JP7471617B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (commonly referred to as "pachinko machines") and reel gaming machines (commonly referred to as "slot machines").

Conventionally, as shown in Patent Document 1, for example, gaming machines are known that offer special games in which a large amount of prize can be won when a winning jackpot is won.

That is, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, first, it is determined whether or not a gaming ball has entered the starting hole. Then, when a gaming ball has entered the starting hole, a determination process is performed to determine whether or not a winning prize has been won. At this time, a special pattern is displayed variably on a specified display for a specified variable time. Then, when the specified variable time has elapsed, the special pattern is displayed stationary in a display mode indicating that a winning prize has been won, and the opening and closing member of the large winning hole is operated, thereby providing the player with a special game in which many prizes can be won.

JP 2017-006393 A

In conventional gaming machines like this, it is necessary to prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

This invention was made in light of these circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

Means 1: A determination means for making a determination;
A bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus based on a result of the determination by the determining means;
an operation receiving section for receiving an operation by a player;
an operation acceptance means capable of generating an acceptance permission state in which an operation opportunity is given, and causing a display change when an operation is accepted in the acceptance permission state;
a model image display means for displaying a model image of an operation receiving portion to which an operation opportunity is to be given in the reception permission state;
Equipped with
A plurality of modes including a special mode are prepared as the mock-image display,
In the reception permitted state, a remaining time indication image may be displayed, the display area of which decreases as time passes,
The reception permission state includes:
a first acceptance state which occurs while the specific BGM is being output in a non-suppressed manner and in which the audible output of the specific BGM continues even after an operation is accepted and a first display change corresponding to the acceptance acceptance state occurs;
a second acceptance state which occurs while the specific BGM is being output in a suppressed manner or is in a non-output state, and which causes a second display change corresponding to the acceptance acceptance state when the operation is accepted; and
A third acceptance state which occurs while the specific BGM is being output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state, and which causes a third display change corresponding to the acceptance acceptance state when the operation is accepted.
Contains
The special mode as the mock-up image display can appear only when the second acceptance allowance state occurs among the first acceptance allowance state, the second acceptance allowance state, and the third acceptance allowance state. However, when the second acceptance allowance state occurs, a mode different from the special mode may appear as the mock-up image display.
the remaining time indication depiction appears when the first acceptance allowance state occurs and when the second acceptance allowance state occurs among the first acceptance allowance state, the second acceptance allowance state, and the third acceptance allowance state, but does not appear when the third acceptance allowance state occurs;
moreover,
A reserve storage means capable of storing judgment information used in the judgment by the judgment means;
A pattern change execution means for selecting one of a plurality of change patterns based on the judgment information stored in the reserved storage means and executing a pattern change in the selected change pattern;
Equipped with
The third acceptance permission state may occur when the pattern variation is started in a specific variation pattern when the number of judgment information stored by the reserved storage means is less than a predetermined number, and when the pattern variation is started in the specific variation pattern when the number of judgment information stored by the reserved storage means is less than the predetermined number, but even if the pattern variation is started in the specific variation pattern when the number of judgment information stored by the reserved storage means is increased before the specific time has elapsed since the pattern variation was started, the third acceptance permission state does not occur even if the specific time has elapsed since the pattern variation was started.
A gaming machine characterized by:

This invention can prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. FIG. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front right. This is an oblique view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left. This is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from behind. This is an oblique view of a pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame open from the main frame and the main frame open from the outer frame. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine viewed from the front, disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main frame, and an outer frame. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, viewed from the rear. FIG. 2 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. This is an oblique view of the outer frame from the front. This is a perspective view of the outer frame from the rear. This is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. 1A is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 1A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame has been removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. 1B is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the outer upper hinge member. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the action of a locking member in the outer frame. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. FIG. This is an oblique view of the door frame from the front right. This is an oblique view of the door frame from the front left. This is a perspective view of the door frame from the rear. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 19. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame disassembled into its main components from the rear. 1A is a perspective view of a door frame base unit in a door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components from the rear. (a) is a front view of the production operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the production operation unit. 1A is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the back. An explanatory diagram showing the performance operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34(a). This is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 34A is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34B, and FIG. 34B is an enlarged view of part A in FIG. This is an exploded oblique view of the performance operation unit, broken down into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the performance operation unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. 1A is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the decorative board unit of the performance operation unit, viewed from the front. An explanatory diagram showing the state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit of Figure 37. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the area where the operation button is cut out and hidden by the first button decorative part and button frame of the operation button, etc., in a view of the performance operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the area where the operation button is hidden by the first button decorative part and button frame, etc., in a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an oblique view of the appearance of the performance operation unit from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the performance operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 1A is a front view of the left side unit of the door frame, FIG. 1B is an oblique view of the left side unit of the door frame from the front, and FIG. 1C is an oblique view of the left side unit of the door frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame left side unit seen from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 47(a). 1A is a front view of the right side unit of the door frame, FIG. 1B is an oblique view of the right side unit of the door frame from the front, and FIG. 1C is an oblique view of the right side unit of the door frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame right side unit seen from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in Figure 51(a). 51(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is an oblique view of the door frame top unit from the front, and (c) is an oblique view of the door frame top unit from the back. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame top unit from the rear. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in Figure 56. FIG. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board, broken down into its main components, as seen from the front. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. This is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as viewed from the front. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as seen from the rear. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged front view of the function display unit with the game board attached to the pachinko machine; FIG. This is an exploded oblique view of a game panel of a different configuration from that of Figure 63, seen from the front, along with its front components, board holder, and main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 seen from behind. This is a block diagram of the main control board, dispensing control board, and peripheral control board. This is a block diagram showing the continuation of Figure 69. This is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input and output to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board, which relays the electrical connection between the payout control board that constitutes the main board and the CR unit and degree display board. This is a block diagram showing the continuation of Figure 69. 2 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU; This is a block diagram of the liquid crystal and sound control unit and the surroundings of the VDP with built-in sound source. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine. This is a block diagram showing the continuation of Figure 75. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing a power outage monitoring circuit. 4 is a circuit diagram showing an interface circuit for communication between a main control board and a peripheral control board. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing the circuits of a dispensing control unit. FIG. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a dispensing control input circuit. This is a circuit diagram showing the continuation of Figure 81. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a dispensing motor drive circuit. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit. 4 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to and from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the arrangement of output terminals on an external terminal board. This is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit that draws on the display area of the upper tray liquid crystal display device. A table showing examples of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the dispensing control board. 11 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from a main control board to a peripheral control board. A table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board in Figure 89 to the peripheral control board. This is a table showing examples of various commands received by the main control board from the dispensing control board. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a process performed when the main control side is powered on; This is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control side power-on processing in Figure 92. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a main control side timer interrupt processing. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power-on process; 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a LOCKN signal history creation process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a connection malfunction determination process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a connection recovery process. 11 is a timing chart explaining the timing of outputting a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the upper tray side liquid crystal transmitter IC. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for special symbol and special electric device control processing (step S114). A flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing processing (step S5232). A flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing processing (step S5234). A flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern process processing (step S5238). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern normal processing (step S5280). A flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305). 1A is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table, and (B) and (C) are diagrams showing a pattern determination table. A flowchart showing the steps of the first special pattern stop pattern setting process (step S5281). A flowchart showing the steps of the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282). A flowchart showing the steps for the first special pattern change processing (step S5283). A flowchart showing the steps of the first special pattern stop processing (step S5284). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal symbol and normal electric device control processing (step S116). 5 is a flowchart showing the procedure for gate passage processing (step S5402). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal processing of normal symbols (step S5403). This is a diagram showing a judgment table T1 of the presentation pattern (variable presentation) referenced in the above-mentioned presentation pattern variation start process when in the normal game state. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of sound control by a fixed channel method as a comparison with the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by a fixed channel method. It shows the relationship between the game status, the playback sound, and the playback channel. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of a performance time chart. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of sound control by an automatic channel method according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by an automatic channel method. A diagram showing the relationship between game status, reproduced sound, and priority order. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of a performance time chart. 11 is a diagram showing an example of automatic channel control work information stored in an AUTO group channel control work area provided in the peripheral control RAM. FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a sound definition table. This figure shows the notification content, notification mode, and notification time for each type of notification sound exemplified in Figure 128, as well as the conditions for terminating the notification (cancellation conditions). 1A is a diagram showing an example of a process when an output condition (abnormality detection) of another alarm sound belonging to the first alarm group is satisfied when an alarm sound belonging to the first alarm group is being reproduced, FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a process when an output condition (state detection) of another alarm sound belonging to the second alarm group is satisfied when an alarm sound belonging to the second alarm group is being reproduced, and FIG. 1C is a diagram showing an example of a process when an output condition (state detection) of another alarm sound belonging to the third alarm group is satisfied when an alarm sound belonging to the third alarm group is being reproduced. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a process when an output condition (state detection) of an informative sound belonging to the second informative group is satisfied when an informative sound belonging to the first informative group is being reproduced; FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a process when an output condition (state detection) of an informative sound belonging to the third informative group is satisfied when an informative sound belonging to the second informative group is being reproduced; FIG. 1C is a diagram showing an example of a process when an output condition (state detection) of an informative sound belonging to the first informative group is satisfied when an informative sound belonging to the second informative group is being reproduced; FIG. 1D is a diagram showing an example of a process when an output condition (state detection) of an informative sound belonging to the second informative group is satisfied when an informative sound belonging to the third informative group is being reproduced; 11 is a time chart showing an example of a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. This is a figure that explains the contents of the notification processing under performance progress according to the notification state of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating the contents of a process related to volume adjustment. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating the contents of a process related to volume adjustment. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating the contents of a process related to volume adjustment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of an allocation state of each channel when a suppressed operation sound output process is performed. FIG. 2 is a front view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword effect operation unit. 1 is a right side view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword effect operation unit. This figure shows an example of a selection table for presentation patterns in a presentation mode in which the sword-drawing presentation can be executed, where (A) shows an example of a selection table for selecting whether or not to display the sword-drawing preparation transition presentation depending on the type of variation pattern, and (B) shows an example of a selection table for selecting whether or not to display the actual sword-drawing presentation. This is a state transition diagram explaining the unsheathing action of a sword decoration when an aura member is attached to the sword portion (blade portion) itself, showing (A) a sheathed state, (B) a first unsheathing state, and (C) a second unsheathing state. 4 is a vertical cross-sectional view illustrating the operation of the aura member. FIG. 11 is a state transition diagram explaining the unsheathing action of a sword decoration when an aura member is attached to the sheath, showing (A) a sheathed state, (B) a first unsheathing state, and (C) a second unsheathing state. 4 is a vertical cross-sectional view illustrating the operation of the aura member. FIG. A diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device and the operation transitions of the sword decorations during the princess reach performance. A diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device and the operation transitions of the sword decorations during the princess reach performance. A diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device and the operation transitions of the sword decorations during the princess reach performance. This is a diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the operation transitions of the sword decoration in a reach performance that includes the operation performance of the operation buttons that are used in various ways. This is a diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the operation transitions of the sword decoration in a reach performance that includes the operation performance of the operation buttons that are used in various ways. This is a diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the motion transitions of the sword decoration in a reach performance that includes the operation performance of the operation buttons that are used in a variety of ways. This is a diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the operation transitions of the sword decoration during a reach performance. This is a diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the operation transitions of the sword decoration during a reach performance. This is a diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the operation transitions of the sword decoration during a reach performance. This is a diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the operation transitions of the sword decoration during a reach performance. This is a diagram explaining the screen transitions of the performance display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the operation transitions of the sword decoration during a reach performance. A diagram explaining the shape of the sword decoration used in the pseudo-consecutive performance. This figure shows an example of a transition of a reach presentation in which a pre-operation suggestion presentation of a first suggestion pattern is executed when it is determined by lottery by the peripheral control board that either the operation button or the sword decoration is enabled for operation during a reach presentation based on the change presentation (reach presentation) of a change pattern selected by the main control board. This figure shows an example of a transition of a reach presentation in which a pre-operation suggestion presentation of a first suggestion pattern is executed when it is determined by lottery by the peripheral control board that either the operation button or the sword decoration is enabled for operation during a reach presentation based on the change presentation (reach presentation) of a change pattern selected by the main control board. This figure shows an example of a transition of a reach performance in which a pre-operation suggestion performance of a second suggestion pattern is executed when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is enabled for operation during the reach performance, as with the first suggestion pattern described above. This figure shows a step-up pattern pre-operation suggestion performance in which, even though the second suggestion pattern is performed as a pre-operation suggestion performance, the sword decoration does not become operable, but the operation button becomes operable at first, and then the sword decoration becomes operable. A figure showing a first presentation manner regarding a specific operation-related presentation. A figure showing a first presentation manner regarding a specific operation-related presentation. A figure showing a second presentation manner regarding a specific operation-related presentation. A figure showing a second presentation manner regarding a specific operation-related presentation. A figure showing a second presentation manner regarding a specific operation-related presentation. A figure showing a second presentation manner regarding a specific operation-related presentation. A figure showing a third presentation style regarding a specific operation-related presentation. A figure showing a third presentation style regarding a specific operation-related presentation. A figure showing a third presentation style regarding a specific operation-related presentation. A figure showing a third presentation style regarding a specific operation-related presentation. A figure showing another example of a specific operation-related presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a presentation when a "specific operation-related presentation" is set as the presentation target of a timer presentation. This is a time chart that explains an example of the performance content for each type of premonition performance when multiple types (premonition performances A, B1, B2, C) are prepared. This figure shows examples of the presentation content when a premonition presentation that is not a specific operation-related presentation is performed, and the presentation content when a premonition presentation that is a specific operation-related presentation is performed. A figure showing another example of the presentation content when a specific operation-related presentation is performed as a premonition presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation in which a button image BTG is displayed with a princess character added (a specific presentation mode). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation when a player makes an operation error between a first operation mode and a second operation mode in a presentation pattern in which a specific operation-related presentation is performed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation when a player makes an operation error between a first operation mode and a second operation mode in a presentation pattern in which a specific operation-related presentation is performed. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode. FIG. A figure showing an example of a presentation when the first premonition presentation is performed. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a first premonition effect. A figure showing a specific example of a presentation in which the degree of expectation is indicated by the automatic presentation function. A figure showing a specific example of a presentation in which the degree of expectation is indicated by the automatic presentation function. A figure showing a specific example of a presentation in which the degree of expectation is indicated by the automatic presentation function. 13A to 13C are diagrams for explaining operation unification control when in an automatic button presentation state. 13A to 13C are diagrams for explaining operation unification control when in an automatic button presentation state. 13A to 13C are diagrams for explaining operation unification control when in an automatic button presentation state. A figure to explain the stable side automatic performance processing when in the automatic button performance state. A figure to explain the stable side automatic performance processing when in the automatic button performance state. A figure to explain the stable side automatic performance processing when in the automatic button performance state. This is a time chart showing the processing content when timing tm1 arrives, at which a new pattern change begins, when a specific movable decorative object is in an abnormal state. This is a time chart showing the processing content when timing tm11 arrives, at which a special performance pattern is started when a specific movable decorative object is in an abnormal state. 13 is a time chart for explaining a situation when a new restoration operation timing (such as the start timing or end timing of a pattern change) arrives while a restoration operation is being executed. 13 is a time chart for explaining a situation when a new restoration operation timing (such as the start timing or end timing of a pattern change) arrives while a restoration operation is being executed. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the process until the sword ornament 5001 is returned to its original position. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing examples of displays when a state transition occurs between a non-play state and a game execution state. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example when an expectation effect is performed in which a princess character is displayed large as a background image while a specific effect pattern is being executed. This figure shows an example of a display when a help image is displayed while the expectation performance shown in Figure 200 is being performed. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing an example of a display when a character image PG is displayed so as to change its display position in response to an operation by a player. 13 is a time chart for explaining an example of processing for generating a presentation restriction period in a non-play state. 13 is a time chart for explaining an example of processing when the performance restriction period ends early. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a process during a special period (a period exclusively for opening a store). 13 is a time chart showing an example of processing when a game is started during a special opening period (a special period). 11 is a time chart showing an example of the first operation acceptance presentation. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the second operation acceptance presentation. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a special operation acceptance presentation. 10 is a time chart showing a manner of channel allocation for sound data including a reception-allowed sound. 10 is a time chart showing a manner of channel allocation for sound data including a reception-allowed sound. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when the low expectation suppression reception presentation is executed in the automatic reception mode. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when the high expectation suppression reception presentation is executed in the automatic reception mode. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when the high expectation suppression reception presentation is executed in the automatic reception mode. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a modified example when the high expectation suppression reception presentation is executed in the automatic reception mode. This is a time chart showing an example of a presentation in which a first permissible sound is output in a specific manner when a "non-suppressed operation acceptance presentation (here, a non-suppressed, non-automatic acceptance presentation)" occurs. This is a time chart showing an example of a presentation in which a "weak suppression mode" and a "strong suppression mode" occur sequentially in a presentation according to a high expected fluctuation pattern. This is a time chart showing an example of a presentation in which a "weak suppression mode" and a "strong suppression mode" occur sequentially in a presentation according to a high expected fluctuation pattern. This is a time chart showing an example of a presentation in which a "weak suppression mode" and a "strong suppression mode" occur sequentially in a presentation according to a high expected fluctuation pattern. This is a time chart showing an example of a performance (restrained moving reception performance) that appears when "the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the object to be operated" in the restrained/automatic reception performance. This is a time chart showing the performance content that appears when fluctuation pattern 1 is selected in the fluctuation pattern determination. This is a time chart showing the performance content that appears when fluctuation pattern 2 is selected in the fluctuation pattern determination. This is a time chart showing the performance content that appears when variation pattern 3 is selected in the variation pattern determination. This is a time chart showing the content of the effect that appears when the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs while the "BGM playback" effect sound is in the "non-suppressed mode." 1 is a time chart conceptually illustrating an example of a processing procedure for realizing various display effects using scenario data and blocks. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process performed when no operation is detected before or after a performance acceptance period (validity period). This is a flowchart showing an example of the processing when an operation is started in the "m+1"th frame during the performance acceptance period (validity period) shown in Figure 226. This is a flowchart showing an example of the processing performed when an operation is started in the "m-2"th frame during the performance acceptance period (validity period) shown in Figure 226. This is a flowchart showing an example of the processing performed when an operation is started in the "m-2"th frame during the performance acceptance period (validity period) shown in Figure 226. This is a flowchart showing an example of the processing when an operation is started from the "m-3"th frame during the performance acceptance period (validity period) shown in Figure 226. This is a flowchart showing an example of a performance acceptance period (validity period) when the timing of the "process of operating (setting) the operation status flag to an on state" within a frame is set to be later than the "determination process related to performance acceptance." FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an integrated model image. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of an integrated mock-up image from the start to the end of a valid period. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of an integrated mock-up image from the start to the end of a valid period. A figure showing an example of the progress of the presentation when the first valid period occurs. A figure showing a modified example of the progress of the presentation when the first valid period occurs. A figure showing a modified example of the progress of the presentation when the first valid period occurs. A figure showing a modified example of the progress of the presentation when the first valid period occurs. A figure showing an example of the progress of the presentation when a second valid period occurs. A figure showing a modified example of the progress of the presentation when the second valid period occurs. A figure showing a modified example of the progress of the presentation when the second valid period occurs. A figure showing a modified example of the progress of the presentation when the second valid period occurs. A figure showing a modified example of the progress of the presentation when the second valid period occurs. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating a modified example of a presentation that indicates the degree of expectation regarding an integrated model image in stages. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an integrated model image. A figure showing an example of the progress of the presentation during the effective period in which the integrated model image is displayed. A figure showing an example of the progress of the presentation during the effective period in which the integrated model image is displayed. A figure showing an example of the progress of the presentation during the effective period in which the integrated model image is displayed. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the effect when a second reception permissible state occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when a first reception permissible state occurs. A figure showing an example of the presentation content when a second reception permissible state occurs. A figure showing an example of the presentation content when a first reception permissive state occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the fourth reception permissible state occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the fifth reception allowable state occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the content of a presentation when a first condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and a first reception period (first reception presentation) occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the content of a presentation when the second condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and a second reception period (second reception presentation) occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the content of a presentation when the third condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and a third reception period (third reception presentation) occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when the fourth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and a fourth reception period (fourth reception presentation) occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when the fifth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and a fifth reception period (fifth reception presentation) occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when the sixth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and a sixth reception period (sixth reception presentation) occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when the seventh condition is satisfied as a result of the judgment and a seventh acceptance period (seventh acceptance presentation) occurs. A figure showing an example of a presentation in a variation pattern in which the first reception period (first reception presentation) occurs. A figure showing an example of a presentation in a variation pattern in which the first reception period (first reception presentation) occurs. A figure showing an example of a presentation in a variation pattern in which a second reception period (second reception presentation) occurs. A figure showing an example of a presentation in a variation pattern in which a second reception period (second reception presentation) occurs. A figure showing an example of a presentation in a variation pattern in which a fourth reception period (fourth reception presentation) occurs. A figure showing an example of a presentation in a variation pattern in which a fourth reception period (fourth reception presentation) occurs. This is a modified version of the presentation regarding the application period. This is a modified version of the presentation regarding the application period. This is a modified version of the presentation regarding the application period. This is a modified version of the presentation regarding the application period. This is a modified version of the presentation regarding the application period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when reception period A (reception presentation A) occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when reception period B (reception presentation B) occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when reception period C (reception presentation C) occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when reception period D (reception presentation D) occurs. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when reception period D (reception presentation D) occurs. 11 is a table showing an example of settings related to occurrence conditions of reception periods A to D. A figure showing an example of a presentation in a fluctuation pattern in which reception period A (reception presentation A) occurs. A figure showing an example of a presentation in a variation pattern in which reception period B (reception presentation B) occurs. A figure showing an example of a presentation in a variation pattern in which reception period C (reception presentation C) occurs. A figure showing an example of a presentation in a variation pattern in which a reception period D (reception presentation D) occurs. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a modified example of the reception period D. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a modified example of the reception period D. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a modified example of the reception period D. A figure showing an example of a presentation in a variation pattern in which a reception period E (reception presentation E) occurs. A diagram showing an example of a presentation during the acceptance period E. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a first B reception period. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a first B reception period. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a first B reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a second B reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a second B reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a second B reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a third B reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a third B reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a third B reception period. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a first B reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a first B reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a second B reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a third B reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a third B reception period occurs. A figure showing another example of a fluctuation pattern in which a first B reception period occurs. A figure showing another example of a fluctuation pattern in which a third B reception period occurs. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a first C reception period. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a first C reception period. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a first C reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a second C reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a second C reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a second C reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a third C reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a third C reception period. 13 is a time chart showing an example of a third C reception period. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a first C reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a first C reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a second C reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a third C reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a third C reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a third C reception period occurs. A figure showing another example of a fluctuation pattern in which a first C reception period occurs. A figure showing another example of a fluctuation pattern in which a third C reception period occurs. A figure showing another example of a fluctuation pattern in which a third C reception period occurs. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a first D reception period. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a first D reception period. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a first D reception period. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a second D reception period. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a second D reception period. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a second D reception period. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a first D reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a first D reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a first D reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a first D reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a second D reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a second D reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a second D reception period occurs. A figure showing an example of a variation pattern in which a second D reception period occurs. A figure showing another example of a fluctuation pattern in which a first D reception period occurs. A figure showing another example of a fluctuation pattern in which a first D reception period occurs. A figure showing another example of a fluctuation pattern in which a first D reception period occurs. A figure showing another example of a fluctuation pattern in which a second D reception period occurs. A figure showing another example of a fluctuation pattern in which a second D reception period occurs.

[1. Overall structure of a pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 1 to 10. Fig. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, Fig. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and Fig. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Fig. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the right front, Fig. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the left front, and Fig. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the rear. Fig. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. Fig. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame as seen from the front, and Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame as seen from the rear.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is equipped with a frame-shaped outer frame 2 that is installed in an island facility (not shown) of a gaming hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a game board 5 that is detachably attached to the main frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player's side through the door frame 3, and has a game area 5a into which the player shoots game balls.

As shown in Figures 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 comprises an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are vertically spaced apart and extend horizontally, and a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width from front to back. Furthermore, the vertical length of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 is longer than the horizontal length of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

The outer frame 2 also includes a panel member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left and right frame members 30 and 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, an upper outer frame hinge member 60 that is attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, and a lower outer frame hinge member 70 that is attached to the upper left end side of the panel member 50 when viewed from the front and to the left frame member 30. The upper outer frame hinge member 60 and the lower outer frame hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be attached so as to be able to open and close.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 with a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and a through hole 111 penetrating from front to back, a handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front face below the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 and can be operated by the player to shoot game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plate unit 320 that is attached to the lower front face below the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100, and a participatory type display unit 320 that is attached to the center of the plate unit 320 and allows the player to select a participatory type display depending on the game state that changes as game balls are shot into the game area 5a. It is equipped with a performance operation unit 400 capable of presenting performances, a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the left of the front side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the right of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the top of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550, above the door frame top unit 570.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 comprises a frame-shaped main body frame base 600, a portion of which can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5; a main body frame upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame lower hinge member 640 which are attached to both the upper and lower ends of the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and which are rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, respectively, and to which the door frame upper hinge member 140 and the door frame lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3 are rotatably attached, respectively; a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front; and a reinforcing frame 670 attached to the lower front part of the main body frame base 600. The game machine includes a ball launcher 680 for shooting game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5, a locking unit 700 attached to the right side of the main frame base 600 when viewed from the front and locking the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, an inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 attached to the rear side along the upper and left sides of the main frame base 600 when viewed from the front and pays out game balls to the player, a base unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main frame base 600, and a back cover 980 attached to the rear side of the main frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable, covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 600.

The payout unit 800 of the main frame 4 comprises an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear of the main frame base 600, a ball tank 802 attached to the top of the payout unit base 801, which is a box-shaped tank that is open upward and extends to the left and right, and which stores game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown), a tank rail 803 that is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 and extends to the left and right to guide the game balls in the ball tank 802 to the left when viewed from the front, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front and guides the game balls from the tank rail 803 downward in a serpentine shape, and a ball guide unit 820 that is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball guide unit 820, and which stores the game balls guided by the ball guide unit 820 in a payout control board box 950. The payout device 830 pays out balls one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 951; an upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guiding the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward and releasing the game balls from either the normal release port 850d or the full release port 850e depending on the storage state of the game balls in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320; and a lower full ball path unit 860 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801 and having a normal guide path 861 that guides the game balls released from the normal release port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward and guides them from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3, and a full guide path 862 that guides the game balls released from the full release port 850e forward and guides them from the front end to the full ball receiving port 274 of the door frame 3.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear of the main body frame base 600, a speaker unit 920 attached to the rear of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 when viewed from the front and having a lower low-pitched speaker 921 inside, a power supply board box 930 attached to the rear of the board unit base 910 on the right side when viewed from the front and housing a power supply board inside, an interface control board box 940 attached to the rear of the speaker unit 920 and housing an interface control board inside, and a payout control board box 950 attached across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and housing a payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls inside.

As shown in Figures 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that define the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which game balls are shot and guides game balls launched from the ball launcher 680 to the upper part of the game area 5a, and a flat game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when game balls are stored in the upper tray 321 and the player rotates the handle 302, the ball launcher 680 shoots the game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strength that corresponds to the rotation angle of the handle 302. When the game balls shot into the game area 5a are received by a winning hole, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 by the payout device 830 according to the winning hole into which the game ball was received. This payout of game balls can increase the player's interest, so that the game balls in the upper tray 321 can be shot into the game area 5a, allowing the player to enjoy the game.

[2. Overall structure of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 11 to 16. Figure 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and Figure 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Figure 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and Figure 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. Figure 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. Figure 16(a) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as seen from below with the left frame member omitted, and Figure 16(b) is an exploded perspective view of Figure 16(a) in which Figure 16(a) is exploded. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an amusement hall or the like.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 comprises an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are vertically spaced apart and extend left and right, and a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and extend up and down. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed with the same width from front to back. Furthermore, the vertical length of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 is longer than the horizontal length of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Furthermore, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end faces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side faces facing outward in the horizontal direction of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are flush with each other.

The outer frame 2 also includes an outer frame upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, a lock member 66 attached to the underside of the outer frame upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the front view of the apron member 50 and to the left frame member 30. The outer frame upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be attached so as to be able to open and close.

The outer frame 2 also includes a fascia member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left and right frame members 30 and 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, a fascia reinforcement member 80 that is attached to the rear side of the fascia member 50 and has both ends attached to the left and right frame members 30 and 40, respectively, a flat left sliding member 81 that is attached to the top surface of the fascia member 50 at a position to the left of the center, and a flat right sliding member 82 that is attached to the top surface of the fascia member 50 at a position near the right end. The fascia reinforcement member 80 is made of a solid member (e.g., wood, plywood, etc.) and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

The outer frame 2 further includes connecting members 85 that respectively connect the upper frame member 10 to the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 to the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 to the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 to the right frame member 40. The outer frame 2 also includes an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 that are attached to the inside (left side) of the right frame member 40 and engage with an outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described below.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed from a solid material (e.g., wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. This upper frame member 10 has an engagement notch 11 that penetrates from top to bottom and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right ends. Upper horizontal fixing parts 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B of a connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached within this engagement notch 11. In addition, the upper frame member 10 has an attachment step 12 that is recessed from the general surface on the top surface and front surface of the left end when viewed from the front. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to this attachment step 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid material (e.g., wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. The left-right length and top-bottom thickness of this lower frame member 20 are the same as those of the upper frame member 10, and the front-to-back width is longer than that of the upper frame member 10. The lower frame member 20 has engagement cutouts 21 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the left-to-right center at positions closer to the rear than the center in the front-to-back direction at both left and right ends. Lower lateral fixing portions 88 of a left lower connecting member 85C and a right lower connecting member 85D (described later) of the connecting member 85 are attached within the engagement cutouts 21.

The lower frame member 20 also has front end notches 22 recessed rearward from the front surface at both left and right ends. The width of the lower frame member 20 in the front-to-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notches 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to be the same dimension as the front-to-rear width of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the area between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the fascia board member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of extruded metal such as aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in a shape symmetrical to each other in a plan view. When assembled into the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have, on the side surface that is the outer side in the left-right direction, recesses 31, 41 recessed inwardly between a position rearward of the center in the front-rear direction and near the rear end, and protrusions 32, 42 that bulge from the side surface opposite the recesses 31, 41 and are formed with a hollow inside. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are increased by the protrusions 32, 42. In addition, the rear lower horizontal fixing parts 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are inserted into the protrusions 32, 42 and attached.

The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 also have multiple grooves formed on their surfaces that extend vertically. These multiple grooves allow the operator to easily hold the pachinko machine 1 by providing finger rests when installing or transporting the pachinko machine 1 in an island facility such as an amusement hall, and also enhance the design quality of the pachinko machine 1's exterior.

[2-4. Skirting panel members]
The fascia board member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with an open rear side. The fascia board member 50 includes a rear extension portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end of the top surface when viewed from the front, a left discharge hole 52 cut out in a U-shape from the left end of the rear extension portion 51 to a size that allows game balls to pass through and penetrating vertically, a right discharge hole 53 penetrating vertically to the right of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension portion 51 to the right of the left discharge hole 52 to a size that allows game balls to pass through, a standing wall portion 54 extending upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the top surface of the fascia board member 50 including the rear end of the rear extension portion 51, and a return portion 55 bulging forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 and inclining rearward as the front surface moves upward.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 (described later) is attached to the front upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on it. The left discharge hole 52 of the front panel member 50 is formed in a position that coincides with a discharge hole 74 (described later) of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 when assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed in a position that is to the right of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 when assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

The top surface of the fascia board member 50 to the right of the rear extension 51 is inclined so that the front end is lower. The fascia board member 50 also has a left attachment portion 56 for attaching a left sliding member 81 to a portion of the top surface to the right of the rear extension 51, and a right attachment portion 57 for attaching a right sliding member 82 near the right end of the top surface. The bottom surface of the main frame 4 is placed on the top surface of the fascia board member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and right sliding member 82.

As shown in the figure, the front of the fascia board member 50 is decorated with a shallow relief. Although not shown in the figure, the box-shaped interior of the fascia board member 50 is divided into a lattice pattern by multiple ribs, which increases its strength and rigidity. The fascia board member 50 is also formed so that the front half of the fascia board reinforcing member 80 can be housed inside.

[2-5. Upper hinge member on outer frame side]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 comprises a horizontally extending, flat, rectangular upper fixing portion 61, a flat forward extension portion 62 extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61, a bearing groove 63 extending forward from the right end of the forward extension portion 62 to the center of the left and right sides of the forward extension portion 62 and penetrating vertically, a flat lateral fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left edge of the upper fixing portion 61 in a planar view, and a flat hanging portion 65 extending downward from the edge from the left end of the forward extension portion 62, around the front end to the position where the bearing groove 63 opens, and which is continuous with the lateral fixing portion 64 (see Figure 16 (b) etc.).

When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 has its upper fixing portion 61 placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed with screws (not shown). The forward extension portion 62 extends forward beyond the front end of the upper frame member 10. The lateral fixing portion 64 is inserted from above into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 and is fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws.

By inserting the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63, the outer frame upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame lower hinge member 70 to support the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Locking member]
As shown in Fig. 16, the locking member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band-shaped locking body 66a extending forward and backward with a predetermined width on the left and right sides, an operating portion 66b protruding to the right from the rear end of the locking body 66a, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the locking body 66a and then extending diagonally forward to the left, and a mounting hole 66d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the locking body 66a. The locking member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 66 is rotatably attached to the underside of the forward extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by mounting screws 67.

The rear end of the locking body 66a of the locking member 66 is attached through the mounting hole 66d at a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the forward extension 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. Furthermore, when the locking member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the locking body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end extends forward so as to be able to abut against a portion of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a abuts against the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is biased in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward around the mounting hole 66d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 abuts against the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 (described later) of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is formed in the portion of the bearing groove 63 forward of the lock body 66a.

By operating the operating portion 66b, the locking member 66 can rotate the locking body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. By operating the operating portion 66b, the locking body 66a can be rotated in a direction in which its front end moves to the left, so that the locking body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the bearing groove 63 can be fully opened. This makes it possible to insert the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 into the bearing groove 63 or remove the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 from within the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 comprises a flat horizontal portion 71 extending horizontally, a flat rising portion 72 rising upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 rearward of the center in the front-to-rear direction, a lower outer frame hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a discharge hole 74 that penetrates the horizontal portion 71 from top to bottom and is large enough to allow only one game ball to pass through. This lower outer frame side hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is cylindrical and is formed in a truncated cone shape with a narrowed upper end above the vertical center. This outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to contact the central part of the rising portion 72 in the front-to-rear direction and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. This discharge hole 74 is formed to be approximately the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the fascia board member 50.

When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 has a horizontal portion 71 placed on the upper surface near the left end of the fascia board member 50 and on the rear extension portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71 is fixed to the fascia board reinforcement member 80 by a screw (not shown) that penetrates the upper surface of the fascia board member 50. Also, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached by a screw (not shown) to a portion forward of the protruding portion 32 on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30. This outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can cooperate with the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 to attach the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the main frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main frame 4.

In addition, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the skirting board member 50. This allows game balls on the horizontal portion 71 to fall (discharge) to the rear side of the skirting board member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. In more detail, when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, game balls that have fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 roll to the rear side where the gap is wider, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 74, because the gap between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 gradually narrows as the main frame 4 is closed. In this case, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is approximately the same as the rear end of the main frame 4 when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 in a state where it is assembled into the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, game balls that fall between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling rearward beyond the main frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 74, and game balls can be made less likely to become stuck in the area of the outer frame lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting members 85 of the outer frame 2 include an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, a lower left connecting member 85C that connects the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 includes a flat horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side of the horizontal fixing portion 86 as the part from which the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends. This connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, an upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center in the front-to-rear direction of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward from both the front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. In other words, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 spaced apart in the front-to-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of abutting against the underside of the upper frame member 10. In addition, the upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the engagement notch 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left-to-right ends of the upper frame member 10. Additionally, the front lower horizontal fixing parts 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces forward of the protruding parts 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Furthermore, the rear lower horizontal fixing parts 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively, by screws that are inserted into the protruding parts 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed in from the outer side surfaces.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes further rearward than the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward from the lower end of the part of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 that protrudes further rearward than the horizontal fixing portion 86. In addition, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 that protrudes from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed in a state of abutting against the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. In addition, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed to the inner side surface forward of the protruding portions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing parts 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the left and right end faces of the lower frame member 20, respectively.

[2-9. Locking mechanism for outer frame upper hinge member]
Next, the locking mechanism for the main body frame 4 upper hinge member 620 by the locking member 66 in the outer frame upper hinge member 60 in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 17 and 18. Figure 17(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body upper hinge member is attached to the outer upper hinge member. Figure 18 is an explanatory diagram showing the action of the locking member in the outer frame.

When the locking member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the forward extension 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c abuts against the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65, and the locking body 66a closes a part of the L-shaped bent bearing groove 63. At the same time, the tip of the locking body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, and a space is formed in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 into which the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

In this embodiment, the support mechanism for the main frame hinge pin 622 using the outer frame upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 is such that in the normal support state, in which the main frame hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a is close to the right hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a small gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right hanging portion 65, and they are not in contact), the centers of the main frame hinge pin 622 located in the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock body 66a are offset diagonally and face each other.

In this normal support state, the hinge pin 622 on the main frame, which supports the heavy main frame 4, is in contact with the front end of the bearing groove 63, so there is almost no load from the hinge pin 622 on the front end of the lock body 66a. In other words, there is no load on the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly when the operating portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. In the figure, the center of the arc on the front end of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the action force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main frame is pulled out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a L-shape and abuts against the arc-shaped front end surface of the lock body 66a, when the action force F is divided into a component force F1 (normal to the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the abutment portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and a component force F2 acting on the abutment portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main frame and the inner surface of one side of the bearing groove 63, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (rotation center of the lock member 66), so no moment is applied to rotate the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in a direction away from the right hanging portion 65, and the state in which the hinge pin 622 on the main frame is sandwiched between the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the inner surface of one side of the bearing groove 63 is maintained.

Therefore, even in a normal support state or when the force of the hinge pin 622 on the main frame is applied to the locking member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the locking member 66 is not constantly loaded, preventing plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c which is integrally formed from synthetic resin, and preventing the hinge pin 622 on the main frame from falling off the bearing groove 63 over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end of the locking body 66a of the locking member 66 is rotated in a direction moving to the right, the front right side of the locking body 66a abuts against the hanging portion 65 and does not rotate any further, so that the locking member 66 does not protrude outside the forward extension 62.

In addition, even if the shape of the front end surface of the locking body 66a is not arc-shaped, by positioning the center of rotation of the locking member 66 (the axis fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where no rotational moment is generated by the action of the component force F1 described above or at a position where a rotational moment is generated that rotates the front end of the locking member 66 toward the outside of the forward extension portion 62, no load is constantly applied to the elastic portion 66c of the locking member 66, and even if the locking member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the locking body 66a only abuts the hanging portion 65, so the locking member 66 does not protrude outside the forward extension portion 62.

When the upper hinge pin 622 of the upper hinge member 620 on the outer frame side is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side, the upper hinge pin 622 on the upper hinge member 620 on the outer frame side is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. When the upper hinge pin 622 on the upper hinge member 622 on the outer frame side is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the upper hinge pin 622 on the upper hinge member 620 on the upper hinge member 620 on the outer frame side is abutted against the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the lock member 66 rotates around the mounting screw 67 so that the front end of the lock body 66a moves leftward against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. As a result, the lock body 66a that had been closing the bearing groove 63 retreats, opening the bearing groove 63, and the upper hinge pin 622 on the upper hinge member 620 on the outer frame side can be moved to the deepest part (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

When the hinge pin 622 on the main frame is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the hinge pin 622 on the main frame and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock body 66a moves to the right due to the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c, and the lock member 66 returns to its normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main frame is housed in the space in front of the front end of the lock body 66a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main frame is held (locked) in a rotatable state in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63.

When removing the main frame hinge pin 622 from the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the locking member 66 is operated to rotate the locking member 66 so that the front end of the locking body 66a moves to the left, and the locking body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. This places the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 in communication with the opening, and the main frame hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Anti-theft mechanism and ball-trapping prevention mechanism at the outer frame lower hinge member]
The following describes the anti-theft mechanism at the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, and the ball trap prevention mechanism for preventing game balls from getting caught between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end of the upper surface of the fascia board member 50 when viewed from the front. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the fascia board member 50 and on the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. This fascia board member 50 has a vertical wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted into the rear side of the main frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640, the tip of the illegal tool abuts against the vertical wall portion 54 that extends upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the fascia board member 50, so that the illegal tool cannot be inserted any further to the rear side, and illegal acts can be prevented from being performed through the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

In addition, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 54 is provided with a return portion 55 that extends forward. If an unauthorized tool comes into contact with the vertical wall portion 54 and bends upward, the return portion 55 can bend the tip of the unauthorized tool further forward, preventing unauthorized tools from being inserted into the rear of the main body frame 4 and reliably preventing unauthorized acts from being performed through the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

When the rear end of the upper surface of the fascia board member 50 is provided with a vertical wall portion 54 extending upward, if a game ball falls onto the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71) while the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the vertical wall portion 54, so there is a risk of it being pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4. In contrast, in this embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extension portion 51 of the fascia board member 50 are provided with a discharge hole 74, a left discharge hole 52, and a right discharge hole 53 through which the game ball can pass, so that the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74, etc., and the game ball can be reduced from being pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

This prevents a game ball from getting caught between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, which could cause damage around the outer frame lower hinge member 70, or the main frame 4 not closing normally and creating a gap between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, which could then be used to commit fraud.

[3. Overall structure of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 19 to 30. Figure 19 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, Figure 20 is a right side view of the door frame, Figure 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and Figure 22 is a rear view of the door frame. Figure 23 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the right front, Figure 24 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the left front, and Figure 25 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the rear. Figure 26 is a cross-sectional view cut along line A-A in Figure 19, Figure 27 is a cross-sectional view cut along line B-B in Figure 19, and Figure 28 is a cross-sectional view cut along line C-C in Figure 19. Figure 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and seen from the front, and Figure 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and seen from the rear.

As shown in Figures 29 and 30, the door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100 that is a rectangular frame-shaped unit that extends vertically when viewed from the front, a handle unit 300 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the door frame base unit 100, a plate unit 320 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, a performance operation unit 400 attached to the center of the plate unit 320, a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the left front of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the right front of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, comprises a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a rectangular (quadrilateral) outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and a through hole 111 penetrating from front to back, a frame-shaped reinforcement unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, a door frame upper hinge member 140 and a door frame lower hinge member 150 attached to both the upper and lower ends of the left end side when viewed from the front of the reinforcement unit 130 and hingedly rotatably attached to the main frame 4, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closing the through hole 111, and a glass unit 190 attached to the rear underside of the glass unit 190. The door frame 3 and main frame 4 are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward, and can be opened and closed. An opening and closing cylinder unit 210 is used to lock the gap between the main frame 4 and the outer frame 2. A ball sending unit 250 is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 to send game balls to the ball launcher 680. A foul cover unit 270 is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 to receive game balls that have been launched by the ball launcher 680 but have not reached the play area 5a and discharge them into the lower tray 322.

The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, allows the player to rotate the rotatable handle 302 to shoot the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strength that corresponds to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

The tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the lower part of the through hole 111 on the front side of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, with the front side bulging forward and the performance operation unit 400 attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The tray unit 320 comprises an upper tray 321 for storing game balls to be shot into the game area 5a, a lower tray 322 arranged below the upper tray 321 and capable of storing game balls supplied from the upper tray 321 or the foul cover unit 270, an upper tray ball removal button 327 for removing game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322, a ball lending button 328 for lending game balls to a player within the amount of cash inserted into the ball lending machine or the remaining balance on a prepaid card, and It is equipped with a return button 329 for returning cash or prepaid cards minus the amount of game balls loaned from the ball loan machine, a ball loan return display unit 330 for displaying the remaining amount of cash or prepaid cards inserted into the ball loan machine, a left effect selection button 331 and a right effect selection button 332 that can be operated by the player when an effect is presented, and a lower tray ball removal button 333 for ejecting game balls in the lower tray 322 below the tray unit 320.

The performance operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front part of the center of the left and right direction when viewed from the front of the tray unit 320, and can be operated by the player by pressing it, and can present performance images to the player. This performance operation unit 400, which will be described in detail later, is equipped with a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side performance display device 460 that is positioned within the operation button 410 so that it can be seen from the player side and can display performance images.

The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3, the details of which will be described later, is attached to the upper side of the dish unit 320, on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and serves to decorate the left outer side of the through hole 111 (play area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 is equipped with a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) that can be illuminated for decoration.

The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3, the details of which will be described later, is attached to the upper side of the dish unit 320, on the right side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, to the right of the through hole 111, and decorates the right outer side of the through hole 111 (play area 5a). This door frame right side unit 550 protrudes farther forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and is equipped with a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 at the front end. The door frame right side unit 550 can illuminate and decorate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550, and decorates the upper part of the door frame 3. The door frame top unit 570, the details of which will be described later, is equipped with a pair of upper speakers 573 spaced apart on the left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward from the center of the front surface, and a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. The door frame top unit 570 can illuminate and decorate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 31 to 33. Figure 31(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the back. Figure 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Figure 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the back.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed (hinged) so that the left side when viewed from the front closes the front of the main frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 attached to the lower front corner of the front, a tray unit 320 to which the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the lower front surface of the through hole 111, a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the left outer front surface of the through hole 111, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111.

As shown in Figures 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 with a through hole 111 that is a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and penetrates from front to back, a frame-shaped reinforcement unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, a door frame upper hinge member 140 and a door frame lower hinge member 150 attached to both the upper and lower ends of the reinforcement unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front, protruding forward from the door frame base 110 and rotatably attached to the main body frame upper hinge member 620 and main body frame lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4, a door frame left side decorative board 160 attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 to the left of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front and having multiple LEDs mounted on the front side, and a glass unit mounting member 170 rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably mounting the glass unit 190.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a cylindrical handle mounting member 180 for mounting the handle unit 300, which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closing the through hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, an opening/closing cylinder unit 210 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

Furthermore, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 is equipped with various decorative boards, ball sending solenoid 255, handle rotation detection sensor 307, handle touch sensor 310, single button operation sensor 312, ball lending button 328, return button 329, ball lending/returning display unit 330, performance selection left button 331, performance selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side performance display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461), upper speaker 573, etc., which are provided on the door frame 3, and a door body relay board for relaying the connection with the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the main body frame 4.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 has an outer shape in a front view that is a square (rectangle) extending vertically. The door frame base 110 has a through hole 111 that penetrates from front to back and has an inner periphery shape in a front view that is approximately a square extending vertically. The through hole 111 has an upper side and both left and right sides that form the inner periphery close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, and a lower side that forms the inner periphery is located at about 1/3 height in the vertical direction from the lower end of the door frame base 110. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the through hole 111 that penetrates from front to back. This door frame base 110 is integrally molded from synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 is provided with a handle mounting surface 112 formed in the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward more than the right end side, a cylinder mounting section 113 recessed from the rear surface toward the front near the right end when viewed from the front between the handle mounting surface 112 and the through hole 111 and to which the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached, a cylinder insertion hole 114 that penetrates from the front to the back in the cylinder mounting section 113 and through which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted, and a ball feed opening 115 that penetrates from the front to the front on the left side of the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting surface 112 when viewed from the front, allowing the entrance 251a and ball removal opening 251b of the ball feed unit 250 to be exposed forward.

The door frame base 110 also has a lower tray passage hole 116 that penetrates from front to back at a position to the left of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, and exposes the ball discharge hole 276 of the foul cover unit 270 to the front, an upper tray passage hole 117 that penetrates from front to back near the left end of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front, adjacent to the lower edge of the through hole 111, and exposes the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 to the front, a glass unit mounting section 118 that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner circumference of the through hole 111, and into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and a speaker insertion hole 119 that penetrates from front to back at both upper left and right corners of the door frame base 110 and into which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcement unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 31 and 33. The reinforcement unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcement unit 130 includes an upper reinforcement metal plate 131 extending left and right and attached along the upper edge of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, a middle reinforcement metal plate 132 extending left and right and attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, a left reinforcement metal plate 133 extending up and down and attached along the left edge of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 as viewed from the front, a right reinforcement metal plate 134 extending up and down and attached along the right edge of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 as viewed from the front, and a locking engagement portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcement metal plate 134 and engaging with the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700.

The left and right ends of the upper reinforcing metal plate 131 of the reinforcing unit 130 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing metal plate 133 and the right reinforcing metal plate 134 with screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 is connected and fixed to the left reinforcing metal plate 133 with screws. The right end of the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing metal plate 134 via the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed into a frame shape by the upper reinforcing metal plate 131, the middle reinforcing metal plate 132, the left reinforcing metal plate 133, and the right reinforcing metal plate 134, etc.

The upper reinforcing metal plate 131, the middle reinforcing metal plate 132, the left reinforcing metal plate 133, the right reinforcing metal plate 134, and the locking engagement portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing metal plate 132 has a notch 132a that penetrates from front to back at a position corresponding to the upper tray passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has portions that are bent in the front-to-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing metal plate 131, the middle reinforcing metal plate 132, the left reinforcing metal plate 133, and the right reinforcing metal plate 134, which increase the strength and rigidity of the plate and also prevent the intrusion of unauthorized tools such as piano wire or flathead screwdrivers from outside.

[3-1c. Door frame upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33 etc. The door-frame-side upper hinge member 140 comprises: a door-frame-upper hinge axis bracket 141 attached to the door-frame base 110 and having a pair of protruding pieces 141a spaced apart vertically; a cylindrical door-frame-upper hinge pin 142 which passes through the pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door-frame-upper hinge axis bracket 141 and has an upper end which is inserted into the door-frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main-frame-side upper hinge member 620; a disk-shaped flange member 143 attached to a position between the pair of protruding pieces 141a on the door-frame-upper hinge pin 142; and a lock spring 144 which is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, through which the door-frame-upper hinge pin 142 is inserted, and which urges the door-frame-upper hinge pin 142 upward.

The door frame upper hinge axis bracket 141 has a flat mounting piece that connects the rear ends of a pair of protruding pieces 141a (not shown), and is U-shaped in side view with an open front. The door frame upper hinge axis bracket 141 has a mounting piece that connects the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and the mounting piece is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a screw.

The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142, which protrudes above the upper protruding piece 141a, is rotatably inserted into the upper door frame hinge hole 623 of the main body frame upper hinge member 620. Although not shown, the upper door frame hinge pin 142 has a portion that protrudes below the lower protruding piece 141a that is bent horizontally. This bent portion abuts against the underside of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the door frame upper hinge pin 142.

The flange member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring that can be inserted through the door frame upper hinge pin 142, with its upper end abutting the flange member 143 and its lower end abutting the lower protruding piece 141a. This lock spring 144 is interposed in a compressed state between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a, and urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward via the flange member 143.

The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state where the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is biased upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 abuts against the underside of the lower protruding piece 141a, restricting further upward movement. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes a predetermined amount above the top surface of the upper protruding piece 141a.

When an operator holds the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and pulls that portion downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 144, the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the upper end of the upper hinge pin 142 of the upper hinge member 140 of the door frame side upper hinge member 620 can be inserted from below into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, or removed downward. As a result, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame upper hinge member 140 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame upper hinge member 620, the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front can be supported so as to be hinged and rotatable relative to the main body frame 4.

The upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side is supported by a pair of protruding pieces 141a of the upper hinge axis bracket 141 on the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame, and is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152 of the lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side, which will be described later. This allows the upper hinge member 140 and the lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side to hinge rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 in a good condition.

[3-1d. Door frame bottom hinge member]
The door-frame-side lower hinge member 150 of the door-frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 and 32. The door-frame-side lower hinge member 150 includes a door-frame-side lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat extension piece 151a attached to the door-frame base 110 and extending forward, and a cylindrical door-frame-side lower hinge pin 152 (see Figures 21 and 22) protruding downward from near the front end of the extension piece 151a of the door-frame-side hinge shaft bracket.

The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat mounting piece (not shown) that extends upward from the rear end of the horizontally extending flat extension piece 151a, and has an overall shape that is roughly L-shaped when viewed from the side. The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a mounting piece (not shown) that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a screw.

The lower end of the door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape that narrows toward the bottom. This door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4 described below. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

This door frame side lower hinge member 150 can support the door frame 3 so that it can rotate relative to the main frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main frame side lower hinge member 640.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative board 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 and 32. The door frame left side decorative board 160 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 110, on the left side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front. The door frame left side decorative board 160 includes a door frame left side upper decorative board 161 that extends vertically from a position lower than the speaker insertion hole 119 on the left side of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front to a height near the center of the through hole 111 in the vertical direction, and a door frame left side lower decorative board 162 that extends vertically from a position lower than the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 to a height approximately the same as the lower end of the upper tray passage hole 117.

The upper left side decorative board 161 and the lower left side decorative board 162 of the door frame left side decorative board 160 each have a number of LEDs 161a, 162a on their front surfaces that can radiate light forward. These LEDs 161a, 162a are full-color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative board 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530 (described later) when the door frame 3 is assembled, and by appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 161a, 162a provided (mounted) on the front, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be illuminated and decorated.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 31(b) etc. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably mounting the glass unit 190. The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably attached around an axis extending forward and backward on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a protruding portion 172 that protrudes in a rod shape from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the axis of rotation.

The glass unit mounting members 170 are rotatably attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 below a pair of speaker insertion holes 119, at a location outside the glass unit mounting portion 118.

By rotating the glass unit mounting member 170 so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, the protrusion 172 is positioned outward from the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from behind, allowing the glass unit 190 to be inserted into or removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110.

When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protrusion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 while the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the protrusion 172 comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190, restricting the rearward movement of the upper part of the glass unit 190, and the glass unit 190 can be mounted to the door frame base 110.

The glass unit mounting member 170 has a protruding portion 172 protruding from a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably attached to the door frame base 110, so that the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located within the protruding portion 172. For this reason, when the glass unit mounting member 170 is in a state in which it can rotate freely, the protruding portion 172 is stable in a state in which it protrudes downward from the base 171. In addition, when the glass unit mounting member 170 is in a rotation position in which the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171, the protruding portion 172 restricts the rearward movement of the glass unit 190. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 170, the entire member does not rotate so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is not naturally released.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the protrusion 172 is moved outward beyond the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190, allowing the upper side of the glass unit 190 to be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1g. Handle attachment member]
The handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in Figures 32 and 33, the handle attachment member 180 includes a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 182 extending from the rear end of the tube portion 181 outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 181, a plurality of (three in this example) protrusions 183 protruding into the tube portion 181 and extending over the entire axial length of the tube portion 181 and arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tube portion 181, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 connecting the outer circumferential surface of the tube portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and arranged in the circumferential direction of the tube portion 181.

The handle mounting member 180 is attached to the handle mounting surface 112 with screws, with the rear surface of the flange portion 182 abutting against the front surface of the handle mounting surface 112 on the door frame base 110.

The inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 181 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base 301a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side of the cylindrical portion 181, and the remaining two are provided on the lower side of the cylindrical portion 181. These three protrusions 183 are formed in positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle attachment member 180 can insert the base 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 and the three grooves 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned, and the rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be regulated relative to the door frame base 110.

In addition, since the axis of the tube portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 extends perpendicular to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, by mounting it on the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110, the axis of the tube portion 181 is inclined to extend forward to the right, and the handle unit 300 can be mounted to the door frame base 110 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be seen from the front. The glass unit 190 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment part 118, and two transparent glass plates 192 that close the inside of the frame of the glass frame 191 and have their outer peripheries attached to the glass frame 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other in the front and rear directions so that a space is formed between them (see Figure 26, etc.).

The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a that extend outward in a flat shape from a position lower than the upper left and right corners when viewed from the front, and a band-shaped locking piece 191b that protrudes downward from the lower end and extends along the lower edge. The mounting pieces 191a of the glass frame 191 are capable of abutting the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b is capable of being inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

This glass unit 190 is attached to the door frame base 110 by inserting the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from the rear side of the door frame base 110, abutting the front end of the glass frame 191 against the rear surface of the glass unit mounting part 118 of the door frame base 110, and rotating the glass unit mounting member 170 to abut the protrusion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 against the rear surface of the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191.

To remove the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the above steps can be reversed. This allows the glass unit 190 to be attached and detached to the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Anti-theft cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 includes a flat body portion 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat rear projection 202 projecting rearward along the outer periphery of the body portion 201, and a pair of locking pieces 203 arranged spaced apart on the left and right, projecting forward beyond the body portion 201, and capable of being locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed so that its lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. The upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape that conforms to the lower end of the play area 5a of the play board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. In more detail, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape that conforms to a part of the inner rail 1002, the out guide portion 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the component 1000 described below, and is formed so as not to protrude into the play area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.

The rear protrusion 202 is formed around almost the entire outer periphery of the main body 201. Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed by the main body 201 and the rear protrusion 202 into a shallow box shape that is open to the rear, and has high strength and rigidity. As shown in FIG. 33, the rear protrusion 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 that is different from the outer periphery of the main body 201. This rear protrusion 202 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed to fit along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled into the pachinko machine 1.

When assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the rear protrusion 202 is not formed in the area located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5. As a result, game balls (game balls launched by the ball launcher 680) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 do not come into contact with the rear protrusion 202 of the security cover 200, and do not impede the shooting of game balls into the game area 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. This allows the security cover 200 to be easily attached and detached to the door frame base 110.

When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 abuts against the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the rear projection 202, excluding the portion projecting rearward from the bottom edge of the main body 201, is inserted into the security recess 1008 of the component 1000 described below. Also, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear projection 202 projecting rearward from the bottom edge of the main body 201 projects rearward beyond the front surface of the component 1000 so as to contact the bottom surface of the component 1000. As a result, the area between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is bent in a complex manner by the rear protrusion 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, so even if someone tries to insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire into the game area 5a through the gap between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the game board 5, the attempt will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008, preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Opening and closing cylinder unit]
The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to a cylinder attachment part 113 located near the right end of the door frame base 110 in a front view and between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112, and is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 in cooperation with a locking unit 700 (described later).

The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is equipped with a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 that has a keyhole 211a on the front and extends forward and backward, a rotation transmission member 212 that is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and transmits the rotation operation of the key inserted into the keyhole 211a to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700, and a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 that mounts the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcement unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can be rotated by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a, and if the key is a corresponding one, it can be rotated a specified angle in either the clockwise or counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape (more specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and has a pair of notches 212a cut from the rear end toward the front at positions facing each other across the central axis. This rotation transmission member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 can be inserted from the rear, and by inserting the protrusions of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 into the pair of notches 212a, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted in the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed into a convex shape that protrudes forward in a plan view. In detail, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a rectangular, flat front plate portion 213a extending vertically in a front view, a pair of side plate portions 213b extending flatly backward from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a, and a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending flatly from the respective rear sides of the pair of side plate portions 213b in a direction away from each other. The cylinder lock 211 penetrates the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 from the rear at a position approximately in the center in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. The pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is such that the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side as viewed from the front is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right side as viewed from the front is attached to the right reinforcing metal plate 134 of the reinforcing unit 130. As a result, the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 connects the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 and the right reinforcing metal plate 134 of the reinforcing unit 130.

When the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 114 from the rear side of the door frame base 110 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate portion 213a and a pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 are housed within the box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 that is open to the rear.

[3-4. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the performance operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 34 to 41. Fig. 34(a) is a front view of the performance operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the performance operation unit. Also, Fig. 35(a) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the back. Fig. 36 is an explanatory diagram of the performance operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. Fig. 37 is a cross-sectional view cut along line D-D in Fig. 34(a), and Fig. 38 is a cross-sectional view cut along line E-E in Fig. 34(b). Fig. 39(a) is a cross-sectional view cut along line F-F in Fig. 34(b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). Fig. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into main members and seen from the front, and Fig. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into main members and seen from the back. The performance operation unit 400 is attached to the front part of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front of the tray unit 320, and can be operated by the player by pressing it, and can also present performance images to the player.

The performance operation unit 400 is equipped with an operation button 410 that has a circular outer shape and is transparent at the center except for the outer edge, which can be pressed by the player, a frame unit 415 that surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and is attached to the performance operation unit attachment part 326a of the plate unit cover 326, a decorative board unit 420 that is positioned behind the operation button 410 and can illuminate and decorate the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, a base unit 430 that is attached to the rear of the frame unit 415 and has the operation button 410 and decorative board unit 420 attached to the front, and a door frame side performance display device 460 that is attached to the base unit 430 so that it can be seen from the player side through the operation button 410 and can display performance images.

[3-4a. Operation buttons]
The operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 39 to 42. Fig. 42(a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and seen from the front, and Fig. 42(b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and seen from the back. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the vertical height of the dish unit 320, and the center side except for the outer periphery is formed transparent. The operation button 410 is equipped with a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical shape) with a circular periphery and a central side bulging forward, an annular button frame 412 attached to the front side of the outer periphery of the button lens 411, and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of a material that is difficult for light to pass through.

The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially uniform thickness throughout. The front side of the button lens 411 is formed to have a smooth curved surface without any irregularities. The button lens 411 includes a first button decoration part 411a that extends a predetermined length toward the center (inside) at a position on the inner periphery of the button frame 412, recessed from the back surface into a W-shaped cross section, and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction, and a plurality (six) of second button decoration parts 411b that extend on an axis toward the center at a position on the outer periphery side of the first button decoration part 411a, recessed from the back surface into an arc-shaped cross section, and are arranged in a row within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction.

As shown in the figure, when assembled to the operating button 410, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 toward the center, with the groups on the left and right sides extending further toward the center than the groups on the top and bottom sides.

The multiple second button decorations 411b of the button lens 411 each extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, with three formed on each of the left and right sides. These second button decorations 411b are formed to face the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward so that their front sides are approximately flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 has a lens effect that refracts light due to the unevenness of the W-shaped or arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface of the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411b, making it difficult to see clearly from behind.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape and has multiple (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-to-rear direction and extend in an arc shape for a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided three on each of the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decorative parts 411b of the button lens 411. This button frame 412 has a plating layer with a metallic luster on its surface.

The button base 413 includes a main body 413a that is approximately cylindrical and extends in the front-rear direction, a ring-shaped flange 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body 413a, a plurality of guide bosses 413c (four in number) that protrude cylindrically from the rear side of the flange 413b along the outer periphery of the main body 413a and are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction, a plurality of detection pieces 413d (three in number) that protrude in a strip-like shape from the rear side of the flange 413b along the outer periphery of the main body 413a and are arranged in the circumferential direction, a base opening 413e that penetrates the flange 413b in the front-rear direction outside the main body 413a, extends a predetermined length along the outer periphery, and is formed in the circumferential direction in a plurality of (six) base openings 413e, and an inner extension 413f that extends forward from the front end of the main body 413a in a cylindrical shape and narrows inward (toward the center) so that the front end side fits along the inner surface of the button lens 411.

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extension 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange 413b. The four guide bosses 413c are respectively arranged at positions corresponding to the four corners of the main body 413a in the circumferential direction. These four guide bosses 413c are each slidably inserted into the retaining holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction, with two on the upper side and one on the lower side, in the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. When the operation button 410 is pressed, these three detection pieces 413d are detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430.

The six base openings 413e are provided three on each side, and correspond to the second button decorative part 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the base opening 413e in the button base 413, the main body 413a and a part of the inner extension 413f are recessed inward from the outer periphery. The inner diameter of the front end of the inner extension 413f, which tapers inward, is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

The front surface of the operation button 410 bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of an approximately spherical surface) and is formed transparent, so that the display screen of the door frame side performance display device 460 arranged on the rear side can be seen from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413c slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and is biased forward by the operation button spring 438 inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431. The operation button 410 is restricted from moving further forward by the front side of the outer periphery abutting against the frame unit 415 due to the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, and moves backward until the rear end abuts against the front surface of the base unit 430 by pressing against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. When the pressure detection sensor 440 detects the detection piece 413d, it means that the operation button 410 has been operated.

In addition, when the performance operation unit 400 is assembled, the first button decoration 411a is formed around the entire circumference of the operation button 410, extending from the inner edge of the button frame 412 of the transparent button lens 411 toward the center, making it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

The front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 of the operation button 410 is closed by the button lens 411 and button frame 412, and the button frame 412 attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 makes the transparent portion through which the rear can be seen narrow inward from the outer periphery relative to the outer diameter of the operation button 410. The presence of this button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner periphery of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

In addition, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the performance operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body 413a) protrudes rearward from the front surface of the decorative board unit 420 through the inner periphery of the decorative board unit 420. This prevents light irradiated forward from the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420 from leaking from the outside to the inside of the button base 413, and prevents light irradiated forward from the LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decorative board 433, operation button right inner decorative board 434, operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and operation button lower inner decorative board 436 of the base unit 430 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the LEDs mounted on the first LED 422a, 423a and second LED 422b, 423b of the decorative board unit 420, and the operation button left interior decorative board 433, operation button right interior decorative board 434, operation button above interior decorative board 435, and operation button below interior decorative board 436 of the base unit 430 can prevent areas other than those intended for illumination decoration from being illuminated, allowing for attractive illumination decoration.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 39 to 41. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the performance operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed into a shape whose outer shape matches the front end side of the performance operation unit attachment part 326a.

The frame unit 415 comprises a frame-shaped frame body 416 having a circular central opening 416a and attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320, a pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached to the frame body 416 from the rear side on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the frame body 416 from the front side above the central opening 416a.

The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates from front to back, a plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b that penetrate from front to back on both the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a and extend in an arc along the periphery of the central opening 416a and are arranged in a row in the circumferential direction, and a cutout portion 416c that is cut out to a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. The central opening 416a is formed to be approximately the same size as the diameter of the outer periphery side of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. This allows the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 to abut against the outer periphery rear side of the frame opening 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a, three on each side, and are closed from the rear by frame side lenses 417. The cutouts 416c also penetrate in the front-to-rear direction, and a frame top lens 418 is fitted into them from the front.

The frame body 416 also has a generally cylindrical inner tube portion 416d that extends rearward from a position slightly outside the periphery of the central opening 416a. The inner tube portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and is cut out at a portion corresponding to the cutout portion 416c. When the performance operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner tube portion 416d is located between the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively, and separates the first LEDs 422a, 423a from the second LEDs 422b, 423b (see FIG. 38).

Furthermore, the frame body 416 has a pair of mounting parts 416e that extend outward from the upper left and right sides of the outer periphery and are attached to the performance operation unit mounting part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. The frame body 416 (performance operation unit 400) is attached to the performance operation unit mounting part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 at the left and right sides of the pair of mounting parts 416e and the cutout part 416c.

The frame body 416 has a plated layer with a metallic luster formed on almost the entire surface, except for a region of the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite the central opening 416a from the notch 416c (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached).

The frame side lens 417 closes the peripheral openings 416b, three of which are formed on each side of the frame body 416 from the rear. The front side of the frame side lens 417 is formed as a smooth surface without any irregularities, and the rear side has multiple irregularities formed along the periphery of the central opening 416a (see Figures 39 and 46). These multiple irregularities refract light, making it impossible to see behind the frame side lens 417.

The frame top lens 418 has a generally rectangular outer shape so that it fits into the cutout 416c of the frame body 416 from the front. The front side of the frame top lens 418 is formed smoothly. In addition, the rear side of the frame top lens 418 has multiple rows of irregularities that extend in a zigzag pattern along the periphery of the central opening 416a in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see Figures 37 and 46). Light is refracted by these multiple irregularities, making it impossible to see the rear side of the frame top lens 418.

When the performance operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 are positioned in front of the second LEDs 422b, 423b on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, and the frame top lens 418 is positioned in front of the frame top lens decorative board 437 of the base unit 430, and each can be illuminated and decorated by the second LEDs 422b, 423b etc. mounted thereon.

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 39 to 43. Fig. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the performance operation unit when viewed from the front. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate and decorate the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415, and can impart vibration to the performance operation unit 400.

The decorative board unit 420 comprises a C-shaped board base 421 that is open on the upper side, a left outer decorative board for operation buttons 422 and a right outer decorative board for operation buttons 423 that are respectively attached to the front of both the left and right sides of the board base 421, a vibration motor 424 that is attached to the lower front of the board base 421, and a motor cover 425 that is attached to the front of the board base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

The inner circumference of the substrate base 421 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer circumference is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 and smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The left operation button outer decorative board 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421. The left operation button outer decorative board 422 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 on the front side, and a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outward from the plurality of first LEDs 422a. The right operation button outer decorative board 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421. The right operation button outer decorative board 423 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 on the front side, and a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outward from the plurality of first LEDs 423a. Both the front and rear surfaces of the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423 are white.

The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to the rotation shaft, and vibrations can be generated by rotating this weight 424a.

When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the performance operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. In addition, in the decorative board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a, 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located behind the second button decorative part 411b of the operation button 410, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. In addition, when assembled to the performance operation unit 400, the inner cylindrical part 416d of the frame unit 415 is located between the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, the decorative board unit 420 can illuminate and decorate only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 with light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, and can illuminate and decorate only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light from the second LEDs 422b, 423b.

In addition, the decorative board unit 420 can generate vibrations by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, causing the entire performance operation unit 400 to vibrate.

[3-4f. Effects of the Production Operation Unit]
The effect of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 44 to 46. Fig. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit in Fig. 37. Fig. 45(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the operation button that is cut out and hidden by the first button decoration part and button frame of the operation button in the view of the performance operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and Fig. 45(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the operation button that is hidden by the first button decoration part and button frame of the operation button in the cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit. Fig. 46(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the performance operation unit in a perspective view seen from the front, and Fig. 46(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the performance operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends.

The presentation operation unit 400 of this embodiment can show the player presentation images according to the game state that changes as the game ball is shot into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and can have the player operate the operation button 410 to participate in the presented presentation, allowing the player to enjoy it.

The performance operation unit 400 is formed so that its overall height is approximately the same as the height of the lower portion of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. In addition, the performance operation unit 400 is formed so that its overall width is slightly larger than 1/3 of the overall width of the door frame 3. When viewed from the front, the performance operation unit 400 is positioned in the center in the left-right direction below the play area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110).

The performance operation unit 400 is attached to the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 at the upper portion of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. When the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320, a gap is formed between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442, which forms the bottom surface, and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. In other words, only the upper portion of the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320, and it is attached in a suspended state.

The performance operation unit 400 is attached so that the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the performance operation unit attachment part 326a. As a result, the performance operation unit 400 is inclined so that the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410, which bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of an approximately spherical surface), moves upward as it moves forward at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. As a result, when a player sits in front of this pachinko machine 1 to play a game using this pachinko machine 1, the player's head is located in front of the center of the play area 5a on the game board 5 located above the plate unit 320 (performance operation unit 400), so that the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when the player looks down from the play area 5a to the performance operation unit 400 (the operation button 410), the operation button 410 will be seen as close as possible to its front view (projected view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL), allowing the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 inside the operation button 410 to be clearly visible.

In the performance operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four retaining holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are biased forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not being pressed), the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to abut against a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415.

In the normal state of the performance operation unit 400, the center side (the side of the central axis CL) near the inner circumference of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of a roughly spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the part that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 37, etc.).

In this embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is approximately 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end thereof) protrudes approximately 4 cm forward from the front surface of the frame unit 415 in the direction of the central axis CL of the operation button 410.

Under normal conditions, when a player presses the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts against the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement of the operation button 410 is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 stops. When the player presses the operation button 410, he presses the button lens 411, which bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of an approximately spherical surface).

This operation button 410 has a much larger outer diameter than the operation buttons for effects provided on conventional pachinko machines, so there is a high possibility that the peripheral area away from the center of the button lens 411 will be pressed. In more detail, the operation buttons for effects on conventional pachinko machines are attached so that their central axes extend approximately parallel to the vertical, whereas the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of this embodiment is attached so that its central axis CL is inclined relative to the vertical. Therefore, when a player presses the operation button 410 from above as in conventional pachinko machines, the player will press a part of the operation button 410 away from the central axis CL, as shown by the hollow arrow in FIG. 44.

However, in conventional pachinko machines, the operation buttons for effects are formed on a flat surface that is pressed by the player. If the operation button is made larger while keeping the part that is pressed on a flat surface, when a part of the operation button that is not in the center is pressed, the surface that is pressed will tilt so that the part that is pressed will move back first, and the operation button will not be able to move back in a straight line, which could make it impossible to press the operation button.

In contrast, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of this embodiment has a curved surface (a part of a roughly spherical surface) that bulges forward at the part (button lens 411) that the player presses, so when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 can move straight backward. Therefore, no matter where on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can move back smoothly without tilting, so the pressing operation can be detected reliably, and the effect of pressing the operation button 410 can be fully enjoyed.

In addition, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower front part of the board base 421 of the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part of the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the performance operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 so that the performance operation unit 400 can be suspended. Therefore, when the vibration motor 424 rotates the weight 424a to generate vibration, the vibration occurs at the part farthest from the part where it is attached, so the entire performance operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly) and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the performance operation unit 400. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is located directly below a position where it is relatively easy for the player to press (the position of the white arrow in Figure 44), a strong vibration can be transmitted to the player who is pressing the operation button 410, surprising the player and allowing him to enjoy the performance.

Furthermore, the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and a gap is formed between the lower surface of the leg 442a of the relay board cover 442 that forms the lower surface and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, so that when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or hit, the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc., can bend downward to absorb the impact until the lower surface of the leg 442a abuts against the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. In addition, after the lower surface of the leg 442a abuts against the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the performance operation unit 400 is restricted, and excessive force is prevented from acting on the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc., and damage to the performance operation unit 400, etc. can be prevented. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a lot of force when a performance is presented to the player in which the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 is pressed, the operation button 410 or the performance operation unit 400 will not be damaged, and interruption of the game due to damage can be avoided, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be prevented, and by making it less likely to be damaged, an increase in the burden on the game hall can be prevented.

As mentioned above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that the player presses is formed into a curved surface (the shape of a part of a roughly spherical surface) that protrudes forward, making it stronger and more rigid than if it were flat. Even if it is hit hard, the impact can be dispersed throughout the entire button lens 411, making it less likely to break.

As shown in FIG. 46, the button lens 411, frame side lens 417, frame top lens 418, and operation button interior decorative member 432 of the performance operation unit 400 are made of transparent materials, so that the uneven decorations formed on the back sides of the first button decoration part 411a, second button decoration part 411b, first button interior decorative part 432f, and second button interior decorative part 432g can be seen from the front side (player side). In addition, in the areas where the uneven decorations are formed, the plate thickness changes and light refracts in a complex manner, making it difficult to see the rear side through the areas where the uneven decorations are formed.

The performance operation unit 400 is provided with a first button decoration part 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center, and the uneven decoration of this first button decoration part 411a makes it difficult to see behind at the outer edge of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the part where the first button decoration part 411a is formed (behind the direction of the central axis CL), there is a gap between the inner peripheral surface of the main body part 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall part 432a of the operation button inner decoration member 432, but the first button decoration part 411a located in front of the gap makes it difficult to see the gap on the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 from the front side (player side). This prevents the appearance of the operation button 410 from deteriorating even if the operation button 410 is provided with an internal decorative member 432 that is fixed in position, preventing players from feeling uncomfortable when they see the operation button 410, and also allows the internal decorative member 432 to be positioned without problems inside the transparent operation button 410, improving the appearance of the operation button 410.

In more detail, the first button decoration 411a, the second button decoration 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 prevent the unit base 431 and the decorative board unit 420, which are located outside the outer periphery of the operation button interior decorative member 432 of the base unit 430 and on the rear side (back side) from being seen by the player through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 45, the cross-hatched area surrounded by a dashed line is made invisible to the player. In this way, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration 411a, the second button decoration 411b, and the button frame 412, the outside and back side of the operation button interior decorative member 432 can be hidden and made difficult to see, improving the appearance of the operation button 410 and, by extension, the entire performance operation unit 400.

In addition, in the performance operation unit 400, the first button decoration 411a of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction, while the second button interior decoration 432g formed on the front plate 432b of the operation button interior decoration member 432 located on the inside rear of the operation button 410 extends in a modified octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL and is arranged in a row in concentric circles, so that, as shown in FIG. 46, the uneven lines of the first button decoration 411a and the uneven lines of the second button interior decoration 432g intersect, allowing the player to see a geometric decoration.

In addition, because the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g of the performance operation unit 400 are separated in the front-to-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis line CL extends), the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g can present the player with a geometric pattern that has a deep, three-dimensional feel, allowing the player to enjoy the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410.

Furthermore, in the performance operation unit 400, the first button decoration 411a and the second button inner decoration 432g are separated in the front-to-rear direction, so that when the player's eye position moves, the overlapping degree between the uneven lines of the first button decoration 411a and the uneven lines of the second button inner decoration 432g changes, allowing the player to see a moving decoration and entertaining the player.

In this way, the performance operation unit 400 can present a dynamic, three-dimensional decoration to the player through the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432, which strongly attracts the player's attention and makes the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing.

In addition, the operation unit 400 has a left operation button interior decorative board 433, a right operation button interior decorative board 434, an upper operation button interior decorative board 435, and a lower operation button interior decorative board 436 arranged behind the operation button interior decorative member 432 within the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), and by illuminating multiple LEDs mounted on the front of these, the operation button interior decorative member 432 within the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated. In other words, the inside of the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated by the left operation button interior decorative board 433, the right operation button interior decorative board 434, the upper operation button interior decorative board 435, and the lower operation button interior decorative board 436. The LEDs mounted on the front of the left operation button interior decorative board 433, the right operation button interior decorative board 434, the upper operation button interior decorative board 435, and the lower operation button interior decorative board 436 are positioned inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 when viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, as shown in Figure 38, so that the light from them does not leak outside the main body 413a, and only the inside of the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated well.

In addition, the performance operation unit 400 has a first LED 422a on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and a first LED 423a on the operation button right outer decorative board 423 in the decorative board unit 420 arranged behind the second button decorative part 411b facing through the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and by illuminating these first LEDs 422a, 423a, the six second button decorative parts 411b of the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a on the left outer decorative board 422 of the operation button and the first LED 423a on the right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button are positioned between the cylindrical main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the cylindrical inner tube 416d in the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415, so that light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body 413a or to the outside of the inner tube 416d, and only the second button decorative part 411b of the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated well.

Furthermore, in the performance operation unit 400, the second LED 422b of the left outer decorative board 422 of the operation button and the second LED 423b of the right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button are arranged behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated and decorated by illuminating these second LEDs 422b, 423b. The second LED 422b of the left outer decorative board 422 of the operation button and the second LED 423b of the right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button are located between the cylindrical inner tube portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer circumference of the frame body 416, and the light from the second LEDs 422b, 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner tube portion 416d or to the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated well.

In addition, the performance operation unit 400 has a frame top lens decorative board 437 in the base unit 430 disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and the frame top lens 418 can be illuminated and decorated by illuminating a number of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative board 437. A flat light-shielding wall portion 431c protrudes forward from the lower side of the portion where the frame top lens decorative board 437 of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430 is attached, up to the rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418, so that light from the LEDs of the frame top lens decorative board 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or frame side lens 417, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated well.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 47 to 50. Figure 47(a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the rear. Figure 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and seen from the front, and Figure 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Figure 50 is a cross-sectional view cut along line L-L in Figure 47(a). The door frame left side unit 530 is attached to the left of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 on the front left side so as to cover the front sides of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 (door frame left side decorative board 160) on the upper side of the plate unit 320. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 530 comprises a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, on the left side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front; a transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusion lens member 532 attached to the front of the left unit base 531; a translucent left unit decorative lens member (not shown) disposed in front of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at its front end; and a cylindrical frame-shaped member attached to the upper front of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member. a left unit upper decorative base 534 that extends vertically along with the left unit upper decorative base 534; a left unit lower decorative base 535 that is attached to the lower front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and protrudes forward in a frame shape shorter than the left unit upper decorative base 534; a transparent left unit decorative cover 536 that is attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 from the front sides of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member; and a plurality of decorative members 537 that are attached to the front side of the left unit decorative cover 536.

The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has multiple openings 531a penetrating the front from front to back. As shown in the figure, the multiple openings 531a include circular holes and rectangular holes extending vertically. The left unit base 531 is attached to the left front side of the door frame base 110 so that the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162) face forward from the multiple openings 531a. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed so that each LED 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 is located approximately in the center in the vertical direction when assembled to the door frame 3. This left unit base 531 is formed of an opaque material.

The left unit base 531 also has a left reflective standing wall 538 (see Figs. 5 and 23) that stands toward the front from the glass plate 192 that is arranged to close the through hole 111. The left reflective standing wall 538 has a flat inner surface that faces the through hole 111 and is provided as a reflective surface that can reflect light. The reflective surface can be provided by forming the inner surface of the left reflective standing wall 538 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, or by attaching a reflective sticker to the inner surface. As will be described later, the left reflective standing wall 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a part (left side) of the above-mentioned reflective standing wall 33.

The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is made of a transparent member and is divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffusion lens member 532 has a circular lens portion 532a that is circular when viewed from the front and corresponds to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a rectangular lens portion 532b that is rectangular when viewed from the front and corresponds to the rectangular opening 531a. The door frame left side unit 530 is formed so that the LEDs 161a, 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are positioned immediately after the centers of the circular lens portion 532a and the rectangular lens portion 532b when assembled to the door frame 3.

The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed into a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. This circular lens portion 532a allows the light from the LEDs 161a, 162a arranged at the rear to be irradiated forward as a point. The light irradiated forward from this circular lens portion 532a allows the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member to be illuminated and decorated.

The rectangular lens section 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 comprises a central diffusion reflection section 532c that is recessed backward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface, a front diffusion lens section 532d that is formed outside the central diffusion reflection section 532c on the front surface, an input lens section 532e that bulges backward in a curved shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffusion reflection section 532c), and a front reflection section 532f that is outside the input lens section 532e on the rear surface and is generally inclined so as to move forward as it moves away from the input lens section 532e.

The front diffuse lens section 532d of the rectangular lens section 532b is formed by a number of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the central diffuse reflection section 532c. More specifically, when the front diffuse lens section 532d is cut in the radial direction, the cross-sectional shape is such that the grooves are recessed in an arc shape toward the rear, and the peaks between the grooves are bulged in an arc shape toward the front, forming a smooth wavy front surface. The front diffuse lens section 532d is also formed such that the grooves and peaks are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction, with the radial lines dividing it in the circumferential direction as the boundary.

The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 532e. These grooves are V-shaped from the rear to the front, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The cross-sectional shape of the front reflecting portion 532f when cut along the radial direction is a sawtooth shape, with the mountain parts between the grooves being triangular and pointed backward. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the grooves and mountain parts move forward as they move away from the center. The front reflecting portion 532f is also formed so that the groove parts and mountain parts are alternately located in the circumferential direction, with the radially extending lines dividing the front reflecting portion 532f ...

When this rectangular lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a on the door frame left side decorative board 160 are located immediately behind the input lens portion 532e.

In the rectangular lens section 532b, the light irradiated forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens section 532e into the rectangular lens section 532b. Since the input lens section 532e bulges backward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), it can refract the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a so that it travels parallel to the front, and guide almost all of the input light to the cone-shaped central diffuse reflection section 532c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflection section 532c is reflected by the inclined cone surface of the central diffuse reflection section 532c so as to be diffused in a direction perpendicular to the axis extending forward and backward (a direction parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160), and travels from the center to the outside along the front surface of the rectangular lens section 532b. Furthermore, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflector 532c travels from the center to the outside (away from the center line of the central diffuse reflector 532c) throughout the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-to-rear direction.

When the light reflected from the center to the outside in the rectangular lens portion 532b approximately parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 reaches the saw-shaped forward reflecting portion 532f, it is reflected forward by the surface of the forward reflecting portion 532f. At this time, the forward reflecting portion 532f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c, so that the thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-to-rear direction becomes thinner as it moves away from the center (see FIG. 50). As a result, the light reflected outward over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-to-rear direction at the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c can be sequentially reflected forward by the forward reflecting portion 532f as it moves from the center to the outside.

The light reflected forward by the front reflector 532f passes through the front diffuser lens section 532d and is irradiated forward from the rectangular lens section 532b. At this time, since the front diffuser lens section 532d has a wavy cross section, it can diffuse the light reflected forward by the front reflector 532f in various directions, and can irradiate the light forward (to the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) approximately uniformly from the front surface of the rectangular lens section 532b.

In the front diffusion lens section 532d and the front reflection section 532f of this rectangular lens section 532b, the multiple concentric grooves are divided by multiple lines extending radially, and the multiple concentric arc grooves are shifted radially at the dividing lines so that the concentric arc grooves are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction. This makes it possible to prevent the light irradiated forward from the front surface of the rectangular lens section 532b from becoming light with a concentric striped pattern of light and shade, and to irradiate light with a more uniform shade forward. This allows the multifaceted decorative section in front of the rectangular lens section 532b in the left unit decorative lens member to be illuminated and decorated in an approximately uniform manner.

The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed to fit the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member has a circular decorative portion formed in a portion located in front of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532, and a polyhedral decorative portion formed in a portion located in front of the angular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape with a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion that is recessed in the front and extends short in the front and rear directions. The polyhedral decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions are arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped that extends vertically, and a plurality of polyhedrons consisting of a plurality of triangles are arranged in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. The circular decorative portion and the polyhedral decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the polyhedral decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

The left unit decorative lens member can be seen from the front (player's side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member is illuminated by light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532, and the multifaceted decorative portion is illuminated by light irradiated forward from the angular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532.

The left unit upper decorative base 534 has a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed into a rectangular tube that extends from front to back. The part that forms the underside of the outer periphery of the left unit upper decorative base 534 is inclined so that it protrudes downward as it moves from the front end to the rear end, and the lower part of this part is perforated from front to rear. This left unit upper decorative base 534 is formed from an opaque material.

The left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front, which is open upward. The left unit lower decorative base 535 is inclined from approximately the center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves rearward as it moves upward. This left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed from an opaque material.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent so that the vertical middle part is concave backwards, and is composed of an L-shaped part whose lower part is bent backwards to fit along the front end of the left unit upper decorative base 534, an L-shaped part whose upper part is bent backwards to fit along the front end of the left unit lower decorative base 535, and a straight part connecting the lower end of the upper L-shaped part and the upper end of the lower L-shaped part.

The left unit decorative cover 536 is attached at both the top and bottom ends to the front of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front of the left unit lower decorative base 535. This left unit decorative cover 536 is made of a transparent material, so that the left unit decorative lens member located at the rear can be seen from the front.

The decorative members 537 extend vertically and are attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. The decorative members 537 are made of an opaque material.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 51 to 55. Figure 51(a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the back. Figure 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and seen from the front, and Figure 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and seen from the back. Figure 54 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line M-M in Figure 51(a). Figure 55(a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line N-N in Figure 51(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line O-O in Figure 51(a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320.

The door frame right side unit 550 is equipped with a box-shaped right unit base 551 that extends vertically and is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 in a front view on the front side of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, a door frame right side decorative board 552 that is attached to the front side of the right unit base 551, a transparent flat right unit left diffusion lens member 553 that is attached to the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552, to the left of the center in a front view on the front side of the right unit base 551, and extends in the vertical and front-to-rear directions, a sheet-shaped right unit left decorative member 554 that is attached to the left side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and is decorated, and a transparent flat right unit left cover 555 that is attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the right unit left decorative member 554.

The door frame right side unit 550 also includes a transparent flat right unit right diffusion lens member 556 that is attached to the right side of the center in front view on the front surface of the right unit base 551 and to the right side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 in a front view, extending in the up-down and front-to-back directions, the right unit right decorative member 557 that is attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and is a sheet-like member that is decorated, and a transparent flat right unit right cover 558 that is attached to the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 550 is equipped with a right unit left light blocking member 559, which is a shallow box-like opaque member that is disposed between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and extends in the vertical and front-to-rear directions with the front and right sides open, and a right unit right light blocking member 560, which is a flat, opaque member that is attached to the left of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light blocking member 559.

The door frame right side unit 550 is provided with a right unit decorative lens member 561 having translucency and a polyhedral decoration at the front end, which is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, a right unit decorative base 562 that is attached to the front of the right unit base 551 so as to cover both the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 and the front end sides of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, a transparent right unit cover 563 that is attached to the front side of the right unit decorative base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562, and a plurality of decorative members 564 that are attached to the front side of the right unit cover 563. Although not shown in the figure, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right unit base 551 so as to penetrate vertically, and is provided with a connection cable for connecting the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame top unit relay board 589 of the door frame top unit 570.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, extending vertically and horizontally, and a short rectangular cylindrical shape extending front to back, with the center in the front to back direction closed off in a box shape. This right unit base 551 is made of an opaque material.

The right unit base 551 also has a right reflective wall portion 568 (see Figs. 6 and 24) that stands toward the front side from the glass plate 192 that is arranged to close the through hole 111. In this right reflective wall portion 568, the inner surface that is flat and faces the through hole 111 is provided as a reflective surface that can reflect light. In addition, like the inner surface of the left reflective wall portion 538, this reflective surface can be provided by forming the inner surface of the right reflective wall portion 568 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, or by attaching a reflective sticker to the inner surface. As will be described later, this right reflective wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and serves as a part (right side portion) of the above-mentioned reflective wall portion 33.

The door frame right side decorative board 552 is formed in the shape of a vertically extending strip. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is equipped with a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a plurality of middle LEDs 552c mounted in the center in the left-right direction on the front surface. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is for illuminating and decorating the right unit left decorative member 554 through the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. The right LED 552b is for illuminating and decorating the right unit right decorative member 557 through the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for illuminating and decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The door frame right side decorative board 552 is formed in white on both the front and back. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative board 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. Although not shown in the figure, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is connected to the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B.

The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 comprises a flat main body portion 553a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, a rear wall portion 553b protruding in a short flat shape from the rear edge of the main body portion 553a to the right as viewed from the front, a rectangular cutout portion 553c cut from the right end side of the rear wall portion 553b to the left as viewed from the front and formed in multiple places at regular intervals in the vertical direction, a shallow storage recess 553d on the left side of the main body portion 553a as viewed from the front so that the right unit left decorative member 554 can be stored in it, input lens portions 553e protruding rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a and provided in multiple vertical directions, and side reflecting portions 553f arranged in multiple vertical directions on the right side of the main body portion 553a as viewed from the front so that each input lens portion 553e is centered in the vertical direction.

The main body 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a shape in side view that is rectangular extending vertically, with the upper corner on the front end side cut out at an angle in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side is inclined so that it moves upward as it moves forward. Also, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body 553a as a whole is slightly inclined with respect to the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that it moves to the right as viewed from the front as it moves forward from the rear end side. When assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the main body 553a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530.

When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the right end of the rear wall 553b extends to approximately the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The right end of this rear wall 553b abuts against the left end of the rear wall 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

The multiple cutouts 553c are formed at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and some of them correspond to the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 face forward from the multiple cutouts 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be effectively illuminated and decorated by the multiple middle LEDs 552c.

The storage recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of its outer periphery roughly matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. This allows the right unit left decorative member 554 to be stored therein.

The input lens parts 553e protrude rearward at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body part 553a. Specifically, they are formed at approximately the vertical center of each of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 when it is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens part 553e has a rectangular part with a rectangular shape extending vertically protruding rearward, and a part that is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular part so as to curve spherically. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, these input lens parts 553e are each located immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552. This allows the light from the left LED 552a to be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body part 553a.

Six (multiple) side reflectors 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflector 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 553e. In each of these concentric arc grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface farther from the input lens portion 553e extends perpendicularly to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. When cut in the radial direction centered on the input lens portion 553e, the side reflector 553f has a cross-sectional shape formed in a pointed triangle shape with the mountain portion between the grooves facing toward the center, and the whole is formed in a saw-like shape. In addition, the side reflector 553f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc grooves as the boundary.

In this right unit left diffusion lens member 553, light irradiated forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is incident from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Since the rear end of this input lens portion 553e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the left LED 552a is refracted so that it spreads out due to the curved surface, and within the main body portion 553a, the light is diffused radially toward the front with each input lens portion 553e as the center.

The main body 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the main body 553a moves to the right as seen from the front as it moves forward, so that the light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 553a from the input lens section 553e hits the flat left surface inside the main body 553a. However, due to the angle of incidence with respect to the left surface of the main body 553a, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not emitted to the outside from the left surface of the main body 553a, but is reflected by the inner surface of the left surface toward the side reflector 553f.

The light incident forward from the input lens section 553e into the main body section 553a is reflected to the left as viewed from the front by hitting the sawtooth side reflecting section 553f, and is irradiated outward from the left surface of the main body section 553a. Note that light is also irradiated outward (to the right as viewed from the front) from the right surface (side reflecting section 553f) of the main body section 553a, but since the right unit left light shielding member 559 arranged on the right side of the main body section 553a is a white material, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 passes through the main body section 553a and is irradiated to the left. Therefore, the light reflected to the left by the side reflector 553f inside the main body 553a and the light irradiated to the right from the side reflector 553f, reflected to the left by the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559, and passed through the main body 553a are irradiated to the left from the left surface of the main body 553a, allowing the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body 553a to be illuminated and decorated with good brightness.

In addition, in the side reflector 553f, the multiple concentric grooves are divided by multiple radially extending lines, and the multiple concentric arc grooves are shifted radially at the dividing lines to alternately arrange the concentric arc grooves in the circumferential direction, so that the light irradiated outward (leftward) from the left surface of the main body 553a does not become light with a concentric striped pattern of light and shade, and light with a more uniform shade can be irradiated to the left. This allows the right unit left decorative member 554 housed in the housing recess 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a to be illuminated and decorated in a substantially uniform manner.

The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is made of a transparent material, so that from the left side of the main body 553a when viewed from the front (the side where the storage recess 553d is formed), the pattern consisting of multiple concentric arc-shaped grooves and radially extending lines of the side reflector 553f formed on the opposite side can be seen. Therefore, if a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflector 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be seen through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right unit left decorative member 554 can be decorated with the side reflector 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape and is decorated with translucent decorations such as the manufacturer's logo of the pachinko machine 1 and a logo that matches the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed approximately symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and has a similar configuration. In detail, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a flat body portion 556a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, a rear wall portion 556b protruding in a short flat shape from the rear edge of the body portion 556a to the left as viewed from the front, a rectangular cutout portion 556c cut from the left end side of the rear wall portion 556b as viewed from the front to the right and formed in a plurality of predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, a storage recess 556d that is shallowly recessed on the right side of the body portion 556a as viewed from the front so that the right unit right decorative member 557 can be stored, input lens portions 556e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the body portion 556a and are provided in the vertical direction, and side reflecting portions 556f that are arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is centered in the vertical direction on the left side of the body portion 556a as viewed from the front.

The body 556a of the right diffusion lens member 556 of the right unit has a shape in side view that is rectangular extending vertically, with the upper corners on the front end side cut out at an angle in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side is inclined so that it moves upward as it moves forward, and is formed in approximately the same shape as the body 553a of the left diffusion lens member 553 of the right unit. Also, as shown in FIG. 55, the body 556a as a whole is slightly inclined with respect to the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that it moves leftward as viewed from the front as it moves forward from the rear end side. The front end of the body 556a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3.

When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the left end of the rear wall 556b extends to approximately the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The left end of this rear wall 556b abuts against the right end of the rear wall 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553.

The multiple cutouts 556c are formed at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and some correspond to the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These multiple cutouts 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the multiple cutouts 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the cutouts 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the cutouts 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 form a square opening that penetrates from front to back, and the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 face forward from this opening, allowing the right unit decorative lens member 561 to be well illuminated and decorated.

The storage recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of its outer periphery roughly matches the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. This allows the right unit right decorative member 557 to be stored therein.

The input lens parts 556e protrude rearward at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body part 556a. Specifically, they are formed at approximately the vertical center of each of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 when it is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens part 556e has a rectangular parallelepiped part with a rectangular shape extending vertically protruding rearward, and a part that is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped part so as to curve spherically. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, these input lens parts 556e are each located immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552. This allows the light from the right LED 552b to be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body part 556a.

Six (multiple) side reflectors 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflector 556f is formed of multiple concentric arc grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the input lens 556e. In each of these multiple concentric arc grooves, the surface closer to the input lens 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body 556a, and the surface farther from the input lens 556e extends perpendicularly to the surface of the main body 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. When cut in the radial direction centered on the input lens 556e, the side reflector 556f has a cross-sectional shape formed in a pointed triangle shape with the mountain part between the grooves facing the center, and the whole is formed in a saw-like shape. In addition, the side reflector 556f is formed so that the groove parts and mountain parts are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial lines dividing the multiple concentric arc grooves in the circumferential direction as the boundary.

In this right unit right diffusion lens member 556, light irradiated forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is incident from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Since the rear end of this input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the right LED 552b is refracted so that it spreads out due to the curved surface, and within the main body portion 556a, the light is diffused radially toward the front with each input lens portion 556e as the center.

The main body 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the main body 556a moves to the left as seen from the front as it moves forward, so that the light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 556a from the input lens section 556e hits the flat right surface inside the main body 556a. However, due to the angle of incidence with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted to the outside from the left surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected by the inner surface of the right surface toward the side reflector 556f.

The light incident forward from the input lens section 556e into the main body section 556a is reflected to the right as viewed from the front by hitting the sawtooth side reflecting section 556f, and is irradiated outward from the right surface of the main body section 556a. Note that light is also irradiated outward (leftward as viewed from the front) from the right surface (side reflecting section 556f) of the main body section 556a, but since the right unit right light shielding member 560 arranged on the left side of the main body section 556a is a white member, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 passes through the main body section 556a and is irradiated to the right side. Therefore, the light reflected to the right by the side reflector 556f inside the main body 556a and the light irradiated to the left from the side reflector 556f, reflected to the right by the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560, and passed through the main body 556a are irradiated to the right from the right surface of the main body 556a, allowing the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a to be illuminated with good brightness.

In addition, in the side reflector 556f, the concentric grooves are divided by multiple radially extending lines, and the concentric grooves are shifted radially at the dividing lines so that the concentric grooves are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction. This makes it possible to prevent the light irradiated outward (to the right) from the right surface of the main body 556a from becoming a concentric striped light and shade, and to irradiate light of a more uniform shade to the right. This allows the right unit right decorative member 557 housed in the housing recess 556d on the right surface of the main body 556a to be illuminated and decorated in a substantially uniform manner.

The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is made of a transparent material, so that from the right side of the main body 556a when viewed from the front (the side where the storage recess 556d is formed), the pattern consisting of multiple concentric arc grooves and radially extending lines of the side reflector 556f formed on the opposite side can be seen. Therefore, if a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflector 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be seen through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right unit right decorative member 557 can be decorated with the side reflector 556f.

The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and is decorated with translucent material, such as the manufacturer's logo of the pachinko machine 1 and a logo that matches the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed approximately symmetrically with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. The decorations applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same or different.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shape in a side view that is substantially the same as the shape in a side view of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape that is open on the front and right sides. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is provided with a flat body portion 559a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, a rear wall portion 559b that protrudes in a short flat shape from the rear edge of the body portion 559a to the right when viewed from the front, a rectangular cutout portion 559c that is cut out from the right end side of the rear wall portion 559b when viewed from the front to the left and is formed in a plurality of predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a plurality of flat reinforcing portions 559d that extend to the right from the right surface of the body portion 559a and extend from the rear wall portion 559b to the front end of the body portion 559a.

The body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a shape in side view that is vertically extending rectangular with the upper corner on the front end side cut out at an angle in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side is inclined so that it moves upward as it moves forward, and is formed in approximately the same external shape as the body parts 553a, 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the left end of the rear wall 559b extends to the right of approximately the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The right end of this rear wall 559b abuts against the left surface of the right unit right light blocking member 560.

The multiple cutouts 559c are formed at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and some correspond to the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These multiple cutouts 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the multiple cutouts 553c, 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 face forward from the multiple cutouts 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be well illuminated and decorated by the multiple middle LEDs 552c.

The multiple reinforcing parts 559d are provided in three sets spaced a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction, with each set consisting of a pair of reinforcing parts 559d spaced apart in the vertical direction at approximately the same height as the left-right width. Each set of reinforcing parts 559d is formed in a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. These multiple reinforcing parts 559d increase the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a shape in side view that is rectangular extending vertically with the upper corner on the front end side cut out at an angle in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side is slanted so that it moves upward as it moves forward, and is formed in approximately the same shape as the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the right unit right light shielding member 560 closes the right side opening that opens to the right of the right unit left light shielding member 559, which is formed in a shallow box shape.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white material. As shown in FIG. 55, when the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the respective main body parts 559a and right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged in close proximity to the main body parts 553a, 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. As a result, the main body parts 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are spaced apart in the left-right direction, forming a space that extends up-down and front-back by a predetermined width in the left-right direction. Light emitted forward from the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is irradiated to the rear side of the right unit decorative lens member 561 through the space formed between the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed from opaque materials, preventing the light irradiated forward from the left LED 552a, middle LED 552c, and right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative board 552 from interfering with each other, and the right unit left decorative member 554, right unit right decorative member 557, and right unit decorative lens member 561 can be illuminated and decorated only by the corresponding left LED 552a, right LED 552b, and middle LED 552c, respectively.

Furthermore, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 have their internal spaces vertically divided into four by three sets of reinforcing parts 559d, so that the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552, which are located at the rear of each divided space, can prevent light interference between the spaces, and the parts located in front of each space of the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be illuminated and decorated independently. In other words, the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550 can be divided vertically into multiple (four) areas, and each can be illuminated and decorated independently.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape that follows the front end shapes of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 has a circular decorative part 561a that is circular when viewed from the front, and a polyhedral decorative part 561b that extends vertically and has multiple polyhedrons formed thereon. The circular decorative part 561a is formed in a shape with multiple triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical part that is concave on the front and extends short in the front and rear directions. The polyhedral decorative part 561b is formed in a shape in which multiple rows of quadrangular pyramid-shaped parts are arranged in the vertical direction on the front of a rectangular parallelepiped that extends vertically, and multiple rows of polyhedrons made of multiple triangles are arranged in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part.

In more detail, the right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed so that in the areas located in front of each of the spaces divided into four by the three sets of reinforcing parts 559d in the right unit left shading member 559, the top three areas have one multifaceted decorative part 561b on each side of the circular decorative part 561a located in the vertical center, and the bottom area has only the multifaceted decorative part 561b.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be seen from the front (player's side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. This right unit decorative lens member 561 is illuminated and decorated by the LED 552c inside the door frame right side decorative board 552 located at the rear.

The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in the shape of a cylindrical frame that penetrates in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shapes of the front and upper ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so that it can cover both the left and right outer sides near the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and both the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 protrudes slightly forward beyond the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. This right unit decorative base 562 is formed from an opaque material.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so that it can close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562. This right unit cover 563 is formed from a transparent material, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 located on the rear side can be seen from the front side.

The decorative members 564 extend vertically and are attached to the front of the right unit cover 563 at regular intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative members 564 are made of an opaque material. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four parts in the vertical direction.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes forward in a plate shape farther forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and protrudes slightly forward than the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. The door frame right side unit 550 can independently illuminate and decorate the right unit left decorative member 554 and right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the protruding left and right sides, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end.

The door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes significantly forward, so when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility in an amusement hall, the door frame right side unit 550 can act as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side. This gives players playing with this pachinko machine 1 the illusion that they are playing in a private room, allowing them to play in a relaxed atmosphere without having to worry about other players around them.

In addition, because the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes significantly forward, in amusement halls where pachinko machines 1 are installed in a row, even if it is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, it can be seen from the side along the island equipment, making the pachinko machine 1 stand out in amusement halls where many pachinko machines are lined up. Therefore, if the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are illuminated, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be made known from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a malfunction such as ball jamming or an error occurs in this pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, right unit right decorative member 557, and right unit decorative lens member 561 on both the left and right sides are illuminated and decorated in a unique manner, so that the occurrence of the malfunction can be immediately notified to the game hall staff and they can quickly respond to the malfunction, which can quickly resolve the interruption of the player's play and prevent the player from becoming frustrated and losing interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 56 to 59. Figure 56(a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the rear. Figure 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the front, and Figure 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the rear. Figure 59 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line P-P in Figure 56. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550, and to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 570 comprises a central base 571 attached to the center in the left-right direction above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, a pair of side bases 572 attached to both the left and right sides of the central base 571 and attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, and a box-shaped base 573 extending left and right with the center in the left-right direction protruding forward and open at the rear, which penetrates forward and backward at the front positions of the pair of upper speakers 573. The unit body 271 has a pair of openings 574a and multiple slits 574b (three on each side) that extend from a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to the vicinity of the center, penetrate in the front-rear direction, and are spaced apart vertically, and is attached to the front of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572; and speaker covers 575 made of punching metal that are disposed in front of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear of the unit body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a.

Although not shown in the figures, each of the pair of side bases 572 (left side base 572a, right side base 572b) has an internal space that is open only toward the side where the opening window is provided, and in these internal spaces, the outer peripheral external light emitter 34 (left outer peripheral external light emitter 34a, right outer peripheral external light emitter 34b) is provided to emit light from outside the outer periphery into the outer periphery of the opening window, and the outer peripheral external light detector 35 (left outer peripheral external light detector 35a, right outer peripheral external light detector 35b) detects light from inside the outer periphery of the opening window outside the outer periphery.

The door frame top unit 570 is made up of a top middle decorative member 576 that is attached to the front of the unit body 271 in the center in the left-right direction and has translucency, a door frame top middle decorative board 577 that is attached to the rear side of the top middle decorative member 576 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a plurality of transparent flat light guide members (three on each side) that are attached to the front of the unit body 271, close the plurality of slits 574b, and extend from near the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 across the opening 574a to near the left and right ends of the unit body 271. 578, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that are respectively attached to the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 271 and cover the front surfaces of the multiple (three) light guide members 578, and a top middle left decorative member 581 and a top middle right decorative member 582 that are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 from the front side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 and extend from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 to near the center end of the opening 574a.

The door frame top unit 570 further includes a door frame top left decorative board 583 and a door frame top right decorative board 584, which are attached to the inside of the left and right side surfaces of the unit body 271, respectively, and have LEDs mounted on the portions facing the left and right outer ends of the multiple (three) light-guiding members 578, a pair of board bases 585 attached to the portions through which the multiple (three) slits 574b formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left and right direction on the rear side of the unit body 271 penetrate, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and a door frame top middle right decorative board 587 attached to the front of the pair of board bases 585, respectively, and have multiple LEDs 586a, 587a mounted at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit body 271, and a pair of light-shielding members 588 attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 in front of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587.

The door frame top unit 570 also includes a door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front of the central base 571 within the unit body 271, a relay board cover 590 attached to the central base 571 so as to cover the front of the door frame top unit relay board 589, an upper cover 591 attached to the unit body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit body 271, and a lower cover 592 attached to the unit body 271 so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit body 271.

The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed into a rectangular shape that extends left and right when viewed from the front. The central base 571 is formed into a box shape that is open to the rear, and has multiple projections and recesses on the front surface. A pair of side bases 572 are attached to both the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. A pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached at an angle so that the front surface of each of the pair of upper speakers 573 moves backwards on the side closer to the left-right center of the door frame top unit 570 when assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-type speakers that can output sound over a wide frequency band.

The unit body 271 is formed in a shape seen from the front, such that the lower portions near both the left and right ends of a rectangle extending left and right bulge downward. In other words, the unit body 271 is formed in a shape seen from the front, such that a rectangle extending left and right is cut out with a trapezoid that narrows upward from the lower end side. The unit body 271 is formed in a shape seen from the front, such that the shape seen from the front combines a rectangle extending left and right, a trapezoid that protrudes forward with a base that is about 1/2 the total width (length in the left and right direction) centered on the left and right center of the front edge of the rectangle, and a rectangle that protrudes forward a short distance with the front edge of the trapezoid as the long side. Therefore, both sides of the part that protrudes forward at the left and right center on the front surface of the unit body 271 are located behind (recessed) the line connecting the left and right ends of the unit body 271 and the left and right ends of the front end of the part that protrudes forward.

The unit body 271 has openings 574a that penetrate from the front to the rear in a region extending from both the left and right ends of the front surface to a position outside the region protruding forward. In addition, the unit body 271 has a plurality of slits 574b that extend left and right at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front and rear direction in a region extending diagonally from the region protruding forward in a trapezoidal shape on the front surface. The plurality of slits 574b extend left and right from near the front end of the region that extends diagonally forward on the front surface of the unit body 271 to near the opening 574a. The plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center in the left and right direction of the unit body 271, three on each side, spaced apart vertically.

The unit body 271 also has an upper opening 574c cut into a square shape from the rear end to the front in the center of the left-right direction on the top surface, and a lower opening 574d cut into the bottom surface from the rear end to the front in the left-right direction. The upper opening 574c of the unit body 271 is closed by an upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by a lower cover 592.

The unit body 271 also has a top left decorative part 574e and a top right decorative part 574f that extend vertically on both the left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative part 574e is formed at approximately the same position in the front-to-back direction as the front surface of the area where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative part 574f is formed so that its front surface is located further forward than the front surface of the area where the opening 574a is formed. This unit body 271 is formed from an opaque material.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion that protrudes forward from the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a shape that, when viewed from the front, combines a roughly square irregular pentagon bent so that the center in the left-right direction of the bottom side is located downward, and a roughly right-angled triangle that connects the tips of the sides that extend outward in the left-right direction from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the irregular pentagon to the lower ends of the left and right sides of the irregular pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined so that the irregular pentagonal portion on the front surface moves backward as it moves downward. This top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape overall and is translucent.

The door frame top middle decorative board 577 is attached to the rear of the top middle decorative member 576 in a tilted state, with its front surface aligned with the front surface of the irregular pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576, and moving rearward as it moves downward. The door frame top middle decorative board 577 has multiple LEDs mounted on its front surface, and by illuminating these LEDs, the top middle decorative member 576 can be illuminated and decorated.

The light guide member 578 is made of a transparent material. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape that conforms to the shape of both the left and right outer sides of the front end of the portion protruding forward on the front surface of the unit body 271. If the side closer to both left and right ends of the unit body 271 is the end side, and the side closer to the center is the center side, the light guide member 578 is composed of a straight portion 578a that extends straight from the end side to the center side, and an arc portion 578b that extends in an arc shape with a large radius so as to move forward as it moves from the end side of the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the up-down direction in the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the height in the up-down direction in the arc portion 578b. In addition, the light guide member 578 is formed so that the height in the up-down direction is constant in the straight portion 578a, and the height in the up-down direction in the arc portion 578b decreases as it moves toward the center side. When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately in front of the opening 574a of the unit body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit body 271 from the front.

The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection section 578c consisting of sawtooth projections and recesses formed on the rear surface of the straight section 578a, and a diffuse input section 578d consisting of multiple projections and recesses formed on the rear surface of the arc section 578b.

When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the outer ends in the left and right directions face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 or the door frame top right decorative board 584, and the diffusion input portion 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 or the door frame top right decorative board 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from the outer ends in the left and right directions, the light travels toward the center inside the straight portion 578a and is sequentially reflected forward from the end side by the diffusion reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and the light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed in front of the light-guiding member 578, and the portion of each of these in front of the straight portion 578a is illuminated and decorated.

When light from the LEDs 586a, 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is incident on the light guide member 578 through the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b, the light is diffused widely into the arc portion 578b due to the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. This allows the area located in front of the arc portion 578b on the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 to be illuminated and decorated.

In this way, the light-guiding member 578 guides the light from the LEDs 583a, 586a on the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, or the LEDs 584a, 587a on the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587, allowing the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 located in front to be illuminated and decorated in a good (uniform) state.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guiding members 578 located to the left of the center in the left-right direction on the front of the unit body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens sections 579a that accommodate the three light guiding members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens section 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape that imitates the light guiding member 578, and covers the front and both the upper and lower sides of the light guiding member 578. The front of each decorative lens section 579a has a row of rectangular pyramidal projections protruding forward on the left and right.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 271. In other words, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates almost the entire area to the left of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. This top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 583a, 586a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 via the three light-guiding members 578.

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guiding members 578 located to the right of the center in the left-right direction on the front of the unit body 271. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens sections 580a that accommodate the three light guiding members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens section 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape that imitates the light guiding member 578, and covers the front and both the upper and lower sides of the light guiding member 578. The front of each decorative lens section 580a has a row of rectangular pyramidal projections protruding forward on the left and right.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative part 574f of the unit body 271. In other words, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates almost the entire area to the right of the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570. This top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a, 587a of the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 via the three light-guiding members 578.

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front of the unit body 271, between the left opening 574a on the front side of the unit body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576, from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579. When assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the top middle left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the gap between the three decorative lens parts 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579, with the center of the front surface protruding further forward than the front surface of the top left decorative lens member 579. This top middle left decorative member 581 is formed from an opaque material.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580, between the right opening 574a on the front side of the unit body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens parts 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front side protrudes forward further than the front side of the top right decorative lens member 580. This top middle right decorative member 582 is formed from an opaque member.

The door frame top left decorative board 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative part 574e) inside the unit body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing rightward. The door frame top left decorative board 583 has the LED 583a mounted in a position facing the left end face of the three light-guiding members 578 attached to the front side to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 (see Figure 59). Each of the three LEDs 583a can be made to emit light independently. The LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 can illuminate and decorate the part of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the opening 574a on the left side of the unit body 271 through the straight parts 578a of the three light-guiding members 578.

The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative part 574f) inside the unit body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing leftward. The door frame top right decorative board 584 has the LED 584a mounted in a position facing the right end face of the three light-guiding members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 (see Figure 59). Each of the three LEDs 584a can be made to emit light independently. The LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative board 584 can illuminate and decorate the part of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the opening 574a on the right side of the unit body 271 through the straight parts 578a of the three light-guiding members 578.

The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion in the unit body 271 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed approximately symmetrically with each other. The substrate base 585 has a side wall that is approximately square in side view with sides extending up and down and front and rear, a rear wall that is rectangular in front view extending from the rear side of the side wall at a right angle to the left and right direction outward, an upper wall that is approximately right-angled triangular in shape connecting the upper sides of the side wall and the rear wall with a line connecting the front end of the upper side of the side wall to the middle of the upper side of the side wall as the hypotenuse, and a lower wall that is approximately right-angled triangular in shape connecting the lower sides of the side wall and the rear wall on the opposite side to the upper wall, and is formed in a triangular prism-like box shape with the upper and lower hypotenuses open. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit body 271 so that the open portion is closed by the unit body 271. This board base 585 is fitted with a door frame top center left decorative board 586 or a door frame top center right decorative board 587 so that the open areas are closed.

The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the board base 585, which is attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 on the left side of the left-right center, so as to close the box-shaped open area from the front. By attaching the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 to the front of the board base 585, the front surface is inclined relative to the plane extending left and right so that it moves forward as it approaches the left-right center of the unit body 271. As a result, when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is approximately parallel to the surface of the area where the three slits 574b are formed to the left of the left-right center of the unit body 271.

The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 has multiple LEDs 586a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit body 271. As a result, when the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the multiple LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b to the left of the center of the unit body 271. By illuminating the multiple LEDs 586a, the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 can illuminate and decorate the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 close to the top middle decorative member 576 through the arc portion 578b of the light-guiding member 578.

The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585, which is attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 on the right side of the left-right center, so as to close the box-shaped open area from the front. By attaching the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 to the front of the board base 585, the front surface is inclined relative to the plane extending left and right so that it moves forward as it approaches the left-right center of the unit body 271. As a result, when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface of the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is approximately parallel to the surface of the area where the three slits 574b are formed to the right of the left-right center of the unit body 271.

The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 has multiple LEDs 587a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit body 271. As a result, when the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the multiple LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b to the right of the center of the unit body 271. By illuminating the multiple LEDs 587a, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 can illuminate and decorate the area of the top right decorative lens member 580 close to the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light-guiding member 578.

The pair of light-shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit body 271. The pair of light-shielding members 588 are formed approximately symmetrically with each other by opaque materials. The light-shielding members 588 separate the upper and lower portions of the multiple LEDs 586a, 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587, which are arranged in a row corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit body 271. This light-shielding member 588 allows light to be guided forward by the light-guiding members 578 only by the LEDs 586a, 587a located immediately behind each light-guiding member 578, and the decorative lens parts 579a, 580a of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be illuminated and decorated well in an independent state.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 relays the connections between the pair of upper speakers 573, the door frame top middle decorative board 577, the door frame top left decorative board 583, the door frame top right decorative board 584, the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of this door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered by a relay board cover 590.

This door frame top unit 570 is equipped with a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward from the center in the left-right direction, and the front sides of the top middle decorative member 576 on both the left and right sides are curved as if carved out backwards, giving the player the illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes significantly forward, strongly drawing the player's attention to this pachinko machine 1.

The door frame top unit 570 also has a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 located in the center, and are formed to extend from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 to the top left decorative portion 574e and the top right decorative portion 574f formed on both the left and right ends of the unit body 271. This allows the door frame top unit 570 to decorate the entire upper front surface of the door frame 3.

In this case, the door frame top unit 570 is provided with upper speakers 573 whose front faces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal, located behind each of the left and right ends where the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are located, and the speaker covers 575 face forward from between the three decorative lens parts 579a, 580a spaced apart above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, allowing the player to hear the sounds output from the left and right upper speakers 573 in good condition and enjoy high-quality stereo sound.

The door frame top unit 570 can also guide light from the door frame top left decorative board 583, the door frame top right decorative board 584, the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 through a plurality of light-guiding members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, allowing the entire front of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 to be illuminated and decorated satisfactorily. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can illuminate and decorate the entire front of the upper part of the door frame 3, including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Function and effect of door frame]
The effect of the door frame 3 will be described. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the through hole 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 is larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than in conventional pachinko machines, and the vertical height of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 is reduced in accordance with the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the horizontal width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 is reduced. As a result, the front of the game board 5 (play area 5a) attached to the main frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190), and this corresponds to the game board 5 with a wide play area 5a.

The door frame 3 is provided with a performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the left-right center of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward below the through hole 111, and the front (front of the dish front lower decorative part 326c) of the lower half (part below the upper dish 321) on both the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 400 is formed in a concave shape that is carved out backwards (a concave curved shape so that the front of both the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 400 are located further back than the straight line connecting the front ends of both the left and right ends of the dish unit 320 and the front ends of both the left and right ends of the performance operation unit 400). As a result, the performance operation unit 400 attached to the front of the left and right center of the dish unit 320 appears to protrude forward, so that the performance operation unit 400 can be made to stand out and be emphasized to the player, and the performance operation unit 400 can be strongly drawn attention to it.

The door frame 3 is attached with the performance operation unit 400, which is located on the front side of the tray unit 320 below the through hole 111, tilted so that the large, semi-spherical, transparent operation button 410 faces diagonally upwards and forward. Therefore, when a player sits in front of this pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face). When the player lowers his or her eyes to look at the performance operation unit 400, the operation button 410 appears almost directly ahead, allowing the large, round operation button 410 to be strongly visible, heightening anticipation for the performance using the operation button 410. At the same time, the performance image displayed on the door frame side performance display device 460, which is located inside the transparent operation button 410, can be clearly seen, allowing the player to fully enjoy the performance image.

The door frame 3 is also provided with a large operation button 410 that bulges forward in a round shape and has a diameter roughly the same as the overall height of the plate unit 320, so that when operating the operation button 410, any part of the operation button 410 can be touched by moving the hand a short distance, making it relatively easy to "quickly press" the operation button 410. In addition, the large-diameter operation button 410 that bulges forward in a round shape is attached in an inclined state, so not only can it be pressed from above like the operation buttons of conventional pachinko machines, but it can also be easily operated from the left, right, or front, and the easy-to-operate operation button 410 makes the performance using the operation button 410 even more enjoyable.

The door frame 3 also has the effect of attaching the operation unit 400 in a suspended state using the tray unit 320, and is equipped with a vibration motor 424 that generates vibrations at the bottom of the operation unit 400. When the vibration motor 424 is rotated to generate vibrations according to the game status, strong vibrations can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the top of the operation button 410, surprising the player and making the effect using the operation button 410 even more enjoyable.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 is equipped with a large operation button 410 (performance operation unit 400) that spans the entire height of the tray unit 320 in the center of the front of the tray unit 320, making the lower tray 322 located below the upper tray 321 less noticeable compared to conventional pachinko machines, making it easier for players who are accustomed to conventional pachinko machines to recognize that it is clearly different, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing and strongly attracts the interest of players.

In addition, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower dish 322 wraps around the rear of the performance operation unit 400 with respect to the lower dish opening 326d that opens to the left of the performance operation unit 400 on the front of the dish unit 320. This allows the volume of the lower dish 322 to be large relative to the size of the lower dish opening 326d, and ensures a sufficient number of game balls can be stored in the lower dish 322. In addition, since the rear of the lower dish 322 wraps around the rear of the performance operation unit 400, when a player puts his/her left hand inside the lower dish 322 or places his/her fingers on the lower dish opening 326d, it is difficult for the player's fingertips to touch the rear wall of the lower dish 322, making it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, suppressing a decrease in interest in the game, and allowing the player to recognize by touch that the volume of the lower dish 322 is larger than the size of the lower dish opening 326d.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball supply port 323c, through which game balls from the upper tray 321 are released into the lower tray 322, and a lower tray ball removal hole 322a, through which game balls on the lower tray 322 are removed into a money box or the like below the tray unit 320, arranged in a straight line from front to back, and are located on the outer right side of the lower tray opening 326d when viewed from the front (to the right of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the performance operation unit 400). In other words, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are located at the rear of the performance operation unit 400, the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a (the outer right side of the lower tray opening 326d) on the tray unit cover 326, the front end side of the lower tray cover 340, etc., so that the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are not visible from the player side, which makes the appearance of the tray unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) neater and improves the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the door frame 3 has the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a located below (directly in front of) the lower tray ball supply port 323c in the lower tray 322. Therefore, when the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is opened, the game balls released from the upper tray 321, etc. to the lower tray 322 are immediately ejected from the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a to the dollar box, etc. below as soon as they enter the lower tray 322. At this time, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a are not visible from the player's side, so the flow of game balls ejected from the upper tray 321, etc. through the lower tray 322 to the dollar box cannot be seen. This gives the player the illusion that the game balls in the upper tray 321 or the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 when the upper tray 321 is full are being discharged directly into the coin box, making it less annoying for the game balls to pass through the lower tray 322, allowing the player to concentrate on the game (the operation of shooting the game balls, the presentation images, etc.) and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball removal hole 322a located in a position on the lower tray 322, forward and to the left of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, and the raised wall portion of the lower tray 322 to the right of the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is curved diagonally toward the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, so that game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be directly guided to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, or indirectly guided to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a by being reflected off the right wall portion. As a result, when the lower tray ball removal hole 322a remains open, game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a without entering the area to the left of the lower tray ball removal hole 322a in the lower tray 322 (lower tray first area A1). This means that the game balls can be discharged below the lower tray 322 (to the cash box) without the player being able to see the game balls circulating inside the lower tray 322, achieving the same effect as described above.

The door frame 3 also has a lower dish opening 326d of the dish unit cover 326, through which the lower dish 322 faces forward, between the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a (performance operation unit 400) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if a player places his/her hand on the lower dish opening 326d or places his/her hand in the lower dish 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. Therefore, the sound from the lower speaker 921 in the board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 can be output forward well, allowing the player to enjoy the sound from this pachinko machine 1. In addition, when a player places his/her hand in or approaches the lower dish 322, the player can tactilely feel the vibrations caused by the deep bass sound from the lower speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker port 326e, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

The door frame 3 is also equipped with a door frame right side unit 550 that protrudes forward in a plate-like shape from the right side of the through hole 111. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility in an amusement hall, the door frame right side unit 550 acts as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, giving players playing with the pachinko machine 1 the illusion that they are playing in a private room, allowing them to play in a relaxed atmosphere without having to worry about other players around them.

Furthermore, the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which is plate-like and protrudes significantly forward, can be decorated with illuminating light, so that even if you are not located in front of this pachinko machine 1 in an amusement hall where pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, the presence of this pachinko machine 1 can be made known from a distance, such as from the side along the island equipment, making it possible to make this pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players.

The door frame 3 is provided with a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward in the left-right center in the door frame top unit 570 above the through hole 111, and the front left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are formed in a concave shape that carves out the front rearward (a concave curved shape such that the front left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 are positioned further rearward than the straight line connecting the front ends of both the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of both the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576). This makes it appear as if only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 protrudes forward significantly, making the top middle decorative member 576 stand out and emphasized to the player, drawing strong attention to the top middle decorative member 576.

In the conventional pachinko machine, the upper part of the door frame is provided with a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other on the left and right, and the two upper speakers stand out. In contrast, the door frame 3 of this embodiment is provided with a pair of upper speakers 573 whose front faces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal on both left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111, and also with a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that extend from both left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576, passing in front of the speaker covers 575, to both left and right ends, so that the entire front of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be illuminated and decorated. This allows the entire upper front surface of the door frame 3 to be decorated, making the pair of upper speakers 573 less noticeable at the top of the door frame 3, and allowing players to immediately recognize that the decoration is clearly different from that of conventional pachinko machines, making the pachinko machine 1 more appealing to players, and allowing players to enjoy high-quality stereo sound from the pair of upper speakers 573.

In this way, the door frame 3 of this embodiment has the performance operation unit 400 attached to the tray unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 each protruding significantly forward at the center in the left-right direction below and above the through hole 111, allowing the player to see a unified decoration from top to bottom with a prominent imaginary line passing through the center in the left-right direction, and the sophisticated decoration makes the machine stand out more than other pachinko machines, making it a highly appealing pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the door frame 3 has the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 and the performance operation unit 400, which are arranged vertically in the center in the left-right direction, protruding forward. Therefore, when the top middle decorative member 576 and the performance operation unit 400 are illuminated, the player can see an illuminated line extending vertically in the center in the left-right direction on the front of the door frame 3, and the player's gaze can be guided to the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400, which is arranged in the center in the left-right direction.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall structure of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to Figs. 60 to 66. Fig. 60 is a front view of the game board. Fig. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Fig. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components as seen from the back. Fig. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, Fig. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of Fig. 63 disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Fig. 65 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of Fig. 63 disassembled into its main components as seen from the back. Fig. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing the function display unit in an enlarged view from the front when the game board is attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which game balls are shot by the player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. The game board 5 also includes a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100, and a main control unit 1300 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and has a main control board 1310 that controls the game content that is played by shooting game balls into the game area 5a. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

The game board 5 further includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, a peripheral control unit 1500 that is attached to the rear of the game panel 1100, a game board side performance display device 1600 that is located in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and can display a predetermined performance image, a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front of the game panel 1100, and a rear unit 3000 that is attached to the rear of the game panel 1100. The game board side performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear of the rear unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear of the game board side performance display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 is equipped with a transparent, flat panel plate 1110 whose outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110, is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and has a rear unit 3000 attached to its rear surface.

The front unit 2000 is equipped with a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open to receive game balls that have been shot into the game area 5a, a first starting opening 2002 that is always open to receive game balls at a different position in the game area 5a from the plurality of general winning openings 2001, a gate unit 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of game balls, a second starting opening 2004 that can receive game balls depending on the result of a normal lottery that is drawn when a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, and a special winning opening 2005 that can receive game balls depending on the result of a first special lottery or a second special lottery that is drawn when a game ball is received at the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004.

The front unit 2000 also includes a start port unit 2100 that is attached directly above the outlet 1126 in the left-right center of the play area 5a and has a first start port 2002 and a large prize port 2005, a lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the start port unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has multiple general prize ports 2001, an upper side unit 2300 that is attached to the upper left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front, and a frame-shaped center device 2500 that is attached approximately in the center of the play area 5a and has a gate portion 2003 and a second start port 2004.

The rear unit 3000 is equipped with a rear box 3010, which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a locking mechanism 3020, which is attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 and allows the game board side performance display device 1600 to be detachably attached.

The rear unit 3000 further includes a rear left middle decorative unit 3050 attached to the front end of the rear box 3010, from the center to the top on the left side when viewed from the front, a rear lower rear movable performance unit 3100 attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 below the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010, a rear upper left movable performance unit 3200 attached to the left side when viewed from the front above the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010, a rear left movable performance unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a when viewed from the front inside the rear box 3010, a rear upper middle movable performance unit 3400 attached from the center to the right edge when viewed from the front above the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010, and a rear lower front movable performance unit 3500 attached in front of the rear lower rear movable performance unit 3100 below the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010.

[5-1. Previous constituent members]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 64 and 65. The front component 1000 has an outer shape of a substantially square in front view, an inner shape of a substantially circular shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape defines the outer circumference of the play area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end on the left side of the center in the front view to the upper right diagonal direction in the clockwise circumferential direction, passing the upper end of the center in the front view to the upper right diagonal direction, an inner rail 1002 that is disposed inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the front view to the upper left diagonal direction in the front view, and an out guide portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the play area 5a on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in the front view and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

The component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that slopes linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 when viewed from the front to near the right side of the component 1000, with the right end being slightly higher; a right rail 1005 that extends from the right end of the lower right rail 1004 along the right side of the component 1000 to below the upper end of the outer rail 1001, with the upper part curved inward of the component 1000; and a collision stop section 1006 that connects the upper end of the right rail 1005 to the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and comes into contact with a game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

The component 1000 is also provided with a backflow prevention member 1007 that is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and can rotate only between a closed position in which it extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 to close the gap with the outer rail 1001, and an open position in which it rotates clockwise when viewed from the front to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position.

Furthermore, the component 1000 has security recesses 1008 recessed rearward from the front end at the outside of the areas extending approximately vertically from the lower ends of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, the underside of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed against the main body frame 4, the security recesses 1008 are inserted into the rear protruding pieces 202 of the security cover 200 on the door frame 3. As a result, the area between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is bent in a complex manner by the rear protrusion 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, so even if someone tries to insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire into the game area 5a between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the game board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008, preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

The front component 1000 also has multiple positioning protrusions 1009 that protrude rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. These positioning protrusions 1009 can be inserted into inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 to position and fix the inner rail 1002 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 has a number of mounting bosses 1010 protruding rearward from the rear surface. The mounting bosses 1010 can be inserted into mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the gaming panel 1100 to determine the position relative to the panel holder 1120 (gaming panel 1100).

The component 1000 also has a notch 1011 cut upward from the bottom end at the bottom left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full ball guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860 pass through these notches 1011 and 1127 and face forward.

[5-2. Game Panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 61, 62, 64, 65, etc. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel board 1110 made of transparent synthetic resin and having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110 and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and has a rear unit 3000 attached to its rear surface.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed from a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is set to the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that is sufficient to hold obstacle nails planted on the front and the front unit 2000 attached. In this example, the panel plate 1110 is formed from a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel board 1110 has an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the bottom end at the lowest point within the play area 5a. The panel board 1110 also has multiple openings 1112 that penetrate from front to back and are used to attach the front unit 2000.

The panel plate 1110 also has a number of fitting holes 1113, which are round holes that are arranged near the outer periphery and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 1114 that is arranged near the outer periphery in the lower left corner and penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the up-down direction. These fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 are arranged outside the play area 5a and are used to position the panel plate 1110 with respect to the panel holder 1120. The panel plate 1110 also has step-shaped engagement steps 1115 with a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and lower side. These engagement steps 1115 are cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the play area 5a, just like the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114, to engage and fix the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

The panel plate 1110 also has multiple inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed in a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusions 1009 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing holes 1116.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has an external shape that is roughly rectangular and large enough to encompass the panel board 1110, and is thicker than the panel board 1110 (approximately 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of synthetic resin (e.g., thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 has a holding step 1121 that detachably holds the panel board 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a through hole 1122 that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction inside the holding step 1121 and is roughly the same size as the game area 5a.

The holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120 has a depth from the front surface that is approximately the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110, so that the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step 1121 is approximately flush with the front surface of the panel holder 1120. The holding step 1121 is also sized so that its front inner peripheral surface forms a predetermined amount of clearance with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. This clearance allows the panel plate 1110 to absorb any expansion or contraction that occurs relative to the panel plate 1110 due to temperature changes or changes over time.

The panel holder 1120 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step 1121, extends forward from the front surface of the holding step 1121, and has a number of protruding pins 1123 that can be fitted into and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into and into the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engagement claw 1124 and an engagement piece 1125 that engage with the engagement step 1115 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. In detail, the engagement claw 1124 is disposed at the top of the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110, protrudes forward from the front surface of the holding step 1121, and elastically engages with the engagement step 1115. The engagement claw 1124 is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

The engagement piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is disposed at the bottom of the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, and corresponds to the lower engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. This engagement piece 1125 extends a predetermined distance upward (towards the center) along the front surface of the panel holder 1120, with a gap formed between the front surface of the holding step 1121 and the engagement piece 1125 large enough to insert the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. By engaging the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with these engagement claws 1124 and engagement piece 1125, the panel plate 1110 is removably held relative to the panel holder 1120.

The panel holder 1120 also has an outlet 1126 that penetrates from front to back at the lowest point within the play area 5a. The lower rear surface of the panel holder 1120 is recessed forward to the bottom end with the same width as the outlet 1126.

The panel holder 1120 further includes a notch 1127 that is cut upward from the bottom end at the bottom left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1127 coincides with the notch 1011 of the previous component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860 pass through these notches 1011 and 1127 and face forward.

The panel holder 1120 also has a number of mounting holes 1128 that penetrate from front to back at positions corresponding to the multiple mounting bosses 1010 on the previous component 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the previous component 1000 into these multiple mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be attached to the rear side of the previous component 1000, and the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned between the previous component 1000.

The panel holder 1120 also has a square insertion hole 1129 that penetrates in the front-rear direction above the cutout 1127. The rear end of the functional display unit 1400 is inserted into this insertion hole 1129.

When the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the previous component 1000, the outlet 1126 of the panel holder 1120 opens to the rear side of the out-guide section 1003 of the previous component 1000. As a result, gaming balls that flow down to the bottom end of the gaming area 5a are guided by the out-guide section 1003 to the rear outlet 1126, and are discharged through the outlet 1126 to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100.

[5-2a. Second embodiment of the gaming panel]
Next, a game panel 1150 of an embodiment different from the game panel 1100 described above will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 67 and 68. Fig. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel of a different form from that shown in Fig. 63, together with a front component, a board holder, and a main control unit. Fig. 68 is an exploded perspective view of Fig. 67, seen from the rear. This game panel 1150 is formed of a wood board material such as plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). This game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 described above.

The gaming panel 1150 has an outer shape that is approximately the same as the outer shape of the previous component 1000. The gaming panel 1150 has an outlet 1151 that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction at a position that corresponds to the out guide portion 1003 of the previous component 1000 at the lower portion approximately in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower rear side of the outlet 1151 of the gaming panel 1150 is recessed forward to the bottom end with the same width as the outlet 1151.

The game panel 1150 also has a notch 1152 that penetrates horizontally in the front-to-back direction on the left side of the lower end when viewed from the front and is open downward and has the same shape as the notch 1011 of the previous component 1000, and a square insertion hole 1153 that penetrates in the vertical direction above the notch 1152 and through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

The gaming panel 1150 also has a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1154 penetrating from the front to the rear, into which the positioning protrusions 1009 can be fitted, at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 protruding rearward from the inner rail 1002 of the previous component 1000. The gaming panel 1150 also has a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating from the front to the rear, at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 of the previous component 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the previous component 1000 into these mounting holes 1155, the gaming panel 1150 can be attached to the rear side of the previous component 1000, and the gaming panel 1150 can be positioned between the previous component 1000.

Furthermore, although not shown, the gaming panel 1150 is provided with multiple openings that run through it from front to back for mounting the front unit 2000, similar to the openings 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the gaming panel 1100 described above.

When the game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the previous component 1000, the outlet 1151 opens to the rear side of the out guide section 1003 of the previous component 1000. As a result, game balls that flow down to the bottom end of the game area 5a are guided by the out guide section 1003 to the rear outlet 1151, and are discharged through the outlet 1151 to the rear side of the game panel 1150.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the board holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 64 and 65. The board holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top and front open, and the bottom surface is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. When assembled to the game board 5, this board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the bottom side. This allows the board holder 1200 to receive all game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the outlet 1126 and game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and to discharge them downward from the discharge part 1201 formed on the bottom surface.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 64 to 65. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. This main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls the game content and the payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200.

The main control board box 1320 is equipped with multiple sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism must be destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320, and traces of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be discovered, and the deterrent effect against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board box 1320 and the various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, 3042 are all made of transparent materials so that they can be visually inspected from the outside. As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 are provided with surface mounting areas that are inferior in terms of fraud prevention performance, and therefore it is important to ensure such transparency in order to obtain the various effects related to the fraud prevention measures described below.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to Fig. 64 to Fig. 66. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the play area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be seen from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 when the play board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see Fig. 66). This function display unit 1400 uses multiple LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game status (game situation), normal lottery results, special lottery results, etc.

As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 comprises a status indicator 1401 consisting of one LED for displaying the game status, a normal pattern indicator 1402 consisting of four LEDs for displaying the normal lottery result drawn when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, a normal hold indicator 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball through the gate unit 2003, a first special pattern indicator 1403 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result drawn when the game ball is accepted into the first starting port 2002, and a second special pattern indicator 1404 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result drawn when the game ball is accepted into the first starting port 2002. It mainly comprises a first special reserved number display 1404 consisting of two LEDs that displays the reserved number; a second special pattern display 1405 consisting of eight LEDs that displays the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of game balls into the second starting port 2004; a second special reserved number display 1406 consisting of two LEDs that displays the reserved number related to the reception of game balls into the second starting port 2004; and a round display 1407 consisting of three LEDs that displays the number of times (number of rounds) the opening and closing pattern of the big winning port 2005 is repeated when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "jackpot" or the like.

This functional display unit 1400 can display the number of reserved items, designs, etc., by turning on, off, blinking, etc. the LEDs provided as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to Fig. 62. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side performance display device 1600, which is attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls the performance presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Although not shown in the figure, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling light emission performance, sound performance, moving performance, etc., and a performance display control unit for controlling performance images.

[5-7. Game board side performance display device]
Next, the game board side performance display device 1600 will be described with reference to Figs. 61 and 62. The game board side performance display device 1600 is disposed in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. In detail, the game board side performance display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the approximate center of the rear wall of the rear box 3010. This game board side performance display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500 when the game board 5 is assembled. This game board side performance display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and videos.

The game board side performance display device 1600 has two left fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side as viewed from the front, and a right fixed piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side as viewed from the front. With the LCD screen facing forward, the game board side performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear box 3010 by inserting the two left fixed pieces 1601 from the diagonal rear of the rear box 3010 into two fixed grooves 3010c opening on the left inner peripheral surface as viewed from the front in the frame-shaped LCD mounting part 3010b of the rear box 3010 described later, and then moving the right fixed piece 1602 side forward to insert the right fixed piece 1602 into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020 and sliding the locking mechanism 3020 downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
Next, the front unit 2000 will be described with reference to Figures 60 to 62. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, with the front end protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and the rear end penetrating the opening 1112 and protruding rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The front unit 2000 of this embodiment is equipped with a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can receive game balls shot into the game area 5a, a first starting opening 2002 that is always open and can receive game balls at a different position in the game area 5a from the plurality of general winning openings 2001, a gate unit 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, a second starting opening 2004 that can receive the game ball depending on the normal lottery result that is drawn when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, and a large winning opening 2005 that can receive the game ball depending on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn when the game ball is received at the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004.

Multiple general winning openings 2001 are located at the bottom of the play area 5a. The first starting opening 2002 is located directly above the outlet 1126 in the left-right center of the play area 5a. The gate section 2003 is located in the upper right corner of the play area 5a when viewed from the front, and approximately directly below the collision stop section 1006. The second starting opening 2004 is located directly below the gate section 2003 and to the right when viewed from the front. The large winning opening 2005 is located between the first starting opening 2002 and the outlet 1126.

The front unit 2000 also includes a start port unit 2100 that is attached directly above the outlet 1126 in the left-right center of the play area 5a and has a first start port 2002 and a large prize port 2005, a lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the start port unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has multiple general prize ports 2001, an upper side unit 2300 that is attached to the upper left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front, and a frame-shaped center device 2500 that is attached approximately in the center of the play area 5a and has a gate portion 2003 and a second start port 2004.

The starting port unit 2100 is located directly above the outlet 1126 near the bottom end of the left-right center in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. This starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 that opens upward and is large enough to accept only one game ball at a time, and a large winning port 2005 that extends left and right and is large enough to accept multiple game balls at a time (e.g., 4 to 6 balls), and is formed so that it can be opened and closed depending on the game status.

The lower side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting hole unit 2100 within the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has multiple general winning holes 2001 that can always receive game balls.

The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front, slightly below the vertical center, at the upper left of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front, within the play area 5a. When the upper side unit 2300 is attached to the front of the panel board 1110, the left end of the shelf portion is close to the inner rail 1002, and game balls that flow down along the inner rail 1002 can be guided to the right (the left-right center of the play area 5a).

The center role 2500 is located in the game area 5a, above the starting opening unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200, and slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The center role 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and through the frame, the game board side performance display device 1600 located behind the game panel 1100 and the performance units provided in the back unit 3000 can be seen from the front. The center role 2500 has a gate section 2003 and a second starting opening 2004.

The entire circumference of the frame-shaped center device 2500, except for the bottom edge, protrudes forward beyond the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, so that a game ball shot into the game area 5a cannot enter the frame.

The center device 2500 is provided with a warp entrance 2520 on the outer periphery on the left side when viewed from the front, which opens to allow game balls in the game area 5a to enter, a warp exit 2522 which opens into the frame and allows game balls that have entered the warp entrance 2520 to be released, and a stage 2530 which releases game balls released from the warp exit 2522 into the game area 5a after rolling them left and right. A start opening unit 2100 is located directly below the stage 2530, and when a game ball is released downward from the center of the stage 2530, there is an extremely high probability that the game ball will be received by the first start opening 2002.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the rear unit 3000 of the game board 5 will be described with reference to Figures 60 to 62. The rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. In addition, the game board side performance display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the rear unit 3000.

The rear unit 3000 comprises a rear box 3010, which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a box-shaped performance drive board box 3042, which is attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending left and right along the bottom edge of the opening 3010a and which houses the performance drive board.

The rear unit 3000 also includes a rear left center decorative unit 3050 attached to the front end of the rear box 3010, from the center to the top on the left side when viewed from the front, a rear lower rear movable performance unit 3100 attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 below the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010, a rear upper left movable performance unit 3200 attached to the left side when viewed from the front above the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010, a rear left movable performance unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a when viewed from the front inside the rear box 3010, a rear upper middle movable performance unit 3400 attached from the center to the right edge when viewed from the front above the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010, and a rear lower front movable performance unit 3500 attached in front of the rear lower rear movable performance unit 3100 below the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010.

The rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000 is box-shaped with an open front and a rectangular opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall, a flat frame-like LCD mounting section 3010b that protrudes rearward at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010a, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed from the inside to the outside of the frame on the left side of the LCD mounting section 3010b when viewed from the rear, into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side performance display device 1600 is inserted, and a cutout 3010d cut from the rear end to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 in the vertical center of the right side of the LCD mounting section 3010b when viewed from the rear, into which the locking mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010a is formed to be approximately the same size as the display screen of the game board side performance display device 1600. The LCD mounting portion 3010b is formed to be large enough to fit the game board side performance display device 1600 into the frame. The rear box 3010 has a locking mechanism 3020 attached to the left side of the cutout portion 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from behind, so that the locking mechanism 3020 can slide up and down.

The rear box 3010 also has a flat fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. This fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with its front surface abutting against the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The rear box 3010 has bosses and mounting holes formed at appropriate positions for mounting each movable performance unit, etc.

The back unit 3000 can provide light-emitting effects, movement effects, display effects, etc. by appropriately using the back-down rear movable performance unit 3100, the back-upper left movable performance unit 3200, the back-left movable performance unit 3300, the back-upper middle movable performance unit 3400, and the back-down front movable performance unit 3500, etc., and can entertain players with various effects, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

[6. Game Contents]
Next, the game content of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 are shot into the upper part of the game area 5a through the gap between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged in the front right lower corner of the door frame 3, and the game with the game balls is started. The game balls shot into the upper part of the game area 5a flow down either the left side or the right side of the center role 2500 depending on the shooting strength. The shooting strength of the game balls can be adjusted by the rotation amount of the handle 302, and the more it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the balls can be shot, and up to 100 game balls can be shot continuously in one minute, that is, at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, within the game area 5a, multiple obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110). When the game ball hits the obstacle nails, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed and various movements are imparted to the game ball, allowing the player to enjoy its movements. In addition to the obstacle nails, within the game area 5a, there is also a windmill (not shown) at an appropriate position that rotates when the game ball hits it.

When a game ball is shot into the top of the center device 2500 and enters the left side of the highest part of the outer periphery of the center device 2500 when viewed from the front, it will flow down the area to the left of the center device 2500 while abutting multiple obstacle nails (not shown). Then, when the game ball flowing down the area to the left of the center device 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 that opens into the outer periphery of the center device 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp exit 2522.

The game balls supplied to the stage 2530 roll back and forth on the stage 2530 before being released forward. When a game ball is released from the center of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, it is highly likely to be received by the first starting hole 2002, since it is located directly above the first starting hole 2002. When a game ball is received by the first starting hole 2002, a predetermined number (e.g., three) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951.

When a game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from anywhere other than the center, it flows down toward the start opening unit 2100. A game ball released into the game area 5a from the stage 2530 of the center device 2500 may be received by the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100 or an open big prize opening 2005.

If a game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center device 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it may be moved toward the center in the left-right direction by the upper side unit 2300 and accepted into the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002 of the lower side unit 2200. Then, when a game ball is accepted into the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951.

On the other hand, when a game ball is hit into the upper part of the center device 2500 in the game area 5a and enters to the right of the highest part of the outer periphery of the center device 2500 (i.e., hits to the right), the game ball flows down through an area downstream where the gate section 2003 and the second starting hole 2004 are provided.

When the game ball hit to the right passes through the gate section 2003, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and if the result of the normal lottery is a "normal win," the second starting hole 2004 opens for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 to 10 seconds), allowing the game ball to be received by the second starting hole 2004. When the game ball is received by the second starting hole 2004, a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., four balls) are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery, which is conducted when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the indication of the normal lottery result (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also called the normal fluctuation time). This indication of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 opens after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

In addition, if a gaming ball passes through gate unit 2003 between the time the gaming ball passes through gate unit 2003 and the time the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot begin, so the start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is reserved until the previous suggestion of the normal lottery result has ended. In addition, the number of reserved normal lottery results is limited to four, and any more than this are discarded rather than reserved, even if the gaming ball passes through gate unit 2003. This prevents the burden on the gaming hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 draws a special lottery result that will generate a favorable game state (e.g., "big win", "medium win", "small win", "probability-changing win", "time-saving win", etc.) that is favorable to the player. The drawn special lottery result is then suggested to the player over a predetermined time (e.g., 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as the special fluctuation time). The special lottery results drawn when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include "miss", "small win", "2R big win", "5R big win", "15R big win", "probability-changing (probability-changing) win", "time-saving (time-saving) win", "probability-saving time-saving win", "probability-saving time-saving win", "probability-saving time-saving win", and "no time-saving win".

When the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by the reception of game balls into the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 is a special lottery result that generates a favorable game state, the large prize opening 2005 becomes capable of receiving game balls in a predetermined opening and closing pattern after the special variable time has elapsed. When the large prize opening 2005 is in an open state and a game ball is received into the large prize opening 2005, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 or 13 balls) are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. Therefore, when the large prize opening 2005 is capable of receiving game balls, by having the large prize opening 2005 receive game balls, a large number of game balls can be paid out, which can entertain the player.

If the special lottery result is a "small win", the large prize opening 2005 repeats an opening and closing pattern multiple times (e.g., twice) in which it is open for a predetermined short time (e.g., between 0.2 and 0.6 seconds) to receive game balls, and then closes. On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a "big win", when either a predetermined time (e.g., about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the large prize opening 2005 has been open to receive game balls, or a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) have been received by the large prize opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (one opening and closing pattern is called one round) in which it is closed and cannot receive game balls is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, if there is a "2R big win", it repeats two rounds, if there is a "5R big win", it repeats five rounds, if there is a "15R big win", it repeats fifteen rounds, and creates an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, after the jackpot game ends, there are "hits" that change the probability of a special lottery result such as a "jackpot" being drawn ("probability hit"), or that change the display time of the presentation image suggesting the special lottery result ("time-saving hit").

In this embodiment, if game balls are received into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 between the start of the special lottery and the indication of the special lottery result drawn by the reception of game balls into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the indication of the special lottery result cannot be started, so the start of the indication of the special lottery result is suspended until the indication of the special lottery result drawn earlier is completed. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for any more than this, the special lottery result is not reserved but discarded even if game balls are received into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. This prevents the burden on the game hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side performance display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the special lottery result. The function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off multiple LEDs and flashing them for a predetermined period of time, and then suggests the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the game board side performance display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is suggested as a performance image. The performance image suggesting the special lottery result on the game board side performance display device 1600 displays three pattern rows consisting of multiple patterns lined up in the left-right direction, and each pattern row is changed and the pattern rows displayed in a changing manner are displayed in sequence, and each pattern row is displayed in a stopped state so that the patterns of the three pattern rows displayed in a stopped state correspond to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "miss," after the three pattern rows have stopped and each pattern is displayed in a stopped state, a final image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, and a favorable game state (for example, a small win game, a big win game, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result is generated.

The time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) is different from the time indicating the special lottery result on the game board side performance display device 1600 (the time until the pattern row changes and the final image is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying a performance image to suggest the result of the special lottery by the game board side performance display device 1600, depending on the special lottery result, it is possible to appropriately use the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 in the door frame 3, the door frame side performance display device 460, various decorations of the center role 2500, various decorations of the back unit 3000, the back bottom rear movable performance unit 3100, the back top left movable performance unit 3200, the back left movable performance unit 3300, the back top middle movable performance unit 3400, and the back bottom front movable performance unit 3500, etc. to perform light-emitting performance, movable performance, display performance, etc., so that the player can be entertained by various performances and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

[Relationship between this embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in this embodiment corresponds to the door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 in this embodiment corresponds to the main body unit of the present invention, the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of this embodiment corresponds to the window portion of the present invention, the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 in the door frame 3 of this embodiment corresponds to the bulge portion of the present invention, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 in the performance operation unit 400 and the second performance operation unit 400A of this embodiment corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in this embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention.

In addition, the decorative member inside the operation button of the base unit in this embodiment, and the main screen 471 and sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the second performance display device 460A on the door frame side correspond to the second decorative body of the present invention, and the second button decorative part 432g of the decorative member inside the operation button 432 in this embodiment, the peripheral decorative part 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, and the peripheral decorative member 478 correspond to the second decorative part of the present invention.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the LEDs mounted on the operation button left interior decorative board 433, operation button right interior decorative board 434, operation button above interior decorative board 435, and operation button below interior decorative board 436, as well as the LED 477a on the sub-screen decorative board 477, correspond to the light-emitting bodies of the present invention, the door frame side performance display device 460 in this embodiment corresponds to the rear decorative means of the present invention, and the frame unit 415, the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 in this embodiment correspond to the base parts of the present invention.

[8. Characteristic Effects of the Present Embodiment]
In this way, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 (or the second performance operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward in the door frame 3 is viewed from the outside, the player can see a decoration that is full of unprecedented perspective, such as a decoration in which the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432g of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second performance display device 460A, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) overlap, and a decoration in which the first button decorative portion 411a and the door frame side performance display device 460 overlap, etc., and therefore it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing and capable of differentiating itself from other pachinko machines.

In addition, the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A (screen unit 470)) and the door frame side performance display device 460, etc. are arranged in the direction of movement of the button lens 411 (operation button 410), and the unit base 431 (unit base 451) supports the button lens 411 so that it can be moved by the player's operation. Therefore, when the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move it, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) move closer to or farther away from each other, and the first button decorative portion By changing the distance between 411a and the second button interior decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), it is possible to change the perspective of the decoration in which the first button decoration 411a and the second button interior decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) appear to overlap, and the player can change the decoration (intersection pattern) of the first button decoration 411a and the second button interior decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) by himself, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward on the opposite side to the operation button interior decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A), a space is formed between the first decorative body and the second decorative body. Therefore, when viewed from the player, the distance between the first button decorative part 411a of the button lens 411 and the second button interior decorative part 432g of the operation button interior decorative member 432 (or the peripheral decorative part 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member This makes the distance to the first button decoration 411a and the second button interior decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, sub-screen decoration member 476, peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) more different, and even when the button lens 411 is not being moved by operation, when the player's eye position moves, the intersection (degree of overlap) between the first button decoration 411a and the second button interior decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, sub-screen decoration member 476, peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) changes, allowing the player to see a moving decoration, which strongly attracts the player's attention.

Furthermore, the outer periphery of the transparent button lens 411 is provided with a first button decoration part 411a having a radial decoration toward the center, so that the rear operation button internal decoration part 432 (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A) and the door frame side performance display device 460 can be clearly seen through the center side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration part 411a is not provided, and the radial decoration of the first button decoration part 411a can direct the player's gaze toward the center of the button lens 411, so that the player's attention can be strongly directed to the operation button internal decoration part 432 (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A) and the door frame side performance display device 460 through the center of the transparent button lens 411.

In addition, the operation button interior decorative member 432 is equipped with a second button interior decorative portion 432g having multiple polygonal decorations in a concentric circle centered at the center, so that when viewed from the outside, the decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the decoration of the second button interior decorative portion 432g of the operation button interior decorative member 432 intersect with each other, ensuring a sense of perspective for the decorations of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decorative portion 432g, and making the decorations of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decorative portion 432g stand out, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, the decoration of the second button interior decorative portion 432g of the operation button interior decorative member 432 has multiple polygonal decorations in a concentric circle centered on the center, so that the decoration of the second button interior decorative portion 432g can direct the player's gaze and attention to the door frame side performance display device 460 that can be seen in the center of the operation button interior decorative member 432, allowing the player to enjoy the decoration (performance image) of the door frame side performance display device.

Furthermore, when each LED mounted on the left operation button inner decorative board 433, the right operation button inner decorative board 434, the upper operation button inner decorative board 435, and the lower operation button inner decorative board 436 (or the LED 477a of the sub-screen decorative board 477) is illuminated, the light can be used to illuminate and decorate the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the sub-screen decorative member 476), and further, the button lens 411 can also be illuminated and decorated, so that in addition to the decoration of the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476), the player can be entertained by the illuminated decoration. At this time, the second button interior decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) can diffuse the light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the left operation button interior decoration board 433, the right operation button interior decoration board 434, the upper operation button interior decoration board 435, and the lower operation button interior decoration board 436. Therefore, the second button interior decoration part 432g is illuminated and decorated by direct light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the left operation button interior decoration board 433, the right operation button interior decoration board 434, the upper operation button interior decoration board 435, and the lower operation button interior decoration board 436, whereas the first button decoration part 411a is illuminated and decorated by direct light from the second button interior decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476). The second button decorative part 432g (sub-screen decorative member 476) is illuminated and decorated with indirect light diffused by the light source, and the first button decorative part 411a is illuminated and decorated with a weak light, so that when the LEDs (or LEDs 477a) of the left operation button decorative board 433, the right operation button decorative board 434, the upper operation button decorative board 435, and the lower operation button decorative board 436 are illuminated, when the first button decorative part 411a and the second button decorative part 432g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) are viewed from the outside, the player can see decorations with a more emphasized sense of perspective, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 with a strong appeal that strongly attracts the player's interest.

In addition, since the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A) is arranged in the direction in which the button lens 411 moves, there is no need to secure space for the button lens 411 to move in the area outside the outer circumference of the button lens 411 or the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A), and it is possible to expand the button lens 411 or the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A) outward and make it as large as possible, and by making it larger, the button lens 411 or the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be made more noticeable. Also, as described above, since there is no need to secure space outside the button lens 411 to move it, by arranging the frame unit 415 in the area outside the button lens 411, the decorativeness of the entire pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look good and have a high appeal that strongly attracts the interest of players.

In addition, because the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, when a player strikes the button lens 411 or applies impact to part of its surface, the applied impact force is more likely to be dispersed over the entire button lens 411 than if the button lens 411 had a flat shape, making the button lens 411 less likely to break (be damaged). Therefore, damage to the button lens 411 during play can be prevented, which can cause the game to be interrupted and can lead to frustration for some players and a loss of interest, and because the button lens 411 is less likely to be damaged, an increase in the burden on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the door frame 3 that allows the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 arranged in the main frame 4 to be viewed from the front through the through hole 111, the operation button 410, which is a circular shape of about 15 cm in outer diameter within the range of 10 cm to 30 cm and can be moved (advanced and retreated) by the player, and the transparent button lens of the operation button 410 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) attached to the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward below the through hole 111. Since the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) which can be seen from the front through the lens 411, and the frame-shaped frame unit 415 in which the operation button 410 is arranged within the frame are attached, the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) having the largest possible operation button 410 can be seen in a position where the game ball storage tray would be prominent in a conventional pachinko machine, so that the player can recognize at a glance that this is different from conventional pachinko machines, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing. The frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and a translucent second button decorative part 411b is provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) adjacent to the frame side lens 417. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative part 411b. First LEDs 422a, 423a are provided for illuminating and decorating the second button decorative part 411b, and second LEDs 422b, 423b are provided for illuminating and decorating the frame side lens 417. The frame body 416 has an inner cylinder 416d that separates the frame side lens 417 from the second button decoration 411b, and a main body 413a and an inner extension 413f that separate the second button decoration 411b from the center of the button lens 411. The inner cylinder 416d, the main body 413a, and the inner extension 413f prevent the light from the first LED 422a, 423a from illuminating the center of the frame side lens 417 or the button lens 411, and prevent the light from the second LED 422b, 423b from illuminating the second button decoration 411b. The frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration 411b, which are adjacent to each other, can be illuminated and decorated independently. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration 411b can be clearly illuminated and decorated, and a good-looking illumination can be produced. In addition, by appropriately combining the off, on, blinking, brightness, color, etc. of the adjacent frame side lens 417 and second button decoration 411b, a variety of light-emitting patterns can be produced, preventing the player from becoming bored and entertaining the player, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the first LEDs 422a, 423a that illuminate and decorate the second button decorative part 411b of the operation button 410, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b that illuminate and decorate the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are provided on a single operation button left outer decorative board 422 and operation button right outer decorative board 423, and the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450). Therefore, compared to the case where a board is provided on the second button decorative part 411b (operation button 410), the first LEDs 422a, 423a can be placed as far away as possible from the second button decorative part 411b, and the light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a can be irradiated to the second button decorative part 411b in a sufficiently diffused state. Therefore, since the second button decoration 411b can be uniformly illuminated, the appearance of the illuminated decoration of the second button decoration 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, which can strongly attract the player's attention and entertain the player, preventing a decline in the player's interest.

Furthermore, because the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the wiring connected to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 does not bend or extend as the operation button 410 moves back and forth, eliminating the risk of the wiring breaking due to fatigue. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (second button decorative part 411b) is moved, the wiring will not break, so the player can enjoy the movement (operation) of the operation button 410 and the illuminated decoration of the frame side lens 417 and second button decorative part 411b without any problems, and a decline in the player's interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since a second button decorative part 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, when the rear operation button internal decorative part 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) are viewed through the transparent button lens 411, the second button decorative part 411b decorates the outer edges of the operation button internal decorative part 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), thereby improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1. By appropriately illuminating the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, the second button decoration 411b and the frame side lens 417 that decorate the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411, from which the operation button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be seen to the rear, can be illuminated and decorated in various patterns as described above, so that the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), and the player can enjoy the illumination effects, the operation of the operation button 410, and the performance images by the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the button lens 411 (operation button 410) with the second button decoration 411b on its outer edge can be operated by the player, so that by having the player operate the operation button 410 while a player-participation type performance is being executed, the player can enjoy operating the operation button 410 (player-participation type performance), and a decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. Furthermore, by illuminating and decorating the second button decoration 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 when a player-participation type performance is being executed, the player's attention can be attracted to the operation button 410, so that the player can be encouraged to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be made to participate in the player-participation type performance and enjoy it.

Furthermore, since the operation button 410 is provided with an opaque main body portion 413a and an inward extension portion 413f which enable only the second button decorative portion 411b to be illuminated and decorated by the first LEDs 422a, 423a, the portion of the operation button 410 which is closer to the center than the second button decorative portion 411b is not illuminated (decorated) by the first LEDs 422a, 423a, and the central portion of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) becomes brighter, which prevents the operation button internal decorative member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) located at the rear from becoming difficult to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration 411b can be illuminated and decorated in good condition, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be viewed in good condition through the transparent button lens 411, allowing the player to fully enjoy the decorations and illumination effects, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, since the inner tube portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 which is equipped with the frame side lens 417, at the rear side of the frame unit 415, the inner tube portion 416d can completely separate the frame side lens 417 from the second button decorative portion 411b of the operating button 410. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) of the inner tube 416d closer to the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423, the rear end of the inner tube 416d is located closer to the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423 than the diffusion range of the light from the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b, so even if a gap is formed between the front of the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423, the light from the first LED 422a, 423a will not illuminate the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LED 422b, 423b will not illuminate the second button decorative part 411b. Therefore, the light can be reliably blocked by the inner tube 416d, and a pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-mentioned effects can be realized.

In addition, since the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f can completely separate the second button decorative part 411b and the center side of the button lens 411 on the rear side of the operation button 410. On the other hand, the end (rear end) of the main body 413a close to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 extends further rearward than the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, so that the light from the first LED 422a, 423a does not pass through the rear end of the main body 413a, and the intrusion of light into the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be completely blocked. Therefore, the first LEDs 422a, 423a can illuminate and decorate the second button decoration 411b in good condition, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be viewed in good condition through the transparent button lens 411, allowing the player to fully enjoy the decorations and illumination effects, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the second button decorative part 411b is located in front of the outer part of the operation button internal decorative member 432 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) which is arranged behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Therefore, the second button decorative part 411b makes it difficult to see the outer parts and rear side (rear side) of the operation button internal decorative member 432 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative member 432 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), thereby preventing the appearance of the operation button 410 from being deteriorated. In addition, when the second button decoration 411b is illuminated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the outside and rear of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) become relatively dark compared to the brightness of the second button decoration member 411b, making it difficult to see the components on the outside and rear of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second performance display device 460A). This can further improve the appearance of the operation button 410, frame unit 415, operation button interior decoration member 432, door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), etc., and suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

In addition, since the outer periphery of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame side lens 417 adjacent to the second button decoration 411b are formed in an arc shape. Therefore, by appropriately illuminating the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b, the player can see a light-emitting effect in which light goes around the outer edge of the operation button 410, a light-emitting effect in which light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410, a light-emitting effect in which light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., so that the player is less likely to get bored with the various light-emitting effects, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the upper tray 321, in which the stored game balls are shot into the game area 5a and used for playing, is attached to the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 in the door frame 3, and the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and below the upper tray 321 to form the remaining space of the mounting space 326j of a predetermined width behind the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), and the remaining space of the mounting space 326j is A portion corresponding to the lower tray first area A1 in the lower tray main body 325 is disposed on the left side of the space, and a portion corresponding to the lower tray second area A2 in the lower tray main body 325 is extended from that portion into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j to mount the lower tray 322 capable of storing game balls. This makes the lower tray 322 appear smaller when viewed from the front, making the lower tray 322 less noticeable, and relatively making the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) more noticeable. Therefore, when the present pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be seen in the position where the upper tray and the lower tray were seen lined up and down in the conventional pachinko machine, so that the player can recognize at a glance that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and it can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the interest of the player.

In addition, in the lower tray second area A2 portion of the lower tray main body 325 of the lower tray 322, lower tray covers 340, 340A are provided which extend upward from the upper end of the main body vertical wall portion 325b which extends upward from the outer periphery and restrict the movement of game balls toward the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, thereby preventing the game balls in the lower tray 322 from contacting the rear side of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) and preventing the game balls supplied into the lower tray 322 or the game balls stored in the lower tray 322 from abutting or pressing against the rear side of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A). Therefore, the game ball will not come into contact with the rear side of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), and the rear side of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) will not be damaged by the game ball, which prevents the player's interest from being reduced by interrupting the game due to damage to the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), and also prevents an increase in the burden on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, the lower tray second area A2 in the lower tray body 325 of the lower tray 322 is equipped with the main body vertical wall portion 325b and the lower tray cover 340, 340A that restricts the movement of the game balls toward the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, so that the game balls can be prevented from entering (spill) from the lower tray body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling like he or she has lost money or is uncomfortable if the game ball enters the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the lower tray covers 340, 340A cover the lower tray second area A2 of the lower tray body 325 in the lower tray 322, even if the game ball supplied into the lower tray 322 bounces up inside the lower tray 322, it can be reliably prevented from entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the above-mentioned effect can be reliably achieved. In addition, since the lower tray covers 340, 340A cover the lower tray second area A2 of the lower tray body 325, when a player inserts his/her hand into the lower tray second area A2 from the lower tray first area A1 side (lower tray opening 326d) of the lower tray body 325, the lower tray covers 340, 340A can restrict the fingertips, etc. from entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, so that it is possible to prevent the fingertips, etc. from touching the underside of the upper tray 321 or the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) and causing injury, and the player can play in a safe environment.

Furthermore, since there is a gap between the lower tray cover 340, 340A and the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), even if an impact or pressure is applied to the lower tray cover 340, 340A due to a game ball hitting it, the impact or pressure is not transmitted from the lower tray cover 340, 340A to the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), and damage to the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be reliably prevented.

In addition, in the lower tray second area A2 portion of the lower tray body 325 of the lower tray 322, a lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is provided in front of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, so that when the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is open, the game ball released from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can enter the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a directly and be discharged downward (to the dollar box), making it difficult for the game ball to reach the front end side of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a, as described above, since the lower tray covers 340, 340A are provided, the game ball can be prevented from abutting against the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), so that damage to the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be prevented, and the interruption of the game can be reduced, suppressing the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower tray body 325 near the front end of the lower tray 322 becomes higher as it moves forward, so that the game ball moving toward the front end side of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325 climbs the inclined bottom surface, thereby attenuating the moving speed of the game ball. Therefore, since the speed of the game ball that abuts against the lower tray cover 340, 340A can be slowed down, the lower tray cover 340, 340A can reliably restrict the game ball from moving toward the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the impact when the game ball abuts against the lower tray cover 340, 340A or the main body vertical wall portion 325b can be reduced, thereby preventing them from being damaged.

In addition, since at least the lower tray covers 340, 340A are separate components, when the lower tray covers 340, 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower tray covers 340, 340A, which reduces the burden on the gaming hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game is played in which game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, etc., a dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 is provided, which bulges furthest forward from the center of the left and right direction of the front, and the performance operation unit 400 and the second performance operation unit 400A are detachably attached to the most forward bulging portion, and the dish unit cover 326 is provided with a storage dish consisting of an upper dish 321 and a lower dish 322 capable of storing game balls, and the storage dish (upper dish 321 and lower dish 322) In addition, the lower tray first area A1 is located outside the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front, and the lower tray second area A2 is located in the rear space of the mounting space 326j behind the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front, so that the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be made to stand out when viewed from the front, and the storage tray (upper tray 321 and lower tray 322) can be made to look smaller and less noticeable. Therefore, since the conspicuous performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be seen in the area where the upper tray and lower tray were visible in conventional pachinko machines, the player can be made to recognize at a glance that this is a gaming machine different from conventional pachinko machines, and it can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the interest of players.

In addition, since the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the left and right direction of the front of the dish unit cover 326, the area where the lower dish 322 is open on the surface of the dish unit cover 326 is small, but since the first extension part 325B, second extension part 325C, and lower dish cover 340, 340A of the lower dish main body 325 having the lower dish second area A2 located in the rear space of the mounting space 326j, which is behind the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front, it is possible to store game balls in the area (lower dish second area A2) that cannot be seen from the front of the lower dish 322. Therefore, contrary to the appearance from the front, a sufficient amount of game balls can be stored, so that the player can concentrate on playing without worrying about the remaining amount of game balls in the lower dish 322, and the player can enjoy the game and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, the lower tray 322 is formed by attaching (combining) the lower tray covers 340, 340A and the first and second extension parts 325B and 325C having the lower tray second area A2 to the lower tray main body 325 and main body part 325A having the lower tray first area A1.By preparing multiple lower tray covers 340, 340A, the first and second extension parts 325B and 325C of different sizes in advance and attaching the lower tray covers 340, 340A, the first and second extension parts 325B and 325C of sizes according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the width of the mounting space 326j within the tray unit cover 326, the volume of the lower tray 322 can be optimized. Also, as described above, by rearranging (replacing) the lower tray covers 340, 340A and the first and second extension parts 325B and 325C, it is possible to accommodate the size of the rear space of the mounting space 326j, and since the size of this rear space depends on the amount of rearward protrusion of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), it is possible to make the lower tray 322 compatible with various performance operation units 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) with different amounts of rearward protrusion, thereby increasing the versatility of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the lower tray 322 has a bottom wall portion 325a and a main body vertical wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, so that the lower tray 322 is in the shape of a container recessed downward, and game balls can be stored reliably. In addition, the lower tray cover 340, 340A has a cover vertical wall portion 340a rising from the upper end of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325, so by preparing lower tray covers 340, 340A of various shapes in advance and combining (attaching) lower tray covers 340, 340A of shapes according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the space at the rear of the mounting space 326j, it is possible to accommodate various forms and achieve the same effects as described above.

In addition, in the lower dish 322, which is composed of the lower dish main body 325 and the lower dish covers 340, 340A, the lower dish covers 340, 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower dish main body 325, so the part of the lower dish 322 where the game balls are placed is the lower dish main body 325, and the boundary (seam, dividing line PL) between the lower dish main body 325 and the lower dish covers 340, 340A is not located in the part where the load of many game balls is applied due to storage. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is only received by the lower dish main body 325, no force is applied that pulls the lower dish covers 340, 340A away from the lower dish main body 325 even if many game balls are stored, and it is possible to prevent the lower dish covers 340, 340A from coming off the lower dish main body 325.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, an upper tray 321 and a lower tray 322 capable of storing game balls are provided below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 where games are played such as receiving game balls into the general winning port 2001, etc., and the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) arranged in the center in the left-right direction makes more than half of the lower tray 322, including the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a in the lower tray 322, difficult to see (makes it difficult to see) from the front (player), so that the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made neat and attractive, and it can be made into a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can strongly attract the interest of players. In addition, the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see the game balls moving from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, making it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game balls inside the lower tray 322, preventing the player from becoming distracted and suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see the game balls guided by the guidance means such as the ball guide section 322c and the buffer section 322d, which are located between the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower tray 322 that guides the game balls from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a. Therefore, if the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is left open, the game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c are guided by the guidance means and smoothly (instantly) ejected downward from the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a, giving the player the illusion that the game balls are being ejected below the lower tray 322 (to the money box) without passing through the lower tray 322. This makes it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game balls passing through the lower tray 322, allowing the player to concentrate on the game and suppressing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) makes more than half of the lower tray 322, including the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, difficult to see from the front, it is likely that the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are located behind the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A). In other words, since more than half of the lower tray 322 is made to wrap around to the rear of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), the actual size (capacity) of the lower tray 322 is larger than the size of the lower tray 322 as it appears from the front, so that the amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 can be secured sufficiently compared to appearance.

In addition, when the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is open, the game balls released into the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be smoothly guided to the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a by the guide means such as the area between the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower tray 322, the ball guide section 322c and the buffer section 322d, and discharged to the bottom of the lower tray 322 (dollar box). This prevents the game balls from circulating around the lower tray 322, and makes it possible to reliably make the game balls circulating in the lower tray 322 difficult to see from the front (player). Therefore, it is difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game balls in the lower tray 322, preventing the player from being distracted and suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, if the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is left open, the game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be instantly ejected downward from the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a by the ball guide section 322c etc. without the player noticing, giving the player the illusion that the game balls are being ejected below the lower tray 322 (to the money box) without passing through the lower tray 322. This makes it less likely for the player to feel annoyed by the game balls passing through the lower tray 322, allowing the player to concentrate on the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) makes more than half of the game ball storage area (storage area) of the lower tray 322 in a plan view difficult to see from the front, so the actual size of the lower tray 322 is more than twice the size that appears from the front, so a sufficient amount of game balls can be stored, just like the lower trays of conventional pachinko machines.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a for mounting a large presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) of the same height as the overall height of the plate unit cover 326 is provided at the left-right center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, which bulges forward when viewed from the front below the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 where games such as receiving game balls into the general winning port 2001 are played. In addition, the plate front lower decorative portion 326c on both the left and right sides of the presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326, which is lower than the approximate center in the up-down direction, is shaped to be concave so as to be carved out toward the rear. This makes it possible for the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) attached to the presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a to appear to protrude significantly forward, making the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) stand out. Therefore, in the position where the upper tray and the lower tray are lined up in a vertical direction in the conventional pachinko machine, the large presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) is emphasized, so that the player can recognize at a glance that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing. And, from the tray front lower decoration part 326c which is recessed backward on both the left and right outer sides of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) on the front of the tray unit cover 326, the lower tray 322 is recessed backward and a part of it is wrapped around the rear of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), so that the storage amount of game balls in the lower tray 322 (the volume of the lower tray 322) can be sufficiently secured, so that the player does not have to worry about the lower tray 322 being filled with game balls while playing, and can concentrate on playing, and it is possible to enjoy the game and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, because a portion of the lower tray 322 wraps around to the rear of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), when a player puts his or her hand into the lower tray 322 from the front, the player's fingertips are less likely to touch the rear wall of the lower tray 322 (the front surface of the tray unit base 323) or the lower tray cover 340. This allows the player to recognize by touch that there is a sufficient amount of game balls stored, and when game balls are stored in the lower tray 322, the player can recognize that many game balls are stored in the lower tray 322, which gives the player a sense of satisfaction and allows the player to enjoy the game and suppress a decline in interest. In addition, because the fingertips of the hand placed on the lower tray 322 are unlikely to touch the rear wall of the lower tray 322 or the lower tray cover 340, the player is given the same sensation as with the lower tray in a conventional pachinko machine, which reduces the sense of discomfort felt by players who are accustomed to conventional pachinko machines, putting the player at ease and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, because the lower tray 322 is formed so that it becomes wider toward the back (rear), even if the front side is small, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of storage for game balls. In other words, because the front end portion of the lower tray 322 is small, it is possible to make the lower tray 322 less noticeable on the front surface (lower tray front decorative portion 326c) of the tray unit cover 326 where the lower tray 322 opens, and relatively, it is possible to make the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) more noticeable. Therefore, it is possible to provide the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) while securing a sufficient amount of storage for game balls in the lower tray 322, which can increase the appeal to players and entertain the players and prevent a decline in interest.

In addition, the sides and top of the part of the lower tray 322 that wraps around to the rear of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) are covered with the lower tray cover 340, so when a player puts their hand inside the lower tray 322, their fingertips are prevented from touching the inner surface of the tray unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) and getting injured, allowing the player to play in a safe environment. The lower tray cover 340 also prevents game balls from entering (spill) from the lower tray 322 into the tray unit cover 326.

Furthermore, since the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) is positioned in the center in the left-right direction on the front side of the tray unit cover 326, the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) can be made more noticeable to the player, making the pachinko machine 1 more appealing and able to strongly attract the player's attention. In addition, the decorations made by the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) can be made more visible, allowing the player to enjoy the decorations and presentations of the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) and preventing a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, the lower tray 322 is equipped with a lower tray ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper tray 321, and a lower tray ball ejection hole 322a that can be opened and closed and penetrates vertically, so that it has the same function as the lower tray in a conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, when a player who is accustomed to conventional pachinko machines plays this pachinko machine 1, he or she will not be confused by the function of the lower tray 322, and can play in the same way as before, allowing the player to concentrate on the game and enjoy the game. In addition, since the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a are respectively arranged behind the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side when viewed from the front, which makes the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 neat and good-looking, and makes it a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the interest of players.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) is attached to the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the play area 5a in the door frame 3. The operation button interior decorative member 432 (screen unit 470 of the door frame side second performance display device 460A) that decorates the outside of the door frame side performance display device 460 that can present a performance to the player is attached to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A). The operation button interior decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) has an outer diameter of about 15 cm and a center that is in a direction away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) so as to surround the outer periphery of the operation button interior decorative member 432 (screen unit 470). ), and the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is provided with a first button decoration part 411a, a second button decoration part 411b, and a button frame 412, and a cylindrical button base 413 protruding from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided. Therefore, the first button decoration part 411a and the button base 413 can reduce the visibility of the outer edge and the inner side (rear side) of the operation button inner decoration part 432 (screen unit 470 of the door frame side second performance display device 460A) from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration part 432 (screen unit 470), and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the operation button inner decoration part 432 provided inside, the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), etc. can be further improved, and the decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

In addition, the first button decorative part 411a, the second button decorative part 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can make it difficult to see the outer edge or the back side of the operation button internal decorative part 432 (screen unit 470) through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative part 432 (screen unit 470). Therefore, even if the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative part 432 (screen unit 470) becomes relatively large by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410, it can be well hidden by the first button decorative part 411a, etc., so that a large operation button 410 (button lens 411) with an outer diameter of approximately 15 cm can be realized without any problems while preventing a deterioration in appearance. Therefore, the operation buttons 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be enlarged, making the pachinko machine 1 stand out and strongly attracting the player's attention, making it a highly appealing pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since it is equipped with a button base 413 (main body 413a) that protrudes cylindrically from the button lens 411 side toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side, when the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) is viewed obliquely, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield and make invisible anything outside the operation button internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470), thereby further improving the appearance of the operation button 410.

In addition, since the transparent button lens 411 is made to have a three-dimensional shape (semispherical) that bulges outward (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the surface near the outer edge of the button lens 411 is inclined with respect to the plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane perpendicular to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are lined up, that is, a plane perpendicular to the forward and backward direction of the operation button 410), so light is easily refracted when viewed from the player's side. Therefore, by combining the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411b provided on the outer edge, and the button frame 412 and the button base 413, it is possible to make it difficult to see the outer edge and the back side of the operation button inner decoration part 432 (screen unit 470) from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration part 432 (screen unit 470), and the above-mentioned effect can be reliably achieved.

In addition, because the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 is increased, so the operation button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) placed inside the operation button 410 can be made larger and easier to move, making it easier to provide the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) that entertains the player inside the operation button 410, and realizing a pachinko machine 1 that provides even more entertainment for the player.

Furthermore, because the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is given a design (decorative) quality, which makes the operation button 410 stand out on this pachinko machine 1 and attracts the player's attention, making it easier for the player to select this pachinko machine as the machine to play.

In addition, the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412, which are provided on the outer periphery of the button lens 411, are opaque, so that the button frame 412 can reliably hide the back side of the operation button 410 and the operation button internal decoration part 432 (screen unit 470) from being seen through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decoration part 432 (screen unit 470), thereby reducing deterioration in the appearance of the operation button 410, etc., and improving its appearance.

The button lens 411 also has an opaque button frame 412 that extends from the outer edge of the button to the inside at a specified width all around, and in cooperation with the first button decoration 411a and the second button decoration 411b, makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the main body 413a of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 and the decorative member inside the operation button 432 (screen unit 470). This makes it possible to enlarge the gap between the main body 413a and the decorative member inside the operation button 432 (screen unit 470), which makes it easier to secure space for the operation button 410 and the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second performance display device 460A to move, allowing them to move smoothly.

Furthermore, because the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, there is no directionality to the outer periphery compared to when it is polygonal, making it easier to move the operation button 410 smoothly. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is made large, it can be pressed without any problems, allowing the player to enjoy the player-participation presentation using the operation button 410 without losing interest.

In addition, because the operation button 410 is enlarged, when a player-participation type presentation is executed in which the player operates the operation button 410, the player can easily touch and press the operation button 410 without having to check the position of the operation button 410 while operating it. This makes it easier for the player to participate in the player-participation type presentation using the operation button 410, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the operation button 410 is equipped with the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), by presenting a performance image according to the game state, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) in the operation button 410, and the player can enjoy the performance by the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A). At the same time, the performance image and light-emitting performance by the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can encourage the player to operate the operation button 410, and by having the player actively participate in the player participation type performance and enjoying it, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. Also, by executing the performance within the operation button 410, it is possible to make some players think that something good will happen, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, because the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) can be seen through the transparent button lens 411 (the area inside the first button decorative part 411a) of the large operation button 410, the player can immediately recognize that the operation button 410 of this pachinko machine 1 is clearly different from the operation buttons of conventional pachinko machines, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players and increasing the player's anticipation for the performance using the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) inside the operation button 410, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest.

The present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention, as described below.

In other words, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine is a pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, and in this case, the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 is shown to have the first button decoration part 411a formed on the inner circumference side of the button frame 412, but this is not limited to this, and the button lens 411 may have no first button decoration part 411a formed thereon.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, but this is not limited to this. Instead of attaching the button frame 412, a decorative part for hiding the rear side over the entire circumference may be formed at the part of the button lens 411 corresponding to the button frame 412.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the operation button 410 is shown to have a button base 413 (main body 413a) that protrudes cylindrically from the outer periphery of the button lens 411 toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side so as to surround the entire periphery of the operation button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame side second performance display device 460A, but this is not limited to this, and at least one may protrude toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side so as to surround only a part of the entire periphery of the operation button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame side second performance display device 460A. The shape of this button base 413 may be a shape that follows the outer periphery of the button lens 411, or a shape that does not follow the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have decoration (flat decoration by pasting a sticker or printing, three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as a relief) at least on the inner wall side. Furthermore, the button base 413 may be translucent or non-translucent. The button base 413 may be colored or colorless and transparent. If the button base 413 is transparent, it is desirable to apply light diffusion processing such as embossing, slits, prisms, etc. to at least one of the inner wall side or the outer wall side.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the lower tray 322 is recessed rearward only from the outer left portion of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) on the front of the tray unit cover 326, but this is not limited to this, and the lower tray 322 may be recessed rearward from both the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) and connected to each other behind the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), or may be recessed rearward only from the outer right portion of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), with a portion of it wrapping around to the rear of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A).

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the shape (shape of the front end of the lower dish 322) of the portion (lower dish front decorative portion 326c) on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 where the lower dish 322 is recessed rearward is shown as a curved surface recessed rearward, but this is not limited to this, and the front surface may be recessed in the shape of a polygonal column or polyhedron.

In the above embodiment, the example of attaching the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) to the front of the plate unit cover 326 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to attach a unit or panel or other member that includes "one with an operation device such as an operation dial or touch panel," "one with a rotating body with a decoration on its surface," "one with a decorative body with a decoration and a movable device for moving the decorative body," "one with a decorative body that three-dimensionally imitates characters, items, logos, and scenes (dioramas), etc., that match the concept of the gaming machine," "one with decorations such as characters, items, logos, and predetermined patterns, etc., that match the concept of the gaming machine, applied by stickers, printing, etc.," etc. Also, the member attached to the mounting space 326j (performance operation unit mounting portion 326a) does not have to be one, and multiple (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members may be attached, such as a member attached to the upper half of the mounting space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the mounting space 326j.

In the above embodiment, the plate unit cover 326 is shown to have a presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a that opens forward for mounting the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), but this is not limited to this. The plate unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover portion) may not have an opening (presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a) for mounting the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A), and a space equivalent to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed behind the plate unit cover. In addition, it is desirable to decorate the front of such a plate unit cover with characters, items, logos, specific patterns, etc. that are in line with the concept of the gaming machine by means of stickers, printing, mounting decorative members, etc.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which an area slightly larger than half of the game ball storage area (storage area) in a planar view of the lower tray 322 is covered by the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) as a covering part to make it difficult to see from the front, but this is not limited to this, and an area less than half of the game ball storage area in the lower tray 322 may be made difficult to see from the front, or the entire lower tray 322 may be made difficult to see from the front.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are shown as being arc-shaped and partially arranged in the circumferential direction, but this is not limited to this, and the second button decorative portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may be annular and extend around the entire circumference.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the second button interior decorative part 432g of the operation button interior decorative member 432 in the performance operation unit 400 is shown as a decoration having multiple polygonal shapes in a concentric circle centered on the center, but this is not limited to this, and the second button interior decorative part 432g may also be a decoration having multiple circular shapes (including ovals) in a concentric circle centered on the center.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410 allows the rear members such as the operation button interior decorative member 432, the door frame side performance display device 460, and the door frame side second performance display device 460A, which are arranged on the rear side, to be always visible, but this is not limited to this, and at least one of the front and rear members arranged in the front and back (or up and down) may have a variable light transmission means that makes the rear side visible when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, examples of the variable light transmission means include "a magic mirror, which makes the rear side visible due to the difference in brightness between the front and rear sides," and "a liquid crystal film, which becomes transparent or opaque by turning the power on and off, making the rear side visible." The front and rear members may be movable relative to each other, or may not be movable relative to each other.

By providing a variable light transmission means in at least one of the front and rear members, in the normal state, only the front member, or both the front and rear members, are visible, and the decoration of the visible member can be shown to the player. Then, in the special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, the rear member (the rear member, or the member arranged behind the rear member) that was not visible in the normal state becomes visible, and the decoration of the front and rear members, or the front member, rear member, and the member behind the rear member, which are overlapping, can be shown. Therefore, various decorations (decorative effects) can be shown to the player using the front and rear members, which makes it difficult for the player to get bored, and can entertain the player, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest.

To go into more detail, for example, if the front member has a variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, in the normal state, the rear side of the front member is darkened, allowing the player to see only the decoration of the front member. Then, by brightening the area between the front and rear members, or the rear side of the rear member with light from a light-emitting unit such as an LED, the conditions for the variable light transmission means in the front member are met, making the rear member visible through the front member, and allowing the player to see the overlapping decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member.

Alternatively, if the front member is transparent and the rear member has a variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, under normal conditions the surface of the rear member is visible through the front member, allowing the player to see the decoration of the front member and the surface of the rear member. Then, if the rear side of the rear member is illuminated with light from a light-emitting unit such as an LED, the fulfillment condition of the variable light transmission means in the rear member is satisfied, making the rear side visible through the rear member, allowing the player to see the components behind the rear member (e.g., display devices, decorations such as characters, etc.) through the front and rear members.

Furthermore, if both the front and rear members have a variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, in the normal state, only the decoration of the front member can be seen by the player, and when the area between the front and rear members is brightened by the light of a light-emitting unit such as an LED, the fulfillment condition of the variable light transmission means in the front member is met, the surface of the rear member becomes visible through the front member, and the decoration of the front and rear members can be seen by the player. On the other hand, when the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of a light-emitting unit such as an LED (or the area between the front and rear members and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by the light of a light-emitting unit such as an LED), the fulfillment conditions of the variable light transmission means in the front and rear members are respectively met, and the member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a character, or other decoration) can be seen by the player through the front and rear members. As a result, by appropriately selecting the area to be brightened by the light of the light-emitting unit, the visible range can be changed in multiple stages, and a variety of decorations can be enjoyed by the player.

In the above specific example, the variable light transmission means is something like a magic mirror, so when the back side is darkened, it looks like a mirror, allowing the player to see the sparkling decorations on the surfaces of the front and back members.

In the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means was described as something like a magic mirror, but the same effect can be achieved if it is something like a liquid crystal film. In addition, if something like a liquid crystal film is used as the variable light transmitting means, it can transmit light even in an opaque state (it has translucency), so if the area between the front and rear members and the rear side of the rear member can be made brighter (or decorated with light) with the light of light-emitting elements such as LEDs, the player can be shown a wider variety of light-emitting effects, decorative effects, and other effects.

[7. Main control board, dispensing control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 69 to Fig. 74. Fig. 69 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board, and the peripheral control board, Fig. 70 is a block diagram showing the continuation of Fig. 69, Fig. 71 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input and output to the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board that relays the electrical connection between the payout control board constituting the main board and the CR unit and the degree display board, Fig. 72 is a block diagram showing the continuation of Fig. 69, Fig. 73 is a block diagram showing the outline of the peripheral control MPU, and Fig. 74 is a block diagram of the periphery of the sound source built-in VDP in the liquid crystal display control unit.

As shown in FIG. 69, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a first control unit MCG that generates a control power source (e.g., +5V, etc.) and controls the game, including the payout of prize balls, and a second control unit SCG that performs presentations related to the game progressed by the first control unit MCG.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing multiple boards, and includes a main control board 1310, a payout control board 951, and a power supply board 931 as the first control unit MCG, and a peripheral control board 1510 as the second control unit SCG. In explaining the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first control unit MCG will first be explained in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931, and then the second control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510).

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the above-mentioned first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is mainly composed of a main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that controls the power-on processing executed when the power is turned on and has various control programs such as a main control program that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on and controls the game operation, a ROM that stores various commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data, as shown in FIG. 69, a main control input circuit 1310b to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to external boards, etc., a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, and a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors for signs of a power outage or momentary power outage of a predetermined voltage.

The main control MPU 1310a has built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), as well as a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

The main control MPU 1310a also has built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a as a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) to identify the individual unit. Once this ID code is assigned, it cannot be rewritten even using an external device, as it is stored in the non-volatile RAM. The main control MPU 1310a is capable of retrieving the ID code from the non-volatile RAM and referencing it.

The main control MPU 1310a also includes a built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as the "main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an") that uses hardware to update random numbers for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state, among various random numbers related to the game. This main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 32767 as the maximum value is preset), and is configured so that the predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (i.e., the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first selects one value within a predetermined numerical range as the initial value, and then rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range without overlapping based on a clock signal (a clock signal output from a main control crystal oscillator, described later) input to the main control MPU 1310a. When all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an again extracts one value within the predetermined numerical range without overlapping based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such rapid lottery selection, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time when it obtains a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an as a random number for determining a jackpot.

The main control input circuit 1310b does not have a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input to its various input terminals as detection signals from the various detection switches, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit that does not receive a system reset signal from the main control system reset described below. In other words, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit in which information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to its various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset described below, and various signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type circuit with an emitter terminal grounded to ground (GND), and is composed of a main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, which has a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information input to various input terminals for outputting various signals to external boards, etc., and a main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which does not have a reset terminal and does not have a reset function. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal is input from the main control system reset described later. In other words, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit in which information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to external boards, etc. is reset by the main control system reset described later, so that no signal based on that information is output from its various output terminals. In contrast, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal is not input from the main control system reset described later. In other words, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is configured as a circuit in which the information for outputting the various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the main control system reset described below, and signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

As shown in FIG. 60, the first start port sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, the second start port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 2004, and the general winning port sensor 4020 that detects a game ball that has entered the general winning port 2001, as well as the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Also, the detection signals from the gate sensor 4003 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate section 2003, the count sensor 4005 that detects a game ball that has entered the large winning port 2005, and the magnetic detection sensor 4024 that is attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 9 and detects fraudulent acts using magnets are input to the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Based on the detection signals from each of these switches, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the specified output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, which outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d outputs a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 and the attacca solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of a specific output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs a drive signal to the first special pattern display 1403, the second special pattern display 1405, the first special reserved number display 1404, the second special reserved number display 1406, the normal pattern display 1402, the status display 1401, and the round display 1407 via the panel relay board 4161 and the function display unit 1400.

The main control MPU 1310a also outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of a specified output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, so that the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs various information (game information) related to the game to the payout control board 951, and outputs a signal (power outage clear signal) from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e by outputting a signal (power outage clear signal) from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e.

In this embodiment, the first start hole sensor 4002, the second start hole sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches, while the general winning hole sensors 4020, 4020 use contact type ON/OFF operation mechanical switches. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start hole 2002 and the second start hole 2004 and frequently pass through the gate section 2003, so the first start hole sensor 4002, the second start hole sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 frequently detect game balls. For this reason, the first start hole sensor 4002, the second start hole sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 use long-life proximity switches. In addition, when a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning hole 2005 is opened and game balls frequently enter, so the count sensor 4005 frequently detects game balls. For this reason, a proximity switch with a long life is also used for the count sensor 4005. In contrast, detection by the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020 does not occur frequently at the general winning openings 2001, 2201, where game balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch with a shorter life than a proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020.

The main control MPU 1310a also transmits various commands related to dispensing as serial data from the output terminal of a specified serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, which then transmits the various commands as serial data to the dispensing control board 951. When the dispensing control board 951 has successfully received the various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

The main control MPU 1310a also receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data at the main control input circuit 1310b, and receives various commands from the main control input circuit 1310b as serial data at the input terminal of its specified serial input port. When the main control MPU 1310a has successfully received various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of its specified output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the payout control board 951.

The main control MPU 1310a also transmits various commands related to the control of game presentations and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of a specified serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, which then transmits the various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510.

Here, we will briefly explain the main serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around the main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main control serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control various serial I/O ports, is circuit-connected via the bus 1310ah (see FIG. 79). The main serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data, and is mainly configured of the transmission shift register 1310aea, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb, the serial management unit 1310aec, etc. (see FIG. 79). When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec transfers the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 1310aea and starts transmitting it to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. In this embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa sets multiple commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and then outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, thereby continuously transmitting multiple commands to the peripheral control board 1510.

The power supply board 931, which supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310, is equipped with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") BC0 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power supply to supply power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when the power is cut off. This capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. When the operation switch 954 of the dispensing control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is output from the dispensing control board 951 and input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU 1310a.

[7-2. Dispensing control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls, etc., is equipped with a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout, an operation switch 954 that performs various functions, and an error LED indicator 860b that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, as shown in Fig. 70. The operation switch 954, which also functions as a RAM clear switch, outputs a RAM clear signal to completely erase information stored in the RAM (hereinafter referred to as the "main control built-in RAM") built into the main control MPU 1310a, based on a detection signal output by being operated.

[7-2-1. Dispense control unit]
As shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952, which performs various controls related to payout, is equipped with a payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor that has built-in a ROM for storing various control programs and various commands, including a payout control program that controls the power-on processing executed when the power is turned on and controls the payout operation of the gaming media executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, a payout control input circuit 952b to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to external boards, etc., a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830, and a CR unit input/output circuit 952e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6. The payout control MPU 952a has built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as the ``payout control built-in RAM'') and built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as the ``payout control built-in ROM''), as well as a watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control program receives various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 as serial data in a serial manner as a main payout serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. In addition, the payout control program generates a frame status 1 command (corresponding to a first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game balls, and creates a 16-bit (2-byte) error release navigation command (corresponding to a first error release command) based on the operation signal (detection signal) of the operation switch 954 as an error release unit, and outputs these error occurrence commands and error release navigation commands as serial data in a serial manner as a payout main serial data transmission signal to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port 952b (command transmission means). In addition, if an error occurs with respect to the payout operation after a predetermined time has elapsed since power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed and payout control is started, this payout control program releases the error based on a detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 954 and stops the output of warning information corresponding to the error (error release control means).

In addition, this dispensing control program outputs a door frame open command (first door open command) when a detection signal (door frame open detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame open switch 618, and outputs a main frame open command (first main frame open command) when a detection signal (main frame open detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the main frame open switch 619. On the other hand, this dispensing control program also outputs a door frame close command (first door frame close command) when a detection signal (door frame close detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the door frame open switch 618, and outputs a main frame close command (first main frame close command) when a detection signal (main frame close detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the main frame open switch 619.

The dispensing control input circuit 952b does not have a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input to its various input terminals as detection signals from the various detection switches, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the dispensing control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit that does not receive a system reset signal from the dispensing control system reset described below. In other words, the dispensing control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit in which the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to its various input terminals is not reset by the dispensing control system reset described below, and various signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type with an emitter terminal grounded to ground (GND), and is composed of a payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function having a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information inputted to various input terminals for outputting various signals to an external board, etc., and a payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function that does not have a reset terminal and does not have a reset function. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is inputted. In other words, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit in which information for outputting various signals inputted to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. is reset by a payout control system reset described later, and a signal based on that information is not outputted from its various output terminals at all. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not inputted. In other words, the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb is configured as a circuit in which the information for outputting the various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. is not reset by the dispensing control system reset described below, and signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

The detection signals from the ball exhaustion detection sensor 827, which detects the exhaustion of game balls in the supply passage of the ball guide unit 820 of the payout unit 800, the payout detection sensor 842, which detects game balls released from the payout outlets 831b, 832b of the payout device 830, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840, which detects the rotation of the payout blade 839, are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. For the sake of explanation below, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 will be simply referred to as the rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

In addition, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618, which detects the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, and the main frame opening switch 619, which detects the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control input circuit 952b.

In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, which detects whether the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in Figure 1 is full of stored game balls, is first input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the handle relay terminal board 315, the power supply board 931, and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU 952a receives various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 in serial data format at the input terminal of its serial input port via the payout control input circuit 952b, and outputs the operation signal (detection signal) of the operation switch 954 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a has successfully received various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of its specified output port to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, which then outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to the main control board 1310.

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a transmits various commands indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb from the output terminal of its serial output port, and thereby transmits various commands as serial data from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb to the main control board 1310.
When the main control board 1310 has successfully received various commands as serial data from the dispensing control board 951, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to inform the dispensing control board 951. This signal (main payout ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU 952a also outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of its specified output port to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, which outputs a drive signal to the payout motor drive circuit 952d and outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 834 from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and outputs a drive signal to the payout motor drive circuit 952d from the payout motor drive circuit 952d, or outputs a drive signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator 860b from the output terminal of its specified output port to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, which outputs a drive signal to the error LED indicator 860b from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca.

The error LED display 860b is a segment display that displays alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b include the following: For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it notifies that it is "normal", when the number "0" is displayed, it notifies that it is "connection abnormal" (specifically, that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951), when the number "1" is displayed, it notifies that it is "ball out" (specifically, that there are no game balls in the supply passage of the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 827), when the number "2" is displayed, it notifies that it is "ball stuck" (specifically, that at the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout rotor and the game ball are engaged near the entrance, making it difficult for the payout rotor to rotate), and when the number "3" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "payout detection sensor error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 840 detects ... 2, a malfunction has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842; when the number "5" is displayed, a "retry error" has occurred (specifically, the number of payout retry attempts has reached a preset upper limit); when the number "6" is displayed, a "full" has occurred (specifically, the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279); when the number "7" is displayed, a "CR not connected" has occurred (electrical connection has been cut somewhere between the payout control board 951 and the CR unit 6); and when the number "9" is displayed, a "stocked (there are prize balls in stock (unpaid))" has occurred (specifically, the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a preset number).

The payout control MPU 952a also outputs the number of game balls actually paid out, etc., from the output terminal of a specified output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, which then outputs the number of game balls actually paid out, etc., to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor not shown.

Furthermore, the payout control board 951 outputs various information related to the game (game information) from the main control board 1310 via resistors (not shown) to the external terminal board 784. The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (configured with built-in infrared LEDs and photo ICs), and is configured to transmit the number of game balls and various information (game information, error content related to the payout operation of game balls or a notice that an error has occurred) to a hall computer installed in the game center (hall) via these multiple photocouplers.
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by multiple photocouplers to prevent the hall computer from malfunctioning or breaking down due to an abnormal voltage being applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1, and also to prevent the hall computer from malfunctioning or breaking down due to an abnormal voltage being applied from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 which proceeds with the game or the payout control board 951 which controls the payout, etc. The hall computer monitors the player's play by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The ball loan request signal from the ball loan button 328 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 329 are first input to the CR unit 6 via the degree display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be loaned in accordance with the ball loan request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869, and this signal is input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the CR unit input/output circuit 952e. The CR unit 6 also updates the remaining balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of game balls lent out, and outputs a signal to the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the degree display board 365 to display the remaining balance on the ball lending and return display unit 330, and this signal is input to the ball lending and return display unit 330. The CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball lending and return display unit 330 is also input with the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880.

The power supply board 931, which supplies various voltages to the dispensing control board 951, is equipped with a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the dispensing control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. This capacitor BC1 allows the dispensing control MPU 952a to store various information in the dispensing control built-in RAM (dispensing memory unit) during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. When the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the operation signal is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control input circuit 952b, and the dispensing control MPU 952a judges it as a RAM clear signal to completely erase the information stored in the dispensing control built-in RAM, and the information is completely erased (cleared) from the dispensing control built-in RAM by the dispensing control MPU 952a using this as a trigger. This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is also output from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb to the main control board 1310.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the game ball lending device connection terminal board]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6, and between the CR unit 6 and the point display board 365 will be described with reference to Fig. 71. As shown in Fig. 71, the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 relays the electrical connection between the boards of the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, and also relays the electrical connection between the boards of the CR unit 6 and the point display board 365 (to be precise, the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 is electrically connected to the point display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880, the CR unit 6 and the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay terminal board 880 and the point display board 365 are electrically connected). The CR unit 6 and the board of the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869, the board of the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the payout control board 951, the board of the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880, and the board of the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the degree display board 365 are electrically connected by each wiring (harness). In addition, AC 24V described later from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, direct current +12V (DC +12V, hereafter referred to as "+12V")) from the supplied AC 24V using an internal voltage generation circuit (not shown) and supplies this voltage, together with the ground LG, to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, while also supplying it to the degree display board 365 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880.

The degree display board 365 has a ball lending button 328, which is a push button switch, mounted on its component surface at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328 on the ball lending unit 360, a return button 329, which is a push button switch, mounted on a position corresponding to the return button 329 on the ball lending unit 360, and a ball lending/return display unit 330, which is a segment display, mounted on a position corresponding to the remaining loaned amount display unit 363 on the ball lending unit 360.

The ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the switch of the ball lending button 328 is turned on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is input to the CR unit 6 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the switch of the return button 329 is turned on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input to the CR unit 6 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

The ball lending/return display unit 330 has three segment displays arranged in a row, and the lighting of these three-digit segment displays is controlled by a so-called dynamic lighting method, which sequentially drives each digit of the three-digit segment displays. By controlling the lighting in this way, the ball lending/return display unit 330 can display the remaining balance of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6, or display errors in the CR unit 6. When the ball lending/return display unit 330 receives digit signals DG0-DG2 (a total of three signals) for specifying one of the three-digit segment displays, and segment drive signals SEG-A-SEG-G (a total of seven signals) for specifying the content to be displayed by lighting up the specified one-digit segment display from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880, the one-digit segment displays are sequentially illuminated according to the input digit signals DG0-DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A-SEG-G, and the content displayed by the illumination of these three-digit segment displays can be viewed through the remaining loan display unit 363.

The CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the degree display board 365 adjacent to the ball lending/return display unit 330. This CR unit lamp 365d receives a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending possible signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 generates the predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24V supplied from the power supply board 931 using an internal voltage generation circuit, and when the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are active and ball lending is possible, the logic of the ball lending possible signal TDL is controlled to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be seen through the remaining loan display unit 363. In addition, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending/return display unit 330 through a current limiting resistor implemented on the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

When the ball loan button 328 is pressed and the ball loan operation signal TDS from the ball loan button 328 is input from the degree display board 365 through the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball etc. loan device connection terminal board 869, the CR unit 6 outputs a ball loan request signal BRDY to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball etc. loan device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 then outputs a BRQ, which is a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of loaned balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, equivalent to 100 yen) in one payout operation, to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball etc. loan device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input outputs an EXS signal to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 to inform the CR unit 6 that one payout operation has started or ended, and outputs a PRDY signal to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 to inform the CR unit 6 that a payout operation to pay out loaned balls is possible or impossible. For example, if the hall staff or the like has preset the CR unit 6 so that 200 yen worth of game balls are paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed twice in succession, and when 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out next, for a total of 50 balls worth 200 yen.

When the return button 329 is pressed and a return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the point display board 365 through the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869, the CR unit 6 ejects and returns the prepaid card from an insertion port (not shown). This returned prepaid card stores the remaining balance obtained by subtracting the amount equivalent to the number of game balls dispensed as a result of the ball lending button 328 being pressed.

[7-3. Power supply board 931
Next, a brief description will be given of the power supply board 931 of the first control unit MCG. The power supply board 931 electrically connects and disconnects the 24 volt AC (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment. 5. A power switch 934 for switching on and off the power supply, a power supply control unit 935 for generating various power supplies, and a control unit for controlling the launching of the ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 by the launching solenoid 682 and the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG. It is equipped with a launch control unit 953 that controls ball delivery using the delivery solenoid 255.

[7-3-1. Power supply control unit]
The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a that rectifies the 24 volt alternating current (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment when the power switch 934 is operated, a power factor correction circuit 935b that improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a smoothing circuit 935c that smoothes the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and a power supply creation circuit 935d that creates various DC power supplies from the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to supply to various boards.

[7-3-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 953, which performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball sending control by the ball sending solenoid 255, is mainly composed of a launch control circuit 953a. The launch control circuit 953a receives an operation signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 302, a detection signal from a handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle 302, and a detection signal from a single button operation sensor 312 that detects whether the launch (launch) of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will, via the handle relay terminal board 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, a CR connection signal that notifies the player is input to the launch control circuit 953a via the payout control board 951.

The launch control circuit 953a adjusts the drive current for shooting (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 and controls the output to the launch solenoid 682, while at the same time controlling the ball sending member of the ball sending unit 250 to receive one game ball stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 and send the received game ball to the ball launching device 650 by outputting a constant current to the ball sending solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal board 315.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
In contrast to this first control unit MCG, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG, as shown in FIG. 72, is equipped with a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs performance control based on various commands from the main control board 1310 and exchanges control commands and various information (various data) with the performance display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460 shown in FIG. 19, a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, while controlling the sound of music, sound effects, etc. played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds calendar information specifying the year, month, and day and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second, and a volume adjustment volume 1510a that adjusts the volume of the music, sound effects, etc. played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the presentation includes a peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, such as a sub-control program that controls the power-on processing executed when the power is turned on and that controls the presentation operation after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on, and various information (e.g., game board, It is equipped with a peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores various information (such as information for managing schedule data that specifies the screen to be drawn on the side performance display device 1600 and schedule data that specifies the light emission modes of various LEDs, etc.), a peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores various information that continues across days (for example, information for managing the history of when a jackpot game state has occurred and information for managing special performance flags, etc.), and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as ``peripheral control external WDT 1511e'') for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can only retain the stored contents for the time it takes for power to be restored after a momentary power outage, and loses its contents if power is cut off for a long period of time (if a long-term power outage occurs), whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power from a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931 (hereinafter referred to as the "SRAM electrolytic capacitor"), allowing it to retain its stored contents for approximately 50 hours. By providing the SRAM electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is no longer supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is no longer able to retain its stored contents and loses its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer that monitors whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a system is out of control, and when this timer expires, a hardware reset is applied. In other words, if the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to clear the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period of time (until the timer expires), a reset is applied. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within the certain period of time, it can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so a reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has multiple built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and when it receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it transmits game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs, etc., provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 based on these various commands from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to the lamp drive board 4170 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), and transmits game board side motor drive data for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 to the motor drive board via the serial I/O port for the motor drive board and the peripheral control output circuit. The motor drive board 4180 is sent to the motor drive board 4180, door side motor drive data for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is sent from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and door side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is sent from the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the performance operation unit 400 and the detection signal from the pressure detection switch for detecting the operation of the pressure operation unit 405 are serialized by a door side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided in the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and this serialized performance operation unit detection data is input from the door side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit via the serial I/O port for performance operation unit detection of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

The detection signals from various detection switches (e.g., photosensors, etc.) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit via a peripheral control input circuit to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input and output of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as the "peripheral control built-in WDT") and uses the peripheral control built-in WDT in conjunction with the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to diagnose whether the system itself is out of control.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a which is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in Fig. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is composed of a peripheral control CPU core 1511aa at the center, a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, a peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, a peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, a peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and a peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as a peripheral control A/D converter) 1511ak.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads and writes various data from the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while reading and writing various data from the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

In addition, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading and writing various data from the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is a dedicated controller that transfers data independently between storage devices such as the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. It has four channels, DMA0 to DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac communicates, via the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, between the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In order to transfer data independently, data is read from and written to the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab via the internal bus 1511ah, while data is read from and written to input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

In addition, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac independently transfers data between storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d that are external to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak that are built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. To transfer data, data is read from and written to storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and external bus 1511h, while data is read from and written to input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad is a dedicated controller that controls the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral bus 1511ai, and external bus 1511h to exchange various data between the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, storage devices such as the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak.

The various peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae include a serial I/O port for the lamp drive board, a serial I/O port for the motor drive board, a serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED, a serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I/O port for the main control board, and a serial I/O port for acquiring information from the performance operation unit.

The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer that monitors whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a system is running out of control, and when this timer times out, it is reset by hardware. In other words, when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer, if it does not output a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period (until the timer times out), it will be reset. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within the certain period, it can restart the timer count, so it will not be reset.

The peripheral control various parallel I/O port 1511ag outputs various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, and serializes detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 using a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving this serialized movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the motor drive board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. This LED is a high-brightness white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that a jackpot game state has been confirmed. In this embodiment, the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag are electrically connected directly to each other, shortening the path between the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag, thereby taking measures against noise in the lighting control of the LED, which is important in the game. The lighting control of the LED is executed in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, and the other LEDs, etc., except for this LED, are executed in the peripheral control unit regular process described later.

The peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume control volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into 1024 levels of values from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute, and board volume 6 is set to maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source described later) is controlled to set the volume to the board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob.

In this embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying the hall staff of malfunctions in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1, and notification sounds for notifying the contents of the game performance (for example, making the screen displayed on the game board performance display device 1600 more impressive, notifying the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a game state that is advantageous to the player, etc.) are also played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. However, the notification sounds and notification sounds are played completely independent of volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob, and the volume can be adjusted from mute to maximum volume by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (the sound source built-in VDP 1512a described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from mute to maximum volume, unlike the board volume divided into seven levels described above. As a result, even if, for example, a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the music and sound effects from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 will be low, but when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or a player is committing a fraudulent act, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is low, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from being difficult to notice the malfunction or the player's fraudulent act due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be low so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects, while the volume of the advertising sound can be high to make the screen unfolding on the game board side performance display device 1600 more impressive in addition to the music and sound effects, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a game state that is advantageous to the player.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral Control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, etc. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, sound generation schedule data for generating music, sound effects, etc., and electric drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that specifies the configuration of the screen in chronological order, and specifies the order of the screens to be drawn on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data that specifies the light emission modes of various LEDs in chronological order. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in chronological order, and specifies the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data specifies an output channel number for specifying which of a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later is to be used, and a track number for specifying which of a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is to be incorporated with sound data such as music and sound effects. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in chronological order, and specifies the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Some of the various control programs stored in peripheral control ROM 1511b are read directly from peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, while others are copied to various control program copy areas of peripheral control RAM 1511c (described below) when power is turned on, and then read and executed. Also, some of the various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in peripheral control ROM 1511b are read directly from peripheral control ROM 1511b, while others are copied to various control data copy areas of peripheral control RAM 1511c (described below) when power is turned on, and then read.

In addition, the peripheral control ROM 1511b includes, as one of the various control programs that control the RTC control unit 4165, a brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side performance display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side performance display device 1600. This brightness correction program corrects the decrease in brightness that occurs with aging of the game board side performance display device 1600 when the game board side performance display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight, and obtains the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on, the current date and time, brightness setting information, etc. from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later, and corrects the obtained brightness setting information based on the correction information. This correction information is pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. The brightness setting information, as described below, includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 in 5% increments within a range from 100% to 70%, and the currently set brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600. For example, based on the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on, corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is turned on, the correction information obtained for this 75% is used. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80%, which is an additional 5% of the positive information, and if 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85%, which is an additional 10% of the correction information obtained for this 75%.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral Control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is provided with a backup management subject work area 1511ca for exclusively storing information to be backed up among various information updated by the execution of various control programs, a first backup area 1511cb and a second backup area 1511cc for exclusively storing copies of the various information stored in the backup management subject work area 1511ca, a various control program copy area 1511cd for exclusively storing copies of the various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, a various control data copy area 1511ce for exclusively storing copies of various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and a non-backup management subject work area 1511cf for exclusively storing information not to be backed up among various information updated by the execution of various control programs.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including when power is restored after a momentary or power outage), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed work area 1511cf to clear it to zero, whereas the backup managed work area 1511ca, backup first area 1511cb, and backup second area 1511cc are cleared to zero when the power-on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state (for example, instructs the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from power-on).

The backup management target work area 1511ca is composed of Bank0 (1fr), which is dedicated to storing, as a backup target, the performance information (1fr), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit regular processing executed every time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later, and Bank0 (1ms), which is dedicated to storing, as a backup target, the performance information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs described later. Here, to briefly explain the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is the minimum management unit that represents the size of the memory area for storing various information, and the "0" following "Bank" means that it is a memory area that is normally used to store various information that is updated by the execution of various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the memory area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Furthermore, "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4", which are provided in the area spanning from the backup first area 1511cb to the backup second area 1511cc described below, have the same memory area size as "Bank 0". As described below, when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data to the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, a V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to inform the peripheral control MPU 1511a that it is in a state where it can accept screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Therefore, each time a V blank signal is input, in other words, every frame (1 frame), the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, and therefore "(1fr)" is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" respectively (the same meaning is also used for performance information (1fr) and performance backup information (1fr) described below). "(1 ms)" is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" because, as described below, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs (the same meaning is also used for the performance information (1 ms) and the performance backup information (1 ms) described below).

Bank 0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab, a received command memory area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad, and a schedule data memory area 1511cae. The lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa is a memory area in which game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the multiple LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab is a memory area in which door side light emission data STL-DAT is set for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the multiple LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. The received command memory area 1511cac is a memory area in which the main control The RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad is a memory area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a described later) is set, and the schedule data memory area 1511cae is a memory area in which various schedule data corresponding to commands received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) is set based on the commands received. In the schedule data memory area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce is read and set, and in some cases, various schedule data is read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and set.

Bank 0 (1 ms) includes a motor transmission data memory area 1511caf on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side, a motor drive board transmission data memory area 1511cag, a movable body information acquisition memory area 1511cah, a performance operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai, and a drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak, etc. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf is a memory area in which door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is set. The motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag is a memory area in which game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is set. The movable body information acquisition memory area 1511cah is a memory area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 is set. The performance operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai is a memory area in which various detection switches provided on the performance operation unit 400 are set. It is a storage area in which various information (for example, rotation (direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401 and operation history information of the press operation unit 405, etc., created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the performance operation unit 400) is set, which is obtained by acquiring the rotation (direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the press operation unit 405 based on detection signals from the switches. The drawing status information acquisition storage area 1511cak is a storage area in which various information is set, which is obtained by acquiring the frequency of malfunctions and the occurrence state of malfunctions between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the performance display drive board 4450 based on a LOCKN signal (described later) that is output by the performance display drive board 4450 when it receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the peripheral control board 1510 and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data.

The lamp drive board transmission data memory area 1511caa and the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data memory area 1511cab in Bank0 (1fr), and the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transmission data memory area 1511caf and the motor drive board transmission data memory area 1511cag in Bank0 (1ms) are each divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

When the peripheral control unit steady-state processing described below is executed, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa, and when the next peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa. Each time the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit routine processing is executed, and for example, when game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa in the current peripheral control unit routine processing, processing proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT that was set in the first area of lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa when the previous peripheral control unit routine processing was executed.

When the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the first area of the transmission data memory area 1511cab for the LEDs on the frame decoration drive amplifier board, and when the next peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data memory area 1511cab for the LEDs on the frame decoration drive amplifier board. Each time the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the transmission data memory area 1511cab for the LEDs on the frame decoration drive amplifier board. Peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, and for example, when door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the current peripheral control unit regular processing, processing proceeds based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT that was set in the first area of frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab when the previous peripheral control unit regular processing was executed.

When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described below is executed, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the first area of the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board, and when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board. Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board. When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, for example, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the process proceeds based on the door side motor drive data STM-DAT that was set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed.

When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag, and when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag. Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag. When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, for example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, when the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT that was set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed.

Next, we will explain the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, which are dedicated to storing copies of the performance information, which is the various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca. In the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs, each consisting of two banks, are managed as one page. The performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used memory area, is copied as performance backup information (1fr) to the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame), and the performance information (1ms), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is the normally used memory area, is copied as performance backup information (1ms) to the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. The consistency of one page is determined by whether the contents of the two banks that make up the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 1511cb manages two pairs as one page: Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame), and the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match, and whether the contents of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) match.

In addition, the backup second area 1511cc has Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair, with a total of two pairs being managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame), and the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match, and whether the contents of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) match.

In this embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb is an area for managing two pairs as one page, one pair consisting of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair consisting of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), and the backup second area 1511cc is an area for managing two pairs as one page, one pair consisting of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair consisting of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms). Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1fr), which is the normally used memory area, is copied as performance backup information (1fr) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc each time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame), and the performance information (1ms), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1ms), which is the normally used memory area, is copied as performance backup information (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc each time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, and the program that executes these high-speed copies by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is common. In other words, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr) and performance information (1ms) are managed using a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral Control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is provided with a backup management target work area 1511da for exclusively storing backup targets among various information updated by the execution of various control programs, and a backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc for exclusively storing copies of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are not cleared to zero even when a power-on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 instructs the start of a RAM clear performance and a game state when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored after a momentary stop or blackout) (for example, when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time of turning on the power). This is completely different from the above-mentioned backup management target work area 1511ca, backup first area 1511cb, and backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c being cleared to zero. In addition, after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for setting the mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, a history of when a jackpot game state occurred) can be cleared, while the content (item) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c is not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. In this respect, the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are completely different.

The backup management target work area 1511da is composed of Bank0 (SRAM) which exclusively stores various information (SRAM) that continues across days, such as information for managing the history of occurrence of jackpot game states and information for managing special performance flags, as a backup target. Here, to briefly explain the name of Bank0 (SRAM), "Bank" is the minimum management unit that represents the size of the memory area for storing various information, as described above, and the "0" following "Bank" means that it is a memory area that is normally used to store various information that is updated by the execution of various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the memory area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. And, "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area spanning from the backup first area 1511db to the backup second area 1511dc described later have the same memory area size as "Bank0". "(SRAM)" is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" because various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d external to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is the target for backup (the same meaning is also used for performance information (SRAM) and performance backup information (SRAM) described below).

Next, the backup first area 1511db and backup second area 1511dc, which are dedicated to storing copies of the performance information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The backup first area 1511db and backup second area 1511dc are managed as one page, with two banks forming one pair. The performance information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used storage area, is quickly copied as performance backup information (SRAM) to the backup first area 1511db and backup second area 1511dc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The consistency of one page is determined by whether the contents of the two banks that make up the page match.

Specifically, the first backup area 1511db is managed as a page, with Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

The second backup area 1511dc also consists of a pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM), which are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

Thus, in this embodiment, the first backup area 1511db is an area for managing a pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one page, and the second backup area 1511dc is an area for managing a pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal display control unit]
The liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which controls the drawing of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 and controls the sound of the music and sound effects etc. played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, has a built-in sound source for controlling the sound of music and sound effects etc. (hereinafter referred to as the "built-in sound source") as shown in FIG. 72, and also has a built-in sound source VDP (Video Display a liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing various sound data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data for the screens displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460; an audio data transmission IC 1512c for transmitting serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194; and a door frame side performance transmitter 1512b for transmitting serialized drawing data to the door frame side performance display device 460 to a performance display drive board 4450 located near the bottom of the door frame side performance display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and stored within the plate unit 320. the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511; a differential circuit 1512e that differentiates, into a positive signal and a negative signal, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511; and a forced switching circuit 1512f that receives a signal from the differential circuit 1512e in addition to the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, and when a signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, connects the circuit to transmit this signal, but when a signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, connects the circuit to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. In the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, sprite data used for displaying screens and images described later, such as ring image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), operation menu background image data used for displaying an operation menu background image described later, selection display object image data used for displaying at least one selection display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used for displaying a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, volume setting icon image data used for displaying a volume adjustment icon described later, and the like, are stored. In addition, main body frame back image data used for displaying a main body frame back image in which the position of each part on the back of the main body frame 4 is visible from the player's perspective, service mode screen image data used for displaying a service mode screen, break timer setting screen image data used for displaying a break timer setting screen, and break screen image data used for displaying a break screen are stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion display object image data used for displaying suggestion display objects for encouraging the player to operate the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the performance operation unit 400.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts schedule data for screen generation corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511, sets it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and copies the first screen data of the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the peripheral control ROM 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511. After extracting the screen data from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the next screen data following the first screen data from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae and outputs it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a when the V blank signal described later is input. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one starting from the first screen data according to the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the first sound command data of the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, sets it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and transfers the first sound command data of the schedule data for sound generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the peripheral control R After extracting the sound command data from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the OM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the next sound command data following the first sound command data from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae and outputs it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a when a V blank signal is input. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one starting from the first sound command data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
In addition to the built-in sound source mentioned above, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source also has a built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as the "built-in VRAM") which, when screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, extracts game board side character data and upper tray side character data from the LCD and sound control ROM 1512b based on this input screen data, as shown in FIG. 74, creates sprite data, and generates drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. The VDP 1512a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data generated on its built-in VRAM, which is for the game board side performance display device 1600, from channel CH1 to the game board side performance display device 1600, and outputs (transmits) drawing data for the door frame side performance display device 460 from channel CH2 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, thereby synchronizing the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460.

The drawing data output from channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side performance display device 1600, while the drawing data output from channel CH2 is output (transmitted) from the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 which is located near the bottom of the door frame side performance display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and stored within the plate unit 320. In this way, the drawing data output from channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side performance display device 1600, as described above. Since the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side performance display device 1600 are each attached to the game board 5, the length of the wiring required for the path from channel CH1 to the game board side performance display device 1600 is short. However, the drawing data output from channel CH2 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, as described above. Since the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5, while the performance display drive board 4450 is stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, the length of the wiring required for the path from channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and then the performance display drive board 4450 is extremely long compared to channel CH1, making it extremely susceptible to the effects of noise. For this reason, for channel CH2, where the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is significantly longer than that for channel CH1, the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d uses a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics, Inc., making it less susceptible to the effects of noise.

Channel CH1 uses a serial differential interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), while channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, namely red, green, and blue video signals, and three synchronous signals, namely horizontal sync signal, vertical sync signal, and clock signal, and is serialized by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 4610d and transmitted to the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. These serialized signals are then restored to parallel signals in the performance display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side performance display device 460.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs one screen (one frame) of screen data to be displayed on the game board side display device 1600 and the door frame side display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on this input screen data, creates sprite data, and generates one screen (one frame) of drawing data to be displayed on the game board side display device 1600 and the door frame side display device 460. is generated on the built-in VRAM, and of the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side performance display device 1600 is output from channel CH1 to the game board side performance display device 1600, and image data for the door frame side performance display device 460 is output (transmitted) from channel CH2 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. In other words, "one screen (one frame) of screen data" refers to data for generating one screen (one frame) of drawing data to be displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 on the built-in VRAM.

In addition, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from channel CH1 to the game board side performance display device 1600, and outputs (transmits) image data for the door frame side performance display device 460 from channel CH2 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When this is done, a V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to inform that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so the interval at which the V blank signal is output is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). When the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives this V blank signal, it executes the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process described below. The interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the LCD size of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. The interval at which the V blank signal is output may also vary slightly depending on the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted.

The sound source built-in VDP 1512a uses a frame buffer system. This "frame buffer system" is a system in which one screen's worth of drawing data (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 is stored in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM), and the one screen's worth of drawing data (one frame) stored in this frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460.

When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from the main control board 1310, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source as shown in FIG. 74, and incorporates the sound data such as music and sound effects into tracks according to the track number specified in the sound command data, sets the output channel to be used according to the output channel number, and serializes the music and sound effects played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573, and outputs them as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data, and in addition to the sound data of the performance sounds such as music and sound effects and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume thereof, the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a incorporate sound data of the notification sounds for notifying the hall staff of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1 and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume thereof. Specifically, for the performance sounds, the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sounds, the maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending at all on the volume adjustment based on the rotating operation of the knob of the volume control volume 1510a. The sub-volume value of the performance sounds can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 to switch to a setting mode described later.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a combine the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a with a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used, and amplify the volume of this combined effect sound to the master volume value that is actually the volume played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573, and serialize this amplified effect sound and output it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC1512c.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized performance sound is at the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value so that the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 becomes the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the performance sound, the sound data of the performance sound incorporated in the track to be used among the multiple tracks and the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the performance sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of this synthesized performance sound is amplified to the master volume value that is actually the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and this amplified performance sound is serialized and transmitted as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. For the alarm sound, the sound data of the alarm sound incorporated in the track being used is mixed with the maximum volume that is not dependent on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, which is set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the alarm sound incorporated in the track being used, and the volume of this mixed alarm sound is amplified to the master volume value that is the volume that is actually played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and this amplified alarm sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

Here, a brief explanation of the control of playing an alarm sound to notify parlor staff of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1 when the sound effect is being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 will be given. First, the sub-volume value of the track in which the sound effect is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound data of the track in which the sound effect is incorporated, the sub-volume value set to mute, the sound data of the track in which the alarm sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value in which the alarm sound volume is set to maximum volume are mixed together, and the volume of this mixed sound effect and alarm sound are amplified to the master volume value that is the volume that is actually played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The amplified sound effect and alarm sound are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In other words, the only sound that actually flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is the notification sound at the maximum volume. At this time, since the performance sound is muted, it is not played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the performance sound proceeds according to the schedule data for sound generation described above. In this embodiment, the notification sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and when this predetermined period has elapsed, the volume of the performance sound that has been proceeding according to the schedule data for sound generation that has been forcibly set to mute is set again as the sub-volume value to the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a (at this time, if the volume has been adjusted by switching to the setting mode by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400, it is set to the sub-volume value of the adjusted performance sound), and is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In this way, when the sound effects are being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and an alarm sound is played to notify the parlor staff of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1, the volume of the sound effects is muted and the alarm sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. However, since this muted sound effects progresses according to the sound generation schedule data, when the alarm sound stops being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the sound effects do not resume from the point where the alarm sound started, but rather from the point where it progressed according to the sound generation schedule data until the predetermined period of time had elapsed since the alarm sound started.

[7-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b pre-stores game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and upper tray side character data for drawing in the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460, and also pre-stores various sound data such as music, sound effects, alert sounds, and notification sounds.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When serialized audio data is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c transmits the right-side audio data as differential serial data with positive and negative signals to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and transmits the left-side audio data as differential serial data with positive and negative signals to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882. As a result, music and sound effects according to various performances are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as differential serial data for the left and right sides between the boards extending from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. This means that even if the positive and negative signals of the left audio data are affected by noise, when the noise components on the positive and negative signals are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 to form a single left audio data, the noise components cancel each other out, eliminating the noise components, and thus providing a noise countermeasure.

[7-4-2d. Door frame side performance transmitter IC]
As shown in FIG. 74, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d receives drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, namely, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronous signals, namely, a horizontal synchronous signal, a vertical synchronous signal, and a clock signal, and the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal are each composed of 8 bits, totaling 24 bits. In this embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d are each composed of 6 bits, totaling 18 bits, so the upper 6 bits of each video signal are input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. The lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to distinguish, so the lower 2 bits containing weak color information are invalidated even though they are output from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

When the three video signals, red, green, and blue video signals, and the three sync signals, horizontal, vertical, and clock signals, which are the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, are input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d serializes the three video signals, red, green, and blue video signals, and the three sync signals, horizontal, vertical, and clock signals, into differential type serial signals (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd., and transmits these various signals from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 using only a differential one-pair cable.

As described above, the drawing data output from channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side performance display device 1600, so the length of the wiring required for the path (first path) from channel CH1 to the game board side performance display device 1600 is short, but the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is output (transmitted) from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 to the door frame side performance display device 460, so the length of the wiring required for the path (second path) from channel CH2 to the door frame side performance display device 460 is much longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path, making it extremely susceptible to the effects of noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in Fig. 1, various wirings must be passed along the open side of the main body frame 4 on the closed side opposite the locking unit 700 shown in Fig. 5 to electrically connect various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side to various boards provided on the door frame 3 side, such as the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 to the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the tray unit 320 provided on the door frame 3. However, in addition to the payout device 830, a full tank branch unit 770 is arranged on the closed side of the main body frame 4, which can guide the game balls paid out by this payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 and can branch and guide the paid out game balls to the lower tray 322 side when the upper tray 321 is full of game balls.
5, which is a unit made up of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 6 and other boards supplied with power from the pachinko island equipment, is disposed below the main body frame 4. In this way, the various wirings electrically connecting the various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are routed near the payout device 830, the full tank branch unit 770, the power supply board 931, etc., and are in an environment subject to noise caused by the driving of the payout motor 834 provided on the payout device 830, as well as noise caused by electrostatic discharge from game balls and noise that has invaded the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

For this reason, for channel CH2, in which the length of the wiring for transmitting drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1, a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Corporation is adopted for the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, making it less susceptible to noise. In this embodiment, as described above, a differential one pair cable is used as the wiring for electrically connecting between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, but this differential one pair cable is not a parallel line in which two wires are simply arranged in parallel, but a twisted pair cable. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair cable.

Here, we will briefly explain the case where parallel wires are used as a differential one-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and receiver. For channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, where the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 adopts a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. to make it less susceptible to noise. However, with only this hardware configuration, the serial data in the parallel wires may be corrupted by noise caused by electrostatic discharge of the game balls, noise that has entered the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc. If affected, the noise is not cancelled (removed) when received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 mounted on the performance display drive board 4450 housed within the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, so the serial data is received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in an affected state, and the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 as distorted data different from the normal data, causing a problem that an image resembling a snow storm is displayed in the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460, making it impossible to discern what the image is.

Therefore, in this embodiment, for channel CH2 of the sound source-embedded VDP 1512a, where the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1 of the sound source-embedded VDP 1512a, a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Inc. is adopted in the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 to make it less susceptible to the effects of noise. In addition to this hardware configuration, a twisted pair cable is adopted as a differential one pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and receiver, which is capable of canceling (removing) noise on the receiving side even if the differential method serial data is affected by noise that has entered the wiring. As a result, even if the serial data is affected in the twisted pair cable by noise caused by electrostatic discharge of the game balls, noise that has entered the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the noise is cancelled (removed) when it is received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, so that the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is reliably received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side performance display device 460, so that the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be reliably displayed on the door frame side performance display device 460. By cancelling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent images such as sandstorms that make it impossible to recognize what the image is, from being displayed on the door frame side performance display device 460, and therefore it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play. This helps prevent players from losing motivation to play due to noise.

In this embodiment, between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, that is, between the transmitter and receiver, there are a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally constructed, but are assembled separately, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. After the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4, various wiring such as harnesses and twisted cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, so that the various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side can be electrically connected to the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side. With this configuration, after opening the door frame 3 from the main frame 4 and removing the various wiring, the door frame 3 can be removed from the main frame 4 to perform maintenance on the main frame 4 and the door frame 3. If a problem with the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3' can be attached to the main frame 4 in place of the defective door frame 3, and the various wiring from the various boards on the door frame 3' side can be electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 on the main frame 4 side, thereby electrically connecting the various boards on the main frame 4 side to the various boards on the door frame 3' side.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 adopts a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. to make it less susceptible to noise, and in addition to such a hardware configuration, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) noise on the receiving side even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by noise that has entered the wiring is adopted as a differential one pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, the boards between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the boards between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the boards between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the performance display drive board 4450 are each electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, while the power wiring and wiring that transmits various other signals are each electrically connected by a harness. As a result, in the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, a power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. Therefore, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are each formed with the above-mentioned video transmission wiring pattern at a predetermined distance from the power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns. Since the path from the transmitter to the receiver crosses multiple relay terminal boards, namely the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, a problem occurs in that a part of the signal transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise or the output level of the signal decreases between the input and output of the video transmission wiring patterns formed on these multiple relay terminal boards. Therefore, in this embodiment, impedance matching is performed on the video transmission wiring patterns formed on these multiple relay terminal boards.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the performance display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, whereas the power wiring and the wiring that transmits various other signals are electrically connected by harnesses, with one of the twisted pair cables being red and the other being gray, and the wiring that supplies power in the harness being red and the other multiple wirings being gray. Note that the wiring that supplies power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differentiating circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted to the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. In addition to the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, the forced switching circuit 1512f receives the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, which is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e and input. In this differential circuit 1512e, the LOCKN signal output request data is serialized into a differential type serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is sent as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side performance display device 460 to check whether or not there is a problem with the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver, during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or during the period when the pachinko machine is waiting for customers and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600. The forced switching circuit 1512f is configured to connect the circuit to transmit two signals when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, and to connect the circuit to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and to the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.On the other hand, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, so that the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and to the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits LOCKN signal output request data to the performance display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and during the period when the machine is waiting for customers and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600.

The performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 is mainly composed of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V, which receives serial signals (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 via the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 described below, restores the various serialized signals to parallel signals, and outputs them to the door frame side performance display device 460.

The door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and if it determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it outputs a LOCKN signal (described later) to inform the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is met based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the sound source built-in VDP 1512a to generate an image to inform the game board side performance display device 1600, and outputs the image to the game board side performance display device 1600, thereby displaying it in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to notify the user.

When the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, it outputs a LOCKN signal (described later) to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can determine that there is no problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no problem with the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, while when the LOCKN signal is not input, it determines that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is a problem with the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, and controls the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to output an alert image to that effect (for example, "A problem has occurred with the liquid crystal display device on the upper tray side. Please call a store clerk.") to the game board side performance display device 1600, and controls the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to output an alert sound to that effect (for example, "A problem has occurred with the liquid crystal display device on the upper tray side.") to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, thereby playing the alert sound from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. This allows notifications to be made by notification images displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and notification sounds that are repeatedly played from speakers or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the decorative LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 may be lit up.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
The RTC control unit 4165, which holds calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second, is configured with the RTC 4165a at its core, as shown in Fig. 72. This RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa (hereinafter referred to as the "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa") in which calendar information and time information are held. The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is used in this embodiment) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. In other words, the RTC 4165a is not supplied with power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) at all, but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). This allows the RTC 4165a to update and retain calendar information and time information using power supplied from the battery 4165b even if power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a and sets it in the RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, and is able to display effects based on the acquired calendar information and time information on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. Examples of such effects include, for example, on December 25th, a screen of a Christmas tree or reindeer is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, and on New Year's Eve, a screen performing a New Year countdown is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. The calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the game board side performance display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight. When the game board side performance display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control. The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 in 5% increments over a range from 100% to 70%, and the currently set brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460.

In addition to calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores input date and time information, which is the date and hour, minute, and second when the calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information were first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa.

When the backlights of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 are cold cathode fluorescent tube type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the backlight ON/OFF or only turns it ON.

The various information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information, is set on the production line of the gaming machine manufacturer. On the production line, in order to perform various tests, such as display tests of the gaming board side performance display device 1600, for example, the input date and time information is set to the manufacturing date and time, which is the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second input on the production line as the date and time when the gaming board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on.

In this way, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa can store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (such as the probability of a low or high probability jackpot game state occurring), such as brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is of the LED type, and input date and time information.

In addition, the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright or too dark for the brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 set at the time of manufacture depending on the environment of the hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400, it is possible to switch to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. After the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for setting the setting mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, and if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the game board side performance display device 1600 is in a customer waiting state and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600, a screen for setting the setting mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. By operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, it is possible to reset the calendar information and time information, and adjust the brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 to the desired brightness. This adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LEDs stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the brightness correction program described above to correct the decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side performance display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is an LED type. The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 to identify the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on, acquires calendar information specifying the year, month, and day and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second to identify the current date and time, and acquires brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 in 5% increments over a range from 100% to 70%, and the brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 that is currently set. The acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on the correction information previously stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, if it has already been six months since the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on, based on the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, corresponding correction information (e.g., 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness becomes 80%, which is 5% higher than this 75%, which is the obtained correction information. The brightness of the backlight is adjusted and turned on, and if 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side performance display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85%, which is 75% plus the obtained correction information of 10%.

The current date and time may be determined by directly acquiring calendar information specifying the year, month, and date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or the current date and time may be determined by acquiring the current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 and the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the peripheral control unit power-on process described below.

[834. Volume Control]
As described above, the volume control volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music and sound effects from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob. As described above, the volume control volume 1510a has a resistance value that can be changed by rotating the knob, and the electrically connected peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob from an analog value to a digital value, and converts it into 1024 levels of values from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, as described above, the 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512 a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573.

In this way, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation of the knob. In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying the hall staff of the occurrence of malfunctions in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1, and notification sounds for notifying the contents of the game performance (for example, making the screen displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 more impressive, notifying the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a game state that is advantageous to the player, etc.) are also played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sounds and notification sounds are played without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob, and the volume can be adjusted from mute to maximum volume by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source) by a program.

Unlike the board volume, which is divided into seven stages as described above, the volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. As a result, even if, for example, a hall staff member or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the music, sound effects, and other sound effects played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 will be low, but when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or a player is cheating, a warning sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the sound effects is low, it is possible to prevent hall staff and the like from having difficulty noticing malfunctions or player cheating due to the warning sound.

In addition, based on the current board volume that is set by adjusting the volume by rotating the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be lowered so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects, while the volume of the advertising sound can be increased to make the screen displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 more impressive in addition to the music and sound effects, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a more advantageous gaming state.

In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 to switch to the setting mode. After the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for setting the mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the game board side performance display device 1600 is performing a demonstration in a customer waiting state, a screen for setting the mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. The volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to the desired volume by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode. Specifically, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume control volume 1510a is converted from an analog value to a digital value by the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and a predetermined value is added or subtracted from this converted value in response to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400, thereby increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume. This adjusted volume is updated as a sub-volume value for the tracks in which sound data for performance sounds such as music and sound effects are incorporated among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the performance sounds, but is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above-mentioned alert sounds and notification sounds.

In this way, in this embodiment, there are two ways to adjust the volume of music and sound effects: by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, or by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400. Since the volume adjustment volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to always keep the main body frame 4 open from the outer frame 2. In that case, the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a can be rotated by the hall staff. However, the volume adjusted by the hall staff may be too low for the player to hear the music and sound effects, or may be too high for the player to hear the music and sound effects. Therefore, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, if the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated within a specified time, or if the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the machine is in a waiting state for customers and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600, a screen for entering the setting mode will be displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, and the volume of the music and sound effects can be adjusted to the desired volume by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 in accordance with this setting mode screen. This allows the player to adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to the desired volume, so if the volume adjusted by the hall staff is too low and the music and sound effects are difficult to hear, the player can operate the dial operation unit 401 or press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 to increase the volume to the desired volume, or if the volume adjusted by the hall staff is too high and the music and sound effects are too loud, the player can operate the dial operation unit 401 or press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400 to decrease the volume to the desired volume.

In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not being played for a predetermined period of time and is in a waiting state for customers and the demonstration by the game board side performance display device 1600 is repeated (for example, 10 times), the volume adjusted by the player who was previously seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing is cancelled and the volume is initialized. This volume initialization is set to the volume adjusted by the hall staff, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall staff by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. As a result, if a player who played while seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time felt that the adjusted volume was low and that the music and sound effects were difficult to hear, a player who is currently seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can increase the volume to the desired level by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400, and if a player who played while seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time felt that the adjusted volume was high and that the music and sound effects were loud, a player who is currently seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can decrease the volume to the desired level by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the performance operation unit 400.

[8. Power Supply System]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 75 and 76. Figure 75 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko machine, and Figure 76 is a block diagram continuing from Figure 75. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, followed by the power supplied to each control board, etc. Note that the grounds (GND) of the various boards and the grounds (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 931, and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 931
The power supply board 931 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into a power outlet of the pachinko island equipment. When the power switch 934 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island equipment is turned on. is supplied to the power supply board 931, allowing the pachinko machine 1 to be powered on.

As shown in FIG. 75, the power supply board 931 is equipped with a power supply control unit 935 and a launch control unit 953. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from 24 volts AC (24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, and the launch control unit 953 is a circuit that drives and controls the launch solenoid 682 of the ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball sending solenoid 255 of the ball sending unit 250 shown in FIG. 1.

The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power supply creation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island equipment is supplied to the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 via the power supply board 931, and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. This synchronous rectification circuit 935a rectifies the AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island equipment and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 935b. This power factor correction circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power to create direct current +37V (DC +37V, hereinafter referred to as "+37V") and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. This smoothing circuit 935c removes ripples from the +37V supplied, smoothing the +37V and supplying it to the launch control circuit 953a and power supply circuit 935d of the launch control unit 953.

Capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and capacitor BC1 supplies backup power to the RAM (dispense control built-in RAM) built into the dispense control MPU 952a of the dispense control unit 952 in the dispense control board 951.

The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 953 uses the +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as the driving power source to adjust the drive current to be output to the launch solenoid 682 in order to launch (launch) the game ball toward the game area 5a shown in FIG. 1 with a launch strength (launch strength) corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 302, while outputting a constant current to the ball sending solenoid 255 of the ball sending unit 250, so that the ball sending member of the ball sending unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320, and sends the received game ball to the ball launching device 650.

The power supply generating circuit 935d generates DC +5V (DC +5V, hereafter referred to as "+5V"), DC +12V (DC +12V, hereafter referred to as "+12V"), and DC +24V (DC +24V, hereafter referred to as "+24V") from the +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c, and supplies these to the dispensing control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The power supply system to which +5V is applied and supplied is the +5V power supply line, the power supply system to which +12V is applied and supplied is the +12V power supply line, and the power supply system to which +24V is applied and supplied is the +24V power supply line.

The +5V generated by the power supply generating circuit 935d is supplied to the dispensing control board 951, as described below. The +5V supplied to the dispensing control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control filter circuit 951a, and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. The +12V generated by the power supply generating circuit 935d is supplied to the +5V generating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 951. This +5V generating circuit 1310g generates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from the +12V from the dispensing control board 951. The +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h, and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM of the dispensing control board 951 and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the dispensing control board 951. In other words, the +5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 flows toward the power terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and the current flows toward the power terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM, which is in the forward direction due to the diode PD0, and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1. In this way, the capacitor BC1 can be charged by being supplied with +5V by an electrical connection method in which the +5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 flows to the dispensing control board 951 and then returns from the dispensing control board 951 to the power supply board 931. As a result, when the +5V generated by the power supply circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the dispensing control board 951, the charge stored in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the dispensing control board 951 as the dispensing VBB. Therefore, although the current does not flow to the power supply terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a due to the diode PD0, and the dispensing control MPU 952a does not operate, the memory contents are retained by supplying the dispensing VBB to the power supply terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 951, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. In other words, the +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the current flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM, which is in the forward direction due to the diode MD0, and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0. In this way, the capacitor BC0 can be charged by being supplied with +5V by an electrical connection method in which the +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied to the main control board 1310 and then from the dispensing control board 951 to the power supply board 931. As a result, when the +12V generated by the power supply circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the +5V generating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and the +5V generating circuit 1310g is no longer able to generate +5V, the charge stored in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 as the main VBB, so that the current is prevented from flowing through the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a by the diode MD0 and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, but the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM, so that the memory contents are maintained. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the main control built-in RAM is composed of the above diode MD0 and the above capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, an overview of the voltages supplied to each control board, etc. will be provided, followed by an explanation of the voltages supplied primarily to the dispensing control board and the voltages supplied to the main control board.

The three voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the dispensing control board 951 as shown in FIG. 75, and of these three voltages, the two voltages, +12V and +24V, are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 951. The three voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are also supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and are supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 via this frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively.

The three voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are respectively supplied to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180, as shown in FIG. 76(a). The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as lighting signals, blinking signals, and gradation lighting signals to the various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 outputs drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the game board 5.

The peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a +3.3V generation circuit 1510b that generates direct current 3.3V (DC +3.3V, hereafter referred to as "+3.3V") from the +5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The +3.3V generated by the +3.3V generation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, the +12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600b of the game board side performance display device 1600.

In response to this, the three types of voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, as shown in FIG. 76(b). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is equipped with a +9V generation circuit 194a that creates direct current +9V (DC +9V, hereafter referred to as "+9V") from the +12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. In addition to the +9V created by the +9V generation circuit 194a, a total of four types of voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, are supplied to various decorative boards, etc. of the door frame 3.

The +12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 is also supplied to the upper tray side LCD module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper tray side LCD module power supply circuit 4450x creates +3.3V from +12V. The +3.3V created by the upper tray side LCD module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to the various electronic components that make up the LCD module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. 74, as well as to the upper tray side LCD module backlight power supply circuit 4450y and the door frame side performance display device 460. The voltage created by the upper tray side LCD module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side performance display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to the dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 952a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 931 and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 952a and the like of the payout control unit 952. The +12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b and the like of the payout control unit 952, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 is a circuit that outputs a signal conveying the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in the game center (hall). The hall computer monitors the player's play by obtaining the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. Note that +24 from the power supply board 931 is not used by the payout control board 951 at all, but is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in Fig. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a +5V generating circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, etc., in addition to the main control MPU 1310a, etc. The +5V generating circuit 1310g receives +12V from the power supply board 931 via the output control board 951, and generates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. In the main control board 1310, the power supply system to which the +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g is applied and supplied becomes the +5V power supply line. In this embodiment, the circuit is configured so that the +5V power line created by the power supply circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected, so that the +5V power line created by the power supply circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to the various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and the +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 is not electrically connected to the various electronic components of other boards other than the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 1310a, etc. The +12V from the dispensing control board 951 is supplied, for example, to the main control input circuit 1310b, etc., and the +24V from the dispensing control board 951 is supplied, for example, to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 via the dispensing control board 951, and monitors signs of a power failure or momentary interruption of these +12V and +24V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects signs of a power failure or momentary interruption of +12V and +24V, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. The power failure warning signal is input to the dispensing control MPU 952a via the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control input circuit 952b of the dispensing control board 951. The power failure warning signal is also input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. In addition, the power outage warning signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, as shown in FIG. 76(b), and is also input to the door frame decoration board, etc. via this frame decoration drive amplifier board 194.

In this embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltages applied to the two power lines, the +12V power line and the +24V power line, respectively, and is therefore able to more accurately detect signs of a power failure or momentary interruption, etc., compared to monitoring the voltage applied to either the +12V power line or the +24V power line.

[9. Main Control Board Circuit]
Next, the circuit of the main control board 1310 shown in Fig. 69 will be described with reference to Figs. 77 to 79. Fig. 77 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, Fig. 78 is a circuit diagram showing the power failure monitoring circuit, and Fig. 79 is a circuit diagram showing the communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in Fig. 75 will be described, followed by the power supply, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, various input/output signals to the main control MPU, and the communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510.

The main control board 1310 is mainly composed of the main control MPU 1310a, main control input circuit 1310b, main control output circuit 1310c, main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, +5V creation circuit 1310g, and main control filter circuit 1310h shown in Figs. 69 and 75, as well as peripheral circuits, as shown in Fig. 77, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal, and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 (24 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal.

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in Fig. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310h is mainly composed of a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics, magnetically shielded with ferrite. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 has a first terminal to which +5V generated by a +5V generating circuit 1310g is applied, a second terminal to which is grounded (GND), and a third terminal to which +5V with noise components removed is output. The +5V applied to the first terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC0, the other end of which is grounded (GND), so that ripples (AC components superimposed on the voltage) are first removed and the voltage is smoothed.

The +5V output from terminal 3 is electrically connected to one end of capacitor MC1 and electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment), which are grounded to ground (GND), to further remove ripple and smooth the voltage. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. Note that if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary interruption.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC3, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed to further remove ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to ground (GND).

In addition, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the capacitor MC3 and the anode terminal of the diode MD0. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a, and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC4, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 through a resistor MR0. In other words, the +5V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 through the diode MD0. As a result, as described above, when the +12V generated by the power supply generating circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is no longer supplied to the +5V generating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the output control board 951 and the +5V generating circuit 1310g is no longer able to generate +5V, the charge stored in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB. Therefore, since the current is prevented from flowing through the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a by the diode MD0, the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, but the main VBB is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM, thereby retaining the memory contents.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
The +5V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 as shown in Fig. 77. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC5, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time of the delay circuit can be set by the capacitance of this capacitor MC5. Specifically, when the +5V input to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 reaches a threshold value (e.g., 4.25V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The output terminal is an open collector output type, with one end electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR1, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and one end electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC6, which is grounded to ground (GND). This capacitor MC6 removes ripples and smoothes them out. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is greater than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor MR1, and the logic becomes HI, and this logic is input to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, while when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is less than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is input to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca are both negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes less than the threshold, the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca are reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC7, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed and ripples are removed. The ground terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
The +5V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, as shown in Fig. 77. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC8, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V input to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, this smoothed +5V is also applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. With +5V applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal, the main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is the output terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input to it. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to ground (GND), and the D terminal, which outputs the divided wave of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b is a circuit to which detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in Fig. 69 are input, as well as operation signals (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 shown in Fig. 70. The circuit configuration to which the detection signals from each switch are input is the same, so here, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which operation signal (RAM clear signal) from operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 is operated when clearing the RAM (dispense control built-in RAM) built into the dispensing control MPU 952a of the dispensing control board 951 and the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from power-on, or when an error is notified after power-on, it is operated to cancel the error, and has a function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period from power-on and a function of canceling the error after power-on (after the period during which it functions as a RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed from power-on). Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error that the dispensing control board 951 has, when an operation signal is input from the operation switch 954 within a predetermined period from power-on, it is judged to be a RAM clear signal for clearing the main control built-in RAM and performs a process of clearing the main control built-in RAM.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal with a logic LOW is input from the dispensing control board 951 to the main control board 1310, whereas when the operation switch 954 is operated, an operation signal with a logic HI is input from the dispensing control board 951 (this point will be explained in detail later).

The transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the dispensing control board 951 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on is electrically connected to one end of the pull-up resistor MR2, which is electrically connected to the +12V power line, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via resistor MR3, as shown in Fig. 77. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR3, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4, which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR5, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via a non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, one of which (MIC10A) shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input without inverting it).

The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the dispensing control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and the transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the dispensing control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and input with a logic LOW, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal from the dispensing control board 951 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and input with a logic HI.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR3 and MR4 and transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by an operation signal from operation switch 954.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, a logically LOW operation signal is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR0, turning transistor MTR0 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR5, and a logically HI operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a determines that this is not an instruction to perform a RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal, which has been pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2 and has a logic HI, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, turning the transistor MTR0 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954, which has a logic LOW, is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that this is an instruction to perform a RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the dispensing control board 951. In other words, between the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 951, in order to suppress the effects of noise that may invade the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, a voltage of +12V, which is higher than the control reference voltage of +5V, is used to increase the reliability of the signal. Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning hole sensor 4020, the first starting hole sensor 4002, and the second starting hole sensor 4004 that are directly input to the main control board 1310 are pulled up to the +5V side by pull-up resistors, while the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general winning hole sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003 that are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 69 are not directly input to the main control board 1310, and are therefore pulled up to the +12V side by pull-up resistors, just like the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltage, +12V and +24V, from the power supply board 931 via the dispensing control board 951, and +12V and +24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors for signs of power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, and when it detects a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure, it outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning to the dispensing control MPU 952a of the dispensing control board 951 and the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the main control MPU 1310a. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of a power failure or momentary power failure of +24V, the monitoring of a power failure or momentary power failure of +12V, and the output of the power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of power outage monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is mainly composed of a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, are electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR20, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and +5V is applied to the REF terminal, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (set to 2.495V in this embodiment) that serves as the comparison reference voltage for the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC20, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is smoothed by removing ripples (AC components superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor MC20. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to ground (GND).

The comparator MIC21 has two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V with the reference voltage Vref, and the other (MIC21B) is used to compare the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V with the reference voltage Vref. The monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is applied to the terminal 3, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the terminal 2, which is the negative terminal of MIC21A. The monitoring voltage V2 of +12V is applied to the terminal 5, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the terminal 6, which is the negative terminal of MIC21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC22 has two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC21, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The +5V applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is smoothed by the capacitor MC21 to remove ripples, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is grounded to ground (GND).

[9-5-2. Monitoring of +24V power outage or momentary power outage]
As described above, the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 compares the +24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref to monitor the +24V power supply. The 3rd terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the +24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR21, one end of which is electrically connected to the +24V power supply line, and the other end of the resistor MR22, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND), as shown in Fig. 78, and is also electrically connected to the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22 and the other end of the capacitor MC23, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The +24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the 3rd terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC23. The values of resistors MR21 and MR22 are set so that when the +24V power supply experiences a power outage or momentary interruption and the voltage starts to drop from +24V to a preset power outage detection voltage V1pf (set to 21.40V in this embodiment), the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes equal to the reference voltage Vref.

The output terminal of comparator MIC21A, terminal 1, is an open collector output, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR23, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and one end of capacitor MC24, which is grounded to ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. Capacitor MC24 acts as a low-pass filter.

When the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 1, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor MR23, and the signal with a logic HI is input to terminal PR, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 1, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the signal with a logic LOW is input to terminal PR, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. Monitoring of +12V power outage or momentary power outage]
As described above, the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 compares the +12V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref to monitor the +12V power supply. The 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR24, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and to the other end of the resistor MR25, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND), as shown in Fig. 78, and is also electrically connected to the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25 and to the other end of the capacitor MC25, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The +12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC25. The values of resistors MR24 and MR25 are set so that when the +12V power fails or is momentarily interrupted and the voltage starts to drop from +12V to a preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in this embodiment), the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes equal to the reference voltage Vref.

Terminal 7, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is an open collector output and is electrically connected to terminal 1, which is the output terminal of MIC21A described above. Therefore, one end is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR23, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC24, which is grounded to ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. As described above, capacitor MC24 serves as a low-pass filter.

When the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 7, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor MR23, and the signal with a logic HI is input to terminal PR, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 7, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the signal with a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Power outage warning signal output]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, in response to a change in edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and outputs this stored value (logic) from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, and also outputs the inverted value of the stored value (logic) from the negative logic 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. When a signal with a logic LOW is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latched state and outputs a signal with the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal (at this time, a signal with the logic of the signal output from 1Q inverted, that is, a signal with the same logic as the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal). On the other hand, when a signal with a logic HI is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 sets the latched state. In addition, when a signal with a logic HI is input to the clear terminal CLR terminal to set the latched state, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 maintains a state in which a signal with a logic LOW is input to the preset terminal PR terminal, so that the D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a signal with a logic HI from the output terminal 1Q terminal (at this time, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 maintains a state in which a signal with the logic of the inverted signal output from 1Q is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal).

In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured so that the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, and the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, are grounded to ground (GND), so that there is no change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is not stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a signal from the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors for a power outage or momentary interruption of +24V, and a signal from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors for a power outage or momentary interruption of +12V, at the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, and outputs a signal from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, based on these signals. The power supply terminal Vcc terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC22, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The +5V applied to the power supply terminal Vcc terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has ripples removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC22, the ground terminal GND terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal, which inverts the logic of the output terminal 1Q terminal, is not electrically connected to the outside.

In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function at the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal. This power failure clear signal is output during the main control side power-on process performed by the main control MPU 1310a, which will be described later, and is stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal with its logic set to LOW via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. When the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latched state, and at this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, is inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power outage clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI through the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to set the latch state when the power outage clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the input state with the logic becoming LOW at the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning signal. In addition, the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is output from the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb to the output control board 951 as a power outage warning signal, and is output to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal.

As shown in Fig. 78, the main control input circuit 1310b electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR26, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via a resistor MR27. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27 and to the other end of a resistor MR28, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR29, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via a non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, one of which (MIC23A) shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input without inverting it).

The circuit consisting of resistors MR27 and MR28 and transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, the transistor MTR20 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side, the transistor MTR20 is turned ON, and the switch circuit is also turned ON.

When both the conditions that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, a signal with a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20, turning the transistor MTR20 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR29, and a power failure warning signal with a logic HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23.

On the other hand, when either the condition that the voltage of +24V is less than the power failure detection voltage V1pf or the condition that the voltage of +12V is less than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, a signal with a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20, turning the transistor MTR20 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and a power failure warning signal with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23.

The main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, which outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the dispensing control board 951 as a dispensing power outage warning signal, is configured as an open collector output type circuit as shown in Fig. 78, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 via resistor MR30. The base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor MR30 and is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR32, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage via a resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33 and to the other end of a resistor MR34, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC26, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND), and is also electrically connected to the dispensing control board 951 via a wiring (harness). In addition, when the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the dispensing control board 951 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12V power line in the dispensing control input circuit 952b of the dispensing control unit 952 shown in FIG. 70 in the dispensing control board 951, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a shown in FIG. 70.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR30, MR31 and the front-stage transistor MTR21 is the front-stage switch circuit, and the circuit consisting of resistors MR33, MR34 and the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is the rear-stage switch circuit, which is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is pulled down to ground (GND), turning transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage and the preceding switch circuit also turns OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR22 in the succeeding stage, is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR32, turning transistor MTR22 in the succeeding stage and the succeeding switch circuit also turns ON. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5V, turning the transistor MTR21 ON and the preceding switch circuit ON, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, is pulled down to ground (GND), turning the succeeding transistor MTR22 OFF and the succeeding switch circuit OFF.

When both the conditions that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and that the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, a signal with a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, turning the preceding transistor MTR21 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, turning the succeeding transistor MTR22 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the dispensing control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic LOW is input to the dispensing control board 951.

On the other hand, when either the condition that the voltage of +24V is less than the power failure detection voltage V1pf or the condition that the voltage of +12V is less than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, a signal with a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, turning the preceding transistor MTR21 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, turning the succeeding transistor MTR22 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the downstream transistor MTR22 is pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor in the dispensing control input circuit 952b of the dispensing control unit 952 in the dispensing control board 951 via wiring (harness), and a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input to the dispensing control board 951.

The main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, which outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal, is configured as an open collector output type circuit as shown in FIG. 78, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35 and the other end of the resistor MR36, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wire (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to a +12V power line in a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 72.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR35 and MR36 and transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor MTR23 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning the transistor MTR23 ON and the switch circuit ON.

When both the conditions that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, a signal with a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23, turning the transistor MTR23 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by a pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and a peripheral power failure warning signal with a logic HI is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either the condition that the voltage of +24V is less than the power outage detection voltage V1pf or the condition that the voltage of +12V is less than the power outage detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, a signal with a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23, turning the transistor MTR23 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and a peripheral power outage warning signal with a logic LOW is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b, which transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning signal, and the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, which outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal, each have one transistor, and the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the peripheral control board 1510 are While the logic is the same, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, which outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the dispensing control board 951 as a dispensing power outage warning signal, has two transistors, one in the front stage and one in the rear stage, and the logic of the dispensing power outage warning signal is the inverted logic of the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the peripheral control board 1510, and is different from the logic of the power outage warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal.

In addition, the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to one end of resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via a non-inverting buffer ICMIC23, while the collector terminal of transistor MTR22 in the rear stage of the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is electrically connected via wiring (harness) to the other end of a pull-up resistor, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951, and the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 of the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is electrically connected via wiring (harness) to a pull-up resistor, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are mounted on the main control board 1310, and between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, a power outage warning is issued by the logic (ON/OFF signal) of the power outage warning signal using +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a. However, between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 951, and between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, in order to suppress the influence of noise that enters the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the boards, a power outage warning is issued by the logic (ON/OFF signal) of the power outage warning signal using +12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of +5V of the main control MPU 1310a, dispensing control MPU 952a, and peripheral control MPU 1511a.

[9-6. Various input/output signals to the main control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to Fig. 77. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, receives serial data from the dispensing control board 951 shown in Fig. 69 as a dispensing main serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. On the other hand, the TXA terminal and TXB terminal, which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, transmit serial data to be sent to the dispensing control board 951 from the TXA terminal to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb as a main payment serial data transmission signal, and transmit a main payment serial data transmission signal from the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb to the dispensing control board 951, and transmit serial data to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in Figure 69 as a main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the TXB terminal to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, and transmit a main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition to the above-mentioned operation signal (RAM clear signal), each input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a receives, for example, a payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951, which indicates that the above-mentioned main pay serial data reception signal has been successfully received, via the main control input circuit 1310b, and detection signals from various switches such as the first start port sensor 4002 shown in Figure 69 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main pay ACK signal indicating that the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal has been normally received is output to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs the main pay ACK signal to the payout control board 951, or a drive signal is output to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca for the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69, and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs the drive signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310 d to the start port solenoid 2107, and outputs drive signals to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca for various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. 69, and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs drive signals to the various displays, and outputs various information related to the game (game information) to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs various information related to the game (game information) to the payout control board 951, etc.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to Fig. 79. The main control board 1310 is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 shown in Fig. 75 via the output control board 951, and the +5V generation circuit 1310g generates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted using +12V, which is a higher voltage than +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, in order to suppress the influence of noise that enters the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, thereby increasing its reliability.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 has the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit is mainly composed of resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and transistor MTR50. In contrast, the peripheral control board 1510 has a communication interface circuit mainly composed of a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (composed of a built-in infrared LED and photo IC).

+12V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 951, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of an electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacity: 220 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment) whose negative terminal is grounded to ground (GND). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness).
As a result, if, for example, a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and power from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the main control board 1310 via the discharge control board 951, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 can continue to be applied as +12 V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacity: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a can at least transfer the command set in its transmission buffer register 1310aeb by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmission shift register 41aea via the serial management unit 1310aec, and complete transmission from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main serial data.

As described above, the main serial data transmission signal sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted using a voltage of +12V, which is higher than the control reference voltage of +5V for the main control MPU 1310a, in order to reduce the effects of noise that may enter the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. This increases the reliability of the signal.

In this embodiment, when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, when the main control serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to its transmission buffer register 1310aeb via the serial management unit 1310aec to the transmission shift register 41aea and transmits it as main serial data from the transmission shift register 1310aea, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 can transmit a main serial data transmission signal with a logic HI due to +12V.

In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a is 32 bytes, and since one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data, a maximum of 10 packets of data can be stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. In this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19,200 bps.

The cathode terminal (terminal 3) of photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of transistor MTR50 on the main control board 1310 via resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). Resistor AR10 on the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor that limits the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal, which outputs the main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 77, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR50, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor MTR50 via a resistor MR51. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51, and is also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR52, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded to ground (GND).

The circuit consisting of resistors MR51 and MR52 and transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main loop serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, transistor MTR50 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, no forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of photocoupler AIC10 of peripheral control board 1510, so photocoupler AIC10 is turned OFF. On the other hand, when the logic of the main loop serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR50, transistor MTR50 is turned ON, and the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of photocoupler AIC10 of peripheral control board 1510, so photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON.

The anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with +5V supplied from the power supply board 931 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, the negative terminal of which is grounded to ground (GND). The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, as well as to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6), which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (terminal 4) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal (terminal 5) of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11 electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of photocoupler AIC10 changes, and that signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of peripheral control MPU 1511a as a main peripheral serial data transmission signal.

As a result, as described above, if the +5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power outage or momentary interruption, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can continue to be applied as +5V to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. When a power outage or momentary interruption occurs, the +5V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 is applied, so that the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 can complete transmission of the data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the main serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main serial data, is reliably received by the peripheral control board 1510 without being cut off or missing.

When the logic of the main loop serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor MTR50 OFF and turning the photocoupler AIC10 OFF. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the main loop serial data transmission signal with a logic of HI is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. On the other hand, when the logic of the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5V by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and turning on the photocoupler AIC10, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the main serial data transmission signal with a logic of LOW is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In this way, the logic of the main serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same logic as the logic of the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510.

In this embodiment, measures are taken when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs on the +5V power line to which +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is applied, and the +12V power line to which +12V, which is the communication voltage applied via the diode MD50, is applied, causing the control reference voltage and communication voltage to drop. In other words, the +5V power line and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, which uses the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power source, are electrically connected in parallel to the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a, so that even if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the +5V power line drops, the control reference voltage is applied from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h, which is the first auxiliary power source, so that the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and the control reference voltage is configured to be connected to the +5V power line by the resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and transistor MTR50. For the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which functions as a communication interface circuit, +12V applied to the +12V power line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 as a communication voltage, and the cathode terminal of this diode MD50 is electrically connected in parallel with the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power source. Even if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the communication voltage applied from the +12V power line through the diode MD50 drops, the communication voltage is applied from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power source, so that the communication voltage can be maintained. This makes it possible to prevent commands being sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 from being cut off, and also prevents them from being lost, so that the peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive commands being sent. This makes it possible to eliminate the risk of missing commands immediately after a power outage or during a momentary interruption.

In addition, the capacitance of electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h is set to 470 μF, and the capacitance of electrolytic capacitor MC50 is set to 220 μF so that all of the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a can be completely transmitted as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which is composed of resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and transistor MTR50 and functions as a communications interface circuit. As a result, even if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb can be completely transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data via the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which functions as an interface circuit, so that the peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb without interruption or loss.

[10. Circuit of the dispensing control board]
Next, the circuit of the dispensing control board 951 shown in Fig. 70 will be described with reference to Figs. 80 to 85. Fig. 80 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the dispensing control unit, Fig. 81 is a circuit diagram showing the dispensing control input circuit, Fig. 82 is a circuit diagram showing the continuation of Fig. 81, Fig. 83 is a circuit diagram showing the dispensing motor drive circuit, Fig. 84 is a circuit diagram showing the CR unit input/output circuit, and Fig. 85 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. First, the dispensing control filter circuit will be described, followed by the circuit of the dispensing control unit, and then the various input/output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board.

[10-1. Dispense control filter circuit]
The dispensing control filter circuit 951a is mainly composed of a dispensing control three-terminal filter PIC0 as shown in Fig. 80. This dispensing control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics, magnetically shielded with ferrite. The first terminal of the dispensing control three-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5V from the power supply board 931 shown in Fig. 75, and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0, which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V from the power supply board 931 is smoothed by first removing ripples (AC components superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The second terminal of the dispensing control three-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to ground (GND), and the third terminal of the dispensing control three-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5V with noise components removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is electrically connected to the capacitor PC1, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the other end of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacity: 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment), so that the +5V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is further smoothed by removing ripples. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal which is the power terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, etc., which will be described later. Note that, when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is applied as +5V for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary interruption occurs to the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the payout control MPU 952a.

The VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor PC3, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by the capacitor PC3 to further remove ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, is grounded to ground (GND).

In addition, the VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the capacitor PC3 and the anode terminal of the diode PD0. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (dispensing control built-in RAM) built into the dispensing control MPU 952a, and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC4, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The VBB terminal of this dispensing control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, and is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 through the resistor PR0. In other words, the +5V smoothed by removing the noise components by the dispensing control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a and is applied to the VBB terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 through the diode PD0. As a result, as described above, when the +5V generated by the power supply generating circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge stored in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as the payout VBB, so that the current is prevented from flowing to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a by the diode PD0, and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, but the payout VBB is applied to the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM, so that the memory contents are maintained. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the payout control built-in RAM is composed of the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Circuit of dispensing control unit]
The payout control unit 952 is mainly composed of a payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a reset signal, a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) as peripheral circuits, in addition to a payout control MPU 952a, a payout control input circuit 952b, a payout control output circuit 952c, a payout motor drive circuit 952d, and a CR unit input/output circuit 952e, as shown in Fig. 80. Here, we will first explain the payout control system reset, and then explain the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input/output circuit, and various input/output signals to the payout control MPU.

[10-2-1. Payout control system reset]
The +5V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 as shown in FIG. 80. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC5, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit can be set by the capacitance of this capacitor PC5. Specifically, when the +5V input to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

The output terminal of the dispensing control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and the reset terminal of the dispensing control output circuit with reset function 952ca. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC6, which is grounded to ground (GND). This capacitor PC6 acts as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is greater than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR1, and the logic becomes HI, and this logic is input to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, respectively, while when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is less than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is input to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, respectively. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes less than the threshold, the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function are reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor PC7, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed and ripples are removed. The ground terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Dispatch control crystal oscillator]
The +5V smoothed by removing noise components by the dispensing control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0, as shown in Fig. 80. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor PC8, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, this smoothed +5V is also applied to the OE terminal, which is the output enable terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0. When +5V is applied to the OE terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0, the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8MHz clock signal from the OUT terminal, which is the output terminal.

The OUT terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the dispensing control MPU 952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Payout control input circuit]
The dispensing control input circuit 952b is a circuit to which a dispensing power failure notice signal is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the main frame opening switch 619, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 shown in Fig. 75, the handle relay terminal board 315 shown in Fig. 70, and the full tank detection sensor 279 via the power supply board 931, a circuit to which an operation signal is input from the operation switch 954, etc. First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described, followed by the circuit to which the detection signal from the main frame opening switch is input, the circuit to which the dispensing power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, the circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input, and the circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch is input. In addition, the full tank detection sensor 279 and the various detection switches such as the bulb out detection sensor 827, dispensing detection sensor 842, and rotation detection sensor 840 shown in Figure 70 have output terminals of the open collector output type, so the circuit configurations to which the detection signals from the various detection switches are input are almost identical, and therefore here we will explain the circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input.

[10-2-3(a). Circuit to which detection signal from door frame open switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 is of a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and is turned ON (conductive) when the door frame 3 is opened from the main frame 4 as shown in FIG. 1, and turned OFF (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4. The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR22, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC20, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR23, the other end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A) without inverting the logic of the signal waveform). When the transistor PTR20 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a as a door open signal.

In addition, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and is also pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor PR24 and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 through a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 through the wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor (not shown) of which one end is electrically connected to the +12V power line on the external terminal board 784. When transistor PTR21 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR21 changes, and that signal is input to external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door open information output signal.

Furthermore, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through resistor PR21, and is pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through resistor PR24. It is also pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 through resistor PR26. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to resistor PR26 and to the other end of resistor PR27, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 through a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wire (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) whose other end is electrically connected to the +12V power line in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69. When transistor PTR22 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

The circuit consisting of pull-up resistor PR20 and capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generating circuit, and is configured as a circuit that also has the function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the door frame opening switch 618 caused by the fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts that make up the door frame opening switch 618 repeatedly turn ON and OFF for a short period of time when the door frame 3 is released from the main frame 4, or when the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR21, PR22 and transistor PTR20, the circuit consisting of resistors PR24, PR25 and transistor PTR21, and the circuit consisting of resistors PR26, PR27 and transistor PTR22 are switch circuits that are turned ON/OFF by the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR20 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and a door frame opening signal with a logic HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. Also, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR21 OFF and the switch circuit OFF.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and an outer end frame door open information output signal with a logic HI is input to the external terminal board 784. Also, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR22 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a main frame door open signal with a logic HI is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20, turning the transistor PTR20 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and a door frame opening signal with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. Also, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +5V, turning the transistor PTR21 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR21 is pulled down to ground (GND), and an outer end frame door open information output signal with a logic LOW is input to the external terminal board 784. Also, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +5V, turning transistor PTR22 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is pulled down to ground (GND), and a main frame door open signal with a logic LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is released from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned ON, and a door frame opening signal with a logic of HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a, the outer end frame door opening information output signal with a logic of HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal with a logic of HI is input to the main control board 1310. On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned OFF, and a door frame opening signal with a logic of LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a, the outer end frame door opening information output signal with a logic of LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal with a logic of LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3(b). Circuit to which detection signal from main body frame opening switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 is of a normally closed type (NC), and is turned on (conductive) when the body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. 1, and turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2. The second terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to ground (GND), while the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR28, one end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29 and is also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR30, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28 and is also electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC21, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the above-mentioned transistor PTR21, and is also electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) on the external terminal board 784, one end of which is electrically connected to a +12V power line. When the transistor PTR23 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door open information output signal.

In addition, the No. 1 terminal of the main frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR28 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via resistor PR29, and is also pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR28 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to resistor PR31 and is also electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR32, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above and is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wire (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) whose other end is electrically connected to the +12V power line in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69. When transistor PTR24 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

The circuit consisting of pull-up resistor PR28 and capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generating circuit, and is configured as a circuit that also has the function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the main frame opening switch 619 caused by the fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the main frame opening switch 619 repeatedly turn ON and OFF for a short period of time when the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, or when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR29, PR30 and transistor PTR23, and the circuit consisting of resistors PR31, PR32 and transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned ON/OFF by the detection signal from the main frame open switch 619.

When the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR23 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and an outer end frame door opening information output signal with a logic of HI is input to the external terminal board 784. Also, when the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR24 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a main frame door open signal with a logic HI is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is OFF, and therefore the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR28, turning the transistor PTR23 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side at the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and an outer end frame door opening information output signal with a logic LOW is input to the external terminal board 784. Also, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is OFF, and therefore the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR28, turning the transistor PTR24 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a main frame door open signal with a logic LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this way, when the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is turned ON, and the outer end frame door open information output signal with a logic of HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal with a logic of HI is input to the main control board 1310. On the other hand, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is turned OFF, and the outer end frame door open information output signal with a logic of LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal with a logic of LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this embodiment, as described above, even if the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4 or the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, or if both of these states occur, a main frame door open signal is input to the main control board 1310. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 cannot determine whether the door frame 3 is open from the main frame 4 or the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 based on the main frame door open signal, but it can be used to determine whether the door frame 3 and/or the main frame 4 are open during normal play. Since an outer end frame door open information output signal is input to the external terminal board 784, this outer end frame door open information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784, and although the hall computer cannot determine whether the door frame 3 is open from the main frame 4 or the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 based on the outer end frame door open information output signal, it can determine that a state that does not occur during normal play by the player, that the door frame 3 and/or the main frame 4 are open, has occurred.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, by adopting normally closed switches for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main frame opening switch 619, even if the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned ON (conductive), the door frame 3 will be opened from the main frame 4, and even if the main frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned ON (conductive), the main frame 4 will be opened from the outer frame 2. In this way, by adopting normally closed switches for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main frame opening switch 619, even in the event of a short circuit, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

When the door frame opening switch 618 and the main frame opening switch 619 are changed from normally closed switches to normally open (normally open (NO)) switches (door frame opening switch 618' and main frame opening switch 619'), the door frame opening switch 618' turns ON (conductive) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, and turns OFF (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is open to the main frame 4. The main frame opening switch 619' turns ON (conductive) when the main frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and turns OFF (disconnected) when the main frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. In this way, even if the door frame opening switch 618' is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the door frame 3 will be released from the main frame 4, and even if the main frame opening switch 619' is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the main frame 4 will be released from the outer frame 2. In this way, even if the door frame opening switch 618' and the main frame opening switch 619' are normally open switches, even in the event of a disconnection, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3 (c) Circuit to which the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit is input]
A transmission line that transmits a power failure warning signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor PR40 that is electrically connected to the +12V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor PTR40 via a resistor PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41, and is also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR42 that is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR43, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A) without inverting the logic of the signal waveform). When the transistor PTR40 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a as a dispensing power failure warning signal.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR41 and PR42 and transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors for signs of power failure or momentary power failure of two types of voltage, +12V and +24V, from the power supply board 931, and when it detects a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the power supply control board 951 as a power failure warning via the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors for signs of power failure or momentary power failure of the +12V and +24V voltages, and when both conditions, that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and that the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, are met, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply control board 951 via the wiring (harness) and the logic of the power failure warning signal becomes LOW. When a signal is input to the dispensing control board 951, and either of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is less than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of +12V is less than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is met, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via the wiring (harness), and a dispensing power failure warning signal with a logic HI is input to the dispensing control board 951.

When both conditions are met: the voltage of +24V is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf, and the voltage of +12V is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf, that is, when there are no signs of a power outage or momentary interruption of the voltages of +12V and +24V, a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic LOW is input to the dispensing control board 951, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR40 OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when either of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of +12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, when there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of the +12V and/or +24V voltages, a dispensing power failure warning signal with a logic HI is input to the dispensing control board 951, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 by the dispensing power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40, turning the transistor PTR40 ON, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the dispensing power failure warning signal with the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 being LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

In this way, when there are signs of a power outage or momentary interruption in the +12V and/or +24V voltages, a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input to input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a, whereas when there are no signs of a power outage or momentary interruption in the +12V and +24V voltages, a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic LOW is input to input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. As described above, when there is a sign of a power outage or momentary power outage of the +12V and/or +24V voltages, a power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, while when there is no sign of a power outage or momentary power outage of the +12V and +24V voltages, the power outage warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the logic of the payout power outage warning signal input to the payout control MPU 952a due to a power outage warning from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e and the logic of the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3(d). Circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the fall cover unit 270 shown in Fig. 1 is input to the dispensing control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 shown in Fig. 1 and the power supply board 931 shown in Fig. 6. The output terminal of this full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type circuit in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor PR44a, one end of which is electrically connected to a +12V power line, and to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor in the dispensing control board 951. This three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit that is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The second terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is grounded to ground (GND), and the third terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is electrically connected to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor through resistor PR44b, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 through resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after noise components are removed in the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. The base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the resistor PR45, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and to the other end of the capacitor PC40, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND). The capacitor PC40 plays the role of a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR47, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, one of which (PIC40B) shapes the logic of the signal waveform input to it without inverting it and outputs it). When the transistor PTR41 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a as a full tank signal.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR45 and PR46 and transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls. In this embodiment, when the storage space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor 44a in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and a signal with a logic HI is input to the payout control board 951. On the other hand, when the storage space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and a signal with a logic LOW is input to the payout control board 951.

When the storage space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor 44a in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the logic becomes HI, which is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 mentioned above, turning the transistor PTR41 ON and also turning the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and a full tank signal with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the storage space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the signal with a logic LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 mentioned above, turning off the transistor PTR41 and also turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the +5V side by resistor PR47, and a full tank signal with a logic HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

In this embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to a switch circuit consisting of resistors PR45, PR46, and transistor PTR41 via the three-terminal filter for the full tank detection sensor PIC50. However, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the bulb out detection sensor 827 and the dispensing detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 are input directly to each switch circuit without passing through a T-type filter circuit such as the three-terminal filter for the full tank detection sensor PIC50. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the fault cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, the path for transmitting the detection signal is extremely long and extremely susceptible to noise compared to the bulb out detection sensor 827, the dispensing detection sensor 842, etc. provided in the dispensing device 830 attached to the main frame 4.

The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with stored game balls, and when the payout control MPU 952a determines that the storage space is full with stored game balls based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, it performs control to forcibly stop the drive control of the payout motor 834 and stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotor. In other words, if noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a may forcibly stop the drive control of the payout motor 834 and stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotor even if the storage space is not full of stored game balls, or if the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled to rotate the payout rotor to continue paying out game balls even though the storage space is full of stored game balls, and the upstream side of the prize ball passage is filled with game balls, the payout rotor itself cannot rotate and an abnormal load is applied to the payout motor 834, the payout motor 834 becomes overloaded and abnormally heats up, or the mechanism that transmits the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 to the rotational motion of the payout rotor may break down. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to prevent such problems from occurring, a circuit configuration is adopted in which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is first filtered out by the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor to remove noise components.

[10-2-3(e). Circuit to which operation signals from operation switches are input]
The first and second terminals, which are output terminals of the operation switch 954, are grounded to ground (GND), and the third and fourth terminals, which are output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR48 and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. The base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the resistor PR49 and to the other end of a resistor PR50, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48 and to the other end of a capacitor PC41, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR51, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 via a resistor PR52. The base terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR53, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear transistor PTR43 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR54, the other end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C) without inverting the logic of the signal waveform). The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the rear transistor PTR43 changes when the front and rear transistors PTR42 and PTR43 are turned ON/OFF, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a as a RWMCLR signal.

In addition, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, terminals 3 and 4, are pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via resistor PR49, and are also pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR44 via resistor PR55. The base terminal of transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to resistor PR55 and is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR56, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR44 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wire (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of pull-up resistor MR2, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line, in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 77. When transistor PTR44 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 changes, and this signal is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a as a RAM clear signal.

The circuit consisting of pull-up resistor PR48 and capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generating circuit, and is configured as a circuit that also has the function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the operation switch 954 caused by the fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts that make up the operation switch 954 repeatedly turn ON and OFF for a short period of time when the operation switch 954 is pressed.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR49, PR50 and transistor PTR42 is the front-stage switch circuit, the circuit consisting of resistors PR52, PR53 and transistor PTR43 is the rear-stage switch circuit, and the circuit consisting of resistors PR55, PR56 and transistor PTR44 is the switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

As described above, the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM (dispense control built-in RAM) built into the dispensing control MPU 952a of the dispensing control board 951 and the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from power-on, or to cancel an error when an error is notified after power-on. It has a function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from power-on, and a function to cancel an error after power-on (after the period during which it functions as a RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed since power-on). The operation signal from the operation switch 954 becomes a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period from power-on, while it becomes an error cancellation signal in the function of clearing the error after power-on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since power-on).

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, terminals 3 and 4, are pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal with a logic HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, turning the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage ON and the switch circuit in the previous stage ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 in the next stage, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR43 in the next stage OFF and the switch circuit in the next stage OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the next stage is pulled up to +5V by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal with a logic HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a determines that when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is HI during a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, it does not indicate that a RAM clear should be performed to erase the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is HI after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from when the power is turned on), it determines that it does not indicate that an error should be cleared.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, terminals 3 and 4, are pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR48, and an operation signal with a logic HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, turning the transistor PTR44 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a RAM clear signal with a logic LOW is input to the main control board 1310. When a RAM clear signal with a logic LOW is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time of power-on, as described above, the RAM clear signal with a logic LOW shown in FIG. 77 is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, turning the transistor MTR0 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR5, and a RAM clear signal with a logic HI is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to input terminal PA0 is HI, main control MPU 1310a determines that this does not indicate an instruction to perform RAM clearing to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, terminals 3 and 4, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and an operation signal with a logic LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the front stage, turning off the transistor PTR42 in the front stage and turning off the switch circuit in the front stage, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the front stage, which is the voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage, is pulled up to +5V by the resistor PR51, turning on the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage and turning on the switch circuit in the rear stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a determines that when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from power-on, this indicates that a RAM clear should be performed to erase the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is LOW after power-on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from power-on), this indicates that an error should be cleared.

When the operation switch 954 is operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, terminals 3 and 4, are pulled down to ground (GND) by the pull-up resistor PR48, and an operation signal with a logic LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, turning off the transistor PTR44 and the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a RAM clear signal with a logic HI is input to the main control board 1310. When a RAM clear signal with a logic HI is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as described above, inputs the RAM clear signal with a logic HI to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 shown in FIG. 77, turning the transistor MTR0 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and a RAM clear signal with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that this is an instruction to perform RAM clearing to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, the dispensing motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the dispensing motor 834 of the dispensing device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the dispensing motor drive circuit 952d is mainly composed of a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive IC PIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the +12V power line and the +5V power line, respectively, and +12 and +5V are applied, respectively, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is grounded to the ground (GND). A voltage switching signal is input to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to terminals 3 and 10, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60, via a Zener diode PZD60, and is also electrically connected to the power terminal of the dispensing motor 834.Based on a voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da, +12V or +5V is supplied as a motor drive voltage to terminals 3 and 10, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60, via the Zener diode PZD60, and to the dispensing motor 834.

The drive ICPIC60 has four Darlington power transistors, and in this embodiment, terminals 6 and 7, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC60, are each grounded to ground (GND), and terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, receive the dispensing motor drive signal via resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The collector terminals of the drive ICPIC60, terminal 2, terminal 4, terminal 9, and terminal 11, correspond to the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, terminal 1, terminal 5, terminal 8, and terminal 12, respectively, and when a dispensing motor drive signal is input to the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, terminal 1, terminal 5, terminal 8, and terminal 12 via resistors PR60 to PR63, a drive pulse, which is an excitation signal, is output to each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 834. This dispensing motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, terminal 1, terminal 5, terminal 8, and terminal 12, respectively, via resistors PR60 to PR63. These drive pulses are generated by switching the excitation current flowing through each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) of the dispensing motor 834, causing the dispensing motor 834 to rotate. When the drive pulses (excitation signals) of each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) are cut off by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC60, the drive ICPIC60 will be damaged, so as a protection measure, a circuit configuration is adopted in which the above-mentioned Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected in front of terminals 3 and 10, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60.

[10-2-5. CR unit input/output circuit]
Next, the CR unit input/output circuit 952e for inputting and outputting various signals with the CR unit 6 shown in Fig. 71 will be described. The payout control board 951 receives the ball loan request signal BRDY and the one-time payout operation start request signal BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 as described above, and is supplied with a predetermined voltage VL (+12V) and ground LG created from AC 24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in Fig. 71. The payout control board 951 outputs an EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal that indicates that a payout operation for paying out loaned balls is possible or impossible, via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869. The input/output circuit for inputting and outputting these various signals is mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (in which an infrared LED and a phototransistor are built in) as shown in Fig. 84.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 through a resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned ON, while when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 through a resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 through a resistor PR72. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to resistor PR71, and also to one end of a pull-up resistor PR73, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a shown in FIG. 80 via the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) without inverting the logic of the signal waveform). When the transistor PTR70 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a as the CR connection signal 1.

Meanwhile, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72, and is also electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR76, the other end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via a wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) in the power supply board 931, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line. When the transistor PTR71 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply board 931 as a CR connection signal.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR71 and PR74 and transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by turning photocoupler PIC70 ON/OFF.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned OFF and pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR73, turning on the transistor PTR70 and the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns ON and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR70 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1, whose logic is now HI, is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR72, PR76, and transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by turning photocoupler PIC70 ON/OFF.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned OFF and pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR73, turning on the transistor PTR71 and the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and a CR connection signal with a logic LOW is input to the power supply board 931.

On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns ON and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning the transistor PTR71 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and a CR connection signal with a logic HI is input to the power supply board 931.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 as well as to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 receives the BRDY signal from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of the BRDY signal from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON, whereas when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of the BRDY signal from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor PR78, the other end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B) without inverting the logic of the signal waveform). When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, and the logic of the BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal with a logic of LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, and the logic of the BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal with a logic of HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. In this way, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of the BRDY from CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, and also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 receives the BRQ from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is ON, whereas when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor PR80, the other end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C) without inverting the logic of the signal waveform). When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal with a logic of LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal with a logic of HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. In this way, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from CR unit 6.

The EXS signal, which indicates that a single dispensing operation has started or ended from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a, is output to the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 from the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb via resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to one end of resistor PR82, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line. Resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC73 via resistor PR82 and the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is LOW, photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON, whereas when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC73 via resistor PR82 and the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is HI, photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL within the CR unit 6 by a pull-up resistor PR83 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and is electrically connected to its built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input as EXS to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC73 via resistor PR82, and the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb is LOW, photocoupler PIC73 turns ON, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS with a logic LOW is input to the built-in control device of CR unit 6. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 turns OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to a specified voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the EXS with a logic of HI is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. In this way, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the same logic as the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function.

The PRDY signal, which indicates whether or not a payout operation for dispensing loaned balls is possible from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU 952a, is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR84. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to one end of resistor PR85, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line. Resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR85 and the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is LOW, photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON, whereas when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR85 and the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is HI, photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL in the CR unit 6 by a pull-up resistor PR86 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and is electrically connected to its built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR85, and the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb is LOW, photocoupler PIC74 turns ON, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY with a logic LOW is input to the built-in control device of CR unit 6. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, and the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a through the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a specified voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the PRDY with a logic of HI is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. In this way, the logic of the PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the same logic as the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a through the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function.

[10-2-6. Various input/output signals to the dispensing control MPU]
Next, we will explain the various input/output signals that are input/output from the input/output terminals of the various input/output ports of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a, receives serial data from the main control board 1310 as a main dispensing serial data reception signal via the dispensing control input circuit 952b. On the other hand, the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a, transmits the serial data to be sent to the main control board 1310 as a main dispensing serial data transmission signal to the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and transmits the main dispensing serial data transmission signal from the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without reset function to the main control board 1310.

In addition to the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, dispensing power failure warning signal, door open signal, full tank signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection signal 1, etc.), each input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a receives, for example, a main dispensing ACK signal from the main control board 1310 indicating that the above-mentioned main dispensing serial data reception signal has been successfully received, via the dispensing control input circuit 952b, and detection signals from the bulb out detection sensor 827, dispensing detection sensor 842, rotation detection sensor 840, etc. shown in FIG. 70 are input via the dispensing control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function, and the EXS signal and PRDY signal are output from the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function to the CR unit input/output circuit 952e, the above-mentioned voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the voltage switching circuit 952da, and the payout motor drive signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function In addition to outputting a dispensing motor drive signal from the circuit 952ca to the dispensing motor 834 via the dispensing motor drive circuit 952d, for example, a payer ACK signal indicating that the above-mentioned main pay serial data reception signal has been successfully received is output to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the payer ACK signal is output from the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the main control board 1310, and a drive signal for the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. 70 is output to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the drive signal is output from the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the error LED indicator 860b, etc.

[10-3. Various input/output signals to/from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input/output signals between the dispensing control board 951 and the main control board 1310, and various output signals from the dispensing control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be explained with reference to Figure 85.

[10-3-1. Various input/output signals to/from the main control board]
The dispensing control board 951 exchanges various input/output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in Fig. 85(a), the dispensing control board 951 outputs the above-mentioned payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, etc. to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, in addition to the above-mentioned main pay serial data reception signal, main pay ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal), the payout control board 951 receives game information signals related to the game, such as the main prize ball number information output signal, 15-round jackpot information output signal, and 2-round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special pattern display information output signal, normal pattern display information output signal, time-saving information output signal, and starting hole winning information output signal, as well as payout power outage warning signals, from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(b), in addition to the outer end frame door opening information output signal described above, the payout motor 834 outputs a prize ball number information output signal every time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls, and the main control board 1310 outputs a main prize ball number information output signal, a jackpot information output signal of a 15-round jackpot information output signal and a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special pattern display information output signal, a normal pattern display information output signal, a time reduction information output signal, and a starting hole winning information output signal, and other game information signals to the external terminal board 784. These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784. In other words, two signals are output to the external terminal board 784 from the payout control board 951: an outer end frame door opening information output signal, and a prize ball number information output signal, and eight signals are output via (passing through) the payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310: a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, a special pattern display information output signal, a normal pattern display information output signal, information output signal during time reduction, and a starting port winning information output signal.

The signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in the game center (hall), not shown, and the hall computer monitors the player's play, etc. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer calculates the number of jackpots of the pachinko machine 1 by adding up the number of jackpots with two rounds (the number of 2-round jackpots) and the number of jackpots with 15 rounds (the number of 15-round jackpots). Therefore, the hall computer cannot determine the number of 2-round jackpots or 15-round jackpots from the total number of jackpots, and therefore cannot determine whether the number of jackpots that have actually occurred on the pachinko machine 1 is 2-round jackpots or 15-round jackpots. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is placed above the pachinko machine 1, and some players refer to the number of times a jackpot game state has occurred, which is displayed on the data counter, to decide whether or not to play.

However, the number of times the jackpot game state has occurred as displayed on the data counter may actually be biased towards the number of times a 2-round jackpot has occurred, so that even when a player starts playing, there may be only 2-round jackpots occurring and no 15-round jackpots occurring for a while. In this way, although the number of times a jackpot game state has occurred as displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of hope, it may also stimulate the player's gambling spirit more than necessary.

In this embodiment, the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal are output separately to the hall computer as the jackpot information output signal, so that the hall computer can accurately grasp the number of 2-round jackpots and the number of 15-round jackpots. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the jackpots that have actually occurred more frequently in the pachinko machine 1 are 2-round jackpots or 15-round jackpots, and the data counter can display the number of 15-round jackpots and the number of 2-round jackpots separately, or only the number of 15-round jackpots, as the number of jackpot game states, so that the player's gambling spirit is not unnecessarily stimulated.

In this embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer during the period from when the 2-round jackpot occurs until the end of the 2-round jackpot, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also output to the hall computer during the period from when the 15-round jackpot occurs until the end of the 15-round jackpot. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in this embodiment, for example, when a 2-round jackpot occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period, and when a 15-round jackpot occurs, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period. Such a method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Arrangement of output terminals on external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of output terminals on an external terminal board 784 that outputs various signals to a hall computer installed in an amusement facility (hall) will be described with reference to Fig. 86. The external terminal board 784 is attached to the rear surface of a prize ball base that is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and its rear side is covered by an external terminal board cover 786. Fig. 86 is a diagram showing the arrangement of output terminals on the external terminal board.

As described above, the external terminal board 784 outputs to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 the outer end frame door opening information output signal, the prize ball number information output signal, the main prize ball number information output signal, the jackpot information output signal of the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal, the probability fluctuation information output signal, the special pattern display information output signal, the normal pattern display information output signal, the time-saving information output signal, and the starting port winning information output signal when they are input from the payout control board 951.

To briefly explain these various signals, the outer end frame door open information output signal is a signal that informs the player that a state that does not occur during normal play has occurred, in which the door frame 3 and/or the main frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 are open; the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that informs the player each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10; the main prize ball number information output signal is a signal that informs the player each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various winning ports, such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning port 2001, 2201, and the large winning port 2005 shown in FIG. 8, reaches 10; the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that informs the player that a 15-round jackpot has occurred; The information output signal is a signal that indicates that a two-round jackpot has occurred, the probability fluctuation information output signal is a signal that indicates that a probability fluctuation is occurring, the special pattern display information output signal is a signal that indicates that the first special pattern display 1403 or the second special pattern display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 has ended (stopped) the variable display of the special pattern, the normal pattern display information output signal is a signal that indicates that the normal pattern display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 has ended (stopped) the variable display of the normal pattern, the time-saving information output signal is a signal that indicates that a time-saving state is occurring, and the start hole winning information output signal is a signal that indicates that each time a game ball enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004 shown in FIG. 8.

As shown in FIG. 86, the external terminal board 784 has output terminals PT1 to PT10 arranged horizontally in a row. The output terminal PT1 is colored white and outputs a prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that notifies the user that the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 has actually paid out 10 prize balls, and in this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 has paid out 10 prize balls each time the prize ball number information output signal is input, and can count the number of paid out prize balls to determine the total number of prize balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT2 is colored green and outputs an outer frame door open information output signal. As described above, the outer frame door open information output signal is a signal that notifies the player that the door frame 3 and/or main frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 are open, a state that does not occur during normal play, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and/or main frame 4 are open. When the outer frame door open information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can grasp that the door frame 3 and/or main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 are open while the outer frame door open information output signal is being input.

The output terminal PT3 is colored gray and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal is a signal that conveys that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) in the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT3 for 0.128 seconds when the variable display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 has ended (stopped). When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1, and can count the number of times this has happened to determine the total number of times the special symbol has been displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT4 is colored yellow and outputs a start port winning information output signal. As described above, the start port winning information output signal is a signal that notifies the player that a game ball has entered the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 8, and in this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT4 for 0.128 seconds each time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. When the start port winning information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a game ball has entered the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1 each time the start port winning information output signal is input, and can count the number of times the start port winning information output signal is input to determine the total number of game balls that have entered the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT5 is colored black and outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 15-round jackpot has occurred, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT5 while a 15-round jackpot is occurring. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a 15-round jackpot is occurring in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15-round jackpot information output signal is being input, and can count the number of times the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input to determine the total number of times a 15-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a 2-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 2-round jackpot has occurred, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT6 while a 2-round jackpot is occurring. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a 2-round jackpot is occurring in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is being input, and can count the number of times the 2-round jackpot information output signal is input to determine the total number of times that a 2-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT7 is colored blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal that indicates that the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 has finished (stopped) the variable display of the normal symbol. In this embodiment, the output terminal PT7 is output for 0.128 seconds when the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 has finished (stopped). When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can know that the variable display of the normal symbol has finished (stopped) in the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1, and can count the number of times that this has happened to know the total number of times the normal symbol has been displayed variable in the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT8 is colored red and outputs a time-saving information output signal. As described above, the time-saving information output signal is a signal that indicates that a time-saving state is occurring, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time-saving state is occurring. When the time-saving information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a time-saving state is occurring in the pachinko machine 1 when the time-saving information output signal is input, and can count the number of times the time-saving information output signal is input to determine the total number of times the time-saving state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT9 is colored orange and outputs a probability fluctuation information output signal. As described above, the probability fluctuation information output signal is a signal that indicates that a probability fluctuation is occurring, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT9 while a probability fluctuation is occurring. When the probability fluctuation information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a probability fluctuation is occurring in the pachinko machine 1 when the probability fluctuation information output signal is input, and can count the number of times that the probability fluctuation information output signal is input to determine the total number of times a probability fluctuation has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT10 is colored light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal is a signal that notifies the player that the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various winning holes such as the first start hole 2002, the second start hole 2004, the general winning hole 2001, 2201, and the large winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. 8 reaches 10 balls, and in this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can know that the pachinko machine 1 is planning to pay out 10 game balls as prize balls each time the main prize ball number information output signal is input, and can count the number of game balls to be paid out and know the total number of game balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1. For example, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various winning ports, such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001, 2201, and the large winning port 2005, reaches 20 or more, and the main prize ball number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize ball number information output signal is output at intervals of 0.128 seconds so that it does not become one continuous signal for 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds x 2) seconds.

Of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal board 784, output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the dispensing control board 951 side, while output terminals PT3 to PT10 are arranged so that various signals output on the main control board 1310 side are output via (passing through) the dispensing control board 951. The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are each colored, and by electrically connecting wiring having connectors colored the same to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, respectively, it is possible to prevent other wiring from being electrically connected in error. In order to prevent the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side from being mixed with the various signals output on the main control board 1310 side, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 for transmitting the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and the output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting the various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are arranged in a row from the left center of the external terminal board 784 to the right side. In this respect, it is possible to prevent the wiring for transmitting the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and the wiring for transmitting the various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer from being mistakenly electrically connected.

In this embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are each configured to be transmitted to the hall computer from the external terminal board 784. For example, in a state where game balls are no longer being supplied from the pachinko island equipment to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some kind of trouble in the pachinko island equipment, if a 15-round jackpot occurs in the pachinko machine 1 at the point when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are running low, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 to pay out as prize balls will be insufficient, and therefore payout will not be possible (also, for example, if ball clogging or ball jamming occurs in the payout device 830, game balls cannot be paid out unless this can be resolved). In this case, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side is a signal that notifies the player that the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10, as described above. Therefore, when the game balls cannot be paid out, the payout control board 951 cannot output the prize ball number information output signal and transmit it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. When the game balls are not paid out, the player calls the hall staff. The hall staff, for example, checks the hose-shaped supply nozzle for supplying game balls from the pachinko island equipment to the prize ball tank 720 to identify the location of the ball jam (and also identifies the location of the ball jam or ball jam that occurred in the payout device 830, for example) and resolves the jam, thereby restoring the game balls to a state where they are paid out.

However, even when the hall staff is working, the game is still in progress using the main control board 1310. When the hall staff returns to a state where game balls are being paid out after the 15-round jackpot has ended, the payout control board 951 will pay out unpaid game balls one after another. Even though the 15-round jackpot has ended and no 15-round jackpots have occurred, the payout control board 951 will output a prize ball number information output signal that notifies the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 reaches 10. As a result, even though no 15-round jackpots have occurred, an extremely large number of game balls will be paid out, which creates a problem in that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 951 to actually pay out prize balls, that is, as a signal separate from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310 outputs a main prize ball number information output signal as a signal to inform the hall computer of the fact that the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered various winning holes such as the first start hole 2002, the second start hole 2004, the general winning holes 2001 and 2201, and the large winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. 8 reaches 10 balls, and transmits the signal to the hall computer via the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784. As a result, even if the above-mentioned troubles (ball clogging in the supply nozzle, ball clogging or ball clogging in the payout device 830, etc.) occur, the relationship between the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls to be paid out in this game state can be accurately transmitted to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out during that game state.

[12. Circuit of the performance display drive board]
Next, the circuit of the performance display drive board 4450 which draws the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460 will be described with reference to Fig. 87. As described above, the performance display drive board 4450 is located near the bottom of the door frame side performance display device 460 attached to the right side of the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is stored within the tray unit 320, and is mainly composed of a liquid crystal module circuit 450V which draws the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460. Fig. 87 is a circuit diagram showing the liquid crystal module circuit which draws the display area of the upper tray side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. Liquid crystal module circuit]
The liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the performance display drive board 4450 is mainly composed of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, as shown in Figure 87.

When serial signals (serial data) using a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Inc. are transmitted as positive and negative signals from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V inputs these signals to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and this common mode choke coil SDL0 is able to separate noise from the positive and negative signals. The positive and negative signals from which noise has been separated are input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals. This resistor SDR0 is a termination resistor (terminator) that prevents the positive and negative signals from reflecting at the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively, and prevents distortion of the serial signal.

The door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 restores three video signals, red, green, and blue video signals, and three synchronization signals, horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively (i.e., restores the parallel signals before being serialized). As mentioned above, the red, green, and blue video signals output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a are each 8 bits, but the red, green, and blue video signals that can be input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d are each 6 bits, totaling 18 bits, so the red, green, and blue video signals are the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

In addition to the signal from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V is also configured to receive two signals, which are serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, and which are differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510. The forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to connect the circuit to transmit these two signals when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, as described above, while connecting the circuit to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the two signals, so the two signals are sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. On the other hand, when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, so the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

When the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are not input, the forced switching circuit 1512f transmits the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the serial signal (serial data) using a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d as a positive signal and a negative signal from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. The signal is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is then input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. On the other hand, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, these two signals are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and are then input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. When two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that this is a request to output a LOCKN signal, and outputs a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal described later to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 to the peripheral control board 1510. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is sent as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side performance display device 460 to check whether or not there is a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and during the period when the game board side performance display device 1600 is performing a demonstration in a waiting state for customers. The LOCKN signal output request data in this embodiment is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal by the differential circuit 1512e, but has a structure whose data format is completely different from that of the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned differential type serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics, Inc. For this reason, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the signal is not that output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, and determines that the data is abnormal, and outputs a LOCKN signal from a LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in this embodiment, the function of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 to output a LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal is used to forcibly output a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal described below, and LOCKN signal output request data having a data format structure different from that of the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby making it possible to check whether the device called the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to check whether there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDSVDD terminal, PLLVDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 are each supplied with +3.3V generated by the upper tray side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in Figure 76, and the GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDSGND terminal, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 are each grounded.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for the digital circuitry, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between this terminal and the GND terminal, which serves as the ground for the digital circuitry, to remove high-frequency noise from the +3.3V power supply line supplied to the VDD terminal.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between this terminal and the GND terminal, which serves as the ground for the TTL output, to remove high-frequency noise from the +3.3V power line supplied to the VDDO terminal.

The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input. A capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between this terminal and the LVDSGND terminal, which serves as the ground for the LVDS input, to remove high-frequency noise from the +3.3 V power supply line supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal.

The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for the PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit. A capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between this terminal and the PLLGND terminal, which serves as the ground for the PLL circuit, to remove high-frequency noise from the +3.3V power line supplied to the PLLVDD terminal.

When +3.3V is supplied (applied) to the PDWN terminal, the logic becomes HI, indicating normal operation, but when the supply of +3.3 is stopped, the logic becomes LOW, indicating power down. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3V via resistor SDR1, and is electrically connected to one end of varistor SDZ0, one end of which is grounded. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage on the +3.3V power line supplied via resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal is a terminal for specifying whether the transmission of various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal (described later) is a rising edge (logic transition from LOW to HIGH) or a falling edge (logic transition from HIGH to LOW). In this embodiment, as described above, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal. Incidentally, if the EDGE terminal is connected to +3.3V, the rising edge can be specified.

The OE terminal indicates whether or not to permit output from the various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) described below. In this embodiment, as described above, the OE terminal is grounded to enable output at all times. Incidentally, if the OE terminal is connected to +3.3V, output is not permitted.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting the operating mode, and the operating mode can be selected by grounding both. There are two operating modes: normal mode and handshake mode. In normal mode, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 restores a parallel signal consisting of three video signals (18-bit video signals) - a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal - and three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signals) - a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal - based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. This is the normal operating mode. In handshake mode, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request the transmission of a specific data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and receiver. This handshake mode is designed to switch automatically.

For example, if the parallel signals that the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 restores based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, which are three video signals (18-bit video signals) of red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal, and three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signals) of horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal, are abnormal data for some reason and are difficult to display on the door frame side performance display device 460, the normal mode is automatically switched to the handshake mode and a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the damping resistor SDR2, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to inform the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d of the satisfaction. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d transmits a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the connection between the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, from the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) at the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily recovered. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. The INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 may be electrically connected directly via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is a terminal that outputs a request to transmit a specific data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via resistor SDR2, which is a damping resistor of the performance display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

The SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are terminals that output three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, that are restored based on the serial signals (serial data) that are input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. In this embodiment, the three restored synchronization signals, the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, and the clock signal, are not used, so the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a DE signal that indicates whether the clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and the data output from the D0 to D17 terminals, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid, as described below. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via resistor SDR3, which is a damping resistor.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal that outputs a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit built into the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via resistor SDR4, which is a damping resistor.

The D0 to D17 terminals are data output terminals that output three video signals (18-bit video signals): a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively. The D0 to D5 terminals are 6-bit data output terminals that output blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA0, which is a damping resistor. The D6 to D11 terminals are 6-bit data output terminals that output green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA1, which is a damping resistor. Red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via ladder resistor SDRA2, which is a damping resistor.

The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the performance display drive board 4450, and the door frame side performance display device 460 are electrically connected and share the same ground.

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to Figures 88 to 91. Figure 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, Figure 89 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, Figure 90 is a table showing a continuation of the various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in Figure 89, and Figure 91 is a table showing an example of various commands received from the payout control board by the main control board. First, a prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, will be described, followed by a description of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and a description of various commands received from the payout control board by the main control board.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the dispensing control board]
When detection signals are input from various winning switches such as the general winning hole sensors 4020, 4020, the first starting hole sensor 4002, the second starting hole sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in Fig. 69, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits a prize ball command to the payout control board to pay out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls based on these detection signals. This prize ball command is a command having a memory capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (a device that communicates with the pachinko machine 1 and drives the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to pay out game balls as loan balls to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322, which are the storage trays) are electrically connected (such pachinko machines are called "CR machines"). As shown in FIG. 88(a), the prize ball commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 include commands 10H to 1EH ("H" represents hexadecimal), with command 10H specifying one prize ball, command 11H specifying two prize balls, ..., and command 1EH specifying fifteen prize balls. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to pay out game balls by the specified number of prize balls.

In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 and the ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls as loan balls to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322, which are the storage trays) are installed adjacent to each other in an amusement hall (hall) and the pachinko machine 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such pachinko machines are called "general machines"). As shown in FIG. 88(b), the prize ball commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 include commands 20H to 2EH, with command 20H specifying one prize ball, command 21H specifying two prize balls, ... and command 2EH specifying 15 prize balls. The payout control board 951 drives the payout motor 834 to control the payout of game balls by the specified number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 88(c), command 30H is provided as a common command for both CR machines and general machines, and this command 30H specifies a self-check. If an ACK signal output as confirmation of receipt of the command is not input from the receiving side for a predetermined period after sending the command, the sending side sends command 30H and checks whether an ACK signal has been input to confirm the connection status. In the case of a CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 951 checks the connection status with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in Figures 89 and 90, are composed of a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a mode indicating a variation of the presentation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

As shown in Figures 89 and 90, the various commands are categorized into those related to special chart 1 synchronization effects, those related to special chart 2 synchronization effects, those related to big wins, power-on, those related to regular chart synchronization effects, those related to regular electric role effects, notification displays, status displays, and others.

[13-2-1. Special Chart 1 Synchronized Performance Related]
The special symbol 1 synchronization performance-related commands are based on the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002 shown in Fig. 69, and as shown in Fig. 89, the commands are composed of commands named "Start special symbol 1 synchronization performance", "Specify special symbol 1", "End special symbol 1 synchronization performance", and "Specify state at time of change" related to the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 shown in Fig. 69. These various commands are assigned "A*H" as the status and "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special pattern 1 synchronization performance start command instructs the start of the special pattern synchronization performance with the performance pattern specified in the mode, the special pattern 1 designation command designates a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot, the special pattern 1 synchronization performance end command instructs the end of the special pattern 1 synchronization performance, and the variable time state designation command instructs the probability and time-saving state. The probability and time-saving state are composed of a low probability time-saving state that indicates a low probability state and a time-saving state, a high probability time-saving state that indicates a high probability state and a time-saving state, a low probability non-time-saving state that indicates a low probability state and a non-time-saving state, and a high probability non-time-saving state that indicates a high probability state and a non-time-saving state (the low probability non-time-saving state is set as the normal game state). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is set higher than that of the low probability state (normal game state), and the time-saving state is, for example, a state in which the time for variably displaying the normal symbols by the normal symbol display device 1402 shown in FIG. 10 is shortened compared to the non-time-saving state (normal game state) and the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in a light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result, so that the number of times the normal lottery result is stopped and displayed by the normal lottery described later in a predetermined time is increased compared to the non-time-saving state, and further, a pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. This state allows players to get a chance to win a special pattern without losing balls by lengthening the period during which the game balls are opened and closed in comparison to the non-time-saving state (normal game state) and increasing the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of the game balls into the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. 8 (in other words, compared to the non-time-saving state, there are more decisions to make as to whether or not to open and close the pair of movable pieces, and when the pair of movable pieces are opened and closed, the period for which the pair of movable pieces are opened and closed is longer, thereby increasing the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of the game balls into the second starting opening 2004).

As for the timing of sending these various commands, the special pattern 1 synchronization start command is sent when the special pattern 1 fluctuation starts, the special pattern 1 designation command is sent immediately after the special pattern 1 synchronization start, the special pattern 1 synchronization end command is sent when the special pattern 1 fluctuation time has elapsed (when special pattern 1 is confirmed), and the fluctuation state designation command is sent immediately after the special pattern win/loss information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[13-2-2. Special Chart 2 Synchronized Performance Related]
The special symbol 2 synchronization performance-related commands are based on the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004 shown in Fig. 69, and as shown in Fig. 89, the commands are composed of commands named "Start special symbol 2 synchronization performance", "Specify special symbol 2", and "End special symbol 2 synchronization performance" related to the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in Fig. 69. These various commands are assigned "B*H" as the status and "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special pattern 2 synchronization performance start command instructs the start of the special pattern synchronization performance with the performance pattern specified in the mode, the special pattern 2 designation command specifies a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot, and the special pattern 2 synchronization performance end command instructs the end of the special pattern 2 synchronization performance.

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: the special symbol 2 synchronization performance start command is sent when the special symbol 2 starts to change, the special symbol 2 designation command is sent immediately after the special symbol 2 synchronization performance starts, and the special symbol 2 synchronization performance end command is sent when the special symbol 2 change time has elapsed (when special symbol 2 is confirmed). Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Jackpot related]
The "jackpot-related" category, as shown in Figure 89, is made up of commands named "jackpot opening", "Nth large prize slot 1 open display", "large prize slot 1 closed display", "large prize slot 1 count display", "jackpot ending", "jackpot pattern display", "small prize opening", "small prize open display", "small prize count display", and "small prize ending". These various commands are assigned a status of "C*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command instructs the start of the jackpot opening, the display command for displaying the Nth opening of the 1st to 16th rounds of the 1st to 16th rounds of the 1st to 16th rounds of the 1st to 16th rounds of the 1st to 16th rounds of the 1st to 16th rounds of the 2nd ...

The small win opening command instructs the start of a small win opening, the small win opening display command instructs the start of a small win opening (when the large winning port 2005 of the start port unit 2100 is open or has started to open during a small win), the small win count display command instructs the large winning port winning presentation during a small win (the presentation when a game ball that has entered the large winning port 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during a small win), and the small win ending command instructs the start of a small win ending.

As for the timing of sending these various commands, the jackpot opening command is sent at the start of the jackpot opening, the large prize opening 1 open Nth display command is sent when the large prize opening 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (when the large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 is opened in the Nth round), the large prize opening 1 closing display command is sent when the large prize opening 1 is closed (when the large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 starts to close), the large prize opening 1 count display command is sent when the large prize opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large prize opening 1 (when the large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 is opened and when the game ball that entered the large prize opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005), the jackpot ending command is sent at the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot pattern display command is sent when the large prize opening is opened (when the large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 is opened).

The small win opening command is sent when the small win opening starts, the small win opening display command is sent when the small win opens (when the large winning port 2005 of the start port unit 2100 opens during a small win), the small win count display command is sent when the ball enters the large winning port during a small win (when the game ball that entered the large winning port 2005 during a small win is detected by the count sensor 4005), and the small win ending command is sent when the small win ending starts. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power On]
The power-on category consists of commands named "power-on state" and "power-on main control return destination," as shown in FIG. 89. These various commands include the status "D*H " and "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1). (This was done).

The power-on state command indicates the start of the RAM clearing effect and the game state. The power-on state command is composed of information that indicates when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated to perform RAM clear when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage), information that indicates which state (probability and time-saving state) to return to when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage), among the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of this pachinko machine, for example, when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet type, specifies which copyright of the work it is for and what kind of game specifications it is (for example, a game specification in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, and a game specification in which the probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times of special pattern fluctuation (for example, 30 times or 70 times) (so-called ST machine)). In other words, the information of the model code of a pachinko machine is mainly composed of a series code that specifies which type it is, among the max type, middle type, and sweet type that indicate the model type, a copyright code that specifies the copyright of the work, and a game specification code that specifies the game specification (for example, a game specification in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, and a game specification in which the probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times of special pattern fluctuation (ST machine)).

The main control return destination command at power on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power on is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information indicating the drive state of the attacca solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69.

The power-on status command and power-on main control return destination command are sent when the main control board is powered on (including when the power is turned on and when power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when it recovers from a power outage or momentary power outage, the main control side power-on process described below is executed, and the power-on status command and power-on main control return destination command are sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-5. General-purpose synchronous performance related]
The normal symbol synchronization performance-related commands are based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in Fig. 69, and as shown in Fig. 89, the commands are composed of commands named "Start normal symbol synchronization performance", "Specify normal symbol", "End normal symbol synchronization performance", and "Specify state at time of change" related to the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in Fig. 69. These various commands are assigned "E*H" as the status and "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal pattern synchronization start command instructs the start of the normal pattern synchronization performance with the performance pattern specified by the mode, the normal pattern designation command designates a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot, the normal pattern synchronization end command instructs the end of the normal pattern synchronization performance, and the variable state designation command instructs the probability and time-saving state. As described above, the probability and time-saving state consists of a low-probability time-saving state that indicates a low-probability state and a time-saving state, a high-probability time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state and a time-saving state, a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a low-probability state and a non-time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state and a non-time-saving state (the low-probability non-time-saving state is set as the normal game state).

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: the normal pattern synchronization start command is sent when normal pattern 1 starts to change, the normal pattern designation command is sent immediately after the normal pattern synchronization start, the normal pattern synchronization end command is sent when the normal pattern change time has elapsed (when the normal pattern is confirmed), and the change time state designation command is sent immediately after the normal pattern win/lose information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Regular Electric Role Performance Related]
The normal electric role performance-related relates to a pair of movable pieces shown in Fig. 8 that are opened and closed by the drive of the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in Fig. 69, and this section is composed of commands named "normal winning opening", "normal power opening display", and "normal winning ending" as shown in Fig. 89. These various commands are assigned "F*H" as the status and "**H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal map opening command instructs the start of normal map opening, the normal power release display command instructs the start of normal power release (when the pair of movable pieces are in a state where they are opened to the left and right by the drive of the starting port solenoid 2107, or when they are about to open), and the normal map ending command instructs the start of normal map ending.

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: the normal map opening command is sent when the normal map opening starts, the normal power release display command is sent when the normal power is released (when the pair of movable pieces open left and right due to the drive of the starting port solenoid 2107), and the normal map ending command is sent when the normal map ending starts. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in Fig. 90, the notification display categories are made up of commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, open/short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door open, and door close. These various commands are assigned a status of "6*H" and a mode of "**H" (where "H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command instructs the start of a winning abnormality notification when a winning ball is entered into the large winning port other than during a jackpot (when a game ball enters the large winning port 2005 of the start port unit 2100 and the count sensor 4005 detects the game ball even when there is no jackpot). The connection abnormality display command instructs the start of a connection abnormality notification when there is an electrical connection abnormality in the path between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The disconnection/short circuit abnormality display command instructs the start of a disconnection/short circuit abnormality display when there is a disconnection/short circuit in the electrical connection between the main control board 1310 and the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc., for example. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command instructs the start of a magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 69.

The door open command instructs a door open notification when the door frame 3 is open relative to the main frame 4 based on a detection signal (open signal) from the door frame open switch 618 input via the dispensing control board 951 shown in FIG. 70, and the door frame close command instructs the end of the door open notification when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame open switch 618. On the other hand, the main frame open command instructs a main frame open notification when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal (open signal) from the main frame open switch 619 input via the dispensing control board 951 shown in FIG. 70, and the main frame close command instructs the end of the main frame open notification when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main frame open switch 619.

As for the timing of sending these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is sent when a big prize is won in the big prize winning port other than during a big win (when the condition device is operating), the connection abnormality display command is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 when a command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951, the disconnection/short circuit abnormality display command is sent when any of the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc. is disconnected or shorted, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is sent when an abnormality in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. In addition, the door open command is sent when the door is opened (when the door frame 3 is open relative to the main frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618), and the door frame close command is sent when the door is closed (when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618). The main frame open command is sent when the main frame is detected as open (when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch 619), and the main frame close command is sent when the main frame is detected as closed (when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch 619). Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in Fig. 90, the status display is made up of commands named Frame Status 1 Command (corresponding to the error occurrence command), Error Clear Navigation Command (corresponding to the error clear command), and Frame Status 2 Command. These various commands are assigned a status of "7*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The slot status 1 command, the error clear navigation command, and the slot status 2 command are each commands with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) sent from the dispensing control board 951, and a detailed description of these will be given later. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the slot status 1 command, the error clear navigation command, and the slot status 2 command from the dispensing control board 951, it sets "7*H" as the status as shown in FIG. 90, and sets the received command as the mode as is. In other words, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the slot status 1 command, the error clear navigation command, and the slot status 2 command from the dispensing control board 951, it adds the additional information "7*H" to these received commands, thereby forming them into commands with a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted Frame State 1 command is sent when power is restored, when the frame state changes, and when error clear navigation is performed, the Error Clear Navigation command is sent when error clear navigation is performed, and the Frame State 2 command is sent when power is restored and when the frame state changes. Note that these formatted Frame State 1 command, Error Clear Navigation command, and Frame State 2 command are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-9. Test-related]
The test-related section is made up of various commands named "test" as shown in Fig. 90. This test command is assigned a status of "8*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" represents a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various tests of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, tests of various boards such as the peripheral control unit 1511, LCD display control unit 1512, lamp drive board 4170, motor drive board 4180, and frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in Figure 72).

The test command is sent when the RAM is cleared when the main control board is powered on and at times other than when the RAM is cleared. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when it recovers from a power outage or momentary power outage, and the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power-on process described below is executed and the test command is sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-10. Others]
Other categories, as shown in Fig. 90, are made up of commands named "Starting hole winning", "Variation shortening operation end designation", "High probability end designation", "Special symbol 1 memory", "Special symbol 2 memory", "Normal symbol memory", "Special symbol 1 memory pre-reading performance", and "Special symbol 2 memory pre-reading performance". These various commands are assigned a status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start hole entry command instructs the start of the start hole entry presentation, and instructs the start of the presentation when the game ball enters the first start hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002, and the start of the presentation when the game ball enters the second start hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004, respectively. The fluctuation shortening operation end designation command instructs the state transition from the fluctuation shortening operation state to the fluctuation shortening non-operation state, and is a high probability end designation. The set command instructs a transition from a high probability state to a low probability state, the special symbol 1 storage command conveys 0 to 4 reserved special symbols 1 (the number of balls (reserved number) that have not yet been used to display the changing special symbols on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 after a game ball has entered the first start hole 2002 shown in FIG. 8), and the special symbol 2 storage command conveys 0 to 4 reserved special symbols 2 (the number of balls (reserved number) that have not yet been used to display the changing special symbols on the second special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 after a game ball has entered the second start hole 2004 shown in FIG. 8). The normal symbol memory command conveys 0 to 4 normal symbol 1 reserved (the number of balls (reserved number) that have not yet been used to display the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 after the game ball has passed through the gate section 2003 shown in FIG. 8), and the special symbol 1 memory pre-reading performance command conveys the number of reserved special symbol 1 reserved balls (the number of balls (reserved number) that have not yet been used to display the variation of the normal symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400). This command instructs the start of a look-ahead performance that reads ahead and notifies a preview of the display result by the first special pattern display 1403 based on the reserved special pattern 1 before it is used to display the changing patterns, and the special pattern 2 storage look-ahead performance command instructs the start of a look-ahead performance that reads ahead and notifies a preview of the display result by the second special pattern display 1405 based on the reserved special pattern 2 before the reserved special pattern 2 is used to display the changing special patterns on the second special pattern display 1405 of the function display unit 1400.

Regarding the timing of sending these various commands, the start hole entry command is sent from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 when the game ball enters the start hole (when the game ball enters the first start hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002, or when the game ball enters the second start hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004) to notify the fact mainly by voice, and the fluctuation reduction operation end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation confirmation that the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been consumed (after the miss stop period has elapsed), and the high probability end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation confirmation that the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been consumed (after the miss stop period has elapsed). The fixed command is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the high probability count in the case of "high probability N times" is consumed and the fluctuation is confirmed (after the miss stop period has elapsed), and the special symbol 1 memory command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 activation changes (when a game ball enters the first start hole 2002 and there is a reserved number that has not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, and when a game ball enters the first start hole 2002 and the reserved number increases, or when the reserved number is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the reserved number decreases). The pattern 2 memory command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2 activation changes (when a game ball enters the second start opening 2004 and there is a reserved number that has not yet been used to display the special pattern variation on the second special pattern display 1405 of the function display unit 1400, and when a game ball enters the second start opening 2004 and the reserved number increases, or when the reserved number is used to display the special pattern variation on the second special pattern display 1405 and the reserved number decreases). The normal pattern memory command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls for normal pattern 1 activation changes (when a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and there is a reserved number that has not yet been used to display the special pattern variation on the normal pattern display 1405 of the function display unit 1400, and when a game ball enters the second start opening 2004 and the reserved number increases, or when the reserved number is used to display the special pattern variation on the second special pattern display 1405 and the reserved number decreases). When there are reserved numbers that have not yet been used to display the normal pattern variation in 402, and the reserved number increases when a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, or when the reserved number is used to display the normal pattern variation in the normal pattern display 1402 and the reserved number decreases), the special pattern 1 memory read-ahead performance command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special pattern 1 activation increases (when a game ball enters the first start hole 2002 and the reserved number increases), and the special pattern 2 memory read-ahead performance command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2 activation increases (when a game ball enters the second start hole 2004 and the reserved number increases). Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

As described above, the start hole entry command is transmitted from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 mainly to notify the player of the start hole entry (when the game ball enters the first start hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002, or when the game ball enters the second start hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004) by voice, but how the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72 uses the start hole entry command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in addition to notifying the player of the start hole entry by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the command is also used to monitor for the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. In contrast, in other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start hole entry command, and does not notify the player of the start hole entry by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

[13-3. Various commands received by the main control board from the dispensing control board]
Next, we will explain the various commands received by the main control board 1310 from the dispensing control board 951.

As shown in Figure 91, the classification of various commands from the dispensing control board 951 consists of commands named Slot Status 1, Error Clear Navigation, and Slot Status 2, and the priority is set in the order of Slot Status 1, Error Clear Navigation, and Slot Status 2.

The Frame Status 1 command (corresponding to the error command) has the following statuses: out of bulb, full, 50 or more bulbs in stock, connection abnormality, and CR not connected; for out of bulb, bit 0 (B0, "B" represents a bit) is set to value 1, for full, bit 1 (B1) is set to value 1, for 50 or more bulbs in stock, bit 2 (B2) is set to value 1, for connection abnormality, bit 3 (B3) is set to value 1, and for CR not connected, bit 4 (B4) is set to value 1. Bits 5 (B5) through 7 (B7) of the Frame Status 1 command have B5 set to value 1, B6 set to value 0, and B7 set to value 0.

The error release navigation command (corresponding to the error release command) is prepared for ball detection, payout detection sensor error, and retry error. For ball detection, a value of 1 is set to bit 2 (B2), for payout detection sensor error, a value of 1 is set to bit 3 (B3), and for retry error, a value of 1 is set to bit 4 (B4). Here, "payout detection sensor error" indicates whether or not there is a malfunction in the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70. "Retry error" indicates that inconsistent payouts of game balls have been performed repeatedly by the retry operation. Bits (B0), (B1), and bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the error release navigation command are set to 0 for B0, 0 for B1, 0 for B5, 1 for B6, and 0 for B7.

The Frame State 2 command has a "ball removed" status, during which a value of 1 is set to bit 0 (B0). Bits 1 (B1) through 7 (B7) of the Frame State 2 command have the following settings: B1 has a value of 0, B2 has a value of 0, B3 has a value of 0, B4 has a value of 0, B5 has a value of 1, B6 has a value of 1, and B7 has a value of 0.

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: Slot Status 1 command is sent when power is restored, when the slot status changes, and when error clearance navigation is performed; Error Clear Navigation command is sent when error clearance navigation is performed; and Slot Status 2 command is sent when power is restored and when the slot status changes. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the command sending process of step S558 in the payout control unit main processing of the payout control unit power-on processing described below.

[14. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in Fig. 69 according to the progress of the game on the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figs. 92 to 94. Fig. 92 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control side power-on process, Fig. 93 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on process in Fig. 92, and Fig. 94 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control side timer interrupt process. First, various random numbers used in game control will be described, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control side timer interrupt process.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
The various random numbers used for game control include a jackpot determination random number used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game state, a reach determination random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach (reach miss) when a jackpot game state is not generated, a variable display pattern random number used to determine the variable display pattern of the special patterns displayed in a variable manner on the first special pattern display 1403 and the second special pattern display 1405 shown in FIG. 69, and a random number used to determine the first special pattern display when a jackpot game state is generated. The following random numbers are provided: a jackpot pattern random number for use in determining the jackpot pattern to be derived and displayed by the first special pattern display device 1403 and the second special pattern display device 1405; a jackpot pattern initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of this jackpot pattern random number; a small win pattern random number for use in determining the small win pattern to be derived and displayed by the first special pattern display device 1403 and the second special pattern display device 1405 when a small win game state is generated; and a small win pattern initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of this small win pattern random number. In addition to these random numbers, there are also prepared random numbers for determining whether or not to open or close the movable piece shown in Figure 8, random numbers for determining an initial value for determining whether or not to win a normal pattern, which are used to determine the initial value of the random number for determining whether or not to win a normal pattern, and random numbers for a normal pattern variable display pattern, which are used to determine the variable display pattern of the normal pattern that is variably displayed on the normal pattern display device 1402 shown in Figure 69.

Of the various random numbers used in this type of game control, the random numbers used to determine jackpots are updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the random number for determining a jackpot is updated directly by hardware using the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an built into the main control MPU 1310a shown in Fig. 69. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in Fig. 77) input to the main control MPU 1310a. After extracting all values within the predetermined numerical range, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an again extracts a value within the predetermined numerical range, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. This type of high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of obtaining the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an as the random number for determining a jackpot.

In contrast, the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit is updated within a predetermined fixed range of values from the minimum to the maximum, and counts up this range by adding one value each time the main control timer interrupt process described below is performed. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum to the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit. When the counter finishes counting up the range of the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit from the minimum to the maximum value, the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit is updated. This method of updating a counter is called an "initial value update type counter." The random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value from the fixed range of values of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit.

In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 69 in the main control side power-on processing described later does not match the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off), etc., the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is set by executing an initial value derivation process in which the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 69 retrieves an ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM, and based on the retrieved ID code, the counter that updates the random number for determining the normal symbol hit executes an ID code derivation process to always derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter, and this derived fixed value is set. In other words, the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning symbol is derived using the ID code, and analysis is prevented by taking two security measures: the first security measure is that the ID code cannot be rewritten even using an external device when the ID code is stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer who manufactured the main control MPU 1310a, and the second security measure is that the same fixed value is derived based on the ID code by executing an initial value derivation process when the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM is cleared.

Here, the advantage of extracting the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit judgment will be explained. For example, even if a person who is trying to illegally acquire game balls paid out as prize balls obtains and disassembles the game board 5 in some way, illegally obtains the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and is able to grasp the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for normal symbol hit judgment and the normal symbol hit judgment value match, the ID code is given a unique code for identifying the individual, so it will be completely different from the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a' equipped with other game boards 5'. In other words, in other game boards 5', the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for normal symbol hit judgment and the normal symbol hit judgment value match is also completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the acquired game board 5 is completely useless for other game boards 5', i.e., other pachinko machines 1'. Therefore, even if a momentary interruption is generated at the predetermined intervals obtained by disassembly and analysis, and game balls are passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at the predetermined intervals, it is not possible to open and close the movable piece shown in FIG. 8 to generate a game state in which game balls can be received by the second starting opening 2004.

[14-2. Processing when power is turned on on the main control side]
First, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the contents of a memory element (register) in use, or an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the return address of this routine when ending a subroutine and returning to this routine, and the stack pointer advances each time a new item is added to the stack.

Then, the above-mentioned main control program performs the main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as shown in Figures 92 and 93. When this main control side power-on processing begins, the main control program sets RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). This RAM access permission setting allows updates to be made to the main control's built-in RAM (game memory unit).

Following step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and startup setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in Fig. 69 (step S12). Here, in order to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT 1310af that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally, a timer setting value is set in a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT control register") built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started to start timing until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts timing, and if a timer clear setting value is not set in the watchdog timer clear register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT clear register") built into the main control MPU 1310a before the timed time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the main control built-in WDT 1310af will forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started and starts timing, if a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the timed time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the timed time by the main control built-in WDT 1310af will be cleared and timing will be started again. In this way, by repeatedly clearing the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af before the time set by the timer setting value is reached and then restarting the timekeeping, it is possible to monitor whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally.

Following step S12, the main control program performs a power outage clear process (step S14). In this power outage clear process, first, the power outage clear signal is output to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 78. This power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is composed of a comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares the voltage between +24V and a reference voltage, or between +12V and a reference voltage, and outputs the comparison result. When no power outage or momentary power outage occurs, the logic of this comparison result becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

In the power outage clear process, the power outage clear signal is first output to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, which starts outputting the power outage clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of this D-type flip-flop MIC22. This power outage clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, with its logic set to LOW from the output terminal of a specified output port of the main control MPU 1310a. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and until the latched state is set, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

Next, in the electric power clear process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, when a power outage or momentary power outage (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power outage warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power outage warning voltage after the power is turned on and stabilizes, and in this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) are set as the waiting time (wait timer). The determination of whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 described above, as the power outage warning signal.

If, after power-on, the voltage becomes greater than the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes, but no power outage warning signal is input, the main control program stops outputting the power outage clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Here, the power outage clear signal is input, with its logic set to HI from the output terminal of a specified output port of the main control MPU 1310a, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to a latched state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 latches the state in which the logic is LOW and input to its preset terminal, the PR terminal, the D-type flip-flop outputs the power outage warning signal from the output terminal, the 1Q terminal.

Following step S14, the main control program makes it possible to execute a RAM clear process that initializes the main control built-in RAM (game memory unit) for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on (game side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program performs this determination based on whether an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is input to the main control MPU 1310a. Based on the logical value of the operation signal, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, the main control program determines that the operation switch 954 is not operated, judging that it does not instruct to perform RAM clearing, whereas when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, the program determines that the operation switch 954 is operated, judging that it instructs to perform RAM clearing.

In step S16, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the main control program sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step S20). That is, the main control program makes the RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (i.e., the main control built-in RAM (game memory unit)) executable for a predetermined time from the time of power-on (game control side power-on operation control means). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to erase game information related to games such as probability fluctuations and unpaid prize balls stored in the main control built-in RAM (game memory unit) of the main control MPU 1310a, and is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and to a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the program waits until the system that controls the drawing of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72 starts up (boots up). In this embodiment, the wait time until booting (boot timer) is set to 2.5 seconds (s).

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power outage warning signal. When the power outage warning signal is input in the determination in step S24, the main control program returns to the determination in step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, and the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af cannot be cleared and timekeeping cannot be started again, so that the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Thereafter, the main control program performs the main control side power-on processing again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Note that a detailed explanation of the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby processing in step S22 will be provided later.

If it is determined in step S24 that no power outage warning signal has been input, the main control program determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to the value 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when game information is to be erased, and to the value 0 when game information is not to be erased. If the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to the value 0 in step S26, that is, when game information is not to be erased, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is calculated by treating the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

Following step S28, the main control program judges whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off process (power-off) described later (step S30). If they match, the main control program judges whether the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG is a flag indicating whether game backup information such as game information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG have been stored and held in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power-off process has been normally completed, and to a value of 0 when the main control side power-off process has not been normally completed. Note that the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the judgment in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after production for inspection in the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310 will be described in detail later.

When the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control side power cut processing is normally completed, the main control program sets the working area of the main control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery (step S34). This setting is done by reading the power recovery information from the ROM (i.e., the main control built-in ROM) built into the main control MPU 1310a, and setting this power recovery information in the working area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to this game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that "power recovery" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on after being cut off, but also the state in which power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and the state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with high frequency from fraudulent means (for example, a high frequency output device hidden in the hem of the fraudster's arm) and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then restored.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). This causes the game information, checksum value (sum value), etc. to change as various subsequent processes are performed. Therefore, unless the main control power failure process described below is normally completed and the backup flag BK-FLG is not set to a value of 1, the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM will be cleared, as described below.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S26, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S30, or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power off processing has not ended normally, the main control program clears the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear processing in response to the input of a detection signal accompanying the operation of the above-mentioned operation switch 954 (payout control side power on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program does this by writing the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. In addition, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 indicates RAM clearing and game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power off processing has not ended normally, the main control MPU 1310a retrieves a unique ID code previously stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining the normal symbol win based on this retrieved ID code, and sets this fixed value as the random number for determining the initial value for the normal symbol win, which is used to determine the initial value of the random number for determining the normal symbol win described above.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the work area of the main control's built-in RAM as the initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control's built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt period when the main control side timer interrupt process described below is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initial settings (step S44). Here, the transmission serial port prescaler corresponding to the various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU 1310a (for example, the serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the dispensing control board 951 and the serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the peripheral control board 1510) is set to the communication speed and whether or not parity is present, and the transmission serial port control register is set to initialize the transmission circuit and allow transmission, etc.

Following step S44, the main control program initializes the test signal output port (step S46). Here, the gaming machine testing facility initializes the test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various types of inspection information when the power is turned on (setting it to output OFF data).

Following step S46, the main control program performs startup settings for the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an shown in Fig. 69 (step S48). Here, the main control program performs settings such as latching and acquiring random numbers in a hardware random number control register built into the main control MPU 1310a to update the jackpot determination random numbers used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state, among various random numbers related to the game, by hardware, and sets the startup of the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an in the hardware random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is started by these settings, it extracts other values in a predetermined numerical range one after another without overlapping at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), and when all values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, it again extracts one value in the predetermined numerical range, and extracts other values in a predetermined numerical range one after another without overlapping at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Note that when the main control MPU 1310a obtains a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and obtains the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when this latch signal is input from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets this acquired random number as the random number for determining a jackpot.

Following step S48, the main control program reserves the command to be sent when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, a power-on state command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 and a main control return destination command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in order to inform the user that the power has been turned on (power has been restored). In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various commands corresponding to the game information read from the game backup information may be stored in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In such a case, after the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on are transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later. A detailed explanation of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be given later.

Following step S50, the main control program sets interrupt permission (step S52). This setting causes the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, to be repeated at the interrupt period set in step S42, i.e., every 4 ms.

Following step S52, when a predetermined time has elapsed since power-on, that is, when the main control side main processing has begun, the main control program will regulate the execution of the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by receipt of an error clear navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to handle the detection signal input in association with the operation of the operation switch 954, and executes the RAM clear processing triggered by the input of the error clear navigation command for a predetermined time from power-on as described above (game control side power-on operation control means), and regulates the execution of the RAM clear processing even if the error clear navigation command is input after the predetermined time has elapsed (game control side normal operation control means), treating it as a release switch for releasing an error notification associated with an error that has occurred. In other words, the operation switch 954 (error clearing section), which would normally be used to clear an error that occurs during the payout operation, can instead function as an operation section for executing a RAM clear process to start the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (and the payout control built-in RAM as the payout memory section, described later) for a predetermined period of time from when the power is turned on, or, after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, as an operation section for clearing an error that occurs during the payout operation of the game balls.

The main control program then determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power outage or momentary interruption occurs, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

When no power outage warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs a non-win/lose random number update process (step S56). In this non-win/lose random number update process, the random numbers for reach determination, the random numbers for variable display patterns, the random numbers for determining the initial value for the jackpot pattern, and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small jackpot pattern, etc., are updated. In this way, in the non-win/lose random number update process, random numbers that are not related to the win/lose determination (jackpot determination) are updated by software. Note that the random numbers for normal pattern hit determination, the random numbers for determining the initial value for normal pattern hit determination, and the random numbers for normal pattern variable display patterns, etc., are also updated by this non-win/lose random number update process.

After step S56, the program returns to step S54, where the main control program determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If no power outage warning signal has been input, the program performs a non-win/lose random number update process in step S56, and repeats steps S54 to S56. The process of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as the "main control side main process."

On the other hand, when a power outage warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S58). This setting disables the main control timer interrupt process described below, prevents writing to the main control's built-in RAM, and protects game information from being overwritten.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power outage clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process is performed as the process in which the power outage clear signal was started to be output in the power outage clear process in step S14. This allows the main control program to release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S60, the main control program stops the drive signals output to the start port solenoid 2107, the attacca solenoid 2108, the first special pattern display 1403, the second special pattern display 1405, the first special reserved number display 1404, the second special reserved number display 1406, the normal pattern display 1402, the normal pattern memory display 1188, the status display 1401, the round display 1407, etc., as shown in FIG. 69 (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by treating the game information in the working area of the main control internal RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control program sets a prohibition on access to the RAM (step S68). This prohibition on access to the RAM makes it impossible to access the main control's built-in RAM (game memory unit), thereby making it possible to prevent updates to the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game memory unit).

After step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, and the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and timekeeping cannot be started again, so that the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. The main control program then performs this main control side power-on processing again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, and performs main control power-on processing when power is subsequently restored.

In step S30, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S32 it is checked whether the main control's power-off processing has been completed normally. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM, it is checked whether the game backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

Here, we will explain the point that the determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24 is made following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, we will explain the problems that arise when there is no determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 following the wait time standby process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is carried out.

As described above, when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary interruption. In other words, even if the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a momentary interruption or power outage, the charge stored in the hardware, the electrolytic capacitor MC2, is applied as +5V, so that the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed within the period of about 7 ms after the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off. This ensures that the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed reliably when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off while the player is playing, that is, while the main control side main processing or the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is being performed.

However, in an extremely rare phenomenon, when power is restored, the wait time standby process of step S22 starts timing the standby time (boot timer: in this embodiment, set to 2.5 seconds) until the system that controls the drawing of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 by the LCD display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in Figure 72 starts (boots), and if an instantaneous interruption or power outage occurs just before reaching that standby time, a charge of +5 V stored in the hardware electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, but within a period of approximately 7 ms, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, so that the main control side timer interrupt processing described below is performed, and even if the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, it may not be possible to complete the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing. As a result, the checksum calculated based on the contents of the main control's built-in RAM is not stored, and the main control's power-on processing will begin again when power is restored.

If this is the case, when power is restored this time, the main control side power-on process is started and the wait time standby process of step S22 is completed without an instantaneous or power outage. After that, when the checksum calculated based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S28 is compared in step S30 with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous or power outage occurred, the checksum values will not match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared in step S38. In other words, there is a problem that when power is restored, the operation switch 954 is operated by a hall staff member or the like, and the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared) even if there is no intention from the hall staff member or the like to clear the RAM.

Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided as step S24 to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and the determination of step S24 is repeated as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. As a result, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, and the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and timekeeping cannot be started again, so that the main control built-in WDT 1310af can forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a. Although a value is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before the wait time standby process in step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a as described above, so even if RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step 24. When a power outage warning signal has been input (that is, when it is determined by the determination of step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 has been cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of step S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is repeated, so that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted, so that the game cannot proceed and the game information can be prevented from being updated, and the calculation result of the checksum does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 and the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64 are consistent, so the game information immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. This prevents game information from being initialized immediately before a momentary or power outage occurs when power is restored.

In addition, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided as step 24 for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. When a power outage warning signal has not been input (i.e., when it is determined by the judgment of step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 has not been cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of step S22), even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is progressing a game, the power is supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77, and the game information due to the progress of this game is maintained. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the main control side power failure process consisting of the process of steps S58 to S68, which is a backup process for storing information, and an infinite loop, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (i.e., the value calculated and stored for the checksum in step S64), when restarted, and therefore does not initialize the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary interruption or power outage occurs. In other words, the game information is restored to the state immediately before the momentary interruption or power outage occurs, and the main control board 1310 can be started.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has been input immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT 1310af, thereby making it possible to start the main control side power outage processing again without updating the contents of the main control's built-in RAM at all. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power outage processing within the "power supply assurance period during momentary power outage or power outage" of approximately 7 ms determined by hardware, as before. That is, in this embodiment, when a momentary or power outage occurs during the main control side power-on process upon power recovery, and the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, and the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary power outage occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power-off process cannot be completed within the "momentary or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms due to the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, then the process in step S24 immediately follows the wait time standby process in step S22. In step S24, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input, and when a power failure warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination in step S24. As long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is repeated, and a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, and the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and timekeeping cannot be started again, so that the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. By forcibly resetting the main control MPU 1310a by the main control built-in WDT 1310af using such software, it is possible to prevent the progress to the step after step S24 (specifically, the control flow in which the interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission is set in step S52 to start the main control side timer interrupt processing described later), thereby avoiding the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM from being updated. In this way, when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the system is divided into two parts: a software part that ensures that the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all, and a hardware part that ensures that the main control's power cut processing is completed reliably and that the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all. By configuring the system in two ways, it is possible to reliably prevent the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information) from being changed.

Next, the reservation setting of the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, in order to inform the user that the power has been turned on (restored), a power-on state command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 and a power-on main control return destination command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, this power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 and information indicating the drive state of the attacca solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. Here, we will first explain the problem that occurs when the power-on main control return destination command does not include information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 and information indicating the drive state of the attacca solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69; in other words, the problem that occurs when the power-on main control return destination command does not reserve the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a jackpot game state screen (e.g., a jackpot game presentation screen) in the display area of the game board side presentation display device 1600 shown in FIG. 8, and the main control board 1310 drives the attacca solenoid 2108 to open the large prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 by the opening/closing member 2107, if a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the main control board 1310 is restored to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, and starts driving the attacca solenoid 2108, causing the large prize opening 2005 to transition from a state in which it is closed by the opening/closing member 2107 to a state in which it is open.

However, when a momentary or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, and thus when a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can restore based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when a momentary or power outage occurs while the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot game state as a game state and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can display a screen in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, but cannot display at all which round of the jackpot game state it is. In other words, even if, for example, a gaming ball enters the large prize opening 2005 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69, and the main control board 1310 transmits a large prize opening 1 count display command to the peripheral control board 1510 to inform the peripheral control board 1510 of the number of gaming balls that have entered the large prize opening 2005, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the number of gaming balls that have entered the large prize opening 2005 on the screen in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state, but cannot display at all which round of the large prize game state (i.e., which round).

In this situation, for example, when the fourth round (fourth round) of the jackpot game state is ended, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacca solenoid 2108 and transmits a large prize opening 1 closed display command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, which instructs the large prize opening 2005 to transition from an open state to a closed state by the opening/closing member 2107 (i.e., the start of closing the large prize opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 between rounds), and when the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, it starts driving the attacca solenoid 2108 and transmits a large prize opening 5th open display command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, which instructs the large prize opening 2005 to transition from a closed state by the opening/closing member 2107 to an open state (i.e., the start of opening the large prize opening 2005 for the fifth round). As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches from the screen corresponding to the probability and time-saving state described above to a screen indicating the start of five rounds of the jackpot game state in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600.

Also, for example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a screen (for example, a screen informing the player that the movable pieces are being opened) on the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to inform the player that the game ball can be received in the second starting hole 2004 and that the game state is favorable to the player, and when the main control board 1310 drives the starting hole solenoid 2107 to open the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 to the left and right, if an instantaneous or power outage occurs and power is then restored, the main control board 1310 is restored to the game state immediately before the instantaneous or power outage occurred based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, and the driving of the starting hole solenoid 2107 is started, and the pair of movable pieces transition from a state in which they are approximately vertically standing to a state in which they are opened to the left and right.

However, when a momentary power outage or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 is designed to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 and recover when power is restored. Therefore, when a momentary power outage or power failure occurs and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when a momentary or power outage occurs while the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which a game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004, generating a gaming state advantageous to the player, and power is then restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return to normal by displaying a screen in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration, but the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display at all in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 a screen informing the player that the gaming state has become advantageous to the player, in which a game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004. For this reason, a player seated at the front of the pachinko machine may be surprised by the occurrence of a momentary or power outage and forget that when power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred was one in which a game ball could be received into the second starting hole 2004. In such a case, even though the game state at the time of power restoration is restored to one in which a game ball can be received into the second starting hole 2004, a screen instructing the game to be played (i.e., a screen instructing the game to put a game ball into the second starting hole 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 at the time of power restoration, and the player may not know what game to play.

As described above, in the two examples mentioned above, there was a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary or blackout could not be quickly restored after power was restored. In other words, there was a problem that a player seated in front of the pachinko machine would mistakenly think that the pachinko machine's system had frozen when power was restored after a momentary or blackout.

In this embodiment, in order for the main control board 1310 to transmit a power-on status command and a power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and power is restored), in step S50, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then transmitted during the main control side timer interrupt process described below.

As a result, based on the power-on state command and power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the peripheral control board 1510 that, for example, in the above example, when a momentary or power outage occurs during the fourth round of the jackpot game state and power is then restored, the main control board 1310 will return to the destination by initiating the drive of the attacca solenoid 2108 and transitioning the jackpot opening 2005 from a state in which it is closed by the opening/closing member 2107 to a state in which it is open. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen specifying that it is the fourth round of the big win game state (i.e., a screen showing which round it is) in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, but can display a screen informing that it is a big win game state, that the attacca solenoid 2108 has started to be driven, and that the big win opening 2005 has been opened by the opening and closing member 2107 (for example, a screen saying "It's a big win. The big win opening is open. Please enter the game ball into the big win opening"). Please play your game.") can be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to instruct the player seated in front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which a game ball will enter the large prize opening 2005 after power is restored. Also, for example, in the above example, in a game state in which game balls can be received by the second start opening 2004 and the game state is favorable to the player, if a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the return destination of the main control board 1310 can be Then, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen informing the player that the start port solenoid 2107 has started to be driven and the pair of movable pieces have been opened to the left and right (for example, a screen informing the player of the message "The movable pieces are being opened. Please play so that the game ball enters the lower start port.") on the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, and the player seated in front of the pachinko machine can be instructed to play a game in which the game ball enters the second start port 2004 after power is restored. This allows the main control board 1310 to give detailed instructions on the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 when a momentary power outage or blackout occurs and then power is restored. Therefore, after power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary power outage or blackout can be quickly restored. In other words, it is possible to prevent a player seated in front of the pachinko machine from mistaking the system of the pachinko machine for a malfunction, as appearing to be frozen when a momentary power outage or blackout occurs and then power is restored.

Next, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the judgment in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since it was manufactured for inspection in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process on the manufacturing line for the main control board 1310, will be described. When the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since it was manufactured for inspection in the main control board inspection process, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the above-mentioned backup process of steps S58 to S68 and the main control side power off process consisting of an infinite loop. Therefore, even if a checksum is calculated based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S28, the checksum values will not match in the comparison judgment in step S30, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will necessarily be cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on as shown in FIG. 89, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, so that only the two commands, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later, the power-on state command is transmitted first, followed by the power-on main control return destination command. Using this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the power-on state command is transmitted as the first command from the main control board 1310 to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

As described above, the power-on state command is composed of information that instructs the user to clear the RAM when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption), information that instructs which state (probability and time-saving state) to return to when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption), among the low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state, and information that indicates the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, we will explain the problem that occurs when the power-on state command does not include information that indicates the model code of the pachinko machine.

As mentioned above, the model code of the pachinko machine is used to determine which copyright of the work it is for and what kind of game specifications it has when creating the so-called max type, mid type, or sweet type pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310) (for example, in addition to game specifications in which, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, there is also a game specification in which the number of times the special pattern can fluctuate is limited (for example, 30 or 70 times) and a probability fluctuation occurs (so-called ST machine)).

In the production line of a manufacturer that produces pachinko machines 1, when the main control boards 1310 are manufactured, main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works may be mixed together.
As a result, workers on the production line may not know which of the multiple types of work copyrights (for example, the copyrights of Movie A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F) the main control board 1310 is being sent down the production line to manufacture for which of the multiple types of work copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Movie D), or they may mistakenly believe or believe that even though the main control board 1310 is being sent down the production line to manufacture the main control board 1310 for one of the multiple types of work copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Movie D), it is being sent down the production line to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). For this reason, when the main control board 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights is manufactured on the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights is mixed, the workers on the manufacturing line cannot confirm which work copyright the main control board 1310 manufactured on the manufacturing line is for, and even for the same work copyright, they cannot confirm which model type (max type, middle type, sweet type) and what game specifications (game specifications in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, or ST machine) are. As a result, when the main control board 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights is manufactured on the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights is mixed, and it will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, there were cases where workers on the game board assembly line attached a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that did not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. As a result, there was a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 decreased.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when a power outage or momentary power interruption occurs and power is restored), in order to transmit a power-on status command including information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine to the peripheral control board 1510, the power-on status command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 and the power-on main control return destination command are created in step S50 and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then transmitted during the main control timer interrupt process described below.

As a result, during the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process for the manufacturing line, an operator on the production line of the manufacturer that produces the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310, and based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine contained in the power-on status command received by the inspection device from the main control board 1310, the inspection device 201 determines the model code of the pachinko machine, i.e., the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, including the series code for identifying which of the above-mentioned model types (max type, middle type, or sweet type) it is, the copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state will continue until the next big win game state occurs, By visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification in which a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times for which a special pattern can be changed (such as an ST machine), in addition to the game specification in which a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times for which a special pattern can be changed, it is possible to determine which copyright of the work the main control board 1310 corresponds to, and even for the copyright of the same work, it is possible to determine which model type (one of the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type) and what kind of game specification it is (such as a game specification in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next big win game state occurs, or an ST machine). As a result, even if main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are mixed when manufacturing the main control boards 1310 on the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, the workers in the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line can visually check the inspection monitor to accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, and can send the main control boards 1310 for each copyright of the work to the subsequent game board assembly line. Then, the workers on the game board assembly line can reliably attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and can prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to improving the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at an interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in Figures 92 and 93.

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control program in the main control board 1310 switches the register bank under the control of the main control MPU 1310a as shown in FIG. 94 (step S100). The general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks consisting of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the above-mentioned main control side power-on processing, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, the register bank is switched from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing to the second register bank. Note that in this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started, the process of saving each register to a stack is not required.

Following step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction processing, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric role control processing described later, the time during which the normal symbol display 1402 is lit according to the normal symbol variable display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric role control processing described later, as well as the time of the ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a payer ACK signal that informs the payout control board 951 that various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) have been input. Specifically, when the change time of the change display pattern or normal pattern change display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the change time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, thereby accurately measuring the change time of the change display pattern or normal pattern change display pattern.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input judgment time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input judgment time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input judgment time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0. Note that these various times and the ACK signal input judgment time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, this main control program, for example, detects a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 4020, 4020 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2001, 2201 shown in FIG. 8, detects a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, detects a detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, detects a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting opening 2002 shown in FIG. 8, detects a game ball that has entered the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, which detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 8, the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 69, which detects fraudulent acts using a magnet, and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69, which informs that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later, are read and stored in the input information storage area as input information. In addition, when the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002, which detects the game ball that has entered the first start hole 2002, and the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004, which detects the game ball that has entered the second start hole 2004, are read, the corresponding start hole winning command classified as others shown in FIG. 90 is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. In other words, when there is a detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002, the corresponding start hole winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and when there is a detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004, the corresponding start hole winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

In this embodiment, when the switch input process is started, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 4020, 4020 that detects the game ball that entered the general winning opening 2001, 2201, the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 that detects the game ball that entered the big winning opening 2005, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that entered the first starting opening 2002, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that entered the second starting opening 2004, and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects the game ball that passed through the gate section 2003 are first read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read the second time is compared with the result read the first time. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again a third time, and the result read the third time is compared with the result read the second time. It is again determined whether any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again a fourth time, and the result read the fourth time is compared with the result read the third time. It is again determined whether any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, it is treated as if no game balls have entered the game.

In this way, in the switch input process, the main control program performs a total of two double readings of the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003, by performing a double reading that compares the detection signals from the first to third times and a double reading that compares the detection signals from the second to fourth times, thereby making it possible to avoid false detections due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc., and thus improving the reliability of the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003.

Following step S104, the main control program performs a win/lose random number update process (step S106). In this win/lose random number update process, the random numbers for the big win symbol and the small win symbol are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random numbers for determining the initial value for the big win symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small win symbol, which are updated in the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 93, are also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big win symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small win symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further increase randomness. In contrast, the random numbers for the big win symbol and the random numbers for the small win symbol are random numbers related to the win/lose judgment (big win judgment), so the respective counters are counted up only each time this win/lose random number update process is performed. In addition, the random numbers for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning combination and the random numbers for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning combination are also updated by this winning/losing random number update process.

For example, as described above, the counter that updates the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won is an initial value update type counter that is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and counts up this range by adding one value each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. It counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won. When the counter finishes counting up the range of the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won, from the minimum to the maximum value, the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether or not a jackpot has been determined is updated by this random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won.

In this embodiment, the random numbers for determining the initial values for the big win symbols and the random numbers for determining the initial values for the small win symbols are updated by the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 93, and the win/lose random number update process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine. However, if the processing time of this routine becomes uneven each time the interrupt timer occurs and the main control side main process is repeatedly executed within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer occurs, causing the number of times the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 is executed to become random, the random numbers for determining the initial values for the big win symbols and the random numbers for determining the initial values for the small win symbols may be updated only in the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control program performs a prize ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and a prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 is created for paying out game balls based on this input information. If the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify this, and stored in the output information storage area as output information, and a self-check command shown in FIG. 88 is created to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The created prize ball command and self-check command are then sent to the payout control board 951 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the large prize opening 2005 shown in Figure 8, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 prize balls, and since the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to inform the player of this, and stored as output information in the output information memory area, and the prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 951.If a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has successfully received the prize ball command is not input within a specified period of time, a self-check command is created to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, and sent to the payout control board 951. In addition, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls exceeds 10, such as when creating a prize ball command to pay out 15 prize balls, the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area in the next prize ball control process is added to the excess number of balls, and when the added number of game balls is reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify this fact, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S108, the main control program performs a frame command receiving process (step S110). In the dispensing control board 951, the dispensing control program transmits various commands of 1 byte (8 bits) classified into the status display shown in Fig. 91 (for example, a frame status 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame status 2 command). On the other hand, as described later, the dispensing control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the dispensing operation, and outputs an error release navigation command based on the detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the above-mentioned frame command receiving process, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, it stores information to that effect to the payout control board 951 as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. The main control program also formats the command normally received as payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified as status displays in FIG. 90 (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command)) and stores it as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. Note that the frame status 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error release navigation command corresponds to the first error release command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state related to the winning ball is confirmed. For example, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and when a detection signal is input from the count sensor 4005 when the game is not in a jackpot game state (when a game ball enters the big prize opening 2005), etc., a winning abnormality display command classified as the notification display shown in FIG. 90 is created as an abnormal state, and is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric role control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric role control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when the latch signal is input is obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and this obtained random number value is set as the random number for jackpot determination. Then, it is judged whether the random number for jackpot judgment (i.e., the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) matches the jackpot judgment value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM (judging whether a jackpot game state is generated (called a "special lottery").), or it is judged whether the value of the counter for updating the random number for jackpot symbols matches the probability hit judgment value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM (judging whether a probability fluctuation is generated). Here, "probability fluctuation" means that the probability of winning a jackpot changes to a high probability (probability fluctuation) that is set higher than normal (low probability). In this embodiment, as the range of the jackpot judgment value (jackpot judgment range) described above, the value 32668 to the value 32767 is set for low probability and is read from the normal judgment table, while the value 31768 to the value 32767 is set for high probability and is read from the probability fluctuation judgment table. Thus, in the special symbol and special electric device control process in step S114, when determining whether the random number for determining a jackpot (i.e., the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a) matches the jackpot determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, this is done based on whether the random number for determining a jackpot (i.e., the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a) is included in the jackpot determination range.

If these determination results are due to the first start hole sensor 4002, various commands related to the special pattern 1 synchronization performance shown in Figure 89 are created, whereas if the lottery result is due to the second start hole sensor 4004, various commands related to the special pattern 2 synchronization performance shown in Figure 89 are created and stored in the transmission information memory area as transmission information. In addition, the output of a lighting signal to the first special pattern display device 1403 or the second special pattern display device 1405 is set so as to light up the first special pattern display device 1403 or the second special pattern display device 1405 in accordance with the determined special pattern variable display pattern, and stored in the above-mentioned output information memory area as output information. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a jackpot game state is reached, various commands classified as jackpot-related commands shown in FIG. 89 (jackpot opening command, command to display Nth opening of jackpot opening 1, command to display closing of jackpot opening 1, command to display count of jackpot opening 1, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) are created and stored in a transmission information storage area as transmission information, the output of a drive signal to an attacca solenoid 2108 to open and close the opening/closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is set, and stored in an output information storage area as output information, and the number of times (rounds) that the jackpot opening 2005 changes from a closed state to an open state is set to 2. When the number of rounds is 15, the output of a lighting signal to the 2 round indicator lamp 1407a shown in FIG. 10 is set to light up the 2 round indicator lamp 1407a, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area. When the number of rounds is 15, the output of a lighting signal to the 15 round indicator lamp 1407b shown in FIG. 10 is set to light up the 15 round indicator lamp 1407b, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area. When the number of rounds is 15, the output of a lighting signal to the status indicator 1401 is set to light up a specified color to indicate the occurrence or absence of a probability fluctuation, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric role control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric role control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and gate winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning processing, it is determined from the input information whether or not a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on the result of this determination, when a detection signal has been input to the input terminal, the counter value for updating the random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol has been hit is extracted and stored as gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

This gate information storage area has 0th to 3rd sections (four sections), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. For example, if gate information is stored in 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information in the 1st section of the gate information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information in the 2nd section of the gate information storage is shifted to the 1st section of the gate information storage, and the gate information in the 3rd section of the gate information storage is shifted to the 2nd section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the 3rd section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the 1st section to the 2nd section of the gate information storage, the gate information in the 1st section of the gate information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information in the 2nd section of the gate information storage is shifted to the 1st section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the 2nd section of the gate information storage and the 3rd section of the gate information storage become an empty area. Here, when gate information is stored in the 1st section to the 3rd section of the gate information storage, the output of the lighting signal of the normal pattern memory indicator 1188 is set based on the above-mentioned gate information so that the total number of the stored gate information is set as a reserved ball and the normal pattern memory indicator 1188 is turned on, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the working area of the RAM built into the main control is read out, and the value of the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has been hit is extracted from the gate information read out to determine whether or not it matches the normal symbol winning determination value previously stored in the ROM built into the main control (called the "normal lottery"). This determination result (the lottery result of the normal lottery) determines whether or not to open or close the movable pieces. If this decision is made to open or close the movable pieces are opened in the left and right directions, creating a game state in which a game ball can be received in the second starting hole 2004, creating a game state that is advantageous to the player. The normal pattern variable display pattern corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal pattern variable display pattern described above, and various commands classified as related to the normal pattern synchronization performance shown in Figure 89 are created and stored in the above-mentioned transmission information memory area as transmission information.In addition, the output of a lighting signal to the normal pattern display device 1402 is set so as to light up the normal pattern display device 1402 according to the determined normal pattern variable display pattern, and stored in the above-mentioned output information memory area as output information. Also, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for determining whether a normal symbol hits is the same as the normal symbol hit determination value previously stored in the ROM with the built-in main control, various commands related to the normal electric role performance shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2107 is set to open and close the movable piece, and stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information. On the other hand, when the value of the extracted random number for determining whether a normal symbol hits is the same as the normal symbol hit determination value previously stored in the ROM with the built-in main control, a normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and various commands classified as related to the normal symbol synchronization performance shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of a light signal to the normal symbol display device 1402 is set to light up the normal symbol display device 1402 according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

Following step S116, the main control program performs a port output process (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above through the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control program, for example, outputs a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 951 when various commands from the payout control board 951 have been normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information, outputs a drive signal to the attacca solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the large winning opening 2005 when in a jackpot game state, outputs a drive signal to the start opening solenoid 2107 that opens and closes the movable piece, and also outputs various information (game information) signals related to the game, such as a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special pattern display information output signal, a normal pattern display information output signal, time-saving information output information, and a start opening winning information output signal, to the payout control board 951.

Following step S118, the main control program performs a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads out the transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits this transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In this transmission information, various commands classified as related to special chart 1 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to special chart 2 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to big wins (for example, a large prize opening 1 count display command corresponding to a large prize opening count command based on a detection signal from a count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69) when a game ball entering a large prize opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal chart synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to normal electric role performance, various commands classified as shown in FIG. 90, various commands classified as notification display (door open command, door frame close command, main body frame open command, main body frame close command, etc.), various commands classified as status display (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command), various commands classified as test related, and various commands classified as other are stored. The main circuit serial data is configured with 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main serial data is composed of a status indicating the type of command with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating the variation of the performance with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values and adding them up; this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits various commands as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 79 can at least transfer the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in its transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec, and complete the transmission from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main serial data. When power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 93, in order to inform the user that power has been restored, a power-on state command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 and a power-on main control return destination command are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information, so that the power-on state command is transmitted as main serial data in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. Note that in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on processing, various commands corresponding to the game information read from the game backup information may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In such a case, the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information is first completed, and then the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a slot status 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a slot status 1 command (second error occurrence command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the slot status 1 command, which has the form shown in FIG. 91 and which it has received from the payout control board 951, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a slot status 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error clear navigation command (first error clear command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits an error clear navigation command (second error clear command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error clear navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as an error clear navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main frame open command (first main frame open command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a main frame open command (second main frame open command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (main frame command transmission means, second main frame transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main frame open command, which is in the form shown in FIG. 91, received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a main frame open command, which is in the form shown in FIG. 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main frame close command (first main frame close command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a main frame close command (second main frame close command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (main frame command transmission means, second main frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main frame close command, which has the form shown in FIG. 91, received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a main frame close command, which has the form shown in FIG. 90.

In addition, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door open command (first door open command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a door open command (second door frame open command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (door frame command transmission means, second door frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame close command, which is in the form shown in FIG. 91 and received from the dispensing control board 951, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a door close command, which is in the form shown in FIG. 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door close command (first door close command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a door close command (second door close command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (door frame command transmission means, second door frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door close command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a door close command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared in step S22 by setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Then, by restarting the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af, the main control MPU 1310a is not forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af.

As described above, the main control board 1310 can execute and complete the above-mentioned backup process for storing game information as the game progresses before power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is in progress, and when power is restored, based on the game information for which the backup process has been executed, the main control board 1310 can output to the peripheral control board 1510 the main control return destination command at power on of Figure 89 which instructs the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 and attacker solenoid 2108, which are the electrical drive sources due to the port output process of step S118 in this routine, when power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, as the return destination for the game progress by the main control board 1310. In other words, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent when power is turned on in step S50 of the main control side power-on processing in Figure 93, the main control board 1310 creates a power-on state command classified as power-on in Figure 89 and a power-on main control return destination command, based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in setting the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 of the same processing, to inform the user that power has been turned on (power has been restored), and stores them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.In the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 of this routine, these are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on state command, and then transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main control return destination command. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the destination to which the main control board 1310 will return the game when power is restored in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 based on the main control return destination command from the main control board 1310 when power is turned on. This allows the game to be quickly restored to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage when power is restored while the player is playing, and the destination to which the main control board 1310 will return the game can be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to notify the player, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 does not appear to be in a frozen state, or in other words, in a frozen state, which prevents the player from mistaking it for a malfunction. Therefore, by quickly returning to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage after power is restored, the game can be prevented from being misunderstood for a malfunction by the player.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process on the manufacturing line for the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38 in the main control side power-on processing in Figure 92. As a result, when the reservation setting for the command to be sent when the power is turned on is made in step S50 of the same process, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on as shown in FIG. 89, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information memory area of the main control's built-in RAM, so that only the two commands, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information memory area of the main control's built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the power-on status command is transmitted as main peripheral serial data to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process is configured to display detailed model information on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine contained in the power-on status command received from the main control board 1310, that is, based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, which comprises the above-mentioned series code for identifying which of the model types (max type, middle type, or sweet type) it is, the copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, in addition to the game specifications in which, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times that a special pattern can fluctuate (ST machine)).

[16-1. Various control processes of peripheral control units]
[16-1-1. Processing when peripheral control unit is powered on]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. 95. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs the peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. 95. When this peripheral control unit power-on process starts, the performance control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the performance control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, a process of determining whether it is a hot start or a cold start, and a process of setting a wait timer after reset. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself, and the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be initialized in an extremely short time. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is in a state where interrupt permission is set, and is able to receive various commands, such as commands regarding the control of game presentations and commands regarding the status of the pachinko machine 1, output from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command receiving interrupt processing described below, as shown in Figures 89 and 90.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, the performance backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1fr) and Bank 2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb is compared, and the performance backup information (1ms) which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1ms) and Bank 2 (1ms) is compared. In the backup second area 1511cc, the performance backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) is compared, and the performance backup information (1ms) which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (1ms) and Bank 4 (1ms) is compared. The performance backup information (1 ms) stored in Bank0 (1fr) and Bank1 (1fr) is compared, and if the compared contents match, the performance backup information (1fr) stored in Bank1 (1fr) for Bank0 (1ms), which is the normally used memory area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and the performance backup information (1 ms) stored in Bank1 (1ms) for Bank0 (1ms) are copied back to perform a hot start, whereas if the compared contents do not match (i.e., there is a mismatch), a value of 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are the normally used memory areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, to perform a cold start.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 73 is compared with the performance backup information (SRAM) backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in its backup first area 1511db, and the performance backup information (SRAM) backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in its backup second area 1511dc. When the compared contents match, the performance backup information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is copied back to Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used memory area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 73, to perform a hot start, whereas when the compared contents do not match (i.e., when they are inconsistent), a value of 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used memory area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, to perform a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 to clear it to zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1000, the performance control program performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. 72, and are set in the calendar information storage unit as the current calendar information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and are set in the time information storage unit as the current time information. In addition, in the current time information acquisition process, a brightness setting process for the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In this brightness setting process for the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and performs a process of adjusting and lighting the brightness of the backlight of the performance display device 1600 on the game board side so that it becomes the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 in 5% increments over a range from 100% to 70%, and the currently set brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600.

Specifically, in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75% and the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 80% and the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Note that in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, no correction similar to the brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side performance display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side performance display device 1600 described above is performed. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated into the brightness setting process of this LCD display device, preventing the LED brightness from being corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the LCD display device is executed.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. After performing this current time information acquisition process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1002, the performance control program sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit regular processing described later, and is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit regular processing is not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later, which is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is in a state where it is possible to accept screen data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is input. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0. In addition, after the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0, it outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1006, the performance control program determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to the value 1 (step S1008). If the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not equal to the value 1 (it is equal to the value 0), the program returns to step S1008 and repeatedly determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to the value 1. By repeating such determinations, the program enters a standby state until the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed. After determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to the value 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when peripheral control unit steady-state processing is to be executed, the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is first set to a value of 1 (step S1009). This steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed.

Following step S1009, the performance control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer start process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start process, a 1 ms interrupt timer is started to execute the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described below, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to a value of 1 to count the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer has been started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has been executed, thereby initializing the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process.

Following step S1010, the presentation control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output processing, the presentation control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 72. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the lamp drive board. When this serial I/O port continuous transmission for the lamp drive board is started, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the multiple LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 is created and set in the lamp data creation processing described later in the lamp data creation processing described later.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies transmission of the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board as the request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transfers and writes the first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the top address of the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. As a result, the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting the byte of data in the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK.

Whenever a transmission interrupt request occurs for the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the trigger is when one byte of data written to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty after one byte of data is lost), and when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac reads the remaining game board side light-emitting data stored in the transmission data memory area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side. The serial I/O port for the lamp drive board transfers and writes the data SL-DAT one byte at a time to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The serial I/O port for the lamp drive board then transfers the data written in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting the one byte of data in the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, performing continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board.

In addition, in the lamp data output process, the performance control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in Figure 72. Here too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. When this serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is created and set in the lamp data creation process described below in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 73.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as the request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transfers and writes the first byte of the door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the top address of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data memory area 1511cab to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting the byte of data in the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK.

Each time a transmission interrupt request occurs for the serial I/O port for the LEDs of the frame decoration drive amplifier board, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the trigger is when one byte of data written to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the LEDs of the frame decoration drive amplifier board is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty after one byte of data is lost), and when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, it transfers the remaining door side light emission data stored in the transmission data memory area 1511cab for the LEDs of the frame decoration drive amplifier board. The data STL-DAT is transferred and written one byte at a time to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the LED of the frame decoration drive amplifier board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The serial I/O port for the LED of the frame decoration drive amplifier board transfers the written data from the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting one byte of data from the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, performing continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the LED of the frame decoration drive amplifier board.

Following step S1012, the presentation control program performs a presentation operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this presentation operation unit monitoring process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later performs a presentation operation unit information acquisition process. In the presentation operation unit information acquisition process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later performs a process to acquire information such as the operation of the operation button 410 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the presentation operation unit 400. In the presentation operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is set to acquire information such as the operation of the operation button 410. The peripheral control RAM 1511c monitors whether the operation of the operation button 410 is performed and appropriately determines whether to reflect the operation state of the operation button 410 in the game presentation.

Following step S1014, the performance control program performs a display data output process (step S1016). In this display data output process, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the display data creation process described below to the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 from channels CH1 and CH2 shown in FIG. 74. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. In addition, in the display data output process, if drawing is performed that exceeds the drawing capacity of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the output of the generated one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data to the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 is canceled. This prevents delays in processing time, but may result in dropped frames. However, this allows for a mechanism that prioritizes synchronization between the effects of the multiple LEDs on the various decorative boards on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 and the multiple LEDs on the various decorative boards on the door frame 3, as performed by the lamp data output process in step S1012, and the effects of music and sound effects, etc., that are in sync with the various effects, as performed by the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2, as performed by the sound data output process described below.

Following step S1016, the performance control program performs a sound data output process (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the performance control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation process described below as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, and outputs sound data of notification sounds and announcement sounds in addition to music and sound effects as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. When serialized audio data is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c transmits the right audio data as differential serial data with positive and negative signals to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and transmits the left audio data as differential serial data with positive and negative signals to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. This allows music and sound effects to be played in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573 in accordance with various performances, as well as notification sounds and announcement sounds to be played in stereo.

Following step S1018, the performance control program performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the performance control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. For example, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is updated to indicate which screen data, from the first screen data, among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, is to be output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source.

The scheduler update process also updates a pointer to indicate which light emission data, from the first light emission data, among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for generating light emission modes set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, is to be used as the light emission mode for each type of LED.

The scheduler update process also updates a pointer to indicate which sound command data, starting from the first sound command data, should be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a among the sound command data that indicates sound data such as music and sound effects, and sound data such as alarm sounds and notification sounds, arranged in chronological order that constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, the pointer is updated to indicate which drive data from the first drive data is to be output among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data is updated in the motor and solenoid drive process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, as described below. In this motor and solenoid drive process that is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in the chronological order, and the pointer is updated every time the process itself is executed. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, so even if for some reason the pointer in the motor and solenoid drive process changes from the drive data it was originally supposed to point to to other drive data, the scheduler update process forces it to point to the drive data it was originally supposed to point to.

Following step S1020, the performance control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the performance control program analyzes the information transmitted from the performance display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command reception means) described later (command analysis means). Based on the information transmitted from the performance display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the performance control program extracts screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and sets them in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The performance control program analyzes whether the command received from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start port winning command for instructing the start of a start port winning performance, a normal pattern memory command for identifying the number of reserved normal patterns (0 to 4), a pattern synchronization performance start command for instructing the start of a pattern synchronization performance, a pattern memory command output when the start reserved number changes, a large prize port 1 count display command (large prize port count command) output every time a game ball is received in the large prize port 2005, or a frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command, full tank error occurrence command) showing the content of full tank shown in Fig. 90 (command analysis means), and recognizes which game state is currently in. Furthermore, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the performance control program analyzes whether the command received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is a main body frame open command, a main body frame close command, a door open command, or a door frame close command. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command memory area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and in the reception command analysis processing, the performance control program analyzes the various commands stored in the reception command memory area 1511cac. The various commands include the various commands classified as related to special chart 1 synchronization performance shown in FIG. 89, the various commands classified as related to special chart 2 synchronization performance, the various commands classified as related to big wins, the various commands classified as power-on, the various commands classified as related to normal chart synchronization performance, the various commands classified as related to normal electric role performance, the various commands classified as notification display shown in FIG. 90, the above-mentioned door frame open command, door frame close command, main body frame open command, and main body frame close command, as well as the various commands classified as status display such as the error release navigation command (corresponding to the second error release command) and frame status 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command), the various commands classified as test-related, and the various commands classified as others.

Following step S1022, the performance control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, when the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 as described above include various commands classified as the notification display shown in FIG. 90, the performance control program extracts the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, and the electrical drive source schedule data, which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications, from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and sets them in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. In addition, in the warning process, if multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the highest priority registered in advance, and automatically transitions to other remaining abnormality notifications after the abnormality is resolved. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that one anomaly has occurred because another anomaly occurs after the first anomaly has occurred but before the first anomaly has been resolved.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, if the command analyzed by the performance control program in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (step S1022) is one of the various commands classified into the status display shown in FIG. 90, such as the error reset navigation command (second error reset command), the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled in a manner different from the normal performance manner associated with the performance operation, for example, a visual warning is given to the outside using the game board side performance display device 1600 (performance device), the door frame side performance display device 460 (performance device), or a lamp (performance device), or an auditory warning is given to the outside using a speaker (error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error reset navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 even though the game is in progress, the pachinko machine 1 is configured to give a warning to the outside, which prevents fraudulent acts against the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the performance control program performs an RTC acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the performance control program updates the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit and the time information stored in the time information storage unit that were acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. This RCT acquisition information update process updates the time information (hour, minute, second) stored in the time information storage unit, and updates the calendar information (year, month, day) stored in the calendar information storage unit based on this updated time information.

Following step S1026, the performance control program performs a lamp data creation process (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the performance control program extracts game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on the light emission data indicated by the pointer, which is arranged in chronological order and constitutes the schedule data for generating the light emission mode, from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The data is extracted and created, and set in the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is extracted and created from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73.

Following step S1028, the performance control program performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the performance control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and extracts the screen data indicated by the pointer from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation, and outputs it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and generates drawing data for one screen (one frame) on the built-in VRAM to be displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460.

Following step S1030, the performance control program performs a sound data creation process (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the performance control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and extracts the sound command data indicated by the pointer from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, among the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for sound generation, and outputs it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source, incorporating sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and setting the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. 73 is started each time the sound data creation process is performed (i.e., each time the peripheral control unit performs steady-state processing), and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume control volume 1510a is converted into 1024 levels of values from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as board volumes 0 to 6, with board volume 0 being set to mute and board volume 6 being set to maximum volume, with the volume increasing from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled to set the volume to the board volumes 0 to 6, and the sound data is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above, so that music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In addition, the notification sounds and the announcement sounds are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob, and the volume can be adjusted from mute to maximum volume by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 by a program. Unlike the board volume divided into seven stages described above, the volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if a hall staff member or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the performance sounds such as music and sound effects played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 will be low, but when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or a player is committing a fraudulent act, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is low, it is possible to prevent the hall staff member or the like from being difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume that is set by adjusting the volume by rotating the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be lowered so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects, while the volume of the advertising sound can be increased to make the screen displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 more impressive in addition to the music and sound effects, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a more advantageous game state.

Following step S1032, the performance control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the performance control program copies and backs up the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, respectively, and also copies and backs up the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d to the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab, the received command memory area 1511cac, and the RTC information acquisition record included in Bank 0 (1fr) that is the backup target are backed up for each frame (1frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, each time the peripheral control unit routine process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in the memory area 1511cad and the schedule data memory area 1511cae, to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb as performance backup information (1fr), and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies it to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies the copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) to the last address of Bank0 (1fr) are copied in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) in the backup first area. All contents are copied in order from the first address of Bank1 (1fr) in the rear 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac that the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb, and the contents stored from the first address of Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are copied in order from the first address of Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb in a predetermined number of consecutive bytes (e.g., 1 byte).

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a request from the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) to the last address of Bank0 (1fr) in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request cause for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies all of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) from the first address to the end address of Bank0 (1fr) in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

In the backup process, for the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the performance information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) that is the backup target, to Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db as performance backup information (SRAM) for each frame (1frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 73, that is, each time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed, and then the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the performance information (SRAM) to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies the copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db as a request factor for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the last address of Bank0 (SRAM) are copied consecutively by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time to the backup first area. All contents are copied in order from the first address of Bank1 (SRAM) in the rear 1511db, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac that the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) be copied to Bank2 (SRAM) in the first backup area 1511db, and the contents stored from the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the last address of Bank0 (SRAM) are copied in order from the first address of Bank2 (SRAM) in the first backup area 1511db, consecutively by a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte).

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a request from the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc, and copies all of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) from the first address to the last address of Bank0 (SRAM) in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc, Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request cause for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies all of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) from the first address to the last address of Bank0 (SRAM) in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc.

Following step S1034, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1036, the performance control program sets the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG to a value of 0 as the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed (step S1038), returns to step S1006, sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 to initialize it, and repeats the judgment of step S1008 until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described below. In other words, in step S1008, the program waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, and if it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value of 1, it performs the processing of steps S1009 to S1038, and returns to step S1006 again. In this way, if it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value of 1, it performs the processing of steps S1009 to S1038. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit regular processing."

This peripheral control unit routine processing starts with the performance control program first setting the routine processing in progress flag SP-FLG to a value of 1 in step S1009, indicating that the peripheral control unit routine processing is being executed, then in step S1010, it executes the 1 ms interrupt timer start processing, and in step S1012, step S1014, ..., and step S1036, it finally completes in step S1038 when it sets the routine processing in progress flag SP-FLG to a value of 0, indicating that the peripheral control unit routine processing has been completed. The peripheral control unit routine processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later, which is executed in response to the input of a V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, which indicates that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is in a state where it can accept screen data. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeated approximately every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process which is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the peripheral control unit 1511 is ready to receive screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, as shown in Fig. 72. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 judges whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0 as shown in Fig. 96 (step S1045). As described above, this steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Fig. 95 is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed.

When the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, this routine ends. On the other hand, when the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), and this routine ends. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady-state processing, and is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, and to 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is not executed.

In this embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is equal to the value 0, i.e., whether the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, and when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1 in step S1050. This is because, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, if a V blank signal is input and the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed as determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95, and the currently executing peripheral control unit steady-state processing is forcibly canceled midway and the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is started from the beginning. In order to prevent this, In step S1009 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 to inform the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and in step S1038 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing) of FIG. 95, the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0 to inform the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. In other words, this is a procedure for when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed by the time the next V blank signal is input after the V blank signal is input, resulting in a so-called processing lag.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit regular processing, if the processing cannot be completed within the time of about 33.3 ms and the processing is delayed, the determination in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95 will result in a standby state until the next V blank signal is input. In other words, the time to execute the peripheral control unit regular processing that has been delayed will be about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later, which is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer occurs due to the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. 95, is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit regular processing, but if there is a peripheral control unit regular processing that has been delayed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times, not 64 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit regular processing is delayed, the consistency between the progress of the performance by the peripheral control unit regular processing and the progress of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit's normal processing slows down, the progress of the presentation can be reliably maintained.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer occurs due to the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Fig. 95, will be described. When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Fig. 72 judges whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in Fig. 97 (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is a counter that counts the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Fig. 95 and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeatedly executed every approximately 33.3 ms, so after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times before the next peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, and the second, ..., and 32nd 1 ms timer interrupts occur in sequence.

When the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, this routine is terminated. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs before the next V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is set to have a higher priority than the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process as the interrupt process priority, but the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs before the next V blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. Then, after the V blank signal is generated and the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started again when the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 in step S1100, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is incremented by a value of 1, step S1102. By adding the value of 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start process in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95, and the number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, has been executed, is increased by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the motors and solenoids of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. 72 are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in the chronological order, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is performed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive process, DMA serial continuous transmission process is performed to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. Here, continuous transmission is performed to the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor by utilizing the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When continuous transmission from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data memory area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the performance operation unit 400 is extracted and created from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as the request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transfers and writes the first byte of the door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the top address of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and starts transmitting the byte of data in the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK.

Each time a transmission interrupt request occurs for the serial I/O port for the motor of the frame decoration drive amplifier board, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the trigger is when one byte of data written to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor of the frame decoration drive amplifier board is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty after one byte of data is lost), and when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, it reads the remaining door side motor drive data stored in the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the motor of the frame decoration drive amplifier board. The data STM-DAT is transferred and written one byte at a time to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor then transfers the written data from the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting one byte of data from the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, performing continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor.

In addition, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing is performed to the motor drive board 4180. Here too, continuous transmission is performed to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board by utilizing the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When continuous transmission from the serial I/O port for the motor drive board is started, first, based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data memory area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting drive signals to the motors and solenoids for moving the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in Figure 8 is extracted and created from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a then specifies transmission of the motor drive board serial I/O port as the request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transfers and writes the first byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored at the top address of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag to the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. As a result, the motor drive board serial I/O port transfers the written data from the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting the byte of data from the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK.

Whenever a transmission interrupt request occurs for the serial I/O port for the motor drive board, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the trigger is when one byte of data written to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty after one byte of data is lost), and when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, it reads the remaining game board side motor drive data stored in the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag. The data SM-DAT is transferred and written one byte at a time to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The serial I/O port for the motor drive board then transfers the written data from the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting one byte of data from the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the motor drive clock signal SM-CLK on the game board side, performing continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, a movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches provided on the game board 5 (for example, original position history information, movable position history information, etc.) is created by determining whether or not detection signals have been input from the various detection switches, and set in the movable body information acquisition memory area 1511cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. The original positions, movable positions, etc. of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in this movable body information acquisition memory area 1511cah.

Following step S1106, a production operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this production operation unit information acquisition process, by determining whether or not detection signals are being input from the various detection switches provided in the production operation unit 400, history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, operation history information of the operation button 410, etc.) is created and set in the production operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. Whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated can be obtained from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in this production operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai.

Following step S1108, a drawing status information acquisition process is performed (step S1110). In this drawing status information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created, and set in the drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. As described above, the LOCKN signal is a signal that the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 outputs to inform the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. Specifically, the LOCKN signal is a signal that is output to request the transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The drawing status of the door frame side performance display device 460 can be obtained by obtaining the frequency of malfunctions and the occurrence state of malfunctions between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the performance display drive board 4450 from the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak.

Following step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are copied and backed up to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, respectively, and the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up to the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c, each time the 1 ms interrupt timer occurs in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf, motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag, movable body information acquisition memory The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the performance information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the area 1511cah and the performance operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai, as performance backup information (1 ms) to Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb, and then quickly copies it to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) of the second backup area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies the copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) to Bank 1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb as a request factor for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the contents stored in the first address of Bank 0 (1 ms) to the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) are copied in a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time to the backup first area. All contents are copied in order from the first address of Bank1 (1 ms) in the rear 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies in the request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac that the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) be copied to Bank2 (1 ms) in the first backup area 1511cb, and the contents stored from the first address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are copied in order from the first address of Bank2 (1 ms) in the first backup area 1511cb in a predetermined number of consecutive bytes (for example, 1 byte).

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a request from the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) to Bank 3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) in succession, starting from the start address of Bank 3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc, in a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies in the request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac that the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) be copied to Bank4 (1 ms) of the second backup area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored from the first address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the last address of Bank0 (1 ms) in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank4 (1 ms) of the second backup area 1511cc.

In this way, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, various processes related to the performance described above in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the performance progresses within a period of 1 ms. In contrast, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 95, various processes related to the performance described above in steps S1012 to S1032 are executed as the performance progresses within a period of approximately 33.3 ms. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as is. Therefore, even if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs by chance before the next V blank signal occurs, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled, and the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing by the occurrence of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started by the occurrence of the first 1 ms timer interrupt. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit regular processing and the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, the progress state of the performance can be reliably matched.

As mentioned above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, and the interval at which the V blank signal is output may also vary slightly depending on the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are implemented. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly, the time lag caused by the slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Fig. 72 starts transmitting various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a takes this as a trigger to capture 1 byte (8 bits) of information from the main control board serial I/O port built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a into a reception buffer, and when this capture is completed, an interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is performed. One packet of the main serial data is composed of 3 bytes, with the status assigned to the first byte, the mode assigned to the second byte, and a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values and calculating their sum to the third byte.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200), as shown in FIG. 98. This 1-byte reception period timer sets the period during which 1 byte (8 bits) of information can be received from the main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, when it is within a period in which 1 byte (8 bits) of information can be received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU 1511a retrieves the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main control board serial I/O port built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1202), and adds (increments) the value of the reception counter SRXC by 1, step S1204. This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times information has been retrieved from the reception buffer, and when the first byte of the main serial data, the status, is retrieved from the reception buffer, the value is 1, when the second byte of the main serial data, the mode, is retrieved from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the third byte of the main serial data, the sum value, is retrieved from the reception buffer, the value is 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 when the power is turned on, etc.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether the receive counter SRXC is equal to 3, i.e., whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has been retrieved from the receive buffer (step S1206). In this determination, it is determined whether the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, have been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order.

If the receive counter SRXC is not equal to 3 in step S1206, that is, if the status, which is the first byte of the main loop serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main loop serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main loop serial data, have not yet been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order, a 1-byte receive period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte receive period timer in step S1208, a period is set in which the mode, which is the second byte of the main loop serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main loop serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, when the receive counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, when the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, are retrieved from the receive buffer in that order, the receive counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 (step S1210) and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, which were already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values, and their sum (sum value) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value of the third byte of the main loop serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value of the third byte of the main loop serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main loop serial data from the main control board 1310, so it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island equipment, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they discharge electrostatically, generating noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is in an environment where it is subject to noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data as numerical values, calculates their sum (sum value), and determines whether this calculated sum value matches the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main serial data from the main control board 1310. This allows the peripheral control MPU 1511a to determine whether the main serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has been affected by noise and changed to main serial data that is different from the normal data.

In step S1214, if the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already taken out of the receive buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data are stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 (step S1216), and this routine ends. This receive command memory area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status assigned as the first byte of the main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data are stored in the peripheral control unit receive ring buffer of the receive command memory area 1511cac. This "peripheral control unit receive ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and beginning of the buffer are connected, and data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when the end of the buffer is reached, it returns to the beginning and stores it. When storing the received main loop serial data in the peripheral control unit receive ring buffer in step S1216, the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the status assigned as the first byte of the main loop serial data in association with the mode assigned as the second byte, and discards the sum value assigned as the third byte.

On the other hand, if the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, if the period in which 1 byte (8 bits) of the main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received has been exceeded, or if, in step S1214, the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is terminated.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process shown in Fig. 75 will be described, which is executed when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. When this peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Fig. 72 first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1320) and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) has been input (step S1302). If it is determined that the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) has not been input, the routine is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if a power outage warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether 2 microseconds have passed (step S1304). In this determination, the timer started in step S1320 determines whether 2 microseconds have passed. If 2 microseconds have not passed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has not been input, the routine ends. However, if a power outage warning signal has been input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have passed. In other words, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether a power outage warning signal has been continuously input for 2 microseconds since the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, was started.

When the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is started in step S1304 and the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds, power saving process is performed (step S1306). This power saving process reduces the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 by sequentially turning off the backlights of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, turning off the excitation to the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, turning off various LEDs, etc., thereby ensuring stable operation for the period of 20 milliseconds during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby processing, assuming that there are various commands being sent by the main control board 1310, the processing waits for at least 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the command being sent. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described above is started, and the received command is stored in the reception command memory area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In this command backup processing, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the contents stored in the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73 at high speed to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and then copies the contents at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies the copying of the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the receive command memory area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb as a request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the receive command memory area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) from the contents stored in the start address of the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). All of the received command memory area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup area 1511cb is copied in order from the top address, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies, as a request factor for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, that the contents stored in the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to the received command memory area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup area 1511cb, and the contents stored from the top address of the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are copied in order from the top address of the received command memory area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup area 1511cb in a predetermined number of consecutive bytes (for example, 1 byte).

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies, as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, that the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to the receive command memory area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the receive command memory area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc in sequence, starting from the first address of the receive command memory area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, in succession of a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies, as a request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, that the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to the receive command memory area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the receive command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in order from the first address of the receive command memory area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, consecutively by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

Following step S1310, it is determined whether a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has been input (step S1312). If it is determined that a power outage warning signal has been input, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 to determine whether the power failure warning signal is input. In other words, the process continues to determine indefinitely whether the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By continuing to determine indefinitely in this manner, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a cannot output a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 is started again.

In this way, if the input of the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) is continued in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312, the WDT clear process is executed in step S1314 so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset just before the power outage state occurs. On the other hand, if the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312 and released, the WDT clear process is not executed, so the output of the clear signal is interrupted to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for a period exceeding 2 microseconds, and the determination of step S1302 is passed, if the input of the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) is not continued in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312 and released, the WDT clear process of step S1314 is not executed so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, so that it is possible to respond to such noise by automatically returning to reset.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, a description will be given of the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in Fig. 97. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, a history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 shown in Fig. 87 is created. As described above, this LOCKN signal is a signal that the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 outputs to inform the user when it determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in Figure 74 is abnormal data.Specifically, this signal is output to request the transmission of a specified data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 reads out LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST from the drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73, as shown in FIG. 100 (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, where "B" represents a bit), and the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 is stored as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST in the drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak.

Following step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 (step S1502). This determination is made when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data and determines that a specific data pattern (SYNC pattern) is being requested to be sent to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal data (it is normal data) and determines that there is no request to send a specific data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, a shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1504). In this shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, in the following order: most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to a value of 1 (step S1506), and this routine is terminated.

On the other hand, if there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, a shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1508). In this shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same process as the shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed, and if there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, in the following order: most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to a value of 0 (step S1510), and this routine is terminated.

In this way, each time this LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, and then the least significant bit B0 is set to a value of 1 or 0, making it possible to create a history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0.

[16-1-7. Connection malfunction determination process]
Next, a connection failure determination process will be described which is executed as one of the processes of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in Fig. 95. In this connection failure determination process, based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 shown in Fig. 87, it is determined whether or not a failure has occurred between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Fig. 72 reads out the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST from the drawing state information acquisition memory area 1511cak of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Fig. 73 as shown in Fig. 101 (step S1520). As described above, this LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450. As described above, this LOCKN signal is a signal that the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450 outputs to inform the user when it determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data; specifically, it is a signal that is output to request the transmission of a specific data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

Following step S1520, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 (step S1522). This determination is made by determining whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 72, and in this embodiment, it is "00001111B ("B" represents a bit)," with the upper four bits B7 to B4 having a value of 0 and the lower four bits B3 to B0 having a value of 1. In the determination in step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower four bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower four bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value.

In step S1522, if the lowest four bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 do not match the lowest four bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation judgment value, it is determined that there is no malfunction between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and receiver, and this routine is then terminated.

On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lowest 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 match the lowest 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation judgment value, it is judged that there is a problem between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the communication check counter CC-CNT is incremented by 1 (step S1524). This communication check counter CC-CNT counts up (counts the cumulative number of times) the number of times it has been judged that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver in the judgment of step S1522 each time this routine is executed. In addition, the communication check counter CC-CNT is set to a value of 0 and reset when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, but is not reset by a momentary or power outage, and is restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the moment or power outage when power is restored.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the upper limit value CC-LMT of the cumulative count (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the upper limit value CC-LMT of the cumulative count, it is determined that the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the upper limit value CC-LMT. On the other hand, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the upper limit value CC-LMT of the cumulative count, it is determined that the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the upper limit value CC-LMT.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, when the cumulative count at which it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 (step S1528), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, when the cumulative count at which it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S1530), and this routine is terminated. The communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is a flag that indicates whether the cumulative number of times that it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT and whether a malfunction has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is set to a value of 1 when a malfunction has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and to a value of 0 when the cumulative number of times that it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. Note that the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 and reset when the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 1, but is not reset by a momentary or power outage and is restored to the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the momentary or power outage when power is restored.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, a connection recovery process will be described as one of the processes of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in Fig. 95. This connection recovery process is executed following the connection failure judgment process shown in Fig. 101, and outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (recover) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, while notifying that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal.

When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 judges whether the screen generation schedule data is being started among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 (step S1540). In this judgment, in the scheduler update process, it is judged whether the pointer is updated to indicate which screen data from the first screen data among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the screen generation schedule data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, the performance is progressing according to the screen generation schedule data, so it is judged that the screen generation schedule data is being started, whereas when the performance is completed according to the screen generation schedule data and all the pointer updates are completed, it is judged that the screen generation schedule data is not started. In addition, this judgment can be made based on the screen generation schedule data to determine whether or not the period during which the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board performance display device 1600, or the period during which the game machine is waiting for customers and is performing a demonstration by the game board performance display device 1600, and if the period during which the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board performance display device 1600, or the period during which the game machine is waiting for customers and is performing a demonstration by the game board performance display device 1600, the process proceeds to step S1542, which will be described later, whereas if the period during which the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board performance display device 1600, or the period during which the game machine is waiting for customers and is performing a demonstration by the game board performance display device 1600 (when the game machine is simply waiting for customers), the routine is ended as is.

When the performance is progressing according to the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is running, this routine is terminated as it is, whereas when the performance is completed according to the screen generation schedule data in step S1540 and all pointer updates are completed, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is not running, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step S1542). As described above, each time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is executed, this communication check counter CC-CNT counts up (counts the cumulative number of times) the number of times that it is determined that a failure has occurred between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. In this determination, it is determined whether the number of times that it has been determined that a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred at least once.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, when it has not been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, the routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 in step S1542, that is, when it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, it is determined whether the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, this communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is a flag that indicates whether the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT and there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the flag is set to 1, and when the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the flag is set to 0.

When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, when the cumulative number of times that it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a SYNC pattern output process is performed (step S1546) and this routine is terminated. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, so that the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is pre-stored in the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and is output to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, restoring the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

On the other hand, when the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S1544, that is, when there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, a communication error display process is performed (step S1548) and this routine is terminated. In this communication error display process, in order to inform the user that there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, a process of drawing is performed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in Figure 8. For example, a message saying "There is a malfunction in the upper tray side LCD display device. Please call a store attendant" is displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, in the communication error display process, during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or during the period when the game board side performance display device 1600 is performing a demonstration in a waiting state for customers, in order to check whether or not a problem has occurred between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits LOCKN signal output request data as an operation check request for the door frame side performance display device 460, and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 is output. CSDIC0 outputs a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, and if this LOCKN signal is not input, it determines that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver and that a problem has occurred in the door frame side performance display device 460, and performs processing to display an alert image (for example, "A problem has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. Please call a store clerk.") in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to that effect, and performs processing to repeatedly play an alert sound (for example, "A problem has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device.") from a speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. At this time, processing may be performed to light up all of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5.

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be explained using the timing chart in FIG. 103.

First, to briefly explain the decorative patterns displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8, the variable display of the decorative patterns is executed by the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, and the first special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of a game ball into the first starting hole 2002 shown in FIG. 8, or the first special lottery result shown in FIG. 8, is executed by the main control side main processing of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 93 by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69, or the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 94, etc. If the result of the second special lottery drawn by the reception of a game ball into the second starting opening 2004 is a "jackpot," the number of times (number of rounds) the opening and closing operation of the big prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is repeated will be 15 rounds in total, from round 1 to round 15. In each round, when a game ball enters the big prize opening 2005 within a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9 balls), the round is completed, and each time a game ball enters the big prize opening 2005, a predetermined number (e.g., 15 balls) of game balls are paid out.

Based on a command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the LCD display control unit 1512 to start the varying display of the left decorative pattern on the left side of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the central decorative pattern in the center, and the right decorative pattern on the right side, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the varying display of the left decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern is stopped, allowing the player to recognize the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. At this time, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result can also be confirmed from the first special pattern or the second special pattern displayed on the first special pattern display device 1403 or the second special pattern display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66. When the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are displayed in a variably manner, the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern become semi-transparent to an extent that the background image can be seen, and the left side decorative pattern is displayed in a variably manner from the upper left to the lower left of the display area, the central decorative pattern from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the right side decorative pattern from the upper right to the lower right of the display area, as if a reel is spinning, and when the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are displayed in a stopped state, the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern become opaque so that the background image at the positions corresponding to the stopped and displayed left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern is difficult to see. In this way, the first special pattern or the second special pattern that starts to be displayed variably and then stops being displayed on the first special pattern display device 1403 or the second special pattern display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66 is synchronized with the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern that starts to be displayed variably and then stops being displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600.

When the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command from the main control board 1310 conveying the first special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of a gaming ball into the first starting port 2002, or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of a gaming ball into the second starting port 2004, the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 based on the received command, and as shown in FIG. 103, when the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 shown in FIG. 8 starts to display the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern (timing K0), in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, the time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data memory area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The pointer is updated to indicate which screen data from the first screen data among the screen data arranged in a column is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, the performance is progressing according to the schedule data for screen generation, so the schedule data for screen generation is running, and while the schedule data for screen generation is running, that is, during the time from when the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern starts to when they are stopped, even if the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 is executed in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95, the routine is forcibly terminated as it is by the judgment of step S1540 in this connection recovery process.

As a result, during the period from when the varying display of the left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern starts to be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 until it stops, even if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, even if it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 (i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver) even once, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the connection between the transmitter and receiver is The process to recover the connection is not performed, and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. For example, the message "A problem has occurred with the upper tray LCD display device. Please call a store attendant" is not displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, which notifies the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal, is invalidated, and the door frame side performance display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d.

When the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 starts to display the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern in a variable manner and stops (timing K1), in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, the performance is completed according to the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data memory area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and all pointer updates are completed. In other words, in the scheduler update process, the schedule data for screen generation is not yet started. While the schedule data for screen generation is not yet started, in the judgment of step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102, which is executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, the process proceeds to step S1542 in the same process, and when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0, that is, the transmitter If it has not been determined even once that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the routine is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, if it has been determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, the routine proceeds to step S1544 in the same process. If the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, if the accumulated number of times it has been determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the routine proceeds to step S1546 in the same process, where the above-mentioned SYNC pattern output process is performed and the routine is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (it is 1), that is, if a malfunction has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the routine proceeds to step S1548 in the same process, where the above-mentioned communication error display process is performed and the routine is terminated. In other words, while the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a stopped state in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, if there is a malfunction occurring even once between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, and the accumulated number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, then the SYNC pattern output process is always performed to ensure that there is a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. While processing to restore the connection is performed, if the cumulative number of times that it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (i.e., there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and receiver), a communication error display process is always performed, for example, a message such as "A malfunction has occurred in the upper tray LCD display. Please call a store attendant" is displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to notify the user, and the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which notifies the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data, is enabled.

During the interval period in which the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 starts and stops displaying the varying left decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern, and then starts displaying the varying left decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern again, the left decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Therefore, as described above, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which notifies the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is activated, and if there has been a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, even once, When the cumulative number of times that it is determined that a connection malfunction has occurred does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a SYNC pattern output process is always performed to restore the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when the cumulative number of times that it is determined that a connection malfunction has occurred between the transmitter and the receiver reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (that is, a malfunction has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), a communication error display process is always performed to, for example, display a message in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 saying, "A malfunction has occurred in the upper tray side LCD display device. Please call a store staff member." to notify the user.

When the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern starts again (timing K2), as described above, since the schedule data for screen generation is running, during the period until the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are stopped and displayed (timing K3), even if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, even if it has been determined that there is a malfunction between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 (i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver) even once, the SYNC pattern output of step S1546 in the connection recovery process No power processing is performed, no processing is performed to restore the connection between the transmitter and receiver, and the communication error display processing of step S1548 in the connection restoration processing is not performed. For example, the message "A problem has occurred with the upper tray side LCD display device. Please call a store attendant" is not displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which notifies the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is invalidated, and the door frame side performance display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d.

In this way, during the interval period when the varying display of the left side decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right side decorative pattern starts and then stops in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, and until the varying display of the left side decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right side decorative pattern starts again, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which notifies the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal, is enabled, whereas during the interval period when the varying display of the left side decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right side decorative pattern starts and then stops in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which notifies the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal, is disabled. This is because the combination results of the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern displayed in a static manner in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 are the information of most interest to the player, and the player can determine whether or not a jackpot game state that will give the player a profit will occur. Therefore, when the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a variably manner in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, even if the image of the performance displayed in the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460 becomes distorted due to the influence of noise and cannot be displayed correctly until the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a static manner, the performance is not interrupted midway and a process is performed to restore it to a state where it can be displayed correctly, but rather the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a static manner in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, completing the display of the information that the player is most interested in.

In this respect, it is significantly different from the case where the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits LOCKN signal output request data to the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510 during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or during the period when the game board side performance display device 1600 is performing a demonstration while waiting for customers. This LOCKN signal output request data is sent from the peripheral control MPU 1511a during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and during the period when the game machine is waiting for customers and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600. It is sent as a request to check the operation of the door frame side performance display device 460 to check whether there is a problem with the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. When the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, the forced switching circuit 1512f connects the circuit to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided on the performance display drive board 4450 determines that the two signals it receives are LOCKN signal output request data, it determines that the LOCKN signal output request data is abnormal data because, as described above, the data format of the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is different, and outputs a LOCKN signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can determine that there is no problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no problem with the performance display drive board 4450, while when the LOCKN signal is not input, it can determine that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is a problem with the performance display drive board 4450, and control the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to output an alert image to that effect (for example, "A problem has occurred with the liquid crystal display device on the upper tray side. Please call a store staff member.") to the game board side performance display device 1600, and control the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to output an alert sound to that effect (for example, "A problem has occurred with the liquid crystal display device on the upper tray side.") to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, thereby playing the alert sound from a speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. This allows notifications to be made by notification images displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and notification sounds that are repeatedly played from speakers or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the decorative LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 may be lit up.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 sends the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512f connects the circuit so that the LOCKN signal output request data can be received by the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which receives the LOCKN signal output request data, outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCK terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 as a response signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a.Therefore, when a LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no problem with the door frame side performance display device 460, whereas when a LOCKN signal is not input, it can be determined that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is a problem with the door frame side performance display device 460. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that a malfunction has occurred in the door frame side performance display device 460, it can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 102 as a notification process. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects a malfunction in the door frame side performance display device 460, it can notify the hall staff, etc., of the malfunction by executing the notification process, so that the hall staff, etc. can check very easily whether or not a malfunction has occurred in the door frame side performance display device 460 before the player plays, and the check is not time-consuming. Therefore, the malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460 can be detected without much effort.

As described above, the LOCKN signal is a signal that the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 outputs to inform the user that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. Specifically, the LOCKN signal is a signal that is output to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Since the LOCKN signal is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, when the image transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d cannot be normally received, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 can output a LOCKN signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 to inform that a communication failure has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the received drawing data is abnormal data. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input can eliminate the communication failure between the image communications by outputting a connection confirmation signal to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to inform that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) will be started to be transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is capable of detecting a malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460 caused by a communication failure during image communication at an early stage and instructing the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to resolve the malfunction. Therefore, by detecting and resolving a malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, when the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which receives the image transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and outputs it to the door frame side performance display device 460, is unable to properly receive the image transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, it is capable of outputting a LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal that notifies the user that a communication failure has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, which is the performance control microprocessor.The peripheral control MPU 1511a, to which the LOCKN signal is input, controls the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the LCD display control unit 1512 to generate a message saying "A failure has occurred in the upper tray side LCD display device. Please call a store staff member," which is an image that notifies the user that a communication failure has occurred, and this generated image is displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to notify the user. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is capable of detecting a malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460 caused by a communication malfunction during image communication at an early stage and notifying the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 so that the player can inform a hall staff member or directly notify a hall staff member who happens to be passing by the pachinko machine 1, so that the hall staff member can begin work to resolve the malfunction at an early stage after it occurs. Therefore, by detecting and resolving a malfunction of the door frame side performance display device 460 at an early stage, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, during the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2, if there is a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, even once, and the accumulated number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 is capable of repeatedly outputting a connection confirmation signal to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, which indicates that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal and eliminating the communication malfunction between the image communications will begin to be transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, until the accumulated number reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can continue to repeatedly output a connection confirmation signal only during the period when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is not executing the progress of the game by starting and stopping the first special pattern or second special pattern game on the first special pattern display 1403 or second special pattern display 1405, thereby helping to resolve the communication problem.

Then, during the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2, if there is a malfunction between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, and if the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 activates the LOCKN signal and sends a connection confirmation signal to inform the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to start transmitting a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 for eliminating the communication malfunction between the image communications. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts to vary the first special pattern or second special pattern play on the first special pattern display 1403 or the second special pattern display 1405 and starts the game progress again, the connection confirmation signal is stopped from being output, and when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d stops transmitting a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 and is able to output an image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can move in the direction of resolving the communication malfunction by repeatedly outputting a connection confirmation signal, which is a malfunction resolution signal, only during the period in which the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts varying and stops the first special symbol or second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and is not executing the game progress. When the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output only during the period when the display is stopped and the game is not being played, even if the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts varying the first or second special pattern play on the first special pattern display device 1403 or the second special pattern display device 1405 and starts the game again, the distortion of the performance (image distortion) progressing on the display screen of the door frame side performance display device 460 can be eliminated each time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and ends the game again (each time the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2 occurs).

According to the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the main control board 1310 of FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 of FIG. 70. The main control board 1310 is equipped with the main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the game ball launched by the ball launching device 650 toward the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004, which are start areas provided in the game area 5a. The payout control board 951 is equipped with the payout control MPU 952a of FIG. 70, which is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball command of FIG. 88 (a) and (b), which is a payout command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, is equipped with at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM is designed to store information related to the game even after the power is cut off.

The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, is equipped with at least a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built into the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM is capable of storing information related to payouts even after a power outage.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment further includes an operation switch 954 in Fig. 70. When the operation switch 954 is operated within a period from when the power is turned on until the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process in Fig. 92 is performed, it outputs a RAM clear signal in Fig. 77 for erasing information related to the game stored in the main control built-in RAM to the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, and when it is operated within a period from when the power is turned on until the payout control unit power-on process is performed, it outputs a RWMCLR signal in Fig. 82 to the payout control microprocessor It also has a RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal in FIG. 82 to the payout control microprocessor, which is the payout control MPU 952a, which is the game control microprocessor, as an error release signal for releasing an error that has occurred regarding the payout device 830, when it is operated after the period from when the power is turned on until the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process in FIG. 92 has elapsed (or the period from when the power is turned on until the payout control unit power-on process is performed), without outputting it to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor.

In this way, when the operation switch 954 is operated within the period from when the power is turned on until the judgment process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed, it outputs the RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor, to erase the information regarding the game stored in the main control built-in RAM, and when it is operated within the period from when the power is turned on until the payout control unit power-on process is performed, it outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control microprocessor, which is the payout control MPU 952a, as a RAM clear signal to erase the information regarding the payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM; When operated after the period from power-on to when the judgment process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process in FIG. 92 is performed (or the period from power-on to when the payout control unit power-on process is performed), the RWMCLR signal in FIG. 82 is output to the payout control microprocessor, payout control MPU 952a, as an error release signal for releasing an error that has occurred in the payout device 830, without being output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor. Therefore, by operating a single operation switch 954, two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error release function, can be provided in the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, a RAM clear function and an error release function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input section of the panel relay board 4161 is a circuit to which detection signals are input from various detection sensors arranged on the game board, such as the general winning hole sensor 4020, the first start hole sensor 4002, the second start hole sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, the vibration detection sensor, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, etc. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signals from each detection sensor are input is the same, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is given here as an example of a detection sensor, and a circuit to which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be described.

In gaming machines, there has been a continuous stream of fraudulent gaming tactics in which players try to gain unfair advantages by manipulating the flow of gaming balls at will by bringing magnets (e.g. permanent magnets or electromagnets) close to the gaming balls that have been shot into the playing area.

In order to detect such fraudulent gaming behavior and prevent fraudulent behavior by using light emitting means or audio warnings, etc., a magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting magnetism is provided in correspondence with a predetermined position in the gaming area.

The following provides an overview of the control over game progress and presentation in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment.

As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1, and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the results of the processes. Based on the control signals (control commands) output by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display mode of the performance display device 1600 (display images such as designs, various background images, letters, characters, etc.) and the display mode and operation mode of various components that contribute to the performance (performance operation unit 400, movable components, etc.).

In particular, the main control board 1310 performs special symbol process processing each time an interrupt process is performed. In this special control process, first, the first and second start port winning process is performed. In this first and second start port winning process, a determination is made as to whether or not the game ball has won a start port, and when it is determined that a winning has occurred, a process is performed to increase the number of reserved balls on the corresponding special symbol side by 1.

When the first and second start port winning processing is completed, if the processing flag is 0, the fluctuation start processing is executed. In this fluctuation start processing, on the condition that the number of reserved balls is 1 or more, the pending jackpot judgment is consumed and executed, and the result of this jackpot judgment (whether it was a win or a loss, its type, etc.) is stored, and then the processing flag is updated to "1".

On the other hand, when the first and second starting port winning processing is completed, if the processing flag is 1, a variation pattern setting process is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern (such as the variation time from when the special pattern starts to vary until it stops) and the stop pattern (such as a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern) of the special pattern (identification pattern) displayed on the first special pattern display device or the second special pattern display device are determined and set based on the stored jackpot determination result and the current game state, and then the processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, when the first and second start port winning processing is completed, if the processing flag is 2, the during-fluctuation processing is executed. In this during-fluctuation processing, the fluctuation time determined and set in the fluctuation pattern setting processing is monitored by a timer, and the variable display of the special pattern on the first special pattern display device or the second special pattern display device is stopped when the timer times out. After this, if the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start processing is a jackpot, the processing selection flag is updated to "3", and if the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start processing is not a jackpot (miss), the processing selection flag is updated to "0". In other words, in this case, the next interrupt processing will start over from the fluctuation start processing.

On the other hand, when the first and second start port winning processing is completed, if the processing flag is 3, the jackpot game processing is executed. In this jackpot game processing, the condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is activated to set the jackpot game mode (for example, the number of rounds) determined based on the type of jackpot won, and the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 2106 is controlled based on this. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, the operation of the condition device is stopped, and if the type of jackpot won is a special type, the game state flag is updated to indicate that it is controlled to an advantageous state such as a time-saving state or a special state, and then the processing flag is updated to "0". In other words, in this case, the next interrupt processing will start over from the variable start processing.

Note that, as the variation pattern, multiple types of variation patterns are stored. The variation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of the pattern variation of the special pattern, and the type of the performance pattern that appears in the performance display device 1600 can be determined by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510. In this embodiment, the multiple types of variation patterns can be classified into a variation pattern for a jackpot variation, a variation pattern for a miss-reach variation, and a variation pattern for a miss variation. The jackpot variation is a variation that occurs when the result of the jackpot judgment is a jackpot, and the performance display device 1600 executes a performance in which the variation display of the decorative pattern is finally developed to display the jackpot pattern in a fixed stop after the reach performance. The miss-reach variation is a variation that occurs when the result of the jackpot judgment is a miss and it is determined that a reach will be performed by the reach judgment based on the reach random number, and the performance display device 1600 executes a performance in which the variation display of the decorative pattern is finally developed to display the miss pattern in a fixed stop after the reach performance. The miss variation is a variation that occurs when the result of the jackpot judgment is a miss and the reach judgment based on the reach random number does not determine that a reach should be made, and the performance display device 1600 executes a performance in which the decorative pattern variation display is ultimately developed to display the miss pattern as a confirmed stop without going through the reach performance. Also, the variation pattern is specified so that it is possible to identify whether it is a variation pattern on the first special pattern side or the second special pattern side.

In other words, the peripheral control board 1510 acquires game information such as the results of jackpot determination from the main control board 1310 and refers to this information to make it possible for such decorative pattern variation patterns to appear. Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 not only makes the decorative pattern variation patterns appear on the performance display device 1600 based on the acquired game information, but also executes control to change the performance display (background and reserved image) related to the expectation level, change the state (display and movement) in the performance operation unit 400, and operate movable members such as the rear-down movable performance unit 3100.

Next, the game control of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment will be described in detail. Figure 104 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric device control process (Figure 94: step S114).

Now, assuming that the main control program has transitioned to the special symbol and special electric device control processing (Figure 94: step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes a first start hole passing processing such as obtaining a first jackpot determination random number from the random number counter and storing this in the first special symbol reserved memory area of the main control built-in RAM (step S5232), provided that the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002 is in the on state (ball has entered the first start hole 2002) (YES in step S5231), as shown in Figure 104. In addition, if the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004 is in the on state (the ball has entered the second start hole 2004) (YES in step S5233), a second special random number for the second special symbol (random number for determining a second big win) is obtained from the random number counter and a second start hole passing process is executed, such as storing this in the second special symbol reserved memory area of the main control built-in RAM (step S5234).

Next, it is determined whether a jackpot in progress flag, which indicates that control is being exercised in a jackpot gaming state, is set (step S5235), and if the jackpot in progress flag is set, a jackpot control process (step S5240a) is executed to control the jackpot gaming state.

In the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
When the result of the judgment process regarding the display state when the variable display of the first special symbol stops indicates either an "8R sure jackpot A" or an "8R normal jackpot", control is made to an 8R jackpot game state in which the large prize winning port 2005 is opened for a long time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) or closed when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize winning port 2005, and an opening and closing pattern (round game) is repeated eight times,
When the result of the determination process regarding the display state when the variable display of the second special symbol stops indicates a state suggesting a "16R guaranteed jackpot", the large prize winning port 2005 is opened for a long time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize winning port 2005, and the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated 16 times to enter a 16R jackpot game state.
When the result of the determination process regarding the display state when the variable display of the second special symbol stops indicates an "8R sure-win B", the large prize winning port 2005 is opened for a long time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize winning port 2005, and then the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated eight times to enter an 8R big win game state.
When the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special pattern stops indicates a mode suggesting a "2R normal jackpot", the game is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which the large prize opening 2005 is opened for a short period of time (e.g., 0.6 seconds) and then closed, repeating an opening and closing pattern (round play) twice.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in a situation where the time-saving control is executed, right-handed hits are more advantageous for the player than left-handed hits, as described above, and in a situation where the time-saving control is not executed, left-handed hits are more advantageous for the player than right-handed hits. In this regard, in the left-handed hit state, even if a jackpot is won as a result of the lottery for the first special pattern in response to the reception of the game ball in the first starting port 2002, only a maximum of eight rounds of long-term open jackpot game state (approximately 1,000 game balls can be won) will occur.

In contrast, in the right-hand hitting state, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol in response to the reception of a game ball into the second starting port 2004, there is an approximately 50% probability (allocation rate of the winning type) of entering a long-open jackpot game state of 16 rounds (approximately 2000 game balls can be won). Since the expected number of prize balls that can be won when a jackpot is won is high, when the machine is controlled to transition to the right-hand hitting state, it is expected that a larger number of prize balls will be won than when it is in the left-hand hitting state.

In addition, in the jackpot control process, when starting the opening control of the jackpot opening 2005, first, a process is performed to start the operation of the condition device, a process to reset the fluctuation count counter described below, etc.

In addition, in the jackpot control process, after controlling the opening of the jackpot opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 110, the process of setting the high probability flag and the time-saving flag is executed according to the type of jackpot that triggered the jackpot game.

The high probability flag is a flag indicating that a high probability state is being entered, and is used in the jackpot determination process shown in FIG. 109 described below. It is set when the jackpot game state based on a jackpot controlled by a special probability (8R special probability jackpot A, 16R special probability jackpot, 8R special probability jackpot B) ends after the jackpot game state ends, and is reset when the next jackpot occurs by the first special pattern stop process shown in FIG. 114 described below or the second special pattern stop process not shown.

The time-saving flag is a flag indicating that time-saving control is being executed (low probability time-saving state, high probability time-saving state), and as shown in FIG. 110, it is set when the jackpot game state based on the jackpot (8R special jackpot A, 16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot B) that is time-saving controlled (high probability time-saving state) after the jackpot game state ends, and is reset when the next jackpot occurs by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 described later or the second special symbol stop process not shown. Alternatively, it is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 described later or the second special symbol stop process not shown when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are consumed 100 times without winning a jackpot after the low probability time-saving state occurs.

The change count counter is a counter that indicates the number of times the special symbol has changed since the change count counter was reset, and is used in the first change pattern setting process (second change pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 112 described later. It is updated (e.g., counted up) when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) changes, and is reset when a jackpot game state based on at least a specific type of jackpot (16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot B) is started.

If the big win in progress flag is not set (NO in step S5235), the next step S5236 is to determine whether the small win in progress flag, which indicates that control is being exercised to a small win gaming state, is set. If the small win in progress flag is set, a small win control process (step S5240b) is executed to control the small win gaming state. In the small win control process, the big win opening 2005 is opened for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds).

Here, in the small win control process (step S5240b), unlike the big win control process (step S5240a), after the opening control of the big win opening 2005 is performed, the various set processes such as the high probability flag, time-saving flag, and time-saving count counter are not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110(a), a small win is not won in the big win determination.

In addition, if the small win in progress flag is not set (NO in step S5236), on condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter, which indicates the number of random numbers for determining a second big win stored in the second special pattern reserved memory area, is "0" (step S5237), a first special pattern process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special pattern stops is executed (step S5238).

In contrast, if the value of the second special reserved number counter, which indicates the number of random numbers for determining a second jackpot stored in the second special symbol reserved memory area, is not "0" (step S5237), a second special symbol process is executed (step S5239), including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol stops. As a result, as long as the game is played so that the lottery for the reserved second special symbol does not run out (as long as the value of the second special reserved number counter is not "0"), only the lottery for the random numbers for determining a second jackpot will be performed continuously without interruption, regardless of the reserved status of the lottery for the first special symbol (priority execution).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player can perform the lottery (determination process) for the second jackpot determination random number continuously and uninterruptedly by simply maintaining hitting the game ball to the right side of the center device 2500 (right hit) in the time-saving state (high probability time-saving state).

Note that the special symbol game (symbol change) using the second special symbol (second special symbol) is not limited to being executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (first special symbol), and for example, the special symbol game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004 and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special symbol game using the first special symbol or the second special symbol from the stored data.

Figure 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first start port passing process (step S5232).

Now, in the processing of step S5231, if it is determined that the first start hole sensor 4002 is in the ON state and that a gaming ball has entered the first start hole 2002, as shown in FIG. 105, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains each random number on the first special symbol side (random number for jackpot determination, random number for reach determination, random number for jackpot symbol, random number for variable display pattern) from the random number counter as processing of step S5241.

Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the first special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and judges whether the reserved number of the first special symbol is its maximum value (upper limit value) of "4" based on this counter value (step S5242). If it is determined in the processing of this step S5242 that the reserved number of the first special symbol is not its maximum value, the processing of the following steps S5243 to S5245 is performed to set the variable display of the first special symbol (determination processing for the first special symbol) to a new reserved state.

That is, first, in the process of step S5243, the first special reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, in the process of step S5244, each random number acquired in step S5241 is stored in a first special symbol reserved memory area in the memory area of the main control built-in RAM that corresponds to the counter value of the first special reserved number counter.

Next, the first special pattern pre-reading process is executed to execute the pre-reading performance on the first special pattern side, and the process is terminated (step S5245). As will be described later, the pre-reading performance on the first special pattern side is a performance that suggests the judgment result (or its expectation) of the first special pattern in advance before starting the variable display of the first special pattern. In this first special pattern pre-reading process, information required for the peripheral control board 1510 to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading performance and the performance content, etc. (information on winning or losing for pre-reading judgment, information on the pattern type for pre-reading judgment, information on the variable pattern number for pre-reading judgment, etc.) is generated and stored in the corresponding memory area as transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the judgment result of the first special pattern itself, information on the stopping pattern of the special pattern as information suggesting the type of jackpot game may be included in the command. For example, information before the final decision, such as the SP reach group, normal reach group, potential hit group, and small hit group of the variable pattern, may be transmitted as a pre-reading command.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of step S5242 that the reserved number of the first special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. In other words, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5243 to S5245, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly reserved.

Figure 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S5234).

Now, in the processing of step S5233, if it is determined that the second start hole sensor 4004 is in the ON state and that a gaming ball has entered the second start hole 2004, as shown in FIG. 106, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains each random number on the second special symbol side (random number for second jackpot determination, random number for second reach determination, random number for second jackpot symbol, random number for second variable display pattern) from the random number counter as processing of step S5251.

Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and judges whether the reserved number of the second special symbol is the maximum value of "4" based on this counter value (step S5252). If it is determined in the processing of this step S5252 that the reserved number of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the processing of the following steps S5253 to S5255 is performed to set the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) to a new reserved state.

That is, first, in the process of step S5253, the second special reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, in the process of step S5254, each random number acquired in step S5251 is stored in a second special symbol reserved memory area in the memory area of the main control built-in RAM that corresponds to the counter value of the second special reserved number counter.

Next, the second special pattern pre-reading process is executed to execute the pre-reading performance on the second special pattern side, and the process is terminated (step S5255). As will be described later, the pre-reading performance on the second special pattern side is a performance that suggests the judgment result (or its expectation) of the second special pattern in advance before starting the variable display of the second special pattern. In this second special pattern pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 generates information (win/lose information, pattern type, variable pattern number, etc.) required to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading performance and the performance content, and stores it in the corresponding memory area as transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the judgment result of the second special pattern itself, information regarding the stopping pattern of the special pattern as information suggesting the type of big win game may be included in the command. For example, information before the final decision stage, such as the SP reach group, normal reach group, potential hit group, and small hit group among the variable patterns, may be transmitted as a pre-reading command.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of step S5252 that the number of reserved symbols for the second special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. In other words, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5253 to S5255, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved.

When the reserved number of first special symbols changes based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 2002, the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) sets a command indicating the reserved number of first special symbols (first reserved number designation command 0-4) and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510. Also, when the reserved number of second special symbols changes based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 2004, the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) sets a command indicating the reserved number of second special symbols (second reserved number designation command 0-4) and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510.

Figure 107 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S5238). Note that the first special symbol process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric device control process and the second special symbol process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric device control process are similar program modules, and only the random numbers and tables used for judgment are different. Therefore, only the first special symbol process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric device control process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five processes will be selectively executed depending on the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. First special symbol normal processing (step S5280) in which a random number for determining a jackpot corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read, and a lottery process is performed for the display mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped based on the read random number for determining a jackpot.

2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) in which the display mode when the first special symbol change control is stopped is determined based on the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the first special symbol change control is stopped.

3. A first variation pattern setting process (step S5282) in which a lottery process is performed for the variation mode of the first special pattern displayed on the first special pattern display device 1403 based on the random number for the variation display pattern, and the variation mode of the performance display executed in response to the special pattern on the performance display device (game board side performance display device) 1600.

4. First special symbol change process (step S5283) that waits until the display of the first special symbol change on the first special symbol display 1403 stops.

5. A first special pattern stop process (step S5284) that stops the display of the first special pattern so that the display mode of the first special pattern when the control of the first special pattern is stopped is displayed on the first special pattern display 1403 in the mode determined based on the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the control of the first special pattern is stopped.

The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is set to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280) should be performed.

Figure 108 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal processing of the first special pattern (step S5280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 108, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines whether or not there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the reserved state based on the counter value of the first special reserved number counter as the processing of step S5301. If it is determined that there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the reserved state, then, as the processing of step S5302, the random number stored in the earliest memory area among the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area of the main control built-in RAM (for example, the random number for first jackpot determination, the random number for first reach determination, the random number for first jackpot symbol, the random number for first variable display pattern) is read from the main control built-in RAM. Next, in the processing of steps S5303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and random numbers related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special pattern stops, which are stored in each memory area of the first special pattern reserved memory area of the main control built-in RAM (for example, the random number for first jackpot determination, the random number for first reach determination, the random number for the first jackpot pattern, and the random number for the first variable display pattern), are shifted in a first-in first-out manner.

Specifically, the first special symbol reserved memory area has four memory areas (first special symbol reserved memory area a to first special symbol reserved memory area d), and random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of a start winning in the first start port 2002 are stored in the first (first) memory area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) memory area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1th (n = 1 to 3) memory area, and when the start condition for the variable display based on the random number stored in the first memory area is established, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read out and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) memory area are moved to the N-1th (N = 2 to 4) memory area. As a result, the order in which the reservation of the variable display of the first special symbol occurred is stored in a specific order, and the reservation of the variable display is released in order from the first reservation (the reservation that occurred first). Similarly, the second special symbol reserved memory area has four memory areas (second special symbol reserved memory area a to second special symbol reserved memory area d), and random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of a start winning in the second start port 2004 are stored in the first (first) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) memory area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1th (n = 1 to 3) memory area, and when the start condition for the variable display based on the random number stored in the first memory area is established, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read out and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) memory area are moved to the N-1th (N = 2 to 4) memory area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the second special symbol is reserved is identifiable and the reservation of the variable display is released in order from the first reservation (the reservation that occurred first).

Then, in step S5305, a jackpot determination process is performed, which is a process for determining whether or not the jackpot has been won, based on the first jackpot determination random number that has been read out. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5306) so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281), this process ends.

Figure 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305).

If the current game state is a high probability state (high probability time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state) (step S5311), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects the high probability jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 110(A) (step S5312), and if the current game state is a low probability state (step S5311), it selects the low probability jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 110(A) (step S5313), and compares the selected jackpot determination table with the random number for jackpot determination read out in step S5302 of the first special pattern normal processing (step S5314).

As shown in FIG. 110(A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the ROM built into the main control, and for each type of special random number (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number), there is a low probability jackpot determination table used when the game state is low probability (low probability non-time-saving state, low probability time-saving state), and a high probability jackpot determination table used when the game state is high probability (high probability non-time-saving state, high probability time-saving state). In the low probability jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, the first jackpot determination random numbers (65,536 types) are associated with each other so that the 204 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating a jackpot win, and the 65,332 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the miss determination value indicating a miss (low probability jackpot probability: approximately "1 in 321"). In contrast, in the low probability jackpot determination table that is referenced for comparison with the second special pattern jackpot determination random number (second jackpot determination random number) in the second special pattern process executed in step S5239 of the special pattern and special electric device control process, the 204 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the jackpot determination value indicating a jackpot win, and the 65,332 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the miss determination value indicating a miss (low probability jackpot probability: approximately 1 in 321).

In addition, in the high probability jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, the 2040 types of first jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the jackpot determination value, and the 63496 types of first jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the miss determination value (high probability jackpot probability: approximately 1 in 32). In contrast, in the high probability jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number in the second special symbol process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric device control process, the 2040 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the jackpot determination value indicating a jackpot win, and the 63496 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the miss determination value indicating a miss (high probability jackpot probability: approximately 1 in 32). In addition, the jackpot determination values (the number of jackpot determination values may be the same but the jackpot determination values are different (same jackpot probability), or the number of jackpot determination values may be different (different jackpot probability)) set in the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number may be different, in which case it is sufficient to make the jackpot determination values of at least one of the low probability jackpot determination table and the high probability jackpot determination table different (both may be different).

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that a jackpot has occurred as a result of comparing the selected jackpot determination table with the random number for jackpot determination read in step S5302 of the first special pattern normal processing, the main control MPU 1310a sets a jackpot flag indicating that the corresponding variation has resulted in a jackpot (step S5316), and ends the jackpot determination processing.

Also, if it is determined in step S5315 that the player has not won the jackpot, a determination is made as to whether the read random number for jackpot determination matches the small jackpot determination value indicating that the player has won a small jackpot based on the selected jackpot determination table (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (second special symbol process processing) in this example, a random number for jackpot determination that matches the small jackpot determination value is not read out (small jackpot probability: 0 in 65,536), so in this step S5317, it is determined that the player has not won a small jackpot (determined to have missed).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5317 that the result is a miss, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM and includes a reach determination table for a high probability non-time-saving state used when the game state is in a high probability non-time-saving state, a reach determination table for a high probability time-saving state used when the game state is in a high probability time-saving state, and a reach determination table for a low probability state used when the game state is in a low probability state (low probability non-time-saving state).

Here, in the reach judgment table for the high probability time-saving state, the above-mentioned reach judgment random numbers are associated so that one type of reach judgment random number matches a reach judgment value indicating a reach, and 71 types of reach judgment random numbers match reach judgment values indicating no reach. However, in the reach judgment table for the high probability time-saving state, in order to maximize the progress speed of the game when in the time-saving state, all 72 types of reach judgment random numbers may match reach judgment values indicating no reach, and may not match reach judgment values indicating a reach.

In addition, in the reach judgment table for the low probability state, five types of reach judgment random numbers, including the same reach judgment random numbers as those set in the reach judgment table for the high probability time-saving state, are associated with the reach judgment values indicating that a reach will occur, and 67 types of reach judgment random numbers are associated with reach judgment values indicating that a reach will not occur. Thus, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach judgment value indicating a reach will occur is higher than in the high probability time-saving state, and can be obtained with a predetermined probability.

Furthermore, in the reach determination table for the high probability non-time-saving state, five types of reach determination random numbers, including the same reach determination random numbers as those set in the reach determination tables for the high probability time-saving state and the low probability state, are associated with the reach determination values indicating a reach will occur, and 67 types of reach determination random numbers are associated with reach determination values indicating no reach will occur. Thus, in this embodiment, in the high probability non-time-saving state, the reach determination value indicating a reach will occur is the same as in the low probability non-time-saving state.

If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the reach is missed (YES in step S5120) based on the comparison between the selected reach judgment table and the random number for reach judgment read in step S5302 (step S5319), it sets a reach flag indicating that the fluctuation is a reach and ends the process (step S5121).

Figure 111 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 111, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol stops, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S5305). The result of the lottery process is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S5331).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the pattern determination table shown in FIG. 110(B) and compares the random number for the first jackpot pattern read in step S5302 of the normal processing of the first special pattern with the selected pattern determination table to determine the jackpot pattern as the state when the variable control of the first special pattern stops (the stopping pattern of the first special pattern) (step S5332).

As shown in FIG. 110(B), the pattern determination table for the first special symbol stores random numbers for the first jackpot symbol (here, a total of 200 random numbers for the first jackpot symbol) associated with each of the judgment results (8R special jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot). As shown in FIG. 110(C), the pattern determination table for the second special symbol stores random numbers for the second jackpot symbol (here, a total of 200 random numbers for the second jackpot symbol) associated with each of the judgment results (16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by identifying the judgment result associated with the acquired random number for the jackpot pattern. In the pattern determination table of this example, the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the first jackpot pattern and the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the second jackpot pattern are set to be different. More specifically, the allocation rate (allocation) between the special jackpot that triggers a transition to a high probability state and the normal jackpot that does not trigger a transition to a high probability state is the same, but the expected value of the game balls that can be obtained by the jackpot determined based on the random number for the second jackpot pattern is greater than the expected value of the game balls that can be obtained by the jackpot determined based on the random number for the first jackpot pattern.

The specific gameplay and presentation content for each type of jackpot is briefly summarized as follows.
1. After the big win symbol combination appears on the performance display device 1600, the big win opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the big win opening 2103, the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated eight times to control the state to an 8R big win game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the big win opening 2103, and after this 8R big win game state, the state is controlled to a high probability time-saving state until the next big win game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R big win game state, a battle performance (battle victory performance) in which a specific character wins is performed, and the performance display device 1600 shows that the high probability time-saving state is a relatively advantageous state. 8R certainty big win A

2. After the big win pattern combination appears on the performance display device 1600, the big win opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the big win opening 2103, the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated eight times to control the state to an 8R big win game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the big win opening 2103, and after this 8R big win game state, the state is controlled to a low probability time-saving state until the special pattern variation display is consumed 100 times (or a big win is won within the period until it is consumed 100 times), and during the execution period of the 8R big win game state, a battle performance (battle defeat performance) in which a specific character is defeated is performed, and in the low probability time-saving state, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to a performance mode in which a relatively unfavorable state is indicated. 8R normal big win

3. After the big win pattern combination appears on the performance display device 1600, the big win opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have entered the big win opening 2103, the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated 16 times to control the state to a 16R big win game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the big win opening 2103, and after this 16R big win game state, the state is controlled to a high probability time-saving state until the next big win game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 16R big win game state, an additional challenge performance is performed in which a performance (success performance) is performed regarding whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (whether it becomes 16 rounds), and after a predetermined period has passed since the control to the high probability time-saving state, the performance mode is controlled to a relatively advantageous state as indicated by the performance display device 1600. 16R sure-win

4. After the big win pattern combination appears on the performance display device 1600, the big win opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the big win opening 2103, the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated eight times to control the game state to an 8R big win game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the big win opening 2103, and after this 8R big win game state, the game state is controlled to a high probability time-saving state until the next big win game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R big win game state, an additional challenge performance is performed in which a performance (failure performance) is performed regarding whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (whether it becomes 16 rounds), and after a predetermined period has passed since the control to the high probability time-saving state, the performance mode is controlled to one in which the performance display device 1600 indicates that the game state is relatively advantageous. 8R sure-win B

5. After the big win pattern combination appears on the performance display device 1600, the big win opening 2103 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the big win opening 2103, the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated twice to control the game state to a 2R big win game state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the big win opening 2103, and after this 2R big win game state, the game state is controlled to a low probability time-saving state until the special pattern variable display is consumed 100 times (or a big win is won within the period until 100 times are consumed), and during the execution period of the 2R big win game state, a battle performance (battle defeat performance) in which a specific character is defeated is performed, and in the low probability time-saving state, the game state is controlled to a performance mode that is shown on the performance display device 1600 as being relatively unfavorable. 2R normal big win

In addition, in the above-mentioned left-hand hitting state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) that opens the second starting hole 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-hand hitting state, the game ball does not enter the second starting hole 2004, and only the game ball enters the first starting hole 2002, and only the variable display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display 1403 is executed except when there is a reserved ball with the second special pattern, and a jackpot related to the first special pattern (8R special jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot) occurs. Similarly, in the above-mentioned right-hand hitting state, the game ball does not enter the first starting hole 2002. Therefore, in the right-hand hitting state, only the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 2004 occurs, and unless there is a reserved ball with the first special pattern, only the variable display of the second special pattern on the second special pattern display 1186 is executed, and a jackpot related to the second special pattern (16R sure-win jackpot, 8R sure-win jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) occurs.

In addition, in the case of a jackpot associated with the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern that keeps the large prize opening 2103 open for a long time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) is repeated up to 8 times, and approximately 1000 game balls are paid out, whereas in the case of a jackpot associated with the second special symbol, the opening and closing pattern that keeps the large prize opening 2103 open for a long time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) is repeated up to 16 times, and approximately 2000 game balls can be paid out.

In addition, if an 8R special jackpot A is determined in the first special jackpot stopping pattern setting process, the jackpot pattern is determined to be an 8R special jackpot A pattern, and if an 8R normal jackpot is determined, the jackpot pattern is determined to be an 8R normal jackpot pattern. Also, although not shown, if a 16R special jackpot is determined in the second special jackpot stopping pattern setting process, the jackpot pattern is determined to be a 16R special jackpot pattern, if an 8R special jackpot B is determined, the jackpot pattern is determined to be an 8R special jackpot B pattern, and if a 2R normal jackpot is determined, the jackpot pattern is determined to be a 2R normal jackpot pattern.

If the big win flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 next determines whether the small win flag is set in step S5333. If the small win flag is set in the process corresponding to step S5333 in the second special symbol process (step S5239), the small win symbol (unique symbol stop mode) is determined as the mode when the second special symbol stops changing (step S5334), and then the process proceeds to step S5337.

Furthermore, if the small win flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the pattern when the special pattern stops changing to a losing pattern (step S5336), and then proceeds to step S5337.

After the determination process for the stopping symbols has been performed in this manner, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a judgment result notification command corresponding to each of the lottery results so that the lottery results (indicating the type of big win, small win, reach miss, or miss (which may also indicate the type of the stopping symbol of the first special symbol)) are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as the process of step S5337. Then, as the process of step S5338, the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282), at which point this process ends.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of the performance display device 1600 based on the received judgment result notification command and variation pattern command (variably displays the left, center, and right decorative patterns and stops and displays them in the order of left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → center decorative pattern (note that the left, center, and right decorative patterns may be displayed synchronously as the same pattern and stopped and displayed simultaneously)). For example, when a type other than a 2R normal jackpot is won as a jackpot, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines a combination of three left, center, and right decorative patterns. In contrast, when a 2R normal jackpot is obtained, a specific pattern combination (a combination in which at least one of the left, center, and right decorative patterns is not the same as the other patterns) is determined. In addition, if a reach miss is identified, a miss pattern with a reach (a combination of the same left and right decorative patterns from "0" to "9" but with a different center decorative pattern; a reach miss pattern) is determined, and if a miss is identified, a miss pattern without a reach (a combination of the left, center, and right decorative patterns in which at least the left and right decorative patterns are different). The stopped pattern thus determined is displayed on the performance display device 1600 when the change time specified by the change pattern command has elapsed (when the game performance ends).

In any case, when a win is obtained as a result of the progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays a display showing the winning effect (special display mode) before the jackpot game starts, and displays a display showing the jackpot game after the jackpot game starts.

Figure 112 is a flowchart showing the steps for the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 112, if the big win flag is set (step S5341), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the big win corresponding to the type of big win determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5342); if the small win flag is set (step S5343), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the small win is selected (step S5344); if the reach flag is set (step S5345), the variation pattern table at the time of the reach is selected (step S5346); if none of the big win flag, small win flag, and reach flag are set, that is, if it is a normal miss (a miss where the reach performance is not executed), the variation pattern table at the time of the miss is selected (step S5347).

Then, the selected variation pattern table is compared with the random number for the variation display pattern read in step S5302 of the normal processing of the first special symbol to determine the variation pattern to be executed (step S5348), and a variation pattern command is set to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the determined variation pattern is to be started, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 is started (step S5349). In addition, the main control MPU 1310a sets the variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S5350). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol variation processing (step S5283) (step S5355), this process is terminated. As a result, the first special symbol variation display device 1403 performs the variation display control of the first special symbol for only the variation time determined in this way, and the performance control is performed in the performance display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

In this example, multiple types of fluctuation pattern tables are provided for each judgment result based on the random numbers for jackpot determination (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number) and the random numbers for jackpot patterns (first jackpot pattern random number, second jackpot pattern random number). In addition, the fluctuation patterns set in each fluctuation pattern table are stored in a form associated with each of the random numbers for the first fluctuation display pattern, with multiple fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (fluctuation time) required for controlling the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern). Thus, the main control MPU 1310a compares the selected variation pattern table from among multiple types of variation pattern tables according to the judgment results based on the random number for jackpot judgment and the random number for jackpot pattern with the random number for the variable display pattern read in step S5302 of the normal processing of the first special pattern, and obtains from this table the variation time information associated with the random number for the variable display pattern read out, thereby determining the variation pattern of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern). This allows the judgment process to be performed on the variation pattern of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern). The variation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

However, as mentioned above, in this example, since a small win will not be won, the variation pattern table for a small win will not be used. In this example, a small win will not be won, but it may be possible to win a small win.

In addition, in the variable display pattern table during reach in this example, the type of reach performance to be executed is determined by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach performance to execute with the random number for the variable display pattern. For example, in the non-time-saving state, 164 types of random numbers for variable display patterns out of the 241 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as judgment values (0 to 163) indicating that one of the normal reach performances will be executed, 59 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as judgment values (164 to 222) indicating that one of the super reach performances with low jackpot expectation will be executed, and 18 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as judgment values (223 to 240) indicating that one of the super reach performances with high jackpot expectation will be executed.

The Super Reach effect (SP effect) has a higher chance of winning than the normal Reach effect, and for players hoping for a jackpot game state, the player's chance of winning the jackpot game state increases when the Super Reach effect is executed. In other words, such a Super Reach effect has the highest selection rate in the jackpot fluctuation pattern table, and this makes it possible to increase the player's chance of winning the jackpot game state even if a miss is ultimately displayed. However, in reality, in order to sufficiently increase the player's chance of winning the jackpot game state, it is necessary for a highly anticipated preview effect, which is drawn separately from the fluctuation pattern, to appear (combined) during the period in which the Super Reach effect is being executed.

In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of failure, which is provided in correspondence with the first jackpot determination random number and the first jackpot pattern random number and is used when determining the variation time of the first special pattern, a variation time of 12 seconds is set in common to the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of failure, which is provided in correspondence with the second jackpot determination random number and the second pattern random number and is used when determining the variation time of the second special pattern, a variation time of 0.1 to 12 seconds can be set for the time-saving state, and a variation time of 12 seconds is set for the non-time-saving state. In this way, the variation time of the first special pattern is set to be the same during the time-saving state and during the non-time-saving state, and during the variation of the first special pattern in the time-saving state, the game ball is encouraged to enter the second start hole 2004 and time is secured for the player to enter the game ball into the second start hole 2004.

In addition, if 0.1 seconds is selected as the variable time when the second special symbol is a miss, it is possible to prevent each game ball that is shot into the game area 5a at 0.6 second intervals in a time-saving state (such as a high-probability time-saving state) from being discharged without being subjected to the lottery process.

That is, the game ball hit to the right is supplied to the area directly above the gate unit 2003. Then, when the game ball is received by the gate unit 2003 from this area during a time-saving state (such as a high-probability time-saving state), a win as a normal pattern is obtained (for example, the probability of winning is 100%), and the movable piece related to the opening and closing of the second starting hole 2004 is maintained in an open state for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). As a result, even in a situation where balls can be continuously received by the second starting hole 2004 one after another (a time-saving state in which almost all game balls hit to the right of the center device 2500 can be received by the second starting hole 2004), control can be executed so that the lottery on the second special pattern side can be consumed one after another with a high probability of winning (probability in a high-probability state) of approximately "1 in 32" each time a game ball is received.

In this example, since the game balls are launched at 0.6 second intervals while the player is operating the handle 302, in the time-saving state (such as the high-probability time-saving state), the second starting port 2004 often receives game balls at 0.6 second intervals. In this respect, in this example, as described above, the variation pattern table for the time-saving state (such as the high-probability time-saving state) can be set to an extremely short variation time of 0.1 seconds when the second special pattern is not obtained based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004. In other words, in this case, when a miss is obtained, the pattern variation ends in a time (0.1 seconds) that is less than the launch interval (0.6 seconds) of the game balls, so that even in a situation where game balls launched at 0.6 second intervals are received one after another by the second starting port 2004, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being discharged without being subjected to the lottery process.

Figure 113 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern change process (step S5283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol fluctuation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 113, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first subtracts 1 from the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process for the fluctuation pattern (step S5282) is set as the process of step S5371. As a result, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery-selected fluctuation time has elapsed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in the process of step S5373, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284), this process ends.

If the variable time timer has not reached 0 despite having been decremented by 1 (step S5371), the above steps S5371 and S5372 will be executed each time the timer interrupt process is executed until the variable time timer reaches 0 (until the time to stop the pattern is reached).

Figure 114 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern stop process (step S5284).

When the first special pattern process flag indicates that the first special pattern stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 114, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs display control to display the stop pattern determined in the first special pattern stop pattern setting process on the first special pattern display device 1403 as the process of step S5381, and sets a stop display command to instruct the performance display device 1600 to derive and display the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern of the first special pattern as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S5382).

When the jackpot flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game state is to start (step S5387), and sets the waiting time until the jackpot game state starts (the time to display the jackpot game state to start, etc.) in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, the main control MPU 1310a sets a jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot game state is being executed, and resets the high probability flag if the high probability flag is set, and resets the time-saving flag if the time-saving flag is set (step S5389), and further resets the fluctuation counter, and updates the first special symbol process flag to be the initial value of the first special symbol normal processing, at which point this processing ends (step S5394). In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the processing in step S5235 above will determine that the jackpot execution flag has been set, and the jackpot game state will be executed in the jackpot control processing described above (step S5240a).

The jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S5387, the jackpot start command (8R special jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R special jackpot command, 8R special jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (8R special jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R special jackpot command, 8R special jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command) is set. As a result, the performance of the jackpot game state (battle performance or additional challenge performance) corresponding to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the performance display device 1600, each lamp/LED, each speaker, etc.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of step S5386 that the jackpot flag is not set (NO in step S5386), first, it is determined whether or not the game is in a low-probability time-saving state (step S5390). Then, when the game is in a low-probability time-saving state, it is determined whether or not the number of times the special symbol has changed since the game was controlled to the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit (here, 100 times) (step S5391). In other words, when the number of times the special symbol has changed since the game was controlled to the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit (100 times), it is determined that the condition for ending the low-probability time-saving state has been met, and the time-saving function is stopped and the game is switched to a normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state) (step S5392).

After the processing related to the time-saving function is performed in this way, it is determined whether the small win flag is set (step S5393). As a result, when it is determined that the small win flag is set (YES in step S5393), a small win start command indicating that the small win game state is started is set (step S5394), and the waiting time until the start of the small win game state (the time to display the fact that the small win game state is started, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, a small win execution flag indicating that the small win game state is being executed is set (step S5396), and when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol normal processing, which is the initial value (step S5394), this processing is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the small win execution flag is set in the processing of the above step S5236, and the small win game state is executed in the above-mentioned small win control processing (step S5240b). By the way, unlike when a big win is won, the game state does not change when this type of small win game state is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the big win flag nor the small win flag is set (NO in step S5393), it is determined to be a miss, and no processing related to the big win or small win is performed. The first special symbol process flag is updated to the initial value of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5394), and this processing ends. In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big win in progress flag or the small win in progress flag is not set (steps S5235, S236), and processing related to the progress of a new game (lottery or symbol control) is performed according to the pending status (steps S5237 to S5239).

Figure 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol and normal electric device control process (step S116).

Now, in the processing of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and that a gaming ball has passed through the gate section 2003, as shown in FIG. 115, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs gate section passing processing as the processing of step S5402, such as first obtaining a normal random number for a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing this in the normal symbol reserved memory area of the RAM.

Next, in the normal pattern process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed depending on the normal pattern process flag.

1. A normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a lottery process for the display mode when the variable control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number (step S5403).
2. A normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S5404) in which a lottery process is performed on the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display device 1402 based on the normal symbol fluctuation random number.
3. Regular symbol variation processing (step S5405) that waits until the regular symbol variation display on the regular symbol display device 1402 is stopped
4. A normal pattern stop process (step S5406) for stopping the variable display of the normal pattern so that the mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the normal pattern determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the normal pattern is displayed on the normal pattern display device 1402.
5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the state when the variable control of the normal symbol is stopped indicates a state that suggests a "normal symbol win", the above-mentioned movable piece is opened to execute a process for controlling the second starting hole 2004 to be able to receive a game ball (step S5407).

The normal symbol process flag is manipulated so that its initial value indicates that the normal symbol normal processing (step S5403) should be performed.

Figure 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate section passing process (step S5402).

Now, in the processing of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and that a gaming ball has passed through the gate section 2003, as shown in FIG. 116, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value of the normal reserved number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as the processing of step S5411. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether the reserved number of normal symbols is the maximum value of "4".

If it is determined in step S5411 that the reserved number of the normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 are performed to set the variable display control of the normal symbols to a new reserved state. That is, first, in step S5412, the normal reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, in step S5413, the normal random number and the normal variable random number are obtained from the random number counter. Next, in step S5414, the random numbers thus obtained are stored in the normal symbol reserved memory area of the memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a that corresponds to the counter value of the normal reserved number counter.

However, if it is determined in the processing of step S5411 that the number of reserved ordinary symbols is at its maximum value, the variable display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly reserved. In other words, by not executing the processing of steps S5412 to S5414, the variable display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly placed on hold.

Figure 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal processing of the normal symbols (step S5403).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 117, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines whether there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the reserved state based on the counter value of the normal reserved number counter as the processing of step S5421. If it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the reserved state, then, as the processing of step S5422, the random number stored in the earliest memory area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the normal symbol (e.g., normal random number, normal variable random number) stored in the normal symbol reserved memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read from the RAM. Next, in the processing of steps S5423 and S5424, the normal reserved number counter is counted down, and the random numbers (normal random numbers, normal pattern variable random numbers) related to the display mode when the variable display of the normal pattern stops, which are stored in each memory area of the normal reserved memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, are shifted in a first-in first-out manner.

Specifically, the normal symbol reserved memory area has four memory areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted in response to the passage of the game ball through the gate unit 2003 are stored in the first (first) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) memory area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1th (n=1 to 3) memory area when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, and when the start condition for variable display based on the random number stored in the first memory area is met, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read out and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) memory area are moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 4) memory area. This allows the order in which the variable display control of the normal symbols was reserved to be specified, and the reservations of the variable display control are released in order starting from the first reservation (the reservation that occurred first).

Next, if the current game state is a time-saving state (high probability time-saving state) (step S5426), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a normal winning judgment table (not shown) during time-saving (step S5426), and if the current game state is a non-time-saving state (low probability non-time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state) (step S5425), it selects a normal winning judgment table (not shown) during non-time-saving (step S5427), and compares the selected normal winning judgment table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal processing of the normal pattern (step S5428).

The normal winning judgment table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and includes a time-saving normal winning judgment table used when the game state is in time-saving (high probability time-saving state), and a non-time-saving normal winning judgment table used when the game state is not in time-saving (low probability non-time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state). In the time-saving normal winning judgment table, which is referenced for comparison with the normal random number, the normal random numbers are associated with each other so that all 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal winning judgment value indicating that a normal winning has been won, and do not match the normal losing judgment value indicating that a normal losing has been won. In this way, when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003 during time-saving, a normal winning is always won, and the movable piece is opened to control the reception of game balls into the second starting port 2004. Instead of all 255 types, more normal random numbers than in non-time-saving mode may match the normal win determination value, which indicates that a normal win has been won.

In addition, in the normal winning judgment table during non-time-saving, which is referenced for comparison with the normal random numbers, all of the 255 types of normal random numbers are associated with the normal winning judgment value indicating that a normal winning has occurred, and the normal random numbers are associated with the normal losing judgment value indicating that a normal losing has occurred. In this way, during non-time-saving, even if a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal winning will not occur, and therefore the movable piece 2106 will not be in the open state and will not be able to control the acceptance of game balls into the second starting port 2004. However, as mentioned above, it may be possible to make it possible to win with a normal symbol even in the non-time-saving state. In this case, the probability of winning may be set to be lower than in the time-saving state (for example, 50%), and when the lottery result for a normal symbol is a winning one, the movable piece of the second starting hole 2004 may be opened for a shorter period of time than in the time-saving state, for example, 2 seconds, to allow the second starting hole 2004 to receive a game ball, and then moved forward again to prevent the second starting hole 2004 from receiving a game ball.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the normal symbol is a winning symbol as a result of comparing the selected normal symbol winning judgment table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S5429), it sets a normal symbol winning flag indicating that the corresponding variation has won a normal symbol (step S5430), and then determines the normal symbol winning symbol as the mode (stopping symbol of the normal symbol) when the normal symbol variation control is stopped (step S5431). On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the normal symbol is a losing symbol as a mode (stopping symbol of the normal symbol) when the normal symbol variation control is stopped as a result of comparing the selected normal symbol winning judgment table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing, it determines the normal symbol losing symbol as the mode (stopping symbol of the normal symbol) when the normal symbol variation control is stopped (step S5432). Then, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the above-mentioned normal symbol variation time determination process (step S5404) (step S5433), this process ends.

While this control is being performed by the main control MPU 1310a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains the various commands sent from the main control MPU 1310a, and is able to grasp the game situation at each stage within the peripheral control unit routine processing (received command analysis processing (step S1022)) and execute presentations according to the game situation.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether a start winning situation has occurred, and if so, controls the pending display and pre-reading effects according to the start winning situation. Then, by updating the process flag based on the grasped game situation, it executes one of the following: waiting for a change pattern designation command to be received, effect pattern change start processing, effect pattern change in progress processing, effect pattern change stop processing, jackpot display processing, jackpot game in progress processing, and jackpot end effect processing.

Waiting for reception of a fluctuation pattern specification command: Until a fluctuation pattern command regarding the fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, control is performed regarding the presentation (demo presentation, etc.) when the pattern is not in a fluctuation state and control regarding a jackpot is not being performed, and when a fluctuation pattern command regarding the fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the presentation pattern fluctuation start processing.

Performance pattern change start processing: Various performance contents (performance patterns, preview performances, etc.) during the pattern change period are determined based on the change pattern command, etc., and the decorative pattern change is controlled to start based on the determined performance contents. After this, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during performance pattern change. Among the variation patterns (performance patterns), many of the "variation patterns (performance patterns) that stop at a jackpot pattern" are provided in pairs with "variation patterns (performance patterns) that stop at a losing pattern," and by functioning as the same variation pattern (performance pattern), a performance is provided regarding whether a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern will appear. Therefore, when describing the fluctuation pattern (presentation pattern) below, "predetermined fluctuation pattern" or "specific fluctuation pattern" means both a "predetermined fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern) that stops at a winning symbol" and a "predetermined fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern) that stops at a losing symbol" unless otherwise noted, and the presentation content progresses in the same manner, resulting in a branching point where either a winning symbol or a losing symbol appears.

Processing during performance pattern change: This performs control to start the various performance contents determined in the performance pattern change start processing at the respective timing during the pattern change period, and when the change time ends, updates the value of the process flag to a value corresponding to the performance pattern change stop processing.
Performance symbol variation stop processing: Controls the variation of decorative symbols to be stopped and the display result (stopped symbol) to be derived and displayed based on the reception of a command (symbol determination command) to stop all symbols. If the decorative symbol is to be stopped at a jackpot symbol, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display processing, and if the decorative symbol is to be stopped at a losing symbol, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting processing.

Jackpot display processing: Controls the effects (such as display effects that notify the occurrence of a jackpot on the effect display device 1600) during the period from when the decorative pattern stops on the jackpot pattern to when the jackpot game starts. After this, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot game processing.

Processing during jackpot play: Controls various effects during the jackpot play state. When the jackpot play state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect processing.

Jackpot end presentation processing: In the presentation display device 1600, the presentation (such as a display presentation that notifies the player that the jackpot play state has ended) during the period from the end of the jackpot play state to the transition to the change-permitted state is controlled. Then, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process of waiting for reception of a change pattern designation command.

FIG. 118 shows a judgment table T1 of the presentation pattern (variable presentation) referenced in the above-mentioned presentation symbol variation start process when in the normal gaming state.
As shown in FIG. 118, in the judgment table T1, each of the variation numbers 1 to 22 indicated by the variation pattern command is associated with a presentation pattern (variation presentation). Therefore, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires a variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the presentation pattern (variation presentation) associated with the variation pattern command based on the judgment table T1, and controls the start of the variation of the decorative pattern based on the determined presentation pattern (variation presentation).

Note that the presentation pattern (variable presentation) does not necessarily have to correspond one-to-one with the variable number indicated by the above-mentioned variable pattern command. For example, multiple presentation patterns (variable presentations) may be associated with one variable number indicated by the variable pattern command, and one of these presentation patterns (variable presentations) may be determined based on a presentation lottery or the game situation. As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a in this embodiment is also configured to associate multiple presentation patterns with some of the variable numbers 1 to 22.

As will be described later, after the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the presentation pattern (variable presentation) in this manner, it performs a preview lottery (preview presentation determination process) based on the result of the jackpot determination, the pattern type, and the variation pattern, and also performs control (presentation pattern variation process) to cause the preview presentation selected in the preview lottery to appear at a predetermined timing while the presentation pattern (variable presentation) determined above is being performed, thereby making it possible to combine multiple presentation contents and to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot pattern appearing based on the appearance mode of these presentation contents, etc.

In the past, among such composite effects, multiple occurrences of the same specific advance notice effect (for example, timer effect) would be displayed while one effect pattern (variable effect) was being executed, which was expected to maintain interest in the game. However, because advance notice effects can only be combined when there is a high probability of a winning symbol appearing, the frequency with which multiple timer effects are executed while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed naturally decreases, making it difficult to sufficiently increase interest in the game.

As will be described later, the "timer effect" refers to a predetermined effect that appears during the execution of an effect pattern (variable effect), and is executed as a count effect display that displays a count from a first predetermined value (e.g., "60 seconds") to a second predetermined value (e.g., "0 seconds") until the timing at which the predetermined effect is performed, or as a standby display (preparation, etc.) before the count display begins. In other words, in this case, when the count display (e.g., countdown) from the first predetermined value begins as a timer effect, it is guaranteed that some effect will occur when the second predetermined value is reached. Or, when an effect (e.g., a conversation preview or cut-in A, B, etc.) that produces either a relatively unfavorable effect mode (a performance mode with low expectations) or a favorable effect mode (a performance mode with high expectations) for the player is the subject of the timer effect, it is guaranteed that a favorable effect result will occur when the second predetermined value is reached. However, in the timer effect (especially the preview side timer effect executed as a result of a preview lottery), it is desirable to keep secret at least at the time when the count display begins which effect is the target of the effect. Additionally, the "target of the timer effect" refers to the effect that appears when the countdown display (e.g., countdown) from a first predetermined value in the timer effect reaches a second predetermined value (e.g., "0 seconds"); in the timer effect, the countdown display is performed toward the timing at which the target of the effect occurs.

In addition, the "timer effect" according to this embodiment displays the time elapsed since the count started to two decimal places, accurately displaying the number of seconds, etc. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed as a timer effect like this, and as long as it is executed as a count effect in which a count is displayed by counting up or down, etc., it does not have to accurately show the time elapsed (number of seconds, etc.) since the count started.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in addition to the timer effect (pre-notification timer effect) that appears only when the pre-notification lottery is won, the timer effect (variable timer effect) that is pre-installed as the effect content of the above-mentioned effect pattern (variable effect) determined based on the judgment table T1 can be executed. In other words, in this case, the count effect display is executed not only as the pre-notification timer effect that functions to increase the jackpot expectation rate for the effect pattern determined based on the variable pattern command, but also as the effect content of the effect pattern itself determined based on the variable pattern command, so that it is possible to make the count effect display (timer effect) appear without unnecessarily increasing the jackpot expectation rate indicated by the effect pattern determined based on the variable pattern command (increasing the expectation rate by satisfying the condition of "winning the pre-notification lottery"). For example, if the expected probability of a jackpot is "20%" when a specific presentation pattern determined based on a fluctuation pattern command appears, if the advance notice timer presentation is further executed, the expected probability of a jackpot will be increased by the composite presentation function to, for example, "40%," and the frequency of appearance will have to be lowered accordingly. However, if the variable side timer presentation is executed as the presentation content of the specific presentation pattern itself, it is possible to execute the timer presentation while keeping the expected probability of a jackpot at "20%" (it can appear simply by selecting a specific fluctuation pattern), and the frequency of appearance can be maintained at an appropriate level.

In addition, the probability of winning when a performance pattern (variable performance) appears in the judgment table T1 varies depending on the variable number (and furthermore, the performance pattern), and basically, the probability of winning increases as the variable number increases. For example, in the performance patterns corresponding to variable numbers 5 (6), 9 (10), and 17 (18), a variable side timer performance is executed in which the performance content is a "conversation notice", but the appearance ratio is variable number 5 (6) > variable number 9 (10) > variable number 17 (18), while the probability of winning when it appears is set to variable number 5 (6) < variable number 9 (10) < variable number 17 (18). For ease of explanation, only the judgment table referenced in the normal game state will be described in detail here, but even in the judgment tables referenced in the low probability time-saving state and the high probability time-saving state, the presentation pattern itself contains a presentation pattern (count fluctuation pattern) in which a variable timer presentation can be executed as the presentation content, and it can appear with a different probability than when in the normal game state.

In addition, in judgment table T1, variable numbers 3 to 6 are the same in that the same normal reach effect is performed, but variable numbers 5 and 6 differ from variable numbers 3 and 4 in that a variable side timer effect with a conversation preview as the effect target may be executed. Also, variable numbers 7 to 14 are the same in that the same character reach effect is performed, but variable numbers 9 and 10 are different in that a variable side timer effect with a conversation preview as the effect target is executed, variable numbers 11 and 12 are different in that a variable side timer effect with a cut-in A as the effect target is executed, and variable numbers 13 and 14 are different in that a conversation preview and cut-in A are executed and a variable side timer effect with them as the effect target may be executed. In addition, variable numbers 15 to 22 are the same in that the same SP reach performance is performed, but variable numbers 17 and 18 execute a variable side timer performance with the conversation announcement as the performance target, variable numbers 19 and 20 execute a variable side timer performance with the cut-in B as the performance target, and variable numbers 21 and 22 are different in that conversation announcement and cut-in B are executed and a variable side timer performance with them as the performance target may be executed. Note that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when a variable side timer performance with cut-ins A and B as the performance target is executed than when a variable side timer performance with conversation announcement as the performance target is executed, and furthermore, it is set so that the expectation of a jackpot tends to be higher when a variable side timer performance with both conversation announcement and cut-ins A and B as the performance target is executed.

Note that a "conversation preview" is a presentation that can appear relatively early after the presentation pattern (decorative pattern variation presentation) is executed, and often has a relatively low expected level, whereas cut-ins A and B are presentations that can appear relatively late after the presentation pattern (decorative pattern variation presentation) is executed, and often has a relatively high expected level (or always has a relatively high expected level). Therefore, a "conversation preview" is set to have a higher appearance rate (probability of execution) than other presentations with higher expected levels (cut-ins A and B, and the role A and B actions described below). Also, in character reach, the "cut-in" that appears as the content of the variation presentation is executed so as to correspond to cut-in A that appears as the content of the preview presentation, whereas in SP reach, it is executed so as to correspond to cut-in B, not cut-in A, that appears as the content of the preview presentation.

In addition, in the judgment table T1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118, the performance contents (performance patterns) are assigned as the variable side timer performance for a plurality of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22). In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is a "predetermined type such as shortened fluctuation or low expectation normal reach performance (e.g., fluctuation numbers 1-6, etc.)," the count performance display as the advance notice timer performance is prevented from winning the performance (increasing the premium degree) to appropriately ensure an increase in expectation when the advance notice timer performance appears. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is a "fluctuation pattern that executes the variable side timer performance (count fluctuation pattern such as fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22, etc.)," the proportion of the fluctuation pattern that corresponds to the above-mentioned predetermined type (e.g., fluctuation numbers 1-6, etc.) is lower than when it is not such a count fluctuation pattern.

Here, 14 count fluctuation patterns (fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) are prepared as the count fluctuation patterns for which the timer performance on the fluctuation side is executed, but only two of these (fluctuation numbers 5 and 6) (which may be set to 0) correspond to the above-mentioned predetermined types (fluctuation numbers 1-6, etc.), so the corresponding ratio is "2/14". In contrast, eight fluctuation patterns (fluctuation numbers 1-4, 7, 8, 15, 16) are prepared as the fluctuation patterns for which the timer performance on the fluctuation side is not executed, and four of these (fluctuation numbers 1-4) correspond to the above-mentioned predetermined types (fluctuation numbers 1-6, etc.), so the corresponding ratio is "4/8".

In this configuration, when the performance content of the fluctuation pattern is one in which a count performance display (fluctuation side timer performance) can be performed (count fluctuation pattern), the percentage of times it is determined that the count performance display (pre-notification side timer performance) cannot be executed as the performance content of the preview performance is lower than in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation side timer performance is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the appearance of multiple count displays within one performance pattern (fluctuation performance) without unnecessarily increasing the expectation level and lowering the frequency of appearance.

As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if the presentation pattern (variation presentation) determined in the presentation pattern variation start process is a count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22), the rate at which the above-mentioned advance notice timer presentation appears varies depending on which count variation pattern the count variation pattern is. For example, as shown in FIG. 118, when the presentation pattern corresponding to variation numbers 5 and 6 is executed, the above-mentioned advance notice timer presentation does not appear at all, when the presentation pattern corresponding to variation numbers 9-14 is executed, the above-mentioned advance notice timer presentation can appear with a medium probability of selection, and when the presentation pattern corresponding to variation numbers 17-22 is executed, the above-mentioned advance notice timer presentation can appear with a high probability of selection.

The above-mentioned advance notice timer effect may be made to appear with a low probability even when the performance patterns corresponding to variable numbers 5 and 6 are executed. Also, even if any of the performance patterns corresponding to variable numbers 15 to 22, which have a high probability of making the above-mentioned advance notice timer effect appear, are executed, the advance notice timer effect is actually made to appear with a higher probability in a performance pattern that results in a jackpot win than in a miss, and the advance notice timer effect is made to appear with an even higher probability in variable number 22 than in variable number 16.

In this configuration, the rate at which the count display is executed as the performance content of the preview performance (preview timer performance) differs depending on whether the fluctuation pattern is the first count fluctuation pattern (e.g., fluctuation number 10) or the second count fluctuation pattern (e.g., fluctuation number 22). Therefore, even among the above count fluctuation patterns (fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) in which the rate at which multiple count displays appear within one performance pattern (fluctuation performance) is high, the rate at which multiple count displays appear can be made even higher depending on the type, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In particular, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even in a presentation pattern in which the same reach type presentation content appears (e.g., character reach, SP reach), in a presentation pattern in which a variable side timer presentation is included as a presentation content (e.g., variable numbers 17 to 22), the rate at which the advance notice timer presentation appears within the execution period of the presentation pattern (the rate at which the advance notice timer presentation is decided to be executed in the advance notice drawing) is higher than in a presentation pattern in which a variable side timer presentation is not included as a presentation content (e.g., variable numbers 15, 16). In other words, in this case, it is possible to make two timer presentations (variable side timer presentation, advance notice timer presentation) appear within one presentation pattern by simply requiring a jackpot expectation level that is high enough for one advance notice timer presentation to be won in the advance notice drawing, and thus it is possible to realize a double timer presentation opportunity without needlessly increasing the jackpot expectation level.

In addition, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if the presentation pattern (variation presentation) determined in the presentation pattern change start process is a count change pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22), the count display mode (such as the shape and color of the count numbers) is different between the variable side timer presentation (variation side count presentation display) in which the "conversation announcement" is the presentation target and the variable side timer presentation (variation side count presentation display) in which the "cut-in" is the presentation target. In other words, in this case, even if a presentation pattern with the same reach presentation as the presentation content (for example, variable numbers 9 and 11) is executed, by checking the count display mode of the variable side timer presentation (variation side count presentation display), coupled with the fact that "the rate at which the above-mentioned announcement side timer presentation appears is different depending on which count change pattern it is," it becomes possible to recognize and expect the likelihood of the announcement side timer presentation appearing.

The mode of the count display that appears in the preview side timer performance (preview side count display) may be different from (or at least different from) the mode of the count display that appears in the variable side timer performance (variable side count display) (conversation preview, cut-in) regardless of whether the performance target is the same (conversation preview, cut-in) or not, or it may be the same as (or at least the same as) that mode.

However, for the count display executed as the preview side timer effect (preview side count effect display), it is beneficial to execute it in a common manner regardless of the type of effect that is the target of the effect, in order to make the player aware that a preview side timer effect with a relatively high expectation level is appearing, thereby increasing the sense of expectation. In this sense, it is more desirable for the preview side timer effect to be different from any of the count display modes (conversation preview, cut-in) that appear in the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display). For the above common mode as the preview side timer effect (preview side count effect display), multiple modes with different expectation levels (for example, blue count, red count, etc.) are prepared, and any of these may be executed.

In addition, to make it easier to recognize that the advance notice timer performance is being performed, it is desirable to have a different count speed (for example, the speed at which the numbers change when counting up or down) between the count display when the advance notice timer performance is being performed and the count display when the variable timer performance is being performed. With this configuration, even during the period in which the count display is progressing after the timer performance has started, the player can pay attention to the count speed of the timer performance, which can arouse interest in whether the relatively low expectation variable timer performance or the relatively high expectation advance notice timer performance is being performed, and this makes it possible to maintain interest in playing during the timer consumption period.

In this case, in the variable side timer performance, depending on the performance target (conversation preview, cut-in), the count can be displayed in a manner in which the count is displayed at a speed relatively close to (or the same speed as) the count speed of the preview side timer performance (cut-in), and in a manner in which the count is displayed at a speed relatively not close to the count speed of the preview side timer performance (conversation preview), which makes it more interesting by varying the difficulty of determining whether the preview side timer performance is being performed or not. Also, while in the variable side timer performance (or preview side timer performance), the count is displayed by repeatedly appearing and disappearing the count numbers, in the preview side timer performance (or variable side timer performance), the count can be displayed by continuously displaying the count numbers.

With this configuration, when a situation occurs in which the count display of the variable timer effect and the count display of the advance notice timer effect are executed simultaneously, it becomes easy to know whether the advance notice timer effect is being executed or not, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, for the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the variable side timer performance (count fluctuation pattern such as fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22, etc.), multiple performance patterns with different start timing or end timing of the count display (total number of counts, or time required to consume all counts) are set as selectable performance patterns. When a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the variable side timer performance is acquired, one of the multiple performance patterns is determined based on a random number for performance, etc., and the ease of simultaneous execution of the count display of the variable side timer performance and the count display of the notice side timer performance (for example, the larger the total number of counts, the easier it is to overlap) is differentiated, and the ease of determining whether the notice side timer performance is being executed is differentiated, adding interest.

In this embodiment, multiple presentation patterns (the target of the timer presentation and the content of the reach presentation are the same) with different start or end timings of the count display (total number of counts or the time required to complete all counts) are prepared for one fluctuation pattern, but multiple different fluctuation patterns may be prepared for multiple presentation patterns (the type of presentation that is the target of the timer presentation and the type of reach presentation executed as the content of the fluctuation pattern are the same for each presentation pattern) with different start or end timings of the count display (total number of counts or the time required to complete all counts) and be matched one-to-one.

In addition, by making the count display number (total count number) different when it appears in the variable side timer effect and the preview side timer effect, or by making the selection rate of the specific count display number different between the variable side timer effect and the preview side timer effect even if the same specific count display number is selectable, it becomes possible to vary the difficulty of determining whether the preview side timer effect is being executed or not, thereby adding to the excitement.

In addition, if the preview side timer performance is executed with a countdown display, while the variable side timer performance is executed with a countup display, it will be possible to determine with certainty whether the preview side timer performance is being executed, which is expected to significantly increase interest in the game.In addition, if the preview side timer performance is executed with a countdown display, while the variable side timer performance targeted at a specific performance (e.g., a conversation preview) is executed with a countup display, and the variable side timer performance targeted at a performance different from the specific performance (e.g., a cut-in) is executed with a countdown display, it will be possible to vary the difficulty of determining whether the preview side timer performance is being executed depending on the performance target, adding to the excitement.

As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a in this embodiment controls the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect so that there are cases where the same effect is the target of the effect, and cases where different effects are the target of the effect. When the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect are the target of the effect (for example, a conversation notice), the probability of the expectation of a jackpot being lower is set to be higher than when the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect are the target of different effects, and even when the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect are the target of the effect (for example, a conversation notice), the end timing of each count display is made different.

In other words, in this case, even if the same effect (e.g., a conversation announcement) is the target of the variable side timer effect and the announcement side timer effect, one of the variable side timer effect and the announcement side timer effect will reach a predetermined value first and end, while the count display of the other will continue, so at this point it looks as if a different effect is the target of the effect (the timer effect is being executed in a relatively high expectation mode). Then, after this, the other count display that was continued will also reach a predetermined value and end in a manner that makes it clear that the same effect (e.g., a conversation announcement) is the target of the effect, so even if it is clear that a conversation announcement with a relatively low expectation is the target of the effect by the timer effect that ended first, it is expected that the expectation that a different effect that can appear later is the target of the effect (the timer effect is being executed in a relatively high expectation mode) will be maintained, and interest in the game will be increased.

In addition, when the same effect (e.g., a conversation announcement) is the target of the variable side timer effect and the preview side timer effect, it is desirable to have separate count end corresponding displays (e.g., "Count successful!", "Chance UP!", etc.) appear when the variable side timer effect reaches a predetermined value and when the preview side timer effect reaches a predetermined value.

More specifically, the variable side timer performance and the notice side timer performance, which are targeted at the "conversation notice" executed as the variable side or notice side performance, are each made to appear within a single performance pattern. In this case, the count display of the variable side timer performance and the count display of the notice side timer performance progress simultaneously, but in the variable side timer performance, the count display progresses in accordance with the variable side specific performance that occurs as a variable side performance in relation to the "conversation notice" (such as "Count successful!" or an effect that coincides with the appearance of the conversation notice), whereas in the notice side timer performance, the count display progresses in accordance with the notice side specific performance that occurs as a notice side performance in relation to the "conversation notice" (such as "Chance UP!" or a timer end display that appears in accordance with the start timing of the conversation notice (or a specified number of seconds before the performance starts)), so that separate count end corresponding displays appear at different times.

The conversation preview and cut-in effects are required to be executed without fail if they are the target of the variable timer effect (if the count fluctuation pattern is determined). In particular, since the conversation preview and cut-in are effects that can be executed in multiple ways with different degrees of expectation, when they are the target of the variable timer effect, they are required to appear in a relatively highly expected manner when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Therefore, it is desirable to incorporate the effects that are the target of the variable timer effect as the performance content of the above-mentioned performance pattern (variable performance) in advance, so that the variable timer effect and the performance that is the target of the effect (the relatively highly expected manner) can each appear simply by executing the performance pattern. However, instead of this, it is also possible to control so that when the variable timer effect is executed, the performance that is the target of the effect (the relatively highly expected manner) is always selected in the preview lottery.

In addition, if the conversation preview and cut-in effects are not targeted for effect in the variable timer effect, not only is a determination made as to whether or not they will be made to appear as part of the preview side effect content in the preview lottery described below, but a determination is also made as to the manner in which they will be made to appear as part of the preview side effect content (a manner with a relatively high or low expectation), and the appearance is controlled based on the results of this determination.

The process of determining the presentation pattern using FIG. 118 will be summarized below.
That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains a variable pattern command or a symbol type command from the main control MPU 1310a, it first refers to a judgment table according to the current game state based on the variable number indicated by the variable pattern command or the symbol type indicated by the symbol type command. For example, if the presentation pattern is determined based on the symbol type, it becomes possible to give a bias (expectation) to the probability of a certain presentation pattern appearing or the number of rounds in a big win game state.

Next, if multiple presentation patterns (such as multiple presentation patterns with different start or end timings for the count display that appears in the variable timer presentation) are available for selection as presentation patterns associated with the variable number, one of the multiple presentation patterns with different start or end timings for the count display is selected based on whether the jackpot judgment is successful. In this case, the presentation pattern is set so that if the jackpot judgment is successful, the probability that the start or end timing of the count display will be delayed is high, so that the later the start or end timing of the count display is, the more likely the jackpot pattern will appear.

As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when a special performance condition is met, even if a count fluctuation pattern (fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) is acquired, a performance pattern that is set so that the variable timer performance does not appear is selected from among the multiple performance patterns.

Then, after the peripheral control MPU 1511a has selected the presentation pattern that will appear during the pattern change (the presentation from when the decorative pattern starts to change until it stops changing), it will decide what kind of preview presentation will be additionally executed (combined) and in what form during the execution period of that presentation pattern (preview lottery).

[12. Sound control using automatic channel method]
Incidentally, in the already explained sound data creation process (step S1032 in FIG. 95), a part of the process, the automatic channel sound control, will be explained later. Next, the automatic channel sound control according to the present embodiment will be explained. First, the background of the process will be briefly explained.

In general pachinko machines, various sounds are output from the speaker in each scene according to the progress of the game, in order to realize an effect that attracts the player's interest. For example, even in the case of a reach that is supposed to raise the player's expectations, there are some that output a variety of sounds depending on the type, and others that do not. In such general pachinko machines, each channel is assigned in advance to each sound that should be output in each scene, including each reach, and each such sound is played using the corresponding default channel (see Patent Publication No. 5627044). However, in general pachinko machines, even if there is an available channel, there are cases where the sound to be played cannot be assigned to the available channel due to channel assignment, and there is a problem in that the sound to be played cannot be played, making it difficult to realize a variety of sound effects.

In this embodiment, therefore, the purpose is to effectively utilize the available channels to realize a variety of sound effects and increase the interest of the player, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 dynamically assigns and manages each channel to each sound to be output from the pair of upper speakers 573 (sound output means) and the pair of lower speakers 921 (sound output means), while when the number of the combinations of sounds to be output exceeds the maximum number of channels for each channel (16 channels are exemplified in this embodiment), each channel is dynamically assigned to the combinations of sounds to be output within the range of the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority (channel control means). Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a simultaneously plays the combinations of sounds to be output through each dynamically assigned channel within the range of the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority (sound output control means). A detailed explanation is given below.

[12-1. Sound control using fixed channel method]
Fig. 119(A) and Fig. 119(B) each show an example of sound control by a fixed channel method as a comparison with this embodiment. Fig. 119(A) shows an example of sound playback channels. In sound control by this fixed channel method, a total of 16 channels, for example playback channel 00 to playback channel 15, are used, similar to sound control by the automatic channel method of this embodiment described later. Note that the "playback ch" shown in the figure omits the playback channel.

On the other hand, Figure 119 (B) shows an example of the allocation of playback channels to each sound. In sound control using this fixed channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is pre-assigned to each playback channel to be used. Regarding basic sound playback rules, one sound requires two channels to be output in stereo, while one channel is required to be output in mono.

As shown in the figure, "Alert Sound 1" through "Button Press Sound" must not be muted once playback has started until playback has finished, under any circumstances. The channel allocation method is to exclusively allocate a playback channel and sound pair to prevent the sound from being overwritten. On the other hand, as shown in the figure, "Normal BGM" through "Pending Winning Sound" can be muted once playback has started, as the sounds can be overwritten with other sounds during playback. As for the channel allocation method, we try to allocate them to the same channel as much as possible to avoid overlapping playback timing.

In sound control using the fixed channel method, when a new sound is output to the same channel as an existing output, the currently output sound is muted and the new sound is output. For sounds that would cause problems if overwritten, an independent channel is assigned, or sounds with non-overlapping playback timing are assigned to the same channel.

Figure 120 shows an example of a sound definition table for implementing sound control using a fixed channel method. In this sound definition table, the definitions of the playback channel number, left/right pan initial value, up/down pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, playback type setting, and output type setting are managed for each sound category and sound name. The playback channel number has been described above, so a description is omitted here.

The left/right pan initial value represents the initial position of the sound image of the sound produced by the left and right speakers, which are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left/right pan setting value during sound playback, a difference in the volume output from the left and right speakers individually is created, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. For example, when set to "0x00", it indicates that the sound is output only from the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L), and when set to "0x80", the difference in volume output from the left and right speakers, which are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, a setting of "0xFF" indicates that the sound will be output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

The initial value of the up/down pan represents the initial position of the sound image of the sound produced by the upper and lower speakers, such as the pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and the pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). By dynamically changing the setting value of the up/down pan during sound playback, a difference is created in the volume output from the upper and lower speakers individually, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. For example, when set to "0x00", it indicates that the sound is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573, and when set to "0x80", the difference in the volume output from the upper and lower speakers individually is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. When set to "0xFF", it indicates that the sound is output only from the pair of lower speakers 921.

The initial volume value indicates the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be set within the range of "0x00" to "0xFF", for example. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each of the sounds mentioned above. The playback type setting indicates whether the target sound is loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure), in which the target sound is played repeatedly, or 1 SHOT playback (corresponding to "1 SHOT" in the figure), in which the target sound is played once. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is played in mono or stereo.

Figure 121 shows the relationship between game states, playback sounds, and playback channels. The horizontal axis, which is the time axis, indicates the game states, which can be, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stopped", "right symbol stopped", "middle symbol stopped", and "during jackpot". Meanwhile, the vertical axis indicates (playback) priority, with the (playback) priority increasing from bottom to top.

Figure 122(A) shows an example of a production time chart, Figure 122(B) shows an example of a channel playback time chart, and Figure 122(C) shows an example of a problem where sounds cannot be played when they are attempted to be played. The horizontal axis of Figures 122(A) to 122(C) all share a common time axis.

In FIG. 122(A), the game is controlled so that the game states along the horizontal time axis are "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stopped", "right symbol stopped", "middle symbol stopped", and "during jackpot", in that order.

In the "variable first half" shown in Figure 122 (A), for example, if there is a start gate winning (corresponding to the "pending winning" shown) during the playback time of "first half preview A" as a new sound, as shown in problem 1 in Figure 122 (C), as the "pending winning sound" is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14, 15 as "first half preview A", as shown in Figure 119 (B), the playback sound of "first half preview A" will be overwritten by the pending winning sound, and the output of the "first half preview A" sound will stop (in the case of sound control by fixed channel).

In the "second half of the fluctuation" shown in FIG. 122(A), for example, if there is a start gate winning (corresponding to the "pending winning" shown in the figure) during the playback time of the "full screen preview" as a new sound, as shown in problem 2 in FIG. 122(C), as the "pending winning sound" is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14, 15 as the "full screen preview", as shown in FIG. 119(B), the playback sound of the "full screen preview" will be overwritten by the pending winning sound, and the output of the "full screen preview" sound will stop (in the case of sound control by fixed channels).

[12-2. Sound control using automatic channel method]
Next, an example of sound control by the automatic channel system according to this embodiment will be described. Figures 123(A) and 123(B) each show an example of sound control by the automatic channel system according to this embodiment.

Figure 123 (A) shows an example of sound playback channels, which differs from the sound control using fixed channels described above in that the channel classification as an attribute of the playback channel is an automatic channel (corresponding to "AUTOch" in the figure). Here, the channel classification being an automatic channel means that each playback channel for each sound is not fixed but variable, and is controlled so that it is automatically assigned according to the rules described below (corresponding to the "sound control using the automatic channel method" described above).

In the automatic channel sound control according to this embodiment, a total of 16 channels, for example playback channel 00 to playback channel 15, are used, just like the fixed channel sound control described above. Note that the "playback ch" shown in the figure is an abbreviation of the playback channel.

On the other hand, Figure 123 (B) shows an example of the allocation of playback channels to each sound. In sound control using this automatic channel method, as shown in the figure, a priority is assigned individually to each sound. Regarding the basic sound playback rules, as mentioned above, a single sound requires two channels to be output in stereo, while a single channel is required to be output in mono.

As shown in the figure, "Notification sound 1" through "Button press sound" must not be muted under any circumstances once playback has started until playback has finished. On the other hand, as shown in the figure, "Normal BGM" through "Pending winning sound" can be muted as they are overwritten with other sounds during playback.

In sound control using the automatic channel method, each playback channel is defined as an AUTO group channel (hereafter abbreviated as "AUTO group"). Multiple AUTO groups can be defined, while multiple playback channels can be defined within an AUTO group. Each AUTO group is used to play sounds for that AUTO group. When assigning sounds to an AUTO group, an identifier and priority for specifying a specific AUTO group can be specified in each AUTO group. When playing a new sound, if the sound is defined in an AUTO group, it will be played immediately if there is a free channel (unused channel) in the specified AUTO group.

In the above case, if there is no available channel, the performance control program searches for all channels currently being played within the AUTO group based on the priority of the new sound to be played. If there is a channel with a lower priority than or the same priority as the sound being played, the performance control program stops using that AUTO channel and plays the new sound. On the other hand, if there is no available channel within the AUTO group with a lower priority than or not the same as the sound being played, the performance control program does not play the new sound.

Figure 124 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the automatic channel method. In this sound definition table for the automatic channel method, instead of the playback channel number, initial left/right pan value, initial up/down pan value, initial volume value, sound number, playback type setting, and output type setting as in the sound control by fixed channels already explained, the definitions of the identifier and priority order (also called "playback priority order") for specifying an AUTO group, the initial left/right pan value, initial up/down pan value, initial volume value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting, and output type setting are managed for each sound category and sound name.

First, the identifier for specifying each specific AUTO group indicates which AUTO group each sound is to be played in among the multiple AUTO groups. The priority is an index indicating which sound should be played with priority when the sounds are played simultaneously. The higher the priority, the higher the priority, while the lower the priority, the lower the priority. In this embodiment, the order of the types of sounds to be played with priority is, for example, "25" for notification sounds ("notification sound 1", "notification sound 2" and "notification sound 3"), "20" for sound effects ("jackpot confirmation sound" and "button press sound"), "15" for BGM ("normal BGM" and the like), "10" for sound effects ("full screen preview sound effect" and the like), "05" for sound effects ("first half preview sound effect" to "second half preview sound effect"), and "01" for reserved winning sound. As a result, when there are no available channels and, for example, an alert sound is to be played, there is no need to play it using a predefined playback channel, and the alert sound will be played preferentially using a channel that is currently playing a sound with a lower priority (for example, a sound for a pending win).

As already explained, the left/right pan initial value represents the initial position of the sound image of the sound produced by the left and right speakers, which are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left/right pan setting value during sound playback, a difference is created in the volume output from the left and right speakers individually, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. This left/right pan initial value is managed as pan information. For example, when set to "0x00", it indicates that the sound is output only from the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L), and when set to "0x80", the difference in volume output from the left and right speakers, which are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, a setting of "0xFF" indicates that the sound will be output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

As already explained, the initial value of the up-down pan represents the initial position of the sound image of the sound produced by the upper and lower speakers, such as the pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and the pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). By dynamically changing the setting value of the left-right pan during sound playback, a difference is created in the volume output from the upper and lower speakers individually, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. This initial value of the up-down pan is managed as pan information. For example, when it is set to "0x00", it indicates that the sound is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573, and when it is set to "0x80", the difference in the volume output from the upper and lower speakers individually is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. When it is set to "0xFF", it indicates that the sound is output only from the pair of lower speakers 921.

Similarly, the initial volume value indicates the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be set within the range of "0x00" to "0xFF", for example. In addition, by setting "1" (0x1FF for 0xFF) in the third byte, it indicates that the sound will always be played at the volume set by the initial value, regardless of any changes in volume caused by operating one or more volume adjustment devices provided on the gaming machine. The sound number is an identifier used to distinguish each of the sounds mentioned above.

The seek points represent the playback start position number within the same phrase in the sound data corresponding to each sound. In this embodiment, for example, the seek points are set to "0" for the "top right speaker confirmation sound" through "first half preview A sound effect," while "second half preview A sound effect" and "second half preview B sound effect" are set to "1." Such seek points make it possible to register sounds beyond the maximum number that can be registered when the maximum number of sounds that can be registered within the sound source is exceeded.

The playback type setting indicates whether the target sound is played repeatedly in loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure), or in 1 shot playback (corresponding to "1 shot" in the figure), in which the target sound is played once. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is played in mono or stereo.

Figure 125 shows the relationship between game state, playback sound, and priority order. The horizontal axis, which is the time axis, indicates the game state, and examples of game states include, in order, "first half of fluctuation," "second half of fluctuation," "left symbol stopped," "right symbol stopped," "middle symbol stopped," and "during jackpot." Meanwhile, the vertical axis indicates (playback) priority order, with the (playback) priority order increasing from bottom to top.

Figure 126(A) shows an example of a presentation time chart, and Figure 126(B) shows an example of an AUTO channel playback time chart. In both Figures 126(A) and 126(B), the horizontal axis is a common time axis. In Figure 126(A), the game is controlled so that the game states along the horizontal time axis are, in order, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left pattern stopped", "right pattern stopped", "middle pattern stopped", and "during jackpot".

In the "first half of the fluctuation" shown in FIG. 126(A), as shown in FIG. 126(B), for example, as a part of it, the sound of "normal BGM playback" is played from start to finish on playback channels 00 to 01 (corresponding to range A). Here, if an attempt is made to play a reserved winning sound as a new sound due to a start-gate winning (corresponding to "reserved winning" in the figure), playback channels 12 to 13 are available as free channels at the start timing, and this reserved winning sound can be played using playback channels 12 to 13. Therefore, none of the sounds being played are overwritten by the reserved winning sound (corresponding to "reserved sound playback" in the figure), and the output of all other types of sounds continues.

In the "second half of the fluctuation" shown in FIG. 126(A), as shown in FIG. 126(B), as a part of it, for example, the "reach BGM playback" sound is played from start to finish on playback channels 00-01 (corresponding to range B). Here, for example, if an attempt is made to play a pending winning sound as a new sound due to a start winning (corresponding to the "pending winning" shown in the figure), playback channels 02-03 are available as free channels at the start timing, and none of the sounds being played are overwritten by the pending winning sound (corresponding to the "pending sound playback" shown in the figure), and the output of all other types of sounds continues.

In the "second half of the fluctuation" shown in FIG. 126(A), if an alert (corresponding to "alert 2 occurrence" in the figure) occurs and a new sound is to be played, with the highest priority of "25" (corresponding to "alert 2" in the figure), a search for available channels reveals that there are no available channels at the start timing, as shown in FIG. 126(B). Therefore, a search is performed for the sound with the lowest priority among the sounds being played at the start timing, and playback channels 04 to 05 are found as channels playing the reserved winning sound with the lowest priority of "01". In these playback channels 04 to 05, the reserved winning sound is being played as described above, but since the priority (25) of the next alert sound to be played (corresponding to "alert sound 2" in the figure) is higher than the priority (01) of the reserved winning sound, the reserved winning sound being played in these playback channels 04 to 05 is overwritten with that alert sound.

Figure 127 shows an example of work information for automatic channel control stored in the AUTO group channel control work area provided in the peripheral control RAM. This work information for automatic channel control includes, for each channel as work names, a setting reservation flag, a requested sound number, a sound number being played, an automatic allocation group, priority at the time of automatic allocation, time elapsed since registration, a volume control work, and a pan control work, and has the corresponding information.

If the setting reservation flag is a value other than "0", it indicates that a setting reservation has been made. For the requested sound number, "-1" means stop, and if it is any value other than "-1", it represents the sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound to be played. For the playing sound number, "-1" means stop, and if it is any value other than "-1", it represents the sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound being played.

When the automatic allocation group is set to "0", the channel is assigned in a fixed manner, while when it is set to "1-", the channel is assigned automatically (corresponding to "sound control using the automatic channel method" described below). Here, for example, an automatic allocation group of "1" indicates AUTO group 1, and "2" indicates AUTO group 2. Meanwhile, the priority during automatic allocation indicates the priority when sound control is performed using the automatic channel method described below.

The time elapsed since registration represents the time elapsed since the desired sound to be played, with the time being set as "0" when the sound was registered. Note that the time elapsed since registration is used to determine which of the multiple sounds being played should be overwritten and erased when attempting to play a new sound in a situation where multiple sounds with the same priority at the time of automatic allocation are being played. For example, the sound that has been played for the longest period of time is identified, and this sound is overwritten and erased with the new sound.

The volume control work stores the volume value of the sound to be played. The pan control work stores pan information including the settings for the left/right pan and up/down pan described above.

Figure 128 shows an example of a sound definition table for implementing a process in which various notification sounds (dispense notification sounds and abnormality notification sounds) excluding sound effects are output only on a specific channel (hereinafter referred to as channel X) among a finite number of channels prepared as sound control using a fixed channel method. In this sound definition table, the definitions of the playback priority, left/right pan initial value, up/down pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting, and output type setting are managed for each sound name. Note that, for the sake of convenience, only the definitions for notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown here, and the definitions of other notification sounds and sound effects are omitted. Note that, in addition to the definitions using the fixed channel method exemplified in Figure 120, it is also possible to use the definitions using the automatic channel method exemplified in Figure 124 for each channel other than channel X to which the notification sounds are assigned.

The priority is a parameter used to determine which of multiple alarm sounds should be assigned to channel X for output when each of the alarm sounds satisfies the output condition, and an alarm sound with a higher priority value will be assigned to channel X for output regardless of the assignment status of an alarm sound with a lower priority value to channel X. As will be described later, when the priorities are the same, the alarm sound that was assigned to channel X first will be given priority, and will be assigned to channel X for output after the output of the alarm sound has been completed.

The left/right pan initial value represents the initial position of the sound image of the sound produced by the left and right speakers, which are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left/right pan setting value during sound playback, a difference in the volume output from the left and right speakers individually is created, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. For example, when set to "0x00", it indicates that the sound is output only from the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L), and when set to "0x80", the difference in volume output from the left and right speakers, which are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, a setting of "0xFF" indicates that the sound will be output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

The initial value of the up/down pan represents the initial position of the sound image of the sound produced by the upper and lower speakers, such as the pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and the pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). By dynamically changing the setting value of the up/down pan during sound playback, a difference is created in the volume output from the upper and lower speakers individually, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. For example, when set to "0x00", it indicates that the sound is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573, and when set to "0x80", the difference in the volume output from the upper and lower speakers individually is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. When set to "0xFF", it indicates that the sound is output only from the pair of lower speakers 921.

The initial volume value indicates the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be set within the range of "0x00" to "0xFF", for example. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each of the sounds mentioned above. The playback type setting indicates whether the target sound is loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure), in which the target sound is played repeatedly, or 1 SHOT playback (corresponding to "1 SHOT" in the figure), in which the target sound is played once. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is played in mono or stereo.

Figure 129 is a table showing the notification content, notification mode, and notification time for each type of notification sound shown in Figure 128, as well as the conditions for terminating the notification (cancellation conditions). Note that in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a finite notification time is set for each notification sound, but this is a measure to make effective use of the single channel X by keeping it as free as possible and refraining from outputting subsequent notification sounds.

As shown in FIG. 129, the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is for notifying that the magnetic sensor 4024 has detected a magnetic field (a state in which there is a high possibility of fraudulent activity using a magnet). The alarm mode is a loop process for repeatedly outputting an alarm sound such as "beep, magnetic field has been detected," a display in the display area of the game board performance display device 1600 (for example, "magnetic field has been detected"), and lighting of various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. As for the alarm time, the loop process for repeatedly outputting an alarm sound such as "beep, magnetic field has been detected" is terminated 60 seconds (corresponding to six repeated alarm sounds) from the time of detection by the magnetic sensor 4024, while the display in the display area of the game board performance display device 1600 and the lighting of various lamps are continued until the release condition "power re-on" is met.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), the alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) which notifies that a vibration has been detected by the vibration sensor 2405 (a state in which there is a high possibility that fraudulent activity through banging is occurring), and the alarm sound 3 (big prize abnormality) which notifies that a detection has been made by the count sensor 4005 (first big prize opening sensor or second big prize opening sensor) even though the big prize game state (a state in which the big prize opening is open) is not in a big prize game state (a state in which there is a high possibility that fraudulent activity is occurring by forcibly opening the big prize opening that is in a closed state to allow a game ball to enter) are regarded as belonging to a first alarm group when there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity has occurred, and the alarm sounds belonging to the first alarm group are all set to have the same alarm mode, alarm time, and release condition.

For example, for alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality), the alarm mode involves a loop process that repeatedly outputs an alarm sound such as "Buzz buzz vibration has been detected," a display in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 (for example, "Vibration has been detected"), and the lighting of various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and game board 5, and the loop process that repeatedly outputs the alarm sound ends 60 seconds (equivalent to six repetitions of the alarm sound) from the time of detection by the vibration sensor 2405, whereas the display in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the lighting of the various lamps continue to be executed until the release condition of "power re-applying" is met. In addition, for the alarm sound 3 (big prize abnormality), the alarm mode is a loop process that repeatedly outputs an alarm sound such as "big prize abnormality detected," a display in the display area of the game board performance display device 1600 (for example, "big prize abnormality detected"), and the lighting of various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and game board 5. The loop process that repeatedly outputs the alarm sound ends 60 seconds (equivalent to six repeated alarm sounds) from the time of detection by the count sensor 4005, while the display in the display area of the game board performance display device 1600 and the lighting of various lamps continue until the release condition of "power re-applying" is met.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group are displayed in different display modes within the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, but the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group are illuminated in the same manner (not necessarily all of the various lamps are illuminated) by the various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. In addition, the notification sounds to be subject to the loop processing are a combination of a warning sound used in all of the notification sounds 1 to 3, such as "buzzing" that serves to notify that the notification belongs to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility of fraudulent activity), and a message sound (unique sound) that serves to notify the individual identification of the content of the notification. The warning sound is composed of a monotonous sound to give a warning meaning in a tense fraud situation, and it is desirable that the message sound is composed of a variety of sounds to clearly distinguish it from other notification sounds.

In other words, when reporting something that belongs to the first notification group (a state where there is a high possibility of fraudulent activity), it is more important to speed up the initial response of the hall to the fraudulent activity than to identify which notification type it is. In this regard, with the above configuration, it is possible to recognize that something belongs to the first notification group (a state where there is a high possibility of fraudulent activity) simply by outputting the "buzzing" notification sound or the lighting pattern unique to the first notification group by various lamps (light-emitting devices), so it is expected that the initial response of the hall to the fraudulent activity will be quicker. Furthermore, since a message sound notifying which notification type it is is output following the "buzzing" notification sound, and a display is made within the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, it is expected that the hall's initial response will also be handled smoothly.

Meanwhile, the alarm sound 4 (door open) is to notify that the door frame 3 has been detected as open relative to the main frame 4 by the door frame open switch 618 (a state in which, although there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been committed by opening the door, there is also a possibility that the door has been opened as a result of abnormality response measures taken by the hall). The alarm mode is a loop process that repeatedly outputs an alarm sound such as "Door is open, ping pong ping pong," a display within the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 (for example, "Door is open"), and the lighting of various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and game board 5. In addition, in terms of the alarm time, the loop process that repeatedly outputs an alarm sound such as "Door is open, ping pong ping pong" ends 30 seconds (equivalent to three repeated alarm sounds) from the time of detection by the door frame opening switch 618, whereas the display in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the lighting of various lamps continue until the release condition "door closed detection (detection that the door frame 3 has been closed against the main frame 4 by the door frame opening switch 618)" is met.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the alarm sound 4 (door open), alarm sound 5 (frame open), which notifies that the body frame 4 has been detected as open relative to the outer frame 2 by the body frame open switch 619 (a state in which there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been committed by opening the body frame, but it is also possible that the body frame has been opened as a result of abnormality response measures taken by the hall), is considered to belong to a second alarm group when there is a moderate possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity has been committed and this cannot be denied, and the alarm modes, alarm times, and release conditions for the alarm sounds belonging to this second alarm group are all set to be the same.

For example, for the alarm sound 5 (frame opening), the alarm mode is a loop process that repeatedly outputs an alarm sound such as "The frame is open, ping pong ping pong," a display in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 (for example, "The frame is open"), and the lighting of various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. The loop process that repeatedly outputs the alarm sound ends 30 seconds (equivalent to three repeated alarm sounds) from the time of detection by the main frame opening switch 619, while the display in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the lighting of various lamps continue to be executed until the release condition of "frame closing detection (detection that the main frame 4 has been closed against the outer frame 2 by the main frame opening switch 619)" is met.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group are displayed in different display modes within the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, but the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group are illuminated in the same manner (not necessarily all of the various lamps are illuminated) by the various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. However, the illumination mode of the lamps (light-emitting devices) when they belong to the second notification group is different from the illumination mode of the lamps (light-emitting devices) when they belong to the first notification group. In addition, for the notification sounds that are the subject of the loop processing, a combination of a message sound (unique sound) that serves to inform the individual identification of the content of the notification and an alarm sound that is used in both notification sounds 4 and 5, such as "ping pong ping pong," that serves to inform the user that the notification belongs to the second notification group (a state in which there is a medium possibility of fraudulent activity), is used by sequentially outputting the message sound.

That is, when reporting something belonging to the second notification group (a state where there is a moderate possibility of cheating), it is important to be able to take measures to deal with the abnormality on the part of the hall relatively quickly while not making people who are playing properly feel disgusted. In this regard, according to the above configuration, as with the case of something belonging to the third notification group described below, a message sound is output as the notification sound to inform people of which notification type it is, so that people who are playing properly are expected to feel less disgusted. On the other hand, in order to make it less disgusting for people who are playing properly, an alarm sound such as "ping pong ping pong" is output following the message sound, although it is a different alarm sound from the case of the first notification group, or various lamps are output in a different lighting mode from the case of the first notification group, but are not output in the case of the third notification group, in order to make it less disgusting for people who are playing properly, and it is expected that the hall's measures to deal with the abnormality will be relatively quickly taken.

On the other hand, the notification sound 6 (left-hand hit guide) notifies the player that the gate sensor 4003 has detected that the game ball has passed through the gate 2003 provided in the area of the game area 5a to the right of the center device 2500 even though the game is not in a time-saving state (the game is being played in a manner that is disadvantageous to the player and should be corrected to an appropriate manner (left-hand hit)). The notification mode is a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Please return to left-hand hit" and a display in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 (for example, "Please return to left-hand hit"). The notification time is set to end 20 seconds (equivalent to two repetitions of the notification sound) from the time the gate sensor 4003 detects the game in a time-saving state.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the alarm sound 6 (left hit guide), the alarm sound 7 (ball removal guide) that notifies when the full tray detection sensor 279 detects that the lower tray 322 is full of game balls (a state in which the game balls in the lower tray 322 should be removed) is regarded as belonging to a third alarm group for when the possibility of fraud is low but game guidance should be given to ensure the game progresses properly, and the alarm sounds belonging to the third alarm group are all set to have the same alarm mode, alarm time, and release conditions.

For example, in the case of the alarm sound 7 (ball removal guide), the alarm mode is a loop process that repeatedly outputs an alarm sound such as "Please remove the balls from the lower tray" and a display in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 (for example, "Please remove the balls from the lower tray"), and the alarm time is set to end 20 seconds (equivalent to two repeated alarm sounds) after detection by the full tank detection sensor 279, both of which are repeated to output an alarm sound such as "Please remove the balls from the lower tray" and the display in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600.

However, for notification sound 6 (left hand hit guide) and notification sound 7 (ball removal guide), if the gate sensor 4003 and full tank detection sensor 279 are still in a detection state when the process is terminated 20 seconds after their detection, the notification process (notification sound 6 (left hand hit guide) and notification sound 7 (ball removal guide)) will be executed again from the beginning.

In the third notification group according to this embodiment, only the message sound is output as the notification sound 6, 7, but more precisely, after the output of the message sound of, for example, 5 seconds of silent data is assigned to channel X and the corresponding sound is output (silent output), and a loop process is performed in which the message sound and the silent data are set to produce a 10-second notification sound in a repeated loop. Since the notification sounds 6, 7 are both configured to output silent data for the same amount of time, they function as unique notification modes different from the first and second notification groups, and the hall can properly recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group simply by checking the silent data portion rather than the message sound portion, which is difficult to hear in a noisy hall. It is preferable to prepare the silent data in advance as a single sound data (10 seconds of sound data) including the message sound, and perform the loop process while keeping this assigned to channel X.

Incidentally, there may be silent parts within the alarm sounds used in the first and second alarm groups (such as between the warning sound and the message sound), but these are only for a very short period of time to create a "gap," and are clearly fundamentally different from the relatively long silent parts (third alarm group) mentioned above that have a group identification function.

With this configuration, warning sounds such as "beep beep" or "ping pong ping pong" are not output, and only the message sound is output repeatedly with a predetermined silent period in between, making it possible to notify the player of game information without making them feel uncomfortable.

In the examples shown in Figs. 128 and 129, the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group are set to the same priority, but the priority may be different between notification sounds belonging to the same notification group. In addition, the playback type setting is set to loop playback in which the target sound is repeatedly played back, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and one-shot playback in which the target sound is played back once may be used. In addition, the "buzzing" sound commonly used in the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group and the "ping pong ping pong" sound commonly used in the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group may be prepared separately for each notification sound as a single sound data linked to the message sound, or may be prepared as sound data separate from the message sound, and sound data combining the message sound and the alarm sound may be created when outputting and then assigned to a channel.

Figure 130 (a) shows an example of processing when an alarm sound belonging to the first alarm group is being played and an output condition (anomaly detection) for another alarm sound belonging to the first alarm group is satisfied.

As shown in FIG. 130(a), if magnetic detection is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 during the processing of step S112 (FIG. 94) at timing tα1 when no alarm sound is being output, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the alarm flag to indicate that magnetic detection has occurred. Next, information indicating that magnetic detection has occurred is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the processing of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that magnetic detection has occurred is output based on the updated state of the alarm flag and is managed within the hall computer, and in the processing of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 and the information (magnetic detection) is used for the alarm processing within the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

In response to this, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (Fig. 95) at the above-mentioned timing tα1 (or immediately thereafter) when no alarm sound is being output, and as a result determines that the command contains magnetic detection information, in the warning process of step S1024 (Fig. 95), alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) shown in Fig. 129 is assigned (set) to channel X, and alarm sound playback in that alarm mode (here, a loop of "buzz buzz magnetism detected") is started, and a timer (60 seconds) is set to count the alarm time of alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality).

When assigning alarm sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) to channel X, schedule data for generating sounds in response to magnetic detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in schedule data storage area 1511cae of peripheral control RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning alarm sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) to channel X, an alarm sound such as "buzz buzz magnetism detected" is played in a predetermined processing mode (loop).

At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a also extracts schedule data for generating a screen in response to magnetic detection and schedule data for generating a light emission mode in response to magnetic detection from various control data copy areas in the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and sets them in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, thereby also executing the above-mentioned LCD display and lamp lighting. The execution of these LCD display and lamp lighting continues until the power is turned back on, which is the condition for clearing the magnetic anomaly.

Through this processing, an alarm sound such as "beep beep magnetism has been detected" is repeatedly played for 60 seconds from timing tα1, and a display (e.g., "magnetism has been detected") is displayed within the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, and various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and game board 5 are lit up (lighting mode of the first alarm group).

However, in the example shown in FIG. 130(a), it is assumed that vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 during the processing of step S112 (FIG. 94) at time tα2 when 60 seconds have not yet elapsed since time tα1 and the notification sound such as "beep beep magnetism detected" is being played in a loop. In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag to indicate that vibration has been detected, as in the case of time tα1 when magnetic detection occurred. Next, information indicating that vibration has been detected is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the processing of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that vibration has been detected is output externally based on the state of the updated notification flag and is managed within the hall computer, and in the processing of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 and the information (vibration detection) is used for notification processing within the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

In response to this, even if the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the above-mentioned timing tα2 (or immediately thereafter) when the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in an output state (playback state) and determines that vibration detection information is included, the alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) shown in FIG. 129 is not assigned to channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). In other words, since the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), which has the same priority, is already assigned to channel X, the alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not newly assigned to channel X, so that the playback of the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) that is already assigned is prioritized and continued.

In addition, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the schedule data for generating sounds in response to vibration detection at timing tα2 is not set. Therefore, the schedule data for generating sounds in response to alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not advanced when it is not assigned to channel X.

However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at timing tα2 (or immediately thereafter), a timer (60 seconds) for timing the notification time of alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) that has not yet been set is set, and if the timer (60 seconds) has not timed out when the output state (playback state) of alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) ends, schedule data for sound generation according to vibration detection is set, and alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is assigned to channel X for the remaining time, and alarm sound playback is performed in that notification mode (here, a loop of "buzzing vibration detected").

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set schedule data for generating sounds in response to vibration detection at timing tα2 (or immediately thereafter), but extracts schedule data for generating screens in response to vibration detection and schedule data for generating light emission modes in response to vibration detection from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c and sets them in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, thereby executing the above-mentioned display on the LCD and lighting of the lamp.

In addition, in the LCD display, a display corresponding to the vibration abnormality appears separately in a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is being displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. When the lamp is turned on, although the schedule data for generating the light emission mode corresponding to the vibration detection is set, the schedule data for generating the light emission mode corresponding to the magnetic detection is already set and has the same priority, so the lighting mode of the already set schedule data for generating the light emission mode corresponding to the magnetic detection is reflected in each of the various lamp lights, and the lighting mode of the schedule data for generating the light emission mode corresponding to the vibration detection is not reflected in each of the various lamp lights. As with the schedule data for sound generation, the schedule data for generating the light emission mode corresponding to the vibration detection may not be set at timing tα2 (or immediately thereafter).

However, as mentioned above, in this embodiment, the schedule data for generating the light emission mode in response to magnetic detection and the schedule data for generating the light emission mode in response to vibration detection have the same data content, so no change occurs in the lamp illumination regardless of which of them is reflected.

Then, at timing tα3, 60 seconds after timing tα1, the timer (60 seconds) for alarm sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) times out, and the loop process of repeatedly playing an alarm sound such as "beep beep, magnetism has been detected" ends. Note that since the time required to play an alarm sound such as "beep beep, magnetism has been detected" once is set to 10 seconds, at timing tα3 when the timer (60 seconds) for alarm sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) times out, the loop process ends at a convenient timing when the alarm sound such as "beep beep, magnetism has been detected" has been played six times.

In addition, at this time, since the timer (60 seconds) for alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) has not yet timed out, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets schedule data for sound generation in response to vibration detection, and assigns alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to channel X for the remaining time (the time (α) from timing tα2 to timing tα3 subtracted from 60 seconds), thereby playing the alarm sound in that alarm mode (here, a loop of "buzzing vibration detected").

In other words, while the timer for alarm sound 2 (abnormal vibration) is set at timing tα2, the schedule data for generating sounds in response to vibration detection is not set, but is set at timing tα3. As a result, at timing tα3, the alarm sound "buzz buzz vibration detected" can be played from the beginning, and when the timer for alarm sound 2 (abnormal vibration) times out, the loop processing of the alarm sound "buzz buzz vibration detected" can be terminated at an intermediate timing (such as the timing of "buzz buzz vibration") and playback can be stopped.

According to this configuration, when an output condition (abnormality detection) of another alarm sound belonging to the first alarm group is satisfied while one alarm sound belonging to the first alarm group is being played (Fig. 130(a)), a smooth alarm sound switching can be realized as if the seventh alarm sound (here, "buzz buzz") was played when the sixth alarm sound (here, "buzz buzz") and the sixth message sound (here, "magnetic field detected") had finished being played. This makes it possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which "buzz buzz magnetic field detected" and "buzz buzz vibration detected" are connected at an odd point, making it impossible to recognize a false alarm in a tense situation (for example, if alarm sound 1 ends with "buzz buzz magnetic field" and alarm sound 2 starts with "motion detected", the content of the alarm will be incomprehensible, such as "buzz buzz magnetic field detected", which may cause confusion at the scene).

Furthermore, with the above configuration, even if at timing tα3 the remaining time on the timer corresponding to vibration detection is getting short and the alarm sound 2 times out and ends at the "buzzing" alarm sound and the message sound is not played, it is possible to recognize that some kind of abnormality has been detected at the same time because the loop process ends at an awkward timing and the sound is no longer played (because if the alarm is only for magnetic abnormalities, the alarm sound ends at a convenient point). As a result, when the alarm sound stops at an awkward timing, the user is prompted to check the LCD display, and the LCD display shows "Magnetic field detected" and "Vibration detected", respectively, allowing the user to properly recognize that magnetic field detection and vibration detection have occurred.

Figure 130 (b) shows an example of processing when an alarm sound belonging to the second alarm group is being played and an output condition (state detection) for another alarm sound belonging to the second alarm group is satisfied.

The process performed when an output condition (state detection) for another alarm sound belonging to the second alarm group is satisfied while an alarm sound belonging to the second alarm group is being played is generally similar to the process described above with reference to FIG. 130(a) (the process performed when an output condition (state detection) for another alarm sound belonging to the first alarm group is satisfied while an alarm sound belonging to the first alarm group is being played).

For example, as shown in FIG. 130(b), if a frame opening is detected by the main frame opening switch 619 during the processing of steps S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at timing tβ1 when no alarm sound is being output, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the alarm flag to indicate that a frame opening has been detected. Next, information indicating that a frame opening has been detected is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the processing of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that a frame opening has been detected is output externally based on the state of the updated alarm flag and is managed within the hall computer, and in the processing of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 and the information (frame opening detection) is used for the alarm processing within the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

In response to this, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (Fig. 95) at the above-mentioned timing tβ1 (or immediately thereafter) when no alarm sound is being output, and as a result determines that the command contains information on frame opening detection, in the warning process of step S1024 (Fig. 95), alarm sound 5 (frame opening) shown in Fig. 129 is assigned (set) to channel X, and playback of the alarm sound in that alarm mode (here, a loop of "frame opening, ping pong ping pong") is started, and a timer (30 seconds) is set to measure the alarm time of alarm sound 5 (frame opening).

When the notification sound 5 (frame opening) is assigned to channel X, the schedule data for generating the sound corresponding to the frame opening detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 5 (frame opening) to channel X, the notification sound such as "frame opening, ping pong ping pong" is played in a predetermined processing mode (loop).

At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a also extracts schedule data for generating a screen in response to frame opening detection and schedule data for generating a light emission mode in response to frame opening detection from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c and sets them in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, thereby also executing the above-mentioned LCD display and lamp lighting. The execution of these LCD display and lamp lighting continues until frame closing detection, which is the release condition for frame opening detection, is performed.

Through this processing, from timing tβ1, an alarm sound such as "The frame is open, ping pong ping pong" is repeatedly played for 30 seconds, and a display (for example, "The frame is open") is displayed within the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, and various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and game board 5 are turned on (lighting mode of the second alarm group).

However, in the example shown in FIG. 130(b), it is assumed that at timing tβ2, when 30 seconds have not yet elapsed since timing tβ1 and the notification sound such as "The frame is open, ping pong ping pong" is being played in a loop, door opening is detected by the door frame opening switch 618 during the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag to indicate that door opening has been detected, as in the case of timing tβ1 when frame opening was detected. Next, information indicating that door opening has been detected is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the processing of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that door opening has been detected is output externally based on the state of the updated notification flag and is managed within the hall computer, and in the processing of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 and the information (door opening detection) is provided for the notification processing within the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

In response to this, even if the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (Fig. 95) at the above-mentioned timing tβ2 (or immediately thereafter) when the alarm sound 5 (frame opening) is in an output state (playback state) and determines that the command contains information on door opening detection, the alarm sound 4 (door opening) shown in Fig. 129 is not assigned to channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (Fig. 95). In other words, since the alarm sound 5 (frame opening), which has the same priority, is already assigned to channel X, the alarm sound 4 (door opening) is not newly assigned to channel X, so that the playback of the alarm sound 5 (frame opening) that is already assigned is prioritized and continued.

In addition, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the schedule data for generating a sound in response to the detection of door opening at timing tβ2 is not set. Therefore, the schedule data for generating a sound in response to alarm sound 4 (door opening) is not processed in an advanced manner when it is not assigned to channel X.

However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at timing tβ2 (or immediately thereafter), a timer (30 seconds) for timing the notification time of alarm sound 4 (door open) that has not yet been set is set, and if the timer (30 seconds) has not timed out when the output state (playback state) of alarm sound 5 (frame open) ends, schedule data for sound generation in response to door open detection is set, and alarm sound 4 (door open) is assigned to channel X for the remaining time, and alarm sound playback is performed in that notification mode (here, a loop of "door open, ping pong ping pong").

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set schedule data for generating a sound in response to door opening detection at timing tβ2 (or immediately thereafter), but extracts schedule data for generating a screen in response to door opening detection and schedule data for generating a light emission mode in response to door opening detection from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c and sets them in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, thereby executing the above-mentioned display on the LCD and lighting of the lamp.

In addition, in the LCD display, the display corresponding to the door opening appears separately in a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the frame opening is being performed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Although the schedule data for generating the light emission mode corresponding to the door opening detection is set when the lamp is turned on, since the schedule data for generating the light emission mode corresponding to the frame opening detection has already been set and has the same priority, the lighting mode of the already set schedule data for generating the light emission mode corresponding to the frame opening detection is reflected in each of the various lamp lighting, and the lighting mode of the schedule data for generating the light emission mode corresponding to the door opening detection is not reflected in each of the various lamp lighting. As with the schedule data for sound generation, the schedule data for generating the light emission mode corresponding to the door opening detection may not be set at timing tβ2 (or immediately thereafter).

However, as mentioned above, in this embodiment, the schedule data for generating the light emission mode in response to frame opening detection and the schedule data for generating the light emission mode in response to door opening detection have the same data content, so no matter which of them is reflected, there will be no change in the lamp illumination.

Then, at timing tβ3, 30 seconds after timing tβ1, the timer (30 seconds) for notification sound 5 (opening frame) times out, and the loop process of repeatedly playing notification sound such as "The frame is open, ping pong ping pong" ends. Note that since the time required to play notification sound such as "The frame is open, ping pong ping pong" once is set to 10 seconds, at timing tβ3 when the timer (30 seconds) for notification sound 5 (opening frame) times out, the loop process ends at a convenient timing when notification sound such as "The frame is open, ping pong ping pong" has been played three times.

At this time, since the timer (30 seconds) for alarm sound 4 (door open) has not yet timed out, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets schedule data for sound generation in response to door open detection, and assigns alarm sound 4 (door open) to channel X for the remaining time (the time (β) from timing tβ2 to timing tβ3 subtracted from 30 seconds), thereby playing the alarm sound in that alarm mode (here, a loop of "Door open, ping pong ping pong").

In other words, while the timer for alarm sound 4 (door open) is set at timing tβ2, the schedule data for generating sounds in response to door open detection is not set, but is set at timing tβ3. As a result, at timing tβ3, the alarm sound "The door is open, ping pong ping pong" can be played from the beginning, and when the timer for alarm sound 4 (door open) times out, the loop processing of the alarm sound "The door is open, ping pong ping pong" can be ended at an intermediate timing (for example, at the timing of "The door is open, beep") and playback can be stopped.

With this configuration, even when an output condition (state detection) for another alarm sound belonging to the second alarm group is satisfied while one alarm sound belonging to the second alarm group is being played (Fig. 130(b)), a smooth alarm sound switching can be achieved, as if a fourth message sound (here, "The door is open") were played when the third message sound (here, "The frame is open") and the third warning sound (here, "Ping pong ping pong") had finished being played. This makes it possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of a situation in which "The frame is open ping pong ping pong" and "The door is open ping pong ping pong" are connected in an odd place, making it impossible to recognize the alarm content in a tense situation.

In addition, with the above configuration, at timing tβ3, the remaining time on the timer corresponding to the door opening detection is getting short, so even if the alarm sound 4 is cut off halfway through, the message sound is played first, making it possible to reliably know that the door is open.

Figure 130 (c) shows an example of the processing that is performed when an alarm sound belonging to the third alarm group is being played and an output condition (state detection) for another alarm sound belonging to the third alarm group is satisfied.

As shown in FIG. 130(c), at timing tγ1 when no notification sound is being output, if the gate sensor 4003 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003 provided in the area to the right of the center device 2500 in the game area 5a despite the non-time-saving state in the processing of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94) (detection of a right hit in a non-time-saving state), the main control MPU 1310a sets information that a right hit has been detected in a non-time-saving state as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the processing of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (detection of a right hit in a time-saving state) is used for the notification processing in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Note that with regard to the processing of the third notification group, the notification flag is not updated in the main control MPU 1310a, and the information is not output to the hall computer.

In response to this, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (Figure 95) at the above-mentioned timing tγ1 (or immediately thereafter) when no alarm sound is being output, and as a result determines that the command contains information on right-hand hit detection in a non-time-saving state, in the warning process of step S1024 (Figure 95), alarm sound 6 (left-hand hit guidance) shown in Figure 129 is assigned (set) to channel X, and playback of the alarm sound in that alarm mode (here, a loop of "Please return to left-hand hit") is started, and a timer (20 seconds) is set to measure the alarm time of alarm sound 6 (left-hand hit guidance).

Regarding the detection of right-hand hits in a non-time-saving state, in this embodiment, information to that effect is output as a command from the main control MPU 1310a, but instead, the main control MPU 1310a may output only information to the effect that the gate sensor 4003 has detected that the game ball has passed through the gate section 2003 as a command, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a may determine whether the detection by the gate sensor 4003 was made in a non-time-saving state, and perform processing related to the alarm sound 6 (left-hand hit guidance) based on the detection by the gate sensor 4003 in a non-time-saving state.

When the notification sound 6 (left hit guidance) is assigned to channel X, the schedule data for generating sounds in response to detection of right hits in a non-time-saving state is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 6 (left hit guidance) to channel X, the notification sound such as "Please return to left hit" is played in a predetermined processing mode (loop).

At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a also executes the above-mentioned display on the liquid crystal display by extracting schedule data for generating a screen in response to detection of a right hit in a non-time-saving state from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The display on the liquid crystal display is executed continuously until the end of the notification (the timer (20 seconds) for timing the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left hit notification) times out), which is the release condition for the notification sound 6 (left hit notification). Note that, with regard to the processing of the third notification group, which has a low possibility of fraud, importance is placed on avoiding interruption to the progress of the performance, and schedule data for generating a light emission mode in response to detection of a right hit in a non-time-saving state is not set.

Through this processing, an alarm sound such as "Please return to left hand" is repeatedly executed for 20 seconds from timing tγ1, and a display (e.g., "Please return to left hand") is executed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 until the alarm sound is terminated.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 130(c), it is assumed that at timing tγ2, when 20 seconds have not yet elapsed since timing tγ1 and the notification sound such as "Please return to left hit" is being played in a loop, the full tray detection sensor 279 detects that the lower tray is full during the processing of steps S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a sets information indicating that the lower tray has been detected as full as a command to the peripheral control board 1510, just as in the case of timing tγ1, when a right hit was detected in a non-time-saving state. As a result, in the processing of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (lower tray full detection) is used for the notification-related processing within the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

In response to this, even if the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (Fig. 95) at the above-mentioned timing tγ2 (or immediately thereafter) when the alert sound 6 (left-hand hit guide) is in the output state (playback state) and determines that the command contains information on detection of a full bottom tray, the alert sound 7 (ball removal guide) shown in Fig. 129 is not assigned to channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (Fig. 95). In other words, since the alert sound 6 (left-hand hit guide), which has the same priority, is already assigned to channel X, the alert sound 7 (ball removal guide) is not newly assigned to channel X, so that the playback of the alert sound 6 (left-hand hit guide) that is already assigned is prioritized and continues.

In addition, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the schedule data for generating a sound in response to detection of a full bottom tray is not set at timing tγ2. Therefore, the schedule data for generating a sound in response to the notification sound 7 (ball removal notification) is not advanced when it is not assigned to channel X.

However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at timing tγ2 (or immediately thereafter), a timer (20 seconds) for timing the notification time of the alarm sound 7 (ball removal notification) that has not yet been set is set, and if the timer (20 seconds) has not timed out when the output state (playback state) of the alarm sound 6 (left-handed hit notification) ends, schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection of a full lower tray is set, and the alarm sound 7 (ball removal notification) is assigned to channel X for the remaining time, and the alarm sound is played in that notification mode (here, the loop of "Please remove the balls from the lower tray").

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set schedule data for generating a sound in response to detection of a full bottom tray at timing tγ2 (or immediately thereafter), but extracts schedule data for generating a screen in response to detection of a full bottom tray from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and sets it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, thereby executing the above-mentioned display within the liquid crystal.

In addition, in the LCD display, the display corresponding to the ball removal guidance appears separately in a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the left hit guidance is displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600.

Then, at timing tγ3, 20 seconds after timing tγ1, the timer (20 seconds) for the notification sound 6 (guidance to left-handed hit) times out, and the loop process of repeatedly playing the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed hit" ends. Note that since the time required to play one notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed hit" is set to 10 seconds, at timing tγ3, when the timer (30 seconds) for the notification sound 6 (guidance to left-handed hit) times out, the loop process ends at a convenient timing when the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed hit" has been played twice.

At this time, since the timer (20 seconds) for the alarm sound 7 (ball removal guidance) has not yet timed out, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets schedule data for sound generation in response to the detection of the lower tray being full, and assigns the alarm sound 7 (ball removal guidance) to channel X for the remaining time (the time (γ) from timing tγ2 to timing tγ3 subtracted from 20 seconds), thereby playing the alarm sound in that notification mode (here, the loop of "Please remove the balls from the lower tray").

In other words, while the timer for the notification sound 7 (ball removal guide) is set at timing tγ2, the schedule data for generating the sound in response to the detection of the lower tray being full is not set, but is set at timing tγ3. Therefore, at timing tγ3, the notification sound "Please remove the balls from the lower tray" can be played from the beginning, and when the timer for the notification sound 7 (ball removal guide) times out, the loop processing of the notification sound "Please remove the balls from the lower tray" can be ended at an intermediate timing (for example, at the timing of "Please remove the balls from the lower tray") and playback can be stopped.

With this configuration, even when an output condition (state detection) for another alarm sound belonging to the third alarm group is satisfied while one alarm sound belonging to the third alarm group is being played (Figure 130 (c)), a smooth alarm sound switching can be achieved, as if the third message sound (here, "Please remove the ball from the bottom tray") were being played when the second message sound (here, "Please return to left hitting") had finished being played. This makes it possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of a situation in which "Please return to left hitting" and "Please remove the ball from the bottom tray" are connected at an odd point, making it impossible to recognize the content of the alarm.

As described above, in the third alarm group according to this embodiment, after the message sound has finished being output, five seconds of silent data are assigned to channel X and a corresponding sound is output (silent output). Therefore, when an alarm sound belonging to the third alarm group is being played and the output condition (state detection) of another alarm sound belonging to the third alarm group is satisfied, the message sound of the other alarm sound is played with five seconds of silent data in between, so that it is possible to preferably avoid a situation in which two different message sounds are connected together due to the absence of an alarm sound, making it impossible to recognize the content of the alarm.

Figure 131 (a) shows an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) for an alarm sound belonging to the second alarm group is satisfied while an alarm sound belonging to the first alarm group is being played.

As shown in FIG. 131(a), if there is a magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at timing t-1 when no alarm sound is being output, the process corresponding to the magnetic detection (magnetic anomaly process) is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 130(a). Therefore, at timing t-1, a loop process is started to repeatedly play an alarm sound such as "beep, magnetic field has been detected," and at timing t-3 when the timer (60 seconds) for alarm sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) expires, the loop process ends at a good timing when the alarm sound "beep, magnetic field has been detected" has been played six times. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is the condition for canceling the magnetic anomaly.

In the example shown in FIG. 131(a), it is assumed that at timing t-2, when 60 seconds have not yet elapsed since timing t-1 and an alarm sound such as "beep beep magnetism detected" is being played in a loop, door opening is detected by the door frame opening switch 618 during the processing of steps S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, since the processing of alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) in response to magnetic detection has a higher priority than the processing of alarm sound 4 (door open) in response to door open detection (see FIG. 128), the processing of alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) will continue even if door open detection occurs.

Normally, for processes with lower priority, similar to the case where processes with the same priority overlap as described with reference to Figures 130(a) to (c), only the timer for the alarm sound with lower priority is set, and the sound generation schedule data itself is not set.

However, a situation where the door is opened immediately after the occurrence of a magnetic anomaly is different from the simple occurrence of door opening, and there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity is taking place, and it can be said that this is no longer a situation that can be said to belong to the "second notification group with a medium possibility of fraud". Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 131(a), at timing t-2, neither the timer nor the schedule data for sound generation for notification sound 4 (door open) in response to door open detection is set, and only the flag in response to door open detection is set. Then, at timing t-3, based on the fact that the flag is set, the timer and the schedule data for sound generation for notification sound 4 (door open) in response to door open detection are set, and notification sound 4 (door open) is assigned to channel X to start playback of the notification sound in that notification mode (here, a loop of "door open ping pong ping pong"). The execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting in response to door open detection starts from timing t-2.

With this configuration, even if the door opening is detected by the door frame opening switch 618 while the alarm sound "beep beep magnetism detected" is being played in a loop, alarm sound 4 (door open) in response to the door opening detection is played for the full 30 seconds from timing t-3 when the loop playback of the alarm sound "beep beep magnetism detected" ends, and the loop processing ends at a convenient timing when the alarm sound "door is open, ping pong ping pong" has been played three times. In this way, by playing alarm sound 4 (door open) in response to the door opening detection in a more polite manner that differs from the normal processing based on priority, it is expected that the alarm content belonging to the second alarm group (here, the loop "door is open, ping pong ping pong") will encourage the user to recognize that the situation is one in which there is a high possibility of fraud.

In addition, by starting the notification with a message sound (the door is open) after the notification sound such as "beep beep magnetism detected," the user can recognize at an early stage that the notification belonging to the first notification group, which is the most tense situation, has ended. On the other hand, by playing a "ping pong ping pong" alarm sound after the message sound, the user can easily recognize that it is not an notification belonging to the third notification group.

Figure 131 (b) shows an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) for an alarm sound belonging to the third alarm group is satisfied while an alarm sound belonging to the second alarm group is being played.

As shown in FIG. 131(b), if the door frame opening switch 618 detects the door opening during the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at timing tδ1 when no alarm sound is being output, the processing corresponding to the door opening detection (door opening processing) is the same as the processing corresponding to the frame opening detection (frame opening processing) described with reference to FIG. 130(b). Therefore, at timing tδ1, a loop processing is started to repeatedly execute an alarm sound such as "The door is open, ping pong ping pong," and at timing tδ3 when the timer (30 seconds) for alarm sound 4 (door opening) times out, the loop processing ends at a good timing when the alarm sound "The door is open, ping pong ping pong" has been played three times. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the door closing, which is the release condition for the door opening, is detected.

In the example shown in FIG. 131(b), it is assumed that at timing tδ2 when 30 seconds have not passed since timing tδ1 and an alarm sound such as "The door is open, ping pong ping pong" is being played in a loop, a right hit is detected in a non-time-saving state by the gate sensor 4003 during the processing of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of alarm sound 4 (door open) in response to door open detection has a higher priority than the processing of alarm sound 6 (left hit guidance) in response to right hit detection in a non-time-saving state (see FIG. 128), so that alarm sound 4 (door open) will continue to be processed even if a right hit is detected in a non-time-saving state.

In other words, as described above, for processes with lower priority, just as in the case where processes with the same priority overlap as explained with reference to Figures 130(a) to (c), only the timer for the notification sound with lower priority is set, and the sound generation schedule data itself is not set.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 131(b), at timing tδ2, the timer (20 seconds) for the notification sound 6 (left hit guidance) is set, but the schedule data for sound generation in response to detection of a right hit in a non-time-saving state is not set. Then, at timing tδ3, when the timer (20 seconds) for the notification sound 6 (left hit guidance) has not timed out, the schedule data for sound generation in response to detection of a right hit in a non-time-saving state is set, and the notification sound 6 (left hit guidance) is assigned to channel X for the remaining time, and the notification sound is played in that notification mode (here, the loop of "Please return to left hit").

With this configuration, after three alert sounds such as "The door is open, ping pong ping pong" have been played, an alert sound that does not include a warning sound such as "Please return to left hand hit" is played at a good timing, so it is possible to easily recognize that the possibility of fraud has decreased while continuing the alert state. Also, in the third alert group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound has been output, five seconds of silent data is assigned to channel X and a corresponding sound is output (silent output). Therefore, even with this silent data, it is possible to easily recognize that the alert sound of the type that had been played up until then has ended and that an alert sound belonging to the third alert group is being played.

Figure 131 (c) shows an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) for an alarm sound belonging to the first alarm group is satisfied while an alarm sound belonging to the second alarm group is being played.

As shown in FIG. 131(c), if the door frame opening switch 618 detects the door opening during the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at timing tε1 when no alarm sound is being output, the processing corresponding to the door opening detection (door opening processing) is the same as the processing corresponding to the frame opening detection (frame opening processing) described with reference to FIG. 130(b). Therefore, at timing tε1, a loop processing is started to repeatedly execute an alarm sound such as "The door is open, ping pong ping pong," and at timing tε3 when the timer (30 seconds) for alarm sound 4 (door opening) times out, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the alarm sound "The door is open, ping pong ping pong" has been played three times. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the door closing, which is the release condition for the door opening, is detected.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 131(c), it is assumed that at timing tε2 when 30 seconds have not passed since timing tε1 and an alarm sound such as "The door is open, ping pong ping pong" is being played in a loop, a magnetic detection occurs by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 during the processing of step S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of alarm sound 4 (door open) in response to door open detection is given a lower priority than the processing of alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) in response to magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (see FIG. 128), so that the processing of alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) in response to magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is given priority, and the output contents of alarm sound 4 (door open) are not reflected as the operation of each actuator, whether it is sound or lamp lighting. In addition, since the display in the liquid crystal is displayed at a different position in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 for each alarm, even if a high priority alarm occurs during the execution of an alarm with a low priority, the display in the liquid crystal on the low priority side is maintained.

Here, as a method for processing the alarm sound 4 (door open), whether it is a sound or a lamp light, so that the output content is not reflected in the operation of each actuator, a process may be performed at timing tε2 to cancel the schedule data for generating the sound and the schedule data for generating the light emission mode in response to the door open detection that had been set up until that point.

In this embodiment, at timing tε2, not only the schedule data for generating a screen in response to door opening detection, but also the schedule data for generating a sound and the schedule data for generating a light-emitting mode in response to door opening detection are maintained in a set state, and the schedule data for generating a sound, a screen, and a light-emitting mode in response to magnetic detection, which have higher priority than the schedule data, are set in a set state. The allocation of channel X and various lamp operations is switched from the schedule data for generating a sound and the schedule data for generating a light-emitting mode in response to door opening detection to the schedule data for generating a sound and the schedule data for generating a light-emitting mode in response to magnetic detection, so that the output contents of the processing of the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) in response to magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 are reflected as the operation of each actuator in any of the following: sound, LCD display, and lamp lighting.

With this configuration, as shown in FIG. 131(c), at timing tε2, it is possible to change the notification content based on the priority between two different processes (door opening process, magnetic anomaly process) without performing any operation on the process with the lower priority that is in the execution state (door opening process).

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 131(c), at timing tδ2, a loop process is started to repeatedly play an alarm sound such as "beep beep, magnetism has been detected," and the loop process ends at a convenient timing when the alarm sound "beep beep, magnetism has been detected" has been played six times in time with the timer (60 seconds) for alarm sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) expiring. Also, the display on the LCD and the lamp lighting will continue to be executed until the power is turned back on, which is the condition for clearing the magnetic anomaly.

With this configuration, as soon as a magnetic detection occurs that is likely to indicate fraudulent activity, the processing of alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is performed, and the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator, whether it is sound, display on the LCD, or lamp lighting. Furthermore, since an alarm sound such as "buzzing" is played first as the alarm sound, it is expected that an alarm belonging to the first alarm group has been issued, and that this will quickly convey to the hall that the situation has switched to one of tension.

Figure 131 (d) shows an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) for an alarm sound belonging to the second alarm group is satisfied while an alarm sound belonging to the third alarm group is being played.

As shown in FIG. 131(d), at timing tζ1 when no notification sound is output, if the gate sensor 4003 detects a right hit in a non-time-saving state during the processing of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94), the processing corresponding to the detection of a right hit in the non-time-saving state (left hit guidance processing) is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 130(c). Therefore, at timing tζ1, a loop processing is started to repeatedly execute a notification sound such as "Please return to left hit", and at timing tζ3 when the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left hit guidance) is up, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound such as "Please return to left hit" has been played twice. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are executed continuously until the timer of the notification sound, which is the condition for canceling the left hit guidance, is up.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 131(d), it is assumed that at timing tζ2 when 20 seconds have not passed since timing tζ1 and an alarm sound such as "Please return to left hit" is being played in a loop, a case where door opening is detected by the door frame opening switch 618 during the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) is assumed. In this regard, since the processing of alarm sound 6 (left hit guidance) in response to right hit detection in the non-time-saving state has a lower priority than the processing of alarm sound 4 (door open) in response to door open detection (see FIG. 128), the processing of alarm sound 4 (door open) in response to door open detection is prioritized, and the output content of alarm sound 6 (left hit guidance) is not reflected as the operation of the actuator. Note that, since the display in the liquid crystal is displayed at a different position within the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 for each alarm, even if a high priority alarm occurs during the execution of an alarm with a low priority, the display in the liquid crystal with a low priority is maintained.

Here, as a method for processing the notification sound 6 (left-hand hit guidance) so that its output content is not reflected in the operation of the actuator, a process may be performed at timing tζ2 to cancel the schedule data for sound generation in response to the detection of a right-hand hit in a non-time-saving state that had been set up until that point.

In this embodiment, at timing tζ2, not only the schedule data for generating a screen in response to detection of a right hit in a non-time-saving state, but also the schedule data for generating a sound in response to detection of a right hit in a non-time-saving state are maintained in a set state, and the schedule data for generating a screen in response to detection of door opening and the schedule data for generating a light emission mode, as well as the schedule data for generating a sound in response to detection of door opening, which has a higher priority, are each set. Then, the allocation to channel X is switched from the content based on the schedule data for generating a sound in response to detection of a right hit in a non-time-saving state to the content based on the schedule data for generating a sound in response to detection of door opening, so that the output content of the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to detection of door opening is reflected as the operation of each actuator, whether it is sound, LCD display, or lamp lighting.

With this configuration, as shown in FIG. 131(d), at timing tζ2, it is possible to change the notification content based on the priority between two different processes (left-hit guidance process, door opening process) without performing any operation on the process with the lower priority that is in the execution state (left-hit guidance process).

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 131(d), at timing tζ2, a loop process is started to repeatedly play an alarm sound such as "The door is open, ping pong ping pong," and the loop process ends at a convenient timing when the alarm sound "The door is open, ping pong ping pong" has been played three times in time with the timer (30 seconds) for alarm sound 4 (door open) expiring. Also, the display in the LCD and the lamp lighting will continue to be executed until door closing is detected, which is the condition for releasing the door open state.

With this configuration, as soon as a door opening detection occurs, which indicates a moderate possibility of fraudulent activity, the output content of the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open) is reflected as the operation of each actuator, whether it is a sound, a display on the LCD, or a lighted lamp. Furthermore, the notification sound is first played as a message sound (the door is open), so as not to offend players who are playing properly, while the subsequent "ping pong ping pong" alarm sound is a notification belonging to the second notification group, which is expected to quickly inform the hall that the situation has switched to one in which there is a possibility of fraud.

Even in a situation where such an abnormal alarm sound is being output, it is possible to change the volume setting value and brightness setting value, but even if the volume setting value is changed, the changed volume setting value will not be reflected as the volume. However, when the brightness setting value is changed, it is desirable to have the changed brightness reflected in some of the multiple performance lamps.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a situation arises in which multiple notification sounds shown in FIG. 128 should be output, the above-mentioned processes are performed according to the priority order, so that it is possible to appropriately notify abnormalities and game information, etc., even though only a single channel (channel X) is used for various notification sounds (channel-saving control structure). However, as mentioned above, even notification sounds belonging to the second notification group, which has a medium degree of fraudulent potential, may have a higher than medium degree of fraudulent potential depending on other detection conditions, so it is difficult to say that the current state of the gaming machine is appropriately notified only by the control based on the above-mentioned priority order.

The alarm sound is output not only when an abnormality is detected that is highly likely to indicate fraudulent activity, but also when an abnormality is detected that is unlikely to indicate fraudulent activity. In other words, if an abnormality is detected that is highly likely to indicate fraudulent activity, the alarm sound must be output as long as the detection state continues. However, if an abnormality is detected that is unlikely to indicate fraudulent activity, the detection state may be maintained for the convenience of the hall (such as to recover from various errors), so even if the detection state continues, it is not necessarily required to continue outputting the alarm sound. It is important to be able to execute more flexible alarm processing according to the situation of the pachinko machine 1.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in each of the situations illustrated in Figs. 132 to 137, in addition to the control based on the above-mentioned priority order, special conditions are also taken into account to realize notifications that can more appropriately represent the state of the gaming machine. Below, the special notification process will be explained separately for each situation with reference to Figs. 132 to 137.

In the example shown in FIG. 132, at timing tα11 when no alarm sound is being output, door open detection occurs by the door frame open switch 618. Then, schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the door open detection is set and the alarm sound is assigned to channel X, and the schedule data for screen generation and light emission mode generation corresponding to the door open detection are also set. At this time, a timer (30 seconds) for timing the alarm time of alarm sound 4 (door open) is set, so that the alarm sound corresponding to the door open detection is played for 30 seconds until timing tα12 arrives.

In contrast, the display on the LCD in response to door opening detection will be maintained until timing tα16 arrives, when door opening is no longer detected by the door frame opening switch 618.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 132, at timing tα13 when the playback of the alarm sound in response to door opening detection ends and channel X becomes vacant, magnetic detection occurs by magnetic detection sensor 4024, which has a relatively high priority for alarms. Therefore, for the lamp illumination in response to door opening detection that began at timing tα11, although the schedule data for generating the illumination mode is maintained in the set state until the above-mentioned timing tα16 arrives, the allocation of the various lamp operations is switched to the lamp illumination mode in response to magnetic detection at timing tα13.

That is, at timing tα13, schedule data for generating sounds in response to magnetic detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to channel X, and the schedule data for generating screens in response to magnetic detection and the schedule data for generating light emission patterns are also set. At this time, a timer (60 seconds) for timing the notification time of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set, so that the notification sound in response to magnetic detection is played for 60 seconds until timing tα14 arrives.

In contrast, the display in the LCD and the lamp illumination in response to magnetic detection will remain on unless the power is turned off.

In the example shown in FIG. 132, magnetic detection occurs by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 when the playback of the alarm sound in response to door open detection has ended and the door open detection by the door frame open switch 618 is still continuing. This situation is assumed to be a situation in which a person with the intention of committing some kind of fraudulent operation opens the door frame 3 and puts it in an open state, waits for the playback of the alarm sound in response to door open detection to end, and then, in a state where the heat has died down, attempts to secretly place a magnet for fraudulent purposes inside the door frame 3, and the magnet momentarily enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024. Since this is an extremely malicious act, there is a concern that simply performing the alarm sound processing in response to magnetic detection is insufficient as a countermeasure. On the other hand, since the magnetic detection state by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 has already been turned off, magnetic detection cannot be used as a trigger for any countermeasures to be taken.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1, when the playback of the alarm sound in response to magnetic detection ends at timing tα14, the door open detection by the door frame open switch 618 is still ongoing, and based on this, a special process is performed in which the "schedule data for generating sound in response to door open detection" for which playback of the alarm sound has already ended for that alarm time (30 seconds) is reset and the alarm sound is reassigned to channel X. At this time, a timer (30 seconds) for timing the alarm sound 4 (door open) is also set, so that the alarm sound in response to door open detection is played for 30 seconds until timing tα15 arrives.

In this configuration, the alarm sound in response to door opening detection, which has already ended, is played in a manner that is linked to the "playback of alarm sound in response to magnetic detection", which is expected to create a strong sense of discomfort in the hall and attract everyone's attention. Also, cheaters may feel relieved that "when the magnetic alarm ends, all alarm sound playback will end, and they will finally be able to make their cheating less noticeable", but the playback of the alarm sound in response to door opening detection, which should have already ended, creates an unexpected alarm situation, which is expected to make them realize that further cheating is too risky.

As will be described later, in this embodiment, during the period when the notification process belonging to the first notification group is being performed and during the period when the notification process belonging to the second notification group is being performed, a process is performed to suppress the volume of the effect sounds during the pattern change and other game sounds assigned to other channels (a process to reduce the volume to a specific value). The specific value may be a volume of 0. During the period when the notification process belonging to the third notification group is being performed, the volume of the effect sounds during the pattern change and other game sounds assigned to other channels is not suppressed.

Here, the period during which the notification process is being performed (period during which the volume is suppressed) refers to a period during which the conditions that either one of the sensors used in the first or second notification group is in a specific detection state (is in an abnormal state) or the notification sound belonging to the first or second notification group is being played (notification sound is being played) are satisfied. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 132, during the period from timing tα11 to tα13 and the period from timing tα14 to tα16, the volume of the effect sound during the pattern change and other game sounds is suppressed (processing to reduce the volume to a specific value) based on the fact that the notification process by the first notification group is being performed, and during the period from timing tα13 to tα14, the volume of the effect sound during the pattern change and other game sounds is suppressed (processing to reduce the volume to a specific value) based on the fact that the notification process by the first and second notification groups is being performed.

In this embodiment, the volume of the effect sounds during the pattern change and other game sounds is reduced to the same value during the period when only the notification process by the first notification group is being performed (timings tα11 to tα13, tα14 to tα16) and during the period when both the first notification group and the second notification group are being performed. However, during the period when both the first notification group and the second notification group are being performed, the volume may be reduced to a lower value than during the period when only the notification process by the first notification group is being performed. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize that there are multiple notification states just by checking the effect sounds other than the notification, which is expected to speed up the initial response of the hall.

In the example shown in FIG. 132, when the door opening detection is terminated at time tα16, the process of suppressing the volume of the sound effects during the pattern change and other game sounds is terminated. However, in the case where the alarm sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been terminated is played in a manner that is connected to the "playback of the alarm sound corresponding to the magnetic detection", it is possible that an extremely malicious act may have been committed. Therefore, even when the door opening detection is terminated at time tα16, the volume of the sound effects during the pattern change and other game sounds may be allowed to continue without being suppressed.

In the example shown in FIG. 132, as is clear from the processing in response to door opening detection, the period during which the alarm sound in response to door opening detection is played, the period during which the display in the LCD in response to door opening detection is made, and the period during which the lamp is illuminated in a manner in response to door opening detection all start at the same time, but end at different times. In this way, by operating the alarm sound, LCD display, and lamp illumination so that they each have different roles, it becomes possible to appropriately notify abnormalities, game information, and the like, even though only a single channel (channel X) is used for the various alarm sounds.

In contrast, in the example shown in FIG. 133, it is assumed that after the notification sound (timing tα21-tα22) corresponding to the door opening detection ends, at timing tα23, the gate sensor 4003 detects a right hit in a non-time-saving state. However, in this example, unlike the example shown in FIG. 132, the possibility of extremely malicious behavior is low, so at timing tα24 when the notification sound playback corresponding to the right hit detection in the non-time-saving state ends, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that is already in the ended state is not played again. In addition, during the period from timing tα22 to timing tα23, the suppression mode of the volume of the performance sound during the pattern change and other game sounds is not changed. Incidentally, even if a frame opening detection occurs instead of a right hit detection in a non-time-saving state by the gate sensor 4003 after the notification sound (timing tα21-tα22) ends, the possibility of extremely malicious behavior is low, so the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that is already in the ended state when the notification sound corresponding to this ends is not played again.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 134 is the same as the example shown in FIG. 132 in that magnetic detection occurs by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 at timing tα33 after the alarm sound corresponding to the door open detection (timings tα31 to tα32) has ended. However, the example shown in FIG. 134 assumes that the door frame 3 is closed and the door open detection has ended at timing tα34, during the period during which the alarm sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being played.

In the example shown in FIG. 134, at the timing tα35 when the playback of the alarm sound in response to magnetic detection is terminated, the alarm sound in response to door opening detection, which has already ended, is not played in a manner that is connected to the "playback of the alarm sound in response to magnetic detection". That is, in the example shown in FIG. 134, as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 132, it is assumed that a person intending to carry out some kind of fraudulent operation may open the door frame 3 to put it in an open state, wait for the playback of the alarm sound in response to door opening detection to end, and then, in a state where the heat has died down, secretly place a magnet for fraudulent purposes inside the door frame 3, and the magnet may momentarily enter the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024. However, in view of the fact that the door frame 3 is closed after timing tα34 and is in a non-fraudulent state where no magnetic detection has occurred, even in such a non-fraudulent state, it is considered that the alarm sound processing is sufficient just by continuing to play the alarm sound in response to magnetic detection until timing tα35 arrives, and it can be said that it is more beneficial to keep channel X free and secure it in case further alarm sound processing is required. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 134, even though only a single channel (channel X) is used for various notification sounds, it is possible to appropriately notify the user of abnormalities, game information, etc.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 135 is the same as the example shown in FIG. 132 in that magnetic detection occurs by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 at timing tα43 after the alarm sound in response to door opening detection (timings tα41 to tα42) has ended. However, the example shown in FIG. 135 assumes that magnetic detection occurs again by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 at timing tα44 during the period in which the alarm sound in response to the magnetic detection is being played.

In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 135, when the person waits for the playback of the alarm sound in response to door opening detection to end and attempts to secretly place a magnet for fraudulent purposes inside the door frame 3 in a calm state, the magnet momentarily enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and in response to this, the alarm sound for a magnetic anomaly is played. However, it is assumed that the person attempts to place the magnet again within the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 without flinching in this situation, and there is a possibility that a more malicious fraudulent act is being committed. Therefore, in this example, if magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at timing tα44, the schedule data for generating sounds in response to magnetic detection is maintained in the set state, while a process is performed to reset the timer (60 seconds) for timing the alarm time of alarm sound 1 (magnetic anomaly).

With this configuration, it is possible to continuously play the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection for a longer period of time, from the first magnetic detection to 60 seconds starting from the timing tα44 when the second magnetic detection occurred. In this case, the notification sound such as "Beep Beep Magnetic Field Detected" is played continuously without interruption from timing tα43 to timing tα45. And in the end, the notification sound such as "Beep Beep Magnetic Field Detected" does not end its loop processing at a good timing, but ends at an awkward timing such as "Beep Beep Magnetic Field Detected", which is expected to create a great sense of discomfort in the hall and attract everyone's attention.

Furthermore, at timing tα44, which is 60 seconds after the timing tα44 when the second magnetic detection occurred, the "schedule data for generating sound in response to door opening detection" for which the alarm sound playback has already been completed for that alarm time (30 seconds) is set again, and special processing is performed to reassign the alarm sound to channel X. At this time, the timer (30 seconds) for timing the alarm sound 4 (door opening) is also set, so that the alarm sound in response to door opening detection is played for 30 seconds until timing tα15 arrives.

In this configuration, the alarm sound in response to door opening detection that has already ended will not only be played back in a manner that connects it to the "alarm sound playback in response to magnetic detection" but will also be played back in a manner that connects it to the "alarm sound playback in response to magnetic detection" whose loop processing ended at an awkward timing such as "beep beep magnetism detected." Therefore, the priority of the alarm sound in response to door opening detection that has already ended will be increased, and the alarm will appear as if the alarm sound for magnetic detection was stopped midway, which is expected to create an even greater sense of discomfort in the hall and attract everyone's attention.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 136 is the same as the example shown in FIG. 132 in that magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα53 after the alarm sound in response to door opening detection (timings tα51 to tα52) has ended. However, the example shown in FIG. 136 assumes that vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs at timing tα54 during the period in which the alarm sound in response to the magnetic detection is being played.

In the example shown in FIG. 136, when waiting for the end of the alarm sound playback in response to door opening detection, and when the heat dies down, the player tries to secretly place a magnet for fraudulent purposes inside the door frame 3, and the magnet momentarily enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024. In response to this, an alarm sound for a magnetic anomaly is played, but the player does not flinch and violently shakes the pachinko machine 1, which may lead to more malicious fraud. Therefore, in this example, at timing tα55 when the alarm sound playback in response to magnetic detection ends, the alarm sound in response to vibration detection is played in a manner connected to the "alarm sound playback in response to magnetic detection", and then at timing tα56 when the alarm sound playback in response to vibration detection ends, the alarm sound in response to door opening detection that has already ended is played in a manner further connected to the "alarm sound playback in response to vibration detection".

Moreover, at timing tα54 when vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405, schedule data for generating sound in response to the vibration detection is not set, and a timer (60 seconds) is set to measure the notification time of alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality), and at timing tα55 when playback of the alarm sound in response to magnetic detection ends, schedule data for generating sound in response to the vibration detection is set and the alarm sound is assigned to channel X.

With this configuration, the notification sound such as "buzzing vibration detected" will not end its loop processing at a convenient time, but will end at an awkward time such as "buzzing vibration detected," which is expected to create a strong sense of discomfort in the hall and attract everyone's attention.

Furthermore, at timing tα56 when the playback of the alarm sound in response to vibration detection ends, special processing is performed to reset the "schedule data for generating sound in response to door opening detection" for which the alarm sound playback has already finished for the alarm time (30 seconds) and reassign the alarm sound to channel X. At this time, a timer (30 seconds) for timing the alarm sound 4 (door opening) is also set, so that the alarm sound in response to door opening detection is played for 30 seconds until timing tα15 arrives.

In this configuration, the alarm sound in response to door opening detection that has already ended is not only played in a manner that connects it to the "alarm sound playback in response to vibration detection" that is connected to the "alarm sound playback in response to magnetic detection", but also in a manner that connects it to the "alarm sound playback in response to vibration detection" whose loop processing ended at an awkward timing such as "buzzing vibration detected". Therefore, the priority state of the alarm sound in response to door opening detection that has already ended is increased, and the alarm mode appears as if the alarm sound for vibration detection was stopped midway, which is expected to create an even greater sense of discomfort in the hall and attract everyone's attention.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 137, it is assumed that magnetic detection occurs by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 at timing tα63 after the alarm sound (timings tα61 to tα62) corresponding to frame opening detection has ended, rather than door opening detection.

In the example shown in Figure 137, the situation where magnetic detection occurs immediately after frame open detection is one in which it is highly likely that some kind of fraudulent activity is occurring. However, on the other hand, if a magnet is used for the purpose of fraudulent activity, the door frame 3 would be in the open state, and even if the main frame 4 is in the open state, there is no benefit to placing a magnet. Therefore, it is possible that the hall may have mistakenly caused a false detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 when using a magnet to clear a ball jam in the ball tank or payout passage, etc.

Therefore, even in the example shown in FIG. 137, at timing tα64 when the playback of the alarm sound in response to magnetic detection ends, the alarm sound in response to frame opening detection that has already ended is played in a manner that connects with the "playback of the alarm sound in response to magnetic detection" (timings tα64 to tα65), which is expected to create a strong sense of discomfort in the hall and attract everyone's attention. However, after that, at timing tα66 when the main frame 4 is closed and frame opening detection ends, special processing is performed to end not only each alarm process in response to frame opening detection (alarm sound, LCD display, lamp) but also each alarm process in response to magnetic detection (alarm sound, LCD display, lamp).

This configuration allows the function against fraudulent activity to be effectively performed, while in the event of a false detection by the hall, all notification processing in response to frame opening detection and magnetic detection (alert sound, LCD display, lamp) can be terminated simply by closing the main body frame 4, which is expected to speed up the hall's response to false detection and maintain a favorable atmosphere in the hall.

In the example shown in FIG. 137, even if the main frame 4 is closed and frame opening detection is terminated during the period in which an alarm sound corresponding to magnetic detection is being played, special processing may be performed at the timing when the frame opening detection is terminated to terminate not only each alarm process corresponding to the frame opening detection (alarm sound, LCD display, lamp) but also each alarm process corresponding to magnetic detection (alarm sound, LCD display, lamp).

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment is equipped with a player-side volume adjustment function.

For example, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, in the process of step S1108, it monitors whether the left effect selection button 331 or the right effect selection button 332 has been operated. If it is determined that the left effect selection button 331 has been operated, it performs a process to lower the value set by the player (player setting value) for the speaker volume, and if it is determined that the right effect selection button 332 has been operated, it performs a process to raise the value set by the player (player setting value) for the speaker volume. In addition, when the player setting value is lowered and the speaker outputs the actually lowered volume, a volume adjustment completion sound (e.g., "beep!") is output at the lowered volume value, whereas when the player setting value is increased and the speaker outputs the actually increased volume, a volume adjustment completion sound (e.g., "beep beep!") is output at the increased volume value, making it possible to grasp the extent to which the volume has changed after the volume adjustment is completed. The volume adjustment completion sound may be the same whether the volume value is increased or decreased. The volume adjustment completion sound has a relatively high priority (for example, the same as the button press sound, "20"), which is referenced when there are no more available channels, and can more reliably communicate that the output volume of the sound effects (audible volume) has changed.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a in this embodiment allows the player to accept such volume adjustment processing not only during the period before the game starts when the pattern change in response to the jackpot determination has not yet occurred (the period during which demo displays, etc. may be performed), but also during the period after the game starts and the pattern change in response to the jackpot determination is being performed, so that interest in the game is maintained by making it possible to dynamically change the volume setting when a more important performance appears, etc.

On the other hand, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a certain state such as a magnetic anomaly or door opening is detected in a situation where various kinds of sound effects are assigned to channels in accordance with the progress of the display performance during the execution period of the pattern change, a process is performed to assign a specific sound effect among the multiple types of sound effects to a channel and output it in accordance with the detected content. In addition, at this time, the channel assignment of the various sound effects in accordance with the progress of the display performance is not stopped, and a process of notifying the progress of the performance in which the output volume is reduced to a specific value can be executed. In other words, in this case, even if a specific sound effect among the multiple types of sound effects is assigned to a channel and output, the channel assignment of the various sound effects in accordance with the progress of the display performance is not stopped, so that as long as the channel assignment of the specific sound effect or the abnormal state ends, the output volume of the sound effect in accordance with the progress of the performance display is appropriately restored, allowing the performance to be enjoyed again.

However, in the above-mentioned notification process under performance progress, the channel allocation of various performance sounds according to the progress of the display performance is not stopped, so that more channels are used than under normal circumstances (non-notification state) by the amount of the specific notification sounds that are assigned to channels, and there is a tendency for the risk of running out of available channels to which sound data is not assigned before the end of the channel allocation (notification state) of the specific notification sound. And if there are no available channels to which sound data is not assigned before the end of the channel allocation (notification state) of the specific notification sound, then one of the channel allocations of the sound data will have to be discarded at that point, and therefore even if the channel allocation (notification state) of the specific notification sound ends thereafter, the sound data that was discarded because it could not be assigned to a channel cannot be played, which raises the concern that interest in the game will decrease.

Concerns about free channels related to such sound effects do not cause any direct problems if a fixed channel method is used for channel allocation of notification sounds, but whether to use a fixed channel method or an automatic channel method for channel allocation of notification sounds should be decided from the perspective of gameplay and presentation design. Therefore, in order to ensure reduced costs and improved reliability in the development of pachinko machine 1, it is important to prepare a processing structure that allows a common processing program to be used as the notification process under the above-mentioned presentation progress regardless of which channel method is adopted. Therefore, in the example described below, either the fixed channel method or the automatic channel method may be adopted for both notification sounds and presentation sounds.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the left effect selection button 331 or the right effect selection button 332 is operated while the performance progress notification process is being executed, the output volume of the performance sound, which has been lowered to a specific value, is not made variable and is maintained at this value. In other words, in this case, even if the player operates the button while the performance progress notification process is being executed, there is no need to generate the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound ("beep!" or "beep beep!"), which is expected to help reduce the risk of running out of available channels by providing more space in the channels.

However, even though the pachinko machine 1 allows for the dynamic change of the volume value when a more important performance appears, if the output volume cannot be changed while the performance progress notification process is being executed, a decrease in interest in the game will be unavoidable due to the inability to change the volume appropriately to the appropriate volume value that matches the content of the performance progress when the performance progress notification process is executed due to a false detection or a notification due to the hall's circumstances (door opening, etc.). Also, if the performance progresses during the period when the performance progress notification process is being performed, and a large discrepancy occurs between the appropriate volume value that matches the content of the performance and the actual setting value, after the output volume (audible sound volume) setting change is permitted, multiple operations will be required to change the volume to the appropriate value. This will result in the channel being occupied by the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound, and there will be a concern that the performance sound will not be able to be output appropriately due to a lack of available channels even after the performance progress notification process has finally ended, resulting in a decrease in interest in the game.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, while the performance progress notification process is being executed, if the performance selection left button 331 or the performance selection right button 332 is operated, the output volume (audible volume) of the performance sound, which has been lowered to a specific value, is not made variable but is maintained at this level, while the player's setting value for volume (player setting value) itself is allowed to be changed, and when the performance progress notification process (processing to lower the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible volume) is changed all at once to reflect all previous operations.

According to this configuration, if the player's setting value (player setting value) can be changed in accordance with the progress of the presentation while the presentation progress notification process is being executed, the output volume (audible sound volume) can be changed all at once to reflect all previous operations when the presentation progress notification process is completed, without the need for any new operations. In this way, by allowing the player to change the setting value (player setting value) even while the presentation progress notification process is being executed, it is expected that the decrease in interest in the game until the presentation progress notification process is completed can be suppressed. In addition, the occurrence of a situation in which the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in multiple stages immediately after the presentation progress notification process is completed, causing a shortage of available channels due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time, is preferably avoided.

In addition, according to the above configuration, when a bulk change in the output volume to the player's setting value is executed when the performance progress notification process is completed, the volume adjustment completion sound will be played only once at the volume after the bulk change, regardless of the number of times the player's setting value was changed or the number of operations performed by the player during the period when the performance progress notification process was being executed, but this volume adjustment completion sound may be output in a special manner that is different from normal times (for example, "Bee!").

Furthermore, in order to more effectively resolve the lack of available channels when the notification process for the performance progress is completed, it is desirable not to play the volume adjustment completion sound itself when the output volume (audible sound volume) is changed all at once when the notification process for the performance progress is completed, regardless of the number of times the player's setting value was changed or the number of operations performed by the player during the period in which the notification process for the performance progress was being executed. With this configuration, it is possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a lack of available channels makes it impossible to enjoy the proper performance, even though the notification process for the performance progress has finally been completed due to a false detection or a notification due to the hall's circumstances (such as opening of the door).

In the above example, if the alarm sound in response to door open detection ends while the door open state is maintained, and then a magnetic anomaly occurs and the corresponding alarm sound ends, the alarm sound in response to door open detection is output again (see FIG. 132). However, if a magnetic anomaly occurs and the corresponding alarm sound ends while the alarm sound in response to door open detection is in an output state, it is preferable not to output the alarm sound in response to door open detection even if the door open state is maintained (or to output only the time remaining as the output time of the interrupted "alarm sound in response to door open detection").

When the door is in an open state, a lamp is illuminated in response to the door open detection, but it is desirable that this lamp illumination continue as long as the door is in an open state even after the alarm sound in response to the door open detection has ended. Furthermore, it is desirable that the lamp illumination continue for a predetermined period of time even after the door frame 3 has been closed and the door open state has ended.

There are specific errors that do not output an alarm sound even if an abnormality is detected, and if the specific error occurs in a situation where the alarm sound in response to door open detection has ended while the door remains open, it is desirable to output the alarm sound in response to door open detection again based on the occurrence of the specific error. With this configuration, it becomes possible to recognize that some abnormality has occurred by re-outputting the alarm sound in response to door open detection.

Alternatively, if there is a specific error that does not output an alarm sound even if an abnormality is detected, and the specific error occurs in a situation where the alarm sound in response to door open detection has ended while the door remains open, the alarm sound in response to door open detection is not output again based on the occurrence of the specific error, but a state in which re-alert is possible may be maintained.

Even in a situation where such an abnormal alarm sound is being output, it is possible to change the volume setting value and brightness setting value, but even if the volume setting value is changed, the changed volume setting value will not be reflected as the volume. However, when the brightness setting value is changed, it is desirable to have the changed brightness reflected in some of the multiple performance lamps.

Below, we will explain an example of the process from when this kind of performance progress notification process is executed to when the output volume (volume of audible sound) is changed all at once.

Figure 138 is a diagram explaining the content of the notification process during performance progression according to the notification state of the pachinko machine 1.

First, before explaining the process from when the performance progress notification process is executed to when the output volume (volume of audible sounds) is changed all at once, the content of the performance progress notification process will be briefly explained with reference to FIG. 138. For ease of explanation, only notification sounds 1 to 7 shown as examples in FIG. 128 are shown here, and explanations of the other notification sounds are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 138, in this explanatory example, first, two types of suppression modes (first volume suppression mode, second volume suppression mode) are prepared as the volume suppression mode of the effect sound. For example, the first volume suppression mode sets the output volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound to "10" while the output volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound can be changed in the range of "20" to "50" by changing the setting value (player setting value) for the volume by the player. In contrast, the second volume suppression mode sets the output volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound to "0". Therefore, the second volume suppression mode has a greater degree of suppression than the first volume suppression mode, and in particular, in this explanatory example, the processing related to the output itself is performed, but the effect sound is muted.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when notification processing is executed for any of the alarm sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic anomaly, vibration anomaly, big prize anomaly) belonging to the first notification group, which has a high possibility of fraud, among the alarm sounds 1 to 7, processing is performed to suppress the output volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound in the second volume suppression mode, which has a higher degree of suppression. Moreover, when notification processing is executed for any of the alarm sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic anomaly, vibration anomaly, big prize anomaly) belonging to the first notification group, even if the abnormality detection is turned off, processing to suppress the output volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound in the second volume suppression mode, which has a higher degree of suppression, is not terminated, but is continued until a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the abnormality detection.

In this explanatory example, when the notification process is executed for any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic anomaly, vibration anomaly, big prize anomaly) belonging to the first notification group, the period during which the process of suppressing the output volume of the performance sound (audible sound volume) continues is set to be the same as the period from when the notification sound (magnetic anomaly, vibration anomaly, big prize anomaly) corresponding to the abnormality detection is played until this is terminated.

On the other hand, when notification processing is executed for any of the alarm sounds 4 and 5 (door opening, frame opening) that belong to the second alarm group, which has a medium degree of fraudulent possibility, out of the alarm sounds 1 to 7, processing is performed to suppress the output volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound in the first volume suppression mode, which has a lower degree of suppression. However, when notification processing is executed for any of the alarm sounds 4 and 5 (door opening, frame opening) that belong to the second alarm group, if abnormality detection is turned off immediately after an abnormality detection occurs, the processing to suppress the output volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound in the first volume suppression mode, which has a lower degree of suppression, will be terminated at that point.

On the other hand, when notification processing is executed for any of the notification sounds 6 and 7 (left-hand hit notification, ball removal notification) that belong to the third notification group related to game guidance among the notification sounds 1 to 7, emphasis is placed on maintaining the presentation quality, and no processing is executed to suppress the output volume (audible volume) of the presentation sound.

In this explanatory example, the suppression mode is different when an alarm sound belonging to the first alarm group is executed and when an alarm sound belonging to the second alarm group is executed, but the suppression mode does not necessarily have to be different, and a process may be performed to suppress the output volume of the performance sound (the volume of the audible sound) in the same suppression mode when an alarm sound belonging to the first alarm group is executed and when an alarm sound belonging to the second alarm group is executed. However, it is important that the end conditions of the suppression process are different and stricter when an alarm sound belonging to the first alarm group is executed than when an alarm sound belonging to the second alarm group is executed.

Figure 139 is a diagram explaining the content of the processing related to volume adjustment that occurs when the left effect selection button 331 or the right effect selection button 332 is operated while no abnormality has been detected and no processing related to the alarm sound is being executed.

In this explanatory example, the player setting value is changed in increments of "1" within a range of "1" to "5" by operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332, and the smaller the value, the lower the volume of the effect sound is set. Also, when the suppression mode described above (first volume suppression mode, second volume suppression mode) is not set for the effect sound, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to a value 20 times the player setting value. Therefore, in this explanatory example, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is changed within a range of "20" to "100" by operation by the player.

Now, as shown in FIG. 139(A), assume that the player's setting value for the volume of the effect sound is "3" out of "1" to "5", no notification flag is set, and the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) is set to "60", which is 20 times that value. Also, if the decorative pattern SZ is in a stopped state, and a jackpot determination has not been made and the game is waiting for a start win, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 displays a display image 331a imitating the effect selection left button 331 and a display image 332a imitating the effect selection right button 332, and a volume adjustment guide display OAH is displayed to inform the player that the volume can be adjusted through the operation of these buttons. At this time, the first volume value display OH1 is also executed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, which allows the player to recognize which of "1" to "5" the current player's setting value is. The volume adjustment guide display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may be displayed at all times, or may be hidden during a specific period such as a super reach effect, which is a reach effect executed with the background image changed, and at least one of the first volume value display OH1 and the second volume value display OH2 described below may be displayed when the player operates the display. Also, it is not necessary to display both the volume adjustment guide display OAH and the first volume value display OH1, and one of them may be omitted and only the other may be displayed.

In the situation shown in FIG. 139(A), when the effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button 332 is operated, the player set value changes by "1" each time the operation is performed, and the output volume of the effect sound (volume of audible sound) changes by "20" accordingly. In addition, each time the output volume of the effect sound (volume of audible sound) changes, a volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "beep!") is played at the new volume.

At this time, in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 (see FIG. 139(C)) is displayed in place of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, which uses a gauge display to show which of the player's settings is currently set within the range of "1" to "5" (see below). This will be explained later.

If the left effect selection button 331 is operated when the player setting value is "1", neither the player setting value nor the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) is lowered, and the player setting value remains at "1" (the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) remains at "20"). Therefore, even if the left effect selection button 331 is operated when the player setting value is "1", it is desirable not to assign the volume adjustment completion sound to a channel itself, or, even if it is assigned to a channel, to set its volume to "0" so that it is not audibly output. The same applies when the right effect selection button 332 is operated when the player setting value is "5".

In contrast, when a start winning occurs and a jackpot determination is made, as shown in FIG. 139(B), the decorative pattern SZ is displayed in a predetermined presentation pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination and the type of variation pattern. Also, while the decorative pattern SZ is displayed in a variegated manner, the predetermined presentation progresses and a presentation sound is output in accordance with the progress of the predetermined presentation.

In this regard, the volume adjustment process in this embodiment allows the player to accept the request not only during the period shown in FIG. 139(A) (the period during which demo displays, etc. may be performed), but also during the period during which the game has started and the patterns are changing in response to the jackpot determination, and as described above, the configuration allows for dynamic changes to the volume setting when a more important effect such as the reach effect shown in FIG. 139(C) appears.

In other words, Figure 139 (C) shows the state after the player operates the effect selection right button 332 twice in response to the execution of a reach effect in the state shown in Figure 139 (B). In the first of these operations, the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", and the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is changed to 20 times that value, from "60" to "80", and the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a specified channel and played at the changed volume of "80", and in the second operation, the player setting value is changed from "4" to "5", and the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is changed to 20 times that value, from "80" to "100", and the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a specified channel and played at the changed volume of "100".

In addition, in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 according to this embodiment, when the player setting value is changed by such an operation, a second volume value display OH2, which indicates the current setting value within the range of the player setting value "1" to "5" by a gauge display, is executed instead of the volume adjustment guide display OAH. This is intended to prevent operational errors such as repeatedly operating the performance selection right button 332 even when the player setting value is the maximum value "5" even in a tense situation where a more important performance has appeared, by clarifying the current setting value within the range of the player setting value "1" to "5". In the gauge display, the numerical range of "1" to "5" is constantly displayed as blocks, and the number of filled blocks among these blocks increases and decreases according to the change in the player setting value, thereby indicating the current player setting value.

As shown in FIG. 139(D), the second volume value display OH2 is hidden after a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the left effect selection button 331 or the right effect selection button 332 was operated in the state shown in FIG. 139(C), and the volume adjustment guide display OAH is then executed again. Therefore, even if an operation is performed in a manner that does not cause a change in the player setting value (operation of the right effect selection button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value of "5"), the display of the second volume value display OH2 will be maintained as long as the operation of the left effect selection button 331 or the right effect selection button 332 is repeated. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation is performed in a manner that does not cause a change in the player setting value (operation of the right effect selection button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value of "5"), the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output each time the operation is performed, but the timer value that measures the time until the second volume value display OH2 is hidden is reset. This will more effectively encourage players to avoid operational errors, such as repeatedly operating the right effect selection button 332 even though the player's setting is at the maximum value of "5."

On the other hand, Figure 140 is a diagram explaining the content of the processing related to the volume adjustment that accompanies the operation of the left effect selection button 331 or the right effect selection button 332 while a door opening detection occurs during the execution period of the pattern change and the processing related to the corresponding alarm sound is being executed.

The situation shown in Figure 140(A) is the situation before the pattern change starts, and is the same as the situation described with reference to Figure 139(A). In this situation, when a start winning occurs and a jackpot determination is made, as shown in Figure 140(B), the decorative pattern SZ is displayed in a predetermined presentation pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination and the type of change pattern, similar to the situation described with reference to Figure 139(B). Also, while the decorative pattern SZ is displayed in a variegated manner, the predetermined presentation progresses and a presentation sound is output in accordance with the progress of the predetermined presentation.

However, in the situation shown in FIG. 140(B), a door open detection belonging to the second notification group occurs during the execution period of the pattern change, and processing related to the notification sound 4 (door open) is executed in response to this. More specifically, a loop process (for 30 seconds) is executed in which a notification sound such as "Door is open, ping pong ping pong" is repeatedly output, a display is displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 (here, "Door open"), and various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and game board 5 are turned on.

As described above, during the period when the patterns change, when a door opening detection belonging to the second notification group occurs and processing related to notification sound 4 (door opening) is executed in response to this, a notification process under performance progress is performed in which the output volume of the performance sound (volume of the audible sound) is suppressed in the first volume suppression manner. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 140(B), although the player setting value is maintained at "3" as in the situation in FIG. 140(A), the output volume of the performance sound (volume of the audible sound) is set to a predetermined first specific value (here, "10") that is lower than the original value (20 times the player setting value), and the performance content progresses under this volume value.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the left effect selection button 331 or the right effect selection button 332 is operated while this kind of performance progress notification process is being executed, the output volume (audible volume) of the performance sound, which has been lowered to a first specific value (here, "10"), is not made variable but is maintained at this level, while the player's setting value for volume (player setting value) itself is allowed to be changed, and when the performance progress notification process (processing to lower the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible volume) is changed all at once to reflect all previous operations, as described above.

In other words, Figure 140 (C) shows the state after the player operates the effect selection right button 332 twice in response to the execution of a reach effect in the state shown in Figure 140 (B), and it can be seen that, even though the player's setting value has been changed from "3" to "5" by operating the effect selection right button 332, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is maintained at a predetermined first specific value (here, "10") that is lower than the original value (20 times the player's setting value). Therefore, even if the player operates the effect selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the effect sound does not change until the above-mentioned effect progress notification process (processing to reduce the output volume to a specific value) is completed, and the effect content progresses at the volume of the first specific value.

In addition, in the first operation by the player, the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", but the output volume of the sound effects (the volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the first specific value (here, "10"), so the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output, and in the second operation, the player setting value is changed from "4" to "5", but the output volume of the sound effects (the volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the first specific value (here, "10"), so the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

However, with the first operation, the player setting value itself has changed from "3" to "4", and the player's operation to adjust the volume has been accepted, so in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the second volume value display OH2, which shows by means of a gauge that the current setting value is "4" within the player setting value range of "1" to "5", is executed in place of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, and the number is also changed from "3" to "4" and displayed on the first volume value display OH1.

The second operation also changes the player setting value itself from "4" to "5", and since the player's operation to adjust the volume has been accepted, the second volume value display OH2 will show by means of a gauge that the current setting value has changed from "4" to "5" within the player setting value range of "1" to "5", and the first volume value display OH1 will also change and display the same value from "4" to "5".

Then, after that, when the door frame 3 is closed with the volume adjustment guide display OAH in a state where it is executed again, and the process related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) and the notification process under performance progress (processing to reduce the output volume to a specific value) are each completed, as shown in FIG. 140(D), the output volume (audible volume) is changed all at once to reflect all the operations up to that point in response to the completion of the process. That is, in this case, since the player setting value changes stepwise from "3" to "4" corresponding to the first operation and to "5" corresponding to the second operation during the execution period of the notification process under performance progress, the output volume (audible volume) should also change stepwise from the first specific value (here, "10") to "80" corresponding to the first operation and to "100" corresponding to the second operation, but instead changes all at once from the first specific value (here, "10") to "100" reflecting all the operations up to that point.

In this way, by allowing the player to change the setting value (player setting value) even while the presentation progress notification process is being executed, it is expected that the decrease in interest in the game until the presentation progress notification process is completed will be suppressed. In addition, it is also possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in multiple stages immediately after the presentation progress notification process is completed, causing a shortage or lack of space in available channels due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time.

Furthermore, in this illustrative example, when the output volume (audible volume) is changed en masse (from "10" to "100") as the performance progress notification process ends, the channel assignment for the volume adjustment completion sound is not performed, even though a change in the output volume occurs. This configuration makes it possible to effectively prevent situations in which a lack of available channels prevents a proper performance from being enjoyed, even though the performance progress notification process has finally ended due to a false detection or a notification due to hall circumstances (such as door opening).

In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a magnetic abnormality and an open door are exemplified as specific states, but the end conditions for the notification process under performance progress when a magnetic abnormality occurs and the notification process under performance progress when a door is open may be different.

For example, first, the notification process for the progression of the performance when the door is opened is to be terminated when the door is closed or when a predetermined time has passed since the door was opened (even if the door remains open). However, in either case, when the output volume (audible sound volume) is changed all at once (for example, from "10" to "100"), it is desirable not to assign a channel for the volume adjustment completion sound, even though a change in the output volume occurs.

In contrast, it is desirable that the notification process for the progress of the performance when a magnetic anomaly has occurred not be terminated simply when the magnetic anomaly has ended, but be continued until the RAM is cleared or the power is cut off. In this case, the output volume (audible volume) will be changed all at once (for example, from "10" to "100") when the RAM is cleared or the power is restored from a cutoff, but even in this case, it is desirable not to assign a channel for the volume adjustment completion sound despite the change in the output volume.

In addition, the presentation progress notification process when a door opening occurs may display a message indicating that the player's setting has been changed, whereas the presentation progress notification process when a magnetic anomaly has occurred may not display a message indicating that the player's setting has been changed. This configuration makes it possible to suggest that the end conditions for the presentation progress notification process when a door opening occurs and the presentation progress notification process when a magnetic anomaly has occurred are different.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the volume can also be adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a. However, since it is assumed that volume adjustment using this knob will be mainly performed by the hall, it is more desirable to prevent the output of a volume adjustment completion sound (channel allocation) triggered by volume adjustment using this knob in order to ensure that there is a margin of available channels.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is provided with buttons for adjusting the volume (the left effect selection button 331 and the right effect selection button 332), as well as buttons for adjusting the brightness (such as a brightness increase button and a brightness decrease button) for various performance lamps (such as lamps controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 and used for performance, and game lamps such as special LEDs controlled by the main control board 1310 are excluded from the brightness setting targets) provided in the pachinko machine 1, and when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, it is possible to execute a process for changing the setting value (player setting value) set by the player for the brightness of the various performance lamps. Also, when the player setting value for brightness is lowered or raised, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound (for example, the same as the volume adjustment confirmation sound) is output at a volume value corresponding to the setting value for the volume at that time. In addition, the brightness of these performance lamps can be changed by the player when the pattern is either not changing or changing.

It is also desirable to assign a channel to the brightness adjustment completion sound under the same conditions as the volume adjustment completion sound described above. In this case, even if the setting value for brightness is changed, there may be situations where the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not assigned a channel or where the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is suppressed and output. With this configuration, it becomes possible to grasp the current situation (such as whether the above-mentioned performance progress notification process is being executed) when the setting value for brightness is changed, rather than the volume. Note that the brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be a different sound from the volume adjustment completion sound.

The player-set value for volume may be changed to a specific value (e.g., "3") without any operation by the player when a certain condition is met (e.g., when a certain time has elapsed since control was given to the demo screen). However, if the setting is changed to a specific value (e.g., "3") without any operation by the player, it is more desirable to not display the current setting value (first volume value display OH1 or second volume value display OH2) or output (channel allocation) the volume adjustment completion sound, in order to make it difficult for a third party to recognize that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 is declining.

In addition, if a new volume adjustment is made while a volume adjustment completion sound corresponding to a volume adjustment is being output, it is more desirable to have a surplus of available channels so that the currently output volume adjustment sound is terminated and the new volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to the same channel and output (overwrites and outputs) it, even if there is an available channel.

In addition, when the player's setting value is at the maximum value but an operation to increase the volume is performed, or when the player's setting value is at the minimum value but an operation to decrease the volume is performed, it is more desirable to not assign the volume adjustment completion sound to a channel and not output it, even if there is an available channel, in order to allow for a margin in the number of available channels. In this case, although the volume adjustment completion sound is not output, an indication of the current setting value (first volume value indication OH1 or second volume value indication OH2) may be displayed.

Volume adjustment by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a is permitted, but it may be possible to create a period during which volume adjustment by the player's operation is not permitted.

On the other hand, FIG. 141 is a diagram explaining the content of the processing related to the volume adjustment that accompanies the operation of the left effect selection button 331 or the right effect selection button 332 while the processing related to the corresponding alarm sound is being executed when the state detection that occurred in FIG. 140 is a magnetic anomaly rather than an open door.

The situation shown in Figure 141 (A) is the situation before the pattern change starts, and is the same as the situation described with reference to Figure 140 (A). In this situation, when a start winning occurs and a jackpot determination is made, as shown in Figure 141 (B), the decorative pattern SZ is displayed in a predetermined presentation pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination and the type of change pattern, similar to the situation described with reference to Figure 140 (B). Also, while the decorative pattern SZ is displayed in a variegated manner, the predetermined presentation progresses and a presentation sound is output in accordance with the progress of the predetermined presentation.

In the situation shown in FIG. 141(B), a magnetic detection belonging to the first alarm group occurs during the execution period of the pattern change, and processing related to the corresponding alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is executed. More specifically, a loop process (for 60 seconds) is executed in which an alarm sound such as "beep beep magnetism detected" is repeatedly output, a display (here, "magnetic detection") is displayed within the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, and various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and game board 5 are turned on.

As described above, during the period when the symbols are fluctuating, if a magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group occurs and processing is performed for notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly), a notification process is performed under the progress of the presentation to suppress the output volume of the presentation sound (volume of the audible sound) in the second volume suppression mode. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 141(B), although the player setting value is maintained at "3" as in the situation in FIG. 141(A), the output volume of the presentation sound (volume of the audible sound) is set to a predetermined second specific value (here, "0") that is lower than the original value (20 times the player setting value), and the presentation content progresses under this volume value (here, muted).

In this regard, even when the presentation progress notification process is executed in response to such a magnetic anomaly, when the left presentation selection button 331 or the right presentation selection button 332 is operated, the output volume of the presentation sound (audible sound volume (here, muted)) which has been lowered to a second specific value (here, "0") is not made variable but is maintained at this level, while the player's setting value for volume (player setting value) itself is allowed to be changed, and as described above, when the presentation progress notification process (process of lowering the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible sound volume) is changed all at once to reflect all previous operations.

In other words, Figure 141 (C) shows the state after the player operates the effect selection right button 332 twice in response to the execution of a reach effect in the state shown in Figure 141 (B), and it can be seen that even though the player's setting value has been changed from "3" to "5" by operating the effect selection right button 332, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is maintained at a predetermined second specific value (here, "0 (mute)") that is lower than the original value (20 times the player's setting value). Therefore, even if the player operates the effect selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the effect sound does not change until the above-mentioned effect progress notification process (processing to reduce the output volume to a specific value) is completed, and the effect content progresses at the volume of the second specific value.

In addition, in the first operation by the player, the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", but the output volume of the sound effects (the volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the second specific value (here, "0"), so the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output, and in the second operation, the player setting value is changed from "4" to "5", but the output volume of the sound effects (the volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the second specific value (here, "0"), so the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

However, with the first operation, the player setting value itself has changed from "3" to "4", and the player's operation to adjust the volume has been accepted, so in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the second volume value display OH2, which shows by means of a gauge that the current setting value is "4" within the player setting value range of "1" to "5", is executed in place of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, and the number is also changed from "3" to "4" and displayed on the first volume value display OH1.

The second operation also changes the player setting value itself from "4" to "5", and since the player's operation to adjust the volume has been accepted, the second volume value display OH2 will show by means of a gauge that the current setting value has changed from "4" to "5" within the player setting value range of "1" to "5", and the first volume value display OH1 will also change and display the same value from "4" to "5".

Incidentally, in this explanatory example, in the situation shown in FIG. 141(C), magnetic detection itself is already in a non-detection state. However, unlike the case of door detection, the performance progress notification process continues to be executed, suppressing the output volume of the performance sound (volume of the audible sound) in the second volume suppression mode, until a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) has elapsed since magnetic detection.

Then, after a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the magnetic detection while the volume adjustment guide display OAH is back in a state where it is executed again, when the performance progress notification process (the process of lowering the output volume to a specific value) ends, as shown in FIG. 141(D), the output volume (audible volume) is changed all at once to reflect all the operations up to that point in response to the end of the process. That is, in this case, since the player setting value changes stepwise from "3" to "4" corresponding to the first operation and to "5" corresponding to the second operation during the execution period of the performance progress notification process, the output volume (audible volume) should also change stepwise from the second specific value (here, "0") to "80" corresponding to the first operation and to "100" corresponding to the second operation, but instead changes all at once from the second specific value (here, "0") to "100" reflecting all the operations up to that point.

When the notification process in response to a magnetic anomaly is executed, unlike when the notification process in response to a door opening is executed, even in the situation shown in FIG. 141(D), the display (here, "magnetic detection") in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the lighting of the various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 remain active. That is, in the notification process in response to a magnetic anomaly, when the notification sound ends, while the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp continue, the performance sound is no longer subject to suppression and is reflected in the output volume according to the player's setting value, whereas in the notification process in response to a door opening, even if the notification sound ends, while the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp continue, the performance sound remains subject to suppression.

In this way, even if a magnetic abnormality occurs, by allowing the player to change the setting value (player setting value) even during the period when the performance progress notification process is being executed, it is expected that the decrease in interest in the game until the performance progress notification process is completed will be suppressed. In addition, it is also possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in multiple stages immediately after the performance progress notification process is completed, causing a shortage or lack of space in available channels due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time.

Moreover, in this illustrative example, even when the output volume (audible volume) is changed en bloc (from "0" to "100") as the performance progress notification process due to a magnetic anomaly ends, the channel assignment for the volume adjustment completion sound is not performed, despite the change in output volume. This configuration makes it possible to effectively prevent situations in which a lack of available channels makes it impossible to enjoy the proper performance, even though the performance progress notification process caused by a false detection has finally ended.

As for the alarm sounds for door opening, such as "Door is open, ping pong ping pong," and for magnetic abnormalities, such as "beep beep, magnetism detected," as shown in Figure 128, the third byte of the volume initial value is set to "1" (0x1FF), so they are always played at the volume set by the initial value regardless of the player's setting.

In addition, when notification sound 6 (left hit notification) or notification sound 7 (ball removal notification) is executed, the notification process during the performance progress is not executed, so it is possible to appropriately change both the player setting value and the output volume of the performance sound (audible sound volume) while these notifications are being executed. However, as shown in FIG. 128, because "1" (0x1FF) is set in the third byte of the volume initial value for these notification sounds 6 and 7, they will always be played at the volume set by the initial value regardless of the player setting value.

Of the alert sounds 1 to 7, alert sound 6 (left-handed hit notification) and alert sound 7 (ball removal notification), which belong to the third alert group, may be included in the volume adjustment by the player without setting the third byte of the volume initial value to "1".

In addition, each process described in Figures 140 and 141 may be executed in the same manner not only during the execution period of the pattern change, but also in the state before the pattern change begins, or when notification processing is executed in response to state detection across the timing of the start and end of the pattern change.

In addition, in each process described in Figures 140 and 141, after the presentation progress notification process has ended, just as before the presentation progress notification process was started, when the player setting value is changed by operating the left presentation selection button 331 or the right presentation selection button 332, the output volume of the presentation sound (volume of the audible sound) is changed accordingly. Then, each time the output volume of the presentation sound (volume of the audible sound) changes, a volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "beep!") is played at the volume after the change.

In addition, the process described in FIG. 140 and the process described in FIG. 141 are different in the suppression mode of the performance sound during the period when the notification process under performance progress is being performed, but the suppression mode does not necessarily have to be different, and as mentioned above, the process may be performed to suppress the output volume of the performance sound (volume of the audible sound) in the same suppression mode when the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and when the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed.

In addition, in the performance progress notification process, the output volume (audible volume) of various game sounds is suppressed, but some of these game sounds, such as the sound (winning sound) played in response to a game ball entering the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004, may be played at the volume set to the initial value without being affected by the volume suppression. In other words, in this case, it becomes easier for the hall to understand whether or not the game is continuing despite the occurrence of an abnormal state in the pachinko machine 1. In this sense, it is desirable to play some game sounds, such as the sound (winning sound) played in response to a game ball entering the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004 when the performance progress notification process is being executed, as special sounds that cannot be output when the performance progress notification process is not being executed.

As mentioned above, in Figures 128 to 141, a channel-saving control structure is adopted that allows various types of alarm sounds to be used to appropriately notify of abnormalities and the like using only a single channel, thereby proposing technical measures to make it less likely that there will be a situation where there are no available channels (the number of available channels is zero). However, even when such a control structure is adopted, there is still concern that there may be a situation where there are no available channels to which sound effects (sound effects) are to be assigned (the number of available channels is zero), resulting in sound output patterns that are not intended in the performance design.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, various technical improvements are made to the channel allocation of the effect sounds before a situation occurs where there are no vacant channels (a situation where the number of vacant channels is zero). Various technical improvements made to the output of the effect sounds are explained below in order. Note that, when adopting these technical improvements in the pachinko machine 1, it is not necessary to adopt the above-mentioned channel saving control structure that allows the various notification sounds to appropriately notify abnormal contents and the like using only a single channel. Also, in each of the examples described below, either the fixed channel method or the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sounds and the effect sounds. Also, when the automatic channel method is adopted, it is not necessary to adopt the above-mentioned priority-based control, and a process of discarding new sounds may be performed when all channels are in use. Also, each of the examples described below can be implemented in appropriate combination.

[Suppressed operation sound output processing]
As mentioned above, in a gaming machine with a finite number of channels, even if a special result is obtained as determined by the determination means in response to a win, if there are no available channels to which sound data is to be assigned (the number of available channels is zero), the special sound corresponding to the special result cannot be assigned to a channel, and there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease due to the inability to output this sound.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when it is determined that a specific presentation pattern is to be executed as a pattern change according to the result of the jackpot determination, during the period from when the pattern change starts to when it ends, the game board side presentation display device 1600 performs a process of progressing the display presentation according to the specific presentation pattern, and also performs a process of assigning and playing the "BGM playback" sound corresponding to the specific presentation pattern to a specific channel. Then, when the display presentation on the game board side presentation display device 1600 progresses to a specific timing within the pattern change period, the "BGM playback" sound is left assigned to the specific channel and is output in a suppressed mode or silently (a state in which the volume of the "BGM playback" is reduced to a specific value and output), and in this state, when an operation on a specific operation means (such as the operation button 410) is detected, a special presentation sound that suggests the expectation that a jackpot pattern (a special display mode in the presentation pattern) will appear in the pattern change is output in a non-suppressed mode (suppressed operation sound output process). The expectation suggested by the special presentation may be 100%.

In this case, when the special sound effects are output in response to operation detection, the "BGM playback" sound remains assigned to the specified channel, but is output in a suppressed or silent manner, creating an atmosphere that suggests there is ample channel usage. This makes it possible to provide the player with an opportunity to operate the device to output the special sound effects without the anxiety that "maybe there are no available channels and I won't be able to output the special sound effects," thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Incidentally, when trying to leave a sound corresponding to a specific effect pattern (the "BGM playback" sound) assigned to a channel and output it in a suppressed or silent manner, it is generally assumed that a process of suppressing the volume of the sound assigned to the channel (the "BGM playback" sound) (a process of lowering the volume to a specific value) will be performed. In fact, if such a volume suppression process is performed prior to granting the player an opportunity to operate (generating a valid period for effect acceptance), it is possible to set the sound corresponding to the specific effect pattern (the "BGM playback" sound) to a state in which it is output in a suppressed or silent manner before granting the player an opportunity to operate (generating a valid period for effect acceptance).

However, as is well known, when a player is given the opportunity to operate, a valid period for the reception of effects is generated for a specified length of time, but the timing of when the operation (reception of effects) will occur within this valid period is indefinite (up to the player) and cannot be predicted in advance. Therefore, even if it is possible to terminate the volume suppression process and return the volume to its initial value when the operation (reception of effects) occurs within the valid period, it is not possible to store the "BGM playback" sound in advance so that a sound that matches this will begin playing at the indefinite timing when the volume is returned to its original value.

In addition to returning the volume when the player operates the device, it is also possible to switch the "BGM playback" sound data to "BGM playback dedicated to playing special effect sounds" sound data and play this. However, since the "BGM playback" sound is played in accordance with the contents of the various effects until a specific effect pattern is stopped and ended, and the timing of the stop of the symbols, etc., it is uncertain (up to the player) when the operation (effect acceptance) is performed during the valid period, and if the "BGM playback" sound were to be played anew in response to the operation (effect acceptance), there would be a so-called sound lag with the various effects and the timing of the stop of the symbols thereafter, which would be a concern as it would reduce interest in the game.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific presentation pattern is executed, first, a process is performed in which multiple sound data (e.g., sound data during normal fluctuation, sound data during the first half of the Super Reach presentation, sound data during the second half of the Super Reach presentation, etc.) stored as the "BGM playback" sound corresponding to the specific presentation pattern are sequentially assigned to a specific channel in the time series defined by the corresponding sound generation schedule data. Then, when a specific sound data (one sound material) among the multiple sound data stored as the "BGM playback" sound corresponding to such a specific presentation pattern is assigned to a specific channel in the time series defined by the sound generation schedule data, it is assigned to the specific channel and starts to be played from a timing before the effective period of the presentation reception occurs within the specific presentation pattern, and is played while maintaining the assigned state to the specific channel for a long period until a timing after the effective period ends.

In this regard, data contents are preset that stipulate that in a certain section (special period) of the specific sound data (one sound material) when viewed in a chronological order, sound output processing is performed in a suppressed manner or without sound compared to other sections, and when the specific sound data is assigned to a specified channel according to the chronological order stipulated by the sound generation schedule data, a chronological relationship is established in which the effective period of effect reception occurs within that certain section (special period). In addition, regardless of the timing of the player's operation within the effective period of effect reception that occurs within the special period (partial section), the special effect sound corresponding to the effect reception is played in an unsuppressed manner on a channel other than the specified channel to which the sound of "BGM playback" is assigned, across two sections in the specific sound data, from the special period (partial section) to the period after the special period (partial section) ends (other section).

With this configuration, it is possible to create a "state of output in suppressed mode or silence (special period)" without adjusting the volume from the initial value, simply by performing a process of sequentially assigning multiple sound data (e.g., sound data during normal fluctuations, sound data during the first half of the Super Reach performance, sound data during the second half of the Super Reach performance, etc.) stored as "BGM playback" sounds corresponding to specific performance patterns to predetermined channels in the chronological order specified by the corresponding schedule data for generating the sounds. Also, when a performance is accepted in the "state of output in suppressed mode or silence (special period)" created in this way, a highly immediate process is triggered by this to start playing the special performance sound in a non-suppressed mode, while the "BGM playback" sound being played on the predetermined channel is maintained in the "state of output in suppressed mode or silence (special period)" for a predetermined time, regardless of the performance acceptance. Then, while the special sound effects are being played, a portion of the specific sound data (one sound material) (suppressed or silent sound output) ends and the data content of the other portion (unsuppressed sound output) is played, blending in with the sound. This makes it possible to quietly return the "BGM playback" sound to unsuppressed output, providing a sound effect that doesn't feel out of place. In other words, in this case, when a player's operation is accepted for a sound effect while the "BGM playback" sound is being output in suppressed or silent mode, the special sound effects are triggered by highly immediate processing to start playing in unsuppressed mode, while still effectively avoiding any sound lag between the various effects and the timing of the stop of the symbols thereafter.

Figure 142 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when such suppressed operation sound output processing is performed. Below, with reference to Figure 142, a specific example of executing such suppressed operation sound output processing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 142(a), during the period in which the pattern change is being performed according to the result of the jackpot determination, at timing ts11, the sound of "BGM playback" according to a specific performance pattern being advanced on the game board side performance display device 1600 is assigned to playback channels 02 and 03 and is already being played (here, stereo playback). This "BGM playback" sound may be, for example, one sound data (one sound material) that is played based on sound generation schedule data for the entire period of the pattern change from the start of the pattern change to the end when it is decided that a specific performance pattern will be executed, or the entire period of the pattern change may be divided into multiple periods, and each separate sound data prepared for each period may be played sequentially based on the corresponding sound generation schedule data. In the example shown in FIG. 142, one sound data (one sound material) as the sound of "BGM playback" is assigned to channels 02 and 03 and is in a playback state for the entire period in the figure including timing ts11 (a part of the pattern change period).

In this regard, as shown in Figures 142(a) and (b), a piece of sound data (the "BGM playback" sound) that is assigned to channels 02 and 03 and in a playback state is set to a playback state in a section in which silent data content is set at time ts12, which is before time ts13, the timing of the operation valid period (valid period for performance acceptance) during which an operation opportunity that triggers the generation of a special performance sound occurs. This makes it possible to output the "BGM playback" sound silently while it is assigned to a specified channel, without adjusting the volume from the initial value.

With this configuration, at timing ts13, while the "BGM playback" sound is being played within a section set as silent data content, providing an atmosphere of ample channel usage, it is possible to generate an effective operation period (effective period for receiving effects) during which the player is given an opportunity to operate. This makes it possible to provide the player with an opportunity to operate to output special sound effects without the anxiety that "there may be no available channels and I may not be able to output the special sound effects," thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Moreover, the operation valid period according to this example ends at time ts15, which is before time ts16, when the partial section in which the sound of "BGM playback" is set as silent data content, so that the operation by the player is no longer accepted, even if there is no operation by the player. Therefore, no matter when the operation by the player is accepted during the operation valid period, the sound of "BGM playback" is in a playback state within the partial section in which the sound of silent data content is set, providing an atmosphere that suggests that the channel is in a relaxed state of use, and a special sound effect corresponding to the operation by the player can be generated. Note that the operation valid period ends not only when time ts15 arrives without any operation by the player, but also when the operation by the player is accepted. When time ts15 arrives without any operation by the player, a special sound effect may be generated in the same way as when the operation by the player is performed at that time.

In this explanatory example, it is assumed that at timing ts14, an operation by the player is accepted as a special effect, and based on this acceptance of the effect, a special effect sound is assigned to and played on channels 08 and 09, which are different from channels 02 and 03, to which the "BGM playback" sound is assigned.

In this regard, in this explanatory example, if the maximum time from the start to the end of the valid operation period (the time from timing ts13 to timing ts15) is "SY", and the time from when the valid operation period ends at this maximum time to the end of a section in which silent data content is set as the "BGM playback" sound (the time from timing ts15 to timing ts16) is "BF", then no matter when the player's operation is accepted during the valid operation period, the special effect sound is assigned to channels 08 and 09 for a fixed time of "SY + α (> BF)" and played.

According to this configuration, no matter when the player's operation is accepted during the operation valid period, the timing ts16 always arrives when the special effect sound is being played, so that the "BGM playback" sound can be output in an unsuppressed mode by blending it in with the special effect sound. In other words, in this case, although the time from when the special effect sound starts to be played until the "BGM playback" sound is output in an unsuppressed mode varies depending on the timing at which the player's operation is accepted, the output period of the special effect sound functions as a buffer period for returning the "BGM playback" sound in an unsuppressed mode (a period during which the "BGM playback" sound is blended in with the special effect sound to make it difficult to notice that it has been returned in an unsuppressed mode), making it difficult to feel a sense of incongruity caused by not returning the "BGM playback" sound in an unsuppressed mode when the player's operation is accepted, and instead returning it after a predetermined time.

Then, after the "BGM playback" sound is restored as the data content (non-suppressed mode) of the BGM playback sound effect, when timing ts17 arrives, the playback of the special sound effect will end while the "BGM playback" sound is being played in a non-suppressed mode.

In the above example, the "timing at which the playback of the special sound effects starts" and the "timing at which the playback of the special sound effects ends" are each variable within the range indicated by the dotted arrows in accordance with the timing at which the player's operation is accepted, as shown in FIG. 142(b). However, no matter which timing these correspond to, it is clear that timing ts16 arrives when the special sound effects are in the playback state, and the normal section begins in which the data content (non-suppressed mode) of the sound effects for BGM playback is set as the "BGM playback" sound.

In the example shown in FIG. 142, in order to make it even less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable because the "BGM playback" sound is not restored in an unsuppressed state when the player's operation is accepted, but is restored after a certain period of time, it is desirable to set the initial volume value of the special sound effect to be larger than the initial volume value of the BGM playback in the normal section. With this configuration, while the special sound effect with its large initial volume value is attracting attention, the BGM playback sound can be quietly transitioned to the normal section playback state.

In the example shown in FIG. 142, when the operation by the player is accepted, a special sound effect is generated based on the acceptance of the operation, but the special sound effect may be generated based on the acceptance of the operation only when a specific condition corresponding to the variation pattern or the result of the big win determination is met. Even if the specific condition is not met, an operation valid period is generated at timing ts14, and when the operation by the player is accepted during the operation valid period, a predetermined sound effect (such as a failure sound effect) is played based on the acceptance of the operation. And, regardless of the timing of the operation during the operation valid period, it is desirable to have the BGM playback sound secretly transition to the normal section playback state while the predetermined sound effect (such as a failure sound effect) is being played, as in the example shown in FIG. 142.

However, instead of this, when a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is played, the playback time may be made shorter than when a special effect sound is played, and the BGM playback sound may be returned to the normal section playback state when the playback of the predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) has ended. In this case, regardless of the timing of the operation during the effective operation period, the timing at which the BGM playback sound is returned to the normal section playback state is set to arrive after the playback of the predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) has ended. With this configuration, a silent period (a period whose length varies depending on the operation timing) can be generated as a buffer period between the end of the predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) and the return of the BGM playback sound to the normal section playback state. In addition, if a revival effect with a high expectation level (which may be 100%) can be set to occur during this silent period, it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained.

Alternatively, when a specific sound effect (such as a failure sound effect) is to be played, the BGM playback sound may not be returned to the normal playback state, and the pattern change may be stopped in a failure mode. In this case, at timing ts12, the allocation of the BGM playback sound to channels 02 and 03 may be terminated, leaving these channels as vacant channels.

In addition, when a special sound effect is generated, it is desirable to also perform a moving effect in which a specified movable body is operated based on the effect reception, thereby reducing the level of attention to the BGM playback sound, in order to quietly transition the BGM playback sound to the normal playback state.

In the example shown in FIG. 142, the "BGM Playback" sound is silently output in some sections, but this is not limited to the above, and it is sufficient if the "BGM Playback" sound is output in a more subdued manner than the "BGM Playback" sound in other sections. Here, examples of a subdued manner include a manner in which the volume is relatively lowered, as well as a manner in which the vibration frequency of the speaker cone per unit time is reduced.

In the example shown in FIG. 142, by setting a time-series period in which the "BGM playback" sound data assigned to a specified channel is suppressed or silent, it is possible to create a state (special period) in which the "BGM playback" sound is output in a suppressed or silent state by simply playing it without adjusting the volume of the "BGM playback". However, it is not necessary to set a time-series period in which the "BGM playback" sound data assigned to a specified channel is suppressed or silent. For example, a volume adjustment may be performed at timing ts12 to lower the volume of the "BGM playback" sound to a specific value (which may be muted). In other words, in this case, even if the operation by the player is accepted as a performance at timing ts14, the process of increasing the volume of the "BGM playback" sound from a specific value (process of returning the volume to the initial value) is not performed in response to the acceptance of the performance. Then, if the specific performance condition is met, when the predetermined timing ts16 arrives, the volume of the "BGM playback" sound is increased from a specific value while the special performance sound is being played (returning the volume to the initial value). On the other hand, if the specific performance condition is not met, as in the above-mentioned other example, the volume of the "BGM playback" sound may be increased from a specific value while a specific performance sound (such as a failure performance sound) is being played (returning the volume to the initial value), or the volume of the "BGM playback" sound may be increased from a specific value (returning the volume to the initial value) when the playback of the specific performance sound (such as a failure performance sound) has ended, or the pattern change may be ended without increasing the specific performance sound (such as a failure performance sound) from a specific value.

In the example shown in FIG. 142, it is desirable to perform a restriction process that makes it difficult to generate new sound allocations to vacant channels at least over the period from a predetermined timing before the arrival of timing ts12 to timing ts16. Note that, as for such a restriction process, it is desirable to restrict specific game sounds that have nothing to do with whether or not a jackpot pattern appears in the ongoing pattern fluctuation, such as block winning sounds, reserved winning sounds, normal power performance sounds, and adjustment sounds, and not to newly assign these specific game sounds to a channel and not play them.

In addition, when it is decided to execute a specific effect pattern as a pattern change according to the result of the jackpot judgment, it is desirable to play a specific effect sound (preferably not music but sound effects or lines, so as not to overlap with the BGM sound) on a channel different from channels 02 and 03 before the arrival of timing ts12, and to output the BGM playback sound in a suppressed or silent state when timing ts12 arrives while the specific effect sound is being played. In other words, in this case, since the BGM playback sound blends in with the specific effect sound, it becomes difficult to notice that the BGM playback sound has been suppressed or silenced. It is desirable to end the playback state of the specific effect sound before timing ts14 (timing ts14 or before the timing ts14) when the special effect sound (or a specified effect sound) is output, in order to alleviate the anxiety of not outputting the special effect sound.

Here, the specific sound effects played on a channel other than channels 02 and 03 do not necessarily have to start playing before timing ts12 arrives, but may start playing after timing ts12 and before timing ts13. Even with this configuration, if the specific sound effects are output in a non-suppressed mode (normal mode) when the BGM playback sound is in a suppressed or silent mode, it becomes possible to make it appear that the BGM playback sound that was once in a "suppressed or silent mode" has been returned to a normal playback mode, making it difficult to notice that the BGM playback sound is in a suppressed or silent mode.

In addition, "the playback state of a specific sound effect is terminated before timing ts14 (timing ts14 or earlier) when a special sound effect (or a specified sound effect) is output" means that "the output of a specific sound effect is terminated based on the acceptance of an operation by the player during the valid operation period, or is automatically terminated at a specific timing within timings ts13 to t15 (valid operation period)." In other words, if no operation by the player is accepted before the specific timing within timings ts13 to t15 (valid operation period) arrives, the specific sound effect will be automatically terminated.

In addition, if it is decided that a specific effect pattern will be executed as a pattern change according to the result of the jackpot determination, it is desirable to output the effect sounds on multiple channels during the period from timing ts14 when the special effect sound (or a predetermined effect sound) is output to timing ts16 when the state in which the BGM playback sound is suppressed or silenced ends. In other words, in this case, since multiple effect sounds including the special effect sound are output, it becomes possible to easily blend the BGM playback sound into these effect sounds, and it becomes possible to secretly transition the BGM playback sound to a normal playback state.

For the operation valid period (timings ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 142, even if no operation is performed, the performance acceptance may occur (automatic acceptance) within the valid period, and a post-operation performance (playback of a special performance sound) may be executed.

Also, when the operation valid period (timings ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 142 occurs, while the sound of "BGM playback" is output in a suppressed or silent manner, a "reception permission sound" that indicates that the performance reception has been permitted (or that the performance reception will be permitted) may be output in a non-suppressed manner. The "reception permission sound" may be configured as a partial section of the "specific sound data" for outputting the above-mentioned "specific performance sound", and may be output by allocating the "specific sound data" to a channel. That is, in this case, the "specific sound data" is allocated to a channel before the operation valid period (timings ts13 to ts15) occurs, and a specific performance sound corresponding to this is output in a non-suppressed manner, and when timing ts13 arrives, the "reception permission sound" is output as a sound corresponding to the "specific sound data" allocated to the channel. Or, the "reception permission sound" is output from before timing ts13 to after timing ts13 so as to span timing ts13. It should be noted that the specific sound effect can be output as a premonition sound effect corresponding to a premonition sound effect (an effect that suggests that the valid period will occur soon) that is performed before the operation valid period occurs, and in this case, a "premonition sound playback section" and a "reception allowance sound playback section" are provided within one piece of sound data that is assigned to a channel so as to span before and after timing ts13. The "reception allowance sound" may be made non-output during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), or may be made non-output at timing ts15, but it is desirable to use this as an opportunity to make it non-output when a performance is accepted while it is in an output state.

In other words, the concept of "outputting an acceptance-permitted sound" here includes not only the new allocation of "sound data containing an acceptance-permitted sound" to a channel at time ts13, but also the arrival of a "playback section of the acceptance-permitted sound" in sound data that is already assigned to a channel at time ts13. Also, the concept of "making a non-output state" here includes not only the cancellation of the allocation of "sound data containing an acceptance-permitted sound" to a channel, but also the concept of maintaining the allocation of the sound data to a channel, but ending the "playback section of the acceptance-permitted sound" in the sound data and transitioning to a period in which the sound thereafter (including silent data) is played.

In addition, during the operation valid period (timings ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 142, regardless of when the performance request is accepted during that valid period, the special performance sound is played in an unsuppressed manner on a channel other than the specified channel to which the "BGM playback" sound is assigned until the elapsed time from when the performance request is accepted reaches the above-mentioned predetermined time value.

In this regard, when a performance is accepted during the operation valid period (timings ts13 to ts15), a special performance display corresponding to the performance acceptance will also appear as a display image on the performance display device 1600. However, it is preferable that the special performance display corresponding to the performance acceptance is not "continued in its execution state (visible state) until the elapsed time from the time when the performance acceptance was made reaches the above-mentioned predetermined time value," but rather "is made invisible when a predetermined timing in the performance pattern arrives, regardless of when the performance acceptance is made during the valid period." Note that the "predetermined timing in the performance pattern" can be, for example, a predetermined timing (for example, timing ts16) within a period after timing ts15 and before timing ts17, but it is preferable that the timing arrives before the timing when the output state of the special performance sound is terminated, even if the performance acceptance is made immediately after the operation valid period (timings ts13 to ts15) occurs. With this configuration, the processing related to the special effect sound must continue in an output state until a timing that arrives after timing ts16 when the "BGM Playback" sound returns in an unsuppressed manner, but the special effect display can be ended before the special effect sound, so that the performance after the post-operation performance can progress at a good tempo. In order to achieve this effect, it is important that the specific timing at which the special effect display is hidden is set to timing ts16 when the "BGM Playback" sound returns or a timing that arrives before said timing ts16.

With this configuration, when a performance request is accepted during the effective operation period (timings ts13 to ts15), based on the fact that the performance request has been accepted, "processing related to the special performance sound that continues to be output until the time elapsed from the timing at which the performance request was accepted reaches a predetermined time value" and "processing related to the special performance display that continues to be displayed until a predetermined timing within the performance pattern arrives" are each started in parallel.

For example, if the effect is accepted relatively early within the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the "processing related to the special effect display" of the post-operation effects will be executed for a relatively long period, but the "processing related to the special effect sound" of the post-operation effects will end when a predetermined time value has elapsed since the effect acceptance. In contrast, if the effect is accepted relatively late within the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the "processing related to the special effect display" of the post-operation effects will be executed for only a relatively short period, but the "processing related to the special effect sound" of the post-operation effects will be executed for a period until a predetermined time value has elapsed since the effect acceptance.

In other words, in this case, the operation valid period (timings ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 142 occurs when a specific presentation pattern is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination and the presentation content of the specific presentation pattern reaches a specific timing, and when a presentation is accepted within the special operation acceptance presentation (valid period), it functions to execute "processing related to a special presentation sound that continues to be output until the elapsed time from the timing at which the presentation was accepted reaches a predetermined time value" and "processing related to a special presentation display that continues to be displayed until the arrival of a predetermined timing within the presentation pattern."

According to this operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), if an operation is performed immediately after the valid period occurs, the execution state of the "processing related to special effect display" among the post-operation effects can be maintained for a long time, but in return, the end timing of the "processing related to special effect sound" among the post-operation effects will arrive at a relatively early stage. On the other hand, if the operation is not performed for a while after the valid period occurs and instead is performed at a later time, the end timing of the "processing related to special effect sound" among the post-operation effects can be made to arrive at a relatively late stage, but there is a disadvantage in that the execution state of the "processing related to special effect display" among the post-operation effects cannot be maintained for long.

In other words, during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), there is no operation timing that is most desirable for creating excitement in terms of the performance.
- In exchange for terminating the "special sound effect processing" earlier, do you want to enjoy the "special effect display processing" by prolonging the execution state of the "special effect display processing" (operating it early during the valid period)? Or
- Should I enjoy extending the time until the "special sound processing" is completed in exchange for shortening the execution state of the "special effect display processing" (operating it at a later stage during the valid period) or
Should we sacrifice the time that the "special effect display processing" is maintained in an execution state and the time until the "special effect sound processing" is completed, to achieve a balance overall (should we operate it neither too early nor too late within the valid period)?
It is possible to endow the effective period itself with such strategic operation presentation properties, thereby making it possible to provide an operation reception presentation that allows the player to select the operation timing according to his/her mood and that is unlikely to cause boredom.

In the above explanation, the "processing related to the special performance sound" and the "processing related to the special performance display" are performed as post-operation performances when the performance acceptance is made during the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15). However, the "processing to operate the specified performance movable body" may be further performed, or the "processing related to the special performance display" may be replaced with the "processing to operate the specified performance movable body". However, as with the above-mentioned "processing related to the special performance display", it is preferable that the "processing to operate the specified performance movable body" is performed so that "the operating state is terminated when a predetermined timing in the performance pattern arrives, regardless of when the performance acceptance is made during the effective period". Here, "terminating the operating state" means starting the process to operate the specified performance movable body in the operating state at the specified position to return it to its original position in the case of the performance in which the specified performance movable body is operated to a specific position.

In the above example, when a performance is accepted during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), a "process for displaying special performance (or a process for operating a predetermined performance movable body)" that continues to be executed until a predetermined timing in the performance pattern arrives, and a "process for special performance sound" that continues until the time elapsed from the timing of the performance acceptance reaches a predetermined time value are executed. However, even if the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, if the predetermined performance condition is not met (for example, if the jackpot judgment is lost or if the predetermined performance judgment is lost), the "process for displaying special performance (or a process for operating a predetermined performance movable body)" is not executed even if the performance is accepted within the operation acceptance performance, and it is more desirable to execute the "process for special performance sound" with a relatively short "predetermined time value" compared to when the predetermined performance condition is met (FIG. 142) as a different performance sound.

However, even if an operation is performed during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), it may not be detected properly (detection error), and the effect may not be accepted. As a result, if the valid period ends without the effect being accepted, there is a concern that the interest of the player in the game may decrease when he or she sees that the "processing related to the special effect display (or the processing for operating a specified effect movable body)" is not performed despite the operation. Therefore, it is desirable to automatically generate (automatically accept) the operation acceptance during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) so that the "processing related to the special effect display (or the processing for operating a specified effect movable body)" that continues to be executed until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives, and the "processing related to the special effect sound" that continues until the elapsed time from the timing of the effect acceptance reaches a predetermined time value are each executed. As the method for automatically generating (automatically accepting) the operation acceptance and the related effect mode, any of the examples described above or below, or an appropriate combination, can be used.

As mentioned above, during the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) that occurs while the "BGM playback" sound is suppressed, if a performance is accepted when the reception permissible sound is in an output state in an unsuppressed manner, a post-operation performance is executed based on the performance acceptance, and the output state of the reception permissible sound is released at this point. In this regard, even when a normal effective period occurs during which the "BGM playback" sound is not suppressed, the reception permissible sound is put into an output state in an unsuppressed manner upon the occurrence of the normal effective period, but it is desirable that the output state of the reception permissible sound is not released and is continued even if a performance is accepted when the reception permissible sound is in an output state. In addition, it is desirable to use the reception permissible sound output during the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) as a performance sound that can continue to be played for a longer period of time than the reception permissible sound output during the normal effective period, in order to maintain interest in the game even while the "BGM playback" sound is suppressed.

In addition, in the valid period that occurs when the sound of the BGM playback is in a suppressed or silent state, there are N types (modes) of the acceptable sound that indicates that the valid period will occur (or that the valid period has occurred), and one of these types is always output (output in a non-suppressed mode). In contrast, in the valid period that occurs when the sound of the BGM playback is in a non-suppressed and normally output state, it is desirable to prepare only M types (modes) of the acceptable sound that indicates that the valid period will occur (or that the valid period has occurred), which is fewer than N, and to have "a case where one of these types is output (output in a non-suppressed mode)" and "a case where the sound data including the acceptable sound that is not output by any of these types is itself not assigned to a channel and generates the valid period." It is also desirable to suggest that "the expectation of the appearance of a jackpot pattern differs" depending on the type of acceptable sound.

Alternatively, multiple types (modes) of acceptable sounds are prepared for both the valid period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in a suppressed or silent state and the valid period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in a non-suppressed state and output in the normal manner, and it is desirable that the rate at which acceptable sounds with a high probability of winning appear is relatively high in the valid period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in a suppressed or silent state and is relatively low in the valid period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in a non-suppressed state and output in the normal manner. In this case too, during a valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is in a suppressed or silent state, an acceptance permission sound indicating that the valid period will occur (or that the valid period has occurred) is always output (output in a non-suppressed manner), whereas during a valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is in a non-suppressed and normally outputted state, it is desirable that there be cases where the acceptance permission sound indicating that the valid period will occur (or that the valid period has occurred) is "output in a non-suppressed manner" and "where the sound data including the acceptance permission sound itself is not assigned to a channel and is not outputted."

According to these configurations, when the BGM playback sound is in a state where it is normally output in a non-suppressed mode, the expectation level suggested by the acceptable reception sound cannot be recognized in detail (M types, which is less than N), and the expectation level cannot be expected very much (relatively low). However, in this case, since the BGM playback sound is normally output in a non-suppressed mode, there is a possibility that the acceptable reception sound may be missed due to the BGM playback sound, and even if it is missed, it is possible to be aware of the possibility that the acceptable reception sound itself was not output. In contrast, when the BGM playback sound is in a state where it is output in a suppressed mode or silent mode, in a situation where it is possible to highlight the sound output in a non-suppressed mode, the acceptable reception sound is always output in a non-suppressed mode, so that the expectation level suggested by this can be looked forward to. In addition, when either (or both) of these modes are adopted, the types of acceptable sounds that can be output when the "valid period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in a suppressed mode or silent state" occur may include at least one of the types of acceptable sounds that can be output when the "valid period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in a non-suppressed mode and is normally output" (e.g., the type of acceptable sounds with the lowest expectation of a jackpot). However, it is desirable that the acceptable sounds that can be output when the "valid period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in a non-suppressed mode and is normally output" also include a type that cannot be output as an acceptable sound that can be output when the "valid period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in a suppressed mode or silent state" occurs (e.g., the type of acceptable sounds with the highest expectation of a jackpot). In addition, it is desirable to make the number of effect types that can appear as post-operation effects in response to the performance reception during the "effective period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in a state where it is normally output in a non-suppressed mode" greater than the number of effect types that can appear as post-operation effects in response to the performance reception during the "effective period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in a suppressed mode or silent mode." The effect types that can appear as post-operation effects in response to the performance reception during the "effective period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in a state where it is normally output in a non-suppressed mode" may include at least one of the effect types that can appear as post-operation effects in response to the performance reception during the "effective period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in a suppressed mode or silent mode."

In addition, in the normal game mode in which neither the time-saving function nor the probability fluctuation function is operating, in both the valid period that occurs when the sound of the BGM playback is in a suppressed or silent state, and the valid period that occurs when the sound of the BGM playback is in a non-suppressed state and is output normally, if multiple types (modes) of acceptable sounds with different jackpot expectations are prepared as acceptable sounds, a special acceptable sound that, when output, "increases the probability of stopping on a jackpot pattern to 100%" may be output in both of those valid periods. Note that multiple types (modes) of special acceptable sounds may be prepared.

In other words, in this case, when the special reception permission sound is output (non-suppressed mode) upon the occurrence of "an effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is in a suppressed mode or silent state," the post-operation performance that is performed based on the performance acceptance being made within the effective period will also be executed in a special mode in which "the rate at which the winning symbol stops will be 100%" when it appears. If a performance acceptance is made while the special reception permission sound is being output, it is desirable to interrupt the output of the special reception permission sound, and output a special performance sound that "makes the rate at which the winning symbol stops will be 100%" when it is output.

However, when a special reception permission sound is output (in a non-suppressed mode) upon the occurrence of an "effective period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in a non-suppressed mode and is output normally," it is desirable that, as a post-operation performance that is performed based on the performance reception being performed within the effective period, when it appears, it is executed in a special mode in which the probability of stopping at a jackpot pattern is 100% when it appears, and when it is not executed in the special mode. Note that the special reception permission sound output upon the occurrence of an "effective period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in a suppressed mode or silent mode" and the special reception permission sound output upon the occurrence of an "effective period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in a non-suppressed mode and is output normally" may be different types of reception permission sound. In addition, there are multiple types of special reception permission sounds output upon the occurrence of an "effective period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in a non-suppressed mode and is output normally," and among these types, there may be one that is the same as the type of special reception permission sound output upon the occurrence of an "effective period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in a suppressed mode or silent mode" and one that is different from that type. When a performance is accepted while a reception permission sound (including a special reception permission sound) is being output, it is desirable to interrupt the output of the reception permission sound and output a performance sound corresponding to the post-operation performance (if the post-operation performance is performed in a special manner, a special performance sound that, when output, "increases the probability of stopping on a jackpot pattern to 100%)).

According to this configuration, when the BGM playback sound is in a suppressed or silent state (when mishearing is unlikely), if the special reception permission sound is output, the post-operation performance based on the performance acceptance within the valid period will always be executed in a manner that "the rate at which the ball is stopped at a winning symbol will be 100%". In contrast, when the BGM playback sound is output normally in a non-suppressed state (when mishearing is likely to occur due to conflict with the BGM playback sound), even if the special reception permission sound is output, the post-operation performance based on the performance acceptance within the valid period will not necessarily be executed in a manner that "the rate at which the ball is stopped at a winning symbol will be 100%". This makes it possible to have doubts as to whether the reception permission sound was output as a "special reception permission sound" (doubts as to whether it was misheard), and makes it possible to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner. This allows the emphasis to be placed on "how not to miss the acceptance permission sound" while the sound of the BGM playback is being output normally in a non-suppressed manner, and the sense of tension until the acceptance permission sound is output can also be appropriately maintained. In order to increase this sense of tension, in an operation acceptance performance in which "a special acceptance permission sound is output and the post-operation performance is not executed in a manner in which "when it appears, the rate at which it stops on a winning symbol becomes 100%", compared to an operation acceptance performance in which "a special acceptance permission sound is output and the post-operation performance is executed in a manner in which "when it appears, the rate at which it stops on a winning symbol becomes 100%", the premonition performance (pre-operation permission related display and pre-operation permission related sound) is executed in a relatively short time so that the effective period occurs suddenly.

In addition, in a state where the sound of BGM playback is output normally in an unsuppressed mode (when there is a situation where mishearing is likely to occur due to conflict with the sound of BGM playback), the operation acceptance performance (valid period) in which "the special reception permission sound is output and the post-operation performance is not executed in a manner where "when it appears, the rate at which it stops at a jackpot pattern becomes 100%"" and the operation acceptance performance (valid period) in which "the special reception permission sound is output and the post-operation performance is executed in a manner where "when it appears, the rate at which it stops at a jackpot pattern becomes 100%"" may be output as different types of reception acceptance sounds, or may be output as the same type of reception acceptance sound. Also, in a state where the sound of BGM playback is output normally in an unsuppressed mode (when there is a situation where mishearing of the reception permission sound is likely to occur due to conflict with the sound of BGM playback), the operation acceptance performance (valid period) in which "the special reception permission sound is output and the post-operation performance is executed in a manner where "when it appears, the rate at which it stops at a jackpot pattern becomes 100%"" may not necessarily occur. Also, in an operation acceptance performance (valid period) in which "a special acceptance permission sound is output and the post-operation performance is not executed in a manner in which "when it appears, the probability of it stopping at a jackpot pattern becomes 100%", no matter what type of acceptance permission sound is output, the post-operation performance will not be executed in a manner in which "when it appears, the probability of it stopping at a jackpot pattern becomes 100%, and this manner may not be prepared in the first place.

In addition, during the operation effective period (timings ts13 to ts15) that occurs while the sound of "BGM playback" is suppressed and during the normal effective period, an image display imitating the operating means used as the operation target and a gauge display showing how much effective time remains are displayed, and an operation promotion effect is performed to encourage the player to operate. In this regard, at least during the operation effective period (timings ts13 to ts15) that occurs while the sound of "BGM playback" is suppressed, if an effect is accepted, it is desirable to leave the gauge display (displayed) and start "processing related to special effect display that continues to be executed until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives (or processing to operate a predetermined effect movable body)" and "processing related to special effect sound that continues until the elapsed time from the timing of the effect acceptance reaches a predetermined time value". With this configuration, it becomes possible to recognize which timing within the effective period the timing of the effect acceptance is based on the remaining gauge remaining as a display after the effect acceptance, and this makes it possible to predict whether the processing related to the special effect display (or processing to operate a predetermined effect movable body) will end soon. As a method for starting the post-operation performance while leaving the gauge display (bar display) in this way, any of the examples described above or below, or an appropriate combination, or even the contents described in the footnotes, can be used.

In the above example explanation, it is desirable to set the number of effect patterns prepared (stored) as "specific types of effect patterns" that output the "BGM playback" sound in a suppressed or silent manner to be less than the number of effect patterns prepared (stored) as "other effect patterns" that do not output the "BGM playback" sound in a suppressed or silent manner, in order to increase the interest in the game when the effect in question occurs.

In addition, when multiple presentation patterns are prepared as "presentation patterns" that output the "BGM playback" sound in a suppressed or silent manner, it is desirable that these presentation patterns include a presentation pattern in which the "BGM playback" sound is output in a suppressed or silent manner for a first set time and a presentation pattern in which the "BGM playback" sound is output in a suppressed or silent manner for a second set time that is longer than the first set time, and that the expectation of the appearance of a jackpot symbol differs between these presentation patterns. With this configuration, when a state in which the "BGM playback" sound is output in a suppressed or silent manner is reached, the expectation of a jackpot can be suggested depending on how long this state continues.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a process can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a) to change the volume setting (volume setting value) set by the player by operating the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). Then, when the volume setting value is changed in a state where the pattern change is not being performed (such as a demo state), the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process to adjust the volume of the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (process to reflect the volume setting value as the volume). At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, even when the pattern change is being performed, it is possible to execute a process for changing the set value (volume setting value) for the volume by the player, but it is desirable to always prevent the volume adjustment confirmation sound from being output even if the volume setting value is changed when the pattern change is being performed. In other words, in a pachinko machine 1 that allows the selection of a "performance pattern in which the sound of BGM playback is output in a suppressed or silent manner," if the volume adjustment confirmation sound is always not output during the pattern change regardless of the performance pattern, a player who sees that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output will become aware of the possibility that a "volume suppression performance" is being performed, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition. In this case, it is desirable to have the performance display device 1600 display an indication that the volume setting value has been changed, in order to make the player aware of the situation in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound is no longer being output (to be aware of the possibility that a "volume suppression performance" is being performed). "Do not output volume adjustment confirmation sound" means that the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself is assigned to a channel but output at a volume of 0, or the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself may not be assigned to a channel.

It is desirable to configure the special sound effect that is output based on the performance acceptance being made when the sound of the BGM playback is suppressed or silent to maintain its output state for a time that is at least twice the effective operation period (timings ts13 to ts15). With this configuration, even if the performance acceptance is made immediately after the effective operation period (timings ts13 to ts15) occurs, it is possible to make the output time (special sound effect) after timing ts15 has passed longer than the output time (special sound effect) up until timing ts15.

[Gaming machine equipped with multiple performance operation units]
In the above, a gaming machine is described in which the game machine is provided with the game machine operation unit 400 that can be operated by the player and can present the game machine operation image to the player, but in the following, a gaming machine that can further increase the player's motivation to operate the game machine will be described with reference to Figs. 143 to 165. The game machine operation unit is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

Figure 143 is a front view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword effect operation unit 5000. Figure 144 is a right side view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword effect operation unit 5000. Here, the sword effect operation unit 5000 disposed in the door frame 3 of the gaming machine 1 described above is described, and the same reference numerals are used for components similar to those described above, and explanations will be omitted as appropriate.

The sword performance operation unit 5000 is installed on the front of the door frame 3 on the right side when viewed from the front. The sword performance operation unit 5000 constitutes a sword ornament 5001 consisting of a sword section 5010 having a blade section 5011, a handle section 5012, and a tsuba section 5013 sandwiched between the blade section 5011 and the handle section 5012, and a sheath section 5020 capable of housing the blade section 5011 of the sword section 5010.

The sword ornament 5001 is mounted on the door frame 3 so that the sheath 5020 can move left and right when viewed from the front. The sword 5010 is also mounted so that it can move in the unsheathing direction and the sheathing direction. The sword 5010 is normally in a sheathed state with the blade 5011 sheathed in the sheath 5020, and in the unsheathing performance, the blade 5010 is in an unsheathed state where the blade 5011 is visible to the player through the unsheathing action. The unsheathed sword 5010 can then function as an operating means that accepts a sheathing operation by the player and returns to the sheathed state.

Now, referring to FIG. 145, we will explain the opportunity to execute the unsheathing effect involving the movement of the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration 5001). FIG. 145 is a diagram showing an example of a selection table for effect patterns in an effect mode in which the unsheathing effect can be executed, showing (A) an example of a selection table for selecting whether or not to execute the unsheathing preparation transition effect according to the type of movement pattern, and (B) an example of a selection table for selecting whether or not to execute the actual unsheathing effect.

The performance patterns described here include a pattern in which the actual unsheathing performance is performed after the preparation for unsheathing transition performance is executed, a pattern in which the actual unsheathing performance is performed without a preparation for unsheathing transition performance being performed beforehand, a pattern in which the actual unsheathing performance is not performed even though a preparation for unsheathing transition performance has been performed beforehand, and a pattern in which neither the preparation for unsheathing transition performance nor the actual unsheathing performance is performed. Furthermore, there are two patterns for the shape of the sword decoration 5001 in the actual unsheathing performance: a form with an aura component and a form without an aura component.

As shown in FIG. 145(A), the main control board 1310 determines whether or not to execute the sword-drawing preparation transition effect depending on the type of variation pattern transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the multiple types of variation patterns are classified into a big win variation pattern for a big win, a small win variation pattern for a small win, and a miss variation pattern for a miss, and the more advantageous the variation pattern is for the player, the higher the probability of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect being executed is set. Specifically, the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed with a 50% probability when the big win variation pattern is used, with a 30% probability when the small win variation pattern is used, and with a 20% probability when the miss variation pattern is used. Note that the probability of the miss variation pattern may be changed depending on the presence or absence of a reach effect so that the probability of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect being executed is higher when a reach effect is performed than when it is not performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(B), whether or not the main unsheathing effect will be executed is selected by lottery depending on the type of fluctuation pattern and the presence or absence of the unsheathing preparation transition effect. Even if the type of fluctuation pattern is the same, if the unsheathing preparation transition effect is executed, the probability of the main unsheathing effect being executed is set to be higher than when the unsheathing preparation transition effect is not executed. Also, the more advantageous the fluctuation pattern is for the player, the higher the probability of the main unsheathing effect being executed. Here, even if the fluctuation pattern is less advantageous, the probability of the main unsheathing effect being executed is set to be higher when the unsheathing preparation transition effect is executed. Specifically, when the unsheathing preparation transition effect is executed in the fluctuation pattern for miss fluctuation, the probability of the main unsheathing effect being executed is higher than when the unsheathing preparation transition effect is not executed in the fluctuation pattern for small win fluctuation. Note that in the case of the fluctuation pattern for big win fluctuation, the main unsheathing effect is always executed regardless of the presence or absence of the unsheathing preparation transition effect.

In addition, when the main sword unsheathing effect is executed, a sword preparation transition effect is executed beforehand, and the more advantageous the variation pattern is for the player, the higher the probability that the main sword unsheathing effect with an aura component will be executed. Note that in this case, the main sword unsheathing effect with an aura component will not be selected in the case of a variation pattern for a small win.

(State transitions and aura component movements caused by the unsheathing of the sword decoration)
Next, the unsheathing action of the sword decoration 5001 in the unsheathing performance (the sword preparation transition performance and the actual unsheathing performance) will be described with reference to Figures 146 to 149. In addition, the action of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described for the case where the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword section 5010 (sword blade section 5011) itself that can accept the player's sword sheathing operation, and the sword section 5010 is transformed by its own constituent member (aura member 5030) (Figures 146 and 147), and the aura member 5035 is provided on the sheath section 5020 of the door frame 3 that stores the sword section 5010 (sword blade section 5011), and the sword section 5010 is combined with the member (aura member 5035) on the door frame 3 side to become an integrated decoration (Figures 148 and 149).

Figure 146 is a state transition diagram explaining the unsheathing operation of the sword accessory 5001 when the aura member 5030 is attached to the sword section 5010 (blade section 5011) itself, showing (A) the sheathed state, (B) the first unsheathing state, and (C) the second unsheathing state. Figure 147 is a vertical cross-sectional view explaining the operation of the aura member 5030. Note that Figure 147 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the blade section 5011 extracted from the sheath section 5020 to make the operation of the aura member 5030 easier to understand.

In the normal state, the sword decoration 5001 is in a sheathed state with the blade 5011 sheathed in the sheath 5020, as shown in FIG. 146(A). After the unsheathing action in the preparation-to-unsheathe transition performance, the sword decoration 5001 is in a first unsheathed state, as shown in FIG. 146(B), in which only the habaki 5011a part of the blade 5011 that is fitted to the hand is unsheathed from the sheath 5020 and visible to the player. Then, after the unsheathing action in the main unsheathing performance, the sword decoration 5001 is in a second unsheathed state, as shown in FIG. 146(C), in which the blade 5011 is further unsheathed from the sheath 5020 and most of it is visible to the player. Here, the sword decoration 5001 in the second unsheathed state can function as an operating means capable of accepting a sheathing action by the player.

The aura member 5030 provided on the blade 5011 is configured to be able to operate independently of the unsheathing action of the blade 5011. When the sword ornament 5001 is in the form with the aura member, the aura member 5030 moves the range of motion as much as possible (maximum movement) from a closed state (FIG. 147(A)) to an open state (FIG. 147(B)) inside the sheath 5020 when the blade 5011 changes from the sheathed state (FIG. 146(A)) to the first unsheathing state (FIG. 146(B)), and deforms the blade 5011. Therefore, the player can see the aura member 5030 even during the change process when the blade 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 changes from the first unsheathing state to the second unsheathing state (FIG. 146(C)). As will be described later, the aura member 5030 is positioned below the habaki 5011a of the blade 5011 even when fully extended, so the player cannot see the aura member 5030 in the first unsheathing state.

In the normal state (closed state), the aura member 5030 is enclosed in the blade 5011 as shown in FIG. 147(A). The aura member 5030 is provided below the blade 5011a of the blade 5011, and has a right aura member 5031, a left aura member 5032, and a pinion 5033 that meshes with the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031 and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. When the pinion 5033 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front by a driving means (not shown), the rotational force of the aura member 5030 is converted into linear motion in the right direction of the rack 5031a and the left direction of the rack 5032a, and as shown in FIG. 147(B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 each stop at a position (open state) where they protrude outward from the outer shape of the blade 5011.

In addition, an LED board 5011c having multiple LEDs is contained in the blade shaft 5011b below the habaki 5011a of the blade 5011. By emitting light from these LEDs, it is possible to illuminate and decorate the blade 50011 (aura member 5030).

Here, an example has been shown in which the timing of the movement of the aura member 5030 changes from a closed state to an open state when the sword decoration 5001 (sword section 5010) changes from the sheathed state to the first unsheathed state, and the movement of the aura member 5030 causes the sword body section 5011 to deform, and the sword decoration 5001 changes from the first unsheathed state to the second unsheathed state, but this is not limiting. The aura member 5030 may start moving (deforming) after the sword decoration 5001 reaches the second unsheathed state. It is sufficient that the sword decoration 5001 in the second unsheathed state reaches the final state (not limited to the state in which it moves to the maximum, but including a state in which it stops moving midway) based on the performance pattern set before it functions as an operating means.

Figure 148 is a state transition diagram explaining the unsheathing operation of the sword accessory 5001 when the aura member 5035 is attached to the sheath 5020, showing (A) the sheathed state, (B) the first unsheathing state, and (C) the second unsheathing state. Figure 149 is a vertical cross-sectional view explaining the operation of the aura member 5035. Note that Figure 149 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the state in which the blade 5011 has been extracted from the sheath 5020 to make the operation of the aura member 5035 easier to understand. Here, the same symbols are used for the same components as those in Figures 147 and 148 described above, and explanations will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in Figures 148 (A) to (C), the aura member 5035 provided on the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword section 5010 (blade section 5011) can move up and down, whereas the aura member 5030 provided on the sword section 5010 (blade section 5011) itself can move left and right. The aura member 5035 is provided to surround the outer periphery of the sword section 5011. When the sword ornament 5001 is in a form with an aura member, the aura member 5035 operates in accordance with the change in state of the sword section 5011 (sheathed state ⇔ first unsheathing state ⇔ second unsheathing state) while maintaining the relative positional relationship between the sword section 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the sheathed state. This allows the sword section 5010 (blade section 5011) to be combined with the frame side member (aura member 5035) to appear as a unified decorative piece.

The aura member 5035 in the normal state (fully housed state) is housed in the sheath 5020 as shown in FIG. 149(A). The aura member 5035 is arranged so that its upper end is below the habaki 5011a of the blade 5011 in the fully housed state, and has a hollow cylindrical surrounding aura member 5036 arranged to surround the outer periphery of the blade 5011, a right rack 5036a and a left rack 5036b arranged below the hollow portion of the surrounding aura member 5036, and a right pinion 5037a and a left pinion 5037b that mesh with the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, respectively. The right pinion 5037a of the surrounding aura member 5036 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a driving means (not shown), and the left pinion 5037b is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front. Both pinions are also engaged, and the rotational force is converted into linear upward motion of the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, and as shown in FIG. 149(B), the surrounding aura member 5036 stops at a position where it combines with the blade 5011 to form the second unsworded state. At this time, the aura member 5035 is in a fully-appearing state in which the surrounding aura member 5036 has moved to the upper limit of its range of motion (maximum movement).

Although not shown in the figure, the blade portion 5011 contains an LED board having multiple LEDs, making it possible to illuminate and decorate the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035.

Here, an example is shown in which the timing of the movement of the aura member 5035 combines with the blade part 5011 while maintaining a relative positional relationship according to the state change of the sword decoration 5001 (sword part 5010) (sword sheathed state ⇔ first drawn state ⇔ second drawn state), but this is not limiting. The aura member 5035 may start moving (combining) after the sword decoration 5001 enters the second drawn state. It is sufficient that the sword decoration 5001 in the second drawn state can reach the final state (not limited to the fully appeared state formed by maximum movement, but including the aura member-attached form in the halfway appeared state formed by stopping the movement midway) based on the performance pattern set before it functions as an operating means. In addition, the aura member 5035 may combine with the blade part 5011 so as not to be visible to the player when changing from the sheathed state to the first drawn state.

(Another presentation pattern 1 using the sword ornament 5001)
Next, with reference to Fig. 150 to Fig. 152, another reach performance using the sword decoration 5001 described above will be described. Fig. 150 to Fig. 152 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the performance display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword decoration 5001 in the princess reach performance. Here, the following points are the main differences from the sword decoration 5001 described above. First, the sword decoration 5001 in the sheathed state functions as an operation means, and detects the sword unsheathing operation by the player. Second, the sheath part 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the left and right directions when viewed from the front, and the sword decoration 5001 in the second unsheathing state can move up to the center of the front of the performance display device 1600.

When the changing pattern reaches a reach state, the changing display of the three decorative patterns reaches a reach state in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (Fig. 150 (A1)), and the start image of the princess reach is displayed (Fig. 150 (A2)). Here, a specific decorative member SDY (blind device) that can be moved up and down is provided above the display area of the performance display device 1600. In the normal state, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap the display area of the performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front, and is stationary above the display area in a state where part of the blind is visible to the player (initial state). Also, at this time, the sword decoration 5001 is in a sheathed state.

In the princess reach performance, an image of the princess moving towards the back of the blinds is displayed (Fig. 150 (A3)), and then an operation performance suggestion image suggesting an operation performance is displayed (Fig. 150 (B1)). Then, the operation performance of the sword decoration 5001 starts, and the effective operation period during which the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is accepted begins. At the same time, an operation prompting image encouraging the player to unsheathe the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the effective operation period are displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (Fig. 151 (B2)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 and/or the specific decorative member SDY may be moved up and down in small increments from the time the operation performance suggestion image is displayed until the time the operation prompting image and the gauge indicating the effective operation period are displayed. Then, when the unsheathing operation by the player is detected, a performance is performed according to a preset development pattern or end pattern.

The unsheathing operation by the player refers to the action of the player grabbing the handle 5012 of the sheathed sword decoration 5001 and lifting the sword 5010 upward to unsheathe the blade 5011 from the sheath 5020. When the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second unsheathing state, the unsheathing operation by the player is detected, and a detection notification action is performed to notify the player of the detection. The detection notification action may be any action that allows the player to sense an action other than the unsheathing operation through the handle 5012 that the player is holding, such as the movement or vibration of the sword 5010 (or the handle 5012) moving up and down. In addition, the detection notification action is performed for a certain period of time after the operation is detected, and the action can be visually confirmed even if the player releases the handle 5012. Therefore, the player can visually confirm the operation detection, which reduces unnecessary contact with the sword decoration 5001 (such as grabbing it again to confirm the detection) and prevents malfunction or damage to the movable body.

When the player draws the sword here, the aura member 5030 (5035) does not appear, but depending on the degree of expectation, the aura member 5030 (5035) may appear so that it is visible to the player when the player draws the sword.

When the end pattern is performed, when the unsheathing operation by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap the display area of the performance display device 1600, but remains stationary (initial state) above the display area, and a screen indicating the end of the operation performance by the sword decoration 5001 is displayed (Fig. 151 (C1)). Then, the decorative pattern is displayed stopped in the losing state "767" (Fig. 151 (C2)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is returned to the sheathed state when the stopping result of Fig. 151 (C2) is notified, but it may be returned to the sheathed state when the detection and notification operation ends.

On the other hand, when an advanced pattern is performed, when the player's unsheathing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is moved down to the front center where it overlaps with the display area of the performance display device 1600 (only the reserved display area below the display area is visible (fully fallen state) (Fig. 151 (D1)). Next, the shadow of the princess is projected in the display area of the performance display device 1600. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 maintains the second unsheathing state (Fig. 151 (D2)). Note that there may be multiple patterns of the princess's shadow projected in the display area of the performance display device 1600 at this time, and for example, the color or size of the shadow, or the comment displayed afterwards may be changed to suggest the expected degree of the lottery result due to the princess reach (such as the expected degree of winning or the gaming profit when a win occurs).

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the player has drawn the sword decoration 5001 into the second drawn state, i.e., since the shadow of the princess has been projected in the display area of the performance display device 1600, the sword decoration 5001 in the second drawn state moves to the center in the left-right direction of the front of the display area of the performance display device 1600 by moving the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (Fig. 151 (D3)). Then, when the sword decoration 5001 reaches the center of the front of the display area of the performance display device 1600, the specific decorative member SDY returns from the fully fallen state to its initial state, and an image of the princess being surprised that the blinds have been removed is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, which now has good visibility (Fig. 152 (D4)). After that, the sword decoration 5001 returns to the position where the original sword-drawing operation was performed, and in the display area of the performance display device 1600, if the result of this changing display is a hit, an image of the smiling princess is displayed to notify the winner (Fig. 152 (E1) (E2)), and if it is a miss, an image of the sad princess is displayed to notify the miss (Fig. 152 (F1) (F2)).

When the unsheathing operation by the player is detected, a detection notification operation is performed as described above, but if the player is unable to move the sword decoration 5001 when executing a moving performance in which the sword decoration 5001 moves to the center of the front left and right direction of the display area of the performance display device 1600 because the player is holding it, an announcement or display such as "Please release the sword" is made. The performance itself will proceed even if the player does not stop holding the sword decoration 5001, but if the sword decoration 5001 is held in the position where the player performed the operation at the timing of the left and right moving performance of the sword decoration 5001 (Fig. 151 (D3)), a delay will be caused in the left and right moving performance. However, regardless of whether the left and right moving performance of the sword decoration 5001 is executed, the performance executed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 and the falling moving performance of the specific decorative member SDY (blind role object) are configured to proceed, so the progress of the game will not stagnate. In addition, the sword decoration 5001 may be configured to immediately perform a left-right movement effect when the player releases the sword decoration 5001, or it may be configured not to perform a movement effect.

In this way, in the princess reach performance, the specific decorative member SDY that suggested the operation performance (operation validity) of the sword decoration 5001 is dropped and moved by the unsheathing operation (up and down movement) of the sword decoration 5001 by the player, and the sword decoration 5001 itself, which was operated outside the display area of the performance display device 1600, can be moved forward (to the left of the operation position) of the performance display device 1600 by moving the sheath part 5020 provided on the door frame 3. In other words, based on the unsheathing operation by the player, the sword decoration 5001 itself can be moved to an operation position different from the operation position where the unsheathing operation was performed, which increases the operation value of the player and suppresses the decrease in the player's motivation to operate. In addition, since one operation means is configured to be able to operate in gradually different modes (up and down during operation, left and right after operation) by the operation by the player, a performance using multiple movable modes can be provided, and the operation value of the operation means can be increased compared to conventional operation means that have only one movable mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

The left-right movement of the sword decoration 5001 is performed by displacing it from an operating position outside the display area of the performance display device 1600 to an operating position in front of the display area of the performance display device 1600 for the purpose of performing an integrated performance with the performance image performed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 and the specific decorative member SDY (blind role), but this is not limited to this. For example, after performing the unsheathing operation with the sword decoration 5001 positioned in front of the display area of the performance display device 1600, a left-right movement performance may be performed in which the sword decoration 5001 is moved to the left (left end of the frame) so that it is outside the display area of the performance display device 1600. In addition, since the operation of the sword decoration 5001 by the player in this example is an up-and-down movement (the unsheathing movement of pulling the sword part 5011 up from the bottom), it is desirable that the movement of the sword decoration 5001 that is performed after the operation based on the operation be in a direction (such as left-right as in this example) different from the direction of the movement when the player operates it (up-and-down in this case).

When the player's unsheathing operation is detected, a detection notification operation is performed to notify the player of the detection via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player, so the player can accurately determine the timing of the operation end. The detection notification operation is performed for a certain period of time so that the player can visually confirm it, so unnecessary contact such as touching the operation unit again to confirm the detection can be suppressed. This prevents the player from continuing the operation, which could delay the movement performance of the sword decoration 5001 thereafter, or damage to the movable body due to unnecessary contact. Furthermore, if the movement performance cannot be executed due to contact with the sword decoration 5001 even after the detection notification operation, a warning such as an announcement is made to the player to remove his/her hand, and even contact with the operation means that was required to be operated during the operation valid period is prohibited after the detection notification operation ends, so the operation value of the operation means can be increased.

(Another presentation pattern 2 using the sword ornament 5001)
Next, with reference to Fig. 153 to Fig. 155, other reach effects using the sword decoration 5001 described above will be described. Fig. 153 to Fig. 155 are diagrams for explaining the screen transitions of the effect display device 1600, the state transitions of the operation button 410, and the motion transitions of the sword decoration 5001 in reach effects including the operation effects of the operation button 410 that are used in various ways. Here, a pattern ((A)(B)→N in the figures) in which an expectation suggestion effect is performed as the operation effect of the operation button 410, suggesting the expectation that the fluctuation during execution will result in a jackpot, and a pattern ((A)(B)→M in the figures) in which an operation effect of the sword decoration 5001 is suggested and developed as the operation effect of the operation button 410 will be described.

In this reach effect, when the variable display of the three decorative patterns reaches a reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (Fig. 153 (A)), first, the effective operation period during which pressing of the operation button 410 is accepted is started, and an operation promotion effect is performed to encourage the player to press the operation button 410 (Fig. 153 (B)). An image of the operation means to be operated (operation button 410) and the effective operation period are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 maintains its sheathed state. Then, when pressing of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset effect pattern.

First, in a pattern in which the expectation indication effect is performed by pressing the operation button 410, when the player's pressing of the operation button 410 is detected, an effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (Fig. 153 (N1)), and then an image suggesting the expectation of a jackpot is displayed (Fig. 154 (N2)). After that, the result of the current variable display (jackpot, miss) is notified (Fig. 154 (N3) or (N4)). Note that a pre-reading effect may be performed instead of an expectation indication effect for the variable display being executed. For example, instead of an image showing the expectation (Fig. 154 (N2)), a character that changes the pending display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be displayed.

In addition, in a pattern in which the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is suggested and developed by pressing the operation button 410, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect image is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, suggesting that an operation performance requesting the sheathing operation of the sword decoration 5001 will be performed (Fig. 153 (M1)). Next, an image of the start of the operation performance of the sword decoration 5001 (here, the title "Chance to draw the sword" and the operation explanation message "Please sheathe your sword") is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, and the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second drawn state. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is in a form with an aura member in which the blade part 5011 is deformed by the maximum operation of the aura member 5030 (Fig. 155 (M2)). Next, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the second unsheathing state and the effective operation period of the sword decoration 5001 has begun, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is moved up and down in small increments from its initial state, and an operation prompting image encouraging the player to sheathe the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the effective operation period are displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (Fig. 155 (M3)). Then, when the sheathing operation by the player is detected, a performance based on the results of this variable display is performed.

If the result of the current variable display is a jackpot, when the player's sheathing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is moved downward from the initial state to the fully fallen state (Fig. 155 (M4)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is returned to the initial state again, an image announcing a jackpot (the stopping state of the decorative pattern "777", the message "Well done") is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is released (Fig. 155 (M5)). On the other hand, if the result of the current variable display is a miss, when the player's sheathing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) only stops moving in small increments in the initial state, and an image announcing a miss (the stopping state of the decorative pattern "767") is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (Fig. 155 (M6)).

In this way, by pressing the operation button 410, a variety of effects are possible, such as suggesting the degree of expectation or developing an operation effect using another operating means (sword decoration 5001), and the player cannot determine the subsequent development at the time of operating the operation button 410. This can increase the player's interest in operating the operation button 410, and can prevent a decrease in motivation to operate and a decline in interest in the game, which is a concern due to the monotony of the effects after operation.

In addition, in a series of reach performances, the player is required to perform different operation modes (pressing operation and sheathing operation) between the first operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410) and the second operation (sheathing operation of the sword decoration 5001) based on the first operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410). This can increase the player's interest in participating in the operation, and can prevent a decrease in interest in the game, which is a concern due to the operation becoming monotonous and unchanging.

In this example, the operation button 410 is the valid operation means for the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (the operation of sheathing the sword decoration 5001) is given based on the pressing of the operation button 410, but this is not limited to this. The operation of sheathing the sword decoration 5001 may be the valid operation for the first operation opportunity. In this case, it is preferable that the operation means valid for the second operation opportunity targets the sword decoration 5001, rather than targeting the operation button 410, which has a relatively lower expectation than the first sword decoration 5001.

(Another Presentation Pattern 3 Using the Sword Decoration 5001)
Next, referring to Fig. 156 to Fig. 160, other reach effects using the sword decoration 5001 described above will be described. Fig. 156 to Fig. 160 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the operation transition of the sword decoration 5001 in the reach effect. Here, a pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → O in the figure) in which a big win occurs when the specific decoration member SDY (blind role) moves based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and a pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → (P1) to (P4) in the figure → Q when the opportunity to operate the sword decoration 5001 is given/R when the opportunity to operate the operation button 410 is given) will be described.

In this reach performance, when the variable display of the three decorative patterns reaches the reach state in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (Fig. 156 (A)), first, the start image of the operation performance of the operation button 410 (here, the message "One push of the button will move the movable body") is displayed (Fig. 156 (B)), and then the operation effective period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started, and an operation promotion performance that encourages the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is performed (Fig. 156 (C)). In the display area of the performance display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation effective period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 maintains the sheathed state. Then, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, a performance is performed according to a preset performance pattern. Note that the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is not limited to one hit (once), but may be repeated (multiple times). Also, to make it easier for the player to understand the object (movable object) that moves when operated, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) may be made to move in small increments up and down in the initial state during the effective operation period of the operation button 410. Also, if the sword decoration 5001 becomes the object of operation later, the state of the sword decoration 5001 may be changed from the sheathed state to the second unsheathed state at this point.

In a pattern where the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) moves to cause a jackpot, when the player's pressing of the operation button 410 is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is moved downward from its initial state to a fully fallen state (Fig. 157 (O1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY is returned to its initial state again, an image announcing a jackpot (the stopping state of the decorative pattern "777" and the message "Well done") is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) has been released (Fig. 157 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be made to vibrate.

In a pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) does not move, when the player's pressing of the operation button 410 is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) only stops its small movement and does not fall. Then, in the display area of the performance display device 1600, a decorative pattern in a miss mode ("767") is displayed swinging in the center of the screen (Figure 158 (P1)). After that, depending on the performance pattern that is set, the pattern will develop into either one in which the decorative pattern is displayed as it is in a miss mode ("767") (Figure 158 (P2)), or a revival pattern in which the reach state is restored again.

In the revival pattern, a revival start image (a samurai image saying "Not yet") is inserted into the display area of the performance display device 1600, indicating that the display is not yet finished, from the swinging display of the decorative pattern in the losing state of FIG. 158 (P1) (FIG. 158 (P3)), and the decorative pattern is again in a reach state and is displayed in a reduced size in the upper right corner of the screen, while an operation valid indication image (the face of an ally samurai with his eyes closed) in which either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is valid is displayed in the center of the screen (FIG. 158 (P4)). Then, as time passes, the eyes of the displayed samurai are enlarged, and the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is moved up and down in small increments from the initial state (FIG. 158 (P5)). This increases the player's sense of anticipation for the performance that will use the specific decorative member SDY (blind role). At this time, the operation button 410 may be illuminated in a high-speed flashing manner, or the sword decoration 5001 may be changed from the sheathed state to the first unsheathing state and moved up and down. Depending on the set performance pattern, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 functions as an effective operating means, and a specific decorative element SDY (blind device) is performed based on the pressing of the operation button 410 or the sheathing of the sword decoration 5001. The pattern in which the operation button 410 is the operation target is set to have a lower expectation than the pattern in which the sword decoration 5001 is the operation target.

When the operation button 410 is used as the operation means, an image of sweat trickling from the samurai's forehead in the operation validity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (operation button confirmation image) is displayed, and the operation button 410 is illuminated (Fig. 159 (R1)). Then, while the specific decorative member SDY (blind mechanism) continues to move in small increments and the operation button 410 is illuminated, the operation valid period of the operation button 410 begins, and an operation promotion performance is performed to encourage pressing the operation button 410 (Fig. 159 (R2)). The image of the operation means to be operated (operation button 410), the number of operations, and the operation valid period are displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600. Here, the operation button 410 is no longer illuminated when it has been operated the required number of times.

When the result of the variable display is a jackpot, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (curtain role) is moved from the initial state to a fully fallen state (Fig. 159 (R3)). At this time, the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the performance display device 1600 is displayed in a stopped state in the lower right corner of the screen so that it can be seen by the player. As described above (Fig. 155 (M4)), it is also possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the state of the decorative pattern at this point. Next, the specific decorative member SDY (curtain role) is returned from the fully fallen state to the initial state again, and an image announcing a jackpot (the stopping state of the decorative pattern "777" and the message "Well done") is displayed in the center of the screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (curtain role) has been released (Fig. 159 (R4)).

On the other hand, if the result of the varying display is a miss, when the player's pressing of the operation button 410 is detected, the small movement of the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is stopped, and the decorative pattern in the miss state ("767") is displayed frozen in the center of the screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (Figure 159 (R5)).

When the sword decoration 5001 is used as the operating means, an image (sword decoration confirmation image) is displayed in which the samurai, who had his eyes closed in the operation validity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, opens his eyes and his gaze becomes sharp, and the sword decoration 5001 changes from a sheathed state to a second drawn state with an aura component (Fig. 160 (Q1)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 may be decorated with a luminous effect. The player can tell from the image in the display area that the sword decoration 5001, not the operation button 410, is effective for operation, but at this point, the form of the sword decoration 5001, such as whether it is in a form with an aura component, can be known by actually looking at the sword decoration 5001. Next, while the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is moved in small increments, a predetermined period of time passes in the second unsheathing state, and the effective operation period of the sword decoration 5001 begins. In the display area of the performance display device 1600, an operation prompting image that encourages the player to sheathe the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the effective operation period are displayed (Fig. 160 (Q2)).

If the result of the current display is a jackpot, and the player's sheathing operation is detected, the same presentation transition as in Fig. 159 (R3) and (R4) described above will occur (Fig. 160 (Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, if the result of the display is a miss, and the player's sheathing operation is detected, the same presentation transition as in Fig. 159 (R5) described above will occur (Fig. 160 (Q5)).

In this way, the degree of expectation is suggested according to the state of the fall of the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) which is executed based on the pressing of the operation button 410, so it is possible to provide a more powerful indication of the degree of expectation than an indication of the degree of expectation based on an image, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. Furthermore, even if the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is not caused to fall based on the pressing of the operation button 410, the player is given another opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001. Since the degree of expectation can be suggested by the operation means which is given the opportunity to operate, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game, which is a concern due to the sameness and monotony of the operation presentation.

Note that although three examples of reach effects using the sword ornament 5001 are given in the above-mentioned Figures 150 to 160, various types of effects may be combined. This allows a wide variety of effects to be provided, further increasing the interest in the game.

(Shapes of sword ornaments)
The form of the sword ornament 5001 of this example will be described with reference to Fig. 161. The sword ornament 5001 up to now has two forms, a form with an aura member and a form without an aura member, but here, two forms are further provided in which the sword part 5010 is transformed by operating the handle part 5012.

Figure 161 is a diagram explaining the form of the sword decoration 5001 used in the pseudo-repeat performance. The sword decoration 5001 here is characterized in that it is capable of changing its form in two stages by the deformation of the handle 5012, and has an aura member 5040 that is provided inside the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 and appears visible to the player from the left and right sides of the sheath 5020. The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 like the aura member 5035 described above, but its operating mode is movable in the left and right directions like the aura member 5030 described above. Figures 161 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing the types of forms (stage changes) of the sword decoration 5001 in the sheathed state, and show, in order, stage 0 form to stage 3 form. The sword decoration 5001 takes one of the forms of stage 0 form to stage 3 form depending on the performance.

As shown in Fig. 161(A), the stage 0 form is a form in a normal state similar to Fig. 146(A) and Fig. 148(A) described above, and shows the initial form in which no movement is required for any of the components. As shown in Fig. 161(B), the stage 1 form shows a form in which the aura member 5040 appears on the outside of the side of the sheath 5012 by the movement of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 form. As shown in Fig. 161(C), the stage 2 form shows a form in which the handle 5012 spreads out from the center and moves so as to be divided into two parts to the left and right from the center from the stage 1 form, and the first decorative part 5012a appears from the inside. As shown in Fig. 161(D), the stage 3 form shows a form in which the second decorative part 5012b is further moved upward from the inside of the handle 5012 in the stage 2 form to form an integral decoration with the first decorative part 5012a. The stage 1 to stage 3 forms here allow the sword decoration body 5001 to change form without putting it into the second unsworded state. Furthermore, the sword section 5010, which can be operated by the player as the operating part of the operating means, and the sheath section 5020, which does not move, move together to form an integrated decorative body, providing a more impressive operating means.

(Pre-operation suggestion using specific decorative material SDY)
Next, referring to Figs. 162 to 165, a pre-operation suggestion effect executed before the operation effective period in which the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 becomes effective in the reach performance will be described. In the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to suggest whether the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 becomes effective among the multiple operation means by the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (blind role). Specifically, as suggestion patterns by the pre-operation suggestion effect using the specific decorative member SDY (blind role), there are a first suggestion pattern in which the operation effective period occurs in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is positioned at the initial position, and a second suggestion pattern in which the operation effective period occurs in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is moved from the initial position to the suggested position, and when the sword decoration 5001 (set to have a higher hit expectation than the operation button 410) becomes effective, the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. Specifically, when a pre-operation suggestion performance of a first suggestion pattern (FIG. 162(B)) that generates a valid operation period with the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) positioned at the initial position even during the valid operation period is performed, the sword decoration 5001 becomes valid for operation with a probability of 30%, and the operation button 410 becomes valid for operation with a probability of 70%. In contrast, when a pre-operation suggestion performance of a second suggestion pattern (FIG. 164(AA1)) that generates a valid operation period with the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) moved to the suggested position is performed, the sword decoration 5001 becomes valid for operation with a probability of 70% (including the step-up pattern), and the operation button 410 becomes valid for operation with a probability of 30%. Below, an example of a performance transition according to the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) in the first suggestion pattern and the second suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion performance will be described.

(First suggested pattern)
162 and 163 are diagrams showing an example of a reach effect transition in which a pre-operation suggestion effect of a first suggestion pattern is executed when it is determined by lottery by the peripheral control board 1510 that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is enabled for operation during the reach effect based on the variable effect (reach effect) of the variable pattern drawn by the main control board 1310. In this reach effect, when three decorative patterns reach the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 162(A)), a pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed before the effective operation period for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001, which has been determined in advance by lottery by the peripheral control board 1510 to be enabled for operation, is generated. As a specific effect of the first suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (aura rotation) that suggests that the operation means will be enabled is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation effective period is generated (Fig. 162 (B)), and at this time, the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) maintains its initial position. Also, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001.

Then, with the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) maintained in its initial position, an effective operation period is generated for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) that has been determined in advance to be effective for operation. In this example, when the operation button 5001 is effective for operation, the first suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the second suggestion pattern (described later) as a pre-operation suggestion performance. In other words, when the effective operation period occurs with the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) in its initial position, it is possible to suggest to the player that the operation button 410 is more likely to be effective for operation than the sword decoration 5001.

When the operation button 410 becomes operable, as shown in FIG. 162(C), an operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated with the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) maintaining its initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the performance display device 1600, an operation promotion performance is performed in which an operation promotion image that encourages the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. In addition, at this time, the operation button 410 is decorated with light so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. In addition, even when the sword decoration 5001 becomes operable, the pre-operation suggestion performance may be executed in the first suggestion pattern, although the rate is lower than that of the operation button 410. In that case, as shown in FIG. 162(D), an operation effective period for the sword decoration 5001 is generated with the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) maintaining its initial position. In addition, in the display area of the performance display device 1600, an operation promotion performance is performed in which an operation promotion image that encourages the player to sheathe the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 changes state from the sheathed state to the second unsheathed state (with aura member), allowing the player to sheathe the sword.

When an operation to a valid operating means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) is detected in the above-mentioned Figure 162 (C) or (D), if the result of the current variable display is a jackpot, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is moved downward from its initial state to a fully fallen state (Figure 163 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is returned to its initial state again, an image announcing a jackpot (the stopping state of the decorative pattern "777" and the message "Well done") are displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) has been released (Figure 163 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the current result of the variable display is a miss, the specific decorative member SDY (blind element) will remain in its initial state and will not move, and an image announcing a miss (decorative pattern stop state "767") will be displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (Figure 163 (CC3)).

(Second suggested pattern)
Fig. 164 is a diagram showing an example of a transition of a reach performance in which a pre-operation suggestion performance of a second suggestion pattern is executed when it is determined that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is enabled for operation during the reach performance, as in the first suggestion pattern described above. Note that Fig. 165 is a diagram showing a pre-operation suggestion performance of a step-up pattern in which the sword decoration 5001 does not become enabled for operation, but the operation button 410 becomes enabled for operation at one time, and then the sword decoration 5001 becomes enabled for operation, even though the second suggestion pattern is executed as a pre-operation suggestion performance.

As shown in FIG. 164 (AA1), the pre-operation suggestion performance of the second suggestion pattern is executed before the operation effective period occurs for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001, which have been determined in advance to be effective by lottery on the peripheral control board 1510. As a specific performance content of the second suggestion pattern, an operation performance suggestion image (rotating aura) suggesting that the operation means will be effective is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 before the operation effective period occurs. The operation performance suggestion image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first suggestion pattern, but in the second suggestion pattern, along with the display of the operation performance suggestion image, the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) moves from the initial position to a small drop state (suggested position) where it overlaps with the upper part of the display area of the performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front, and the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction between the initial position and the suggested position. At this time, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration.

Then, with the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) in the suggested position, an effective operation period is generated for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) that has been determined in advance to be effective for operation. In this example, when the sword decoration 5001 is effective for operation, the second suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern as a pre-operation suggestion performance. In other words, when the effective operation period occurs with the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) in the suggested position, it is possible to suggest to the player that the sword decoration 5001 is more likely to be effective for operation than the operation button 410.

When the sword decoration 5001 becomes available for operation, as shown in FIG. 164 (AA3), a valid operation period for the sword decoration 5001 is generated with the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) operating in the suggested position. At the same time, an operation promotion effect is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, in which an operation promotion image that encourages the player to sheathe the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the valid operation period are displayed. At this time, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second unsheathing state (aura-attached form), allowing the player to sheathe the sword. Also, even when the operation button 410 becomes available for operation, there is a low chance that the pre-operation suggestion effect will be executed in the second suggestion pattern. In that case, as shown in FIG. 164 (AA2), a valid operation period for the operation button 410 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is operating in the suggested position, and at the same time, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image that encourages the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the valid operation period are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. In addition, in the second suggestion pattern, when the player's operation is detected in the operation promotion effect, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is moved from the state in which it is operating in the suggested position to its initial state. Also, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) may be moved from the state in which it is operating in the suggested position to its full drop state or to its initial state without being returned to its initial state.

Then, when an operation on a valid operating means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) is detected in the above-mentioned FIG. 164 (AA2) or (AA3), similar to the above-mentioned FIG. 162 (C) or (D), if the result of this variable display is a jackpot, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is moved downward from its initial state to a fully fallen state (FIG. 163 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is returned to its initial state again, an image announcing a jackpot (the stopping state of the decorative pattern "777" and the message "Well done") are displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) has been released (FIG. 163 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of this variable display is a miss, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) remains in its initial state and is not moved, and an image announcing a miss (decorative pattern stop state "767") is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (Figure 163 (CC3)). The performance transition after the operation prompt performance is the same as the performance transition after the operation prompt performance in the first suggestion pattern.

The movement pattern of the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) in the second suggestion pattern may not only be a pattern in which it is moved to a suggested position, but may also include multiple movement patterns. For example, if multiple types of movement patterns are provided so that the proportion of times the sword decorative body 5001 is effective for operation differs, the player's interest in the movement can be heightened, thereby increasing the interest of the pre-operation suggestion performance and operation promotion performance using the specific decorative member SDY (blind role).

(Step-up pattern)
When a specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is operated to a suggested position and a pre-operation suggestion performance of a second suggestion pattern occurs in which an effective operation period is generated, and the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective for operation, in addition to the basic pattern that follows the performance transition of (AA1)->(AA3) in FIG. 164 described above until the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective for operation, a step-up pattern is provided in which the operation button 410 becomes effective for operation at one time and then the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective for operation.

As shown in Figures 165 (BB1) to (BB4), the step-up pattern pre-operation suggestion performance is executed before the operation effective period for the sword ornament 5001 that has been determined in advance to be operable by lottery on the peripheral control board 1510 occurs, that is, before the operation promotion performance for the sword ornament 5001 shown in Figure 164 (AA3) described above is executed.

In the step-up pattern, first, the operation performance suggestion image (aura rotation) similar to that of FIG. 164 (AA1) is displayed and the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is moved in small increments (FIG. 165 (BB1)). Next, with the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) moved to the suggested position, an effective operation period for the operation button 410 is generated. At the same time, the operation button 410 is illuminated and decorated, and an operation promotion performance is performed in which an operation promotion image that encourages the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the effective operation period are displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (FIG. 165 (BB2)). Here, even if the pressing of the operation button 410 by the player is detected during the effective operation period of the operation button 410, the result is not notified as shown in FIG. 163, and a switching suggestion image (mostly blacked-out image) that suggests switching the effective operation means is displayed (FIG. 165 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed when the player presses the operation button 410 or when the operation effective period of the operation button 410 ends. After that, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second drawn state (aura-attached form), and a switching notification image (messages such as "Chance to draw sword" and "Please sheathe your sword") is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 to notify that the operation effective means will be switched from the operation button 410 to the sword decoration 5001 (Fig. 165 (BB4)). During this time, the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is in a state of operating in the suggested position. Then, when the operation effective period of the sword decoration 5001 is generated, the operation promotion performance of the sword decoration 5001 shown in Fig. 164 (AA3) is performed. The performance transition after the operation promotion performance is the same as the performance transition after the operation promotion performance in the second suggestion pattern described above (Fig. 163).

Note that in the above-mentioned FIG. 165 (BB2), the button operation 410 may not be enabled (no operation promotion effect) and only an image of the button operation 410 may be displayed. It is sufficient to first direct the player's attention to the button operation 410 and then have the player operate the sword decoration 5001. Also, the step-up pattern may be selectable not only when the second suggestion pattern is reached, but also when the first suggestion pattern is reached.

In this way, in the pre-operation suggestion performance of this example, the position of the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) can be changed before the effective operation period of one of the multiple operating means is generated, and the position suggests the operating means that is to be effective. Specifically, in the first suggestion pattern (Fig. 162 (B)) in which the effective operation period is generated when the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is in the initial position, there is a high expectation that the operation button 410 will be effective, and in the second suggestion pattern (Fig. 164 (AA1) in which the effective operation period is generated when the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is in the suggested position, there is a high expectation that the sword decoration 5001 will be effective. For this reason, the player focuses on the state of the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) to understand which operating means will be effective, which can increase the interest of the pre-operation suggestion performance.

In the second suggestion pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) moves up and down in small increments in the pre-operation suggestion performance. The movement performance (falling performance) of the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is also used in the result notification after the operation of the operation means (Fig. 163), so the fall performance can be made to look like a series of performances from the small up and down movements of the pre-operation suggestion performance, and the decline in interest in the game can be suppressed. Note that, in the above, the state of the specific decorative member SDY (blind role), that is, the expectation that the operation means that is enabled for operation by the movable body will be enabled for operation, is shown, but this is not limited to this, and the expectation may be suggested by displaying a character during the pre-operation suggestion performance. In addition, when the operation means that is enabled for operation is decided, not only the operation button 410 is lit or the sword decoration 5001 is changed to the second unsword state, but the operation means that is enabled for operation may be moved by vibration or the like.

The second suggestion pattern also includes a step-up pattern in which the operation button 410 becomes operable once (or appears to become operable) when the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is in the suggested position, and then the sword decoration 5001 becomes operable. This allows the player to become interested in both operation means. Even if the operation button 410 becomes operable immediately after the pre-operation suggestion performance, the player can have hope that the sword decoration 5001 may become operable afterwards, which prevents a decline in willingness to operate and a decline in interest in the game.

In the first suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion performance, at the timing when an operation performance suggestion image is displayed before the operation effective period in which any of the multiple operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) is enabled for operation (Fig. 162 (B)), similarly to the second suggestion pattern (Fig. 164 (AA1)), the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) may be moved from the initial position to a small drop state (suggested position) that overlaps with the upper part of the display area of the performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front, and may be moved slightly up and down between the initial position and the suggested position. In addition, when the operation effective period is generated after that, the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) is returned to the initial position (stationary). As a result, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (blind role) in the first suggestion pattern is partially the same as the operation in the second suggestion pattern at the same timing, so that even when the operation performance suggestion image according to the first suggestion pattern is displayed to the player, it is possible to make the player believe that the pre-operation suggestion performance of the second suggestion pattern is being executed. For this reason, even when a pre-operation suggestion performance based on the first suggestion pattern is being executed, it is possible to make the player expect that the sword decoration 5001 will be effective for operation. And since the player strongly desires that the effective operation period occur with the specific decoration member SDY (blind role), which is operated at the timing when the operation performance suggestion image is displayed, being operated to the suggested position, the interest of the pre-operation suggestion performance can be increased.

[Specific operation-related effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained in the performance judgment according to the result of the jackpot judgment, the performance is executed in a specific performance pattern on the game board side performance display device 1600. In the performance period in which the specific performance pattern is executed, a specific performance acceptance period (valid period) in which a specific performance execution condition is established by an operation by the player can be generated, and when an operation is performed within the specific performance acceptance period, a specific operation-time performance (such as a performance that suggests the expectation of the award) can be executed based on the establishment of the specific performance execution condition. The expectation of the award suggested as a result of the specific operation-time performance may be 100% or 0%.

Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the operation button 410, another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001) can be provided as an operation means for such an operation-time performance (such as a performance in which the expectation of the bonus is suggested when the operation is performed). In this regard, in a specific performance pattern, based on the result of the performance judgment, there are cases where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 (when a specific performance execution condition is established when the operation button 410 is operated) and cases where an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001) (when a specific performance execution condition is established when the other operation means is operated). When an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001), the player is made to recognize that the expectation of the bonus (expectation of a big win) is higher than when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, simply because the pre-operation performance in which the operation opportunity is given even if no operation is performed at that operation opportunity occurs. When an opportunity to operate another operating means (such as the sword decoration 5001) is given, the expected probability of receiving a bonus may be 100% or 0%.

With this configuration, when an opportunity to operate another operating means (such as the sword decoration 5001) is given, it is possible to increase interest in the game when the operation-time presentation corresponding to the operation of the other operating means (such as the sword decoration 5001) has not yet been performed and the operation is about to be performed. In other words, in this case, even if the desired presentation result (such as a presentation result suggesting a high expectation of a bonus being awarded) does not appear in the operation-time presentation corresponding to the operation of the other operating means (such as the sword decoration 5001) or if the operation of the operating means cannot be performed within the specific presentation acceptance period (validity period), it is possible to increase interest in the game through such operation-related presentation.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when an operation opportunity is given to any of the multiple operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) having such presentation properties, a common operation-related presentation can be executed when the operation opportunity is given.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, at least the following are modes of effect modes that generate a valid period (effect reception period) during which operation of the operation button 410 is enabled (effect reception is possible):
Multiple presentation modes are provided, such as: a first presentation mode which generates an effective period (performance acceptance period) during which operations on the operation button 410 are enabled (performance acceptance possible) after a "specific operation-related performance" which can also appear when an operation on the sword ornament 5001 is enabled (performance acceptance possible), is started; and a second presentation mode which generates an effective period (performance acceptance period) during which operations on the operation button 410 are enabled (performance acceptance possible) without a "specific operation-related performance" being started. By executing any of these presentation modes, an effective period (performance acceptance period) during which operations on the operation button 410 are enabled (performance acceptance possible) is generated.

With this configuration, whether a period occurs during which an operation on a specific operation means (e.g., operation button 410) among multiple operation means (e.g., operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) is eligible for effect acceptance, or a period occurs during which an operation means other than the specific operation means (e.g., sword decoration 5001) is eligible for effect acceptance, a common (specific) operation-related effect can be executed prior to the occurrence of such a period, so that it is possible to add interest in which of the specific operation means and the other operation means is eligible for effect acceptance, and by having the player perform operations while such effects are being performed, a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, in such a common (specific) operation-related performance, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the performance starts, a performance acceptance period corresponding to one of the multiple operation means (e.g., the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001) will occur, but it is desirable to keep secret which of the operation means (e.g., the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001) will have a performance acceptance period at least at the time the performance starts. In addition, for each operation-related performance exemplified below, it may be possible to indicate (make a performance result display appear) which of the multiple operation means (e.g., the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001) will have an operation opportunity before the performance acceptance period occurs, or to indicate (make a performance result display appear) which of the multiple operation means (e.g., the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001) will have an operation opportunity during the period after the performance acceptance period occurs, including at the same time as the performance acceptance period occurs, and it is possible to change the timing until which the operation-related performance is executed as appropriate.

Below, several performance modes that can be adopted when implementing such a common (specific) operation-related performance will be sequentially described. In each of the following explanation examples and their other examples, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are used as the multiple operation means that are the target of the common (specific) operation-related performance, but the types of the operation means are not limited to these, and three or more operation means may be prepared as the multiple operation means that are the target of the common (specific) operation-related performance. In addition, the following performance examples and their other examples mainly show the performance content when any of the performance reception periods occurs after the common (specific) operation-related performance is executed, and the performance content may be omitted when any of the performance reception periods occurs without the execution of the common (specific) operation-related performance. However, as the performance content when any of the performance reception periods occurs without the execution of the common (specific) operation-related performance, a general performance such as "an operation instruction image appears to prompt an operation on the operation button 410 or an operation instruction image appears to prompt an operation on the sword decoration 5001 without the execution of a specific operation-related performance" can be mentioned. Furthermore, in the following examples of effects and their alternatives, a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed when the reach state has not been formed, but a common (specific) operation-related effect may be generated as an image separate from the effect image displayed as the reach effect during the period when the reach state has been formed and the reach effect is being executed, or a common (specific) operation-related effect may be generated during the execution of a jackpot game.

The effects described below can be combined appropriately with the effects of the different examples described below, and can also be combined appropriately with the effects described above. The effects described below can be combined by replacing a part of them with the effects of the different examples described below, or it is possible for the effects described below to be performed when the first effect pattern is executed, and the effects of the different examples described below to be performed when the second effect pattern is executed. The same can be said for the effects of the different examples described below.

[First Presentation Mode]
Figures 166 and 167 are figures showing an example of a presentation (first presentation mode) in which at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is capable of accepting a presentation during the period in which a specific operation-related presentation is being executed after the presentation has begun.

Figure 166 (a) shows a display situation in which, in a normal game state, the number of reserved symbols is 0 and the display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is changed in a specific display pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination on the display device 1600.

Figure 166 (b) shows a performance situation in which a specific operation-related performance is started while the decorative pattern SZ shown in Figure 166 (a) is being displayed in a variable manner.

Here, in the specific operation-related performance shown in FIG. 166(b), a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and a sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed moving within the display area of the performance display device 1600. In this way, by simultaneously displaying multiple types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means within the display area, it becomes possible to suggest that an operation for one of these operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) will soon be available for performance acceptance, without it being clear which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is available for performance acceptance.

Figure 166 (c) shows a performance situation in which the specific operation-related performance shown in Figure 166 (b) has progressed, with both the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 displayed frozen within the display area, and an instruction display (here, a text display such as "Operate" and a bar display showing the remaining time during which the performance can be accepted) appears, encouraging the user to operate one of these operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001).

According to this presentation mode, even if the operation of at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is acceptable for presentation, it is possible to make it unclear which of these operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) is acceptable for presentation. This is because the same presentation mode (Fig. 166(c)) is displayed in both situations, that is, when the operation of the operation button 410 is acceptable for presentation and when the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is acceptable for presentation. In other words, in this presentation example (first presentation mode), a common (specific) operation-related presentation as shown in Figs. 166(b) and (c) is executed over a period from before the operation of at least one of the multiple operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) is acceptable for presentation to after the operation of at least one of the multiple operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) is acceptable for presentation.

Therefore, in this example, as well as in each of the examples and other examples described below, the content of the specific operation-related performance is not limited to the content shown in Fig. 166 (b) and (c). In short, when the specific operation-related performance is executed, at least one of the performance reception period for the operation button 410 and the performance reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs thereafter (here, during the execution period of the specific operation-related performance). With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the operation of at least one of the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) is acceptable for performance, while leaving it unclear which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is acceptable for performance. For example, it is not necessary to simultaneously display multiple types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means, or it is possible to display neither the button image BTG nor the sword decoration image SYG, but to display a performance image different from either of them as a specific operation-related performance.

However, in order to more reliably conceal whether the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is eligible for performance acceptance, it is more desirable to set the time required from when a specific operation-related performance is executed (start of performance) until the performance acceptance period occurs to be the same when a performance acceptance period occurs for the operation button 410 and when a performance acceptance period occurs for the sword ornament 5001.

Furthermore, the operation instruction displayed while a specific operation-related performance is being performed may be a display that urges the user to operate one of the operation means (such as "operate"), although it is unclear which of the operation means should be operated, or a display that always urges the user to operate a specific operation means among the multiple operation means, regardless of how each of the multiple operation means is capable of receiving performance acceptance. In short, by making the same operation mode appear as the operation instruction in both situations, where an operation on the operation button 410 is capable of receiving performance acceptance and an operation on the sword ornament 5001 is capable of receiving performance acceptance, it becomes possible to provide an operation opportunity while keeping secret which of the multiple operation means is capable of receiving performance acceptance.

In addition, in the performance example (first performance mode) shown in FIG. 166(c), while it is kept secret which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is available for operation, when the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is available for operation and when the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is not available for operation (in any of the first to third situations described below), only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is illuminated to prompt the user to operate the operation button 410. However, instead of this, both the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 may be in a non-illuminating state, or an illumination means may be provided on the sword decoration 5001 side to illuminate both the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001.

Here, in this example of the performance (first performance mode), the performance situation in which the image shown in FIG. 166(c) appears is set to be either a first situation in which only the operation of the operation button 410 out of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is acceptable for performance, a second situation in which only the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is acceptable for performance, or a third situation in which both the operation of the operation button 410 and the operation of the sword decoration 5001 are acceptable for performance. Of these multiple situations, when the second situation (a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001) occurs, the expectation of the special offer is set to be higher than when the first situation (a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) occurs. Therefore, it is desirable to set the rate at which the second situation (a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001) occurs within the pattern change according to the result of the jackpot determination to be lower than the rate at which the first situation (a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) occurs.

In this example (first presentation mode), when the operation button 410 is operated (the progress is made to "FF" in the figure) in either the first situation (operation button 410) or the third situation (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001), or when the sword decoration 5001 is operated (the progress is made to "GG" in the figure) in either the second situation (sword decoration 5001) or the third situation (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001), a presentation is accepted and a presentation at the time of operation corresponding to that operation (Fig. 167(d), Fig. 167(f)) is performed.

In the operation performance, in either of the situations shown in FIG. 167(d) and (f), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front of the display area, and a predetermined display performance ("Chance!!") is executed in the performance display device 1600. As the predetermined display performance, for example, multiple performance modes such as "Chance!!" which suggests a relatively low expectation level and "Hot!!" which suggests a relatively high expectation level may be prepared, and one of these performance modes may be displayed in response to the performance reception to suggest the expectation level for the special offer. Similarly, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY may have a performance mode that does not displace the member to the front of the display area, and one of these performance modes may be displayed in response to the performance reception to suggest the expectation level for the special offer. The expectation level may be "100%" or "0%".

Moreover, in the operation-time presentation according to this presentation example (first presentation mode), in either of the situations shown in Fig. 167(d) or (f), when a presentation is accepted by an operation by the player, it is possible to execute control to put the operating means into an operating state (a state different from the non-operating state before the operation) based on the operation.

More specifically, first, in the presentation situation shown in FIG. 167(d), even though the player has operated the operation button 410, it is possible to execute control to move the sword decoration 5001 on the side where the operation has not been performed back and forth between the first position and the second position in response to the presentation acceptance. With this configuration, although there is a situation in which the presentation acceptance occurs as a result of the player's operation of the operation button 410 and the presentation upon operation of the operation button 410 side is executed, it is possible to appeal to the player the possibility that "even if the operation button 410 is not operated and the sword decoration 5001 on the side with higher expectations is operated, the presentation acceptance may have occurred and the presentation upon operation of the sword decoration 5001 side may have been executed."

In contrast, in the presentation situation shown in FIG. 167(f), as a result of the player performing an unsheathing operation on the sword decoration 5001, control can be executed to maintain the sword decoration 5001 in the unsheathing position (unsheathing state) in response to the presentation acceptance, rather than returning it to the sheathing position (sheathing state). As a result, the sword decoration 5001 moves from the sheathing position (sheathing state) to the unsheathing position (unsheathing state) based on the player's operation, and an operation presentation is performed when the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in this unsheathing state. Therefore, even if the same presentation (such as a specific decorative member SDY or a specified display presentation) is performed on the operation button 410 side and the operation presentation on the sword decoration 5001 side, by checking the operating state of the sword decoration 5001 at that time, it is possible to have the feeling that an operation presentation caused by the operation on the sword decoration 5001 side is being performed.

After the operation performance (Fig. 167(d) and (f)) is performed in this way, a reach state is formed and the reach performance can be performed as shown in Fig. 167(e). However, since there is a possibility that a performance using the sword decoration 5001 will be performed during the execution of the reach performance, whether the operation performance on the operation button 410 side or the operation performance on the sword decoration 5001 side is performed, control is performed to return the sword decoration 5001 to a non-operated state (sword sheathing position (sword sheathing state)) when a predetermined time has elapsed (at a stage before the reach performance starts). However, in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned effect, it is desirable for the sword decoration 5001 to continue its operating state (reciprocating movement, or maintaining the sword in a drawn state) for at least half or more of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side to when it returns to the initial position (non-driven position). Furthermore, in terms of the amount of power consumed (moving load), it is more desirable to end the operating state of the sword decorative body 5001 at an earlier stage than when the specific decorative member SDY returns to its initial position (non-driven position) so that no driving force is applied.

According to the performance example (first performance mode) shown in FIG. 166 and FIG. 167, whether a specific operation means (e.g., sword decoration 5001) among multiple operation means (operation button 410 and sword decoration 5001) is available for performance or not, a common (specific) operation-related performance is started, and while the started common (specific) operation-related performance is being executed, the specific operation means (e.g., sword decoration 5001) is available for performance, or the specific operation means (e.g., sword decoration 5001) is not available for performance and the operation button 410 is available for performance. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide an operation opportunity while keeping secret whether the specific operation means (e.g., sword decoration 5001) and another operation means (e.g., operation button 410) are each available for performance.

In this example (first performance mode), in particular, regardless of whether a specific operation means (e.g., sword decoration 5001) is made available for performance reception, or whether the specific operation means (e.g., sword decoration 5001) is not made available for performance reception and the operation button 410 is made available for performance reception, when an operation opportunity is given while such a common (specific) operation-related performance is being performed, only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is made to emit light, so that even if the sword decoration 5001 is made available for performance reception, it is possible to confuse the player as if the sword decoration 5001 is not available for performance reception. In other words, in this case, it is possible to encourage the operation of the operation button 410 on the lower side, rather than the sword decoration 5001, which is the side with a higher probability of performing a relatively high-expectation performance when the performance is received, and it is expected to add fun to which operation means to operate when a common (specific) operation-related performance is performed.

If an operation means on a side that is not capable of accepting effects (a side on which the effect acceptance period is not occurring) is operated while such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, no reaction will occur. However, it is possible to enjoy the disadvantage that the effect acceptance period will be consumed by the amount of such an erroneous operation, reducing the remaining time.

However, if an operation means on the side that is not capable of accepting effects (the side on which the effect acceptance period is not occurring) is operated while a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, the effect acceptance required to execute the above-mentioned operation-related effect (such as a specific decorative member SDY or a specified display effect) will not be established, but the operation itself will be detected, and based on that detection, control may be performed to end the effect acceptance period for the operation means on the side that is capable of accepting effects at that point. With this configuration, there is a risk that an operation opportunity will be lost, so it is possible to encourage the user to carefully consider which of multiple operation means is capable of accepting effects and to operate it carefully.

In addition, in the above presentation example (first presentation mode), the same presentation (such as a specific decorative member SDY or a specified display presentation) is executed in the operation presentation on the operation button 410 side and the operation presentation on the sword decoration 5001 side, but these operation presentations may have different presentation contents. For example, in the operation presentation on the sword decoration 5001 side, in addition to the presentation mode executed in the operation presentation on the operation button 410 side, if another presentation mode (such as a light-emitting part different from the presentation display device 1600 emitting light or a unique presentation sound being generated) is further made to appear, it will be possible to more appropriately increase the interest in the game when an operation on the sword decoration 5001 is accepted.

In addition, when a different performance mode is prepared that can only be executed when a first operating means (e.g., operating button 410 or sword decoration 5001) is operated, in either case where a performance acceptance period for the occurrence of that different performance mode is set for the first operating means (e.g., operating button 410 or sword decoration 5001) or where a performance acceptance period for the occurrence of that different performance mode is not set and a performance acceptance period is set for a second operating means (e.g., sword decoration 5001 if the first operating means is operating button 410, and operation button 410 if the first operating means is sword decoration 5001), it is possible to make it possible to perform an operation-time performance when the first operating means is operated in the situation shown in FIG. 166 (c). That is, in this case, when the common (specific) operation-related performance is being performed and the performance acceptance period related to the occurrence of the different performance mode is set, if the first operation means is operated, the different performance mode is executed as the operation-time performance, whereas when the common (specific) operation-related performance is being performed and the performance acceptance period related to the occurrence of the different performance mode is not set (when the performance acceptance period for the second operation means is set), if the first operation means is operated, the different performance mode is not executed as the operation-time performance, but the same operation-time performance as when the operation button 410 is operated is executed. In short, when the performance acceptance period related to the occurrence of the different performance mode is not set for the first operation means, the performance acceptance period related to the occurrence of the operation-time performance on the second operation means side is set for both the second operation means and the first operation means. Note that, when the different performance mode is to appear as the operation-time performance, the operation-time performance may be performed as a performance content different from the operation-time performance on the second operation means side, rather than appearing the different performance mode in addition to the performance mode performed in the operation-time performance on the second operation means side.

In the above example (first performance mode), the situation where a display prompting an operation appears while a common (specific) operation-related performance is being performed is set to correspond to any one of the following: a first situation in which only the operation of the operation button 410 out of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is acceptable for performance acceptance; a second situation in which only the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is acceptable for performance acceptance; and a third situation in which both the operation of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are acceptable for performance acceptance. In this case, in the first and second situations, the same operation performance appears when performance acceptance is made, whereas in the third situation, it is desirable that an operation performance different from either the first or second situation or the above-mentioned other performance mode (different from the operation performance of the first and second situations) appears. However, in the above example, the third situation does not necessarily have to be present.

In addition, although the operation button 410 in the above-mentioned presentation example is not provided as an operation means to which a driving force is applied by the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the operation button 410 may be provided as an operable operation means, and the control to operate the operation button 410 on the side where the player has not operated may be executed in the presentation situation shown in FIG. 167(f) among the above-mentioned presentation examples (first presentation mode), as in the presentation situation shown in FIG. 167(d). In this type of control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side where the player has not operated, and in this case, it is possible to appropriately design whether or not to operate the operation means on the side where the player has operated. However, it is desirable to end the operation state of the operation means on the side where the player has not operated the game board 5 at an earlier stage than when the specific decorative member SDY on the game board 5 side returns to the initial position (non-driven position), so that the player's gaze is naturally returned to the game board 5 side.

In addition, when the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source that applies a drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source that applies a drive force to the sword decoration 5001 may be different drive sources, or they may be the same drive source. It goes without saying that the drive sources provided in correspondence with these operation means are provided as drive sources different from the drive source for the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory). In addition, examples of the "actions" of the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) caused by such drive sources include "movement," "rotation," "swing," and "vibration," and this is not limited to this presentation example, but is similar in other presentation examples as well.

[Second Presentation Mode]
Figures 168 to 171 are figures showing a presentation example (second presentation mode) in which a specific operation-related presentation is executed as a presentation showing the presentation progress until either a first presentation result or a second presentation result appears, and when the first presentation result appears as a result of the presentation, it is suggested that a presentation acceptance period will occur for the operation button 410 among the multiple operation means, and when the second presentation result appears as a result of the presentation, it is suggested that a presentation acceptance period will occur for the sword ornament 5001 among the multiple operation means.

Figure 168 (a) shows a display situation in which, in a normal game state, when the number of reserved symbols is 0, the display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is changed in a specific display pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination on the display device 1600.

Figure 168 (b) shows a performance situation in which a specific operation-related performance is started while the decorative pattern SZ shown in Figure 168 (a) is being displayed in a variable manner.

Here, in the specific operation-related performance shown in FIG. 168(b), a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and a sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are simultaneously displayed within the display area of the performance display device 1600, depicting a lightning image IZ acting on these images BTG and SYG. In this way, by simultaneously displaying multiple types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means respectively within the display area, it becomes possible to suggest that an operation for one of these operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) will soon be available for performance acceptance, without it being clear which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is available for performance acceptance.

Figure 168 (c) shows a progression of the specific operation-related performance shown in Figure 168 (b), in which the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 push against each other within the display area of the performance display device 1600, in an attempt to push the other out of the display area.

That is, the specific operation-related effect (Fig. 168 (b) and (c)) in this effect example (second effect mode) is executed as an effect in which "the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG push against each other to see which of the images BTG and SYG will remain in the display area." When the effect result in which the button image BTG remains (first effect result) appears, a performance acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs, and when the effect result in which the sword decoration image SYG remains (second effect result) appears, a performance acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs. Therefore, in this effect example (second effect mode), the effect shown in Fig. 168 (b) and (c) corresponds to "a specific operation-related effect that can appear prior to the occurrence of either the performance acceptance period for the operation button 410 or the performance acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001, regardless of whether these periods occur."

The left side of FIG. 168(c) depicts a situation in which the button image BTG is in a favorable state to remain within the display area, and the right side depicts a situation in which the sword decoration image SYG is in a favorable state to remain within the display area. In certain operation-related effects, such a favorable/unfavorable state changes from moment to moment as time passes.

Figure 169 (d) shows an effect depicted in the effect shown in Figure 168 (c), in which the sword decoration image SYG is pushed completely outside the display area, with the button image BTG remaining within the display area (first effect result). When this effect progresses, the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 does not occur, and only the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs.

In other words, a specific operation-related presentation (Fig. 168 (b) and (c)) is executed, suggesting that an operation opportunity will soon be given while concealing which of the multiple operation means is eligible for presentation, and as a result, a presentation (Fig. 169 (d)) is executed in which the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed in the display area, and a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, making it possible to recognize that an operation for the operation button 410, among the multiple operation means, is eligible for presentation (a presentation reception period for the operation button 410 has occurred).

At this time, in addition to the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410, an instruction display encouraging operation (such as a text display such as "Press" or a bar display showing the remaining time of the performance acceptance period) is displayed, making it possible to recognize that operation of the operation button 410 among the multiple operation means is in a state in which it is possible to accept performance (the performance acceptance period for the operation button 410 is in progress). In particular, in this performance example, operation of the operation button 410 is also encouraged by making only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 illuminated.

The presentation shown in FIG. 169(d) may progress through a specific operation-related presentation (such as FIG. 168(b) or (c)), or it may progress without going through the specific operation-related presentation (for example, from the presentation state shown in FIG. 168(a)). However, even if the same presentation shown in FIG. 169(d) is performed, it is desirable to make the expectation of the award being higher when the presentation is performed through a specific operation-related presentation than when the presentation is performed without going through a specific operation-related presentation.

In addition, with regard to the length of the effect reception period, when an effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 after a specific operation-related effect (FIG. 169(d)) is performed, it is desirable to make the length of the effect reception period occurring for the operation button 410 shorter more frequently than when an effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 without going through a specific operation-related effect (FIG. 169(d)) is performed. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the effect being prolonged, as described below, when a specific operation-related effect is performed.

Figure 169 (e) illustrates a situation in which, while the performance shown in Figure 169 (d) is being performed, an operation is performed on the operation button 410, one of the multiple operating means, and a performance is received and performed according to that operation.

The operation effect shown in FIG. 169(e) is the same as that shown in FIG. 167(d). That is, in the operation effect shown in FIG. 169(e), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area, and a predetermined display effect ("Chance!!") is executed on the effect display device 1600. Also, in this case, even if the player operates the operation button 410, control (control to put into an operating state) is executed to move the sword decoration body 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed back and forth between the first position and the second position in response to the effect reception, which is also the same. In addition, as the predetermined display effect, for example, multiple effect modes such as "Chance!!" which suggests a relatively low expectation and "Hot!!" which suggests a relatively high expectation may be prepared, and one of these effect modes may be displayed in response to the effect reception to suggest the expectation for the award. Similarly, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY may have a performance mode that does not displace the display area to the front side, and one of these performance modes may be displayed in response to the performance reception to indicate the expectation of receiving a special benefit. The expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

After such an operation performance (FIG. 169(e)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 169(f), a reach state is formed and a reach performance can be performed. However, since there is a possibility that a performance using the sword decoration 5001 will be performed during the execution of the reach performance, control is performed to return the sword decoration 5001 to a non-operated state (sword sheathed state) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation performance is performed (at a stage before the reach performance starts). However, in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned effect, it is desirable for the sword decoration 5001 to continue its operating state (reciprocating movement, or maintaining the sword in a drawn state) for at least half or more of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side to when it returns to the initial position (non-driven position). Also, it is more desirable in relation to the amount of power consumed (moving load) to end the operating state of the sword decoration 5001 at an earlier stage than when the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driven position) so that no driving force is applied.

In contrast, FIG. 170(g) shows an effect in which, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 168(c), the button image BTG is pushed completely outside the display area, with the sword decoration image SYG remaining within the display area (second effect result). When progressing to this effect, the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 does not occur, and only the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs.

In other words, a specific operation-related presentation (Fig. 168 (b) and (c)) is executed, suggesting that an operation opportunity will soon be given while concealing which of the multiple operation means is eligible for presentation, and as a result, a presentation (Fig. 170 (g)) is executed in which the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is not displayed in the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area, making it possible to recognize that an operation for the sword decoration 5001 out of the multiple operation means is eligible for presentation (a presentation reception period for the sword decoration 5001 is occurring).

At this time, in addition to the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001, an instruction display encouraging operation (text display such as "Draw your sword" or a bar display showing the remaining time of the performance acceptance period) is displayed, making it possible to recognize that among the multiple operating means, operation for the sword decoration 5001 is in a state in which it is possible to accept the performance (the performance acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 is in progress). In particular, in this performance example, operation for the sword decoration 5001 is also encouraged by only lighting up the operation unit (the sword decoration 5001 itself may be made to light up) that includes the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001.

The effect shown in FIG. 170(g) may progress through a specific operation-related effect (e.g., FIG. 168(b), (c)), or may progress without going through the specific operation-related effect (e.g., from the effect state shown in FIG. 168(a)). However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 170(g) is performed, it is desirable to make the expectation of the bonus being awarded higher when the effect is performed through a specific operation-related effect than when the effect is performed without going through a specific operation-related effect. Furthermore, it is desirable to make the expectation of the bonus being awarded higher when the effect shown in FIG. 169(d) is performed through a specific operation-related effect than when the effect shown in FIG. 170(g) is performed without going through a specific operation-related effect, and to make the expectation of the bonus being awarded lower than when the effect shown in FIG. 170(g) is performed through a specific operation-related effect.

Figure 170 (h) shows how, as a result of an operation being performed on the sword ornament 5001 among the multiple operating means while the performance shown in Figure 170 (g) is being performed, a performance is accepted and a performance is performed at the time of operation in response to that operation.

The operation effect shown in FIG. 170(h) is basically the same as the operation effect shown in FIG. 169(e), in that the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front of the display area and a specific display effect is executed on the effect display device 1600. Note that here, an effect mode such as "Super Hot!!" which suggests a relatively high expectation level is displayed in response to the effect reception, but "Chance!!" which suggests a relatively low expectation level may also be displayed. Similarly, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY may have an effect mode that does not displace the member SDY to the front of the display area, and one of these effect modes may be displayed in response to the effect reception to suggest the expectation level for the award. The expectation level may be "100%" or "0%".

However, in the operation presentation shown in FIG. 170(h), based on the operation on the sword decoration 5001, the presentation state of the sword decoration 5001 itself can change to any of the multiple forms described above (from the stage 0 form shown in FIG. 161 to any of the stage 1 form to stage 3 form), and the appearance of any of these forms also suggests the high expectancy of receiving a special bonus such as a jackpot.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 170(i), even when the operation performance (FIG. 170(h)) ends and the specific decorative member SDY is returned to its initial position (non-driven position), the sword decoration 5001 is not returned to its sheathed state, but is maintained in its unsheathed state. In other words, in this performance example, although not shown in the figures, the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in its unsheathed state, and thereafter (such as during the period when the reach performance is being performed), an operation opportunity is provided to operate the sword decoration 5001 to its sheathed state, at which point it is possible to execute an operation performance in accordance with the operation to the sheathed state.

With this configuration, two stages of operation opportunities are provided for one operating means (sword decoration 5001), and operation effects are provided for each of the first stage operation (operation to unsheathed state) and the second stage operation (operation to sheathed state). This is expected to maintain the player's interest in the operation not only while the operating means (sword decoration 5001) is being operated, but also during the non-operation period between the first stage operation (operation to unsheathed state) and the second stage operation (operation to sheathed state). It is preferable that the first stage operation and the second stage operation are different operation modes (here, operations in opposite directions). It is also preferable that the operation effects corresponding to the first stage operation and the second stage operation have different effects.

In addition, when the operation performance corresponding to the first stage operation (Fig. 170(h)) is performed, it is desirable that the sword decoration 5001 is not necessarily maintained in the undrawn state, and if it is not maintained in the undrawn state, the second stage operation opportunity is not given. In the operation performance corresponding to the first stage operation, it may be executed as an effect suggesting the expectation of whether or not the sword decoration 5001 will be maintained in a position (undrawn state) that allows the second stage operation opportunity (opportunity to change from undrawn state to sheathed state) to be given. In other words, when the sword decoration 5001 is not maintained in the undrawn state but is returned to the sheathed state, it is clear that it will be practically impossible to give the second stage operation opportunity (opportunity to change from undrawn state to sheathed state). The expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

If the sword decoration 5001 is not maintained in the unsheathed state as a result of the operation performance (Fig. 170 (h)) in response to the first stage operation, control is performed to return the sword decoration 5001 to a non-driven state (sheathed state) when a predetermined time has elapsed (before the reach performance begins). In this case, however, it is desirable for the sword decoration 5001 to continue its operating state (reciprocating movement, or maintaining the unsheathed state) for at least half the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves toward the display area to when it returns to its initial position (non-driven position). Also, in terms of the amount of power consumed (moving load), it is more desirable for the sword decoration 5001 to end its operating state at an earlier stage than when the specific decorative member SDY returns to its initial position (non-driven position) so that no driving force is applied.

On the other hand, in FIG. 171(j), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 168(c), the sword decoration image SYG is pushed completely out of the display area, and the button image BTG remains within the display area, as in the case shown in FIG. 169(d). That is, in this example (second effect mode), when a predetermined time has elapsed since the effect shown in FIG. 168(c) was performed, either the effect shown in FIG. 169(d), the effect shown in FIG. 170(g), or the effect shown in FIG. 171(j) appears. Note that which effect will appear has been previously determined in the determination process of the effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination.

However, in the presentation shown in FIG. 171(j), unlike the presentation shown in FIG. 169(d), the presentation (here, a lightning image IZ) that was performed in a specific operation-related presentation (FIGS. 168(b) and (c)) continues, and this lightning image IZ suggests the possibility that some kind of change may occur to the button image BTG.

The effect shown in FIG. 171(j) also differs from that shown in FIG. 169(d) in that no instruction display encouraging an operation (such as a text display such as "Press" or a bar display showing the remaining time in the effect acceptance period) is displayed. This makes it possible to recognize that although the sword decoration image SYG has been completely pushed outside the display area and the button image BTG remains within the display area, the effect acceptance period for the button image BTG has not yet begun.

Figure 171 (k) shows an effect in which the effect shown in Figure 171 (j) progresses, causing the lightning image IZ to act on the button image BTG, causing the button image BTG to be enveloped in a haze MY, and even the depiction of its outline to be lost.

In other words, in the effect shown in FIG. 171(k), all effect elements (button image BTG) that suggested that operations on the operation button 410 are acceptable for effect reception are removed. Therefore, although the effect shown in FIG. 171(j) initially suggests that operations on the operation button 410 are acceptable for effect reception, the appearance of the effect shown in FIG. 171(k) creates doubt as to whether the effect reception period for the operation button 410 will actually occur.

In the effect shown in FIG. 171(k), the effect display (here, the lightning image IZ) that was performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIG. 168(b) and (c)) continues. However, here, the appearance of the lightning image IZ is changing (it is about to disappear), suggesting that there is little time left until it is definitively indicated which of the multiple operating means the effect acceptance period will occur for.

Figure 171 (i) shows the progression of the presentation shown in Figure 171 (k), resulting in a presentation in which the outline of the mist MY is approaching the sword decoration 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) rather than the operation button 410 (button image BTG).

With this configuration, even if the sword decoration image SYG is not yet displayed, the outline of the mist MY can suggest the possibility that a performance acceptance period will occur for the sword decoration body 5001, rather than the operation button 410.

In addition, in the effect shown in FIG. 171(i), the effect display (here, lightning image IZ) that was performed in the specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 168(b) and (c)) continues. However, here, the state of the lightning image IZ has changed even further (just before disappearing) than in FIG. 171(k), suggesting that there is even less time remaining until it is definitively shown which of the multiple operating means the effect acceptance period will occur for.

In this example (second presentation mode), when the presentation shown in FIG. 171(i) progresses further and the mist MY is no longer displayed, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the presentation shown in FIG. 170(g) is performed.

With this configuration, even if a specific operation-related effect (Fig. 168 (b) and (c)) is performed and the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the button image BTG is displayed (Fig. 169 (d) and Fig. 171 (j)), the possibility remains that an effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 will occur, thereby making it possible to maintain interest in the game.

In particular, in this presentation example (second presentation mode), when the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed on the presentation display device 1600 and the button image BTG is displayed (Fig. 169 (d), Fig. 171 (j)), by checking whether the presentation display of the lightning image IZ that appeared in a specific operation-related presentation (Fig. 168 (b), (c)) is still continuing, it is possible to know whether there is still a possibility that the presentation acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 will occur, which also makes it possible to maintain interest in the game.

In this example (second performance mode), when the performance shown in FIG. 171(j) appears, the button image BTG is hidden by the mist MY (FIG. 171(k)), and as the performance progresses further, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the performance shown in FIG. 170(g) is guaranteed to occur. In this sense, the performance shown in FIG. 171(j) does not display the sword decoration image SYG on the performance display device 1600, but instead displays the button image BTG, but it can also be said that it is a performance that suggests that a performance acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 will occur, contrary to the display content.

However, instead of this, as the effect shown in FIG. 171(k) progresses, a performance pattern can also appear in which the outline of the mist MY does not necessarily approach the sword decoration 5001 (sword decoration image SYG), but approaches the outline of the operation button 410 (button image BTG), and when this performance pattern appears, the button image BTG is then displayed again and the performance shown in FIG. 169(d) is performed. Note that if such a performance pattern is made possible, the performances shown in FIGS. 171(j) and (k) will also be executed as specific operation-related performances that conceal which of the multiple operating means is eligible for performance acceptance.

Furthermore, by providing the operation button 410 as an operable operation means, in the above-mentioned presentation example (second presentation mode), in the presentation situation shown in FIG. 170(h), it may be possible to execute control to operate the operation button 410 on the side where no operation has been performed by the player, as in the presentation situation shown in FIG. 169(e). Note that in such control, it is important to at least operate the operation means on the side where no operation has been performed by the player, and in this case, it may be designed appropriately as to whether or not to operate the operation means on the side where operation has been performed by the player.

In addition, when the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source that applies a drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source that applies a drive force to the sword decoration 5001 may be different drive sources, or they may be the same drive source. It goes without saying that the drive sources provided in correspondence with these operation means are provided as drive sources different from the drive source for the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory). In addition, examples of the "actions" of the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) caused by such drive sources include "movement," "rotation," "swing," and "vibration," and this is not limited to this presentation example, but is similar in other presentation examples as well.

[Third Presentation Mode]
Figures 172 to 175 are figures showing a different presentation example (third presentation mode) from the second presentation mode, although it is basically the same as the second presentation mode with regard to specific operation-related presentation.

Figure 172 (a) shows a display situation in which, in a normal game state, the number of reserved symbols is 0 and the display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is changed in a specific display pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination on the display device 1600.

Figure 172 (b) shows a performance situation in which a specific operation-related performance has begun during the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in Figure 172 (a). However, as shown in Figure 172 (b), in the specific operation-related performance in this performance example (third performance mode), a specific movable member different from the performance display device 1600 is first operated to indicate that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 will soon be able to accept a performance.

In particular, in this performance example (third performance mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are adopted as such predetermined movable members, and by operating these operation button 410 and sword decoration 5001, it is possible to easily recognize that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 will soon be able to accept a performance, even when the performance display related to the operation has not yet been performed on the performance display device 1600 side. Note that here, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are controlled to move from the initial position toward the operation position, but they are moved at a slower speed than when they are moved toward the operation position when an operation opportunity is given.

With this configuration, even if there is still time left before the performance acceptance period occurs, or the performance acceptance period does not occur until the end of the pattern change, these operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) will each operate. Therefore, even when there is still time left before the performance acceptance period occurs, or the performance acceptance period does not occur until the end of the pattern change, it becomes possible to preferably maintain interest in these operations.

In this example (third performance mode), instead of a performance display on the performance display device 1600, once a specific operation-related performance is started by each action of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 (Figure 172 (b)), the performance basically progresses in the same way as in the second performance mode described above.

For example, first, of the effects shown in FIG. 172(c), the effect displayed on the effect display device 1600 is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 168(b), except that the button image BTG is displayed as corresponding to the "movable operating button 410."

However, in the presentation shown in FIG. 172(c), unlike the presentation shown in FIG. 168(b), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are in an operating state from their initial positions (non-operated positions). In the presentation shown in FIG. 172(c), even with such movable presentation, it is intended to suggest that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is available for presentation.

In addition, in the presentation shown in FIG. 172(c), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are positioned in an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied) after a specific operation-related presentation has begun, in a position different from their initial position (the position when not driven) and also different from the operating position when an opportunity to operate is given.

In other words, when such an operation-related effect is performed, the operation-related effect will be drawn out compared to when the operation opportunity is immediately given without the operation-related effect being performed. However, when movable operation means are used, even if such an operation-related effect finally ends, it will be necessary to move the operation means on the side that is set to be able to accept the effect at least to the operation position. Therefore, the operation-related effect will be drawn out even further by the time required for such an action, and there is a concern that such drawing out will reduce interest in the game.

Therefore, in this example (third presentation mode), during the period when the specific operation-related presentation is being performed, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are positioned in an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied) in a position (for example, an intermediate position) different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operating position. As a result, when the specific operation-related presentation ends and the presentation acceptance period occurs, the operation means on the side where the presentation acceptance period has occurred can be operated to the operating position in a shorter time, and the operation means on the side where the presentation acceptance period has not occurred can be operated to the initial position in a shorter time, which makes it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the prolongation of the operation-related presentation. In addition, by positioning the operation means on the side to be operated in an operating state in a position different from the operating position until the presentation acceptance period occurs, it becomes possible to easily recognize that although it is in an operating state, the presentation acceptance period itself has not yet occurred.

Then, when the performance shown in FIG. 172(c) progresses and the performance shown in FIG. 172(d) is performed, the performance display on the performance display device 1600 will have the same performance content as described with reference to FIG. 168(c), except that the button image BTG is displayed as corresponding to the "movable operating button 410". However, even in the performance shown in FIG. 172(d), unlike the performance shown in FIG. 168(c), the operating button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are positioned in an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied) in a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operating position, respectively.

In the performance shown in Fig. 172(b) and (c), the button image BTG and sword decoration image SYG in the performance display device 1600 are displayed in a manner that imitates their appearance when they are in the initial position (non-driven position), whereas the operation button 410 and sword decoration 5001 are positioned in an operating state in a position different from the initial position (non-driven position). In this way, by deliberately making the appearance of the button image BTG and sword decoration image SYG in the performance display device 1600 different from the appearance of the operation button 410 and sword decoration 5001, it becomes possible to suggest that a performance will occur in which they will be consistent in the near future (the appearance of the button image BTG and sword decoration image SYG will change, or the operation button 410 and sword decoration 5001 will operate).

In addition, when the performance shown in FIG. 172(d) is performed, resulting in the performance shown in FIG. 173(e), the performance display on the performance display device 1600 will have the same performance content as described with reference to FIG. 169(d), except that the button image BTG is displayed as corresponding to the "movable operating button 410 when in the operating position."

However, in the presentation shown in FIG. 173(e), unlike the presentation shown in FIG. 169(d), the operation button 410 is in an operating state at the operating position, and the sword ornament 5001 is in an operating state at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operating position. In other words, in this case, the operation button 410 has moved from a position closer to the operating position than the initial position (position when not driven) toward the operating position, and thus the dragging of the operation-related presentation is suitably suppressed.

As for the effect shown in FIG. 173(e), a "display effect in which the button image BTG is displayed (preferably in a state where it has been moved to the operation position) and the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed" is performed first, and after performing the display effect, the operation button 410 is moved to the operation position, and an instruction display (text display such as "press" or a bar display showing the remaining time of the effect reception period) that prompts the operation may be displayed by generating a performance reception period for the operation button 410. According to this configuration, the button image BTG that appears as a result of the execution of a specific operation-related performance is displayed in a "state where it has been moved to the operation position", while the operation button 410 at the time of display is displayed in a state different from the "state where it has been moved to the operation position". In this way, by intentionally displaying the button image BTG that appears as a result of the execution of a specific operation-related performance in a state different from the state of the operation button 410 at that time, it becomes possible to suggest in advance that the difference between the states will soon be filled (here, the operation button 410 moves to the operation position).

When the performance shown in Fig. 173(e) is performed, and the performance shown in Fig. 173(f) is performed, the performance content will appear on the performance display device 1600 as described with reference to Fig. 169(e). However, unlike the performance shown in Fig. 169(e), the performance shown in Fig. 173(f) has the operation button 410 returned from the operating position to the initial position (non-driven position), and the sword ornament 5001 is operating in a position different from both the initial position (non-driven position) and the operating position.

After this type of operation presentation (Figure 173 (f)) has been performed, a reach state is formed and a reach presentation can be performed, as shown in Figure 173 (g), but this is also as described with reference to Figure 169 (f).

In response to this, when the performance shown in FIG. 172(d) is performed, resulting in the performance shown in FIG. 174(h), the performance display on the performance display device 1600 will have the same performance content as described with reference to FIG. 170(g), except that the instruction content regarding the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is "pressed" and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a state in which it has "moved to the operation position."

However, in the presentation shown in FIG. 174(h), unlike the presentation shown in FIG. 170(g), the operation button 410 is in an operating state in a position different from both the initial position (position when not actuated) and the operating position, and the sword decoration 5001 is in an operating state in the operating position. In other words, in this case, the sword decoration 5001 has moved from a position closer to the operating position than the initial position (position when not actuated) toward the operating position, which effectively prevents the lag in the operation-related presentation.

As for the effect shown in FIG. 174(h), a display effect in which the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed (preferably in a state where it has moved to the operation position) may be performed first, and after the display effect is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 may be moved to the operation position, and an instruction display (text display such as "push" or a bar display showing the remaining time of the effect reception period) may be displayed to prompt the operation by generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001. According to this configuration, the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of the execution of a specific operation-related effect is displayed in a "state where it has moved to the operation position", while the sword decoration image SYG at the time of display is in a state different from the "state where it has moved to the operation position". In this way, by intentionally displaying the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of the execution of a specific operation-related effect in a state different from the state of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time, it is possible to suggest in advance that the difference between the states will soon be filled (here, the sword decoration body 5001 moves to the operation position).

When the performance shown in FIG. 174(h) is performed, and the performance shown in FIG. 174(i) is performed, the performance content will appear on the performance display device 1600 as described with reference to FIG. 170(h). However, unlike the performance shown in FIG. 170(h), the performance shown in FIG. 174(i) is in a state where the operation button 410 is operated in a position different from both the initial position (non-driven position) and the operating position, and the sword decoration 5001 has been returned from the operating position to the initial position (non-driven position).

After this type of operation presentation (Figure 174 (i)) has been performed, a reach state is formed and a reach presentation can be performed, as shown in Figure 174 (j), as described with reference to Figure 169 (f).

On the other hand, when the performance shown in FIG. 172(d) is performed, resulting in the performance shown in FIG. 175(k), the performance display on the performance display device 1600 will have the same performance content as described with reference to FIG. 171(j), except that the button image BTG is displayed as corresponding to the "movable operating button 410 when in the operating position."

However, in the presentation shown in FIG. 175(k), unlike the presentation shown in FIG. 171(j) and the presentation shown in FIG. 173(e), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are each in an operating state in a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operating position. By setting the operating situation in this way, it is possible to suggest that the presentation acceptance period for the operation button 410 has not yet occurred, and that there is still a possibility that the presentation acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 will occur.

When the performance shown in FIG. 175(k) is performed, and the performance shown in FIG. 175(l) is performed, the performance content will appear on the performance display device 1600 as described with reference to FIG. 171(k). However, unlike the performance shown in FIG. 171(k), the performance shown in FIG. 175(l) has the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 operating in positions different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operating position.

When the performance shown in FIG. 175(m) is performed as a result of the performance shown in FIG. 175(l), the performance content will appear on the performance display device 1600 as described with reference to FIG. 171(l). However, unlike the performance shown in FIG. 171(k), the performance shown in FIG. 175(l) has the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 each operating in a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operating position. In the performance shown in FIG. 175(m), it is more desirable to make the outer shape of the mist MY closer to the sword decoration 5001 when it is in the operating position, rather than the sword decoration 5001 when it is in the initial position.

When the effect shown in FIG. 175(m) progresses further, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the effect shown in FIG. 174(h) is guaranteed to occur. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 175(k) does not display the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600, but instead displays the button image BTG, but contrary to this display content, it can also be said to be an effect that suggests that an effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 will occur.

However, instead of this, as the effect shown in Fig. 175(l) progresses, a performance pattern can also appear in which the outline of the mist MY does not necessarily approach the sword decoration 5001 (sword decoration image SYG), but approaches the outline of the operation button 410 (button image BTG), and when this performance pattern appears, the button image BTG is then displayed again and the performance shown in Fig. 173(e) is performed. Note that if such a performance pattern is made possible, the performances shown in Figs. 175(k) and (l) will also be executed as specific operation-related performances that conceal which of the multiple operating means is eligible for performance acceptance.

In the above example, when the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is operated and a performance is accepted during the valid period that occurs after a specific operation-related performance is executed, the sword decoration 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed is made to move back and forth between the first position and the second position in response to the performance acceptance (e.g., FIG. 167(d) and FIG. 169(e)). However, it is sufficient to put the sword decoration 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed into an operating state, and the operating state can be, for example, a state where the sword decoration 5001 moves to another location and remains there, or a state where the sword decoration 5001 vibrates. In addition, when the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is operated and a performance is accepted during the valid period that occurs after a specific operation-related performance is executed, it is desirable to put the operation button 410 on the side where the operation is not performed into an operating state (such as vibrating) in response to the performance acceptance.

In addition, such an effect that puts the "operation unit on the side where no operation is being performed" into an operating state may be configured to appear when the post-operation effect according to the operation is executed in a "mode with high expectancy (the rate at which a jackpot symbol will appear, including "0" and "100")," and not to appear when the post-operation effect according to the operation is executed in a "mode with low expectancy (the rate at which a jackpot symbol will appear, including "0" and "100")."

In addition, when a post-operation performance is performed by operating one of the two operation parts (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001), the "other operation part on which no operation is being performed" is also set to an operating state, but when a post-operation performance is performed by operating the other, the "one operation part on which no operation is being performed" may not be set to an operating state.

In addition, in this example (third performance mode), the driving source that applies a driving force to the operation button 410 and the driving source that applies a driving force to the sword ornament 5001 may be different driving sources or may be the same driving source.

In each of the above-mentioned presentation modes and their other examples, when a "button image BTG (first display mode) modeled after the operation button 410" appears as a presentation result in which a specific operation-related presentation has been performed, basically, of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001, an operation opportunity is given only to the operation button 410, and when an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted in the presentation, the button operation presentation is performed. Also, when a "sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) modeled after the sword decoration 5001" appears as a presentation result in which a specific operation-related presentation has been performed, basically, of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001, an operation opportunity is given only to the sword decoration 5001, and when an operation on the sword decoration 5001 is accepted in the presentation, the sword role piece operation presentation is performed. In this regard, the button operation effects are either a success effect (activating the specific decorative member SDY) or a failure effect (not activating the specific decorative member SDY) based on the results of the effect lottery according to the jackpot determination, whereas the sword role piece operation effects are either a success effect (activating the specific decorative member SDY) or a failure effect (not activating the specific decorative member SDY) based on the results of the effect lottery according to the jackpot determination, and the effects are the same. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when an opportunity to operate the operation means on the side other than the side desired by the player, between the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001, is given.

The performance when the button is operated and the performance when the sword role piece is operated may have the same performance content regarding whether or not the specific decorative member SDY operates, as well as the display performance performed by the performance display device 1600.

In addition, in each of the examples of specific operation-related effects described above, a performance is performed to determine which of multiple operation means an operation opportunity is given, and the operation opportunity is given to the operation means corresponding to the result. However, it is also possible to perform a specific operation-related performance with performance content that gives an operation opportunity to a specific operation means regardless of which performance result appears, such as having specific operation means push against each other.

For example, a presentation may be made as to which mode (e.g., an operation to change the sword decoration 5001 from a sheathed state to a drawn state, or an operation to change the sword decoration 5001 from a drawn state to a sheathed state) an operation opportunity will be given to one operating means, and the operating opportunity may be given to the operating means in the mode corresponding to the result. In this case, it is desirable to operate the sword decoration 5001 in a state other than either the sheathed state or the drawn state while a specific operation-related presentation is being performed, and to operate the sword decoration 5001 in either the sheathed state or the drawn state when the presentation result of the specific operation-related presentation indicates which mode the sword decoration will be operated in.

Also, a presentation may be made while the pattern change is on hold (within the execution period of the previously consumed pattern change) that suggests that a specific operation-related presentation will be performed within the execution period of the pattern change when the pending pattern change is consumed. With this configuration, even though an operation opportunity is only given to one of the multiple operation means, it is possible to sustain the interest in operation for a longer period for both the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given and the operation means to which the operation opportunity is not given. Note that, as such a presentation, it is preferable that when the pattern change for which a specific operation-related presentation is performed is on hold (within the execution period of the previously consumed pattern change), each of the multiple operation means used for the specific operation-related presentation is operated.

In the second and third performance modes and their other examples, multiple images (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to multiple operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) are displayed as a specific operation-related performance, but these images do not necessarily have to be displayed. In short, when a specific operation-related performance is executed, it is sufficient that either the performance reception period for the operation button 410 or the performance reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs thereafter. With this configuration, while suggesting that a performance reception period will occur for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001, it is possible to keep secret which of the operation means the performance reception period will occur for until the performance reception period occurs. Therefore, it is not necessary to simultaneously display multiple types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means, or it is possible to have neither the button image BTG nor the sword decoration image SYG appear, and have a performance image different from both of them appear as a specific operation-related performance.

However, even in cases where a presentation mode is adopted in which the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are not displayed simultaneously while a specific operation-related presentation is being executed, when the specific operation-related presentation ends, either the button image BTG (an image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (an image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) will be displayed to indicate for which of these operation means the presentation acceptance period will occur. In this case, it can be said that it is important to execute the presentation content related to the specific image (such as the lightning image IZ) that was displayed during the execution period of the specific operation-related presentation in relation to the button image BTG (an image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (an image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) thus displayed, in order to make the specific operation-related presentation function as a presentation that suggests for which of multiple operation means the presentation acceptance period will occur. For example, a specific operation-related performance can be executed as a performance in which lightning strikes one of two rocks, and when the lightning strikes one rock, a button image BTG appears from within the rock, and when the lightning strikes the other rock, a sword decoration image SYG appears from within the rock, so that the performance can progress to the performance shown in FIG. 169(d) or FIG. 170(g). Alternatively, a specific operation-related performance can be executed as a performance in which lightning strikes one rock, and when the lightning strikes the rock, either a button image BTG or a sword decoration image SYG appears from within the rock, so that the performance can progress to the performance shown in FIG. 169(d) or FIG. 170(g). In short, it is desirable to progress the performance as a performance content in which the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the performance result of the specific operation-related performance.

In addition, in the second and third performance modes and their alternative examples described above, it is more desirable to set the time required from when a specific operation-related performance is executed (start of performance) until the performance acceptance period occurs to be the same when a performance acceptance period occurs for the operation button 410 and when a performance acceptance period occurs for the sword ornament 5001. Also, it is desirable to set the performance acceptance period to occur for the same amount of time regardless of when an operation opportunity is given for any operation means after a specific operation-related performance is executed.

In addition, multiple presentation modes may be prepared as specific operation-related presentations, and the percentage of the presentation reception period during which a specific presentation (presentation during operation) can occur set for a specific operation means among the multiple operation means may differ depending on which of the presentation modes the presentation is performed in. The percentage may be 100% or 0%.

In addition, in the second and third presentation modes and their alternative examples described above, when the operation means on the side that was not operated is operated based on the operation of the operation means on the side indicated in a specific operation-related presentation (such as FIG. 169(e)), control may be performed to return the operation means on the side that was not operated to its initial position after a predetermined time has elapsed based on the time when the operation was performed. However, it is preferable to vary the length of time from when the operation means on the side that was not operated is operated to when the operation is terminated depending on the timing of the operation during the presentation acceptance period, rather than based on the time when the operation was performed.

In other words, when an operation means indicated by a specific operation-related effect is operated, the less time remaining in the effect acceptance period, the more likely it is that the player will have conflicted over whether to operate the operation means indicated by the specific operation-related effect or the operation means not indicated by the specific operation-related effect. Therefore, by varying the length of time from when the operation means on the side not operated is operated to when that operation is completed (the length of time that appeals to the player that "even if the operation means indicated by the specific operation-related effect is operated, the effect acceptance may have occurred and the operation-time effect may have been executed") depending on when during the effect acceptance period the operation was performed (depending on the degree of likelihood of conflict), it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the game in an optimal manner.

In addition, if none of the multiple operation means provided for a specific operation-related performance is operated after the performance, all of the multiple operation means provided for the performance may be operated when the performance reception period ends.

In addition, a predetermined effect may be performed that suggests the percentage of the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) with a higher expectation that will be displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect between the start of the specific operation-related effect and the display of the effect result (such as a button image BTG or a sword decoration image SYG). A movable body effect may be performed as the predetermined effect, but in this case, it is preferable to operate a movable body different from the specific movable body (here, a specific decorative member SDY) that operates based on the effect acceptance within the effect acceptance period after the specific operation-related effect is performed, in order to more reliably operate the specific movable body based on the effect acceptance within the effect acceptance period after the specific operation-related effect is performed.

In addition, between the start of a specific operation-related performance and the display of the performance result (such as the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG), an operation opportunity may be given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) corresponding to one of the images that may appear in the performance result. With this configuration, for example, while a specific operation-related performance is being performed to determine whether the performance reception period for a specific performance (such as a performance that operates a specific decorative member SDY) is to be generated using either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001, the performance reception period is generated only for one of the operation means (for example, the operation button 410). This makes it possible to create a special performance mode in which the performance result is displayed and the performance is terminated even though the specific operation-related performance is in the middle of its execution, and it becomes possible to appropriately maintain interest in the game while the performance is being performed. In addition, when a specific operation-related effect is being performed and an operation on one side of the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) is accepted, it is desirable to perform a specific effect based on the effect acceptance, thereby suggesting the proportion of the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) on the side with the highest expectation that will be displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

Here, as the specific operation means to which an operation opportunity is given in the middle of the execution of a specific operation-related presentation, it is desirable to use the operation means (e.g., operation button 410) that has a relatively low expectation among the multiple operation means (e.g., operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) in order to increase the player's interest in the game when the player realizes that the specific operation-related presentation is in the middle of its execution.

In addition, in the case where the specific operation-related performance for the multiple operation means is being performed in the middle stage, and a performance reception period is generated only for the operation button 410 of the multiple operation means, if a specific performance condition is satisfied when the operation button 410 is operated during the performance reception period, a special operation performance is executed, and when the special operation performance is executed, the expectation of the special bonus being awarded may be the same regardless of which of the multiple operation means (e.g., the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001) appears as the performance result. The expectation may be 100%. With this configuration, the performance of the specific operation-related performance can be lost from the start of the performance to the display of the performance result, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means with a relatively low expectation. However, when the special operation performance is executed, it is desirable to make the expectation of the special operation performance higher than when the special operation performance is not executed and an operation opportunity is given to the operation means with a high expectation among the multiple operation means.

In addition, during each of the above-mentioned effect acceptance periods, when a player performs an operation, an effect is usually generated based on the operation. However, it may be possible to set an automatic button effect state, which will be described later, in which control is performed to start the same effect as when the operation is performed before the effect acceptance period has elapsed even if such an operation is not performed. With such an automatic button effect state, an operation-time effect is generated without the need for operation each time an effect acceptance period occurs, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to forgetting to operate. Then, when the specific operation-related effect is performed while the automatic button effect state is set, even if an effect acceptance period occurs for any of the above-mentioned multiple operation means as a result of the effect, the same operation-time effect as when the corresponding operation means is operated during the effect acceptance period will be executed even if the corresponding operation means is not operated during the effect acceptance period.

However, even if the automatic button effect state described below is set, if an effect acceptance period is generated only for the operation button 410 of the operation means while a specific operation-related effect is in the middle of being performed, it is desirable to prevent the special operation effect from being executed unless the operation button 410 is operated during the effect acceptance period (to prevent the automatic button function from functioning). After this, even if an effect acceptance period is generated for any of the above multiple operation means as a result of the specific operation-related effect being performed, it is desirable to execute the same operation-time effect as when the corresponding operation means is operated during the effect acceptance period (to enable the automatic button function to function). With this configuration, it becomes possible to know whether a specific operation-related effect is in the middle of being performed depending on whether the automatic button function is functioning, and it is expected that a decrease in interest in the game will be suppressed.

It is preferable that the setting change of the automatic button performance state on and off be possible not only during periods when the pattern change is not being performed, but also during periods when the pattern change is being performed, by operating the operation button 410, for example. For example, when the automatic button performance state is off and no performance acceptance period for the operation button 410 has occurred, operating the operation button 410 can change the setting of the automatic button performance state from the off state to the on state, and when the automatic button performance state is on and a performance acceptance period for the operation button 410 has occurred and the operation button 410 is operated within the performance acceptance period, not only is a performance at the time of operation according to the operation performed, but the automatic button performance state can also be changed from the on state to the off state. However, since it is conceivable that there may be cases where a player wishes to generate an on-operation effect by operation while maintaining the automatic button effect state on, for example, during the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 when the automatic button effect state is on, it is desirable to enable not only the operation button 410 but also operations on an operation means other than the operation button 410, and to cause a change in the effect being executed when an operation is performed on the other operation means, unlike when the operation button 410 is operated, while maintaining the automatic button effect state on. In this case, it is more desirable to generate the same on-operation effect as when the operation button 410 is operated.

The operation mode may be different when the automatic button effect state is changed from the off state to the on state and when it is changed from the on state to the off state.

In addition, in the second and third presentation modes and their other examples described above, as a presentation result in which a specific operation-related presentation is performed, a button image BTG modeled after the operation button 410 or a sword decoration image SYG modeled after the sword decoration 5001 is displayed, and an operation opportunity corresponding to the button image BTG or the sword decoration 5001 is given, but this is not limited to this. In other words, by preparing two different display modes (first display mode, second display mode), and providing an operation opportunity (performance reception period) for the operation button 410 when the first display mode is displayed, and providing an operation opportunity (performance reception period) for the sword decoration 5001 when the second display mode is displayed, any display content may be adopted for the first and second display modes.

For example, in the second and third presentation modes described above, the presentation image CG shown in Figure 176 (a) (first display mode) may be displayed instead of the presentation image shown in Figure 169 (d) and Figure 173 (e), and the presentation image TG shown in Figure 176 (b) (second display mode) may be displayed instead of the presentation image shown in Figure 170 (g) and Figure 174 (h). According to this configuration, while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, both the effect portion and the other background image (the portion that was displayed before the specific operation-related effect started) are suddenly replaced (substantially the entire effect in the display area is replaced) with the effect image CG (first display mode) or effect image TG (second display mode) that is the result of the specific operation-related effect. Unlike the cases in which partial display modes (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG) appear in the display area shown in Figures 169 (d), 170 (g), 173 (e), and 174 (h), the effect display related to the granting of operation opportunities is performed using substantially the entire display area (even to the point of not displaying other effect images such as the background portion that may suggest the degree of expectation), which is expected to increase the interest in the operation.

In the effect image CG (first display mode) shown in FIG. 176(a), a first character is displayed holding a shield (button image BTG modeled after the operation button 410) that incorporates the operation button 410 into its design, and in the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 176(b), a second character is displayed holding a sword (sword decoration image SYG) modeled after the sword decoration 5001, subtly suggesting which operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) should be operated. In this way, the effect image CG (first display mode) and effect image TG (second display mode) do not need to be prepared as effect images modeled after the operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001 themselves, but it is desirable to display them as effect images that incorporate at least some of the shapes and designs of these operation means.

In addition, the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) using the entire display area in this way may also be used to suggest a different expectation level depending on whether the effect image CG (first display mode) or the effect image TG (second display mode) is displayed. For example, when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears, it is suggested that the expectation level for the award is higher than when the effect image CG (first display mode) appears. In addition, multiple effect modes (different colors, etc.) may be prepared as the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode), and the expectation level may be suggested depending on which of the effect modes is displayed. In this case, even if the effect image CG (first display mode) appears, when it is displayed in a specific display mode, the expectation level may be higher than when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears.

In addition, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG may be displayed as a result of a specific operation-related performance being executed (preferably in a performance situation with a relatively high expectation), or may be displayed without a specific operation-related performance being executed (for example, after a premonition performance described below that is not a specific operation-related performance is executed) (preferably in a performance situation with a relatively low expectation). In this case, for example, when a specific operation-related performance is executed and the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed as a result of the performance, a performance acceptance period may be generated only for the operation button 410 among the multiple operation means, whereas when a specific operation-related performance is not executed and the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed (for example, after a premonition performance described below that is not a specific operation-related performance is executed), a performance acceptance period may be generated not only for the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG, but also for another operation means not corresponding to the button image BTG (for example, the sword decoration 5001, etc.). With this configuration, even if the button image BTG appears in a situation where a specific operation-related effect is not being executed and expectations are relatively low, it is possible to provide a different level of excitement to the operation than when the button image BTG appears in a situation where expectations are relatively high and a specific operation-related effect is being executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game. The different operation means may be an operation means different from the sword decoration 5001.

In addition, when a button image BTG appears in a presentation situation with relatively low expectations without a specific operation-related presentation being executed, if an operation for another operating means not corresponding to the button image BTG is accepted within the presentation acceptance period, a special operation presentation is executed if a specific presentation condition is satisfied, and it is desirable that when the special operation presentation is executed, it is suggested that the presentation situation has a higher expectation than when the presentation situation is "a presentation situation in which a sword decoration image SYG appears in a presentation situation with relatively high expectations after a specific operation-related presentation is executed." The expectation level may be 100%.

Here, when a button image BTG appears in a situation where a specific operation-related effect is not being executed and the expectation level is relatively low, if the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is operated within the effect acceptance period, it is desirable to end the effect acceptance period for another operation means occurring at the same time so that a special operation effect is not executed, and to execute an operation-time effect corresponding to the operation on the operation means (operation button 410).

In contrast, if a button image BTG appears in a situation where a specific operation-related effect is not being executed and expectations are relatively low, and an operation means other than the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is operated during the effect acceptance period, it is desirable to end the effect acceptance period for the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG as well, and execute a special operation effect when a specified effect condition is met. In this case, it is also possible to not execute the special operation effect when the specified effect condition is not met, and instead execute an operation-time effect when the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG (operation button 410) is operated even if the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG (operation button 410) is not operated and an operation means other than the operation means is operated.

When a specific operation-related effect is executed while the automatic button effect state is set, even if an effect acceptance period occurs for the operation means corresponding to either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG as a result of the effect, it is desirable to execute the same operation-related effect as when the corresponding operation means is operated during the effect acceptance period (to make the automatic button function function). However, when a specific operation-related effect is not executed while the automatic button effect state is set and the button image BTG appears, even if an effect acceptance period is generated for both the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG and an operation means other than the operation means, it is desirable to execute only the operation-related effect that is the same as when the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is operated even if no operation is performed, and not to execute a special operation effect that can only appear when another operation means not corresponding to the button image BTG is operated.

However, if an operation is performed on another operating means before the specific timing during the effect acceptance period when the automatic button function causes an operation effect (an effect when the operating means corresponding to the button image BTG is operated) to appear, and specified effect conditions are met, it is desirable that a special operation effect be performed in response to the effect acceptance, and that the operation effect (an effect when the operating means corresponding to the button image BTG is operated) not appear even when the specific timing arrives. In this case, the automatic button function described above will not actually function during the effect acceptance period, but it is desirable that the automatic button effect state continue in the on state even after the effect acceptance period has ended.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG may be reversed, and each of the above-described performances (such as the operation performance and the automatic button function) may be applied. In other words, in this case, when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed without a specific operation-related performance being executed (for example, after a premonition performance described below that is not a specific operation-related performance is executed), rather than when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without a specific operation-related performance being executed (for example, after a premonition performance described below that is not a specific operation-related performance), a performance acceptance period will be generated not only for the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG, but also for another operation means (for example, operation button 410, etc.) that does not correspond to the sword decoration image SYG.

As described above, in each of the above-mentioned presentation modes and their other examples, when either the "button image BTG (first display mode) modeled on the operation button 410" or the "sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) modeled on the sword decoration 5001" is displayed as a presentation result in which a specific operation-related presentation has been performed, and the presentation is accepted by the operation means on the side on which it is displayed, it is possible to cause either the first operation presentation (for example, a presentation mode in which the specific decorative member SDY operates) whose presentation content suggests a relatively high level of expectation, or the second operation presentation (for example, a presentation mode in which the specific decorative member SDY does not operate) whose presentation content suggests a relatively low level of expectation, to appear. In other words, in this case, when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the first operation presentation whose presentation content suggests a relatively high level of expectation will be executed at a higher rate than when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed. However, when the first operation-time effect is executed based on the effect reception during the effect reception period that occurs after a specific operation-related effect, it is desirable to suggest the same expectation level when the first operation-time effect is executed based on the effect reception for the operation button 410 when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed and when the first operation-time effect is executed based on the effect reception for the sword decoration body 5001 when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed. The expectation level may be 0% or 100%. According to this configuration, even if the effect image (button image BTG (first display mode)) with a relatively low expectation level is displayed as a result of the specific operation-related effect, as long as the first operation-time effect is executed based on the effect reception, there will be no disadvantage in the effect compared to the case where the effect image (sword decoration image SYG (second display mode)) with a relatively high expectation level is displayed as a result of the specific operation-related effect, so that a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned timer effect (FIG. 118), it is possible to set "granting an operation opportunity to the operating means" as the effect target (one of the above-mentioned multiple effect modes that are the timer target). That is, in a timer effect with "granting an operation opportunity to the operating means" as the effect target, when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), an operation opportunity will soon be granted to the operating means, and this allows the player to enjoy the effect at the time of operation. In this case, in the "operation opportunity to the operating means" prepared as a candidate for the effect target of the timer effect, when the operating means is operated, either an advantageous or disadvantageous effect result for the player can appear depending on the result of a predetermined effect lottery. However, when the "opportunity to operate the operating means" is granted as the effect target of the timer effect, it is more desirable to make the rate at which an advantageous effect result appears to the player higher than when it is not the effect target of the timer effect. The rate may be 100%.

In this regard, when a performance pattern appears in which a timer performance is executed with the performance target of "granting an operation opportunity to the operating means (e.g., the sword decoration 5001)", a specific operation-related performance may be further executed utilizing the "granting an operation opportunity to the operating means" that is the performance target. That is, in this case, when the count display of the timer performance reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), the sword decoration image SYG appears and an operation opportunity is granted to the sword decoration 5001, but at this time, a specific operation-related performance is executed regarding whether the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears before the sword decoration image SYG appears.

With this configuration, the timer effect and the specific operation-related effect are each executed for the same effect, which increases the interest in the game when an opportunity to operate the operating means (e.g., the sword ornament 5001) is given.

However, in this case, if two different effects (a timer effect, a specific operation-related effect) are progressing simultaneously up until the moment of a single effect target (the provision of an opportunity to operate the sword decoration 5001), the player will not be able to understand which effect to focus on, which could distract the player and decrease interest in the game.

Therefore, when a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect are respectively executed for one effect target (granting an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001), as will be explained below with reference to FIG. 177, it is desirable to keep the "specific operation-related effect" in an unexecuted state until the count display of the specific timer effect is executed and the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), and then to start the "specific operation-related effect" after the count value reaches the predetermined value (here, the count "0").

Figure 177 is a diagram explaining an example of a performance when a specific timer performance and a specific operation-related performance are executed for one performance target (granting an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001). Note that the following timer performance corresponds to the above-mentioned advance notice timer performance, and is executed as a result of various processing being performed accordingly.

Figure 177 (a) shows a display situation in which, in a normal game state, the number of reserved symbols is 0 and the display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is changed in a specific display pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination on the display device 1600.

Figure 177(b) shows a performance situation in which the timer performance starts (here, a countdown display) with a specific value (here, "3") while the decorative pattern SZ shown in Figure 177(a) is being displayed in a variable manner. Note that in the performance situation shown in Figure 177(b), the "specific operation-related performance" has not yet been executed, and it is unclear which performance the timer performance is intended for.

In other words, in the timer effect in this example, while it is unclear which of the multiple timer target effect candidates is being executed, the count value first reaches a predetermined value (here, a count of "0") and is displayed. Then, after the count value of "0 (predetermined value)" is displayed in this way, a "specific operation-related effect" is started, as shown in FIG. 177(d). Note that when the "specific operation-related effect" starts, the count value is not even "0" and is hidden.

With this type of timer effect, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0"), a specific operation-related effect is executed in which either the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed. In other words, in this case, even though two different effects (a timer effect, a specific operation-related effect) are executed for one effect target (the provision of an operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001), these effects are prevented from overlapping in chronological order, allowing the user to enjoy each of the different effects.

However, if the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0") while a specific operation-related effect has not yet been executed, there is a concern that the player will not be able to recognize which effect the timer effect is targeting, which could reduce interest in the game. Therefore, in this example of the effect, as shown in FIG. 177(c), a performance is performed that suggests the type of effect that the timer effect is targeting (the provision of an opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001) between the time the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0") and the start of the specific operation-related effect.

In the example shown in FIG. 177(c), when the count display of the timer performance reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0"), first, the "sheathing of the sword" is displayed on the performance display device 1600, thereby suggesting that the timer performance was aimed at "granting an opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 (an opportunity to operate by "sheathing the sword")."

As shown in FIG. 177(d), this configuration allows the "specific operation-related effect" to be started in an effect situation in which the player recognizes that the effect image (sword decoration image SYG (second display mode)) corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is being displayed (the player is given an opportunity to perform an operation by "sheathing the sword"), thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. Note that when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, count "0"), the count display (count "0") may continue to be displayed even when the "sheathing the sword" is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 177(c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), the sword decoration 5001 performs a predetermined movement (here, a reciprocating movement in the up and down direction), which also suggests that "the granting of an opportunity to operate the sword decoration 5001 (an opportunity to operate by "sheathing the sword")" is the target of the timer effect.

The predetermined action by the sword decoration 5001 may be performed when the count display reaches 0 not only when the timer effect is intended to "provide an opportunity to operate the sword decoration 5001" but also when the timer effect is intended to target another effect. In other words, in this case, the predetermined action by the sword decoration 5001 does not function as an effect suggesting the type of effect that the timer effect is intended to target, but rather as an effect suggesting that the count display has reached 0. In this sense, it is important that the predetermined action by the sword decoration 5001 is performed after the count display reaches 0 and before the effect that is intended to be the effect starts, and at the same time as or before the effect suggesting the type of effect that the timer effect is intended to target starts, and that the effect suggesting the type of effect that the timer effect is intended to target is also executed during this execution state.

FIG. 177(d) shows the presentation situation when a "specific operation-related presentation" has begun.
In this performance state, as described above, not only is the count value already hidden, but the performance suggesting the performance type targeted by the timer performance is also hidden. In addition, the predetermined action by the sword decoration 5001 has also ended. However, it is important that the performance suggesting the performance type targeted by the timer performance and the predetermined action by the sword decoration 5001 are executed before the specific operation-related performance starts, and the execution state may be continued even after the specific operation-related performance starts.

After the "specific operation-related effect" has begun, the effects will progress in the order of Figure 177(e)-(h). However, the content of these effects is generally the same as that explained with reference to Figure 168(c), Figure 170(g)-(i), or Figure 172(d), Figure 174(h)-(j), so we will not go into detail here.

As the timer effect performed in association with the specific operation-related effect, either the timer effect shown in FIG. 177 or another timer effect may be executed based on the result of a predetermined effect lottery. In other words, in the other timer effect, the specific operation-related effect starts after the timer effect is started, which is the same as the timer effect shown in FIG. 177, but the count value does not reach a predetermined value (here, "0") at the timing when the specific operation-related effect starts (strictly speaking, a little earlier than this), and the specific operation-related effect continues after the effect starts. In this case, regardless of whether the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, the expectation of the special bonus (jackpot) is the same. The expectation may be 100%.

According to such another timer effect, the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect will progress simultaneously, but when a performance situation in which they progress simultaneously appears, whether the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed as the performance result of the specific operation-related effect, the performance value of these images will be the same (the expectation of the bonus (jackpot) will be the same). In other words, in this case, the performance value of the specific operation-related effect itself can be substantially lost, so that even if the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect progress simultaneously, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is unable to understand which effect to focus on and becomes distracted. However, in order to increase the interest in the game, it is desirable to make the expectation of the bonus higher when a performance pattern in which the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect progress simultaneously appears than when the performance pattern shown in FIG. 177 appears.

In the example shown in FIG. 177(c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), first, a display suggesting the type of effect target ("sheathing the sword") is displayed on the effect display device 1600, but such a display suggesting the effect target may also be displayed when a different effect type is set as the effect target for the timer effect. However, when a specific effect out of multiple effects that can be the timer target is set as the timer target, it is also possible not to display a display suggesting which effect is the target of the timer effect.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance modes and their other examples, a specific operation-related performance is performed regarding which of the operation means is given the operation opportunity, before giving an operation opportunity to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001. However, a performance pattern may be made to appear in which a first premonition performance that does not appear when an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001 is performed before giving an operation opportunity to the operation button 410 (before the performance acceptance period occurs), or a second premonition performance that does not appear when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is performed before giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001 (before the performance acceptance period occurs). When performing these premonition performances (first premonition performance, second premonition performance), it is desirable to set the time required for the performance (premonition performance) to be shorter than when a specific operation-related performance is performed, and to lower the expectation of the award when the performance appears, in order to increase the interest in the game when a specific operation-related performance is performed.

Here, as a premonition effect, for example, a specific image, such as one expressing a foggy state, is displayed before the appearance of an effect image (for example, button image BTG) that imitates the operating means (for example, operating button 410) on the side where the operation opportunity is given. Next, while the specific image is being displayed, the button image BTG is displayed in a position where it is difficult to see by overlapping with the specific image (a position on the layer behind the specific image). Then, by gradually changing the specific image to be hidden (by increasing the transparency or reducing the area where the specific image is displayed, for example), it is possible to execute an effect in which the button image BTG is gradually revealed. Note that specific examples of depiction modes related to such premonition effects will be described later.

At this time, if the button image BTG is displayed in one of a number of display modes (for example, a blue button image BTG, a red button image BTG, etc.) with different expectations for the awarding of a special bonus (jackpot), it becomes possible to add to the excitement of wondering which display mode of the button image BTG will appear as the premonition performance in which the button image BTG is gradually revealed progresses.

It is important that the first premonition effect, which appears when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 but not to the sword decoration 5001, the second premonition effect, which appears when an operation opportunity is not given to the operation button 410 but is given to the sword decoration 5001, and the specific operation-related effect, which appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001, are executed with different performance contents. Also, it is desirable that not only the performance contents but also the time required for the performances be different.

Such premonition effects can be said to be a higher-level concept that includes the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effects" in the sense that they are "effects that are performed as effects related to the granting of an operation opportunity when an operation opportunity is granted to a specific operating means." Furthermore, for premonition effects, including "specific operation-related effects," as will be explained below with reference to FIG. 178, it is more desirable to provide multiple performance modes and indicate the length of the performance acceptance period that occurs in response to the premonition effect depending on which of these performance modes the premonition effect is performed in, in order to increase the interest in the game when the premonition effect is performed.

Figure 178 is a time chart that explains an example of the content of each type of premonition effect when multiple types (premonition effects A, B1, B2, C) are available.

First, in the example (premonition performance A) shown in FIG. 178(a), premonition performance A is started when a first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the pattern change. This premonition performance A is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation-related performance" regarding whether an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001, and when the premonition performance A is executed, a performance acceptance period (valid period) T1 is generated for the specific operation means shown as the performance result. In other words, in the example (premonition performance A) shown in FIG. 178(a), when premonition performance A is executed, a performance acceptance period (valid period) T1 of the same length is generated regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity.

During the effect acceptance period (valid period) T1, an instruction display (such as a text display such as "press" or a bar display showing the remaining time of the effect acceptance period) is displayed to encourage operation of the specific operation means on the side indicated as a result of premonition effect A. Then, when an effect is accepted by operation of the specific operation means within the effect acceptance period (valid period) T1, the above-mentioned operation time effect (for example, the effect described with reference to Figures 167(d) and (f), 169(e), 170(h), 173(f), and 174(i), etc.) is executed based on the effect acceptance, and processing is performed to end the period T1 at that point.

In contrast, in the example shown in FIG. 178(b) (premonition effect B1), the premonition effect B1 starts when a second predetermined time has elapsed, not when a first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the pattern change. This premonition effect B1 is not a "specific operation-related effect," but is executed prior to the operation opportunity being given for a specific operation means (e.g., operation button 410) (it is not executed when an operation opportunity is given for a specific operation means), and when the premonition effect B1 is executed, an effect acceptance period (validity period) T2 for the specific operation means (e.g., operation button 410) occurs.

During the effect acceptance period (valid period) T2, an instruction display (such as a text display such as "press" or a bar display showing the remaining time of the effect acceptance period) is displayed to encourage operation of the specific operating means corresponding to the premonition effect B1. Then, when an effect is accepted by operating the specific operating means within the effect acceptance period (valid period) T2, a predetermined operation-time effect different from the above-mentioned operation-time effect is executed based on the effect acceptance, and processing is performed to end the period T2 at that point.

In this regard, in this example, the effect acceptance period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the premonition effect B1 occurs as a period having a different time length (here, a shorter time length) than the effect acceptance period (valid period) T1 corresponding to the premonition effect A, as shown in Figures 178 (a) and (b). This makes it possible to suggest the length of the effect acceptance period occurring in response to the premonition effect depending on which form (premonition effect A, premonition effect B1) the premonition effect has been performed in, making it possible to maintain interest in the game when the premonition effect is performed.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 178(c) (premonition effect B2), the premonition effect B2 is started when a second predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the pattern change. Like premonition effect B1, this premonition effect B2 is not a "specific operation-related effect" but is executed prior to the operation opportunity being given to a specific operation means (e.g., operation button 410) (it is not executed when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means). However, when premonition effect B2 is executed, an effect acceptance period (effect acceptance period for a specific operation means (e.g., operation button 410)) T3 occurs, which has a different duration from the effect acceptance period (validity period) T2 corresponding to premonition effect B1.

Even during this effect acceptance period (valid period) T3, an instruction display (such as a text display such as "press" or a bar display showing the remaining time of the effect acceptance period) is displayed to encourage operation of the specific operating means corresponding to premonition effect B2. Furthermore, when an effect is accepted by operating the specific operating means within effect acceptance period (valid period) T3, an operation-time effect different from either of the cases in which premonition effects A or B1 are executed is executed based on the effect acceptance, and processing is performed to end the period T3 at that point.

In this example, the effect reception period (valid period) T3 corresponding to the premonition effect B2 occurs as a period having the same length as the effect reception period (valid period) T1 corresponding to the premonition effect A, as shown in Figs. 178(a) and (c). That is, in this case, even though the premonition effect B2, which has a relatively low expectation of the bonus (jackpot), is executed, it is suggested that the effect reception period (valid period) T3 occurs with the same length as when a specific operation-related effect, which has a relatively high expectation, is executed. This creates an effect situation as if a specific operation-related effect was executed, and it is possible to appropriately maintain the interest in the game when the premonition effect B2 is executed. In this case, it is desirable to make the expectation of the bonus different when the effect reception period (valid period) T2 occurs and when the effect reception period (valid period) T3 occurs.

Note that for the premonition effects B1 and B2, the same presentation mode may be displayed from the start of the effect until a timing during the effect, and a different presentation mode may be displayed after the timing has passed, thereby providing a presentation feature regarding whether the presentation acceptance period (valid period) T2 or the presentation acceptance period (valid period) T3 occurs for a specific operation means. However, such presentation feature is not necessarily required, and the presentation start timing for the premonition effects B1 and B2 may be different times after the start of the pattern variation, or the premonition effects B1 and B2 may have different durations.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 178(d) (premonition performance C), the premonition performance C is started when the third predetermined time has elapsed since the pattern change started. This premonition performance C is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation-related performance" regarding whether an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001, and when the premonition performance C is executed, a performance acceptance period (valid period) T4 is generated for the specific operation means shown as the performance result. In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 178(d) (premonition performance C), when the premonition performance C is executed, a performance acceptance period (valid period) T4 of the same length is generated regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity.

During the effect acceptance period (valid period) T4, an instruction display (text such as "press" or a bar display showing the remaining time of the effect acceptance period) is displayed to encourage operation of the specific operation means on the side indicated as a result of the premonition effect C. Then, when an effect is accepted by operating the specific operation means within the effect acceptance period (valid period) T4, the above-mentioned operation time effect (for example, the effect described with reference to Figures 167(d) and (f), 169(e), 170(h), 173(f), and 174(i), etc.) is executed based on the effect acceptance, and processing is performed to end the period T4 at that point.

In this regard, in this example, the effect acceptance period (valid period) T4 corresponding to premonition effect C occurs as a period having the same length of time as the effect acceptance period (valid period) T1 corresponding to premonition effect A, as shown in Figures 178 (a) and (d). In other words, in this case, even if the length of time required for premonition effect C itself is shorter than that of premonition effect A, if the premonition effect is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect," it is suggested that an effect acceptance period (valid period) T4 having the same length of time as premonition effect A will occur, so that interest in the game can be maintained in an appropriate manner when premonition effect C is performed.

In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 178, the length of the effect acceptance period (valid period) is suggested by associating the type of premonition effect A, B1, B2, and C with a one-to-one relationship. However, the length of the effect acceptance period (valid period) may also be suggested by setting the rate at which a specific effect acceptance period (e.g., effect acceptance period T2) of a predetermined length occurs differently for each type of premonition effect.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance modes and their other examples, after a specific operation-related performance is performed, when a performance acceptance period (validity period) occurs for a specific operation means (e.g., operation button 410) suggested as a result of the performance, a performance image (e.g., button image BTG) imitating the specific operation means is displayed. At this time, the performance image (e.g., button image BTG) is displayed so as to imitate the same state as the specific operation means at that time. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 173(e), the operation button 410 is in a state where it has been operated at the operation position, but the button image BTG is also displayed in a state where it has been operated at the operation position accordingly, and in the example shown in FIG. 174(h), the sword decoration body 5001 is in a state where it has been operated at the operation position (unsheathing state), but the sword decoration image SYG is also displayed in a state where it has been operated at the operation position accordingly (unsheathing state).

However, if a specific operation means (e.g., operation button 410) that is given an opportunity to operate after a specific operation-related effect is performed is displayed as an effect image (e.g., button image BTG) that mimics its appearance exactly, the range of effects will be significantly narrowed when displaying the results of a specific operation-related effect that has a relatively high expectation, raising concerns that this may reduce interest in the game.

Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect is performed, as will be explained below with reference to Figures 179 and 180, it is desirable that the effect image (e.g., button image BTG) that imitates the specific operation means (e.g., operation button 410) does not necessarily directly represent the state of the specific operation means at that time, but is displayed in a state different from the specific operation means at that time.

Figure 179 shows examples of the content of a premonition effect that is not a specific operation-related effect, and the content of a premonition effect that is a specific operation-related effect.

First, Fig. 179(a)-(c) show the contents of the presentation when a premonition presentation that is not a specific operation-related presentation is performed. For example, suppose that in a normal game state, the number of reserved balls is 0, and the display of the decorative pattern SZ (special pattern) is being displayed in a specific presentation pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination on the presentation display device 1600. Then, in this presentation state, as shown in Fig. 179(a), if a premonition presentation that corresponds only to the sword decoration 5001 side of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is performed instead of a "specific operation-related presentation," it becomes possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will soon be given to the sword decoration 5001. Note that in the premonition presentation (as in other examples), if a predetermined display corresponding to the operation means on the side where an operation opportunity will soon be given is performed, it is not necessary to display a presentation image that imitates the operation means. With this configuration, even when the sword decoration image SYG that is displayed during the performance reception period has not yet been displayed, it becomes possible to recognize that an opportunity to operate the sword decoration 5001 will soon be given.

In the premonition effect shown in FIG. 179(a), a sword decoration image SYGa with a blue aura of relatively low expectation and a sword decoration image SYGb with a red aura of relatively high expectation are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the effect content is revealed as to which of them will ultimately remain in the display area. Therefore, in this effect situation, it is possible to recognize that an opportunity to operate the sword decoration body 5001 will soon be given, but it is kept secret as to whether the sword decoration image SYG will be the sword decoration image SYGa with low expectation or the sword decoration image SYGb with high expectation.

Figure 179(b) shows the final performance result in which the sword decoration image SYGb with a red aura remains, suggesting that a performance acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 will occur in a performance situation with relatively high expectations. The display shown in Figure 179(b) displays a final effect suggesting that the sword decoration image SYGb with a red aura will not change to another performance image (such as sword decoration image SYGa).

Figure 179 (c) shows an example of a performance when a performance acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs. When the performance acceptance period occurs, an instruction display (text display such as "push in" or a bar display showing the remaining time of the performance acceptance period) is displayed to prompt the user to operate the sword decoration 5001. When the performance acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs, the sword decoration 5001 changes state from a sheathed state to a drawn state, and the sword decoration image SYGb also changes state from a sheathed state to a drawn state accordingly. When a performance acceptance is made within the performance acceptance period, a specified operation-time performance is performed based on the performance acceptance, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in a sheathed state. Also, a process is performed to end the performance acceptance period at that point.

According to this configuration, if a premonition effect is performed that corresponds only to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001, when the effect acceptance period occurs, the effect image (here, the sword decoration image SYGb) that imitates the operation means on the operation target side (here, the sword decoration 5001) will be displayed in the same state (unsheathing the sword) as the operation means on the operation target side (here, the sword decoration 5001) at that time. In particular, during the effect acceptance period in this effect example, both the effect image (here, the sword decoration image SYGb) that imitates the operation means on the operation target side and the operation means on the operation target side (here, the sword decoration 5001) are stopped in a predetermined position.

In contrast, Figures 179(d)-(g) show the content of the presentation when a specific operation-related presentation is performed as a premonition presentation. For example, assume that in normal game mode, the number of reserved symbols is 0, and the presentation display device 1600 is displaying a varying display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in a specific presentation pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. In this presentation state, if a premonition presentation as a "specific operation-related presentation" begins as shown in Figure 179(d), it becomes possible to recognize that an opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 will soon be given.

Figure 179 (e) shows a presentation situation in which the precursor presentation as a "specific operation-related presentation" has progressed and its presentation result has appeared. In this presentation situation, the button image BTG is not displayed, and instead the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, to suggest that an operation opportunity will be given to the sword decoration 5001 as a presentation result of the "specific operation-related presentation". In the display shown in Figure 179 (e), a final effect is displayed, suggesting that the sword decoration image SYG will not change to another presentation image (such as the button image BTG).

Figure 179 (f) shows an example of a performance when a performance acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs. When the performance acceptance period occurs, an instruction display is displayed to prompt the user to operate the sword decoration 5001 (text display such as "push in" or a bar display showing the remaining time of the performance acceptance period). In addition, when the performance acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs, the sword decoration 5001 changes state from a sheathed state to a drawn state, and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the drawn state.

In this regard, in the examples shown in Figures 179 (f) and (g), during the performance acceptance period, the sword decoration image SYG is maintained as the display content when the sword decoration body 5001 is in a drawn sword state (the sword decoration image SYG is stopped), while the sword decoration body 5001 continues to slowly move upwards over the period until the performance acceptance period ends, so that they are in different states.

During the performance acceptance period, regardless of the position of the sword decoration 5001, when an operation is performed on the target action object 141 to put it in a sheathed state, a performance acceptance is performed, and a specified performance upon operation is performed based on the performance acceptance, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in the sheathed state. Also, a process is performed to end the performance acceptance period at that point.

With this configuration, when a performance acceptance period occurs after a specific operation-related performance, one of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG continues to operate and is used in the performance, while the other does not operate and plays the role of accurately conveying the current situation. Note that in the example of Figures 179 (f) and (g), during the performance acceptance period, the sword decoration image SYG is stopped and the sword decoration body 5001 is operated continuously, but this is not limited to this, and the sword decoration image SYG may be operated continuously and the sword decoration body 5001 may be stopped.

In this way, in the example presentation shown in FIG. 179, during the presentation acceptance period that occurs without a specific operation-related presentation (FIG. 179(c)), both the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG are stopped, whereas during the presentation acceptance period that occurs after a specific operation-related presentation (FIG. 179(f)), one of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG is stopped, but the other is allowed to continue in a dynamic state so that it can be used in the presentation. Therefore, when the presentation acceptance period occurs after a specific operation-related presentation, the range of presentations can be expanded, making it possible to maintain interest in the game in an optimal manner.

In particular, even if the operation button 410 itself is not an operation means to which a driving force is applied by control by the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when a performance acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs after a specific operation-related performance, the operation button 410 itself is stopped, whereas the button image BTG that imitates the operation button 410 is made to be in a dynamic state and its depiction continues, which is expected to greatly improve the range of performances when a performance acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs after a specific operation-related performance.

The method of displaying either the sword decoration image SYGa with a blue aura with a relatively low expectation or the sword decoration image SYGb with a red aura with a relatively high expectation as the sword decoration image SYG may be adopted not only when a premonition effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed, but also when a specific operation-related effect as a premonition effect is performed. In other words, in this case, in the specific operation-related effect, in addition to the performance of whether the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 or the sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword decoration body 5001 appears, when any performance image (for example, the button image BTG) appears, it is possible to further provide the performance of whether the performance image (button image BTG) is displayed in a display mode with a relatively high expectation or a display mode with a relatively low expectation. This method may be appropriately adopted in each of the performance modes described above and their other examples in addition to the performance example in FIG. 179.

When a specific operation-related effect is to have these two types of effects, first, a state is made to appear as the result of the specific operation-related effect, in which it is recognizable whether a button image BTG or a sword decoration image SYG will appear, and a state is made to appear as the result of the specific operation-related effect, in which it is unclear whether the display mode of the effect image that appears is highly anticipated (for example, the effect image that imitates the operating means is made white so that only the outline can be recognized). Then, it is desirable to have the effect proceed in a further manner so that states appear one after another in which it is recognizable whether the display mode of the effect image that appears as the result of the specific operation-related effect is highly anticipated (for example, the white state of the effect image that imitates the operating means is released so that the color can be confirmed). In addition, when the button image BTG is displayed after such a performance progression, under certain conditions, the display mode is made recognizable as to whether or not the expectation level is high (for example, the white state of the performance image imitating the operating means is released, etc.), and then the button image BTG is made invisible, and the sword decoration image SYG appears as a result of the specific operation-related performance, and it is unclear whether or not the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG is highly expected (for example, the sword decoration image SYG is made white so that only the outline can be recognized). After this, the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of the specific operation-related performance is made recognizable as to whether or not the expectation level is high (for example, the white state of the sword decoration image SYG is released so that the color can be confirmed, etc.). In this case, when the display mode when the button image BTG is displayed is a display mode on the high expectation side (for example, red), it is desirable to make the rate at which such further performance progression occurs higher than when the display mode is on the low expectation side (for example, blue).

Figures 180(a)-(e) are diagrams showing other examples of the effects shown in Figures 179(d)-(g) as the effect content when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a premonition effect. That is, in Figure 180(a), a premonition effect as a "specific operation-related effect" is started, and in this premonition effect, a first character (effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) holding a shield (button image BTG) modeled after the operation button 410 and a second character (effect image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) holding a sword (sword decoration image SYG) modeled after the sword decoration 5001 are depicted facing each other, and depending on which of these characters remains in the display area, it is suggested whether an opportunity to operate the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 will be given.

Figure 180(b) shows a performance situation where the performance result of the premonition performance as a "specific operation-related performance" is displayed. In this performance situation, the first character (performance image corresponding to the operation button 410) is not displayed, and the second character (performance image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) is displayed, to suggest that an operation opportunity will be given to the sword decoration 5001. The display image shown in Figure 180(b) is roughly the same as the display image TG shown in Figure 176(b) (the instruction display encouraging the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed), and while the specific operation-related performance is being performed, both the performance part (characters confronting each other) and the other background image (the part that was displayed before the specific operation-related performance started) are suddenly replaced (almost the entire performance in the display area is replaced) with the performance image (display image shown in Figure 180(b)) as the performance result of the specific operation-related performance.

Figures 180(c) to (e) show examples of effects when a performance acceptance period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs. When the performance acceptance period occurs, first, as shown in Figure 180(c), an instruction display is displayed to encourage an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 (such as a text display such as "push in" or a bar display showing the remaining time of the performance acceptance period).

Here, in this example of effect, as shown in FIG. 180(c), the sword decoration 5001 begins to move from the sheathed state to the drawn state when the effect acceptance period occurs, and as shown in FIG. 180(d), the sword decoration 5001 completes its movement (movement) from the sheathed state to the drawn state after only a relatively short time has passed since the effect acceptance period began. Then, from this point on, as shown in FIG. 180(e), unless there is an operation by the player, the sword decoration 5001 will remain in the drawn state at least until the end of the effect acceptance period, waiting for an operation by the player (operation to move from the drawn state to the sheathed state).

In response to this, as shown in Figures 180(c)-(e), the performance display device 1600 depicts the second character swinging down the sword decoration image SYG in a movement (a downward rotational movement) that is completely different from the movement of the sword decoration 5001 (linear movement), and the sword decoration image SYG continues to move even after the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in a drawn state. The sword decoration image SYG in this performance example is repeatedly displayed in a loop during the performance acceptance period, from the start (Figure 180(c)) of the downward swing movement to its end (Figure 180(e)).

However, even if this loop processing is performed, the bar display indicating the remaining time of the performance acceptance period will not be affected and the display change will progress in proportion to the passage of time. Also, the sword decoration 5001 is also designed to complete the movement to the unsheathed state during the series of displays from the start of the downward swing motion (Fig. 180(c)) to its end (Fig. 180(e)), but will remain in the unsheathed state without being affected by the loop processing. Note that when an operation is performed on the target action object 141 to put it in the sheathed state during the performance acceptance period, a performance acceptance is performed, and a specified operation-time performance is performed based on the performance acceptance, the loop processing is terminated, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in the sheathed state. Also, a process is performed to end the performance acceptance period at that point.

According to this configuration, when a premonition effect is performed as a specific operation-related effect, both the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG will operate within that effect acceptance period, but their operation modes (the action that plays the role of accurately conveying the current situation (the action up to moving to the operation position), and the loop action used for the effect) are different from each other, and the sword decoration image SYG will continue its operation even after the action of the sword decoration body 5001 has ended. As a result, when the effect acceptance period (Fig. 180 (c) to (e)) that occurs after a specific operation-related effect occurs, the effect content of the specific operation-related effect can be continued (the background also continues) even after the effect acceptance period has occurred, widening the scope of the effect, and making it possible to maintain interest in the game in an optimal manner.

In addition, according to the example of the performance shown in FIG. 180, the performance (FIG. 180(c)-(e)) when the performance acceptance period occurs is executed by changing both the performance content (display of characters facing each other) and the background image that appeared when the premonition performance (FIG. 180(a)) as a specific operation-related performance is being performed. In particular, during the performance acceptance period according to this example of the performance, a dedicated background (full moon) is displayed, and both the performance image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the operation means and the character (a specific image different from the sword decoration image SYG) are dynamically displayed, thereby improving the performance during the performance acceptance period. In this sense, it is more desirable to perform the performance using at least one of the performance image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the operation means and the character in the premonition performance, in order to further improve the performance by providing a performance connection between the premonition performance and the performance during the performance acceptance period. In addition, the special background (full moon) may have multiple display modes with different expectations for the award of a special bonus, and may be displayed in any one of these display modes.

Note that for premonition effects as specific operation-related effects and effects during the effect acceptance period, multiple effect modes may be prepared for those effects, and depending on which of those effect modes appears, a suggestion may be given as to whether a highly anticipated effect will appear as an operation-related effect when the effect acceptance is made during the effect acceptance period. The expectation of receiving a bonus may be suggested using a background image that appears when the premonition effect is performed.

In addition, in the performance example shown in Figure 180, when a premonition performance is being performed as a specific operation-related performance, the performance within the performance acceptance period is executed by changing both the performance content that appeared in that premonition performance and the background image. However, when the above-mentioned premonition performance that is not a specific operation-related performance (a dedicated premonition performance when an operation opportunity is granted for a specific operation means among multiple operation means (or in a specific operation mode among multiple operation modes)) is being performed, the performance when the performance acceptance period occurs may be executed by changing both the performance content that appeared in that premonition performance and the background image. In short, it is sufficient that "an operation-related effect (omen effect) can be generated in relation to the operation of the operating means, and the operation-related effect (omen effect) can include at least a first operation-related effect in which an effect related to a first effect is accepted by the operation of the player, and a second operation-related effect in which an effect related to a second effect different from the first effect is accepted by the operation of the player, the first operation prompt image displayed in the first operation-related effect is displayed while the background image displayed when the first operation prompt image is not yet displayed continues to be displayed, and the second operation prompt image displayed in the second operation-related effect is displayed in conjunction with changing the background image when the second operation prompt image is not yet displayed to another background image." Here, the first operation prompt image and the second operation prompt image do not have to be the same image, and can be appropriately adopted, for example, a button image BTG, a sword decoration image SYG, a gauge display, or a comment display such as "Press it!" or "Sheathe your sword!". In addition, the "first performance" and the "second performance" may be different post-operation performances. For example, the "first operation-related performance in which the performance acceptance for the first performance is made" may be exemplified as a performance regarding which mode appears as a conversation notice when the performance acceptance is made, and the "second operation-related performance in which the performance acceptance for the second performance is made" may be exemplified as a performance regarding whether or not the specific decorative member SDY operates when the performance acceptance is made. In this case, it is desirable to design the performance so that, regardless of which mode appears as the conversation notice, the rate (including 100%) of the appearance of the jackpot pattern is higher when the specific decorative member SDY operates. In addition, the "second operation-related performance in which the performance acceptance for the second performance is made" may be executed as any of the operation acceptance performances (operation acceptance performances under BGM suppression) described later with reference to FIG. 142, FIG. 212 to FIG. 215, FIG. 217 to FIG. 220, FIG. 223, FIG. 250, FIG. 253, etc. In contrast, the "first operation-related performance in which a performance is accepted for the first performance" may be executed as one of the operation acceptance performances (operation acceptance performances without suppressing BGM) described later with reference to FIG. 216, FIG. 222, FIG. 224, FIG. 249, etc. Also, each of the other examples of the operation acceptance performances described later may be appropriately adopted. Also, the "continuous display" of the background image does not necessarily have to be a still image, but may be displayed as a moving image showing a river flowing or characters dueling, and may include images in which the range of the still image or moving image is displayed in a sliding manner (displayed in a manner in which the coordinates move). In other words, if the displayed depiction content is displayed with a chronological or coordinate-based connection, the background image can be said to be "continuously displayed". In contrast, "changing the background image to another background image" does not necessarily have to be displayed by another image data or another layer, and includes, for example, a sudden change or replacement (switching) of the background image itself to an "image with a different form (a dedicated background image corresponding to the performance reception period)" that is not connected in time series or coordinates. It also includes a change or replacement (switching) to a "pure black image". In other words, if there is no connection in terms of depiction content before and after the change, it can be said that "the background image is changed to another background image". In order to make it easier to recognize that a change has occurred in the background image, it is more desirable to display an effect image (such as a blackout or whiteout) that hides the background image that was displayed until then over at least half the area (more preferably almost the entire area) of the display area of the performance display device 1600, and after the display, to display a second operation promotion image together with the new background image. The first operation-related performance and the second operation-related performance may be displayed sequentially within one variation pattern. As described above, the timing for changing the background image to a different background image may be before the performance acceptance period occurs, or may be set after the performance acceptance period occurs, including the timing when the performance acceptance period occurs (for example, FIG. 180(b) may be omitted, and the performance may progress from FIG. 180(a) to FIG. 180(c)).

In the example performance shown in FIG. 180, the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is started after the performance acceptance period has occurred, but the operation of the sword decoration 5001 may be started before the performance acceptance period has occurred, or the operation of the sword decoration 5001 that has been started before the performance acceptance period has occurred may be completed before the performance acceptance period has occurred (the operation that plays a role in accurately communicating the current situation is completed before the performance acceptance period has occurred) and then maintained in a stopped state.

In addition, even when an opportunity to operate a specific operating means (e.g., sword ornament 5001) is provided, there may be cases where a display is made to change the background image when the performance reception period occurs, and cases where a display to change the background image is not made. In this case, it is desirable that when a display to change the background image is made when the performance reception period occurs, the expectation of receiving a bonus is higher than when a display to change the background image is not made when the performance reception period occurs.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned presentation modes and their other examples, after a specific operation-related presentation is performed, when a presentation is accepted by operating a specific operating means (e.g., operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the presentation, a specific decorative member SDY (a movable body provided on the game board 5 side) is operated as an operation-time presentation based on the presentation acceptance. At this time, for example, in the presentation examples shown in Figures 167(d), 169(e), and 170(h), the sword decorative body 5001 (or operation button 410) is also operated as a movable body provided on the door frame 3 side, thereby improving the presentation of the operation-time presentation after the specific operation-related presentation. In this way, in order to improve the presentation quality of the operation-time presentation when a specific operation-related presentation has been performed, it is desirable that in the operation-time presentation when a specific operation-related presentation has been performed, depending on the result of the presentation, a presentation situation when the movable body on the game board 5 side and the movable body on the door frame 3 side (the gaming machine main body side) are both activated, or a presentation situation when the movable body on the game board 5 side and the movable body on the door frame 3 side do not operate is displayed. In contrast, in the operation-time presentation performed without a specific operation-related presentation (for example, an operation-time presentation after a premonition presentation that is not a specific operation-related presentation has been performed), depending on the result of the presentation, a presentation situation when the movable body on the game board 5 side and the movable body on the door frame 3 side only operate, or a presentation situation when the movable body on the game board 5 side and the movable body on the door frame 3 side do not operate is displayed.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned presentation modes and the specific operation-related presentations according to their other examples, when a sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a result of the presentation, the expectation of the bonus being awarded is set to be higher than when a button image BTG is displayed as a result of the presentation. In this regard, when a button image BTG is displayed as a result of a specific operation-related presentation, for example, as shown in FIG. 181(a), the button image BTG may be displayed in a mode with a princess character added (specific presentation mode), and when the button image BTG is displayed in this mode, the expectation of the bonus being awarded is set to be higher than when a sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a result of the specific operation-related presentation, so that it is possible to preferably maintain interest in the game when the button image BTG is displayed as a result of the specific operation-related presentation.

The manner in which the princess character is displayed (specific presentation manner) may be applied to the sword decoration image SYG, as shown in FIG. 181(b). In this case, it is desirable to make the expectation of receiving a special bonus higher when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the specific presentation manner than when it is displayed in the normal manner.

In addition, as possible performance patterns that may appear as a result of a specific operation-related performance, a first performance pattern (FIG. 181(a)) in which the button image BTG is displayed in a specific performance mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) and a second performance pattern (FIG. 181(b)) in which the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific performance mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) as a result of a specific operation-related performance may be prepared. In this case, it is desirable to set the expectation level for the award to be the same when the first performance pattern appears as a result of a specific operation-related performance and when the second performance pattern appears. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the fun of whether the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears as a result of a specific operation-related performance, and also to provide a completely different fun of whether a specific performance mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) appears, regardless of whether the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears. The expectation level may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, if such a specific performance mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) can appear as a result of a specific operation-related performance, when a specific performance condition is met, the specific performance mode may be displayed in advance from a stage in which the performance result of the specific operation-related performance (whether the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears) has not yet appeared (for example, from a stage in which the specific operation-related performance is in progress), as shown in FIG. 181(c). With this configuration, even if a specific operation-related performance is being performed in which either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG will have the same performance value (same expectation) because the specific performance mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) appears. In other words, in this case, the performance of the specific operation-related performance itself is lost, so that it becomes possible to provide a completely different performance such as a "premonition performance by a princess character" even when a specific operation-related performance is being performed.

In addition, the sword ornament 5001 according to each of the above-mentioned presentation modes and their respective examples is provided to have a first operation mode (first movement mode) in which the sword portion (handle portion 5012, blade portion 5011) of the sword ornament 5001 can be operated in the vertical direction, as well as a second operation mode (second movement mode) in which the sheath portion (scabbard portion 5020) of the sword ornament 5001 can be operated in the horizontal direction, as shown in FIG. 151. Therefore, in each of the above-mentioned presentation modes and their respective examples, the above-mentioned specific operation-related presentation may be provided as a presentation regarding whether the sword ornament 5001 provided as a single operation unit is given an operation opportunity in the first operation mode or the second operation mode. In addition, the sword portion (handle portion 5012, blade portion 5011) and the sheath portion (scabbard portion 5020) are both supported so that they can be moved (operated) by a main body support portion (not shown) that is provided on the door frame 3, and are structured so that even if one side of the sword portion (handle portion 5012, blade portion 5011) and the sheath portion (scabbard portion 5020) is in an operating (operated) state, the other side can be moved (operated).

However, if a specific operation-related performance is performed in this manner, there is a concern that the player is more likely to make an operation error, since no matter which performance result appears, only the operation mode is different, and the sword decoration 5001 is still operated. In particular, even if an operation opportunity is given for either the first operation mode or the second operation mode, if, for example, a performance image modeled after the sword part of the sword decoration 5001 (and an instruction display encouraging the operation) is displayed, there is an increased concern that the player will make an operation error between the first operation mode and the second operation mode. In other words, in this case, as the remaining time of the performance acceptance period decreases, it is difficult to first have the player perform an operation to correct the operation error and then perform further operations in the original correct mode, and if a specific operation-related performance with a relatively high expectation is performed, but the performance acceptance period ends before the performance acceptance, there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease.

In addition, the sword ornament 5001 has a mode of "up and down movement" by the sword part and a mode of "side to side movement" by the sheath part, and in an operation unit that can provide multiple complex operation modes that are not inversely related, if an operation is performed on the wrong side when an operation opportunity is given, it will take time to perform the correct side, and there is a high risk that the performance acceptance period will end and the operation opportunity will be lost.

Therefore, when the above-mentioned specific operation-related presentation is performed as a presentation regarding whether an operation opportunity is given in the first operation mode or the second operation mode for the sword ornament 5001 provided as a single operation unit, as will be described below with reference to Figures 182 and 183, even if an operation error occurs on the player's side between the first operation mode and the second operation mode and the operation error is not corrected and the originally correct operation is performed from that state, it is desirable to ensure that the presentation acceptance is properly performed and that the operation-time presentation corresponding to the presentation acceptance is executed.

Figures 182 and 183 show examples of effects that occur when a player makes an operation error between the first and second operation modes in an effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed.

Figure 182 (a) shows a display situation in which, in a normal game state, the number of reserved symbols is 0 and the display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is changed in a specific display pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination on the display device 1600.

Figure 182 (b) shows a performance situation in which a specific operation-related performance is started while the decorative pattern SZ shown in Figure 182 (a) is being displayed in a variable manner.

Here, in the specific operation-related performance shown in FIG. 182(b), a first performance image OX that imitates a first operation mode in which the sword part of the sword decoration 5001 is operated from a drawn state to a sheathed state, and a second performance image TX that imitates a second operation mode in which the sheath part of the sword decoration 5001 is operated to move laterally, are simultaneously displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, suggesting that an operation opportunity for one of these operation modes will soon be available for performance acceptance. In this regard, although the image portion imitating the sword part of the sword decoration 5001 in the first performance image OX is displayed larger than the second performance image TX, the sword part is displayed as an image in both the first performance image OX and the second performance image TX, which may lead to an operational error between the first operation mode and the second operation mode.

In Fig. 182(c), the specific operation-related effect shown in Fig. 182(b) progresses, and a first effect image OX corresponding to a first operation mode and a second effect image TX corresponding to a second operation mode push against each other within the display area of the effect display device 1600, attempting to push the other out of the display area. When a performance result in which the first effect image OX remains (first performance result) appears, a performance acceptance period for the first operation mode occurs, and when a performance result in which the second effect image TX remains (second performance result) appears, a performance acceptance period for the second operation mode occurs.

In the specific operation-related effect according to this effect example, as shown in FIG. 182(c), when the situation favors the first effect image OX to be left, a display such as "push" becomes visible, and when the situation favors the second effect image TX to be left, a display such as "slide" becomes visible. The details of the operation content are made easy to recognize according to the effect situation. However, these displays do not necessarily have to be displayed, as there is a concern that they may be mistakenly recognized as encouraging an operation at a time when the effect acceptance period has not yet occurred.

Figure 182 (d) shows an effect depicted in which the second effect image TX is pushed completely outside the display area, with the first effect image OX remaining within the display area, as a result of the effect shown in Figure 182 (c) being performed (first effect result). When this effect progresses to this effect, even if an operation is performed in the second operation mode, no specific operation effect (such as a moving effect using a specific decorative member SDY) will occur, but when an operation is performed in the first operation mode, an effect is accepted and a specific operation effect (such as a moving effect using a specific decorative member SDY) will occur in response to the effect acceptance.

In other words, in the performance situation shown in FIG. 182(d), a performance acceptance period for a specific operation performance occurs only for the first operation mode out of the first and second operation modes, and during this performance acceptance period, in addition to the first performance image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, an instruction display encouraging the operation (text display such as "push in" or a bar display showing the remaining time of the performance acceptance period) is displayed. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 moves from a sheathed state to a drawn state so that operation by the first operation mode can be performed.

Figure 183 (e) shows the presentation situation when the player performs an operation (misoperation) in the second operation mode instead of the first operation mode, even though the first presentation image OX corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed.

In other words, in this presentation example, even if a presentation acceptance period for a specific operation presentation occurs only for the first operation mode out of the first and second operation modes, operation detection of the second operation mode itself is enabled. Then, when an operation in the second operation mode is detected during the presentation acceptance period, it is determined that there has been an operation error by the player, and a specific notification (here, "It's fine as it is") is issued that would not appear when an operation in the first operation mode is accepted for presentation.

Also, as shown in FIG. 183(f), the content of such specific notifications changes over time (here, "stay calm and hold back") to allow the player to regain composure. With this configuration, even if the content to be notified is complex, it is possible to notify the player sequentially using short words, which is expected to suitably suppress panic even if the player is in a state of panic. This allows the player to recognize that even if an operation is performed in the first operation mode on the sword decoration 5001, which is in the second operation mode, the performance will be properly accepted.

Figure 183 (g) depicts a state in which, as a result of a proper operation (first operation mode) being performed during the performance status of Figure 183 (e) or Figure 183 (f) (performance acceptance period when in an erroneous operation state), performance acceptance is performed and the above-mentioned performance at the time of operation corresponding to that operation is performed. However, at this time, when the player's hand is released from the sword decoration 5001 (when the operation is completed), the sword decoration 5001 will return from the second operation mode state to a non-operated state (normal state).

With this configuration, even if an operational error occurs between the first and second operating modes on the player's side and the operational error is not corrected and the correct operation is performed from the original state (operation error state), the performance will be properly accepted, so that the decrease in interest in the game when an operational error occurs is suppressed.

In the above example, when the player makes an erroneous operation, a notification is given to the effect that the player should continue to operate without correcting the erroneous operation. However, it is not necessary to give a detailed notification of the content (the player should continue to operate without correcting the erroneous operation). In other words, as mentioned above, when an erroneous operation is made, the player may panic, so a notification with complicated content may be counterproductive. Therefore, when the player makes an erroneous operation during the performance acceptance period, it is desirable to give a simple notification such as an effect or a sound notification rather than a message display, as a specific notification that would not appear when the operation is accepted in a proper manner. In this case, the player may not recognize that he or she made an erroneous operation, but it can be said that it is quite possible to expect that the operation will be switched to the proper operation by confirming a special situation in which a specific notification is given based on the operation and a performance is not given at the time of operation.

On the other hand, it is conceivable that some players (especially older players) may mistakenly perform certain operation-related effects before the effect acceptance period has begun. For example, when an operation has been performed on the second operation part (e.g., the sheath part) even though no operation instruction has been given for the second operation part (e.g., the sheath part), it is conceivable that a situation may occur in which the effect acceptance period for a certain operation effect begins only for the first operation part (e.g., the sword part). In this case, too, there is a concern that the player may not be able to recognize how to operate the game.

Therefore, when a specific operation-related performance is being performed regarding whether an operation opportunity is given to the first operation part (sword part) or the second operation part (scabbard part), even if an operation instruction (a bar display of the remaining time) is not given to the second operation part (for example, the situation shown in Fig. 182 (b) and (c)), and an operation is performed to the second operation part, it is desirable to be able to perform a specific notification that would not appear when an operation in a proper manner is accepted. This specific notification may be a message display indicating that "while maintaining the operation state, the user should operate the proper operation part that will soon be given an operation opportunity," or a simple notification such as an effect or a sound notification instead of a message display. In any case, it can be said that it is quite possible to expect that by confirming a special situation in which a specific notification is given based on an operation and no operation performance is given despite the operation being performed, it will be an opportunity to operate the proper side later.

In this case, for example, even if an effect acceptance period for a specific operation effect occurs only for the first operation part (e.g., the sword part) while the second operation part (e.g., the sheath part) is being operated (the sword decoration 5001 has moved to the left), when the first operation part (e.g., the sword part) is operated while maintaining the state in which the second operation part (e.g., the sheath part) is being operated (the sword decoration 5001 has moved to the left), the effect acceptance will be performed and the above-mentioned operation effect corresponding to that operation will be performed.

With this configuration, even if an operation error occurs between the first and second operation modes before the effect acceptance period occurs, and the operation error is not corrected during the effect acceptance period in which the operation error is maintained and the correct operation is performed from that state, the effect acceptance will be performed properly, so that a decrease in interest in the game is suppressed even when an operation error occurs before the effect acceptance period occurs.

However, if the above-mentioned specific notification is made during the period in which a specific operation-related presentation is made regarding whether an operation opportunity is given to the first operation unit or the second operation unit, and immediately before the presentation acceptance period occurs when the presentation result is displayed, there is a concern that the information will be mixed with the content of the notification (instruction display, etc.) during the presentation acceptance period, further confusing the player. Therefore, in a specific operation-related presentation in which a presentation result suggesting that an operation opportunity is given to the first operation unit is finally displayed, during the period until the presentation result is displayed, there is a first period in which the above-mentioned specific notification is made when an operation is performed in the second operation mode even though no operation instructions are displayed regarding the second operation unit (e.g., the sheath portion), and a second period in which the above-mentioned specific notification is not made even if an operation is performed in the second operation mode in that situation, and it is desirable to generate the presentation acceptance period for the above-mentioned first operation unit after passing through the first period and the second period in sequence.

In the above example of the presentation, the expectation of receiving the special benefit may be indicated when the specific notification is made. The expectation may be 0% or 100%.

Furthermore, in the sword decorative body 5001 according to each of the above-mentioned performance modes and their alternative examples, the performance mode of the sword decorative body 5001 itself can be changed to any of the above-mentioned multiple modes (for example, from the stage 0 form shown in FIG. 161 to any of the stage 1 form to stage 3 form). In this regard, after a specific operation-related performance is performed, the sword decorative body 5001 may be changed to any of the above-mentioned multiple modes, and a performance acceptance period for the sword decorative body 5001 may be generated in this changed state. Alternatively, when a performance acceptance period occurs after a specific operation-related performance is performed, the sword decorative body 5001 may be changed to any of the above-mentioned multiple modes.

In this case, during the performance acceptance period, the performance display device 1600 will display instruction displays encouraging the user to operate the sword decoration 5001 (such as text displays such as "push" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the performance acceptance period) and a sword decoration image SYG modeled after the sword decoration 5001, but the sword decoration image SYG will be displayed in the same form as the sword decoration 5001 at that time (stage 0 form to stage 3 form shown in Figure 161).

However, if the sword decoration image SYG is always displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001 when displayed on the performance display device 1600, it would not be interesting to view the sword decoration image SYG, and the performance would lack presentational value during the performance acceptance period. Therefore, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG on the performance display device 1600, when certain performance conditions are met, it is desirable to display the sword decoration image SYG in a manner different from the sword decoration body 5001 at that time in order to ensure presentational value during the performance acceptance period.

In this case, it is desirable to make the appearance represented by the sword decoration image SYG have a higher expectation than the appearance of the sword decoration body 5001 in order to more appropriately ensure the presentation during the presentation acceptance period. For example, when the sword decoration body 5001 is in stage 1 form and a specified presentation condition is met, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in stage 2 or stage 3 form rather than stage 1 form. With this configuration, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in stage 1 form, it is possible to understand that there is a higher expectation by checking the appearance of the sword decoration image SYG, so that interest in the game during the presentation acceptance period is appropriately maintained.

In order to achieve this effect, it is sufficient that the number of performance modes on the sword decoration image SYG side is greater than the number of performance modes on the sword decoration body 5001 side. The number of performance modes on the sword decoration body 5001 side may be one. Furthermore, when multiple performance modes are prepared for the sword decoration body 5001, these multiple performance modes do not necessarily have to change form.

However, if the appearance of the sword decoration body 5001 and the appearance of the sword decoration image SYG are simply made different in this way, there is a concern that some players may feel uncomfortable as they feel that a false display has been made, which may reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, more preferably, a special appearance different from any of the appearances prepared as the appearance of the sword decoration body 5001 (here, stage 0 form to stage 3 form shown in FIG. 161) is prepared as the appearance of the sword decoration image SYG, and when a predetermined performance condition is met, it is desirable to display the sword decoration image SYG in a special appearance rather than the appearance of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time, thereby making the appearance of the sword decoration body 5001 and the appearance of the sword decoration image SYG different from each other. The special appearance may be an appearance in which the sword decoration image SYG is further deformed or combined to change its external shape, or it may be an appearance in which the sword decoration body 5001 operates in an appearance that does not appear, or it may be an appearance in which the sword decoration body 5001 emits light in an appearance that does not appear.

With this configuration, the sword decoration image SYG is able to achieve effects that would be difficult to achieve due to the structure of the sword decoration 5001, which not only reduces concerns that players may feel uncomfortable seeing a false representation, but is also expected to increase interest in the game by providing effects that exceed the player's imagination when they see the structure of the sword decoration 5001.

Note that even when the sword decoration image SYG is given a special form in this way, it is desirable to be able to display the sword decoration image SYG in each form (here, stage 0 form to stage 3 form shown in FIG. 161) prepared as the form of the sword decoration body 5001. That is, in this case, the sword decoration image SYG is basically displayed in the same form as the sword decoration body 5001, and only when a predetermined performance condition is met will the sword decoration image SYG be displayed in a special form. Note that when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special form, it is desirable to suggest that there is a higher expectation of a special bonus being awarded than when it is displayed in any other form. The expectation may be 100%.

The technique of displaying the sword decoration image SYG in a special manner may also be applied to other effects in addition to when a specific operation-related effect is performed.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance modes and their other examples, for example, when a pattern change is performed in a first performance pattern based on the result of a jackpot determination, a first premonition performance that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and an operation opportunity is not given to the sword decoration 5001 within the pattern change can be executed. When a pattern change is performed in a second performance pattern based on the result of a jackpot determination, a second premonition performance that appears when an operation opportunity is not given to the operation button 410 and an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001 within the pattern change can be executed. When a pattern change is performed in a third performance pattern based on the result of a jackpot determination, a third premonition performance (specific operation-related performance) that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 can be executed.

In this regard, these premonition effects are executed with different performance contents, but the performance contents are, for example,
Before a performance image imitating an operating means to which an operation opportunity is given appears in the display area, a specific image is displayed so as to cover at least the area in which the performance image appears;
Then, a performance image imitating the operation means of the side to which the operation opportunity is given is displayed at a position that is difficult to see due to the specific image,
- After that, the specific image may be gradually changed from the display area to hidden (such as by increasing the transparency of the specific image itself or reducing the area in which the specific image is displayed) to make them common. For example, in the first premonition effect, a display effect using a "cloud effect" as the specific image (a display effect in which the image imitating the operating means becomes gradually easier to see) is performed, in the second premonition effect, a display effect using a "flame effect" as the specific image (a display effect in which the image imitating the operating means becomes gradually easier to see), and in the third premonition effect, a display effect using a "water effect" as the specific image (a display effect in which the image imitating the operating means becomes gradually easier to see). By making the types of specific images different, it is possible to make these premonition effects different from each other. In other words, in this case, When the "cloud effect" display performance is performed, it is recognizable that a first premonition performance is being performed before an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410; when the "flame effect" display performance is performed, it is recognizable that a second premonition performance is being performed before an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001; and when the "water effect" display performance is performed, it is recognizable that a third premonition performance (a specific operation-related performance) regarding whether an operation opportunity will be given to either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is being performed.

When performing a premonition performance (at least one of the first, second, and third premonition performances) with such performance content, it is desirable to generate a performance reception period for the operation means during the period in which the performance image imitating the operation means is difficult to see due to the specific image. When such a configuration is applied to either the first or second premonition performance, an operation opportunity is given to the operation means from a stage where it is uncertain whether the performance image imitating the operation means will be displayed in a display mode with high expectation (e.g., red) or a display mode with low expectation (e.g., blue), so that the performance during the performance reception period can be improved. Also, when such a configuration is applied to the third premonition performance (specific operation-related performance), an operation opportunity is given to the operation means from a stage where it is uncertain whether the operation opportunity will be given to the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001, so that the performance during the performance reception period can be improved.

Figure 185 is a diagram showing an example of a performance when the first premonition performance is performed with such performance content, and Figure 186 is a time chart showing an example of a performance when the first premonition performance is performed with the same content. Below, an example of a performance when the first premonition performance is performed will be explained with reference to Figures 185 and 186, but this example of a performance can also be applied to the second premonition performance or the third premonition performance instead of the first premonition performance.

Figure 185 (a) shows a display situation in which, in a normal game state, the number of reserved symbols is 0 and the display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is changed in a specific display pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination on the display device 1600.

Figure 185 (b) shows a performance situation in which the first premonition performance has begun while the decorative pattern SZ shown in Figure 185 (a) is being displayed in a variable manner.

In the presentation situation shown in FIG. 185(b), a "cloud effect" display presentation is being performed over a large area within the display area of the presentation display device 1600. After this "cloud effect" display presentation starts at timing t1 shown in FIG. 186, the display area is gradually changed to non-display (such as by increasing the transparency of the specific image itself or reducing the area in which the specific image is displayed).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 186, at timing t2, which is an intermediate stage in which the "cloud effect" display effect is gradually changing to non-display, a performance acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs, and a button image BTG modeled after the operation button 410 and an instruction display (a bar display indicating the remaining time of the performance acceptance period) encouraging the user to operate the operation button 410 are displayed (FIG. 185(c)).

In this example, the button image BTG can be displayed in any of a number of different modes, and when the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode (e.g., red), the probability of the operation performance being performed in a more promising mode is higher than when the button image BTG is displayed in the second display mode (e.g., blue). In this regard, in the performance situation shown in FIG. 185(c), even though the "cloud effect" makes it uncertain whether the button image BTG will be displayed in the first or second display mode, when the operation button 410 is operated, a performance is accepted and an operation performance corresponding to the performance acceptance is executed. In other words, in this case, the operation performance is executed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 by switching the performance content from such a premonition performance, so that the performance can be advanced without being uncertain whether the button image BTG will be displayed in the first or second display mode.

In addition, in the performance situation shown in FIG. 185(c), even though the "cloud effect" makes it uncertain whether the button image BTG will be displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode, the instruction display prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 continues to change the length of the bar display, suggesting that the remaining time in the performance acceptance period is gradually decreasing.

In contrast, at time t3, a predetermined time after the occurrence of the effect situation shown in FIG. 185(c), the "cloud effect" becomes completely hidden while the effect acceptance period that occurred at time t2 continues (FIG. 185(d)). In this situation, it becomes possible to operate the operation button 410 while being easily recognizable whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode. That is, in this case, the effect upon operation is executed by switching the effect content from that shown in FIG. 185(d).

With this configuration, during the performance reception period (timings t2 to t4), during the period from when the button image BTG is displayed until the "cloud effect" is completely hidden (timings t2 to t3), it is possible to provide a performance effect by making the button image BTG relatively difficult to see.

In order to improve the quality of the effects received during the entire effect reception period (timings t2 to t4), it is desirable to display an effect that is not displayed during the period between t2 and t3 during the period when the "cloud effect" is completely hidden (timings t3 to t4). In this effect example, when the "cloud effect" is completely hidden (timings t3 to t4), a message such as "Press" is displayed. However, if the button image BTG, which was displayed in a stationary state during the period between t2 and t3, is dynamically displayed during the period between t3 and t4, the quality of the effects during that period (timings t3 to t4) can be improved more favorably.

In addition, in the performance example shown in FIG. 185, the instruction display encouraging the user to operate the operation button 410 and the button image BTG simulating the operation button 410 are displayed simultaneously (when the performance acceptance period occurs), but the button image BTG simulating the operation button 410 may be displayed before the performance acceptance period occurs. In other words, in this case, after the performance display using the "cloud effect" is performed, a performance situation in which the button image BTG is difficult to see will first appear, and after a predetermined time has passed since this situation occurred, the performance acceptance period for the operation button 410 will occur and an instruction display encouraging the user to operate the operation button 410 will appear while the performance situation remains difficult to see.

In this case, when the button image BTG is difficult to see before the effect acceptance period occurs, an effect pattern may appear in which the display state of the button image BTG changes to a more promising state (in the case of the third premonition effect, an effect pattern in which the button image BTG changes to a sword decoration image SYG). With this configuration, it is possible to provide an entertainment that makes it more worthwhile to pay attention to the button image BTG when the button image BTG is in an effect state in which it is difficult to see, and it is possible to maintain interest in the game in an optimal manner.

In the example performance shown in FIG. 185, the button image BTG is made difficult to see by the "cloud effect," but the instruction display encouraging the user to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in such a way that its visibility is maintained without being affected by the "cloud effect." This allows the user to safely enjoy the change in visibility of the button image BTG while knowing the remaining time of the performance acceptance period.

However, the instruction display encouraging the player to operate the operation button 410 may also be made difficult to see until timing t3 due to the influence of the "cloud effect." In other words, in this case, the player is left with a dilemma as to whether or not to operate the operation button 410 while being unable to properly grasp the remaining time of the performance acceptance period and without being certain of the display mode, making it possible to provide an unprecedented and innovative performance.

In addition, in the operation reception presentation shown in FIG. 185, the "reception permission sound" described above or below may be output. In this case, the "reception permission sound" will be output when the operation button 410 is in a state where it is difficult to see due to the "cloud effect."

In addition, if this "acceptance permission sound" is output in one of several modes with different expectation levels (the rate at which a jackpot symbol will appear, including "0" and "100"), it will be possible to properly recognize the expectation level before the entire button image BTG appears, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

When a performance reception (operation) is performed while the "reception permissible sound" is being output, it is desirable to stop outputting the "reception permissible sound" that is in the output state at that point in time. In addition, the "reception permissible sound" may be appropriately configured using any of the configurations described above or below.

The "cloud effect" may be transparent, in which case the button image will be faintly visible behind it, but the invisibility will still be maintained even in this configuration.

The "cloud effect" itself may be displayed in any of a number of different forms with different expectations (the rate at which a winning symbol appears, including "0" and "100"). In this case, while it functions to make the operation button 410 difficult to see, it also increases interest in the game when it indicates a high expectation.

A later-described technique may be used to suppress or silence a specific sound effect (BGM) or to make it non-output during the time between when the "cloud effect" is displayed and when it is completely hidden. A specific sound effect (BGM) that has been suppressed or silenced or made non-output in this way will not be returned to non-suppressed output even when the player performs an operation.

When applying such a performance to any of the first, second, and third premonition effects, even if the length of time from when the premonition effect starts until the performance image imitating the operation means becomes clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) is different, it is desirable to set the same time for all of the times from when the performance image imitating the operation means is displayed until the performance image becomes clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden). Also, when applying such a performance to any of the first, second, and third premonition effects, it is possible to provide multiple performances with different expectations by providing multiple lengths of time from when the premonition effect starts until the performance image imitating the operation means becomes clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden), but it is desirable to set the same time for all of the times from when the performance image imitating the operation means is displayed until the performance image becomes clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden).

In addition, the method of making the effect image imitating the operation means difficult to see does not necessarily have to use a separate image (specific image). For example, the effect image imitating the operation means may be made to appear in a display mode that is relatively difficult to see (timing t2) by changing the setting of the transparency of the effect image imitating the operation means itself, and then gradually change to a display mode that is relatively easy to see (timing t3). However, the timing at which the effect image imitating the operation means appears in a display mode that is relatively difficult to see may be a timing prior to timing t2. In this case, the appearance in such a display mode may itself be performed as a precursor effect, or the effect image imitating the operation means may be made to appear in a display mode that is relatively difficult to see while a different display is being performed as a precursor effect.

In addition, when a specific presentation pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, the specific operation-related presentation described with reference to Figures 166 to 186 may be executed only when a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state) described later is occurring. In other words, when the specific operation-related presentation starts, which of the multiple operation means is available for presentation acceptance is kept secret, and as a result of the presentation progressing, a presentation acceptance period corresponding to only one of the multiple operation means occurs. Therefore, if there is a delay in determining which of the multiple operation means should be operated, the presentation acceptance period may end by consuming all of the remaining time before the player operates it. In this regard, if a specific operation-related effect can be executed only when a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) described below occurs, during the effect acceptance period after the specific operation-related effect is executed, even if an image corresponding to any operation means appears as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, the effect acceptance will be performed by either the player's operation of the operation means that is the target of operation or by the automatic effect function, and the post-operation effect will always be executed, so that interest in the game when the specific operation-related effect is executed can be maintained in an optimal manner.

[Automatic button effect status]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, control to an automatic button presentation state (specific presentation state) can be executed, and when the automatic button presentation state is controlled, if a presentation acceptance period for the operation button 410 (more precisely, a predetermined presentation pattern in which the presentation acceptance period for the operation button 410 is set) occurs based on the result of the big win determination, even if the operation by the player is not accepted during the presentation acceptance period, a process (automatic presentation function) can be executed to cause the same change in the presentation as when the operation by the player is accepted during the presentation acceptance period. According to such an automatic button presentation state, even if the player does not operate each time the presentation acceptance period occurs, a post-operation presentation occurs when the player operates, so that a decrease in interest in the game due to forgetting to operate can be suppressed. Note that the automatic presentation function may cause the same presentation acceptance as when the operation actually occurred when it functions, so that a process according to the presentation acceptance is performed, or the same process as when the presentation acceptance occurs may be performed without causing the presentation acceptance.

In the embodiments of the "automatic performance function" described below, the above-mentioned operation-related techniques, performances, settings, etc. may be used in appropriate combinations or substitutions.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, during the period when the demo screen in which the pattern change is not yet executed is displayed, the operation means is operated multiple times to set the automatic button performance state. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation of the operation button 410, the "various settings" displayed in the menu screen is selected by the second operation of the operation button 410 (or an operation means other than the operation button 410) to display the "various settings" screen, and when the "automatic button performance state setting" displayed in the "various settings" screen is selected by the third operation of the operation button 410 (or an operation means other than the operation button 410), the automatic button performance state is set. Note that only the operation button 410 may be operated multiple times, or the operation of the operation button 410 and the operation of the operation means other than the operation button 410 may be operated multiple times in combination.

In contrast, during the period when the pattern change is in the execution state, the automatic button presentation state can be set by simply operating the operation button 410 once, and such a simplified operation makes it possible to set the automatic button presentation state while maintaining a close eye on the progress of the presentation during the pattern change. However, some players want to actively operate the operation button 410 regardless of whether the valid period has occurred or not, and for such players, if the automatic button presentation state is set by simply operating the operation button 410, their interest in playing may decrease. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to set the automatic button presentation state during the period when the pattern change is in the execution state, it is required to operate the operation button 410 once in a state in which the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) (the so-called "long press state"). This makes it possible to make it difficult to erroneously set the automatic button presentation state even if the operation button 410 is actively operated regardless of whether the valid period has occurred during the period when the pattern change is in the execution state. In addition, it is desirable to prevent the automatic button effect state from being set even if a long press is performed at least when the effect acceptance period occurs during the period when the pattern change is in progress.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the automatic button performance state is set, a different operation mode is required for the period when a demo screen is displayed in which the pattern change is not yet performed and the period when the pattern change is being performed, as a method of canceling this setting.

In other words, while the demo screen in which the pattern change is not yet executed is displayed, the automatic button presentation state can be cancelled by operating the operation means multiple times. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by operating the operation button 410 the first time, "Various Settings" displayed in the menu screen is selected by operating the operation button 410 the second time (or an operation means other than the operation button 410) to display the "Various Settings" screen, and when "Cancel Automatic Button Presentation State" displayed in the "Various Settings" screen is selected by operating the operation button 410 the third time (or an operation means other than the operation button 410), the automatic button presentation state is cancelled.

In contrast, during the period when the pattern change is in an execution state, the automatic button presentation state can be cancelled by simply operating the operation button 410 once. This simplification of the operation makes it possible to cancel the automatic button presentation state while maintaining attention on the progress of the presentation during the pattern change. However, unlike when the automatic button presentation state is set, the automatic button presentation state is cancelled by simply detecting that the operation button 410 has been placed in an operation state (by simply operating in a single operation mode) without maintaining the operation state of the operation button 410 for a predetermined time (even if it is not a long press operation mode). In other words, the fact that some operation has been performed on the operation button 410 means that there is a desire to operate the operation button 410, and therefore it is expected that the interest in playing the game will be maintained in an appropriate manner by cancelling the automatic button presentation state at the time of the operation and quickly returning to the normal presentation state.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is configured to include a plurality of operating means including the operating button 410. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when in an automatic button performance state set by the operation of the operating button 410, a performance acceptance period (more precisely, a predetermined performance pattern in which the performance acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001, etc. is set) occurs in which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operating means (e.g., the sword decoration 5001, etc.) different from the operating button 410 based on the result of the big win determination, and even if the operation by the player (operation for the sword decoration 5001) is not accepted during the performance acceptance period, a process (automatic performance function) can be executed to cause the same change to the performance as when the operation by the player (operation for the sword decoration 5001) is accepted during the performance acceptance period. With this configuration, when the above-mentioned performance (specific operation-related performance (see Figures 166 to 186)) is executed regarding whether a period occurs during which operations on the operation button 410 out of multiple operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001, etc.) are acceptable for performance, or whether a period occurs during which operations on another operation means (for example, sword decoration 5001) are acceptable for performance, there is no need to worry about forgetting to operate the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 as a result of the performance, so it becomes possible to enjoy such specific operation-related performance with peace of mind.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
When a first-side performance reception period occurs in which a first operation means (e.g., operation button 410) among a plurality of operation means is set as an operation target while being controlled in a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), if no operation is performed on the first operation means during the first-side performance reception period, an automatic process can be executed to cause the same change in the performance as when an operation is performed on the first operation means (first automatic performance means),
When a second side performance acceptance period occurs in which a second operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001) among the multiple operation means is set as the operation target while being controlled in a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), if no operation is performed on the second operation means during the second side performance acceptance period, an automatic process can be executed to bring about the same change in the performance as when an operation is performed on the second operation means (second automatic performance means).
With such a configuration, regardless of whether a first side performance reception period or a second side performance reception period occurs, automatic processing by the first automatic performance means or automatic processing by the second automatic performance means can be executed when the same specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the period.

With this configuration, when controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), even if either the first side presentation acceptance period in which the first operating means is set as the operation target or the second side presentation acceptance period in which the second operating means is set as the operation target occurs within the execution period of the pattern change, the automatic presentation function will be able to function when the same specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of these periods, allowing you to enjoy the presentation with peace of mind.

However, when a first side performance acceptance period occurs with the first operation means (e.g., operation button 410) set as the operation target, the performance may progress within the pattern change so that automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed when a specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first side performance acceptance period, and automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed when a time different from the specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first side performance acceptance period. With this configuration, while it is assumed that automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed when a specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first side performance acceptance period, the performance acceptance is performed at a different timing and a post-operation performance is automatically generated, making it possible to function as a surprise performance.

When the game is controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), the occurrence rate of the presentation acceptance period during which the operation opportunity is given to the operation means during the pattern change period may be higher than when the game is not controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state). In other words, in this case, it is expected that the frequency of the presentation acceptance period occurring will be higher, and the frequency of operation forgetting during the presentation acceptance period will also be higher. However, even if an operation forgetting occurs, the automatic presentation function will function to execute the post-operation presentation, so that the presentation acceptance period can be generated more frequently while suppressing a decrease in interest in the game due to frequent forgetting to operate. Incidentally, when the game is controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), it is desirable to increase the occurrence rate of both the presentation acceptance period for the first operation means and the presentation acceptance period for the second operation means, but it is more desirable to make the degree of increase in the occurrence rate different between the presentation acceptance period for the first operation means and the presentation acceptance period for the second operation means.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment (peripheral control MPU 1511a),
When the performance acceptance condition is satisfied within the performance acceptance period, a post-operation performance can be executed (post-operation performance execution means);
A process for satisfying the effect reception condition based on an operation performed by a player within the effect reception period (player operation reception means) can be executed.
When no operation is performed by the player within the effect reception period, a process can be executed to establish the effect reception conditions at a specific timing within the effect reception period without receiving an operation by the player (automatic effect reception means).
However, the specific timing within the effect reception period is set so as not to arrive until at least half of the time set as the effect reception period has elapsed since the start of the effect reception period. This allows the player ample time to operate the game himself before the automatic effect function starts, and leaves the player with the option of causing the effect reception to occur through operation by the player, thereby making it possible to maintain the player's interest in the game.

In this case, when the performance progresses within the pattern change so that there are cases where the automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed when a specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first side performance acceptance period, and cases where the automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed when a time different from the specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first side performance acceptance period, both the above "specific time" and the above "time different from the specific time" will be set to a time value that is at least longer than half the time set as the first side performance acceptance period.

Here, during the execution period of the pattern change when controlled in the automatic button performance state, a performance acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs, and if an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted during the performance acceptance period, a process for generating a post-operation performance according to the performance acceptance is executed. However, at this time, in addition to the process for generating a post-operation performance according to the performance acceptance, a process for canceling the automatic button performance state may also be performed.

Similarly, if a performance acceptance period occurs for an operation means other than the operation button 410 (such as the sword decoration 5001) during the execution period of the pattern change when controlled to the automatic button performance state, and an operation for the sword decoration 5001 is accepted during that performance acceptance period, it is desirable to execute a process for generating a post-operation performance according to that performance acceptance and a process for canceling the automatic button performance state. Note that even in this case, the "post-operation performance according to performance acceptance" will be executed as a performance with the same content as the post-operation performance executed when a performance acceptance period occurs for the sword decoration 5001 during a period when control is not performed in the automatic button performance state, and an operation for the sword decoration 5001 is accepted during that performance acceptance period.

That is, after control has been made into an automatic button presentation state (a specific presentation state), the player may have a desire to return to a presentation state (normal presentation mode) in which the presentation can progress depending on the player's own operation (a desire to end the specific presentation state). This desire often arises when a presentation acceptance period occurs during which the player is given an opportunity to operate, but it is difficult to perform both an operation to end the specific presentation state and an operation to allow operation acceptance within the limited time from the start to the end of the presentation acceptance period, and if the opportunity to operate is lost as a result, interest in the game may decrease. In this regard, in the above configuration, when a performance acceptance period for a specific performance occurs while controlled in the automatic button performance state (specific performance state), a single operation of the operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001 that is given an operation opportunity during the performance acceptance period (simply operating in a single operation mode) is sufficient to perform both a process to end the automatic button performance state (specific performance state) and a process that may cause a change in the performance (a process to execute a post-operation performance). Therefore, even if a desire to end the automatic button performance state (specific performance state) and progress the performance depending on the player's own operation arises during the performance acceptance period, it becomes possible to smoothly switch the performance state.

However, when it comes to changing the settings for the automatic button presentation state (changing the setting to the automatic button presentation state or canceling the automatic button presentation state) during the period when the demo screen is displayed (when the pattern change is not being executed), the setting can be changed without requiring any operation on the sword decoration 5001. In other words, the sword decoration 5001 is given operation opportunities less frequently than the operation button 410 during the execution period of the pattern change, and when an operation opportunity is given, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than that of the operation button 410. Therefore, it is more desirable to prevent operations on the sword decoration 5001 for the sole purpose of changing the settings for the automatic button presentation state (a specific presentation state), thereby increasing the sense of premium when an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001 and maintaining interest in the game. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, while a demo screen in which no pattern change has been performed is being displayed, the automatic button performance state can be set or released by operating any of the multiple operating means other than the sword ornament 5001 (such as the operating button 410 or another operating means) multiple times.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of the pattern change when the machine is not controlled to the automatic button presentation state, the setting can be changed to the automatic button presentation state without the need to operate the sword decoration 5001. In other words, as described above, the machine is controlled to the automatic button presentation state by operating the operation button 410 once in the "long press mode," but operations on the sword decoration 5001 are not permitted solely for the purpose of changing the setting to the automatic button presentation state.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the case where the setting for the automatic button performance state can be changed by an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is limited to a case where a performance acceptance period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs during the execution period of the pattern change when controlled in the automatic button performance state, and an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is accepted within the performance acceptance period, and a corresponding post-operation performance appears. With this configuration, it becomes possible to change the setting to the automatic button performance state by an operation on the sword decorative body 5001, without compromising the premium feeling when an opportunity to operate the sword decorative body 5001 is given.

The multiple operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment may include operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) that can be the target of the "automatic performance function that generates an operation-time performance without operation during the performance acceptance period" when in the automatic button performance state, as well as special operation means that are not the target of the "automatic performance function that generates an operation-time performance without operation during the performance acceptance period". In other words, in this case, when the pattern variation is in an execution state, a performance acceptance period occurs in which an operation opportunity for the special operation means is given, and when an operation for the special operation means is accepted during the performance acceptance period, the expectation of a jackpot is suggested by the post-operation performance according to the performance acceptance. However, even if the machine is in a state controlled to the automatic button performance state, if an operation for the special operation means is not accepted during the performance acceptance period, the same post-operation performance as when the performance was accepted will not appear. However, in this case, the same post-operation performance as when the performance was accepted will not appear, but if it is a performance different from the performance accepted, it may be made to appear.

In addition, it is desirable that the setting of the automatic button performance state using the operation button 410 (operation in a long press mode) should not be permitted not only when a performance acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during the period in which the pattern change is in progress, but also when a performance acceptance period for an operation means other than the operation button 410 occurs (such as a performance acceptance period in which the expectation level is suggested when the sword decoration 5001 is operated, or a performance acceptance period in which the expectation level is suggested when a special operation means is operated). In other words, if an automatic button effect state were to be generated by operating the operation button 410 (by pressing and holding it) during a period in which effects are accepted for an operation means other than the operation button 410, the "automatic effect function that generates an effect upon operation without any operation during the effect acceptance period" would be enabled partway through the effect acceptance period, and the original effect acceptance (effect acceptance when an operation means other than the operation button 410 is operated) could occur without any operation. This would confuse players who are unfamiliar with such automatic button effect states as to whether the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 or the effect acceptance period for an operation means other than the operation button 410 had occurred, which could lead to a decrease in interest in the game.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the premonition effect can be executed prior to the occurrence of the effect acceptance period, but it may be possible to execute the premonition effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect acceptance period when not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) in a different display mode from the premonition effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect acceptance period when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize in advance whether the automatic effect function is in a function state within the specific effect acceptance period, and to enjoy the effects with peace of mind.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific image (e.g., a "bar display" indicating the remaining time) indicating the remaining time is displayed during the effect reception period, but when the effect reception period occurs, an effect image different from the specific image (e.g., an image of lightning falling toward the specific area) may be displayed (premonition effect) outside the specific area where the specific image is displayed at least until the specific image (e.g., the "bar display" indicating the remaining time) is displayed. That is, in this case, when the effect reception period occurs, by checking the movement of the effect image different from the specific image, it is possible to encourage attention to the location where the hidden "specific image indicating the remaining time" will appear, so that it is possible to preferably prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the specific effect reception period ends without the player being able to operate in time, and furthermore, even if the player is unable to operate in time, the automatic effect function will function to execute the post-operation effect, so that it is expected that interest in the game will be preferably maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state setting and the setting cancellation of the automatic button presentation state can be executed by the operation of the player, but the state may be set to the automatic button presentation state or the setting cancellation of the automatic button presentation state may be executed according to the progress of the game or presentation based on the result of the jackpot determination, including the following examples. Examples of the state setting and the setting cancellation according to the progress of the game or presentation include a control mode such as "the automatic button presentation state is controlled while being controlled in the normal game state, but the automatic button presentation state is cancelled when it is transferred to the jackpot game state or the high probability time-saving state", a control mode such as "the automatic button presentation state is generated during the execution period of the pattern change, and a presentation pattern that cancels the setting when a predetermined time has passed since the occurrence before the pattern change in the execution state is ended", and a control mode such as "the automatic button presentation state is generated over the period during which multiple pattern changes are executed", and so on. It is also possible for the pachinko machine 1 to be constantly controlled in the automatic button presentation state, in which case the automatic button presentation state will never be released, and there will be no processing such as setting or releasing the "automatic button presentation state."

The timing at which the automatic performance function described above functions may be when the remaining time of the performance acceptance period has been consumed, or at a specified timing thereafter, or it may be an intermediate timing (specific timing) while there is remaining time in the performance acceptance period. If the automatic performance function described above functions when the remaining time of the performance acceptance period has been consumed, or at a specified timing thereafter, the post-operation performance will be executed as if the performance acceptance had been made after the performance acceptance period had ended. In contrast, if the automatic performance function described above functions at an intermediate timing (specific timing) while there is remaining time in the performance acceptance period, the performance acceptance period will end at the time when the automatic performance function described above functions (specific timing) and the post-operation performance will be executed, just as if an operation had actually been performed.

However, in order to ensure a sense of security that a post-operation effect will occur without operation when the automatic button effect state is in effect, it is important to activate the automatic effect function and start the corresponding post-operation effect until the end of the effect acceptance period (at a specific timing within the effect acceptance period). In other words, in this case, if the automatic effect function does not function even though a specific timing within the effect acceptance period has arrived, the player can operate the game himself after the specific timing has arrived to cause a post-operation effect to occur, which makes it possible to suitably suppress feelings of anxiety when the game is in the automatic button effect state (for example, "I may mistakenly believe that I am in the automatic button effect state even though I am not in the automatic button effect state, and I may not be able to see the post-operation effect," or "Some kind of trouble may cause the automatic effect function to not work, and I may not be able to see the post-operation effect," etc.).

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has characteristic technologies related to this automatic button performance state. Below, the characteristic technologies related to the automatic button performance state will be explained in order, but these characteristic technologies may be applied to each of the performance examples described above, or the following characteristic technologies may be used in appropriate combination.

In addition, in explaining each of the characteristic technologies below, the premise is that in a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), when a presentation acceptance period occurs that can occur even when not controlled to the specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), a post-operation presentation is generated that is the same as when an operation is performed, even if no operation is performed during the presentation acceptance period. However, instead of this, a specific display presentation (a display presentation that can be selected based on the result of a jackpot determination) that can only be executed when controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state) may be prepared, and when a specific effective period related to this occurs while the specific display presentation is being performed, a post-operation presentation that is the same as when the operation is performed may be generated, even if no operation is performed during the specific effective period. According to such a configuration, not only is the performance enhanced when the game is controlled in a specific performance state (automatic button performance state) (the performance is improved by allowing the occurrence of a specific display performance), but also, even if a specific performance state (automatic button performance state) occurs, the automatic performance function may not function during another performance acceptance period that is set when a specific display performance is not being performed, whereas in a specific effective period when a specific display performance is being performed, the automatic performance function functions, thereby saving the trouble of operating the game, and allowing the player to feel like a VIP, which is expected to favorably increase the interest in the game. Note that the automatic performance function does not necessarily have to be disabled during all of the other performance acceptance periods that are set when a specific display performance is not being performed, and if the automatic performance function is disabled during at least some of the performance acceptance periods, it is possible to expect the above-mentioned action and effect when a specific effective period occurs when a specific display performance is being performed (when a performance acceptance period in which the automatic performance function always works occurs). Furthermore, even if such a specific valid period occurs, if the player does not perform any operation until a specific timing within the specific valid period arrives, it is desirable to activate the above-mentioned automatic performance function at that specific timing to start a corresponding post-operation performance.

In addition, at least a first specific display effect, a second specific display effect, and a third specific display effect are prepared as specific display effects that can be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination,
When a first specific effective period occurs while a first specific display effect is being executed, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing when a first predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first specific effective period, and ends the first specific effective period and generates a corresponding post-operation effect.
When a second specific effective period occurs while the second specific display effect is being executed, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a timing when a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the second specific effective period, thereby ending the second specific effective period and generating a corresponding post-operation effect; and
- When the third specific effective period occurs while the third specific display effect is being executed, each process may be performed while in the specific effect state, such that if no operation is performed before the end of the third specific effective period despite being controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed will not appear. With this configuration, even if the effect acceptance period (specific effective period) occurs while controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function when a first predetermined time has elapsed since the effect acceptance period occurred, the above-mentioned automatic effect function will not function unless a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time has elapsed, or the above-mentioned automatic effect function will not function at all even if the effect acceptance period ends. Therefore, even when controlled to a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), it is possible to have the necessity to confirm which type of specific display presentation has been performed when a presentation acceptance period (specific valid period) occurs, and for example, when the above-mentioned automatic presentation function does not function even though a first predetermined time has elapsed, it is possible to progress the presentation with a sense of tension, such as whether the above-mentioned automatic presentation function will function when a second predetermined time has elapsed, or whether the above-mentioned automatic presentation function will not function at all. Note that the first specific valid period, the second specific valid period, and the third specific valid period are all ones that are accepted for presentation and generate a post-operation presentation when the operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) to be operated is in an operating state (when a so-called single operation is performed).

The first, second, and third specific display effects may be executable only when the game is controlled to a specific display state (automatic button display state). In this way, when the game is controlled to a specific display state (automatic button display state), if a display mode that cannot appear when the game is not controlled to the specific display state (automatic button display state) can be displayed, it is possible to preferably maintain the interest in playing the game when the game is in the specific display state (automatic button display state). In addition, the first specific display effect (first specific valid period) and the second specific display effect (second specific valid period) are prepared, but the third specific display effect (third specific valid period) does not necessarily have to be prepared. In addition, the post-operation effects that occur when the effects are accepted in the first specific valid period, the second specific valid period, and the third specific valid period may have different effects.

In addition, when the automatic performance function described above functions to generate a post-operation performance, the bar display (a display whose image changes (here, the area changes) over time) indicating the remaining time of the performance reception period may be displayed rather than hidden when the automatic performance function functions, so that it is possible to recognize when the automatic performance function functions (how much time was left in the performance reception period when the performance was accepted) and generate a post-operation performance. With this configuration, for example, by checking the remaining time indicated by the "bar display" that continues to be displayed when the automatic performance function functions, it becomes possible to recognize whether the performance reception period was a first specific effective period (a period during which the automatic performance function functions when a first specified time has elapsed, which is a relatively early stage after the performance reception period has occurred) or a second specific effective period (a period during which the automatic performance function functions when a second specified time has elapsed, which is a relatively late stage after the performance reception period has occurred).

In this sense, it is desirable to make the jackpot expectation different (for example, the second specific effective period is more advantageous) when the first specific effective period (the period during which the automatic performance function functions when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the performance reception period has occurred) occurs and when the second specific effective period (the period during which the automatic performance function functions when the second predetermined time has elapsed since the performance reception period has occurred) occurs. In this case, the first specific display performance and the second specific display performance may not necessarily be executed. However, if the first specific display performance and the second specific display performance are executed, the jackpot expectation will function to be different (for example, the second specific display performance is more advantageous) when the first specific display performance appears and when the second specific display performance appears. In addition, if a post-operation performance occurs due to an operation by the player during the performance reception period, the "bar display" may be made non-displayed when the post-operation performance occurs, or, as in the case where the above-mentioned automatic performance function has functioned, the "bar display" may not be made non-displayed and may be displayed to generate the post-operation performance. The post-operation performance does not have to be executed as a display change on the performance display device 1600, but may be executed, for example, as illumination by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an action by a movable decorative object.

In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the above-mentioned automatic performance function functioning, the post-operation effect is automatically generated without the player having any involvement in the operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) that is the operation target, so there is a concern that the player will not be able to grasp which operation means the automatically generated post-operation effect corresponds to. Therefore, when the above-mentioned automatic performance function is operated to generate a post-operation effect, it is desirable to first display an operation target suggestion image (e.g., an image display imitating the operation means to be operated) that suggests the operation target operation means during the performance reception period, and to generate the post-operation effect with the operation target suggestion image displayed rather than hidden, even if the above-mentioned automatic performance function has functioned. In this case, the display mode (e.g., color, transparency, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image before and after the post-operation effect occurs does not necessarily have to be the same, and it is sufficient that it is possible to recognize which operation means was the operation target even in the state in which the post-operation effect occurs. In contrast, if a post-operation effect occurs due to an operation by a player during the effect acceptance period, the operation target suggestion image may be made invisible when the post-operation effect occurs, or, as in the case where the above-mentioned automatic effect function has functioned, the post-operation effect may be generated with the operation target suggestion image displayed rather than hidden. When the above-mentioned automatic effect function has functioned, such as when the above-mentioned automatic effect function has functioned within the above-mentioned first specific effective period or when the above-mentioned automatic effect function has functioned within the above-mentioned second specific effective period, the post-operation effect may always be generated with the operation target suggestion image displayed rather than hidden.

In this case, if the post-operation effect is generated while the operation target suggestion image is displayed in one of several modes with different odds of winning, it becomes possible to simultaneously check both the mode of the operation target suggestion image and the mode of the post-operation effect, which can increase interest in the game. Furthermore, the post-operation effect does not have to be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600, and may be executed, for example, as illumination by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable decorative body.

For example, even in a pachinko machine 1 that does not have the automatic performance function described above, multiple modes of operation target suggestion images (such as images that imitate the operating means) with different jackpot expectations (for example, the rate at which the post-operation performance is executed in a mode that appears only when a jackpot has been obtained) can be prepared, and when an operation is accepted by the player, the operation target suggestion image (such as an image that imitates the operating means) can be left displayed in one of the multiple modes with different expectations at the time the post-operation performance begins to be executed based on the operation acceptance. This allows the player to simultaneously check both the mode of the operation target suggestion image and the mode of the post-operation performance, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

When a valid period (performance reception period) during which a mock image is displayed is generated, it is desirable to have a display in which the display area is reduced over time (a first valid period generated by the establishment of a first condition) and a display in which the display area is not reduced over time (a second valid period generated by the establishment of a second condition) based on the type of the valid period (performance reception period) (such as the condition for the valid period to occur or the type of post-operation performance that occurs when an operation is accepted). In other words, during a valid period in which the display area is not reduced over time, it becomes difficult to recognize how much time is left for operation acceptance, and the sense of tension during the valid period can be appropriately maintained. Note that "not displaying a specific image with a reduced display over time" can be realized by, for example, adopting a method in which a gauge image is displayed in a manner in which the display area is reduced over time during a normal period (first valid period) but the gauge image itself is not displayed during a second valid period, or a method in which the gauge image is displayed but its display area is not reduced over time.

In this regard, when an operation is accepted during the second valid period (when the display area is not reduced over time), it is desirable that the imitation image be displayed rather than hidden at the time when the change corresponding to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or a lamp illumination) begins to be executed. This allows the user to know that the operation has been accepted while the imitation image is displayed (before the valid period ends), and eliminates any anxiety that the user may have "missed the operation acceptance in time."

In this case, the display mode (e.g., color, transmittance, etc.) of the imitation image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or a lamp light emission) occurs, and the imitation image may be made difficult to see by other images, as long as it is possible to recognize which operating means was the target of the operation even in a state in which a change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or a lamp light emission) occurs. However, in order to preferably obtain such an effect, it is desirable to maintain the display state of the imitation image in the mode displayed before the operation was accepted, at least at the time when the change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or a lamp light emission) begins to be executed, and to prevent the imitation image from being made difficult to see by other images. Therefore, if the replica image is dynamically displayed during the valid period in which operation reception is permitted, it is desirable to continue the dynamic display even when a change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or a lamp light) is started. In contrast, if a change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or a lamp light) occurs due to an operation by the player during the first valid period, the replica image may be hidden when the change (display change, lamp light, etc.) occurs, or, as in the case of the second valid period described above, the replica image may be displayed instead of hidden, and a change in response to the operation reception (display change, lamp light, etc.) may occur while the replica image is displayed.

However, even during this effective period when "the display area of the specific image is not reduced over time," a dummy image that mimics the operating means to be operated should be displayed, and it is desirable to display this dummy image as a moving image that progresses at a specific speed. With this configuration, although the remaining time is not indicated by the gauge image, it is possible, though difficult, to grasp the remaining time during which operation acceptance is permitted based on how far the moving image of the dummy image has progressed, which is expected to maintain interest in the game in an optimal manner.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 in this example is equipped with a first operation means (e.g., operation button 410) and a second operation means (e.g., sword decoration 5001) as operation means, and there are cases where an effective period (effect reception period) during which operation reception for the first operation means is permitted is generated, and cases where an effective period (effect reception period) during which operation reception for the second operation means is permitted is generated, and of these effective periods, a first imitation image of the first operation means is displayed during the effective period during which operation reception for the first operation means is permitted, and a second imitation image of the second operation means is displayed during the effective period during which operation reception for the second operation means is permitted. Also, the effective period during which operation reception for the first operation means is permitted and the effective period during which operation reception for the second operation means are permitted have different jackpot expectancies (probability of execution of a mode that only appears at the time of a jackpot as a post-operation performance) suggested when an operation is received. In addition to the valid period during which operation acceptance for the first operation means is permitted (performance acceptance period) and the valid period during which operation acceptance for the second operation means is permitted (performance acceptance period), other valid periods may be possible. In this regard, when an operation is accepted during a valid period with a high probability of winning (for example, a valid period during which operation acceptance for the second operation means is permitted), it is desirable that the model image (second model image) is not hidden but is in a displayed state at the time when the change corresponding to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed.

As a result, in addition to cases where an operation is accepted in a situation such as that shown in FIG. 183(f) above, even if, for example, an operation is mistakenly performed on the first operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) despite the opportunity to operate the second operation means (e.g., the sword decoration 5001) being given, and an operation is performed on the second operation means (e.g., the sword decoration 5001) while the first operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) is still in an operating state (while operating), and this operation is accepted, the player can be made to recognize that this has been properly accepted.

In this case, the display mode (e.g., color, transmittance, etc.) of the imitation image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) occurs, and the imitation image may be made difficult to see by other images, as long as it is possible to recognize which operating means was the target of the operation even in a state in which a change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) occurs. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned effect, it is desirable to maintain the display state of the imitation image in the same manner as it was displayed before the operation was accepted, at least at the time when the change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed, and to prevent the gauge image from being made difficult to see by other images. Therefore, if the imitation image is dynamically displayed during the valid period in which operation acceptance is permitted, it is desirable to continue the dynamic display even when a change in response to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed. Also, in order to allow the player to recognize that the performance has been accepted properly, even if a change in response to the operation acceptance (display change, lamp illumination, etc.) occurs due to the player's operation during the first valid period, it is desirable to display the imitation image (first imitation image) rather than hiding it when the change (display change, lamp illumination, etc.) occurs, and to cause the change in response to the operation acceptance (display change, lamp illumination, etc.) to occur while it is displayed.

According to this configuration, "the game includes a determination means for making a determination, a performance means for performing a performance based on the result of the determination by the determination means, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the determination by the determination means, a specific operation receiving portion (operation button 410 that can be displaced between a normal position and a pressed position) that is displaceable between a first position and a second position, a first detection unit that can detect a specific action (a press operation) by a player based on the displacement of the specific operation receiving portion to the second position, and a second detection unit that can detect a special action (e.g., a sheathing operation) by a player to a special operation receiving portion (e.g., sword decoration 5001) different from the specific operation receiving portion, and a plurality of performance reception periods (different types of post-operation performances that occur when performance reception is made) including a first performance reception period and a second performance reception period. a performance acceptance period is provided, during the first performance acceptance period, a specific model image simulating the specific operation receiving portion is displayed, and performance acceptance is made by detection by the first detection unit, during the second performance acceptance period, a special model image simulating the special operation receiving portion is displayed, and performance acceptance is made by detection by the second detection unit, and even if the special model image simulating the special operation receiving portion is displayed during the second performance acceptance period and the specific operation receiving portion is displaced from the first position to the second position by a specific action by the player, even if the special action by the player is performed while maintaining the specific operation receiving portion at the second position, performance acceptance is made by detection by the second detection unit, and a post-operation performance can be executed based on the performance acceptance."

And in this configuration, "even if the special action is performed by the player while the specific operation receiving part is maintained in the second position, the effect is accepted upon detection by the second detection part, and at the point in time when the post-operation effect is started to be executed based on the effect acceptance, the special image imitating the special operation receiving part is not hidden but remains displayed, thereby enabling the player to recognize that the post-operation effect is being executed as an operation by the correct side, and not as an operation by the side that performed the operation erroneously.

When the special Momo image is displayed in one of multiple modes with different odds of winning, the post-operation performance will start with the special Momo image displayed. If the performance is accepted without such an erroneous operation, the Momo image may be left displayed rather than hidden when the post-operation performance starts, or the Momo image may be hidden when the post-operation performance starts.

The second performance acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to a special operation receiving part often occurs less frequently than the first performance acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation receiving part, and this is thought to be one of the factors that cause operation errors. Therefore, when the second performance acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to a special operation receiving part occurs, it is desirable to output an acceptance permission sound that indicates that the performance acceptance has been permitted or that the performance acceptance will be permitted. This allows the player to recognize that the second performance acceptance period has occurred, and is expected to make it difficult for operation errors to occur. The "acceptance permission sound" is a sound that, when the sound starts to be output, always occurs during the time that this sound is output (while the sound data is assigned), or is in a state in which the acceptance permission state (valid period) has already occurred. In other words, it indicates that the output has started within the set time during which the performance reception is permitted and that the performance reception is permitted, or that the output has started before the set time during which the performance reception is permitted starts and that the performance reception is permitted, and is output as a performance sound such as a "ping-pong."

However, even when the first performance reception period occurs in which an operation opportunity is given to the specific operation receiving unit, a reception permission sound may be output to indicate that the performance reception has been permitted or to indicate that the performance reception will be permitted. In this case, however, it is preferable to make the manner (tone, etc.) of the reception permission sound different between the first performance reception period and the second performance reception period. Alternatively, in the first performance reception period, even if a performance reception is made while the reception permission sound is being output, the reception permission sound in the output state is not terminated but is continued, but in the second performance reception period, if a performance reception is made while the reception permission sound is being output, the reception permission sound in the output state is preferably terminated midway. Both of these configurations may be adopted. With such a configuration, it becomes easier to grasp whether the first performance reception period or the second performance reception period will occur, and it becomes possible to properly grasp whether an operation to the specific operation receiving unit or an operation to the special operation receiving unit has been accepted.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a small gauge effective period (performance acceptance period) is generated by displaying a gauge image (small gauge image) with a relatively small display area, and then displaying the display area of the gauge image (small gauge image) to be smaller over time (for example, displaying the display area to be "0"), which indicates the remaining time during which operation acceptance is permitted, or a large gauge effective period (performance acceptance period) is generated by displaying a gauge image (large gauge image) with a relatively large display area, and then displaying the display area of the gauge image (large gauge image) to be smaller over time (for example, displaying the display area to be "0"), which indicates the remaining time during which operation acceptance is permitted. The small gauge effective period in which the small gauge image is displayed and the large gauge effective period in which the large gauge image is displayed are different in the jackpot expectation level (the rate at which a mode that appears only at the time of a jackpot is executed as a post-operation performance) indicated when operation acceptance is performed (for example, the large gauge effective period has a higher jackpot expectation level). In addition to the small gauge effective period and the large gauge effective period, other effective periods may be generated. The small gauge validity period and the large gauge validity period may provide operation opportunities for the same operation target, or may provide operation opportunities for different operation targets.

In this regard, when an operation is accepted during the large gauge valid period, it is desirable that the large gauge image is not hidden but remains displayed at the time when the change in response to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes resulting from the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed. It is also desirable that the display of the large gauge image getting smaller over time continues without ending even at the time when the change in response to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes in response to the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed. This provides a sense of security that there appears to be a lot of time remaining because the large gauge image is displayed, but after the operation is accepted, it is possible to create a sense of anxiety as to whether the operation was accepted properly, and it is possible to maintain a sense of tension in an appropriate manner.

In this case, the display mode (e.g., color, transmittance, etc.) of the gauge image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after a change occurs in response to operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by a post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination), and the gauge image may be made difficult to see by other images. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned effect, it is desirable to maintain the display state of the gauge image in the mode it was displayed in before the operation was accepted, at least at the point in time when the change in response to operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by a post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed, and to prevent the gauge image from being made difficult to see by other images. On the other hand, if a change occurs during the small gauge validity period due to an operation by the player in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by a post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination), the gauge image (small gauge image) may be made invisible when the change (display change, lamp illumination, etc.) occurs, or, as in the case of the large gauge validity period described above, the gauge image (large gauge image) may not be hidden, but may be displayed while a change occurs in response to the operation reception (display change, lamp illumination, etc.).

In addition, when the large gauge valid period occurs, it is desirable to output a reception permission sound that indicates that the performance reception is permitted or that the performance reception will be permitted. This allows the player to recognize that the large gauge valid period has occurred, and further emphasizes the sense of security until the operation reception is performed. The "reception permission sound" is a sound that, when the sound starts to be output, always generates a reception permission state (valid period) while the sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned), or is in a state where the reception permission state (valid period) has already occurred. In other words, it is a sound that starts to be output within the set time during which the performance reception is permitted and indicates that the performance reception is permitted, or starts to be output before the set time during which the performance reception is permitted starts and indicates that the performance reception is permitted, and is output as a performance sound such as a "beep".

However, even when a small gauge valid period occurs, a reception permission sound may be output that indicates that a performance reception is permitted or that a performance reception is permitted. In this case, however, it is desirable to make the manner (tone, etc.) of the reception permission sound different between when a small gauge valid period occurs and when a large gauge valid period occurs. Alternatively, during a small gauge valid period, even if a performance reception is made while the reception permission sound is being output, the reception permission sound in the output state is not terminated but is continued, but during a large gauge valid period, if a performance reception is made while the reception permission sound is being output, it is desirable to terminate the reception permission sound in the middle of it. Both of these configurations may be adopted. With such a configuration, it becomes easier to grasp whether a small gauge valid period or a large gauge valid period will occur, and it becomes possible to properly grasp whether an operation reception has been made during a small gauge valid period or a large gauge valid period.

The large gauge image and the small gauge image may not only differ in size, but may also differ in shape (e.g., images that are not similar to each other).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above (or later), during the period in which operation acceptance is permitted, the replica image is dynamically displayed to depict the operation receiving portion being displaced. In this regard, if the replica image is not hidden but is left displayed at the time when a change in response to operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed, the dynamic display of the replica image may also be continued without being terminated.

The model image and gauge image may also be displayed as an integrated model image, which will be described later.

In each of the above-mentioned examples and each of the examples described below, "operation reception" may be detection by a mechanical operation means such as a button, or may be reception of an operation by detecting contact with a specific operation receiving portion with a touch sensor, or reception of an operation by non-contact detection of the player's movement in a specific area.

In addition, when an effect that generates an effect acceptance period during which an operation opportunity is given to an operation means (any of multiple operation means) is defined as an "operation-based effect", the operation-based effect may be executed in parallel with another specific effect that is unrelated to it (for example, a movable body effect, a count effect, etc.). In this case, however, when the "operation-based effect" is executed but the "other specific effect that is unrelated to it" is not executed in a performance situation, it is desirable to make the automatic performance function described above function more frequently than when the "operation-based effect" and the "other specific effect that is unrelated to it" are executed in parallel. That is, when the "operation-based effect" and the "other specific effect unrelated to this" are in a parallel performance situation, even if the "operation-based effect" does not receive a performance reception and the post-operation effect is not executed, the "other specific effect unrelated to this" is in an execution state, so that the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed, whereas when the "operation-based effect" is executed but the "other specific effect unrelated to this" is not executed, if the "operation-based effect" does not receive a performance reception and the post-operation effect is not executed, the situation will be such that no performance is executed, and therefore the decrease in interest in the game is unavoidable. Therefore, when the "operation-based effect" is executed but the "other specific effect unrelated to this" is not executed, the automatic effect function is set to function at a higher rate than when the "operation-based effect" and the "other specific effect unrelated to this" are in a parallel performance situation, so that the interest in the game can be favorably maintained when the operation-based effect occurs. The rate may be 100%. Incidentally, the premonition effect that is performed before the effect reception period occurs, and the effect in which the operation means to be operated is operated, can be said to be executed as an "operation-related effect" or an effect related thereto. In addition, if the "other specific effect" is generated, for example, before the start of the effect reception period (preferably, the premonition effect), it is possible to suggest in advance that the rate at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function will be high. In this case, it is desirable to execute it as an effect that ends after the end of the effect reception period (preferably, the post-operation effect). In contrast, if the "other specific effect" is generated, for example, after the start of the effect reception period (preferably, the premonition effect) and executed as an effect that ends before the end of the effect reception period, it becomes possible to recognize whether the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function at a high rate only immediately before, and it becomes possible to provide an effect with a sense of tension. In this regard, if the "another specific effect" is to be generated before the start of the effect acceptance period (preferably the premonition effect), then if the "another specific effect" is performed multiple times within one pattern change, it will be executed even when the effect acceptance period does not occur, so that it is possible to create tension as to whether the effect acceptance period will occur while the automatic effect function is functioning at a high rate when the "another specific effect" is executed.

In addition, when in a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), until the number of executions of missing variations according to the result of the jackpot determination reaches a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive missing variations are executed and the 1000th missing variation), a presentation acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of multiple operation means) based on the result of the jackpot determination can be generated with a predetermined probability, and even if the presentation acceptance period occurs, if there is no operation by the player, the above-mentioned automatic presentation function may or may not be activated. In contrast, when in a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), if the number of times the failure variations according to the result of the big win determination are consumed in sequence and reach a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive failure variations are executed, resulting in the 1000th failure variation), the pattern variation (presentation pattern) that has reached the specific value will always generate a presentation acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of the multiple operation means) regardless of the result of the big win determination, and even if there is no operation by the player during the presentation acceptance period, the above-mentioned automatic presentation function may be activated to always generate the same post-operation presentation as when there is an operation by the player during the presentation acceptance period. According to this configuration, when the number of consecutive executions of the failure variations reaches a specific value, the pachinko machine 1 itself is realized as a presentation that always activates the automatic presentation function even if there is no operation by the player, as if it felt responsible for the past "having urged the player to operate every time a presentation acceptance period occurred while the failure variations were being executed consecutively, but no results were achieved." This makes it possible to maintain the interest in the game in a good condition. In this case, during the performance acceptance period that occurs when the losing variations are sequentially consumed and the number of times they are executed reaches a specific value (for example, the 1000th losing variation), it is desirable to display a special display image (for example, "If it is too much trouble, I will operate it for you") different from the display image (for example, "Operate it") that appeared during the performance acceptance period until the losing variations are sequentially consumed and the number of times they are executed reaches a specific value (for example, up to 999 losing variations). Furthermore, even after a pattern change (presentation pattern) that has reached a specific value has been consumed, each time a pattern change is consumed until a specific condition (for example, the occurrence of a jackpot game state) is met, a presentation acceptance period is always generated within the pattern change (presentation pattern) during which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of multiple operation means) regardless of the result of the jackpot determination, and a special display image (for example, "If it's too much trouble, I'll operate it for you") appears, and it is desirable to execute a process that causes the above-mentioned automatic presentation function to function and always generates a post-operation presentation according to the presentation acceptance even if the player does not operate the game during the presentation acceptance period.

In addition, when in a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), the number of remaining variations may be displayed until the number of executions reaches a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive executions of missing variations and the 1000th missing variation) as the missing variations corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination are consumed in sequence.

In addition, when in a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state), during the pattern change, until the number of executions of the miss variations corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially consumed and reaches a specific value, both the presentation acceptance period for the first operation means and the presentation acceptance period for the second operation means can occur, but in the pattern change when the miss variations are sequentially consumed and the number of executions reaches a specific value, only one of the presentation acceptance period for the first operation means and the presentation acceptance period for the second operation means always occurs, and the presentation can be advanced so that the other cannot occur. With such a configuration, since an operation opportunity is always given to the same operation means, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of expectations regarding the occurrence of a presentation acceptance period itself. However, considering that this example of presentation is realized as a presentation in which the pachinko machine 1 itself ensures that the automatic presentation function will function even if there is no operation by the player, as if the manufacturer felt responsible for the fact that "the player was prompted to operate each time a presentation acceptance period occurred while the losing variations were being executed continuously, but no results were achieved," it is preferable to generate a presentation acceptance period for the first operating means (e.g., operation button 410), which has a relatively low level of expectation when it occurs, and not generate a presentation acceptance period for the second operating means (e.g., sword decoration 5001), so as not to create excessive expectations any further.

The first effect acceptance period during which an operation opportunity is given to a first operation means (e.g., operation button 410) among the multiple operation means can occur both when the operation means is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) and when the operation means is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), but the second effect acceptance period during which an operation opportunity is given to a second operation means (e.g., sword ornament 5001) among the multiple operation means may be configured to not occur when the operation means is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) but to occur when the operation means is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). With this configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect when the operation means is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and to maintain the interest in playing when the operation means is in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a performance acceptance period is generated based on the result of the jackpot determination,
Displaying a mock image of an operating means (an operation target suggesting image suggesting an operating means to be operated) (a mock image display means);
After the effect reception period has occurred, when a player performs an operation while the model image is being displayed, a post-operation effect can be executed based on the operation (player operation reception means),
After the performance reception period has occurred, if a specific timing arrives without the player performing any operation while the model image is being displayed, the post-operation performance can be executed without the player performing any operation (automatic performance reception means).
However, it is desirable that the mock image can be displayed in one of a number of modes with different rates (expectations) of execution of the post-operation effect in a "mode advantageous to the player" when the effect is accepted. With this configuration, in either case of the post-operation effect being generated by the player operation accepting means or the post-operation effect being generated by the automatic effect accepting means, it becomes possible to generate the post-operation effect while the expectation is recognizable.

In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the function of the automatic effect function, the post-operation effect is automatically generated without the player having any involvement in the operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) that is the operation target, so there is a concern that the player will not be able to grasp which operation means the automatically generated post-operation effect corresponds to. Therefore, when the automatic effect function is operated to generate a post-operation effect, it is desirable to first display a mock image (an operation target suggestion image that suggests the operation means to be operated) during the effect acceptance period, and to generate the post-operation effect with the mock image displayed, rather than hiding it, even if the automatic effect function has functioned. In this case, the display mode (e.g., color, transparency, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image before and after the post-operation effect occurs does not necessarily have to be the same, as long as it is possible to recognize which operation means was the operation target even in the state in which the post-operation effect occurs. On the other hand, if a post-operation effect occurs due to an operation by the player during the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden when the post-operation effect occurs, or, as in the case where the automatic effect function described above has functioned, the operation target suggestion image may not be hidden but may be displayed when the post-operation effect occurs. The post-operation effect may be performed using at least an area of the effect display device 1600 that is different from the area where the mock image is displayed, or may be performed by lighting a lamp provided on the game board 5 or by operating a movable decoration.

In this case, if the model image is displayed in one of multiple modes with different expectation levels, it will be possible to check the expectation level (model image display mode) that was suggested during the performance acceptance period even when the post-operation performance has occurred.

The imitation image that continues to be displayed in this way will be hidden after the post-operation performance occurs. However, it is desirable that the time from when the post-operation performance is performed until the imitation image is hidden be different between the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is performed when a specific time has elapsed since the first-side performance reception period has occurred and the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is performed when a time different from the specific time has elapsed since the first-side performance reception period has occurred. With this configuration, even if it is not possible to recognize whether the post-operation performance occurred by automatic processing when a specific time has elapsed or when a time different from the specific time has elapsed, it is possible to recognize at what time the post-operation performance occurred by checking the time from when the post-operation performance was performed until the imitation image was hidden.

The likelihood of a jackpot being obtained in the jackpot determination may be different when a post-operation effect occurs through automatic processing after a specific time has elapsed and when a post-operation effect occurs through automatic processing after a time other than the specific time has elapsed.

In addition, when a specific presentation state (automatic button presentation state) is controlled and a presentation acceptance period occurs during which the player is given an opportunity to operate, one of two display modes (e.g., a low expectation display mode with a relatively low expectation of a jackpot, and a high expectation display mode with a relatively high expectation of a jackpot) can appear during the presentation acceptance period, and when a high expectation display mode (e.g., a red operation image) appears, even if no operation is performed within the presentation acceptance period, the presentation is always accepted (the automatic presentation function always functions) and a post-operation presentation corresponding to the presentation acceptance is executed, but when a low expectation display mode (e.g., a blue operation image) appears, if no operation is performed within the presentation acceptance period, the presentation may progress in such a way that there are cases where the presentation is accepted (the automatic presentation function functions) and a post-operation presentation corresponding to the presentation acceptance is executed, and cases where the presentation is not accepted (the automatic presentation function functions) and a post-operation presentation is not executed. That is, if an operation is forgotten when a high-expectation display mode (e.g., a red operation image) appears, a decrease in interest in the game is inevitable due to the inability to confirm the post-operation performance, but it is assumed that an operation is forgotten when a low-expectation display mode (e.g., a blue operation image) appears, even if an operation is forgotten, the automatic performance function is always activated within the performance reception period to avoid a decrease in interest in the game due to an operation forgetting, while the automatic performance function is not always activated within the performance reception period to prevent an operation forgetting when a low-expectation display mode (e.g., a blue operation image) appears, so that a sense of tension is created in the game and a sense of participation of the player is increased so that an operation forgetting does not occur. Note that when not controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), a low-expectation display mode (e.g., a blue operation image) appears, but a high-expectation display mode (e.g., a red operation image) may not appear. Also, during the performance reception period, any of three or more display modes may appear.

The characteristic technologies described below may also be implemented by appropriately applying these other examples of automatic button presentation states.

[Automatic performance function suggests expectations]
As described above, in the automatic button performance state, even if the player does not perform an operation during the performance acceptance period (when the above-mentioned alternative example is applied, the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period), a process (automatic performance function) that causes the same change to the performance as when the operation is performed can be executed. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the operation by the player is not accepted during the performance acceptance period in the automatic button performance state, a performance pattern in which the process (automatic performance function) that causes the same change to the performance as when the performance is accepted is not executed can also be generated. In this case, when the automatic performance function does not function when the operation by the player is not accepted during the performance acceptance period in the automatic button performance state, a process can be executed to advance the performance in the pattern variation so that the expectation (proportion) of the big win pattern appearing in the pattern variation is lower than when the automatic performance function works. In this case, the expectation (proportion) of the big win pattern appearing may be 0%.

According to this configuration, when a performance acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button performance state, by checking whether the automatic performance function works when the operation button 410 is not operated during the performance acceptance period, it is possible to grasp the expectation of whether a jackpot pattern will appear in the pattern change in the execution state. In other words, in this case, in the automatic button performance state, there is a risk that a performance disadvantage may occur, such as "the post-operation performance itself, which would have been confirmed if the performance acceptance (operation of the operation button 410) had been performed during the performance acceptance period, will not be confirmed," and it is expected that the novel performance, in which the player is forced to exercise a performance selection such as "not operating the operation button 410 during the performance acceptance period," will favorably maintain the interest in the game.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is capable of executing the above-mentioned performance (specific operation-related performance (see Figures 166 to 186)) regarding whether a period occurs during which an operation on the operation button 410 out of multiple operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001, etc.) can be accepted, or whether a period occurs during which an operation on another operation means (for example, sword decoration 5001) can be accepted. In this regard, in the automatic button performance state, during the performance acceptance period that occurs in response to such a specific operation-related performance, a process can be executed in which the performance within the pattern change is advanced so that the rate at which the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions when there is no operation (performance acceptance) during the performance acceptance period is higher than during the performance acceptance period that occurs without the specific operation-related performance being executed. In this case, the rate at which the automatic performance function functions may be 100%.

With this configuration, the fact that a specific operation-related effect is executed before the effect acceptance period occurs can itself function as an effect that suggests that there is a high probability that the automatic effect function described above will function, making it possible to more appropriately increase interest in the game when the specific operation-related effect is executed.

Also, as mentioned above, in a specific operation-related effect, the expectation of a jackpot pattern appearing in the pattern variation in the execution state is set to be higher when it is indicated that an operation opportunity will be given to the sword decoration 5001 as a result of the effect than when it is indicated that an operation opportunity will be given to the operation button 410. However, in the automatic button effect state, it is more desirable to set the rate at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions when there is no operation (effect acceptance) within the effect acceptance period that occurs in response to a specific operation-related effect to be the same when it is indicated that an operation opportunity will be given to the operation button 410 and when it is indicated that an operation opportunity will be given to the sword decoration 5001.

With this configuration, even if a relatively low expectation presentation situation (suggesting that an operation opportunity will be given to the operation button 410) appears as the result of a specific operation-related presentation, the rate at which the above-mentioned automatic presentation function will function is not changed by this (the presentation result of the specific operation-related presentation), so it is possible to preferably maintain the expectation for the above-mentioned automatic presentation function to function. In this way, interest in the game can be increased by running two different presentations (specific operation-related presentation, expectation suggestion by the automatic presentation function) in parallel that are not affected by each other's presentation results.

Below, specific examples of effects that suggest the degree of expectation using such an automatic effect function will be explained with reference to Figures 187 to 189.

Figure 187 (a) shows a presentation situation in which, in the automatic button presentation state, the reserved number is in a state of 3, and the display of the decorative pattern SZ (special pattern) is changing and being displayed by the presentation display device 1600 in a specific presentation pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. As shown in the figure, during the period when the automatic button presentation state is in effect, a display indicating that the automatic button presentation state is in effect (here, "Auto button setting") appears continuously within the display area of the presentation display device 1600.

Figure 187 (b) shows a performance situation in which a specific performance acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in Figure 187 (a). As shown in the figure, during the specific performance acceptance period, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, a text display such as "Press" and a bar display showing the remaining time of the specific performance acceptance period) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is to be given is in a light-emitting state, which also prompts the operation of the operation button 410.

If an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted within the specific performance acceptance period shown in FIG. 187(b), a specific decorative member SDY (such as a blind) will be operated as a post-operation performance corresponding to the performance acceptance, and one of multiple modes with different degrees of expectation (for example, "Chance!" with a relatively low degree of expectation or "Hot!" with a relatively high degree of expectation) will be displayed within the display area. At this time, the automatic button performance state is released and the normal performance state is restored, and the specific performance acceptance period will end at the point where the performance acceptance has occurred without consuming the remaining time.

In contrast, in the performance situation shown in FIG. 187(b), when no operation is performed on the operation button 410 within a specific performance acceptance period (when no performance acceptance occurs), there is a 60% chance that the above-mentioned automatic performance function will not function, and a 40% chance that the above-mentioned automatic performance function will function.

In other words, if the automatic performance function does not function 60% of the time, as shown in FIG. 187(c), it is assumed that no operation to the operation button 410 was accepted within the specific performance acceptance period, and the post-operation performance that would have occurred if the performance acceptance had been made will not be executed. Then, the performance will progress with a reach state being formed a predetermined time after the specific performance acceptance period has occurred.

On the other hand, when the automatic performance function described above functions at a rate of 40%, even if no operation is performed on the operation button 410 during the specific performance reception period, as shown in FIG. 187(d), a post-operation performance with the same content as when an operation is performed and a performance reception is performed during the specific performance reception period is executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation performance that occurs due to the performance reception during the specific performance reception period, a specific decorative member SDY (such as a blind role) is operated, and one of multiple modes with different expectation levels (for example, "Chance!" or "Super Hot!") is displayed in the display area. In both cases, when a post-operation performance occurs in response to an operation during the specific performance reception period and when a post-operation performance occurs due to the automatic performance function functioning, the modes displayed in the display area are the same. Then, as shown in FIG. 187(e), the performance progresses in such a way that a reach state is formed a predetermined time after the specific performance reception period occurs.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, whether a specific performance acceptance period is generated as a "performance acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions" or as a "performance acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function" is determined (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination when the pattern variation is executed, and as a result, the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function 60% of the time during the specific performance acceptance period, and the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions 40% of the time. For example, when a jackpot is won as a result of the jackpot determination, the selection table for the winning time is referenced, and a "performance acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions" or a "performance acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function" is generated based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding selection time, and when a jackpot is lost as a result of the jackpot determination, the selection table for the losing time is referenced, and a "performance acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions" or a "performance acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function" is generated based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the losing time. As a result, during a particular performance acceptance period, the automatic performance function described above will not function 60% of the time, and will function 40% of the time.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, if a particular effect acceptance period is generated as a "effect acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions", then it is determined (selected) which of these periods the particular effect acceptance period will occur as based on the result of the jackpot determination, so that the probability of a jackpot pattern appearing when the pattern variation is stopped is higher than if the particular effect acceptance period is generated as a "effect acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function".

According to this configuration, the automatic performance function functions relatively more frequently when a performance acceptance period occurs in which it is determined that a highly anticipated post-operation performance (such as "Super Hot!") will appear when the performance is accepted, whereas the automatic performance function functions relatively less frequently when a performance acceptance period occurs in which a low-expected post-operation performance (such as "Chance!") will appear when the performance is accepted. Therefore, when a performance acceptance period occurs for the operation button 410 in the automatic button performance state, it is possible to grasp the expectation of whether a jackpot pattern will appear in the pattern variation in the execution state by checking whether the automatic performance function functions when the operation button 410 is not operated during the performance acceptance period. In other words, in this case, in the automatic button presentation state, there is a risk that a presentation disadvantage may occur, such as "not being able to see the post-operation presentation itself, which would have been possible if only the presentation acceptance (operation of operation button 410) had been performed within the presentation acceptance period," but it is expected that interest in the game will be favorably maintained by the innovative presentation, in which the player is forced to exercise a presentation selection such as "deliberately not operating operation button 410 within the presentation acceptance period."

However, as shown in FIG. 187(d), even if the automatic performance function functions when no operation is deliberately performed on the operation button 410 during the performance acceptance period, a low expectancy mode (such as "Chance!") may appear as the post-operation performance. Therefore, even if the automatic performance function has functioned to suggest a relatively high expectancy, successive suggestions of such expectation (suggestions due to the automatic performance function having functioned, suggestions due to the post-operation performance mode) will create a performance that keeps you on your toes, and is expected to maintain your interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 187(c), even if the automatic effect function does not function when the operation button 410 is not operated during the effect reception period, there is still a possibility that a highly anticipated aspect would have appeared in the post-operation effect that would have appeared if the effect reception had been performed, so it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition. However, when the performance situation shown in FIG. 187(c) appears (a situation in which the automatic effect function did not function and no post-operation effect appeared), it is desirable to make the expectation level lower than when the performance situation shown in FIG. 187(d) appears (a situation in which the automatic effect function worked but a less anticipated aspect appeared as the post-operation effect).

Figures 188 and 189 show specific examples of effects whose expectations are suggested by the automatic effect function when an effect acceptance period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see Figures 166 to 186) occurs in the automatic button effect state.

Figure 188 (a) shows a presentation situation in which, in the automatic button presentation state, the number of reserved symbols is 3, and the display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is changed and displayed by the presentation display device 1600 in a specific presentation pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. In this example, as shown in the figure, during the period when the automatic button presentation state is in effect, a display indicating that the automatic button presentation state is in effect (here, "Auto button setting") appears continuously in the display area of the presentation display device 1600.

Figure 188(b) shows a performance situation in which a specific operation-related performance exemplified in Figures 168 to 171 (which may be a specific operation-related performance exemplified separately) has begun to be performed while the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in Figure 188(a) is being performed. That is, as described above, in the specific operation-related performance exemplified in Figures 168 to 171, a common display performance is performed when an operation opportunity is given for the operation button 410 and when an operation opportunity is given for the sword decoration 5001, and while the common display performance is being performed, it is kept secret as to whether an operation opportunity is given for the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001. However, once a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of a specific operation-related performance, a performance status will appear indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated as a first performance result with a relatively low expectation, or a performance status will appear indicating that the sword decoration 5001 should be operated as a second performance result with a relatively high expectation, thereby indicating whether the opportunity to operate the operation button 410 with a relatively low expectation or the sword decoration 5001 with a relatively high expectation will be given.

Figure 188 (c) shows a state in which, as a result of the specific operation-related performance shown in Figure 188 (b) being performed, a performance situation appears indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated as the first performance result with a relatively low expectation, and a performance acceptance period for the operation button 410 has occurred. In this performance situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display (here, a text display such as "press" and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the specific performance acceptance period) appears to encourage the operation of the operation button 410. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is to be given is in a light-emitting state, which also encourages the operation of the operation button 410.

If an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted within the performance acceptance period shown in FIG. 188(c), a specific decorative member SDY (such as a blind) will be operated as a post-operation performance in response to the performance acceptance, and one of multiple modes with different degrees of expectation (for example, "Chance!" with a relatively low degree of expectation or "Hot!" with a relatively high degree of expectation) will be displayed within the display area. At this time, the automatic button performance state is released and the normal performance state is restored, and the specific performance acceptance period will end at the point where the performance acceptance has occurred without consuming the remaining time.

In contrast, in the performance situation shown in FIG. 188(c), when no operation is performed on the operation button 410 within the performance reception period (when no performance reception occurs), there is a 20% chance that the above-mentioned automatic performance function will not function, and a 80% chance that the above-mentioned automatic performance function will function.

That is, in a specific operation-related performance (specific display performance), the player may be confused as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 will be activated, and as a result, a situation may occur in which the player is unable to perform the appropriate operation within the performance reception period. Therefore, in the automatic button performance state, when a performance reception period corresponding to such a specific operation-related performance occurs (see FIG. 188(c)), a process can be executed to advance the performance within the pattern variation so that the rate at which the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions when there is no operation (performance reception) during the performance reception period is higher than the performance reception period that occurs without the execution of the specific operation-related performance (see FIG. 187(b)). With this configuration, it is possible to provide the excitement of whether or not the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 will be activated through the specific operation-related performance, while suppressing the sense of anxiety that "the appropriate operation may not be performed within the performance reception period and the performance corresponding to the operation may not appear." In order to obtain such an effect, it is not necessary to have a configuration that suggests the degree of expectation depending on whether the automatic performance function has functioned.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period when it is controlled to the automatic button presentation state, from the time when a specific operation-related presentation (specific display presentation) is executed until the corresponding presentation acceptance period ends, as shown in the figure, a display (here, "Auto Button High Probability") indicating that the presentation situation is one in which the automatic presentation function is likely to function is continuously displayed.

If the automatic performance function does not function 20% of the time, as shown in FIG. 188(d), it is assumed that the operation of the operation button 410 was not accepted during the performance acceptance period, and the post-operation performance that would have occurred if the performance acceptance had been accepted is not executed. After this, the performance progresses in such a way that a reach state is formed a predetermined time after the specific performance acceptance period occurs. However, in the performance situation shown in FIG. 188(c), if the automatic performance function does not function when the operation button 410 is not operated during the performance acceptance period (when performance acceptance does not occur) in the performance situation shown in FIG. 187(b), it is desirable to set the expectation level higher than when the automatic performance function does not function when the operation button 410 is not operated during the performance acceptance period (when performance acceptance does not occur).

In addition, when the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions 80% of the time, even if no operation is performed on the operation button 410 during the performance reception period, as shown in FIG. 188(e), a post-operation performance with the same content as when an operation is performed during the performance reception period and the performance is accepted is executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation performance that occurs due to the performance acceptance during a specific performance acceptance period, a specific decorative member SDY (such as a blind role) is operated, and one of multiple modes with different expectations (for example, "Chance!" or "Super Hot!") is displayed in the display area. In both cases, when a post-operation performance occurs in response to an operation during a specific performance acceptance period and when a post-operation performance occurs due to the automatic performance function functioning, the modes displayed in the display area are the same. Then, as shown in FIG. 188(f), the performance progresses in such a way that a reach state is formed a predetermined time after the specific performance acceptance period occurs.

On the other hand, FIG. 189(g) shows a state in which, as a result of the specific operation-related performance shown in FIG. 188(b) being performed, a performance status appears indicating that the sword decoration 5001 is in a state in which it should be operated as a relatively highly anticipated second performance result, and a performance acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 has occurred. In this performance status, as shown in the figure, the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display prompting an operation on the sword decoration 5001 (here, a text display such as "Put away your sword" and a bar display showing the remaining time of the specific performance acceptance period) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is to be given is in an operating state, which also prompts an operation on the operation button 410, and allows the sword decoration 5001 to be operated from the operating state to the original position.

Here, if an operation on the sword decoration 5001 is accepted during the performance acceptance period shown in FIG. 189(g), the same post-operation performance will be executed as when an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted during the performance acceptance period shown in FIG. 188(c). However, when an operation on the sword decoration 5001 is accepted during the performance acceptance period shown in FIG. 188(g), the rate at which a high expectation mode appears in the display area among multiple modes with different expectation levels (for example, "Chance!" with a relatively low expectation level and "Hot!" with a relatively high expectation level) is higher than when an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted during the performance acceptance period shown in FIG. 188(c). This rate may be 100%. In addition, when an operation on the sword decoration 5001 is accepted during the performance acceptance period, the automatic button performance state is released and the normal performance state is restored, and the specific performance acceptance period also ends at the point at which the performance acceptance is made without consuming the remaining time, which is the same as in the performance acceptance period shown in FIG. 188(c).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if no operation is performed on the sword decoration 5001 within the performance acceptance period in the performance situation shown in FIG. 189(g) (if performance acceptance does not occur), even though the performance situation has a higher expectation than when the performance situation shown in FIG. 188(c) occurs, the automatic performance function described above does not function 20% of the time and functions 80% of the time, just as when performance acceptance does not occur in the performance situation shown in FIG. 188(c).

According to this configuration, even if a specific operation-related performance results in a performance situation (see FIG. 188(c)) indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated as a first performance result with a relatively low expectation level, the rate at which the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions is not changed by this (the performance result of the specific operation-related performance), so that the expectation of the above-mentioned automatic performance function functioning can be favorably maintained. In this way, by paralleling two different performances (specific operation-related performance, expectation level suggestion by the automatic performance function) that are not influenced by each other's performance results, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when an unfavorable performance result appears in one of the performances. However, in this case, if the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions when the operation button 410 is not operated during the performance reception period (when performance reception does not occur) in the performance situation shown in FIG. 188(c), the expectation level will be lower than if the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions when the sword decoration 5001 is not operated during the performance reception period (when performance reception does not occur) in the performance situation shown in FIG. 189(g).

If the automatic performance function does not function 20% of the time, as shown in FIG. 189(h), it is assumed that no operation was performed on the sword decoration 5001 during the performance reception period, and the post-operation performance that would have occurred if the performance reception had been performed will not be executed. After this, the performance will progress in such a way that a reach state is formed a predetermined time after a specific performance reception period occurs. However, even if the automatic performance function does not function when no operation is performed on the sword decoration 5001 during the performance reception period (when no performance reception occurs) in the performance situation shown in FIG. 189(g), it is desirable to make the expectation higher than when the automatic performance function does not function when no operation is performed on the operation button 410 during the performance reception period (when no performance reception occurs) in the performance situation shown in FIG. 187(b).

In addition, if the automatic performance function described above functions 80% of the time, even if no operation is performed on the sword decoration 5001 during the performance reception period, as shown in FIG. 189(i), a post-operation performance with the same content as when an operation is performed during the performance reception period and the performance is accepted is executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation performance that occurs due to the performance acceptance during a specific performance acceptance period, a specific decorative member SDY (such as a blind role) is performed, and one of multiple modes with different expectations (for example, "Chance!" or "Super Hot!") is displayed in the display area, but in both cases, when a post-operation performance occurs in response to an operation during the performance acceptance period and when a post-operation performance occurs due to the automatic performance function functioning, the mode displayed in the display area is the same. Then, as shown in FIG. 189(j), the performance progresses in such a way that a reach state is formed a predetermined time after the performance acceptance period corresponding to the specific operation-related performance occurs.

In addition, as in the case of a performance acceptance period that occurs without a specific operation-related performance being executed (see Figure 187 (b)), whether the performance acceptance period corresponding to a specific operation-related performance (see Figure 188 (c) and Figure 189 (g)) is generated as a "performance acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions" or as a "performance acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function" is determined (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination when the pattern change is executed, and as a result, during the performance acceptance period corresponding to a specific operation-related performance, the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function 20% of the time, and the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions 80% of the time. For example, when the result of the jackpot determination is that the jackpot is won, the selection table for the winning time is referenced, and a "performance acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic performance function works" or a "performance acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not work" is generated based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding selection time, and when the result of the jackpot determination is that the jackpot is not won, the selection table for the losing time is referenced, and a "performance acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic performance function works" or a "performance acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not work" is generated based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the losing time. As a result, during the performance acceptance period corresponding to a specific operation-related performance (see Figure 188 (c) and Figure 189 (g)), the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not work 20% of the time, and the above-mentioned automatic performance function works 80% of the time.

Similarly, when the effect acceptance period (see FIG. 188(c) and FIG. 189(g)) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect is generated as a "effect acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions", it is determined (selected) which of these periods it will occur as based on the result of the above-mentioned jackpot determination so that the probability of a jackpot pattern appearing when the pattern variation is stopped is higher than when it is generated as a "effect acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function".

The post-operation performance may be executed as a different performance during a performance reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related performance (see FIG. 188(c) and FIG. 189(g)) and during a performance reception period that occurs without a specific operation-related performance being executed (see FIG. 187(b)). However, even when executed as a different performance, it is desirable that the post-operation performance can have one of multiple patterns with different expectation levels. The expectation level may be 0% or 100%.

The sword ornament 5001 used in the examples shown in Figures 187 to 189 may be the type of sword ornament 5001 shown in Figure 161. Although Figures 188 and 189 are described as examples in which "effects using the automatic performance function" are applied to the specific operation-related effects shown in Figures 168 to 171, "effects using the automatic performance function" may be applied to any of the specific operation-related effects in Figures 166 to 186.

In the example of the effects shown in Figs. 188 and 189, when a specific operation-related effect is executed without being controlled in the automatic button effect state, it is desirable to not only not accept a setting operation to the automatic button effect state during the effect acceptance period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect, but also to have the state where "the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is not accepted" occur at least from the effect situation shown in Fig. 188(b) (the effect situation in which the specific operation-related effect has started) before the effect acceptance period occurs, and to have this state continue until the effect acceptance period. With this configuration, even if a setting operation to the automatic button effect state is attempted after confirming that the specific operation-related effect has started, this will not be accepted, so that it is possible to provide "effects using the automatic effect function" only to those who continue playing while maintaining the automatic button effect state, and it becomes possible to provide a performance value for continuing to play while maintaining the automatic button effect state.

Furthermore, during the effect acceptance period that occurs without a specific operation-related effect being executed (see FIG. 187(b)), and during the effect acceptance period that corresponds to a specific operation-related effect (see FIG. 188(c) and FIG. 189(g)), it is desirable to make it possible for a first display mode (e.g., a blue button image BTG or a blue sword decoration image SYG) or a second display mode (e.g., a green button image BTG or a green sword decoration image SYG) to appear, and to make it possible for the "effect acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions" to occur more frequently when the second display mode appears than when the first display mode appears.

In addition, during a performance acceptance period that occurs without a specific operation-related performance being executed (see FIG. 187(b)), or during a performance acceptance period that corresponds to a specific operation-related performance (see FIG. 188(c) and FIG. 189(g)), a third display mode (e.g., a red button image BTG or a red sword decoration image SYG) may appear, and when the third display mode appears, the "performance acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions" may be set to occur without fail.

With these configurations, in the automatic button presentation state, there is a risk that a presentation disadvantage may occur, such as "not being able to see the post-operation presentation itself, which would have been possible if only the presentation acceptance (operation of the operation button 410) had been performed within the presentation acceptance period." However, it is possible to provide information on whether to exercise a presentation selection, such as "not operating the operation button 410 within the presentation acceptance period," and it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in an optimal manner.

In addition, regardless of whether or not "effects using the automatic effect function" are applied, it is desirable to generate effect reception periods corresponding to each of the "specific operation-related effects" illustrated in Figures 166 to 186, 188, and 189 that are longer than effect reception periods that occur without the execution of a specific operation-related effect (such as Figure 187 (b)). In other words, in a specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player may be confused as to whether the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is activated, which may result in a situation in which the player is unable to perform the appropriate operation within the effect reception period; however, by extending the effect reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related effect," it is expected that such a situation will be prevented from occurring.

In particular, in the examples of Figures 188 and 189, in the effect acceptance period corresponding to the "specific operation-related effect", the automatic effect function is set to function relatively frequently. In view of this, it is desirable to set the effect acceptance period to be longer than the effect acceptance period that occurs without the execution of the "specific operation-related effect", in order to maintain the effect of whether or not the automatic effect function functions for a longer period and to improve the interest in the game. In this case, the timing at which the automatic effect function functions is set to arrive when a first time has passed since the occurrence of the effect acceptance period that occurs without the execution of the "specific operation-related effect", whereas in the effect acceptance period corresponding to the "specific operation-related effect", it is set to arrive when a second time, which is longer than the first time, has passed since the occurrence of the period, in order to maintain the effect of whether or not the automatic effect function functions for a longer period.

Even if the time from start to end of the effect acceptance period that occurs without the execution of a "specific operation-related effect" and the effect acceptance period corresponding to a "specific operation-related effect" is made to differ from the start to end of these periods, it is desirable to display the bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect acceptance period in the same manner (a bar display of the same length) and only differ the speed at which the remaining gauge is decreased. In other words, in this case, even if an effect acceptance period corresponding to a "specific operation-related effect" occurs, it can be made to seem as if it continues for the same period as an effect acceptance period that occurs without the execution of a "specific operation-related effect", and this, combined with the "irritation" of the period continuing for a longer period than expected, makes it possible to preferably maintain the effect of whether or not the automatic effect function works.

According to the example shown in Figures 187 to 189, when the specific performance state (automatic button performance state) is controlled, a first performance acceptance period (performance acceptance period for a specific operation means (operation button 410)) occurs, and even if no operation is performed on the specific operation means (operation button 410) during the first performance acceptance period, the processing by the first automatic performance means (automatic performance function for the operation button 410) is not necessarily executed. However, in the performance acceptance period that occurs when a predetermined time has elapsed since the specific display performance (specific operation-related performance) was executed, the rate at which the processing by the first automatic performance means (automatic performance function for the operation button 410) is executed when no operation is performed on the specific operation means (operation button 410) during the first performance acceptance period is higher than the first performance acceptance period (performance acceptance period for a specific operation means (operation button 410)) that occurs without the specific display performance being executed.

In this regard, as such an automatic button presentation state, when the automatic button presentation state in which the rate at which the automatic presentation function functions ("60%-40%", "20%-80%) is set to be different depending on the type of presentation acceptance period as described above is set as the "first automatic button presentation state", a "second automatic button presentation state" in which the rate at which the automatic presentation function functions is set to be different depending on the type of presentation acceptance period ("50%-50%", "10%-90%), and a third automatic button presentation state in which the automatic presentation function is always set to function regardless of the type of the presentation acceptance period when it occurs may be further prepared, and it may be possible to set to any of these presentation states, including the normal presentation state in which the automatic presentation function does not function. Also, it may be possible to always execute games and presentations in the automatic button presentation states (first automatic button presentation state, second automatic button presentation state, third automatic button presentation state) without providing a normal presentation state in which the automatic presentation function does not function.

The above-mentioned "type of effect reception period" may mean different types of post-operation effects that occur when an operation is accepted. For example, in the first automatic button performance state, in the "first performance reception period for generating a post-operation effect of a conversation announcement" and the "second performance reception period for generating a post-operation effect of a cut-in", when no operation is accepted for the operation means during the performance reception period, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted is not issued (automatic acceptance is not performed), but in the "third performance reception period for generating a post-operation effect for operating the movable body A", when no operation is accepted for the operation means during the performance reception period, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted is issued (automatic acceptance is performed). In contrast, in the "second automatic button performance state (second performance state)" in which automatic acceptance is more likely to occur than in the "first automatic button performance state (first performance state)," in the "first performance acceptance period in which a post-operation performance of a conversation announcement is generated," when an operation is not accepted for the operating means during the performance acceptance period, the same post-operation performance as when the operation is accepted is not generated (automatic acceptance is not performed), but in the "second performance acceptance period in which a post-operation performance of a cut-in is generated" and the "third performance acceptance period in which a post-operation performance of moving the movable body A is generated," when an operation is not accepted for the operating means during the performance acceptance period, the same post-operation performance as when the operation is accepted is generated (automatic acceptance is performed). However, regardless of which of the multiple performance acceptance periods including the first performance acceptance period (type of conversation announcement), the second performance acceptance period (type of cut-in), and the third performance acceptance period (type of movable body A) occurs, when an operation is not accepted for the operating means, a "normal performance state" in which the same post-operation performance as when the operation is accepted is not generated is not prepared and cannot be set to this.

That is, in this case, "the game includes an operation means operable by a player, a judgment means for making a judgment based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player based on a predetermined result being obtained in the judgment by the judgment means, and a bonus state control means for controlling to one of a plurality of bonus states, and a plurality of bonus acceptance periods for which different types of post-operation effects are generated when an operation is accepted are prepared as the bonus acceptance period during which an operation opportunity is granted to the operation means, and the plurality of bonus states include a case where, when one of the plurality of bonus acceptance periods occurs, when no operation is accepted for the operation means during that bonus acceptance period, a post-operation effect is generated that is the same as when the operation is accepted, and a case where the same post-operation effect is generated as when the operation is accepted, depending on the type of the bonus acceptance period that occurs. The gaming machine is provided as a "game machine characterized in that, when any one of the multiple performance acceptance periods occurs, depending on the type of the performance acceptance period that occurs, there are cases where when no operation is accepted on the operation means during that performance acceptance period, a post-operation performance identical to that when the operation is accepted is generated, or the same post-operation performance identical to that when the operation is accepted is not generated, but the likelihood of the same post-operation performance occurring includes at least a second performance state different from the first performance state, and when any one of the multiple performance acceptance periods occurs, there is no performance state in which a post-operation performance identical to that when the operation is accepted is not generated.

The allocation rate may also be set to either 0% or 100% depending on the type of performance reception period and the type of performance state.

The examples of effects shown in Figures 187 to 189 may be modified as follows. That is, if the automatic effect function functions during the first effect reception period shown in Figure 187(b), the automatic effect function described above functions at the timing when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the first effect reception period occurred (timing within the first effect reception period), and the first effect reception period ends and a corresponding post-operation effect is generated. However, if the automatic effect function does not function during the first effect reception period shown in Figure 187(b), the automatic effect function does not function at the timing when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the first effect reception period occurred (timing within the first effect reception period), and the first effect reception period ends without the post-operation effect being executed (the post-operation effect is not executed thereafter). In contrast, if the automatic performance function functions during the second performance reception period shown in FIG. 188(c) or the third performance reception period shown in FIG. 189(g), the automatic performance function functions when a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time has elapsed since the second performance reception period or the third performance reception period occurred, and the second performance reception period or the third performance reception period ends and a corresponding post-operation performance is generated. However, if the automatic performance function does not function during the second performance reception period shown in FIG. 188(c) or the third performance reception period shown in FIG. 189(g), the automatic performance function does not function when a second predetermined time has elapsed since the second performance reception period or the third performance reception period occurred, and the second performance reception period or the third performance reception period ends without the post-operation performance being executed (the post-operation performance is not executed thereafter).

With this configuration, in the first effect acceptance period on the side where the automatic effect function functions at a low rate, the automatic effect function can function at a relatively early stage, and even if the automatic effect function does not function, the player has enough time to operate the effect acceptance by himself before the end of the first effect acceptance period, so that the player can play with peace of mind. In contrast, in the second effect acceptance period or the third effect acceptance period on the side where the automatic effect function functions at a high rate, the automatic effect function can only function at a relatively late stage, and if the automatic effect function does not function, there is not much time left for the player to operate the effect by himself, so that even though the automatic effect function functions at a high rate, a tense game can be provided.

In the above modified example, during the first performance acceptance period, the automatic performance function may or may not function when the first predetermined time has elapsed (within the first performance acceptance period), but during the second and third performance acceptance periods, the automatic performance function may always function when the second predetermined time has elapsed (within the second performance acceptance period). Even with this configuration, the automatic performance function can only function at a relatively late stage, and if the automatic performance function does not function (due to some kind of trouble), the player may imagine that there is not much time left for the player to operate it himself, so a similar effect can be expected to be achieved.

In addition to the presentation examples described above with reference to Figures 187 to 189, in other presentation examples as well, the control to the automatic button presentation state (specific presentation state) does not necessarily have to be performed by the player's operation, and may be controlled, for example, based on the result of a jackpot determination, or may always be controlled as the automatic button presentation state (specific presentation state). Also, the machine may be configured so that the automatic button presentation state is not set, and the automatic presentation function always functions at a predetermined rate.

[Controlling unified operations when in automatic button performance state]
As described above, in the automatic button presentation state (specific presentation state), even if the player does not perform an operation during the presentation acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-mentioned alternative example is applied), a process (automatic presentation function) that causes the same change in presentation as when the operation is performed can be executed. However, after being controlled to the automatic button presentation state (specific presentation state), a desire to return to a normal presentation mode in which the presentation can progress depending on the player's own operation (desire to end the automatic button presentation state) may occur. Such a desire often occurs when a presentation acceptance period occurs in which the player is given an opportunity to operate, but it is difficult to perform both an operation to end the automatic button presentation state and an operation to allow operation acceptance within the limited time from the start of the presentation acceptance period to its end, and if an operation opportunity is lost as a result, interest in the game may decrease.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a performance acceptance period for a specific performance occurs while the machine is controlled in the automatic button performance state (specific performance state), a single operation on the operating means (such as the operating button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) that is the subject of an operation opportunity during the performance acceptance period is sufficient to perform a process to end the automatic button performance state and a post-operation performance (a process that may cause a change in the performance) according to the performance acceptance (unified operation control in the automatic button performance state). This makes it possible to avoid loss of operation opportunities and smoothly switch performance modes, even if a desire to end the automatic button performance state and progress the performance depending on the player's own operation arises during the performance acceptance period.

As mentioned above, when setting to the automatic button performance state while the pattern change is in execution state, the setting operation is only permitted for the operation button 410 out of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001.

On the other hand, as mentioned above, when the automatic button performance state is to be cancelled while the pattern change is in progress, when the performance acceptance period is not occurring, only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is permitted to be operated to cancel the setting. In contrast, when the performance acceptance period is occurring, if an operation is performed on the operation means (such as the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) that is the subject of an operation opportunity during the performance acceptance period, a process to end the automatic button performance state and a post-operation performance (a process that may cause a change in the performance) according to the performance acceptance are performed (operation unification control). Therefore, even if an operation is performed on the operation button 410 while the performance acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 is occurring, the operation is not accepted, and the process to end the automatic button performance state is not executed.

However, it can be expected that some players will wish to play in a selfish manner, such as "maintaining the automatic button presentation state (without switching presentation modes) and performing operations themselves only when they like to advance the presentation." Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special operation means (button for continuing automatic mode) different from both the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is further provided in the door frame 3, and when the operation button 410 (or the sword decoration 5001) is operated during the performance reception period for the specific performance while controlled in the automatic button performance state (specific performance state), a process for terminating the automatic button performance state (specific performance state) and a process that may cause a change in the performance are respectively performed (operation unification control in the automatic button performance state), but when the special operation means is operated during the performance reception period for the specific performance while controlled in the automatic button performance state (specific performance state), a process for terminating the automatic button performance state (specific performance state) is not performed, and a process that may cause a change in the performance according to the operation is performed.

With this configuration, if the player wishes to end the automatic button presentation state and actively play from then on, they can operate the operation button 410 (or the sword decoration 5001) during the presentation acceptance period, and if they wish to maintain the automatic button presentation state (without switching presentation modes) and only occasionally perform operations, they can operate the special operation means during the presentation acceptance period. In this way, by simply using different operation means, the player can achieve the gameplay they desire.

Below, we will explain the unified operation control when in this automatic button presentation state, with reference to Figures 190 to 192.

Figure 190 (a) shows a state in which, in the automatic button presentation state, the number of reserved symbols is 1, the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is changing and displayed by the presentation display device 1600 in a specific presentation pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination, and a presentation acceptance period has occurred in which pressing of the operation button 410 is accepted while a reach state has been formed, in which the automatic button presentation state is being controlled. As shown in the figure, during the period in which the automatic button presentation state is being controlled, a display (here, "Auto button setting") appears continuously within the display area of the presentation display device 1600.

Also, as shown in the figure, even during this performance acceptance period, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display (here, a downward arrow display and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the performance acceptance period) appears to encourage operation of the operation button 410. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is to be given is in an illuminated state, which also encourages operation of that operation button 410. However, in reality, not only the operation button 410 in an illuminated state, but also operation of the special operation means (the button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 that has not undergone any change is permitted.

Figures 190(b) to (d) show a state in which, although no operation was performed on the operation button 410 during the performance acceptance period that occurred in Figure 190(a), the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions, and a post-operation performance is executed with the same content as when an operation was performed and performance acceptance was performed during the performance acceptance period. Note that, when the above-mentioned automatic performance function functions, the performance acceptance period that occurred in Figure 190(a) ends, and both the opportunity to operate the operation button 410 and the opportunity to operate the special operation means (the button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 are lost.

In other words, in the post-operation presentation in this presentation example, a gradual progression of presentation appears, and even if it has been determined at the start of the pattern change (based on the result of the jackpot determination) which of the multiple presentation results with different degrees of expectation (Figures 190(c) and 190(d)) will ultimately appear, a specific presentation image (here, a smoke image from an explosion) is first displayed as shown in Figure 190(b). Thereafter, if the performance progresses to a relatively low-expectation performance result, as shown in FIG. 190(c), a performance image suggesting a relatively low-expectation performance result (here, a fortune slip for "good luck") is displayed while the specific performance image shown in FIG. 190(b) (here, a smoke image from an explosion) gradually disappears, and if the performance progresses to a relatively high-expectation performance result, as shown in FIG. 190(d), a performance image suggesting a relatively high-expectation performance result (here, a fortune slip for "medium good luck") is displayed while the specific performance image shown in FIG. 190(b) (here, a smoke image from an explosion) gradually disappears.

The flow of effects shown in Figures 190(a)-(d) will appear as the basic progression of effects when an effect acceptance period occurs in the automatic button effect state, and even after the post-operation effects (Figures 190(b)-190(d)) have been executed by the automatic effect function described above, the automatic button effect state will not end and will be maintained unless an operation is performed by the player.

However, as mentioned above, after control has been placed into the automatic button presentation state (a specific presentation state), a desire to return to the normal presentation mode in which the presentation can progress depending on the player's own operation (a desire to end the automatic button presentation state) may arise. This desire often arises when a presentation acceptance period occurs during which the player is given an opportunity to operate, but it is difficult to perform both the operation to end the automatic button presentation state and the operation to allow operation acceptance within the limited time from the start to the end of the presentation acceptance period, and if the opportunity to operate is lost as a result, interest in the game may decrease.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, if the operation button 410 is operated within the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. 190(a), the operation is detected (the operation button 410 is detected to be in the operation position), and based on this, a process to end the automatic button effect state and a post-operation effect according to the effect acceptance are performed (operation unification control in the automatic button effect state). Note that when an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted for effect, the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. 190(a) ends, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is disabled, and the opportunity to operate the special operation means (the button marked "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is also lost.

Even if the operation button 410 is operated within the performance acceptance period that occurs in FIG. 190(a), as shown in FIG. 191(e), a specific performance image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed as a post-operation performance in response to the operation being performed within the performance acceptance period and performance acceptance being performed. Then, if the performance progresses to a performance result with a relatively low expectation, as shown in FIG. 191(f), a performance image suggesting that the performance result has a relatively low expectation (here, a fortune slip for "good luck") is displayed while the specific performance image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) shown in FIG. 191(e) gradually disappears, and if the performance progresses to a performance result with a relatively high expectation, as shown in FIG. 191(g), a performance image suggesting that the performance result has a relatively high expectation (here, a fortune slip for "medium good luck") is displayed while the specific performance image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) shown in FIG. 191(e) gradually disappears.

However, if the operation button 410 is operated within the performance acceptance period generated in FIG. 190(a), a process to end the automatic button performance state based on the operation is also performed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 191(e)-(g), after the operation of the operation button 410 is accepted for performance, the display indicating that the automatic button performance state is being controlled (here, "Auto button set") is hidden in the display area of the performance display device 1600. Note that in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if the operation button 410 is operated within the performance acceptance period generated in FIG. 190(a), a display indicating that the process to end the automatic button performance state has been executed (here, "Auto button release") is displayed (see FIG. 191(e)).

As mentioned above, during the performance acceptance period that occurs in FIG. 190(a), not only are operations permitted for the operation button 410 in an illuminated state permitted, but also for the special operation means (the button marked "PUSH" in the figure) 1410, which has not undergone any change. As mentioned above, this special operation means (the button marked "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is provided to enable a selfish playing technique such as "maintaining the automatic button performance state (without switching the performance mode) and operating the device yourself only when you like to advance the performance."

Therefore, even if an operation is performed on the special operation means (the button marked "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 during the performance reception period that occurs in FIG. 190(a), as shown in FIG. 192(h), a specific performance image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed as a post-operation performance corresponding to the operation being performed during the performance reception period and performance reception being performed. Then, when the performance progresses to a performance result with a relatively low expectation, as shown in FIG. 192(i), a performance image suggesting that the performance result has a relatively low expectation (here, a fortune slip for "good luck") is displayed while the specific performance image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) shown in FIG. 192(h) gradually disappears, and when the performance progresses to a performance result with a relatively high expectation, as shown in FIG. 192(j), a performance image suggesting that the performance result has a relatively high expectation (here, a fortune slip for "medium good luck") is displayed while the specific performance image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) shown in FIG. 192(h) gradually disappears. In addition, when an operation to the special operation means (the button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is accepted, the performance acceptance period that occurred in FIG. 190(a) ends, the automatic performance function described above is no longer able to function, and the opportunity to operate the operation button 410 is also lost.

However, if an operation is performed on the special operation means (the button marked "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 during the performance acceptance period that occurs in FIG. 190(a), the process of terminating the automatic button performance state based on that operation will not be performed at the same time. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 192(h)-(j), even after the operation on the operation button 410 has been accepted for performance, the display indicating that the automatic button performance state is being controlled (here, "Auto button setting in progress") will continue to be displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the special operation means (the button marked "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is operated during the performance reception period generated in FIG. 190(a), a special performance that would not appear when the above-mentioned automatic performance function is activated (FIG. 190(b)) or when the operation button 410 is operated (FIG. 191(e)) can appear. Such a special performance may be a performance using a movable body or a lamp, and in the performance example shown in FIG. 192(j), in addition to the performance image (post-operation performance) that appears when the above-mentioned automatic performance function is activated (FIG. 190(b)) or when the operation button 410 is operated (FIG. 191(e)), a sparkling effect display is additionally displayed in the performance display device 1600. Instead of the sparkling effect display, a performance using a movable body or a lamp may be additionally implemented.

According to this configuration, when the automatic button performance state (specific performance state) is controlled, the change in performance that occurs when the operation button 410 is operated during the performance reception period related to the fortune-telling performance is different from the change in performance that occurs when the special operation means (the button marked "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is operated during the performance reception period related to the fortune-telling performance is controlled. In this case, when the above-mentioned special performance (here, a sparkling effect display) appears, it becomes possible to recognize while enjoying the post-operation performance that "the operation means is operated and a post-operation performance corresponding to the performance reception has appeared, but the automatic button performance state has not been released and is continuing". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 192(i), even when a performance image (here, a "lucky" fortune) that suggests a relatively low expectation performance result is displayed, the special performance (here, a sparkling effect display) can appear.

In addition, it is desirable to have such special effects (here, a sparkling, shining effect display) appear in addition to the above-mentioned post-operation effects at a predetermined rate based on the result of the jackpot determination, and when the special effect appears, the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears in the pattern change is higher than when the special effect does not appear. However, this would mean that it would be more beneficial for the player to operate the special operation means (the button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 rather than the operation button 410, and there is a concern that operation of the operation button 410 will not be performed. Therefore, if a special effect (here, a sparkling, shining effect display) does not appear when special operation means (the button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is operated within the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. 190(a), it is desirable to make the rate at which a jackpot pattern appears in that pattern change lower than when any effect result appears by operating operation button 410 within the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. 190(a) or by the automatic effect function described above functioning.

According to this configuration, in order to create a state in which "an operation on the special operation means (the button marked "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is performed and a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception appears, but the automatic button effect state is not released and continues", there is a risk that a disadvantage in terms of presentation may occur, such as "the probability of a jackpot pattern appearing in the pattern fluctuation may be suggested to be extremely low", and therefore it is expected that by having the player exercise this type of presentation selection, interest in the game will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

Thus, in the example shown in FIG. 192(i), although the same presentation mode as the example shown in FIG. 191(f) appears, the above-mentioned presentation disadvantage occurs, and it is possible to recognize that the probability of a winning pattern appearing in the pattern change is lower than in the examples shown in FIG. 190(c) and FIG. 191(f). However, in the example shown in FIG. 192(i), while it is possible to recognize that the expectation level is low, the presentation mode is the same as in the cases shown in FIG. 190(c) and FIG. 191(f), making it difficult for a third party who is not operating the special operation means (the button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 to understand that the presentation situation is one in which the presentation selection has failed, which is expected to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regardless of which presentation selection is made within the presentation acceptance period that occurs in FIG. 190(a), a specific presentation image (here, a smoke image from an explosion) is displayed as shown in FIG. 190(b), FIG. 191(e), FIG. 192(h), etc., but the specific presentation image may be displayed in one of a number of modes with different rates of appearance of a presentation mode with a relatively high expectation as a post-operation presentation (here, a fortune slip for "medium luck") or a special presentation.

Also, regardless of which presentation selection is made during the presentation acceptance period that occurs in FIG. 190(a), it is possible to omit displaying the specific presentation image and directly display one of the presentation modes with different degrees of expectation (here, the fortune slip of "Good luck" or "Medium luck") as the post-operation presentation. However, in order to make it difficult for a third party to understand that a presentation situation in which a presentation selection has failed (FIG. 192(i)) is occurring when that presentation situation appears, it is desirable to first display a specific presentation image (here, a smoke image from an explosion) when displaying one of the presentation modes with different degrees of expectation (here, the fortune slip of "Good luck" or "Medium luck") as the post-operation presentation.

In addition, it may be possible to provide effects that suggest the degree of expectation even during the effect acceptance period that occurs in FIG. 190(a), so that this can be used to determine whether or not to take the above-mentioned effect risks.

In addition, the special operation means (the button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 does not necessarily have to be provided as a dedicated operation means for continuing the automatic button performance state when in that state, and may be replaced by another operation means that is already provided.

The performance acceptance period that occurs in FIG. 190(a) may also occur as a result of the execution of the above-mentioned performance (specific operation-related performance (see FIG. 166 to FIG. 186)) regarding whether a period occurs during which an operation on the operation button 410 out of multiple operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001, etc.) is acceptable for performance acceptance, or whether a period occurs during which an operation on another operation means (for example, sword decoration 5001) is acceptable for performance acceptance.

In addition, the effect acceptance period during which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 may include a first effect acceptance period (see FIG. 190(a)) during which an operation opportunity is also given to the special operation means (the button marked "PUSH" in the figure) 1410, and a second effect acceptance period during which an operation opportunity is not given to the special operation means (the button marked "PUSH" in the figure). In this case, when the first effect acceptance period (see FIG. 190(a)) occurs, it is desirable to make the rate at which the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect (see FIG. 166 to FIG. 186) appears before the pattern change is stopped higher than when the second effect acceptance period occurs. With this configuration, it functions as an effect that suggests the rate at which the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect (see FIG. 166 to FIG. 186) appears depending on whether the first effect acceptance period or the second effect acceptance period occurs.

[Automatic Stabilization Processing]
As described above, in the automatic button presentation state (specific presentation state), even if the player does not perform an operation during the presentation acceptance period (when the above-mentioned alternative example is applied, the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period), a process (automatic presentation function) that causes the same change in presentation as when the operation is performed can be executed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special presentation acceptance period can be generated in which "multiple operation means are made available for presentation acceptance, and different presentations are executed depending on which operation means is operated." Therefore, when such a special presentation acceptance period occurs while the machine is in a state controlled in the automatic button presentation state (specific presentation state), and no operation is performed on any of the operation means during the special presentation acceptance period, the problem is which of the multiple operation means should have the automatic presentation function enabled (which of the multiple operation means should cause the same change in presentation as when the presentation is accepted).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a special effect acceptance period occurs in which "multiple operation means are capable of accepting effects, and different effects are executed depending on which operation means is operated," the criterion is not "whether there is a possibility of a more promising effect occurring," but "whether there is a possibility of a less promising effect occurring," and it is possible to execute a process (stable side automatic effect process) that activates the automatic effect function for an operation means other than the "operation means on the side that can generate an effect that has the potential to produce a less promising effect."

With this configuration, the least promising performance mode among the multiple performance modes that can occur when a performance request is made to any of the multiple operating means during the special performance reception period will not appear when the automatic performance function is functioning. This makes it possible to preferably avoid situations such as "the least promising performance mode appears due to the automatic performance function when an operation is forgotten."

Below, the stable side automatic effect processing when in this automatic button effect state will be explained with reference to Figures 193 to 195.

First, an example of a performance when a special performance acceptance period occurs when the player is not controlled to the automatic button performance state and is in a normal performance state will be described. In FIG. 193(a), in a normal performance state, the number of reserved balls is 3, the display of the decorative pattern SZ (special pattern) is displayed on the performance display device 1600 in a specific performance pattern according to the result of the big win judgment, and a performance display is displayed suggesting that a special performance acceptance period will begin in which the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sheathing operation of the sword decoration 5001 under the condition that a reach state is formed. In this performance state, although neither the performance acceptance for the operation button 410 nor the performance acceptance for the sword decoration 5001 has yet been enabled, the operation button 410 is in a light-emitting state and the sword decoration 5001 is in a state of being moved to the unsheathing position in order to prompt the player to decide whether to operate the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 from the situation. Additionally, the performance display device 1600 displays a button image BTG and a sword decoration image SYG.

Figure 193 (b) shows a presentation situation in which the special presentation acceptance period suggested by the presentation display shown in Figure 193 (a) has occurred (a presentation acceptance period in which the player can select either pressing the operation button 410 or sheathing the sword decoration 5001). In this presentation situation, at least a portion of the presentation display (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) on the presentation display device 1600 that has been displayed since the presentation situation shown in Figure 193 (a) and the states of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are maintained, while an instruction display (here, a downward arrow displayed corresponding to the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG, respectively, and a bar display showing the remaining time of the special presentation acceptance period, etc.) appears to encourage the player to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001.

Here, in the performance status shown in FIG. 193(b), a text image such as "stable" is displayed corresponding to the button image BTG, and a text image such as "turbulent" is displayed corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG. However, instead of this, it is also possible to display a dedicated mark when both of the two operation means are capable of receiving performances, without displaying the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG. Also, it is also possible not to display a dedicated mark when both of the operation means are capable of receiving performances. For example, even if both the operation of the operation button 410 and the operation of the sword decoration 5001 are permitted, it is also possible to "not display an imitation image of the operation button 410, but display an imitation image of the sword decoration 5001", or to "display an imitation image of the operation button 410, but not display an imitation image of the sword decoration 5001".

That is, in this performance example, when the performance acceptance for the operation button 410 is made within the special performance acceptance period shown in FIG. 193(b), as a button-side post-operation performance, first, it is displayed that the performance acceptance for the operation button 410 has been made (FIG. 193(c)), and then a performance (FIG. 193(d), FIG. 193(e)) is executed in which either "50 corpses defeated" or "100 corpses defeated" appears based on the result of the jackpot determination as a performance result that suggests that the fewer the number of corpses defeated, the lower the expectation level, and the greater the number of corpses defeated, the higher the expectation level. For example, in the button-side post-operation performance when a jackpot is won, the performance mode shown in FIG. 193(d) appears at a rate of "40%" and the performance mode shown in FIG. 193(e) appears at a rate of "60%", and in the button-side post-operation performance when a jackpot is lost, the performance mode shown in FIG. 193(d) appears at a rate of "60%" and the performance mode shown in FIG. 193(e) appears at a rate of "40%".

In contrast to this, when a performance acceptance is made for the sword decoration 5001 within the special performance acceptance period, as a performance after operation on the sword side, first, a display is displayed indicating that a performance acceptance for the sword decoration 5001 has been made (Fig. 194 (f)), and then a performance is executed in which one of "1 unit defeated", "100 units defeated", or "777 units defeated" appears based on the result of the jackpot determination, as a performance result suggesting that the fewer the number of units defeated, the lower the expectation level, and the greater the number of units defeated, the higher the expectation level (Figs. 194 (g) to 194 (i)). For example, in the performance after operation on the sword side when a jackpot is won, the performance mode shown in FIG. 194(g) appears at a rate of "10%", the performance mode shown in FIG. 194(h) appears at a rate of "50%", and the performance mode shown in FIG. 194(i) appears at a rate of "40%", and in the performance after operation on the sword side when a jackpot is lost, the performance mode shown in FIG. 194(g) appears at a rate of "40%", the performance mode shown in FIG. 194(h) appears at a rate of "50%", and the performance mode shown in FIG. 194(i) appears at a rate of "0%".

In the examples of the effects shown in Figures 193 to 195, regardless of whether the effect appears as a result of the button-side operation effect or the sword-side operation effect, an effect with a low number of kills has a lower expectation level than an effect with a high number of kills. Also, in the case of effect modes with the same number of kills (for example, the effect shown in Figure 193(e), the effect shown in Figure 194(h), and the effect shown in Figure 195(e) described below), the expectation levels may be different, but it is desirable to make them the same.

In this configuration, a special effect acceptance period is generated that allows effect acceptance for both the operation button 410 (first operation means) and the sword decoration 5001 (second operation means), and different operation effects (button-side post-operation effect, sword-side post-operation effect) can be generated depending on the type of operation means operated within the special effect acceptance period. This improves the monotonous effects that occur when only one operation means is operated, and increases the excitement of the game.

In particular, rather than having the same degree of expectation be shown whether the operation button 410 (first operation means) or the sword decoration 5001 (second operation means) is operated, a specific presentation mode (here, the "1 monster defeated" presentation mode shown in FIG. 194(g)) that suggests that the jackpot pattern is unlikely to appear in the pattern change (pattern change in the execution state) can only appear when the sword decoration 5001 (second operation means) is operated. This is expected to maintain interest in the game by providing a sense of conflict and stimulation as to whether the player wants to see the presentation on the sword decoration 5001 (second operation means) side (post-sword operation presentation) even at such a risk.

In this case, the button-side post-operation performance functions as a relatively stable post-operation performance in the sense that it eliminates the risk of the appearance of the "least promising specific performance mode (here, the "one enemy defeat" performance mode shown in FIG. 194(g))" among the performance modes that appear when either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is operated during the special performance acceptance period. Also, the sword-side post-operation performance functions as a relatively turbulent post-operation performance in the sense that it has a risk of the appearance of the "least promising specific performance mode (here, the "one enemy defeat" performance mode shown in FIG. 194(g))" among the performance modes that appear when either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is operated during the special performance acceptance period.

Furthermore, in this presentation example, the presentation mode shown in FIG. 193(a-b) can be made to appear based on the result of the jackpot determination during the period from when the presentation situation shown in FIG. 193(a) appears until when the presentation situation shown in FIG. 193(b) appears (here, during the special presentation acceptance period), and when this presentation mode appears, the presentation can progress in such a way that the appearance rate of the "lowest expectation specific presentation mode (here, the "one monster defeat" presentation mode shown in FIG. 194(g))" is lower when an operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001 than when this presentation mode does not appear. This rate may be 0%.

With this configuration, the result of whether or not the presentation mode shown in FIG. 193(a-b) has appeared can be used as a criterion for deciding whether to operate the sword decoration 5001 instead of the operation button 410, even at the risk of the appearance of the "particular presentation mode with the lowest expectation (here, the "One Defeat" presentation mode shown in FIG. 194(g))." This is expected to favorably increase interest in the game when the special presentation acceptance period shown in FIG. 193(b) occurs.

In addition, in the normal presentation state, if the special presentation acceptance period shown in FIG. 193(b) occurs but no presentation is accepted within the special presentation acceptance period, the automatic presentation function described above will not function, and the presentation will proceed without executing either the button-side post-operation presentation or the sword-side post-operation presentation.

In contrast, Figures 195(a) to (e) show examples of effects that occur when such a special effect acceptance period occurs while the automatic button effect state is being controlled.

As shown in Figures 195(a), 195(a-b), and 195(b), even when controlled to the automatic button performance state, except for the fact that a display indicating that it is controlled to the automatic button performance state (here, "Auto button setting in progress") continues to appear on the performance display device 1600, the performance progresses in the same manner as in the normal performance state described above (Figures 193(a), 193(a-b), and 193(b)) from the time the performance display indicating that the special performance acceptance period is about to begin appears until the special performance acceptance period ends.

However, as mentioned above, when neither the operation button 410 nor the sword decoration 5001 is operated within the special effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 195(b), a process (stable side automatic effect process) can be executed to activate the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 that is different from the sword decoration 5001 that is "the side that may generate an effect that has the potential to produce a less promising effect result (here, the "one enemy defeated" effect shown in FIG. 194(g)).

In other words, in this case, even though neither the operation button 410 nor the sword decoration 5001 was operated during the special performance acceptance period shown in FIG. 195(b), the automatic performance function for the operation button 410 is enabled, and the same change occurs in the performance as when the operation of the operation button 410 is accepted during the special performance acceptance period. Therefore, as a performance after the button side operation, first, it is displayed that the performance acceptance for the operation button 410 has been made (FIG. 195(c)), and then a performance is executed in which either "50 corpses defeated" or "100 corpses defeated" appears based on the result of the jackpot determination as a performance result suggesting that the fewer the number of corpses defeated, the lower the expectation level, and the greater the number of corpses defeated, the higher the expectation level (FIG. 195(d), FIG. 195(e)).

With this configuration, the least promising performance mode (here, the "1 monster defeat" performance mode shown in FIG. 194(g)) among the multiple performance modes that can occur when a performance reception is made for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 during the special performance reception period will not appear when the automatic performance function is functioning, so it is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of a situation in which "the least promising performance mode appears due to the automatic performance function when an operation is forgotten."

Here, there is a concern that the convenience of the automatic performance function will cause the player to stop operating either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 in order to maintain the automatic button performance state. However, as mentioned above, during the special performance acceptance period, the performance mode shown in FIG. 195 (a-b) can appear based on the result of the jackpot determination, and when this performance mode appears, an opportunity is given to enjoy the sword side post-operation performance in the midst of a low probability of appearance of the "lowest expectation specific performance mode (here, the "one monster defeat" performance mode shown in FIG. 194 (g))," so it is expected that this will favorably encourage the player to operate the sword decoration 5001.

In the examples shown in Figures 193 to 195, the period during which operations on the operation button 410 are accepted and the period during which operations on the sword decoration 5001 are accepted are controlled as a special period during which they occur and end simultaneously, but these periods do not necessarily have to occur simultaneously. For example, if the period during which operations on the operation button 410 are accepted and the period during which operations on the sword decoration 5001 are accepted overlap in part, these periods may occur at different times.

In addition, when a specific presentation pattern is selected from among multiple presentation patterns based on the result of the big win determination, the above-mentioned special presentation acceptance period may be always generated, in which "multiple operation means are available for presentation acceptance, and different presentations are executed depending on which operation means is operated." In other words, in this case, at a relatively early stage from when the pattern variation starts with a specific presentation pattern, it becomes possible to think about presentation strategies that assume the occurrence of a special presentation acceptance period, such as "which of the multiple operation means should be operated during the special presentation acceptance period, and further, whether the setting operation to the automatic button presentation state should be performed before the special presentation acceptance period occurs." For example, since it becomes possible to confirm "how many advance presentations were performed and in what presentation mode (expectation level)" before the special presentation acceptance period occurs, it becomes possible to use these confirmation results as a basis for determining "which of the multiple operation means should be operated during the special presentation acceptance period," and it becomes possible to appropriately maintain the interest in the game until the special presentation acceptance period occurs.

However, even if a specific presentation pattern is selected, it is desirable to determine which presentation mode will appear when the operation button 410 is operated within the special presentation acceptance period, when the sword decoration 5001 is operated, or when the automatic presentation function is activated, by a lottery (determination) based on the results of the jackpot determination when the pattern change begins or when presentation acceptance occurs (or when the automatic presentation function is activated).

In addition, even if the special effect acceptance period has not yet occurred, when the "effect display (FIG. 193(a), FIG. 195(a))" is being performed, it is desirable to control this as a prohibited period so that the setting to the automatic button effect state is not permitted. With this configuration, even if the player attempts to set the automatic button effect state after confirming that the "effect display suggesting that the special effect acceptance period will begin, during which the player can select either the pressing of the operation button 410 or the sheathing of the sword decoration 5001" has begun, this will not be accepted. Therefore, it is possible to provide the "stable side automatic effect processing when in the automatic button effect state" only to those who are continuously playing while maintaining the automatic button effect state, and it is possible to provide a performance value for continuously playing while maintaining the automatic button effect state.

In addition, in the performance examples shown in Figures 193 to 195, the "specific performance mode with the lowest expectation (Figure 194 (g)" that may appear when the sword-side post-operation performance is performed is executed as a unique performance mode different from any of the performance modes that may appear when the button-side post-operation performance is performed, but the "specific performance mode with the lowest expectation" may be executed as the same performance mode that may appear when the button-side post-operation performance is performed (for example, "50 enemies defeated" as shown in Figure 193 (d)). In other words, in this case, even if the "specific performance mode with the lowest expectation" appears as a result of the sword-side post-operation performance, the appearance will be the same as the performance mode that may appear when the button-side post-operation performance is performed, so It is possible to make it difficult for a third party who does not know which of the decorative bodies 5001 has been operated to recognize that the presentation situation has a significantly low expectancy, which is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. In other words, in this case, even though the presentation display device 1600 only displays one presentation situation, such as "a specific presentation mode is displayed based on the presentation reception," the expectation of the appearance of a jackpot pattern in the pattern change (pattern change in the execution state) differs depending on whether the presentation situation has occurred due to an operation on the operation button 410 or an operation on the sword decorative body 5001, making it possible to make the presentation using multiple operating means even more interesting.

However, even if the "lowest expectation specific presentation mode" in the sword-side post-operation performance is executed in the same mode as the presentation mode that can appear when the button-side post-operation performance is performed, it is desirable to execute the "highest expectation special presentation mode" in the sword-side post-operation performance as a unique presentation mode that is different from any of the presentation modes that can appear when the button-side post-operation performance is performed (for example, "777 enemies defeated" as shown in FIG. 194(i). According to such a configuration, when the "lowest expectation specific presentation mode" appears in the sword-side post-operation performance, the performance situation is such that the expectation is significantly lowered for a third party who does not know whether the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 has been operated. On the other hand, when the "special presentation mode with the highest expectation" appears in the presentation after the operation of the sword side, even a third party who does not know whether the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 was operated can easily recognize that the presentation situation is one in which the expectation is extremely high. Therefore, the player can enjoy the presentation on the sword decoration 5001 (second operation means) side (presentation after the operation of the sword side) at the risk described above without worrying about the eyes of a third party. Note that the "special presentation mode with the highest expectation" only needs to be recognizable by a third party, and it may be unique from other presentation modes, for example, by executing a movable body operation or lamp illumination.

In addition, in the presentation examples shown in Figures 193 to 195, the "777 corpses defeated" presentation mode (Figure 194(i)) can appear as a result of the sword side post-operation presentation (Figures 194(f) to 194(i)), and when the "777 corpses defeated" presentation mode (Figure 194(i)) appears, the probability of a jackpot pattern appearing in that pattern change (pattern change in execution state) is higher than when any other presentation mode (Figures 193(d), 193(e), 194(g), 194(h)) appears. This probability may be 100%. However, the "777 defeated" presentation mode (Figure 194(i)) does not necessarily have to appear. In this case, the appearance rate of the presentation mode shown in Figure 194(h) will be higher than the appearance rate of the presentation mode shown in Figure 193(e) by the amount that the expectation level of the presentation mode shown in Figure 194(g) is lowered compared to the presentation mode shown in Figure 193(d).

In the performance examples shown in Figures 193 to 195, a common performance mode (here, the "100 enemies defeated" performance mode) can appear regardless of whether the button-side post-operation performance (Figures 193(c) to 193(e)) or the sword-side post-operation performance (Figures 194(f) to 194(i)) is performed, but it is also possible for a common performance mode not to appear. Also, whereas only display changes appear in the button-side post-operation performance, the sword-side post-operation performance may be able to perform movable body movements and lamp illumination in addition to display changes. Furthermore, the button-side post-operation performance and the sword-side post-operation performance may not have common performance content regarding the number of enemies defeated, and the performance content itself may be executed as different performances.

In addition, in the example of effects shown in Figures 193 to 195, when an effect is received, including when the automatic effect function is activated, a display (Figures 193(c), 194(f), and 195(c)) is displayed to indicate whether the effect has been received for the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001. However, it is also possible to execute an effect that displays an effect result that indicates the expected degree without displaying the display.

In addition, in the example of the performance shown in Fig. 193 to Fig. 195, when the "777 Defeat" performance mode (Fig. 194(i)) appears as a result of the sword side post-operation performance (Fig. 194(f) to Fig. 194(i)), it is desirable to make the rate at which the above-mentioned specific operation-related performance (see Fig. 166 to Fig. 186) appears before the pattern change stops higher than when any other performance mode (Fig. 193(d), Fig. 193(e), Fig. 194(g), Fig. 194(h)) appears, and further, when the specific operation-related performance appears, the rate at which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (sword decoration 5001) on the higher expectation side is higher. With this configuration, it becomes possible to preferably encourage the operation of the sword decoration 5001 on the higher performance risk side in the performance examples shown in Fig. 193 to Fig. 195.

[Restoration process for movement abnormalities with reduced impact on movement performance]
As described above, in this pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), when a specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state (more precisely, when a specific state is not occurring) and a restoration operation time corresponding to the pattern change (for example, the start or stop time of the pattern change) arrives, it is possible to execute a process to perform a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decoration. However, if such a restoration process is executed regardless of the presentation situation, it is uninteresting and there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease.

For example, the above-mentioned "start time of pattern change" is set as the "restoration operation time corresponding to the pattern change". Now, as shown in Figure 196, if the timing tm1 at which a new pattern change starts in a situation where a specific movable ornament is in an abnormal state arrives, the peripheral control MPU 1511a will execute at least each of the following processes.
A process of setting a presentation pattern corresponding to the pattern change based on a command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side when the pattern change starts, and progressing the presentation of the set presentation pattern as the pattern change progresses. A process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body based on a command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side when the pattern change starts (based on the arrival of the time for the restoration operation corresponding to the pattern change).

In the example shown in FIG. 196, it is assumed that a "specific performance pattern that can operate a specific movable decorative object at a specific timing tm2 within the pattern change" is set as the performance pattern. Therefore, when timing tm1 arrives, a situation will arise in which the performance progress related to the "specific performance pattern that can operate a specific movable decorative object at a specific timing tm2 within the pattern change" and the process of performing a specified restoration operation on the specific movable decorative object are carried out in parallel.

In general, in a pachinko machine 1 in which such a specific presentation pattern can be executed, a presentation pattern (a presentation pattern with a relatively low expectation) that is paired with the specific presentation pattern in terms of presentation is prepared. In the paired presentation pattern (a presentation pattern with a relatively low expectation), even though the specific movable ornament is not operated at the specific timing tm2 in the pattern change, the same presentation as the "specific presentation pattern (a presentation pattern with a relatively high expectation) that can operate the specific movable ornament at the specific timing tm2 in the pattern change" is performed toward the specific timing tm2. In this way, by preparing two presentation patterns (a presentation pattern that operates the specific movable ornament and a presentation pattern that does not operate the specific movable ornament) that are paired with each other in terms of presentation, at the specific timing tm2 (for example, during a specified time until the specific timing tm2 arrives), a specified presentation (for example, a presentation display as to whether or not the specific movable ornament will operate) with a presentation of whether or not the specific movable ornament will operate can be executed, and this presentation can maintain the interest in the game in an appropriate manner.

However, if the process of performing a specified restoration action on a specific movable decorative object is still in progress when the specific timing tm2 arrives after the pattern change has started, it will become clear that the specific movable decorative object is in a situation where it cannot perform its performance action even though the specific timing tm2 has arrived. In other words, in this case, even if the above-mentioned specified performance is performed at the specific timing tm2 within the pattern change, the function of the specified performance, which has the performance element of whether or not the specific movable decorative object will operate, may be lost, and there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease.

In the example shown in FIG. 196, when a situation occurs in which the performance progress related to a "specific performance pattern that can operate a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2" among the performance patterns and the process of performing a specific restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body (restoration process based on the restoration operation timing corresponding to the pattern change) are performed in parallel, the "process of performing a specific restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body" is terminated before the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration situation. Note that various methods can be adopted as the "process of performing a specific restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body", but in the following explanation, it is explained as if "a process of repeatedly performing a restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body until the abnormal state is resolved or a specific upper limit number is reached" is executed.

More specifically, the time required for the "process of causing a specific movable decoration to perform a specified restoration operation" to be completed to restore the specific movable decoration from the abnormal state will vary depending on the degree to which the specific movable decoration is abnormal. For example, when the abnormal state is eliminated and the specific movable decoration is returned (restored) to its original position by performing only the first restoration operation on the specific movable decoration, the timing tx at which the "process of causing a specific movable decoration to perform a specified restoration operation" is completed will arrive relatively early, but the more times the restoration operation on the specific movable decoration fails and is repeated before it is returned (restored), the later the timing tx at which the "process of causing a specific movable decoration to perform a specified restoration operation" is completed will be postponed. And at the latest, if the restoration operation for a specific movable ornament has failed and the ornament has not yet returned (restored), but performing the restoration operation again would result in exceeding the timing tx, the process of performing the specified restoration operation will be terminated while leaving the specific movable ornament in an abnormal state, so that the process of performing the specified restoration operation will be terminated before the specific timing tm arrives, regardless of the restoration status.

When it is assumed that one restoration operation for a specific movable decorative object requires x time, an upper limit n of the number of times the specific restoration operation is repeated within one pattern change can be set so that the relationship "x time x n times < time between timings tm1 and tm2" holds. By terminating the process of performing the specific restoration operation when the upper limit n is reached, even if the object has not returned (restored), the process of performing the specific restoration operation can be terminated before the specific timing tm2 arrives, regardless of the restoration status.

According to this configuration, when a situation occurs in which the performance progress according to a specific performance pattern that can operate a specific movable decoration at a specific timing tm2 within the pattern change and a specific restoration operation for a specific movable decoration are performed in parallel, the process of performing the specific restoration operation will be terminated before the specific timing tm2 arrives, regardless of the restoration situation. In other words, in this case, the specific movable decoration will be in a stopped state at the specific timing tm2, not only if the specific movable decoration is restored before the specific timing tm2 arrives, but even if the specific movable decoration is not restored, it is possible to preferably maintain the performance of whether or not the specific movable decoration will operate when the specific timing tm2 arrives. For example, even if the specific movable decoration is in a stopped state at a position different from the original position, when the specific timing tm2 arrives, it may cause some kind of behavior, or even if the movable decoration does not operate, the lamp of the movable decoration may light up (assuming that the lamp of the movable decoration lights up when the performance operation by the movable decoration is performed).

However, in reality, if a specific movable decoration is performing a restoration action while the above-mentioned specified performance is being performed, the function of the specified performance, which has the effect of determining whether or not the specific movable decoration will move, may be lost. Therefore, in order to maintain interest in the game, it is more desirable to have the timing tx at which the "process of causing a specific movable decoration to perform a specified restoration action" be completed before the above-mentioned specified performance begins, regardless of the restoration status.

As a predetermined effect, for example, when a specific movable decoration is provided as "something that operates when a specific display result (for example, a display result in which an attack hits) appears within a super reach effect and does not operate unless the specific display result appears," it is possible to give an example of "a display effect that appears in advance in a way that teases whether or not a specific display result will appear," and when a specific movable decoration is provided as "something that operates based on the effect being accepted by the player's operation (or the effect is accepted but does not operate)," it is possible to give an example of "an effect that causes a specific display to appear to encourage the player to operate."

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 196, it is assumed that the specific movable decorative body has recovered (restored) from an abnormal state to a normal state at the timing tx when the "process of performing a specified restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body" is completed. In this way, even if the specific movable decorative body was in an abnormal state when the fluctuation started (or the "restoration operation time" such as when the previous pattern stopped), when the specific timing tm2 in the pattern fluctuation arrives after it has been restored to a normal state, it becomes possible to perform a performance operation on the specific timing tm2.

In contrast, when the "process of performing a specified restoration operation on a specific movable decorative object" is completed at the timing tx, if the specific movable decorative object cannot return (restore) from the abnormal state and the specific timing tm2 in the pattern change arrives while the specific movable decorative object remains in the abnormal state, the stopped state will be maintained at least from the specific timing tm2 (more precisely, timing tx) until the pattern change ends and the next restoration operation time arrives. In other words, in this case, although the specific movable decorative object cannot be caused to perform a performance operation at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to preferably maintain the performance of whether or not the specific movable decorative object operates, and when the specific performance pattern is based on a jackpot variation, a surprise performance can be provided by stopping the jackpot pattern even though the specific movable decorative object did not perform a performance operation at the specific timing tm2.

However, in recent years, pachinko machines have begun to be equipped with movable decorations that have more complex structures and perform multi-stage movements, and the restoration process of such movable decorations often requires a longer time to be completed. However, on the other hand, in a specific performance pattern that can operate a specific movable decoration at a specific timing tm2 within the pattern change, or a performance pattern that has a paired relationship with this, even if the specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state when the performance pattern starts, it is required to complete the process of performing a specific restoration operation on the specific movable decoration within a time shorter than the time required from the start of the pattern change until the specific timing tm2 arrives (more preferably, the time until the specified performance is performed). In other words, in this case, each time a specific movable decoration becomes abnormal, it can only be restored in a simple, emergency manner, which may hasten the deterioration of the specific movable decoration.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) provides a special presentation pattern (a presentation pattern for restoration and diagnosis), and when the special presentation pattern is selected based on a command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when the pattern change is started, the specific movable ornament is not operated and a predetermined presentation (for example, a presentation display indicating whether or not the ornament will operate) is not displayed while the special presentation pattern is progressing (while the pattern change corresponding to the special presentation pattern is being performed). As shown in Fig. 197A (a) and (d), when the timing tm11 at which the pattern change is started in a situation where a specific movable ornament is in an abnormal state arrives, the presentation progress related to the special presentation pattern and the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable ornament are parallel to each other, the restoration process is not terminated and is continued at least while the special presentation pattern is being performed (the period until the pattern is stopped).

More specifically, in the restoration process that began at timing tm11, even if the abnormal condition is resolved and the specific movable decorative object returns (restores) to its original position after only the first restoration operation is performed on the specific movable decorative object, the restoration process will not end at least while the special performance pattern is being performed, and the restoration process will be performed on the specific movable decorative object for the entire period.

With this configuration, when a particular movable decoration is in an abnormal state, it is possible to perform a more thorough restoration process (for example, performing an additional normal diagnosis after restoration) aiming for the time when the special presentation pattern is performed, so that the special presentation pattern functions as a restoration/diagnosis presentation pattern, and the player can watch the careful restoration and enjoy the subsequent presentation with peace of mind. In this sense, it is desirable to prepare the special presentation pattern as one that can be selected only when the jackpot judgment is lost. It is also desirable for the display content on the presentation display device 1600 to appear in a unique manner, such as "This is a restoration/diagnosis presentation pattern. Please wait a moment."

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in Figs. 197A(a) and (d), when a specific movable ornament is in an abnormal state and timing tm11 arrives and the above-mentioned special presentation pattern is performed, the restoration process started at timing tm11 is not terminated but continues even after timing tm12 when the special presentation pattern ends. This configuration eliminates the constraint that "despite an abnormality occurring in a specific movable ornament, the restoration process must be performed for each unit where a pattern change occurs," making it possible to perform restoration processing in a more authentic manner.

However, if at the time tm12 when the special presentation pattern ends, the reserved amount is not interrupted and a presentation pattern corresponding to a new pattern change is performed, the time for the next restoration operation (here, the time when the next pattern change begins) will arrive. If the restoration process started at the time tm11 is still continuing at this time, it will be determined that the specific movable decoration is still in an abnormal state (e.g., not located in the original position). If a new restoration process is started for the specific movable decoration based on this determination, then in effect, only restoration processes that can be completed within the time it takes for one pattern change to occur can be performed, and the content of the process will naturally be limited, and the inability to adequately deal with the abnormality may hasten the deterioration of the specific movable decoration.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in Figures 197A (b) and (d), when the next restoration operation time (here, the time when the next pattern change will start) arrives while restoration processing is being performed on a specific movable decoration, the restoration processing in the execution state is not terminated but is continued across the time of the next restoration operation. With this configuration, no matter what the situation is when restoration processing is being held for a specific movable decoration, the constraint that "despite an abnormality occurring in a specific movable decoration, the restoration processing must be performed for each unit where pattern change occurs" is eliminated, making it possible to perform restoration processing in a more authentic manner.

However, as shown in Figures 197A(c) and (d), when a new pattern change is started while a restoration process is being performed on a specific movable decorative object, a "specific performance pattern that can operate a specific movable decorative object at a specific timing tm2 in the pattern change" may appear as the new pattern change. Therefore, as shown in Figures 197A(a) to (c), regardless of the game or performance situation (and even the restoration situation, etc.) after the special performance pattern is ended, it is desirable to end the timing tx at which the "processing to perform a specific restoration operation on a specific movable decorative object" started at timing tm11 is completed within a time shorter than the time required for the arrival of the specific timing tm2 in the next pattern change (more preferably, the time until the specified performance is performed). Even with this configuration, it becomes possible to continue performing the restoration process on a specific movable decorative object for a relatively long time until the time from timing tm11 to tm12 (the time required to consume the special performance pattern) is completed, in addition to the time from timing tm11 to tm12 until the time from timing tm12 to tx is completed.

In addition, if a situation arises in which a special presentation pattern (a presentation pattern for restoration and diagnosis) is executed consecutively after a special presentation pattern (a presentation pattern for restoration and diagnosis) has ended, the restoration process may not end within the new special presentation pattern (a presentation pattern for restoration and diagnosis), but may continue across three or more pattern changes (presentation patterns) (after one restoration process is started, the one restoration process may span two or more restoration operation periods).

In the example shown in FIG. 197A, it is assumed that the specific movable decorative object has recovered (restored) from an abnormal state to a normal state at the timing tx when the "process of performing a specified restoration operation on a specific movable decorative object" is completed. In this way, by continuing one restoration process across the time of the next restoration operation (here, the time when the next pattern change begins), it becomes possible to restore even a serious abnormal state that could not be restored in the past, and it becomes possible to perform a performance operation on the specific movable decorative object at a specific timing tm2.

In contrast, even if one restoration process is continued across the next restoration operation time (here, the start time of the next pattern change), if a specific movable decorative body cannot return (restore) from the abnormal state at timing tx, the stopped state will be maintained from timing tx until the pattern change ends and the next restoration operation time arrives. In other words, in this case, although it is not possible to perform a performance operation of the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to preferably maintain the performance of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates, and when the specific performance pattern is based on a jackpot fluctuation, a surprise performance can be provided by stopping the jackpot pattern even though the specific movable decorative body did not perform a performance operation at the specific timing tm2.

In addition, in a situation where a specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state and restoration processing has not been performed on the specific movable decoration, if the restoration processing is started multiple times on the specific movable decoration each time the restoration operation time (here, the time when the pattern change starts) arrives, there is a concern that if the specific movable decoration is broken to the extent that it cannot be restored, the restoration processing on the specific movable decoration will be repeated repeatedly even though it cannot be restored, which will reduce interest in the game. Therefore, if a specific movable decoration has not been restored from the abnormal state despite the arrival of a specified maximum number of restoration operation times after it has been put into an abnormal state (even though the number of times the restoration processing (specific movable decoration) has been performed has reached a specified maximum number), it is desirable not to start a new restoration processing on the specific movable decoration even if a new restoration operation time arrives thereafter.

However, on the other hand, if a situation arises in which a special performance pattern (a performance pattern for restoration and diagnosis) other than the special performance pattern (for example, a specific performance pattern) is executed after a specific movable ornament is put into an abnormal state and only the special performance pattern (a performance pattern for restoration and diagnosis) is executed (started) in succession for the above-mentioned specified upper limit number, one restoration process may be continued across the specified upper limit number of special performance patterns and the next performance pattern. In other words, in this case, even though the restoration operation time has arrived the specified upper limit number of times after the specific movable ornament is put into an abnormal state, it has not been restored from the abnormal state, but even when the "specified upper limit number + 1" restoration operation time arrives, the restoration process for the specific movable ornament is not terminated but is continued. In this way, with regard to the mode in which one restoration process is continued across the restoration operation time, it is desirable to treat it as one restoration process in the count against the above-mentioned specified upper limit number and not terminate it, regardless of how many times the restoration operation time arrives while the one restoration process is continuing, so that restoration processing in a more serious mode is not hindered.

Incidentally, such restoration processing (restoration processing carried out based on the restoration operation timing corresponding to the pattern change) is basically performed in the manner described above for the board-side movable decorations (e.g., the back front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable performance unit 3200, the specific decorative member SDY (blind role), etc.) provided on the game board 5 side, as well as the frame-side movable decorations provided on the door frame 3 side. However, among the frame-side movable decorations provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorations that are also used as operating means (e.g., the operably provided operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001, etc.) may be restored (returned) in a manner different from that of the specific movable decorations (board-side movable decorations) described above.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as described above, a movable operation system performance pattern (for example, the performance pattern shown in FIG. 177) is prepared in which an operation opportunity granting performance that grants an operation opportunity for the sword decorative body 5001 during the period in which the pattern is changed is executed. As also described above, in such an operation opportunity granting performance, "processing for moving the sword decorative body 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force (see FIG. 177(f))", "processing for generating a performance acceptance period for the sword decorative body 5001 (see FIG. 177(f))", and further "processing for displaying a message encouraging an operation (such as displaying a text message such as "push in" or a bar displaying the remaining time of the performance acceptance period) (see FIG. 177(f))" are executed. As a result, when the sword decoration 5001, which has moved to the operating position, is operated (here, a push operation) and this is accepted for performance, a "process for performing a performance operation of a board-side movable decoration such as a specific decorative member SDY (a blind function) (see FIG. 177(g))" and a "process for causing a change in the display content (see FIG. 177(g))" are performed based on the performance acceptance. Note that the board-side movable decoration that is performed in this process may be the specific movable decoration described in FIG. 196 or FIG. 197A.

However, among such operation opportunity granting effects, the "process of moving the sword decorative body 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force" is not executed when the sword decorative body 5001 is in an abnormal state, but can be executed when it is in a normal state, whereas the "process of generating an effect acceptance period for the sword decorative body 5001" and the "process of displaying a prompt for operation" are executable whether the sword decorative body 5001 is in a normal state or an abnormal state. Therefore, in a movable operation type effect pattern, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is in an abnormal state, if a player who sees the "display prompting operation" operates the sword decorative body 5001 and this is accepted as an effect, the "process of performing an effect operation of a board-side movable decorative body such as a specific decorative member SDY (blind role object)" and the "process of causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600" will each be performed. Moreover, in a movable operation type presentation pattern, even if the sword decoration 5001 is in an abnormal state, the player's operation may cause the sword decoration 5001 to receive an external force, causing the operation part to move, and the abnormal state may be resolved on its own.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a frame-side movable decoration that is also used as an operating means (for example, an operably arranged operating button 410 or a sword decoration 5001, etc.) goes into an abnormal state, a return process (restoration process in the manner described with reference to Figures 196 and 197A) that applies a driving force to return the frame-side movable decoration (operating means) to its original position can be executed at each of the timings of "the above-mentioned restoration operation time (here, the start time of the pattern change)" and "after the performance is accepted by the player's operation within the performance pattern of the movable operation system."

According to this configuration, when the board-side movable decoration is in an abnormal state, a process to return the board-side movable decoration is performed at a timing such as the start or stop of the pattern change (more precisely, after it has started or stopped), whereas when the frame-side movable decoration is in an abnormal state, a process to restore (return) the frame-side movable decoration (operation means) is performed not only at a timing such as the start or stop of the pattern change, but also at a different unique timing (a timing during the change period when an external force (operation by the player) is applied to the frame-side movable decoration (operation means) and the abnormal state may be eliminated), so it is expected that it will be possible to quickly return the frame-side movable decoration (operation means) in an abnormal state to its original position.

Figure 198 is a time chart showing an example of the process for returning the sword decorative body 5001 to its original position when the sword decorative body 5001 is used as such a frame-side movable decorative body (operation means).

As shown in FIG. 198, a movable operation system presentation pattern (a presentation pattern in which an operation opportunity grant presentation that grants an operation opportunity for the sword decorative body 5001 during the period in which the pattern is changed) is being executed, and at timing tm21, a "process for moving the sword decorative body 5001 from the original position to the operation position" is executed. Then, when the sword decorative body 5001 is in a state in which the sword decorative body 5001 is located in the operation position, if the player operates the sword decorative body 5001 and this is accepted as a presentation while a "process for generating a presentation acceptance period for the sword decorative body 5001" and a "display prompting operation (text display such as "push in" and a bar display showing the remaining time of the presentation acceptance period) are being executed (timing tm22), then a "process for performing a presentation operation on a board-side movable decorative body such as a specific decorative member SDY (a blind role object)" and a "process for causing a change in the display content on the presentation display device 1600" are respectively executed. In the example shown in Figure 198, based on the performance acceptance, the specific movable decorations described in Figures 196 and 197A are operated as movable decorations on the board side.

In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 198 assumes that an abnormality occurs in the sword decoration 5001 at the timing tm22 when the performance is accepted, causing it to not return to its original position, and another abnormality occurs in the specific movable decoration (the board-side movable decoration) that performed the performance operation based on the performance acceptance, causing it to not return to its original position. At this time, a determination is made that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001 and a determination is made that an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration, but it is desirable that the determination that an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration is accompanied by neither a specific alarm sound nor a display alarm, and that the determination that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001 is accompanied by at least one of a specific alarm sound and a display alarm. This is because the sword decoration 5001 is "placed within reach of the player (door frame 3)" and if an alarm is set to notify the player that it has entered an abnormal state, it is expected that the player will carry out the work to repair the abnormal state by hand, whereas the specific movable decoration is "placed out of reach of the player (game board 5)" and even if an alarm is set to notify the player that it has entered an abnormal state, the player will not be able to help in any way and simply emphasizing that the movable performance is not being performed may contribute to a decrease in interest in the game. However, it is preferable that such an alarm be terminated when a specified time has elapsed.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 198, an abnormality occurs in a specific movable ornament during the "processing of performing a performance operation on a specific movable ornament" based on the performance acceptance at timing tm22, but it is desirable to make it difficult to recognize that an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable ornament by having the "processing of causing a change in the display content in the performance display device 1600" be executed normally. After this, the performance pattern of the movable operation system will progress with both the sword ornament 5001 and the specific movable ornament remaining in an abnormal state, and the pattern change will be stopped at timing tm23.

In the example shown in FIG. 198, when timing tm23 is reached, the pattern change that is already on hold is immediately (e.g., after 0.6 seconds) consumed (started), and it is assumed that the specific performance pattern described in FIG. 196 is executed as a performance pattern corresponding to the new pattern change. That is, in the specific performance pattern, a specific movable decorative body is caused to perform a performance operation at timing tm2, a predetermined time after the pattern change has started, but as described above, the timing tx at which the "process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation" that starts at the time of the restoration operation (here, when the pattern change starts) is completed is completed within a time shorter than timing tm2 (more preferably, until the predetermined performance starts) regardless of the restoration status.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is also capable of executing a process for returning the sword decoration 5001 to its original position (applying a driving force) in parallel with at least some of the operations described above, based on the arrival of the time for the restoration operation of the sword decoration 5001 (here, the time when the pattern starts to change). Moreover, the timing at which such a "process for causing the sword decoration 5001 to perform a specified restoration operation" is completed is also set to be shorter than timing tm2 (more preferably, until the specified performance starts) regardless of the restoration status.

With this configuration, when the abnormal state of a particular movable decorative object is resolved and a movable performance is performed by the particular movable decorative object at timing tm2, the restoration action of the sword decorative object 5001 will not continue, which makes it possible to avoid disappointment when the restoration action and the movable performance are performed in parallel.

In the example shown in FIG. 198, the timing at which the restoration process for a specific movable decorative object starts and ends is the same as the timing at which the restoration process for the sword decorative object 5001 starts and ends, but only one of these timings may be the same, or both of these timings may be different.

Furthermore, as explained with reference to Figure 197A, the "processing of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation" can of course continue even after a special presentation pattern (a restoration/diagnosis presentation pattern) has ended when that special presentation pattern appears, and in a situation where the pattern change that is on hold after the special presentation pattern has ended is consumed (started) immediately (for example, after 0.6 seconds), the process (one restoration process) can be executed without terminating when crossing over into the next restoration operation time (here, the start time of the next pattern change). It is desirable that the "processing of causing a specific restoration operation to be performed on the sword decorative body 5001" can also be executed in the same manner (as explained with reference to Figure 197A). In other words, in this case, the "process of performing a specified restoration operation on the sword decoration 5001" will also be executed across the next restoration operation timing (here, the start timing of the next pattern change) when a special performance pattern appears, but it will be terminated regardless of the restoration status during the time required from the start of the next pattern change to the arrival of timing tm2.

In addition, after the sword ornament 5001 is put into an abnormal state, if a situation arises in which only the special performance pattern (the performance pattern for restoration and diagnosis) is executed in succession a predetermined upper limit number of times, and then a performance pattern (e.g., a specific performance pattern) different from the special performance pattern (the performance pattern for restoration and diagnosis) is executed, a restoration process for the sword ornament 5001 may be continued across the predetermined upper limit number of special performance patterns and the next performance pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 198, it is assumed that at timing tx, the restoration process for the specific movable decorative object and the restoration process for the sword decorative object 5001 are each completed, but both restorations fail. Therefore, at timing tm2, no movable performance is performed by the specific movable decorative object, and the sword decorative object 5001 and the specific movable decorative object both remain in an abnormal state while the specific performance pattern progresses, and the pattern change is stopped at timing tm24.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, even if a specific movable decoration is returned to its original position (returned to a normal state) by an external force (without applying a driving force from a motor, etc.) within the period from timing tx to tm2 within a specific presentation pattern, the specific movable decoration will not perform a presentation operation at timing tm2. In other words, the application of an external force (without applying a driving force from a motor, etc.) to a specific movable decoration within the period from timing tx to tm2 is itself an abnormal situation. In such an unreliable situation, even if a presentation operation is performed by a specific movable decoration, there is a high possibility that it will fail, so it is desirable not to do so in order to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, if the restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 fails and an abnormal state occurs again, it is desirable that neither the specific alarm sound nor the display alarm be issued. In other words, if an alarm were issued every time the restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 fails and an abnormal state occurs again, this could give the player the misunderstanding that the player is responsible for the abnormal state not being resolved. Therefore, it is desirable to issue the above-mentioned alarm (at least one of the specific alarm sound and display alarm) only the first time an abnormality occurs, when the normal state changes to an abnormal state, to encourage the player to take repair work.

In the example shown in FIG. 198, it is assumed that only a specific movable ornament out of the sword decorative body 5001 and a specific movable ornament has recovered from an abnormal state due to a restoration process triggered by any restoration operation time (here, the time when the pattern change starts) that arrives after timing tm24. Now, with only the sword decorative body 5001 in an abnormal state, the performance pattern of the movable operation system is being performed again, and as shown in FIG. 198, if the sword decorative body 5001, which was in an abnormal state at timing tm25, receives a performance due to operation by the player, it is possible to expect that such an operation may have resolved the abnormality that occurred in the sword decorative body 5001.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the sword decoration 5001, which was in an abnormal state at timing tm25, is accepted for performance by the player's operation, it is possible to apply a driving force to return the sword decoration 5001 to its original position (to make it remain at its original position). In this case, considering that a moving performance by a specific movable decoration is performed based on the performance acceptance, it is preferable that the period during which the process of applying a driving force to return the sword decoration 5001 to its original position (the period when a single return operation is successful) is performed after the moving performance by the specific movable decoration has started and ends before the moving performance by the specific movable decoration ends (the specific movable decoration returns to its original position), in order to make it difficult to recognize that such a return process is being performed. However, considering that there is now a rare chance that the sword decoration 5001, which was previously unable to return due to such external forces (operations by the player), may be able to return, it is desirable that if the process of applying a driving force to return the sword decoration 5001 to its original position (the return action on the sword decoration 5001) fails, the process of applying a driving force to return the sword decoration 5001 to its original position (the return action on the sword decoration 5001 is executed again) is continued until the period after the movable performance by the specific movable decoration has ended, making it easier for the player to recognize the abnormal situation and encouraging the player to help. However, even if this return process fails, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification that accompanies it is not performed.

The example shown in FIG. 198 assumes that the return process (return to original position) of the sword decoration 5001 using such an external force (operation by the player) is successful, after which the sword decoration 5001 and the specific movable decoration will both remain in a normal state, the performance pattern of the movable operation system will progress, and the pattern change will be stopped at timing tm26.

In this way, according to the example shown in FIG. 198, for the frame-side movable decoration (sword decoration 5001) that is also used as an operating means, in addition to the restoration operation time (when the pattern starts to change) set for the board-side movable decoration (specific movable decoration), a restoration operation time (timing after the performance is accepted) using an external force (operation by the player) is set. In other words, the frame-side movable decoration (sword decoration 5001), which is also used as an operating means, is easily put into an abnormal state because it can be directly touched by the player, but even if it does become abnormal, there are many opportunities for it to return to its original position, and various return methods are used (a return method only by applying a driving force, or at least a return method using an external force), so the possibility of eliminating the abnormal state is increased and a decline in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, the process of applying a driving force to the sword decoration 5001 to return it to its original position after the sword decoration 5001, which was in an abnormal state, is accepted for performance by the player's operation may be performed with a driving force different from the restoration process performed when the pattern change start time (for example, timing tm23) arrives. In other words, since this process uses an external force (operation by the player) to return the sword decoration 5001, it is desirable to perform the process with a different content from the process when no external force is used in order to increase the probability of return. In addition, this process should be performed in a simple manner so that the return process is completed within the pattern change regardless of the return situation, and if return fails, it is desirable to perform a more full-scale return process at the next restoration operation time.

In the example shown in FIG. 198, when the restoration operation time (here, the pattern change start time) arrives a predetermined upper limit number of times and the restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 is executed that number of times, but the sword decoration is not restored from the abnormal state, and even if a new restoration operation time (here, the pattern change start time) arrives, the restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 is not newly started. Even if the performance pattern of the movable operation system is started and the sword decoration 5001 in the abnormal state at timing tm25 is accepted for performance by the player's operation, it is desirable to perform a process of applying a driving force to return the sword decoration 5001 to its original position (to make it stay at its original position) after the performance is accepted. In other words, as described above, the return process after the performance is accepted is performed when the possibility of the sword decoration 5001, which has not been able to return until now, returning due to an external force (operation by the player) is increasing, so even if the above-mentioned situation in which return without an external force is given up, it is desirable to perform the process without giving up. Therefore, it is important that the "processing for generating a performance acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001 (see FIG. 177(f))" and the "processing for displaying a message prompting an operation (such as a text display such as "push in" or a bar displaying the remaining time of the performance acceptance period) (see FIG. 177(f))" are carried out normally even in the above-mentioned situation where recovery without external force has been abandoned.

In addition, if the operating means is provided so that the first operating opportunity is given to push the sword decoration 5001 in the operating position (to operate it to a specific detection position), and the second operating opportunity is given to push it in when it is in the original position (to operate it to a specific detection position), it is desirable not to give a driving force to return it to the original position even if a performance acceptance occurs in the second operating opportunity for the sword decoration 5001 that was in an abnormal state, but to give a driving force to return it to the original position only when a performance acceptance occurs in the first operating opportunity for the sword decoration 5001 that was in an abnormal state. In other words, even if a performance acceptance occurs when the second operating opportunity is given, the amount of movement of the operating part is relatively small, so it is expected that the possibility of the abnormal state being resolved is naturally low.

In addition, the process of applying a driving force to the sword decoration 5001 to return it to its original position after the sword decoration 5001, which was in an abnormal state, has been accepted for performance by the player's operation does not necessarily have to be executed on the condition that the performance has been accepted, and may be executed, for example, after the performance acceptance period has ended.

The timing of the restoration operation may be a predetermined timing that occurs at least on condition that the pattern change is executed, and may be used as at least one of the pattern change start time and the pattern change stop time, for example. If the pattern change stop time is used as the restoration operation time corresponding to the pattern change, the restoration process will be started based on a command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when the pattern change is stopped, and the restoration process that has been started will be completed before the timing tm2 in the reserved specific performance pattern arrives, or executed so as to straddle the end of the reserved special performance pattern, and the above-mentioned processes will be performed.

The frequency with which special presentation patterns (restoration and diagnosis presentation patterns) appear may also be varied depending on the state of the game. For example, when a special presentation state occurs in which the frequency of movement of movable ornaments increases, abnormal states become more likely to occur in proportion to the increased frequency of movement, so it is desirable to make it possible to play in such a way that the frequency with which special presentation patterns (restoration and diagnosis presentation patterns) appear more frequently in this special presentation state than in the normal presentation state.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the frame-side movable ornament (e.g., sword ornament 5001, etc.) used as an operating means or a specific movable ornament is in an abnormal state and the special presentation pattern (presentation pattern for restoration and diagnosis) is performed, as shown in FIG. 197A, a restoration process for the movable ornament in the abnormal state can be continuously executed for a period until the presentation pattern corresponding to the next pattern change is started. However, in this case, even if a new restoration operation time (e.g., the start time of the pattern change) arrives while a restoration process is being continuously executed, the restoration process for the movable ornament in the abnormal state is not started again, and the restoration process that is already being executed is continued without being terminated, so that when a movable ornament other than the movable ornament that is the target of the restoration process newly becomes abnormal, the timing at which the restoration process for the other movable ornament is started becomes an issue.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 197A, the restoration process for a specific movable decorative object that was started at timing tm11 continues to be executed without being terminated after timing tm12, when the special performance pattern ends, arrives, even when spanning a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next pattern change). In this regard, if a new abnormality occurs in a movable decorative object other than the specific movable decorative object between the time tm11 and the time when the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next pattern change) arrives, it is desirable to employ at least one of the following methods 1 to 3, or "both method 1 and method 2", or "both method 1 and method 3" to execute the restoration process for the other movable decorative object.

Method 1: At least in the case where a relationship is such that "a specific movable decoration is provided as a board-side movable decoration, while the above-mentioned other movable decoration is provided as a frame-side movable decoration," when a new restoration operation time (start time of the next pattern change) arrives while one restoration process for a specific movable decoration is being continuously executed, a new restoration process for another movable decoration (frame-side movable decoration) is started based on the arrival of the new restoration operation time (start time of the next pattern change).

According to this method 1, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next pattern change) is treated as invalid for the restoration process for a specific movable decoration that is already in an execution state, but is treated as valid for another movable decoration (frame-side movable decoration) for which the restoration process is not yet in an execution state, and this timing (new restoration operation time) can be used as an opportunity to start a new restoration process for the other movable decoration (frame-side movable decoration). In other words, in this case, a situation will arise in which the restoration process for a specific movable decoration (board-side movable decoration) and the restoration process for another movable decoration (frame-side movable decoration) are executed simultaneously, but there is no concern of interference between these movable decorations, and early recovery of these movable decorations can be expected.

Method 2: At least when the relationship is such that "both a specific movable decoration and another movable decoration are provided as board-side movable decorations," even if a new restoration operation time (start time of the next pattern change) arrives while one restoration process for the specific movable decoration is being continuously executed, the restoration process for the other movable decoration (board-side movable decoration) is not started at that point, but rather awaits the completion of one restoration process for the specific movable decoration, and then starts a new restoration process for the other movable decoration (board-side movable decoration) based on the arrival of the new restoration operation time (start time of the next pattern change).

According to method 2, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next pattern change) is treated as invalid for the restoration process for a specific movable decoration that is already in an execution state, but is treated as valid for another movable decoration (a board-side movable decoration) for which the restoration process is not yet in an execution state. In this regard, since the restoration process for another movable decoration (a board-side movable decoration) is started after waiting for one restoration process for a specific movable decoration to be completed, there is no concern about interference between those movable decorations, and early recovery of those movable decorations can be expected.

Method 3: At least in the case where the relationship is such that "both a specific movable decoration and another movable decoration are provided as board-side movable decorations," even if a new restoration operation time (start time of the next pattern change) arrives while one restoration process for a specific movable decoration is being continuously executed, the restoration process for the other movable decoration is not executed in response to the arrival of the new restoration operation time (start time of the next pattern change), but rather, a restoration process for the specific movable decoration is waited for to be completed, and then a new restoration process for the other movable decoration (board-side movable decoration) is started in response to the arrival of the subsequent restoration operation time.

According to method 3, the timing of the new restoration operation (the start time of the next pattern change) is treated as invalid for both the restoration process for a specific movable decoration that is already in execution and the restoration process for another movable decoration that is not yet in execution, and unless one restoration process for a specific movable decoration is completed, no processing for the abnormal state will be performed even if a new abnormality occurs in another movable decoration. In other words, in this case, even if another movable decoration becomes abnormal while one restoration process for a specific movable decoration is in execution, it is possible to carefully restore those movable decorations one by one, and it is possible to adequately deal with the abnormality, which is expected to slow the rate of deterioration of those movable decorations.

Next, the behavior (methods 1 to 3, etc.) when a new restoration operation timing (such as the start or end timing of a pattern change) arrives while a restoration operation is being performed will be described in detail with reference to Figures 197B and 197C.

First, for ease of explanation, the pachinko machine 1 in this example is provided with at least a first movable decoration (the "specific movable decoration" described above), a second movable decoration, a third movable decoration, a fourth movable decoration, and a fifth movable decoration as movable decorations capable of performing a performance operation. Then, if only one of the movable decorations is not in a normal state, regardless of whether the movable decoration that is not in a normal state is the "first movable decoration," the "second movable decoration," the "third movable decoration," the "fourth movable decoration," or the "fifth movable decoration," the movable decoration that is not in a normal state is configured to start a restoration operation (restoration process) when the restoration operation timing corresponding to the pattern change (such as the start timing or end timing of the pattern change) arrives.

However, if there are multiple movable decorative objects that are not in a normal state when the time for the restoration operation corresponding to the pattern change arrives, and all of these movable decorative objects that are not in a normal state begin their restoration operation (restoration process) simultaneously when that time comes, there is a concern that this will prevent players from concentrating on the presentation corresponding to the pattern change and will result in a loss of interest.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 in this explanatory example, if there are multiple movable decorations that are not in a normal state when the time for the restoration operation corresponding to the pattern change arrives, only some of the movable decorations that are not in a normal state will be able to start a restoration operation when the time for the restoration operation arrives, thereby preventing all of the movable decorations that are not in a normal state from starting a restoration operation all at once, and realizing a restoration operation in a manner appropriate to the situation.

For example, as shown in FIG. 197B, when the pattern change (first time) ends (stops on a miss) and the timing tm32 arrives when the next pattern change (second time) begins (the time for the restoration operation corresponding to the pattern change arrives), an abnormality has occurred in all of the first movable decorative body, the second movable decorative body, the third movable decorative body, the fourth movable decorative body, and the fifth movable decorative body. Note that "abnormality" here means that an "abnormality" has been detected by the detection means, but it does not necessarily mean that an "abnormality" has been detected, and may simply mean that an "abnormality" has occurred in the movable decorative body (undetected state).

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this illustrative example, when the time for the restoration operation (timing tm32) arrives, the restoration process is executed for the movable ornament that is in an abnormal state. However, here, the restoration operations for the first movable ornament, the second movable ornament, and the fourth movable ornament are started in parallel, but the restoration operation is not started for the third movable ornament and the fifth movable ornament, which remain in an abnormal state and wait. This makes it possible to avoid the simultaneous start of restoration operations for all movable ornaments that are not in a normal state, and makes it possible to realize restoration operations in a manner appropriate to the situation.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 in this example, for the third movable decoration, which does not start the restoration operation at timing tm32 and remains in an abnormal state, the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of timing tm34, at which the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration is completed, without waiting for the arrival of the next restoration operation time (timing tm35). This makes it possible to return all of the movable decorations that are not in a normal state to a normal state relatively quickly, while avoiding all of the movable decorations that are not in a normal state starting the restoration operation all at once.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 in this example, for the fifth movable decoration, which does not start the restoration operation at timing tm32 and remains in an abnormal state, the restoration operation is not started even when the next restoration operation time (timing tm35) arrives, and the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of timing tm36, when the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration is completed. This makes it possible to preferably avoid multiple movable decorations performing restoration operations in parallel in a combination that would hinder concentration on the performance.

In the example shown in FIG. 197B, the restoration process for the second movable ornament is completed before the timing tm34 when the restoration process for the first movable ornament is completed, but the "third movable ornament" and the "fifth movable ornament" do not start their restoration operations when the restoration process for the second movable ornament is completed. In the example shown in FIG. 197B, the restoration process for the fourth movable ornament is completed after the timing tm34 when the restoration process for the first movable ornament is completed, but the third movable ornament does not start its restoration operation and does not remain in a standby state until the restoration process for the fourth movable ornament is completed, and the "fifth movable ornament" does not start its restoration operation when the restoration process for the fourth movable ornament is completed.

In other words, the third movable decorative body will start the restoration process (restoration operation) when timing tm32 arrives if a specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is not in an abnormal state, but will not start the restoration process (restoration operation) when timing tm32 arrives if a specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is in an abnormal state, and will wait until the restoration process (restoration operation) of the specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is completed before starting the restoration process (restoration operation).

In addition, the fifth movable decorative body will start the restoration process (restoration operation) when timing tm32 arrives if the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body are not in an abnormal state, but will not start the restoration process (restoration operation) when timing tm32 arrives if the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body are in an abnormal state, and will wait until the restoration processes (restoration operations) of the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body are completed before starting the restoration process (restoration operation).

In this way, by preventing parallel restoration processing for certain combinations of movable decorative objects (for example, combinations that may interfere with concentration on the performance) among multiple movable decorative objects, it becomes possible to carry out restoration processing while maintaining an ideal environment in which one can concentrate on the performance in response to the pattern changes.

In the example shown in FIG. 197B, even though the "fifth movable decoration" became abnormal before the "third movable decoration," when the restoration process for the "first movable decoration" is completed, the restoration process for the "third movable decoration" is started first. In this way, by not performing the restoration process in the order in which they became abnormal, movable decorations with the highest presentation importance can be given priority in returning to normal, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 197B, it is assumed that, in a situation in which the third movable decorative body is in the middle of executing the restoration process (restoration operation), the timing tm35 (restoration operation time corresponding to the pattern change) arrives when the pattern change (second time) ends (stops due to a miss) and the next pattern change (third time) begins. Such a restoration operation time is originally intended to function to start a new restoration operation for the third movable decorative body that has not yet returned to a normal state. However, in this case, for the third movable decorative body, such a function as the restoration operation time is not used, and the restoration process (restoration operation) is continuously executed so as to straddle the restoration operation time (timing tm35). This makes it possible to return to the normal state earlier than when the restoration process (restoration operation) is redone based on the arrival of timing tm35. For example, if the pattern change (third time) is a movable performance using the third movable decorative body, the probability of being able to "return the third movable decorative body to the normal state before the timing at which the movable performance using the third movable decorative body begins within the pattern change (third time)" is high. In other words, in this example, even if the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at the start of the pattern change, as long as the movable decorative body has returned to a normal state by the time the movable performance using the movable decorative body starts, it will be possible to perform the performance as a movable performance using the movable decorative body within the pattern change.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 197B, the third movable decorative body is assumed to have an abnormality at timing tm31 prior to timing tm32 (time of restoration operation corresponding to the pattern change) when the pattern change (first time) ends (stops on a miss) and the next pattern change (second time) begins. As a result of timing tm32 (time of restoration operation corresponding to the pattern change) arriving while in an abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is started later than timing tm32 (timing tm34).

However, for the third movable decorative body, it is desirable to maintain the normal state until "timing tm33", which is after timing tm32 (the restoration operation timing corresponding to the pattern change) and is within the period during which the first movable decorative body is performing the restoration process (restoration operation), and even if an abnormality occurs at timing tm33, to start the restoration process (restoration operation) based on the arrival of timing tm34 at which the restoration process (restoration operation) of the first movable decorative body is terminated, as in the example shown in FIG. 197B. That is, in this case, even though the third movable decorative body is in a situation in which the restoration operation timing corresponding to the pattern change has not yet arrived since it became abnormal at timing tm33, it is possible to start the restoration process (restoration operation) by utilizing the restoration operation timing (timing tm32 that arrived before timing tm33) that triggered the restoration process (restoration operation) for the other movable decorative body (first movable decorative body), and therefore it is possible to quickly return to the normal state. Details regarding "restoration process (restoration operation) utilizing the restoration operation timing at timing tm32" will be described later.

In this case, if the restoration process for the first movable decorative object is prolonged and exceeds timing tm35, it is desirable to continue executing the restoration process so as to straddle timing tm35. Also, it is desirable not to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative object at timing tm35, but to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative object at the timing when the restoration process for the first movable decorative object, which was executed so as to straddle timing tm35, is completed.

In this case, even though the fifth movable ornament was in an abnormal state when timing tm32 (restoration operation time) arrived, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the "third movable ornament," which was not in an abnormal state when timing tm32 (restoration operation time) arrived, can be started before the "fifth movable ornament," so that movable ornaments with higher performance importance can be returned to normal first. Furthermore, the "fifth movable ornament" will start the restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation time at timing tm32 based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation) for the "third movable ornament," which was in a normal state when timing tm32 (restoration operation time) arrived. "Restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at timing tm32" means that the program executed based on the arrival of timing tm32 includes a restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable ornament, a restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable ornament, and a restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable ornament, and each of these restoration processes is executed sequentially. For example, when the restoration process for the "first movable ornament" is completed, it is determined whether the "third movable ornament" is in an abnormal state, and if it is determined that the "third movable ornament" is in the abnormal state, the restoration process for the "third movable ornament" is started. When the restoration process for the "third movable ornament" is completed, it is determined whether the "fifth movable ornament" is in an abnormal state, and if it is determined that the "fifth movable ornament" is in the abnormal state, the restoration process for the "fifth movable ornament" is started. If the "third movable ornament" is not in an abnormal state when the restoration process for the "first movable ornament" is completed, the restoration process for the "third movable ornament" is not performed, and it is determined whether the "fifth movable ornament" is in an abnormal state. As a result, when it is determined that the abnormal state has occurred, restoration processing will be started for the "fifth movable decorative object." In other words, in this case, if the "third movable decorative object" is in a normal state at timing tm34, restoration processing will be started for the "fifth movable decorative object" when timing tm34 arrives.

In contrast, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, it is assumed that the "restoration process for the first movable decorative body" which was started in response to the start timing (restoration operation timing) of the pattern change (first time) has not been completed and is still in progress even when the "timing tm42 at which the pattern change (first time) ends (stops on a miss) and the next pattern change (second time) starts" arrives (the restoration operation timing corresponding to the pattern change arrives), and that the "second movable decorative body," "third movable decorative body," "fourth movable decorative body," and "fifth movable decorative body" are all in an abnormal state when the timing tm42 arrives.

In this example, the pachinko machine 1 does not restart the restoration process for the "first movable decorative body" from the beginning when timing tm42 arrives, but continues to execute the process across timing tm42 (the restoration operation time). This allows the restoration process (restoration operation) to be restored to a normal state earlier than when the restoration process (restoration operation) is restarted when timing tm42 arrives. For example, if the pattern change (second time) is a moving performance using the first movable decorative body, there is a high probability that the first movable decorative body can be restored to a normal state before the timing at which the moving performance using the first movable decorative body starts within the pattern change (second time). In other words, in this example, even if the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at the start of the pattern change, as long as the movable decorative body has returned to a normal state at the start of the moving performance using the movable decorative body, it is possible to perform the performance as a moving performance using the movable decorative body within the pattern change.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 in this example, when the time for the restoration operation (timing tm42) arrives, the restoration process is executed for the movable decoration that is in an abnormal state. However, here, for the fourth movable decoration, the restoration operation is started in parallel with the first movable decoration that is in the middle of execution, but for the second movable decoration, the third movable decoration, and the fifth movable decoration, the restoration operation is not started and they wait in an abnormal state. This makes it possible to avoid all movable decorations that are not in a normal state starting the restoration operation all at once, and makes it possible to realize the restoration operation in a manner appropriate to the situation.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 197B, when the first movable decorative body is in a state where it is "not in a normal state and is not performing a restoration process (restoration operation)," the restoration process (restoration operation) is started in parallel with the first movable decorative body based on the arrival of the restoration operation time (timing tm32). Nevertheless, as shown in FIG. 197C, when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) arrives while the first movable decorative body is in a state where it is "not in a normal state and is performing a restoration process (restoration operation)," the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is not started at the arrival of the restoration operation time (timing tm42).

In other words, a situation in which the first movable decoration is performing a restoration process (restoration operation) across the restoration operation period (timing tm42) means that the first movable decoration is having difficulty returning to normal (returning to its original position), and the player is also becoming distracted by the "first movable decoration" in such a state. If many movable decorations were to start new restoration processes (restoration operations) in such a situation, there is a concern that the player will not be able to concentrate on the presentation in response to the pattern changes, which will cause a loss of interest.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, among the movable ornaments (see FIG. 197B) that can execute the restoration process (restoration operation) in parallel with the first movable ornament, the restoration process for the fourth movable ornament is started in parallel with the first movable ornament in the middle of execution even in the situation shown in FIG. 197C. In contrast, for the second movable ornament, in the situation shown in FIG. 197C, the restoration process is not started in parallel with the first movable ornament in the middle of execution, and the second movable ornament is kept in a standby state until the restoration process for the first movable ornament is completed. Then, when the restoration process for the first movable ornament is completed, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable ornament is started based on the arrival of the timing tm45, waiting for the arrival of a new restoration operation time (in FIG. 197C, timing tm45). This will prevent many movable ornaments from starting new restoration processes (restoration operations) when the first movable ornament is having difficulty returning to normal, eliminating the above-mentioned concerns.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 in this example, for the third movable decoration, which does not start the restoration operation at timing tm42 and remains in an abnormal state, the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of timing tm44, at which the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration is completed, without waiting for the arrival of the next restoration operation time (timing tm45), as in the example shown in FIG. 197B. This makes it possible to return all of the movable decorations that are not in a normal state to a normal state relatively quickly, while avoiding all of the movable decorations that are not in a normal state starting the restoration operation all at once.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 in this example, for the fifth movable decoration, which does not start the restoration operation at timing tm42 and remains in an abnormal state, the restoration operation is not started even when the next restoration operation time (timing tm45) arrives, as in the example shown in FIG. 197B, and the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of timing tm46, when the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration is completed. This makes it possible to preferably avoid multiple movable decorations performing restoration operations in parallel in a manner that hinders concentration on the performance.

In the example shown in FIG. 197C, the restoration process for the fourth movable decorative object is completed before the timing tm44 at which the restoration process for the first movable decorative object is completed, but the "second movable decorative object," "third movable decorative object," and "fifth movable decorative object" do not start their restoration operations at the point at which the restoration process for the fourth movable decorative object is completed.

In other words, the third movable decorative body will start the restoration process (restoration operation) when timing tm42 arrives if a specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is not in an abnormal state, but will not start the restoration process (restoration operation) when timing tm42 arrives if a specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is in an abnormal state, and will wait until the restoration process (restoration operation) of the specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is completed before starting the restoration process (restoration operation).

In addition, the fifth movable decorative body will start the restoration process (restoration operation) when timing tm42 arrives if the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body are not in an abnormal state, but will not start the restoration process (restoration operation) when timing tm42 arrives if the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body are in an abnormal state, and will wait until the restoration processes (restoration operations) of the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body are completed before starting the restoration process (restoration operation).

In this way, by preventing parallel restoration processing for certain combinations of movable decorative objects (for example, combinations that may interfere with concentration on the performance) among multiple movable decorative objects, it becomes possible to carry out restoration processing while maintaining an ideal environment in which one can concentrate on the performance in response to the pattern changes.

In the example shown in FIG. 197C, it is assumed that the timing tm45 (the restoration operation timing corresponding to the pattern change) arrives when the pattern change (second time) ends (stops due to a miss) and the next pattern change (third time) starts while the third movable decorative body is in the middle of executing the restoration process (restoration operation). Such a restoration operation timing is originally intended to function to start a new restoration operation for the third movable decorative body that has not yet returned to a normal state. However, in this case, for the third movable decorative body, such a function as the restoration operation timing is not used, and the restoration process (restoration operation) is continuously executed so as to straddle the restoration operation timing (timing tm45). This makes it possible to return to the normal state earlier than when the restoration process (restoration operation) is redone based on the arrival of timing tm45. For example, if the pattern change (third time) is a movable performance using the third movable decorative body, the probability of being able to "return the third movable decorative body to the normal state before the timing when the movable performance using the third movable decorative body starts within the pattern change (third time)" is high. In other words, in this example, even if the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at the start of the pattern change, as long as the movable decorative body has returned to a normal state by the time the movable performance using the movable decorative body starts, it is possible to perform the performance as a movable performance using the movable decorative body within the pattern change.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, the third movable decorative body is assumed to have an abnormality at timing tm41 before timing tm42 (time of restoration operation corresponding to the pattern change) arrives, when the pattern change (first time) ends (stops on a miss) and the next pattern change (second time) begins. Then, as a result of timing tm42 (time of restoration operation corresponding to the pattern change) arriving while in an abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is started later than timing tm42 (timing tm44).

However, for the third movable decorative body, it is desirable to maintain the normal state until "timing tm43", which is after timing tm42 (the restoration operation time corresponding to the pattern change) and is within the period during which the first movable decorative body is performing the restoration process (restoration operation), and even if an abnormality occurs at timing tm43, to start the restoration process (restoration operation) based on the arrival of timing tm44 at which the restoration process (restoration operation) of the first movable decorative body is terminated, as in the example shown in FIG. 197C. In other words, in this case, even though the third movable decorative body is in a situation in which the restoration operation time corresponding to the pattern change has not yet arrived since it became abnormal at timing tm43, it is possible to start the restoration process (restoration operation) by utilizing the restoration operation time (timing tm42 that arrived before timing tm43) that triggered the restoration process (restoration operation) for the other movable decorative body (first movable decorative body), and therefore it is possible to quickly return to the normal state. Details regarding the "restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at timing tm42" are as explained in the section "restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at timing tm32".

In this case, even though the fifth movable decorative object was in an abnormal state when timing tm42 (restoration operation time) arrived, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the "third movable decorative object," which was not in an abnormal state when timing tm42 (restoration operation time) arrived, can be started before the "fifth movable decorative object," so that movable decorative objects with higher performance importance can be returned to normal first. Furthermore, the "fifth movable decorative object" will start the restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation time at timing tm42 based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation) for the "third movable decorative object," which was in a normal state when timing tm42 (restoration operation time) arrived. "Restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at timing tm42" means that the program executed based on the arrival of timing tm42 includes a restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable ornament, a restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable ornament, and a restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable ornament, and each of these restoration processes is executed sequentially. For example, when the restoration process for the "first movable ornament" is completed, it is determined whether the "third movable ornament" is in an abnormal state, and if it is determined that the "third movable ornament" is in the abnormal state, the restoration process for the "third movable ornament" is started. When the restoration process for the "third movable ornament" is completed, it is determined whether the "fifth movable ornament" is in an abnormal state, and if it is determined that the "fifth movable ornament" is in the abnormal state, the restoration process for the "fifth movable ornament" is started. If the "third movable ornament" is not in an abnormal state when the restoration process for the "first movable ornament" is completed, the restoration process for the "third movable ornament" is not performed, and it is determined whether the "fifth movable ornament" is in an abnormal state. As a result, when it is determined that the abnormal state has occurred, restoration processing will be started for the "fifth movable decorative object." In other words, in this case, if the "third movable decorative object" is in a normal state at timing tm44, restoration processing will be started for the "fifth movable decorative object" when timing tm44 arrives.

According to the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) arrives, among the movable ornaments (first movable ornament, second movable ornament, third movable ornament, fourth movable ornament, and fifth movable ornament) that are not in a normal state (not in a state where they should be movable but are not in their original position), for the movable ornament (first movable ornament) that is performing a restoration operation triggered by the restoration operation time (start timing of the pattern change (first time)) that arrived earlier, the restoration operation is not repeated but is ignored and the restoration operation time is ignored and the movable ornament (fourth movable ornament) that is not performing a restoration operation is allowed to start using the restoration operation time (timing tm42) as an opportunity without ignoring it. In other words, in this case, some of the multiple movable ornaments in an abnormal state will ignore the function as the restoration operation time and some will not ignore it depending on the situation in which they are placed, so that a restoration process appropriate to the situation can be realized while the performance is being performed.

In addition, according to the example shown in FIG. 197C, if the time for the restoration operation corresponding to the pattern change (the start timing of the pattern change (first time)) arrives again while the "first movable decorative body" is performing a restoration operation, the first movable decorative body performing the restoration operation can continue to perform the restoration operation without redoing it, triggered by the arrival of the restoration operation time corresponding to the pattern change (the start timing of the pattern change (second time)). In other words, in this case, it takes time to return to normal, and as a result, even if the time for the restoration operation arrives again while the restoration operation is being performed, this is ignored, so it is possible to continue the restoration operation that is in the middle of being performed without interruption, which makes it possible to encourage the movable decorative body in an abnormal state to return to normal as soon as possible.

In addition, in the example shown in Figure 197C, if an abnormality occurs in another movable decorative body (a third movable decorative body) while a restoration process (restoration operation) is being executed on a first movable decorative body across multiple fluctuations, the third movable decorative body will not initiate a return operation when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) corresponding to the pattern fluctuation arrives, but will initiate a restoration process (restoration operation) based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation) on the first movable decorative body, which is in the middle of execution. In other words, in this case, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration is not repeated when the restoration operation time arrives (timing tm42), and the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration is not started when the restoration operation time arrives (timing tm42). The restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration is started immediately after the continued "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration" is completed. This makes it possible to return multiple movable decorations to normal relatively quickly while preventing parallel restoration processes for specific combinations of movable decorations (for example, combinations that disrupt concentration on the performance) among multiple movable decorations.

In the example shown in FIG. 197C, if the third movable decorative body becomes abnormal at timing tm43, the third movable decorative body starts the restoration process (restoration operation) based on the arrival of timing tm44 (the end timing of the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body" executed to straddle the restoration operation timing) when the restoration operation time has not yet arrived since the third movable decorative body became abnormal. In other words, in this case, even though the restoration operation time corresponding to the pattern change has not yet arrived since the third movable decorative body became abnormal at timing tm43, the restoration process (restoration operation) can be started by using the restoration operation time (timing tm42 that arrived before timing tm43) that triggered the restoration process (restoration operation) for the other movable decorative body (first movable decorative body), so that the third movable decorative body can be quickly returned to a normal state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 in this example, the restoration process (restoration operation) is continuously executed across the restoration operation period, so that when the timing to execute a movable performance using the movable decoration arrives within the pattern variation in which the movable decoration has returned to normal, it is possible to execute a movable performance using the movable decoration that has just returned to normal. In this configuration, by continuously executing the restoration process (restoration operation), it becomes possible to quickly return the movable decoration to normal by the timing when the movable performance begins.

In addition, even if the timing of the restoration operation corresponding to the pattern change occurs multiple times while the restoration process (restoration operation) is being performed on the movable decorative body, it is desirable to ignore all of them and continue the restoration process (restoration operation) on the movable decorative body.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the first movable decoration and the second movable decoration are in a relationship in which they perform restoration processes (restoration operations) in parallel, as shown in FIG. 197B. However, as shown in FIG. 197C, if a new restoration operation time (timing tm42) arrives while only the first movable decoration is performing a restoration operation, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decoration is not started at that timing tm42, and each restoration operation is prevented from being performed in parallel. This prevents many movable decorations from starting new restoration processes (restoration operations) when the first movable decoration is having difficulty returning to normal.

Then, when a new restoration operation time (timing tm45) arrives after the restoration operation of the first movable decorative body is completed and it has returned to normal, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is started at that timing tm45. With this configuration, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is not started immediately after the situation in which the first movable decorative body is having difficulty returning to normal is resolved, but the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is started after waiting for the arrival of a new restoration operation time (timing tm45), making it possible to create an ideal environment in which one can concentrate on the performance.

In this case, even if the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative object ends in failure, when a new restoration operation time (timing tm45) arrives after the restoration process (restoration operation) ends, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative object will be started based on the arrival of timing tm45. In other words, in this case, it will not be possible to provide a movable performance using the first movable decorative object, so it is desirable to restore just the second movable decorative object to normal so that a movable performance using the second movable decorative object can be performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 197(C), if the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative object is completed and returned to normal, and the first movable decorative object again becomes abnormal before a new restoration operation time (timing tm45) arrives, it is desirable for the first movable decorative object and the second movable decorative object to start their own restoration processes (restoration operations) in parallel when the new restoration operation time (timing tm45) arrives.

In the above example, even if the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative object ends in failure (does not return to the original position), it is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative object based on the end of the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative object. Also, even if the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative object ends in failure (does not return to the original position), it is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decorative object based on the end of the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative object.

In the above example, when the third movable decorative body is not in an abnormal state at the time when the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is completed (timing tm34, tm44), it is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decorative body based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body. Also, when the third movable decorative body becomes abnormal again during the execution period of the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decorative body" thus started, it is desirable not to perform the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decorative body, but to perform the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body when a new restoration operation time corresponding to the pattern change arrives. However, if the restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decorative body has not yet been completed and is still in execution when the time for a new restoration operation corresponding to the pattern change arrives, it is preferable not to start the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body" when the time for that restoration operation arrives, but to start the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body" when the time for the restoration operation arrives after the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decorative body" has ended.

In the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) corresponding to the pattern change (second time) arrives, the first movable decorative body, which is not in a normal state and is executing the restoration process (restoration operation) triggered by the restoration operation time corresponding to the previous pattern change (first time), ignores the restoration operation time (timing tm42) and continues to execute the restoration process (restoration operation) without redoing it, but the fourth movable decorative body, which is not executing the restoration process (restoration operation), does not ignore the restoration operation time (timing tm42) and starts the restoration operation triggered by it. In this regard, even if the fourth movable decorative body does not ignore the restoration operation time (timing tm42) and starts the restoration process (restoration operation), if a new restoration operation time (timing tm43) arrives while the restoration process (restoration operation) is being performed, it is desirable to ignore the new restoration operation time (timing tm43) and continue to execute the restoration operation so as to straddle the restoration operation time.

When there is a situation in which a movable decorative object is in a state where a restoration process (restoration operation) is being executed and another movable decorative object is in a state where the restoration process (restoration operation) is waiting to be executed, even if a specific abnormal state occurs in which the display related to the pattern change is not visible (such as a state in which the entire screen is displayed as an abnormality due to a magnetic abnormality), it is desirable to continue executing the restoration process (restoration operation) that is already in an execution state without stopping it while the above-mentioned notification in response to the occurrence of the specific abnormal state is being executed, and to start a new restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative object that is in a state where the restoration process (restoration operation) is waiting to be executed when the time for the restoration operation arrives.

When there are movable decorations that are in a state where a restoration process (restoration operation) is being performed, or movable decorations that are waiting to be performed, and the timing for performing a movable performance using those movable decorations arrives within the pattern change, it is desirable to provide those movable decorations with a driving force for the restoration process (restoration operation) but not with a driving force for performing the performance (no performance operation) in order to achieve an early return to the normal state. However, while the driving force for performing the performance is not provided to those movable decorations, it is desirable to have the light-emitting parts provided on each movable decoration emit light as usual so that the light-emitting mode corresponding to the movable performance appears. In other words, in this case, it is not that the movable performance itself is not performed, but rather that part of the performance (light-emitting performance) that constitutes the movable performance is properly performed, so that a different light-emitting mode according to the expectation level (the rate at which a jackpot pattern appears, including "0" and "100") will appear on "movable decorations that are not in a normal state", and interest in the game can be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In addition, for movable decorations in a state where the restoration process (restoration operation) has ended in failure, the restoration process (restoration operation) will not be performed even if the time for the restoration operation arrives again, so it can be said that the movable decoration will not be operated in a movable presentation, at least as long as the power is continued. However, even for movable decorations in such a state, when the time arrives for the movable presentation using the movable decoration to be executed, it is desirable that the movable presentation itself not be not executed, but that a part of the presentation that constitutes the movable presentation (light-emitting presentation) be executed properly. In other words, in this case, different light-emitting modes according to the expectation level (the rate at which a jackpot pattern appears, including "0" and "100") will appear on "movable decorations in a state where the restoration process (restoration operation) has ended in failure," and interest in the game can be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In addition, for movable decorative objects that are in a state where a restoration process (restoration operation) is being performed, movable decorative objects that are waiting for the restoration process (restoration operation) to be performed, or movable decorative objects that have ended in failure during the restoration process (restoration operation), the light-emitting section may be able to emit light as usual even when other performances are being performed.

The timing of the restoration operation may include not only timing that occurs in response to a pattern change, but also timing that occurs due to other conditions. When the restoration process (restoration operation) is started at a specific timing that occurs due to conditions other than the pattern change, a specific notification (movable body abnormality notification) corresponding to the restoration process (restoration operation) is made, whereas when the restoration operation is performed at a restoration operation timing that corresponds to the pattern change, it is desirable to start (execute) the restoration process (restoration operation) in a non-notification state without making a specific notification (movable body abnormality notification).

In the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) corresponding to the pattern change (second time) arrives, the first movable decorative body, which is not in a normal state and is executing the restoration process (restoration operation) triggered by the restoration operation time corresponding to the previous pattern change (first time), does not repeat the restoration process (restoration operation) and continues to execute it, ignoring the restoration operation time (timing tm42), but for the fourth movable decorative body, which is not executing the restoration process (restoration operation), the restoration operation time (timing tm42) is not ignored and is used as an opportunity to start the restoration operation. In this way, even when the first movable decorative body is in a situation where it is difficult to return to normal, when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) corresponding to the pattern change arrives, the "fourth movable decorative body" will not ignore it and will start the restoration process (restoration operation). It is desirable that it be used for important effects such as when a winning result is derived from the pattern change, or when it operates during the start or execution of a jackpot game.

In the pachinko machine 1 in the above example, with regard to the third movable decoration, it is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) based on the end of the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration" regardless of whether the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration" ends (comes to completion) when the restoration is successful (reference position is detected) or when it fails (reference position is not detected).

In addition, if the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body" ends with a failure to return to normal, and the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body" performed based on the end of the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body" ends with a successful return to normal, and the third movable decorative body again becomes abnormal within the pattern variation that successfully returned to normal, it is desirable to perform the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body" when the time for the restoration operation corresponding to the next pattern variation arrives, rather than performing the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body."

However, in this case, if the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decoration" that was started based on the completion of the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration" is in an execution state at the time when the time for the restoration operation corresponding to the next pattern change arrives, it is desirable not to perform either the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration" or the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration", but to perform the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration" using the "restoration operation time corresponding to the pattern change" that arrives after the completion of the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decoration" as an opportunity, rather than performing the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration".

In addition, even if an abnormality occurs again in the first movable decoration while the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration" is being executed after the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration" has been successfully completed and returned to normal, if the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration" is executed so as to straddle the restoration operation time corresponding to the next pattern change, it is desirable to prevent the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration" from being started at that restoration operation time. In other words, in this case, the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration" will be started at the restoration operation time that arrives after the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration" has been successfully completed and returned to normal or has failed.

In the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) corresponding to the pattern change (second time) arrives, for the first movable decorative body that is not in a normal state and is executing a restoration process (restoration operation) triggered by the restoration operation time corresponding to the previous pattern change (first time), the restoration process (restoration operation) is not repeated but is continued by ignoring the restoration operation time (timing tm42). For the third movable decorative body, the restoration operation time (timing tm42) is ignored, and the restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the completion of the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body". In this regard, if the first movable decorative body again becomes abnormal while the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body" thus started is being executed, it is preferable to start the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body" based on the arrival of a new time for the restoration operation corresponding to the pattern change, rather than starting the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body" based on the completion of the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body".

However, in this case, if the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body" has not been completed and is in the middle of being executed (executed so as to straddle the restoration operation time) when a new restoration operation time corresponding to the pattern change arrives, it is desirable to ignore the restoration operation time and wait for the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body" to be completed. Then, it is desirable to start the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body" at the restoration operation time corresponding to the pattern change that arrives after the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body" has been completed.

In other words, in this case, the "first movable decorative body" and the "third movable decorative body" have a relationship in which when either is in an abnormal state, a restoration process is carried out first to return the "first movable decorative body" to normal, but when the time for a restoration operation corresponding to a pattern change arrives when the third movable decorative body is not in a normal state, the first movable decorative body will either start a restoration operation based on the arrival of the time for the restoration operation (when the third movable decorative body is in a situation where it is not performing a restoration process) or will not start a restoration operation (when the third movable decorative body is in a situation where it is performing a restoration process), thereby making it possible to realize restoration processing according to the situation.

The pachinko machine 1 may be provided with a setting change means capable of changing the winning probability for winning judgment and the selection probability for the presentation pattern. However, regardless of the setting of these probabilities, it is preferable to use the same timing for the restoration action corresponding to the pattern change (for example, when the pattern starts to change).

The first movable decoration, the second movable decoration, the third movable decoration, the fourth movable decoration, and the fifth movable decoration may include a movable decoration that is provided in a position that can be touched by the player. In this case, since the movable decoration provided in a position that can be touched by the player is considered to be the one most likely to go into an abnormal state, it is desirable to provide it as the "fourth movable decoration" that starts the restoration process (restoration operation) when the time for restoration operation arrives regardless of the status of the other movable decorations.

By providing a light-guiding plate that displays a light-guiding pattern in front of the movable decorative body, and allowing the display of the light-guiding pattern to be executed without restriction even during the restoration process (restoration operation) of the movable decorative body, it is desirable to make the restoration process (restoration operation) of the movable decorative body difficult to see from the player's side.

The "first movable decoration" and "second movable decoration" shown in Figures 197B and 197C are preferably prepared as having a performance relationship in which both are in an operating state in a specific movable performance. For example, the "first movable decoration" and the "second movable decoration" are provided with decorations that are related to each other, or are prepared as a movable performance based on a pattern change (performance pattern) that operates at the same time to form one decoration (such as the completion of a character or a string of characters). The third movable decoration is prepared as one that is not used in a specific movable performance or when forming one decoration. With this configuration, when the restoration process (restoration operation) is performed, it is possible to avoid forming one decoration in the same manner (operation at the same time) as the movable performance based on the pattern change (performance pattern), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

The "first movable decorative body," "second movable decorative body," "third movable decorative body," "fourth movable decorative body," and "fifth movable decorative body" may be arranged separately, with one provided on the game board 5 side and one provided on the door frame 3 side.

In the above example, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the "first movable decoration", "second movable decoration", "third movable decoration", "fourth movable decoration", and "fifth movable decoration", but it is not necessary to provide all of the "second movable decoration", "third movable decoration", "fourth movable decoration", and "fifth movable decoration", and it may be provided with "one", or an appropriate "two" or "three" of the movable decorations. Even with such a configuration, the technical features described with reference to Figures 197B and 197C (how the restoration process is performed in relation to the "first movable decoration") are provided.

[Penalty when operating an operation part capable of lighting effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a process can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a) to change the volume setting value (volume setting value) set by the player by operating the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). Usually, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process to adjust the volume of the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (a process to reflect the volume setting value as the volume). At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is provided with a brightness adjustment button for various performance lamps (lamps to be controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a) in addition to the volume adjustment button (the performance selection left button 331 and the performance selection right button 332), which is not shown in the figure. When it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, it is possible to execute a process to change the setting value (brightness setting value) set by the player regarding the brightness of the various performance lamps (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the brightness setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process to adjust the light emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (process to reflect the brightness setting value as the amount of light). At this time, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at a "volume according to the volume setting value" at the time when the player's setting value for brightness (brightness setting value) is lowered or raised.

The acceptance of changes to these settings (volume setting value, brightness setting value) and the adjustment process according to the changed setting value can be performed by the player in both cases, when the pattern is not changing and when the pattern is changing.

In recent years, there has been a trend in gaming machines to have an increasing number of control parts that players can operate. However, these control parts can be handled carelessly, and as a result, if even one of these control parts breaks down, operability and presentation are significantly reduced, and a decline in interest in the game is inevitable.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the operation button 410, as described above,
The sword part 5010 (the blade part 5011, the handle part 5012, the tsuba part 5013) is provided so as to be movable (variable) between the sheathing position and the unsheathing position by a predetermined operation (unsheathing operation, sheathing operation) (see Figures 146, 161, etc.)
If the "operation of unsheathing the sword portion 5010 (the blade portion 5011, the handle portion 5012, and the tsuba portion 5013) from the sheath portion 5020 (unsheathing operation)" or the "operation of sheathing the sword" is performed repeatedly even though no opportunity for operation is given, this may cause a malfunction.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a performance light emitting unit (not shown) is provided for each of the blade 5011, the handle 5012, and the tsuba 5013, and a special detection unit (not shown) is provided that can detect whether the blade 5010 (blade 5011, handle 5012, tsuba 5013) is in a specific position (original position) where the blade is sheathed in the sheath 5020. Then, at least during the "period in which the demo screen is displayed (non-play state in which game performances and pattern changes according to a jackpot determination have not been performed)," if the special detection unit detects that the sword 5010 is not in the specific position (original position), the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates a performance restriction period as a penalty.

With this configuration, when the game is in a non-play state where no pattern change is occurring, if the sword section 5010 is displaced together with the performance light-emitting section (the blade section 5011, the handle section 5012, and the tsuba section 5013) by a specified operation and it is detected that the sword section 5010 is not located in a specific position, a performance restriction period may occur, which can effectively prevent the operation section from being handled roughly.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, both the above-mentioned "change in the setting value (volume setting value) related to the output volume of the effect sound" and the above-mentioned "change in the setting value (brightness setting value) related to the light emission brightness" are made to be in a state that can be accepted by the player's operation, and the effect restriction period is generated. However, as will be described later, during this effect restriction period,
Regarding the sound effects, even if the setting value (volume setting value) for the output volume is changed, the sound effects will not be output at a volume corresponding to the volume setting value, and the volume adjustment confirmation sound will not be output either.
- Regarding the performance lamps, when the setting value (brightness setting value) for their light emission brightness is changed, among the multiple performance lamps equipped in the pachinko machine 1, the performance light-emitting section (blade section 5011, handle section 5012, and tsuba section 5013) equipped in the sword section 5010 that is the detection target will not emit light at a brightness corresponding to the brightness setting value, but the performance lamps equipped in parts other than the sword section 5010 that is the detection target (for example, various performance LEDs mounted on the decorative board of the game board 5) will be made to be in a state where they can emit performance light at a brightness corresponding to the setting value, and so on.

With this configuration, when the performance restriction period occurs, even though both changes to the volume setting and changes to the brightness setting are acceptable, the degree of restriction is different between processes related to the volume setting and processes related to the brightness setting.

In other words, when it comes to sound effects, the volume setting is secretly variable internally, but the sound effects are not output in a way that reflects the changed volume setting, and not even a volume adjustment confirmation sound is output, creating a sense of tension for the player (as if they might have done something they shouldn't have done).

On the other hand, with regard to brightness, even if the brightness setting value is changed for the performance light-emitting parts (blade part 5011, handle part 5012, and tsuba part 5013) of the "sword part 5010" operated by the player, the performance light-emitting part does not emit light in a way that reflects the changed brightness setting value, but the performance lamps equipped in parts other than the "sword part 5010" operated by the player can emit light in a way that reflects the changed brightness setting value (for example, by emitting light in accordance with the timing of a specific advance notice performance). This makes it possible to recognize that a performance restriction has been imposed due to rough handling of the "sword part 5010" and warn of this, while suitably appealing that the pachinko machine 1 as a whole intends to continue the game and performance. In this sense, it is desirable for the performance lamps on the game board 5 where the game balls flow down and win prizes to emit light in a way that reflects the changed brightness setting value as normal. This makes it possible to effectively avoid "discouraging the player from wanting to start playing or encouraging them to end the game," while also issuing a warning against careless handling of the control unit.

Moreover, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the conditions for removing the restrictions on the volume setting-related processing and the brightness setting-related processing are different. In particular, the "volume setting-related processing" that was initially subject to relatively strict restrictions is significantly improved to a normal state relatively quickly, strongly encouraging the player to continue playing, whereas the "brightness setting-related processing" that was initially subject to relatively lenient restrictions is slowed down in its overall improvement rate and some restrictions are left in place, even if it shows signs of improvement. This is expected to maintain a moderate sense of tension for a long period of time and prevent the player from playing roughly again.

[Help image to help understand the production]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a performance pattern determination as to which of a plurality of performance patterns is executed based on the result of the big win determination. Then, when one performance pattern is selected as a result of the performance pattern determination, it is possible to execute a notice performance determination as to which of a plurality of expected performances (such as notice performances) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected performance pattern is to be selectively displayed. Note that, depending on the result of this notice performance determination, all of the plurality of expected performances (such as notice performances) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected performance pattern may be executed sequentially, or none of the plurality of expected performances (such as notice performances) may be executed.

When such a performance pattern determination and advance notice performance determination are made, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance content according to the results of these determinations, and a variable performance using decorative symbols according to the result of the jackpot determination is executed together with an expected performance (advance notice performance) related to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movement of the movable body (gimmick performance). As a result, when the variable performance using decorative symbols is executed together with the expected performance related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., and the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the player is allowed to play a jackpot game as a bonus.

In this configuration, the variable presentation of the decorative patterns serves as a presentation with the "function of definitively indicating whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination," and the expectation presentation related to the background depiction and the movement of the moving body serves as a presentation with the "function of suggesting the expectation level (including 0% and 100%) of a jackpot being obtained." In other words, the player enjoys playing the game through these presentations.

However, when implementing this kind of anticipation effect as a background depiction (background preview), essentially all that is done is to give it some dramatic effect, such as "setting the percentage of times that a highly anticipated image will appear." As a result, the fundamental problem of "if a highly anticipated image (anticipation effect) does not appear, it becomes difficult to have a sense of anticipation for a big win" has yet to be resolved.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, first, when it is determined that a special effect will be performed as a result of the preview effect determination (when a specified effect condition is satisfied), it is possible to execute a process to display at least the background image used for the background depiction in a special manner different from the original image data, and when it is displayed in this special manner, it is possible to suggest that the expectation level (probability of a winning symbol appearing) is higher than when it is not displayed in this special manner.

Here, examples of "processing for displaying in a special mode" include:
A process of displaying the original image data as rotated data by rotating it by a predetermined angle (e.g., rotating it around one of the x-, y-, or z-axes (or an appropriate combination) in the display area),
Examples of processing that can be given include processing for displaying original image data as mosaic-processed data with a predetermined degree of "blurring."

In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a predetermined effect condition is met, a special effect is performed in which the original image data is slightly processed (rotated, mosaicked, etc.) and then displayed (displayed in a special manner). With this configuration, even if a special effect is performed in which only slight processing is performed on the original image data, it is difficult for the player to definitively detect or recognize this fact. However, in exchange for this, even if a special effect is not being performed, the player can be given the sensation or illusion that "maybe a special effect is being performed," so that it is expected that the expectation of a jackpot will be maintained in an optimal manner even if a state in which a highly anticipated image (special effect) does not appear continues.

However, if there are no clues for the player to recognize the implementation status of this "processing to display in a special mode," it will be difficult for the player to even recognize the possibility of being in a high-expectation situation, and ultimately the very purpose of performing special effects may be lost.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is capable of executing a process to display a help image as to whether or not the "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed in response to an operation by the player. With this configuration, since a help image can be displayed in response to an operation by the player, it is expected that a decrease in interest in the game caused by an inability to recognize whether or not the "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed is suppressed, and a sense of anticipation is thereby maintained in an optimal manner.

However, the "help image" in this explanatory example does not explicitly indicate whether or not the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is being executed, but rather deliberately includes difficulty in recognition. By deliberately making it difficult to recognize in this way, even if it does not appear that the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is being executed, one cannot be certain that this is the case, and so hope remains and it becomes possible to maintain a sense of expectation.

Figure 199 shows an example of a display on the performance display device 1600 when the state transitions between a non-play state (such as a demo screen) in which no game is being played, and a game execution state in which a game is being played.

Figure 199(a) shows an example of the display on the performance display device 1600 when in a non-play state (such as during a demo screen) where no game is being played. As shown in Figure 199(a), when in a non-play state, the performance display device 1600 displays a guide image AG that suggests that a character image PG (here, a penguin-like character) that is useful for checking whether "a special performance is being played" can be made to appear by operating a specific operating means (such as the operating button 410). In this explanatory example, an explanatory text and a character image PG are displayed as the guide image AG.

When a start winning occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 199(a) and the game (change of the special symbol in response to the jackpot determination) begins, the performance display device 1600 first hides the guide image AG as shown in FIG. 199(b). At the same time, the change performance using the decorative symbol SZ is executed together with the expectation performance (preview performance) related to the background depiction (background preview) and the movable body movement (gimmick performance). In this way, by automatically hiding the guide image AG when the game starts, it is possible to avoid adversely affecting the performance when the game is in progress, while making it possible to appropriately appeal to the presence of the character image PG (here, a character modeled after a penguin).

Figure 199 (c) shows an example of the display on the performance display device 1600 when the variable performance using the decorative pattern SZ shown in Figure 199 (b) has ended (stopped display).

If the reserved information remains in the situation shown in FIG. 199(c), the reserved information is consumed and a new variable performance using the decorative pattern SZ is started, and the performance situation shown in FIG. 199(b) appears again with the guide image AG remaining in a hidden state. On the other hand, if there is no reserved information remaining in the situation shown in FIG. 199(c), the state transitions back to a non-play state (demo screen, etc.). That is, in this case, the situation where the guide image AG is displayed (the situation shown in FIG. 199(a)) appears again based on the fact that a new game has not been started for a predetermined time since the variable performance using the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. 199(b) ended (stopped display). Note that in the performance display device 1600 when the guide image AG is displayed, the decorative pattern SZ may remain stopped or the decorative pattern SZ itself may be hidden.

The "processing for displaying in a special mode" in this example of presentation can be executed when the variable presentation using the decorative pattern SZ is being performed in a "specific presentation pattern" (when a predetermined judgment result is obtained in the presentation judgment) and during the period in which a specific presentation image appears (at a predetermined timing within the specific presentation pattern).

Figure 200 shows an example of the display on the performance display device 1600 when the variable performance using the decorative pattern SZ is being performed in a "specific performance pattern" and an expected performance is being performed in which a princess character (specific performance image) is displayed large as a background image.

In other words, in this example of the performance, at least when the "expected performance in which the princess character (specific performance image) is displayed large as the background image" is being performed, a process (process to display in a special mode) can be executed in which the original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) are rotated slightly before being displayed, provided that certain performance conditions are met. When a princess character (specific performance image) for which the "process to display in a special mode" has been executed is displayed, the probability of a jackpot pattern appearing is higher than when a princess character (specific performance image) for which the "process to display in a special mode" has not been executed is displayed.

More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 200(a), the "processing for displaying in a special mode" has not been performed, and the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) are displayed as their original image data. In contrast, in the situation shown in FIG. 200(b), the processing for displaying the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) after rotating them three times to the left has been performed, and in the situation shown in FIG. 200(c), the processing for displaying the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) after rotating them six times to the left has been performed.

As is clear from Fig. 200(a)-(c), even when "processing to display in a special mode" is performed, only a small amount of rotation processing is performed on the original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character). In particular, in the figure, Fig. 200(a)-(c) can be compared, but in the actual performance, only one of Fig. 200(a)-(c) is displayed according to the result of the performance judgment, and they cannot be compared. Therefore, even when Fig. 200(b) or (c) appears, it is difficult to be certain that it is in a state of being displayed in a special mode, but it is expected that the player will be aware of the possibility that it is in a state of being displayed in a special mode (possibility of high expectation), and even when Fig. 200(a) appears, it is difficult to be certain that it is not in a state of being displayed in a special mode, and it is expected that there will be some hope (maintaining a sense of expectation) that "it may be in a state of being displayed in a special mode."

The process of rotating the original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) three degrees (or six degrees) to the left and then displaying them (the process of displaying them in a special mode) may be performed by rotating each piece of original image data separately and then displaying them, or by combining each piece of original image data to convert it into a single image, then rotating the single image and displaying it.

Also, regarding figures 200(b) and (c), a relationship may be established in which when the image shown in figure 200(c) is displayed, the probability of a jackpot pattern appearing is higher than when the image shown in figure 200(b) is displayed. Alternatively, when the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is executed, after figure 200(a) is displayed once, figures 200(b) and (c) may be displayed as moving images whose inclination changes from moment to moment in that order. Alternatively, it is not necessary to provide both figures 200(b) and (c), and only one of figures 200(b) and (c) may be displayed.

However, as mentioned above, if there are no clues for the player to determine the implementation status of such "processing to display in a special mode", performing such a special effect may lose its meaning. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, at least when the "expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed large as the background image" is being performed, it is possible to execute a process to display a help image as to whether the "processing to display in a special mode" is being performed by operating a specific operating means such as the operating button 410.

Figure 201 shows an example of a display on the performance display device 1600 when a help image is displayed based on the acceptance of an operation by the player while a "hopeful performance in which a princess character (a specific performance image) is displayed large as a background image" is being performed.

In other words, in this example of the presentation, when the player performs an operation (such as operation button 410) while at least in a state where "an expected presentation in which a princess character (a specific presentation image) is displayed large as a background image" is being performed (see FIG. 200), a character image PG (here, a character modeled after a penguin) that is useful for checking whether "a special presentation (here, a tilt presentation) is being performed" is displayed as a help image.

More specifically, when the player performs an operation (such as the operation button 410) in the situation shown in FIG. 200(a), the situation shown in FIG. 201(a) will appear, when the player performs an operation (such as the operation button 410) in the situation shown in FIG. 200(b), the situation shown in FIG. 201(b) will appear, and when the player performs an operation (such as the operation button 410) in the situation shown in FIG. 200(c), the situation shown in FIG. 201(c) will appear.

However, as is clear from Figures 201(a)-(c), when a character image PG (help image) is displayed, although it can be useful in determining whether the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is being executed, it is not clearly indicated whether the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is being executed or not. By deliberately making it difficult to recognize in this way, if it appears that the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is being executed, the possibility can be made strong and, even if it does not appear that the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is being executed, one cannot be certain, and hope remains that the process can be executed, making it possible to maintain a sense of expectation.

As shown in Figures 201(a)-(c), the character image PG (help image) in this example of effect can only be displayed in a predetermined position and in one manner, held like a ruler held horizontally, regardless of whether or not the "processing for displaying in a special manner" is being executed and the manner in which it is being executed. In this way, by having an image (here, a ruler) that is not affected by the "processing for displaying in a special manner" and is displayed extending horizontally appear through the player's operation, the image (here, a ruler) can function as a guide image (help image) for whether or not the "state is in which a special effect (here, a tilt effect) is being executed."

In particular, in this example, a guide image (here, a ruler) that is not affected by the "processing to display in a special mode" and that is displayed extending horizontally is made to appear at a position that overlaps with the image (princess character) that is the target of the "processing to display in a special mode". Therefore, by checking the degree of overlap with the image (princess character) that is the target of the special process, it becomes even more useful in determining whether the special process is being executed.

In other words, in this example of a special effect, the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is a subtle tilting effect, and when this tilting effect is performed, the expectation is higher than when this tilting effect is not performed. For this reason, the player operates a specified operation means (such as the operation button 410) to determine whether the tilting effect is being performed, but even if the player performs this operation, it is intentionally made difficult to recognize that it does not definitively notify whether the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is being performed. As a result, when the tilting effect appears to be performed, it is expected that the player will be aware of the possibility of high expectations, and even if the tilting effect does not appear to be performed, it is expected that the player will remain hopeful (maintain a sense of expectation) that "the state may be one in which the tilting effect is being performed."

Moreover, one effect is the display of a guide image (here, a ruler) to indicate whether or not a "special effect (here, a tilt effect) is being executed" by overlapping at least a portion of it with the image (decorative pattern SZ, background image) that is the subject of the "processing to display in a special mode." The guide image (here, a ruler) alone cannot function as an effect (expectation level); it only comes into play when compared with an effect image (here, the princess character) that is already in a displayed state, providing an interesting effect.

In addition, with this configuration, it is possible for the player to select (operate) to progress the performance without displaying the guide image (here, a ruler), so if the player is not sure whether the "special performance (here, a tilt performance) is being executed," the player can choose not to operate the game, allowing the player to enjoy various ways of playing.

In this example, the "processing of displaying in a special mode" is executed as "processing of rotating and then displaying the original image data," but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be executed as a process of rotating and then displaying image data created based on the original image data, rather than the original image data. Also, instead of rotating the image data, it may be executed by adding other processing or conversion. In short, as long as it is possible to execute a special process that converts the image into an image with a different mode from the normal mode and displays it, and it is possible to display a guide image that is not subject to the special process by the player's operation when the special process is executed, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned effect.

In the above-mentioned example of the performance, the "processing for displaying in a special mode" was described as being executable when the "expected performance in which the princess character (a specific performance image) is displayed large as the background image" is in a state in which it is performed, but depending on the result of the performance judgment, it may be possible to make it executable multiple times within the period from when the decorative pattern SZ starts to change to when it stops changing. In this case, it is desirable to make the rate at which the jackpot pattern appears higher when the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is executed many times than when the number of times is fewer.

The character image PG (particularly, the ruler in this case) may also be made displayable by the player's operation not only when the "expected performance in which the princess character (a specific performance image) is displayed large as a background image" is in progress, but also throughout the entire period from when the decorative pattern SZ starts to change until it stops changing. It may also be made displayable by the player's operation even when the decorative pattern SZ is in a stopped state.

In other words, in this case, no matter what background image is displayed on the performance display device 1600, if the player operates the device, a process of making the character image PG (particularly, here, a ruler) appear is executed. However, considering that the character image PG (particularly, here, a ruler) is a "comparison reference image (guideline image) for the background image," it is clear that the preferred display position for displaying the character image PG differs depending on the type of background image at each time. That being said, if the display position or display form of the character image PG (particularly, here, a ruler) were to be changed to match the type of background image at each time, the character image PG may lose its essential function as a comparison reference image (guideline image), and there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease due to suspicions of lack of reliability. In other words, the character image PG as a comparison reference image (guideline image) is required to be displayed as an image that is unchanging and absolute regardless of the performance situation.

It is therefore desirable to make it possible for the display position of the character image PG to be changeable between a number of predefined display positions in response to the player's operation (such as the operation button 410). However, it is important that the display form remains the same regardless of the display position at which the image is displayed.

Figure 202 shows an example of a display in which the character image PG is displayed so that its display position changes due to the player's operation.

Figure 202 (a) shows a presentation situation in which a specific background image is displayed in a reach state. Now, if, in this presentation situation, the player suspects that "a process to display in a special mode has been executed" and performs an operation to display a comparison reference image (guideline image), a process is performed to display a character image PG as a comparison reference image (guideline image) in one of a number of display positions (see Figures 202 (b) to (d)) that are predetermined according to the mode of the operation.

For example, if the operation button 410 is operated only once within a predetermined short time, a process is performed to display a character image PG as a comparison reference image (reference image) in the left position within the display area (Fig. 202(b)). In contrast, if the operation button 410 is operated twice within the predetermined short time, a process is performed to display a character image PG as a comparison reference image (reference image) in the center position within the display area (Fig. 202(c)), and if the operation button 410 is operated three times within the predetermined short time, a process is performed to display a character image PG as a comparison reference image (reference image) in the right position within the display area (Fig. 202(d)).

As is clear from Figures 202(b) to (d), the shape of the character image PG (particularly, here, the ruler) itself is the same regardless of the display position, but since the positional relationship between the background image (or decorative pattern) that may be the subject of the "processing to display in a special mode" and the character image PG (particularly, here, the ruler) is different, the ease of determining whether the "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed naturally differs.

For example, when a character image PG (particularly, here a ruler) is displayed at the position shown in FIG. 202(c) (the center position within the display area), the character image PG (particularly, here a ruler) will be displayed so as not to overlap with the background image to be compared, and when a character image PG (particularly, here a ruler) is displayed at the position shown in FIG. 202(d) (the right position within the display area), the character image PG (particularly, here a ruler) will overlap with the background image to be compared, but will be displayed so as to hide almost the entire background image (the sign), making it relatively difficult to determine whether the "process of displaying in a special mode" is being executed.

With this configuration, the character image PG (particularly, here a ruler) serving as a comparison reference image (guideline image) can be displayed by the player in a "display position suitable for comparison" that differs depending on the type of background image at each time, providing ideal information for determining whether the "process of displaying in a special mode" is being executed.

In this example, the display position of the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) serving as a comparison reference image (guideline image) is variable depending on the number of times the operation button 410 is operated within a specified time, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display position may be variable depending on the length of time the operation button 410 is pressed and held, or multiple operation means other than the operation button 410 may be provided, and the character image PG may be displayed at a display position that is predetermined for the operation means operated depending on which of the operation means is operated. If the character image PG is displayed by operating an operation means other than the operation button 410, it may be possible to display the character image PG even in a situation where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 (acceptance period).

Furthermore, the character image PG (particularly the ruler in this case) serving as a comparison reference image (guideline image) cannot function as an effect (expectation) on its own, and so after a sufficient amount of time (e.g., three seconds) has passed to compare and judge with the background image, it becomes a worthless image that only makes it difficult to see the expected effect (background image). Therefore, it is desirable to have it automatically hidden without the need for any operation once a predetermined amount of time (e.g., three seconds) has passed since it was displayed by the player's operation.

However, depending on the relationship between the position where the character image PG (particularly, here, a ruler) is displayed as the comparison reference image (reference image) and the type of background image, a specified time (e.g., 3 seconds) may not be enough to compare and determine whether the "process of displaying in a special mode" is being executed. Therefore, in the above example of the performance, if the specified operating means operated to make the character image PG appear is operated again while the character image PG as the comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed (within 3 seconds), the time for which the character image PG is continuously displayed is extended. For example, if the specified operating means is made to disappear after a specified time (e.g., 3 seconds) based on the timing of the operation each time it is operated again, the character image PG can be maintained in its displayed state by performing intermittent operations until the player is satisfied, and the player can take his time to compare and determine.

However, if such limitless continuous display as a comparison reference image (character image PG) were simply permitted, it could become extremely easy to determine whether a special process is being executed. In other words, the player could always confidently conclude that "special processing is being executed" or "special processing is not being executed," which would defeat the purpose mentioned above of "deliberately making it difficult to recognize, rather than clearly indicating whether or not a process to be displayed in a special manner is being executed."

Therefore, when a specific operation means is operated again while the character image PG is displayed (within 3 seconds), it is desirable to extend the time for which the character image PG (ruler) is continuously displayed, in exchange for reducing the overall size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG), such as by shortening the length (longitudinal direction) of the ruler held by the character image PG by a specific unit (for example, 1 cm), thereby making it more difficult to compare with the background image. In other words, in this case, each time the specific operation means is operated again while the character image PG is displayed, in exchange for extending the time until the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden, the overall display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG) becomes gradually smaller (here, the ruler becomes gradually shorter), so that while the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be extended, it is possible to suitably maintain the difficulty of recognizing that a process for displaying in a special mode is being executed.

However, if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed too small (the ruler length is displayed too short), it will not be useful for comparison with the background image, which may lead to a decrease in interest in the game. Therefore, it is desirable to set a minimum size (here, the shortest possible ruler length) for the overall size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in advance, and when it is reduced to this minimum size, it is desirable not to extend the time until the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden, even if the specified operating means is operated again in that state, and not to further reduce the overall display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG).

It is also desirable that the overall size (display area) of such a comparison reference image (character image PG) be carried over even after the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden. In other words, in this case, each time a specific operating means is operated to make the comparison reference image (character image PG) appear (or extend the display time), the overall display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG) gradually becomes smaller (here, the ruler gradually becomes shorter) until it does not even appear at all, so that it is possible to encourage the user to operate it only when they really want to know whether the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is being executed, and it is expected that the user will otherwise concentrate on the original content of the presentation.

The overall size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) may be carried over even after the current variable performance ends and the next variable performance begins. With this configuration, the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be provided as an extremely valuable performance opportunity, and it is basically possible to provide a performance (see Figure 200) that predicts whether the "process for displaying in a special mode" is being executed just by looking at the background image and decorative pattern SZ.

The comparison reference image (character image PG) shown in Figures 201 and 202 is in the state it was in when it was first displayed by operating a specific operation means after the power was turned on (or the RAM was cleared). After this, each time an operation is performed on the specific operation means, the display area of the comparison reference image as a whole gradually becomes smaller (here, the ruler becomes shorter) until it no longer appears at all. However, when a specific detection is made or a specific condition is met, a process may be provided to increase the display area of the comparison reference image as a whole (in this case, to lengthen the ruler) and display it (if it appears in multiple positions, only the comparison reference image corresponding to one of those positions). With this configuration, it becomes possible to recover the remaining number of times that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be made to appear by operating the specific operation means.

As mentioned above, when multiple operating means are prepared, each of which is set to display a different position for the comparison reference image (character image PG), the character image PG will be displayed at a predetermined display position corresponding to the operating means operated depending on which of the operating means is operated. In this case, it is desirable to set the remaining number of times (the number of operations until the minimum unit) that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear for each operating means (display position), and when an operation is performed on a specific operating means, only the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the position corresponding to that specific operating means will be displayed small (the ruler will be displayed short).

For example, in the example of the performance described with reference to FIG. 202, when the first operating means is operated in the performance situation shown in FIG. 202(a), the performance situation shown in FIG. 202(b) appears. As described above, when the first operating means is operated again in the performance situation shown in FIG. 202(b), the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the displayed state is extended, and in exchange, it is displayed smaller (the ruler is shortened). However, even if the second operating means is operated after this, the performance situation shown in FIG. 202(c) only appears, and the reduced display of the comparison reference image (character image PG) resulting from the re-operation of the first operating means is not carried over to the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed in the center position by the operation of the second operating means. Similarly, when the third operating means is operated, the presentation situation shown in FIG. 202(d) is displayed, and the reduced display of the comparison reference image (character image PG) that accompanies the re-operation of the first operating means is not carried over to the comparison reference image (character image PG) that is displayed in the right-hand position by operating the third operating means.

In this regard, if another operating means (e.g., the first operating means) that does not correspond to the specific position (central position) is operated while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed at a specific position (e.g., the central position shown in FIG. 202(c)) (within 3 seconds), it is desirable to maintain the comparison reference image (character image PG) already displayed at the specific position (central position) in its displayed state, and to newly display the comparison reference image (character image PG) at another position (left side position) that corresponds to the other operating means (first operating means).

In other words, in this case, even if an operation on a specific operating means causes a comparison reference image (character image PG) to appear in a position that is difficult to compare in relation to the background image, it is possible to newly display the comparison reference image (character image PG) in a different display position by operating an operating means other than the specific operating means. This adds to the fun of searching for a position at which the comparison reference image (character image PG) should be displayed in order to make comparison easier.

Moreover, in the above configuration, even if a comparison reference image (character image PG) is newly displayed at a different display position, the comparison reference image (character image PG) that was already displayed is not hidden, but is maintained in its displayed state. With this configuration, multiple comparison reference images (character images PG) are displayed simultaneously, which increases the amount of material for comparison with the background image (here, two rulers are lined up, and the horizontal length is effectively longer). This provides an opportunity to significantly improve the ease of comparison when a background image that is difficult to compare appears but you really want to know whether the "process for displaying in a special mode" is being executed. However, this can be achieved by simultaneously consuming two of the "remaining number of times that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear (the number of operations until it becomes the minimum unit)" set for each of the multiple operating means, so the price for significantly improving the ease of comparison is high.

As mentioned above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden a predetermined time (3 seconds) after it is displayed by the player's operation, so in order to extend the time for which multiple comparison reference images (character images PG) are displayed simultaneously, it is necessary to operate the second operation means as soon as possible after operating the first operation means. In other words, in this case, a quick decision is required as to whether or not the "state in which special processing is being executed" is being determined based only on the comparison reference image (character image PG) that appears as a result of operating the first operation means, or whether to further operate the second operation means even if it means increasing the cost and greatly improve the ease of comparison. Since the player's disadvantage increases to the extent that the decision is delayed, the tension can be maintained in an optimal manner.

Furthermore, with this configuration, even if multiple comparison reference images (character images PG) are displayed simultaneously, the timing at which the comparison reference images (character images PG) are hidden will be different, and the size (ruler length) of each comparison reference image (character image PG) will also differ depending on the operation situation. Furthermore, depending on the operation situation (remaining number of times) for each operation means, a performance situation such as "operating a specific operation means will not display the comparison reference image (character image PG), but operating another operation means will display the comparison reference image (character image PG)" can occur. Therefore, when determining which operation means should be operated to make the comparison reference image (character image PG) appear, a determination element other than the type of background image to be compared can be added to provide even more interest.

As mentioned above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden a predetermined time later (3 seconds) after it is displayed by the player's operation, but if the pattern change (decorative pattern SZ) stops due to a miss before the predetermined time has elapsed, it is desirable to use this as an opportunity to hide the image. That is, as shown in Figures 201 and 202, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed, it becomes difficult to see the performance content in the display area, and it becomes difficult to concentrate on the performance content due to comparison with the background image, etc. As a result, if the player does not notice that the image has stopped due to a miss, the purpose of the character image PG to be useful for the performance is lost, so it is desirable to use this as an opportunity to hide the character image PG when the image stops due to a miss.

However, when the machine stops due to a jackpot, the character image PG may not be hidden, but may remain displayed until a predetermined time has passed. In other words, when the machine stops due to a jackpot, the jackpot game will start even if the player does not notice this, so it is expected that the disappearance of the character image PG after the predetermined time has passed will function as a surprise effect.

In addition, when a comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed, it is desirable to be able to output a specific sound related to that comparison reference image (character image PG). With this configuration, even when the player is paying close attention to the presentation, it becomes easy to recognize that the comparison reference image (character image PG) has been displayed. However, when outputting such a specific sound, it is more desirable to adopt the following method in order to maintain interest in the game.

That is, although the remaining number of times (the number of operations until the minimum unit) that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear is set for each operation means (display position), if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is frequently displayed during the period until the remaining number is consumed, this, combined with the difficulty in visually recognizing the content of the presentation in the display area, makes it difficult to concentrate on the original presentation. Therefore, while a specific sound (e.g., the sound of a penguin crowing) can be output when a character image PG is displayed, the sound output of this specific sound (e.g., the sound of a penguin crowing) is permitted only when the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is not being executed. In this way, by using a specific sound (e.g., a penguin's cry) only as a definite indication on the negative side, rather than using a specific sound (e.g., a penguin's cry) as a definite indication on the positive side regarding the execution of the "process of displaying in a special manner," it is expected that players who dislike such specific sounds will concentrate on the original presentation and only make the comparison reference image (character image PG) appear when the situation seems likely to result in the execution of the "process of displaying in a special manner."

However, it is desirable that the output of a specific sound (e.g., the sound of a penguin roaring) is not necessarily permitted even if a comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed by a player's operation when the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is not being executed. In other words, in this case, if a specific sound (e.g., the sound of a penguin roaring) is output when a comparison reference image (character image PG) is newly displayed (or the size of a comparison reference image that was already displayed is reduced (the ruler length is shortened)) by a player's operation, it will be recognized with certainty that the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is not being executed, but when a specific sound (e.g., the sound of a penguin roaring) is not output, it is possible that either the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is being executed or the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is not being executed, so that the excitement of when a specific sound (e.g., the sound of a penguin roaring) is not output can be maintained.

Note that a specific sound (e.g., the sound of a penguin crying) may be output under the above-mentioned specified conditions regardless of which of multiple operating means with different display positions is operated. However, if the specific sound is output under the above-mentioned specified conditions only when a specific operating means out of multiple operating means is operated, the player can select whether to display a comparison reference image (character image PG) that is useful for determining whether the "process of displaying in a special mode" is being executed when there is a possibility that the specific sound is being output, or to display a comparison reference image (character image PG) that is useful for determining whether the "process of displaying in a special mode" is being executed when there is no possibility that the specific sound is being output.

In addition, in the above example, the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the displayed state is extended by displaying it in a smaller size (shortening the ruler), thereby suitably maintaining the difficulty of recognizing that a process to display in a special mode is being executed. In this regard, if a specific sound (e.g., the sound of a penguin crowing) is output when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is relatively small, the volume of the sound is made smaller than when the specific sound (e.g., the sound of a penguin crowing) is output when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is relatively large, and it is expected that a certain degree of difficulty of recognition will be maintained when the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the displayed state is extended.

It is also desirable to set the size and display position of each comparison reference image (character image PG) so that they do not overlap when displayed simultaneously at multiple display positions (see FIG. 202). This increases the amount of comparison material between the background image and each comparison reference image (character image PG) that is displayed without overlapping.

The comparison reference image (character image PG) may also be displayed as a transparent image. With this configuration, even if the comparison reference image (character image PG) overlaps with a large portion of the background image, it is possible to preferably compare the comparison reference image (character image PG) with the background image that can be seen through it.

In the above example, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed smaller (the ruler is shortened) each time a specific operation means is operated, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and any mode that increases the difficulty of recognizing that a process to display in a special mode is being executed may be used. For example, each time a specific operation means is operated, the shape and size of the comparison reference image (character image PG) itself may remain the same, but the portion with relatively high transparency may be gradually enlarged. In other words, if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is "displayed at a specific transparency," it is important to display the portion of the comparison reference image (character image PG) that is displayed at the specific transparency smaller (the portion of the ruler that is displayed at the specific transparency is shortened), and the portion that is no longer displayed at the specific transparency may be hidden, or may be displayed at a transparency higher than the specific transparency to increase the difficulty of visibility.

As mentioned above, the "processing for displaying in a special mode" may be, for example, a dynamic depiction process that changes the display state shown in FIG. 200(a) via the display state shown in FIG. 200(b) to the display state shown in FIG. 200(c). When the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is realized as such a dynamic depiction process, when the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is terminated, the display state will be returned to the display state shown in FIG. 200(a) via the display state shown in FIG. 200(b).

As mentioned above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden a predetermined time (3 seconds) after it is displayed, but it is desirable to perform the "processing of displaying in a special mode" as a dynamic depiction process in a time shorter than the predetermined time (3 seconds). In other words, in this case, if the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be made to appear by the player's operation when the "processing of displaying in a special mode" as a dynamic depiction process is being executed, the comparison reference image (character image PG) will always move from the display state shown in FIG. 200(c) to the display state shown in FIG. 200(b) and then back to the display state shown in FIG. 200(a) while it is maintaining its display state (within 3 seconds), making it easier to compare and determine whether the process of displaying in a special mode is being executed.

However, the "processing of displaying in a special mode" as a dynamic depiction process may be performed for a time longer than the predetermined time (3 seconds). In other words, in this case, even if the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be made to appear by the player's operation when the "processing of displaying in a special mode" as a dynamic depiction process is being executed, the comparison reference image (character image PG) will not necessarily move from the display state shown in FIG. 200(c) to the display state shown in FIG. 200(b) and then back to the display state shown in FIG. 200(a) while it is maintaining its display state (within 3 seconds), making it difficult to compare and determine whether the process of displaying in a special mode is being executed. In addition, the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be extended, which adds a strategic element.

The "processing of displaying in a special manner" as a dynamic depiction process may be performed in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds) or in a time longer than a predetermined time (3 seconds) depending on the result of the performance determination. The "processing of displaying in a special manner" as a dynamic depiction process performed in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds) and the "processing of displaying in a special manner" as a dynamic depiction process performed in a time longer than a predetermined time (3 seconds) may each be performed at different timings that are determined in advance within the period from when the decorative pattern SZ starts to change to when it stops changing.

The comparison reference image (character image PG) is made invisible a predetermined time (3 seconds) after it is displayed, but it is desirable to interrupt the output of a specific sound (e.g., a penguin's cry) that may be output when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed for a time significantly shorter than the predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds, which is less than half the time). In other words, in this case, even if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed immediately before the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is executed, the output of the specific sound (e.g., a penguin's cry) is prevented from being maintained until after the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is executed, making it difficult to create a performance situation in which the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is being executed but is being negated by the specific sound (e.g., a penguin's cry).

In this case, the comparison reference image (character image PG) will maintain its display state (for 3 seconds) from before the "processing for displaying in a special manner" is executed to after it is executed. Therefore, when the "processing for displaying in a special manner" is executed as a dynamic depiction process, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed, it will change, for example, from the display state shown in FIG. 200(a), via the display state shown in FIG. 200(b), to the display state shown in FIG. 200(c).

The comparison reference image (character image PG) is composed of a penguin-like character and a ruler, but it is also possible to display only either the penguin-like character or the ruler. In short, it is sufficient if the comparison reference image (character image PG) that is not subject to the "processing to display in a special mode" can be made to appear by the player's operation. However, if a guide image (ruler) showing the horizontal unit of length is displayed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed.

The guide image AG in the demo screen shown in Figure 199 does not necessarily have to be displayed.

In the above example, the method for not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound or brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be achieved by not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound or brightness adjustment confirmation sound to a channel, or by assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound or brightness adjustment confirmation sound to a channel but setting the volume value to "0."

It is desirable to output the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound as the same sound, so that although it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" has been output, it is possible to recognize that some "confirmation sound" has been output. In other words, if various sounds were used as confirmation sounds, it could lead to a situation where the player is made aware that they may be anticipation effects sounds that suggest a degree of expectation, which could decrease interest in the game.

[Prevention of tampering with multiple operating methods]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a performance pattern determination as to which of a plurality of performance patterns is executed based on the result of the big win determination. Then, when one performance pattern is selected as a result of the performance pattern determination, it is possible to execute a notice performance determination as to which of a plurality of expected performances (such as notice performances) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected performance pattern is to be selectively displayed. Note that, depending on the result of this notice performance determination, all of the plurality of expected performances (such as notice performances) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected performance pattern may be executed sequentially, or none of the plurality of expected performances (such as notice performances) may be executed.

When such a performance judgment (performance pattern judgment, advance notice performance judgment) is made, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance content according to the result of the performance judgment, and a variable performance using a decorative pattern according to the result of the jackpot judgment is executed together with an expected performance (advance notice performance) related to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movement of the movable body (gimmick performance). As a result, when the variable performance using the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected performance related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., and the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the player is allowed to play a jackpot game as a bonus.

In this configuration, the variable presentation of the decorative patterns serves as a presentation with the "function of definitively indicating whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination," and the expectation presentation related to the background depiction and the movement of the moving body serves as a presentation with the "function of suggesting the expectation level (including 0% and 100%) of obtaining a jackpot." In other words, the player enjoys playing the game through these presentations.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of executing a process (peripheral control MPU 1511a) that changes the volume setting (volume setting value) set by the player by operating the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). Normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process to adjust the volume of the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (process to reflect the volume setting value as the volume). At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is provided with a brightness adjustment button for various performance lamps (lamps to be controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a) in addition to the volume adjustment button (the performance selection left button 331 and the performance selection right button 332), which is not shown in the figure. When it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, it is possible to execute a process to change the setting value (brightness setting value) set by the player regarding the brightness of the various performance lamps (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the brightness setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process to adjust the light emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (process to reflect the brightness setting value as the amount of light). At this time, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at a "volume according to the volume setting value" at the time when the player's setting value for brightness (brightness setting value) is lowered or raised.

The acceptance of changes to these settings (volume setting value, brightness setting value) and the adjustment process according to the changed setting value can be performed by the player in both cases, when the pattern is not changing and when the pattern is changing.

As explained with reference to Figures 143 and 144, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is provided with many operating means (such as the operating button 410, the sword section 5010, the left effect selection button 331, the right effect selection button 332, and a brightness adjustment button (not shown)) that can be operated by the player. When a predetermined performance condition is met, the player is given an opportunity to operate while a variable performance is being performed using decorative patterns, and this type of operational performance is intended to maintain interest in the game.

However, providing so many operating means makes the presence of these operating means more conspicuous, making them an easy target for players to tamper with. Furthermore, if even one of these operating means becomes abnormal or malfunctions as a result of rough handling, the operability and presentation of the game will be significantly reduced, and a decline in interest in the game will be inevitable.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the machine is in a non-play state (a state in which the above-mentioned operation effects cannot occur) in which no game effects are being executed in response to a jackpot determination, and operation detection occurs on multiple operation means, making it highly likely that tampering has occurred, a performance restriction period (function restriction period) is generated, thereby making it possible to prevent the operation means from being handled roughly.

More specifically, when a game has not started (non-game state), if an operation is detected within a predetermined continuous operation detection time for some predetermined operation means (here, the operation button 410 and the sword portion 5010) that should not require operation among the multiple operation means equipped in the pachinko machine 1, the detection is used as a trigger to:
In the performance display device 1600, in a state where a specific video (warning video) that cannot appear when a game performance corresponding to a jackpot determination is being executed is displayed (played),
Even if the volume adjustment button is operated, the volume setting value for the output volume of the performance sound is not changed, and the current volume setting value is not displayed.
-Even if the brightness adjustment button is operated, a performance restriction period (function restriction period) is generated for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 minutes) during which a penalty is imposed, such as not accepting changes to the brightness setting value for the performance lamp and not displaying the current brightness setting value. Note that when a predetermined time (e.g., 5 minutes) has passed since the occurrence of the performance restriction period (function restriction period), the specific video is made invisible, operation acceptance regarding the volume is permitted and a volume adjustment confirmation sound is also output, and operation acceptance regarding the brightness is permitted and a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is also output, and the game is returned to a normal non-playing state.

In the performance restriction period (function restriction period) according to this embodiment, "even if the volume adjustment button is operated, the volume setting value for the output volume of the performance sound is not accepted and the current volume setting value is not displayed," and "even if the brightness adjustment button is operated, the brightness setting value for the brightness of the performance lamp is not accepted and the current brightness setting value is not displayed," but it is also possible to restrict only either the volume adjustment process or the brightness adjustment process.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment provides multiple operation modes (operation patterns) that trigger the occurrence of such a performance restriction period (function restriction period). This is expected to complicate the conditions for the occurrence of the performance restriction period, creating a sense of tension that "maybe the hall is actually watching the mischief."

Figure 203 is a time chart to explain an example of the processing that occurs when a performance restriction period occurs based on the establishment of a predetermined performance restriction condition during a non-play state (such as during a demo screen).

Now, assume that the game is not started (non-game state) and the display device 1600 is displaying a standby state (such as a decorative pattern being displayed in a stopped state or a demo screen being displayed). As described above, in this situation, when the volume adjustment button (the left effect selection button 331 or the right effect selection button 332) is operated, the volume setting value is changed, and if any effect sound is being output at the time of the operation, a process of adjusting the volume (a process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) is executed. At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume. Similarly, when the brightness adjustment button is operated, the brightness setting value is changed, and if a specific effect lamp is in an illuminating state at the time of the operation, a process of adjusting the brightness (a process of reflecting the brightness setting value as the amount of light) is executed. At this time, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output.

In this way, in a non-playing state, operation of the volume adjustment buttons and brightness adjustment buttons is permitted so that the player can set the volume and brightness to their liking when starting play. When an operation is accepted, the volume and brightness settings are changed accordingly, which is expected to prompt the player to start playing.

However, as mentioned above, when not in play, multiple operating means, including the volume and brightness control buttons, may be manipulated for the purpose of mischief. As a result, if an abnormality or malfunction occurs in even one of these operating means, the operability and presentation of the game will be significantly reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game will be unavoidable.

The pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment has several operation patterns (detection patterns) that are recognized as prank detection, and when an operation using any of these operation patterns is detected during a non-play state, it is possible to execute a process that generates a performance restriction period (function restriction period) during which a penalty is imposed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 minutes).

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) of this embodiment, it is determined that the conditions for restricting the presentation are met when any of the following operation patterns (detection patterns) are detected in a non-play state.
a. An operation pattern (detection pattern) in which detection conditions are set such that a first timer time (e.g., 3 seconds) is started in response to detection of an operation on the sword unit 5010, and a new operation detection on the operation button 410 occurs before the first timer time is counted, and a second timer time (e.g., 3 seconds) is started in response to the newly generated operation detection on the operation button 410, and a second operation detection on the sword unit 5010 occurs before the second timer time is counted.
b. An operation pattern (detection pattern) in which the detection conditions are set such that a third timer time (e.g., 3 seconds) is started in response to detection of an operation on the operation button 410, and a new operation detection on the blade unit 5010 occurs before the third timer time is counted, and a fourth timer time (e.g., 3 seconds) is started in response to the newly generated operation detection on the blade unit 5010, and a second operation detection on the operation button 410 occurs before the fourth timer time is counted.

Note that these operation patterns a and b are merely examples, and a performance restriction period (function restriction period) may be generated when the detection conditions for other operation patterns are satisfied. It is not necessary to prepare multiple operation patterns to be detected, and only one of them may be used. The first to fourth timer times may be the same or different. The times may be measured using the same timer or different timers.

Here, it can be said that "long pressing of the operation button 410" and "repeated tapping of the operation button 410 (multiple taps)" are not required when the game has not started (non-game state). However, since these modes can be instructed in the operation performance in the game execution state, it is assumed that the player may perform these operations for some purpose (for example, making a wish or practicing) when starting the game even in the non-game state, and it has been confirmed that such situations actually occur relatively often. Therefore, it can be said that it is important to set the "operation combination of multiple operation means (for example, operation in the order of "sword part 5010 → operation button 410 → sword part 5010")" that is detected for the purpose of pranks as something that is not instructed as an operation performance when the game is executed, in order to avoid erroneous detection. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the performance restriction period occurs relatively frequently and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 drops significantly.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a condition is that an operation on a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) is performed before and after another operation on another operation means (e.g., the sword portion 5010), and the detection condition for the above operation pattern (detection pattern) is met and a performance restriction period (function restriction period) is generated only when operations on multiple operation means are mixed within a relatively short period of time. Therefore, players who only touch each of the buttons once out of curiosity and not with the intention of playing pranks can be exempt from penalties, and it is possible to more appropriately avoid a situation in which the performance restriction period occurs relatively frequently and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 drops significantly.

The detection conditions are made stricter in this way in order to avoid a significant drop in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 due to the relatively frequent occurrence of performance restriction periods, and because it is expected that various combinations of operations will be performed when the machine is operated in a jumbled manner due to pranks, so even if the detection conditions are made stricter, there is a high possibility that the detection conditions will be met eventually.

In the example shown in FIG. 203, first, at timing tq1 when in a non-play state, an operation on the sword part 5010 is detected. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates a first timer time (e.g., 3 seconds) based on the detection, and enters a state (first stage state) in which it is determined whether or not the second stage detection condition is satisfied before the first timer time has elapsed.

That is, as described above, in "operation pattern (detection pattern) a", three conditions (sword section 5010 → operation button 410 → sword section 5010) are imposed as the conditions for generating the performance restriction period, and each time these conditions are met, it is as if a step is climbed up the ladder for generating the performance restriction period.

At timing tq1, the first of three steps required to trigger the performance restriction period will be climbed. The state of the first step can continue until the first timer time (e.g., 3 seconds) has expired, and if the first timer time expires without the second step detection condition (here, operation of the operation button 410) being met, the state will return to the original state where none of the above three conditions are met (down one step to the zeroth step).

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 203, at timing tq2 when the first timer time has not yet expired (first stage state), an operation on the operation button 410 is detected, and the "second stage detection condition" of the three conditions of operation pattern (detection pattern) a is satisfied. Then, based on this detection, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates a second timer time (e.g., 3 seconds), and is placed in a state (second stage state) in which it is determined whether or not the third stage detection condition (here, the last detection condition) is satisfied before the second timer time expires.

That is, at timing tq2, the second of the three stairs that must be climbed before the performance restriction period is triggered will be climbed. The second-stage state can continue until the second timer time (e.g., 3 seconds) has expired, and if the second timer time expires without the detection condition for the third stage (here, an operation on the sword portion 5010) being met, the state will return to the original state (the state of the 0th stage, having descended two stairs) in which none of the above three conditions are met.

In the example shown in FIG. 203, at timing tq3 when the second timer time has not yet expired (second stage state), an operation on the operation button 410 is detected again, and the "third stage detection condition (last detection condition)" of the three conditions of the operation pattern (detection pattern) a is satisfied. Therefore, based on the detection, the peripheral control MPU 1511a starts displaying (playing) a specific video (warning video) that cannot appear when a game performance corresponding to a big win determination is being executed in the performance display device 1600. In addition, even if the volume adjustment button is operated, the volume setting value for the output volume of the performance sound is not accepted, the current volume setting value is not displayed, and of course the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, and even if the brightness adjustment button is operated, the brightness setting value for the brightness of the performance lamp is not accepted, the current brightness setting value is not displayed, and of course the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output, so that a performance restriction is generated. The performance restriction period (functionality restriction period) during which such a penalty is imposed will continue for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 minutes) from timing tq3.

With this configuration, if multiple operations are performed in a jumble, a performance restriction period will occur, making it possible to curb mischievous operations.

In addition, to trigger the effect restriction period, it is necessary to clear the conditions one by one and raise the status level (go up the stairs), but if time runs out halfway through, the previous status levels are all cleared and the game returns to the original state. This makes it possible to effectively avoid situations where the effect restriction period is unintentionally triggered when a new player tries to start playing, even if play ends with the status level raised.

Note that, in the process of increasing the status level (climbing the stairs), it is conceivable that the "volume control button" or "brightness control button", which are the operation means that are subject to restriction when a performance restriction period occurs, may be operated. However, these operation means (volume control button, brightness control button) are permitted to be operated so that the player can set the volume and brightness to his or her liking when starting a game. Therefore, no matter how many times these operation means (volume control button, brightness control button) are operated in the process of increasing the status level (climbing the stairs), it is desirable to prevent this from causing a change in the status level or affecting the first timer time, second timer time, etc.

In other words, in this case, no matter how much the volume and brightness buttons are targeted for tampering, this will not trigger a performance restriction period. However, at the very least, an already increased state level will not be lowered as a result of these operations, and once a performance restriction period has occurred, the target of performance restrictions will be the "volume and brightness buttons," and any operations on these will be completely invalid, so it is expected that tampering with the "volume and brightness buttons," which are not targeted for tampering detection, will also be effectively suppressed.

In addition, as an operation pattern (detection pattern) used in detecting pranks, it is more desirable to set the condition that an "operation of a specific operation means (e.g., operation button 410) (timing tq2 in FIG. 203)" that is sandwiched between "two operations of another operation means (e.g., sword portion 5010) (timings tq1 and tq3 in FIG. 203)" is performed a predetermined number of times, rather than just once.

In other words, in this case, for example, in the case of the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern) a," when an operation on the sword part 5010 is detected, an operation on the operation button 410 is detected within a fifth timer time (e.g., 3 seconds) corresponding to the detection, an operation on the operation button 410 is detected again within a sixth timer time (e.g., 3 seconds) corresponding to the detection, and an operation on the sword part 5010 is detected again within a seventh timer time (e.g., 3 seconds) corresponding to the detection, the detection conditions for the "operation pattern (detection pattern) a" are satisfied and a performance restriction period is generated. Furthermore, the fifth to seventh timer times may all be the same time or different times. Furthermore, they may be timed using the same timer or different timers.

When an operation on the operation button 410 is not detected again within the sixth timer time (e.g., 3 seconds) and an operation on the sword part 5010 is detected again, it is more desirable to reset the sixth timer time (e.g., 3 seconds) and prevent the detection conditions for the operation pattern (detection pattern) from being met and the performance restriction period from occurring. Also, when an operation on the operation button 410 is detected again (a specific number of times (here, the third time) that is greater than the number of times to be detected (here, twice)) within the seventh timer time (e.g., 3 seconds), rather than an operation on the sword part 5010, it is more desirable to reset the seventh timer time (e.g., 3 seconds) and prevent the detection conditions for the operation pattern (detection pattern) from being met and the performance restriction period from occurring.

According to this configuration, if the operation button 410 is operated n times (here, twice) in succession between two operations of the sword portion 5010, the detection conditions for the operation pattern (detection pattern) are satisfied and a performance restriction period occurs. In other words, if the operation button 410 is operated only m times (< n times) between two operations of the sword portion 5010, or if the operation button 410 is operated l times (> n times), no performance restriction period will occur. This is expected to complicate the conditions for the occurrence of the performance restriction period, creating a sense of tension that "maybe the hall is actually watching the pranksters."

In order to achieve this kind of complication, it is desirable to control the operation button 410 to a state different from the original state (it may be a state different between m and l times) when the operation button 410 is operated only m times (<n times) and the sword part 5010 is operated again within that timer time, or when the operation button 410 is operated l times (>n times) within each timer time. Therefore, even if the operation is performed according to the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern) a" in these different controlled states, no performance restriction period will occur.

Furthermore, if the operation button 410 is operated l times (>n times) between two operations on the sword part 5010, no performance restriction period will be generated, but if the operation button 410 is operated k times (>l times) a performance restriction period can be generated (similar to when it is operated n times), which is expected to further complicate the conditions for the generation of the performance restriction period and to more appropriately create a sense of tension that "the hall may actually be monitoring the mischief." In this case, it goes without saying that a timer time will be generated each time the operation button 410 is operated, and the next operation detection will be required within that timer time. Even with this configuration, multiple "predetermined operation modes (operation patterns (detection patterns))" that trigger the generation of the performance restriction period will be prepared.

However, this type of prank behavior is very different from fraudulent behavior such as magnet cheating, and taking too strict measures could lead to disadvantages for the hall. Therefore, for the specific videos that appear during the performance restriction period, rather than displaying a strong warning, it is preferable to display content that merely explains the proper handling of the game and the performance, in order to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

As mentioned above, once a predetermined time (e.g., 5 minutes) has elapsed since the production restriction period (function restriction period) occurred, the specific video will be hidden and the game will return to a normal non-playing state in which "acceptance of volume-related operations will be permitted and a volume adjustment confirmation sound will be output, and acceptance of brightness-related operations will be permitted and a brightness adjustment confirmation sound will be output."

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 204, at timing tq4 before a predetermined time (e.g., 5 minutes) has elapsed since the occurrence of the effect restriction period (function restriction period), it is conceivable that the player will start playing and cause a start winning, resulting in a transition to a game execution state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. In such a case, the above-mentioned intended purpose of causing the player to stop the mischief and start playing will be achieved, so the effect restriction period (function restriction period) will end even though the predetermined time (e.g., 5 minutes) has not yet elapsed.

However, since there is a possibility that reflection is insufficient if play is started before the specified time (e.g., 5 minutes) has elapsed, it is desirable to control it as a partial restriction period, such that, although volume adjustments and brightness adjustments are each permitted at least until the variable display of the decorative patterns that triggered the end of the performance restriction period has ended, "even if the volume has been adjusted, the current volume setting value will be displayed but the volume adjustment confirmation sound will not be output, and even if the brightness has been adjusted, the current brightness setting value will be displayed but the brightness adjustment confirmation sound will not be output."

As shown in FIG. 204, when the game execution state is entered in this manner, detection of the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern)" is disabled regardless of whether or not the game is controlled during a partial restriction period. Therefore, even if the sword portion 5010 or the operation button 410 is operated, the first timer time or the second timer time is not counted as a result of this, and no performance restriction period occurs.

With this configuration, if the game is switched to the game execution state without waiting for the original duration of the effect restriction period, the game will be switched to the game execution state with some of the restrictions in place during the effect restriction period remaining, making it possible to encourage reflection on mischievous behavior without interrupting the progress of the game effect.

The partial restriction period may be continued not only until the variable display of the decorative symbols that triggered the end of the effect restriction period ends, but also until the decorative symbols are stopped with the number of reserved symbols at 0 (until the non-playing state is reached).

In addition, at the timing when the game execution state ends and transitions to a non-game state (for example, timing tq5 shown in FIG. 204), it is desirable to set a predetermined safe time and continue the state in which detection of the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern)" is disabled until the predetermined safe time has elapsed, even though the game is in a non-game state. In other words, when the game execution state has just ended, the player's excitement has not yet subsided, and it is expected that he or she will operate multiple operating means in an overzealous manner, and imposing a penalty for such an operation could lead to the immediate cessation of play. Therefore, it is desirable to always set a safe time when the game execution state ends and transitions to a non-game state.

In addition, when a transition to a non-play state occurs during the above-mentioned partial restriction period, since there is a possibility that the player has not yet fully reflected on his/her mischievous behavior, the partial restriction period may be continued until the safe time has elapsed. At this time, detection of the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern)" will be permitted again when the safe time has elapsed.

It is also desirable to set the safe time to a time value longer than the shortest time value among multiple time values that can be selected as the pattern change time from when the display of the decorative pattern changes to when it stops. With this configuration, even if the display of the decorative pattern changes ends immediately, it is possible to continue the state in which detection of the above-mentioned "operation pattern (detection pattern)" is disabled, or to continue the partial restriction period, at least until the safe time ends.

In addition, when the display of decorative patterns begins as a result of the end of the performance restriction period (function restriction period), it is desirable to always select a pattern change time that is longer than the safe time, and to display decorative patterns for only the selected pattern change time. With this configuration, it becomes possible to continue the partial restriction period for a relatively long period of time.

In the above example, even if a detection is made that the performance restriction period is approaching during the detection period for the above operation pattern (detection pattern) (the area with fine dots in FIG. 203), no behavior is displayed. However, instead of this, a specific sound may be output each time the timer time is set for the above operation pattern (detection pattern) (each time the penalty stairs are climbed), to encourage the player to stop the mischievous operation. This specific sound may be output as a different sound depending on the type of operation means that is the target of detection. Similarly, a change may be made to the display content on the performance display device 1600 each time the timer time is set for the above operation pattern (detection pattern) (each time the penalty stairs are climbed).

In the above example, the method for not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound or brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be achieved by not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound or brightness adjustment confirmation sound to a channel, or by assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound or brightness adjustment confirmation sound to a channel but setting the volume value to "0."

It is desirable to output the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound as the same sound, so that although it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" has been output, it is possible to recognize that some "confirmation sound" has been output. In other words, if various sounds were used as confirmation sounds, it could lead to a situation where the player is made aware that they may be anticipation effects sounds that suggest a degree of expectation, which could decrease interest in the game.

[Noise prevention by adjusting confirmation sounds when opening the store]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a performance pattern determination as to which of a plurality of performance patterns is executed based on the result of the big win determination. Then, when one performance pattern is selected as a result of the performance pattern determination, it is possible to execute a notice performance determination as to which of a plurality of expected performances (such as notice performances) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected performance pattern is to be selectively displayed. Note that, depending on the result of this notice performance determination, all of the plurality of expected performances (such as notice performances) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected performance pattern may be executed sequentially, or none of the plurality of expected performances (such as notice performances) may be executed.

When such a performance judgment (performance pattern judgment, advance notice performance judgment) is made, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance content according to the result of the performance judgment, and a variable performance using a decorative pattern according to the result of the jackpot judgment is executed together with an expected performance (advance notice performance) related to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movement of the movable body (gimmick performance). As a result, when the variable performance using the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected performance related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., and the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the player is allowed to play a jackpot game as a bonus.

In this configuration, the variable presentation of the decorative patterns serves as a presentation with the "function of definitively indicating whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination," and the expectation presentation related to the background depiction and the movement of the moving body serves as a presentation with the "function of suggesting the expectation level (including 0% and 100%) of obtaining a jackpot." In other words, the player enjoys playing the game through these presentations.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of executing a process (peripheral control MPU 1511a) that changes the volume setting (volume setting value) set by the player by operating the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). Normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process to adjust the volume of the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (process to reflect the volume setting value as the volume). At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is provided with a brightness adjustment button for various performance lamps (lamps to be controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a) in addition to the volume adjustment button (the performance selection left button 331 and the performance selection right button 332), which is not shown in the figure. When it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, it is possible to execute a process to change the setting value (brightness setting value) set by the player regarding the brightness of the various performance lamps (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the brightness setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process to adjust the light emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (process to reflect the brightness setting value as the amount of light). At this time, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at a "volume according to the volume setting value" at the time when the player's setting value for brightness (brightness setting value) is lowered or raised.

The acceptance of changes to these settings (volume setting value, brightness setting value) and the adjustment process according to the changed setting value can be performed by the player in both cases, when the pattern is not changing and when the pattern is changing.

For a while after an arcade opens, there will be only new customers looking to start playing, so volume and brightness adjustments may be made frequently so that customers can start playing with settings that suit their preferences. In this case, however, if a volume adjustment confirmation sound or brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output every time a volume or brightness adjustment is made, the adjustment confirmation sound will echo throughout the arcade, ruining the atmosphere and causing a loss of interest.

The pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment does not accept operations related to volume adjustment or brightness adjustment by the player from when the power is turned on until a certain condition is met, but once the certain condition is met, the volume setting value and brightness setting value are set to their respective "predetermined specific values" and a state is established in which changes to the volume setting value and brightness setting value can be accepted.

According to this configuration, when a predetermined condition is met after the power is turned on, the setting value (volume setting value) for the output volume of the effect sound and the brightness setting value are automatically set to their respective "predetermined specific values." In other words, in this case, by adopting the automatically set "specific value" as the volume setting value that many players tend to prefer, it is expected that a situation in which many players adjust the volume setting value and brightness setting value to their own preferences shortly after the hall opens will be less likely to occur. Note that the fulfillment of the predetermined condition may be the passage of a certain amount of time after the power is turned on, the receipt of a predetermined command from the main control MPU 1310a, or the end of a specific process in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment allows the acceptance of changes to the volume setting value and brightness setting value based on the establishment of a predetermined condition or the arrival of a predetermined timing after the establishment of the predetermined condition, but first generates a special period (opening exclusive period) for a predetermined time (for example, one hour) during which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output even if the change to the setting value is accepted. Then, after the special period (opening exclusive period) ends, a period (normal business period) is generated during which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output when the change to the setting value is accepted. This makes it possible to provide an opportunity to adjust the volume and brightness to start playing with the setting value that suits one's preference while maintaining the state in which various adjustment confirmation completion sounds are not output for a while after the opening of the hall (until the time required for various adjustments by new customers to be completed has elapsed).

Figure 205 is a time chart showing an example of processing during a special period (period exclusively for opening hours).

As shown in FIG. 205, if the power is turned on at timing tr0, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment controls the machine so that it does not accept any operations by the player to adjust the volume or brightness until a certain condition is met. In this situation, detection (main control side) related to the game, such as the start winning, is not allowed, and the game cannot be started. On the performance display device 1600, either a dedicated display (preparation screen) while the power is being restored appears, or no display output is performed, and the standby screen (stopped symbol display, demo screen, etc.) is not yet displayed.

After that, when timing tr1 arrives at which a predetermined condition (for example, a predetermined command is sent from the main control MPU 1310a) is met, game-related detection such as a start winning is permitted, and the game is controlled in a waiting state for the start of the game (a state waiting for a start winning). The performance display device 1600 also starts to display a stopped pattern (standby screen), making it possible to recognize that the state is waiting for a pattern change.

At this time, with the volume and brightness settings set to their respective "predetermined specific values," a "special period (open-only period) is generated during which changes to the volume and brightness settings are permitted, but the volume and brightness adjustment confirmation sounds are not output even if changes to these settings are accepted." This open-only period is designed to continue until timing tr2 arrives, when a predetermined time (e.g., one hour) has elapsed since the start of the period, and when the period ends at timing tr2, a period (normal business period) is generated during which the volume and brightness adjustment confirmation sounds can be output when changes to the volume and brightness settings are accepted. In addition, the performance display device 1600 maintains the state in which the stopped pattern is displayed (waiting for the pattern to change) even after timing tr2 arrives, and the display of the stopped decorative pattern and the various background images (images with a lower priority in the layer than the decorative pattern) displayed behind it (statically or dynamically displayed) will not change as a result of the transition from the open-only period to the regular business period.

According to this configuration, even after the state where the stop pattern is displayed (standby screen) appears and the game start waiting state is entered, the adjustment confirmation sound is maintained in a state where it is not output until timing tr2 arrives (until the opening-only period ends), so that it is possible to preferably avoid the adjustment sound echoing immediately after opening. On the other hand, when timing tr2 arrives (when the time required for various adjustments by new customers has elapsed), the state is automatically shifted to a state where the adjustment confirmation sound can be output, so that when various adjustments by new customers have settled down, more detailed adjustments can be allowed while checking the adjustment sound according to the volume setting value. Moreover, since the state where the stop pattern is displayed (standby screen) is automatically shifted to the normal business period where the adjustment confirmation sound can be output, it is possible to make it difficult for players to notice that they are being controlled to the opening-only period where the adjustment sound is not output until a certain time has elapsed from the opening time.

After the predetermined conditions are met and the game is waiting to start (after timing tr1), if a change to the volume setting value or brightness setting value is accepted, the performance display device 1600 will display parameters (volume parameter display, brightness parameter display) according to the changed setting value. Therefore, by checking these parameter displays, it is possible to adjust the setting value according to one's preference.

However, even if the output of the adjustment confirmation sound is not performed in this way during the period immediately after opening (opening exclusive period), if the change in the volume setting value or brightness setting value is reflected as the volume or light amount, it may lead to the atmosphere in the hall being dominated by adjustments, which may ruin the atmosphere and make it less interesting. Therefore, as long as the waiting state for starting the game is maintained, even if a change in the volume setting value is accepted before the arrival of timing tr2, it is desirable that the changed volume setting value is not reflected as the performance sound. Similarly, as for the brightness, as long as the waiting state for starting the game is maintained, even if a change in the brightness setting value is accepted before the arrival of timing tr2, it is desirable that the changed brightness setting value is not reflected as the light amount. In this configuration, during the period immediately after opening (opening exclusive period), each player adjusts the setting value according to his or her preference while checking the parameter display on the performance display device 1600. In other words, in this case, while providing the opportunity to adjust the settings to suit one's preferences, the surroundings of the pachinko machine 1 are not affected by sound or light, so the atmosphere in the hall can be maintained in a favorable manner.

Of the volume and brightness, only for brightness, the state in which the changed brightness setting value is not reflected as the amount of light may be maintained even after timing tr2 arrives. In other words, it is necessary to avoid reflecting adjustments to the side that increases power consumption due to mischief before gameplay begins, and it is desirable not to reflect adjustments to brightness, which consumes more power than the volume, while gameplay does not begin. Also, unlike the volume adjustment sound, the degree of adjustment cannot be confirmed, so the brightness adjustment sound may not necessarily be output.

However, even if timing tr2 has not yet arrived (the time for the opening-only period has not yet expired), once the pattern change (changing display of decorative patterns) has begun based on the start winning, the player has already completed volume and brightness adjustments, and it is assumed that the frequency of these adjustments will decrease significantly. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) of this embodiment, if a start winning is detected after timing tr1 but before timing tr2 arrives, it is possible to execute a process to end the opening-only period early and transition to the normal business period based on that detection.

However, if changes to the volume and brightness settings are accepted during the period in which decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner due to a start winning that causes the opening-only period to end early, and an adjustment confirmation sound is output in response to the change, it is expected that many players will adjust the volume and brightness after the opening-only period ends early, which could be counterproductive.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, if a start winning is detected after timing tr1 but before timing tr2 arrives, the opening-only period ends early and the normal business period begins, but the output of various adjustment confirmation sounds is not permitted at least until the decorative pattern fluctuation state that occurs as a result of this is terminated (fluctuation suppression processing).

Figure 206 is a time chart showing an example of the processing that occurs when play begins during a special opening period (a special period).

For example, as shown in FIG. 206, suppose that a start winning is detected at timing tr3 when the time for the special period has not yet expired. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the process for the opening-only period ends, transitions to the normal business period, and starts the suppression process during the normal business period. This suppression process during the fluctuation is executed as a process that "allows the acceptance of changes to the volume setting value and brightness setting value while the variable display of the decorative pattern is being performed, and can execute a process that reflects the change in these setting values as the volume of the performance sound in the output state and the light intensity of the performance lamp in the light-emitting state, but does not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound or brightness adjustment confirmation sound even if the volume setting value or brightness setting value is changed," and the difference from the "processing for the opening-only period" is whether or not the variable display of the decorative pattern is being performed, and whether or not the change in the setting value is reflected as the volume or light intensity, and the suppression content for the various adjustment confirmation sounds remains the same.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, this type of fluctuation suppression processing is continuously executed unless the machine is transitioned to a non-play state (a state in which the number of reserved balls is 0 and the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 206, the game execution state is controlled to the shortest time that can be selected as the pattern change time (a pattern change with a short change time is executed only once), and even if the state is immediately returned to a non-game state (a state in which the number of reserved symbols is 0 and the decorative symbols are displayed frozen) at timing tr4 (for example, a state immediately after opening when one hour has not yet passed since the occurrence of the early-ended opening-only period), the special period (opening-only period) will not occur again.

In other words, in this case, the non-play state from timing tr4 onwards is controlled as a period (normal business period) during which a volume adjustment confirmation sound or brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output when a change in the volume setting value or brightness setting value is accepted. During normal business periods when the fluctuation suppression process is not being executed, the changed volume setting value is reflected at least as a volume adjustment confirmation sound, and the changed brightness setting value is also reflected as the amount of light from the performance lamp in the lit state. In addition, the performance display device 1600 will display a stopped pattern (standby screen), making it possible to recognize that the game is in a state of waiting for the pattern to change.

A player who creates a situation in which "the opening-only period (special period) ends early and then the game execution state ends immediately" is assumed to be someone who is not satisfied with the adjustments made without the adjustment sounds being output, and who wishes to make more detailed adjustments even if it means interrupting the game that has already started. Therefore, it is desirable to not trigger the special period (opening-only period) again, even if it has not yet been an hour since the power was turned on, just after opening, and to allow the output of the volume adjustment confirmation sound and brightness adjustment confirmation sound.

In the above example, the duration of the opening-only period (special period) (timings tr1 to tr2) may be a fixed period of time after the opening-only period (special period) occurs, or it may be the time until a specific process in the peripheral control MPU 1511a is completed.

The timing for setting the volume setting value and brightness setting value to their respective "predetermined specific values" may be timing tr1, or a specified timing prior to timing tr1.

In addition, in the above example, the technical feature is in the configuration related to the opening-only period (special period) that occurs after timing tr1, and the processing in the period before timing tr1 may be realized as processing different from that described above.

In the above example, at timing tr2, no change is made to the decorative pattern or background image on the performance display device 1600, but a display change may be made to the extent that an additional image different from the decorative pattern or background image is displayed.

In the above example, the method for not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound or brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be achieved by not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound or brightness adjustment confirmation sound to a channel, or by assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound or brightness adjustment confirmation sound to a channel but setting the volume value to "0."

It is desirable to output the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound as the same sound, so that although it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" has been output, it is possible to recognize that some "confirmation sound" has been output. In other words, if various sounds were used as confirmation sounds, it could lead to a situation where the player is made aware that they may be anticipation effects sounds that suggest a degree of expectation, which could decrease interest in the game.

In the above example, it may be possible to change only the volume or brightness setting.

[Control of volume adjustment confirmation sound according to production importance]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a performance pattern determination as to which of a plurality of performance patterns is executed based on the result of the big win determination. Then, when one performance pattern is selected as a result of the performance pattern determination, it is possible to execute a notice performance determination as to which of a plurality of expected performances (such as notice performances) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected performance pattern is to be selectively displayed. Note that, depending on the result of this notice performance determination, all of the plurality of expected performances (such as notice performances) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected performance pattern may be executed sequentially, or none of the plurality of expected performances (such as notice performances) may be executed.

When such a performance judgment (performance pattern judgment, advance notice performance judgment) is made, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance content according to the result of the performance judgment, and a variable performance using a decorative pattern according to the result of the jackpot judgment is executed together with an expected performance (advance notice performance) related to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movement of the movable body (gimmick performance). As a result, when the variable performance using the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected performance related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., and the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the player is allowed to play a jackpot game as a bonus.

In this configuration, the variable presentation of the decorative patterns serves as a presentation with the "function of definitively indicating whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination," and the expectation presentation related to the background depiction and the movement of the moving body serves as a presentation with the "function of suggesting the expectation level (including 0% and 100%) of obtaining a jackpot." In other words, the player enjoys playing the game through these presentations.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of executing a process (peripheral control MPU 1511a) that changes the volume setting (volume setting value) set by the player by operating the volume adjustment buttons (effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332). Normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process to adjust the volume of the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (process to reflect the volume setting value as the volume). At this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is provided with a brightness adjustment button for various performance lamps (lamps to be controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a) in addition to the volume adjustment button (the performance selection left button 331 and the performance selection right button 332), which is not shown in the figure. When it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, it is possible to execute a process to change the setting value (brightness setting value) set by the player regarding the brightness of the various performance lamps (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the brightness setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process to adjust the light emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (process to reflect the brightness setting value as the amount of light). At this time, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at a "volume according to the volume setting value" at the time when the player's setting value for brightness (brightness setting value) is lowered or raised.

The acceptance of changes to these settings (volume setting value, brightness setting value) and the adjustment process according to the changed setting value can be performed by the player in both cases, when the pattern is not changing and when the pattern is changing.

As also mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in either case where a first hit determination is made in response to a game ball being received by the first starting hole 2002, or where a second hit determination is made in response to a game ball being received by the second starting hole 2004, a special benefit (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be awarded after the pattern change (first pattern change, second pattern change) in response to the hit determination is made. However, the expected value for the special benefit is set to be higher for the second hit determination (second pattern change) than for the first hit determination (first pattern change).

In the above example, in the case of a jackpot associated with the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern that keeps the large prize opening 2103 open for a long time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) is repeated up to 8 times, and approximately 1000 game balls are paid out, whereas in the case of a jackpot associated with the second special symbol, the opening and closing pattern that keeps the large prize opening 2103 open for a long time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) is repeated up to 16 times, and approximately 2000 game balls can be paid out.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the acceptance of changes to the volume setting value is permitted in any of the following states: "a waiting state for the game to start in which neither the first pattern change nor the second pattern change is being executed," "a first side execution state in which the first pattern change is being executed and the second pattern change is not being executed," and "a second side execution state in which the first pattern change is not being executed and the second pattern change is being executed," and the numerical range in which changes to the volume setting value are permitted is the same in any of these states.

With this configuration, sound can be adjusted regardless of the state (waiting for game start, first side execution state, second side execution state) without being restricted by setting ranges, etc., so interest in the game can be maintained in an optimal manner through sound adjustments tailored to each state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the machine is in the "waiting for game start state" and "first side execution state" described above, a volume adjustment confirmation sound is output if the setting value (volume setting value) for the output volume of the performance sound is changed, but in the "second side execution state" described above, the machine is controlled so that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output even if the volume setting value is changed.

In other words, in the "waiting to start game state", since no game is being played, no sound effects are being output, and unless a volume adjustment confirmation sound is output when the volume setting value is changed, the volume of the changed volume cannot be confirmed as an audible sound. For this reason, in the "waiting to start game state", it is desirable to output a volume adjustment confirmation sound when the setting value (volume setting value) for the output volume of sound effects is changed.

In addition, in the "first side execution state", although a sound effect corresponding to the first hit judgment is output, this state is often controlled to a low probability game state (low probability non-time-saving game state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low, and there is little hope for a good performance. In recent years, it has been confirmed that in such a low expectation game state, players play while staring at their mobile devices such as smartphones. Therefore, when the volume setting value is changed in the "first side execution state", it is desirable to output a volume adjustment confirmation sound to reliably inform the player of the change and the volume level after the change.

On the other hand, in the "second side execution state", a sound effect corresponding to the second hit judgment is being output, and the state is often controlled to a high probability game state (high probability time-saving game state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high. In such a state, expectations for the performance are high, and there is a tendency for volume adjustment to be performed to enjoy the performance. Therefore, if a volume adjustment confirmation sound is output when the volume setting value is changed, the performance sound and background music corresponding to the second hit judgment may become difficult to hear, which may decrease interest in the game. Therefore, in the "second side execution state", it is desirable to control so that a volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output even if the volume setting value is changed, thereby providing an opportunity to adjust the volume in an environment where the performance sound and background music corresponding to the second hit judgment can be clearly heard, thereby maintaining interest in the game.

However, in the "second side execution state", expectations for the presentation are high, and it can be said that it is important to ensure time (aftertaste) for the player to be aware of the possibility that the second symbol change may change again and change into a jackpot state even after it has stopped and been displayed in a losing mode in order to maintain interest in the game. In this regard, if normal processing for the "waiting for game start state" is performed immediately after the state is transitioned to the "waiting for game start state", the player will be able to easily tell that the processing for the "second side execution state" has ended in a losing mode and the state has been transitioned to the "waiting for game start state", which could lead to a decrease in interest in the game.

Therefore, when the processing related to the "second side execution state" is ended and the state is transitioned to the "play start waiting state", it is desirable to control so that the normal processing in the "play start waiting state" (processing that allows the volume setting value to be changed and outputs a volume adjustment confirmation sound when the volume setting value is changed) is not performed for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) after the transition to the "play start waiting state". For example, it is desirable to perform "processing that allows the volume setting value to be changed but does not output a volume adjustment confirmation sound even if the volume setting value is changed" or "processing that does not allow the volume setting value to be changed at all" for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) after the transition from the "second side execution state" to the "play start waiting state". However, in order to more actively make the player aware of the possibility that the "second side execution state" is still continuing for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) after the transition from the "second side execution state" to the "play start waiting state", it is more desirable to perform "processing that allows the volume setting value to be changed but does not output a volume adjustment confirmation sound even if the volume setting value is changed" as in the "second side execution state".

On the other hand, in the "first side execution state", expectations for the performance are not high, and the first symbol variation is basically displayed as stopped in a losing state. Therefore, unlike the above-mentioned "second side execution state", when the processing related to the "first side execution state" ends and the state transitions to the "waiting for game start state", it is desirable to continue the above-mentioned normal processing (processing that allows changes to the volume setting value and outputs a volume adjustment confirmation sound when the volume setting value is changed) that is also performed in the "first side execution state".

However, when the machine is controlled in the "first side execution state," there is a concern that the stress of not winning the jackpot will lead to mischievous operations in which multiple operation means are operated in a relatively short period of time. In other words, if an abnormality or malfunction occurs in even one of the operation means as a result of rough handling, the operability and presentation will be significantly reduced, and a further decrease in interest in the game will be inevitable.

Therefore, not only when the device is controlled to the "waiting for game start state", but also when the device is controlled to the "first side execution state", if operation detection occurs on multiple operation means, making it highly likely that tampering has occurred, a performance restriction period (function restriction period) may be generated as in the example of "Preventing tampering with multiple operation means (see Figures 203 and 204)" described above.

That is, in this case, when operations of some predetermined operation means (here, the operation button 410 and the sword part 5010) among the multiple operation means equipped in the pachinko machine 1 are detected within a predetermined continuous operation detection time in either the "waiting for game start state (non-play state)" or the "first side execution state", the detection is used as a trigger to:
In the performance display device 1600, in a state where a specific video (warning video) that cannot appear when a game performance corresponding to a jackpot determination is being executed is displayed (played),
Even if the volume adjustment button is operated, the volume setting value for the output volume of the performance sound is not changed, and the current volume setting value is not displayed.
Even if the brightness adjustment button is operated, the brightness setting value for the brightness of the performance lamp is not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed. A performance restriction period (function restriction period) is generated for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 minutes) during which a penalty is imposed. The specific video in the performance display device 1600 is displayed even if an image related to the "first side execution state" has appeared before. When a predetermined time (e.g., 5 minutes) has passed since the performance restriction period (function restriction period) occurred, the specific video is hidden, operation acceptance related to the volume is permitted and a volume adjustment confirmation sound is also output, and operation acceptance related to the brightness is permitted and a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is also output, and the normal state is returned to the "game start waiting state" or "first side execution state".

For details and other examples of such effect restriction periods (functionality restriction periods), it is possible to adopt the various contents in the explanatory examples of "Preventing tampering with multiple operating means" as appropriate. In this case, however, even if the state is shifted from the "waiting for game start state" to the "first side execution state" during the effect restriction period (functionality restriction period), the effect restriction period (functionality restriction period) will not end early, and various processes related to the effect restriction period will continue under the same conditions as when the state is in the "waiting for game start state". This is expected to curb tampering when the state is controlled to the "first side execution state", which has low expectations.

In contrast, when the state is transitioned from the "waiting for game start state" to the "second side execution state" during the performance restriction period (function restriction period), the "processing for early termination of the performance restriction period (function restriction period)" described above with reference to FIG. 204 or a variation thereof will be appropriately adopted and executed. This maintains the atmosphere of when the highly anticipated "second side execution state" is finally executed, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In the above example, the method for not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound or brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be achieved by not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound or brightness adjustment confirmation sound to a channel, or by assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound or brightness adjustment confirmation sound to a channel but setting the volume value to "0."

It is desirable to output the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound as the same sound, so that although it is not possible to confirm which "confirmation sound" has been output, it is possible to recognize that some "confirmation sound" has been output. In other words, if various sounds were used as confirmation sounds, it could lead to a situation where the player is made aware that they may be anticipation effects sounds that suggest a degree of expectation, which could decrease interest in the game.

In the above example, it may be possible to change only the volume or brightness setting.

[Period during which operation acceptance is permitted (validity period) - its own dramatic effect]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the big win determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is capable of executing a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) as to which of a plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected variation pattern is to be selectively displayed. Note that, depending on the result of this performance determination, all of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected variation pattern may be executed in sequence, or none of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) may be executed.

When such a performance judgment (performance pattern judgment, advance notice judgment, etc.) is made, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance content according to the result of the performance judgment, and a variable performance using decorative patterns according to the result of the jackpot judgment is executed together with the expected performance (advance notice performance) related to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movement of the moving body (gimmick performance). As a result, when the variable performance using decorative patterns is executed together with the expected performance related to the background depiction and the movement of the moving body, etc., and the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the player is allowed to play a jackpot game as a bonus.

In this configuration, the changing effect of the decorative patterns is provided as an effect with a function of indicating whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination, and the expectation effects related to the background depiction and the movement of the moving body are provided as effects with a function of indicating the expectation level (including 0% and 100%) of obtaining a jackpot. In other words, the player enjoys playing the game through these effects.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, an operation reception performance (later-described "intrinsic reception performance") in which the performance reception is permitted when the pattern performance based on the first variation pattern progresses to a specific timing can be generated regardless of the result of the advance notice performance determination. Also, even if the second variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, when a special result is obtained in the advance notice performance determination corresponding to the second variation pattern, an operation reception performance (later-described "additional reception performance") in which the performance reception is permitted when the pattern performance based on the second variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing can be generated. However, in the second variation pattern, if a special result is not obtained in the advance notice performance determination, an operation reception performance (valid period) in which the performance reception is permitted is not generated even if the pattern performance based on the second variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. A plurality of first variation patterns that generate "intrinsic reception performance" and a plurality of second variation patterns that can generate "additional reception performance" may be prepared. Alternatively, the first variation pattern may be prepared so that an "intrinsic reception effect" and an "additional reception effect" can occur sequentially.

However, the operation acceptance performance (valid period) that can occur under these conditions, etc., only executes a post-operation performance that generates a predetermined change to the performance component that is the target of the performance (at least one of a display change on the performance display device 1600, a performance sound change on the speaker, a light emission change by the lamp, and a performance action by the movable decorative body) as long as an operation is detected within the valid period. Therefore, the operation acceptance performance (valid period) itself lacks performance quality, and there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease until the post-operation performance is executed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
A first operation presentation means capable of performing a post-operation presentation that continues to be executed until a predetermined timing in a pattern presentation based on a variation pattern arrives when an operation by a player is detected;
- It is provided with a second operation presentation means which, when an operation by a player is detected, is capable of executing a post-operation presentation in a manner that continues until the elapsed time from the timing of the detection reaches a predetermined time value.

With this configuration, different presentation characteristics are provided for the operation reception presentation (validity period) itself when the operation reception presentation is executed by the first operation presentation means and when the operation reception presentation is executed by the second operation presentation means, which is expected to increase the interest in playing until the post-operation presentation is executed.

In other words, the post-operation performance by the first operation performance means is executed until a predetermined timing, regardless of whether the operation is performed early or late within the valid period. Therefore, it can be said that performing the operation immediately after the valid period occurs is advantageous in terms of maintaining the execution state of the post-operation performance for a long time and enjoying the performance.

In contrast, in the operation reception presentation by the second operation presentation means, regardless of when the operation is performed during the valid period, the post-operation presentation is executed in a manner that continues until the time elapsed from the operation timing reaches a predetermined time value. Therefore, it can be said that it is advantageous to refrain from operating for a while after the valid period occurs, and instead operate at a later time, in order to maintain a long overall presentation time from the start of the valid period to the end of the post-operation presentation, and to enjoy the presentation.

In this case, the conditions for generating the operation reception performance by the first operation performance means and the operation reception performance by the second operation performance means are different. For example, the operation reception performance by the first operation performance means occurs when the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the pattern performance (performance pattern) based on the first variation pattern progresses to a specific timing, and the operation reception performance by the second operation performance means can be realized as occurring when the second variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and a special result is obtained in the advancement performance determination corresponding to the second variation pattern, and the pattern performance (performance pattern) based on the second variation pattern progresses to a specified timing. Alternatively, the operation reception performance by the first operation performance means occurs when the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the pattern performance based on the first variation pattern progresses to a specific timing, and the operation reception performance by the second operation performance means may be realized as occurring when the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the pattern performance based on the first variation pattern progresses to a timing different from the specific timing.

Figure 207 is a time chart showing an example of a first operation reception effect in which a post-operation effect is executed in a manner that continues until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives, regardless of the length of time required from when the valid period occurs until it is detected.

Now, if the first effect condition required for the occurrence of the "first operation acceptance effect in which acceptance of effects is permitted" is satisfied and the pattern effect (effect pattern) based on the variable pattern progresses to timing tr1, the first operation acceptance effect (valid period) is generated based on the progress to timing tr1. This first operation acceptance effect (valid period) ends without executing the post-operation effect when timing tr3 arrives, when a predetermined set time has elapsed without any effect acceptance. During the execution period of the first operation acceptance effect in which acceptance of effects is permitted, an image imitating the operating means to be operated and a gauge showing how much valid time remains are displayed, and an operation promotion effect is performed to encourage the player to operate.

When the first operation reception performance (valid period) starts, an acceptance permission sound is output, indicating that the performance reception is permitted (or that the performance reception will be permitted). However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a in this embodiment does not continue to output the acceptance permission sound for the above-mentioned specified set time, but rather makes it non-output at timing tr2, which is an intermediate stage before the above-mentioned specified set time has elapsed, so that it cannot be heard.

The concept of "outputting the reception-permitted sound" here includes not only the new allocation of "sound data containing reception-permitted sound" to a channel at timing tr1, but also the arrival of a "reception-permitted sound playback period" in sound data that is already assigned to a channel at timing tr1. Alternatively, the "reception-permitted sound" may be output from before timing tr1 to after timing tr1, spanning timing tr1. The concept of "setting to a non-output state" here includes not only the cancellation of the allocation of "sound data containing reception-permitted sound" to a channel, but also the end of the "reception-permitted sound playback period" in the sound data and the transition to a period in which subsequent sounds (including silent data) are played, while the allocation of the sound data to a channel is maintained.

As described above, in this type of first operation acceptance presentation, an "operation-induced process using the first presentation member" is started as a post-operation presentation when an operation by the player is detected and the presentation is accepted. However, the post-operation presentation (operation-induced process using the first presentation member) thus started is terminated when a predetermined timing tr4 in the pattern presentation (presentation pattern) based on the variation pattern arrives, regardless of when the presentation is accepted within its effective period. Note that the "operation-induced process using the first presentation member" can be executed, for example, as a process of causing the first decorative movable body to perform a presentation operation when the presentation is accepted.

For example, as shown in FIG. 207, if a performance request is received at a relatively early timing tr1a within the valid period (timings tr1 to tr3), the post-operation performance (operation-induced processing using the first performance member) will be executed for a relatively long time from timing tr1a to timing tr4. In contrast, as shown in FIG. 207, if a performance request is received at a relatively late timing tr2a within the valid period (timings tr1 to tr3), the post-operation performance (operation-induced processing using the first performance member) will only be executed for a relatively short time from timing tr2a to timing tr4.

This type of first operation reception presentation makes it possible to provide a presentation in which performing an operation immediately after the validity period occurs results in an advantageous effect of maintaining the execution state of the post-operation presentation (the execution state of the operation-induced processing using the first presentation component) for a long period of time, which is advantageous for enjoying the presentation.

As will be described later, in the first operation reception performance, the performance is accepted when the reception permissible sound is in an output state, and even if a post-operation performance (operation-induced processing using the first performance component) is executed based on the performance acceptance, the output state of the reception permissible sound is not released and is maintained in that output state until the predetermined timing tr2.

Figure 208 is a time chart showing an example of a second operation reception presentation in which a post-operation presentation is executed in such a manner that the elapsed time from the timing of detection continues until it reaches a predetermined time value.

Now, if the second effect condition required for the occurrence of the "second operation reception effect in which the effect acceptance is permitted" is satisfied and the pattern effect (effect pattern) based on the variable pattern progresses to timing tr11, the second operation reception effect (valid period) is generated based on the progress to timing tr11. As in the case of the first operation reception effect, this second operation reception effect (valid period) also ends without executing the post-operation effect when timing tr13 arrives when a predetermined set time has elapsed without the effect acceptance being performed. A time value different from the predetermined set time in the first operation reception effect and the predetermined set time in the second operation reception effect may be set. Even during the execution period of the second operation reception effect in which the effect acceptance is permitted, an image imitating the operating means to be operated and a gauge showing how much valid time remains are displayed, and an operation promotion effect is performed to encourage the player to operate.

When the second operation reception performance (valid period) starts, an acceptance permission sound is output, indicating that the performance reception has been permitted (or that the performance reception will be permitted). However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a in this embodiment does not continue to output this acceptance permission sound for the above-mentioned specified set time, but rather makes it non-output at timing tr12, which is an intermediate stage before the above-mentioned specified set time has elapsed, so that it cannot be heard.

The concept of "outputting the reception-permitted sound" here includes not only the new allocation of "sound data containing a reception-permitted sound" to a channel at timing tr11, but also the arrival of a "reception-permitted sound playback period" in sound data that is already assigned to a channel at timing tr11. Alternatively, the "reception-permitted sound" may be output from before timing tr11 to after timing tr11, spanning timing tr11. The concept of "setting to a non-output state" here also includes not only the cancellation of the allocation of "sound data containing a reception-permitted sound" to a channel, but also the end of the "reception-permitted sound playback period" in the sound data and the transition to a period in which subsequent sounds (including silent data) are played.

As described above, in this type of second operation acceptance effect, an "operation-induced process using the second performance member" is started as a post-operation effect when an operation by the player is detected and the performance is accepted. However, the post-operation effect thus started (operation-induced process using the second performance member) is continued until the elapsed time from the performance acceptance reaches a predetermined time value (for example, a set time longer than the above-mentioned specified set time as the valid period), regardless of when the performance acceptance is made within the valid period. Note that the "operation-induced process using the second performance member" can be executed, for example, as a process of causing the second decorative movable body to perform a performance operation when the performance acceptance is made.

For example, as shown in FIG. 208, if a performance request is received at a relatively early timing tr11a within the valid period (timings tr11 to tr13), the post-operation performance (operation-induced processing using the second performance member) will be executed from timing tr11a to timing tr14, which is a predetermined time value after timing tr11a. In contrast, as shown in FIG. 208, if a performance request is received at a relatively late timing tr12a within the valid period (timings tr11 to tr13), the post-operation performance (operation-induced processing using the second performance member) will be executed from timing tr12a to timing tr15, which is a predetermined time value after timing tr14.

This type of second operation reception presentation allows you to provide a presentation that is advantageous in that by not operating for a while after the valid period has occurred, and instead operating at a later time, you can lengthen the overall presentation time from when the valid period begins to when the post-operation presentation ends, which is more enjoyable.

As will be described later, in the second operation reception performance, even if the performance is accepted when the reception permissible sound is in an output state, and a post-operation performance (operation-induced processing using the second performance component) is executed based on the performance acceptance, the output state of the reception permissible sound is not released, and the output state is maintained until the predetermined timing tr12.

As explained with reference to Figures 207 and 208, the first and second operation acceptance effects (valid periods) themselves have different presentation characteristics, and these operation acceptance effects (valid periods) are generated based on the establishment of different presentation conditions, which is expected to maintain interest in the game from the occurrence of the operation acceptance effect (valid period) to the execution of the post-operation effect.

However, simply adopting the configurations related to the first and second operation acceptance effects (valid periods) leaves the following problem unsolved. That is, with these operation acceptance effects (valid periods), it is sometimes more advantageous to perform the operation early within the valid period in order to enjoy the effect, and sometimes more advantageous to perform the operation later within the valid period in order to enjoy the effect. As such, the performance within the valid period is still lacking in some aspects, and there are concerns that this may reduce interest in the game. For this reason, it is more desirable to execute the operation acceptance effects as special operation acceptance effects having the form described below.

FIG. 209 is a time chart showing an example of a special operation acceptance presentation.
Now, if the pattern effect (effect pattern) based on the variable pattern progresses to timing tr21 while the special effect condition required for the occurrence of the special operation reception effect is satisfied, a special operation reception effect (valid period) is generated based on the progress to the timing tr21. As will be described later, this special operation reception effect (valid period) is different from the first and second operation reception effects in that the timing tr23 does not arrive after a predetermined set time has elapsed without the effect being accepted, and even if there is no operation, the effect acceptance always occurs within the valid period, and the post-operation effect described later is executed. As will be described later, the predetermined set time in the special operation reception effect is set to a time value longer than the predetermined set time in the first operation reception effect and the predetermined set time in the second operation reception effect.

Also, when the special operation reception performance (valid period) starts, an acceptance permission sound is output, indicating that the performance reception has been permitted (or that the performance reception will be permitted). However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a in this embodiment is configured to continue the output state of this acceptance permission sound (Fig. 209) for a longer period of time than the acceptance permission sounds (Figs. 207 and 208) generated in response to the first and second operation reception performances. Note that in this explanatory example, the acceptance permission sound shown in Fig. 209 is also made non-output at timing tr22, which is an intermediate stage before the above-mentioned specified set time has yet to elapse, so that it cannot be heard. However, the acceptance permission sound shown in Fig. 209 may be one that can continue to be output until timing tr23 arrives.

The concept of "outputting the reception-permitted sound" here includes not only the new allocation of "sound data containing reception-permitted sound" to a channel at timing tr21, but also the arrival of a "reception-permitted sound playback period" in sound data that is already assigned to a channel at timing tr21. Alternatively, the "reception-permitted sound" may be output from before timing tr21 to after timing tr21, spanning timing tr21. The concept of "setting to a non-output state" here also includes not only the cancellation of the allocation of "sound data containing reception-permitted sound" to a channel, but also the end of the "reception-permitted sound playback period" in the sound data and the transition to a period in which the sound (including silent data) is played thereafter.

In this regard, in the special operation acceptance presentation, when an operation by the player is detected within the valid period and the presentation is accepted, based on that presentation acceptance, the "operation-triggered processing using the first movable decorative body (first presentation member)" shown in Figure 207 and the "operation-triggered processing using the second movable decorative body (second presentation member)" shown in Figure 208 are each started in parallel. Therefore, an "operation-triggered process using the first performance member" is started, and the "operation-triggered process using the first performance member" thus started will be terminated when the predetermined timing tr24 in the pattern performance (performance pattern) based on the variation pattern arrives, regardless of when the performance acceptance is made during its effective period, and an "operation-triggered process using the second performance member" is started, and the "operation-triggered process using the second performance member" thus started will be continued, regardless of when the performance acceptance is made during its effective period, until the elapsed time from the time the performance acceptance is made reaches a predetermined time value (for example, a set time longer than the above-mentioned specified set time as the effective period).

For example, as shown in FIG. 209, if a performance request is accepted at a relatively early timing tr21a within the valid period (timings tr21 to tr23), the "operation-induced processing using the first performance member" of the post-operation performance will be executed over a relatively long period from timing tr21a to timing tr24, but the "operation-induced processing using the second performance member" of the post-operation performance will end at timing tr25, a predetermined time value having elapsed since timing tr21a. In contrast, as shown in FIG. 209, if the performance is accepted at a relatively late timing tr22a within the valid period (timings tr21 to tr23), the "operation-induced processing using the first performance member" of the post-operation performance will only be executed for a relatively short period of time from timing tr22a to timing tr24, but the "operation-induced processing using the second performance member" of the post-operation performance will be executed from timing tr22a to timing tr26 (a timing that arrives later than timing tr25), when a predetermined time value has elapsed.

In this way, the special operation acceptance effect in this embodiment occurs when a specific effect pattern is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the effect content as the specific effect pattern progresses to a specific timing. When an effect is accepted within the special operation acceptance effect (validity period), an "operation-triggered process using a first effect member that continues to be executed until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" and an "operation-triggered process using a second effect member that continues until the time elapsed from the timing at which the effect was accepted reaches a predetermined time value" are respectively executed.

According to this type of special operation reception effect, if an operation is performed immediately after the valid period occurs, the execution state of the "operation-induced process using the first performance member" in the post-operation effect can be maintained for a long time, but in return, the end timing of the "operation-induced process using the second performance member" in the post-operation effect will arrive at a relatively early stage. On the other hand, if the operation is not performed for a while after the valid period occurs and instead is performed at a later time, the end timing of the "operation-induced process using the second performance member" in the post-operation effect can be made to arrive at a relatively late stage, but there will be a disadvantage in that the execution state of the "operation-induced process using the first performance member" in the post-operation effect cannot be maintained for a long time.

In other words, in the special operation reception performance, there is no optimal operation timing for creating excitement in terms of the performance.
- In exchange for shortening the time until the "operation-induced process using the second effect member" is completed, the user may enjoy the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" by prolonging the execution state of the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" (by operating the "operation-induced process" at an early stage within the valid period), or
- In exchange for shortening the execution state of the "operation-induced process using the first effect member", extend the time until the "operation-induced process using the second effect member" is completed and enjoy this (operate at a later stage within the valid period), or
Should we sacrifice a little at a time during which the "operation-triggered process using the first effect member" is maintained in an execution state and a little at a time until the "operation-triggered process using the second effect member" is terminated, in order to strike a balance overall (should we operate it neither too early nor too late within the valid period)?
The special operation reception performance itself can be endowed with such strategic operation performance, thereby making it possible to provide an operation reception performance that allows a player to select operation timing according to his/her mood and that is unlikely to cause boredom.

As will be described later, in the special operation reception performance, when a performance is received while the reception permissible sound is in an output state, a post-operation performance (operation-induced processing using the first performance member, operation-induced processing using the second performance member) is executed based on the performance reception, and the output state of the reception permissible sound is released at this point.

Here, in the above-described example, when a special operation reception effect (FIG. 209) is received, "operation-induced processing using a first effect member that continues to be executed until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" and "operation-induced processing using a second effect member that continues until the elapsed time from the timing of the effect reception reaches a predetermined time value" are executed. However, even if a special operation reception effect occurs, if a predetermined effect condition is not met (for example, if a jackpot judgment is not successful or if a predetermined effect judgment is not successful), even if an effect reception is received within the special operation reception effect, the "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" is not executed, and it is more preferable that the "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" in which the "predetermined time value" is set relatively short compared to when the predetermined effect condition is satisfied (FIG. 209) is executed in a different effect mode.

According to this configuration, even if a special operation reception effect occurs, if the specified performance condition is not satisfied, the performance content becomes equivalent to the operation reception effect (first and second operation reception effects) in which only one of the "operation-induced processing using the first performance member that continues to be executed until the predetermined timing in the performance pattern arrives" and the "operation-induced processing using the second performance member that continues until the elapsed time from the performance acceptance timing reaches a predetermined time value" is executed. Therefore, by providing such a performance risk, it is possible to preferably maintain the tension when a special operation reception effect occurs. In this sense, when a post-operation performance in which the "operation-induced processing using the first performance member that continues to be executed until the predetermined timing in the performance pattern arrives" and the "operation-induced processing using the second performance member that continues until the elapsed time from the performance acceptance timing reaches a predetermined time value" is executed in parallel in the special operation reception effect, it is desirable to make the rate at which a jackpot pattern appears higher than when a post-operation performance appears in the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect.

However, if an operation is performed within the special operation reception effect but is not properly detected (detection error), and the effect is not accepted, and as a result the valid period ends without the effect being accepted, the player who sees that the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" is not performed despite the operation may mistakenly believe that the operation reception effect has been reduced to one in which only one is executed, and there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, as described above, with regard to the special operation reception effect, it is desirable to automatically generate (automatically accept) the operation acceptance during the valid period even if the player does not operate during the valid period, so that the "operation-induced process using the first effect member that continues to be executed until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" and the "operation-induced process using the second effect member that continues until the elapsed time from the timing of the effect acceptance reaches a predetermined time value" are each executed. As a method for automatically generating (automatically accepting) the operation acceptance and the related effect modes, any of the examples described above or below, or an appropriate combination, or the contents described in the footnotes can be used.

In the above example, when the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect occur, an acceptance permission sound is output to indicate that the effect reception is permitted. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in Figures 207 to 209, the acceptance permission sound output when the special operation reception effect occurs is used as an effect sound whose playback state can continue for a longer period of time than the acceptance permission sound output when the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect occurs.

With this configuration, by checking how long the acceptance permission sound that is in the output state continues from the time when the effect acceptance becomes permitted (when an image display imitating the operating means to be operated or a gauge display showing how much effective time remains is displayed), it becomes possible to recognize whether the operation acceptance effect is a special operation acceptance effect that executes "an operation-induced process using a first effect member that continues in an execution state until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" and "an operation-induced process using a second effect member that continues until the elapsed time from the timing of the effect acceptance reaches a predetermined time value". However, this can be done in exchange for reducing the remaining time that the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" can be maintained in an execution state (delaying the timing of the effect acceptance), and by the time it is recognized that the operation acceptance effect is a "special operation acceptance effect", the disadvantage arises that the presentation strategies that the player can select are narrowed.

However, even if it is recognized that the special operation reception effect is occurring, it is important to leave the presentation strategic to a certain extent. Therefore, it is desirable to execute the output time (timings tr1-tr2, tr11-tr12) of the reception allowable sound output when the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect occurs as a non-output state when a specific time less than half of the "predetermined set time (timings tr21-tr23) as the special operation reception effect (valid period)" has elapsed. With this configuration, if the reception allowable sound is not non-output but maintains its output state when a specific time less than half of the "predetermined set time (timings tr21-tr23) as the special operation reception effect (valid period)" has elapsed, it becomes possible to recognize that the special operation reception effect is being executed, and therefore it becomes possible to provide a presentation strategic with more than half of the "predetermined set time (timings tr21-tr23) as the special operation reception effect (valid period)" remaining.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reception allowable sound output when the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect occurs is maintained in its output state even if the effect reception is made when it is in that output state, whereas the reception allowable sound output when the special operation reception effect occurs is forced to end its output state when the effect reception is made when it is in that output state. In other words, in this case, when the effect reception is made in a situation where it is not recognized whether it is a special operation reception effect (a situation where the above-mentioned specific time has not passed since the reception allowable sound was output), the important concerns are whether the operation reception effect was a "special operation reception effect" and whether a more promising aspect has appeared as a post-operation effect. However, one of these (whether the operation reception effect was a "special operation reception effect") can be easily recognized by simply checking whether the output state of the reception allowable sound has ended as a result of the effect reception. For example, even if it is recognized that the output state of the reception allowable sound has not ended and as a result the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect has occurred, it is expected that the player will change his/her mind and focus on "whether a more promising aspect has appeared as a post-operation effect". In this case, it is desirable to design the presentation so that when a more promising post-operation presentation appears, the probability of a new special operation reception presentation occurring increases until the pattern stops.

As described above, in the first operation reception performance, the second operation reception performance, and the special operation reception performance, an image display imitating the operation means used as the operation target in each operation reception performance and a gauge display showing the remaining effective time are displayed, respectively, to promote the operation of the player. In this regard, at least in the special operation reception performance, when the performance is accepted, it is desirable to start "the operation-induced process using the first performance member that continues to be executed until the arrival of a predetermined timing in the performance pattern" and "the operation-induced process using the second performance member that continues until the elapsed time from the timing of the performance acceptance reaches a predetermined time value" while leaving (displaying) the gauge display. With this configuration, it becomes possible to recognize which timing within the effective period the performance acceptance was made at, after the performance acceptance, based on the remaining gauge remaining as a display, and this makes it possible to predict whether the execution state of the operation-induced process using the first performance member will end soon. Note that, as a method of starting the post-operation performance while leaving the gauge display (bar display) in this way, any of the examples described above or below, or an appropriate combination, can be used.

In the special operation reception effect, it is desirable to execute an operation-related display (premonition effect) that suggests the occurrence of the effect before reception is permitted, so that it is possible to operate the special operation reception effect as soon as it occurs. With such a configuration, it is expected that the player will be able to enjoy the strategic nature of the performance throughout the entire period of the special operation reception effect (validity period). In contrast, it is desirable to execute an operation-related display (premonition effect) that suggests the occurrence of the effect before reception is permitted in the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect, but it is desirable to execute the operation-related display as a "short-term premonition effect with inferior timing suggestion function" in order to avoid creating excessive expectations compared to when a highly anticipated special operation reception effect occurs.

Here, the operation-related display (a short-term precursor display with little timing suggestion function) performed by the performance display device 1600 before the effective period of the first operation reception performance or the second operation reception performance occurs can be realized, for example, as an image displayed in a fade-in state (such as a white-out image) when an "image display imitating an operating means" is made to appear in a fade-in manner.

Figure 210 is a time chart showing an example of the processing related to the operation-related display when the first operation reception performance or the second operation reception performance is performed, and the processing related to the channel allocation of sound data that includes the reception-permitted sound.

In other words, from an ergonomic perspective, it is known that simply displaying the suggestive image (operation-related display) several frames (e.g., 0.2 seconds) before the valid period occurs makes it possible to operate the machine so that the performance acceptance occurs shortly after the valid period occurs. However, even if this is the case, if the "image display simulating the operation means" is displayed in the normal mode even when the valid period has not yet occurred, even if it is only for several frames, a situation may arise in which the performance acceptance is not performed despite the operation being performed while the "image display simulating the operation means" is displayed, and there is a concern that this may reduce interest in the game.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 210, the operation-related display is started based on the arrival of timing trA, which is several frames before the occurrence of the effective period of the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect, but in a situation where the effective period has not occurred, the "image display imitating the operation means" is not displayed in the normal mode.

More specifically, at timing trA, a "pre-permission operation-related display" is started, which can be realized as a fade-in image in which the "image display simulating an operating means" is displayed in a fade-in manner, or as a specified effect image. Then, when timing tr1 (or timing tr11) arrives while the "pre-permission operation-related display" is being displayed in this manner, the state transitions from one in which the "pre-permission operation-related display" is displayed to one in which the "image display simulating an operating means" is displayed in a normal manner.

In this regard, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment outputs a reception permission sound indicating that the performance reception is permitted when the valid period occurs. However, as shown in FIG. 210, this reception permission sound is not output at timing trA, but is instead output at the above timing tr1 (or timing tr11).

In other words, in order to enable the player to operate the game so that the performance acceptance is performed immediately after the valid period has occurred, it would be desirable to output the acceptance permission sound several frames before the valid period has occurred. However, if the acceptance permission sound is output several frames before the valid period has occurred, the output timing will be out of sync with the appearance timing of the "image display imitating the operation means", which may result in a sense of incongruity as if there has been a sound delay, and there is a concern that this will reduce interest in the game. On the other hand, it is possible to output a pre-permission operation-related sound that is different from the acceptance permission sound during the period from timing trA to tr1 (timing trA to tr11). However, if the pre-permission operation-related sound is output in such a short period of time, the pre-permission operation-related sound may sound integrated with the acceptance permission sound, rather than being an independent performance sound, which may ultimately result in a sense of incongruity as if there has been a sound delay.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, prior to the occurrence of the valid period of the first operation acceptance performance or the second operation acceptance performance, the operation-related display (pre-acceptance operation-related display) is started several frames before, while the operation-related sound (pre-acceptance operation-related sound) is not executed, and only the acceptance acceptance sound is output when the valid period occurs. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 210, the acceptance acceptance sound is output by assigning "sound data including the acceptance acceptance sound" to a channel based on the arrival of timing tr1.

In the example shown in FIG. 210, the allocation of the "sound data including acceptance-permissible sound" to the channel is terminated when timing tr2 arrives, thereby putting the acceptance-permissible sound into a non-output state. However, the "sound data including acceptance-permissible sound" itself may continue to be assigned to the channel after timing tr2, for example, it may continue to be assigned to the channel until timing tr3 arrives. In other words, in this case, the sound data itself remains assigned to the channel, but the "playback period of the acceptance-permissible sound" within the sound data ends at timing tr2.

In the example shown in FIG. 210, if a performance is accepted between timings tr1 and tr2 (timings tr11 and tr12), the state in which the performance is accepted is terminated and the "image display imitating an operating means" is hidden. In contrast, the "sound data including accepted sound" is kept assigned to the channel, and as mentioned above, the accepted sound is not forcibly terminated midway.

Figure 211 is a time chart showing an example of the processing related to the operation-related display when a special operation reception performance is performed, and the processing related to the channel allocation of sound data that includes the reception-permitted sound.

As shown in FIG. 211, even in the special operation reception effect, the operation-related display (pre-permission operation-related display) is displayed from the time of the arrival of timing trB, which is before timing tr21 when the effective period occurs. However, the "period from timing trB to tr21" is more than twice (more preferably 10 times) as long as the "period from timing trA to tr1" shown in FIG. 210, and as a result, the pre-permission operation-related display displayed during that period can selectively appear in one of multiple performance modes to suggest the "expectation that the post-operation performance performed when the performance is accepted will be performed in a highly expected manner" or the "expectation that a jackpot pattern will appear." Note that, as in the example shown in FIG. 210, when the effective period is not occurring, the "image display imitating the operation means" is not displayed in the normal mode.

For example, the "pre-permission operation-related display" that starts at timing trB has different content from the "pre-permission operation-related display" shown in FIG. 210, and is performed as a somewhat story-like premonition effect (any of the aspects of the "specific operation-related effect" described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 184 may be applied) in which multiple effect images are repeatedly moved toward the location where the "image display imitating the operation means" will be displayed later (timing tr21), and then hidden at that location. At this time, any of a number of aspects can be displayed as the effect image, and the degree of expectation is indicated depending on which of those aspects is displayed. Then, when the above-mentioned timing tr21 arrives while the "pre-permission operation-related display" is displayed in this way, the state in which the "pre-permission operation-related display" is displayed will be changed to a state in which the "image display imitating the operation means" is displayed in the normal aspect.

As described above, in the special operation reception effect, when the valid period occurs, an acceptance permission sound is output to indicate that the reception of the effect is permitted. However, as shown in FIG. 211, this acceptance permission sound is output from timing tr21 as a performance sound that is played in a partial section of the sound data assigned to the channel at timing trB.

That is, as described above, the special operation reception effect uses a highly dramatic "pre-permission operation display" before the valid period occurs (timing trB to tr21) for a time that is significantly longer than "the ergonomically required minimum time to enable operation immediately after the valid period occurs." Therefore, in order to further enhance the dramatic effect during this effect period (timing trB to tr21), it is desirable to output a dramatic sound (pre-permission operation related sound) that matches the "pre-permission operation related display" displayed during the same period. In addition, since the effect period (timing trB to tr21) is long enough to perform a dramatic effect, even if a dramatic sound (pre-permission operation related sound) is output during that period, there is no inconvenience in that it is heard as a sound integrated with the reception permission sound.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when timing trB arrives, the pre-allowed operation-related display is displayed on the performance display device 1600 and a pre-allowed operation-related sound is output, and these output states are continued until timing tr21. Then, when timing tr21 arrives, a transition is made from a state in which the "pre-allowed operation-related display" is displayed to a state in which the "image display imitating the operating means" is displayed in the normal mode, and a transition is made from a state in which the "pre-allowed operation-related sound" is output to a state in which the "acceptance allowance sound" is output.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 211, when timing trB arrives, one piece of sound data including a playback section for the "pre-permission operation-related sound" and a playback section for the "reception permissible sound" is assigned to a channel, thereby realizing the above-mentioned sound effect output during the period from timing trB to tr22.

In this configuration, in the special operation reception effect, the reception allowable sound output when the effective period occurs is output as a performance sound that is played during a partial period within the sound data assigned to the channel spanning from the premonition effect to the special operation reception effect. In other words, in this case, by simply assigning one sound data to a channel before the special operation reception effect occurs (such as when the premonition effect occurs), the first half of the sound data is played as a performance sound (premonition operation related sound) corresponding to the premonition effect (premonition operation related display), which not only makes it possible to indicate the timing of the special operation reception effect, but also makes it possible to release the channel assignment as appropriate based on the performance reception after the effective period occurs, so that the player can be made aware that the special operation reception effect has been executed even after the performance reception has been performed. As an output method for "one sound data" including a playback section of the "pre-permission operation-related sound" and a playback section of the "acceptance acceptance sound," it is desirable to first prepare multiple sound data with different expectancies (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing when the pattern fluctuation is stopped), and then selectively assign one of the sound data (one sound data) to a channel based on the result of the jackpot judgment (or performance judgment (preview judgment, etc.)), thereby realizing the above-mentioned performance sound output during the period from timing trB to tr22. In this case, it is more desirable for the multiple sound data to include first sound data and second sound data configured so that the same performance sound is output during the playback section of the "pre-permission operation-related sound (omen performance)," but different performance sounds are output during the playback section of the "acceptance acceptance sound (operation acceptance performance)."

In other words, in the special operation acceptance effect, if the effect is accepted between timings tr21 and tr22, the state in which the effect is accepted is ended and the "image display imitating the operation means" is hidden. In addition, the state in which the "sound data including the acceptance acceptance sound" is also assigned to the channel is ended, and as described above, the output of the acceptance acceptance sound is forcibly terminated midway through. Therefore, by checking whether the acceptance acceptance sound is forcibly turned off when the effect is accepted, it is possible to make the player aware that the special operation acceptance effect was being executed even after the effect was accepted.

Note that even if there is only one sound data (timing trB to tr22), in a situation where the section (first half) of the sound effect (pre-permissible operation related sound) corresponding to the premonition effect (pre-permissible operation related display) is in a playback state (timing trB to tr21), this will not be forcibly terminated even if the player performs an operation. The channel assignment state will be released based on the player's operation only in a situation where the section (second half) of the sound effect (acceptance permissible sound) corresponding to the valid period is in a playback state (timing tr21 to tr22).

The one sound data (sound data including a pre-permission operation-related sound and a reception-permission sound) may have been assigned before timing trB and may already be in an assigned state at timing trB. As described above, the assigned state to the channel may continue after timing tr22, for example, the assigned state to the channel may continue until timing tr23 arrives. In other words, in this case, the sound data itself remains assigned to the channel, but the "playback period of the reception-permission sound" within the sound data ends at timing tr22.

In the example shown in FIG. 210, the allocation of the "sound data including acceptance-permissible sound" to the channel is terminated when timing tr2 arrives, thereby putting the acceptance-permissible sound into a non-output state. However, the "sound data including acceptance-permissible sound" itself may continue to be assigned to the channel after timing tr2, for example, it may continue to be assigned to the channel until timing tr3 arrives. In other words, in this case, the sound data itself remains assigned to the channel, but the "playback period of the acceptance-permissible sound" within the sound data ends at timing tr2.

In the configurations shown in Figures 207 to 211, "multiple acceptance allowable sounds with different lengths of time that the output state is maintained" are prepared as acceptance allowable sounds that accompany the occurrence of an operation acceptance effect, and different acceptance allowable sounds are generated for a special operation acceptance effect, which has different post-operation effects when the effect is accepted, and a first operation acceptance effect (or a second operation acceptance effect). Therefore, by checking how long the output state of the acceptance allowable sound continues, it becomes possible to recognize whether a special operation acceptance effect or a first operation acceptance effect (or a second operation acceptance effect) is occurring, although there is a disadvantage in that the above-mentioned strategic presentation is narrowed.

Moreover, the multiple reception permissible sounds include a first reception permissible sound (special operation reception effect) whose output state is terminated when an operation by the player is accepted as an effect, and a second reception permissible sound (first and second operation acceptance effects) whose output state is continued. Therefore, when an operation is performed so that an effect is accepted while the reception permissible sound is in an output state, by checking whether the output state of the reception permissible sound is terminated when the effect is accepted, it becomes possible to immediately recognize whether the special operation acceptance effect or the first operation acceptance effect (or second operation acceptance effect) has occurred.

However, the reception permissible sound should be put into a non-output state when the valid period ends, and if the output state is maintained when the post-operation performance is started, it may interfere with the performance. In this regard, in the above example, the reception performance sound whose output state is ended when the performance is accepted is used as the first reception permissible sound (special operation reception performance) on the side where the time setting value for maintaining the output state is relatively long.

In other words, in this case, when a performance is accepted in the output state of the "second acceptance-permissible sound on the side where the time setting value for maintaining the output state is relatively short," that output state will be maintained, but since the time setting value for maintaining the output state of the second acceptance-permissible sound is short to begin with, it will soon be put into a non-output state and will not interfere with the performance. In contrast, when a performance is accepted in the output state of the "first acceptance-permissible sound on the side where the time setting value for maintaining the output state is relatively long," even if the original time setting value for maintaining the output state remains, that output state will be ended, so it will no longer interfere with the performance.

Furthermore, even if a player tries to determine whether a special operation reception effect or a first operation reception effect (or a second operation reception effect) is occurring by checking how long the output state of the reception allowable sound continues, if the output state of the reception allowable sound is maintained when the time setting value for the second reception allowable sound has elapsed, it is possible to predict that the first reception allowable sound is being output, not the second reception allowable sound. In this regard, by checking how the first reception allowable sound is made non-output when a performance reception is generated, it becomes possible to confirm early on whether the prediction that a special operation reception effect is occurring is correct, without checking for the end of the output state of the first reception allowable sound.

In the configurations shown in Figs. 207 to 211, when the valid period of the operation reception effect occurs, a pre-permission operation related display is displayed to suggest that the valid period will occur soon. The pre-permission operation related display includes a first pre-permission operation related display with a short display time (see Fig. 210) and a second pre-permission operation related display with a long display time (see Fig. 211). In this regard, when the first pre-permission operation related display with a short display time is displayed, the "sound data including the reception permission sound" is not assigned to the channel, and the "sound data including the reception permission sound" is assigned to the channel in accordance with the timing when the valid period occurs, so that the reception permission sound is output. In other words, in this case, the effect sound corresponding to the first pre-permission operation related display is not output, but it is possible to encourage an operation from the time the valid period occurs without causing a sense of discomfort as if a sound delay has occurred.

In contrast, when the second pre-operation-related display, which has a longer display time, is made, the "sound data including the acceptance acceptance sound" is assigned to the channel from the time the second pre-operation-related display is made, and the acceptance acceptance sound is outputted by making the playback section of the acceptance acceptance sound arrive at the timing when the valid period occurs. With this configuration, by simply assigning one sound data to a channel before the special operation acceptance effect occurs (such as when the premonition effect occurs), the first half of the sound data is played as a sound effect (pre-operation-related sound) corresponding to the premonition effect (pre-operation-related display), which not only makes it possible to indicate the timing of the special operation acceptance effect, but also makes it possible to release the channel assignment as appropriate based on the effect acceptance after the valid period occurs, so that the player can be made aware that the special operation acceptance effect has been executed even after the effect acceptance has been made.

In other words, in the pre-permission operation related display shown in FIG. 211, a corresponding pre-permission operation related sound is output and an acceptance acceptance sound is also output when the valid period occurs, whereas in the pre-permission operation related display shown in FIG. 210, a corresponding pre-permission operation related sound is not output and an acceptance acceptance sound is output when the valid period occurs.

In the above explanatory examples shown in Figures 207 to 211, the "performance component" may be the performance display device 1600, a speaker, a performance lamp, a movable decorative body, etc. Also, the "first performance component" may be any one of the performance display device 1600, a speaker, a performance lamp, and a movable decorative body, and the "second performance component" may be any one of the performance display device 1600, a speaker, a performance lamp, and a movable decorative body that is different from the "first performance component".

In addition, in the above example, the operation means to be operated in the special operation reception performance and the first operation reception performance (or the second operation reception performance) do not necessarily have to be the same, and may be different. When the operation means to be operated are different, the mock images displayed during each valid period will be different.

In the first operation reception performance, "operation-induced processing using a first performance member that continues to be executed until a predetermined timing in the performance pattern arrives" is executed as a post-operation performance, but "operation-induced processing using a first performance member that continues to be executed until a predetermined timing in the performance pattern arrives" and "operation-induced processing using a second performance member that continues to be executed until a predetermined timing in the performance pattern arrives" may be executed as post-operation performances. Furthermore, operation-induced processing using a performance member different from the first and second performance members may be further executed, but in the post-operation performance corresponding to the first operation reception performance, both operation-induced processing are executed as being executed until a predetermined timing in the performance pattern arrives.

In the second operation reception performance, "operation-induced processing using the second performance member that continues until the time elapsed from the timing of the performance reception reaches a predetermined time value" is executed as a post-operation performance, but "operation-induced processing using the first performance member that continues until the time elapsed from the timing of the performance reception reaches a predetermined time value" and "operation-induced processing using the second performance member that continues to be executed until a predetermined timing in the performance pattern arrives" may be executed as post-operation performances. Furthermore, operation-induced processing using a performance member different from the first and second performance members may be further executed, but in the post-operation performance corresponding to the second operation reception performance, both operation-induced processing are executed as continuing until the time elapsed from the timing of the performance reception reaches a predetermined time value.

In the special operation reception effect, "operation-induced processing using a first effect member that continues to be executed until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" and "operation-induced processing using a second effect member that continues until the time elapsed from the timing of the effect reception reaches a predetermined time value" are executed as post-operation effects, but operation-induced processing using an effect member different from the first effect member and the second effect member may be further executed. In the special operation reception effect, it is sufficient that the operation-induced processing that is executed as if the execution state continues until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives and the operation-induced processing that is executed as if the time elapsed from the timing of the effect reception reaches a predetermined time value are mixed.

In addition, in the above-described explanatory examples shown in Figures 207 to 211, the effective period of the special operation acceptance effect is set to a time value longer than the effective period of the first operation acceptance effect (or the second operation acceptance effect). By setting a longer time in this way, it becomes possible to enjoy an effective period with the above-mentioned strategic presentation.

The first pre-permission operation-related display (see FIG. 210), which has a short display time, does not suggest the "expectation that the post-operation performance performed when the performance acceptance is made will be performed in a highly anticipated manner" or the "expectation that the jackpot pattern will appear", but it is desirable that the second pre-permission operation-related display (see FIG. 211), which has a long display time, can suggest the "expectation that the post-operation performance performed when the performance acceptance is made will be performed in a highly anticipated manner" or the "expectation that the jackpot pattern will appear".

During the "validity period of the special operation reception effect" which is set as a relatively long time value, it is desirable to have one of a number of display modes with different degrees of expectation appear, so that the "expectation that the post-operation effect performed when the effect is accepted will be performed in a highly expectable manner" or the "expectation that a jackpot pattern will appear" can be suggested.

In addition, in the case of a special operation acceptance effect, regardless of the timing of the effect acceptance during its valid period, it is desirable to have a relationship in which the execution state of the "effect by the first effect element generated as a result of the effect acceptance" ends earlier than the "effect by the second effect element generated as a result of the effect acceptance," in order to allow the player to recognize that the post-operation effects have the same effect content.

In the above-described example shown in Figs. 207 to 211, the pachinko machine 1 is configured so that the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect can occur based on the satisfaction of different performance conditions. However, the first operation reception effect may not be installed and will not occur, and the second operation reception effect and the special operation reception effect can occur based on the satisfaction of different performance conditions. Alternatively, the second operation reception effect may not be installed and will not occur, and the first operation reception effect and the special operation reception effect can occur based on the satisfaction of different performance conditions. Alternatively, the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect may not be installed and will not occur, and the special operation reception effect can occur based on the satisfaction of a specified performance condition.

The special operation acceptance effect shown in the above explanatory examples shown in Figures 207 to 211 may generate a state in which the effect acceptance is permitted while specific sound effect data (e.g., background music sound effect data) assigned to a channel is being output in a suppressed or silent manner.

[More detailed control over acceptable reception sound levels]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the big win determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is capable of executing a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) as to which of a plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern is to be selectively displayed. Note that, depending on the result of this performance determination, all of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the above-mentioned selected variation pattern may be executed in sequence, or none of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) may be executed.

When such a performance judgment (performance pattern judgment, advance notice judgment, etc.) is made, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance content according to the result of the performance judgment, and a variable performance using decorative patterns according to the result of the jackpot judgment is executed together with the expected performance (advance notice performance) related to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movement of the movable body (gimmick performance). As a result, when the variable performance using decorative patterns is executed together with the expected performance related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., and the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the player is allowed to play a jackpot game as a bonus.

In this configuration, the changing effect of the decorative patterns is provided as an effect with a function of indicating whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination, and the expectation effects related to the background depiction and the movement of the moving body are provided as effects with a function of indicating the expectation level (including 0% and 100%) of obtaining a jackpot. In other words, the player enjoys playing the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if a specific variation pattern is selected from among the high expectation variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into an SP reach (such as a reach performance accompanied by a background change) as a result of the variation pattern determination, then no matter which result is obtained as the performance determination (such as a notice determination), when the pattern performance based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach (when a specified condition is met), an operation acceptance performance (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated. However, as will be described later, the mode of the acceptance permission sound output when the operation acceptance performance occurs is set to differ depending on the result of the performance determination, thereby suggesting the percentage of times that the post-operation performance will be executed in a highly expected mode and the percentage of times that the jackpot pattern will be stopped.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the above variation pattern determination, when a special result is obtained in the performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (when a predetermined condition is met), an operation acceptance performance (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination, even if the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, the operation acceptance performance (valid period) will not be generated. Also, the operation acceptance performance (valid period) generated in the predetermined variation pattern is executed as a performance different from the operation acceptance performance (valid period) generated when the pattern performance based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach.

Note that, as for the variation patterns that generate an operation acceptance presentation (valid period) at a predetermined timing during the SP reach regardless of which result is obtained as the preview presentation judgment, other than the above-mentioned "specific variation patterns" may be provided. However, as for the variation patterns that generate an operation acceptance presentation (valid period) at a predetermined timing regardless of which result is obtained as the preview presentation judgment, it is preferable that they are not included in the low expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns), or that their selection rate is made low.

However, the operation acceptance performance (valid period) that can occur under these conditions, etc., simply executes a post-operation performance that generates a predetermined change to the performance component that is the target of the performance (at least one of the following: a display change on the performance display device 1600, a performance sound change on the speaker, a light emission change by the lamp, and a performance action by the movable decorative body) as long as the operation is detected within the set time (valid period). Therefore, the performance quality of the operation acceptance performance (valid period) itself is poor, and there is a concern that interest in playing the game will decrease until the post-operation performance is executed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as an operation reception performance,
During the execution period of a pattern presentation (presentation pattern) based on a low-expectation fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), at least a low-expectation non-suppressed acceptance presentation can be generated which provides an operation opportunity while "BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (presentation pattern) is output in a non-suppressed mode, and during the execution period of a pattern presentation (presentation pattern) based on a high-expectation fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern), at least a high-expectation suppressed acceptance presentation can be generated which provides an operation opportunity while "BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (presentation pattern) is output in a suppressed mode or silently, or is in a non-output state (the playback period in which audible sounds are recorded among the sound data has ended, or channel allocation has ended, for example).

In this configuration, when an operation opportunity is granted, the output of "BGM playback (specific type of sound effect)" may be maintained in an unsuppressed mode (low expectation unsuppressed reception effect), or "BGM playback (specific type of sound effect)" may be output in a suppressed mode or silently, or may be in a non-output state (suppressed operation reception effect). Since the rate of winning a jackpot (expectation) differs depending on the mode of the operation reception effect (low expectation unsuppressed reception effect, high expectation suppressed reception effect), it becomes possible to increase interest in the game depending on the presentation when the operation opportunity is granted (the presentation of whether or not "BGM playback (specific type of sound effect)" is suppressed when the operation opportunity is granted).

However, in high-expectation suppressed reception effects, when an operation opportunity is granted, "BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)" is output in a suppressed manner or silently, so there is concern that the performance will be less dramatic than low-expectation non-suppressed reception effects.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described below, when a high expectation suppression reception effect occurs, a specific sound that is not output when a low expectation non-suppression reception effect occurs can be output as a reception-permitted sound. This makes it possible to effectively suppress the poor presentation quality when a high expectation suppression reception effect occurs.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described below, the reception permissible sound output when a high expectation suppression reception effect occurs is used as a sound that maintains an output state for a longer period of time than the reception permissible sound output when a low expectation non-suppression reception effect occurs, which also effectively prevents the performance from becoming poor when the high expectation suppression reception effect occurs.

On the other hand, in the high expectation suppression reception performance, when an operation opportunity is granted, "BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)" is output in a suppressed or silent mode, or is in a non-output state, so that when a post-operation performance occurs, it is possible to highlight the corresponding performance sound, which is beneficial in terms of increasing interest in the game. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when a performance reception is made while the reception permissible sound that is output when a high expectation suppression reception performance occurs is in an output state, the output state is terminated based on the fact that the performance reception has been made. This makes it possible to highlight the performance sound corresponding to the post-operation performance without being disturbed by the reception permissible sound.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation reception effect can be generated not only by a "non-automatic reception mode in which, if no operation is detected within a set time in which reception of effects is permitted, the set time ends without the occurrence of a post-operation effect," but also by an "automatic reception mode in which a post-operation effect can be generated even if no operation is detected within a set time in which reception of effects is permitted."

In other words, if the operation reception effect is generated by the automatic reception mode, even if no operation is detected within the set time allowed for reception of the effect, the same post-operation effect will be executed as when the operation is detected, which makes it possible to prevent the player from operating the device and, as a result, being unable to confirm the post-operation effect. However, as will be described later, more strictly speaking, the output time of the post-operation effect for the sound effect is the same as when the operation is detected, but the output time of the post-operation effect for the LCD display is set to be shorter than when the operation is detected.

In addition, in the automatic reception mode (operation reception performance) according to this embodiment, as described below, if no operation is detected, a performance reception is automatically generated (the automatic button function is enabled) at a specific timing within the set time, and a post-operation performance is executed based on the automatically generated performance reception. In other words, in this case, the performance reception is guaranteed to occur by the time the specific timing within the set time arrives at the latest, so that performance reception is not performed within the time after the specific timing within the set time, and the length of the valid period during which performance reception is permitted is effectively shortened. As a result, unlike the case where the post-operation performance is started after the set time has ended, it is possible to realize the activation of such an automatic button function without causing any dragging in the performance, and conversely, by speeding up the tempo of the performance.

In addition, if the automatic button function is enabled within the set time in this way, the player will essentially lose the opportunity to operate the machine even though the set time has not yet elapsed. This is expected to cause players to fear this and to actively operate the machine earlier within the set time, or to play with a sense of tension about the presentation.

In order to achieve this effect, it is desirable that the "gauge display showing the remaining effective time" displayed on the performance display device 1600 not indicate the time remaining until the specific timing at which the automatic button function is activated, but rather indicate only the time remaining until the set time has elapsed. When such a display method is adopted, in an operation reception performance executed in the automatic reception mode, the performance will always be accepted before the remaining time on the gauge display reaches "0".

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described later, not only in the operation reception performance executed in the non-automatic reception mode, but also in the operation reception performance executed in the automatic reception mode, when the performance is generated, a reception permission sound is output to indicate that the performance reception has been permitted or that the performance reception will be permitted. This makes it possible to effectively prevent a situation in which the performance reception is automatically generated due to forgetting to operate, and the performance reception cannot be generated by the player's own operation.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation reception performance executed in the automatic reception mode occurs, a specific sound that is not output when an operation reception performance executed in the non-automatic reception mode occurs can be output as the reception-permitted sound. Therefore, by checking the type of reception-permitted sound, it becomes possible to recognize that an operation reception performance executed in the automatic reception mode, rather than the non-automatic reception mode, is occurring.

On the other hand, since post-operation effects usually have the risk of being executed in a low-expectation mode, performing operations to cause such post-operation effects is not necessarily a good way to increase interest in the game. Therefore, in the non-automatic reception mode of this embodiment, as will be described later, once the reception permission sound has been output for a period of time sufficient to suggest that the performance reception has been permitted, the reception permission sound in this output state is terminated relatively early, creating "time in which one can consider whether or not to cause the performance reception" while the reception permission sound is not being output.

However, if the reception permission sound were to end early even in an operation reception performance executed in the automatic reception mode, there would be a concern that it could lead to the misunderstanding that "the automatic button has functioned and performance reception is no longer permitted." Therefore, in the automatic reception mode of this embodiment, the reception permission sound is maintained in an output state for a relatively long time, which suggests that the automatic button has not yet functioned and performance reception is permitted, and ultimately encourages the player to perform operations while feeling reassured that "the automatic button has not yet functioned."

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a technical feature in that, as the operation acceptance performance, a suppressed acceptance performance (here, a high-expectation suppressed acceptance performance) that provides an operation opportunity while "BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)" is output in a suppressed or silent mode or in a non-output state, and a non-suppressed acceptance performance (here, a low-expectation non-suppressed acceptance performance) that provides an operation opportunity while "BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)" is output in a non-suppressed mode can be generated in an automatic reception mode or a non-automatic reception mode, and a reception acceptance sound that indicates that the performance acceptance has entered a state in which acceptance is permitted or that the performance acceptance will enter a state in which acceptance is permitted is generated in a manner that enhances the unique performance characteristics of each of these.

The technical features will be explained below, but in explaining the technical features, the "reception permissible sound" will be explained once again. The "reception permissible sound" is a sound that starts to be output within the set time during which performance reception is permitted, suggesting that the performance reception is permitted, or starts to be output before the set time during which performance reception is permitted begins, suggesting that the performance reception is permitted, and is output as a performance sound such as a "ping-pong". However, if the "reception permissible sound" is put into an output state before the set time during which performance reception is permitted occurs, it is required that the output state of the "reception permissible sound" be maintained across the timing of the set time occurring (it is in an output state even within the set time (within the period during which performance reception is permitted)), and it is desirable to set the time from when the set time occurs until the output state of the "reception permissible sound" is terminated, to be longer than the time from when the "reception permissible sound" is put into an output state until the set time occurs. In this sense, an "acceptable sound" can be said to be a sound that can only be output when a set time (valid period) occurs, and that is in an output state during the set time (valid period), but can also be said to be a sound that can be switched to a non-output state (inaudible state) in response to an operation by the player or as the output time elapses.

The "reception permission sound" may be assigned to a channel and output as standalone sound effect data (see FIG. 210), or may be assigned to a channel and output as a single sound effect data combined with other sound effects (for example, premonition effects executed before the occurrence of a set time (validity period), or sound effects output in conjunction with the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effects") (see FIG. 211), and the method of realizing this may be adopted as appropriate.

Figure 212 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when the low-expectation non-suppression reception presentation is executed in the non-automatic reception mode.

Now, in the normal game state (non-variable/non-time-saving), if the start condition is established (reserved consumption), and the result of the variation pattern determination is that a "predetermined variation pattern" is selected from among the "low-expectation variation patterns in which even a reach state is not formed," the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern variation performance (performance depiction according to the predetermined variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the predetermined variation pattern, etc.) is started, and during the execution period of the variation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance (performance pattern) related to the selected "predetermined variation pattern." In addition, when a performance pattern determination (sub-control side) is performed based on the result of the variation pattern determination (main control side), including each of the performance examples described below, and a preview determination (sub-control side) is performed based on the result of the performance pattern determination, the "variation pattern determination" may be replaced with a "performance pattern determination" and the "variation pattern" may be replaced with a "performance pattern" for the processing related to the preview performance.

As described above, when a special result is obtained in the performance judgment (preview judgment, etc.) corresponding to a predetermined variation pattern, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates an operation acceptance performance (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted when timing tr32 arrives, which is a predetermined time after the start of the decorative pattern variation performance, as shown in FIG. 212(b). However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation acceptance performance (valid period) generated during the performance execution period related to the low expectation variation pattern (predetermined variation pattern) is as follows:
- "Non-suppression reception performance (see FIG. 212 (a) and (b))" in which a set time during which the performance reception is permitted is set while the "sound of BGM playback" corresponding to the variation pattern (performance pattern) maintains an output state in a non-suppression mode, and - "non-automatic reception mode (see FIG. 212 (j))" in which the set time ends without the post-operation performance occurring if no operation is detected within the set time during which the performance reception is permitted (timing tr32 to tr33).
This is done as a "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect" executed by the above.

According to this configuration, during the execution period of the performance (performance pattern) related to the low expectation fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), the "sound of BGM playback" is suppressed to suggest the occurrence of an operation reception performance, and the set time (valid period) during which the performance reception is permitted is suddenly set (non-suppressed reception performance), which takes the player by surprise and makes it easy for a delay to occur when starting to move when trying to operate. Nevertheless, if no operation is detected within the set time (timing tr32 to tr33), the set time ends without the post-operation performance occurring (non-automatic reception mode), which makes the player aware of the risk of missing an opportunity to generate a post-operation performance, and therefore makes it possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension during the execution period of the performance (performance pattern) related to the low expectation fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern).

However, even if this is executed as a "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect", if the set time (timings tr32 to tr33) ends without the post-operation effect occurring against the player's will, there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in Figures 212 (b), (c), and (g), the "reception permission sound" starts to be output when timing tr31 arrives, which is slightly before the set time (timings tr32 to tr33) at which the performance reception is permitted occurs, and the output state is maintained across timing tr32. This allows the player to recognize that the performance reception is permitted at timing tr31, which is slightly before the set time (timings tr32 to tr33), and it is expected that the frequent occurrence of "the set time (timings tr32 to tr33) ends without the post-operation effect occurring against the player's will" will be reduced. However, as mentioned above, the "acceptance permission sound" does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timings tr32 to tr33) occurs; for example, it may be generated to coincide with the occurrence of timing tr32 of the set time.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the "acceptance allowable sound" is provided with a first allowable sound output as a sound effect such as "Peek!" and a second allowable sound output as a message sound such as "Push!" However, as shown in Figs. 212(d) and (h), in the operation acceptance performance (valid period) generated during the execution period of the performance (performance pattern) related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), the second allowable sound (message sound) is not output, and only the first allowable sound (sound effect) is output, so that the output restriction on such "acceptance allowable sound" also makes it easier for a delay to occur in the start of movement when the player tries to operate.

Meanwhile, during the execution period of an effect (effect pattern) related to a low expectation fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), as a countermeasure against the set time (validity period) being suddenly set or being executed in a non-automatic reception mode, some players may try not to miss the opportunity for a post-operation effect to occur by repeatedly tapping the operating means (here, operation button 410) from a state in which reception of the effect is not permitted. However, in this case, since the post-operation effect will start as soon as reception of the effect is permitted, it will be difficult to recognize whether the started effect is "performed in response to reception of the effect (post-operation effect)" or "automatically generated as a mere advance notice effect unrelated to reception of the effect," and there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 212 (particularly FIG. 212(c)), in the low expectation non-suppressed reception performance, if a performance is accepted at timing tr32a when the "acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound)" is in an output state after the set time (valid period) has occurred, the set time (valid period) itself is terminated, but the "acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound)" is not terminated midway, and its output state is maintained until it has finished being output as the first permissible sound (the same timing as when no operation is performed (FIG. 212(g)). This makes it possible to prevent situations from occurring where it becomes difficult to recognize whether the started performance is "performed in response to performance acceptance (post-operation performance)" or "automatically generated as a mere preview performance unrelated to performance acceptance."

In addition, in the example of the performance shown in FIG. 212, when the performance is accepted within the set time (valid period) (timing tr32a in the figure), at least a post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) on the performance display device 1600 (first performance member) and a post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) by the speaker (second performance member) are generated as post-operation performances corresponding to the performance acceptance. In the figure, the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) by the speaker are maintained in an execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) is made invisible at a predetermined timing that arrives after timing tr33 regardless of when the performance is accepted within the set time (valid period), whereas the post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) may be made to maintain an output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the performance is accepted. However, regardless of the timing at which the performance request is received, if timing tr33 has not yet elapsed, it is required that both the post-operation display performance (LCD display) and the post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) remain in their output state.

In the example performance shown in FIG. 212, when the timing tr32 arrives at which the set time (valid period) is set, the performance display device 1600 displays a model image of the operating means that is the target of operation in the low expectation non-suppression acceptance performance, and also displays a gauge indicating the remaining time until the set time has elapsed. As a display method for the model image and gauge display, for example, the method shown in FIG. 159 (R2) can be adopted, and these display images (model image, gauge display) are hidden (both are hidden at the same time) based on the occurrence of performance acceptance.

However, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment may be equipped with a "special presentation mode (automatic button presentation state)" that activates the automatic button function for all operation reception presentations for which operation instructions are given, and the "special presentation mode" may be set or released by the player's operation. In other words, in this case, even if the operation reception presentation occurs during the execution period of a presentation (presentation pattern) related to a low expectation fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), when the "special presentation mode" is set, it is a "non-suppression reception presentation" and is executed in the above-mentioned "automatic reception mode", and occurs as a "non-suppression, non-automatic reception presentation" only when the "special presentation mode" is not set. However, in the specification (especially "More detailed presentation characteristics for reception allowable sounds" and related descriptions), unless otherwise specified, it is described as a presentation example when the "special presentation mode" is not set or when the pachinko machine 1 is not equipped with a "special presentation mode".

Figures 213 and 214 are time charts showing an example of the content of the presentation when the high expectation suppression reception presentation is executed in the automatic reception mode.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in the normal game state (no chance of winning, no time reduction), and a "specific variation pattern" is selected from among the "high expectation variation patterns that develop into SP reach (such as a reach performance accompanied by a background change)" as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the specific variation pattern. After this, it starts the variation performance of the decorative pattern (such as a performance depiction according to the specific variation pattern, or sound output of BGM playback according to the specific variation pattern), and during the execution period of the variation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the performance determination is additionally executed to the performance (performance pattern) related to the "specific variation pattern" selected above.

However, as mentioned above, in the case of a presentation (presentation pattern) related to a "specific variation pattern," regardless of which result is obtained as the presentation judgment (preview judgment), as shown in FIG. 213(b), an operation acceptance presentation (valid period) in which presentation acceptance is permitted occurs when timing tr42 (timing within the SP reach state) arrives, when a specific time has elapsed since the decorative pattern variation presentation began.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation acceptance performance (valid period) generated at the timing tr42 in the specific variation pattern is as follows:
- A "suppressed reception performance (see Figs. 213(a) and 213(b))" in which a set time during which the performance reception is permitted while the "sound of BGM playback" corresponding to the variation pattern (performance pattern) is output in a suppressed mode or in silence is set, and - even if no operation is detected for the operation means that is the object of operation within the set time during which the performance reception is permitted (timing tr42 to tr43), when timing tr42A within the set time arrives, the performance reception is automatically generated internally (the automatic button function is enabled), and a post-operation performance is started based on the fact that the performance reception has been made "automatic reception mode (see Fig. 213(j))".
In this case, the "BGM playback sound" is generated as a "suppression/automatic reception effect" executed by the user. As a method for outputting the "BGM playback sound" in a suppressed mode or silently, a method for previously setting a silent section (suppression section) in the data of the "BGM playback sound" itself, a method for changing the volume value for the channel to which the "BGM playback sound" is assigned to a suppression value (for example, "0"), or a combination of these can be adopted. As will be described later, this "suppression/automatic reception effect" is also called a "second suppression operation reception effect", and the suppression mode here is also called a "strong suppression mode".

According to this configuration, during the execution period of the performance (performance pattern) related to the high expectation fluctuation pattern (SP reach state in the performance (performance pattern) related to a specific fluctuation pattern), the "sound of BGM playback" is output in a suppressed mode or silently to suggest the occurrence of an operation reception performance, and a set time (valid period) during which the performance acceptance is permitted is set with such a performance feature (suppressed acceptance performance), so that from the player's perspective, it becomes easier to operate immediately after the operation reception performance occurs. In addition, even if no operation is detected within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43), the post-operation performance is automatically generated at the latest when timing tr42A within the set time arrives (automatic acceptance mode), so that the player can enjoy operating with the peace of mind that he will not miss the post-operation performance that occurs in the operation reception performance during high expectation.

Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in the "suppressed/automatic reception performance", as in the above-mentioned "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception performance", as shown in Figs. 213(b), (c), and (g), the "reception permission sound" is started to be output when timing tr41 arrives, which is slightly before the occurrence of the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) when the performance reception is permitted, and the output state is maintained across timing tr42. As a result, even if the player does not recognize that the "sound of BGM playback" is being output in a suppressed mode or in silence, he or she can recognize that the state in which the performance reception is permitted will soon occur at timing tr41, and it is expected that the frequent occurrence of "performance reception being performed by the activation of the automatic button function, not by the player's own operation, against the player's will" is less likely to occur. However, as described above, the "reception permission sound" does not necessarily have to be generated before the occurrence of the set time (timing tr42 to tr43), and may be generated in accordance with, for example, the occurrence timing tr42 of the set time.

However, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effect (suppression reception performance), it is important to set the timing tr40 at which the "BGM playback sound" transitions from a state in which it is output in a non-suppressed mode to a state in which it is output in a suppressed mode or in silence (or a non-output state) so that it arrives significantly before "the output start timing tr41 of the above-mentioned reception-permitted sound, which occurs prior to the set time," so that there is a relationship such as "the length of timing tr40-tr41 > the length of timing tr41-tr42," as shown in Figures 213(a)-(c).

Furthermore, in the "suppressed/automatic reception performance" according to this embodiment, as shown in Figs. 213(c), (d), (g), and (h), unlike the above-mentioned "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception performance," not only the first permissible sound output as a sound effect such as "Peek!" as the "reception permissible sound," but also the second permissible sound output as a message sound such as "Push!" is started to be output at the same time as timing tr41 arrives, and the output state is maintained across timing tr42.

According to this configuration, it becomes possible to recognize which of the multiple operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001, etc.) equipped in the pachinko machine 1 should be operated from the state (timing tr41-tr42) when the mock image of the operation means to be operated is not yet displayed on the performance display device 1600, so it becomes easier to operate it immediately after the operation reception performance occurs. That is, as will be described later, in the "suppression/automatic reception performance" of this embodiment, there are "cases where the operation button 410 is selected as the operation object" and "cases where the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation object" based on the result of the advance performance judgment, and when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation object, a message sound such as "Press!" is output as the second allowable sound (message sound), and when the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation object, a message sound such as "Sheathe your sword!" is output as the second allowable sound (message sound).

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 213, the first and second permissible sounds start to be output at the same time, but the first and second permissible sounds may be output sequentially with different timings for starting to output each sound. In this case, only one of the first and second permissible sounds may start to be output before the set time (valid period) has elapsed.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 213(g) and (h), the "first permissible sound" is used as a sound that is output for a relatively short period of time, and the "second permissible sound" is used as a sound that is output for a relatively long period of time, but the length relationship of these permissible sounds may be reversed.

However, as shown in Figures 213(g) and (h), it is preferable that the output states of the "first allowable sound" and the "second allowable sound" are maintained for different times, and that the times at which these output states are terminated (the times at which they are made inaudible) occur at different times prior to the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is enabled. With this configuration, depending on which of the following situations the "acceptance allowable sound" is in, it is possible to estimate how much time is left until the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is enabled arrives, and it is expected that it will be difficult for "the performance acceptance to be performed against the will of the player, not by the player's own operation, but by the activation of the automatic button function" to occur frequently.
- A first situation in which both the "first tolerable sound" and the "second tolerable sound" maintain their output state. - A second situation in which the output state of one of the "first tolerable sound" and the "second tolerable sound" is maintained, but the other has ceased to be in an output state (made inaudible). - A third situation in which both the "first tolerable sound" and the "second tolerable sound" have ceased to be in an output state (made inaudible).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the same effect sound (for example, "Pikiin!") is output as the "first allowable sound" in the "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect" in the effect example shown in FIG. 212 and the "suppressed, automatic reception effect" in the effect example shown in FIG. 213. That is, in this case, the message sound (second allowable sound) among the reception allowable sounds is output as an effect sound that is not output in the "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect", while the sound effect (first allowable sound) among the reception allowable sounds can be output as an effect sound that is also output in the "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect". Therefore, while maintaining the effect when the "sound of BGM playback" is suppressed (second allowable sound), it becomes easier to recognize that the reception of the effect is allowed (first allowable sound).

The time between timings tr41 and tr42 (or timings tr31 and tr32) when the acceptable sound (first acceptable sound, second acceptable sound) is output prior to the set time (valid period) or the display of the mock image may be the minimum time in the control (processing) unit (for example, one frame) or may be two or more frames. In other words, if the sound can be output even slightly prior to the set time (valid period) or the display of the mock image, the player may be able to recognize that the performance acceptance is permitted and which operating means is the object of operation earlier by that amount of time, which is expected to prevent players from forgetting to operate during the period until the end of the set time or the period until the automatic button function is enabled.

As mentioned above, in the operation reception performance executed in the automatic button mode, even within the set time (valid period), the automatic button function is enabled (timing tr42A), and the operation opportunity may be lost. Therefore, in the performance example shown in Fig. 213(c) and (d), unlike the performance example shown in Fig. 212(c), when a performance reception is made when the reception permissible sound (at least one of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound) is in the output state, the output state is terminated based on the fact that the performance reception has been made. In other words, in this case, when the player performs an operation, the output of the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound, second permissible sound) is interrupted at that point, and it becomes possible to recognize that the state in which the performance reception is permitted (valid period) has ended, so that it is possible to avoid the misunderstanding that "the performance reception has not yet occurred and the automatic button function may be enabled (a state in which the operation opportunity may be lost)." Furthermore, if an operation is performed and a performance is accepted prior to timing tr42A, when the automatic button function is enabled, within the set time (validity period), the state in which performance acceptance is permitted will end at the time when the performance is accepted, so it goes without saying that the automatic button function will not be enabled even when timing tr42A arrives.

Also, in the example of the performance shown in FIG. 213, when the performance is accepted within the set time (valid period) (timing tr42a in the figure), at least a post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) on the performance display device 1600 (first performance component) and a post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) by the speaker (second performance component) are generated as post-operation performances corresponding to the performance acceptance. More specifically, the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) is made invisible (invisible) at a specific timing that arrives after timing tr43, regardless of when the performance is accepted within the set time (valid period), whereas the post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) is maintained in an output state for a predetermined period of time from the timing when the performance is accepted.

However, as shown in FIG. 213, regardless of the timing of the performance reception within the set time (valid period), it is desirable to set the post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) to maintain the output state at the time when the timing tr44 arrives when the "BGM playback sound" is returned from the suppressed state (silent state) to the output in the non-suppressed mode. In contrast, in the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display), in the performance example shown in FIG. 213, the output state is terminated at the timing tr44 when the "BGM playback sound" is returned to the output in the non-suppressed mode. That is, in this case, at the timing tr44, both the "BGM playback sound" is returned to the output in the non-suppressed mode and the content related to the display performance is switched, so that the performance is greatly changed and it is expected to increase the interest in the game. In addition, the "BGM playback sound" may be gradually returned by a method such as fading in when returning to the output in the non-suppressed mode. Furthermore, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) may end its output state not at timing tr44, but at a specific timing after timing tr44.

Also, in the example of the performance shown in FIG. 213, when the timing tr42 arrives at which the set time (valid period) is set, the performance display device 1600 displays a model image of the operation means to be operated in the high expectation suppression reception performance, and a gauge display indicating the remaining time until the set time has elapsed is also performed. In this regard, in the operation reception performance executed in the automatic reception mode, a message sound (e.g., "Push!") is output as the second allowable sound, so that the performance display device 1600 also displays a message display (e.g., "Push!") that does not appear in the operation reception performance executed in the non-automatic reception mode. Note that, as a display method for the model image, gauge display, and message display, for example, the method shown in FIG. 159 (R2) can be adopted, and these display images (model image, gauge display, message display) are hidden (all hidden at the same timing) at a stage when the set time has not yet elapsed based on the occurrence of the performance reception. The message display does not necessarily have to be completely consistent with the content of the message sound, and it is sufficient if it encourages the operation.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 213(g)-(i), the output state of the message sound is terminated (to an inaudible state) before the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is enabled within the set time (valid period), while the message display is maintained in a displayed state even at the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is enabled, and furthermore, after the automatic button function is enabled, the message display is not hidden (not visible) at least until the timing tr43 when the set time ends. The display state may be maintained even after that. Note that the set time (valid period) ends when the performance is accepted, so in reality, it ends at the latest when the timing tr42A when the automatic button is enabled arrives. Therefore, strictly speaking, the "timing tr43 when the set time ends" means the timing when the set time ends if it were to continue, and is the timing that arrives when the time set at timing tr42 has elapsed from said timing tr42.

With this configuration, when a performance is accepted due to the automatic button function being enabled, the output state of the message sound (second permissible sound) will not be terminated halfway (inaudible state), and the message display will not be hidden halfway through the set time, so it is possible to suggest to the player that the performance has not been accepted due to the detection of an operation on the operation target prompted by the message sound (second permissible sound) or message display. In other words, in this case, even if the operating means on the side that is not prompted to be operated by the message sound or message display is operated by mistake, it is possible to suggest that a performance has not been accepted due to that operation.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in both the operation reception performance not executed in the automatic button mode (Fig. 212) and the operation reception performance executed in the automatic button mode (Fig. 213), a remaining time display (gauge display) can be performed within the set time (validity period) to indicate the time remaining until the end of the state in which the performance reception is permitted. In the operation reception performance not executed in the automatic button mode (Fig. 212), the remaining time display (gauge display) is dynamically displayed based on the time until the set time has elapsed. That is, in this case, the less time there is until the set time has elapsed, the less the gauge amount becomes, and when this time reaches "0", the gauge amount also becomes "0".

In contrast, in an operation acceptance performance (Fig. 213) executed in the automatic button mode, if a specific timing tr42A arrives within the set time without any operation detection, the automatic button function is enabled and performance acceptance occurs automatically, and as described above, after the specific timing tr42A arrives, performance acceptance is no longer permitted even if the set time has not yet elapsed. Therefore, if a "remaining time display (gauge display) indicating the remaining time until the end of the state in which performance acceptance is permitted" is to be performed within the set time of such an operation acceptance performance (Fig. 213), it is usually conceivable to dynamically display the remaining time display (gauge display) based on the time until the specific timing tr42A arrives.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, in the operation reception performance (Fig. 213) executed in the automatic button mode, even though performance reception is not permitted after the specific timing tr42A arrives, the remaining time display (gauge display) is dynamically displayed based on the time until the set time has elapsed, not the time until the specific timing tr42A arrives. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the set time has elapsed decreases, and when the set time becomes "0", the gauge amount is dynamically displayed so that it also becomes "0". However, in this case, since the state in which performance reception is not permitted is always shifted to before the set time becomes "0", the state in which performance reception is not permitted will be shifted to when there is still a gauge amount remaining.

With this configuration, when the automatic button function is enabled and a performance is accepted, the gauge amount in the remaining time display (gauge display) is intentionally left, which makes it possible to suggest to the player that there is a risk of "losing an opportunity to operate" against the player's will, and thus makes it possible to encourage the player to operate at an early stage during the set time (validity period) from the next time onwards, regardless of the gauge amount remaining.

Moreover, in the operation reception performance (FIG. 213) executed in the automatic button mode according to this embodiment, when performance reception occurs due to operation detection, the remaining time display (gauge display) can be made invisible (invisible) before the set time has elapsed. In contrast, when performance reception occurs due to activation of the automatic button function (specific timing tr42A), the remaining time display (gauge display) is not made invisible when the set time has not yet elapsed, and the "dynamic display mode in which the suggested remaining time (gauge amount) gradually decreases" is maintained at least until the set time has elapsed.

With this configuration, when a performance is accepted due to the automatic button function being enabled, the remaining time display (gauge display) will continue to be dynamically displayed at least until the set time has elapsed, making it possible to suggest to the player that the performance has not been accepted due to the detection of an operation on an operation target for which an operation has been prompted by a message sound or message display. In other words, in this case, even if an operation means for which an operation has not been prompted by a message sound or message display has been erroneously operated, it will be possible to suggest that a performance has not been accepted due to that operation.

As mentioned above, in the operation reception performance that occurs at timing tr42 in FIG. 213, there are two cases: "the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target" and "the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target" based on the result of the advance notice performance judgment. In other words, in this case, since there is a possibility of confusion as to which operation means is the operation target after the set time (valid period) during which the performance reception is allowed occurs, it is desirable to set the set time to a relatively long time such as 5 seconds. In contrast, in the operation reception performance that occurs at timing tr32 in FIG. 212, there is no "case of selecting the sword decoration 5001 as the operation target", and the operation button 410 is always used as the operation target, so it is desirable to set the set time to a relatively short time such as 3 seconds. In this case, it is desirable to set the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is enabled after the timing 3 seconds have elapsed since the set time (valid period) occurs in order to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player loses the operation opportunity against his will.

In addition, in the operation acceptance presentation that occurs at timing tr42 in FIG. 213, if an operating means that is not the operation target is operated, it is desirable that the presentation be accepted and a post-operation presentation be executed even if the operating means that is the operation target is operated while maintaining the erroneous operation state. In other words, if a situation arises in which the presentation is not accepted despite the operation of the operating means, the player may become confused, and in such a situation it would be cruel to interrupt the erroneous operation state and then further request operation of the correct operating means, so it is desirable that the presentation be accepted when the operating means that is the operation target is operated, even if the erroneous operation state is maintained.

In addition, in the example of the performance shown in FIG. 213, it is possible to appropriately adopt the matters described in the above-mentioned "Suppressed Operation Sound Output Processing (FIG. 142)" and its other examples. In other words, in this case, the timings tr40, tr42, tr42a, tr43, and tr44 in the example of the performance shown in FIG. 213 correspond to the timings ts12, ts13, ts14, ts15, and ts16 in the example of the performance shown in FIG. 142, respectively.

However, as mentioned above, in a suppressed operation acceptance performance, a specific type of performance sound is output in a suppressed manner or silently when an operation opportunity is granted, so there is a concern that the performance quality will be poorer than in a non-suppressed operation acceptance performance. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the acceptance allowable sound output when a suppressed operation acceptance performance occurs can be output as a sound that maintains an output state for a longer period of time than the acceptance allowable sound output when a non-suppressed operation acceptance performance occurs.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, multiple modes (e.g., multiple modes including a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode) in which the time for which the output state is maintained is different are prepared as the first permissible sound, and one of the multiple modes is selectively output as the first permissible sound based on the result of the advance notice performance judgment. Here, the "first mode" as the first permissible sound is the mode shown in Figs. 212(c) and (g) and Figs. 213(c) and (g), and is set as the mode in which the "time for which the output state is maintained" is the shortest among the multiple modes. In addition, it is desirable to make the probability (expectation) of the appearance of the jackpot pattern when the pattern variation is stopped different depending on which of the multiple modes the first permissible sound is output in.

The decisions as to "which of the multiple modes to output as the first permissible sound" and "which of the multiple operating means to use as the operation target" may be obtained as separate judgment results within the preview performance judgment, or may be obtained as a single judgment result within the preview performance judgment. However, it is desirable that at least the first mode among the multiple modes be selectable as the first permissible sound in both cases, that is, when the "operation button 410" is the operation target and when the "sword decoration 5001" is the operation target. The second and third modes may also be selectable in both cases, that is, when the "operation button 410" is the operation target and when the "sword decoration 5001" is the operation target.

Figure 214 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when the second mode is used as the first reception allowable sound when the high expectation suppression reception presentation is executed in the automatic reception mode.

As shown in FIG. 214, this example of the performance is basically the same as the example of the performance described above with reference to FIG. 213, including the conditions for its occurrence and the content of the performance (as well as other examples). However, this example of the performance is different in that, as a result of a preview performance determination, at timing tr41, the first permissible sound is output in a second mode that is longer than the first mode, rather than in the first mode, and here the output state of the first permissible sound is maintained for a longer period of time than the second permissible sound.

With this configuration, the acceptance allowance sound output when a suppressed operation acceptance effect occurs can be output as a sound that maintains an output state for a longer period of time than the acceptance allowance sound (first mode) output when a non-suppressed operation acceptance effect occurs, so that the presentation can be favorably maintained even in a situation where "BGM playback (specific type of presentation sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silently when an operation opportunity is granted.

In addition, in order to improve the presentation quality of the suppression operation reception presentation, it is desirable to use, for the first permissible sound output in the second mode, a sound that is not output as a reception permissible sound in the operation reception presentation shown in FIG. 212.

213 and 214, on the other hand, it is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is the operation target in both cases, in which "the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target" and "the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target" are selected based on the result of the advance notice performance judgment. Therefore, in this performance example, the second allowable sound is output in the same manner (for example, "Push!") as in the performance example shown in FIG. 213. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 214(c) and (g), even when the first allowable sound is output in the second manner, the output state of the first allowable sound is terminated (inaudible state) before the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is enabled, so that even in this performance example, it is possible to estimate how much time is left until the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is enabled from the output state of the reception allowable sound.

In particular, in this example, by checking whether the output state of the first allowable sound is maintained even after the output state of the "second allowable sound" output in the example shown in FIG. 213 has ended, it becomes possible to estimate in more detail than in the example shown in FIG. 213 how much time is left until the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is enabled arrives. Also, by outputting only the first allowable sound of the first and second allowable sounds in a longer different mode (second mode), the player can first estimate the "remaining time until timing tr42A arrives" based on the timing at which the output state of the commonly used second allowable sound ends, and then, with the peace of mind of having made a normal guess, can make a more detailed guess using the first allowable sound in a challenging manner, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the performance example shown in FIG. 214, other matters are the same as in the performance example shown in FIG. 213. For example, if a performance is accepted when the reception-permitted sound is in an output state, the output state is terminated midway, which is also the same as in the performance example shown in FIG. 213.

In addition, when the "special presentation mode" is set, if the high expectation suppression reception presentation (Fig. 213, Fig. 214) occurs, it is desirable to set the timing at which the automatic button function is enabled to be earlier than timing tr42A within the set time. However, in this case, since the automatic button function can be enabled by the player's will, it is desirable to set the message display output state to be hidden before timing tr43 (the timing at which the presentation is accepted, or the timing delayed by the above-mentioned time) even if the presentation is accepted by enabling the automatic button function, rather than maintaining the message display output state until timing tr43. In addition, in this case, the timing at which the automatic button function is enabled does not arrive in the output state when the first permissible sound is output in the first mode, but arrives in the output state when the first permissible sound is output in the second mode, and it is desirable to function to end the first permissible sound output in the second mode halfway.

In addition, not only may the time for which the output state is maintained differ between when the first permissible sound (sound effect as a reception permissible sound) is output in the first manner and when the first permissible sound (sound effect as a reception permissible sound) is output in the second manner, but different sound effects may also be used. For example, when the first permissible sound (sound effect as a reception permissible sound) is output in the first manner, a sound effect such as "beep" may be output, and when the first permissible sound (sound effect as a reception permissible sound) is output in the second manner, a sound effect such as "grrr."

In the above explanation example, the low expectation fluctuation pattern is defined as "a fluctuation pattern in which even a reach state is not formed", but it may be defined as "a fluctuation pattern in which the pattern stops without an SP reach state being reached", and the performance example shown in FIG. 212 may be performed when a specific fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expectation fluctuation patterns.

In addition, it is desirable that the "suppressed/automatic reception effect" illustrated in the above description example does not appear in the low expectation fluctuation pattern (the corresponding effect pattern) in the normal game state, but the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect" illustrated in the above description example can also appear in the high expectation fluctuation pattern (the corresponding effect pattern), including the above "specific fluctuation pattern" in the normal game state. In other words, even in the high expectation fluctuation pattern (the corresponding effect pattern), during the period before the performance progresses to the SP reach state, such as the non-reach state, the performance that also appears in the low expectation fluctuation pattern (the corresponding effect pattern) is basically executed, so that the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect" illustrated in FIG. 212 can also appear during that period. Even with this configuration, when the "suppressed/automatic reception effect" appears (high expectation fluctuation pattern), the probability (expectation level) of the big win pattern appearing when the pattern fluctuation is stopped is higher than when the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect" appears (low expectation fluctuation pattern or high expectation fluctuation pattern).

In addition, in the low expectation fluctuation pattern (the corresponding presentation pattern) that occurs during normal game play, when an operation opportunity is given, it is desirable that "BGM playback (specific type of presentation sound)" is not output in a suppressed mode or in silence, and that low expectation non-suppressed reception presentation is not executed in an automatic reception mode. Note that this applies when the "special presentation mode" is not set, or when the pachinko machine 1 is not equipped with a "special presentation mode."

The length of time from "timing tr42A when the automatic button function is enabled" to "timing tr43 when the set time has elapsed since the performance acceptance is permitted" may be the minimum time in the control (processing) unit (for example, one frame) or may be a time of two or more frames. For example, if the message display is visible at "timing tr42A when the automatic button function is enabled" and this visible state continues at least until "timing tr43 when the set time has elapsed since the performance acceptance is permitted" arrives, it is possible to suggest the original length of the set time (validity period), and it is possible to have the possibility of recognizing that the player has not performed an operation. In the operation acceptance performance executed in the automatic acceptance mode, it is desirable to output the message sound (second acceptable sound) or message display in the above-mentioned relationship (see Figures 213 (h), (i) and Figures 214 (h), (i)) for the "timing when the automatic button function is enabled" within the set time in any operation acceptance performance.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "time that the message display remains after the performance acceptance is made (in the example in the figure, the time from timing tr42A to tr43)" in FIG. 213(i) and FIG. 214(i) is made to appear when the performance acceptance occurs at other timings (such as FIG. 212(e) and FIG. 213(e)) by sharing the program, but it may be made to appear only when the automatic button function is enabled by using a separate program. That is, in this case, in the example shown in FIG. 212(e), the operation-related display is made non-display at timing tr32a, and in the example shown in FIG. 213(e), the operation-related display is made non-display at timing tr42a.

In the above explanation (FIGS. 212 to 214), the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) on the performance display device 1600 (first performance component) and the post-operation performance sound output (sound performance) by the speaker (second performance component) are started simultaneously, but the post-operation performance may be performed so that the start times of these performances are staggered. For example, in a situation where the post-operation performance sound output (sound performance) by the speaker (second performance component) is started at timing tr42, the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) is not yet displayed on the performance display device 1600 (first performance component), and the display of the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) is started in accordance with the timing at which the operation-related display shown in FIGS. 212 to 214 is hidden (or the timing at which the fade-out process is started), so that the display performance can be switched smoothly.

As explained in the above "Suppressed Operation Sound Output Processing (FIG. 142)", in the example of the effects shown in FIG. 213 and FIG. 214, the premonition effect (for example, the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect") may be performed in a period before the set time (valid period) during which the effect acceptance is permitted. In this case, it is preferable to prepare multiple modes of the premonition effect with different expected probability of the appearance of the big win pattern, and perform the premonition effect in one of these modes. In this case, it is also preferable to prepare multiple modes for the premonition effect sound to be output during the period in which the premonition effect is performed, and select which of the multiple modes to output as the premonition effect sound according to the execution mode of the premonition effect. In contrast, the first permissible sound is output in one of multiple modes including the first mode and the second mode while the model image to be operated, the gauge display indicating the remaining time, and the message display "Push!" are displayed.

In the performance examples shown in Figures 212 to 214, when the operation reception performance shown in Figures 213 and 214 occurs, a specific sound (the first permissible sound of the second mode or the second permissible sound) that is not output when the operation reception performance shown in Figure 212 occurs can be output as a reception permissible sound, which makes it possible to preferably suppress a loss of performance when the suppressed operation reception performance occurs. Also, by checking the type of reception permissible sound, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation reception performance is occurring in the automatic reception mode rather than the non-automatic reception mode.

Furthermore, for the acceptable sound in the non-suppressed operation reception performance (Fig. 212), there is a first acceptable sound that outputs the acceptable sound as a sound effect, and a second acceptable sound that outputs the acceptable sound as a message sound. However, the second acceptable sound is not provided and only the first acceptable sound is output, whereas for the acceptable sound in the suppressed operation reception performance (Figs. 213 and 214), both the first acceptable sound and the second acceptable sound are output. This makes it possible to maintain the performance quality when the suppressed operation reception performance is being performed.

In addition, in the above example of the performance, between the non-suppression operation acceptance performance (Figure 212) and the suppression operation acceptance performance (Figures 213 and 214), there are cases where the same performance sound is output as the first permissible sound (Figures 212 and 213), and cases where different performance sounds are output as the first permissible sound (Figures 212 and 214).

That is, if a different reception allowable sound is output than in normal times, it becomes difficult to recognize that the performance reception is permitted, and an opportunity to operate may be lost. Therefore, it is desirable to output the second allowable sound (message sound) as a sound that is not output in normal times, while outputting the first allowable sound (sound effect) as a sound that is output even in normal times. Then, while the reception allowable sound is output in this manner, the first allowable sound (sound effect) is also output with a predetermined probability as a performance sound (second manner) that is not output in normal times, and at this time, the rate (expectation level) of the appearance of a jackpot pattern is made higher than when it is output in the first manner, so that the performance can be appropriately maintained when the "BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)" is output in a suppressed manner or silently, while making it possible to recognize that the performance reception is permitted. To achieve this effect, when a suppression operation acceptance presentation occurs (a specific variation pattern occurs), it is desirable to make the proportion of presentation judgments such as advance notice presentation judgments in which it is determined that the first mode is to be output as the first acceptance permissible sound higher than the proportion of judgments that the second mode is to be output.

In the performance examples shown in Figures 212 to 214, not only in the operation reception performance (Figure 212) executed in the non-automatic reception mode, but also in the operation reception performance (Figures 213 and 214) executed in the automatic reception mode, when the performance occurs, a reception permission sound may be output to indicate that a state in which reception is permitted has been entered, or to indicate that reception will be permitted, so that it is possible to preferably prevent a situation in which a performance reception is automatically generated due to forgetting to operate, resulting in the loss of one's own opportunity to operate.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 213 and FIG. 214, a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) is set when timing tr41 arrives, and it is determined whether specific timing tr42A arrives within this set time (valid period), and if specific timing tr42A arrives without performance acceptance corresponding to the operation detection, performance acceptance is automatically generated. With this configuration, it is possible to start the post-operation performance within a preset period (set time) regardless of whether an operation has been performed, so that it is possible to make the button automatic without making the flow of the subsequent performance different between when an operation has been performed and when it has not, or without causing a delay in the performance.

In addition, in the above example of the performance, a "message sound (second permissible sound) urging an operation to be performed" may be output as the permissible reception sound, and this message sound (second permissible sound) is not output in an "operation reception performance executed in a non-automatic reception mode" in which the performance is not accepted unless an operation is performed, but is output only in an "operation reception performance executed in an automatic reception mode" in which the performance is accepted even if no operation is performed.

That is, it may be thought that a message sound (second acceptable sound) that directly indicates that an operation should be performed or many types of acceptable reception sounds (first acceptable sound, second acceptable sound) should be output in the operation reception performance executed in the non-automatic reception mode, but since there is usually a risk of a performance executed in a mode with low expectations in the post-operation performance, it is not necessarily good for improving the interest in the game to operate so that the post-operation performance is performed. In this regard, since the "operation reception performance executed in the non-automatic reception mode" is a performance in which it is permitted to make a choice such as "not generating the post-operation performance on purpose", in such a performance, it is desirable to avoid directly expressing that an operation should be performed as a message (second acceptable sound) and not output a message sound (second acceptable sound), and to output a message sound (second acceptable sound) or many types of acceptable reception sounds only in the "operation reception performance executed in the automatic reception mode" in which there is no choice of whether or not to generate the post-operation performance. In addition, in the "operation reception performance executed in the non-automatic reception mode", if the set time ends without the performance being received, the post-operation performance or related performance will not be performed, so the performance will progress without any indication of the degree of expectation. In the non-automatic reception performance, a message sound is not output for any operation reception performance, but the "operation reception performance executed in the automatic reception mode" may include a type of operation reception performance for which a message sound is not output.

As described above, this pachinko machine 1 provides multiple message sounds (second allowable sounds) (such as "Press!" and "Sheathe your sword!"), and in the example of the performance shown in FIG. 213 and FIG. 214, one of the multiple sounds is selectively output depending on whether the object to which the operation opportunity is given is the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 (based on the result of the advance performance determination). In this case, when the object to which the operation opportunity is given is the operation button 410 and the corresponding message sound ("Press!") is output, the probability (expectation) of the appearance of a performance mode suggesting that "when the pattern fluctuation is stopped, a jackpot pattern will appear" in the post-operation performance corresponding to the performance reception is lower than when the object to which the operation opportunity is given is the sword decoration 5001 and the corresponding message sound ("Sheathe your sword!") is output. The probability (expectation) of the appearance of the performance mode may be 0% or 100%.

In contrast, in the example of the performance shown in FIG. 212, the message sound (second acceptable sound) is not output, and when the message sound (second acceptable sound) is not output, the operation object is not the sword ornament 5001, the operation button 410 is used as the operation object, and an operation reception performance executed in a non-automatic reception mode occurs. Moreover, at least in the normal game state, the probability (expectation) of the appearance of a performance mode suggesting that "when the pattern variation is stopped, a jackpot pattern appears" in a post-operation performance executed when a performance acceptance is made in an operation acceptance performance in which a message sound is not output is lower than the probability (expectation) of the appearance of a performance mode suggesting that "when the pattern variation is stopped, a jackpot pattern appears" in a post-operation performance executed when a performance acceptance is made in an operation acceptance performance in which a message sound is output. The probability (expectation) of the appearance of the above performance mode may be 0% or 100%.

According to this configuration, when an operation reception performance occurs, first, "whether a message sound (second acceptable sound) is output" becomes a branching point for knowing the level of expectation, and when the message sound (second acceptable sound) is output, the level of expectation can be known by its mode. Even if the operation button 410 is used as the operation target, when the message sound (second acceptable sound) is output, the post-operation performance can be enjoyed with a relatively high level of expectation. Therefore, when the message sound (second acceptable sound) is output, it is desirable to prevent the post-operation performance from being overlooked by executing the post-operation performance in the automatic reception mode. On the other hand, when the message sound (second acceptable sound) is not output, the expectation becomes relatively low, and the "sword decoration 5001", which is used only when the expectation is high, will not become the operation target. In other words, in this case, it is desirable to grant the player the right to choose whether to generate the post-operation performance by executing the post-operation performance in the non-automatic reception mode.

In addition, in the operation reception performance executed in FIG. 213 and FIG. 214, when the set time (valid period) occurs, a message sound is output and a message display is displayed. In this regard, as shown in FIG. 213(g)-(i) and FIG. 214(g)-(i), the message sound is output (becomes inaudible) before the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is enabled within the set time (valid period), whereas the message display is maintained in a displayed state even at the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is enabled, and furthermore, after the automatic button function is enabled, it is not hidden (not visible) at least until the timing tr43 when the set time ends. In other words, in this case, when the performance is accepted by the player's operation within the set time, the message display can be hidden before the set time has elapsed according to the performance acceptance, but if the automatic button function is enabled within the set time, the message display ("Push!" or "Sheathe your sword!") will continue to be displayed at least until the set time ends.

With this configuration, when a performance is accepted due to the automatic button function being enabled, the output state of the message sound (second permissible sound) will not be terminated halfway (inaudible state), and the message display will not be hidden halfway through the set time, so it is possible to suggest to the player that the performance has not been accepted due to the detection of an operation on the operation target prompted by the message sound (second permissible sound) or message display. In other words, in this case, even if the operating means on the side that is not prompted to be operated by the message sound or message display is operated by mistake, it is possible to suggest that a performance has not been accepted due to that operation.

In addition, in the operation acceptance presentation (Figs. 213 and 214) in which the automatic button function is enabled, when the presentation acceptance is made due to the automatic button function being enabled at timing tr42A, the gauge amount in the remaining time display (gauge display) is intentionally left, which makes it possible to suggest to the player that there is a risk of "losing an operation opportunity" against the player's will, and thus makes it possible to encourage the player to perform an operation at an early stage in the set time (validity period) from the next time onwards, regardless of the gauge amount remaining.

In addition, in operation acceptance effects (Figures 213 and 214) in which the automatic button function is enabled, if the effect acceptance is made as a result of the automatic button function being enabled, the remaining time display (gauge display) continues to be dynamically displayed at least until the set time has elapsed. This makes it possible to suggest to the player that the effect acceptance is not occurring due to the detection of an operation on an operation target for which an operation has been prompted by a message sound or message display. In other words, in this case, even if an operation means on the side for which an operation has not been prompted by a message sound or message display has been erroneously operated, it is possible to suggest that an effect acceptance caused by that operation has not occurred.

In addition, since the same presentation sound (first permissible sound of the first mode) is output as the acceptance allowable sound in the operation acceptance presentation shown in FIG. 212 and the operation acceptance presentation shown in FIG. 213, even if any operation acceptance presentation occurs, it is possible to properly inform the player that an operation opportunity is given. Moreover, since the operation acceptance presentation shown in FIG. 213 also outputs the second permissible sound that is not output in the operation acceptance presentation shown in FIG. 212, it is possible to recognize which of the operation acceptance presentations is occurring. Furthermore, in the operation acceptance presentation executed in the automatic acceptance mode in a specific variation pattern (presentation pattern corresponding to the specific variation pattern), the rate of execution in the mode shown in FIG. 213 is relatively high, and the rate of execution in the mode shown in FIG. 214 is relatively low, and when executed in the mode shown in FIG. 214, the rate of stopping at the jackpot pattern is relatively high. In other words, in this case, while it is possible to avoid missing the post-operation performance, the first permissible sound is output in the "second mode" that is not used in the operation reception performance shown in FIG. 212, rather than in the "first mode," which increases the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the presentation examples shown in Figures 213 and 214, compared to the presentation example shown in Figure 212, the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) can be used as a presentation sound (Figure 214) whose output state is maintained for a long period of time, making it possible to preferably maintain the presentation quality when "BGM playback (specific type of presentation sound)" is being output in a suppressed mode or silently.

In addition, in the example of the performance (suppression operation reception performance) shown in Fig. 213 and Fig. 214, the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is not necessarily used as the performance sound (second mode) whose output state is maintained for a long time, and the same reception allowable sound (first allowable sound of the first mode) as when the non-suppression operation reception performance (Fig. 212) occurs can also be generated. In addition, when the first allowable sound is output with the performance sound (second mode) whose output state is maintained for a long time (Fig. 214), the rate of the pattern stopping with the jackpot pattern is made higher than when the first allowable sound is output with the performance sound (first mode) whose output state is maintained for only a short time (Fig. 213), thereby adding a new performance. This makes it possible to appropriately maintain the performance when the "BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)" is output in the suppressed mode or silently while making the player recognize that the performance reception is permitted.

In addition, in the performance examples shown in Figures 212 to 214, when the first permissible sound is output with a performance sound (second mode) that maintains an output state for a long time (Figure 214), if a performance acceptance is made during the period in which the first permissible sound is output, the sound is made to be in a non-output (inaudible) state even in the middle of the output (see Figure 214 (c)). In contrast, when the first permissible sound is output with a performance sound (first mode) that maintains an output state for a short time (Figures 212 and 213), only if the first permissible sound is output in a "suppressed operation acceptance performance" or an "operation acceptance performance executed in an automatic acceptance mode" (Figure 213), if a performance acceptance is made during the output, the sound is made to be in a non-output (inaudible) state at that point (see Figures 212 (c) and 213 (c)). That is, in this case, in the operation acceptance performance shown in Figure 212, even if a performance acceptance is made when the first permissible sound is in an output state, the output state is maintained until the end of the playback data as the first permissible sound. Note that the first permissible sound is in an output state during the period from timing tr41 to tr42, but since no performance is accepted during this period even if an operation is detected, it goes without saying that the output state of the first permissible sound will not be interrupted.

That is, as described above, in the non-suppression operation reception effect, unlike the suppression operation reception effect, the operation reception effect occurs without suppressing the "BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)", so there is a relatively high possibility of missing the post-operation effect, and when the operation reception mode is executed in the non-automatic reception mode, there is a possibility that the post-operation effect cannot be generated, unlike when the operation reception mode is executed in the automatic reception mode, so when these operation reception effects occur, it is expected that some players will repeatedly tap before the set time occurs. However, in this case, if the operation is detected by repeated tapping, there is a concern that it will be difficult to understand whether the effect occurred as a post-operation effect or a notice effect unrelated to the operation, so it is desirable to eliminate such concerns by maintaining the output state until the end of the playback data as the first permissible sound (Figure 212). On the other hand, in the suppression operation reception effect and the non-automatic reception effect, there is no need to repeatedly tap, so in order to suppress such play by such repeated tapping, it is desirable to make it difficult to recognize whether the first permissible sound was output in the first mode or the second mode when the player is repeatedly tapping (output is stopped at an intermediate stage).

Even if the effect is accepted by the player's operation within the set time, if the operation is detected late, such as immediately before the automatic button function is enabled, the message display may continue to be displayed until the end of the set time, or the remaining time display (gauge display) may continue to be dynamically displayed until the end of the set time (such as the standardization of the programs mentioned above).

As mentioned above, in the post-operation performance, there is usually a risk of the performance being executed in a mode with low expectation, so operating to perform the post-operation performance is not necessarily good for improving the interest in the game. In this regard, in the performance example shown in FIG. 212 (non-automatic reception performance), a mode (first mode) is used in which the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output for a sufficient time to suggest that the performance reception is allowed and then terminated relatively early, creating "time to determine whether or not to generate the performance reception" while the reception allowable sound is not being output. In contrast, in the automatic reception performance (FIGS. 213 and 214), since there is no need to create such time, in addition to the case where the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output in the same mode (first mode), there is also a case where the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output in a longer mode (second mode), suggesting that the expectation level differs depending on the mode. Furthermore, by maintaining the output state of the acceptance sound for a relatively long period of time, it is possible to indicate that the automatic button function has not yet been enabled, which in turn encourages the player to operate the machine with a sense of security.

In addition, in the automatic reception performance (Figures 213 and 214), even when the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) is output in a long mode (second mode) (Figure 214), the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) is made inaudible before the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is enabled arrives, and the two reception permissible sounds (first permissible sound, second permissible sound) are each terminated at different timings.

This makes it possible to recognize that the timing tr42 at which the automatic button function is enabled will not arrive until the reception permissible sounds (first permissible sound, second permissible sound) become inaudible, and when they become inaudible, it can be suggested that the automatic button function will soon be enabled unless an operation is performed quickly. At this time, it is desirable to change at least one of the volume and pitch of the sound as time passes, at least in the longer mode (second mode) and in the second permissible sound that maintains an output state longer than the first permissible sound of the first mode, in order to make it easier to recognize how much time has passed.

In addition, in the operation acceptance presentation shown in Figures 213 and 214, when an operation opportunity is granted, "BGM playback (specific type of presentation sound)" is output in a suppressed or silent mode, and thus, when a post-operation presentation occurs, a presentation sound corresponding to this is output prominently. In this regard, with regard to the reception permissible sound output when such a suppressed operation acceptance presentation occurs, if a presentation is accepted while the reception permissible sound is in an output state, the output state is terminated based on the fact that the presentation has been accepted, so that the presentation sound corresponding to the post-operation presentation can be emphasized without being disturbed by the reception permissible sound.

In the above example of the performance, when a "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception performance" occurs, even if the performance reception is made when the reception permissible sound is in the output state, this is not interrupted, and the output state is maintained. However, instead of this, only when the "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception performance" is in a relatively high expectation situation, such as when it occurs in an SP reach state within a high expectation fluctuation pattern (the performance pattern corresponding to the high expectation fluctuation pattern), it may be interrupted if the performance reception is made when the reception permissible sound (even if the same performance sound (first mode) is output as the first permissible sound) is in the output state, in order to encourage concentration on the performance.

In the presentation examples shown in Figures 213 and 214, a case is described where a "suppressed/automatic reception presentation" occurs, but it is also possible to allow "unsuppressed/automatic reception presentation" and "suppressed/non-automatic reception presentation" to occur, and to have the presentation progress in the same manner even when a "unsuppressed/automatic reception presentation" or "suppressed/non-automatic reception presentation" occurs.

In addition, when a high expectation suppression reception effect occurs, it is desirable to be able to output a third mode as the first permissible sound, in which the output time is maintained for a longer period of time than the first mode (Fig. 213) or the second mode (Fig. 214), and to make it so that when the third mode is output, the probability of a jackpot pattern appearing when the pattern variation is stopped is higher than when the first or second mode is output. With this configuration, it becomes possible to recognize the degree of expectation by paying attention to how long the output time of the first permissible sound continues, and it becomes possible to more appropriately maintain interest in playing within the set time (valid period) during which reception of the effect is permitted.

In this case, it is also desirable to maintain the third mode in an output state until the timing tr42A arrives at which the automatic button function is enabled. That is, in this case, when paying attention to how long the output time of the first permissible sound continues, the longer it takes to confirm that the state is output as the third mode, rather than the first or second mode, the higher the risk that the automatic button function will be enabled, and this makes it possible to preferably maintain a sense of tension within the set time (validity period) during which performance acceptance is permitted. Other matters when the third mode is output, such as the fact that if a performance acceptance is made while the third mode is in an output state, this is interrupted, are the same as those described in Figures 213 and 214.

The automatic button function may be set to always be activated when timing tr42A in a specific fluctuation pattern (or corresponding presentation pattern) occurs, or may be set to be activated when timing tr42A in a specific fluctuation pattern (or corresponding presentation pattern) occurs when a jackpot has been obtained, but not activated when timing tr42A in a specific fluctuation pattern (or corresponding presentation pattern) occurs when a jackpot has not been obtained.

Multiple types of effects may be prepared as non-automatic reception effects in which the automatic button is not activated within a set time (valid period), and in some of these effects, the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound, second allowable sound) may not be output when the set time (valid period) occurs. In other words, in this case, when the set time (valid period) during which reception of effects is allowed occurs, there may be "0" reception allowable sounds, "1" reception allowable sound (first allowable sound), or "2" reception allowable sounds (first allowable sound, second allowable sound), and the pachinko machine 1 may suggest to what degree it is "urging operation."

As a method for hiding the message display or remaining time display (gauge display), a method of starting to fade out when the time to hide it arrives may be used.

In the example of effects shown in Figures 213 and 214, "BGM playback (specific type of effect sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silently during the period from timing tr40 to tr44, but instead, it may be in a non-output state (the playback period in which audible sounds are recorded in the sound data has ended, or channel allocation has ended, etc.). That is, in this case, at timing tr44, "BGM playback (specific type of effect sound)" as new data is assigned to a channel and put into an output state.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, as described above, when a specific variation pattern is selected from among the high expectation variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into an SP reach (such as a reach performance accompanied by a background change) as a result of the variation pattern judgment, regardless of which result is obtained as the performance judgment (preview judgment, etc.), when the performance of the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach, the operation acceptance performance (valid period) during which the performance acceptance is permitted is changed to:
- A "suppressed reception performance (see Figs. 213(a) and (b) and Figs. 214(a) and (b))" in which a set time during which the performance reception is permitted while the "sound of BGM playback" corresponding to the variation pattern is output in a suppressed mode or in silence is set, and - even if an operation on the operation means that is the object of operation is not detected within the set time during which the performance reception is permitted (timing tr42 to tr43), when timing tr42A within the set time arrives, the performance reception is automatically generated internally (the automatic button function is enabled), and a post-operation performance is started based on the fact that the performance reception has been made. "Automatic reception mode (see Figs. 213(j) and Fig. 214(j))
This is done as a "suppression/automatic reception effect" executed by the above.

Also, at this time, based on the result of the performance judgment (preview performance judgment), it is judged in which of the multiple modes including the first mode and the second mode the sound effect (first permissible sound) of the reception permissible sounds is to be output, and in which of the multiple modes including the first mode and the second mode the message sound (second permissible sound) of the reception permissible sounds is to be output as "Press!" or "Sheathe your sword!", and the reception permissible sounds (first permissible sound, second permissible sound) are output in the mode corresponding to the judgment result, as described above (Fig. 213, Fig. 214). And, as also described above, when the second mode is output as the first permissible sound, the expectation is higher than when the first mode is output, and when "Sheathe your sword!" is output as the second permissible sound, the expectation is higher than when "Press!" is output. At this time, it is preferable to set the order of expectation as "2nd mode & sheathe your sword!", "2nd mode & press!", "1st mode & sheathe your sword!", and "1st mode & press!" in order to maintain the interest in the game when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation means.

As mentioned above, in the "suppression/automatic reception performance" according to the above performance example, regardless of which of the multiple modes is output as the first permissible sound, if the performance is accepted while the first permissible sound is in the output state, the performance is interrupted (see Figures 213 and 214). Similarly, regardless of whether the second permissible sound is "Push!" or "Sheathe your sword!", if the performance is accepted while the second permissible sound is in the output state, the performance is interrupted.

However, instead of this, when the performance reception is made when the first allowable sound is in the output state in a mode other than the first mode among the multiple modes, the output state is terminated based on the fact that the performance reception has been made, but when the performance reception is made when the first allowable sound is in the output state in the first mode, the output state may be maintained without being terminated. That is, in this case, in the "suppression/automatic reception performance", even if the output state of the first allowable sound is interrupted midway and the expectation level cannot be recognized, it is possible to recognize that it is not the first mode, which is the least expected among the multiple modes, and it is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in playing. Also, even if a mode with low expectation appears in the post-operation performance, if the output state of the first allowable sound, which is the least expected among the multiple modes, is maintained, it is possible to recognize again that the performance state was one in which it was difficult to have expectations for the post-operation performance in the first place, making it easier to accept the result that appeared as the post-operation performance, and it is expected to suppress a significant decrease in interest in playing.

Even when such a modified example is adopted, if the "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect" occurs within the above-mentioned specified fluctuation pattern, it is as described with reference to FIG. 212, and if the first permissible sound is output in the second manner in the "suppressed, automatic reception effect" within the above-mentioned specific fluctuation pattern, it is as described with reference to FIG. 214. In other words, among the above-mentioned performance examples, the "performance mode shown in FIG. 213" when the first permissible sound is output in the first manner in the "suppressed, automatic reception effect" that appears within the specific fluctuation pattern is executed in place of the "performance mode shown in FIG. 215".

As shown in FIG. 215, the "performance mode shown in FIG. 215" is basically the same as the "performance mode shown in FIG. 213" and the other examples thereof. However, in the "performance mode shown in FIG. 215", even if a performance acceptance is made at timing tr42a when the first permissible sound is in an output state in the first mode, the output state is not interrupted by the performance acceptance, and the output state is maintained until the end of the playback data as the first permissible sound. In contrast, even if a "suppression/automatic acceptance performance" occurs within a specific variation pattern, when the first permissible sound is output in a mode (e.g., the second mode) different from the first mode with the lowest expectation among the multiple modes (e.g., FIG. 214(c)), when the performance acceptance is made at timing tr42a, the output state is interrupted based on the performance acceptance, as described above.

According to this configuration, when a "suppression/automatic reception performance" occurs within a specific fluctuation pattern, even if the performance reception is made at an early timing where it is difficult to confirm which aspect of the first allowable sound is, it is possible to recognize the degree of expectation by checking whether the output state of the first allowable sound ends as a trigger. In particular, in this performance example (Figures 213 and 215, etc.), the first allowable sound is output from timing tr41 before the occurrence of the set time (valid period) to timing tr42 when the set time is set, and the first allowable sound is not interrupted regardless of the aspect from the time when it becomes an output state at timing tr41 until the arrival of timing tr42, so that it can function as a time to "listen" for which aspect of the first allowable sound is.

In this regard, in the modified example shown in FIG. 215, a first mode in which the output state is not interrupted is prepared as one in which the output state is maintained for a shorter period of time than any of the other modes in which the output state is interrupted. As a result, even if a post-operation performance is started when the first permissible sound is being output in the first mode, it is possible to shorten the time during which the output states of the performance sound as the post-operation performance and the first permissible sound overlap, and this can prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, in the modified example shown in FIG. 215, the first permissible sound output in the first manner can also be output in the performance example shown in FIG. 212 (see FIG. 212(c)), and in this performance example, it is not interrupted as a result of performance acceptance, and the output state is maintained until the end of the playback data as the first permissible sound. Therefore, even if a situation arises in which the first permissible sound is not interrupted by performance acceptance, it can be provided as a natural performance.

However, when the second permissible sound is in the output state and a performance acceptance is made, the output state is interrupted based on the fact that the performance acceptance has been made, regardless of which mode is being output as the first permissible sound (see Fig. 214(d) and Fig. 215(d)). In other words, in this case, the first permissible sound serves the function of suggesting the degree of expectation when the performance acceptance is made early, whereas the second permissible sound serves the function of suggesting whether or not the situation is one in which the performance acceptance has been made by operation detection (a situation in which the opportunity to operate may be lost due to the automatic button function). By giving the acceptance permissible sound these different functions, it is possible to maintain interest in playing when an operation acceptance performance occurs.

On the other hand, the acceptance permission sound output when the operation acceptance effect shown in FIG. 212 occurs may be always output in the first mode, or may be output in a special mode, but it is desirable to maintain the output state without terminating it even if an effect is accepted when output in the special mode. Note that when output in the special mode, it is desirable to make the probability of a jackpot pattern appearing when the patterns stop higher than when output in the first mode. This probability may be 100%. There may be cases where the sound is output in a mode different from the first mode and the special mode.

In other words, in the operation reception presentation shown in FIG. 212, the "BGM playback (specific type of presentation sound)" is kept in an unsuppressed output state, and there is no problem with a lack of presentation quality. Therefore, it is more desirable to be able to confirm the state of the first permissible sound even in a situation where the post-operation presentation has started, and to be able to recognize the degree of expectation.

It goes without saying that in a "suppressed operation reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given while a specific type of sound effect is being output in a suppressed or silent mode, or in a non-output state," other sounds can be output in a non-suppressed mode even in a situation in which a specific type of sound effect is suppressed or inaudible.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned performance example, in the "suppressed operation reception performance (Figs. 213 to 215) in which an operation opportunity is given while a specific type of performance sound is output in a suppressed mode or silently, or in a non-output state," the accepted allowable sound output when the set time (valid period) occurs can be output in a non-suppressed mode in one of "multiple modes with different lengths of time maintained as an output state," and the expectation level (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) is made to differ depending on the output mode. In this regard, in the "non-suppressed operation reception performance in which an operation opportunity is given while a specific type of performance sound (e.g., BGM playback) is output in a non-suppressed mode," in addition to the case in which the accepted allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output in a non-suppressed mode in the first mode (Fig. 212), the accepted allowable sound (first allowable sound) may also be output in a mode different from the first mode (different length, different performance sound itself, etc.), and the expectation level (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) may differ depending on the output mode. With this configuration, the acceptance permission sound output when an "uninhibited operation acceptance effect" occurs and the acceptance permission sound output when a "suppressed operation acceptance effect" occurs can both be output in one of "multiple modes with different lengths of time that the output state is maintained for," and the degree of expectation differs depending on the output mode, so that in both the "uninhibited operation acceptance effect" and the "suppressed operation acceptance effect," interest in the game can be appropriately maintained until the effect is accepted.

Figure 216 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in which the first permissible sound is output in a specific manner when a "non-suppressed operation acceptance performance (here, a non-suppressed, non-automatic acceptance performance)" occurs.

As shown in FIG. 216, this example is basically the same as the example shown in FIG. 212 unless otherwise noted. However, in the non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect (timings tr31-tr33) of this example, a performance judgment is made as to which of the multiple modes in which the first permissible sound will be output when it occurs (for example, a notice performance judgment at the start of the pattern change). As a result of this performance judgment, as shown in FIG. 216(c) and (g), it is assumed that the sound will be output in a "specific mode" rather than the "first mode", and the performance situation is such that the probability of the jackpot pattern appearing when the pattern change is stopped is higher than when the sound is output in the "first mode". The specific mode is output for a longer period of time than the first mode.

As mentioned above, in both the "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect" and the "suppressed, automatic reception effect", when the operation reception effect occurs, the first permissible sound can be output in the first manner (see FIG. 212 or FIG. 213 (or FIG. 215)). In other words, in this case, in both the "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect" and the "suppressed, automatic reception effect", when the operation reception effect occurs, the same effect sound is output for the same period of time as the first permissible sound.

In contrast, when the first allowable sound is output in a specific manner when a "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception performance" occurs (FIG. 216) and when the first allowable sound is output in a second manner when a "suppressed, automatic reception performance" occurs (FIG. 214), different performance sounds are output as the first allowable sound for different periods of time. In this performance example, when the first allowable sound is output in the second manner, it is output for a longer period of time than when the first allowable sound is output in the specific manner.

On the other hand, however, when the same effect sound is output as the first allowable sound for the same period of time (see the first mode (FIG. 212 or FIG. 213 (or FIG. 215)), the expectation level (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) differs depending on whether the "first mode" is output when a "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 212)" occurs or when a "suppressed, automatic reception effect (FIG. 213 (or FIG. 215))" occurs. Note that here, the expectation level (probability) that suggests that a jackpot pattern will appear in the post-operation performance in response to the performance reception when the "first mode" appears when a "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 212)" occurs is lower than the expectation level (probability) that suggests that a jackpot pattern will appear in the post-operation performance in response to the performance reception when the "first mode" appears when a "suppressed, automatic reception effect (FIG. 213 (or FIG. 215))" occurs. The expectation level (probability) may be 0% or 100%.

In contrast, when different sound effects are output for different periods of time as the first allowable sound (when the "second mode (Fig. 214)" or the "specific mode (Fig. 216)" appears), the expectation level (probability of the appearance of a jackpot pattern) is set to be the same as a predetermined value regardless of whether the sound is output during the "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect" or the "suppressed, automatic reception effect." The expectation level (probability) may also be 0% or 100%.

With this configuration, even if the same sound effect is output for the same amount of time as the first allowable sound, the degree of expectation will not necessarily be the same depending on whether a "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect" or a "suppressed, automatic reception effect" occurs. Also, even if a "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect" occurs, when a specific pattern is output as the first allowable sound, the same degree of expectation is suggested as the "suppressed, automatic reception effect" when the second pattern is output as the first allowable sound.

That is, in this case, for the "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception performance" and the "suppressed, automatic reception performance", the expectation levels are different even if the first allowable sound is output in the same manner (first manner), and furthermore, the first allowable sound may be output in different manners (second manner, specific manner), so that it is possible to make it appear that there is no performance relationship between them. However, in reality, when the first allowable sound is output in the second manner or specific manner, the expectation levels are made the same despite the different performance sounds and different output times, so that it is possible to have a secret performance relationship. For example, when the set time (valid period) during which performance reception is permitted occurs, in the case where "BGM playback" is suppressed and the case where "BGM playback" is not suppressed, normally (when the reception allowable sound is output as the first manner), different post-operation performances (different expectation levels) are started when performance reception is performed, making it appear that there is no performance relationship between them. However, if the acceptance permission sound is output in the second mode or specific mode, it will appear as if a different performance has been performed depending on whether or not "BGM playback" has been suppressed, but the same content (same expectation) can appear as the post-operation performance when the performance is accepted. By secretly maintaining a performance relationship, it is expected to provide a surprise performance.

In this case, multiple modes are prepared as the first allowable sound in both the "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception performance" and the "suppressed, automatic reception performance", but it is desirable that the "first mode" used in common is set as the mode with the shortest output time among the multiple modes, regardless of which operation reception performance it is. In addition, the "second mode" as the first allowable sound is set as the mode with the longest output time among the multiple modes that can be output when the "suppressed, automatic reception performance" occurs, and the "specific mode" as the first allowable sound is set as the mode with the longest output time among the multiple modes that can be output when the "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception performance" occurs, but it is desirable that the output times are different (for example, the "output time of the specific mode" < the "output time of the second mode") in order to make it appear that there is no performance relationship between them.

Furthermore, in the "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect", whether the first permissible sound is output in the first mode or the specific mode, it is desirable to maintain the output state without terminating the output midway, regardless of whether the performance is accepted or not. In other words, in this case, the output of the first permissible sound can be continued even after the post-operation performance has started, so that it is possible to eliminate the possibility of missing the first permissible sound even though it is output in the "specific mode" that raises the expectation level to the same as the relatively high expectation "suppressed, automatic reception effect" in a situation where a relatively low expectation "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect" is being executed. In contrast, whether or not the output state of the first permissible sound is interrupted when the performance is accepted in the "suppressed, automatic reception effect" is as described with reference to Figures 213 to 215.

In the above-mentioned example, the expectation level is set to be the same when the second mode is output as the first allowable sound in the "suppressed/automatic reception performance" (Fig. 214) and when a specific mode is output as the first allowable sound in the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception performance" (Fig. 216). However, in the "suppressed/automatic reception performance", if it is possible to output the above-mentioned "third mode" in which the output time is maintained for a longer period of time than the "first mode (Fig. 213)" or the "second mode (Fig. 214)" as the first allowable sound, the expectation level is set to be the same when the "third mode" is output as the first allowable sound in the "suppressed/automatic reception performance" instead of the above-mentioned "second mode" and when the "specific mode" is output as the first allowable sound in the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception performance". The "third mode" is as described above.

In addition, in the example of the performance shown in FIG. 216, when the performance is accepted within the set time (valid period) (timing tr32a in the figure), at least a post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) in the performance display device 1600 (first performance member) and a post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) by the speaker (second performance member) are generated as post-operation performances corresponding to the performance acceptance. In the figure, the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) by the speaker are maintained in an execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) is made invisible at a predetermined timing that arrives after timing tr33 regardless of when the performance is accepted within the set time (valid period), whereas the post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) may be made to maintain an output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the performance is accepted. However, regardless of the timing at which the performance request is received, if timing tr33 has not yet elapsed, it is required that both the post-operation display performance (LCD display) and the post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) remain in their output state.

In addition, in the above example of the performance, the length of time that the "acceptable sound is output" does not refer to the length of time that the sound data of the acceptable sound is assigned to a channel, but rather to the length of time that it is output as an audible sound.

In addition, in the above example of effects, in order to make it appear that there is no effect relationship between the "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect" and the "suppressed, automatic reception effect", it is preferable that the "second mode" and "third mode" can be output only by the "suppressed, automatic reception effect" out of the "suppressed, automatic reception effect" and the "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect", and that the "specific mode" can be output only by the "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect" out of the "suppressed, automatic reception effect" and the "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect". In addition, if the "second mode" and "third mode" are prepared as output candidates for the "suppressed, automatic reception effect", even if the reception allowable sound specific to the "suppressed, automatic reception effect" (second mode, third mode) is output, the expectation level will not necessarily be the same as when the reception allowable sound specific to the "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect" (specific mode) is output, so that the performance of the reception allowable sound output when the "suppressed, automatic reception effect" occurs can be more suitably improved.

As mentioned above, the non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effects (timings tr31 to tr33) do not have to occur as effects related to low-expectation fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns), but may occur, for example, during the performance period before the development into the SP reach state among effects related to high-expectation fluctuation patterns (for example, specific fluctuation patterns) that develop into the SP reach state.

In the above example of effects, for the "suppression operation reception effect" in which a specific type of sound effect (for example, a sound effect for playing background music) can be suppressed, multiple effects may be prepared, including at least a "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" in which the degree of suppression is relatively low, and a "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" in which the degree of suppression is relatively high or the sound effect is not output. Note that when a specific type of sound effect is output with a relatively high degree of suppression, its volume may be set to "0."

This configuration allows for a creative way to determine how much the specific type of sound effect is suppressed when the set time (validity period) during which sound effect acceptance is permitted occurs.

Here, in order to obtain the above-mentioned action effect preferably, it is desirable to make the expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) different depending on whether a "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance performance)" or a "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation acceptance performance)" occurs. Here, the expectation (probability) that a jackpot pattern will appear in the "post-operation performance in response to performance acceptance" when a "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance performance)" occurs is lower than the expectation (probability) that a jackpot pattern will appear in the "post-operation performance in response to performance acceptance" when a "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation acceptance performance)" occurs. The expectation (probability) may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance effect)" can appear in both an effect corresponding to a high expectation fluctuation pattern that develops into an SP reach (such as a reach effect accompanied by a background change) and an effect corresponding to a low expectation fluctuation pattern in which a reach state is not even formed (or a reach state may be formed but does not develop into an SP reach), whereas the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation acceptance effect)" does not occur in a low expectation effect pattern, but may occur as an effect corresponding to a high expectation fluctuation pattern. Even with this configuration, it can be said that the expectation level when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance effect)" occurs is lower than the expectation level when the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation acceptance effect)" occurs.

In order to obtain the above-mentioned effect more effectively, it is desirable to generate a "special presentation state" that can be entered based on the satisfaction of a special presentation condition, and in the "special presentation state," each time a presentation acceptance is made during a set time (valid period) during which an operation promotion image (such as a model image or gauge display) that encourages the player to perform an operation is displayed, a specific type of presentation sound (e.g., background music playback presentation sound) is suppressed, and a post-operation presentation corresponding to the presentation acceptance is executed (started). According to such a "special presentation state," it is possible to provide a presentation regarding the extent to which a specific type of presentation sound (e.g., background music playback presentation sound) is suppressed each time a set time (valid period) occurs during which presentation acceptance is permitted, and since the degree of expectation is also suggested by such presentation (the degree to which it is suppressed) in addition to the degree of expectation suggested by the post-operation presentation, it is expected that the interest in the game will be further increased when the presentation acceptance is permitted.

It is also possible to provide a presentation pattern (e.g., a presentation corresponding to a specific variation pattern among high expectation variation patterns) in which a "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance presentation)" and a "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation acceptance presentation)" can be executed sequentially within the pattern variation. In other words, in this case, even if a "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance presentation)" with a relatively low expectation occurs, there remains the possibility that a "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation acceptance presentation)" with a relatively high expectation will occur, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when the player recognizes that the degree of suppression for a specific type of presentation sound is small (weak suppression mode).

In addition, in order to more appropriately suppress the decline in interest in the game when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance effect)" occurs, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation acceptance effect)" is as follows:
・When a specific fluctuation pattern is selected from among the high expectation fluctuation patterns (SP reach fluctuation patterns) that develop into an SP reach (such as a reach performance accompanied by a background change) as a result of the above fluctuation pattern judgment, regardless of which result is obtained as the performance judgment (preview judgment, etc.), it is assumed that the performance of the specific fluctuation pattern will occur when it progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach. In contrast, for the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance performance)",
Even if the above-mentioned specific fluctuation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance judgment (preview judgment, etc.), the performance of the specific fluctuation pattern will not occur even if it progresses to a predetermined timing, and if a special result is obtained in the performance judgment (preview judgment, etc.), the performance of the specific fluctuation pattern will occur when it progresses to a predetermined timing. And, when a "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance performance)" occurs in the performance according to the specific fluctuation pattern, it is desirable to make the rate of the post-operation performance being executed in a highly expected mode when the performance acceptance is made in the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation acceptance performance)" higher than when a "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance performance)" does not occur in the performance according to the specific fluctuation pattern.

In this configuration, in the presentation corresponding to a specific fluctuation pattern, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation acceptance presentation)" always occurs, whereas the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance presentation)" does not necessarily occur. Furthermore, when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance presentation)" occurs, the probability that a post-operation presentation with a high expectation will be executed in the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation acceptance presentation)" becomes high. This makes it possible to draw attention to whether or not the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance presentation)" occurs, thereby making it possible to increase interest in the game when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance presentation)" occurs.

Figures 217 to 219 are time charts showing examples of effects when a "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance effect)" and a "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation acceptance effect)" occur sequentially in an effect corresponding to a high expectation fluctuation pattern (for example, a specific fluctuation pattern). Figure 217 shows an example of an effect when an operation is detected relatively early after the set time (valid period) occurs, Figure 218 shows an example of an effect when an operation is detected relatively late after the set time (valid period) occurs, and Figure 219 shows an example of an effect when no operation is detected within the set time (valid period).

Now, if the start condition is met (pending is consumed) and a "specific variation pattern" is selected from among the "high expectation variation patterns that develop into SP reach (such as a reach performance accompanied by a background change)" as a result of the variation pattern judgment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first makes a performance judgment (preview judgment, etc.) corresponding to the specific variation pattern. After this, the decorative pattern variation performance (performance depiction according to the specific variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the specific variation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the variation performance, a performance (preview performance, etc.) according to the result of the performance judgment (preview judgment, etc.) is additionally executed to the performance (performance pattern) of the selected "specific variation pattern" itself.

However, in the "specific variation pattern", the content of the performance that appears after timing tr40 (timing in the SP reach state) arrives when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the decorative pattern variation performance is the same as in the performance example described with reference to Figures 213 and 214. That is, first, when timing tr40 arrives, regardless of which result is obtained as the advance notice performance judgment, "a specific type of performance sound (sound of BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode or silently (or in a non-output state). Here, the suppressed state is called a "strong suppression mode", and when timing tr42 (timing in the SP reach state when a specific time has elapsed since the start of the decorative pattern variation performance) arrives while the "strong suppression mode" is thus appearing, regardless of which result is obtained as the advance notice performance judgment, an operation acceptance performance (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted is generated. Here, the operation acceptance performance that occurs while the "strong suppression mode" is appearing is called a "second suppression operation acceptance performance".

In contrast, in a "specific variation pattern," when timing tr51 (before the development into the SP reach state) arrives, a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the decorative pattern variation performance, and a special result has been obtained as the advance notice performance judgment, an operation acceptance performance (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted is additionally generated to the pattern performance (performance pattern) based on the variation pattern. However, as will be described later, the operation acceptance performance (valid period) that occurs at timing tr51 differs from the operation acceptance performance (non-suppressed/non-automatic acceptance performance) shown in FIG. 212 in that, although the degree of suppression is lower than the "second suppressed operation acceptance performance (strong suppression mode)," under certain conditions, processing can be performed to suppress the volume of the "specific type of performance sound (sound of BGM playback)."

According to this configuration, even if a performance corresponding to a "specific fluctuation pattern" is being executed, when a special result is not obtained as a performance judgment (preview judgment, etc.), the performance example shown in FIG. 213 or FIG. 214 will appear, that is, a "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance performance)" will not occur in the performance corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, and only a "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation acceptance performance)" will occur. In contrast, when a special result is obtained as a performance judgment (preview judgment, etc.), as shown in FIG. 217 to FIG. 219, a "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance performance)" will first occur in the performance corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, and then the second suppression operation acceptance performance (strong suppression mode) shown in FIG. 213 or FIG. 214 will further occur.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 217 to FIG. 219, the performance contents after the arrival of timing tr40 are as described with reference to FIG. 213, so the description will be omitted here. In this case, for the second suppression operation acceptance performance (strong suppression mode), depending on the result of the performance judgment (preview judgment, etc.), the first permissible sound may be output in the second mode shown in FIG. 214, rather than the first mode shown in FIG. 213 or FIG. 217 to FIG. 219. It goes without saying that the above-mentioned contents regarding the related performances, other examples, and modified examples of the performance contents shown in FIG. 213 are also appropriately applied to the performance contents after timing tr40 (strong suppression mode (second suppression operation acceptance performance)) in the example of the performance shown in FIG. 217 to FIG. 219.

As described above, in the example effects shown in Figures 217 to 219, when timing tr51 (timing before the development into the SP reach state) arrives, which is a predetermined time after the decorative pattern change effect (effect according to a specific change pattern) has started, the operation acceptance effect (valid period) in which the effect acceptance is permitted occurs as a "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance effect)."

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance performance)" that occurs at timing tr51 in the fluctuation performance according to a specific fluctuation pattern is as follows:
A set time (valid period) during which the "sound of BGM playback" according to the variation pattern is output in a non-suppressed mode is set, and when the performance reception is made within the set time (valid period), the "sound of BGM playback" is changed from a non-suppressed mode to a weakly suppressed mode (a mode in which the degree of suppression is relatively low) as a trigger for the performance reception (see FIG. 217(a) and (b))". If no operation is detected for the operation means that is the operation target within the set time (timing tr51 to tr52) during which the performance reception is permitted, the performance reception is not made, and as a result, each process triggered by the performance reception (processing for changing the "sound of BGM playback" from a non-suppressed mode to a weakly suppressed mode, and post-operation performance (liquid crystal display, performance sound, etc.) is not executed, and the set time (valid period) ends without being executed. "Non-automatic reception mode (see FIG. 219(a), (b), (f))".
In addition, as a method for outputting the "BGM playback sound" in the weak suppression mode, a method of changing the volume value for the channel to which the "BGM playback sound" is assigned to a weak suppression value (for example, a volume value (audible volume) of "10") that is less suppressed than the strong suppression mode (for example, a volume value (audible volume) of "0") can be adopted.

According to this "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (first suppression operation reception effect)," unless the effect is received by the player's operation, the state will not change to "a state in which a specific type of performance sound (sound of BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode," so it is possible to make it appear as if the "non-suppression reception effect" shown in Figures 212 and 216 is occurring. In other words, in this case, when the player operates the state, it changes to "a state in which a specific type of performance sound (sound of BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode," and it becomes possible for the player to recognize for the first time that it is not a "suppression reception effect," so that the surprise effect can increase interest in the game.

In order to obtain such an effect, it is desirable to make the variation pattern in which the "conditionally suppressed (weakly suppressed mode) non-automatic reception performance (Fig. 217 to Fig. 219)" can occur depending on the result of the performance judgment (pre-notice judgment, etc.) selectable only when in a special performance state (for example, a look-ahead performance zone, etc.), and in the special performance state, the probability (expectation level) of a jackpot pattern appearing when the pattern variation is stopped is higher than in the normal performance state in which the variation pattern in which the "non-suppressed non-automatic reception performance (Fig. 212, Fig. 216)" can occur depending on the result of the performance judgment (pre-notice judgment, etc.) can be selected. With this configuration, when the "conditionally suppressed non-automatic reception performance" appears, the expectation level is higher than when the "non-suppressed non-automatic reception performance (Fig. 212, Fig. 216)" appears, and this, combined with the above-mentioned surprise performance element, can increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effect more suitably, it is desirable that the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception performance)" can occur in both the "normal performance state" and the "special performance state", and that in the "normal performance state", within a performance corresponding to one fluctuation pattern (one fluctuation pattern paired with winning or losing), a "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception performance (Figs. 212, 216)" and a "suppressed (strong suppression mode)/automatic reception performance (Figs. 213, 214)" can occur sequentially, and in the "special performance state", within a performance corresponding to one fluctuation pattern (one fluctuation pattern paired with winning or losing), a "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception performance (Figs. 217 to 219)" and a "suppressed (strong suppression mode)/automatic reception performance (Figs. 213, 214)" can occur sequentially.

Moreover, in the "conditionally suppressed (weakly suppressed mode) non-automatic reception effect", if the set time (valid period) has elapsed without the effect being accepted, the effect will proceed to the subsequent effect without transitioning to a "state in which a specific type of effect sound (sound of BGM playback) is output in a weakly suppressed mode" (Fig. 219). In other words, in this case, it is difficult to recognize whether a "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect" or a "conditionally suppressed, non-automatic reception effect" has occurred, and furthermore whether the state is a "normal presentation state" or a "special presentation state", and the subsequent effects will proceed. Therefore, even if an "operation acceptance effect (valid period) while output in a non-suppressed mode", which is considered to have a relatively low expectation level, occurs, the player can be more actively encouraged to operate.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 217 to Fig. 219)" occurs and when a "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 212)" occurs, the same effect sound (first mode) is output as the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) for the same period of time, which also makes it difficult to recognize whether a "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 217 to Fig. 219)" or a "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 212)" is occurring.

In addition, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) non-automatic reception performance (FIG. 217 to FIG. 219)", as in the case where the "non-suppression non-automatic reception performance (FIG. 212)" occurs,
The "acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound)" starts to be output when timing tr50 arrives, which is slightly before the set time occurs, and the output state is maintained across timing tr51.
- The second allowable sound (e.g., a message sound) is not output, and only the first allowable sound (e.g., a sound effect) is output. - When the timing tr51 at which the set time (valid period) is set arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays a model image of the operation means to be operated in the operation reception effect, and a gauge display indicating the remaining time until the set time has elapsed is performed. Each of these configurations is also adopted, which also makes it difficult to recognize whether a "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 217 to FIG. 219)" or a "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 212)" is occurring. Therefore, as a display method for the model image and gauge display, it is desirable to adopt, for example, the method shown in FIG. 159 (R2), as in the case where the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 212)" occurs, and it is also desirable to adopt the same mode as the performance example shown in FIG. 212 for the timing at which the display images (model image, gauge display) are hidden based on the occurrence of the performance reception.

Moreover, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) non-automatic reception performance (Figs. 217 to 219)" according to this embodiment, similarly to the performance example shown in Fig. 212, if the performance is accepted at timings tr51a, tr52a (Figs. 217(c), 218(c)) when the "reception permissible sound (first permissible sound)" is in an output state after the set time (valid period) has occurred, the set time (valid period) itself is terminated, but the "reception permissible sound (first permissible sound)" is not terminated midway, and its output state is maintained until the output as the first permissible sound has finished (the same timing as when no operation was performed (Fig. 219(c)).

With this configuration, even after the effect acceptance is made by the player's operation, it becomes difficult to tell whether a "conditionally suppressed (weakly suppressed mode) non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 217-219)" or a "non-suppressed non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 212)" is occurring just by listening to the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound). In other words, since it becomes necessary to listen for whether or not a transition has been made to a "state in which a specific type of effect sound (sound of BGM playback) is output in a weakly suppressed mode" while the output state (non-suppressed mode) of the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) is maintained, it is expected that a sense of tension will be appropriately maintained each time an effect acceptance is made.

Also, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) non-automatic reception performance (Figs. 217 to 219)", when the performance is accepted within the set time (valid period) (timings tr51a and tr51b in the figures), at least a post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) on the performance display device 1600 (first performance member) and a post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) by the speaker (second performance member) are generated as post-operation performances corresponding to the performance acceptance. In the figures, the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) by the speaker are maintained in an execution state for the same period of time, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) is made invisible at a predetermined timing that arrives after timing tr52, regardless of when the performance is accepted within the set time (valid period), whereas the post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) may be made to maintain an output state for a predetermined period of time from the timing at which the performance is accepted. However, regardless of the timing at which the performance request is received, if timing tr52 has not yet elapsed, it is required that both the post-operation display performance (LCD display) and the post-operation performance sound output (sound performance) be set to maintain their output state.

In addition, for the reception permission sounds and operation-related displays that appear in the "conditionally suppressed/non-automatic reception presentations (Figs. 217 to 219)," it is possible to appropriately adopt alternative examples or modified examples of the presentation example shown in Fig. 212, and it is preferable to use the same method for both.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for the "first suppression operation acceptance presentation (conditional suppression/non-automatic acceptance presentation)" that is generated at timing tr51 in the presentation according to a specific variation pattern, processing is performed to output the "BGM playback sound" in a weakly suppressed mode (a mode in which the degree of suppression is relatively low) for a certain predetermined period of time from the timing at which the presentation is accepted.

According to this configuration, when the performance is accepted at a relatively early timing tr51a after the set time (valid period) has occurred (Figure 217), the timing tr53a at which the "BGM playback sound" is returned from a weakly suppressed mode (a mode in which the degree of suppression is relatively low) to a non-suppressed mode also arrives relatively early, and as a result, there is a relatively long interval (timing tr53a to tr40) between the period when the "BGM playback sound" is in a weakly suppressed mode and the period when the "BGM playback sound" is in a strongly suppressed mode. In contrast, if the performance is accepted at timing tr51b, which is relatively late after the set time (valid period) has occurred (Figure 218), timing tr53b, at which the "BGM playback sound" is returned from the weakly suppressed mode to the non-suppressed mode, also arrives relatively late, and as a result, there is only a relatively short interval (timing tr53b to tr40) between the period when the "BGM playback sound" is in the weakly suppressed mode and the period when the "BGM playback sound" is in the strongly suppressed mode.

In other words, in this case, the later the timing of the player's operation in the first suppression operation reception presentation (the closer to timing tr52), the shorter the time between the end of the period in which the "BGM playback sound" is in the weak suppression mode and the start of the period in which the "BGM playback sound" is in the strong suppression mode. As a result, depending on whether the player's operation in the first suppression operation reception presentation is early or late, the timing of the strong suppression mode appearing after the weak suppression mode ends can come relatively soon, making it appear as if a continuous suppression presentation (weak suppression mode → strong suppression mode) is being executed, or the timing of the strong suppression mode appearing after the weak suppression mode ends can come relatively late, making the player feel anxious that "the strong suppression mode may not appear," thereby improving the interest in the game.

In this example, the length of time (a predetermined fixed time) during which the "BGM playback sound" is output in the weakly suppressed mode is set to be the same as the execution time of the post-operation performance (LCD display, sound effects), but this is not necessarily limited to this. However, it is desirable to set the length of time during which the "BGM playback sound" is output in the weakly suppressed mode to be the same as or longer than the execution time of the post-operation performance (LCD display, sound effects) in order to highlight the post-operation performance when the performance is accepted. Furthermore, even if the performance is accepted at the latest timing tr52 among the set times (validity period) of the "first suppression operation acceptance performance (conditionally suppressed, non-automatic acceptance performance)," it is desirable to set the length of time during which the "BGM playback sound" is output in the weakly suppressed mode so that the timing to end the weakly suppressed mode arrives before the timing tr40 to start the strong suppression mode. In this example, the times tr51a to tr53a and the times tr51b to tr53b are the same.

As shown in FIG. 217 to FIG. 219, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, within the performance according to one variation pattern,
a first suppression operation acceptance effect (the period from timing tr50 to the end of the post-operation effect) in which a specific type of sound effect (e.g., a sound effect of playing background music) is suppressed to a relatively low degree (weak suppression mode); and a second suppression operation acceptance effect (the period from timing tr40 to the end of the post-operation effect) in which a specific type of sound effect (e.g., a sound effect of playing background music) is suppressed to a relatively high degree (strong suppression mode).
As described above, the second suppression operation reception effect is executed as a "pattern effect based on a variable pattern that is never executed even if the performance mode (such as the type of acceptable sound or the operation target) changes depending on the result of the performance judgment," whereas the first suppression operation reception effect can be generated on the condition that a special result is obtained in the performance judgment (such as the advance notice judgment).

Also, as mentioned above, the first suppression operation acceptance effect can appear if a special result is obtained in the effect judgment (preview judgment, etc.) even in an effect corresponding to a low expectation fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern) that does not cause the second suppression operation acceptance effect to occur, so during the pattern fluctuation, there are cases where only one of the first suppression operation acceptance effect and the second suppression operation acceptance effect occurs, and cases where the first suppression operation acceptance effect and the second suppression operation acceptance effect occur sequentially.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the period from the "timing at which the weak suppression mode ends" to the "timing at which the strong suppression mode begins" is set as a variable period that is variable according to the timing at which the first suppression operation reception effect is received, so that it is possible to provide a performance as to whether or not the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) will occur after the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) ends, thereby improving the interest in the game. Note that when the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) and the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) occur in sequence, the expectation level (proportion of stopping at a jackpot pattern) is higher than when the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) does not occur and only the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) occurs. Furthermore, in a variation pattern that generates a second suppression operation acceptance performance (strong suppression mode), if the first suppression operation acceptance performance (weak suppression mode) occurs before the second suppression operation acceptance performance (strong suppression mode), the second suppression operation acceptance performance is more likely to be executed in a more promising mode (for example, the first permissible sound is output in the second mode) than if the first suppression operation acceptance performance (weak suppression mode) does not occur.

As mentioned above, when an operation reception effect occurs that can suppress a specific type of sound effect (e.g., a sound effect of playing BGM), the expectation level differs depending on whether the degree of suppression is high (the second suppression operation reception effect in the strong suppression mode) or low (the first suppression operation reception effect in the weak suppression mode). However, even if one tries to guess whether the degree of suppression is high or low (whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode) when a specific type of sound effect (e.g., a sound effect of playing BGM) is suppressed, it is actually difficult to guess whether the degree of suppression is high (strong suppression mode) or low (weak suppression mode) without a comparison object. This is especially true when the volume value when suppressed is not so different between the strong suppression mode and the weak suppression mode, which makes it possible to maintain a sense of tension when the operation reception effect occurs and attract the player to the effect.

In this regard, in the presentation examples shown in Figures 217 to 219, the first permissible sound that is output when the set time (valid period) during which the first suppression operation acceptance presentation and the second suppression operation acceptance presentation occurs is output as the same presentation sound for the same period of time (output in the "first mode" in the figures). In other words, in this case, even if the first permissible sound is confirmed, it is difficult to guess whether the degree of suppression is high or low (whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode), which more appropriately maintains the tension of the presentation and further attracts the player to the presentation.

However, in reality, there is a concern that interest in playing the game may decrease if it is impossible to guess whether the mode is strong or weak suppression. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, presentation elements that are useful for guessing whether the mode is strong or weak suppression are prepared as follows, scattered chronologically within the period from when the operation reception presentation starts to when it ends.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the above-mentioned situation occurs in which the first permissible sounds may be output as the same effect sound for the same amount of time (output in the "first mode" in the figure), it is possible to infer whether the mode is strong suppression mode or weak suppression mode based on the first permissible sounds.

That is, the first allowable sound output when the first suppression operation reception effect occurs is output for a predetermined time without terminating the output in the middle even if the effect is accepted when in the output state, whereas the first allowable sound output when the second suppression operation reception effect occurs is output when the effect is accepted when in the output state, and the output is terminated in the middle based on the effect acceptance (see Figs. 217 and 218). In this configuration, the same mode can be output as the first allowable sound in both the first suppression operation acceptance effect and the second suppression operation acceptance effect, making it difficult to guess whether the suppression mode is strong or weak, thereby increasing the tension of the effect, while the first allowable sound itself has a function that helps guess whether the suppression mode is strong or weak, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to an inability to guess.

The first permissible sound output when the second suppression operation reception effect occurs can be output in the first mode, as well as in a mode (such as the second or third mode) that cannot be output when the first suppression operation reception effect occurs. In other words, in this case, depending on the mode in which the first permissible sound is output, it is possible to easily guess whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode, even if the effect is not accepted when the first permissible sound is in the output state, and it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in a good manner. However, in order to maintain the tension of the effect, it is desirable to have a lower execution rate for outputs in modes (such as the second or third mode) that cannot be output when the first suppression operation reception effect occurs than for outputs in the first mode.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the second suppression operation acceptance effect occurs, the second permissible sound is output in addition to the first permissible sound, so that by checking whether the second permissible sound is output, it is possible to infer whether the suppression mode is strong or weak. However, the second permissible sound does not necessarily have to be provided, and only the first permissible sound may be output in both the first suppression operation acceptance effect and the second suppression operation acceptance effect.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation-related display (display encouraging an operation) that appears within the set time (valid period) during which the reception of the effect is permitted is different between the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect, so that it is possible to guess whether the mode is strong or weak suppression mode by checking the operation-related display. However, since the operation-related display appears with a delay relative to the reception permission sound, and there are only some differences between the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect, it is possible to maintain a sense of tension regarding the effect by making it somewhat difficult to guess whether the mode is strong or weak suppression mode.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if it is not possible to guess whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode at the time when the output of the acceptance allowance sound and the operation-related display is completed, it is possible to guess whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode by checking the execution mode of the post-operation performance. That is, in the post-operation performance corresponding to the first suppression operation acceptance performance, both the "performance by the liquid crystal display" and the "performance by the performance sound" are "performed for a certain period of time from the time when the performance is accepted", whereas in the post-operation performance corresponding to the second suppression operation acceptance performance, the "performance by the performance sound" is "performed for a certain period of time from the time when the performance is accepted", but the "performance by the liquid crystal display" is "ended when the predetermined timing tr44 arrives". That is, in this case, in the post-operation performance corresponding to the second suppression operation acceptance performance, the time from the end of the "performance by the liquid crystal display" to the end of the "performance by the performance sound" becomes variable depending on the timing of the performance acceptance, and a large deviation occurs, so by checking this deviation, it becomes possible to guess whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode.

However, even if presentation elements that aid in guessing are scattered chronologically in this way, some players may not notice them, and as a result may not be able to guess whether the mode is strong or weak suppression, which could ultimately reduce interest in the game.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first suppression operation reception performance (weak suppression mode), the BGM playback performance sound is set to the weak suppression mode based on the performance reception being made within the set time (valid period). In contrast, in the second suppression operation reception performance (strong suppression mode), the BGM playback performance sound is set to the strong suppression mode from a situation in which the set time (valid period) has not yet occurred, and the set time (valid period) occurs while in the strong suppression mode, so that the performance reception can be made. With this configuration, the timing for suppressing a specific type of performance sound (for example, the BGM playback performance sound) differs between the first suppression operation reception performance (weak suppression mode) and the second suppression operation reception performance (strong suppression mode), so that it is possible to infer whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode by checking the timing.

Moreover, in the first suppression operation acceptance effect (weak suppression mode) according to this embodiment, unlike the second suppression operation acceptance effect (strong suppression mode), if no operation is detected within the set time (valid period), the set time will elapse without the effect acceptance automatically occurring (see FIG. 219). In other words, in this case, if no operation is detected within the set time (valid period), the suppression process (weak suppression mode) triggered by the effect acceptance for a specific type of effect sound (for example, background music playback effect sound) will not be performed, and although there is a cost in that the effect cannot be confirmed after the operation, it will be possible to recognize that the effect was in the weak suppression mode and not the strong suppression mode.

In addition, in the second suppression operation acceptance performance (strong suppression mode) according to this embodiment, the timing at which the process of changing the "BGM playback sound effects" to a strong suppression mode ends is set to be the same as or earlier than the end timing of the post-operation performance. Therefore, in the first suppression operation acceptance performance (weak suppression mode), if the timing at which the process of changing the "BGM playback sound effects" to a weak suppression mode ends is set to be later than the end timing of the post-operation performance, it becomes possible to infer whether the mode is strong or weak suppression by checking the timing at which the "BGM playback sound effects" are returned to a non-suppression mode.

As described above, in the first suppression operation reception performance according to the above performance example, the length of the period during which the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) on the performance display device 1600 (first performance component) and the post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) by the speaker (second performance component) are performed in parallel is constant, regardless of the timing of the performance reception within the set time (valid period) (see Figures 217 and 218). In contrast, in the second suppression operation reception performance, the length of the period during which the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) on the performance display device 1600 (first performance component) and the post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) by the speaker (second performance component) are performed in parallel changes depending on the timing of the performance reception within the set time (valid period) (see Figures 217 and 218).

This configuration adds drama to "when the performance acceptance (operation) is performed," making it possible to maintain interest in the game in an optimal manner until the performance acceptance (operation) is performed.

In addition, in the above configuration, in order to make it difficult to distinguish whether the first suppression operation acceptance effect or the second suppression operation acceptance effect, which have different execution modes for the post-operation effect, is occurring, the first permissible sound is output as the same effect sound for the same amount of time, and effect elements that help distinguish between them are prepared so that they are scattered in chronological order. This is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game while maintaining the tension of the effects.

In addition, in the above configuration, the first suppression operation acceptance performance and the second suppression operation acceptance performance, which have different execution modes of the post-operation performance, can be intentionally mixed within a performance corresponding to one fluctuation pattern, so that each time an operation acceptance performance occurs, it is possible to preferably maintain a sense of tension about "when the performance acceptance (operation) will be performed." In addition to the mode in which the first suppression operation acceptance performance and the second suppression operation acceptance performance are mixed within a performance corresponding to one fluctuation pattern, in order to achieve such an effect, it is desirable to be able to execute a mode in which only the second suppression operation acceptance performance (or the first suppression operation acceptance performance) appears multiple times within a performance corresponding to one fluctuation pattern.

If the objective is to obtain only the effect of the dramatic nature of "when to accept the dramatic effect (operation)," it is also possible to maintain the output in a non-suppressed mode without suppressing a specific type of dramatic sound (a dramatic sound for playing BGM) in the first suppression operation acceptance performance and the second suppression operation acceptance performance.

In addition, for operation acceptance effects in which the length of the period during which the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect component) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect component) are performed in parallel is constant, regardless of when the effect acceptance is made within the set time (valid period), it is desirable to make it possible for such effects to occur on the condition that a special result is obtained in the effect judgment (preview judgment, etc.), and not to appear as a pattern effect (effect pattern) based on a variable pattern.

In other words, in this case, by checking the execution mode of the post-operation performance, it becomes possible to infer that a special result has been obtained in the advance notice performance judgment (expectations are relatively high), and unlike the performance of the variation pattern itself (pattern performance) which always occurs regardless of the result of the advance notice performance judgment, it is expected that the interest in the game will increase when it is recognized that it has been performed additionally. In addition, the second suppression operation acceptance performance, in which the length of the period during which the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) on the performance display device 1600 (first performance member) and the post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) by the speaker (second performance member) are performed in parallel changes depending on the timing of the performance acceptance within the set time (validity period), may be made to occur only as the performance of the variation pattern itself (pattern performance), or it may occur both as the performance of the variation pattern itself (pattern performance) and when a special result has been obtained in the performance judgment (advance notice judgment, etc.).

The weak suppression mode, which outputs the "BGM playback sound effect" at a lower suppression level than the strong suppression mode, may be made to appear even when no operation opportunity is given (when the first suppression operation acceptance performance does not occur). In other words, in this case, after the "BGM playback sound effect" is in the weak suppression mode for a predetermined time, it is returned from the weak suppression mode to the non-suppression mode without being given an operation opportunity. Then, if the number of times that the weak suppression mode appears, including the first suppression operation acceptance performance, increases within the performance corresponding to one variation pattern, the rate at which the suppression level is further increased (the rate at which the second suppression operation acceptance performance is further executed) increases, so that the performance can be further improved through the suppression state for the "BGM playback sound effect". In addition, when the performance is accepted within a set time (effective period) that occurred while the "BGM playback sound effect" was not in the suppression mode, it is possible to add more fun to the performance regarding "whether the number of times the weak suppression mode appears increases (whether it is the mode shown in FIG. 212 or the mode shown in FIG. 217)".

The strong suppression mode for the "BGM playback sound effect" may also be made to appear when no operation opportunity is given (when the second suppression operation acceptance effect does not occur). In other words, in this case, after the "BGM playback sound effect" is in the strong suppression mode for a predetermined time, it is returned from the strong suppression mode to the non-suppression mode without being given an operation opportunity. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a performance regarding whether or not an operation opportunity is given when the strong suppression mode appears.

In the example of the effects shown in Figures 217 to 219, when the first suppression operation reception effect occurs, the "BGM playback effect sound" is set to the suppressed mode (weakly suppressed mode) based on the fact that the effect is received within the set time (valid period). However, instead of this, even when the first suppression operation reception effect occurs, the "BGM playback effect sound" may be set to the suppressed mode (weakly suppressed mode) before the set time occurs, as in the case of the second suppression operation reception effect, and a set time (valid period) during which the effect reception is permitted while in the suppressed mode (weakly suppressed mode) may be generated. In this case, even if the same variation pattern is selected, the "BGM playback effect sound" may or may not be set to the suppressed mode (weakly suppressed mode) when the specified timing arrives depending on whether or not a special result is obtained in the effect judgment (preview judgment, etc.), so that the range of effects can be expanded. In the first suppression operation reception effect, it is desirable that the timing at which the "BGM playback effect sound" is returned from the suppressed mode (weakly suppressed mode) to the unsuppressed mode occurs at the same time as or after the post-operation effect ends.

In the examples of the effects shown in Figures 213 to 215 and Figures 217 to 219, in the second suppression operation acceptance effect (strong suppression mode), the process of changing the "BGM playback sound effect" to a strong suppression mode (output in a suppressed mode or silently, or in a non-output state) is ended at the same time as or before the end timing of the post-operation effect, but it may also be ended after the end timing of the post-operation effect arrives. In this case, the "BGM playback sound effect" may not be returned from the strong suppression mode to the non-suppression mode at least as long as the special pattern (decorative pattern) is changing (unless the pattern change is stopped).

As mentioned above, the acceptance acceptance sound does not have to occur shortly before the set time (validity period), but may be output based on the occurrence of the set time (validity period).

In the operation reception performance (second suppression operation reception performance) in the strong suppression mode shown in Figures 213 to 215 and Figures 217 to 219, the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) in the performance display device 1600 (first performance member) is terminated at a predetermined timing tr44 in the performance according to the fluctuation pattern, while the post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) by the speaker (second performance member) is terminated when a certain time has passed since the performance reception. However, instead of this, both the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) in the performance display device 1600 (first performance member) and the post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) by the speaker (second performance member) may be terminated at a predetermined timing in the performance according to the fluctuation pattern, or both the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) in the performance display device 1600 (first performance member) and the post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) by the speaker (second performance member) may be terminated when a certain time has passed since the performance reception.

The specific type of sound effects that are subject to suppression (BGM playback sound effects) are output when the pattern starts to change or when the effect changes within the effect according to the change pattern (for example, when the SP reach effect starts). In contrast, the post-operation effect starts at an indefinite timing (when the operation is performed) within the set time.

The specific fluctuation pattern described in the presentation examples shown in Figures 213 and 214 and the specific fluctuation pattern described in the presentation examples shown in Figures 217 to 219 may be different fluctuation patterns or may be the same fluctuation pattern. In addition, the above special presentation state may not be a look-ahead presentation zone, but may be a presentation state when the probability of a jackpot for jackpot determination is relatively high.

The weak suppression mode may be to set the volume value (audible volume) of the "specific type of performance sound" to a specific suppression value (a number greater than 0) that is lower than in the non-suppression mode, and output the sound in an audible state, while the strong suppression mode may be to make the "specific type of performance sound" inaudible (output silently (audible volume is 0) or not output (channel allocation is terminated)).

In addition, in the performance examples shown in Figures 217 to 219, it is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is the operation target and the operation opportunity is given in the same operation mode. In this regard, in the "first suppression operation acceptance performance", the operation button 410 is only used as the operation target (first operation mode), but in the "second suppression operation acceptance performance", as described above with reference to Figures 213 and 214, there are "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" and "when the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)" based on the result of the advance notice performance judgment. Therefore, when the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode), it is easy to recognize that it is not the weak suppression mode but the strong suppression mode. Note that the post-operation performance in response to the performance acceptance is the same in "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" and "when the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)".

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation means to be operated are:
The operation opportunity can be given in any of a plurality of modes, including a first operation mode in which the operation receiving part (the part that the player touches when operating) is not moved when the set time (valid period) occurs, and a second operation mode in which the operation receiving part is moved to a specific position by a driving force when the set time (valid period) occurs. Note that the "first operation mode" here assumes a case in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, and the "second operation mode" assumes a case in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001, and the sword decoration 5001 "can give an operation opportunity to the player in a state where it has moved to a specific position." However, one operation means (one operation receiving part) may have both the "first operation mode" and the "second operation mode," and an operation opportunity may be given in any of these modes.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation reception performance is as follows:
A non-suppression operation acceptance performance in which a specific type of sound effect (a sound effect for playing background music) is output in a non-suppression mode and the post-operation performance is executed from the occurrence of a set time (valid period), and a suppression operation acceptance performance in which a specific type of sound effect (a sound effect for playing background music) is output in a suppression mode or silently, or is not output. Further, as the suppression operation acceptance performance,
A first suppression operation reception effect (for example, the above-mentioned "conditional suppression/non-automatic reception effect") that suppresses a specific type of sound effect (for example, a sound effect of playing BGM) at a relatively low suppression level (weak suppression mode), and a second suppression operation reception effect (for example, the above-mentioned "suppression/automatic reception effect") that suppresses a specific type of sound effect (for example, a sound effect of playing BGM) at a relatively high suppression level (strong suppression mode).
are available.

However, here, as the second suppression operation reception performance,
- A suppressed non-movement acceptance performance in which the operating means is given an operation opportunity in the first operation mode (here, the operation button 410) while a specific type of performance sound is suppressed in a strong suppression mode (while it is output in a suppressed mode or in silent mode, or while it is in a non-output state), and - a suppressed movement acceptance performance in which the operating means is given an operation opportunity in the second operation mode (here, the sword decoration 5001 is unsheathed) while a specific type of performance sound is suppressed in a strong suppression mode (while it is output in a suppressed mode or in silent mode, or while it is in a non-output state), thereby further improving the performance when the operation opportunity is granted.

Figure 220 is a time chart showing an example of a performance (restrained movement reception performance) that appears when "sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)" in the second suppression operation reception performance (restrained/automatic reception performance). Note that the example of a performance (restrained non-movement reception performance) that appears when "operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" in the second suppression operation reception performance (restrained/automatic reception performance) is as explained with reference to Figures 213 and 217 (the period from timing tr40 to the end of the post-operation performance).

As shown in FIG. 220, the "case where the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)" in the second suppression operation reception presentation (suppression/automatic reception presentation) is basically the same as the "case where the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" in the second suppression operation reception presentation (suppression/automatic reception presentation) unless otherwise noted (FIGS. 213, 214, 217 to 219), and the related presentations, other examples, and modified examples described above can also be adopted as appropriate.

However, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression/automatic reception effect) is executed in the second operation mode, it is necessary to carry out a process of moving the operation receiving part to a specific position by a driving force when the set time (valid period) occurs, but there is a problem as to when to carry out this process.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least in a specific game state (normal game state or time-limited game state), as shown in FIG. 220(c) and (h), the process of moving the operation receiving part to a specific position is not performed unless the timing tr40 at which the specific type of effect sound (the effect sound of BGM playback) is in the strongly suppressed mode arrives. Therefore, for example, when the specific type of effect sound (the effect sound of BGM playback) is in the non-suppressed mode or the weakly suppressed mode, even if the set time at which the effect reception is permitted occurs, the operation opportunity in the second operation mode is not given, and only the operation opportunity in the first operation mode is given. In other words, in this case, unless the specific type of effect sound (the effect sound of BGM playback) is in the strongly suppressed mode, even if an operation opportunity is given, it will not be the second operation mode, so that the player can be prevented from operating in the wrong operation mode.

In contrast, when a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback sound effect) is in a strongly suppressed mode (timing tr40), while in the strongly suppressed mode, there is a possibility that an operation opportunity will be given in the first operation mode, or in the second operation mode. However, since the strong suppression of the specific type of sound effect (BGM playback sound effect) allows the player to concentrate on "whether the operation opportunity will be given in the first operation mode or the second operation mode," it becomes possible to prevent operation errors from occurring between these modes.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, whether the first or second operation mode is given is kept secret until just before the operation opportunity is given, so that the tension and interest in the game are appropriately maintained from timing tr40 until the performance is accepted and the post-operation performance starts. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 220(c) and (h), when timing tr42 arrives at which the set time (valid period) occurs, the operation receiving unit starts moving to a specific position. Here, when an operation opportunity is given in the second operation mode, the advance notice performance is determined so that the expectation level (the rate at which a jackpot pattern appears when the pattern fluctuation is stopped) is higher than when an operation opportunity is given in the first operation mode.

However, in this case, during the period immediately after the set time (valid period) occurs (until the operation receiving unit has completed its movement to the specific position), even though the performance reception itself is permitted, it is difficult to operate the operation receiving unit properly, so the length of the set time (valid period) is effectively shortened, which may reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in Figs. 220(c) and (d), the time required to move the operation receiving unit from the original position to the specific position is set to be shorter than the time required to finish outputting the first mode, which has the shortest output time, among the reception allowable sounds (first allowable sounds). As a result, even if any mode (the first mode, the above-mentioned second mode, third mode, etc.) is output as the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound), it is possible to make the performance reception possible in the middle of that output state (output can be terminated midway), and even if the second operation mode appears, it is difficult for inconveniences in terms of performance to occur.

As will be described later, in this embodiment, the time required to move the operation receiving part from the original position to the specific position by the driving force is intentionally shorter than the time required to move the operation receiving part from the specific position to the original position by the driving force without any operation on the operation receiving part, by moving the operation receiving part at a faster speed (see FIG. 220 (h)). This type of movement mode makes it possible to show that efforts are being made to reduce the time that is effectively cut into the set time (valid period), and is expected to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the time being cut.

In order to more effectively suppress such dissatisfaction, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression/automatic reception effect) is generated, it is desirable to set a time value having a length equal to or greater than the time required to move the operation receiving part from the original position to the specific position added to the set time (effective period) of the operation reception effect in the non-suppression mode (from timing tr31 to the post-operation effect) shown in FIG. 212 or the set time (effective period) of the operation reception effect in the weak suppression mode (from timing tr50 to the post-operation effect) shown in FIG. 217. According to this configuration, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression/automatic reception effect) is executed in the second operation mode, a set time (effective period) having a longer time value is generated that more than compensates for the time that is substantially cut, so that interest in the game can be maintained in a good manner. In this case, in order to standardize the program, it is desirable to set a set time of similar length when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression/automatic reception effect) is executed in the first operation mode.

However, as described above, in the time from timing tr42A to tr43 after the automatic button function is enabled, no performance is actually accepted, and the set time (effective period) is effectively shortened. In view of this, when generating the second suppression operation acceptance performance (suppression/automatic acceptance performance), it is more desirable to set the set time (effective period) to a time value that is longer than the sum of the "time required to move the operation receiving part from the original position to the specific position" and the "time from timing tr42A to tr43 after the automatic button function is enabled" to the set time (effective period) of the operation acceptance performance in the non-suppression mode shown in FIG. 212 (from timing tr31 to the post-operation performance) and the operation acceptance performance in the weak suppression mode shown in FIG. 217 (from timing tr50 to the post-operation performance). In this case, too, in order to standardize the program, it is desirable to set a set time of similar length when executing the second suppression operation acceptance performance (suppression/automatic acceptance performance) in the first operation mode.

As described above, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression/automatic reception effect) is being executed in the second operation mode, if there is no operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, as shown in FIG. 220(a), (h)-(l), the effect reception automatically occurs at timing tr42A, and based on the effect reception, at least the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are executed as post-operation effects. However, in this case, as is clear from a comparison of FIG. 220(g) and (l), the execution time of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) is shortened, which may reduce interest in the game.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 220(h), in a situation where the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression/automatic reception effect) is being executed in the second operation mode, if there is no operation on the operation receiving part within a set time, the "speed at which the operation receiving part is moved from the specific position to the original position by the driving force" is intentionally made slower than the "speed at which it is moved from the original position to the specific position", so that the moving state is maintained for a relatively long time. With this configuration, in exchange for the execution time of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) being shortened, the operation receiving part can be expected to function as a movable effect (part of the post-operation effect), so that interest in the game can be appropriately maintained.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 220(h), the "movement performance from a specific position to the original position" by the operation receiving unit is started when a specific timing arrives during the execution of the post-operation performance in response to the automatic occurrence of performance acceptance (automatic button function), but it may also be started at the timing tr42A when the performance acceptance is automatically generated, just like the post-operation performance.

However, no matter how slow the "movement from the specific position to the original position" is, this alone is not enough to gain time for the moving performance, and there is a concern that it is difficult to maintain interest in the game. Therefore, in the performance example shown in FIG. 220(h), after the operation receiving part is moved from the specific position to the original position (or a position nearby), a vibration performance is performed to vibrate the operation receiving part, and the period from the start of the movement from the specific position to the original position (or a position nearby) to the end of the vibration of the operation receiving part functions as a moving performance period by the "operation receiving part not operated by the player". This makes it possible to preferably realize a moving performance using the "operation receiving part not operated by the player", and it is expected that the performance will be preferably maintained when the execution time of the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) in the performance display device 1600 (first performance member) is shortened as a result of the automatic occurrence of the performance reception. In this case, if the operation receiving part is made to emit light while it is being moved from the specific position to the original position, it is possible to more preferably appeal that the operation receiving part is used as a moving performance.

Here, it is desirable that the movable presentation period (movement time from a specific position to the original position, vibration time) by the "operation receiving part not operated by the player" ends when timing tr44, at which the strong suppression mode ends, arrives or before said timing tr44. This allows the specific type of presentation sound to be returned from the strong suppression mode to the non-suppression mode, making it possible to smoothly promote the progress of the presentation content corresponding to this (switching of presentations).

Other differences from when the second suppression operation acceptance performance (suppression/automatic acceptance performance) is executed in the first operation mode include the output of a message sound such as "Sheathe your sword!" as the second permissible sound (message sound), and the display of a message such as "Push in" and a mock image of a "sword decoration image SYG" as operation-related displays, which makes it less likely that an operation error will occur.

As described above, in the first suppression operation acceptance performance (weak suppression mode), no operation opportunity is given in such a second operation mode. However, if an operation opportunity is given with the "specific type of performance sound" in the weak suppression mode, it may encourage an operation error when the player misrecognizes whether the weak suppression mode or the strong suppression mode is appearing. In this regard, in the performance example shown in Figures 217 to 219, when the first suppression operation acceptance performance (weak suppression mode) occurs, no operation opportunity is given with the "specific type of performance sound" in the weak suppression mode, and the weak suppression mode appears based on the performance acceptance. This makes it possible to provide a performance without creating unnecessary tension or expectation that "an operation opportunity in the second operation mode may be given."

In the above example (second operation mode), even if an operation is performed on the operation receiving part within the set time, as in the case where no operation is performed on the operation receiving part within the set time, a vibration effect is performed to vibrate the operation receiving part when a predetermined timing (the same timing) occurs within the period during which the post-operation performance is being performed, as shown in FIG. 220(c). With this configuration, regardless of when the post-operation performance occurs, the vibration effect is performed when a predetermined timing occurs before timing tr44, at which the strong suppression mode ends, making it possible to suggest that the strong suppression mode will soon end and a new performance will begin.

However, if an operation is performed on the operation receiving part within the set time, the vibration effect may be started early based on the fact that the operation has resulted in the reception of an effect, thereby further increasing interest in the game during the period in which the post-operation effect is being performed. In other words, in this case, if an operation is performed on the operation receiving part within the set time, the vibration effect will be performed for a longer period of time than if no operation is performed on the operation receiving part within the set time.

In addition, in the above example of effects, the process of moving the operation receiving part to a specific position is not performed unless the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback effect sound) is in a strongly suppressed mode. However, instead of this, when the effect reception is permitted when the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback effect sound) is in a strongly suppressed mode, the proportion of operation opportunities in the second operation mode (which may be 0 or 100) that are granted may be higher than when the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback effect sound) is in a non-suppressed mode or when the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback effect sound) is in a weakly suppressed mode.

In each of the above-mentioned examples of effects (Figs. 146 to 220), in an operation acceptance effect in which the automatic button function may be enabled, it is desirable to set the set time (valid period) to a time value that is at least as long as the set time (valid period) in which the automatic button function is not enabled plus the "time from when the automatic button function is enabled until the set time has elapsed." With this configuration, a set time (valid period) with a longer time value is generated that more than makes up for the time that is effectively cut as the period during which acceptance of effects is permitted, making it possible to maintain interest in the game.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the following operation reception effects may occur during normal game play:
・Operation acceptance performance (intrinsic acceptance performance) executed as the performance (pattern performance) of the fluctuation pattern itself based on the result of the fluctuation pattern judgment, and ・Operation acceptance performance (additional acceptance performance) executed as a performance additionally performed to the performance of the fluctuation pattern itself (performance pattern) on the condition that a special result is obtained in the performance judgment (preview judgment, etc.)
At a minimum, the following measures will be provided.

In other words, when a special result is obtained (when a special variation pattern is selected) in the variation pattern determination based on the result of the jackpot determination, the "intrinsic reception performance" is confirmed to be executed within the performance corresponding to the determined variation pattern. In contrast, even if the variation pattern determination results in a "predetermined result that can generate the additional reception performance" (even if a predetermined variation pattern is selected), the "additional reception performance" is not necessarily executed unless a result indicating that the "additional reception performance" is generated is further obtained in the performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Therefore, once the performance corresponding to the variation pattern has started, it is more beneficial for the player and more important in increasing the interest in the game to have an "additional reception performance" that is allowed to occur depending on the result of the performance determination (preview determination, etc.) occur than to have an "intrinsic reception performance" that is linked to the variation pattern (performance pattern) and whose occurrence is confirmed. In addition, even if the same presentation content (presentation pattern) appears as a presentation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, if an "additional reception presentation" occurs within that presentation, the probability (expectation) of a winning pattern appearing when the pattern fluctuation stops is higher than if an "additional reception presentation" does not occur within that presentation.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the inherent reception performance that may occur in the normal game state, there are cases where the reception of the performance is permitted while a specific type of performance sound (the "BGM playback" performance sound) is output in a suppressed or silent mode or is in a non-output state, and cases where the reception of the performance is permitted while a specific type of performance sound (the "BGM playback" performance sound) is output in a non-suppressed mode. In contrast, in the additional reception performance that may occur in the normal game state, the reception of the performance is not permitted while the performance sound is output in a suppressed or silent mode or is in a non-output state, but is permitted while the specific type of performance sound is output in a non-suppressed mode. In other words, in this case, in the normal game state, by paying attention to whether the specific type of performance sound is output in a suppressed or silent mode or is in a non-output state when the reception of the performance is permitted, it becomes possible to recognize the possibility of the additional reception performance occurring, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the inherent reception effects that may occur in the normal game state may be executed in an automatic reception mode in which a post-operation effect can occur even if no operation is detected within the set time in which the reception of effects is permitted, or in a non-automatic reception mode in which the set time ends without the post-operation effect occurring if no operation is detected within the set time in which the reception of effects is permitted. In contrast, the additional reception effects that may occur in the normal game state are not executed in the automatic reception mode, but in the non-automatic reception mode. In other words, in this case, by paying attention to whether the reception of effects is performed automatically (automatic button function) within the set time in the normal game state, it becomes possible to recognize the possibility that an additional reception effect has occurred, and it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained until the reception of effects is performed.

Figure 221 is a time chart showing the effects that appear when variation pattern 1 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

As shown in FIG. 221, when variation pattern 1 is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, first, in the performance determination (such as a notice determination according to variation pattern 1) performed at the start of the pattern variation, at least a determination is made as to whether or not to execute preview performance A. If it is determined that preview performance A is to be executed as a result of this performance determination, the preview performance A will be executed additionally to the pattern performance (performance pattern) when timing tr61 in the pattern performance based on variation pattern 1 arrives (timing tr61 to tr62), and if it is not determined that preview performance A is to be executed, even if timing tr61 in the pattern performance based on variation pattern 1 arrives, preview performance A will not appear and the pattern performance (performance pattern) based on variation pattern 1 will remain executed.

Here, if it is determined that the preview performance A is to be executed as a result of the performance judgment, when the timing tr61 arrives, not only the display performance but also the performance sound and the lamp performance are additionally executed to the performance (pattern performance) of the fluctuation pattern 1 itself. Note that "executing additionally" can be realized, for example, by displaying the preview performance A on a layer with a higher priority than the layer in which the display performance of the fluctuation pattern 1 itself appears. In this case, the preview performance A may be displayed in a form in which all of the pattern performance based on the fluctuation pattern 1 is covered and made invisible, or the preview performance A may be displayed by covering only a part of the pattern performance based on the fluctuation pattern 1. In contrast, in the case of the lamp performance, the mode of "lamp performance according to the occurrence of the preview performance A" is output with priority over "lamp performance based on the fluctuation pattern 1 (performance pattern)". In addition, in the case of the performance sound, "performance sound according to the preview performance A" is output additionally to "performance sound based on the fluctuation pattern 1 (performance pattern)" by assigning "performance sound according to the preview performance A" to a channel different from "performance sound based on the fluctuation pattern 1".

Figure 222 is a time chart showing the effects that appear when variation pattern 2 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

As shown in FIG. 222, when the variation pattern 2 is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, first, in the performance determination (such as a notice determination according to the variation pattern 2) performed at the start of the pattern variation, at least a determination is made as to whether or not to execute the "additional reception performance". Here, the variation pattern 2 in this performance example is the same as the "predetermined variation pattern shown in FIG. 212". Therefore, as a result of this performance determination, if it is determined that the "additional reception performance" is to be executed, the "additional reception performance" is additionally executed to the pattern performance (performance pattern) when timing tr31 in the pattern performance based on the variation pattern 2 (predetermined variation pattern shown in FIG. 212) arrives (from timing tr31 to the end of the post-operation performance), and if it is not determined that the "additional reception performance" is to be executed, even if timing tr31 in the pattern performance based on the variation pattern 2 arrives, the "additional reception performance" does not appear, and the pattern performance (performance pattern) based on the variation pattern 2 is merely executed.

Here, regarding the operation reception performance (additional reception performance) shown in FIG. 222, while the performance sound of "BGM playback" based on variation pattern 2 (predetermined variation pattern) maintains the output state in the non-suppressed mode, the first permissible sound is output at timing tr31, the set time (valid period) occurs at timing tr32, and at timing tr33 the set time ends without the automatic button function being enabled, but as these are as described above with reference to FIG. 212 etc., the explanation will be omitted. In other words, the operation reception performance (additional reception performance) shown in FIG. 222 is basically the same as the "performance content when the low expectation non-suppressed reception performance is executed in the non-automatic reception mode" shown in FIG. 212 in the parts not specifically noted, and the related performances, alternative examples, and modified examples described above can also be adopted as appropriate.

However, in the operation reception performance (additional reception performance) according to this performance example, as shown in FIG. 222, the post-operation performance corresponding to the performance reception is described as an example of executing in the manner of the other example described above in FIG. 212. Therefore, in the operation reception performance (additional reception performance) shown in FIG. 222, when the performance reception is made within the set time (valid period) (timing tr32a in the figure), at least a "post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) on the performance display device 1600 (first performance member)" and a "post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) by the speaker (second performance member)" are generated as post-operation performances based on the performance reception, and with regard to the post-operation performance,
The "post-operation display (liquid crystal display) on the performance display device 1600 (first performance member)" ends at a predetermined timing that arrives after timing tr33, regardless of the timing at which the performance is accepted.
- "Post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) by speaker (second performance component)" is executed in such a manner that it ends when a predetermined fixed time has elapsed from the timing at which the performance is accepted.

Figure 223 is a time chart showing the effects that appear when variation pattern 3 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

As shown in FIG. 223, when variation pattern 3 is selected as a result of the variation pattern judgment, regardless of the result of the performance judgment (such as the advance notice judgment according to variation pattern 3) performed at the start of the pattern fluctuation, at timing tr40 in the pattern performance based on variation pattern 3, processing is performed to change the performance sound of "BGM playback" to the above-mentioned "strong suppression mode", and at timing tr41, which arrives while the "strong suppression mode" is appearing, an "intrinsic reception performance" occurs as a pattern performance based on variation pattern 3 (from timing tr41 to the end of the post-operation performance).

Here, the variation pattern 3 in this example of the performance is the same as the "specific variation pattern shown in Figures 213 to 215, or Figures 217 to 220, etc." Therefore, for the operation reception performance (intrinsic reception performance) shown in Figure 223, while the performance sound of "BGM playback" based on variation pattern 3 (specific variation pattern) is in a strongly suppressed state (for example, an output state of silence (volume 0), or an inaudible state such as a non-output state), when timing tr41 arrives, the first permissible sound is output, the set time (valid period) occurs at timing tr42, and when "timing tr42A" arrives before timing tr43 when the set time has elapsed without performance reception, the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled, but these are as described above with reference to "Figures 213 to 215, or Figures 217 to 220", etc., so the explanation will be omitted. In other words, the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) shown in FIG. 223 is the same as the effect content of the "suppression/automatic reception effect" shown in FIG. 213, and it is possible to appropriately adopt the related effects described above, as well as other examples and modified examples (such as FIG. 215 and FIG. 217 to FIG. 220).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least in the normal game state, during the period when the "BGM playback" sound effect is in a strongly suppressed mode, an "intrinsic reception performance" may occur as a pattern performance based on the fluctuation pattern, but an "additional reception performance" that is executed in addition to the pattern performance based on the fluctuation pattern will not occur, whereas during the period when the "BGM playback" sound effect is in a non-suppressed mode, an "intrinsic reception performance" that is a pattern performance based on the fluctuation pattern may occur, and an "additional reception performance" that is executed in addition to the pattern performance based on the fluctuation pattern may occur.

In other words, in this case, when an operation acceptance effect occurs while the "BGM playback" effect sound based on the variation pattern is in a strongly suppressed mode, the possibility that the operation acceptance effect is an "additional acceptance effect" is eliminated, so it becomes possible to generate a set time (valid period) during which the effect acceptance is permitted in an environment in which the player can concentrate on which mode the operation acceptance effect will be executed. In contrast, when an operation acceptance effect occurs while the "BGM playback" effect sound is output in a non-suppressed mode, it becomes possible to recognize that there is a possibility that an additional acceptance effect has occurred, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In order to obtain such an advantageous effect, it is desirable to make it possible for the "additional reception performance" and the "intrinsic reception performance" to appear in succession even within a performance corresponding to one variation pattern (for example, a specific variation pattern (variation pattern 3)), in addition to making the "additional reception performance" and the "intrinsic reception performance" appear in separate variation patterns 2 and 3. The "additional reception performance" should preferably occur at an earlier time than the "intrinsic reception performance".

More preferably, within a presentation corresponding to one variation pattern (specific variation pattern), the "additional reception presentation" and the "intrinsic reception presentation" can be made to appear sequentially while the "BGM playback" presentation sound is in a non-suppressed mode, and the "intrinsic reception presentation" can also be made to appear while the "BGM playback" presentation sound is in a strongly suppressed mode. With this configuration, depending on the suppression mode status, there will be cases where it is possible to know whether the "additional reception presentation" or the "intrinsic reception presentation" is occurring (strong suppression mode), and cases where it is difficult to know whether the "additional reception presentation" or the "intrinsic reception presentation" is occurring (non-suppression mode), and it will be possible to increase interest in the game through the suppression mode for the "BGM playback" presentation sound.

Furthermore, if an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) occurs while the "BGM playback" effect sound is in a strongly suppressed mode within a pattern effect corresponding to a specific change pattern, it is desirable to prevent an "additional reception effect" from occurring during the period from the end of the inherent reception effect to the stop of the pattern change. With this configuration, when an operation reception effect occurs while the "BGM playback" effect sound is in a strongly suppressed mode, not only is the possibility that the operation reception effect is an "additional reception effect" eliminated, but even the possibility that an "additional reception effect" will appear before the pattern change is stopped is eliminated, so that there is no expectation of an "additional reception effect" occurring and the player can focus on the mode (such as the reception allowable sound, the type of operation means, or the mode of the post-operation effect) in which the "intrinsic reception effect" that has occurred is executed.

As mentioned above, when an "additional reception effect" occurs, it is desirable to make it so that the "intrinsic reception effect (either in a non-suppressed mode or in a strongly suppressed mode)" that occurs afterwards is executed in a highly anticipated mode (such as a reception allowable sound, a type of operating means, or a mode of a post-operation effect) more likely to occur than if the "additional reception effect" had not occurred.

As mentioned above, when the "BGM playback" sound effect is set to a strong suppression mode, an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) may always occur during the period when the strong suppression mode is set. In this case, the multiple variation patterns that are set as selection candidates in the variation pattern determination do not include a "variation pattern that is set to a strong suppression mode but does not generate an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) during the period when the strong suppression mode is set," but include a "variation pattern that, when set to a strong suppression mode, generates an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) during the period when the strong suppression mode is set." Alternatively, even if the "BGM playback" sound effect is set to a strong suppression mode, the period when the strong suppression mode is set may end without an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) occurring. In this case, the multiple fluctuation patterns that are selected as candidates in the fluctuation pattern determination will include a "fluctuation pattern that is in a strong suppression mode but does not generate an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) during the strong suppression mode" and a "fluctuation pattern that, when in the strong suppression mode, generates an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) during the strong suppression mode."

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if an operation acceptance effect (intrinsic acceptance effect) occurs while the "BGM playback" effect sound is in the "strong suppression mode," even if the player does not notice that the effect is in the "strong suppression mode," the player can recognize that the possibility of an "additional acceptance effect" occurring has been eliminated based on the effect elements below.

That is, when an "intrinsic reception effect" occurs while the "BGM playback" effect sound is in the "strong suppression mode", even if the first permissible sound is a sound effect that can also be output during an "additional reception effect" and is output for the same time (output in the "first mode" in the figure), it is possible to recognize that an "intrinsic reception effect" is occurring, not an "additional reception effect", based on the first permissible sound. More specifically, the first permissible sound (see FIG. 222) output upon the occurrence of an "additional reception effect" is output for a predetermined time, even if the effect is accepted when in the output state, and the output is not terminated halfway, whereas the first permissible sound (see FIG. 223) output upon the occurrence of an "intrinsic reception effect" while the "BGM playback" effect sound is in the "strong suppression mode", and when the effect is accepted when in the output state, the output is terminated halfway based on the effect acceptance.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the "BGM playback" effect sound is in the "strong suppression mode" and an "intrinsic reception effect" occurs, the second permissible sound is output in addition to the first permissible sound. Therefore, by checking whether the second permissible sound is output, it is possible to recognize that the possibility that an "additional reception effect" has occurred has been eliminated. However, as mentioned above, the second permissible sound does not necessarily have to be provided.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in Figures 222 and 223, the operation-related displays (displays encouraging operation) that appear within the set time (valid period) during which the performance reception is permitted are also made different when an "intrinsic reception performance" is occurring (message displayed) while the "BGM playback" performance sound is in the "strongly suppressed mode" from when an "additional reception performance" is occurring (message not displayed), which also makes it possible to recognize that the possibility of an "additional reception performance" occurring has been eliminated.

In addition, in the "intrinsic reception performance" that occurs when the "BGM playback" performance sound is in the "strongly suppressed mode," the above-mentioned automatic button function can be enabled, whereas in the "additional reception performance," the above-mentioned automatic button function is not enabled, which also makes it possible to recognize that the possibility of an "additional reception performance" occurring is eliminated.

In this way, when an "intrinsic reception effect" occurs while the "BGM playback" effect sound is in a "strong suppression mode," in addition to the effect elements related to the "suppression mode," various effect elements will appear in different modes than when an "additional reception effect" is occurring. This makes it relatively easy to recognize that the possibility of an "additional reception effect" occurring has been eliminated, and encourages concentration on the "intrinsic reception effect."

In contrast to this, when an "intrinsic reception effect" occurs while the "BGM playback" effect sound is in the "non-suppressed mode," various effect elements are made to have commonalities with the "additional reception effect," making it difficult to recognize whether an "intrinsic reception effect" or an "additional reception effect" is occurring, providing a performance that in fact makes the user aware of the possibility that an "additional reception effect" is occurring.

Figure 224 is a time chart showing the effect content that appears when an "intrinsic reception effect" as a pattern effect based on a fluctuation pattern occurs while the "BGM playback" effect sound is in the "non-suppressed mode." Note that the "intrinsic reception effect" shown in Figure 224 may occur as a pattern effect corresponding to a fluctuation pattern when a fluctuation pattern different from the "fluctuation pattern that can cause the operation reception effects shown in Figures 222 and 223" is selected. However, here, it is assumed that the same fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern) as the operation reception effects shown in Figures 222 and 223 is selected and the effect occurs as a pattern effect corresponding to the specific fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 224, the "intrinsic reception effect" that occurs in the "non-suppression mode" is the same as the "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 223 that occurs in the "strong suppression mode", and will always occur when the predetermined timing (here, timing tr71) in the pattern effect arrives, regardless of the result of the effect judgment (preview judgment).

However, the first permissible sound (first mode) output when an "intrinsic reception performance" shown in FIG. 224 occurs is similar to the first permissible sound (first mode) output when an "additional reception performance" shown in FIG. 222 occurs, in that even if a performance reception is performed while in the output state, the output is not terminated midway, but is output for a predetermined time (timing tr72a). Therefore, when the first permissible sound is output in the first mode, it is difficult to distinguish whether an "intrinsic reception performance" or an "additional reception performance" is occurring based on this.

In addition, in the "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 224, the second permissible sound is not output in addition to the output of the first permissible sound (first mode), and in this respect it is similar to the "additional reception effect" shown in FIG. 222.

Also, in the "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 224, the operation-related display (display encouraging operation) that appears within the set time (validity period) during which the performance reception is permitted only displays an imitation image of the operating means to be operated and a gauge display indicating the remaining time, and no message display is displayed, which is similar to the "additional reception effect" shown in FIG. 222.

Furthermore, in the "intrinsic reception performance" shown in FIG. 224, the object to which an operation opportunity is given is limited to the "operation button 410", and the "sword ornament 5001" is not made an object to be operated, and in this respect it is similar to the "additional reception performance" shown in FIG. 222.

In addition, in the "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 224, if no operation is detected within the set time (valid period), the automatic button function described above is not enabled, and the timing tr73 at which the set time (valid period) ends arrives without any post-operation effect occurring, which is similar to the "additional reception effect" shown in FIG. 222.

In this way, when an "intrinsic reception effect" occurs while the "BGM playback" sound effect is in the "non-suppressed mode," it is different from when an "intrinsic reception effect" occurs while the "BGM playback" sound effect is in the "strongly suppressed mode," in that various effect elements are the same as when an "additional reception effect" occurs, making it possible to be aware of the possibility that an "additional reception effect" is occurring.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an "intrinsic reception effect (intrinsic reception effect in which the automatic button function is not enabled)" occurs while the "BGM playback" sound effect is in the "non-suppressed mode", there are cases where a reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) is output, and cases where the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) itself is not output and a set time occurs. In contrast, when an "additional reception effect" occurs while the "BGM playback" sound effect is in the "non-suppressed mode", the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) itself is not output and the set time does not occur, but the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) is always output.

According to this configuration, when the performance reception is permitted while the performance sound of "BGM playback" is in the "non-suppressed mode", when the reception allowance sound is output, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the "intrinsic reception performance" or the "additional reception performance" is occurring, whereas when the reception allowance sound is not output, it becomes possible to recognize that the "intrinsic reception performance" is occurring, not the "additional reception performance". In addition, when the "intrinsic reception performance" is generated while the performance sound of "BGM playback" is in the "non-suppressed mode", it is preferable that whether or not the reception allowance sound (first allowable sound) is output is determined according to the type of the fluctuation pattern, not by the performance judgment. The "intrinsic reception performance" in the non-suppressed mode in which the reception allowance sound (first allowable sound) is output and the "intrinsic reception performance" in the non-suppressed mode in which the reception allowance sound (first allowable sound) is not output may be executed sequentially within the same pattern performance (for example, a pattern performance based on a specific fluctuation pattern).

In addition, according to the above configuration, when an operation reception effect appears in which the automatic button function is not enabled, it becomes difficult to recognize whether an "intrinsic reception effect" or an "additional reception effect" is occurring when an acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound) is output, whereas it becomes possible to recognize that the operation reception effect is an "intrinsic reception effect" when an acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound) is not output.

As mentioned above, in the "additional reception effect", the first permissible sound can be output in a mode different from the first mode based on the result of the effect judgment (notice judgment), but the different mode may not be output when the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs while the "BGM playback" effect sound is in the "non-suppressed mode" (for example, the "specific mode" shown in FIG. 216). However, it is desirable to make the occurrence rate of the different mode lower than when the first permissible sound is output in the first mode.

For the "intrinsic reception presentation" shown in FIG. 224, unless otherwise noted, other examples or variations of the operation reception presentation shown in FIG. 212 may be used as appropriate.

In addition, for the sake of convenience, the examples of effects shown in Figures 221 and 222 are illustrated as if the effect judgment is made while the pattern effect is being performed, but in reality, the effect judgment is made when the pattern change begins.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 212 to FIG. 224, the mode of the post-operation performance according to the performance reception may be different depending on whether the jackpot is obtained in the jackpot judgment or not. For example, when the jackpot is obtained in the jackpot judgment, the performance may be as shown in the example of FIG. 212 to FIG. 224, whereas when the jackpot is not obtained in the jackpot judgment, the post-operation performance may be performed in a different mode from the example of FIG. 212 to FIG. 224.

As mentioned above, conventionally, performance control on the peripheral control board 1510 has been achieved by combining and executing programs that individually control various performance devices and programs that link multiple performance devices. These programs are written by highly skilled programmers and are written using program code that represents the operation content and control procedures of the performance devices for each preview content, in addition to commands related to the variation pattern. In LCD drawing, individual performance drawing data is called up in the frame in which the performance is executed, and multiple performance drawings (background, design, preview, hold, etc.) are combined.

However, in recent gaming machines, in order to improve the performance of the hardware and to increase the interest of the gaming machines, a wide variety of effects must be executed, and complex performance control must be realized. This requires highly skilled programmers and increases the amount of development work, making it difficult to secure the necessary personnel (programmers) both qualitatively and quantitatively. Furthermore, as the total amount of program code for the performance control program increases, the amount of work required to check the operation of the gaming machine and test it to improve its quality also increases.

As mentioned above, in the peripheral control board 1510 of this embodiment, in order to shorten development time and improve quality, rather than implementing effects that are executed in conjunction with LCD drawing (image display) using program code, program data for the gaming machine is output using a tool that creates LCD drawing effects, and various effects are executed based on the output program data, thereby shortening development time and improving quality.

More specifically, the peripheral control board 1510 prepares scenario data that is configured as a combination of multiple blocks, each of which indicates the content of a performance. Each block is assigned a flag (availability information) that indicates whether or not a performance based on that block can be executed. This flag (availability information) is stored, for example, as rewritable information on RAM.

In the scenario data, for example, a number of blocks are prepared as candidates for effects that can be executed based on the result of the effect determination, and are combined in a chronological order. That is, when the start condition for starting the pattern change is satisfied, a performance determination is first made as to which type of effect should be generated from among the effects. When the result is obtained, the flag (availability information) of the block corresponding to the effect type that has been determined to be executed based on the result is set to ON, and the flag (availability information) of the block corresponding to the effect type that has not been determined to be executed is maintained in the OFF state. In this way, after the pattern change (changing pattern) is started, the scenario data is processed (analyzed) in a chronological order (for each unit time (one frame)), and only the type of effect corresponding to the block set to ON is selectively executed.

Here, the scenario data may be prepared as different data for each type of variation pattern, or may be prepared independently of the variation pattern. When different data is prepared for each type of variation pattern, only blocks corresponding to the performance types that may occur separately for each variation pattern are combined in time series to form scenario data, and only the flags (availability information) of the blocks determined to be executed among those blocks are turned on. In contrast, when the scenario data is prepared as data commonly prepared for each variation pattern, blocks (numbers corresponding to blocks) corresponding to all performance types are configured as scenario data stored in a table structure or the like, and only the flags (availability information) of the blocks determined to be executed among those blocks are turned on. Additionally, scenario data that is prepared independent of the variation pattern may be prepared in accordance with the type of processing that is read out while processing (analyzing) the blocks (such as "scenario data related to post-operation performance" described below). In this case, scenario data that corresponds to the type of variation pattern and scenario data that does not correspond to the type of variation pattern are prepared, and the scenario data that does not correspond to the type of variation pattern can be commonly used for multiple types of variation patterns, thereby making it possible to effectively reduce processing load and memory capacity.

However, due to the configuration of the gaming machine, it is not possible to realize all the effects simply by executing each block that is turned on, because effects related to the lottery can be displayed or hidden, effects and patterns can be replaced, and interactive effects can be generated in response to external input from the player.

Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the process identification information (performance SW) for calling a program that executes a performance or executes a predetermined control at a predetermined timing can be set (embedded) in the block or in the liquid crystal performance scheduler data associated with the block. Here, the process identification information (performance SW) is prepared in the number of types of programs to be called, and each is set to an on state or an off state. Alternatively, process identification information (performance SW) that can always function in an on state may be prepared. As a result, when process identification information is acquired (detected) at a predetermined timing while processing (analyzing) the scenario data, the block, the liquid crystal performance scheduler data, etc., a process with contents corresponding to the type of the acquired process identification information is called, and the called process is executed. The process identification information may indicate the number of the program function to be called, or may indicate a number in a table in which the number of the program function to be called is stored.

When the peripheral control board 1510 acquires (detects) embedded processing identification information while executing and analyzing scenario data, blocks, LCD performance scheduler data, etc., it dynamically calls (calls back) a program function according to the type of acquired processing identification information. Depending on the type (processing content) of the program function called by the callback, it is possible to execute effects other than LCD effects (for example, sound output, lighting of lamps, operation of gimmicks, etc.), and it is also possible to perform processing such as setting information necessary for subsequent performance control, such as setting flags and updating data in specified areas. In this way, by calling a program function using processing identification information, it is possible to realize the display or non-display of drawings using multiple blocks, replacement of effects and patterns, and interactive effects in response to external input by the player.

The program functions called by the callback are pre-installed in the peripheral control unit 1530, and do not need to be created anew for each type of gaming machine. Therefore, even designers and planners without advanced programming knowledge only need to design the various presentation contents, and by setting the process identification information that calls the pre-defined program functions, it is possible to easily realize even complex presentation specifications. Furthermore, by using the presentation creation tool to create presentation blocks (LCD presentation scheduler data) for each presentation configuration unit, it is possible to significantly shorten the development period, and in addition, by testing the presentation contents using flags (availability information) and process identification information rather than testing them based on random lottery results, it is possible to simplify the testing process and significantly reduce the time required for testing.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with a game control means (main control board 1310) that can determine whether a jackpot has been reached and can award a bonus based on a predetermined determination result (a jackpot), a presentation control means (peripheral control unit 1511) that can execute processing related to various presentations based on a variation pattern according to the determination, and an image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) that outputs image data to the display area based on the processing performed by the presentation control means, and the presentation control means is equipped with an image information processing means that can read out time-series image information (such as the above-mentioned scenario data and blocks, or liquid crystal presentation scheduler data) and execute processing to display an image based on the time-series image information.

In addition, in this embodiment, the time-series image information (such as the above-mentioned scenario data or blocks, or LCD performance scheduler data) may contain processing identification information at least in part, and the image information processing means is able to acquire the processing identification information from the time-series image information and call up processing according to the type of acquired processing identification information. As a result, while processing related to images is being performed for each unit of time (e.g., one frame), processing related to performance elements other than images (such as lamps, sounds, movable objects, etc.) can be started based on a schedule related to image display, which prevents discrepancies in the start times of different performance elements when they work together to realize a single performance.

This point will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the time-series image information read out when a specific variation pattern is executed as the variation pattern can include a section where processing identification information is acquired for each unit time. In such a configuration, the time-series image information, which is data that chronologically specifies the "processing for displaying an image", can itself include processing identification information, which is data that specifies the reading of a process, and the time-series image information read out when a specific variation pattern is executed as the variation pattern can include a section where processing identification information is acquired for each unit time, so that even when it is necessary to perform performance processing at precise timing, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a discrepancy with the performance of the displayed image.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a special operation reception effect that allows reception of a performance while a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed or silent mode, or is in a non-output state, can be executed. In this regard, which will also be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the pre-permission operation-related display that is performed when such a special operation reception effect occurs and the permitted operation-related display that is performed when the performance reception is permitted in the special operation reception effect are displayed based on different time-series image information (such as the above-mentioned scenario data and blocks, or liquid crystal performance scheduler data). In other words, in the special operation reception effect according to the above configuration, the performance reception is allowed while a specific type of performance sound is output in a suppressed or silent mode, or is in a non-output state, so that it is expected that the player will be able to concentrate on the operation performance. However, in exchange for this, there is a concern that the performance will be poor to the extent that the specific type of performance sound is suppressed. In this regard, in the above configuration, the pre-permission operation-related display that is displayed when a special operation reception effect occurs, and the permissible operation-related display that is displayed when the special operation reception effect is in a state in which reception of the effect is permitted, are displayed based on different time-series image information, which makes it possible to realize a wide variety of presentations regarding the display effects, and makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if no operation is detected within the period in which the performance reception is permitted, a special operation reception performance that can generate a post-operation performance can be executed. This will also be described later, but in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the pre-permission operation-related display that is performed when such a special operation reception performance occurs and the permitted operation-related display that is performed when the performance reception is permitted in the special operation reception performance are displayed based on different time-series image information (such as the above-mentioned scenario data and blocks, or liquid crystal performance scheduler data). In other words, in such a special operation reception performance, even if no operation is detected within the period in which the performance reception is permitted, the post-operation performance can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player does not perform an operation and, as a result, the post-operation performance cannot be confirmed. Moreover, in the above configuration, the pre-permission operation-related display that is displayed when a special operation reception effect occurs, and the permissible operation-related display that is displayed when the special operation reception effect is in a state in which reception of the effect is permitted, are displayed based on different time-series image information, which allows for a variety of presentations in terms of the display effects, and helps prevent a decline in interest in the game.

As described above, the peripheral control unit 1511 in this embodiment is capable of reading information corresponding to image data to be displayed from the LCD performance scheduler data associated with the block, and outputting the read information to the LCD display control unit 1512. As will be described later, the blocks provided are a first type of block that is read after a wait time (wait processing period) required for a specified timing to arrive, and a second type of block that is read without a wait time (wait processing period).

More specifically, the first type of block can be configured such that the availability information is set to the ON state when the variation pattern starts, and the block is read out after a predetermined wait time (wait processing period) has elapsed until the timing for starting the performance arrives. The second type of block can be configured such that the availability information corresponding to the second type of block is set to the ON state within a process that is called based on the process identification information obtained from the LCD performance scheduler data associated with the first type of block, and the block is read out without a wait time (wait processing period).

In this case, the second type blocks are no longer dependent on the set value for the wait time (wait processing period) and can be used as common data across multiple timings and multiple variation patterns, which is expected to not only help reduce processing load and memory capacity, but also facilitate performance design and changes.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the second time-series image information (second block or second LCD performance scheduler data) can be read out while processing based on the first time-series image information (first block or first LCD performance scheduler data) among the time-series image information (blocks or LCD performance scheduler data) is in execution, and when the second time-series image information is read out, the processing based on the second time-series image information is executed in place of the processing based on the first time-series image information that is in the middle of execution. In other words, in this case, it is possible to avoid the trouble of terminating the processing based on the first time-series image information halfway, and it is expected that the processing load and memory capacity will be reduced.

These technical features will be explained below, but in explaining these technical features, it is necessary to provide another explanation of the "blocks" in this embodiment. When the image displayed on the performance display device 1600 is composed of "multiple image elements (multiple layers)," the "blocks" are prepared separately for these image elements (layers), and are used in processing to read out information (image number) corresponding to image data (video or still image) that should be output by the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) in order to display the image elements.

Here, the process for reading out information (image number) corresponding to image data (processing within the peripheral control unit 1511) is executed within the "peripheral control unit routine processing (Fig. 95)" which is started every frame, and for each frame, it is determined whether there is information (image number) corresponding to the image data to be currently displayed based on the "block", and if there is such information, it is read out, and a drawing list is created based on the information read out for each frame and sent to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512). As a result, the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) reads out image data based on the drawing list, creates a display image, and then outputs this to the display area, thereby realizing the display performance in the performance display device 1600.

Here, the "block" itself may be configured as a data structure that specifies "information corresponding to image data (image number)" for each unit of time. In this case, since it has the function of the "LCD performance scheduler data" described above, there is no need to prepare "LCD performance scheduler data" separately from the "block," and it can be omitted.

However, the "block" in this explanatory example specifies the type of "LCD performance scheduler data", and determines whether there is information (image number) corresponding to the image data to be currently displayed based on the "LCD performance scheduler data" associated with the "block", and if there is such information, it is read out and sent to the image control means (LCD display control unit 1512). Multiple "LCD performance scheduler data" may be associated with one "block", in which case the "LCD performance scheduler data" will be executed in a predetermined order, or one of the "LCD performance scheduler data" will be selectively executed.

In addition, the "block" in this explanatory example includes "LCD performance scheduler data" that describes the schedule for each frame regarding information (image number) corresponding to "image data in the image control means (LCD display control unit 1512)", as well as information on which "processing related to lamp light emission" is to be executed, which "processing related to movable body operation" is to be executed, and which "processing related to sound output" is to be executed. In other words, in this case, when a "block" for realizing a specific preview performance is read out, the "image processing in the performance display device 1600", "processing related to lamp light emission", "processing related to movable body operation", and "processing related to sound output" related to the specific preview performance are each read out and executed based on the "block", so that when different performance elements (image, lamp, movable body, sound) work together to realize one performance (specific preview performance), the start times of those performance elements are prevented from being out of sync.

As mentioned above, a "block" constitutes a single piece of scenario data, either together with other blocks or by itself, and only those "blocks" whose availability information is in the ON state are selectively executed (analyzed) from the scenario data, so that the performance is executed in a manner that corresponds to the results of the performance determination.

However, as long as the scenario data and blocks have a relationship such that "scenario data can be constructed as a combination of multiple blocks, each of which indicates the content of the performance," there are no limitations on the detailed implementation method, including whether or not "LCD performance scheduler data" is provided in addition to the "blocks."

Figure 225 is a time chart that conceptually shows an example of the processing procedure for realizing various display effects using "scenario data" and "blocks" when a specific variation pattern is selected based on the results of a jackpot determination. Note that in Figure 225, "LCD effect scheduler data" is described as "animation list," but these are synonymous.

As shown in FIG. 225, in the peripheral control unit 1511 in this explanatory example, scenario data is prepared for each layer. For example, the scenario data for "Layer 2" is configured as a chronological combination of multiple blocks (Pattern Block A, Pattern Block B, Pattern Block C, Pattern Block D) that indicate the content of the pattern presentation. However, in this embodiment, scenario data for Layer 1 and Layer 5, etc., are also included in which only one block indicating the content of the presentation is prepared.

As will be described later, the scenario data in this explanatory example also includes "something that is configured to selectively execute any one of the multiple blocks associated with it," and in this case, only the unavailable information corresponding to the selected block among the multiple blocks is turned on, and the unavailable information corresponding to the other blocks is left off, thereby making it possible to selectively execute any one of the multiple blocks. Alternatively, the blocks in this explanatory example also include "something that is configured to selectively execute any one of the multiple LCD performance scheduler data associated with it," and in this case, only the unavailable information corresponding to the selected LCD performance scheduler data among the multiple LCD performance scheduler data is turned on, and the unavailable information corresponding to the other LCD performance scheduler data is left off, thereby making it possible to selectively execute any one of the multiple LCD performance scheduler data.

Now, assuming that the start conditions for the pattern change (reserved consumption) are met, the peripheral control unit 1511 first obtains information on the results of various judgments from the main control board 1310. The information obtained in this way includes information on the change pattern, and the peripheral control unit 1511 reads out scenario data corresponding to that information (change pattern) and performs a performance judgment as to which block (performance) to execute from among the multiple blocks (such as blocks corresponding to preview performances) associated with the scenario data as candidates for execution. Then, for the blocks (performances) associated with the scenario data for which a performance judgment has been made to execute, the availability information is operated (set) to the ON state, and for the blocks (performances) for which a performance judgment has not been made to execute, the availability information is left in the OFF state.

The availability information associated with each block (effect) is operated (set) to the OFF state when starting a pattern effect (variable effect using decorative patterns), such as when scenario data is read out. Then, based on the scenario data thus read out, the above-mentioned process is carried out to determine which block's availability information should be operated (set) to the ON state.

Here, the "block" whose availability information is operated (set) to the ON state when starting the pattern performance will be executed (analyzed) immediately after the pattern performance is started based on the scenario data, or executed (analyzed) following other blocks (performances) started based on the scenario data, or executed (analyzed) at a timing when a wait time (wait processing period) previously determined for the scenario data or block has passed. However, blocks (performances) also include "those that may be executed at multiple timings within one variation pattern" and "those that may be executed in multiple variation patterns". In other words, if a mechanism is created in which the availability information of all blocks executed within the variation is operated (set) to the ON state when starting the pattern performance, it will be necessary to "prepare scenario data (or blocks) with different wait times (wait processing periods) set for each, even if the performance mode has the same content, but only the execution timing is different". In other words, in this case, different data is prepared even though the performance content is the same, and the performance is executed based on that data, which is a concern as it may have a negative impact on the processing load and memory capacity.

In the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, when a specific variation pattern is selected, a specific block (specific effect) is always the target for execution, but when executing the pattern effect, the availability information of the specific block (specific effect) is not operated (set) to the ON state, and the pattern effect can be started with the information in the OFF state. Examples of such specific blocks (specific effects) include the "appearing EF block E", the "waiting for operation block E", and the "post-operation block E" in FIG. 225, but these blocks will be described later. Of these, the "post-operation block E" is executed as an effect that clearly indicates whether or not the jackpot has been won (an effect in which special performance content is prepared for the jackpot).

In addition, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, even if a block (effect) is determined to be executed as a result of the effect determination, if this block has a different variation pattern or is one that may be executed at a different timing, the availability information is not operated (set) to the ON state when executing the pattern effect, but rather the pattern effect can be started with the information in the OFF state. Examples of such blocks include "block A for waiting for operation" and "appearing EF & block D for waiting for operation" in FIG. 225, and these blocks will be described later.

In the example shown in FIG. 225, it is assumed that the start condition is met at timing ts1. Therefore, at timing ts1, scenario data that is predefined for each layer in a form that corresponds to the type of variation pattern is read out. Next, a performance judgment is made as to which of the blocks corresponding to the scenario data thus read out and the availability information attached to the LCD performance scheduler data should be operated (set) to an on state, and the availability information is operated (set) based on the result of the performance judgment. Then, with the availability information thus operated (set), the scenario data is executed (analyzed) for each layer, and the performance progresses in a manner that corresponds to the result of the performance judgment.

However, instead of this, a performance judgment corresponding to the type of variation pattern may be made before the scenario data, which is predefined for each layer in a form corresponding to the type of variation pattern, is read out. In other words, in this case, the blocks associated with the read scenario data and the availability information attached to the LCD performance scheduler data are operated based on the results of the performance judgment made before the scenario data is read out.

Of the multiple layers, "Layer 1" corresponds to a block of scenario data (normal background block) for the "background image" that is displayed when no symbol presentation is being performed (symbols are frozen and no game is being played). Therefore, in "Layer 1," no new blocks are read out when timing ts1 arrives, and the block (normal background block) that is already in execution continues to be executed (analyzed).

More specifically, in the normal background block, "LCD performance scheduler data for normal background" is associated with "image data for background image" stored in the LCD display control unit 1512, which is information (time-series image information) about "which image data" should be output at "what timing". That is, the peripheral control unit 1511 executes (analyzes) the "LCD performance scheduler data for normal background" for each unit time (one frame), and as a result, each time information corresponding to "image data for background image (moving image or still image)" is obtained, the information is transmitted to the LCD display control unit 1512. At this time, the information obtained from other frames may be compiled to create one piece of information (drawing list), and the drawing list may be transmitted to the LCD display control unit 1512. As a result, the background depiction (normal background) according to the schedule specified in the "LCD performance scheduler data for normal background" is displayed on the performance display device 1600. The blocks and scenario data that correspond to this "LCD presentation scheduler data for normal background" are preferably read out when the power-on process ends or when the corresponding presentation state (normal presentation state, high probability presentation state, special presentation mode, etc.) is entered, and are set as time-series image information in which the same background image (background video) is displayed in a loop at predetermined intervals. Also, instead of combining information obtained from other frames to create a single piece of information (drawing list), information corresponding to the "image data for background image (video or still image)" may be sent to the LCD display control unit 1512. In short, it is sufficient that information corresponding to the "image data for background image (video or still image)" is sent to the LCD display control unit 1512 in any form.

The normal background image displayed on "Layer 1" based on the normal background block is hidden on the performance display device 1600 when the background image at the time of SP reach is displayed on "Layer 3" based on the "SP reach background block" or "SP conclusion background block" described later. However, as for the internal image processing, even if the background image at the time of SP reach is displayed on "Layer 3", the processing related to the normal background image based on the "LCD performance scheduler data for normal background" continues to be executed on "Layer 1" and is not made to be in a non-executing state according to the processing status related to the SP background image on "Layer 3". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 225, in the period X after the scenario data corresponding to the background image at the time of SP reach is finished, the normal background is displayed again, and the "pattern block D" for displaying the stop pattern with the normal background displayed is executed. This makes it easy to recognize which performance state the winning was in when the big win pattern appears, and it is possible to favorably promote understanding of the game.

In contrast, "Layer 2" corresponds to a block (a block for a design) of scenario data related to "performance design (design displayed on the performance display device 1600)". Since the specific variation pattern shown in FIG. 225 develops into a SP reach performance, the scenario data of "Layer 2" specifies that "design block A" corresponding to "LCD performance scheduler data for pre-reach variation", "design block B" corresponding to "LCD performance scheduler data for normal reach variation", "design block C" corresponding to "LCD performance scheduler data for SP reach variation", and "design block D" corresponding to "LCD performance scheduler data for stop patterns" are executed (analyzed) in sequence.

However, in recent years, the "performance symbol" is often displayed small within the performance display device 1600 during the period when the SP reach background is displayed, and sometimes the performance progresses in such a way that "after the SP reach background is displayed, the background is temporarily returned to the normal background, and then the SP reach background is displayed again." In other words, in this case, simply executing (analyzing) the display schedule for the "performance symbol" and the display schedule for the "SP reach background" separately for each layer is a concern as it may cause discrepancies in the event of some abnormality, so the "pattern block C" that corresponds to the "liquid crystal performance scheduler data for SP reach fluctuations" may be executed based on the display schedule for the "SP reach background." In this case, the processing related to the background image functions to manage the schedule for the performance symbol.

For example, by adding process identification information for calling up the "process for turning on the availability information for symbol block C" at a predetermined timing in the "Liquid Crystal Display Scheduler Data for SP Reach Background" corresponding to the "SP Reach Background Block" described below, it is possible to execute "symbol block C" and "symbol block D" based on the display schedule for the "SP Reach Background". In this case, not only will the availability information for "symbol block C" and "symbol block D" remain in the OFF state when the symbol performance begins, but they will not be included in the scenario data corresponding to "symbol block A" and "symbol block B", but will be configured as separate scenario data.

In addition, in "Layer 3", it corresponds to the blocks of scenario data (SP reach background block, SP conclusion background block) for the "background image after the SP reach performance has started". In this regard, the "background image after the SP reach performance has started" should not be displayed at the time when the pattern performance has started, but should be started from the middle of the pattern performance. Therefore, in the scenario data of "Layer 3", a wait time (wait processing period) is set that functions to prevent the block of the "background image after the SP reach performance has started" from being executed until the corresponding timing arrives. As a result, after a predetermined wait time (wait processing period) has passed since the pattern performance started, the "SP reach background block" and the "SP conclusion background block" are executed (analyzed) in sequence, and the corresponding information can be read out for each frame, so that the background image of the SP reach performance appears in the performance display device 1600.

In other words, in this case, the above blocks include first type blocks (such as blocks corresponding to layers 3 and 4 shown in FIG. 225) that are read out after a wait time (wait processing period) until the specified timing arrives, and second type blocks (such as blocks corresponding to layers 1, 2, and layers 5 to 7 shown in FIG. 225) that are read out without a wait time (wait processing period). Since second type blocks are no longer dependent on the set value for the wait time (wait processing period) and can be used as common data for all performance timing, this is expected to not only help reduce processing load and memory capacity, but also to facilitate performance design and changes.

In this regard, SP reach effects are often configured to start with a display effect that is the same regardless of whether or not a jackpot has been hit, and then branch midway through the effect to either a jackpot effect (for example, an effect in which the character wins) or a loss effect (for example, an effect in which the character loses), thereby suggesting the result of the jackpot determination. In this case, although the same display effect is executed regardless of whether or not a jackpot has been hit until the midway point of the SP reach effect, there is a concern that displaying them in different blocks (jackpot blocks, loss blocks) or image data could have a negative impact on processing load and memory capacity.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the scenario data related to the SP reach performance is divided into a block corresponding to image data that can be used in both jackpot and miss situations (SP reach background block) and a block corresponding to different image data for jackpot and miss situations (SP ending background block), and these are executed sequentially. This makes it possible to execute the SP reach performance while reducing the processing load and memory capacity.

In the scenario data for the SP reach performance, after a specified wait time (wait processing period) has passed, an "SP reach background block" is read out. Next, the "SP reach background LCD performance scheduler data" corresponding to the "SP reach background block" is read out. These processes are executed (analyzed) for each unit of time, but the "SP reach background LCD performance scheduler data" has a section set where the same processing identification information is obtained for each unit of time (1 frame). This means that the performance acceptance period (validity period) is generated by managing the LCD performance scheduler data for each frame, rather than by time management using a timer or the like.

For example, in the "Liquid Crystal Performance Scheduler Data for SP Reach Background" shown in Fig. 225, apart from the information corresponding to the image data to be currently displayed, the process identification information of "X1" is added to each frame from timing ts31 immediately after the "Liquid Crystal Performance Scheduler Data for SP Reach Background" is executed (analyzed). Each time the process identification information of "X1" is read out, the following "Process X1" is read out and executed.
Process X1: A process for determining whether to generate a post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block C" based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410)

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the section to which such processing identification information (here, "X1") is attached for each unit time functions as a "performance acceptance period (valid period) during which performance acceptance can be performed by operation", and in this "processing X1", when a performance determination is made, the availability information of the "post-operation block C" associated with "Layer 6" is operated (set) to the ON state. As a result, the "post-operation block C" is read out for the corresponding time for each unit time, and the "post-operation liquid crystal performance scheduler data C" associated with the "post-operation block C" is executed (analyzed) for each unit time, and the "lamp light emission related processing", "movable body operation related processing", "sound output related processing", etc. associated with the "post-operation block C" are each started to be executed, so that a post-operation performance corresponding to the "post-operation block C" can be generated.

In addition, in the next frame after each process associated with the "post-operation block C" has been started, the "SP reach background liquid crystal performance scheduler data" corresponding to the above-mentioned "SP reach background block" is executed (analyzed). Therefore, when a performance is accepted midway through a section (performance acceptance period) to which the process identification information (here, "X1") is assigned for each unit time, the process identification information (here, "X1") is read from the "SP reach background liquid crystal performance scheduler data" and the above-mentioned "process X1" corresponding to the process identification information is executed in the next frame. However, the "process X1" also includes a process for determining whether each process associated with the "post-operation block C" has been started, and when it is determined in the process that the process has been started, the "process X1" is terminated without further processing based on the operation detection information.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 225, four identical process identification information (here, "X1") are lined up from timing ts31, but the "process X1" read from the second process identification information (here, "X1") is read, and the "LCD performance scheduler data C for post-operation" associated with the "block C for post-operation" in "Layer 6" is executed (analyzed). In this case, the third and fourth process identification information (here, "X1") that are filled in in the figure no longer need to be read, but they will be read automatically while the "LCD performance scheduler data for SP reach background" is executed every unit time. However, each time they are read in this way, the "process X1" corresponding to the process identification information (here, "X1") executes a process such as "the post-operation performance has already been executed, so the process X1 is terminated", which essentially invalidates the process related to the performance judgment (putting the performance acceptance in a state in which it is not permitted).

In contrast, when no performance determination is made in "Process X1" (when a determination is made that the post-operation performance is not to be executed), the availability information of the "post-operation block C" associated with "Layer 6" is left in the OFF state and the process X1 is terminated. Then, until the section in which the same process identification information (here, "X1") is acquired per unit time (one frame) is ended, the process identification information (here, "X1") is read from the "Liquid Crystal Performance Scheduler Data for SP Reach Background" per unit time (one frame) and the above-mentioned "Process X1" corresponding to this is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 225, since the above-mentioned section is ended with the fourth process identification information (here, "X1"), when the fourth process identification information is read and no performance determination is made in the process X1 corresponding to this, the post-operation performance corresponding to the "post-operation block C" is not executed and the subsequent performance progresses.

With this configuration, even after the post-operation performance is executed (even after a performance determination is made within the process X1 read from the second process identification information (X1)), the same process identification information (X1) is obtained to read "process X1 that can generate a post-operation performance" from the "liquid crystal performance scheduler data for SP reach background". However, simply analyzing this information will allow it to function effectively as a performance acceptance period (validity period), which will facilitate and standardize performance design.

Note that FIG. 225 merely illustrates this type of processing as a concept, and in reality, the processing identification information is not acquired over only four frames. If it is to function as a performance acceptance period, it is usually set as a section in which the same processing identification information is acquired over a period of about 90 frames. This is not limited to the performance acceptance period that occurs at timing ts31, but is also true for performance acceptance periods that occur at other timings. Also, as mentioned above, such processing identification information may be attached to the block side rather than the LCD performance scheduler data side, or the LCD performance scheduler data and the block may be provided as a single piece of data.

Moreover, in the "Liquid Crystal Performance Scheduler Data for SP Reach Background" shown in Fig. 225, even at timing ts41, the process identification information (here, "1") related to the operation performance is added. However, the process identification information of "1" does not read out "the process in which a performance determination is made as to whether or not to generate a post-operation performance", but rather reads out and executes "Process 1" described below.
Processing 1. A process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" to the ON state in order to perform a premonition effect (such as an appearance effect display) that suggests that the "effect acceptance period (valid period) in which the effect acceptance can be performed by an operation" will occur soon, and an operation waiting effect (such as the above-mentioned model image and gauge display) that prompts the player to operate when the effect acceptance period is occurring

According to this configuration, although it is necessary to prepare a "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal performance scheduler data D)" in addition to the "SP reach background liquid crystal performance scheduler data", the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" can be started to be executed at an appropriate timing (here, timing ts41) determined by the "SP reach background liquid crystal performance scheduler data". In other words, in this case, it is easy to start the execution of the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" at any timing or multiple timings within the "SP reach background liquid crystal performance scheduler data", and to start the execution of the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" from the "liquid crystal performance scheduler data" in a variation pattern different from the "SP reach background liquid crystal performance scheduler data", which makes it possible to facilitate and standardize the performance design.

Here, when the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" is executed (analyzed), the "appearance EF & operation waiting LCD performance scheduler data D" corresponding to the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" is read out. These processes are executed (analyzed) for each unit time, but in the "appearance EF & operation waiting LCD performance scheduler data", first, a section is provided in which image information (video or still image) corresponding to a precursor performance (such as an appearance effect display) that suggests that a "performance acceptance period (valid period) in which performance acceptance may be performed by operation" will soon occur while performance acceptance is not permitted.

However, in the "LCD effect scheduler data for appearance EF & waiting for operation", a section appears midway through during which an effect acceptance period occurs and image information (video or still image) corresponding to an operation waiting effect (such as the above-mentioned mock image or gauge display) that prompts the player to operate is acquired, and in this section, the same processing identification information is acquired for each unit time (1 frame).

That is, in the "LCD performance scheduler data for appearance EF & operation waiting" executed (analyzed) from timing ts41, apart from the information corresponding to the image data to be currently displayed, the process identification information of "Y3" is added to each frame from timing ts42. Each time the process identification information of "Y3" is read, the following "process Y3" is read and executed.
Process Y3: A process for determining whether to generate a post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block D" based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410)

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the section in which such processing identification information (here, "Y3") is assigned for each unit time functions as a "performance acceptance period (valid period) in which performance acceptance can be performed by operation." Furthermore, in the "processing Y3," when a performance determination is made, the availability information of the "post-operation block D," which is associated with the same "layer 6" as the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal performance scheduler data D)" that is the basis for reading out the "processing Y3," is operated (set) to the on state.

In this case, when the "post-operation block D" is read out, various processes including the "post-operation LCD performance scheduler data D" associated with the "post-operation block D" are executed, and a post-operation performance corresponding to the "post-operation block D" is generated. Not only this, but the newly read "post-operation block D (post-operation LCD performance scheduler data)" is put into an execution state in "Layer 6" in place of the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting LCD performance scheduler data D)" that was in the middle of execution.

With this configuration, by simply reading out the "post-operation block D", it is possible to essentially invalidate (put into a state in which performance acceptance is not permitted) the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal performance scheduler data D)" that no longer needs to be read due to the performance judgment, and even the processing identification information of "Y3" for reading "processing Y3", and it is possible to suitably facilitate and standardize performance design, as it becomes unnecessary to perform a separate judgment or process to terminate these. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 225, it is assumed that performance acceptance is performed in "processing Y3" read out from the second processing identification information (here, "Y3") in the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal performance scheduler data D)", and thus the "post-operation liquid crystal performance scheduler data D" associated with the "post-operation block D" in the same "layer 6" is executed (analyzed). Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the "ray portion" in the "appearing EF & operation waiting block D (appearing EF & operation waiting LCD performance scheduler data D)" corresponds to the section that has been erased by overwriting (effectively the section that has been invalidated).

In other words, the processing identification information for "Y3" could have been attached to the "Liquid Crystal Performance Scheduler Data for SP Reach Background (Block for SP Reach Background)" side, just like the performance acceptance period that occurs from timing ts31, but by deliberately attaching it to the "Liquid Crystal Performance Scheduler Data for Appearance EF & Waiting for Operation (Block D for Appearance EF & Waiting for Operation)" side, which is associated with the same layer as the "Block D for After Operation (Liquid Crystal Performance Scheduler Data D for After Operation)," it can be said that it is possible to achieve such an excellent effect.

However, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, during the performance reception period that occurs from timing ts42, in addition to the above-mentioned processing identification information of "Y3" included in "LCD performance scheduler data for appearance EF & operation waiting (block D for appearance EF & operation waiting)",
- Processing identification information for "Y2" contained in "Liquid crystal performance scheduler data for SP reach background (block for SP reach background)" is to be prepared.

That is, as mentioned above, the "LCD performance scheduler data for appearance EF & waiting for operation (appearance EF & waiting for operation block D)" is associated with the same "layer 6" as the "post-operation block D (LCD performance scheduler data for post-operation)", so if the processing identification information of "Y3" is added to it, it is beneficial in that it will be automatically erased (invalidated) when the "post-operation block D (LCD performance scheduler data for post-operation)" is executed. However, the "LCD performance scheduler data for appearance EF & waiting for operation (appearance EF & waiting for operation block D)" is executed (analyzed) by its availability information being set to the on state based on the processing identification information of "1" contained in the "LCD performance scheduler data for SP reach background (SP reach background block)". Therefore, if a frame processing with a processing identification information of "1" is skipped during a high processing load, the "LCD performance scheduler data for appearance EF & waiting for operation (appearance EF & waiting for operation block D)" itself will not be executed, and the performance acceptance period (validity period) based on the processing identification information of "Y3" may not occur.

Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 in this embodiment, processing identification information for "Y2" and processing identification information for "Y3" are prepared as processing identification information for reading out processing related to operation presentation (processing in which a presentation determination is made as to whether or not to generate a post-operation presentation based on operation detection information), and the processing identification information for "Y2" is attached to the "LCD presentation scheduler data for SP reach background (block for SP reach background)" side, while the processing identification information for "Y3" is attached to the "LCD presentation scheduler data for appearance EF & waiting for operation (block D for appearance EF & waiting for operation)" side. In this way, by providing both processing identification information for reading out processing related to the operational performance, which corresponds to a first type of block whose availability information is set to the ON state when the variable pattern starts and which is read out after a predetermined wait time (wait processing period) has elapsed until the timing for starting the performance arrives, and which corresponds to a second type of block whose availability information is set to the ON state within the processing executed based on the first type of block and which is read out without the wait time (wait processing period), it is possible to reduce the above-mentioned risk that the performance acceptance period (validity period) will not occur.

Here, in "processing Y3" executed based on the process identification information of "Y3", when a performance determination is made, the availability information of the above-mentioned "post-operation block D" is operated to the ON state, and the display performance after the operation (post-operation performance) in the performance display device 1600 is executed. In contrast, in "processing Y2" executed based on the process identification information of "Y2", when a performance determination is made, "processing related to lamp light emission", "processing related to movable body operation", and "processing related to sound output" are each started to be executed. Therefore, even if the process identification information of "Y3" is not read out, it is possible to realize a post-operation performance by lamp light emission, movable body operation, and sound output by the process identification information of "Y2". "Processing Y2" and "processing Y3" may be any as long as they can generate different post-operation performances.

In the example shown in FIG. 225, three identical process identification information (here, "Y2") are lined up from timing ts42, but it is assumed that the performance acceptance is performed within the "process Y2" read from the second process identification information (here, "Y2"), and thus a post-operation performance by lamp illumination, movable body operation, and sound output is executed. In this case, although there is no longer any need to read the third process identification information (here, "Y2") that is filled in in the figure, it will be read automatically while the "liquid crystal performance scheduler data for SP reach background" is executed every unit time. However, each time it is read in this way, the "process Y2" corresponding to the process identification information (here, "Y2") executes a process such as "the post-operation performance has already been executed, so the process Y2 is terminated", which essentially invalidates the process related to the performance judgment (putting the performance acceptance in a state in which it is not permitted).

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above,
- A "first special operation reception effect (performance reception period) in which performance reception based on operation detection information is permitted" that occurs while a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed or silent mode or is in a non-output state,
A second special operation reception effect (performance reception period) that can generate a post-operation performance even if no operation is detected, regardless of the performance state (performance mode)
As described above, the above can be executed (see, for example, FIG. 142, and FIGS. 212 to 224).

In the first special operation reception effect, the reception of the effect is permitted while a specific type of sound effect is suppressed or silent, or is not output at all, so it is expected that the focus will be on the operation performance. However, in exchange for this, there is a concern that the performance will be less effective to the extent that a specific type of sound effect (background music playback) is suppressed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the pre-allowed operation-related display (premonition effect) which is displayed when the first special operation acceptance effect occurs, and the allowed operation-related display (such as the mock image and gauge display mentioned above) which is displayed when the effect acceptance is allowed (during the valid period) in the first special operation acceptance effect, are displayed based on different blocks (LCD effect scheduler data). This makes it possible to realize a variety of effects in terms of the display effects, and makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest in playing the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the pre-allowed operation-related display (premonition effect) which is displayed when the second special operation acceptance effect occurs, and the allowed operation-related display (such as the above-mentioned mock image and gauge display) which is displayed when the effect acceptance is allowed (during the valid period) in the second special operation acceptance effect, are displayed based on different blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). This makes it possible to realize a variety of effects in terms of the display effects, and makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest in playing the game.

More specifically, in the "Liquid Crystal Display Scheduler Data for SP Reach Background" shown in Fig. 225, a special operation reception effect (first special operation reception effect or second special operation reception effect) that generates a post-operation effect can be generated even when a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode and an operation is not detected, and at timing ts51, processing identification information "2" is read out to start processing related to the special operation reception effect. However, the processing identification information "2" does not read out "processing in which a performance determination is made as to whether to generate a post-operation effect" but rather reads out and executes "processing 2" described below.
Process 2. A process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to the "appearance EF block E" to the ON state in order to perform a premonition effect (such as an appearance effect display) that suggests that the "effect acceptance period (validity period) in which an effect acceptance can be performed by an operation" will occur soon

According to this configuration, in addition to the "SP reach background block (SP reach background liquid crystal performance scheduler data)", a dedicated block (appearing EF block E) for the permissible pre-operation related display (omen performance) and the corresponding liquid crystal performance scheduler data (appearing EF liquid crystal performance scheduler data E) must be prepared, but the "appearing EF block E" can be started at an appropriate timing (here, timing ts51) determined by the "SP reach background liquid crystal performance scheduler data". In other words, in this case, it is easy to start the execution of the "appearing EF block E" at any timing or multiple timings within the "SP reach background liquid crystal performance scheduler data", and to start the execution of the "appearing EF block E" from the "liquid crystal performance scheduler data" in a variation pattern different from the "SP reach background liquid crystal performance scheduler data", which makes it possible to facilitate and standardize the performance design.

In addition, with this configuration, multiple modes with different expectations (expectations of a jackpot pattern appearing) are prepared separately for the pre-permission operation-related display (premonition effect) and the permissible operation-related display, and it becomes possible to combine them as appropriate as to which combinations to execute, which allows for a wide variety of effects and prevents a decline in interest in the game. Also, when adopting other variation patterns, it becomes possible to realize effects in which the pre-permission operation-related display (premonition effect) is a common mode, but the permissible operation-related display is executed in a unique mode that is not shared.

Here, when the "appearing EF block E" is executed (analyzed), the "LCD performance scheduler data E for appearing EF" corresponding to the "appearing EF block E" is read out and executed (analyzed). When this "LCD performance scheduler data E for appearing EF" is executed (analyzed), image information (video or still image) is obtained for executing a performance with a specified effect display (pre-permission operation related display) across the "section where performance reception is not permitted" and the "section where performance reception is permitted".

However, since the "block E for appearing EF" and the "LCD performance scheduler data E for appearing EF" are not provided with processing identification information for executing "processing in which a performance determination can be made to generate a post-operation performance based on operation detection information," no performance acceptance period will be generated based on the block or scheduler data.

That is, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, when timing ts52 occurs in the "SP reach background block (liquid crystal performance scheduler data for SP reach background)", the process identification information of "3" is read out in order to generate a performance acceptance period. The process identification information of "3" does not correspond to "processing in which a performance determination can be made to generate a post-operation performance based on operation detection information", but is data that associates it with "processing 3" described below.
Process 3: A process of operating (setting) the availability information of the "operation waiting block E" to the ON state in order to perform an operation waiting effect (such as the above-mentioned model image or gauge display) that prompts the player to perform an operation when the effect reception period is occurring

With this configuration, in addition to the "SP reach background block (LCD performance scheduler data for SP reach background)" and the "appearing EF block E (LCD performance scheduler data E for appearing EF)", it is necessary to prepare a block dedicated to the allowable operation-related displays (such as the above-mentioned mock image and gauge display) (block E for waiting for operation) and LCD performance scheduler data corresponding to this block (LCD performance scheduler data E for waiting for operation); however, the "block E for waiting for operation" can be caused to start execution from an appropriate timing (here, timing ts52) determined by the "SP reach background LCD performance scheduler data". In other words, in this case, it is easy to start the execution of the "waiting for operation block E" at any timing or multiple timings within the "LCD performance scheduler data for SP reach background", and to start the execution of the "waiting for operation block E" from "LCD performance scheduler data" within a different variation pattern than the "LCD performance scheduler data for SP reach background", which makes it possible to easily and conveniently simplify and standardize the performance design.

Here, the performance acceptance period occurring at timing ts52 may also be configured as a performance section in which the same processing identification information (X1, Y3, etc.) is added to each frame in a row, similar to the performance acceptance period in which performance acceptance is permitted at timings ts31 and ts42. However, in the example shown in FIG. 225, this is realized using a method different from that for the performance acceptance period occurring at timings ts31 and ts42, and the other performance acceptance periods may also be configured using the method described below.

In other words, for the effect reception period that occurs at timing ts52, a method is adopted in which a state in which effect reception is not permitted (off state) and a state in which effect reception is permitted (on state) are created by manipulating the state of the operation status flag (off state, on state). When this method is adopted, it is desirable to have effect determination based on operation detection information performed every unit time (every frame) within the "peripheral control unit steady-state processing" shown in FIG. 95, rather than within a process called based on processing identification information.

For example, each time "peripheral control unit steady-state processing" is performed, the operation status flag is checked, and on condition that the operation status flag is in the on state (on condition that the effect acceptance period is in progress), an effect determination can be made to generate a post-operation effect based on the operation detection information. When an effect determination is made, the availability information of the block (here, "post-operation block E") corresponding to the type of post-operation effect according to the operation status flag that is in the on state is operated (set) to the on state.

In other words, in this case, operation status flags are prepared for each type of post-operation performance, and after determining which type of operation status flag is on, the availability information of the block corresponding to the corresponding post-operation performance is operated (set) to on. The process of turning the operation status flag to off may be performed within the process that operates (sets) the availability information of the block corresponding to the post-operation performance to on, or may be performed within a process called based on the process identification information attached to the block (LCD performance scheduler data) whose availability information has been operated to on.

Regarding the processing procedure when this method is adopted, starting from the point where the processing identification information for "3" above is read out at timing ts52 and the above "processing 3" is executed, the "operation waiting block E (LCD performance scheduler data E for operation waiting)" is first read out and executed (analyzed).

The process of setting the operation status flag to the on state may be performed within the above-mentioned "Processing 3", but in the example shown in Figure 225, the processing identification information of "Z1" corresponding to the "Processing Z1" described below is read out in the first frame (processing timing) when the above-mentioned "Waiting for Operation Block E (LCD Performance Scheduler Data E for Waiting for Operation)" is executed (analyzed).
Process Z1: A process for turning on the operation status flag of the type associated with the "post-operation block E" among the operation status flags.

As a result, at timing ts52, the operation status flag corresponding to the "post-operation block E" is operated (set) to the on state, and the period during which the operation status flag is maintained in the on state can be made to function as the "performance acceptance period" by performing a judgment process based on the operation detection information in the above-mentioned "peripheral control unit regular processing". In addition, while the operation status flag is maintained in the on state in this way, the permitted operation-related display (such as the above-mentioned mock image and gauge display) based on the execution (analysis) of the "operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal performance scheduler data E)" is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 225, the pre-operation-related display (appearing EF block E (appearing EF liquid crystal performance scheduler data E)) associated with layer 7 and the permitted operation-related display (operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal performance scheduler data E)) associated with layer 6 are executed so that their display periods partially overlap.

Here, the pre-allowed operation related display associated with layer 7 is displayed closer to the viewer than the allowed operation related display associated with layer 6, and is displayed preferentially. Therefore, the performance acceptance is permitted from the time when the pre-allowed operation related display makes it difficult to see at least a part of the allowed operation related display, and this provides a performance in which the performance acceptance is possible even when it is difficult to see what aspect of the pre-allowed operation related display has a high degree of expectation.

In this regard, when the performance reception period is not yet over at timing ts53, which is an intermediate stage, the process of operating (setting) the availability information of the "post-operation block E" associated with the same layer 6 as the "waiting-for-operation block E (waiting-for-operation liquid crystal performance scheduler data E)" to the on state is executed within the above-mentioned "peripheral control unit regular process". As a result, each process (lamp, movable body, sound, etc.) including the "post-operation liquid crystal performance scheduler data E" associated with the "post-operation block E" is executed. At this time, in layer 6, the "post-operation liquid crystal performance scheduler data E" associated with the "post-operation block E" is executed in place of the "waiting-for-operation liquid crystal performance scheduler data E" associated with the "waiting-for-operation block E", so there is no need to perform special processing to end the "waiting-for-operation block E". At this time, the process identification information of "Z3" described later included in the "waiting-for-operation block E (waiting-for-operation liquid crystal performance scheduler data E)" can be automatically erased (invalidated).

The process of setting the operation status flag to the OFF state may be performed in conjunction with the process of operating (setting) the availability information of the "post-operation block E" to the ON state within the above-mentioned "peripheral control unit steady-state processing." In the example shown in FIG. 225, however, in the first frame (processing timing) when the above-mentioned "post-operation block E (post-operation LCD performance scheduler data E)" is executed (analyzed), the processing identification information of "Z2" is read out and the corresponding "processing Z2" described below is executed, thereby executing processing based on the "post-operation block E" after the performance acceptance period has ended.
Process Z2: A process of turning off the operation status flag of the type associated with the "post-operation block E" among the operation status flags.

However, as mentioned above, in the example shown in FIG. 225, there are cases where the performance acceptance is performed in a state where the pre-permission operation related display (appearing EF block E (appearing EF liquid crystal performance scheduler data E)) remains on the screen (displayed state). Therefore, in "processing Z2", it is desirable to determine whether the appearing EF block E (appearing EF liquid crystal performance scheduler data E) is in an execution state, and if it is in an execution state, to also perform a process to terminate it midway. However, after the "appearing EF block E (appearing EF liquid crystal performance scheduler data E)" is allowed to continue without being terminated midway, the image display based on the "post-operation block E" may be preferentially executed (displayed in front of the image display (layer) based on the appearing EF block E) in a range that includes at least the entire "range in which the image display based on the appearing EF block E is performed" (for example, the entire screen), so that the image display based on the appearing EF block E is not displayed.

In addition, when the "operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal performance scheduler data E)" is executed (analyzed) at timing ts54, the processing identification information of "Z3" associated with "processing Z3" is read out to end the performance acceptance period. Here, when the "operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal performance scheduler data E)" is executed (analyzed) at timing ts54, it means that the "operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal performance scheduler data E)" is not overwritten by the "post-operation block E (post-operation liquid crystal performance scheduler data E)" corresponding to the same layer 6, that is, it means that the performance acceptance is not performed until the timing ts54 arrives. However, even if the performance acceptance is not performed between timing ts52 and timing ts54, the performance acceptance period that occurs from timing ts52 functions as the above-mentioned "second special operation acceptance performance" that operates (sets) the availability information of the "post-operation block E" to the on state, which is the same as when the performance acceptance was performed (the above-mentioned "automatic button function").

Therefore, in the "block E for waiting for operation (LCD performance scheduler data E for waiting for operation)", the following processing is executed in "processing Z3" which is executed based on the processing identification information of "Z3" read out at timing ts54.
Process Z3: A process is performed to turn off the operation status flag of the type associated with the "post-operation block E" among the operation status flags, and to operate (set) the availability information of the "post-operation block E" to the ON state.

With this configuration, during the effect acceptance period that occurs from timing ts52, even if the effect is not accepted within that period, the same block as when the effect acceptance was made is read out and the post-operation effect associated with that block is executed, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when the player forgets to operate. Also, since the post-operation effect is not executed after the effect acceptance period (timings ts51 to ts52) ends, but rather "processing to read out the same block as when the effect acceptance was made" is performed within the final frame (processing at timing ts52) of the processing related to the effect acceptance period (timings ts51 to ts52), it is possible to realize smooth performance progression without any discrepancy between when an operation is made and when there is no operation.

In addition, with this configuration, the display image (such as a mock image or gauge display) based on the "operation waiting block E (liquid crystal display performance scheduler data E for operation waiting)" is hidden when the performance is accepted, whether it is accepted by the player's operation or by the automatic button function being enabled (here, "post-operation block E"). This means that even if the player forgets to operate the game, the performance can progress in the same way, which is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 225, the effect acceptance period that occurs from timing ts52 also functions as the above-mentioned "first special operation acceptance effect" that is executed while a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is being output in a suppressed mode when the effect acceptance period occurs. In the "first special operation acceptance effect" shown in FIG. 225, the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is not returned to a non-suppressed mode at the time the effect is accepted, but continues to be output in a suppressed mode. Then, during the period in which the post-operation effect is being executed, the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is set to be returned to being output in a non-suppressed mode.

Note that "a specific type of effect sound" refers to the sound of "BGM playback" (BGM playback for normal background or SP background), but in this case it specifically corresponds to the sound (BGM playback sound for SP reach) that is output by executing "processing related to sound output" associated with the "SP reach background block." The above-mentioned modes and methods can be appropriately adopted as the suppression modes and methods.

In the above configuration, when an operation acceptance effect (timing ts52-ts54) is generated while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is suppressed (or when an operation acceptance effect is generated in which the same post-operation effect as when the effect is accepted is executed even if the effect is not accepted), the pre-allowed operation-related display (appearing EF block E) and the allowed operation-related display (waiting for operation block E) that are displayed at the time are executed based on mutually different blocks (LCD effect scheduler data). This makes it possible to realize a variety of effects regarding the display effects, and makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, in the operation acceptance effects (first special operation acceptance effect, second special operation acceptance effect) at such timings ts52 to ts54, the images (pre-permission operation-related display, permissible operation-related display) displayed by different blocks (liquid crystal display effect scheduler data) are displayed so that there is a period of overlap. This makes it possible to realize a presentation that is intertwined with the "pre-permission operation-related display" and the "permissible operation-related display" (such as the difficulty of visibility mentioned above), which can prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In contrast, in operation reception effects that occur when the "specific type of performance sound" is not suppressed, such as the operation reception effect that occurs at timing ts41 (or operation reception effects in which a post-operation performance does not occur when the performance is not accepted), the pre-permission operation-related display and the permissible operation-related display are displayed in the same block (LCD performance scheduler data). In other words, unlike the operation reception effects at timings ts52 to ts54 (operation reception effects that suggest whether or not a jackpot will be won by the post-operation performance), such operation reception effects may or may not occur depending on the results of the performance judgment (preview judgment), so it can be said that it is more beneficial to display the pre-permission operation-related display and the permissible operation-related display in the same block (LCD performance scheduler data) to facilitate handling according to the judgment results.

However, even when the pre-permissible operation related display and the permissible operation related display are displayed in the same block (LCD performance scheduler data) in this way, it is desirable to execute these performances so that, although they are on the same layer, the pre-permissible operation related display and the permissible operation related display appear to overlap in time (there are times when both the pre-permissible operation related display and the permissible operation related display are displayed, for example, in a manner such that part of the permissible operation related display is difficult to see).

For a block of operation-related display during permissible operation (block E for waiting for operation), the availability information may be set to the ON state within a process corresponding to the process identification information read out based on a block of operation-related display before permissible operation (block E for appearing EF (liquid crystal performance scheduler data E for appearing EF)).

The operation reception effect for which reception is permitted at timings ts52 to ts54 may be executed as at least one of the first special operation reception effect and the second special operation reception effect described above, and may be executed as any of the operation reception effects (operation reception effects with BGM suppression) described above with reference to FIG. 142, FIG. 212 to FIG. 215, FIG. 217 to FIG. 220, FIG. 223, etc. In this case, the other operation reception effects among the operation reception effects shown in FIG. 225 may be executed as any of the operation reception effects (operation reception effects with BGM not suppressed) described above with reference to FIG. 216, FIG. 222, FIG. 224, etc. In addition, each of the other examples of these operation reception effects described later may be appropriately adopted.

For example, different blocks are used for the operation reception effect that occurs at timing ts52 (block E for waiting for operation) and the operation reception effect that occurs at timing ts42 (appearance EF & block D for waiting for operation), but in these operation reception effects, the same reception acceptable sound may be output when the effect is accepted (first acceptable sound shown in Figures 212 to 224).

In addition, in the operation reception performance (operation waiting block E) that occurs at timing ts52, if the performance is accepted while the reception permissible sound is being output, the output state is terminated. However, in the operation reception performance (operation waiting block E) that occurs at timing ts42, even if the performance is accepted while the reception permissible sound is being output, the output state is maintained (first permissible sound shown in Figures 212 to 224). Various configurations can be appropriately adopted.

As mentioned above, the scenario data for the SP reach performance is divided into a block corresponding to image data that can be used in both jackpot and miss situations (SP reach background block) and a block corresponding to different image data for jackpot and miss situations (SP ending background block), and these are executed sequentially. In this regard, the peripheral control unit 1511 in this embodiment is set so that the timing ts55 of the transition from the "SP reach background block" to the "SP ending background block" always occurs within the period in which the post-operation performance is being executed.

That is, in an operation acceptance performance in which acceptance of a performance is permitted at timing ts52, regardless of when the performance acceptance (including the automatic button function described above) is made during the performance acceptance period (timings ts52 to ts54), a predetermined time from timing ts54 is set as the period during which the post-operation performance is guaranteed to be executed (the time required to execute the post-operation performance is set). During the period during which the post-operation performance is guaranteed to be executed, a display based on the post-operation LCD performance scheduler data E corresponding to the "post-operation block E" (post-operation display performance (post-operation performance) on the performance display device 1600) is executed over the entire display area of the performance display device 1600, and is given priority over a display based on the LCD performance scheduler data for the SP ending corresponding to the "SP ending background block" (displayed in front of the image display based on the SP reach background block and the SP ending background block). In this case, the display time of the image executed based on the post-operation block E is set to be longer than the display time of the image executed based on the waiting-for-operation block E, and this longer time functions as the "period during which the post-operation performance is always executed."

By transitioning from the "SP reach background block" to the "SP conclusion background block" during the period in which the display effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to such an "after-operation block E" is being executed, even if the "SP reach background block display (block shared for winning or losing)" and the "SP conclusion background block display (block used only for winning or losing)" are designed to have completely different atmospheres, there will be no sense of incongruity, and a decline in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the scenario data for "Layer 4" and "Layer 5" is not related to any images, and corresponds to blocks (LCD performance scheduler data) that function only as time-series data for calling up processing at a certain timing. In other words, the blocks (LCD performance scheduler data) themselves do not contain information corresponding to the image data to be displayed, and adopt a data structure (empty time-series image information) that can be called a "data call block (LCD performance scheduler data for data call)" that is not involved in any image display. Even if such a block (LCD performance scheduler data) is executed (analyzed), no images are displayed in layers 4 and 5 that correspond to the block (LCD performance scheduler data).

There are two methods for such data call blocks (liquid crystal display performance scheduler data for data call). First, in the scenario data corresponding to "Layer 4", a wait time (wait processing period) is set at the start of the pattern change, which prevents data call block B (liquid crystal display performance scheduler data for data call) from being executed until timing ts21, which calls the process, arrives. Then, after this wait time (wait processing period), when timing ts21 arrives, "data call block B" is executed (analyzed), and as a result, "liquid crystal display performance scheduler data B for data call" corresponding to said "data call block B" is executed (analyzed).

Here, the "data call block B" or the "liquid crystal display performance scheduler data B for data call" corresponding to the "data call block B" is assigned processing identification information of "X2" for each unit time, and each time the processing identification information of "X2" is read out, the following "processing X2" is executed.
Process X2: A process for determining whether to generate a post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block B" based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410)

In this "data call block B (liquid crystal display performance scheduler data B for data call)," the section to which the processing identification information of "X2" is attached for each unit time is made to function as a "performance reception period (valid period) during which performance reception can be performed by operation." In the above "processing X2," when a performance determination is made, the availability information of the "post-operation block B" associated with "Layer 6" is operated (set) to the on state. As a result, the "post-operation block B" is executed (analyzed), and the "post-operation liquid crystal display performance scheduler data B" associated with the "post-operation block B" is executed (analyzed) for each unit time, and the "lamp light emission related processing," "movable body operation related processing," and "sound output related processing," associated with the "post-operation block B," are each started to be executed, so that a post-operation performance corresponding to the "post-operation block C" can be generated.

In addition, in the next frame after each process associated with the "post-operation block B" has been started, the "data call block B (data call liquid crystal performance scheduler data B)" is executed (analyzed). Therefore, when a performance is accepted in the middle of a section (performance acceptance period) to which the process identification information (here, "X2") is assigned for each unit time, the process identification information (here, "X2") is read from the "data call block B (data call liquid crystal performance scheduler data B)" in the next frame, and the above-mentioned "process X2" corresponding to the process identification information is executed. However, the "process X2" also includes a process for determining whether each process associated with the "post-operation block B" has been started, and when it is determined in the process that each process has been started, the "process X2" is terminated without further processing based on the operation detection information, as explained in the above-mentioned "process X1".

In contrast, when no performance determination is made in "processing X2" (when a determination is made that a post-operation performance is not to be performed), the availability information of the "post-operation block B" associated with "layer 6" is left in the off state, and the process X2 ends. Then, until the section in which the same process identification information (here, "X2") is acquired per unit time (one frame) ends, the process identification information (here, "X2") is read from the "data call block B (liquid crystal performance scheduler data B for data call)" per unit time (one frame), and the above-mentioned "processing X2" corresponding to this is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 225, since the above-mentioned section ends with the sixth process identification information (here, "X2"), when the sixth process identification information is read and no performance determination is made in the process X2 corresponding to this, the post-operation performance corresponding to the "post-operation block B" is not executed, and the subsequent performances proceed.

With this configuration, even after the post-operation performance is executed (even after a performance determination is made within the process X2 read from the third process identification information (X2)), the same process identification information (X2) is obtained to read "process X2 that can generate a post-operation performance" from "data call block B (liquid crystal performance scheduler data B for data call)". However, simply analyzing this information can effectively function as a performance acceptance period (validity period), which makes it possible to facilitate and standardize performance design.

Here, the block (LCD performance scheduler data) corresponding to "Layer 4" does not contain information corresponding to the image data to be displayed, and the "block for waiting for operation" is not read by "Process X2" read from the processing identification information of "X2". Therefore, in the operation acceptance performance that occurs at timing ts21, the performance acceptance is allowed without the mock image or gauge display, and this type of operation acceptance performance is realized by the above-mentioned "empty time-series image information".

With this configuration, it is possible for "data call block B (liquid crystal performance scheduler data B for data call)" to be shared even when a different variation pattern is selected, and by preparing scenario data with different settings for the wait time (wait processing period), it is also possible to make it appear at a different timing.

In contrast, in the scenario data corresponding to "Layer 5", the data call block A (liquid crystal display performance scheduler data A for data call) is executed without waiting time (wait processing period), but a substantial wait function is set to work within the data call block A (liquid crystal display performance scheduler data A for data call). In other words, in the data call block A (liquid crystal display performance scheduler data A for data call), no image information or processing identification information is read out until timing ts11 arrives, and when timing ts11 arrives, the processing identification information of "4" is read out. However, the processing identification information of "4" does not read out "processing in which a performance determination is made as to whether or not to generate a post-operation performance", but rather "processing 4" described below is read out and executed.
Process 4. A process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A" to the ON state in order to perform a premonition effect (such as an appearance effect display) that suggests that the "effect acceptance period (valid period) in which the effect acceptance can be performed by an operation" will occur soon, and an operation waiting effect (such as the above-mentioned model image and gauge display) that prompts the player to operate when the effect acceptance period is occurring

With this configuration, it is necessary to prepare a data call block A (liquid crystal display performance scheduler data A for data call) in addition to the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A", but the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A" can be called up as needed from a block (liquid crystal display performance scheduler data) other than the "data call block A (liquid crystal display performance scheduler data A for data call)" simply by adding the processing identification information "4", which facilitates and standardizes the performance design.

Here, when the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A" is executed (analyzed), the "appearance EF & operation waiting LCD performance scheduler data A" corresponding to the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A" is read out. These processes are executed (analyzed) for each unit time, but in the "appearance EF & operation waiting LCD performance scheduler data A", first, a section is provided in which image information (video or still image) corresponding to a precursor performance (such as an appearance effect display) that suggests that a "performance acceptance period (valid period) in which performance acceptance may be performed by operation" will soon occur while performance acceptance is not permitted.

However, in the "Appearance EF & Operation Waiting LCD Performance Scheduler Data A", a section appears midway through during which a performance acceptance period occurs and image information (video or still image) corresponding to the operation waiting performance (such as the above-mentioned mock image or gauge display) that prompts the player to operate is acquired, and in this section, the same processing identification information is acquired for each unit time (1 frame).

That is, in the "LCD performance scheduler data A for appearance EF & operation waiting" executed (analyzed) from timing ts11, apart from the information corresponding to the image data to be currently displayed, the process identification information of "Y1" is added to each frame from timing ts12. Each time the process identification information of "Y1" is read, the following "process Y1" is read and executed.
Process Y1: A process for determining whether to generate a post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block A" based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (e.g., the operation button 410)

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the section in which such processing identification information (here, "Y1") is assigned for each unit time functions as a "performance acceptance period (valid period) in which performance acceptance can be performed by operation." Furthermore, in the "processing Y1," when a performance determination is made, the availability information of the "post-operation block A," which is associated with the same "layer 6" as the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal performance scheduler data A)" that is the basis for reading out the "processing Y1," is operated (set) to the on state.

In this case, when "post-operation block A" is read out, various processes including the "post-operation LCD performance scheduler data A" associated with the "post-operation block A" are executed, and a post-operation performance corresponding to the "post-operation block A" is generated. Not only this, but the newly read "post-operation block A (post-operation LCD performance scheduler data A)" is put into an execution state in "Layer 6" in place of the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & operation waiting LCD performance scheduler data A)" that was in the middle of execution.

With this configuration, by simply reading out the "post-operation block A", it is possible to essentially invalidate (put into a state in which performance acceptance is not permitted) the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal performance scheduler data A)" that no longer needs to be read due to the performance judgment, and even the processing identification information of "Y1" for reading out "processing Y1", and thus it becomes possible to easily and commonly design performance, as there is no need to make a separate judgment or process to terminate them. In the example shown in FIG. 225, it is assumed that performance acceptance is performed in "processing Y1" read out from the second processing identification information (here, "Y1") in the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal performance scheduler data A)", and thus the "post-operation liquid crystal performance scheduler data A" associated with the "post-operation block A" in the same "layer 6" is executed (analyzed). Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the "ray portion" in "appearing EF & waiting for operation block A (appearing EF & waiting for operation LCD performance scheduler data A)" corresponds to the section that has been erased by overwriting (effectively the section that has been invalidated).

In addition, in "Layer 4", a performance section is set on the "data call block B (liquid crystal display performance scheduler data for data call B)" side, where processing identification information is assigned to each frame. However, the performance section may be set within a block read from the "data call block" as in "Layer 5". Also, in "Layer 4", this may be achieved by using a substantial wait function within the data call block (liquid crystal display performance scheduler data for data call) as shown in "Layer 5".

In addition, in "Layer 5", a performance section is set in which processing identification information is added for each frame on the block side read from "Data Call Block A (Liquid Crystal Display Scheduler Data A for Data Call)". However, the performance section may be set within "Data Call Block A (Liquid Crystal Display Scheduler Data A for Data Call)" as in "Layer 4". Also, in "Layer 5", this may be achieved by setting a wait to put the data call block (Liquid Crystal Display Scheduler Data for Data Call) itself on hold, as shown in "Layer 4".

In the example shown in FIG. 225, when the process identification information of "1" or "4" is acquired, the process is executed to operate (set) the availability information attached to the "appearance EF & operation waiting block" to the ON state for performing a premonition effect (such as an appearance effect display) that suggests that the "effect acceptance period (valid period) in which the effect acceptance can be performed by an operation" will occur soon, and an operation waiting effect (such as the above-mentioned model image and gauge display) that prompts the player to operate when the effect acceptance period is occurring. However, the premonition effect (such as an appearance effect display) does not necessarily have to be executed, and a process may be executed to operate (set) the availability information attached to the "operation waiting block" to perform an operation waiting effect (such as the above-mentioned model image and gauge display) that prompts the player to operate when the effect acceptance period is occurring. In other words, in this case, the process identification information associated with the "process in which the effect judgment can be performed" is acquired as soon as the "operation waiting block" is read out.

As described above, the performance acceptance periods occurring at times ts12, ts21, ts31, and ts42 may also be realized by setting the operation status flag, just as in the performance acceptance period occurring at time ts51.

In the example shown in FIG. 225, the process identification information of "Y2" and the process identification information of "Y3" are set to be read out at the same timing, but they may be set to be read out at different timings.

As mentioned above, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the blocks and the corresponding LCD performance scheduler data are provided separately, but these may also be configured together as a single piece of data.

Furthermore, with regard to LCD performance scheduler data (block) in which information corresponding to image data is obtained every unit time (every frame), it may be configured so that information corresponding to video data over the entire period of the LCD performance scheduler data (block) can be obtained at the first processing timing (frame). In this case, information corresponding to image data is obtained only at the first processing timing (frame), and thereafter, although analysis is performed every unit time (every frame), information corresponding to image data is not obtained, and processing corresponding to the processing identification information is executed only when it is assigned.

For blocks (LCD performance scheduler data) whose availability information is set to the ON state, the block may be executed (analyzed) within the processing timing when the availability information is set to the ON state, or may be executed (analyzed) at the processing timing one step after the processing timing when the availability information is set to the ON state.

In addition, although different processing identification information (Y1, Y3) is acquired for "appearing EF & waiting for operation block A (appearing EF & waiting for operation LCD performance scheduler data A)" and "appearing EF & waiting for operation block D (appearing EF & waiting for operation LCD performance scheduler data D)", the same information may be acquired as "information corresponding to image data". In addition, the length of the block (LCD performance scheduler data) and the length of the validity period may be set to be the same. In other words, in this case, the same model image and gauge display will be displayed for the same amount of time.

In the example shown in FIG. 225, when a specific variation pattern is selected and a background display performance for a specific reach (SP reach background block, SP conclusion background block) is executed, the performance is divided into a performance section (SP reach background block) in which display data is shared whether or not a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained, and a performance section (SP conclusion background block) in which different display data is used whether or not a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained. In this configuration, when performing a background display performance for a specific reach, different display data is not used throughout the entire period whether or not a predetermined judgment result is obtained, but rather the display data is shared up to the middle section (timing ts55), and different display data is used only for the remaining period to show the win or loss (judgment result), which is expected to reduce processing load and memory capacity.

Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 225, in "Layer 6" different from "Layer 3" where the background display performance for the specific reach is executed, the post-operation performance (post-operation block E) is executed so as to span (including) the above timing ts55. In particular, the post-operation performance (Layer 6) is executed over the entire display area of the performance display device 1600, and is displayed with priority over the background display performance for the specific reach (Layer 3) (displayed closer to the image display based on the SP reach background block and the SP conclusion background block), thereby making it difficult to see (or hide) the "switch from the performance section in which display data is shared between whether or not a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) has been obtained to the performance section in which different display data is used between whether or not a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) has been obtained" in Layer 3. This makes it possible to easily design the connection between the "performance section where the display data is shared between when a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and when it is not" and the "performance section where different display data is used between when a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and when it is not" in terms of performance, even if it is difficult to design the connection, as this can be hidden (disguised) by the post-operation performance, making the performance design easier. In this sense, it is desirable for the post-operation performance to also execute a process that moves the movable body forward of the display screen.

In addition, the post-operation performance (post-operation block E), which is executed so as to span (including) timing ts55, is configured to be executed automatically regardless of the performance mode, even if no operation is detected within the performance acceptance period. This makes it possible to reliably conceal the connection between the "performance section in which display data is shared between whether a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) has been obtained or not" and the "performance section in which different display data is used between whether a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) has been obtained or not."

To achieve this effect, the timing ts55 at which the presentation section switches must be set after (including) timing ts54 and within a period before the post-operation presentation (LCD display) is hidden (if the end of the post-operation presentation differs depending on the operation timing, it must be set within a period before the post-operation presentation (LCD display) is hidden when the presentation is accepted at the earliest timing in the operation acceptance presentation that occurs at timing ts52). In this configuration, display-related processing is performed in "Layer 3" (SP reach background block, SP conclusion background block), but a display section is provided that does not appear on the LCD display.

However, the configuration for hiding the background display effect (Layer 3) at the timing of switching between the "effect section in which display data is shared between whether a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) has been obtained" and the "effect section in which different display data is used between whether a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) has been obtained" and the "effect section in which different display data is used between whether a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) has been obtained" may be executable when a jackpot has been won, but may not be executed when a jackpot has not been won. For example, even when a jackpot has not been won, a post-operation effect (for a loss) is executed, but the post-operation effect is not executed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, but is executed as a partial effect display, etc., thereby making it possible to maintain the display state of the background display effect (Layer 3).

In the example shown in FIG. 225, a "post-operation block E" is prepared as one of a number of blocks corresponding to a specific variation pattern, which is read out based on the fact that a performance is accepted within the period from timing ts52 to ts54. Even when no operation is detected within the period from timing ts52 to ts54, the "post-operation block E" is generated by automatically accepting the performance (by automatically generating and executing the same program as when an operation is detected), making it possible to provide an interesting performance that has not been seen before.

In this regard, although illustration is omitted, even if a first fluctuation pattern or a second fluctuation pattern different from a specific fluctuation pattern is executed, the "post-operation block E" may be made executable.

For example, in the first variation pattern, the "SP reach background block" and the "SP conclusion background block" of the performance contents corresponding to the first variation pattern are executed in sequence, and similar to the specific variation pattern shown in FIG. 225, the processing identification information of "2" and the processing identification information of "3" are read out based on the "SP reach background block (LCD performance scheduler data)". That is, in the first variation pattern, although the performance contents of the SP reach background ("information on image data" obtained from the LCD performance scheduler data) are different, the same pre-allowed operation-related display (premonition performance) and allowed operation-related display (mock image, gauge display, etc.) as in the specific variation pattern are executed, and the same "post-operation block E" is executed as the post-operation performance when the performance acceptance is made in the operation acceptance performance generated in this way.

Furthermore, in the first variation pattern, even if no operation is detected during the operation reception performance, the performance reception is performed automatically, and the post-operation performance is executed so as to straddle (including) the timing of the switch between the "SP reach background block" and the "SP conclusion background block", thereby making the switch in the background performance invisible, which are similar to the specific variation pattern.

In addition, the configuration of hiding the background display effect (layer 3) at the timing of switching between the "effect section in which display data is shared between whether or not a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) has been obtained" and the "effect section in which different display data is used between whether or not a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) has been obtained" may be made executable in the first variation pattern when a jackpot has been won, as in the specific variation pattern, and may not be executed when a jackpot has not been won. With this configuration, even though different background effects (SP reach effects) are executed in the specific variation pattern and the first variation pattern, when a jackpot has been won, the same effect (post-operation effect) always appears in the form of hiding the different background effects, making it possible to recognize that a jackpot has been won. On the other hand, when a jackpot has not been won, it becomes possible to recognize that a jackpot has been lost when a background effect (SP ending background block) with different contents between the specific variation pattern and the first variation pattern appears. In other words, in this case, when a jackpot is won, the "background effects" whose content varies depending on the fluctuation pattern are hidden, and one effect is always displayed, allowing the player to intuitively recognize that they have won the jackpot; on the other hand, when a jackpot is lost, the "background effects" whose content varies depending on the fluctuation pattern are not hidden but are displayed, making it difficult for the player to intuitively recognize that they have lost the jackpot and maintaining a sense of anticipation.

In contrast, in the second variation pattern, the "SP reach background block" and "SP conclusion background block" whose presentation contents correspond to the second variation pattern are executed in sequence. However, the "SP reach background block (liquid crystal presentation scheduler data)" in the second variation pattern may have the process identification information of "1", but does not contain the process identification information of "2" or "3", so that immediately before the transition to the "SP conclusion background block", no operation reception presentation that can generate a post-operation presentation spanning the transition timing is generated.

In this regard, in the "SP reach background block (LCD performance scheduler data)" according to the second variation pattern, the process identification information of "5" (not shown) is acquired at a predetermined timing when the reception of the performance is not permitted, and based on the acquisition of the process identification information of "5", a process (process 5) is executed to operate the availability information of the "post-operation block E" to the ON state.

And by turning on the availability information for the "post-operation block E" in this way, in the second variation pattern, just like the above-mentioned "specific variation pattern" and "first variation pattern," the same post-operation performance based on the "post-operation block E (post-operation LCD performance scheduler data)" will be executed on a different layer so as to straddle (including) the switching timing between the "SP reach background block" and the "SP conclusion background block."

In this configuration, when a second variation pattern different from the specific variation pattern is executed, normally it would be sufficient to design the presentation as a display related to the background presentation, but instead, by deliberately executing the "post-operation block E" as a block different from the background image block at a predetermined timing within the presentation section where no period during which presentation acceptance is permitted occurs, even when no mock image or gauge is displayed, no operation is being performed, and presentation acceptance is not even permitted, the post-operation presentation (post-operation block E) that occurs when presentation acceptance is performed with another variation pattern suddenly appears, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

With this configuration, even in the second variation pattern, between the "presentation section in which display data is shared between when a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) has been obtained and when it has not been obtained" and the "presentation section in which different display data is used between when a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) has been obtained and when it has not been obtained", even if it is difficult to design a connection in the presentation, this can be hidden (disguised), making presentation design easier.

In addition, the configuration of hiding the background display effect (layer 3) at the timing of switching between the "effect section in which display data is shared between when a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and when it is not obtained" and the "effect section in which different display data is used between when a jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and when it is not obtained" may be made executable in the second variation pattern as in the specific variation pattern and the first variation pattern when a jackpot is won, and may not be executed when a jackpot is not won. With this configuration, even if a background effect (SP reach effect) different from the specific variation pattern or the first variation pattern is being executed, when a jackpot is won, the same effect (post-operation effect) always appears in the form of hiding the different background effect, which makes it possible to recognize that a jackpot has been won. On the other hand, when a jackpot is not won, it becomes possible to recognize that a jackpot has been lost when a background effect (SP ending background block) with different content from the specific variation pattern or the first variation pattern appears. In other words, in this case, when a jackpot is won, the "background effects" whose content varies depending on the fluctuation pattern are hidden, and one effect is always displayed, allowing the player to intuitively recognize that they have won the jackpot. On the other hand, when a jackpot is lost, the "background effects" whose content varies depending on the fluctuation pattern are not hidden, but are displayed, making it difficult for the player to intuitively recognize that they have lost the jackpot and maintaining a sense of anticipation.

In the example shown in FIG. 225 and other examples, the operation reception presentation is executed based on various processing identification information attached to the SP reach background block (LCD presentation scheduler data for SP reach), but these processing identification information do not have to be attached to the SP reach background block (LCD presentation scheduler data for SP reach) and may be read from other blocks (LCD presentation scheduler data), such as, for example, a pattern block (LCD presentation scheduler data for patterns) or a call block (LCD presentation scheduler data for calls).

In the example shown in FIG. 225 and other examples, in the performance judgment performed within the process read based on the process identification information such as "X1", "X2", "Y1", "Y2", and "Y3", a performance judgment based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is exemplified. However, the specific operation means is not limited to the operation button 410 and may be other operation means. In addition, it is also possible to determine which of the multiple operation means (operation button 410, sword performance operation unit 5000, etc.) is in a state where an operation opportunity is given, based on all or part of the above performance judgment based on the process identification information such as "X1", "X2", "Y1", "Y2", and "Y3", and to determine whether or not an operation has been performed (whether a performance judgment is made) for the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given. According to such a configuration, when determining which of a plurality of operating means (operation button 410, sword performance operation unit 5000, etc.) to give an operation opportunity to and realizing an operation acceptance performance in which an operation opportunity is given only to the operating means corresponding to the determination, it is possible to standardize the process identification information, and further the liquid crystal performance scheduler, blocks, etc., regardless of which operating means the operation opportunity is given to. Alternatively, an operation opportunity may be given to both of the different operating means, and a post-operation performance based on the process identification information may be executed based on the fact that the operating means operated first has received a performance acceptance.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 225 or other examples thereof, multiple pre-permission operation-related displays may be provided in the appearing EF block E. For example, a normal appearing EF block E1 that does not involve movement of the operation button 410 (vibration, protrusion, rotation, etc.) and a special appearing EF block E2 that involves movement of the operation button 410 (vibration, protrusion, rotation, etc.) may be provided, and either one may be executed (analyzed) depending on the fluctuation pattern. In this case, blocks may be saved by using the blocks following the appearing EF block E1 and the appearing EF block E2 (both or either of the waiting-for-operation block E and the post-operation block E) in common.

In the example shown in FIG. 225 and other examples, operations for specific operation means can be accepted by executing a process read based on the process identification information (such as "X1", "X2", "Y1", "Y2", "Y3", etc.) attached to the block or LCD performance scheduler data. However, in addition to this, for a specific operation means other than the specific operation means, operations may be accepted within a process (such as a peripheral control unit regular process) that is completely unrelated to the process identification information attached to the block or LCD performance scheduler data, and changes corresponding to the acceptance may be made to the performance being executed. With this configuration, even if an error occurs in the performance progress due to the block or LCD performance scheduler data, etc., operations for the specific operation means are accepted properly, so that interest in the game can be maintained.

Also, a player operation separate from the process that performs effect determination based on the process identification information of "X1", "X2", "Y1", "Y2", and "Y3" may be used to make the block itself invisible, and disable all effect elements (display, sound, movement) related to the target block. With this configuration, it is possible to conserve layers.

In addition, the period or timing of the performance determination may be changed so that part of each of the processing identification information "X1", "X2", "Y1", "Y2", and "Y3" is converted to other processing identification information by the player's operation.

A specific layer may be scheduled for use before the target change begins, and may be used across multiple changes.

Blocks may be used not only during fluctuations, but also during winning play, etc. Also, blocks that span from fluctuations to winning play, and blocks that span from winning play to probability change may be provided, and processing identification information may be attached to these blocks and the LCD performance scheduler data that corresponds to the blocks.

In addition, the type of processing identification information that is read out may be changed depending on the game state, such as by attaching "Y3" only to blocks (or LCD performance scheduler data) that are executed during the special probability state.

In addition, during an error (abnormality) notification, it is desirable to display an error image and/or output an error sound, but not erase any of the currently running blocks or process identification information. This makes it possible to properly restore the presentation after the error is cleared.

In addition, among the inventions inherent in the example shown in FIG. 225 and its other examples, those that can achieve the described effects without necessarily using technology such as blocks (liquid crystal display scheduler data) or processing identification information may be realized by other methods.

[Performance determination based on operation detection information before the validity period occurs]
Generally, when a performance acceptance period (valid period) occurs during which performance acceptance is permitted, the above-mentioned "mochi image" and "gauge display (bar display)" are displayed in accordance with the timing of the occurrence. In this regard, if a player plays for a long time or plays many times, he or she will be able to predict at what timing in the variation pattern the "mochi image" and "gauge display" will be displayed. Then, some players will not be able to wait to operate and will operate at the timing when they foresee that the "mochi image" and "gauge display" will be displayed. In this case, if an operation is performed just before the "mochi image" or "gauge display" is displayed (just before the performance acceptance period occurs), the player will mistakenly think that the operation was performed when the "mochi image" or "gauge display" is displayed (when the performance acceptance period occurs), and as a result, the redo of the operation during the performance acceptance period (valid period) will be delayed, and the performance acceptance period (valid period) may end without the performance being accepted.

In this regard, in the special operation acceptance effect according to this embodiment (for example, the effect acceptance period occurring at timing ts42 shown in FIG. 225), when the effect acceptance period (valid period) occurs from a predetermined timing within the mth frame after the start of fluctuation, as described above, even if no operation is performed within the effect acceptance period, the automatic button function makes an effect judgment and a post-operation effect can be generated. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which the post-operation effect cannot be confirmed, even if the operation is not redone within the effect acceptance period (valid period) in the above-mentioned situation.

However, even if the post-operation effect can be confirmed, the player cannot have a sense of having generated the post-operation effect due to the player's operation, and this raises concerns about a decline in interest in the game. Therefore, as described later, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment only allows the effect judgment to generate a post-operation effect during the effect acceptance period (valid period), but deliberately uses the operation state detection as the subject (judgment material) of the effect judgment even if it is performed within (just before) the period before the effect acceptance period (valid period) occurs. With this configuration, even if an operation is performed just before the effect acceptance period (valid period) in anticipation of its occurrence, this is regarded as an operation performed within the effect acceptance period (valid period), and the post-operation effect is executed. In other words, in this case, the player also has a sense of having generated the post-operation effect due to the operation, and therefore the interest in the game can be favorably maintained.

On the other hand, as will be described later, even if an operation state is detected during (immediately before) a period prior to the occurrence of a performance acceptance period (valid period), if the performance acceptance period (valid period) occurs while the operation state is maintained beyond a specific time, it is not determined that the performance acceptance will occur within the m-th frame. With this configuration, it is possible to fairly grant performance acceptance conditions to players, which is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Also, as will be described later, at least in a certain operation acceptance effect, when the effect acceptance period (valid period) occurs from a certain timing within the mth frame after the start of the fluctuation, the "replica image simulating the operating means (or gauge display indicating the remaining time)" is not yet displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time the mth frame starts. In other words, in this case, since a period in which effect acceptance is permitted internally occurs when the replica image (or gauge display) is not yet displayed, even if the player gets ahead of himself and as a result operates just before the replica image (or gauge display) is displayed, the effect will be accepted, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the effect cannot be confirmed after the operation.

The technical features will be described below, but in explaining the technical features, the "performance acceptance period (valid period)" according to this embodiment will be explained once again. The "performance acceptance period (valid period)" refers to the period from the start of the process that generates a state in which performance acceptance is permitted to the end of the process. Here, the "process that generates a state in which performance acceptance is permitted" corresponds to, for example, "the process of turning on the operation status flag (see FIG. 225)," "the process of setting a timer," or "the process of calling the process for determining performance acceptance based on the process identification information (see FIG. 225)," although the details differ depending on the method of realizing the "performance acceptance period (valid period)." In other words, the "performance acceptance period (valid period)" corresponds to the "performance section (period) from the execution of the process that generates a state in which performance acceptance is permitted to the passage of a predetermined time," and this predetermined time corresponds to "the time until the operation status flag is turned off," or "the time until the timer times out," or "the time until the performance section to which the same process identification information is attached in each frame is ended," etc. During this "performance acceptance period (valid period)", a process of determining whether performance acceptance will be performed is performed at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every frame) based on the detection of the operation state, but the "process of determining whether performance acceptance will be performed" according to this embodiment is characterized in that it targets not only the "detection of the operation state" performed during the "performance acceptance period (valid period)", but also the "detection of the operation state" performed before the occurrence of the "performance acceptance period (valid period)". It is common to create such a "performance acceptance period (valid period)" as a period of, for example, about 100 frames.

Figures 226 to 231 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure for the processing that is performed before and after the performance acceptance period (validity period) occurs. Note that in each example described below, the "blocks" and "LCD performance scheduler data" described with reference to Figure 225 are used to display images, but the display method is not limited to this, and any general method of realizing the image control can be used as long as it is performed in units of frames. Also, although the "processing that generates a state in which performance acceptance is permitted" is exemplified as "processing that turns on the operation status flag," it is not limited to this and may be other methods such as "processing that sets a timer" or "processing that calls the process for determining performance acceptance based on process identification information."

Figure 226 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing performed when no operation is detected before or after the performance acceptance period (validity period).

Now, when a special operation acceptance effect (such as an effect acceptance period occurring at timing ts42 shown in FIG. 225) occurs in a specific variation pattern, the operation status flag is operated (set) to the ON state as a "process for generating a state in which the effect acceptance is permitted" within the "m"th frame after the pattern change has started. Note that the reason why the operation status flag is operated (set) to the ON state at the halfway "timing t1(m)" within the "m"th frame is that even if the "process for operating (setting) the operation status flag to the ON state" itself is executed based on the arrival of the "m"th frame, more strictly speaking, in relation to the execution of other processes, it is impossible to execute all of the various processes, including the process, at the start timing of the "m"th frame, and it is common for the various processes to be executed with a delay relative to the "frame start timing" while they are executed in a predetermined order.

When the operation status flag is thus operated to the on state, a performance section (performance acceptance period) in which performance acceptance is permitted is generated, and within this performance acceptance period, a "determination process as to whether to generate a post-operation performance" is performed at predetermined time intervals based on the operation detection information.

The effect acceptance period in this example is described as the "special operation acceptance effect" shown in FIG. 225. Therefore, as described above, the "determination process on whether to generate a post-operation effect" is executed as a "performance determination based on operation detection information" for each unit time (each frame) within the "peripheral control unit regular processing" regardless of whether the effect acceptance period is occurring (whether the operation status flag is on). This is continued after the effect acceptance period, so that the "determination process on whether to generate a post-operation effect" is executed based on the operation detection information at each predetermined time even during the effect acceptance period (in the figure, it is executed at "timing t2(m)", "timing t2(m+1)", "timing t2(m+2)", and "timing t2(m+3)"). That is, in this case, the "determination process on whether to generate a post-operation effect" is executed even in frames prior to the "m"th frame, but since this is essentially invalidated when the operation status flag is off as described above, it will be omitted in the figure.

In this example, the order of various processes that are performed in response to the arrival of a new frame is set so that the "process of determining whether to generate a post-operation performance" is executed later than the "process of operating (setting) the operation status flag to the on state", so that performance acceptance (determination to generate a post-operation performance) can be made within the same frame (m-th frame) in which the operation status flag is operated (set) to the on state. However, the order does not necessarily require the "process of operating (setting) the operation status flag to the on state" to be executed first, and conversely, the order of the "process of determining whether to generate a post-operation performance" may be set first. In this case, the "process of determining whether to generate a post-operation performance" itself will not be executed within the same frame (m-th frame) in which the operation status flag is operated (set) to the on state, so performance acceptance (determination to generate a post-operation performance) will not be made.

And conventionally, if a "process for generating a state in which reception of effects is permitted (here, a "process for operating the operation state flag to the ON state")" is executed at timing t1(m) in the "m"th frame, a "process for determining whether to generate a post-operation effect" is executed based on the operation detection information acquired during the period after the execution of the process (here, the "period during which the operation state flag is in the ON state"). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 226, at timing t2(m), it is determined based on the operation detection information whether an operation has been performed during the period from timing t1(m) to t2(m), and if it is determined that the operation has been performed, the post-operation effect is executed, and if it is not determined that the operation has been performed (or if it is determined that the operation state has been detected but the length of time that the operation state has been maintained is insufficient), the post-operation effect is not executed, and at timing t2(m+1) in the next frame, it is determined again based on the operation detection information whether an operation has been performed during the period from timing t2(m) to t2(m+1). This process is executed for each frame.

However, as mentioned above, there is a concern that if someone gets impatient and tries to operate at a timing that anticipates the effect reception period to occur, the effect reception period (valid period) may end without the effect being accepted. Therefore, as also mentioned above, the peripheral control unit 1511 in this embodiment only allows a "effect judgment to generate a post-operation effect" within the effect reception period (valid period), but deliberately uses the "detection of the operation state" itself as the subject (determination material) of the operation detection judgment, even if it is made within (just before) the period before the effect reception period (valid period) occurs.

For example, in such an operation detection determination, the determination condition is usually "maintaining an operation state for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 ms) or more" to avoid false detection due to chattering or the like. In this regard, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment also uses operation detection information before the arrival of timing t1(m), and determines that an operation has been performed if the operation means (e.g., operation button 410) has been maintained in an operation state for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 ms) or more from before timing t1(m) even if the operation means (e.g., operation button 410) has not been maintained in an operation state for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 ms) or more during the period from timing t1(m) to t2(m), and executes a post-operation performance.

With this configuration, even if an operation is performed just before the effect acceptance period (valid period) in anticipation of its occurrence, the operation is deemed to have been performed within the effect acceptance period (valid period), and the post-operation effect is executed. In other words, in this case, the player also feels that the post-operation effect has occurred as a result of the operation, which allows the player to maintain an interest in the game.

There is no particular limitation as to which of these is used as a more specific configuration for such operation detection information. In this regard, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment determines on a frame-by-frame basis whether the operation state has been maintained (continued) for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 ms) or more, and leaves a history as an "ON frame" for a frame in which the operation state has been maintained (continued) for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 ms) or more, and treats a frame that does not have a history as an "ON frame" as an "OFF frame." The history may be left at the end of the frame or the start of the next frame, or may be left as an "ON frame" when the operation state has been maintained for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 ms).

As will be described later, in the "process of determining whether to generate a post-operation performance" in this embodiment, when operation detection information is obtained in which three frames are lined up with a history of an "OFF frame", an "ON frame", and an "ON frame", a performance is accepted (determination that an operation has occurred), and the post-operation performance can be executed.

In addition, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, since the peripheral control unit 1511 judges whether the frame was an "ON frame" or an "OFF frame" at the end of the frame and records the history, the "m"th frame including the timing t2(m) is not used as a judgment material in the "judgment process on whether to generate a post-operation performance" performed at timing t2(m) shown in FIG. 226. That is, in this case, the "m-3"th frame, the "m-2"th frame, and the "m-1"th frame are used as judgment materials, and it is judged whether they have been recorded as an "OFF frame", an "ON frame", or an "ON frame". In contrast, if the history is recorded as an "ON frame" when the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 ms), the "m"th frame including the timing t2(m) is also used as a judgment material in the "judgment process on whether to generate a post-operation performance" performed at timing t2(m) shown in FIG. 226. In other words, in this case, the "m-2"th frame, the "m-1"th frame, and the "m"th frame are used as the basis for the judgment, and a judgment is made as to whether or not they have been recorded in the history as an "OFF frame", an "ON frame", and an "ON frame".

In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 226 shows a case where no operation is detected before or after the effect acceptance period (valid period). Therefore, at the judgment timing in each frame after the effect acceptance period (valid period) occurs (timings t2(m), t2(m+1), t2(m+2), and t2(m+3) in the figure), it is judged that the history remains as "OFF frame", "OFF frame", and "OFF frame", and no effect acceptance (judgment that an operation has occurred) is made and no post-operation effect is executed.

It is known that there is a delay of two frames (or one frame) between when the image displayed on the performance display device 1600 starts display processing in the peripheral control unit 1511 and when it appears as an image. This delay occurs because one frame is required for processing within the peripheral control unit 1511 (processing to determine which image to use in response to various judgments and to create a drawing list in response to that decision), and because one frame is also required for processing within the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) that receives the processing results (information about images such as the drawing list) on the peripheral control unit 1511 side (drawing processing on the preparation buffer (non-display buffer) side of so-called double buffering).

Therefore, conventionally, the peripheral control unit 1511's processing for the "valid period performance (operation waiting block E)" was set to start in the frame two frames (the "m-2"th frame) before the "m"th frame in which the performance acceptance period (valid period) occurs, so that the valid period performance would appear on the performance display device 1600 from the "m"th frame.

However, as described above, one of the features of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is that the "effective period performance (block for waiting for operation)" is not yet displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 when the m-th frame starts, and the period up to the "m-1"th frame immediately before the performance acceptance period (effective period) occurs is set as the "processing period for the effective period pre-performance (block E for appearing EF such as effect performance)", and the period from the "m"th frame when the performance acceptance period (effective period) occurs is set as the "processing period for the effective period performance (block E for waiting for operation such as model image and gauge display)". Note that, as shown in FIG. 225, the processing period for the effective period pre-performance (block E for appearing EF such as effect performance) may continue after the "m"th frame and overlap with the "processing period for the effective period performance (block E for waiting for operation such as model image and gauge display)".

More specifically, during the specified period up until the arrival of the "m"th frame (or the period thereafter), a drawing list is created based on information corresponding to the "pre-valid period performance (effect performance, etc.)" and sent to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512). In contrast, during the specified period after the arrival of the "m"th frame (the period during which the valid period performance is performed), a drawing list is created based on information corresponding to the "valid period performance (mock image, gauge display, etc.)" and sent to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512).

According to this configuration, as shown in FIG. 226, in the peripheral control unit 1511, processing related to the "effective period pre-effect (block E for appearing EF)" is executed up to the "m-1"th frame (or thereafter), and processing related to the "effective period effect (block E for waiting for operation)" is executed from the "m"th frame onwards. However, in the effect display device 1600, the "effective period pre-effect (display based on block E for appearing EF)" is still in the middle of execution in the "m"th frame, and the "effective period effect (display based on block E for waiting for operation)" finally starts in the "m+2"th frame. In other words, in this case, a period in which effect acceptance is permitted internally occurs from the time when the "effective period effect (display based on block E for waiting for operation)" is not yet displayed (the "m"th frame, the "m+1"th frame). Therefore, even if the player gets ahead of himself and as a result operates just before the "effective period effect (display based on block E for waiting for operation)" is displayed, the effect will be accepted, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the post-operation effect cannot be confirmed.

In the example shown in FIG. 226, for the sake of convenience, the processing related to the "pre-validity period performance (display based on block E for EF to appear)" and the processing related to the "validity period performance (display based on block E for EF to appear)" are executed for each frame in the peripheral control unit 1511. However, if these performances are displayed using video data, the peripheral control unit 1511 only needs to create a drawing list based on "information corresponding to the video" in the start frame of the processing. In other words, in this case, the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) will automatically read and display image data in each subsequent frame, so the above-mentioned processing does not necessarily have to be executed for each frame in the peripheral control unit 1511.

Figure 227 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing when an operation is started in the "m+1"th frame during the performance acceptance period (validity period) shown in Figure 226.

As described above, in the "processing for determining whether to generate a post-operation performance" in this embodiment, when operation detection information is obtained in a form in which three frames are lined up with a history of an "OFF frame", an "ON frame", and an "ON frame", a performance is accepted (determination that an operation has been performed) and a post-operation performance can be executed.

In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 227 assumes that an operation is started prior to timing t2(m+1) in the "m+1"th frame (prior to the timing of the determination of the effect acceptance), and the "m+1"th frame itself leaves history as an "ON frame" at the end of the frame. However, at timing t2(m+1) in that frame, all three frames subject to that determination (the "m-2"th frame, the "m-1"th frame, and the "m"th frame) are "OFF frames," so no effect acceptance (determination that an operation has been performed) is made.

Even at timing t2 (m+2) in the next frame, the "m+2"-th frame, the three frames to be judged (the "m-1"-th frame, the "m"-th frame, and the "m+1"-th frame) still have history as an "OFF frame", an "OFF frame", and an "ON frame", respectively, so no performance acceptance (determination that an operation has been performed) will be made.

Furthermore, at timing t2 (m+3) in the next frame, the "m+3"th frame, the three frames being judged (the "m"th frame, the "m+1"th frame, and the "m+2"th frame) will have their histories recorded as an "OFF frame", an "ON frame", and an "ON frame", respectively, and this will result in a performance acceptance (a judgment that an operation has been performed).

According to this configuration, since the "m+1"th frame and the "m+2"th frame are "ON frames", it is possible to determine that the operation state has been maintained for a predetermined time or more (e.g., 3 ms) over two frames within the performance acceptance period (valid period). Also, since the "m"th frame is "OFF frame", it is possible to determine that the operation has been started within the performance acceptance period (valid period). In other words, in this case, since it means that the operation has been properly performed within the period in which performance acceptance is permitted, in the example shown in FIG. 227, the performance is accepted within the performance acceptance period (valid period) (here, timing t2 (m+3)) as in the past, and the corresponding post-operation performance (here, "post-operation block E") is executed (started). Note that in this example, the process of turning off the operation status flag is executed at the time the performance is accepted, but the operation status flag may be turned off at the end of the frame, etc., and in short, it is sufficient that the operation determination process is (effectively) not executed in the next frame by executing the process of turning off the operation status flag based on the performance acceptance.

In this regard, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, when a performance request is received at timing t2 (m+3), processing related to the "post-operation performance (post-operation block E)" is performed from the frame in which the performance request was received (the "m+3"th frame). Therefore, in the performance display device 1600, the post-operation performance (display corresponding to the post-operation block E) will be displayed from the "m+5"th frame (not shown), two frames later.

Figure 228 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing when an operation is initiated in the "m-2"th frame during the performance acceptance period (validity period) shown in Figure 226.

As described above, in the "processing for determining whether to generate a post-operation performance" in this embodiment, when operation detection information is obtained in a form in which three frames are lined up with a history of an "OFF frame", an "ON frame", and an "ON frame", a performance is accepted (determination that an operation has been performed) and a post-operation performance can be executed.

Also, as mentioned above, the peripheral control unit 1511 in this embodiment only allows "a performance judgment to generate a post-operation performance" within the performance acceptance period (valid period), but as for the "detection of the operation state" itself, even if it is performed within a period (several frames immediately prior) before the performance acceptance period (valid period) occurs, it is deliberately used as the subject (criterion) of the operation detection judgment.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 228, it is assumed that an operation is started in the "m-2"th frame, which is two frames before the "m"th frame in which the effect acceptance period (valid period) occurs. Conventionally, information obtained by an operation at such timing is not used in determining whether or not an effect has been accepted. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the effect acceptance period (valid period) occurs at timing t1(m) in the "m"th frame, the operation detection information obtained in the three previous frames (the "m-3"th frame, the "m-2"th frame, and the "m-1"th frame) is used in determining whether or not an effect has been accepted at timing t2(m) in the "m"th frame. In this example, these frames (the "m-3"th frame, the "m-2"th frame, and the "m-1"th frame) are left in history as "OFF frames", "ON frames", and "ON frames", respectively, and this allows for the acceptance of effects (determination that an operation has been performed).

With this configuration, since the "m-3"th frame is an "OFF frame" and the "m-2"th and "m-1"th frames are "ON frames", it is possible to determine that the operation state has been maintained for a predetermined time or more (e.g., 3 ms) over the two frames immediately prior to the occurrence of the performance acceptance period (valid period). In other words, in this case, it means that the operation was started in the "m-2"th frame, which is two frames prior to the "m"th frame in which the performance acceptance period (valid period) occurs. In the example shown in FIG. 228, the performance is accepted within the performance acceptance period (valid period) (here, timing t2(m)), and the corresponding post-operation performance (here, "post-operation block E") is executed (started). When this configuration is adopted, as shown in FIG. 228, the effect acceptance period (valid period) itself will end in an extremely short time that does not last even one frame, but even if an operation is started just before the effect acceptance period (valid period) in anticipation of its occurrence, it will be possible to regard this as an operation having been performed within the effect acceptance period (valid period) and generate a post-operation effect. In other words, in this case, the player will also have the feeling that a post-operation effect has occurred as a result of the operation, which will allow the player to maintain an interest in the game.

However, if such effects are frequently accepted, the significance of the effect acceptance period (valid period) itself may be undermined, and there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, when an effect acceptance is made at timing t2(m) in the "m"th frame based on operation detection information acquired before the occurrence of the effect acceptance period (valid period), a post-operation effect is executed without displaying a mock image or gauge display. In other words, in this case, it is possible to create some doubt as to whether the "post-operation effect" occurred as a result of being given an operation opportunity, which is expected to suppress the start of operations before the occurrence of the effect acceptance period (valid period).

The method of realizing "executing the post-operation performance without displaying the model image or gauge display" is not particularly limited. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the processing related to the "valid period performance (block E for waiting for operation)" is performed from the "m"th frame without considering the delay of two frames, and then, when the performance is accepted at timing t2(m), the processing related to the "post-operation performance (block E for post-operation)" is performed from the frame (the "m"th frame) in which the performance is accepted. As a result, as shown in FIG. 228, the processing related to the "post-operation performance (block E for post-operation)" is executed without executing the processing related to the "valid period performance (block E for waiting for operation)", so that the post-operation performance is executed without displaying the model image or gauge display.

In the example shown in FIG. 228, it is assumed that the operation (operation state) started from the "m-2"th frame is maintained across timing t2(m) in the "m"th frame, and it is explained how a judgment is made under this assumption and how a performance is executed according to the judgment. However, as shown in FIG. 229, even if the operation (operation state) started from the "m-2"th frame is not maintained across timing t2(m) in the "m"th frame and is ended in the "m-1"th frame, if the "m-2"th frame and the "m-1"th frame each have a history as an "ON frame" (if the operation state is maintained for 3 ms or more), the same judgment is made at the timing explained with reference to FIG. 228, and the same performance is executed according to the judgment.

In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 228, no operations by the player are detected after the effect acceptance period has occurred, and they have only been performed in the period before the effect acceptance period has occurred. However, as long as the judgment conditions for effect acceptance at timing t2(m) are met (the "m-3"th frame, the "m-2"th frame, and the "m-1"th frame leave histories as an "OFF frame", an "ON frame", and an "ON frame", respectively), the effect will be accepted and a post-operation effect will be executed even if the operation state is not maintained at that time point t2(m).

The same can be said about such a configuration when an operation is performed within the performance reception period (valid period). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 227, even if the operation state is not maintained at the time of timing t2(m+3) and the operation state is ended at a timing before timing t2(m+3) in the "m+3"th frame or within the "m+2"th frame, as long as the judgment condition for performance reception at that timing t2(m+3) (the "m"th frame, the "m+1"th frame, and the "m+2"th frame leave their histories as "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame", respectively) is satisfied, the performance will be accepted as shown in FIG. 227 and the post-operation performance will be executed, even if the operation state is not maintained at the time of timing t2(m+3).

In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it does not matter whether the operating state is maintained at the time when the "determination regarding performance reception" is made, but when the operating state is maintained for a predetermined time or more within the period prior to the time when the "determination regarding performance reception" is made (in this embodiment, when the operating state is maintained for a predetermined time or more in each of two frames), it is determined that the operation has been performed appropriately on the operating means that is the target of operation, and the performance is accepted, and a post-operation performance is executed.

If operation detection information obtained before the effect acceptance period (valid period) was simply used as the basis for the "effect acceptance judgment process" that is carried out after the effect acceptance period (valid period) has occurred, there is a concern that someone might try to make the effect acceptance take place by maintaining an operating state from a situation where, for example, not even a premonition effect (appearance effect) has been executed and there is no sign of the effect acceptance period (valid period) occurring. In other words, if operations in this manner were permitted, the very meaning of the effect acceptance period (valid period) could be undermined, and there is a concern that interest in playing the game would decrease.

Therefore, as described above, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment does not only determine "ON frames", but detects whether "OFF frames" and "ON frames" exist, thereby resolving the above-mentioned concerns. In this embodiment, ON/OFF is determined on a frame-by-frame basis, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a method such as "detecting the rising or falling edge of the sensor signal to determine the timing at which the operation was started, and accepting the performance on the condition that the operating state is maintained for a period of time equal to or longer than a predetermined period of time from that timing" may be adopted. Even in such a case, the above problem can be solved by determining how long before the timing at which the sensor signal rose or fell occurred before the performance acceptance period (valid period) occurred, or by determining how long the operating state has been maintained.

Figure 230 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing when an operation is started from the "m-3"th frame during the performance acceptance period (validity period) shown in Figure 226.

As shown in FIG. 230, this example assumes that an operation that begins in frame "m-3", which is three frames before frame "m" when the performance acceptance period (valid period) occurs, continues until frame "m+2" within the performance acceptance period (valid period). In this example as well, when the performance acceptance period occurs, a "determination regarding performance acceptance" is first made at timing t2(m) within frame "m", and the operation detection information acquired before the performance acceptance period occurs (here, the operation detection information acquired in frame "m-3", frame "m-2", and frame "m-1") is used as the basis for this determination.

However, in this example, because the "m-3"th frame, "m-2"th frame, and "m-1"th frame have their histories left as "ON frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame", respectively, no performance acceptance (determination that an operation has been performed) will be performed as a result of the "determination regarding performance acceptance" at the above timing t2(m). Moreover, even in the "determination regarding performance acceptance" performed in the next frame onwards, such as timing t2(m+1), only the histories left as "ON frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame" will be left for the three frames that are the subject of that judgment, so as long as the operation state from the "m-3"th frame is maintained, no performance acceptance (determination that an operation has been performed) will be performed as a result of the "determination regarding performance acceptance" performed in each frame.

In other words, in this case, it is possible to prevent performance acceptance (determination that an operation has been performed) from being performed unless the operation state maintained from the "m-3"th frame is temporarily terminated and a frame that will leave a history as an "OFF frame" is created, and then the operation is performed again. This makes it possible to effectively avoid performance acceptance based on this, even if the operation state is maintained from a situation where not even a precursor performance (appearance effect) has been performed and there is no sign of the performance acceptance period (validity period) occurring.

As described above, in the examples shown in Figures 227 to 230, if the effect is accepted at timing t2(m) in the "m"th frame, the post-operation effect will be executed without displaying the replica image or gauge display (see Figure 228 in particular). However, this would prevent the player from feeling that the post-operation effect was caused by an operation, which could reduce interest in the game. Therefore, the effect may be advanced so that the replica image and gauge display are always displayed regardless of when the effect is accepted during the effect acceptance period. In this case, it is not necessary to retain the feature that "at the start of the mth frame, the 'effective period effect (block for waiting for operation)' is not yet displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600," but it is more preferable to retain this feature.

The method for realizing such a configuration is not particularly limited, but it can be realized, for example, by setting the timing at which the "process of operating (setting) the operation status flag to the ON state" is performed within a frame and the timing at which the "determination process related to performance reception" is performed to be reversed from the example shown in FIG. 226.

Figure 231 is a flowchart showing an example of the performance reception period (validity period) when the timing of the "processing for operating (setting) the operation status flag to the ON state" within a frame is set to occur after the "processing for determining whether or not a performance is received."

As shown in FIG. 231, when the "m"th frame arrives, first, at timing t12(m) in that frame, a process is performed in which the operation status flag is operated (set) to the ON state. This causes a performance acceptance period (valid period) to occur, but in the "m"th frame, no "determination process related to performance acceptance" is performed after the performance acceptance period (valid period) has occurred.

In other words, although illustration is omitted, in the "m"th frame, the timing for the "determination process for performance reception" to be performed arrives before timing t12(m). At this time, either the "determination process for performance reception" itself is not performed, or the "determination process for performance reception" is performed, but a determination is made that performance reception will not be performed because the performance reception period (validity period) has not yet occurred.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent performance acceptance in the frame (here, the "m"th frame) in which the performance acceptance period (valid period) occurs. Therefore, in the frame (here, the "m"th frame) in which the performance acceptance period (valid period) occurs, processing related to the "valid period performance (operation waiting block E)" is always performed within the peripheral control unit 1511 regardless of the operation status, and the display image corresponding to this processing (valid period performance) can be made to appear on the performance display device 1600 in the "m+2"th frame two frames later.

In other words, in this case, the earliest that a performance will be accepted after the performance acceptance period has occurred is when timing t11 (m+1) in the "m+1"th frame arrives, with the "m-2"th frame, "m-1"th frame, and "m"th frame having their histories as "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame", respectively. At this time, the peripheral control unit 1511 performs processing related to the "post-operation performance (post-operation block E)" based on the performance acceptance. At this time, the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) is already performing drawing processing on the preparation buffer (non-display buffer) side of the double buffering based on the processing results related to the "effective period performance" processed in the peripheral control unit 1511 in the "m"th frame (see "Processing in the image control means" in FIG. 231).

Therefore, according to the method shown in FIG. 231, even if the performance acceptance is made as soon as possible after the performance acceptance period has occurred, the performance display device 1600 will display the "performance during valid period" in the "m+2"th frame and the "post-operation performance" in the "m+3"th frame, so that the post-operation performance can be started after displaying the mock image or gauge display.

However, the method of starting a post-operation performance after displaying a mock image or gauge display is not limited to the method shown in FIG. 231. For example, similar to the case shown in FIG. 226, even in a frame (here, the "m"th frame) in which a performance acceptance period (valid period) occurs, it is possible to make it possible for performance acceptance to occur at timing t2(m), and even if performance acceptance occurs at timing t2(m), processing related to the "valid period performance (operation waiting block E)" may be performed within the peripheral control unit 1511 at timing t2(m).

That is, in this case, the frame in which the peripheral control unit 1511 processes the "post-operation performance (post-operation block E)" based on the performance acceptance is delayed by one frame from the frame in which the performance was accepted. Therefore, even if the performance is accepted at timing t2(m) in the "m"th frame, the peripheral control unit 1511 processes the "valid period performance (waiting for operation block E)" in the "m"th frame, and the peripheral control unit 1511 processes the "post-operation performance (post-operation block E)" in the next frame, the "m+1"th frame. This "delay" is not limited to the frame in which the performance acceptance period (valid period) occurs (here, the "m"th frame), but occurs in any frame in which the performance is accepted. Even with this method, even if the performance is accepted at the shortest time after the performance acceptance period occurs, it is possible to start the post-operation performance after displaying the mock image or gauge display.

In this way, according to the examples shown in Figs. 226 to 231 and other examples thereof, in the "determination process for effect reception" performed at a predetermined timing in the m-th frame, the "detection information from the operation detection means" acquired in the "m-1"-th frame before the start of the m-th frame is also used as a determination material for the effect reception. In particular, according to the examples shown in Figs. 226 to 231 and other examples thereof, both the "detection information from the operation detection means" acquired in the "m-1"-th frame before the start of the "m-th" frame and the "detection information from the operation detection means" acquired in the "m-2"-th frame are used as a determination material for the effect reception. In other words, in this case, even if an operation is performed just before the effect reception period (valid period) in anticipation of its occurrence (within an extremely short time of about 33 ms to 66 ms before the valid period occurs), this is regarded as an operation performed within the effect reception period (valid period) and the post-operation effect is executed, so that the player also feels that the post-operation effect occurred due to the operation.

Moreover, even if the operation state is not maintained at the time when the "determination process for effect reception" in the m-th frame is performed, the effect can be accepted based on the "detection information from the operation detection means" obtained in a frame prior to the m-th frame. In other words, in this case, even if the operation state is only maintained immediately before the effect reception period (valid period) in anticipation of its occurrence (within an extremely short period of time, such as 33 ms to 66 ms before the valid period occurs), this is regarded as an operation having been performed within the effect reception period (valid period) and the post-operation effect is executed, so that the player also feels that the post-operation effect has occurred as a result of the operation.

However, as mentioned above, instead of operating (setting) the frame to an "ON frame" at the end of the frame, the frame may be operated (set) to an "ON frame" when a predetermined time (3 ms) has elapsed within the frame. In this case, the operation detection information (detection information from the operation detection means) acquired from the start of the mth frame until the effect acceptance period (valid period) occurs is also used as a criterion for the effect acceptance. That is, in this case, the effect acceptance is performed when it is determined that an operation (e.g., an operation state is maintained for 3 ms or more) has been performed in the "m-1"th frame and the "m"th frame, and that no operation has been performed in the "m-2"th frame (e.g., an operation state is maintained for less than 3 ms). With this configuration, the time until the operation by the player is used as a criterion for judgment is shortened, making it possible to provide a post-operation effect with high immediate responsiveness.

In addition, in the examples shown in Figures 226 to 230 and other examples thereof, when the performance acceptance period (valid period) occurs, the model image and gauge display are not yet displayed in the display area. Then, when the performance acceptance is made in the m-th frame, the button image and gauge display are not displayed (created), and the post-operation performance is executed. In other words, in this case, even if the operation state is only maintained immediately before the performance acceptance period (valid period) in anticipation of its occurrence (within an extremely short time of about 33 ms to 66 ms before the valid period occurs), this is considered to have been an operation performed within the performance acceptance period (valid period) and the post-operation performance is executed, but it is possible to give a performance-related disadvantage such as "when the post-operation performance is generated in this manner, the button image and gauge display are not displayed," and it is possible to encourage appropriate operation within the performance acceptance period (valid period). For example, if the button image and gauge display are displayed in one of multiple modes, it is not possible to visually determine in which of these modes they are displayed, and it is not possible to grasp the degree of expectation suggested by the mode, resulting in a performance-related disadvantage.

In addition, in the examples shown in Figures 226 to 231 and other examples thereof, when an operational state is maintained for a long period of time and a performance acceptance period (validity period) occurs, performance acceptance is not performed, so that it is possible to encourage operation in an appropriate manner for the performance acceptance period.

However, on the other hand, when the operation state is maintained for a period of time that is shorter than a specific time, and the effect acceptance period (valid period) occurs, the effect is accepted. Therefore, even if an operation is performed just before the effect acceptance period (valid period) in anticipation of its occurrence, this is considered to have been performed within the effect acceptance period (valid period), and the post-operation effect is executed, so that the player also feels that the post-operation effect occurred as a result of the operation.

Moreover, in order for a performance to be accepted, it is not enough for the operating state to be maintained for a period of time shorter than a specific time, but it is also required that the operating state be maintained for a period of time longer than a predetermined time, which makes it possible to effectively avoid false detections due to chattering, etc.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 231 and other examples thereof, in the processing in the "mth" frame in which the performance reception period begins, no matter what operation detection information is obtained, among the processing related to the post-operation performance (display processing in the performance display device 1600, processing related to lamp light emission, processing related to sound output, processing related to movable body operation), at least for the display processing in the performance display device 1600, "processing of reading out information corresponding to image data of the post-operation performance in the peripheral control unit 1511" is not executed, and processing when performance reception is not being performed (processing of reading out information corresponding to image data for waiting for operation in the peripheral control unit 1511) is executed. With this configuration, no matter what operation information is obtained in the mth frame in which the performance reception period begins, at least a part (display processing in the performance display device 1600) of the processing when performance reception is not being performed (display processing in the performance display device 1600, processing related to lamp light emission, processing related to sound output, processing related to movable body operation) is always executed in the mth frame. In other words, in this case, with regard to the display on the performance display device 1600, the processing in response to the performance acceptance (the processing of reading information corresponding to image data for the post-operation performance within the peripheral control unit 1511) will start with a delay, and before that, the processing when the performance acceptance has not been made (the processing of reading information corresponding to image data waiting for operation within the peripheral control unit 1511) will always be executed, so that it becomes possible to recognize that the "post-operation performance" is a performance that has started as a result of an operation by the player.

As mentioned above as another example of the example shown in FIG. 231, even in the "mth" frame where the performance reception period starts, a performance determination may be made based on the operation detection information, and in the frame where the performance determination is made, the "process of reading out information corresponding to image data for the post-operation performance in the peripheral control unit 1511" may not be executed, and the "process of reading out information corresponding to image data for the post-operation performance in the peripheral control unit 1511" may be executed in the next frame. In other words, in this case, among the processes related to the post-operation performance (display processing in the performance display device 1600, processing related to lamp illumination, processing related to sound output, and processing related to movable body operation), at least with regard to the display processing in the performance display device 1600, in the frame where the performance determination is made, the processing when the performance reception is not being made (process of reading out information corresponding to image data for waiting for operation in the peripheral control unit 1511) is executed. However, in this case, among the processes related to the post-operation performance (display processing in the performance display device 1600, processing related to lamp illumination, processing related to sound output, and processing related to movable body operation), for example, with regard to "processing related to lamp illumination" and "processing related to sound output," processing may be performed to read out "information related to the light emission mode after the operation" and "information related to the sound output after the operation" in the frame in which the performance determination was made. In other words, in this case, the lamp or sound will start to be output in the post-operation mode based on the information read out in the frame in which the performance determination was made or in the next frame.

Also, as shown in FIG. 225, in the case of adopting a method of displaying effect images by blocks, when an effect is accepted by operation, in addition to a "post-operation block" for executing a post-operation effect, a "disappearance EF block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for disappearance EF)" for displaying a disappearance effect image until an operation prompting image such as a model image or gauge display that had been displayed until then is hidden may be executed. According to such a "disappearance EF block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for disappearance EF)", for example, an image in which a model image or gauge display fades out (an image that is gradually made invisible) upon acceptance of the effect can be displayed. Also, such a "disappearance EF block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for disappearance EF)" may be executed when the effect acceptance period ends without a post-operation effect being performed. The "disappearing EF block (LCD performance scheduler data for disappearing EF)" can also be configured to be executed by having its availability information set to the ON state within a process that is read based on the process identification information attached to a background block (LCD performance scheduler data for background) or a waiting-for-operation block (LCD performance scheduler data for waiting for operation).

The "processing for generating a state in which the performance reception is permitted (processing for operating (setting) the operation state flag to the ON state)" described in Figs. 226 to 231 may be executed based on a scheduler (elapsed time) after the pattern change has started, and does not necessarily have to be executed based on a frame.

The "moth image" and "gauge display" may also be displayed as part of the pre-validity period performance (display based on block E for appearing EF). However, the display mode during the pre-validity period performance (display based on block E for appearing EF) is required to be different from when the "validity period performance (display based on block E for waiting for operation)" is being performed, such as by displaying semi-transparently or by displaying a blurred image with other effects. In this case, during the pre-validity period performance (display based on block E for appearing EF), one of the "moth image" and the "gauge display" may be displayed, and the other may not be displayed as the performance progresses.

[More possibilities for displaying mock-images]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the big win determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is capable of executing a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) as to which of a plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern is to be selectively displayed. Note that, depending on the result of this performance determination, all of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the above-mentioned selected variation pattern may be executed in sequence, or none of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) may be executed.

When such a performance judgment (performance pattern judgment, advance notice judgment, etc.) is made, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance content according to the result of the performance judgment, and a variable performance using decorative patterns according to the result of the jackpot judgment is executed together with an expected performance (advance notice performance) related to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movement of the movable body (gimmick performance). As a result, when the variable performance using decorative patterns is executed together with the expected performance related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., and the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the player is allowed to play a jackpot game as a bonus.

In this configuration, the variable presentation of the decorative patterns serves as a presentation with the "function of indicating whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination," and the expectation presentation related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body serves as a presentation with the "function of suggesting the expectation level (including 0% and 100%) of obtaining a jackpot." In other words, the player enjoys playing the game through these presentations.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if a specific variation pattern is selected from among the high expectation variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into an SP reach (such as a reach performance accompanied by a background change) as a result of the variation pattern determination, then no matter which result is obtained as the performance determination (such as a notice determination), when the pattern performance based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach (when a specified condition is met), an operation acceptance performance (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated. However, as will be described later, the mode of the acceptance permission sound output when the operation acceptance performance occurs is set to differ depending on the result of the performance determination, thereby suggesting the percentage of times that the post-operation performance will be executed in a highly expected mode and the percentage of times that the jackpot pattern will be stopped.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the above variation pattern determination, when a special result is obtained in the performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (when a predetermined condition is met), an operation acceptance performance (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination, even if the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, the operation acceptance performance (valid period) will not be generated. Also, the operation acceptance performance (valid period) generated in the predetermined variation pattern is executed as a performance different from the operation acceptance performance (valid period) generated when the pattern performance based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach.

Note that, as for the variation patterns that generate an operation acceptance presentation (valid period) at a predetermined timing during the SP reach regardless of which result is obtained as the preview presentation judgment, other than the above-mentioned "specific variation patterns" may be provided. However, as for the variation patterns that generate an operation acceptance presentation (valid period) at a predetermined timing regardless of which result is obtained as the preview presentation judgment, it is preferable that they are not included in the low expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns), or that their selection rate is made low.

However, the operation acceptance performance (valid period) that can occur under these conditions, etc., simply executes a post-operation performance that generates a predetermined change to the performance component that is the target of the performance (at least one of a display change on the performance display device 1600, a performance sound change on the speaker, a light emission change by the lamp, and a performance action by the movable decorative body) as long as the operation is detected within the set time (valid period). Therefore, the performance quality of the operation acceptance performance (valid period) itself is poor, and there is a concern that interest in playing the game will decrease until the post-operation performance is executed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the operation reception performance,
As mentioned above, various measures have been taken, such as at least being able to generate a low-expectation non-suppressed acceptance performance in which, during the execution period of a pattern performance (performance pattern) based on a low-expectation fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), "BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (performance pattern) is output in a non-suppressed mode, providing an opportunity for operation, and a high-expectation suppressed acceptance performance in which, during the execution period of a pattern performance (performance pattern) based on a high-expectation fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern), "BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (performance pattern) is output in a suppressed mode or silently, or is in a non-output state (the playback period in which audible sounds are recorded in the sound data has ended, or channel allocation has ended, for example).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the Momo image displayed in the operation reception performance is displayed as an integrated Momo image integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the Momo image, thereby improving the interest in playing when the operation reception performance (valid period) occurs. It is desirable to display such an integrated Momo image in both the operation reception performance (valid period) that occurs when the pattern performance based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach and the operation reception performance (valid period) that occurs in the above-mentioned specified variation pattern, and it is also desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression reception performance and the high expectation suppression reception performance. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples (Figs. 144 to 195, Figs. 207 to 231), it is desirable to replace the display mode of the exemplified Momo image with one of the integrated Momo images described below in order to improve the interest in playing.

The case where the mock-up image is displayed as an "integrated mock-up image" will be described below.
First, to explain the "imitation image" once again, the operation means to which an operation opportunity is given in the operation reception performance has an "operation receiving portion" that receives the operation by the player and a "peripheral decoration portion" that decorates the periphery of the operation receiving portion. In this regard, the "imitation image" means an image that imitates the "operation receiving portion" of such an operation means. The "operation receiving portion" is usually provided so as to be displaced by the operation by the player, and the "peripheral decoration portion" is often provided as a non-movable member. For example, in the case of the operation means (performance operation unit 400) illustrated in Figures 39 and 40, the "operation receiving portion" corresponds to the button lens 411 (operation button 410), and the "peripheral decoration portion" corresponds to the frame unit 415. Also, in the case of the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) illustrated in Figures 146 and 161, the "operation receiving portion" corresponds to the sword portion 5010, and the "peripheral decoration portion" corresponds to the sheath portion 5020.

Figure 232 shows an example of an "integrated model image" that is displayed when an operation reception effect (valid period) occurs for an operation means that has an "operation receiving portion" that receives a "pressing operation" by a player.

In this explanatory example, for ease of explanation, it is assumed that a push-type handle button 5014 is provided as an "operation receiving part" on the top surface of the handle portion 5012 of the sword decoration 5001. In other words, when the handle button 5014 is "pushed" by the player, it is pushed into the handle portion 5012 and detected by a specified sensor (detection means), and the detection information is provided to the performance (such as the trigger for executing a post-operation performance). With this configuration, the sword decoration 5001 as an operation unit is provided with two operation receiving parts: the "handle button 5014" which can move (move up and down) relative to the handle portion 5012, and the "handle portion 5012" which can move (move up and down) relative to the sheath portion 5020.

In FIG. 232, the "integrated imitation image" will be described when a specific operation acceptance effect (valid period) occurs in which an operation opportunity is given to the pattern button 5014 when a predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. However, in the examples described below, including FIG. 232, the "integrated imitation image" when an operation opportunity is given to the pattern button 5014 may be applied as the "integrated imitation image" when an operation acceptance effect (valid period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, rather than the pattern button 5014, occurs. In other words, in this case, the "imitation image of the operation button 410" exemplified in each of the above-mentioned performance examples (FIGS. 144 to 195, 207 to 231) can be replaced with the "integrated imitation image" described below, and in this case, the pattern button 5014 is not provided and is omitted as a component.

As shown in Fig. 232(a)-(d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific operation acceptance effect (valid period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is generated, the effect display device 1600 displays the button model image BMG, which is modeled after the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410), as integrated model images IGa-IGd integrated with the border decoration image SSG that decorates the border. In the example shown in Fig. 232(a)-(d), the button model image BMG and the border decoration image SSG are not prepared separately as image data, and are displayed only as one integrated image data (integrated model images IGa-IGd). When the integrated model images IGa-IGd are displayed, operation promotion displays such as "press" and "down arrow" are also displayed, but for convenience of explanation, they are omitted here.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, multiple presentation modes including a "first presentation mode with relatively low expectation" and a "second presentation mode with relatively high expectation" are prepared as post-operation presentations to be executed when an operation is accepted during a specific operation acceptance presentation (valid period), and one of these presentation modes is executed based on the result of the big win judgment (presentation judgment). In this regard, in the examples shown in Figures 232(a) to (d),
During a specific operation reception effect (validity period), the appearance rate of the "relatively highly anticipated second effect mode" as a post-operation effect is higher when the mode shown in FIG. 232(b) (integrated model image IGb) appears than when the mode shown in FIG. 232(a) (integrated model image IGa) appears.
During a specific operation reception effect (validity period), the appearance rate of the "relatively highly anticipated second effect mode" as a post-operation effect is higher when the mode shown in FIG. 232(c) (integrated model image IGc) appears than when the mode shown in FIG. 232(b) (integrated model image IGb) appears.
In order to establish a relationship in which the appearance rate of the "second performance mode with a relatively high expectation" as a post-operation performance is higher when the mode shown in FIG. 232(d) (integrated model image IGd) appears than when the mode shown in FIG. 232(c) (integrated model image IGc) appears during a specific operation acceptance performance (validity period), one of the integrated model images IGa to IGd is displayed based on the result of a jackpot determination (performance determination).

It is not necessary to prepare all four of the integrated model images IGa to IGd. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the post-operation performance during the valid period by preparing at least two of the models. In addition, it is also possible to prepare a model different from the above four models (integrated model images IGa to IGd) and display any one of the prepared models.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
An operation means (sword decoration 5001, performance operation unit 400) having an operation receiving part (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) that is displaced by the operation of the player and a peripheral decoration part (handle part 5012, frame unit 415) provided on the periphery thereof;
an integrated model image display means for displaying a model image representing an operation receiving portion as integrated model images IGa to IGd integrated with a border decoration image that decorates the border of the model image;
- It is equipped with an operation reception execution means that can cause a display change (post-operation performance) when a player performs an operation while the integrated model image is displayed, causing a predetermined displacement in the operation receiving section, and the integrated model image can be displayed in any of a number of forms (integrated model images IGa to IGd).

Details about the "integrated model images" shown in Figures 232(a) to (d) will be explained separately for each of these aspects (integrated model images IGa to IGd).

First, the "integrated model image IGa" shown in FIG. 232(a) is composed of a normal button model image BMGa and a normal border decoration image SSGa that decorates its periphery. However, in the "integrated model image IGa", the normal button model image BMGa is displayed as an image that imitates the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given, whereas the normal border decoration image SSGa does not imitate the border decoration part (pattern part 5012 or frame unit 415) that is actually provided on the periphery of the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given, but decorates the periphery of the normal button model image BMGa as a virtual decoration in the display performance of the performance display device 1600.

According to this configuration, firstly, even if a plurality of operating means are provided, it is possible to easily recognize which of the operating means is given an opportunity to operate by visually checking the normal button imitation image BMGa which imitates (a part of) the operating means to be operated. Moreover, since the normal button imitation image BMGa itself is not displayed as an actual peripheral decoration part, but as a gorgeous and large image (integrated imitation image IGa) integrated with a peripheral decoration image which is preferable for improving decorativeness and presentation, it is expected that the presentation impact when the normal button imitation image BMGa is displayed will be large and the interest in the game will be improved. In addition, there is no need to worry about the cost and installation space required to make the actual peripheral decoration part gorgeous, and it is possible to realize a presentation with a high degree of freedom that is not limited by the shape of the actual peripheral decoration part.

In the "integrated model image IGa" shown in FIG. 232(a), the normal border decoration image SSGa is expressed as a base for placing a button (normal button model image BMGa), and the top surface of the base is decorated with a specific decoration that warns that the button is highly dangerous. As mentioned above, these "bases" and "specific decorations" have a different shape from the actual border decorations and are expressed as different decorations.

In this regard, in the "integrated model image IGa" according to this embodiment, a display target area for the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided for the normal border decoration image SSGa. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 233 and the like, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed so that the display area within the display target area decreases over time. More specifically, when no operation is accepted within the valid period, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so that the display area decreases over time from a predetermined maximum value to a predetermined minimum value (including "0"). That is, in this case, the normal border decoration image SSGa not only has the function of suggesting the operation means that is the object of operation, but also has the remaining time suggesting function of suggesting the remaining time until the state in which operation acceptance is permitted (valid period) ends.

In the normal border decoration image SSGa shown in FIG. 232(a), a partition image KG is provided which separates the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from other areas within the normal border decoration image SSGa. The area surrounded by this partition image KG functions as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG." However, the partition image KG does not necessarily have to be displayed, and a predetermined range within the normal border decoration image SSGa may be the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG."

In the example shown in FIG. 232(a), a predetermined decoration (here, a "black and white striped pattern") is applied within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and a gauge image (here, a "gray" gauge image) GG with a predetermined transparency is displayed so as to overlap the display target area with the predetermined decoration. With this configuration, the predetermined decoration is not hidden but is visible even in the area where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed, so that interest in the game can be maintained throughout the entire period from when the gauge image GG changes from full to empty.

When realizing such a display mode within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, in addition to a method of displaying a gauge image GG with a predetermined transmittance by superimposing it on the display target area with the predetermined decoration, a method of displaying the display target area with the predetermined decoration by changing the color of the display target area itself between the part with the gauge and the part without the gauge may be adopted. In this case, the gauge image GG itself does not exist as standalone image data, and the gauge image GG can be expressed only by changing the color of the predetermined decoration within the display target area.

In the example shown in FIG. 232(a), the specified decoration (here, a "black and white striped pattern") applied within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is applied in a manner that spans other areas within the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa, which further enhances the integrated decorativeness of the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself, and is expected to more favorably increase interest in playing when the "integrated model image IGa" is displayed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 232(a), when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) occurs in which the "integrated model image IGa" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) that is the object of operation is illuminated in the same color (e.g., "blue") as the normal button model image BMGa in the "integrated model image IGa". That is, as will be described later, the button model image BMG has multiple modes with different degrees of expectation, and the normal button model image BMGa is displayed as one of these modes. By adopting such an illumination mode, it becomes possible to recognize the mode (expectation) of the button model image BMG by simply checking the pattern button 5014 that is the object of operation, without visually checking the normal button model image BMGa.

The "button imitation image BMGa (Fig. 232(a))" does not necessarily have to be an exact imitation of the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) that is the object of operation; the point is that it should be displayed with a level of imitation (deformation, etc.) that allows the user to recognize which operation tool is the object of operation.

In contrast, the "integrated model image IGb" shown in FIG. 232(b) is basically the same as the above-mentioned "integrated model image IGa," and is configured as an image in which a button model image BMG representing the object to be operated and a peripheral decoration image SSG decorating its periphery are integrated. However, in the "integrated model image IGb," the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa," but the button model image BMG is displayed not as the above-mentioned "button model image BMGa," but as a "special button model image BMGb" having a different shape.

More specifically, in the "integrated model image IGb" shown in Fig. 232(b), the special button model image BMGb does not model the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) that is the target of operation, and is displayed as an image having a different shape from the "button model image BMGa (Fig. 232(a))" that models the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410). However, if such a display method is simply adopted, there is a concern that it will be difficult to recognize which of multiple operation means is the target of operation when the "integrated model image IGb" is displayed.

However, as described above, in the "integrated model image IGa", the "button model image BMGa" modeled after the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) that is the object of operation is displayed integrated with the "normal border decoration image SSGa", so the "normal border decoration image SSGa" itself naturally has the function of suggesting that the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) is the object of operation. In this regard, in the "integrated model image IGb", the "special button model image BMGb" is displayed integrated with such a "normal border decoration image SSGa", so even if the "special button model image BMGb" does not properly model the object of operation, the "integrated model image IGb" as a whole can suggest that the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) is the object of operation. To obtain this effect (the function of suggesting the operation target by the normal border decoration image SSGa), it is important that the "normal border decoration image SSGa" is not displayed when the operation target is an operation means (such as the handle portion 5012) other than the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410).

With this configuration, the button model image BMG, which represents the operation receiving portion, and the peripheral decoration image SSG, which decorates the peripheral portion, are displayed as an integrated model image. This makes it possible to display the button model image BMG, which is only a part of the integrated model image, in a more flexible manner that is not necessarily bound by the shape of the operating means to be operated, and is expected to increase interest in the game through more distinctive presentation and decorativeness.

The "special button image BMGb" shown in FIG. 232(b) is depicted as a button with a streamlined shape in a more stylish design than the "button image BMGa," and has the word "DANGER" written on the top. The appearance of this "special button image BMGb," which does not actually exist as a part of the pachinko machine 1, makes it easier for players to feel a sense of premium, and is expected to make them instinctively sense that there is a higher level of anticipation than when the "button image BMGa" appears.

Also, as shown in FIG. 232(b), when a specific operation acceptance effect (validity period) occurs in which the "integrated model image IGb" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is made to emit light in the same color (e.g., "red") as the special button model image BMGb in the "integrated model image IGb". In other words, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a manner according to the type of button model image BMG in the "integrated model image IG", so that the appearance (expectation) of the button model image BMG can be recognized simply by checking the pattern button 5014 to be operated, without visually checking the button model image BMG.

On the other hand, the "integrated model image IGc" shown in FIG. 232(c) is basically the same as the above-mentioned "integrated model image IGa," and is configured as an image in which a button model image BMG representing the object to be operated and a border decoration image SSG decorating its periphery are integrated. However, in the "integrated model image IGc," the button model image BMG is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal button model image BMGa," but the border decoration image SSG is displayed not as the above-mentioned "normal border decoration image SSGa," but as a "special border decoration image SSGb" having a different shape.

However, the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is similar to the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" in the following respects.
"The actual peripheral decorative portion (the handle portion 5012 or the frame unit 415) provided on the periphery of the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given is not imitated, but the periphery of the button-imitated image BMG is decorated as a virtual decoration for the display performance on the performance display device 1600.
A display target area for the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided.

With this "integrated model image IGc (Fig. 232(c))", it is possible to significantly change the overall shape of the "integrated model image IGc (Fig. 232(c))" without causing any change in the shape of the "button model image BMG" which suggests which operating means will be given an operating opportunity when the "integrated model image IGa (Fig. 232(a))" is used as a reference. This makes it possible to realize decorativeness and presentation with a high degree of freedom by causing shape changes without sacrificing the suggestive function of the operation target.

In addition, in this embodiment, at least a portion of the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (Fig. 232(c))" is displayed as an image having the same decoration as the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (Fig. 232(a))". Therefore, when the "integrated model image IGa (Fig. 232(a))" appears and when the "integrated model image IGc (Fig. 232(c))" appears, it is possible to suggest that this is a specific operation acceptance performance (validity period) targeting the same post-operation performance.

In particular, in the "special border decoration image SSGb (Fig. 232(c))" according to this embodiment, a separate component with special decoration is added to the "normal border decoration image SSGa (Fig. 232(a))" and the whole is displayed as a larger image in an expanded form. Therefore, it is easy to recognize that the "special border decoration image SSGb" is displayed as an advanced version of the "normal border decoration image SSGa", and it is expected that the user will instinctively sense that there is a higher level of anticipation than when the "button pattern image BMGa" appears.

In addition, the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (Figure 232 (c))" has a different shape and decoration from the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (Figure 232 (a))", but no changes are made to the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself.

In other words, if a portion of such an integrated model image IG is used as the display target area of the gauge image GG, it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the display target area or the gauge image is merely "part of the decoration" or "a part that has the function of indicating the remaining time." In this regard, in the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (Fig. 232(a))" and the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (Fig. 232(c))," the display target area of the gauge image (prescribed image) GG, which has the important function of "indicating the remaining time," is not changed in shape, but the other parts are changed in shape. This makes it possible to realize highly flexible decorativeness and presentation by changing the shape without sacrificing the function of indicating the remaining time.

Also, as shown in FIG. 232(c), when a specific operation reception performance (valid period) occurs in which the "integrated model image IGc" is displayed on the performance display device 1600, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is made to emit light in the same color (e.g., "blue") as the normal button model image BMGa in the "integrated model image IGc". In other words, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a manner according to the type of the button model image BMG in the "integrated model image IG", so that the appearance (expectation) of the button model image BMG can be recognized simply by checking the pattern button 5014 to be operated without visually checking the button model image BMG. However, the normal button model image BMGa when the "integrated model image IGc" is displayed may be displayed in a color (e.g., "green") different from that when the "integrated model image IGa" is displayed. In this case, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) will also emit green light.

On the other hand, the "integrated model image IGd" shown in FIG. 232(d) is basically the same as the "integrated model image IGa" described above, and is configured as an image in which a button model image BMG representing the object to be operated and a border decoration image SSG decorating its border are integrated. However, in the "integrated model image IGd", the button model image BMG is not displayed as the "normal button model image BMGa" described above, but as a "special button model image BMGb" having a different shape, and the border decoration image SSG is not displayed as the "normal border decoration image SSGa" described above, but as a "special border decoration image SSGb" having a different shape.

That is, in the "integrated model image IGd (Fig. 232(d))", the "special button model image BMGb" used in the "integrated model image IGb (Fig. 232(b))" and the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" used in the "integrated model image IGc (Fig. 232(c))" are displayed as an integrated image. With this configuration, not only can the effects of the "special button model image BMGb" described above for the "integrated model image IGb (Fig. 232(b))" and the effects of the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" described above for the "integrated model image IGc (Fig. 232(c))" be obtained, but also, when the "integrated model image IGa (Fig. 232(a))" is used as a reference, the appearance of both the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are changed, so that it is expected that the user will instinctively feel that there is a high level of expectation.

On the other hand, while both the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are modified in appearance, the same decoration and shape appear in some areas of the peripheral decoration image SSG, so that when an "integrated model image IGa (Figure 232(a))" appears and when an "integrated model image IGd (Figure 232(d))" appears, it can be suggested that a specific operation acceptance performance (validity period) is targeted at the same post-operation performance.

Also, as shown in FIG. 232(d), when a specific operation reception performance (valid period) in which the "integrated model image IGd" is displayed occurs on the performance display device 1600, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is made to emit light in the same color (e.g., "red") as the special button model image BMGb in the "integrated model image IGd". In other words, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a manner according to the type of the button model image BMG in the "integrated model image IG", so that the appearance (expectation level) of the button model image BMG can be recognized simply by checking the pattern button 5014 to be operated without visually checking the button model image BMG. However, the special button model image BMGb when the "integrated model image IGd" is displayed may be displayed in a color (e.g., "rainbow color") different from that when the "integrated model image IGb" is displayed. In this case, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) will also emit light in rainbow colors.

As shown in Figures 232 (a) to (d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the pattern presentation based on a predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing and a predetermined operation acceptance presentation (valid period) occurs, an integrated button model image IG in which the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are integrated is displayed, and when one side of the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed in one manner, the other side can be displayed in any of a number of manners. For example, when the button model image BMG is displayed as a "normal button model image BMGa", the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed as either a "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" or a "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" (Figures 232 (a) and (c)). Also, when the button model image BMG is displayed as a "special button model image BMGb", the border decoration image SSG can be displayed as either a "normal border decoration image SSGa" or a "special border decoration image SSGb" (Fig. 232 (b) and (d)). Also, when the border decoration image SSG is displayed as a "normal border decoration image SSGa", the button model image BMG can be displayed as either a "normal button model image BMGa" or a "special button model image BMGb" (Fig. 232 (a) and (b)). Also, when the border decoration image SSG is displayed as a "special border decoration image SSGb", the button model image BMG can be displayed as either a "normal button model image BMGa" or a "special button model image BMGb" (Fig. 232 (a) and (b)).

With this configuration, even though the button-like image BMG and the border decoration image SSG are displayed as one unit, when the appearance changes, only one side of them is displayed. Therefore, by looking at one side where the appearance has not changed, it is easy to recognize that a specified operation reception performance (valid period) is occurring, regardless of the appearance of the other side, and by looking at the other side where the appearance has changed, the degree of expectation can also be appropriately recognized. Note that it is also possible to have one side of the button-like image BMG and the border decoration image SSG not change in appearance, and only the other side change in appearance.

In the integrated model image IG shown in Fig. 232(a)-(d), the border decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. When the integrated model image IG is displayed during the operation reception performance (valid period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed so that its display area within the display target area decreases with time. In other words, in this case, the "border decoration image SSG" has a remaining time indication function that indicates the remaining time until the operation reception-permitted state ends, and is displayed as an integrated model image IG integrated with the "button model image BMG" that has a function of indicating which operation means is the operation target. This allows the player to grasp the remaining time and the operation target, and further recognize which of the multiple modes has appeared, and is expected to maintain the interest in playing when the operation reception performance (valid period) is occurring.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in Fig. 232 (a) to (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the non-display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG (there are both a portion with a remaining time indication function and a portion without a remaining time indication function). In other words, the peripheral decoration image SSG is not intended only to indicate the remaining time of the operation reception performance (valid period), and since it is possible to actively adopt a display mode aimed at "enhancing the decorativeness of the button model image BMG" in the portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed, it is possible to significantly improve the performance when the operation reception performance, which is an important performance, occurs while indicating the remaining time. In order to obtain such an effect, it can be said that it is more desirable to display the non-display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG as a larger area than the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 232(a) to (d), when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed in one mode, the button model image BMG can be displayed in one of multiple modes, but in reality, when the peripheral decoration part "pattern part 5012" is in one mode, the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410), which is the operation receiving part, changes to one of multiple modes (multiple light emitting colors). Therefore, when the button model image BMG changes, it can be confirmed by simply checking the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410), which is the object to be copied.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 232(a) to (d), when the button model image BMG is displayed in one mode, the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed in one of multiple modes, but in reality, the peripheral decoration part "handle part 5012" does not change to one of multiple modes. That is, as described above, the peripheral decoration image SSG decorates the periphery of the button model image BMG as a virtual decoration that does not actually exist as a part of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the peripheral decoration image SSG does not need to match the mode of the peripheral decoration part "handle part 5012", and can be depicted in a variety of ways that are preferable for livening up the performance. Note that the peripheral decoration part "handle part 5012" may be provided as something that cannot be changed into multiple modes in the first place, such as being non-luminous.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 232(a) to (d), there are cases where the appearance of both the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG changes (Figure 232(d)), but in reality, it is desirable to have the appearance of both the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG change when the peripheral decoration part, the "handle part 5012", is in one aspect.

The "pattern portion 5012" of the peripheral decoration may have different appearances when the peripheral decoration image SSG is the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" and when the peripheral decoration image SSG is the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb". However, while the peripheral decoration image SSG at least changes in shape when the peripheral decoration image SSG is the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" and when the peripheral decoration image SSG is the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb", it is preferable that the "pattern portion 5012" of the peripheral decoration only changes in appearance (such as a change in the light emission mode) without changing the shape. It can be said that it is preferable to provide the peripheral decoration as something that cannot change its shape in the first place, in order to highlight the virtual presentation function of the peripheral decoration image SSG.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as imitation images, in addition to a button imitation image BMG simulating the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410), a pattern imitation image TMG simulating the handle portion 5012 is prepared, and the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG is made to differ depending on which of these imitation images is displayed. In other words, in this case, the peripheral decoration images SSGa, b that decorate the periphery of the button imitation image BMG cannot be displayed when a imitation image other than the button imitation image BMG is displayed, so that the peripheral decoration images SSGa, b themselves can be expected to have the "function of suggesting which operation means is the object of operation."

When the form of the border decoration image SSG differs depending on the form of the model image (button model image BMG, pattern model image TMG), it is preferable to make the form (thickness, length) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG included in the border decoration image different as well. The operation reception effect in which the button model image BMG is displayed and the operation reception effect in which the pattern model image TMG is displayed may be effects that occur at the same timing within the same change pattern (one of them is selected according to the performance judgment), or may be effects that occur in different change patterns or at different timing. The border decoration image SSG that appears when the button model image BMG is displayed may not be an image of the border decoration part, and the border decoration image SSG that appears when the pattern model image TMG is displayed may be an image of the border decoration part. However, it is preferable that the set time of the operation reception effect (validity period) may be the same even if the form (thickness, length) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is different.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 232(a) to (d), the display target area of the gauge image (prescribed image) GG and other areas in the peripheral decoration image SSG are decorated with a prescribed decoration (here, a "striped pattern") that spans these areas, and the gauge image (prescribed image) GG is displayed so that it overlaps the prescribed decoration. In other words, in this case, as the display area of the gauge image (prescribed image) GG decreases, the display area of the exposed prescribed decoration increases, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, a gauge image (here, a "gray" gauge image) GG with a predetermined transparency is displayed by being superimposed on the display target area to which the predetermined decoration has been applied. With this configuration, the predetermined decoration is not hidden but is visible even in the area where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed, so that interest in the game can be maintained throughout the entire period from when the gauge image GG goes from full to empty.

However, the predetermined decoration does not necessarily have to be displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Also, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself may have (serve as) the predetermined decoration, in which case the display area of the predetermined decoration will decrease as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, encouraging players who dislike the reduction in the predetermined decoration to perform an operation early.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 232(a) to (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG does not model the peripheral decoration (handle portion 5012 or frame unit 415) provided on the periphery of the operation receiving portion (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) that is the object of operation, but is an image that represents an object that does not have substance as an amusement machine part. Therefore, it is possible to realize decorativeness and presentation with a higher degree of freedom that is not bound by the substance of an amusement machine part.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 232(a) to (d), of the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG, at least the peripheral decoration image SSG has a plurality of shapes. In other words, in this case, it is possible to change the shape of only the peripheral decoration image SSG, which represents an insubstantial object, without changing the shape of the button model image BMG, so that it is possible to realize a display with higher presentation and decorativeness by varying the shape of the integrated model image IG while properly indicating which of the multiple operating means is being operated.

The border decoration image SSG may be designed so that when the button-like image BMG is in one state, the shape does not necessarily change, but only the color is changed. However, the reason that shape change is permitted is because the border decoration image SSG represents an insubstantial object, and the border decoration image SSG is displayed as an image integrated with the button-like image BMG, and in this sense, it can be said that changing the shape of the border decoration image SSG has great technical value.

In the integrated model image IG shown in Fig. 232(a)-(d), the shape of the peripheral decoration image SSG is changed to be larger. As will be described later, methods of changing the shape can include increasing the number of objects represented as images (such as the number of decorations), displaying them in one of a number of different shapes with different contours (such as a rectangular parallelepiped or a sphere), or expanding the range of objects displayed among the objects represented as images. As will be described later, the shape of the peripheral decoration image SSG can be changed in stages from a low expectation shape to a high expectation shape as a premonition effect, and then operation acceptance in the operation acceptance effect can be allowed while the final changed shape is maintained.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 232(a) to (d), no matter what form the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed in, the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG included in the peripheral decoration image SSG is not changed (at least the shape is not changed) and is displayed in the same form. Therefore, even if the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG changes, it is possible to preferably maintain the indication function of how much time is remaining, and while maintaining this important function, it becomes possible to also indicate the degree of expectation by changing the shape of other areas different from the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

Depending on which of the above-mentioned effects is to be achieved, the border decoration image SSG does not necessarily have to represent an insubstantial object, but may be displayed as an image that imitates a border decoration provided on the periphery of the operation receiving portion.

The integrated model image IG shown in Figures 232(a) to (d) can be dynamically displayed during the "valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted" such as a specific operation acceptance presentation, thereby encouraging the player to perform an operation.

However, in the integrated model image IG according to this embodiment, although the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed as an integrated image, only one side of the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed dynamically, while the other side is displayed as if it is stationary. With this configuration, one side contributes to improving the presentation when an important button presentation occurs through dynamic expression, while the other side is displayed as if it is stationary, so that it does not move when the integrated model image IG is viewed as a whole, ensuring good visibility.

In the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 232(a) to (d), the button model image BMG is dynamically displayed so as to depict the state in which the operation receiving part to which an operation opportunity is assigned is displaced within its movable range, and the peripheral decoration image SSG is not dynamically displayed. Then, on the side that is not dynamically displayed (peripheral decoration image SSG), a display target area for the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided, and when the integrated model image IG is displayed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed so that its display area within the display target area decreases over time.

In this way, by including the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG on the side of the integrated mock-up image IG that has the best visibility (the side that is not dynamically displayed, the peripheral decoration image SSG), it is possible to improve the presentation quality when an important operation acceptance presentation occurs by dynamically displaying the button mock-up image BMG, while also making it easy to recognize how much time is left in which the presentation is permitted to be accepted.

Furthermore, the side of the integrated model image IG that has good visibility (the peripheral decoration image SSG that is not dynamically displayed) includes not only the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, but also an area in which the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. In other words, in this case, when performing a presentation that suggests the degree of expectation on the side of the integrated model image IG that has good visibility, the presentation is performed in an area in which the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed, thereby making it possible to avoid adverse effects on the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

The area of the border decoration image SSG that is different from the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the shape of the border decoration image SSG itself, and the button pattern image BMG are provided with multiple modes with different degrees of expectation, and one of these modes is displayed based on the result of the jackpot determination (presentation determination). However, the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself may also be provided with multiple modes with different degrees of expectation, and one of these modes may be displayed based on the result of the jackpot determination (presentation determination).

However, as shown in Figures 232(a) to (d), when the button model image BMG is displayed as an integrated model image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates its periphery, and the peripheral decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, there is a concern that it will be difficult to grasp whether the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is merely a decoration or pattern within the peripheral decoration image SSG, or whether it has the function of indicating the remaining time. There is also a concern that interest in playing the game will decrease because it will be difficult to grasp how far the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has decreased due to its being mixed with the decoration and pattern applied to the peripheral decoration image SSG.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511), at least when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced (within the valid period), an image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or an image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed, can be displayed in the display target area in which the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed.

More specifically, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is displayed at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Then, in accordance with the displacement of the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, the display position of the "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is displayed so as to displace in the same manner.

According to this configuration, the valid period ends when the "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or the specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is displaced to a predetermined position, so even if it is not possible to recognize whether the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is merely decorative or indicates the remaining time, it is possible to recognize the remaining time by checking the position of the "specific image." In this sense, when displaying such a "specific image," it can be said that it is not necessarily necessary to display the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

Figure 233 shows an example of the display of the integrated model image IG from the start of the valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted to the end of the period.

As shown in FIG. 233, if the timing A0 arrives at which a valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted (a specified operation acceptance presentation) begins within a specified variation pattern, the presentation display device 1600 displays an integrated model image IG and operation promotion images such as "Press!" and "Downward arrow."

In this example, the integrated model image IG is displayed in the form shown in FIG. 232(a) (integrated model image IGa), but it may be displayed in any of the forms shown in FIG. 232(b)-(d) based on the results of the performance determination. Regardless of which form the integrated model image IG is displayed in, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG during the valid period and the display of a "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the form of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" will change in the form described below over time.

As shown in FIG. 233(a), first, in the integrated image IG at timing A0 (start timing of the valid period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the entire display target area. By displaying the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in this full state, it becomes possible to recognize that the valid period has just started.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 233(a), at timing A0, which is the start timing of the valid period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is not displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. With this configuration, simply by checking whether "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is displayed, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether a specific time has already passed since operation acceptance was permitted (a situation in which the remaining crotch is decreasing).

However, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is first displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in such a manner that "the display area increases by an amount corresponding to the elapsed time" from timing A0 (the start timing of the valid period) until a predetermined time (the time required for the entirety of the specific image to finish appearing) has elapsed.

For example, in the integrated image IG at time A1, a short time after time A0 (the start of the valid period), as shown in FIG. 233(b), a "specific image TG" that is "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the appearance of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" has appeared to the point where about half of the image is visible, indicating that the display area is increasing with the passage of time.

As shown in Figures 233(c) and (d), in the integrated image IG at timings A2 and A3 when a large amount of time has passed, the "specific image TG" as "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" has already appeared in its entirety and is displaced within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG without increasing the display area.

That is, as described above, the "specific image TG" is displayed at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG that displaces when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and is displayed so that its display position displaces in accordance with (following) the displacement of the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

The "specific image TG" in this embodiment is an image with a star-shaped mark in a white square space, which is displayed at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. However, the "specific image TG" does not have to be displayed as a separate image at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and may be displayed in a manner in which the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed, such as an image in which the image gradually fades from the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG over a predetermined length. Or, it may be displayed as an effect image that appears at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

In any case, the "specific image TG" does not originally function as part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, which indicates that there is no time left when its display area reaches a minimum value (here, "0"), so even when there is no time left (when the valid period ends), at least a part of it (or it could be all of it) will not be hidden and will remain displayed.

As shown in FIG. 233(e), in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, in the integrated model image IG at timing A4, which is the end timing of the valid period, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is "0", and the display area of the "specific image TG" remains at about half. Then, if no operation is accepted until this state is reached, the period during which operation acceptance is permitted ends in this state, and the integrated model image IG is made invisible.

However, as mentioned above, the "specific image TG" does not originally function as part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Therefore, in the integrated model image IG at timing A4, which is the end timing of the valid period, it is most desirable to display the "specific image TG" so that its entire display area remains, and such a configuration may be adopted.

However, it is difficult to realize a display in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG becomes exactly "0" when the valid period ends. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the "specific image TG" is displayed so that its display position is displaced in accordance with (continuously with) the displacement of the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, so that when viewed from the player's side, it becomes unclear which part of the image displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

In other words, although the "specific image TG" is not hidden when the valid period ends, and most (more than half, or all) of its display area remains, from the player's perspective it also appears to be part of the gauge image (prescribed image) GG, whose display area is set to the minimum (hidden in this case) when the valid period ends. With this configuration, it is possible to make the gauge image (prescribed image) GG appear to be a longer image than it actually is, and therefore it is possible to make it appear as if more time remains than it actually is, making it possible to maintain interest in the game while the operation acceptance presentation is being carried out.

On the other hand, when the effective period of the operation reception presentation ends, at least a portion of the "specific image TG" remains and ends. Therefore, even if the period does not end immediately after the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is hidden, it is possible to display the "specific image TG" so that the display area thereof is reduced, which makes it less likely that a sense of discomfort will arise due to a discrepancy between the timing at which the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is hidden and the timing at which the effective period ends. In other words, in this case, the "specific image TG" can be expected to act as a buffer that can absorb such a time discrepancy.

In the example shown in FIG. 233, at timing A0, which is the start timing of the valid period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is not displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. However, at timing A0, which is the start timing of the valid period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" may be displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

This configuration makes it possible to make a "specific image that is different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" appear as if it were part of the gauge image GG, so that it appears as if the valid period is set to a longer period than it appears, which is expected to increase interest in the game when the valid period occurs.

Figure 234 shows another example of the display of the integrated image IG from the start to the end of the valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted.

Now, assuming that within a specified variation pattern, timing A0 arrives at which a valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted (specified operation acceptance presentation) begins, even in the example shown in FIG. 234, the presentation display device 1600 displays an integrated model image IG and operation promotion images such as "Press!" and "Downward arrow".

In this example, the integrated model image IG is displayed in the form shown in FIG. 232(a) (integrated model image IGa), but it may be displayed in any of the forms shown in FIG. 232(b)-(d) based on the results of the performance determination. Regardless of which form the integrated model image IG is displayed in, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG during the valid period and the display of a "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the form of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" will change in the form shown in FIG. 234(a)-(d) over time.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 234(a), in the integrated image IG at time A0 (start timing of the valid period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed in the entire display target area, and the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and the "specific image TG" are displayed separately. At time A0 (start timing of the valid period), the "specific image TG" may be in a state where only a portion of it is displayed, but here it is displayed in its entirety. With this configuration, it is possible to make the "specific image TG" appear to function as part of the "gauge image GG", making it possible to give the impression that more time remains than appears.

The "specific image TG" in this example is an image that represents an "eraser" and is displayed with a size that does not fit within the area surrounded by the partition image KG (the display target area of the gauge image GG) and extends into other areas (such as the area of the border decoration image SSG whose appearance may change depending on the degree of expectation). This configuration makes it possible to make the "specific image TG" more noticeable than the "gauge image GG", and is expected to prevent situations from occurring in which it is not possible to recognize how much time is remaining.

In this example, when time passes from timing A0 to timings A2 and A3, and the "specific image TG" is displaced, the part through which the "specific image TG" has passed changes to a "white area" as if it had been erased with an eraser, as shown in Fig. 234 (b) and (c). With this configuration, when the display area of the "gauge image GG" that was expressed in multiple colors (including similar colors and glossy expressions) is reduced by an amount corresponding to the displacement of the "specific image TG", the reduced area is expressed in only one color, so that the contrast with the "specific image TG" as the boundary stands out, making it easier for the player to recognize that the depiction suggests how much time is left. It is preferable that the color that appears in the reduced area is a color not used in the "gauge image GG".

Even in the example shown in FIG. 234, the "specific image TG" does not originally function as part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, which indicates that there is no time left by its display area reaching a minimum value (here, "0"), so even when there is no time left (when the valid period ends), at least a part of it (or it could be all of it) will not be hidden and will remain displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 234(d), at timing A4, which is the end timing of the valid period, in the integrated model image IG, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is "0", and the display area of the "specific image TG" is entirely left. Then, if no operation is accepted until this state is reached, the period during which operation acceptance is permitted ends in this state, and the integrated model image IG is made invisible.

However, even in this example, in the integrated image IG at timing A4, which is the end timing of the validity period, a part of the display area of the "specific image TG" may be hidden and a part may be left remaining.

Even in this example, the "specific image TG" is displayed so that its display position is displaced in accordance with (continuously with) the displacement of the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, so that when viewed from the player's side, it becomes unclear to what extent of the image displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

In other words, although the "specific image TG" is not hidden when the valid period ends, and most (more than half, or all) of its display area remains, from the player's perspective it also appears to be part of the gauge image (prescribed image) GG, whose display area is set to the minimum (hidden in this case) when the valid period ends. With this configuration, it is possible to make the gauge image (prescribed image) GG appear to be a longer image than it actually is, and therefore it is possible to make it appear as if more time remains than it actually is, making it possible to maintain interest in the game while the operation acceptance presentation is being carried out.

On the other hand, since the effective period of the operation reception presentation ends with at least a portion of the "specific image TG" remaining, even if the period does not end immediately after the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is hidden, it is possible to display the "specific image TG" so that the display area thereof is reduced, thereby making it less likely that a sense of discomfort will arise due to a discrepancy between the timing at which the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is hidden and the timing at which the effective period ends. In other words, in this case, the "specific image TG" can be expected to act as a buffer that can absorb such a time discrepancy.

In the example shown in FIG. 234, the images of the "gauge image GG" and the "specific image TG" are different from those in the example shown in FIG. 233, but the same images may be used. Conversely, in the example shown in FIG. 233, the same images may be used as in the example shown in FIG. 234. Also, the effective period during which the images of the "gauge image GG" and the "specific image TG" are displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 233 and the effective period during which the images of the "gauge image GG" and the "specific image TG" are displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 234 may occur under different conditions. In this case, it is desirable to make the shape of the integrated model image IG itself, or at least the display target area of the gauge image GG, different from each other in the effective period during which the mode shown in FIG. 233 appears and the effective period during which the mode shown in FIG. 234 appears.

As mentioned above, the integrated model image IG can be dynamically displayed during the valid period of a specified operation reception presentation, as shown in Figures 233(a)-(e) and 234(a)-(d), thereby encouraging the player to operate. However, as also mentioned above, while the button model image BMG is dynamically displayed so as to depict the state in which the operation receiving part to which the operation opportunity is given is displaced within its movable range, the border decoration image SSG is not dynamically displayed. In addition, in the border decoration image SSG, which is not dynamically displayed, a display target area for the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided, and the specific image TG and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG are changed in the display target area, so that even with the dynamically displayed integrated model image IG, it is possible to easily recognize how much time is left until the valid period ends.

The "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and the "specific image TG" may be displayed as a single image data, or each may be displayed as separate image data.

According to the configuration shown in Figures 233 and 234, the "specific image TG" is displayed at or near the end of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" which displaces when the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is reduced within the display target area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG", and is displayed so that its display position displaces in accordance with the displacement of the end of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG". Therefore, when viewed from the player's side, it becomes possible to make it unclear to what extent of the image displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

The "specific image TG" shown in FIG. 233 is not displayed when the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is at its maximum value, and during the period from when operation acceptance is permitted until a predetermined time has elapsed (until the entire specific image TG appears), the display area of the "specific image TG" is increased to compensate for the reduction in the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG". With this configuration, during the initial period from when the valid period begins until the predetermined time has elapsed, it becomes possible to have the impression that the remaining time indicated by the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is not decreasing, which makes it possible to maintain interest in the game in an optimal manner.

In the examples shown in Figures 233 and 234, the integrated model image IG may be displayed in one of a number of modes (Figures 232 (a) to (e)) based on the result of the jackpot determination (presentation determination), but regardless of which mode it is displayed in, it is desirable that the display shapes of the "gauge image (prescribed image) GG" and "specific image TG" be the same. The aspects (patterns, colors, etc.) of the "gauge image (prescribed image) GG" and "specific image TG" may be changed according to the degree of expectation, but in order to favorably maintain the function of indicating the remaining time, it is desirable that even if the aspect of one of the "gauge image (prescribed image) GG" and "specific image TG" changes, the aspect of the other does not change. For example, if the mark on the "specific image TG" shown in FIG. 233 is a double circle rather than a star, which indicates a high level of expectation, the expectation level (double circle) will gradually become visible as the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" decreases, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

In the examples shown in Figs. 233 and 234, the "specific image TG" is not hidden at least in part (or may be entirely) and is maintained in a displayed state even when the valid period ends without the player performing any operation. However, it is desirable that the operation reception effect shown in Figs. 233 and 234 functions as the above-mentioned "automatic reception effect" in which, when timing A4 arrives without the player performing any operation, an operation is internally received and a post-operation display or post-operation sound output (including, for example, a sound output only in response to the operation reception) is performed. In this case, timing A4 may be the timing at which the valid period ends, or may be set as a timing before or after that timing. In any case, it is desirable to set timing A4 as a timing after the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is hidden (the timing at which it is hidden or a timing after that), and arrives with at least a part of the "specific image TG" being displayed.

With this configuration, even if a situation occurs in which the player performs an operation immediately after operation acceptance is no longer permitted, the "specific image TG" will be displayed even immediately before the post-operation display or post-operation sound output is performed, making it appear as if the player performed the operation in time and the associated operation acceptance occurred, resulting in the post-operation display or post-operation sound output starting. The "specific image TG" may also be displayed at the time the post-operation display or post-operation sound output starts (for example, it may be gradually made invisible by fading out after the post-operation display or post-operation sound output starts).

If the valid period during which such automatic reception is performed is the first valid period that occurs when the first condition is satisfied, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can generate a second valid period during which automatic reception is not performed when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. Even during the second valid period, the button model image BMG is displayed as an integrated model image IG integrated with the border decoration image SSG that decorates its periphery, and the border decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. However, during the second valid period that occurs when the second condition is satisfied, the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, but the "specific image TG" is not displayed. Except for the fact that the "specific image TG" is not displayed, the integrated model image IG displayed during the first valid period and the integrated model image IG displayed during the second valid period can be displayed as the same image.

In other words, in the second valid period that occurs when the second condition is met, unlike the first valid period that occurs when the first condition is met, if the set time elapses without any operation by the player, the automatic reception does not function and the second valid period ends without generating a post-operation display or post-operation sound output (or both). Therefore, if the "specific image TG" remains displayed at the time when reception of operations by the player is no longer permitted, it may give the wrong impression that the valid period has ended even though the remaining time has not been consumed, which may ultimately reduce interest in the game. Therefore, in the second valid period, it is desirable to prevent the "specific image TG" from being displayed for the entire period from start to finish.

In this case, it is desirable to make the length of the set time (the time from when operation acceptance is permitted to when it is terminated) different between the first valid period and the second valid period. It is also desirable to make the display change (post-operation display) and sound output (post-operation sound output) that occurs when an operation is accepted different from each other.

In addition, in addition to the first valid period that occurs when the first condition is met, a third valid period in which automatic acceptance is performed may be generated (e.g., generated when the third condition is met), and in addition to the second valid period that occurs when the second condition is met, a fourth valid period in which automatic acceptance is not performed may be generated (e.g., generated when the fourth condition is met). In short, it is sufficient that the valid periods in which automatic acceptance is performed (valid periods each having different conditions for generation) include at least the first valid period in which display and sound processing is performed in the manner described above, and the valid periods in which automatic acceptance is not performed (valid periods each having different conditions for generation) include at least the second valid period in which display and sound processing is performed in the manner described above.

In addition, the "first effective period" here means
・It does not mean that the post-operation display or post-operation sound is output only when the device is set to a special performance state (automatic reception mode), regardless of whether or not the device is operated during the valid period.
- It means that a post-operation display or post-operation sound is output regardless of the presentation state, regardless of whether or not an operation is performed during the valid period. In the first place, it is not necessary to prepare a "special presentation state (automatic reception mode)" or "multiple presentation states" as the presentation state. In addition, when a "second valid period" occurs while the "special presentation state (automatic reception mode)" is set, either one may be adopted as to whether or not automatic reception is enabled (for example, it may be possible that "automatic reception is not always enabled regardless of the presentation state"), and this is unrelated to the configuration related to the technical features described here.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed as an image having a specific non-linear shape. More specifically, when the valid period of the operation reception performance occurs, an integrated model image IG (peripheral decoration image SSG) is displayed, and in a portion of the non-linear area of the area forming the integrated model image IG (peripheral decoration image SSG), the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced as time passes. With this configuration, the depiction of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG reducing its display area as time passes becomes decorative, and this in itself makes it possible to maintain interest in the game as the remaining time of the valid period is consumed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, a specific pattern is applied to the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and a gauge image (predetermined image) GG having a specific transmittance is displayed superimposed thereon, or a specific pattern is applied to the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself, which makes it possible to improve the decorativeness of the depiction itself, which reduces the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG over time. Moreover, in this embodiment, the specific pattern is applied so as to extend beyond the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, which makes it possible to further improve the decorativeness of the depiction itself, which reduces the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG over time.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, when the display target area of the non-linear specific shape shown in FIG. 233 or FIG. 234 is set as the "first display target area", an operation reception effect (valid period) in which a second display target area is displayed that has a different shape (non-similar shape) from the non-linear specific shape and has a different distance from when the gauge image (predetermined image) GG starts to reduce the display area to when it ends can be generated under different conditions. The operation reception effect (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed is at least terminated when the first set time has elapsed without the player performing an operation, and terminated when the second set time has elapsed without the player performing an operation, whereas the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the second display target area is displayed may end when the first set time has elapsed without the player performing an operation, but is not terminated when the second set time has elapsed without the player performing an operation.

In this regard, if the operation target (operation receiving part) to which the operation opportunity is given is different between the operation reception performance (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception performance (valid period) in which the second display target area is displayed, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the set time is the same when the operation targets are different, and coupled with the fact that the operation targets are different, it is possible to encourage the enjoyment of the operation reception performance with a more fresh feeling. In this case, in the operation reception performance (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception performance (valid period) in which the second display target area is displayed, a model image modeling a different operation receiving part is displayed in a form integrated with the peripheral decoration image. The peripheral decoration image may also be displayed as an image depicting a different decoration between the operation reception performance (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception performance (valid period) in which the second display target area is displayed, but in either case, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided in a part of it. The gauge images (predetermined images) GG may be displayed as having different display shapes.

In order to obtain the above-mentioned effect, it is desirable to make the rate at which the "appearance suggesting a jackpot" appears as a post-operation display or post-operation sound output different between the case where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in a display target area of a "non-linear specific shape" and the case where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in a display target area of a "different shape (non-similar shape)" even if the same time (first set time) is set for both. The rate may be "0%" or "100%".

It is desirable that when the same set time (first set time) is set in the operation reception performance (valid period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception performance (valid period) in which the second display target area is displayed, the same opportunity for operation reception regarding post-operation display and post-operation sound output is provided. It is desirable that when the set time is different, the opportunity for operation reception regarding different post-operation display and post-operation sound output is provided.

In the examples shown in Figures 233 and 234, operation-related displays such as "Press!" or "Down arrow" are displayed superimposed on the integrated model image IG, so that when viewed together with the integrated model image IG, it is more strongly indicated that an operation is required. However, in this case, operation-related displays such as "Press!" or "Down arrow" are not displayed superimposed on the button model image BMG (at any time when it is dynamically displayed) that indicates the object to be operated, and are not displayed superimposed on the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or specific image TG that indicate the remaining time.

In this configuration, important information such as the button model image BMG, gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and specific image TG is avoided from the integrated model image IG, and operation-related displays such as "Press!" or "Down arrow" are displayed superimposed on the integrated model image IG, making it possible to properly convey important information to the player while strongly urging him or her to perform an operation. Needless to say, this is because the button model image BMG is displayed as an integrated model image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment provides multiple (types) of valid periods during which operation acceptance is permitted, with different post-operation displays and post-operation sounds that are output when an operation is accepted within the valid periods. The conditions for generating these valid periods are different, and when any of the conditions is met, the corresponding type of valid period is generated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the multiple types of valid periods include at least one valid period during which the "specific image TG" is displayed (first valid period), and one valid period during which the "specific image TG" is not displayed (second valid period). In the following example, these "first valid period" and "second valid period" are described as being the same as the above-mentioned "first valid period" in which automatic reception is performed and the above-mentioned "second valid period" in which automatic reception is not performed, respectively, but they may also be applied as valid periods different from these.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, when performing a premonition effect (specific display) that suggests that operation acceptance is permitted, the premonition effect (specific display) may be executed in a manner that straddles the timing before and after the occurrence of the valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted. With such a premonition effect (specific display), the valid period occurs while a flashy effect is being performed, which can increase interest in the game when the valid period occurs.

However, when the premonition effect (specific display) is executed in this manner, the premonition effect (specific display) is displayed with priority over the integrated model image IG, so even if the integrated model image IG is displayed (internal layer display) when the valid period begins, the part that overlaps with the premonition effect (specific display) will not appear on the screen (will not be made visible). Or, even if a specified transparency is set for the premonition effect (specific display), the part of the integrated model image IG that overlaps with the premonition effect (specific display) will be made difficult to see. In any case, the display area of the gauge image (specified image) GG will begin to decrease under such circumstances where visibility is poor.

In this case, by the time the premonition effect (specific display) is hidden or the overlapping portion with the premonition effect (specific display) disappears and the visibility of the entire integrated model image IG (or the entire display target area of the gauge image (prescribed image) GG) improves, the display area of the gauge image (prescribed image) GG has already been reduced, which may give the player the impression that the effective period (set time) has effectively been shortened.

On the other hand, the above-mentioned "specific image TG" is expected to function as a "pseudo gauge" that appears to be part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when viewed from the player's side. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, among the multiple types of valid periods, in the "second valid period in which the premonition effect (specific display) is not executed, or the premonition effect (specific display) is executed but the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has not decreased at the time the premonition effect (specific display) is ended", the "specific image TG" is not displayed at all from the occurrence to the end of the second valid period. On the other hand, among the multiple (types) valid periods, in the "first valid period in which the premonition effect (specific display) is generated during the execution of the premonition effect (specific display) and the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has decreased by the time the entire integrated model image IG becomes visible (or easily visible)", the "specific image TG" is displayed within the first valid period.

According to this configuration, during the first effective period when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced at the time when the premonition effect (specific display) is hidden, the "specific image TG" is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, so that when the entire integrated model image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) becomes visible, it is possible to make it appear as if the display area of the gauge image GG has not been reduced significantly, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

In contrast, if the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced when the premonition effect (specific display) is hidden, or if a "specific image TG" is displayed during the second valid period in which the premonition effect (specific display) is not performed, for example, in the case of the display mode of FIG. 233, the "specific image TG" is not displayed when the valid period occurs, and when the "specific image TG" gradually appears over time after the valid period occurs, it may be possible to tell that this does not function as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. In other words, in this case, there is a concern that interest in playing the game will decrease due to the exaggerated representation of the remaining time, so it is desirable to not display the "specific image TG" during such a second valid period in order to prevent a decrease in interest in playing the game.

...

In the following examples, the gauge image GG and the specific image TG are displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 233, but at least one of the gauge image GG and the specific image TG may be replaced with the manner shown in FIG. 234.

Figure 235 shows an example of the progress of the presentation when the first valid period occurs out of the first and second valid periods.

Figure 235 (a) shows the performance status in which, in normal game mode, the number of reserved symbols is 0 and the display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is changed in a specific performance pattern (changing pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination on the performance display device 1600.

Figure 235 (b) shows a performance situation in which a premonition performance (specific display TH) is started on the performance display device 1600 while the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in Figure 235 (a) is being performed.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 235(b), it can be seen that at least in the performance display device 1600, the integrated model image IG has not yet appeared. However, it is also possible to have the integrated model image IG displayed internally from the start of the premonition performance (specific display TH), and have the premonition performance (specific display TH) displayed with priority, so that the entire integrated model image IG cannot be seen (or is made difficult to see by a specified transmittance). In other words, in this case, operation acceptance is permitted (the valid period begins) from the start of the premonition performance (specific display).

Figure 235 (c) shows a situation in which the premonition effect (specific display TH) shown in Figure 235 (b) progresses and the area in which the premonition effect (specific display TH) is displayed shrinks, resulting in the appearance of a part of the integrated model image IG that does not overlap with the premonition effect (specific display), and this part is displayed with good visibility.

That is, the integrated model image IG is displayed (displayed in layer processing) at least internally when the "specific timing (the timing when the effective period starts)" arrives, which is the timing that arrives after the situation shown in FIG. 235(b) appears (including the timing shown in FIG. 235(b)) and the timing that arrives before the situation shown in FIG. 235(c) appears. Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 235(c), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG cannot be seen (or is difficult to see) because they overlap with the premonition effect (specific display TH) that is displayed with priority, but the reduction in the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has also already started (progressed). In this example, the specific image TG is made to overlap in its entirety with the premonition effect (specific display TH).

With this configuration, the premonition effect (specific display TH) is performed across the timing (specific timing) of the occurrence of the valid period, and for a predetermined time after the occurrence of the valid period, the premonition effect (specific display TH) makes at least a part of the integrated model image IG invisible or difficult to see. In other words, in this case, the entirety of the integrated model image IG is gradually revealed within the valid period, so that the excitement of knowing what the expectation (the aspect of the peripheral decoration image) and the object of operation (the aspect of the button model image) suggested by the aspect of the integrated model image IG is can be maintained for a predetermined time after the start of the valid period.

In the example shown in FIG. 235(c), the button-like image that imitates the object of operation is in a state where it is difficult to see, but the border decoration image that decorates the border is in a state where it is possible to recognize that it is not a "special border decoration image SSGb" but a "normal border decoration image SSGa". In addition, since the "specific image TG" is in a state where it is difficult to see in the example shown in FIG. 235(c), it is difficult to distinguish whether the "specific image TG" is a type that is displayed at the time the valid period starts (see FIG. 234) or a type that is not displayed at the time the valid period starts and gradually appears thereafter (see FIG. 233). In other words, in the case of the type shown in FIG. 234, it is easy to see that the "specific image TG" cannot function as a gauge image (predetermined image) GG, so when the type shown in FIG. 234 is adopted, it can be said that executing the premonition performance in the above-mentioned manner is particularly effective in suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

Figure 235 (d) shows a situation where the premonition effect (specific display TH) shown in Figure 235 (b) has progressed further, resulting in no overlapping portion with the integrated model image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) (here, the premonition effect has been hidden).

As shown in FIG. 235(d), when the entire integrated model image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) becomes easily visible, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already been reduced, and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already begun (here, the entire "specific image TG" has finished appearing). In other words, in this case, since the "specific image TG" also appears to be part of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG", it is possible to give the impression that more display area remains than the actual display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and that the display area has not been reduced that much. This is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG having already been reduced when the premonition effect (specific display TH) ends.

Figure 235 (e) shows an example of an image that appears on the performance display device 1600 when the valid period ends (or immediately before the valid period ends) when no operation is accepted until the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG reaches its minimum value (here, "0").

As shown in FIG. 235(e), at least a portion (or all) of the "specific image TG" is displayed even when the valid period ends. In this regard, during the first valid period, as described above, even if the player does not perform any operation during that period, the same post-operation display and post-operation sound are output as when the operation is performed (see FIG. 235(f)).

According to this configuration (automatic reception effect), even if a situation occurs in which the player performs an operation immediately after the valid period ends (operation reception is no longer permitted), the "specific image TG" is displayed even just before the post-operation display or post-operation sound output is performed, so that it can be made to look as if the player performed the operation in time and the post-operation display or post-operation sound output was started in response to the operation reception associated with the operation. In particular, when the premonition effect (pre-display) is performed in this manner, by the time the entire picture of the integrated model image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is clearly visible, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already decreased, and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already begun. In other words, in this case, it is considered that there is a high possibility that a situation will occur in which the player will not be able to perform the operation in time, so it can be said that it is particularly effective in suppressing a decline in interest in the game to perform the post-operation display or post-operation sound output with the "specific image TG" displayed even if the player does not perform the operation during the valid period.

The performance progression in the manner shown in FIG. 235 may be applied to either the case where a "specific image TG" is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 233, or the case where a "specific image TG" is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 234.

In the example shown in FIG. 235, the premonition effect (specific display TH) and the integrated model image IG are displayed on separate layers, and the premonition effect (specific display TH) is displayed with priority, thereby realizing the performance progression in the manner shown in FIG. 235. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the performance progression in the manner shown in FIG. 235 may be stored as a single piece of video data, and this may be realized by playing back the video data. This method may also be applied to each of the examples described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 235, the integrated model image IG is displayed in the form shown in FIG. 232(a) (integrated model image IGa). However, as mentioned above, the integrated model image IG may be displayed in one of a number of forms (forms shown in FIG. 232(a)-(d)) based on the result of the jackpot determination (presentation determination). If such a method is adopted, it is more desirable to execute the premonition presentation in the form shown in FIG. 236-FIG. 238 in order to increase interest in the game.

Figures 236 to 238 are diagrams showing modified examples of the progress of the presentation when the first valid period occurs out of the first and second valid periods described above.

Figure 236 (a) shows the performance status in which, in normal game mode, the number of reserved symbols is 0 and the display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is changed in the first performance pattern (changing pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination on the performance display device 1600.

Figure 236 (b) shows a performance situation in which the first premonition performance (first specific display TH1) is started on the performance display device 1600 while the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in Figure 236 (a) is being performed.

This first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) occurs when the first effect pattern (variation pattern) progresses to the first timing, and functions as an effect that suggests that an operation-related effect will occur.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, after the first premonition effect (first specific display TH1) has been performed, either the "image shown in FIG. 237(c)" or the "image shown in FIG. 238(j)" is displayed based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination), thereby suggesting whether the "normal button model image BMGa" or the "special button model image BMGb" is more likely to appear as the button model image BMG.

Here, if the "image shown in FIG. 237(c)" is displayed, it is suggested that there is a high probability (here, "100%) that the "normal button model image BMGa" will be displayed as the button model image BMG.

In this example, the "image shown in FIG. 237(c)" is displayed as an image IGa' in which the "integrated model image IGa" is displayed in a different manner (semi-transparent here) from the normal manner (the manner shown in FIG. 232(a)). However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the "image shown in FIG. 237(c)" may display the "integrated model image IGa" in the manner shown in FIG. 232(a) as it is, or the "normal button model image BMGa" may be displayed as a standalone image without being integrated with the "normal border decoration image SSGa". When the "normal button model image BMGa" is displayed as a standalone image, it may be displayed in the normal manner (the manner shown in FIG. 232(a)), or it may be displayed as an image displayed in a different manner (semi-transparent here) from the normal manner (the manner shown in FIG. 232(a)).

In any case, in the situation shown in FIG. 237(c), either the "normal button imitation image BMGa" itself shown in FIG. 232(a) or at least an image BMGa' with an outline similar to (imitated from) the "normal button imitation image BMGa" is displayed. This makes it possible to suggest the occurrence of an effective period during which the "normal button imitation image BMGa" is displayed as an "integrated imitation image IGa (FIG. 232(a))" integrated with the "normal border decoration image SSGa", or an effective period during which it is displayed as an "integrated imitation image IGc (FIG. 232(a))" integrated with the "special border decoration image SSGb".

After the image IGa' (image BMGa') shown in FIG. 237(c) is displayed, a presentation is executed that suggests (evokes) that the image IGa' (image BMGa') may be displayed as an "integrated model image IGc (FIG. 232(c))" rather than an "integrated model image IGa (FIG. 232(a))."

In the example shown in FIG. 237(d), the effect is depicted as gradually bringing the "image SSGb' representing the special border decoration image SSGb" closer to the "image IGa' representing the integrated model image IGa (or image BMGa' representing the normal button model image BMGa)." As a result of this effect, when the "image SSGb' representing the special border decoration image SSGb" is added to and integrated with the "image IGa' representing the integrated model image IGa (or image BMGa' representing the normal button model image BMGa)," an effective period occurs during which the "integrated model image IGc (FIG. 232(c))" appears. In contrast, when the "image IGa' representing the integrated model image IGa (or the image BMGa' representing the normal button model image BMGa)" is not added to and integrated with the "image SSGb' representing the special border decoration image SSGb," a valid period occurs during which the "integrated model image IGa (Figure 232 (a))" appears.

Figure 237 (e) shows the performance situation in which the second premonition performance (second specific display TH2) is started on the performance display device 1600 after the performance shown in Figure 237 (d) is performed.

This second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) occurs when the first effect pattern (variation pattern) progresses to the second timing, and is executed as an effect suggesting that operation acceptance is permitted. The second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) in this example is started while the "image SSGb' representing the special border decoration image SSGb" is gradually approaching the "image IGa' representing the integrated imitation image IGa (or image BMGa' representing the normal button imitation image BMGa)". At the time of the start, it is unclear whether the "image IGa' representing the integrated imitation image IGa (or image BMGa' representing the normal button imitation image BMGa)" and the "image SSGb' representing the special border decoration image SSGb" have been integrated.

When the presentation shown in FIG. 237(e) progresses, either the image shown in FIG. 237(f) or the image shown in FIG. 237(h) will be displayed based on the result of the jackpot determination (presentation determination).

The situation and image content shown in Figures 237(f) and 237(h) are basically the same as the "situation and image content shown in Figure 235(c)" described above, and as a result of the second premonition effect (second specific display TH2) shown in Figure 237(e) progressing and the area in which the second premonition effect (second specific display TH2) is displayed shrinking, a part of the integrated model image IG that does not overlap with the premonition effect (specific display) appears, indicating a situation and image content in which this part is displayed with good visibility.

That is, the integrated model image IG is displayed (displayed in layer processing) at least internally when the "specific timing (the timing when the effective period starts)" arrives, which is the timing that arrives after the situation shown in FIG. 237(e) appears (including the timing shown in FIG. 237(e)) and the timing that arrives before the situation shown in FIG. 237(f) or FIG. 237(h) appears. Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 237(f) or FIG. 237(h), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG cannot be seen (or is difficult to see) because they overlap with the second premonition effect (specific display TH2) that is preferentially displayed, but the reduction in the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" has already started (progressed) and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has also already started (progressed). In this example, the specific image TG is made to overlap in its entirety with the second premonition effect (second specific display TH2).

According to this configuration, the second premonition effect (second specific display TH2) is performed across the timing (specific timing) of the occurrence of the valid period, and for a predetermined time after the occurrence of the valid period, the second premonition effect (second specific display TH2) makes at least a part of the integrated imitation image IG invisible or difficult to see. In other words, in this case, the entire picture of the integrated imitation image IG is gradually revealed within the valid period, so that the excitement of knowing what the expectation level (the aspect of the peripheral decoration image) and the operation target (the aspect of the button imitation image) suggested by the aspect of the integrated imitation image IG are is maintained for a predetermined time after the start of the valid period.

In this regard, when the situation shown in FIG. 237(f) appears, it is possible to recognize that the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated model image IG is not the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" but the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa", and therefore it is possible to recognize that the "image IGa' representing the integrated model image IGa (or the image BMGa' representing the normal button model image BMGa)" has failed to link with the "image SSGb' representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" as a result of the effects shown in FIG. 237(d) and (e). That is, in this case, when the second premonition effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, the entire picture of the integrated model image IGa (see FIG. 232(a)) appears as shown in FIG. 237(g). The subsequent performance progress is as described above with reference to FIG. 235(d) to (f), and therefore will be omitted.

In contrast, when the situation shown in Fig. 237(h) appears, it is possible to recognize that the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated mosaic image IG is the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb", and therefore it is possible to recognize that the "image IGa' representing the integrated mosaic image IGa (or image BMGa' representing the normal button mosaic image BMGa)" has successfully linked with the "image SSGb' representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" as a result of the performance shown in Fig. 237(d). In other words, in this case, when the second precursor performance (second specific display TH2) is made non-display, the entirety of the integrated mosaic image IGc (see Fig. 232(c)) appears, as shown in Fig. 237(i). The subsequent progression of the presentation is simply a replacement of the integrated model image IGa (see FIG. 232(a)) with the integrated model image IGc (see FIG. 232(c)), as described above with reference to FIGS. 235(d)-(f), and will not be detailed here.

On the other hand, if the "image shown in FIG. 238(j)" is displayed, it is suggested that there is a high probability (here, "100%) that the "special button image BMGb" will be displayed as the button image BMG.

In this example, the "image shown in FIG. 238(j)" is displayed as an image IGb' in which the "integrated model image IGb" is expressed in a different manner (here, semi-transparent) from the normal state (the manner shown in FIG. 232(b)). However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the "image shown in FIG. 238(j)" may display the "integrated model image IGb" in the manner shown in FIG. 232(b) as it is, or the "special button model image BMGb" may be displayed as a standalone image without being integrated with the "normal border decoration image SSGa". When the "special button model image BMGb" is displayed as a standalone image, it may be displayed in the normal state (the manner shown in FIG. 232(b)), or it may be displayed as an image expressed in a different manner (here, semi-transparent) from the normal state (the manner shown in FIG. 232(b)).

In any case, in the situation shown in FIG. 238(j), either the "special button mockup image BMGb" itself shown in FIG. 232(b) or at least an image BMGb' with an outline similar to (mocked) the "special button mockup image BMGb" will be displayed. This makes it possible to suggest the occurrence of an effective period during which the "special button mockup image BMGb" will be displayed as an "integrated mockup image IGb (FIG. 232(b))" integrated with the "normal border decoration image SSGa", or an effective period during which the "integrated mockup image IGd (FIG. 232(d))" integrated with the "special border decoration image SSGb".

After the image IGb' (image BMGb') shown in FIG. 238(j) is displayed, a presentation is executed that suggests (evokes) that the image IGb' (image BMGb') may be displayed as an "integrated model image IGd (FIG. 232(d))" rather than an "integrated model image IGb (FIG. 232(b))."

In the example shown in FIG. 237(k), the effect is depicted as gradually bringing the "image SSGb' representing the special border decoration image SSGb" closer to the "image IGb' representing the integrated mosaic image IGb (or image BMGb' representing the special button mosaic image BMGb)." As a result of this effect, when the "image SSGb' representing the special border decoration image SSGb" is added to the "image IGb' representing the integrated mosaic image IGb (or image BMGb' representing the special button mosaic image BMGb)," an effective period occurs during which the "integrated mosaic image IGd (FIG. 232(d))" appears. In contrast, when the "image IGb' representing the special border decoration image SSGb" is not added to and integrated with the "image IGb' representing the integrated model image IGb (or image BMGb' representing the special button model image BMGb)," a valid period occurs during which the "integrated model image IGb (Figure 232 (b))" appears.

Figure 238 (l) shows a performance situation in which a second premonition performance (second specific display TH2) is started by the performance display device 1600 after the performance shown in Figure 238 (k) is performed. It may be performed as a third premonition performance (third specific display) different from the second premonition performance (second specific display TH2).

As described above, this second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) occurs when the first effect pattern (variation pattern) progresses to the second timing, and is executed as an effect suggesting that operation acceptance is permitted. The second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) in this example is started while the "image SSGb' representing the special border decoration image SSGb" is gradually approaching the "image IGb' representing the integrated imitation image IGb (or image BMGb' representing the special button imitation image BMGb)." At the time of the start, it is unclear whether the "image IGb' representing the integrated imitation image IGb (or image BMGb' representing the special button imitation image BMGb)" and the "image SSGb' representing the special border decoration image SSGb" have been integrated.

When the presentation shown in FIG. 238(l) progresses, either the "image shown in FIG. 238(m)" or the "image shown in FIG. 238(o)" will be displayed based on the result of the jackpot determination (presentation determination).

The situation and image content shown in Figure 238 (m) and Figure 238 (o) are basically the same as the "situation and image content shown in Figure 235 (c)" described above, and as a result of the second premonition effect (second specific display TH2) shown in Figure 238 (l) progressing and the area in which the second premonition effect (second specific display TH2) is displayed shrinking, a part of the integrated model image IG that does not overlap with the premonition effect (specific display) appears, indicating a situation and image content in which this part is displayed with good visibility.

That is, the integrated model image IG is displayed (displayed in layer processing) at least internally when the "specific timing (the timing when the effective period starts)" arrives, which is the timing that arrives after the situation shown in FIG. 238(l) appears (including the timing shown in FIG. 238(l)) and the timing that arrives before the situation shown in FIG. 238(m) or FIG. 238(o) appears. Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 238(m) or FIG. 238(o), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG cannot be seen (or is difficult to see) because they overlap with the second premonition effect (specific display TH2) that is preferentially displayed, but the reduction in the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" has already started (progressed) and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has also already started (progressed). In this example, the specific image TG is made to overlap in its entirety with the second premonition effect (second specific display TH2).

According to this configuration, the second premonition effect (second specific display TH2) is performed across the timing (specific timing) of the occurrence of the valid period, and for a predetermined time after the occurrence of the valid period, the second premonition effect (second specific display TH2) makes at least a part of the integrated imitation image IG invisible or difficult to see. In other words, in this case, the entire picture of the integrated imitation image IG is gradually revealed within the valid period, so that the excitement of knowing what the expectation level (the aspect of the peripheral decoration image) and the operation target (the aspect of the button imitation image) suggested by the aspect of the integrated imitation image IG are is maintained for a predetermined time after the start of the valid period.

In this regard, when the situation shown in FIG. 238(m) appears, it is possible to recognize that the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated mosaic image IG is not the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" but the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa", and therefore it is possible to recognize that the "image IGb' representing the integrated mosaic image IGb (or the image BMGb' representing the special button mosaic image BMGb)" has failed to be linked to the "image SSGb' representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" as a result of the effects shown in FIG. 238(k) and (l). In other words, in this case, when the second premonition effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, the entire integrated mosaic image IGb (see FIG. 232(b)) appears as shown in FIG. 238(n). The subsequent progression of the presentation is simply a replacement of the integrated model image IGa (see FIG. 232(a)) with the integrated model image IGb (see FIG. 232(b)), as described above with reference to FIGS. 235(d)-(f), and will not be detailed here.

In contrast, when the situation shown in Fig. 238(o) appears, it is possible to recognize that the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated mosaic image IG is the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb", and therefore it is possible to recognize that the "image IGb' representing the integrated mosaic image IGb (or image BMGb' representing the special button mosaic image BMGb)" has successfully linked with the "image SSGb' representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb" as a result of the performance shown in Fig. 238(k). That is, in this case, when the second precursor performance (second specific display TH2) is made non-display, the entirety of the integrated mosaic image IGd (see Fig. 232(d)) appears, as shown in Fig. 238(p). The subsequent progression of the presentation is simply a replacement of the integrated model image IGa (see FIG. 232(a)) with the integrated model image IGd (see FIG. 232(d)), as described above with reference to FIGS. 235(d)-(f), and will not be detailed here.

In the example shown in Figures 236 to 238, when Figure 237(c) appears, the probability that the "special button image BMGb" appears as the button image BMG is set to "0%", but it is also possible to set a small probability that the "special button image BMGb" appears as the button image BMG. In other words, in this case, after the performance shown in Figure 237(e) is performed, in addition to Figure 237(f)→(g), (h)→(i), there is also a possibility that the performance will progress in the form of Figure 238(m)→(n), (o)→(p).

According to this configuration, when Figures 237(f), (h) or Figures 238(m), (o) appear, it is possible to recognize in which form the border decoration image SSG is displayed, but it is not possible to recognize in which form the button-like image BMG is displayed. In other words, in this case, the expectation level is gradually suggested depending on the situation regarding the progress of the second premonition effect (second specific display TH2), which makes it possible to increase interest in the game. In particular, if the button-like image BMG can suggest one of multiple operation means with different operation objects depending on its display mode, a state will occur in which it is not possible to recognize which operation object is present, even though the valid period has started and the expectation level related to the operation is also suggested, and this will significantly increase the attention to the effect.

However, even in situations where Figures 237(f) and (h) or 238(m) and (o) appear, it is desirable to have the operation means (operation receiving portion) that is the object of operation by the player emit light in a manner corresponding to the type displayed as the button replica image BMG (e.g., emit light from the start of the valid period). With this configuration, players with a strong desire to operate who tend to look directly at the operation means (operation receiving portion) will be able to quickly recognize the "type displayed as the button replica image BMG", thereby encouraging the player to operate.

In the examples shown in Figures 236 to 238, the first premonition effect (first specific display TH1) does not necessarily have to be executed. For example, the situation shown in Figure 236(a) may be transitioned to the situation shown in Figure 237(c) or Figure 238(j).

In the examples shown in Figures 236 to 238, the second premonition effect (second specific display TH2) does not necessarily have to be executed. For example, the situation shown in Figure 237(d) or Figure 238(k) may be transitioned to the situation shown in Figures 237(g), (i) or Figures 238(n), (p). In other words, in this case, the effect shown in Figure 237(d) or Figure 238(k) functions as the premonition effect. At the time of transition, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may already have been reduced, or the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may not have been reduced. If the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is already reduced at the time of transition, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG will start to reduce its display area when in the situation shown in Figure 237(d) or Figure 238(k).

Furthermore, some of the effects in Figures 236 to 238 may be omitted depending on the form prepared as the integrated model image IG. For example, if the forms shown in Figures 232(b) and (d) are not prepared as the integrated model image IG, it is possible to omit all of them from the series of effects shown in Figure 238. In this case, Figure 237(c) may also be omitted.

In the presentation of Figures 236 to 238, an image BMG' representing a button imitation image BMG (or the button imitation image BMG itself) is displayed (Figures 237(d), 238(k)) before operation acceptance is permitted (before the valid period occurs), but in this situation (before the valid period occurs), the image BMG' representing the button imitation image BMG (or the button imitation image BMG) is not dynamically displayed to depict the state of displacement within the movable range of the operation receiving part. With this configuration, even if the button imitation image BMG or the image BMG' representing it is displayed prior to the occurrence of the valid period, it is possible to implicitly suggest that the valid period has not yet occurred, and the player can concentrate on the presentation without worrying about the remaining time of the valid period. In addition, since reception of the performance is permitted when the second premonition performance (second specific display TH2) is being performed, the button-like image BMG is dynamically displayed while being invisible or difficult to see due to the second premonition performance (second specific display TH2).

Figures 239 to 243 are diagrams showing an example of the progress of the presentation when the second valid period occurs out of the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

In other words, Figs. 235 to 238 explain an example of the progression of the performance when an effective period (first effective period) occurs in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has decreased when the premonition performance (specific display) is made non-displayable. In contrast, Figs. 239 to 243 explain an example of the progression of the performance when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has not decreased when the premonition performance (specific display) is made non-displayable, or an effective period (second effective period) occurs without the premonition performance (specific display) being performed.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, basically, a predetermined premonition effect (premonition display) is performed when a valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted occurs. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, a "display mode with distinctive movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" during the valid period can be executed, and when such an effect is performed, in order to highlight the distinctive feature, the predetermined premonition effect (premonition display) itself is not performed when the valid period occurs, or even if the predetermined premonition effect (premonition display) is performed, a situation appears in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has not yet been reduced and is at its maximum value when the entire display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is well visible.

Here, an example of a "display mode with a characteristic movement of the gauge image GG" is one in which, normally (see, for example, Figures 233 to 238), if no operation is performed within the valid period, the valid period ends when the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, "0"), whereas a "first display mode in which, even if no operation is performed within the valid period and no post-operation display or post-operation sound is output, the display area of the gauge image GG does not reach the predetermined minimum value (here, "0") and has a predetermined display area at the time the valid period ends" can be mentioned. With this configuration, even if there appears to be a lot of time left until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches the predetermined minimum value (here, "0"), the player becomes aware of the possibility that the valid period may suddenly end, and therefore it becomes possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension during the valid period.

Also, as a "display mode with distinctive movement of the gauge image GG", while normally (see Figures 233 to 238, etc.) the display area of the gauge image GG decreases every unit time during the valid period, it is possible to cite a "second display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not decreased even during the valid period". With this configuration, even when it seems like there is only a short time left until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, "0"), the player becomes aware of the possibility that the display area of the gauge image GG will no longer be decreased, and a decrease in interest in the game is suppressed.

That is, the example described below shows a display example in which at least one of the "first display mode" and "second display mode" is used to execute a "display mode that provides distinctive movement of the gauge image GG."

First, FIG. 239(a) shows the performance status in which, in a normal game state, the number of reserved symbols is 0 and the display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is changed in the second performance pattern (changing pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination on the performance display device 1600.

Figure 239(b) shows a performance situation in which, during the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in Figure 239(a), a valid period occurs during which operation reception to the operating means (operation receiving unit) is permitted, and an integrated model image IG is displayed on the performance display device 1600. As shown in Figure 239(b), at the point in time when the integrated model image IG is displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG is at a predetermined maximum value and has not yet been reduced.

In addition, when the "display mode with a characteristic feature in the movement of the gauge image GG" is executed during the valid period, the time (set time) set for the valid period (second valid period) is longer than the time (set time) set for the valid period (first valid period) during which the "display mode with a characteristic feature in the movement of the gauge image GG" is not executed. This means that when a display mode with a characteristic feature in the movement of the gauge image GG is executed during the valid period, it takes time to execute the display mode. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, even though the set time until the valid period ends is different between the first valid period during which the "display mode with a characteristic feature in the movement of the gauge image GG" is not executed and the second valid period during which the "display mode with a characteristic feature in the movement of the gauge image GG" is executed, the integrated model image IG itself is displayed in the same or in a similar manner (in this example, the integrated model image IG itself is the same, and the gauge image GG (the display target area of the gauge image GG) has the same display area). With this configuration, it is difficult to recognize at first glance that the set time is different between the first effective period in which the "display mode with distinctive movement of the gauge image GG" is not executed and the second effective period in which the "display mode with distinctive movement of the gauge image GG" is executed; however, when a situation arises in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the time during which this situation of no reduction is added, making it possible to estimate that the set time is longer than it appears.

When the performance situation shown in FIG. 239(b) occurs, a premonition effect suggesting the occurrence may be performed. However, it is required that at the point when the entire integrated model image IG (at least the "display target area of the gauge image GG" included in the integrated model image IG) is displayed without overlapping with the premonition effect, the display area of the gauge image GG is at its maximum value and has not yet decreased.

In other words, as described above, in this example, in a state where acceptance of operations regarding a specified post-operation display or a specified post-operation sound output is permitted (within the valid period), a situation can occur in which the display area of the gauge image (specified image) GG does not decrease, and when the performance situation shown in FIG. 239(c) appears after a specified time has passed since the performance situation shown in FIG. 239(b), the gauge image GG maintains its display area with the display area reduced by an amount corresponding to the elapsed time up to that point (specified time), and a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" begins.

As shown in Figs. 239(c) and (d), such a "period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" continues for a predetermined time after the occurrence of the period. However, even during the "period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced", the state in which operation acceptance is permitted is maintained, and when an operation is performed on an operating means that has been given an operation opportunity, the valid period is terminated, and accordingly the integrated model image IG is made invisible, and a post-operation display and post-operation sound are output based on the operation acceptance (see Fig. 239(g)).

With this configuration, a "state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" appears within the valid period, which suggests that there is ample time remaining until the end of the valid period, compared to a case in which the display area of the gauge image GG continues to reduce at a constant rate.

In addition, although the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the operation reception itself is maintained as permitted, which gives the impression that the valid period has been extended, which is expected to increase interest in the game when the valid period is in progress.

In the example shown in Figures 239(c) and (d), during the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced," the decorative pattern SZ that had been displayed up until that point is made invisible or difficult to see, thereby encouraging attention to the "display mode that gives distinctive movement to the gauge image GG."

However, if a state occurs in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the player may mistakenly believe that a so-called "freeze effect" has occurred, in which the image on the display screen suddenly becomes still. In other words, a "freeze effect" is a commonly known display mode in which no reaction is shown for a predetermined period of time and the state cannot be released, which may encourage the player to mistakenly believe that operations are no longer permitted, causing the player to lose motivation to operate and resulting in a decline in interest in the game. In particular, in this example, the decorative pattern SZ is made invisible or difficult to see, which may also encourage the player to mistakenly believe that operations are no longer permitted.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, when the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the integrated model image IG itself is not made static, but the gauge image GG included in the integrated model image IG is made static, while the button model image BMG included in the integrated model image IG continues to be dynamically displayed (a display depicting the button model image BMG being displaced within the movable range of the operation receiving portion).

With this configuration, while the dynamic display of the button image BMG continues, the display area of the gauge image GG will not be reduced, which will reduce the possibility of the player mistakingly believing that operations are no longer being accepted (a freeze effect has occurred), and is expected to maintain the player's motivation to operate the machine.

Here, the dynamic display by the button-like image BMG is executed as a display that repeats a predetermined action (such as a reciprocating action within the movable range of the operation receiving part). In this regard, during the effective period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced when the premonition effect (specific display) is hidden (first effective period shown in Figs. 235 to 238, etc.), the predetermined action by the button-like image BMG is executed as a display that repeats n times before the set time ends, whereas during the effective period in which the premonition effect (specific display) is not executed or the premonition effect (specific display) is executed but the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced when it is hidden (second effective period shown in Figs. 239 to 243, etc.), it is desirable to be able to execute the predetermined action by the button-like image BMG as a display that repeats m (>n) times even during the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" of the set time.

According to this configuration, when a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced occurs, the state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced continues for a longer time than the first effective period shown in Figs. 235 to 238, etc., so that even if the player is surprised by the occurrence of the state and has difficulty in understanding the situation, there is enough time to operate, and it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition. In addition, if an effective period (one in which a different post-operation display or post-operation sound output is generated) other than the first effective period shown in Figs. 235 to 238, etc. is prepared as the effective period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced at the time when the premonition effect (specific display) is hidden, it is desirable to make the number of predetermined operations by the button-shaped image BMG greater during the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" of the second effective period shown in Figs. 239 to 243, etc., than the longest of the times (set times) set for those effective periods.

As described above, when such a second valid period occurs, the gauge image GG is in a state where its visibility is well ensured, and its display area is displayed as a predetermined maximum value (Fig. 239(b)). However, at this time, as shown in Fig. 234, if a specific image TG is displayed in a state where it is well visible within the display target area of the gauge image GG, the display area of the gauge image GG may appear to be reduced by the amount of the specific image TG displayed, and there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease. Also, as shown in Fig. 233, if a specific image TG is made to appear in a state where it is well visible in response to the display area of the gauge image GG being reduced from its maximum value, it becomes clear that the specific image TG does not function as part of the gauge image GG, and there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease due to the exaggeration of the remaining time of the valid period.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the specific image TG itself is not displayed during the second effective period. Therefore, even if the display area of the gauge image GG starts to decrease from the situation shown in FIG. 239(b), the specific image TG will not appear, and when the display area of the gauge image GG is decreased to a predetermined value while the specific image TG is not displayed, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not decreased" occurs for a predetermined time (FIGS. 239(c) and (d)).

In this example, when the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends without any operation being accepted by the player, the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced again. In this state, the decorative pattern SZ is displayed again or made easier to see. After this, when the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined value (minimum value) (Fig. 239(e)), the time set for the second effective period (set time) expires, the second effective period ends, and the operation-related images including the integrated model image IG are hidden (Fig. 239(f)). Note that here, when the display area of the gauge image GG becomes "0", that is, hidden (Fig. 239(e)), the time set for the second effective period (set time) expires, the second effective period ends, and the operation-related images including the integrated model image IG are hidden (Fig. 239(f)).

In this way, during the second valid period, if the set time has elapsed without any operation being accepted (Fig. 239(f)), the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when an operation is accepted during the second valid period will not be executed (automatic acceptance performance will function), and in this respect, it also differs from the first valid period. However, instead, during the second valid period, the gauge image GG is displayed in a stopped state for a period longer than the set time for the first valid period, and as described above, operation acceptance is permitted even during the display period in this stopped state, so it can be said that it is less likely that an incident will occur in which operations are not completed in time to make the gauge image GG reach a predetermined value (minimum value).

In the example shown in Fig. 239, a case was described in which, as a "display mode with a characteristic movement of the gauge image GG", the display area of the gauge image GG is normally (see Figs. 233 to 238, etc.) reduced at a predetermined constant speed during the valid period, whereas a "second display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced despite being within the valid period" is applied. However, as described above, as a "display mode with a characteristic movement of the gauge image GG", normally (see Figs. 233 to 238, etc.) when no operation is performed during the valid period, the valid period ends when the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, "0"), whereas a "first display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG does not reach a predetermined minimum value (here, "0") and has a predetermined display area at the time when the valid period ends, despite no operation being performed during the valid period and no post-operation display or post-operation sound being output" may be further applied. If such a method is adopted, it is more desirable to implement it in either the manner shown in Figures 240 and 241 or the manner shown in Figures 242 and 243 in order to increase interest in the game.

Figures 240 and 241 are diagrams showing an example of the progress of the presentation when the second valid period occurs out of the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

The situations shown in Fig. 240(a)-(d) are the same as those described above with reference to Fig. 239(a)-(d) and other examples thereof. Therefore, in this example as well, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs midway through the second effective period, and if an operation is accepted during the second effective period, including this period, a post-operation display and post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance will be executed (see Fig. 241(g)).

However, in this example, even if the "period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends without any operation being accepted by the player, the gauge image GG will not be displayed to reduce its display area again. In this example, the "period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" continues until the time set for the second valid period (set time) has elapsed. Therefore, when the "period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends, as shown in Figures 240(d) and 241(e), the display area of the gauge image GG remains the same (predetermined value) and the operation-related images including the integrated model image IG are hidden. In this state, the decorative pattern SZ is displayed again or made easier to see.

In this way, in the second validity period of this example, if the set time has elapsed without any operation being accepted (Figure 241 (e)), the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when an operation is accepted within the second validity period will not be executed (automatic acceptance performance will function). However, instead, as described above, in the second validity period of this example, the gauge image GG is displayed in a stopped state for a period longer than the set time for the first validity period, and operation acceptance is permitted even during the display period in the stopped state.

However, in this example, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced to a predetermined value (here, "0"), and the second valid period ends with the display area of the predetermined value remaining. This may cause a situation where the second valid period ends without the player being able to operate despite the player's intention to do so, which may reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, in this example, after the second valid period ends without the player performing an operation, an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (pattern button 5014 or operation button 410) as the operation means to which an operation opportunity was given during the second valid period, while a specific condition (for example, the pattern has stopped, or it has not been reached 10 seconds before the pattern stops) is not met, and when an operation is received for the operation means, the second valid period can be generated again based on this. In this sense, when the second valid period ends without the player performing an operation, a special valid period for regenerating the second valid period is generated from the time of the end.

With this configuration, even if the second valid period ends as a result of the passage of a predetermined set time without any operation by the player, it is possible to generate an operation reception for outputting the post-operation display and post-operation sound output shown in FIG. 241(g) by the operation by the player. More specifically, when the player operates the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) in the situation shown in FIG. 241(e), the second valid period is started from the beginning based on the operation reception (FIG. 241(f)). Then, the above-mentioned contents are repeated again with reference to FIGS. 240(b)-(d), 241(e) and (g). Therefore, even if an operation is received during the second valid period thus regenerated, the post-operation display and post-operation sound output based on the operation reception are executed (see FIG. 241(g)).

When an operation is accepted during the special valid period shown in FIG. 241(e), the image shown in FIG. 241(f) (the same as the image shown in FIG. 240(b)) appears as the post-operation display. This image is different from the post-operation display executed based on the operation being accepted during the second valid period (such as FIG. 240(b)-(d) and FIG. 241(f)). Similarly, the post-operation sound output executed based on the operation being accepted during the special valid period shown in FIG. 241(e) is also different from the post-operation sound output executed based on the operation being accepted during the second valid period (such as FIG. 240(b)-(d) and FIG. 241(f)).

Figures 242 and 243 are diagrams showing modified examples of the progress of the presentation when the second valid period occurs out of the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

The situation shown in FIG. 242(a) is the same as that described above with reference to FIG. 239(a) and FIG. 240(a) and other examples thereof. However, in this example, when the second effective period occurs and the integrated model image IG is displayed on the performance display device 1600 during the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. 242(a), a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs for a predetermined time from the time the integrated model image IG is displayed (FIG. 242(b) and (c)). In this example, since the display area of the gauge image GG is at a predetermined maximum value at the time the integrated model image IG is displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG is maintained at its maximum value.

The configuration and progress during the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" are the same as those described above with reference to Figures 239 to 241 and other examples thereof, including the fact that the specific image TG is not displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG, that operations are permitted to be accepted even during the period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, and that post-operation display and post-operation sound are output when the operation is accepted.

Also, in this example, similar to the examples shown in Figures 240 and 241, the "period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" continues until the time (set time) set for the second valid period has elapsed. Therefore, when the "period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends, as shown in Figures 242(c) and 243(d), the display area of the gauge image GG remains the same (maximum value) and the operation-related images including the integrated model image IG are hidden. In this state, the decorative pattern SZ is displayed again or made easily visible.

In this way, in the second validity period of this example, if the set time has elapsed without any operation being accepted (Figure 243 (d)), the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when an operation is accepted within the second validity period will not be executed (automatic acceptance performance will function). However, instead, as described above, in the second validity period of this example, the gauge image GG is displayed in a stopped state for a period longer than the set time for the first validity period, and operation acceptance is permitted even during the display period in the stopped state.

However, even in this example, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced to a predetermined value (here, "0"), and the second valid period ends with the maximum display area remaining. This may cause a situation where the second valid period ends without the player being able to operate despite the player's intention to do so, which may reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, even in this example, after the second valid period ends without the player performing an operation, an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (pattern button 5014 or operation button 410) as the operation opportunity given to the operation means during the second valid period while a specific condition (for example, the pattern has stopped, or it has not been reached 10 seconds before the pattern stops) is not met, and when an operation is received for the operation means, the second valid period can be generated again based on this. In this sense, it can be said that when the second valid period ends without the player performing an operation, a special valid period is generated to regenerate the second valid period.

With this configuration, even if the second valid period ends as a result of the passage of a predetermined set time without the player performing any operation, it is possible to generate an operation reception for outputting the post-operation display and post-operation sound output shown in FIG. 243(f) by the player's operation. More specifically, when the player operates the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) in the situation shown in FIG. 243(d), the second valid period is started from the beginning based on the operation reception (FIG. 243(e)). Then, the above-mentioned contents are repeated again with reference to FIGS. 242(b), (c), 243(d), and (f). Therefore, even if an operation is received during the second valid period thus regenerated, the post-operation display and post-operation sound output based on the operation reception are executed (see FIG. 243(f)).

However, in this example, even if the second effective period reoccurs in this manner, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" will occur from the point of reoccurrence, and therefore in the situation shown in Figure 243 (e), the decorative pattern SZ will be hidden or made difficult to see.

That is, the "image shown in FIG. 243(e)" that appears as the post-operation display when an operation is accepted during the special valid period shown in FIG. 243(d) is the same as the "image shown in FIG. 242(b)". Such an image is different from the post-operation display (FIG. 243(f)) that is executed based on the operation being accepted during the second valid period (e.g., FIG. 242(b), (c) or FIG. 243(d)). Similarly, the post-operation sound output that is executed based on the operation being accepted during the special valid period shown in FIG. 243(d) is different from the post-operation sound output (FIG. 243(f)) that is executed based on the operation being accepted during the second valid period (e.g., FIG. 242(b), (c) or FIG. 243(d)).

In this way, in the example shown in Figures 242 and 243, the entire period from the start to the end of the second validity period functions as a "period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced," and the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced under any circumstances.

In the situation (special valid period) shown in FIG. 241(e) or FIG. 243(d), the integrated model image IG may be displayed as in the second valid period. However, it is preferable that at least one of the display position and size of the integrated model image IG is different between the second valid period and the special valid period so that it is easy to recognize that the post-operation display and post-operation sound output generated according to the operation are different valid periods (second valid period, special valid period). That is, in this case, at the end of the second valid period, the integrated model image IG in the form corresponding to the second valid period is hidden, and the integrated model image IG in the form corresponding to the special valid period is newly displayed. When the integrated model image IG is displayed in the special valid period, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image is not reduced" may be generated during the valid period, or a "period in which the display area of the gauge image is not reduced" may not be generated.

The "display mode with distinctive features in the movement of the gauge image GG" shown in Figures 239 to 243 is executable when the integrated model image IGa is displayed among the integrated model images IGa to IGd, and is desirably not executed when the integrated model images IGb to IGd are displayed among the integrated model images IGa to IGd. In other words, the integrated model image IGa is displayed as the mode with the lowest expectation, but when the integrated model image IGa is displayed, there is a possibility that the "display mode with distinctive features in the movement of the gauge image GG" shown in Figures 239 to 243 will appear, which can prevent a decline in interest in the game.

According to the examples shown in Figures 240 to 243, when an operation-related image (such as an integrated model image IG) is displayed in a "display mode that provides a distinctive movement of the gauge image GG," even if a situation arises in which the operation-related image is hidden as a result of a predetermined set period (second effective period) having elapsed without an operation by the player, it is possible for an operation to occur and for a display change (or for a post-operation sound output) to occur. More specifically, even if the predetermined set period (second effective period) has ended, it is possible for the predetermined set period (second effective period) to be re-occurred by operating the operation receiving portion (operation means) whose operation had been prompted by the integrated model image IG, and operation acceptance is permitted during the re-occurred predetermined set period (second effective period) (Figures 241(e) and (f) and Figures 243(d) and (e)). With this configuration, even if the specified set period (second valid period) ends without the player being able to understand the "display mode with distinctive movement of the gauge image GG," the specified set period (second valid period) can be triggered again, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In contrast, during a specified set period (first effective period) during which the operation-related image (such as the integrated model image IG) is not displayed in a "display mode that gives distinctive movement to the gauge image GG," even if the operation receiving section (operation means) that had been prompted to be operated by the integrated model image IG is operated after the specified set period (first effective period) has ended without any operation being accepted, the specified set period (second effective period) will not be re-occurred (Figs. 235 to 238).

The specified set period (second effective period) during which the operation-related image (such as the integrated model image IG) is displayed in a "display mode that features the movement of the gauge image GG" does not necessarily have to occur during the period during which the pattern change is being performed. For example, it may be a period that occurs using the RTC function regardless of whether the pattern change is occurring or not, or it may occur during a "period during which the pattern change is not being performed," such as during the execution of a jackpot game or the period before the start of a jackpot game.

In addition, according to the example shown in Figs. 235 to 243, even though the second effective period (Figs. 239 to 243) is set to a longer time than the first effective period (Figs. 235 to 238), the integrated model image IG itself is displayed the same or in a similar manner between the first and second effective periods (in the above example, the integrated model image IG itself is the same, and the gauge image GG (display target area of the gauge image GG) has the same display area). When the integrated model image IG is displayed in a similar manner, the size ratio of the gauge image GG (display target area) to the button model image will be the same, and it is expected that the length of the set time (set time) will appear to be the same. With this configuration, it is difficult to recognize at first glance that the set time is different between the first effective period in which the "display mode with distinctive movement of the gauge image GG" is not executed and the second effective period in which the "display mode with distinctive movement of the gauge image GG" is executed; however, when a situation arises in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the time during which this situation of no reduction is added, making it possible to estimate that the set time is longer than it appears.

When the integrated model image IG is displayed in a similar manner during the first effective period (Figs. 235 to 238) and the second effective period (Figs. 239 to 243), it is desirable to display a smaller integrated model image IG during the second effective period, in which the "display mode with distinctive movement of the gauge image GG" appears, than during the first effective period.

In addition, according to the example shown in Figs. 235 to 243, in the first valid period (Figs. 235 to 238), if no operation is received, the period ends when the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) reaches a specific value (here, "0"), but in the second valid period (Figs. 239 to 243), if no operation is received, the period ends with the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) displayed at a value greater than the specific value. In other words, if the time (set time) set for the valid period is long, the sense of tension during the valid period tends to decrease, but by allowing the possibility that the valid period may end even if the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) does not reach a specific value (here, "0"), it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

Also, according to the above example, the image displayed within the display target area of the gauge image GG is different between the case where the integrated model image IG is displayed so that the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced while the premonition effect is being performed (first effective period) and the case where the integrated model image IG is displayed so that the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at least while the premonition effect is being performed (second effective period). In this case, the aspect of the gauge image GG itself may be different from each other. "The premonition effect is performed but the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at least while the premonition effect is being performed" means that the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced throughout the entire effective period, as illustrated in Figures 242 and 243.

In this regard, according to the above example, in the first valid period (Fig. 235 to Fig. 238), the specific image TG is displayed and the specific image TG is displayed when the set time elapses without any operation, but in the second valid period (Fig. 240 to Fig. 243), the specific image TG is not displayed and the gauge image GG (display target area) is displayed when the set time elapses without any operation. With this configuration, in the first valid period, it is possible to make the valid period appear longer by the amount of the specific image TG displayed at the end of the valid period, and in the second valid period, it is possible to maintain tension by making it appear as if the valid period has ended earlier than expected by the player, by leaving the gauge image GG (display target area) at the end of the valid period. To obtain such an effect, it is desirable to leave most of the display area of the gauge image GG (display target area) (at least an area larger than half the maximum value) at the end of the valid period in the second valid period.

In addition, according to the above example, the gauge image GG is displayed in such a way that the display area is reduced for each unit time over the entire first effective period (Figs. 235 to 238), but is displayed in such a way that the display area is not reduced over the second effective period (Figs. 239 to 243). This makes it difficult to determine the remaining time just from the size of the display area when the gauge image GG appears, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In addition, according to the above example, the button model image BMG is dynamically displayed to depict the operation receiving portion being displaced in both the first and second effective periods, but the gauge image GG is displayed in a first mode (a mode in which the display area is reduced) in the first effective period, whereas it is displayed in a second mode (a mode in which the display area is not reduced) different from the first mode in the second effective period. That is, in the above example, although the button model image BMG is displayed as a single image (integrated model image IG) integrated with the gauge image GG (peripheral decoration image SSG), when the button model image BMG of the integrated model image IG is dynamically displayed, there are times when the gauge image GG is reduced and times when the gauge image GG is not reduced. Therefore, even if the gauge image GG is not reduced, the dynamic display of the button model image BMG makes it possible for the integrated model image IG to suitably suggest that the operation reception is permitted.

Also, according to the above example, the "display mode with distinctive movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" can be displayed only when the normal button image BMGa is displayed out of the normal button image BMGa and the special button image BMGb. Also, when the normal button image BMGa is displayed, not only may the "display mode with distinctive movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" be displayed, but there may also be cases where the "display mode with distinctive movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is not displayed, and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the mode (normal mode) that appears even when the special button image BMGb is displayed. This is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when the normal button image BMGa, which has a lower expectation level than the special button image BMGb, is displayed.

In particular, in the second effective period shown in FIG. 242 and FIG. 243, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced at all, and the display mode (color, etc.) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in only one mode. That is, in this case, the gauge image GG itself loses its remaining time indication function and expectation indication function, and no information can be obtained from the gauge image GG. However, the integrated model image IG in which the display target area of the gauge image GG is formed is displayed, and the gauge image GG is displayed statically (in a mode in which the area does not change) in the integrated model image IG. With this configuration, the gauge image GG displayed in the second effective period does not function as an image indicating the remaining time or expectation, but functions only as a simple decorative image in the integrated model image IG. Therefore, its function can be greatly different from that of the gauge image GG displayed in the first effective period, and it is expected that the diversity of expression as the gauge image GG will increase the interest in playing.

The first valid period and the second valid period may have different occurrence conditions. For example, they may occur at different times within one pattern change period. The first valid period means a period during which operation acceptance is permitted for the first post-operation display and the first post-operation sound output, and the second valid period means a period during which operation acceptance is permitted for the second post-operation display different from the first post-operation display and the second post-operation sound output different from the first post-operation sound output, and the reactions (display change, sound output) that appear when an operation is accepted within each of these periods are different from each other.

Regarding the integrated image IG,
After the premonition effect (specific display TH) starts to be displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced per unit time from the time when the premonition effect in the display state and the "integrated model image IG" overlap (Figures 235 to 238);
A mode in which the premonition effect is not displayed, or even if the premonition effect starts to be displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced when the premonition effect in the displayed state overlaps with the "integrated model image IG" (FIGS. 239 to 243).
According to such a configuration, as a result of the premonition effect being performed, there are cases where the display area of the gauge image GG has already been reduced by the time the visibility of the gauge image GG is ensured, and cases where the display area of the gauge image GG has not been reduced by the time the entire gauge image GG becomes visible regardless of whether the premonition effect has been performed or not, making it possible to provide an entertainment effect by utilizing the visibility of the gauge image GG.

In particular, only when a mode (Figures 239 to 243) is adopted in which the display area of the gauge image GG has not decreased at the point when the entire gauge image GG is visible regardless of whether a premonition performance has been performed, a display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not decreased even within the valid period can further appear, thereby further increasing attention to the gauge image GG.

When adopting a mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced when the premonition effect is not displayed or when the premonition effect starts to be displayed but at least the displayed premonition effect overlaps with the "integrated model image IG" (Figs. 239 to 243), in addition to the case in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced during the effective period (Figs. 239 to 243), there may be cases in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced does not appear. However, in this case, when the occurrence condition of the second effective period (Figs. 239 to 243) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears is set as the second condition, the occurrence condition of a specific effective period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced does not appear is set as a specific condition different from the second condition.

In the above example, during the period during which the button image BMG is displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG may be reduced over time, or may not be displayed. If the display is not performed, the gauge image GG itself may not be displayed during the valid period, and may be hidden. Nevertheless, the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed not only during the first valid period during which the display area is reduced over time, but also during the second valid period during which the display area is not reduced over time, which is expected to appropriately suggest that the reception of performances is permitted.

In the above example, the gauge image GG does not display a display area that decreases with time, and when the time (set time) set for the valid period (second valid period) has elapsed and the valid period ends, the automatic reception function is not enabled. In other words, if the automatic reception function were to be enabled, the sense of tension would be completely lost because the gauge image GG does not indicate the remaining time, so it is desirable not to enable the automatic reception function for the valid period (second valid period) (regardless of the presentation mode). In contrast, it is desirable to enable the automatic reception function for the above-mentioned first valid period (regardless of the presentation mode).

In addition, when a display method is adopted in which the button model image BMG and the gauge GG are displayed separately and the gauge function (remaining time indication function) is pursued exclusively, if a method is adopted in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, a great sense of incongruity will be felt when the remaining time indication function is not performed despite the gauge image GG. In this regard, in the above configuration, the button model image BMG is displayed as an image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that includes the display target area of the gauge GG. That is, in this case, a pattern can be seen on the back side of the gauge image GG even when it is displayed, or the gauge image GG itself can have multiple colors, and the gauge image GG itself becomes decorative within the integrated model image IG, which is expected to suppress the sense of incongruity when a situation occurs in which the remaining time indication function of the gauge image GG is not performed.

In the example shown in Figures 236 to 238, prior to the occurrence of the first valid period, the presentation of whether the "button model image BMG" will have a low expectation (normal button model image BMGa) or a high expectation (special button model image BMGb) and the presentation of whether the "border decoration image SSG" will have a low expectation (normal border decoration image SSGa) or a high expectation (special border decoration image SSGb) are gradually presented. However, such presentation can also be presented by the method described below.

Figure 244 is a diagram explaining a modified example of a presentation that gradually indicates the degree of expectation regarding the integrated model image IG.

First, FIG. 244(a) shows the performance status in which, in a normal game state, the number of reserved symbols is 0 and the display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is changed in the first performance pattern (changing pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination on the performance display device 1600.

Figure 244 (b) shows a performance situation in which, during the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in Figure 244 (a), a valid period occurs during which operation reception to the operating means (operation receiving unit) is permitted, and a button-like image BMG is displayed on the performance display device 1600.

However, in the situation shown in FIG. 244(b), the button model image BMG is not displayed as an image integrated with the "peripheral decoration image SGG", but remains displayed by itself. In other words, at the timing shown in FIG. 244(b), the button model image BMG provides a performance of whether it is displayed in a low expectation mode (normal button model image BMGa) or a high expectation mode (special button model image BMGb), and the figure shows an example of a case where a high expectation mode (special button model image BMGb) appears. The selection of which of these modes to display is based on the result of a jackpot determination (performance determination).

Figure 244 (c) shows a presentation situation in which the special button image BMGb shown in Figure 244 (b) is displayed as an image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG.

However, the performance may not necessarily progress from the situation shown in FIG. 244(b) to the situation shown in FIG. 244(c). For example, if a mode is prepared in which the button mosaic image BMG (normal button mosaic image BMGa, special button mosaic image BMGb) shown in FIG. 244(b) occurs without being integrated with the border decoration image SSG, it becomes possible to provide an interesting experience of whether the performance progresses from the situation shown in FIG. 244(b) to the situation shown in FIG. 244(c) and the effective period (first effective period) occurs after the integrated mosaic image IG is formed, or whether the performance progresses to the situation shown in FIG. 244(c) and the effective period (first effective period) occurs without the integrated mosaic image IG. If the validity period (first validity period) occurs without becoming an integrated model image IG, the gauge image GG will be displayed as an image separate from the button model image BMG, and for example, the display area of the gauge image GG will be reduced within a bar-shaped (straight-line) partitioned area. In this case, it is preferable that the specific image TG not be displayed.

When the button pattern image BMG is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG and the valid period occurs, it is desirable to make the expectation (proportion) of stopping at the jackpot pattern higher than when the valid period occurs without being integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG. Also, when the special button pattern image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244(b), it is desirable to make the rate of progression to the situation shown in FIG. 244(c) and integration with the peripheral decoration image SSG higher than when the normal button pattern image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244(b). These percentages may include "100%" or "0%".

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 244(c), the button pattern image BMG provides a performance by integrating it with either a peripheral decoration image with a low expectation (normal peripheral decoration image BMGa) or a peripheral decoration image with a high expectation (special peripheral decoration image BMGb), and the figure shows an example in which a high expectation (special peripheral decoration image BMGb) appears. Which of these images is displayed is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination (performance determination).

For ease of explanation, the peripheral decoration image BMG (normal peripheral decoration image BMGa, special peripheral decoration image BMGb) in this example has a different image type from those shown in the above examples (Figs. 232 to 244), but are basically displayed as having the same function. The peripheral decoration image BMG in this example has a box shape for storing the button-shaped image BMG, and while the normal peripheral decoration image BMGa has a heart pattern (not shown), the special peripheral decoration image BMGb has a checkered pattern. Of the areas with these patterns, the "area from the upper right to the lower left" is displayed as the display target area for the gauge image GG.

The image shown in Figure 244 (c) functions as an image (integrated image) IGd in which the special button image BMGb and the special border decoration image BMGb are integrated, and in terms of presentation, it is the same as Figure 232 (d).

Figure 244 (d) shows the performance situation in which the first additional decoration HS1 is added to the integrated model image IGd shown in Figure 244 (c).

However, the progression from the situation shown in FIG. 244(c) to the situation shown in FIG. 244(d) may not necessarily take place. For example, if a mode is provided in which the effective period (first effective period) occurs without the first additional decoration HS1 being added to the integrated model image IG (integrated model images IGa-IGd) shown in FIG. 244(c), it becomes possible to provide an interesting experience of whether the effective period (first effective period) occurs after the first additional decoration HS1 is added by progressing from the situation shown in FIG. 244(c) to the situation shown in FIG. 244(d), or whether the effective period (first effective period) occurs without the first additional decoration HS1 being added without progressing to the situation shown in FIG. 244(d).

In addition, when the effective period occurs after the first additional decoration HS1 is added to the integrated mosaic image IG, it is desirable to make the expectation (proportion) of stopping at the big win pattern higher than when the effective period occurs without the first additional decoration HS1 being added to the integrated mosaic image IG. In addition, when the special button mosaic image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244(b) or the special peripheral decoration image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244(c), it is desirable to make the rate at which the first additional decoration HS1 is added by progressing to the situation shown in FIG. 244(d) higher than when the normal button mosaic image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244(b) or the normal peripheral decoration image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244(c). The percentages may include "100%" or "0%".

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 244(d), it may be possible to provide a dramatic effect as to whether the first additional decoration HS1 is added in a low expectation mode or a high expectation mode.

Figure 244 (e) shows the performance situation in which the second additional decoration HS2 is added to the integrated model image IGd shown in Figure 244 (d).

However, the progression from the situation shown in FIG. 244(d) to the situation shown in FIG. 244(e) may not necessarily take place. For example, if a mode is provided in which the effective period (first effective period) occurs without the second additional decoration HS2 being added to the integrated model image IG (integrated model images IGa-IGd) shown in FIG. 244(d), it becomes possible to provide an interesting experience of whether the effective period (first effective period) occurs after the performance progresses from the situation shown in FIG. 244(d) to the situation shown in FIG. 244(e) and the first additional decoration HS1 is added, or whether the effective period (first effective period) occurs without the performance progressing to the situation shown in FIG. 244(e) and the second additional decoration HS2 is not added.

In addition, when the effective period occurs after the second additional decoration HS2 is added to the integrated Mogumo image IG, it is desirable to make the expectation (proportion) of stopping at the big win pattern higher than when the effective period occurs without the second additional decoration HS2 being added to the integrated Mogumo image IG. In addition, when the special button Mogumo image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244(b) or the special peripheral decoration image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244(c), it is desirable to make the rate at which the second additional decoration HS2 is added by progressing to the situation shown in FIG. 244(e) higher than when the normal button Mogumo image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244(b) or the normal peripheral decoration image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244(c). The percentages may include "100%" or "0%".

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 244(e), the second additional decoration HS2 may be added in either a low expectation mode or a high expectation mode to provide a dramatic effect.

Figure 244 (f) shows a performance situation in which an effective period (first effective period) occurs while the integrated model image IGd shown in Figure 244 (e) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 244(f), when the valid period (first valid period) occurs, an operation instruction image such as "press" or "down arrow" is displayed. In addition, the above-mentioned specific image TG is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG, and by checking the specific image TG, it is possible to recognize that the operation reception is permitted. For the sake of convenience, the specific image TG in this example is a different image type from those shown in the above examples (FIGS. 232 to 244), but is basically displayed as having the same function. The specific image TG in this example depicts a frog character, and the character displaces in accordance with the "end of the gauge image GG", which displaces when the display area of the gauge image GG decreases.

The specific image TG in this example may be displayed in a manner similar to the example shown in FIG. 233 (wherein the image is not displayed at the start of the validity period and is gradually displayed as time passes), or in a manner similar to the example shown in FIG. 234 (wherein the entire image is displayed at the start of the validity period).

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 244(f), the specific image TG is displayed in either a low expectation mode (snail character) (not shown) or a high expectation mode (frog character), and the figure shows an example of a high expectation mode. The specific image TG is displayed more frequently in a high expectation mode when a valid period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 244(d) than when a valid period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 244(c), and it is desirable to display the specific image TG more frequently in a high expectation mode when a valid period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 244(e) than when a valid period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 244(d). The percentages may include "100%" or "0%".

This configuration makes it possible to provide a dramatic effect showing how much the operation-related image can progress to a state with high expectations before the valid period occurs, thereby increasing interest in the operation before the valid period has yet to occur. Furthermore, while the operation-related images (button-shaped image BMG, peripheral decoration image SGG, additional decoration HS1, 2) suggest the degree of expectation before the valid period occurs, after the valid period occurs, a different image (specific image TG) further suggests the degree of expectation, thereby ideally increasing interest throughout the period from before the valid period occurs to after it has occurred.

In the example shown in FIG. 244, the operation-related images (button model images, border decoration images, additional decorations, etc.) may be temporarily hidden at the timing when the performance progresses from FIG. 244(b) to FIG. 244(c), when the performance progresses from FIG. 244(c) to FIG. 244(d), when the performance progresses from FIG. 244(d) to FIG. 244(e), etc. In other words, in this case, when the operation-related images (button model images, border decoration images, additional decorations, etc.) are displayed again, it is possible to provide the fun of knowing whether the performance has progressed or whether the validity period has expired.

In the example shown in FIG. 244, before the validity period has elapsed, the button image, border decoration image, additional decoration, etc. are displayed in the same manner as during the validity period, but they may be displayed in a different manner (such as blinking or semi-transparent).

In the example shown in FIG. 244, it is desirable to set the time required for the operation-related image to gradually indicate the degree of expectation before the validity period occurs to be longer than the set time for the validity period.

As mentioned above, the sword ornament 5001 according to this embodiment has two operation receiving parts: the "handle 5012" which can move (up and down) relative to the sheath 5020, and the "handle button 5014" which can move (up and down) relative to the handle 5012. In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment displays both a "handle model image TMG" modeled after the handle 5012 and a "button model image BMG" modeled after the handle button 5014 during the effective period (operation reception performance) when a predetermined condition is met to generate an effective period (operation reception performance) during which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012. During the effective period (operation reception performance) during which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012, operation reception to the handle button 5014 is not permitted, and during the effective period (operation reception performance) during which an operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5014, operation reception to the handle 5012 is not permitted.

In this configuration, when an effective period (operation reception effect) occurs during which an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012, it becomes difficult to recognize whether operation reception to the handle portion 5012 or operation reception to the handle button 5014 is permitted. In other words, when an operation is received during the effective period during which an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012, the rate at which a mode suggesting that a jackpot pattern will be stopped as a post-operation display (or a mode suggesting that a jackpot pattern will be stopped as a post-operation sound output) appears is higher than when an operation is received during the effective period during which an operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5014. The rate may be 0% or 100%. Therefore, when it is difficult to recognize whether operation reception to the handle portion 5012 or operation reception to the handle button 5014 is permitted, when the player recognizes that operation reception to the handle portion 5012 is permitted, the player will operate the handle portion 5012 in a state of elation, which can significantly increase the player's interest in the game.

In order to obtain such an effect, it is required to make it difficult to recognize whether operation acceptance is permitted for the handle portion 5012 or for the handle button 5014. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the effective period (operation acceptance performance) during which an operation opportunity is granted for the handle portion 5012, not only is the handle portion 5012 (its light-emitting portion) illuminated, but also the handle button 5014 (its light-emitting portion) on the side to which no operation opportunity is granted is illuminated. That is, in this case, during the effective period (operation acceptance performance) during which both the "handle-modeled image TMG" modeled after the handle portion 5012 and the "button-modeled image BMG" modeled after the handle button 5014 are displayed, even if the handle portion 5012 or the pattern button 5014 is directly viewed, it remains difficult to recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the pattern button 5014 is given an operation opportunity. In this situation, the player will become aware that operations on the handle 5012 are permitted, and will operate the handle 5012 in a state of euphoria, significantly increasing the player's interest in the game.

In other words, during the valid period (operation reception performance) during which an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012, it is difficult to determine whether an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012 or the pattern button 5014 by directly looking at the handle portion 5012 or the pattern button 5014, or by simply glancing at the performance display device 1600. At least for someone playing the pachinko machine 1 for the first time (beginners) or someone unfamiliar with the complex performance specifications (elderly people, etc.), it can be said to be difficult to determine whether an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012 or the pattern button 5014.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a "valid period during which it is difficult to recognize whether the handle portion 5012 or the handle button 5014 has been given an operation opportunity" is generated, and the button model image BMG and the pattern model image TMG are displayed in such a way that, although it is difficult to instantly recognize during the valid period whether the handle portion 5012 or the handle button 5014 has been given an operation opportunity, it can be recognized after a certain amount of time.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1, during the valid period (operation acceptance performance) during which an opportunity to operate the handle 5012 is given, both a "handle-modeled image TMG" modeled after the handle 5012 and a "button-modeled image BMG" modeled after the handle button 5014 are displayed, and of these model images, the "handle-modeled image TMG" on the side where operation acceptance is permitted is dynamically displayed, but the "button-modeled image BMG" on the side where operation acceptance is not permitted is not dynamically displayed. Here, "dynamic display" refers to, for example, a display depicting the state in which the operation receiving portion is displaced within its movable range (in the case of the handle 5012, this corresponds to a display depicting the state in which it moves (moves up and down) relative to the sheath 5020, and in the case of the handle button 5014, this corresponds to a display depicting the state in which it moves (moves up and down) relative to the handle 5012).

Even with this configuration, it is difficult to instantly recognize whether the handle portion 5012 or the handle button 5014 has been given an operation opportunity during the valid period. However, once a predetermined time has elapsed that allows recognition as a dynamic display (moving image), the player will notice that the behavior during operation appears as a dynamic display in the handle model image TMG, but does not appear as a dynamic display in the button model image BMG, and will be able to recognize whether the operation opportunity has been given to the handle portion 5012 or the handle button 5014. Then, when the player recognizes that the operation reception portion (handle portion 5012) with the higher expectation is allowed to receive an operation, he or she will operate the handle portion 5012 in a state of elation, which can significantly increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when the "handle model image TMG" and the "button model image BMG" are displayed during the valid period (operation acceptance performance) during which an opportunity to operate the handle portion 5012 is given, these model images are displayed as "integrated model images" integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery of the model images, thereby increasing the interest in playing when the operation acceptance performance (valid period) occurs. The functions and variations of such integrated model images are basically as described above. For example, the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 232 to 244 may be displayed to further display (include) the "handle model image TMG" in addition to the "button model image BMG".

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "button model image BMG" and the "handle model image TMG" are displayed as a "composite model image HMG" that models at least a portion of the sword decoration 5001, and the "composite model image HMG" is displayed as an "integrated model image IG" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery of the "composite model image HMG."

Figure 245 shows an example of the "integrated model image IG" that is displayed when an operation reception display (validity period) occurs for the handle portion 5012.

245(a)-(d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific operation reception effect (valid period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012 is generated, the effect display device 1600 converts the "handle model image TMG" that models the handle portion 5012 into a "composite model image HMG" that is integrated with the "button model image BMG", and displays the "composite model image HMG" as integrated model images IGe-IGh with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery. In the example shown in FIG. 245(a)-(d), the "handle model image TMG", "button model image BMG", and "peripheral decoration image SSG" are not prepared individually as image data, but are displayed as a single integrated image data (integrated model images IGe-IGh). Additionally, when the integrated model images IGe to IGh are displayed, operation prompts such as "push" and "down-left arrow" are also displayed, but for ease of explanation, they will not be described here.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, multiple presentation modes including a "first presentation mode with relatively low expectation" and a "second presentation mode with relatively high expectation" are prepared as post-operation presentations that are executed when an operation is accepted during a specific operation acceptance presentation (valid period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012, and one of these presentation modes is executed based on the result of the big win judgment (presentation judgment). In this regard, in the examples shown in Figures 245(a) to (d),
During a specific operation reception effect (validity period), the appearance rate of the "relatively highly anticipated second effect mode" as a post-operation effect is higher when the mode shown in FIG. 245(b) (integrated model image IGf) appears than when the mode shown in FIG. 245(a) (integrated model image IGe) appears.
During a specific operation reception effect (validity period), the appearance rate of the "relatively highly anticipated second effect mode" as a post-operation effect is higher when the mode shown in FIG. 245(c) (integrated model image IGg) appears than when the mode shown in FIG. 245(b) (integrated model image IGf) appears.
In order to establish a relationship in which the appearance rate of the "second performance mode with a relatively high expectation" as a post-operation performance is higher when the mode shown in FIG. 245(d) (integrated model image IGh) appears than when the mode shown in FIG. 245(c) (integrated model image IGg) appears during a specific operation acceptance performance (validity period), one of the integrated model images IGe to IGf is displayed based on the result of a jackpot determination (performance determination).

It is not necessary to prepare all four of the integrated model images IGe to IGh. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the post-operation performance during the valid period by preparing at least two of the models. In addition, it is also possible to prepare a model different from the above four models (integrated model images IGe to IGh) and display any one of the prepared models.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
An operation means (sword decoration 5001) having an operation receiving part (handle part 5012) that is displaced by the operation of the player and a peripheral decoration part (scabbard part 5020, etc.) provided on the periphery of the operation receiving part,
an integrated model image display means for displaying a model image (pattern model image TMG) modeled on the operation receiving portion (pattern portion 5012) as an integrated model image IGe to IGh integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the peripheral portion of the model image;
- It is equipped with an operation reception execution means that can cause a display change (post-operation performance) when a predetermined displacement occurs in the operation receiving portion (handle portion 5012) due to an operation by the player while the integrated model image is displayed, and the integrated model image can be displayed in any of a number of forms (integrated model images IGe to IGh).

Details about the "integrated model images" shown in Figures 245 (a) to (d) will be explained separately for each of these aspects (integrated model images IGe to IGh).

First, the "integrated model image IGe" shown in Figure 245 (a) is composed of a pattern model image TMGe and a button model image BMGe (composite model image HMGe), and a normal border decoration image SSGe that decorates the borders. However, in the "integrated model image IGe," the pattern model image TMGe and the button model image BMGe (composite model image HMGe) are displayed as an integrated image of "an image modeling the pattern part 5012, which is the object to which an operation opportunity is given," and "an image modeling the pattern button 5014, which is not the object to which an operation opportunity is given," whereas the normal peripheral decoration image SSGe does not model the peripheral decoration part (such as the sheath part 5020) that is actually provided on the periphery of the pattern part 5012, which is the object to which an operation opportunity is given. In this example, the normal peripheral decoration image SSGe only models a part of the peripheral decoration part (such as the sheath part 5020), and most of the image SSGe decorates the periphery of the pattern model image TMGe (composite model image HMGe) as a virtual decoration in the display performance of the performance display device 1600.

In the "integrated model image IGe" shown in FIG. 245(a), the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa is represented as a treasure chest containing several treasures including the pattern model image TMGe (composite model image HMGe), and as described above, these "treasures" and "treasure chests" have a different shape from the actual peripheral decoration and are represented as different decorations.

In this regard, in the "integrated model image IGe" according to this embodiment, a display target area for the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided for such a normal border decoration image SSGe. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG in this example can also be displayed so that the display area within the display target area decreases over time. More specifically, when no operation is accepted within the valid period, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so that the display area decreases over time from a predetermined maximum value to a predetermined minimum value (including "0").

In the normal border decoration image SSGe shown in FIG. 245(a), a partition image KG is provided which separates the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from other areas within the normal border decoration image SSGe. The area surrounded by this partition image KG functions as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG." In this example, a necklace, which is one of the treasures, is displayed as the partition image KG, and the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is displayed within the necklace. However, the partition image KG does not necessarily have to be displayed, and a predetermined range within the normal border decoration image SSGa may be used as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG."

Also, as shown in FIG. 245(a), when a specific operation acceptance performance (valid period) in which the "integrated model image IGe" is displayed occurs on the performance display device 1600, the handle portion 5012 that is the object of operation is made to emit light in the first mode (for example, emit light in the same color as the handle model image TMGe in the "integrated model image IGe" (for example, "blue" in FIG. 245(a))). Also, the handle button 5014 that is not the object of operation is made to emit light in the fifth mode (for example, emit light in the same color as the button model image BMGe in the "integrated model image IGe" (for example, "blue" in FIG. 245(a)). Here, the same color is used, but the first and fifth modes may be different colors.

In contrast, the "integrated mosaic image IGf" shown in FIG. 245(b) is basically the same as the "integrated mosaic image IGe" described above, and is configured as an image in which the pattern mosaic image TMGf and button mosaic image BMGf (composite mosaic image HMGf) are integrated with the border decoration image SSG that decorates the border. In the "integrated mosaic image IGf", there is no change in the shape of the pattern mosaic image TMGf and button mosaic image BMGf (composite mosaic image HMGf). However, with regard to the border decoration image SSG, although the treasure chest itself is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal border decoration image SSGe", it is displayed as a "first special border decoration image SSGf" in which the amount and type of treasure contained therein has been increased. The amount and variety of treasures has increased, and necklaces, swords, and cups are also displayed in the "normal border decoration image SSGe," so they are common.

In addition, in the "integrated model image IGf" shown in FIG. 245(b), the shape of the "necklace (section image KG)" which is the display target area of the gauge image GG changes as the amount and type of treasure increases, thereby causing the display mode of the gauge image GG to differ. With this configuration, the shape of the display target area of the gauge image GG differs (it is not similar) depending on which of multiple modes with different expectation levels it is displayed in, so as the display area decreases, it becomes difficult to recognize how much time is left, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

Also, as shown in FIG. 245(b), when a specific operation acceptance performance (valid period) in which the "integrated model image IGf" is displayed occurs on the performance display device 1600, the handle portion 5012 that is the object of operation is made to emit light in the second mode (for example, emit light in the same color as the handle model image TMGf in the "integrated model image IGf" (for example, "green" in FIG. 245(b))). Also, the handle button 5014 that is not the object of operation is made to emit light in the sixth mode (for example, emit light in the same color as the button model image BMGf in the "integrated model image IGf" (for example, "green" in FIG. 245(b)). Although the same color is used here, the second mode and the sixth mode may be different colors.

On the other hand, the "integrated mosaic image IGg" shown in FIG. 245(c) is basically the same as the "integrated mosaic image IGe" described above, and is configured as an image in which the pattern mosaic image TMGg and button mosaic image BMGg (composite mosaic image HMGg) are integrated with the border decoration image SSG that decorates the border. In the "integrated mosaic image IGg", there is no change in the shape of the pattern mosaic image TMGg and button mosaic image BMGg (composite mosaic image HMGg). However, with regard to the border decoration image SSG, although the treasure itself is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal border decoration image SSGe", the treasure chest that stores them (the shape of the treasure chest) is different, and it is displayed as a "second special border decoration image SSGg".

However, the "second special peripheral decoration image SSGg" is similar to the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGe" and the "first special peripheral decoration image SSGf" in the following points.
"The peripheral decorative portion (such as the sheath portion 5020) that is actually provided on the periphery of the handle portion 5012, which is the object to which the operation opportunity is given, is not imitated, but the periphery of the handle-modeled image TMGg (composite modeled image HMGg) is decorated as a virtual decoration for the display performance on the performance display device 1600.

Also, as shown in FIG. 245(c), when a specific operation acceptance performance (valid period) in which the "integrated model image IGg" is displayed occurs on the performance display device 1600, the handle portion 5012 that is the object of operation is illuminated in the third state (in FIG. 245(c), for example, illuminates in the same color (e.g., "red") as the handle model image TMGg in the "integrated model image IGg"). Also, the handle button 5014 that is not the object of operation is illuminated in the seventh state (for example, illuminates in the same color (e.g., "red") as the button model image BMGg in the "integrated model image IGg"). Here, the same color is used, but the third and seventh states may be different colors.

On the other hand, the "integrated mosaic image IGh" shown in FIG. 245(d) is basically the same as the "integrated mosaic image IGe" described above, and is configured as an image in which the pattern mosaic image TMGh and button mosaic image BMGh (composite mosaic image HMGh) are integrated with the border decoration image SSG that decorates the border. In the "integrated mosaic image IGh", there is no change in the shape of the pattern mosaic image TMGh and button mosaic image BMGh (composite mosaic image HMGh). However, the border decoration image SSG is displayed as a "third special border decoration image SSGh" in which the amount and types of treasures are increased compared to the "normal border decoration image SSGe" described above, and the treasure chest that stores them (the shape of the treasure chest) is also different.

In addition, in the "integrated model image IGh" in this example, the shape of the "necklace (section image KG)" which is the display target area of the gauge image GG changes as the amount and type of treasure increases, which causes the display mode of the gauge image GG to differ.

However, the "third special peripheral decoration image SSGh" is similar to the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGe" in the following respects.
"The actual peripheral decorative portion (such as the sheath portion 5020) provided on the periphery of the handle portion 5012, which is the object to which the operation opportunity is given, is not imitated, but the periphery of the handle-modeled image TMGh (composite modeled image HMGh) is decorated as a virtual decoration for the display performance on the performance display device 1600.

In other words, the "integrated model image IGh (Fig. 245(d))" is displayed as an image that combines a portion (treasure) of the "first special peripheral decoration image SSGg" used in the "integrated model image IGf (Fig. 245(b))" and a portion (treasure chest) of the "second special peripheral decoration image SSGg" used in the "integrated model image IGg (Fig. 245(c))."

On the other hand, since the same decorations and shapes appear in some areas of the peripheral decoration image SSG, the appearance of the "integrated model image IGe (Figure 245(a))" and the appearance of the "integrated model image IGh (Figure 245(d))" can suggest that they are specific operation acceptance effects (validity period) targeting the same post-operation effect.

Also, as shown in FIG. 245(d), when a specific operation acceptance performance (valid period) in which the "integrated model image IGh" is displayed on the performance display device 1600 occurs, the handle portion 5012 that is the object of operation is made to emit light in the fourth mode (for example, emit light in the same color as the handle model image TMGh in the "integrated model image IGh" (for example, "rainbow color" in FIG. 245(d))). Also, the handle button 5014 that is not the object of operation is made to emit light in the eighth mode (for example, emit light in the same color as the button model image BMGh in the "integrated model image IGh" (for example, "rainbow color" in FIG. 245(d)). Although the same color is used here, the fourth mode and the eighth mode may be different colors.

In the examples shown in Figs. 245(a)-(d), the pattern image TMG and button image BMG (composite image HMG) are displayed in the same shape in all cases, but the shapes of the pattern image TMG and button image BMG (composite image HMG) may be changed according to changes in the amount or type of treasure (Figs. 245(b) and (d)), or according to changes in the treasure chest (Figs. 245(c) and (d)).

In addition, in the examples shown in Figures 245 (a) to (d), the pattern image TMG and the button image BMG (composite image HMG) are displayed in different colors in each aspect, but they may be displayed in the same color.

When displaying a button-like image BMG modeled after the pattern button 5014, in the example shown in Fig. 232(a)-(d), the button-like image BMG is displayed with the peripheral decoration images SSGa,b integrated. In this regard, in the example shown in Fig. 245(a)-(d), the button-like image BMG modeled after the pattern button 5014 is also displayed, but the peripheral decoration images SSGa,b are not displayed. In other words, because the peripheral decoration image is displayed as a virtual decoration in the display performance of the performance display device 1600, it is possible to display completely different images in the examples shown in Fig. 232(a)-(d) and the examples shown in Fig. 245(a)-(d), which makes it possible to provide a wide variety of performance effects.

Needless to say, in the configuration of the example shown in Figs. 245(a)-(d), the parts having the same functions as the example shown in Figs. 232(a)-(d) have the same effects as the various effects described above with reference to Figs. 232(a)-(d). Also, in the example shown in Figs. 245(a)-(d), the above-mentioned modified examples and performance examples of the example shown in Figs. 232(a)-(d) can be appropriately adopted.

Furthermore, during the effective period during which the integrated model image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 245, the above-mentioned "specific image TG" is displayed during that effective period, just as during the effective period during which the integrated model image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 232.

However, during the valid period (multiple valid periods) in which the integrated model image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 232, the "specific image TG" may or may not be displayed depending on the type of valid period (type of post-operation display or post-operation sound output, type of premonition effect, etc.), whereas during the valid period (multiple valid periods) in which the integrated model image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 245, the "specific image TG" is always displayed regardless of the type of valid period (type of post-operation display or post-operation sound output, type of premonition effect, etc.).

In other words, the effective period (multiple effective periods) during which the integrated model image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 245 does not include an effective period during which the "state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" shown in FIGS. 239 to 243 occurs as an effect. Therefore, it is desirable to display a "specific image TG" to clarify how much time is left. When displaying a "specific image TG", it is not necessary to display the gauge image GG.

When the integrated image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 245, the "specific image TG" may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 233 or in the manner shown in FIG. 234.

In the example shown in FIG. 245, an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012 in a state in which the handle portion 5012 has been moved from the original position to a specific position, thereby allowing a movement operation from the specific position to the original position (sheathing the sword). However, when an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012, the handle portion 5012 does not necessarily have to be moved from the original position to the specific position. For example, an operation opportunity may be given to the handle portion 5012 in a state in which the handle portion 5012 is in the original position, thereby allowing a movement operation from the original position to the specific position (unsheathing the sword).

Figure 246 shows an example of the presentation (operation reception presentation) when the integrated model image IG is displayed in the manner shown in Figure 245.

Figure 246 (a) shows a performance situation in which the display of the premonition performance (specific display TH3) has started on the performance display device 1600 in a performance situation in which the number of reserved balls is 0 and the display of the decorative pattern SZ (special pattern) is being performed on the performance display device 1600 in a specific performance pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the big win determination in a normal game state. This performance pattern may be the same as the performance pattern shown in Figures 235 to 238, or it may be different. When it is the same performance pattern, the effective period (operation acceptance performance) shown in Figures 235 to 238 and the effective period shown in Figure 246 may be generated at the first timing and the second timing in the performance pattern, respectively, or only one of the effective periods (operation acceptance performance) may be generated at a predetermined timing in the performance pattern based on the result of the performance determination.

The premonition effect (specific display TH3) in this example is also executed across the timing of the occurrence of the valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted, and at this point, operation acceptance (effect acceptance) for the handle portion 5012 is not permitted and the valid period has not yet occurred.

In this regard, the premonition effect (specific display TH3) in this example is performed by displaying the integrated mosaic image IG itself (dynamic display by the lid of the treasure chest). At the time shown in FIG. 236(a), the treasure chest represented by the peripheral decoration image SSG of the integrated mosaic image IG is displayed in a "closed state", and as a result, some of the treasures including the pattern mosaic image TMGe (composite mosaic image HMGe) are not displayed as images (by the specific display TH3, which is the lid of the treasure chest), making them invisible (or difficult to see).

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 246(a), the treasure chest represented by the peripheral decoration image SSG of the integrated model image IG is provided with the performance of being displayed in either the relatively low expectation mode shown in FIG. 245(a) and (b) or the relatively high expectation mode shown in FIG. 245(c) and (d), and the figure shows an example of a case where it is displayed in a low expectation mode (FIG. 245(a) and (b)). The selection of which of these modes is displayed is based on the result of a jackpot determination (performance determination). Note that, although an explanation of the case where the treasure chest is displayed in a high expectation mode will be omitted, the subsequent performance progresses in the same manner as "when the treasure chest is displayed in a low expectation mode" described below.

Figure 246 (b) shows a situation in which, as the premonition effect shown in Figure 246 (a) progresses (as the lid of the treasure chest (specific display TH3) is opened and the area displayed overlapping with the "treasure" shrinks over time), the part of the "treasure" that does not overlap with the lid of the treasure chest (specific display TH3) gradually expands, and this part is displayed in a manner that is easily visible.

That is, as the premonition performance shown in FIG. 246(a) progresses, a specific timing arrives and an effective period for the handle portion 5012 occurs. When this effective period occurs, as shown in FIG. 246(b), the handle portion 5012, which is the object of operation, begins to move to a "specific position" by the driving force from the actuator (motor). Also, as described above, both the "handle portion 5012", which is the object of operation, and the "handle button 5014", which is not the object of operation, begin to emit light in a specific manner (blue, green, red, rainbow, etc.).

However, at the time when such light emission starts, the premonition effect (specific display TH3) shown in FIG. 246(a) is in the middle of being executed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 246(b), the integrated model image IG depicts the lid part (specific display TH3) of the treasure chest changing from a "closed state (fully closed)" to an "opened state (fully open)". Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 246(b), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG cannot be seen (or is difficult to see) due to the "premonition effect (specific display TH3) depicted (expressed) as being in front of it", but the reduction in the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" has already started (progressed) and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has also already started (progressed). In this example, the entirety of the specific image TG overlaps with the premonition effect (specific display TH) and is not displayed as an image.

With this configuration, the premonition effect (display on the specific display TH3) is performed across the timing (specific timing) of the occurrence of the valid period, and for a specified time after the occurrence of the valid period, the premonition effect (specific display TH3) makes at least a part of the integrated mosaic image IG invisible or difficult to see. In other words, in this case, the whole picture of the integrated mosaic image IG (pattern mosaic image TMG and button mosaic image BMG (composite mosaic image HMG), border decoration image SSG, specific image TG, etc.) is gradually revealed during the valid period, so that the expectation level (border decoration image aspect) and the excitement of which the operation target (pattern mosaic image aspect) is suggested by the aspect of the integrated mosaic image IG can be maintained for a specified time after the start of the valid period.

That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 246(b), the "treasure" that is the contents of the treasure box is at least displayed in a mode in which the amount or type is small (a mode with relatively low expectation shown in FIG. 245(a)) and in a mode in which the amount or type is large (a mode with relatively high expectation shown in FIG. 245(b)), providing a dramatic effect in which it is displayed. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 246(b), it is possible to recognize that the "treasure" that is the contents of the treasure box is displayed in a mode in which the amount or type is large (a mode with high expectation). Also, in the example shown in FIG. 246(b), the "specific image TG" is in a state in which it is difficult to see, so that it is difficult to distinguish whether the "specific image TG" is the type that is displayed in the first place at the time the valid period starts (see FIG. 234) or the type in which the "specific image TG" is not displayed at the time the valid period starts and gradually appears thereafter (see FIG. 233). That is, in the case of the type shown in FIG. 234, it is easy to see that the "specific image TG" cannot function as a gauge image (predetermined image) GG, so when the type shown in FIG. 234 is adopted, executing the premonition effect in the manner described above is particularly effective in preventing a decline in interest in the game. Note that, although we will not go into the details of when "treasure" is displayed in a manner with low expectations, the subsequent performance will progress in the same manner as "when "treasure" is displayed in a manner with high expectations" described below.

Figure 246 (c) shows a situation where the premonition effect (display relating to specific display TH3) shown in Figure 246 (b) has progressed further, resulting in the overlapping portion with the integrated model image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) (the portion where the specific display TH3 is depicted as being in front of the "treasure") disappearing. However, in this example, the specific display TH3 is not hidden, but remains displayed while the integrated model image IG is displayed, which makes it possible to provide a consistent presentation from before the valid period begins until it ends, thereby improving interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 246(c), when the entire treasure of the integrated model image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) becomes visible, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already decreased, and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already begun (in this case, the entire "specific image TG" has finished appearing). In other words, in this case, since the "specific image TG" also appears to be a part of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG", it is possible to make it seem as if more display area remains than the actual display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and the display area has not decreased that much. This is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the fact that the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already decreased when the premonition effect (the effect of opening the lid part, which is the specific display TH) ends. The "specific image TG" in this example is displayed as an image expressing a "light" that displaces at or near the end of the gauge image GG.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 246(c), the handle model image TMG of the integrated model image IG is dynamically displayed (a display depicting the handle portion 5012 displacing within its movable range), but the button model image BMG is not dynamically displayed (a display depicting the handle button 5014 displacing within its movable range), as described above.

Figure 246 (d) shows an example of an image that appears on the performance display device 1600 when the valid period (set time) ends (or just before the valid period ends) and no operation is accepted until the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG becomes the minimum value (here, "0"). At the time when the image shown in the same figure 246 (d) appears, it is assumed that the operation acceptance is barely permitted in terms of time, but it is also possible to make it so that the operation acceptance is already not permitted when the screen appears. However, in this case, the handle part 5012 and the handle button 5014 are in a state where they have already stopped emitting light at that time. Also, in this case, images such as "Push!" and "Down-left arrow" may be hidden. In any case, at least a part (or all) of the "specific image TG" is displayed even at the time when the valid period ends.

When the valid period ends, the illumination of the handle portion 5012 and the illumination of the handle button 5014 both cease. In this regard, during the valid period during which an opportunity to operate the handle portion 5012 is given, even if the player does not perform any operation during that period, the same post-operation display and post-operation sound are output as when the operation is performed (see FIG. 246(e)). This is the same as the automatic reception (e.g., FIG. 235(e) and (f)) that functions during the first valid period described above.

According to this configuration (automatic reception effect), even if a situation occurs in which the player performs an operation immediately after the valid period ends (operation reception is no longer permitted), the "specific image TG" is displayed even just before the post-operation display or post-operation sound output is performed, so that it can be made to look as if the player performed the operation in time and the post-operation display or post-operation sound output was started in response to the operation reception associated with the operation. In particular, when the premonition effect (pre-display) is performed in this manner, by the time the entire picture of the integrated model image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is clearly visible, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already decreased, and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already begun. In other words, in this case, it is considered that there is a high possibility that a situation will occur in which the player will not be able to perform the operation in time, so it can be said that it is effective in suppressing a decline in interest in the game to perform the post-operation display or post-operation sound output with the "specific image TG" displayed even if the player does not perform the operation during the valid period. In this example, the pattern button 5014 on the side that is not given an operation opportunity is illuminated when the valid period begins, making it difficult to recognize whether the operation opportunity has been given to the pattern part 5012 or the pattern button 5014. In other words, in this case, since there is a high possibility that the operation will not be completed in time within the valid period, this is said to be effective in preventing a decrease in interest in the game when the operation is not completed in time.

The performance progression in the manner shown in FIG. 246 may be applied to either the case where a "specific image TG" is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 233, or the case where a "specific image TG" is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 234.

In the example shown in FIG. 246, the premonition effect (specific display TH) and the integrated model image IG are displayed on separate layers, and the premonition effect (specific display TH) is displayed with priority, thereby realizing the performance progression in the manner shown in FIG. 235. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the performance progression in the manner shown in FIG. 246 may be stored as a single piece of video data, and this may be realized by playing back the video data.

In the example shown in FIG. 246, the integrated model image IG is displayed in the form shown in FIG. 245(b) (integrated model image IGa). However, as described above, the integrated model image IG may be displayed in one of multiple forms (forms shown in FIG. 245(a) to (d)) based on the result of the jackpot determination (performance determination).

According to the example shown in FIG. 246, first, prior to the occurrence of the valid period, when the treasure chest that is part of the integrated model image IG is displayed, a first presentation is provided as to whether the treasure chest will be displayed in a "high expectation mode" or a "low expectation mode". After the valid period has occurred, a second presentation is provided as to whether the "treasure" will be displayed in a "high expectation mode" or a "low expectation mode" while the treasure chest of the integrated model image IG is depicted gradually opening. In other words, in this case, the expectations are each suggested by the gradual presentation (first presentation, second presentation) that spans the occurrence of the valid period, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably increased in the period from before the occurrence of the valid period to after it has occurred.

In addition, because this type of gradual presentation is realized by the depiction of the integrated model image IG itself (the depiction covering the lid of the treasure chest), it causes less stress than when the visibility of the integrated model image IG is obstructed by other images (such as the specific display TH shown in FIG. 235), and it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game. However, in the example shown in FIG. 246, premonition presentation may also be performed in the same manner as in FIG. 237.In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 237, premonition presentation may also be performed in the same manner as in FIG. 246.

246 describes an example of the progress of the performance (first operation acceptance period) when the first performance condition is met and the model image of the operation target is displayed as an integrated model image integrated with the "peripheral decoration image (first decoration image)" including the display target area of the gauge image. In contrast, FIG. 247 and FIG. 248 describe an example of the progress of the performance (second operation acceptance period) when the second performance condition is met and the model image of the operation target is displayed as an "image not integrated with the peripheral decoration image (first decoration image) including the display target area of the gauge image". The example shown in FIG. 246 and the examples shown in FIG. 247 and FIG. 248 do not necessarily need to provide an operation opportunity to the same operation target, but if an operation opportunity is provided to the same operation target, it is desirable to display the model image of the operation target itself as the same image (including a similar shape).

Here, examples of the manner in which the imitation image of the operation target is displayed as "an image that is not integrated with the border decoration image that includes the display target area of the gauge image" include a manner in which the imitation image of the operation target is displayed as "an image that is not integrated with the border decoration image at all and is a standalone image," and a manner in which the imitation image of the operation target is displayed as "an image that is integrated with the border decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image." With this configuration, when the valid period occurs, there are cases in which the imitation image of the operation target is displayed as one image and a gauge image is displayed within that image, and cases in which the imitation image of the operation target is displayed as one image and a gauge image is not displayed within that image, so that the sense of tension during the valid period can be maintained in an appropriate manner.

The example described below shows a display example in which a model image of an operation target is displayed as "an image integrated with a border decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image."

First, FIG. 247(a) shows a presentation situation in which, in a normal game state, the number of reserved symbols is 0 and the display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is being performed by the presentation display device 1600 in a specific presentation pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination, and the presentation display device 1600 has started to display a premonition presentation (specific display TH3). This presentation pattern may be the same as the presentation patterns shown in FIG. 235 to FIG. 238 and FIG. 246, or it may be different. When it is the same presentation pattern, it may be made to occur at the first and second timings within one presentation pattern, or only one of the valid periods (operation acceptance presentations) may be made to occur at a predetermined timing within the presentation pattern based on the result of the presentation determination.

In this example, the situation shown in Figs. 247(a) and (b) is basically the same as the situation shown in Figs. 246(a) and (b), and the description of the same configuration will be omitted. However, the "treasure (second decorative image)" partially visible in the situation shown in Fig. 247(b) has different contents from the "treasure (first decorative image)" partially visible in the situation shown in Fig. 246(b). That is, as described above, the "image simulating the operation target" in this example is displayed as an "image integrated with the peripheral decorative image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image", but the "peripheral decorative image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image" has a part that is displayed as the same image as the above-mentioned "peripheral decorative image that includes the display target area of the gauge image" and a part that is displayed as a different image.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 247(c), the "treasure (second decorative image)" of the peripheral decorative image SSG in this example is similar to the "treasure (first decorative image)" shown in FIG. 246 in that it includes a "Holy Grail". However, the "treasure" of the peripheral decorative image SSG in this example does not display the "gold bar" and "necklace (display target area of the gauge image GG)" shown in FIG. 246, and instead displays an image of gold coins stuffed inside. The treasure chest shown in FIG. 247(c) is the same as the treasure chest shown in FIG. 246(c), and is also the same in that the treasure chest is displayed in one of the multiple forms shown in FIG. 245.

With this configuration, even if the specific display TH3 is no longer depicted as being in front of the "treasure (peripheral decoration image SSG)" (Figure 247 (c)), the gauge image GG will no longer be displayed within the "treasure (peripheral decoration image SSG)". In other words, in this case, while the "treasure (peripheral decoration image SSG)" is gradually made more visible by the specific display TH3, even if you try to find the gauge image GG, you will not be able to find it, so it is possible to maintain a good sense of tension about how much time is left.

In particular, in this example, the border decoration image SSG (treasure) does not display the "necklace" which is the display target area of the gauge image GG, but is displayed as if it contains the same image (such as a chalice) as when the "necklace" which is the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed (Figure 245 (c)). In other words, in this case, it is possible to make the player believe that the "necklace" which is the display target area of the gauge image GG is also displayed somewhere, and as a result, when the player searches for the "necklace" which is the display target area of the gauge image GG and realizes that it is not displayed anywhere, it will appear as if a certain amount of time has already passed since the valid period began, making it possible to maintain a sense of tension during the valid period.

In this example, as shown in Figs. 247(b) to (d), the integrated model image IG, in which the pattern model image TMG representing the operation target is integrated with the border decoration image SSG, does not have a display target area for the gauge image, nor is the display target area for the gauge image displayed as an image separate from the integrated model image IG. In other words, in this case, the gauge image is not displayed, making it difficult to know how much time is left in the valid period, which makes it possible to maintain a good sense of tension during the valid period. Note that the display target area for the gauge image does not necessarily have to be hidden; for example, the gauge image may be displayed as an image separate from the integrated model image IG, with the display area reduced over time.

Figure 247(d) shows an example of an image that appears on the performance display device 1600 when the set time for the valid period has elapsed and the valid period is about to end. As mentioned above, in this example, no gauge image is displayed. Therefore, as shown in Figure 247(d), there is no indication that the valid period is about to end, and the player cannot recognize that this is the case even if he or she sees the image.

However, even during the valid period in this example, the pattern image TMG being operated displays (dynamic display) a picture of the pattern 5012 reciprocating within its movable range (reciprocating from the original position to a specific position). In this regard, since the valid period in this example is set to end when the reciprocating motion has been repeated N times (N does not have to be an integer) since the period began, it is possible to know how much time (reciprocating motions) is left in the valid period by continuing to gaze at the dynamic display of the pattern image TMG.

Note that even during the valid period in this example, as shown in Figs. 247(c) and (d), the button model image BMG does not display (dynamic display) a picture of the pattern button 5014 reciprocating within its movable range. In this regard, during the valid period in which the display target area of the gauge image is not displayed, even if the operation receiving part (here, the pattern button 5014) corresponding to the model image on the side where such dynamic display is not performed is operated, a post-operation display or post-operation sound may be output in response to the operation reception.

That is, in the valid period according to this example, since the gauge image is not displayed and it is difficult to recognize the remaining time, it is assumed that the player will operate in a hurry, and as a result, the possibility of operating the operation receiving part on the side that is not dynamically displayed is high. Therefore, even if the operation receiving part on the side that is not dynamically displayed is operated, it is desirable to perform a post-operation display and a post-operation sound output, unlike the case shown in FIG. 246, in order to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Examples of the post-operation display and post-operation sound output in this case include a display and a sound output such as "Push the handle part, not the handle button!". Therefore, even if the operation receiving part on the side that is not dynamically displayed is operated and a post-operation display and a post-operation sound output corresponding to this are performed, it is desirable not to end the valid period or reset the set time, but to continue the dynamic display of the handle model image TMG. When the handle part 5012 is operated during the valid period thus continued, a post-operation display and a post-operation sound output corresponding to this are performed (see FIG. 248 (h)). In this case, the post-operation display and post-operation sound output are obviously different from the post-operation display and post-operation sound output that appear when the operation receiving part on the non-dynamically displayed side is operated (for example, "Push the handle part, not the handle button!"). However, in order to improve the interest in the game, it is desirable to execute the post-operation display and post-operation sound output (for example, "Congratulations!") that appear when the operation receiving part (handle part 5012) corresponding to the dynamically displayed pattern image TMG is operated without operating the operation receiving part (handle button 5014) corresponding to the non-dynamically displayed button image BMG during the valid period, as different from the post-operation display and post-operation sound output (for example, "Good thing you made it in time, congratulations!") that appear when the operation receiving part (handle part 5012) corresponding to the dynamically displayed pattern image TMG is further operated after the operation receiving part (handle button 5014) corresponding to the non-dynamically displayed button image BMG is operated during the valid period.

Figure 248 (e) shows an example of an image that appears on the performance display device 1600 when no operation is accepted within the time (set time) set for the validity period for this example.

In other words, in the valid period in this example, if the set time elapses without any operation being accepted (Fig. 247 (d) and (e)), the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when an operation is accepted on the handle portion 5012 during the valid period will not be executed (the automatic reception performance will function).

However, in this example, the gauge image GG is not displayed within the integrated model image IG, and the gauge image GG is not displayed as a separate image, so that the player may be concerned that the valid period may end without being able to operate despite his intention to do so, which may reduce his interest in the game. Therefore, in this example, after the valid period ends without the player performing an operation, an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (here, the handle portion 5012) as the operation means to which an operation opportunity was given during the valid period, while a specific condition (for example, the pattern has stopped, or it has not yet reached 10 seconds before the pattern stops) is not met, and when an operation is received for that operation means, the above-mentioned valid period can be generated again based on this. In this sense, when the valid period ends without the player performing an operation, a special valid period for regenerating the valid period is generated from the time of the end.

With this configuration, even if the valid period ends as a result of the passage of a predetermined set time without the player performing any operation, it is possible to generate an operation reception by the player to output the post-operation display and post-operation sound output shown in FIG. 248(h). More specifically, when the player performs an operation on the handle 5012 in the situation shown in FIG. 248(e) (special valid period), the valid period is started from the beginning based on the operation reception (FIG. 248(f) and (g)). After that, the above-mentioned contents are repeated with reference to FIG. 247(b)-(d), FIG. 248(e) and (g). Therefore, even if an operation is received during the valid period thus regenerated, the post-operation display and post-operation sound output based on the operation reception are executed in the above-mentioned manner (see FIG. 248(h)).

When an operation is accepted in the situation shown in FIG. 248(e) (special valid period), the images shown in FIG. 248(f) and (g) (the same as the images shown in FIG. 247(b) and (c)) will appear in sequence as post-operation displays. These images are different from the post-operation displays executed based on the operation being accepted in the valid period (e.g., FIG. 247(b)-(d) and FIG. 247(f) and (g)). Similarly, the post-operation sound output executed based on the operation being accepted in the situation shown in FIG. 248(e) (special valid period) is different from the post-operation sound output executed based on the operation being accepted in the valid period (e.g., FIG. 247(b)-(d) and FIG. 248(f) and (g)).

During the effective period (operation acceptance presentation) shown in Fig. 247 and Fig. 248, since the specific image TG is not displayed, it is not necessary to perform a premonition presentation (dynamic display by specific display TH3) to generate the effective period. For example, when a specific condition for allowing operation acceptance regarding a specific post-operation display (specific post-operation sound output) is satisfied (when a specific timing arrives), the situation shown in Fig. 247(c) may be made to appear, and thereafter the display may progress in the same manner as in the above-mentioned example.

In the example shown in Figs. 246 to 248, the pattern model image TMG and the button model image BMG are displayed as one image (composite model image HMG), but these model images may be displayed as separate images. In the example shown in Figs. 246 to 248, the "button model image BMG" and the "pattern model image TMG" are displayed as one image (composite model image HMG) that includes both of these model images, and the "composite model image HMG" is displayed as an "integrated model image IG" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates its periphery. However, the "button model image BMG" and the "pattern model image TMG" may be displayed as separate images, with at least one of these model images being displayed as an image integrated with the peripheral decoration image that decorates its periphery. For example, if the "pattern-model image TMG" is displayed as an integrated image integrated with the border decoration image, and the "button-model image BMG" is displayed as a separate image, the "pattern-model image TMG" can be made to stand out even though both the "pattern-model image TMG" and the "button-model image BMG" are displayed simultaneously, and it can be implied that the operation receiving portion (pattern portion 5012) corresponding to the "pattern-model image TMG" should be operated. In this case, other configurations and examples can be similarly applied, such as the fact that the "pattern-model image TMG" in the integrated model image IG is dynamically displayed, while the "button-model image BMG" displayed as a standalone image is not dynamically displayed.

In addition, during the validity period (operation reception presentation) shown in FIG. 246, both the button model image BMG and the pattern model image TMG are displayed, but it is also possible to display only the model image that provides the operation opportunity (here, the pattern model image TMG).

In addition, it is desirable to generate the effective period (operation reception performance) shown in FIG. 247 and FIG. 248 as a setting time longer than the effective period (operation reception performance) shown in FIG. 246. In this case, it is desirable to make the manner in which the model image (here, the pattern model image TMG) is dynamically displayed (such as the speed of reciprocating movement) within the effective period (operation reception performance) shown in FIG. 246 the same as the manner in which the model image (here, the pattern model image TMG) is dynamically displayed (such as the speed of reciprocating movement) within the effective period (operation reception performance) shown in FIG. 247 and FIG. 248. With this configuration, even if the gauge image GG is not displayed, the user is encouraged to operate with ample time by checking the "state of the dynamic display of the model image" based on the case in which the gauge image GG is displayed.

In the examples shown in Figures 246 to 248, the peripheral decoration image SSG may be an image of "treasure," and a treasure chest may not necessarily be displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 246, when the operation receiving portion corresponding to the non-dynamically displayed model image is the "first operation receiving portion," the operation receiving portion corresponding to the dynamically displayed model image may be the "first operation receiving portion" in the examples shown in FIG. 247 and FIG. 248. However, in this case, when the dynamically displayed operation receiving portion is the "second operation receiving portion" in the example shown in FIG. 246, it is preferable that the operation receiving portion corresponding to the non-dynamically displayed model image be the "third operation receiving portion" different from the "second operation receiving portion" in the examples shown in FIG. 247 and FIG. 248. With this configuration, it becomes possible to generate two types of operation reception effects in which the display relationship of the three operation targets (operation receiving portions) slides, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, the valid period (operation reception effect) shown in Figures 247 and 248 does not necessarily have to occur during the period during which the pattern change is being performed. For example, it may be a period that occurs using the RTC function regardless of whether the pattern change is occurring or not, or it may occur during a "period during which the pattern change is not being performed," such as during the execution of a jackpot game or the period before the start of a jackpot game.

In addition, during the valid period (operation reception presentation) shown in Figures 247 and 248, the decorative pattern SZ that had been displayed up until that point may be made invisible or difficult to see, as during the valid period in the examples shown in Figures 240 to 243, making it easier to notice that a special presentation state in which the gauge image is not displayed is in progress.

As the valid period during which the image shown in FIG. 246(c) is displayed, multiple valid periods each having different occurrence conditions may be prepared. In this case, the display progression shown in FIG. 246 does not have to occur during all of those valid periods, but it is sufficient that the display progression shown in FIG. 246 occurs during at least one of the valid periods.

A number of valid periods, each with different occurrence conditions, may be prepared as the valid period during which the image shown in FIG. 247(c) is displayed. In this case, the display progression shown in FIG. 247 and FIG. 248 does not have to occur during all of those valid periods, but it is sufficient that the display progression shown in FIG. 247 and FIG. 248 occurs during at least one of the valid periods.

In the validity period (operation reception presentation) shown in Figures 247 and 248, unlike the validity period shown in Figure 246, multiple forms (colors, etc.) of the mock image may not be displayed, and it may be displayed in only one form.

The effective period (operation acceptance effect) during which the gauge image is not displayed may occur only when an operation opportunity is given for either the handle portion 5012 or the handle button 5014, and the effective period (operation acceptance effect) during which the gauge image is displayed may occur whenever an operation opportunity is given for the other.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the valid period during which the integrated model image is displayed without reducing the display area of the gauge image GG (valid period shown in Figs. 239 to 241), the valid period during which the integrated model image is displayed without providing a display target area for the gauge image GG (valid period shown in Figs. 247 and 248), and the like can occur as one of multiple types of valid periods. In this regard, in these valid periods (Figs. 239 to 241, 247, and 248), in order to maintain a suitable sense of tension, when an operation by the player is not accepted, the same post-operation performance as when the operation is accepted is not performed (no automatic button function), and in the valid period during which the gauge image GG is displayed in a smaller size over time (Figs. 235 to 238, and 246), in order to maintain a suitable sense of tension, when an operation by the player is not accepted, the same post-operation performance as when the operation is accepted is performed (with automatic button function).

In this regard, when an operation is accepted for an operation means to which an operation opportunity is provided during a valid period in which an integrated model image is displayed without reducing the display area of the gauge image GG (valid period shown in Figs. 239 to 241) or during a valid period in which an integrated model image is displayed without providing a display target area for the gauge image GG in the first place (valid period shown in Figs. 247 and 248), it is desirable that the integrated model image is not hidden but is in a displayed state at the time when a change in response to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed. It is also desirable that the dynamic display of the integrated model image is continued. This makes it possible to create a sense of anxiety about whether the performance acceptance was properly carried out when the remaining time is not indicated by the gauge image, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be more appropriately maintained.

In this case, the display mode (e.g., color, transmittance, etc.) of the imitation image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after a change occurs in response to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by a post-operation performance, such as a display change or a lamp lighting up), and the imitation image may be made difficult to see by other images, as long as it is possible to recognize which operating means was the target of operation even in a state in which a change occurs in response to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by a post-operation performance, such as a display change or a lamp lighting up). In contrast, during the effective period (Figs. 235-238, 246) during which the gauge image GG is displayed to become smaller over time, if a change occurs in response to the operation received due to the player's operation (at least one of the changes caused by post-operation effects, such as a display change or lamp illumination), the integrated model image (both the model image and the gauge image) may be hidden when the change (display change, lamp illumination, etc.) occurs, or, as in the above case, the integrated model image may not be hidden, but may be displayed and a change in response to the operation received (display change, lamp illumination, etc.) may occur.

However, even during this effective period when "the display area of the specific image is not reduced over time," a dummy image that mimics the operating means to be operated should be displayed, and it is desirable to display this dummy image as a moving image that progresses at a specific speed. With this configuration, although the remaining time is not indicated by the gauge image, it is possible, though difficult, to grasp the remaining time during which operation acceptance is permitted based on how far the moving image of the dummy image has progressed, which is expected to maintain interest in the game in an optimal manner.

[Integrated mock image, performance before validity period, mock image disappearance performance]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the big win determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is capable of executing a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) as to which of a plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern is to be selectively displayed. Note that, depending on the result of this performance determination, all of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the above-mentioned selected variation pattern may be executed in sequence, or none of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) may be executed.

As described above, when such a performance judgment (performance pattern judgment, advance notice judgment, etc.) is made, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance content according to the result of the performance judgment, and a variable performance using decorative patterns according to the result of the jackpot judgment is executed together with an expected performance (advance notice performance) related to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movement of the moving body (gimmick performance). As a result, when the variable performance using decorative patterns is executed together with the expected performance related to the background depiction and the movement of the moving body, etc., and the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the player is allowed to play a jackpot game as a bonus.

In this configuration, the variable presentation of the decorative patterns serves as a presentation with the "function of indicating whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination," and the expectation presentation related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body serves as a presentation with the "function of suggesting the expectation of a jackpot being obtained, that is, the percentage (including 0% and 100%)." In other words, the player enjoys playing the game through these presentations.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if a specific variation pattern is selected from among the high expectation variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into an SP reach (such as a reach performance accompanied by a background change) as a result of the variation pattern determination, no matter which result is obtained as the performance determination (such as a preview determination), when the pattern performance based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach (when a specified condition is met), an acceptance permission state (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the variation pattern determination, when a special result is obtained in the performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (when a predetermined condition is met), an acceptance allowance state (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination, the acceptance allowance state (valid period) does not occur even if the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. Also, the acceptance allowance state (valid period) generated in the predetermined variation pattern is executed as a different performance from the acceptance allowance state (valid period) generated when the pattern performance based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach.

Note that, with regard to the fluctuation patterns that will generate an acceptance-permitted state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during the SP reach no matter which result is obtained as the preview performance judgment, other than the above-mentioned "specific fluctuation patterns" may be provided. However, it is preferable that the fluctuation patterns that will generate an acceptance-permitted state (valid period) at a predetermined timing no matter which result is obtained as the preview performance judgment are not included in the low expectation fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns), or that the selection rate for these patterns is low.

However, the acceptance permission state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions, etc., only executes a post-operation performance that generates a predetermined change in the performance component that is the target of the performance (at least one of a display change in the performance display device 1600, a performance sound change in the speaker, a light emission change by the lamp, and a performance action by the movable decorative body) as long as an operation is detected within the set time (valid period). Therefore, the acceptance permission state (valid period) itself has little performance value, and there is a concern that interest in playing the game will decrease until the post-operation performance is executed.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, first, when an acceptance permission state (valid period) in which an operation opportunity is granted occurs, a model image imitating the operation receiving part to which the operation opportunity is granted is displayed as an integrated model image (see FIG. 232) integrated with a peripheral decoration image decorating the periphery of the model image, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in playing until the post-operation performance is executed. It is desirable to display such an integrated model image in both the operation acceptance performance (valid period) that occurs when the pattern performance based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach and the operation acceptance performance (valid period) that occurs in the above-mentioned predetermined variation pattern, and it is also desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression acceptance performance and the high expectation suppression acceptance performance. In addition, it is desirable to replace the display mode of the illustrated model image in each of the above-mentioned performance examples (FIGS. 144 to 195, 207 to 231) with one of the integrated model images described below in order to improve interest in playing.

The "integrated model image" in this example is as described with reference to Figures 232 to 248, or as another example or modified example thereof, and for example, a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the border decoration image. Also, multiple modes (see Figure 232) with different degrees of expectation are prepared as the "integrated model image", and it is similarly configured to be displayed in one of these modes.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when an acceptance-permitted state occurs, an acceptance-permitted sound is output to indicate that an operation acceptance has been permitted, or to suggest that an operation acceptance will be permitted, thereby making it less likely that an operation will be forgotten. Here, the "acceptance-permitted sound" refers to a sound that, when the sound starts to be output, will necessarily cause an acceptance-permitted state (valid period) to occur while the sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned), or is in a state where an acceptance-permitted state (valid period) has already occurred.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described later, a plurality of reception allowance states including a first reception allowance state and a second reception allowance state are prepared as reception allowance states (valid periods). Here, the first reception allowance state is a valid period (a valid period generated based on the first condition being established in the performance judgment based on the result of the jackpot judgment) that can be generated when a specific fluctuation pattern is selected from the high expectation fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern), but cannot be generated in a predetermined fluctuation pattern from the low expectation fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) (or in any of the low expectation fluctuation patterns). Also, the second reception allowance state is a valid period (a valid period generated based on the second condition different from the first condition being established in the performance judgment based on the result of the jackpot judgment) that can be generated when a specific fluctuation pattern is selected from the high expectation fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) or when a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expectation fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) (or in at least one of those fluctuation patterns).

The "integrated imitation image" according to this embodiment can be displayed in either the first reception-permitting state or the second reception-permitting state. Here, it is assumed that the first reception-permitting state and the second reception-permitting state both occur as reception-permitting states in which an operation opportunity is given for the same operation means (operation button 410), and therefore the "integrated imitation image" displayed in the first reception-permitting state or the second reception-permitting state is an image simulating the same operation means (operation button 410).

However, among the multiple modes prepared as the "integrated model image", the special mode with a high expectation (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 232(d)) can only be displayed in the first reception allowance state out of the first reception allowance state and the second reception allowance state, and in the second reception allowance state, it can only be displayed in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 232(a)-(c)). In the first reception allowance state, a determination is made based on the result of the jackpot determination as to which of the multiple modes including the special mode (for example, FIG. 232(a)-(d)) the "integrated model image" will be displayed in, and the "integrated model image" is displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination. In the second reception allowance state, a determination is also made based on the result of the jackpot determination as to which of the multiple modes not including the special mode (for example, FIG. 232(a)-(c)) the "integrated model image" will be displayed in, and the "integrated model image" may be displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination.

In this configuration, in the first acceptance allowable state, two types of acceptance allowable sounds (first and second acceptance allowable sounds) are output, and in the second acceptance allowable state, one type of acceptance allowable sound (third acceptance allowable sound) is output. Here, the first and third acceptance allowable sounds are output as sound effects such as "beep!", and may be output as the same sound or different sounds. In contrast, the second acceptance allowable sound is output as a message sound such as "push!". However, the second acceptance sound does not necessarily have to be output as a message sound, and as long as it is a sound different from the first acceptance sound and is output for a different output time, the player can easily recognize that the state in which two types of acceptance allowable sounds (first and second acceptance allowable sounds) are being output is possible.

As mentioned above, in the first acceptance state, the "integrated model image" can be displayed in a mode different from the special mode (a mode with a relatively low expectation), but even in this case, two types of acceptance sound (first and second acceptance sound) are output. That is, in this case, if only one type of acceptance sound is output when the acceptance state occurs (the integrated model image is displayed), the special mode will not be displayed as the "integrated model image" but a mode different from the special mode, but when two types of acceptance sound are output, there are cases where the special mode is displayed as the "integrated model image" and cases where a mode different from the special mode is displayed.

With this configuration, it becomes possible to recognize the possibility that the "integrated model image" will be displayed in a special manner based on the manner in which the acceptance permission sound is output, thereby increasing interest in the game when an acceptance permission state occurs.

When the "integrated model image" is displayed in the first reception-permitting state or the second reception-permitting state, a pre-show (premonition) is executed before this, and the integrated model image is displayed (displayed in a state where it is difficult to see) in such a pre-show execution state that at least a part of it overlaps with the "image related to the pre-show". The integrated model image is then gradually reduced in size by gradually reducing the overlapping part with the "image related to the pre-show", or the transparency of the "image related to the pre-show" gradually increases, and finally becomes invisible, so that its form (entirely) is revealed (displayed in a state where it is easy to see) after the reception-permitting state occurs. Such pre-show (premonition) is, for example, the performance shown in Figures 235(b), (c) and 237(c)-(f), and may be executed in the same manner.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as will be described later, the second permissible sound does not start to be output at the timing when the first permissible sound is output, but starts to be output in a delayed manner. However, when the first permissible sound starts to be output in advance, not only is "the integrated model image itself not displayed, or even if it is displayed, its appearance is difficult to recognize," but even when the second permissible sound starts to be output in a delayed manner, at least a part of the integrated model image is displayed in a state in which an image related to the pre-effect (premonition effect) is overlapped in front of it, making it difficult to see. The acceptance permissible state (valid period) is set to occur when the pre-effect (premonition effect) starts to be executed or during its execution period, and is in a state where it has already occurred at least when the output of the second permissible sound starts, or occurs in conjunction with the start of its output.

With this configuration, at least when the situation is such that "the first permissible sound is being output and the second permissible sound is not being output," it is difficult to recognize whether the first acceptance permissible state in which two types of acceptance permissible sounds (the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound) are output will occur (or is occurring), or the second acceptance permissible state in which only one type of acceptance permissible sound (the first permissible sound) is output will occur (or is occurring). However, when a situation such as "the output of the second permissible sound begins after the output of the first permissible sound" occurs, it is possible to recognize that the first acceptance permissible state in which two types of acceptance permissible sounds (the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound) are output has occurred, and further, that there is a possibility that the integrated model image will be displayed in a special manner.

In other words, in this case, it is difficult to recognize in what form the integrated image is displayed (or if it is displayed at all),
A transition from a "state in which only the first tolerable sound of the first and second tolerable sounds is output" to a "state in which at least the second tolerable sound is output" (first reception permissible state),
- A case where "a state in which only the first allowable sound of the first and second allowable sounds is output" does not transition to "a state in which at least the second allowable sound is output" (second reception allowable state) can occur, and this type of "transition regarding the output of the reception allowable sound" can suggest "the possibility that the integrated model image will be displayed in a special manner". Therefore, while in the "state in which only the first allowable sound of the first and second allowable sounds is output", it is possible to make the player interested in whether the output of the second allowable sound will start before the image related to the pre-effect (premonition effect) is hidden, which makes it possible to increase the interest in the game. As a result, if the second allowable sound is output while the image related to the pre-effect (premonition effect) is displayed, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the integrated image with a special mode will be displayed (displayed), and it is possible to provide a performance in which the integrated model image is gradually revealed in such a sense of expectation.

As mentioned above, even at the time when the second permissible sound starts to be output, at least a part of the integrated imitation image is difficult to see due to the "image related to the pre-performance". Therefore, it goes without saying that while it is possible to recognize that the integrated imitation image may be displayed in a special manner, it is at least not easy to recognize in what manner the integrated imitation image is being displayed. Furthermore, at the time when the second permissible sound starts to be output, the first permissible sound may be maintained in an output state, or the first permissible sound may be terminated from an output state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when a third condition (third acceptance allowance state) different from either the first condition (first acceptance allowance state) or the second condition (second acceptance allowance state) is satisfied, the integrated model image is displayed without outputting any acceptance allowance sound (first acceptance allowance sound or second acceptance allowance sound), and when an operation is accepted on the operation means (here, the operation button 410) while the integrated model image is displayed, a display change or a post-operation output sound may be generated, as when an operation is accepted in the first acceptance allowance state or the second acceptance allowance state. In this case, the content of the display change or post-operation output sound may differ depending on the type of acceptance allowance state (first acceptance allowance state, second acceptance allowance state, third acceptance allowance state).

That is, by displaying the integrated model image without outputting any acceptance permission sound, it becomes difficult to know when the acceptance of operations became acceptable, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game related to the operations. Therefore, when adopting such a configuration, it is desirable to display the gauge image GG included in the integrated model image in one of the modes shown in Figures 239 to 243 after displaying the integrated model image. With such a configuration, a "gauge stop period" occurs during which the gauge image GG is not reduced, or the area of the gauge image GG does not reach the predetermined value (0) and the integrated model image is hidden while remaining this area. This makes it possible to preferably maintain the tension when the acceptance permission state occurs, and it is possible to more preferably improve the interest in the game related to the operations.

Or, when the integrated model image is displayed without outputting any reception permission sound, the gauge image may not be displayed within the integrated model image, and the display target area may not even be provided. Such a display method is as described above with reference to Figures 247 and 248, although the operation target is different. For example, "the display target area of the gauge image GG is not displayed, but the same image (peripheral decoration image) as when the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed is intentionally displayed, or the display target area of the gauge image is not displayed as an image separate from the integrated model image," and the technical idea can be applied in the same way. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain the tension regarding how much time is left, and it is possible to more preferably increase the interest in the game related to the operation.

Also, even in the acceptance acceptance state in this example, there are cases where operation acceptance is permitted while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in a non-suppressed mode, and cases where operation acceptance is permitted while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state. In this example, "outputting a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) in a suppressed mode" includes cases where a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is output at a volume of "0" (silent output). "Non-output state" includes, for example, a case where no allocation to a channel has even been made.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are a plurality of reception allowance states in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in a non-suppressed mode, and a plurality of reception allowance states in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state. The above-mentioned "first reception allowance state" and "third reception allowance state" are included as one of the reception allowance states in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state, and the above-mentioned "second reception allowance state" is included as one of the reception allowance states in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in a non-suppressed mode.

With this configuration, when the BGM playback sound (a specific type of sound effect) is suppressed or not output, the viewer can be aware of the possibility that the integrated model image will be displayed in a special manner, which makes it possible to avoid a situation that lacks dramatic effect and allows the viewer to enjoy the performance with greater concentration even when the BGM playback sound is suppressed or not output.

Note that "an acceptance-permitting state in which operation acceptance is permitted while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state" may be a state in which a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) that is being output in a non-suppressed mode is output in a suppressed mode or is put in a non-output state, and then an acceptance-permitting state is generated, or it may be a state in which a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is output in a non-suppressed mode and then an acceptance-permitting state is generated while the specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in a non-suppressed mode, and while the acceptance-permitting state is generated (or at the same time), the specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode or is put in a non-output state. In short, it is sufficient that operation acceptance can be performed while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state.

Also, even in the reception-permitted state in this example, if no operation is detected within the set time during which operation reception is permitted, the system may be executed in an automatic reception mode that causes the same display changes as when the operation is detected, or in a non-automatic reception mode that does not cause the same display changes as when the operation is detected.

Here, the reception permission state in which the “automatic reception mode” is executed among the reception permission states is as described above.
・It does not mean that the post-operation display or post-operation sound is output only when the device is set to a special performance state (automatic reception mode), regardless of whether or not the device is operated during the valid period.
- It means that regardless of the presentation state (presentation setting state), post-operation display and post-operation sound are output regardless of whether or not an operation is performed during the valid period. In the first place, it is not necessary to prepare a "special presentation state (automatic reception mode)" or "multiple presentation states" as the presentation state. In addition, when a reception allowance state in which the "non-automatic reception mode" is executed among the reception allowance states occurs when the reception allowance state is set to a special presentation state (automatic reception mode), either one may be adopted as to whether or not automatic reception is enabled (for example, it may be "automatic reception is not always enabled regardless of the presentation state" or "automatic reception is enabled only when the special presentation state (automatic reception mode) is set"), and it is not related to the configuration related to the technical features described here.

More specifically, when game settings are possible during the demo screen (period when the pattern change is not being performed), automatic reception is always enabled in the reception allowance state in which the "automatic reception mode" is executed, regardless of which of the settings is selected. And, when at least certain setting conditions are met among those settings, the reception allowance state in which the "automatic reception mode" is executed and the reception allowance state in which the "non-automatic reception mode" is executed can occur under different occurrence conditions. The game settings include settings for the special presentation state (automatic reception mode), as well as settings for volume, brightness, and the probability of presentation appearance, and the setting for the special presentation state (automatic reception mode) does not necessarily have to be installed. When a setting for the special presentation state (automatic reception mode) is installed, the special presentation state (automatic reception mode) is not set under "certain setting conditions".

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as will be described later, at least when certain set conditions are met, there are multiple reception permission states in which the "automatic reception mode" is executed, and multiple reception permission states in which the "non-automatic reception mode" is executed, and the above-mentioned "first reception permission state" is included as one of the reception permission states in which the "automatic reception mode" is executed, and the above-mentioned "second reception permission state" and "third reception permission state" are included as one of the reception permission states in which the "non-automatic reception mode" is executed.

According to this configuration, in the first reception permission state where there is a possibility that the integrated mochi image will be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232(d)) (if operation is forgotten, interest in playing the game may drop significantly), the "automatic reception mode" is executed. Therefore, even if operation is forgotten when the integrated mochi image is displayed in a special mode with high expectation (a mode in which the probability of stopping at a jackpot pattern is higher than other modes), it is possible to generate a post-operation performance (at least one of a display change in the performance display device 1600, a performance sound change in the speaker, a light emission change by the lamp, and a performance action by the movable decoration), and it is possible to suppress a drop in interest in playing the game. On the other hand, in the second reception permission state and the third reception permission state where there is no possibility that the integrated mochi image will be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232(d)) (if operation is forgotten, interest in playing the game may drop significantly), the "non-automatic reception mode" is executed, so it is possible to suppress a drop in interest in playing the game when operation is forgotten, while maintaining the sense of tension when operation acceptance is permitted.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at least a portion of the period during which the reception permissible sound is output overlaps with the reception permissible state, and if an operation is accepted while the reception permissible sound is in the output state, the output state of the reception permissible sound can be terminated midway (made inaudible) based on the acceptance of the operation.

This configuration makes it easy to recognize that the timing when the reception permission sound ends midway is the timing when an operation by the player has been detected (operation reception), reducing anxiety about whether "the operation has been received or not yet."

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 in this example, at least a portion of the period during which the reception allowable sound is output overlaps with the reception allowable state, but even if an operation is accepted when the reception allowable sound is in the output state, the output state of the reception allowable sound may be maintained without being terminated midway (to an inaudible state) based on the acceptance of the operation. As will be described later, there are multiple reception allowable states in which the reception allowable sound is terminated midway and multiple reception allowable states in which the reception allowable sound is not terminated midway, and the above-mentioned "first reception allowable state" is included as one of the reception allowable states in which the reception allowable sound is terminated midway, and the above-mentioned "second reception allowable state" is included as one of the reception allowable states in which the reception allowable sound is not terminated midway.

According to this configuration, in the first reception permission state in which there is a possibility that the integrated mochi image will be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232(d)) (if the player forgets to operate the machine, the player's interest in the machine may drop significantly), if an operation is accepted while the reception permission sound is being output, the operation is terminated midway. Therefore, when the integrated mochi image is displayed in a special mode with a high expectation (a mode in which the player is more likely to stop at a jackpot pattern than other modes), the player does not feel anxious about whether the operation has been accepted or not, and can concentrate on the post-operation performance such as the post-operation display, post-operation output sound, changes in the light emitted by the lamp, and the performance action of the movable decoration, thereby preventing a drop in interest in the machine. On the other hand, in the second reception permission state in which there is no possibility that the integrated mochi image will be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232(d)) (if the player forgets to operate the machine, the game interest may drop significantly), the operation is not terminated midway even if an operation is accepted while the reception permission sound is being output, so that the player can maintain a good sense of tension when operating the machine while preventing a drop in interest in the machine.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode or when operation acceptance is permitted in a non-output state, the integrated model image is sometimes displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232(d)) and sometimes displayed in a mode different from the special mode (see FIG. 232(a)-(c)).

More specifically, the acceptance acceptance state in which acceptance of operations is permitted when a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state includes at least the first acceptance acceptance state which occurs when the first condition is satisfied, as well as a fourth acceptance acceptance state which occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied. In the first acceptance acceptance state, there are times when the integrated model image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232(d)) and times when the integrated model image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (see FIG. 232(a) to (c)). However, in the fourth acceptance acceptance state, the integrated model image is never displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232(d)), but is only displayed in a mode different from the special mode (see FIG. 232(a) to (c)). In the first reception permissible state, if an operation is accepted while the reception permissible sound is in an output state, the output state of the reception permissible sound is terminated midway (made inaudible) based on the acceptance of the operation, whereas in the fourth reception permissible state, if an operation is accepted while the reception permissible sound is in an output state, the output state of the reception permissible sound is not terminated midway (made inaudible) based on the acceptance of the operation.

According to this configuration, when a reception permissible state occurs in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in a suppressed mode or is not being output, and the integrated model image is displayed in a special mode in the reception permissible state, the reception permissible sound is terminated midway based on the operation reception. In contrast, when a reception permissible state occurs in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in a suppressed mode or is not being output, and the integrated model image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode in the reception permissible state, the reception permissible sound may be terminated midway based on the operation reception, or the reception permissible sound may be maintained without being terminated midway.

In this case, when a specific type of sound effect (background music playback) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state, in an operation acceptance acceptance state in which operation acceptance is accepted, if the integrated model image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (a mode in which interest in playing is unlikely to decrease significantly if an operation is forgotten), even if an operation is accepted, the acceptance acceptance sound may end midway based on the operation acceptance, or the acceptance acceptance sound may be continued without being ended midway. Therefore, when the acceptance acceptance sound does not end midway, it becomes difficult to distinguish whether this is because an operation has not been accepted, or because an operation has been accepted but the fourth acceptance acceptance state has occurred, and it becomes possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension while suppressing a decrease in interest in playing.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the first reception allowable state occurs, a wide-area pre-performance using at least half of the specified display area (e.g., the performance display device 1600) is executed beforehand, and when the second reception allowable state occurs, a narrow-area pre-performance using less than half of the specified display area is executed beforehand. A mock image (here, an integrated mock image) that mimics the operation receiving section is displayed both during the period when the wide-area pre-performance is being executed and during the period when the first reception allowable state occurs, but is displayed in a different manner during the period when the wide-area pre-performance is being executed and during the period when the first reception allowable state occurs.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the integrated model image (model image) displayed during the period when the wide-area pre-performance is being executed and the integrated model image (model image) displayed during the period when the first reception allowance state is occurring are modeled after the same operation receiving section (operation button 410), but are displayed based on different image data, and as a result, not only are the color schemes different, but the outline shapes themselves are displayed as being different.

With this configuration, when performing a wide-area pre-show, it is possible to display the integrated mock-up image (mock image) in a more independent expression with a higher degree of freedom, without being bound by the form (image data) of the integrated mock-up image (mock image) displayed in the first reception-permitting state, which makes it possible to greatly improve the presentation when performing a pre-show over a wider area (wide-area pre-show). It is clear that this effect cannot be achieved by image processing such as fade-in based on a single image data.

In addition, in a state where wide-area pre-effects are executed, the probability that a performance mode that appears only when a jackpot has been obtained will appear as a post-operation effect is higher than in a state where narrow-area pre-effects are executed. This probability may be 0% or 100%.

In the pachinko machine 1 in this example, multiple reception allowance states are prepared as reception allowance states corresponding to wide-area pre-performance (wide-area pre-performance is executed), with the first reception allowance state and the third reception allowance state being prepared as one of these reception allowance states. Also, multiple reception allowance states are prepared as reception allowance states corresponding to narrow-area pre-performance (narrow-area pre-performance is executed), with the second reception allowance state and the fourth reception allowance state being prepared as one of these reception allowance states.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, in the first reception permission state, operation reception can be performed while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state, and in the second reception permission state, operation reception can be performed while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is in a non-suppressed mode. In other words, when a narrow-area pre-performance with relatively poor performance is performed, operation reception can be performed while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is not in a suppressed mode but in a non-suppressed mode (second reception permission state), so that a decrease in interest in the game due to the fact that a wide-area pre-performance with relatively excellent performance was not performed can be suppressed. In contrast, when a specific type of sound effect (background music playback) is being output in a suppressed mode or an operation can be accepted while the sound effect is not being output, a wide-area pre-effect that has relatively superior performance quality is performed (first acceptance-permitted state), and this can prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the failure to accept an operation while a specific type of sound effect (background music playback) is being output in a non-suppressed mode.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at least when in a specific setting condition (one performance state), in the first reception allowance state, when an operation is not detected within the set time in which operation reception is allowed, the machine is executed in an automatic reception mode that causes the same display change as when the operation is detected, and in the second reception allowance state, when an operation is not detected within the set time in which operation reception is allowed, the machine is executed in a non-automatic reception mode that does not cause the same display change as when the operation is detected. In other words, in the first reception allowance state in which a wide-area pre-performance is performed, there is a concern that a decrease in interest in the game will occur when an operation is forgotten due to its high performance, but since the machine is executed in the automatic reception mode, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when an operation is forgotten. In contrast, in the second acceptance state where a narrow-area pre-show is performed, the fact that operation acceptance is permitted is indicated in a relatively unnoticeable manner. In this case, only those who pay close attention to the show and realize that operation acceptance is permitted can enjoy the post-operation effects such as the post-operation display and post-operation output sound, so the sense of tension can be maintained in an optimal manner.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the acceptance acceptance state in which the operation acceptance is accepted while the specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state includes at least the first acceptance acceptance state that occurs when the first condition is satisfied and the fourth acceptance acceptance state that occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied. In this regard, in the fourth acceptance acceptance state, the operation acceptance is allowed while the specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in the fourth suppressed mode, but in the first acceptance acceptance state, the operation acceptance is allowed while the specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in the first suppressed mode, which is more suppressed than the fourth suppressed mode, or is in a non-output state. In addition, when the fourth acceptance acceptance state occurs, a narrow-area pre-performance using less than half of the specified display area is started prior to this. That is, when a narrow-area pre-effect with relatively poor performance is performed, even if a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is in a suppression mode, the degree of suppression is low (fourth reception-permitted state), so that a decrease in interest in the game due to a wide-area pre-effect with relatively superior performance is not performed can be suppressed. On the other hand, when a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is output in a first suppression mode with a higher degree of suppression than the fourth suppression mode, or an operation can be accepted while in a non-output state (first reception-permitted state), a wide-area pre-effect with relatively superior performance is performed, so that a decrease in interest in the game due to a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) not being suppressed to a low degree can be suppressed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the first reception-permitting state occurs and a player performs an operation while the model image (integrated model image) is displayed, a post-operation performance (at least one of a display change in the performance display device 1600, a performance sound change in the speaker, a light emission change by the lamp, and a performance action by the movable ornament) corresponding to the operation reception is started to be executed, and a wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance performance) using at least half of a specified display area (e.g., the performance display device 1600, etc.) is executed when the model image (integrated model image) is made invisible. When the second acceptance permission state occurs and the player accepts an operation while the model image (integrated model image) is displayed, a post-operation performance (at least one of a display change on the performance display device 1600, a performance sound change on the speaker, a change in light emitted by the lamp, and a performance action by the movable decorative body) corresponding to the operation acceptance is started, and a narrow-area disappearance effect (narrow-area disappearance performance) is executed that uses less than half of a specified display area (e.g., the performance display device 1600) when the model image (integrated model image) is made invisible.

Here, the term "disappearance effect" (wide-area disappearance effect, narrow-area disappearance effect) refers to an "image other than the Mosaic image" or a "display effect for the Mosaic image" that is displayed in such a way that a part or the whole of the Mosaic image (integrated Mosaic image) in the displayed state is made difficult to see or cannot be seen. Such a disappearance effect (disappearance performance) may be, for example, an image displayed in a different layer before the layer in which the Mosaic image (integrated Mosaic image) is displayed, or the Mosaic image (integrated Mosaic image) and the image (disappearance effect) may be displayed as a single video prepared in advance, and the image (disappearance effect) may be displayed in the video to show a state in which a part or the whole of the Mosaic image (integrated Mosaic image) becomes difficult to see due to the image (disappearance effect), or it may be executed by changing the display mode of the Mosaic image (integrated Mosaic image) itself (display effect). However, in order to suggest the degree of expectation as a disappearance effect and to increase interest in the game, it goes without saying that it is more desirable to display a separate image when the model image (integrated model image) is hidden.

Furthermore, "when the Momo image (integrated Momo image) is made invisible, a disappearance effect is executed" may mean "as the Momo image (integrated Momo image) is made invisible, a disappearance effect is executed", or "as the Momo image (integrated Momo image) is made invisible (such as the transmittance of the Momo image (integrated Momo image) itself increasing) a disappearance effect is executed", or "after the Momo image (integrated Momo image) is made invisible, a disappearance effect is executed", and all of these aspects are included. Furthermore, the increase in the transmittance of the Momo image (integrated Momo image) itself as it is made invisible may be realized as "when the Momo image (integrated Momo image) is made invisible, a disappearance effect is executed".

With this configuration, when the post-operation performance in response to the operation received by the player starts to be executed and the imitation image is hidden, a wide-area disappearance effect may be executed while the post-operation performance is being executed, or a narrow-area disappearance effect may be executed, thereby improving the performance up until the time when the imitation image (integrated imitation image) disappears.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when such a disappearance effect (disappearance image) is executed, in the narrow-area disappearance effect (narrow-area disappearance image), the background image displayed before the narrow-area disappearance effect (narrow-area disappearance image) is displayed is displayed (maintained) without change until the narrow-area disappearance effect (narrow-area disappearance image) is hidden or while the post-operation performance (post-operation display or post-operation output sound) is being executed. In contrast, in the wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance image), the background image displayed before the wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance image) is displayed is changed to a different background image based on the operation acceptance by the player until the wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance image) is hidden or while the post-operation performance (post-operation display or post-operation output sound) is being executed.

That is, when the wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance image) is executed, not only the mosaic image (integrated mosaic image) but also at least a part of the background image is made difficult to see by the wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance image). Therefore, by changing (replacing) the background image with a different background image at the timing when such a wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance image) is executed, a smooth transition of the presentation (transition to a new presentation situation) using the button presentation can be realized. For example, the wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance image) may be an image displayed in a different layer that is located before the layer in which the mosaic image (integrated mosaic image) is displayed and the layer in which the background image is displayed, or the mosaic image (integrated mosaic image), the background image, and the image (disappearance effect) may be displayed as a single video prepared in advance, and a state in which a part or the whole of the mosaic image (integrated mosaic image) and a part or the whole of the background image become difficult to see by the image (disappearance effect) may be expressed in the video.

In contrast, when a narrow-area disappearance effect (narrow-area disappearance image) is executed, the background image does not change while the narrow-area disappearance effect (narrow-area disappearance image) is hidden or while the post-operation performance (post-operation display or post-operation output sound) is being executed, so a performance transition (transition to a new performance situation) is not realized. Therefore, the player becomes interested in the post-operation performance, as well as whether the wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance image) or the narrow-area disappearance effect (narrow-area disappearance image) is displayed, and the game interest related to the model image can be appropriately maintained from the time the model image (integrated model image) is displayed until it is hidden.

In addition, when a wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance image) is displayed, the probability of a jackpot appearance mode that only appears when a jackpot has been obtained is higher as a post-operation performance than when a narrow-area disappearance effect (narrow-area disappearance image) is displayed. This probability may be 0% or 100%.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, multiple acceptance allowance states are prepared as acceptance allowance states corresponding to wide-area disappearance effects (wide-area disappearance image) (where a wide-area disappearance effect is executed), with the first acceptance allowance state and the third acceptance allowance state being prepared as one of these acceptance allowance states. Also, multiple acceptance allowance states are prepared as acceptance allowance states corresponding to narrow-area disappearance effects (narrow-area disappearance image) (where a narrow-area disappearance effect is executed), with the second acceptance allowance state and the fourth acceptance allowance state being prepared as one of these acceptance allowance states.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, in the first reception-permitting state, the player's operation can be accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state, and in the second reception-permitting state, the player's operation can be accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is in a non-suppressed mode, as described above. In other words, when a narrow-area type disappearance effect with relatively poor performance is performed, the player's operation can be accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is not in a suppressed mode but in a non-suppressed mode (second reception-permitting state), so that a decrease in interest in the game due to the fact that a wide-area type disappearance effect with relatively excellent performance was not performed can be suppressed. In contrast, when a player's operation can be accepted while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state, a wide-area vanishing effect, which has a relatively superior dramatic effect, is performed (first acceptance-permitted state), so that a decrease in interest in the game due to a player's operation not being accepted while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in a non-suppressed mode can be suppressed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at least when it is in a specific setting condition (one performance state), in the first reception-permitting state, when an operation by the player is not detected within a set time in which the reception of the operation by the player is permitted, it is executed in an automatic reception mode that causes the same display change as when the operation is detected, and in the second reception-permitting state, when an operation by the player is not detected within a set time in which the reception of the operation by the player is permitted, it is executed in a non-automatic reception mode that does not cause the same display change as when the operation is detected, as described above. That is, in the first reception-permitting state in which the wide-area type disappearance effect is performed, there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease when an operation is forgotten due to its high performance, but since it is executed in the above-mentioned automatic reception mode, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game when an operation is forgotten. That is, in this case, even if the automatic reception works without the operation being received by the player, the wide-area type disappearance effect will be executed in the same mode as when the operation is received by the player. In contrast, in the second reception allowing state in which the narrow-range disappearance effect is performed, the above-mentioned non-automatic reception mode is executed, so that if the set time elapses without the player performing any operation (the second reception allowing state ends), the imitation image is hidden without performing any post-operation performance (at least one of the display change in the performance display device 1600, the performance sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the performance action by the movable ornament). In this regard, in the second reception allowing state, the narrow-range disappearance effect is executed even when the imitation image is hidden without performing the post-operation performance, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game when the post-operation performance is not performed as a result of forgetting to perform an operation. In this case, the narrow-range disappearance effect may be executed in the same mode (same image) as when the operation is accepted and the post-operation performance is performed. However, as will be described later, in the second reception allowing state according to this example, the narrow-range disappearance effect that appears when the operation is accepted and the post-operation performance is performed and the narrow-range disappearance effect that appears when the operation is not accepted and the post-operation performance is not performed are different modes (images) from each other.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the acceptance acceptance state in which the acceptance of the operation by the player is accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state includes at least the first acceptance acceptance state that occurs when the first condition is satisfied and the fourth acceptance acceptance state that occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied. In the fourth acceptance acceptance state, the acceptance of the operation by the player is accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in the fourth suppressed mode, but in the first acceptance acceptance state, the acceptance of the operation by the player is accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is output in the first suppressed mode, which is more suppressed than the fourth suppressed mode, or in a non-output state. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the acceptance of the operation by the player is accepted in the fourth acceptance acceptance state, a narrow-area type disappearance effect is executed instead of a wide-area type disappearance effect. That is, when a narrow-range extinction effect with relatively poor performance is performed, the specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is suppressed beforehand, but the degree of suppression is low (fourth reception-permitting state), so that a decrease in interest in the game due to the fact that a wide-range extinction effect with relatively superior performance was not performed can be suppressed. On the other hand, when a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) is output in the first suppression mode with a higher degree of suppression than the fourth suppression mode, or an operation can be accepted while in a non-output state (first reception-permitting state), a wide-range extinction effect with relatively superior performance is performed, so that a decrease in interest in the game due to the fact that the degree of suppression of the specific type of performance sound (BGM playback) was not low can be suppressed.

Figure 249 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the second condition is satisfied and the second reception permissible state occurs under the specific setting condition (presentation setting). Figure 251 is a diagram showing an example of presentation in a variation pattern in which the second reception permissible state occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved time consumed) in the normal game state (non-variable/non-time-saving), and the "second variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the second variation pattern. After this, the decorative pattern SZ variation performance (performance depiction according to the second variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the second variation pattern, etc.) is started (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 251(a)"), and during the execution period of the variation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "second variation pattern" itself.

As described above, when a special result is obtained in the performance judgment (such as a notice judgment) corresponding to the second variation pattern (when the second condition is met), the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates the second reception permission state (valid period) in which operation reception regarding the second post-operation performance is permitted when the timing tB3 arrives at which the second predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ, as shown in FIG. 249(b) (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 251(d)"). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the second reception permission state (valid period) is
"BGM playback sound (specific type of sound effect)" according to the second fluctuation pattern, for example, "non-suppression reception permission state (see FIG. 249 (a) and (b))" in which operation reception is permitted while the BGM playback sound during normal fluctuation is maintained in an output state in a non-suppression mode, and "non-automatic reception mode (see FIG. 249 (h))" in which a post-operation performance (second post-operation performance) corresponding to the second reception permission state is not generated if no operation is detected within the set time (timing tB3 to tB4) in which operation reception is permitted.
This is done as a "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect" executed by the above.

With this configuration, the set time (valid period) during which operation acceptance is permitted is suddenly set without any dramatic effect such as the "BGM playback sound" being switched to a suppressed mode to suggest the occurrence of an acceptance-permitted state (non-suppressed acceptance effect), which takes the player by surprise and makes it easier for delays to occur when starting to move when attempting to operate. Nevertheless, if no operation is detected within the set time (timing tB3 to tB4), the set time ends without the post-operation effect occurring (non-automatic acceptance mode), which makes it possible to maintain a good sense of tension by making the player aware of the risk of missing an opportunity for the post-operation effect (here, the second post-operation effect) to occur.

However, although such a "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect" has a lower rate (which may be 0% or 100%) of post-operation effects (here, the second post-operation effect) being performed in a manner that only appears at the time of a jackpot than the "suppressed, automatic reception effect" described below, there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease if the post-operation effect does not occur frequently against the player's will. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in Figs. 249(b), (e), and (i), when timing tB2 arrives, which is slightly before the set time (timings tB3 to tB4) at which operation reception is permitted, the "reception permission sound (here, the first permission sound)" is output (corresponding to the "situation shown in Fig. 251(c)"), and even if an operation is accepted at timing tB3a within the set time, the output state is maintained across this. This allows the player to recognize that operation acceptance is permitted at timing tB2, slightly before timing tB3 when the second acceptance acceptance state setting time (timing tB3-tB4) is set, and is expected to reduce the frequency of "the player noticing that acceptance of operation is permitted too late, and the player is unable to operate in time, resulting in the post-operation performance (here, the second post-operation performance) not occurring." However, the "acceptance acceptance sound (here, the first acceptance sound)" does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tB3-tB4) occurs; for example, it may be generated in time with the occurrence of timing tB3, the occurrence of the set time.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as the "acceptable sound", a first allowable sound that is output as a sound effect such as "Peek!", and a second allowable sound that is output as a message sound such as "Push!" are prepared. However, as shown in Figures 249(f) and (j), in the second acceptable state, the second allowable sound (message sound) is not output, and only the first allowable sound (sound effect) is output, so that the output restriction on such "acceptable sound" also makes it easier for delays to occur in the start of movement when the player tries to operate the machine.

Incidentally, in the second operation acceptance state, as a countermeasure against the set time being suddenly set or being executed in a non-automatic operation acceptance mode, some players may try not to miss the opportunity for the post-operation effect to occur by repeatedly tapping the operation means (here, operation button 410) from a state in which operation acceptance is not permitted. However, in this case, since the post-operation effect starts immediately after operation acceptance is permitted, it becomes difficult to know whether the effect that has started is "performed in response to operation acceptance (post-operation effect)" or "automatically generated as a mere advance notice effect unrelated to operation acceptance," and there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 249 (particularly FIG. 249(e)), in the second acceptance state, if an effect is accepted at timing tB3a when the "acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound)" is in an output state after the set time (validity period) has occurred, the set time itself is terminated, but the "acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound)" is not terminated midway, and its output state is maintained until it has finished being output as the first acceptable sound (timing tB3c (FIGS. 249(e) and (i)), which is the same as when no operation has been performed). This makes it possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which it becomes difficult to recognize whether the started effect is "one that is performed in response to operation acceptance (post-operation effect)" or "one that has automatically occurred as an effect unrelated to operation acceptance".

In addition, in the example of the performance shown in FIG. 249, when the performance is accepted within the set time of the second acceptance allowance state (timing tB3a in the figure), at least a post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) in the performance display device 1600 (first performance member) and a post-operation output sound (performance sound) by the speaker (second performance member) are generated as post-operation performances corresponding to the operation acceptance (see FIG. 249(d)). In the figure, the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (performance sound) by the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) is made invisible at a predetermined timing that arrives after timing tB4 regardless of when the performance is accepted within the set time (validity period), whereas the post-operation output sound (performance sound) may be made to maintain the output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the performance is accepted. However, regardless of the timing at which the operation is accepted, if timing tB4 has not yet elapsed, it is required that both the post-operation display effect (LCD display) and the post-operation output sound (sound effect) remain in their output state.

In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 249, when the timing tB2 arrives before the timing tB3 at which the set time of the second reception allowance state is set, the effect display device 1600 displays a model image of the operation means to be operated, and a gauge display indicating the remaining time until the set time has elapsed is also performed (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 251(c)"). This allows the player to recognize that the operation reception is permitted at timing tB2 slightly before timing tB3 at which the set time of the second reception allowance state (timing tB3 to tB4) is set, and it is expected that the frequent occurrence of "the player is late in noticing that the operation reception is permitted, and the operation by the player is not in time, and the post-operation performance (here, the second post-operation performance) does not occur and ends without occurring" is less likely to occur. In this example, the timing at which the model image is displayed is the same as the timing at which the reception allowance sound (first allowance sound) starts to be output, but this is not limited to this, and either one may start earlier. Alternatively, only one of the mock image and the acceptable sound (for example, only the mock image) may be started before timing tB3.

As described above, the mock image (an image modeled after the operation receiving part to which an operation opportunity is given) displayed when the second reception permissible state occurs is displayed as an integrated mock image IG integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the mock image. This "integrated mock image IG" is as described with reference to Figures 232 to 248, or as described as another example or modified example thereof, and for example, a display target area (section image KG) for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the peripheral decoration image. Also, multiple modes (see Figure 232) with different degrees of expectation are prepared as the "integrated mock image IG", and similarly, one of these modes is selectively displayed. However, in this second reception allowance state, among the multiple modes prepared as "integrated model images," a special mode with a high expectation (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 232(d)) is not included as a target for the lottery (selection), and only modes different from the special mode (for example, the normal mode shown in FIG. 232(a)) can be displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 251, the integrated model image IGa, which has the lowest expectation, is displayed as the integrated model image IG.

In the example shown in Figures 249(c) to (f), it is assumed that timing tB3a arrives while such an integrated model image is being displayed, and an operation is accepted. When an operation is accepted under such circumstances, in the pachinko machine 1 in this example, output related to the liquid crystal display and output related to the performance sound are started as post-operation performance (at least one of the following: a display change in the performance display device 1600, a performance sound change in the speaker, a light emission change by the lamp, and a performance action by the movable ornament) (corresponding to the "situation shown in Figure 251(f)").

However, as shown in Fig. 249(c), (d) and Fig. 251(f), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the post-operation performance starts, the integrated model image IG is not hidden, but is maintained in a displayed state. More specifically, even if an operation is accepted, at that time (timing tB3a), no change is caused to the integrated model image IG (specific layer) due to the operation acceptance, and until timing tB3b arrives, which is a short time (predetermined time) after that, the "display of the integrated model image IG" is continued in the same manner as when the operation acceptance is permitted, and the display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before. In the example shown in Fig. 251, a conversation announcement by the princess character (this may be your chance) is displayed as the post-operation performance (output on the liquid crystal display).

Then, when timing tB3b arrives, an image KSE (disappearance effect) is displayed to make all or part of the displayed integrated model image difficult to see or impossible to see (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 251(g)"). As described above, such an image KSE may be, for example, an image displayed in a separate layer prior to the layer in which the integrated model image IG is displayed, or an image in which the integrated model image IG and the image (disappearance effect) are displayed as a single video prepared in advance, and in which the video shows the integrated model image IG becoming difficult to see in part or in whole due to the image KSE (disappearance effect).

As shown in FIG. 249(c), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of presentation, the integrated model image IG is not hidden even when the image KSE (disappearance effect) starts to be displayed, but remains displayed. More specifically, even when the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tB3b), no change is caused to the integrated model image IG in the layer in which the integrated model image IG is displayed, and the display area of the gauge image GG continues to decrease in the same manner as before. However, because the disappearance effect is displayed in a layer in front of that, the model image and gauge image GG become difficult to see or cannot be seen at all.

That is, in this case, even though the disappearance effect image KSE (the same applies to the wide-area disappearance effect image HSE described below) is displayed on a specified layer with the aim of making the model image (integrated model image IG) difficult to view or impossible to view, the model image (integrated model image IG) itself displayed on a specific layer (behind the specified layer (lower priority side)) is maintained in the same state as when operation acceptance was permitted, and no change occurs. Also, the display of the gauge image GG, which continues to reduce its display area, continues across operation acceptance. As a result, even while the model image (integrated model image IG) is in the process of being difficult to view or impossible to view, it becomes possible to view (at least a part of) the state when operation acceptance was permitted, and it becomes possible to shorten the time for which the state shown in FIG. 251(f) should be maintained.

Then, during the period in which the image KSE of the disappearance effect is displayed (timings tB3b to tB3d), the display output (display on the layer) of the integrated model image IG is terminated (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 251(i)"). From this point on, the image KSE of the disappearance effect (here, a narrow-area disappearance effect using less than half of the specified display area) is displayed in a situation in which the integrated model image IG is not displayed on the layer either. The image KSE of such a disappearance effect is made invisible when a predetermined time has elapsed (timing tB3d) since its display began (timing tB3b) (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 251(j)"). In this regard, it is desirable to set the timing tB3d at which it is made invisible so that it arrives within the period in which the display change (here, the liquid crystal display) in the performance display device 1600 is being executed, particularly in the post-operation performance, regardless of the timing at which the operation is accepted. That is, as will be described later, the image KSE of the vanishing effect and the integrated model image IG are displayed on a layer in front of the image related to the display change in the performance display device 1600 (the conversation announcement by the princess character), and are displayed overlapping this. Therefore, as shown in Figures 251 (g) to (i), while the image KSE of the vanishing effect is displayed, the image related to the display change in the performance display device 1600 (the conversation announcement by the princess character) is made difficult to see. The same applies to the wide-area vanishing effect.

According to this configuration, when an operation is accepted, not only does the post-operation performance begin, but the state in which the integrated model image IG was displayed at the time the operation was accepted (which of Figures 232(a) to (d) was it, and how much time is remaining as indicated by the gauge image GG, etc.) is maintained in a state in which it is possible to grasp this (corresponding to the "situation shown in Figure 251(f)"). After this, the display of the disappearance effect image KSE, which makes the "image relating to the display change in the performance display device 1600" and the integrated model image IG difficult to see, begins (corresponding to the "situation shown in Figure 251(g)"). As described above, there are two types of disappearance effects: a narrow-area disappearance effect with low dramatic effect and a wide-area disappearance effect with low dramatic effect, and in this case, the narrow-area disappearance effect is executed. While this type of disappearance effect image KSE is displayed, the integrated model image IG becomes hidden (corresponding to the "situation shown in Figure 251 (i)"). After that, when the disappearance effect image KSE is hidden, the "image relating to the display change on the performance display device 1600 (conversation announcement by the princess character)" from the post-operation performance finally becomes visible in a clear state (corresponding to the "situation shown in Figure 251 (j)").

In this case, when an operation is accepted, first you can enjoy what state the integrated model image IG was in, then you can enjoy what state will appear as the disappearance effect, and after that you can enjoy what state will appear as the post-operation performance (here, one of multiple conversation preview modes with different expectations), so this variety of performances can increase your interest in the game when an operation is accepted.

In order to optimally obtain such an effect, it would be more desirable to change the timing at which the image (post-operation performance) related to the display change on the performance display device 1600 starts to be displayed not at timing tB3a, but at timing tB3b, or within the period during which the disappearance effect is being executed (timings tB3b to tB3d). However, even in this case, the post-operation performance using sound effects and lamps will start to be executed at timing tB3a, so the start timing of the post-operation performance itself will remain at timing tB3a.

In contrast to this, the examples shown in Figures 249 (g) to (j) assume that the set time has passed (the second reception permission state has ended) without any operation by the player being detected. As described above, the second reception permission state is executed in a non-automatic reception mode, so if the set time has passed without any operation by the player, the model image (here, the integrated model image IGa) will be hidden without any post-operation performance being performed.

However, as described above, as shown in FIG. 249(b) and (g), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the state in which operation reception is permitted (second reception permitted state) is ended, the model image (here, the integrated model image IGa) on the specific layer is not hidden, but maintains the display state that was displayed when the reception was permitted. More specifically, even if the operation reception is no longer permitted, at that time (timing tB4), no change is caused to the model image (here, the integrated model image IGa) due to the operation reception being prohibited, and the "display related to the model image" is continued in the same manner as when the operation reception is permitted until timing tB4a arrives, which is a short time (predetermined time) after that. Also, in this example, the gauge image GG has a small display area even when the state in which operation reception is permitted (second reception permitted state) is ended, and the display area is reduced so that the display area becomes "0" after timing tB4.

With this configuration, even if the valid period (second acceptance state) ends without any operation, it is possible to check in which state (among multiple states with different degrees of expectation) the model image was displayed. In addition, since the display area of the gauge image is set to "0" after the valid period ends, it is possible to encourage the player to think "that was close" when they were unable to accept the operation at the last minute, which is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In this example, the time from time tB4 when the valid period (second reception-permitted state) ends without any operation being accepted until the model image is made invisible (invisible) is set shorter than the time from time tB3a when an operation is accepted until the model image is made invisible (invisible).

As described above, in the second reception allowance state, if the set time has elapsed without the player's operation being detected, the post-operation performance is not executed. However, even in this case, as shown in FIG. 249(g), a narrow-area disappearance effect is executed when the model image (here, the integrated model image IGa) is made invisible, and the model image (here, the integrated model image IGa) is made invisible while the narrow-area disappearance effect is being executed. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, the narrow-area disappearance effect (FIG. 249(g)) when the post-operation performance is not executed is executed in a different manner (image) from the narrow-area disappearance effect (FIG. 249(c)) when the post-operation performance is executed.

According to such a configuration, even if the player is unable to understand whether the operation has been accepted (whether the player made it in time), the player can properly understand the situation by checking the state of the narrow-area disappearance effect, and thus the player is able to avoid a decline in interest in the game due to the player being unable to grasp whether the post-operation performance is being performed. In order to obtain such an effect, it is desirable that the state of the narrow-area disappearance effect (Fig. 249(c)) when the post-operation performance is performed does not appear when the post-operation performance is not performed (Fig. 249(g)). However, for example, if the narrow-area disappearance effect (Fig. 249(c)) when the post-operation performance is performed is a combination of two modes, "A (e.g., a change in the model image itself)" and "B (e.g., an image other than the model image)," the narrow-area disappearance effect (Fig. 249(g)) when the post-operation performance is not performed may be performed in "A." Even with this configuration, it is possible to know that no operation has been accepted when the "B" pattern does not appear in the narrow-area disappearance effect, and this avoids a decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to know whether a post-operation performance is being performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 249, when timing tB1 arrives before timing tB3 when the second reception allowable state occurs, a narrow-area pre-effect using less than half of the specified display area is started (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 251(b)"). Then, during the period when the image KTH related to such a narrow-area pre-effect is displayed, the display of a mock image (here, the integrated mock image IGa) that imitates the operation receiving part and the output of the first allowable sound are started (timing tB2, corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 251(c)"). At the time when the display of the mock image (here, the integrated mock image IGa) starts, a part or the whole of the mock image (integrated mock image IG) is difficult to see due to the image KTH related to the narrow-area pre-effect. That is, as time passes, the range in which the image related to the narrow-area pre-effect is displayed is reduced, and its transparency is increased, thereby providing a performance in which the visibility of the model image (integrated model image IG) is gradually increased (FIGS. 251(b)-(d)). In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, while the narrow-area pre-effect is being executed and the model image (here, the integrated model image IGa) is being displayed, the timing tB3 at which the second acceptance allowable state occurs arrives, and operation acceptance is permitted (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 251(d)"). That is, in this case, since operation acceptance is permitted at an intermediate stage in which the visibility of the mock image (integrated mock image IG) is being increased, it becomes possible to provide strategic presentations, such as whether to make the operation acceptance (post-operation presentation) take place without checking the appearance (expectation) of the mock image (integrated mock image IG) and hide it, or to make the operation acceptance (post-operation presentation) take place after checking the appearance (expectation) of the mock image (integrated mock image IG) and hide it.

The image KTH used in such a narrow-area pre-performance may be, for example, an image displayed in a separate layer before the layer in which the mock image (integrated mock image IG) is displayed, or may be an image in which the mock image (integrated mock image) and the image (narrow-area pre-performance) are displayed as a single video prepared in advance, and the video shows the visibility of the mock image (integrated mock image IG) gradually increasing.

In addition, in the narrow-area pre-performance, not only the image display on the performance display device 1600 but also the output of related performance sounds may be performed. However, considering that the second reception permissible state is executed in a non-automatic reception mode and is intended to maintain tension regarding operations, it can be said that it is desirable to execute the narrow-area pre-performance as an image display on the performance display device 1600 without outputting related performance sounds, in order to increase concentration on the performance.

In addition, multiple modes with different degrees of expectation may be prepared as the narrow-area pre-effect, and one of these modes may be selectively displayed based on the result of the effect judgment based on the result of the jackpot judgment. However, considering that the second reception-permitting state is executed in a non-automatic reception mode, and if an operation is forgotten, the post-operation effect will not be executed, it is desirable to prepare only one mode for the narrow-area pre-effect and have it displayed only in that one mode, in order to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when an operation is forgotten.

Figure 250 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the first condition is satisfied and the first reception permissible state occurs under the specific setting condition (presentation setting). Figure 252 is a diagram showing an example of presentation in a variation pattern in which the first reception permissible state occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved time consumed) in the normal game state (non-variable/non-time-saving), and the "first variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the first variation pattern. After this, the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ (performance depiction according to the first variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the first variation pattern, etc.) is started (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 252(a)"), and during the execution period of the variation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "first variation pattern" itself.

As described above, in the performance according to the "first variation pattern", regardless of the result of the performance judgment (preview judgment), when the timing tC4 (for example, the timing within the SP reach state) arrives at which the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the decorative pattern SZ variation performance as shown in FIG. 250(b), the above-mentioned first reception allowable state (valid period) in which operation reception for the first post-operation performance is permitted is generated (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 252(g)"). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first reception allowable state (valid period) is generated as follows:
In a "suppression acceptance permission state (see FIG. 250(a) and FIG. 250(b))" in which the "sound of BGM playback" according to the first variation pattern is output in a suppressed mode or is not output, and even if no operation is detected for the operation means that is the object of operation within a set time (timing tC4 to tC5) in which operation acceptance is permitted, when timing tC4f within the set time arrives, a post-operation performance is started in an "automatic acceptance mode (see FIG. 250(h))."
As will be described later, the suppression mode here is also called a "strong suppression mode."

According to this configuration, since operation reception is permitted while the "BGM playback sound" is being output in a suppressed mode or is not being output (suppressed reception effect), it becomes easier for the player to operate as soon as the set time (valid period) occurs. In addition, even if no operation is detected within the set time (timing tC4 to tC5), the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect) is automatically generated at the latest when timing tC4f within the set time arrives (automatic reception mode), so that the player can enjoy operating with a sense of security that he will not miss the highly anticipated post-operation effect. In other words, as described above, in such a "suppressed/automatic reception effect", the rate at which the post-operation effect is performed in a mode that only appears at the time of a jackpot (which may be 0% or 100%) is higher than in the above-mentioned "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect".

Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in the "suppressed/automatic reception effect", as in the above-mentioned "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect", as shown in Figs. 250(b), (e), and (i), the "reception permitted sound (here, the first permitted sound)" starts to be output when timing tC3 arrives, which is slightly before the set time (timings tC4 to tC5) at which the effect reception is permitted, and the output state is maintained across timing tC4 (corresponding to the "situation shown in Fig. 252(f)"). As a result, even if the player does not recognize that the "sound of BGM playback (specific type of effect sound)" is being output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state, the player can recognize that a state in which operation reception is permitted will soon occur at timing tC3, and it is expected that the frequent occurrence of "effect reception being performed by the activation of the automatic button function, not by the player's own operation, against the player's will" will be reduced. However, as mentioned above, the "acceptance sound" does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timings tC4 to tC5) occurs; for example, it may be generated to coincide with timing tC4, which is when the set time occurs.

In order to more effectively obtain the above-mentioned effect (suppressed reception performance), the timing tC2a at which the "BGM playback sound" transitions from "a state in which it is output in a non-suppressed mode" to "a state in which it is output in a suppressed mode or a state in which it is not output" will be different from that shown in the figure, but it is desirable to set it well before the "output start timing tC4 of the above-mentioned reception-permitted sound that occurs prior to the set time" so that there is a relationship such as "length of timing tC2a to tC3 > length of timing tC3 to tC4". For example, timing tC2a may arrive before the start of the wide-area pre-performance.

In addition, as shown in Fig. 250(f) and (j), in the "suppressed/automatic reception performance" according to this embodiment, unlike the above-mentioned "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception performance," not only the first permissible sound output as a sound effect such as "Peek!" but also the second permissible sound, which is a message sound such as "Push!", is output as the "reception permitted sound." Moreover, in this example, the output of the second permissible sound is delayed by a predetermined time from the timing tC3 at which the first permissible sound starts to be output, and starts at timing tC4a which arrives while the operation reception is already permitted (valid period).

That is, in this case, in the second acceptance permissible state (valid period) in which the integrated model image IG (model image) cannot be displayed in a specific highly expected manner (special manner), the first permissible sound begins to be output without delay from the occurrence of the set time (valid period), and the second permissible sound is not output. In contrast, in the first acceptance permissible state (valid period) in which the integrated model image IG (model image) can be displayed in a specific highly expected manner (special manner), the first permissible sound begins to be output without delay from the occurrence of the set time (valid period), and the second permissible sound begins to be output with a delay from the occurrence of the set time (valid period).

According to this configuration, the first allowable sound (sound effect) starts to be output when the state of the integrated model image IG (model image) is difficult or impossible to see due to the previous performance, and then, when the first acceptance allowable state (valid period) occurs, the state can be transitioned to one in which both the first allowable sound (sound effect) and the second allowable sound (message sound) are output, so that the possibility that the integrated model image IG (model image) will be displayed in a specific highly expected state (special state) can be suggested by whether or not the second allowable sound (message sound) is further output. In other words, if the second allowable sound (message sound) is further output while the first allowable sound (sound effect) is in an output state, it becomes possible to have a sense of expectation that the integrated model image IG (model image) with a specific highly expected state (special state) will be displayed, and in such an environment, a performance in which the integrated model image IG (model image) is gradually revealed (clarified) is provided. As will be described later, in this example, as shown in Figures 250 (c) and (f), the second permissible sound begins to be output while the "second wide-area pre-effect" of the wide-area pre-effects is being executed (while the image of the pre-effect is being displayed).

As will be described later, in the "suppression/automatic reception performance" according to this embodiment, there are two cases based on the result of the advance performance judgment: "the operation button 410 is selected as the operation object" and "the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation object." When the operation button 410 is selected as the operation object, a message sound such as "Press it!" is output as the second allowable sound (message sound), and when the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation object, a message sound such as "Sheathe your sword!" is output as the second allowable sound (message sound).

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 250(e), (f), (i), and (j), the "second permissible sound" is used as a sound that is output for a relatively short period of time, and the "first permissible sound" is used as a sound that is output for a relatively long period of time, but the length relationship of these permissible sounds may be reversed.

However, as shown in Fig. 250 (e), (f), (i), and (j), it is preferable that the output states of the "first allowable sound" and the "second allowable sound" are maintained for different times, and that the times at which the output states are terminated (the times at which they are made inaudible) are all made to arrive at different times prior to the timing tc4f at which the automatic button function is enabled. With this configuration, depending on which of the following situations the "acceptance allowable sound" is in, it is possible to estimate how much time is left until the timing tc4f at which the automatic button function is enabled arrives, and it is expected that it will be difficult for "the performance acceptance to be performed against the will of the player, not by the player's own operation, but by the activation of the automatic button function" to occur frequently.
- A first situation in which only the "first tolerable sound" of the "first tolerable sound" and the "second tolerable sound" maintains its output state - A second situation in which both the "first tolerable sound" and the "second tolerable sound" maintain their output state - A third situation in which the "first tolerable sound" maintains its output state, but the "second tolerable sound" has ceased its output state (made inaudible) - A fourth situation in which both the "first tolerable sound" and the "second tolerable sound" have ceased their output state (made inaudible)

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect" in the performance example shown in FIG. 249 and the "suppressed, automatic reception effect" in the performance example shown in FIG. 250 output the same effect sound (for example, "Piki-kin!") as the "first allowable sound". In other words, in this case, the message sound (second allowable sound) among the reception allowable sounds is output as an effect sound that is not output in the "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect", while the sound effect (first allowable sound) among the reception allowable sounds can be output as an effect sound that is also output in the "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect". This makes it easier to recognize that the reception of effects is allowed (first allowable sound) while maintaining the effect when the "sound of BGM playback (specific type of effect sound)" is suppressed (second allowable sound). However, different reception allowable sounds may be output as the first allowable sound for the "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect" in the example performance shown in FIG. 249 and the "suppressed, automatic reception effect" in the example performance shown in FIG. 250.

The length of time between any timings shown in the figures described above and the figures described below may be the minimum time in the control (processing) unit (e.g., one frame) or may be two or more frames. For example, if the acceptance permission sound (first acceptance sound) can be output even slightly ahead of the set time (valid period), the player will be able to recognize that the state in which acceptance of operations is permitted (or has been permitted) earlier by that amount of time, which is expected to prevent players from forgetting to perform operations during the period until the end of the set time or the period until the automatic button function is enabled.

In addition, in the example of the presentation shown in FIG. 250, unlike the example of the presentation shown in FIG. 249, when an operation is accepted while the reception-permitted sound (at least one of the first and second permissible sounds) is in an output state, the output state is terminated based on the fact that the operation has been accepted. That is, in this case, when the player performs an operation, the output of the reception-permitted sound (first and second permissible sounds) is interrupted at that point, so that the player can recognize that the state in which the operation acceptance is permitted (valid period) has ended. This makes it difficult to mistakenly recognize that an operation has been accepted even when no operation has been accepted, and it is possible to prevent the automatic acceptance function from being enabled against the player's intention. Note that, if an operation is performed and an operation is accepted at a timing prior to the timing tC4f at which the automatic button function is enabled within the set time (valid period), the state in which the operation acceptance is permitted ends at the time the operation is accepted, so it goes without saying that the automatic button function will not be enabled even if the timing tC4f arrives.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 250(e) and (f), the first allowable sound starts to be output immediately after the set time (valid period) occurs, and the second allowable sound starts to be output after the set time (valid period) occurs. With this configuration, the first allowable sound starts to be output no matter how early the player's operation is accepted, but depending on the timing of the operation acceptance (when the operation is accepted between timings tC3 and tC4a), the state in which the operation acceptance is allowed ends without the second allowable sound starting to be output, and the post-operation performance (here, the first post-operation performance) is executed. Note that if an operation is performed between timings tC3 and tC4, no operation is accepted, and the first allowable sound is not terminated as a result of this. Also, if the operation is accepted before timing tC4a arrives, the second allowable sound does not start to be output.

With this configuration, it is up to the player to choose whether to start the post-operation performance after confirming that the second permissible sound will be output (after confirming that the game is in the first acceptance permissible state), or to start the post-operation performance without confirming that the second permissible sound will be output (without recognizing whether the game is in the first acceptance permissible state or the second acceptance permissible state). This is expected to broaden the scope of play and increase interest in the game.

Moreover, in this example, as will be described later, as shown in Figures 250(c) and (f), during the period from timing tC3 to tC4a, the image (at least a part of it) relating to the pre-effect (here, the wide-area pre-effect) is not hidden, but is maintained in a displayed state. In other words, in this case, in a situation where the second permissible sound has not yet been output (timing tC3 to tC4a), the pre-effect also makes the appearance (expectation level) of the integrated model image (model image) invisible to the naked eye, making it possible to make the above-mentioned gameplay characteristic of "leaving it up to the player's choice" even more interesting.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 250(d), when an operation is accepted within the set time (valid period) (timing tC4b in the figure), at least a post-operation display (liquid crystal display) on the performance display device 1600 (first performance member) and a post-operation output sound (performance sound) by the speaker (second performance member) are generated as a post-operation performance corresponding to the operation acceptance (here, the first post-operation performance) (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 252(i)"). Here, unlike the example shown in FIG. 249, the post-operation display (liquid crystal display) is made invisible (invisible) at a specific timing (same timing) that arrives after timing tC5, regardless of when the operation is accepted within the set time (valid period), whereas the post-operation output sound (performance sound) is maintained in an output state for a predetermined time (fixed time) from the timing of the operation acceptance. In the example shown in FIG. 252, a background preview by the princess character is displayed as a post-operation performance (output on the liquid crystal display).

However, as shown in FIG. 250, regardless of the timing at which the operation is accepted within the set time (valid period), it is desirable to set the post-operation output sound (effect sound) to maintain its output state at the point in time tC6 at which the "BGM playback sound (specific type of effect sound)" goes from a suppressed state (non-output state) to being output in a non-suppressed manner.

In contrast, the output state of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is ended at timing tC6 when the "BGM playback sound" is output in a non-suppressed mode. That is, in this case, at timing tC6, the "BGM playback sound" is output in a non-suppressed mode, and the content of the display effect is switched, which is expected to significantly change the presentation and increase interest in the game. However, instead of this, the output state of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) may also be maintained when timing tC6 arrives. In addition, when returning to output in a non-suppressed mode, the "BGM playback sound" may be gradually returned by a technique such as fading in.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 250, when the timing tC3 arrives before the timing tC4 at which the set time of the first reception allowance state is set, the performance display device 1600 displays a model image of the operation means to be operated, and a gauge display indicating the remaining time until the set time has elapsed is also performed (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 252(f)"). This allows the player to recognize that the operation reception is permitted at timing tC3, which is slightly before timing tC4 at which the set time of the first reception allowance state (timings tC4 to tC5) is set, and it is expected that the frequent occurrence of "the player being late in noticing that the operation reception is permitted, and the operation by the player is not in time, and the post-operation performance (here, the first post-operation performance) does not occur and ends without occurring" is less likely to occur. In this example, the timing at which the model image is displayed is the same as the timing at which the reception allowance sound (first allowance sound) starts to be output, but this is not limited to this, and either one may start earlier. Alternatively, only one of the mock image and the acceptable sound (for example, only the mock image) may be started before timing tC4.

As described above, the mock image (an image modeled after the operation receiving part to which an operation opportunity is given) displayed when the first reception permissible state occurs is also displayed as an integrated mock image IG integrated with the border decoration image that decorates the border of the mock image. This "integrated mock image IG" is as described with reference to Figures 232 to 248, or as described as another example or modified example thereof, and for example, a display target area (partition area KG) for a gauge image GG (predetermined image) GG is provided within the border decoration image. Also, multiple modes (see Figure 232) with different degrees of expectation are prepared as the "integrated mock image IG," and similarly, one of these modes is selectively displayed. However, unlike the second reception permission state, in the first reception permission state, a special form with a high expectation among the multiple forms prepared as the "integrated model image IG" (for example, the form shown in FIG. 232(d) (integrated model image IGd)) is included as a subject for the lottery (selection) and can be displayed, as described above.

In the first reception permission state (Fig. 250) executed in the automatic reception mode, it is conceivable to dynamically display the remaining time display (gauge image GG) based on the time until the timing tc4f arrives, at which the automatic button function is enabled when there is no operation. In this regard, in the first reception permission state (Fig. 250) according to this embodiment, the remaining time display (gauge image GG) is dynamically displayed based on the time until the timing tC5 at which the set time has elapsed, rather than the time until the timing tc4f arrives. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the set time has elapsed decreases, and when the set time reaches "0", the gauge amount is also dynamically displayed to "0".

With this configuration, when the automatic button function is enabled and the post-operation performance begins, the gauge amount in the remaining time display (gauge image GG) is intentionally left, suggesting that there is a risk of "losing an operation opportunity" against the player's will, and thus encouraging the player to perform an operation at an early stage during the set time (validity period) from the next time onwards, regardless of the remaining gauge amount.

However, for the first reception permission state (Fig. 250) executed in the automatic reception mode, the same post-operation performance as when an operation is received does not necessarily have to be started within the set time, but may be started when or after the set time ends.

The integrated model image IG (model image) displayed in the example shown in FIG. 250 does not necessarily have to be the same as the integrated model image IG (model image) displayed in the example shown in FIG. 249. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 249, the operating means (operation receiving portion) that is the object of operation is depicted in a deformed manner, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 250, the operating means (operation receiving portion) that is the object of operation may be depicted realistically.

In the example shown in FIG. 249, the operation button 410 is used as the operation means (operation receiving portion) to be operated, and is displayed as an integrated model image IG (model image), whereas in the example shown in FIG. 250, the handle 5012 (sword ornament 5001) is used as the operation means (operation receiving portion) to be operated, and may be displayed as an integrated model image IG (model image) (see FIG. 245(a)-(d)). These "integrated model images IGe-IGh" are as described with reference to FIG. 245-FIG. 248, or as described as other examples or modified examples thereof, and for example, a display target area (section image KG) for the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the peripheral decoration image. In addition, multiple modes (see FIG. 232) with different expectation levels are prepared as the "integrated model image IG", and one of these modes is selectively displayed in the same manner.

As mentioned above, in the operation reception performance that occurs at timing tC4 in FIG. 250, there are two cases: "the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target" and "the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target" based on the result of the advance notice performance judgment. In other words, in this case, since there is a possibility of confusion as to which operation means is the operation target after the set time (valid period) during which the performance reception is allowed occurs, it is desirable to set the set time to a relatively long time such as 5 seconds. In contrast, in the operation reception performance that occurs at timing tB3 in FIG. 249, there is no "case of selecting the sword decoration 5001 as the operation target", and since the operation button 410 is always used as the operation target, it is desirable to set the set time to a relatively short time such as 3 seconds. In this case, it is desirable to set the timing tC4f at which the automatic button function is enabled after the timing 3 seconds have elapsed since the set time (valid period) occurs in order to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player loses the operation opportunity against his will.

In addition, in the operation acceptance presentation that occurs at timing tC4 in FIG. 250, if an operating means that is not the operation target is operated, it is desirable that the presentation be accepted and a post-operation presentation be executed even if the operating means that is the operation target is operated while maintaining the erroneous operation state. In other words, if a situation arises in which the presentation is not accepted despite the operation of the operating means, the player may become confused, and in such a situation it would be cruel to interrupt the erroneous operation state and then request further operation of the correct operating means, so it is desirable that the presentation be accepted when the operating means that is the operation target is operated, even if the erroneous operation state is maintained.

As mentioned above, in a suppressed operation acceptance performance, a specific type of performance sound is output in a suppressed mode or is not output before an operation opportunity is given, so there is a concern that the performance will be less dramatic than a non-suppressed operation acceptance performance. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) output when a suppressed operation acceptance performance occurs can be output as a sound that maintains an output state for a longer period of time than the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) output when a non-suppressed operation acceptance performance occurs.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, multiple modes (e.g., multiple modes including a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode) in which the time for which the output state is maintained is different are prepared as the first permissible sound, and one of the multiple modes is selectively output as the first permissible sound based on the result of the advance notice performance judgment. Here, the "first mode" as the first permissible sound is the mode shown in FIG. 250(e), and is set as the mode in which the "time for which the output state is maintained" is the shortest among the multiple modes. Also, it is desirable to make the probability (expectation) of the appearance of a jackpot pattern when the pattern variation is stopped different depending on which of the multiple modes the first permissible sound is output in.

The "Which of the multiple modes to output as the first allowable sound" and "Which of the multiple operating means to use as the operation object" may be obtained as separate judgment results within the above-mentioned preview performance judgment, or may be obtained as a single judgment result within the above-mentioned preview performance judgment. However, it is desirable that at least the above-mentioned first mode among the multiple modes be selectable as the first allowable sound in both cases where the "operation button 410" is the operation object and where the "sword decoration 5001" is the operation object. In addition, the second and third modes may also be selectable in both cases where the "operation button 410" is the operation object and where the "sword decoration 5001" is the operation object, but it is desirable to prepare a mode that can be output only when the "sword decoration 5001" is the operation object. And, in any of these modes, when the first allowable sound is output, the output state is maintained for a length of time equal to or longer than the time value required for the mode shown in FIG. 249.

In the example shown in Figures 250 (c) to (f), it is assumed that timing tC4 arrives while the integrated model image IG (here, integrated image IGd) is being displayed, and an operation is accepted. When an operation is accepted under such circumstances, in the pachinko machine 1 in this example, an output related to the liquid crystal display and an output related to the performance sound are each started as post-operation performance (at least one of a display change in the performance display device 1600, a performance sound change in the speaker, a light emission change by the lamp, and a performance action by the movable ornament).

However, as described above and shown in Figs. 250(c) and (d), even in this example, when the post-operation performance starts, the integrated model image IG on the specific layer is not hidden, but maintains the display state from when it was in the operation acceptance state. More specifically, even if an operation is accepted, at that time (timing tC4b, which corresponds to the "situation shown in Fig. 252(i)"), no change is caused to the integrated model image IG due to the operation acceptance, and until timing tC4c arrives, which is a short time (a specified time) after that, the "display of the integrated model image IG" continues in the same manner as when the operation acceptance is accepted, and the display area of the gauge image GG also continues to decrease in the same manner as before.

Then, when timing tC4c arrives, an image HSE (disappearance effect) is displayed to make all or part of the displayed integrated model image IG difficult to see or impossible to see (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 252(j)"). As described above, such an image HSE may be, for example, an image displayed in a separate layer (predetermined layer) that is located before the specific layer in which the integrated model image IG is displayed, or an image in which the integrated model image and the image (disappearance effect) are displayed as a single video prepared in advance, and in which the video shows the integrated model image becoming difficult to see in part or in whole due to the image (disappearance effect).

As shown in FIG. 250(c), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of the performance, the integrated model image IG is displayed on a specific layer, and is not hidden even when the image HSE (disappearance effect) displayed on the specified layer starts to be displayed, but maintains the display state as it was when it was in the reception-permitted state. More specifically, even when the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tC4c), no change is caused to the integrated model image IG in the specific layer in which the integrated model image IG is displayed, and the display area of the gauge image GG continues to decrease in the same manner as before. However, by displaying the disappearance effect on a specified layer further forward, the model image and gauge image GG will gradually become difficult to see or will not be visible at all.

Then, during the period (timing tC4c to tC4g) during which the image HSE of the disappearance effect is displayed, the display output (display on the layer) of the integrated model image IG is terminated, and thereafter, the image HSE of the disappearance effect (here, a wide-area disappearance effect using more than half of the specified display area) is displayed under the circumstances where the integrated model image IG is not displayed on a specific layer. The image HSE of such a disappearance effect is made invisible when a predetermined time has elapsed (timing tC4g) since its display was started (timing tC4c). In this regard, it is desirable to set the timing tC4g at which the image is made invisible so that it arrives within the period during which the display change (here, the liquid crystal display) of the performance display device 1600 is being executed, particularly in the post-operation performance, regardless of the timing at which the operation is accepted. That is, as will be described later, the image HSE of the disappearance effect and the model image (integrated model image) are displayed on a specified layer in front of the image (post-operation performance) related to the display change in the performance display device 1600, and are displayed in a form that overlaps this. Therefore, while the disappearance effect image HSE is displayed (Fig. 252 (j) and (k)), the image (post-operation performance) related to the display change on the performance display device 1600 is made difficult to see.

With this configuration, when an operation is accepted, not only does the post-operation performance begin, but it also maintains a state in which it is possible to grasp in what form the integrated model image IG was displayed at the time the operation was accepted (which of Figures 232 (a) to (d) it was in, how much time is remaining as indicated by the gauge image GG, etc.). Then, of the post-operation performance, the display of the "image relating to the display change in the performance display device 1600 (background preview by the princess character)" and the disappearance effect image HSE begins in a manner that makes it difficult to see the integrated model image IG. As described above, there are two types of disappearance effects: a narrow-area disappearance effect with low dramatic effect and a wide-area disappearance effect with low dramatic effect, and here it is executed as the wide-area disappearance effect. While this type of disappearance effect image HSE is displayed, the integrated model image IG becomes hidden, and when the disappearance effect image HSE is subsequently made hidden, the "image relating to the display change on the performance display device 1600 (background preview by the princess character)" from the post-operation performance finally becomes visible in a clear state (corresponding to the "situation shown in Figure 252 (l)").

In this case, when an operation is accepted, first you can enjoy what the integrated model image IG looks like, then you can enjoy what appearance appears as the disappearance effect, and after that you can enjoy what appearance appears as the post-operation presentation, so this variety of presentations can increase your interest in the game when an operation is accepted.

In order to optimally obtain such an effect, it would be more desirable to change the timing at which the image (post-operation performance) related to the display change on the performance display device 1600 starts to be displayed not at timing tC4b, but at timing tC4c, or within the period during which the disappearance effect is being executed (timings tC4c to tC4g). However, even in this case, the post-operation performance using sound effects and lamps will start to be executed at timing tC4b, so the start timing of the post-operation performance itself will remain at timing tC4b.

In contrast to this, the examples shown in Figures 250(g) to (j) assume that the set time has passed (the first reception permission state has ended) without any operation by the player being detected. As described above, since the first reception permission state is executed in an automatic reception mode, even if the set time has passed without any operation by the player, the model image (here, the integrated model image IG) will be hidden while the post-operation performance is being performed.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 250(b) and (g), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, even when the automatic button function is enabled, the Mogu image (here, the integrated Mogu image) is not hidden, but maintains its display state, as in the case where an operation by the player is accepted. More specifically, even when the automatic button function is enabled, at that time (timing tC4f), no change is caused to the Mogu image (here, the integrated Mogu image) due to the automatic button function being enabled, and the "display related to the Mogu image" continues in the same manner as when the operation acceptance is permitted until timing tC4fa arrives, which is a short time (predetermined time) after that. Also, in this example, the gauge image GG has a small display area even when the operation acceptance is permitted (second acceptance permitting state) is terminated, and the display area is reduced to "0" after timing tC4f.

With this configuration, even if the post-operation performance is started by activating the automatic button function, it is possible to check in which state (among multiple states with different expectations) the mock image was displayed.

In addition, in this example, the time from time tC4c when the operation is accepted until the model image is hidden (not visible) is set to be the same as the time from time tC4f when the automatic button function is enabled until the model image is hidden (not visible).

In this example, even if the automatic button function is enabled (timing tC4f), as shown in FIG. 250(g), when the Mogu image (here, the integrated Mogu image IG) is hidden, a wide-area disappearance effect is executed, and the Mogu image (here, the integrated Mogu image) is hidden while the wide-area disappearance effect is being executed. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, the image in the wide-area disappearance effect (FIG. 250(c)) when the operation by the player is accepted and the image in the wide-area disappearance effect (FIG. 250(g)) when the automatic button function is enabled are executed in the same manner (both images are "image HSE"). This is different from the example shown in FIG. 249 (where the narrow-area disappearance effect when the Mogu image is hidden in the non-automatic acceptance mode is different from the narrow-area disappearance effect when the operation is performed).

With this configuration, even if the operation is not accepted at the last minute, the same behavior as when the operation is accepted on time will be displayed, which will encourage the player to think that "the operation was accepted on time and the post-operation performance has started," and is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In the example shown in FIG. 250, when timing tC1 arrives before timing tC3 when the first reception permissible state occurs, a wide-area pre-performance using more than half of the specified display area is started (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 252(b)"). Then, during the period when the wide-area pre-performance is being executed, the display of a mock image (here, the integrated mock image IG) that mimics the operation receiving part and the output of the first permissible sound are started (timing tC3, corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 252(f)"). At the time when the display of the mock image (here, the integrated mock image IG) starts, a part or the whole of the mock image (integrated mock image IG) is difficult to see due to the image related to the wide-area pre-performance. That is, as time passes, the range in which the image related to the wide-area pre-effect is displayed is reduced, and its transparency is increased, thereby providing a performance in which the visibility of the model image (integrated model image) is gradually increased (FIG. 252(f)-(h)). In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, while the wide-area pre-effect is being executed and the model image (here, the integrated model image IG) is being displayed, the timing tC4 at which the first reception allowable state occurs arrives, and operation reception is permitted. That is, in this case, since operation acceptance is permitted at an intermediate stage in which the visibility of the mock image (integrated mock image IG) is being increased, it becomes possible to provide strategic presentations, such as whether to make the mock image (integrated mock image IG) invisible by accepting the operation (post-operation presentation) without checking its appearance (expectation) as an image, or to make the mock image (integrated mock image IG) invisible by accepting the operation (post-operation presentation) after checking its appearance (expectation).

The image used in such a wide-area pre-show may be, for example, an image displayed in a separate layer before the layer in which the Mosaic Image (integrated Mosaic Image IG) is displayed, or the Mosaic Image (integrated Mosaic Image) and the image (wide-area pre-show) may be displayed as a single video prepared in advance, and the video may express the gradually increasing visibility of the Mosaic Image (integrated Mosaic Image).

In view of the fact that the wide-area pre-performance suggests the occurrence of the relatively highly anticipated first reception permissible state, it is desirable to have the performance display device 1600 not only display an image, but also output a related performance sound, unlike the second reception permissible state. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute the wide-area pre-performance so that part of the performance sound functions as the first permissible sound.

In addition, in order to increase interest in the game, it is desirable to provide multiple modes with different degrees of expectation as wide-area pre-shows, and selectively display one of these modes based on the results of a show judgement that is based on the results of a jackpot judgement.

Also, as shown in FIG. 250(c), the wide-area pre-performance in this example is started when timing tC1 in the "first variation pattern" arrives, is executed across timing tC4 when the first reception permissible state occurs, and is terminated within the set time of the first reception permissible state. However, between the start and end of such a wide-area pre-performance, the first wide-area pre-performance and the second wide-area pre-performance are executed sequentially as the wide-area pre-performance. These two wide-area pre-performances may be displayed as a single video data, or may be displayed as different video data.

Here, the first wide-area pre-performance begins to be displayed when timing tC1 arrives (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 252(b)"), and the second wide-area pre-performance begins to be displayed in place of the first wide-area pre-performance when timing tC2 arrives (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 252(e)"). However, regardless of which of these pre-performances is being displayed, "an imitation image of the operating means to be operated" is displayed during the period in which the pre-performance is being displayed.

In the example shown in Figure 250(c), a mock image (integrated mock image) is displayed when timing tC1a arrives during the period in which the first wide-area pre-performance is being executed, making it possible to recognize at a relatively early stage which of the multiple operating means the opportunity to operate will be given (corresponding to the "situation shown in Figure 252(c)"). Figure 252(c) depicts the image HTH1 from the first wide-area pre-performance producing "an image in which the entire mock image (here, the integrated mock image) is whitened," but this is merely a whitened state and is not at the stage where it can be said to be an image that mimics the performance button that is the target of operation. After this, "image A1, which is the entire imitation image (here, the integrated imitation image) in white," is displayed as "image A2, which uses at least one of decoration and pattern to form at least the outline of the imitation image (here, the integrated imitation image)" (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 252(d)"), suggesting that the object of operation is an effect button. From this, it can be said that such "image A2" is an imitation image that imitates the operating means that is the object of operation. In other words, this is executed as an effect that makes such image A2 look as if it was created by "image HTH1 by the first wide-area front effect." "The outline of the imitation image (here, the integrated imitation image)" means the outline of the operation receiving portion (here, the outline of the operation receiving portion and the outline of the peripheral decoration image).

However, when timing tC2 arrives, the "second wide-area pre-performance" is started by making the "image A2 as a mock image (integrated mock image)" and the "image HTH1 relating to the first wide-area pre-performance" that were in a displayed state until then either invisible or difficult to see (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 252(e)"). Then, when timing tC3 arrives within the period during which the second wide-area pre-performance is being executed, the mock image (integrated mock image IG) is displayed again (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 252(f)"), and in this displayed state, timing tC4 arrives at which the first reception-permitting state occurs (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 252(g)"). In other words, the second mock-up image (Fig. 252 (f)-(k)) continues to be displayed from the time when the operation is permitted to be accepted until it is no longer permitted, and the operation is accepted while the second mock-up image is being displayed, and the post-operation performance (here, the first post-operation performance) begins to be executed.

In this case, prior to the occurrence of the first acceptance state, the pre-effects are executed twice, and in these pre-effects, the "first mock image that is hidden before the acceptance of the operation is permitted (Fig. 252 (c) and (d))" and the "second mock image that continues to be displayed after the acceptance of the operation is permitted (Fig. 252 (f) to (k))" are displayed separately. With this configuration, it is possible to display the mock image (the mock image (first time) that is hidden before the acceptance of the operation is permitted) under a more flexible presentation design without considering the manner in which it should be displayed when the acceptance state occurs (such as the result of the presentation judgment), thereby widening the scope of the presentation. In this sense, it is desirable to display the "mock image (first time) that is hidden before the acceptance of the operation is permitted" in a manner that cannot be displayed during the period in which the acceptance of the operation is permitted (a manner different from any of the manners shown in Fig. 232).

Here, the mock image (second time) displayed while the second wide-area pre-performance is being performed continues to be displayed in the same manner as the mock image displayed while the narrow-area pre-performance described above, even after the state in which operation acceptance is permitted occurs, and is therefore displayed in one of the multiple modes shown in FIG. 232 (the special mode, integrated mock image IGd, is used in the example shown in FIG. 250). In contrast, it is desirable to display the mock image (first time) displayed while the first wide-area pre-performance is being performed as an image (here, image A2) having at least one of a shape or pattern (decoration) different from any of the modes shown in FIG. 232. For example, the shape can be such that the contour of the mock image is rounded, or that curves are used more than straight lines, and a method of displaying the image as an image that deforms the operating means (operation receiving part) that is the object of operation is used. Note that in the narrow-area pre-performance described above, an image having at least one of a shape or pattern (decoration) different from the state in which acceptance is permitted does not appear.

In addition, if the operation means to be operated is a specific operation means, it is desirable to make it possible to display the imitation image (first time) displayed during the first wide-area pre-performance in one mode (the same mode) even if the mock image (second time) displayed during the second wide-area pre-performance is displayed in any of the multiple modes shown in FIG. 232. In other words, in this case, the first wide-area pre-performance can be used exclusively to "indicate which type of operation means will soon be given an operation opportunity." Such a first wide-area pre-performance allows the player to recognize the operation object without reducing the player's interest in the game, and after the player recognizes the operation object, the game moves to the second wide-area pre-performance, which suggests the degree of expectation.

In order to obtain such an advantageous effect, it is more desirable to execute the first wide-area pre-effect only when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (sword decoration 5001) with the higher expectation among the multiple operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001). In other words, in this case, whether an acceptance permission state in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 occurs or an acceptance permission state in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001 occurs, the wide-area pre-effect is executable prior to this, but the first wide-area pre-effect is executable only when an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001 among the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001. In this case, the first acceptance permission state may be generated as an acceptance permission state in which an operation opportunity can be given only to the sword decoration 5001. In contrast, the second wide-area type front performance can be executed when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and when an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001. In this case, the second wide-area type front performance may be executed in the same manner when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and when an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001, or may be executed in different manners.

In addition, if the Momo image (second time) displayed while the second wide-area pre-performance is being performed is displayed as an integrated Momo image IG, the display target area of the gauge image GG will be formed within that peripheral decoration image, but even in this case, the Momo image (first time) displayed while the first wide-area pre-performance is being performed may be displayed as an image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image GG. In this case, it goes without saying that the shape of the Momo image (integrated Momo image) will be different. In addition, in this case, the Momo image may be displayed as an integrated Momo image integrated with the peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image GG, or it may be displayed as an image that is not integrated with the peripheral decoration image in the first place.

According to the above-mentioned example of the performance, in the second reception allowable state shown in FIG. 249, the model image (integrated model image IG) is not displayed in a special mode, and the first allowable sound is output as the reception allowable sound, but the second allowable sound is not output. In contrast, in the first reception allowable state shown in FIG. 250, the model image (integrated model image IG) can be displayed in a special mode, and the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound can each be output as the reception allowable sound. However, in the first reception allowable state shown in FIG. 250, even if a mode other than the special mode (the low expectation mode used in FIG. 249) is displayed as the model image (integrated model image IG), the reception allowable sound will be processed as described with reference to FIG. 250, and it goes without saying that the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound can each be output as the reception allowable sound.

When the second permissible sound (message sound) starts to be output, the image related to the wide-area pre-performance remains, making it difficult to visually recognize the appearance of the mock image (integrated mock image IG). In a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the appearance of the mock image (integrated mock image IG), a state in which only the first permissible sound (sound effect) is output may be transitioned to a state in which the second permissible sound (message sound) is also output, so that the reception permissible sound can suggest the possibility that the mock image (integrated mock image IG) will be displayed in a special manner. In other words, when the second permissible sound (message sound) is output, a sense of anticipation can be created for the mock image (integrated mock image IGd) with a special appearance to be revealed, and in this environment, the mock image (integrated mock image IG) will gradually be revealed.

The integrated model image IG includes the display target area (section image KG) of the gauge image GG, but whether the integrated model image IG is displayed in the low expectation mode (IGa) or the high expectation mode (IGd), the display target area of the gauge image GG (the target portion on which the gauge image GG is displayed, which increases as the display area of the gauge image GG decreases) is displayed as the same image. Therefore, it becomes easy to recognize how much time is left regardless of the mode of the model image.

As mentioned above with reference to FIG. 232, not only the model image but also the appearance of the peripheral decoration image are different between the low expectation mode (IGa) and the high expectation mode (IGd). Also, the operating means (such as the performance button) that is the target of the player's operation can emit light in the same manner as the model image, but the peripheral decoration member is not designed to emit light in the same manner as the peripheral decoration image SSG.

According to the above-mentioned example of the performance, in a predetermined game state, there are prepared a plurality of suppressed reception allowance states in which operation reception is allowed while a specific performance sound is suppressed, and a plurality of non-suppressed reception allowance states in which operation reception is allowed while a specific performance sound is not suppressed. In the first reception allowance state of the suppressed reception allowance state, the integrated model image IG can be displayed in a special mode, whereas in the second reception allowance state of the non-suppressed reception allowance state, the integrated model image IG is not displayed in the special mode (IGd) but can be displayed in a mode different from the special mode. In the second reception allowance state, the integrated model image IG may be displayed only in one mode (IGa) rather than being selectively displayed from a plurality of modes (IGa to IGc) with different expectancies excluding the special mode (IGd). According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the feeling that the performance is poor when a specific performance sound is suppressed compared to when the specific performance sound is not suppressed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when a third condition (third acceptance state) different from either the first condition (first acceptance state) or the second condition (second acceptance state) is satisfied, after displaying the integrated model image, the gauge image GG included in the integrated model image is displayed in one of the modes shown in Figs. 239 to 243 (for example, the modes shown in Figs. 242 and 243), as described above. However, when generating such a third acceptance state (a valid period during which the display area of the gauge image GG does not decrease), it is desirable to change the "sound of BGM playback (specific type of performance sound)" from a non-suppressed state to a suppressed state (or a non-output state) prior to this, as in the first acceptance state, so that a post-operation display (post-operation performance) or a post-operation output sound that does not appear in other acceptance states including the first acceptance state and the second acceptance state is executed. That is, if the "BGM playback sound" is suppressed (or not output) when the reception-permitting state occurs, it is expected that a highly anticipated mode (special mode) will be displayed as the integrated model image IG, but if the special mode is not displayed, the inferior presentation compared to when the "BGM playback sound" is not suppressed and output stands out, and there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease. In this regard, in the third reception-permitting state, a mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced can be made to appear, and a post-operation display that appears only when this mode appears is executed, so that a decrease in interest in the game can be suitably suppressed even if a special mode does not appear as the integrated model image IG.

However, whether in the first reception permission state or the third reception permission state, it is preferable that the "BGM playback sound (specific type of sound effect)" in the suppressed state (or non-output state) is not restarted in a non-suppressed mode in response to the reception of an operation, but rather that the display change or post-operation output sound be executed while maintaining the suppressed state (or non-output state).

In addition, even if the acceptance allowance state occurs after the "BGM playback sound (specific type of sound effects)" is suppressed (or not output), when the third acceptance allowance state occurs, it is desirable that, unlike the first acceptance allowance state, the integrated model image IG is not displayed in a special mode, but can only be displayed in one mode (for example, the normal mode IGa). With this configuration, it is possible to add interest in whether the first or third acceptance allowance state occurs when the "BGM playback sound (specific type of sound effects)" is suppressed (or not output).

In addition, the third reception permission state is executed as a valid period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, but instead, it may be executed as a valid period during which a mock image (which may or may not be an integrated mock image) is displayed in a form that does not include the display target area of the gauge image GG (the form shown in Figures 247 and 248). Even with such a configuration, it can be said that a similar effect can be achieved. It goes without saying that in this case, the gauge image GG itself will not be displayed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, multiple types of acceptance allowance states with different occurrence conditions are prepared, but even if an acceptance allowance state different from the first acceptance allowance state occurs, if this is a specific type of acceptance allowance state, it is desirable to make it possible for the integrated model image IG to be displayed in a special mode (IGd). However, it is desirable to have the acceptance allowance state in which the integrated model image IG can be displayed in a special mode (IGd) be executed in an automatic acceptance mode in order to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when an operation is forgotten.

In the presentation example shown in FIG. 250, the automatic button function is enabled at a specific timing within the set time (valid period), but the automatic button function may also be enabled when or after the set time (valid period) ends, to start executing "the same post-operation presentation as when an operation by a player is accepted within the valid period." In this case, the processing from the timing when the automatic button function is enabled is the same as the "processing from timing tC4f" shown in FIG. 250 (g) and (h).

For the images involved in the vanishing effect shown in Figures 251 and 252, a certain transparency may be set for the image itself, making it possible to see the image behind it, although with some difficulty.

According to the presentation examples shown in Figures 249 to 252, when the post-operation presentation starts after the player's operation is accepted or the automatic button function is enabled, both the appearance of the model image (integrated model image IG) and the appearance of the gauge image GG are displayed in a highly visible state without being made difficult to see by the disappearance effect (see Figures 251 (f) and 252 (i)). This allows the player to enjoy the post-operation presentation while knowing in which appearance the model image (integrated model image IG) is displayed and how much time is left, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 251, even if an operation is accepted in the second reception-permitting state and a post-operation performance (second post-operation performance) is executed, the background image is not switched before and after the post-operation performance starts, but is maintained. In contrast, in the example of the performance shown in FIG. 252, when an operation is accepted in the first reception-permitting state and a post-operation performance (first post-operation performance) is executed, the background image is switched before and after the post-operation performance starts (a space background after the operation).

This configuration makes it possible to effectively use the automatic reception function, and even if an operation is forgotten, the background image can be changed appropriately, allowing the performance to proceed smoothly. On the other hand, in the reception-permitted state in which the automatic reception function is not enabled, no changes are made to the background image, so it is possible to avoid the occurrence of inconvenient events such as the background image not being able to be changed when an operation is forgotten, or the background image suddenly changing alone.

In addition, in the second reception allowance state, after the operation reception (or the automatic button function is enabled), most of the display area becomes invisible because it overlaps with the image HSE for the wide-area disappearance effect. However, as described above, by changing the background image itself, if there is even a small part that does not overlap with the image HSE for the wide-area disappearance effect, the state after the operation can be recognized by checking the image in that part, and the disadvantage of the wide-area disappearance effect being executed can be eliminated. In order to obtain such an effect, when the operation reception (or the automatic button function is enabled) is performed in the second reception allowance state, it is more desirable to make the background image when the post-operation performance is executed different from the background image when the post-operation performance is executed in a state in which the rate at which the jackpot pattern appears is relatively high and the post-operation performance is executed in a state in which the rate at which the jackpot pattern appears is relatively low. These percentages may be 0% or 100%. In this case, the background image itself may be changed when the post-operation performance is executed in a state where the probability of the big win symbol appearing is relatively high, whereas the background image may be left unchanged when the post-operation performance is executed in a state where the probability of the big win symbol appearing is relatively low.

In the above-mentioned presentation example, when an operation opportunity is granted, a specific type of presentation sound is output in a non-suppressed mode (second reception-permitted state), or a specific type of presentation sound is output in a suppressed mode or is not output (first reception-permitted state), and the rate (expectation level) of a post-operation presentation being executed in a mode that only appears when a jackpot is won varies depending on the type, thereby improving the presentation when an operation opportunity is granted. This rate may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, in the first reception permissible state, when an operation opportunity is given, a specific type of effect sound is output in a suppressed manner or is not output, so that when a post-operation effect occurs, the corresponding effect sound is audible in a prominent manner. In this regard, in the above configuration, with regard to the reception permissible sound output when the first reception permissible state occurs, if an effect is accepted while the reception permissible sound is in an output state, the output state is terminated based on the fact that the effect has been accepted, so that the effect sound corresponding to the post-operation effect can be emphasized without being disturbed by the reception permissible sound.

Multiple types of reception allowable states are prepared in which the integrated model image IG can be displayed in a special manner (IGd), and in any of these reception allowable states, it is desirable that the reception allowable sound be terminated midway if an operation is accepted when the reception allowable sound is in an output state. In contrast, multiple types of reception allowable states in which the integrated model image IG cannot be displayed in a special manner (IGd) are also prepared, and it is desirable that these reception allowable states include both a reception allowable state in which the reception allowable sound is terminated midway if an operation is accepted when the reception allowable sound is in an output state, and a reception allowable state (such as a second reception allowable state) in which the reception allowable sound is not terminated midway if an operation is accepted when the reception allowable sound is in an output state (which can occur under different conditions).

As mentioned above, there are two types of reception allowable sounds: sound effects and message sounds. In this regard, the message sounds are always interrupted when a performance is accepted while the integrated model image is in the normal mode (IGa) and in that output state, even if the integrated model image is displayed in that mode. In contrast, it is desirable that the sound effects be interrupted when a performance is accepted while the integrated model image is displayed in the normal mode (IGa) and when they are displayed in that output state (first reception allowable state) and not interrupted (second reception allowable state). It is desirable that multiple types of reception allowable states, including the first reception allowable state, be prepared as reception allowable states in which message sounds are output.

The wide-area pre-performance shown in Figures 250 and 252 is realized by sequentially executing the first wide-area pre-performance and the second wide-area pre-performance. In this regard, in both the first wide-area pre-performance and the second wide-area pre-performance, a mock image (integrated mock image) that mimics the operating means (operation receiving part) that is the object of operation is displayed, but the mock image A2 displayed during the execution period of the first wide-area pre-performance is different from the mock image (integrated mock image IG) displayed during the set time of the reception permissible state (first reception permissible state), and does not gradually change to the mock image (integrated mock image IG).

That is, the mock image A2 (Fig. 252(d)) displayed in the first wide-area pre-performance is made invisible (not visible) when the second wide-area pre-performance is executed, prior to the occurrence of the first reception-permitting state. Then, after a predetermined time has passed during which no mock image of the operation target is displayed (maintained as not visible) (Fig. 252(e)), an image different from the mock image A2 displayed in the first wide-area pre-performance is displayed as the mock image during the execution period of the second wide-area pre-performance (Fig. 252(f)). This "mozu image during the execution period of the second wide-area pre-performance" is the mozu image (integrated mozu image IG) that is displayed within the set time of the reception permissible state (first reception permissible state), and is displayed together with the image HSE related to the second wide-area pre-performance across the occurrence of the reception permissible state (first reception permissible state), thereby allowing the reception of operations while the mozu image (integrated mozu image IG) is displayed. The mozu image (integrated mozu image IG) is also displayed at the time when the operation is accepted and the post-operation performance begins (Figure 252 (i)), and is thereby displayed over the period from before the first reception permissible state occurs to after it ends.

Here, when the model image A2 is displayed in the wide-area pre-performance (first wide-area pre-performance), an opportunity to operate the operating means (operation receiving section) that the model image A2 is modeling will be given without fail (without any other performance). In other words, while it would be sufficient to generate a state in which the model image A2 is displayed and the acceptance is permitted, in the above-mentioned performance example, the model image A2 is made invisible, and a state in which "no model image of the operation target is displayed" is once generated in the wide-area pre-performance, and then the model image that is modeling the operating means (operation receiving section) is displayed as an image (integrated model image IG) that is depicted differently from the first time (A2).

According to this configuration, even if a model image is displayed for a long time as a pre-performance to suggest that a highly anticipated acceptance-permitted state will occur, it is expected that the player will be prompted to perform an operation without delaying the timing at which operation acceptance is permitted. In other words, if a model image is displayed for a long time as a pre-performance and the acceptance-permitted state occurs while the model image is being displayed, the timing at which operation acceptance is permitted may arrive suddenly, and operation delays may occur frequently even when the pre-performance is being performed. In this regard, according to the above configuration, not only is a model image having a different depiction from the model image displayed during the set time of the acceptance-permitted state displayed in advance before the first acceptance-permitted state occurs, but the model image displayed during the set time of the acceptance-permitted state is displayed after a period of time during which no model image is displayed. In other words, since it is possible to make the player aware that the first acceptance-permitted state can only occur during the period after the model image displayed during the set time of the acceptance-permitted state is displayed, it is possible to make it difficult for operation delays to occur while displaying a model image for a long time as a pre-performance.

To optimally obtain such an effect, it is clearly more desirable to set the "time from when the second wide-area pre-performance is executed until the first reception permissible state occurs" and the "time from when the mock image (integrated mock image IG) is displayed until the first reception permissible state occurs" to be shorter than the "time required for the first wide-area pre-performance" and the "time for the mock image A2 to be displayed." The mock image A2 may be displayed from the start of the first wide-area pre-performance.

In order to obtain such an advantageous effect, the mosaic image (integrated mosaic image IG) displayed in the second wide-area front performance is dynamically displayed in a form expressing the "movement in the movable area" and "behavior when operated" as an operating means (operation receiving unit) (see FIG. 233, etc.), whereas it is more desirable to display the mosaic image A2 displayed in the first wide-area front performance without such dynamic display. Note that the mosaic image (integrated mosaic image IG) displayed in the second wide-area front performance will continue to be dynamically displayed even after the first reception allowable state occurs. Also, the mosaic image (integrated mosaic image IG) displayed in the narrow-area front performance is dynamically displayed in a form expressing the "movement in the movable area" and "behavior when operated" as an operating means (operation receiving unit), and will continue to be dynamically displayed even after the second reception allowable state occurs.

The mock-up image (integrated mock-up image IG) in the state shown in FIG. 252(f) and the mock-up image (integrated mock-up image IG) in the state shown in FIG. 252(g) are the same image, but the transmittance may be different.

As for the image KTH for the narrow-area front performance shown in FIG. 251, it is more desirable to display it as an image large enough to cover the entire mosaic image (integrated mosaic image IG) from the front. It is also desirable to at least either reduce the display area of the image KTH or increase its transmittance, so that the mosaic image (integrated mosaic image IG) is displayed in such a way that it is gradually revealed over time from the location where the image KTH was displayed.

Of the images HTH1 and HTH2 relating to the wide-area front performance shown in FIG. 252, image HTH1 is displayed behind the model image A2 (without adversely affecting the visibility of the model image A2), whereas image HTH2 is displayed in front of the model image (integrated model image IG) (without adversely affecting the visibility of the model image (integrated model image IG)). In other words, like image KTH relating to the narrow-area front performance, image HTH2 is displayed as an image large enough to cover the entire model image (integrated model image IG) from the front (FIG. 252(e)), and then either its display area is reduced or its transmittance is increased, so that the model image (integrated model image IG) is gradually revealed over time from the location where image HTH2 was displayed. In contrast, image HTH1 is displayed in such a way as to highlight the depiction of model image A2, which makes it possible to eliminate the disadvantage of making the model image difficult to see when an operation opportunity is given (making it difficult to recognize which operation means the operation opportunity is given for, resulting in operation delays).

The wide-area pre-performance is performed by sequentially executing the first wide-area pre-performance and the second wide-area pre-performance, but it is desirable that the performance sounds output in the wide-area pre-performance be output by playing one sound data (one sound effect/music).

In addition, in the narrow-area pre-performance shown in FIG. 251, the background image that has been displayed prior to this is maintained without being changed in the narrow-area pre-performance, but in the wide-area pre-performance shown in FIG. 252, the background image that has been displayed prior to this is changed in the wide-area pre-performance (here, changed at the start of the wide-area pre-performance). In this configuration, the background change can be executed as part of the wide-area pre-performance, so that it is executed as a pre-performance with higher dramatic effect compared to narrow-area pre-performances that are limited to partial performance changes. Note that the background image that was displayed prior to the narrow-area pre-performance (FIG. 251(a)) and the background image that was displayed prior to the wide-area pre-performance (FIG. 252(a)) may be different background images.

In the second wide-area pre-performance shown in FIG. 252(f), the mosaic image is displayed as an integrated mosaic image IG integrated with a "peripheral decorative image in which the partition image KG that partitions the display target area of the gauge image GG is decorated (depicted)", but in the first wide-area pre-performance shown in FIG. 252(d), a mosaic image in which such a partition image KG is not decorated (depicted) is displayed. This allows the player to enjoy the pre-performance in the first wide-area pre-performance at least without having to worry about the remaining time. Note that a mosaic image in which the partition image KG is not decorated (depicted) may be one in which the partition image KG that is decorated (depicted) in the integrated mosaic image IG is not displayed, and may be one in which at least a portion of the decoration (gauge area) of the integrated mosaic image IG is not displayed, or one in which the shape itself is different from the integrated mosaic image IG.

As described above, "the acceptance permission state in which operation acceptance is permitted while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state and is executed in an automatic acceptance mode" is prepared in multiple forms with different occurrence conditions (variation patterns, etc.), and the "first acceptance permission state" is prepared as one of these acceptance permission states. However, it is desirable that these acceptance permission states include a specific acceptance permission state in which "the first wide-area pre-performance (Fig. 252 (c) to (e)) in which a model image is displayed and then hidden, and the second wide-area pre-performance (Fig. 252 (e) to (g)) in which a model image is displayed across the timing of the acceptance permission state are performed" as well as "the first wide-area pre-performance (Fig. 252 (e) to (g)) in which a model image is displayed across the timing of the acceptance permission state is not performed, and the second wide-area pre-performance (Fig. 252 (e) to (g)) in which a model image is displayed across the timing of the acceptance permission state is not performed." That is, in this case, by making the rate at which the post-operation effect is executed in a manner that only appears at the time of a jackpot higher in the first reception-permitting state than in the specific reception-permitting state, it becomes possible to increase interest in the game from the time when the timing (the timing at which the first wide-area pre-effect appears) arrives significantly before the timing at which operation reception is permitted. In this case, the second wide-area pre-effect that is performed when the first reception-permitting state occurs and the second wide-area pre-effect that is performed when the specific reception-permitting state occurs do not necessarily have to have the same content, and may be executed as different presentation contents (images). Also, the operation means that provide the operation opportunity may be different between the first reception-permitting state and the second reception-permitting state.

As mentioned above, there are multiple "acceptance states in which operation acceptance is permitted while a specific type of sound effect (BGM playback) is being output in a non-suppressed mode and which are executed in a non-automatic acceptance mode" with different occurrence conditions (variation patterns, etc.), and the "second acceptance state" is provided as one of these acceptance states.

The wide-area pre-effect performed in the first reception-permitting state is executed under the condition that "specific type of performance sound (BGM playback)" is suppressed or not outputted, but it is executed for a longer time than the narrow-area pre-effect (second reception-permitting state) executed while "specific type of performance sound (BGM playback)" is not suppressed and outputted, so that the interest in playing can be favorably maintained. In particular, by executing only the first wide-area pre-effect among the wide-area pre-effects for a longer time than the narrow-area pre-effect, it is possible to favorably increase the interest in playing well before the reception-permitting state occurs. The timing at which "specific type of performance sound (BGM playback)" is suppressed or not outputted may arrive while the first wide-area pre-effect is being executed, or may arrive before the first wide-area pre-effect starts to be executed.

According to the above-mentioned performance example, when a wide-area pre-performance (Fig. 252) is performed upon occurrence of the first reception-permitting state, a performance change including the background image is generated, whereas when a narrow-area pre-performance (Fig. 251) is performed upon occurrence of the second reception-permitting state, the background image is not changed and the performance change is generated while maintaining it. Furthermore, in the first reception-permitting state that occurs while such a wide-area pre-performance is being performed, the background image can be further changed by the post-operation performance (automatic reception mode) regardless of whether an operation is performed, whereas in the second reception-permitting state that occurs while a narrow-area pre-performance is being performed, the post-operation performance does not change the background image and the performance progresses while maintaining it. According to this configuration, in the first reception-permitting state, the background image is changed twice before and after its occurrence in relation to the occurrence of the first reception-permitting state, so that the performance can be significantly improved compared to the second reception-permitting state, and it is possible to encourage greater concentration on the operation-related performance.

In the wide-area disappearance effect according to the above-mentioned performance example, the background image is changed accordingly (Fig. 252(j)). However, the timing of the background image change may be later than the timing of the start of the wide-area disappearance effect. That is, in this case, in Fig. 252(i), the post-operation performance (background announcement by the princess character) is started while the background image is not changed. Then, after the post-operation performance is started in this way, the wide-area disappearance effect first makes the background image displayed in the reception-permitted state difficult to see or cannot be seen (the background image is changed in the situation shown in Fig. 252(j)), and then changes the background image by displaying another background image (the background image is changed in the situation shown in Fig. 252(k) or the situation shown in Fig. 252(l)). The other background image may be displayed in a manner that is gradually revealed while the wide-area disappearance effect is being performed, or may be displayed after the wide-area disappearance effect has ended.

In the example shown in FIG. 252, the post-operation effect is first initiated by a display change on the LCD display (background announcement by the princess character), but instead of this, the light emitted by the lamp or the post-operation sound output may be initiated first as the post-operation effect, and the display change on the LCD display may be initiated later (for example, at the timing when the background image is changed).

As described above, multiple "acceptance allowance states in which the automatic acceptance mode and the wide-area disappearance effect are executed" are prepared with different occurrence conditions (variation patterns, etc.), and the "first acceptance allowance state" is prepared as one of these acceptance allowance states. However, it is desirable that these acceptance allowance states include, in addition to the "first acceptance allowance state", a "special acceptance allowance state in which the same post-operation performance (first post-operation performance) as the first acceptance allowance state can be executed, but the wide-area disappearance effect is executed as a different image (the timing of display may be the same). In other words, in this case, even if the same post-operation performance is executed, the disappearance effect will be different, so that it is possible to improve the performance and it is expected that a decrease in interest in the game will be suppressed. The special acceptance allowance state may be the specific acceptance allowance state described above. The specific acceptance allowance state and the special acceptance allowance state are executed in the same manner as the first acceptance allowance state in terms of the display timing of the model image, the processing related to the output of the acceptance allowance sound, the processing related to the disappearance effect, etc.

As described above, multiple "acceptance allowance states in which the non-automatic acceptance mode and the narrow-range disappearance effect are executed" are prepared with different occurrence conditions (variation patterns, etc.), and the "second acceptance allowance state" is prepared as one of these acceptance allowance states. However, it is desirable that these acceptance allowance states include, in addition to the "second acceptance allowance state", a "special acceptance allowance state in which a post-operation performance (third post-operation performance) of a type different from that of the second acceptance allowance state (for example, a conversation announcement and a movable body operation) can be executed, but the narrow-range disappearance effect is executed as the same image (the timing of display may also be the same)". In other words, in this case, even if a different post-operation performance is executed, the disappearance effect itself will be displayed as the same image, so it is easy to recognize that the operation has been accepted regardless of the type of post-operation performance. The special acceptance allowance state is executed in the same manner as the second acceptance allowance state in terms of the display timing of the mock image, the processing related to the output of the acceptance allowance sound, the processing related to the disappearance effect, etc.

In the narrow-area disappearance effect, even when the model image (integrated model image IG) is hidden after the post-operation performance is started, the image KSE related to the narrow-area disappearance effect is not hidden but maintained in a displayed state (see FIG. 251(i)). In this regard, it is desirable to set the time from when the model image (integrated model image IG) is hidden to when the image KSE related to the narrow-area disappearance effect is hidden to be longer than the time from when the operation is accepted (when the post-operation performance is started) to when the model image (integrated model image IG) is hidden. According to this configuration, the display state of the model image (integrated model image IG) is maintained even after the post-operation performance is started so that its appearance can be confirmed, but the fact that the post-operation performance is not clearly revealed is due to the "model image whose display state is maintained" but is due to the performance of the "image KSE related to the narrow-area disappearance effect", so that a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed. In this case, it goes without saying that the narrow-area disappearance effect will not be a fade-out that ends relatively quickly, but will be performed by a dynamic display of an image other than the mock image. It is more desirable to prepare multiple types of "dynamic display of a different image" as this narrow-area disappearance effect with different expectations, and have them selectively appear depending on the type of acceptance permission state that has different occurrence conditions.

The wide-area disappearance effect according to the above-mentioned performance example can be expected to have a function that suggests that the first reception-permitting state has been executed in the automatic reception mode. In contrast, in the second reception-permitting state, operations are only accepted by the player's operation and the post-operation performance is not executed, so it is easy to recognize that the post-operation performance will be executed without affecting the entire screen, and it can be said that executing it by a narrow-area disappearance effect, which has a small image for the disappearance effect, is advantageous in that the post-operation performance can be executed immediately with good visibility. With this configuration, in the case of a wide-area disappearance effect, it is necessary to change it from the background image to ensure its visibility, but in the case of a narrow-area disappearance effect, it is possible to ensure visibility by simply executing the post-operation performance without changing the background image and maintaining it.

As described above, in the second reception allowance state, the post-operation performance (second post-operation performance) is executed in one of a plurality of modes (including the first mode and the second mode) with different ratios (which may be 0% or 100%) at which the jackpot pattern is stopped, based on the result of the performance judgment according to the result of the jackpot judgment. In this regard, when the first mode (relatively high ratio mode) appears as the post-operation performance (second post-operation performance) and the second mode (relatively low ratio mode) appears, the narrow-area disappearance effect is executed in the same mode (image). In contrast, in the first reception allowance state, the post-operation performance (first post-operation performance) is executed in one of a plurality of modes (including the third mode and the fourth mode) with different ratios (which may be 0% or 100%) at which the jackpot pattern is stopped, based on the result of the performance judgment according to the result of the jackpot judgment. In this regard, it is desirable that when the third mode (relatively high ratio mode) appears as the post-operation performance (first post-operation performance), a wide-area disappearance effect is executed in a different mode (image) from when the fourth mode (relatively low ratio mode) appears, or that when the third mode (relatively high ratio mode) appears, a wide-area disappearance effect is executed, and when the fourth mode (relatively low ratio mode) appears, a narrow-area disappearance effect is executed. The narrow-area disappearance effect in this case may be the same as the narrow-area disappearance effect executed in response to the second reception permission state, or it may be different.

According to this configuration, in the first acceptance allowance state and the second acceptance allowance state, in the first acceptance allowance state in which a wide-area disappearance effect may occur, the disappearance effect itself is expected, so that the decrease in interest in the game caused by the low visibility of the post-operation performance due to the wide-area disappearance effect can be suppressed. It should be noted that the first acceptance allowance state and the second acceptance allowance state, as well as the fourth acceptance allowance state and the fifth acceptance allowance state described below, can occur in both the variation pattern in which the jackpot is lost and the variation pattern in which the jackpot is won, and it goes without saying that the first and second variation patterns described above, as well as the fourth and fifth variation patterns described below, are "variation patterns for when a jackpot is won and variation patterns for when a miss is lost, which are provided as a pair."

The second acceptance state may be made to occur not only in the second fluctuation pattern, but also in the first fluctuation pattern. For example, the second acceptance state is generated at a relatively early timing within the first fluctuation pattern, and then the first acceptance state is generated at a relatively late timing.

The timing at which the display output (display on the layer) for the mock image (integrated mock image IG) ends during the period in which the disappearance effect image is displayed (the timing from when an operation is accepted until it is hidden) may be different between the first allowable acceptance state and the second allowable acceptance state.

When an operation is accepted in the "situation in which image KTH relating to a narrow-area pre-effect is displayed" shown in FIG. 251(d), it is desirable not to use this as a trigger to make the image KTH invisible, but to have the post-operation performance begin while the image KTH continues to be displayed. That is, in this case, the image KTH is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 251(f). Then, when the narrow-area disappearance effect begins to be executed after this, it is desirable to progress the performance so that the "image KTH relating to a narrow-area pre-effect" is made difficult to see or cannot be seen by the "image KSE relating to a narrow-area disappearance effect."

Also, even if an operation is accepted in the "situation in which image HTH2 relating to the wide-area pre-effect is displayed" shown in FIG. 252(g), it is preferable not to use this as a trigger to make image HTH2 invisible, but to have the post-operation performance begin while image HTH2 continues to be displayed. That is, in this case, image HTH2 is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 252(i). Then, when the wide-area disappearance effect begins to be executed after this, it is preferable to progress the performance so that "image HSE relating to the wide-area disappearance effect" makes "image HTH2 relating to the wide-area pre-effect" difficult to see or makes it impossible to see.

In the example shown in FIG. 250, if operation acceptance is permitted while the "specific type of sound effect (BGM playback)" is in a non-output state, the "specific type of sound effect (BGM playback)" does not necessarily have to be re-output before the pattern is stopped. For example, at timing tC6, a special sound effect different from both the "specific type of sound effect (BGM playback)" that is already in a non-output state and the "sound effect related to post-operation performance" that starts to be output in response to operation acceptance may be newly output. The special sound effect is not output in response to operation acceptance, but is output based on the arrival of a predetermined timing within the variation pattern.

Images related to wide-area pre-performance and images related to narrow-area pre-performance may be displayed until the set time for the reception permissible state ends (or until the automatic reception button is activated). The first permissible sound may also be maintained in an output state until the set time for the reception permissible state ends (or until the automatic reception button is activated).

In the above-mentioned performance example, the imitation image of the operation receiving part is displayed in both the wide-area pre-performance and the narrow-area pre-performance, but in the wide-area pre-performance (first wide-area pre-performance), it is displayed in a different form (image data) from the form (image data) that appears during the period when operation reception is permitted (first reception permitted state). As a result, in the wide-area pre-performance (first wide-area pre-performance), even if the imitation image is displayed when operation reception is not yet permitted, it is possible to appeal to the occurrence of the operation reception performance (reception permitted state) while making it difficult to cause a mistaken recognition that the operation reception is permitted, and this makes it possible to perform a large-scale pre-performance that requires a relatively long time. Note that in the second wide-area pre-performance and the narrow-area pre-performance, the imitation image (integrated imitation image) is displayed in the form (image data) that appears during the period when operation reception is permitted (reception permitted state), and this is gradually revealed as the pre-performance is hidden (the display area decreases). In other words, in this case, the mock image displayed on the specific layer when the reception permissible state occurs will continue to be displayed from before the reception permissible state occurs to after it occurs. This is also the case with the fourth reception permissible state described below.

In the presentation example shown in FIG. 249 (FIG. 251) and the presentation example shown in FIG. 250 (FIG. 252), in either case, when the change in response to the operation reception (the post-operation presentation, which is at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation presentation, such as a display change or lamp illumination) starts to be executed, the model image (gauge image) is not hidden but is kept displayed (and even dynamically displayed) (see FIG. 251(f), FIG. 252(i), etc.). Then, the disappearance effect (narrow-area disappearance effect or wide-area disappearance effect) starts to be executed (see FIG. 251(g), FIG. 252(j), etc.). However, the wide-area disappearance effect executed over a relatively large range makes it difficult to see most of the change (post-operation presentation) that was once clearly visible, which is a concern as it may reduce interest in the game. Therefore, when a narrow-area disappearance effect is executed, a change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or a lamp light emission) is started before the narrow-area disappearance effect is executed, and at this point, the model image (gauge image) is not hidden and is not made difficult to see by the narrow-area disappearance effect, but is displayed. On the other hand, when a wide-area disappearance effect is executed, a change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or a lamp light emission) may not be started before the wide-area disappearance effect is executed. In other words, in this case, at the time when the change in response to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or a lamp light emission) is started, the model image (gauge image) is not hidden but is displayed, but is made difficult to see by the wide-area disappearance effect (FIG. 252(j)).

In other words, when a narrow-area disappearance effect is executed, the display state of the mock image (gauge image) is maintained in the manner in which it was displayed before the operation was accepted at the time when the change in response to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed. In this case, the mock image (gauge image) is not made difficult to see by the narrow-area disappearance effect at the time when the post-operation performance begins to be executed. In contrast, when a wide-area disappearance effect is executed, Fig. 250(j) may appear after Fig. 250(i), or Fig. 250(j) may appear at the time when the post-operation performance begins to be executed without going through Fig. 250(i).

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, in regard to the acceptance allowance state executed in the "suppression operation acceptance effect" in which a specific type of effect sound can be suppressed, multiple types are prepared, including at least a first acceptance allowance state executed in the "strong suppression mode (first mode shown in FIG. 250)" in which the degree of suppression is relatively high or non-output, and a fourth acceptance allowance state executed in the "weak suppression mode (second mode shown in FIG. 249)" in which the degree of suppression is relatively low. Note that in this case, the specific type of effect sound that is the subject of suppression may be a different effect sound, and may be output as an effect sound that performs the same function, such as a BGM playback effect sound, for example.

This configuration allows for creative control over how much the specific type of sound effect is suppressed when the set time (valid period) during which operation acceptance is permitted occurs.

Here, in order to obtain the above-mentioned action effect preferably, it is desirable to make the expectation level (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) different depending on whether the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception-permitting state)" or the "strong suppression mode (first reception-permitting state)" occurs. Note that here, when the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception-permitting state)" occurs, the probability (expectation level) that the "post-operation performance in response to operation reception" is executed in a manner that appears only when a jackpot is won is lower than the probability (expectation level) that the "post-operation performance in response to operation reception" is executed in a manner that appears only when a jackpot is won when the "strong suppression mode (first reception-permitting state)" occurs. The probability may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance-permitting state)" can appear in both a performance according to a high-expectation fluctuation pattern that develops into an SP reach (such as a reach performance accompanied by a background change) and a performance according to a low-expectation fluctuation pattern in which the reach state is not even formed (or the reach state may be formed but does not develop into an SP reach), whereas the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance-permitting state)" does not occur in a low-expectation performance pattern, but may occur as a performance according to a high-expectation fluctuation pattern. Even with this configuration, it can be said that the expectation of a jackpot when the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance-permitting state)" occurs is lower than when the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance-permitting state)" occurs.

In order to obtain the above-mentioned effect more favorably, it is desirable to make it possible to generate a "special presentation state" to which a transition can be made based on the satisfaction of a special presentation condition, and in the "special presentation state," each time an operation is accepted during a set time (valid period) during which an operation prompting image (such as a model image or gauge display) that encourages the player to operate is displayed, a post-operation presentation corresponding to the operation acceptance is executed (started) while a specific type of presentation sound (for example, a presentation sound for playing background music) is suppressed. According to such a "special presentation state," each time a set time (valid period) occurs during which operation acceptance is permitted, it is possible to provide a presentation regarding how much a specific type of presentation sound (for example, a presentation sound for playing background music) is suppressed (whether one of multiple modes, including a weakly suppressed mode or a strongly suppressed mode, appears), and since the degree of expectation is suggested by such presentation (the degree of suppression) in addition to the degree of expectation suggested by the post-operation presentation, it is expected that the interest in the game will be further increased when the presentation acceptance is permitted. In this case, the second reception permission state described above does not occur in the "special presentation state," but can occur in a different presentation state (normal presentation state).

It is also possible to provide a variation pattern (e.g., a presentation corresponding to a specific variation pattern among high expectation variation patterns) in which a "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance-permitted state)" and a "strong suppression mode (first acceptance-permitted state)" can be executed sequentially within the pattern variation. In other words, in this case, even if a "weak suppression mode (first acceptance-permitted state)" with a relatively low expectation occurs, there remains the possibility that a "strong suppression mode (first acceptance-permitted state)" with a relatively high expectation will occur, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when the player recognizes that the degree of suppression for a specific type of presentation sound is small (weak suppression mode).

In addition, in order to more appropriately suppress the decline in interest in the game when the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception permission state)" occurs, the "strong suppression mode (first reception permission state)" is as follows:
・When a specific fluctuation pattern is selected from among the high expectation fluctuation patterns (SP reach fluctuation patterns) that develop into an SP reach (such as a reach performance accompanied by a background change) as a result of the above fluctuation pattern judgment, regardless of which result is obtained as the performance judgment (preview judgment, etc.), it is assumed that the performance of the specific fluctuation pattern will occur when it progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach. In contrast, for the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance performance)",
Even if the above-mentioned specific variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance judgment (pre-notice judgment, etc.), the performance of the specific variation pattern will not occur even if it progresses to a predetermined timing, and if a special result is obtained in the performance judgment (pre-notice judgment, etc.), the performance of the specific variation pattern will occur when it progresses to a predetermined timing. And, when the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowance state)" occurs in the performance according to the specific variation pattern, it is desirable to make the rate at which the post-operation performance is executed in a highly expected mode (the rate at which it is executed in a mode that appears only at the time of a jackpot) higher when the performance acceptance is made in the "strong suppression mode (first reception allowance state)" than when the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowance state)" does not occur in the performance according to the specific variation pattern.

In this configuration, in the presentation according to a specific fluctuation pattern, the "strong suppression mode (first reception-permitting state)" always occurs, whereas the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception-permitting state)" does not necessarily occur. Furthermore, when the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception-permitting state)" occurs, the probability that a post-operation presentation with high expectations will be executed in the "strong suppression mode (first reception-permitting state)" increases, so that attention can be drawn to whether or not the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception-permitting state)" occurs, and it is possible to increase interest in the game when the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception-permitting state)" occurs.

However, the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance-permitting state)" does not necessarily have to occur in the same fluctuation pattern as the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance-permitting state)." For example, the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance-permitting state)" may occur within the first fluctuation pattern, and the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance-permitting state)" may occur within the fourth fluctuation pattern.

Figure 253 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the fourth condition is satisfied and the fourth reception permissible state occurs under the specific setting condition (presentation setting). Figure 253 shows an example of presentation in a variation pattern in which the fourth reception permissible state occurs.

Now, for example, if the start condition is met (pending is consumed) in the "special presentation state" and the "fourth variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a presentation determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern. After this, the decorative pattern SZ variation presentation (presentation of a presentation according to the fourth variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the fourth variation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the variation presentation, a presentation (preview presentation) according to the result of the preview presentation determination is additionally executed to the presentation of the selected "fourth variation pattern" itself.

As described above, when a special result is obtained in the performance judgment (such as a notice judgment) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern (when the fourth condition is met), the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates the fourth reception permission state (valid period) in which operation reception regarding the fourth post-operation performance is permitted when the timing tD3 arrives at which the fourth predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ, as shown in FIG. 253(b). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the fourth reception permission state (valid period) is as follows:
A set time (valid period) during which operation reception is permitted while the "sound of BGM playback" according to the fourth variation pattern is output in a non-suppressed mode is set, and if an operation is received within the set time (valid period), the "sound of BGM playback" is changed from the non-suppressed mode to the weakly suppressed mode (mode in which the degree of suppression is relatively low) in response to the operation reception, which is a "conditional suppression reception performance (see FIGS. 253(a) and 253(b))," and if no operation is detected within the set time (timing tD3 to tD4) during which operation reception is permitted, a "non-automatic reception mode (see FIG. 253(h))" in which a post-operation performance (fourth post-operation performance) corresponding to the fourth reception permitted state is not generated.
In addition, as a method for outputting the "BGM playback sound" in the weak suppression mode, a method of changing the volume value (maximum "100") for the channel to which the "BGM playback sound" is assigned to a weak suppression value (for example, a volume value (audible volume) of "10") that is less suppressed than the strong suppression mode (for example, a volume value (audible volume) of "0") can be adopted.

According to this "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (fourth reception permission state)", unless an operation is accepted by the player, the state will not change to "a state in which a specific type of performance sound (sound of BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode", so it is possible to make it appear as if the "non-suppression reception effect (first reception permission state)" shown in FIG. 249 is occurring. In other words, in this case, when the player operates the state, it changes to "a state in which a specific type of performance sound (sound of BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode", and it becomes possible for the player to recognize for the first time that it is not a "suppression reception effect", so that the surprise effect can increase interest in the game.

In order to obtain such an effect, it is desirable to make the fourth variation pattern, which allows the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 253)" to occur depending on the result of the performance judgment (pre-notice judgment, etc.), selectable only when in a special performance state (for example, a look-ahead performance zone, etc.), and when in the special performance state, the probability (expectation level) of a jackpot pattern appearing when the pattern variation is stopped is higher than when in a normal performance state in which a variation pattern in which the "non-suppression non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 249)" can occur depending on the result of the performance judgment (pre-notice judgment, etc.) can be selected. With this configuration, when the "conditional suppression non-automatic reception effect" appears, the expectation level is higher than when the "non-suppression non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 249)" appears, and this, combined with the above-mentioned surprise performance element, can increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effect more suitably, it is desirable that the "strong suppression mode (first reception permission state)" can occur in both the "normal presentation state" and the "special presentation state", and that in the "normal presentation state", within a presentation corresponding to one fluctuation pattern (one fluctuation pattern paired with winning or losing), a "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception presentation (Fig. 249)" and a "suppression (strong suppression mode)/automatic reception presentation (Fig. 250)" can occur sequentially, and in the "special presentation state", within a presentation corresponding to one fluctuation pattern (one fluctuation pattern paired with winning or losing), a "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception presentation (Fig. 253)" and a "suppression (strong suppression mode)/automatic reception presentation (Fig. 250)" can occur sequentially.

Moreover, in the "conditionally suppressed (weakly suppressed mode) non-automatic reception effect", if the set time (valid period) has elapsed without any operation being accepted, the effect will proceed to the subsequent effect without transitioning to a "state in which a specific type of effect sound (background music playback sound) is output in a weakly suppressed mode". In other words, in this case, it is difficult to know whether a "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect" or a "conditionally suppressed, non-automatic reception effect" has occurred, and furthermore whether the state is a "normal presentation state" or a "special presentation state". As a result, even if an "operation acceptance effect (valid period) while outputting in a non-suppressed mode", which is considered to have a relatively low expectation level, occurs, the player can be more actively encouraged to operate.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 253)" occurs and when a "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 249)" occurs, the same effect sound is output as the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound) for the same period of time, which also makes it difficult to recognize whether a "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 253)" or a "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 249)" is occurring.

In addition, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) non-automatic reception performance (FIG. 253)", as in the case where the "non-suppression non-automatic reception performance (FIG. 249)" occurs,
a. A narrow-area pre-show is performed at timing tD1 before operation acceptance is permitted;
b. The "acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound)" starts to be output when the timing tD2 slightly before the set time occurs, and the output state is maintained across the timing tD2.
c. The second allowable sound (e.g., a message sound) is not output, and the first allowable sound (e.g., a sound effect) is output;
d. When the timing tD2 arrives, which is slightly before the set time occurs, the performance display device 1600 displays a model image (integrated model image) of the operation means to be operated in the operation reception performance, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the set time has elapsed is displayed;
e. Even if an operation is accepted while the acceptance allowance sound is being output, the acceptance allowance sound being output is not terminated.
f. When an operation is accepted, the model image (integrated model image) and the gauge image are not hidden, but are kept displayed, g. A narrow-range disappearance effect is executed while the model image (integrated model image) and the gauge image are displayed, and h. Even if an operation is not accepted, a narrow-range disappearance effect is executed, but the narrow-range disappearance effect is executed in a different mode (image) from when the operation is accepted. Each of these configurations is also adopted, which also makes it difficult to recognize whether a "conditionally suppressed (weakly suppressed mode) non-automatic reception performance (Fig. 253)" or a "non-suppressed non-automatic reception performance (Fig. 249)" is occurring. With this configuration, it becomes necessary to distinguish whether a transition has been made to a "state in which a specific type of performance sound (BGM playback sound) is output in a weakly suppressed mode" while the output state (non-suppressed mode) of the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is maintained, so that it is expected that a sense of tension will be maintained appropriately each time a performance is accepted.

Therefore, as with the case where a "non-suppressed, non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 249)" occurs, it is desirable to adopt, for example, the method shown in Fig. 251 as a display method for the mock image, gauge image, narrow-area pre-effect, and narrow-area disappearance effect, and it is also desirable to adopt the same mode as the example of the effect shown in Fig. 249 for the timing at which these images are hidden. However, it is not necessary to adopt the same mode.

Also, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) non-automatic reception performance (Fig. 253)", when an operation is accepted within the set time (valid period) (timing tD3a in the figure), at least a post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) in the performance display device 1600 (first performance member) and a post-operation output sound (performance sound) by the speaker (second performance member) are generated as post-operation performances corresponding to the operation acceptance. In the figure, the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (performance sound) by the speaker are maintained in an execution state for the same period of time, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) is made invisible at a predetermined timing that arrives after timing tD4 regardless of when the performance acceptance is made within the set time (valid period), whereas the post-operation output sound (performance sound) may be made to maintain an output state for a predetermined period of time from the timing of the operation acceptance. However, regardless of the timing at which the performance request is received, if timing tD4 has not yet elapsed, it is required that both the post-operation display performance (LCD display) and the post-operation output sound (sound performance) be set to maintain their output state.

In addition, for the reception permission sound, operation-related display, pre-effects, disappearance effects, and post-operation effects that appear in the "conditionally suppressed, non-automatic reception effects (Figure 253)", it is possible to appropriately adopt other examples or modified examples of the performance examples shown in Figures 249 and 251, and it is preferable to use the same methods for both.

In this example, the length of time (a predetermined fixed time) during which the "BGM playback sound" is output in a weakly suppressed mode is set so that the timing for ending the weakly suppressed mode is the same as or later than the timing for ending the sound effect for the post-operation performance, even if an operation is accepted at the latest timing tD4 among the set times (validity period) for the "conditionally suppressed, non-automatic reception performance (fourth reception permissible state)." However, the timing for ending the weakly suppressed mode for the "BGM playback sound" may also be set to always be the same as the timing for ending the sound effect for the post-operation performance. With any of these configurations, it is possible to highlight the post-operation performance when a performance is accepted.

As mentioned above, when an operation reception effect occurs that can suppress a specific type of sound effect (e.g., sound effect of playing BGM), the expectation level differs depending on whether the degree of suppression is high (first acceptance allowance state of strong suppression mode or no output) or low (fourth acceptance allowance state of weak suppression mode). However, even if you try to guess whether the degree of suppression is high or low (strong suppression mode or no output, or weak suppression mode) when a specific type of sound effect (e.g., sound effect of playing BGM) is suppressed, it is actually difficult to guess whether the degree of suppression is high (strong suppression mode or no output) or low (weak suppression mode) without a comparison. This is especially true when the volume value when suppressed is not so different between the strong suppression mode and the weak suppression mode, which makes it possible to maintain a sense of tension when an operation reception effect occurs and attract the player to the effect.

However, in reality, there is a concern that interest in playing the game may decrease if it is impossible to guess whether the mode is strong or weak suppression. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, presentation elements that are useful for guessing whether the mode is strong or weak suppression are prepared as follows, scattered chronologically within the period from when the operation reception presentation starts to when it ends.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first permissible sound outputted when the fourth reception permissible state occurs is outputted for a predetermined time period, without terminating the output midway, even if a performance reception is made when in the output state, whereas the first permissible sound outputted when the first reception permissible state occurs is outputted when a performance reception is made when in the output state, and terminates the output midway based on the performance reception. In this configuration, the first permissible sound itself has a function that helps infer whether the mode is strong or weak suppression, and this makes it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to an inability to make such a prediction.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first acceptance permissible state occurs, the second acceptance permissible sound is output in addition to the first acceptance permissible sound, so that by checking whether the second acceptance permissible sound is output, it is possible to infer whether the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode is being used. However, the second acceptance permissible sound does not necessarily have to be provided, and it may be possible to have only the first acceptance permissible sound being output in both the first acceptance permissible state and the fourth acceptance permissible state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation-related display (display encouraging an operation) that appears within the set time (valid period) during which performance reception is permitted is displayed in one of multiple modes including the special mode (Fig. 232 (a) to (d)) in the first reception-permitting state, whereas in the fourth reception-permitting state it is displayed in one of multiple modes excluding the special mode (Fig. 232 (a) to (c)). Therefore, by checking the operation-related display, it is possible to guess whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if it is not possible to guess whether the mode is strong or weak suppression mode at the time when the output of the reception permission sound or the operation-related display is terminated, it is possible to guess whether the mode is strong or weak suppression mode by checking the execution mode of the post-operation performance. That is, in the post-operation performance according to the fourth reception permission state (fourth post-operation performance), both the "performance by the liquid crystal display" and the "performance by the performance sound" are "performed for a certain period of time from the time when the performance is accepted", whereas in the post-operation performance according to the first reception permission state (first post-operation performance), the "performance by the performance sound" is "performed for a certain period of time from the time when the performance is accepted", but the "performance by the liquid crystal display" is "ended when a predetermined timing arrives". In other words, in this case, in the post-operation performance corresponding to the first reception permission state, the time from when the "performance by the liquid crystal display" ends to when the "performance by the performance sound" ends is variable depending on the timing of the operation reception, and since a large discrepancy occurs, by checking this discrepancy it is possible to guess whether the mode is strong or weak suppression mode.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, by checking the execution mode of the pre-performance and the disappearance effect for the acceptance permission state, it is also possible to guess whether the mode is strong suppression mode or weak suppression mode. That is, in the pre-performance and the disappearance effect according to the fourth acceptance permission state, an image related to the pre-performance and the disappearance effect is displayed in a relatively narrow area, and at the same time, the background image is not changed, whereas in the pre-performance and the disappearance effect according to the first acceptance permission state, an image related to the pre-performance and the disappearance effect is displayed in a relatively wide area, and at the same time, the background image is changed. By checking such modes, it is also possible to guess whether the mode is strong suppression mode or weak suppression mode.

However, even if presentation elements that aid in guessing are scattered chronologically in this way, some players may not notice them, and as a result may not be able to guess whether the mode is strong or weak suppression, which could ultimately reduce interest in the game.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the fourth reception-permitting state (weak suppression mode), the BGM playback effect sound is set to the weak suppression mode based on the fact that the effect reception is made within the set time (valid period). In contrast, in the first reception-permitting state (strong suppression mode or non-output), the BGM playback effect sound is set to the strong suppression mode from a situation in which the set time (valid period) has not yet occurred, and the set time (valid period) occurs while in the strong suppression mode, so that the effect reception can be made. With this configuration, the timing for suppressing a specific type of effect sound (for example, the BGM playback effect sound) differs between the fourth reception-permitting state (weak suppression mode) and the first reception-permitting state (strong suppression mode), so that it is possible to infer whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode by checking the timing.

Moreover, in the fourth acceptance permission state (weak suppression mode) according to this embodiment, unlike the first acceptance permission state (strong suppression mode or non-output), if no operation is detected within a set time (valid period), the post-operation effect is not automatically generated (see FIG. 253 (h)). In other words, in this case, if no operation is detected within a set time (valid period), the suppression process (weak suppression mode) triggered by the acceptance of an operation for a specific type of sound effect (for example, sound effect for playing background music) is not performed, so although there is a cost in that the post-operation effect cannot be confirmed, it becomes possible to recognize that the mode was the weak suppression mode and not the strong suppression mode.

In addition, in the first acceptance permission state (strong suppression mode or non-output) according to this embodiment, the timing at which the process of changing the "BGM playback sound effects" to the strong suppression mode ends is set to be the same as or earlier than the end timing of the post-operation performance. Therefore, in the fourth acceptance permission state (weak suppression mode), if the timing at which the process of changing the "BGM playback sound effects" to the weak suppression mode ends can arrive after the end timing of the post-operation performance, it becomes possible to infer whether the mode is strong or weak suppression by checking the timing at which the "BGM playback sound effects" are returned to the non-suppression mode.

As described above, in the fourth reception permission state according to the above performance example, the length of the period during which the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) on the performance display device 1600 (first performance component) and the post-operation output sound (performance sound) by the speaker (second performance component) are performed in parallel remains unchanged, regardless of when the performance reception is made within the set time (valid period). In contrast, in the first reception permission state, the length of the period during which the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) on the performance display device 1600 (first performance component) and the post-operation output sound (performance sound) by the speaker (second performance component) are performed in parallel changes depending on when the performance reception is made within the set time (valid period).

This configuration adds drama to "when the performance acceptance (operation) is performed," making it possible to maintain interest in the game in an optimal manner until the performance acceptance (operation) is performed.

The weak suppression mode, which outputs the "BGM playback sound effects" at a lower degree of suppression than the strong suppression mode, may be made to appear even when no operation opportunity is given (when the fourth reception allowance state does not occur). In other words, in this case, after the "BGM playback sound effects" are in the weak suppression mode for a predetermined time, they are returned from the weak suppression mode to the non-suppression mode without being given an operation opportunity. In addition, if the number of times that the weak suppression mode, including the fourth reception allowance state, appears in the performance according to one variation pattern increases, the rate at which the degree of suppression is further increased (the rate at which the first reception allowance state is further executed) increases, and this makes it possible to further improve the performance through the suppression state for the "BGM playback sound effects".

The strong suppression mode for the "BGM playback sound effects" may also be made to appear when no operation opportunity is given (when the first reception permissible state does not occur). In other words, in this case, after the "BGM playback sound effects" are in the strong suppression mode for a predetermined period of time, they are returned from the strong suppression mode to the non-suppression mode without any operation opportunity being given. With this configuration, it becomes possible to provide a performance regarding whether or not an operation opportunity is given when the strong suppression mode appears.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 253, when the fourth reception allowable state occurs, the "BGM playback performance sound" is set to the suppressed mode (weakly suppressed mode) based on the fact that the operation is accepted within the set time (valid period). However, instead of this, even if the fourth reception allowable state occurs, the "BGM playback performance sound" may be set to the suppressed mode (weakly suppressed mode) before the set time occurs, as in the case of the first reception allowable state, and a set time (valid period) during which the performance acceptance is allowed while in the suppressed mode (weakly suppressed mode) may be generated. In this case, depending on whether a special result is obtained in the performance judgment (preview judgment, etc.), the "BGM playback performance sound" may or may not be set to the suppressed mode (weakly suppressed mode) when a predetermined timing arrives, so that the range of performance can be expanded. In the fourth reception allowable state, it is desirable that the timing at which the "BGM playback performance sound" is returned from the suppressed mode (weakly suppressed mode) to the non-suppressed mode arrives at the same time as or later than the timing at which the post-operation performance ends.

The weak suppression mode may be to set the volume value (audible volume) of the "specific type of performance sound" to a specific suppression value (a number greater than 0) that is lower than in the non-suppression mode, and output the sound in an audible state, while the strong suppression mode may be to make the "specific type of performance sound" inaudible (output silently (audible volume is 0) or not output (channel allocation is terminated)).

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance examples, it is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is the operation target and the operation opportunity is given in the same operation mode. In this regard, in the "fourth reception allowance state", only the operation button 410 is used as the operation target (first operation mode), but in the "first reception allowance state", as described above, there are "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" and "when the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)" based on the result of the advance notice performance judgment. Therefore, when the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode), it is easy to recognize that it is not the weak suppression mode but the strong suppression mode. Note that the post-operation performance in response to the performance reception is the same in "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" and "when the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)".

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation means to be operated are:
The operation opportunity can be given in any of a plurality of modes, including a first operation mode in which the operation receiving part (the part that the player touches when operating) is not moved when the set time (valid period) occurs, and a second operation mode in which the operation receiving part is moved to a specific position by a driving force when the set time (valid period) occurs. Note that the "first operation mode" here assumes a case in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, and the "second operation mode" assumes a case in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001, and the sword decoration 5001 "can give an operation opportunity to the player in a state in which it has moved to a specific position". However, one operation means (one operation receiving part) may have a "first operation mode" and a "second operation mode", respectively, and an operation opportunity may be given in any of these modes. Also, as described above, in the first reception permission state, an operation opportunity may always be given to the sword decoration 5001.

According to the above-mentioned performance example, in a reception permissible state (suppressed reception performance) where the post-operation performance is set to be executed while the "BGM playback performance sound" is output in a suppressed mode or is not output, when the model image (integrated model image) is displayed in a special mode (Fig. 232 (d)), this means that the reception permissible state is the "first reception permissible state (strong suppressed mode)," and when the model image (integrated model image) is displayed in a special mode (Fig. 232 (a)), this means that the reception permissible state is the "first reception permissible state (strong suppressed mode or not output)" or the "fourth reception permissible state (weakly suppressed mode)."

In this case, when the Momo image (integrated Momo image) is displayed in the special mode (Fig. 232(d)), if an operation is accepted while the acceptance-permitted sound is in the middle of being output, this will be terminated (first acceptance-permitted state). In contrast, when the Momo image (integrated Momo image) is displayed in the normal mode (Fig. 232(a)), if an operation is accepted while the acceptance-permitted sound is in the middle of being output, this will either be terminated or not (first acceptance-permitted state, fourth acceptance-permitted state). With this configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain the interest in playing when the Momo image (integrated Momo image) is displayed in the normal mode (Fig. 232(a)).

Furthermore, when the Mosaic image (integrated Mosaic image) is displayed in the special mode (Fig. 232 (d)), the reception permission state will be executed in the automatic reception mode (first reception permission state). In contrast, when the Mosaic image (integrated Mosaic image) is displayed in the normal mode (Fig. 232 (a)), the reception permission state will be executed in either the automatic reception mode or the non-automatic reception mode (first reception permission state, fourth reception permission state). With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately maintain the sense of tension when the Mosaic image (integrated Mosaic image) is displayed in the normal mode (Fig. 232 (a)).

In this regard, when the mock-up image (integrated mock-up image) is displayed in the normal mode (Fig. 232(a)), the size of the display may be made different when the first reception permission state occurs and when the fourth reception permission state occurs. With this configuration, it becomes possible to recognize whether the reception permission sound will end midway and whether it will be executed in the automatic reception mode or the non-automatic reception mode.

In addition, according to the above-mentioned performance example, by checking whether the pre-performance is executed as a "wide-area pre-performance" or a "narrow-area pre-performance", it becomes easier to check whether a specific type of performance sound (sound of BGM playback) is in a "weakly suppressed mode" or a "strongly suppressed mode or non-output" mode when it is suppressed. Then, by checking whether an operation is terminated midway when an acceptance permission sound is output while the operation is performed, it becomes possible to reconfirm while the post-operation performance is being performed whether it is in a "weakly suppressed mode (not terminated midway)" or a "strongly suppressed mode or non-output (terminated midway)".

In addition, according to the above-mentioned performance example, when the strong suppression mode or non-output is adopted, the wide-area pre-performance is executed with the specific type of performance sound (BGM playback sound) in the strong suppression mode or non-output, whereas when the weak suppression mode is adopted, the narrow-area pre-performance is executed with the specific type of performance sound (BGM playback sound) not in the weak suppression mode. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to maintain the performance quality when the narrow-area pre-performance is performed.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the first acceptance allowance state has a higher probability of executing a mode that only appears at the time of a jackpot as a post-operation performance (higher expectation) than the second acceptance allowance state. This percentage may be 0% or 100%. However, according to each of the above-mentioned performance examples, different performance contents (acceptance allowance sound, mock image, pre-performance, etc.) appear when the first acceptance allowance state (special acceptance allowance state) occurs and when the second acceptance allowance state (predetermined acceptance allowance state) occurs, even before the operation is accepted. Therefore, if the player is made aware in advance that the second acceptance allowance state will occur (or has occurred) due to such performance contents, there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease.

In this example, the pachinko machine 1 further provides a fifth acceptance allowance state (specific acceptance allowance state) that is generated based on the establishment of a fifth condition in a performance determination based on the result of a jackpot determination as one of the multiple acceptance allowance states, and while the fifth acceptance allowance state is difficult to distinguish from the second acceptance allowance state until an operation is accepted, after the operation is accepted, a performance progress that is reminiscent of the first acceptance allowance state is realized, so that a decrease in interest in the game is unlikely to occur at least until an operation is accepted. In order to preferably obtain such an effect, it is desirable to set the rate at which the first acceptance allowance state occurs after the fifth acceptance allowance state occurs to be higher than when the second acceptance allowance state occurs until the pattern is stopped. It is also desirable to set the rate at which the jackpot pattern is stopped when the second acceptance allowance state occurs and when the fifth acceptance allowance state occurs to be different from each other. These rates may be 0% or 100%.

A method for realizing a performance progression that is reminiscent of the first acceptance allowable state after an operation is accepted in the fifth acceptance allowable state while making it difficult to distinguish between the second acceptance allowable state and the fifth acceptance allowable state is, for example, to first output the same type of acceptance allowable sound when the second acceptance allowable state and the fifth acceptance allowable state occur, but when the first acceptance allowable state occurs, output is an acceptance allowable sound that cannot be output in either the second acceptance allowable state or the fifth acceptance allowable state (for example, a different type of sound as the first acceptance allowable state, or an additional type that outputs the second acceptance allowable sound). When an operation is accepted in the second acceptance state, the post-operation performance (second post-operation performance) is executed while the sound that was in the output state at the time of the operation acceptance is continuously output, whereas in the first acceptance state or the fifth acceptance state, when an operation is accepted, the sound (all of the sounds) that were in the output state at the time of the operation acceptance are output in a suppressed mode or are not output, and the post-operation performance (first post-operation performance or fifth post-operation performance) is executed in this state. In this regard, if a specific performance movable body is used as an object that causes a change in both the first post-operation performance and the fifth post-operation performance, it is possible to realize a performance progress that reminds the first acceptance state after the operation is accepted in the fifth acceptance state, while making it difficult to distinguish between the second acceptance state and the fifth acceptance state. This makes the player aware of the possibility that the first acceptance state has occurred (the possibility that the acceptance acceptance sound has been misheard), and is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In this case, in the first reception-permitting state, at least a performance using a specific performance movable body will be executed as a post-operation performance (first post-operation performance), and as such a performance, for example, it is possible to perform a movable performance (such as the performances shown in Figures 162 (C) and (D) and Figures 163 (CC1) to (CC3)) in which the specific performance movable body is moved to the front of the display area of the performance display device 1600.

In contrast, even in the fifth reception allowance state, at least a performance using a specific performance movable body is executed as a post-operation performance (fifth post-operation performance), but it is desirable to execute this performance with a performance content significantly different from that of the first post-operation performance. In other words, the fifth reception allowance state is prepared solely for the purpose of "maintaining interest in playing at least until the operation is accepted, even if a situation arises in which the pre-operation performance or the state of the reception allowance sound suggests the possibility of the occurrence of the second reception allowance state with low expectations." If the player is given the mistaken belief that the first reception allowance state has occurred at the time the post-operation performance is executed, a decrease in interest in playing will be unavoidable when the player realizes the mistake.

Therefore, for this type of post-operation performance (fifth post-operation performance), it is desirable to perform a performance that tends to be more restrained than the first post-operation performance, and it is possible to perform this as a performance that produces a performance change such as reducing the light-emitting range of a specific performance movable body that was in an emitting state at the time the operation was accepted, or making it non-emitting, without operating it (without generating a driving force). Note that in the second post-operation performance, there is no performance change that tends to be restrained, such as reducing the light-emitting range of a specific performance movable body or making it non-emitting. Note that in this case, the specific movable decorative body will have a specified light-emitting section.

With this configuration, a change in presentation is caused using a specific presentation movable body to remind the player of the first reception-permitted state (first operation post-presentation), which allows the player to recognize that the player is not in the second reception-permitted state (second operation post-presentation). However, as the suppressed presentation content is gradually revealed, the player is able to calmly determine that the player is not in the first reception-permitted state (first operation post-presentation), which is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In order to more suitably execute the fifth post-operation performance as a performance that tends to be more restrained than the first post-operation performance, in the first post-operation performance, the operation means (operation receiving part such as an operation button) that is the object of operation is made to emit light (or cause a change in the emitted light) when an operation is accepted, and a drive means (motor, etc.) provided corresponding to the operation means is driven to cause it to make a predetermined movement (vibration, etc.), whereas in the fifth post-operation performance, it is desirable to turn off the operation means (operation receiving part such as an operation button) that is the object of operation (operation receiving part such as an operation button) (which may be turned off gradually) when an operation is accepted, and not drive the drive means (motor, etc.) provided corresponding to the operation means so as not to cause the predetermined movement (vibration, etc.). In this way, while the post-operation performance (first post-operation performance, fifth post-operation performance) is executed for the same movable ornament in the first reception-permitting state and the fifth reception-permitting state, the first post-operation performance and the fifth post-operation performance are made to have completely opposite performance contents, thereby enabling the above-mentioned action and effect to be optimally achieved.

Figure 254 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the fifth condition is satisfied and the fifth reception permissible state occurs under the specific setting condition (presentation setting). Figure 254 is a diagram showing an example of presentation in a fluctuation pattern in which the fifth reception permissible state occurs. This fluctuation pattern is described as the fifth fluctuation pattern, but as mentioned above, it may be the first fluctuation pattern.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved time consumed) in the normal game state (no chance of winning or time reduction), and the "5th fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the 5th fluctuation pattern. After this, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 5th fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 5th fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started, and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "5th fluctuation pattern" itself.

As described above, in the fifth variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 254(b), when the fifth predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ, the fifth reception permission state (valid period) in which operation reception regarding the fifth post-operation performance is permitted is generated at the timing tE3. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the fifth reception permission state (valid period) is generated as follows:
- "Non-suppression acceptance permission state (see FIG. 254 (a) and (b))" in which operation acceptance is permitted while the "sound of BGM playback (specific type of effect sound)" according to the fifth variation pattern is maintained in an output state in a non-suppression mode, and - "automatic acceptance mode (see FIG. 254 (i))" in which a post-operation performance is started when timing tE3c within the set time arrives, even if no operation on the operation means that is the object of operation is detected within the set time (timing tE3 to tE4) in which operation acceptance is permitted.
The timing tE3c does not necessarily have to arrive within the set time, and may arrive when or after the set time ends.

With this configuration, until the post-operation performance starts, a situation appears as if the second reception-permitting state is occurring, but once the post-operation performance starts due to the automatic reception mode, a performance progression is realized that is reminiscent of the first reception-permitting state, so that interest in the game can be maintained in an optimal manner until the post-operation performance starts.

Also, in the fifth acceptance allowable state, as shown in Figs. 254(b), (e), and (j), similar to the second acceptance allowable state, the "acceptance allowable sound (here, the first acceptable sound)" starts to be output when timing tE2 arrives, which is slightly before the set time (timings tE3 to tE4) at which operation acceptance is allowed occurs, and the output state is maintained across timing tE3 at which the set time occurs. The length of time from when the first acceptable sound starts to be output until operation acceptance is allowed is also the same. Not only is the sound itself output as the first acceptable sound the same, but the second acceptable sound (message sound) is not output, which is similar to the second acceptance allowable state. As a result, the acceptance allowable sound has the same appearance in the second acceptance allowable state and the fifth acceptance allowable state until operation acceptance is performed, and it is expected that interest in playing will be maintained in a good condition.

However, as described above, in the second acceptance state, if an operation is accepted at timing tB3a (Figure 249 (e)) when the "acceptance allowable sound (first acceptable sound)" is in an output state after the set time (valid period) has occurred, the set time itself is terminated, but the "acceptance allowable sound (first acceptable sound)" is not terminated midway, and its output state is maintained until it has finished being output as the first acceptable sound (timing tB3c (Figure 249 (e)) which is the same as when no operation has been performed.In contrast, in the fifth acceptance state, if an operation is accepted at timing tB3a (Figure 249 (e)) when the "acceptance allowable sound (first acceptable sound)" is in an output state after the set time (valid period) has occurred, If an operation is accepted at timing tE3a (FIG. 254(e)), not only will the set time itself end, but the "acceptance permitted sound (first acceptable sound)" will also be terminated. In other words, with regard to the "acceptance permitted sound (first acceptable sound)," this behavior (termination midway) appears when an operation is accepted in the first acceptable state (FIG. 250(e)), so even though the fifth acceptable state is occurring, a performance progression reminiscent of the first acceptable state is realized, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In the example performance shown in FIG. 254, when an operation is accepted within the set time of the fifth acceptance allowance state (timing tE3a in the figure), a post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) on the performance display device 1600 (first performance component) and a post-operation output sound (performance sound) by the speaker (second performance component) are generated as post-operation performances in response to the operation acceptance (see FIG. 254(d)). In the figure, the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) maintains an execution state until timing tE5 regardless of when the operation is accepted, and the post-operation output sound (performance sound) maintains an execution state for a predetermined period of time, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the post-operation display performance (liquid crystal display) does not necessarily have to be executed.

Although not shown in the figure, in this performance example, in both the post-operation performance corresponding to the fifth reception allowable state (fifth post-operation performance) and the post-operation performance corresponding to the first reception allowable state (first post-operation performance), at least a "performance using a specific performance movable body" is executed. The performance contents of the "performance using a specific performance movable body" corresponding to the first reception allowable state and the "performance using a specific performance movable body" corresponding to the fifth reception allowable state are as described above. For example, as the first post-operation performance, it is possible to perform a moving performance (such as the performance shown in Figures 162 (C), (D), and 163 (CC1) to (CC3)) in which the specific performance movable body is moved to the front side of the display area of the performance display device 1600. As the fifth post-operation performance, it is possible to perform a performance change such as reducing the light-emitting range of the specific performance movable body that was in a light-emitting state at the time of the operation reception or changing it to a non-light-emitting state.

With this configuration, a change in presentation is caused using a specific presentation movable body to remind the player of the first reception-permitted state (first operation post-presentation), which allows the player to recognize that the player is not in the second reception-permitted state (second operation post-presentation). However, as the suppressed presentation content is gradually revealed, the player is able to calmly determine that the player is not in the first reception-permitted state (first operation post-presentation), which is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Also, in the example of the presentation shown in FIG. 254 (fifth reception-permitting state), similarly to the example of the presentation shown in FIG. 249 (second reception-permitting state), when the timing tE2 arrives before the timing tE3 at which the set time for the reception-permitting state is set, the presentation display device 1600 displays a model image of the operation means to be operated, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the set time has elapsed. The display mode of these model images and gauge images is also the same as that of the second reception-permitting state, and for example, they are displayed as an integrated model image IG. The same is also true in that the special mode shown in FIG. 232(d) is not displayed as the integrated model image IG. As a result, the same mode appears for the model image and gauge image in the second reception-permitting state and the fifth reception-permitting state until the operation is accepted, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained.

In this example, the timing at which the imitation image is displayed is the same as the time at which the reception-permitted sound (first reception-permitted sound) starts to be output, but this is not limited to the above, and either one may start earlier. Alternatively, only one of the imitation image or the reception-permitted sound (for example, only the imitation image) may start before timing tE3. However, even when adopting such an alternative example or the other alternative examples described above, it is desirable to match the configuration until operation reception is performed between the second reception-permitted state and the fifth reception-permitted state.

254(c)-(f), it is assumed that timing tE3a arrives while such an integrated model image (model image, gauge image) is being displayed, and an operation is accepted. When an operation is accepted under such circumstances, the pachinko machine 1 in this example will start a fifth post-operation performance (at least one of a display change in the performance display device 1600, a performance sound change in the speaker, a light emission change by the lamp, and a performance action by the movable ornament), but in the pachinko machine 1 in this example, when the fifth post-operation performance starts, the integrated model image (model image, gauge image) is not hidden, but remains displayed. More specifically, even if an operation is accepted, at that point (timing tE3a) no changes are made to the integrated model image (specific layer) due to the operation, and until timing tE3b arrives, which is a short time (predetermined time), the "display of the integrated model image (model image, gauge image)" continues in the same manner as when the operation acceptance is permitted, and the display area of the gauge image also continues to decrease in the same manner as before.

Then, when timing tE3b arrives, an image (disappearance effect) is displayed in such a way that a part or the whole of the integrated Momo image (Momo image, gauge image) in the displayed state is made difficult or impossible to see. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this performance example, the integrated Momo image (Momo image, gauge image) is not hidden even at the time when such an image (disappearance effect) starts to be displayed, and maintains its displayed state. More specifically, even when the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tE3b), in the layer in which the integrated Momo image (Momo image, gauge image) is displayed, no change is caused by the disappearance effect, and the display area of the gauge image is allowed to decrease in the same manner as before. However, by displaying the disappearance effect in a layer ahead of it, the Momo image and the gauge image are made difficult or impossible to see.

In other words, in this case, even though the disappearance effect image is displayed on a specified layer with the aim of making the mosaic image and gauge image (integrated mosaic image) difficult to view or impossible to view, the mosaic image and gauge image (integrated mosaic image) displayed on a specific layer (behind the specified layer (lower priority side)) are themselves maintained in the same state as when operation acceptance was permitted, and no changes are made. Also, the gauge image is displayed with its display area continually reduced, continuing across operation acceptance. This makes it possible to view (at least a part of) the state when operation acceptance was permitted, even while the mosaic image and gauge image (integrated mosaic image) are in the process of being difficult to view or impossible to view.

In addition, during the period in which the disappearance effect image is displayed (timing tE3b to tE3e), the display output (display on the layer) for the integrated model image (model image, gauge image) is terminated, and from this point onwards, the disappearance effect image is displayed in a situation in which the integrated model image (model image, gauge image) is not displayed on the layer either.

The display method for the model images and gauge images after an operation has been accepted is the same for both the first and fifth acceptance allowing states, so this will not decrease interest in the game.

In the example shown in FIG. 254, as in the example shown in FIG. 249, when timing tE1 arrives before timing tE3 at which the fifth reception allowable state occurs, a narrow-area pre-performance using less than half of the specified display area is started. Then, during the period in which an image related to such a narrow-area pre-performance is displayed, first, the display of a mock image (here, an integrated mock image) that imitates the operation receiving part and the output of the first allowable sound are started (timing tE2). At the time when the display of the mock image (here, an integrated mock image) starts, a part or the whole of the mock image (integrated mock image) is difficult to see due to the image related to the narrow-area pre-performance. In other words, as time passes, the range in which the image related to the narrow-area pre-performance is displayed is reduced or its transmittance is increased, thereby providing a performance in which the visibility of the mock image (integrated mock image) is gradually increased. In this regard, even in the fifth reception-permitting state, the narrow-area pre-show is being executed, and the mock image (here, the integrated mock image) is being displayed, and the timing tE3 at which the fifth reception-permitting state occurs arrives, allowing operation reception, and the narrow-area pre-show is performed across the timing tE3 at which the fifth reception-permitting state occurs.

The image used in such a narrow-area pre-performance may be, for example, an image displayed in a separate layer before the layer in which the mosaic image (integrated mosaic image) is displayed, or the mosaic image (integrated mosaic image) and the image (narrow-area pre-performance) may be displayed as a single video prepared in advance, and the video may express the gradually increasing visibility of the mosaic image (integrated mosaic image IG). However, it is preferable to use the same image for the narrow-area pre-performance corresponding to the fifth reception allowance state as the image for the narrow-area pre-performance corresponding to the second reception allowance state.

In addition, in the narrow-area pre-performance, not only the image display on the performance display device 1600 but also the output of related performance sounds may be performed. However, considering that the second reception permissible state is executed in a non-automatic reception mode and is intended to maintain tension regarding operations, it can be said that it is desirable to execute the narrow-area pre-performance as an image display on the performance display device 1600 without outputting related performance sounds, in order to increase concentration on the performance.

In this way, the same behavior appears in the narrow-area pre-effect that occurs before operation acceptance is permitted in the second acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state, so it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in an optimal manner.

With this configuration, until an operation is accepted, the presentation will progress in the same manner as the presentation content shown in Figures 251 (a) to (e). Therefore, even if the player knows in advance that the relatively highly anticipated first acceptance allowance state has not occurred, it will be interesting to wonder whether the second or fifth acceptance allowance state will occur, and this is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

However, as mentioned above, once a player's operation is detected in the fifth reception-permitting state and the post-operation presentation (fifth post-operation presentation) begins, the presentation will progress in a manner reminiscent of the first reception-permitting state, rather than the second reception-permitting state.

That is, in the presentation example shown in FIG. 254, when an operation by the player is detected (operation acceptance) in the fifth acceptance state, (all of) the sounds that were in the non-suppressed output state at the time the operation was accepted are switched to the output state in the strongly suppressed mode or to the non-output state, and this is terminated midway. In the example shown in FIG. 250 (first acceptance state), when an operation is accepted, the "first permissible sound" and "second permissible sound" that were in the non-suppressed output state are switched to the output state in the strongly suppressed mode or to the non-output state, and these are terminated midway, but in the example shown in FIG. 254 (fifth acceptance state), when an operation is accepted, the "BGM playback sound" and "first permissible sound" that were in the non-suppressed output state are switched to the output state in the strongly suppressed mode or to the non-output state, and these are terminated midway. As a result, in both the second acceptance allowing state and the fifth acceptance allowing state, (all of) the sounds that were in an unsuppressed output state before the operation was accepted will be put into a strongly suppressed output state or into a non-output state upon the acceptance of the operation, which will evoke the first acceptance allowing state at timing tE3a shown in FIG. 254, and is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In this case, it is acceptable to use either the strongly suppressed output state or the non-output state in response to the operation reception, but it is desirable to perform the same processing in the second reception allowing state and the fifth reception allowing state. For example, if in the second reception allowing state, the operation reception is used to switch a sound that was previously in a non-suppressed output state to a non-output state, then in the fifth reception allowing state, the operation reception is also used to switch a sound that was previously in a non-suppressed output state to a non-output state.

In contrast to this, the example shown in Figures 254 (g) to (k) assumes that the set time has passed (the second reception permission state has ended) without any operation by the player being detected. As described above, the fifth reception permission state is executed in an automatic reception mode, so when the predetermined timing tE3c arrives without any operation by the player, the same processing as when an operation is received is executed.

Therefore, at timing tE3c, not only does the post-operation performance (fifth post-operation performance) begin to be executed, but the sound that was previously in an unsuppressed mode (here, the sound of BGM playback) is switched to an output state in a strongly suppressed mode or to a non-output state, and these are terminated midway. Even in the first reception permissible state (Fig. 250), a specified sound (for example, the first permissible sound) may be output in an unsuppressed mode until timing tC4f arrives at which the automatic button function is enabled, and at that timing tC4f, the sound may be switched to an output state in a strongly suppressed mode or to a non-output state, and terminated midway.

At timing tE3d, while the fifth post-operation performance is already in the execution state, the "wide-area type extinction effect" is started to be executed as the extinction effect described above. The image of the "wide-area type extinction effect" does not necessarily have to be the same as that in the first reception-permitting state, but it is desirable to execute it as an extinction effect accompanied by a change from the background image displayed until the operation is accepted. In other words, in this case, it goes without saying that it will be executed using at least half of the display area. As a result, the extinction effect after the operation is accepted (after the post-operation performance is executed) will be executed in the same manner (wide-area type extinction effect) in both the second reception-permitting state and the fifth reception-permitting state, so that the first reception-permitting state can be recalled after the operation is accepted (after the post-operation performance is executed), and it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition. The manner of such an extinction effect is the same when the operation is accepted (timing tE3b) and when the automatic button function is enabled (timing tE3c), and this point is also the same as in the first reception-permitting state.

In the example shown in FIG. 254, the timing at which the "BGM playback sound" is again output in a non-suppressed mode in the fifth reception-permitting state is set to be the timing tE5 at which the post-operation performance (fifth post-operation performance) ends, but it may be a timing that arrives while the post-operation performance (fifth post-operation performance) is being executed, or a timing that arrives after the post-operation performance (fifth post-operation performance) has ended.

In addition, in the first acceptance state, as in the fifth acceptance state, the timing for putting the "BGM playback sound" into a suppressed output state or into a non-output state may be when an operation is accepted.

In the first acceptance state or the fifth acceptance state, the process of changing the sound that was previously in a non-suppressed output state to "output in suppressed mode" or "non-output state" and the process of outputting the output sound after an operation do not necessarily need to be started at the same time, as long as both processes are started based on the acceptance of an operation.

As described above, when an operation is accepted in the fifth acceptance state, it is desirable to use this as an opportunity to turn off the specific performance movable body that was previously in a light-emitting state for a predetermined time (fifth post-operation performance), whereas when an operation is accepted in the first acceptance state, it is desirable to use this as an opportunity to apply a driving force to the specific performance movable body so that a predetermined performance action appears (first post-operation performance). In addition, in the first post-operation performance, a driving force is generated for the driving means corresponding to the operation means that is the operation target, so that a predetermined movement (such as vibration) appears in the operation means, whereas in the fifth post-operation performance, it is desirable not to perform such processing. In addition, in the first post-operation performance, it is desirable to change the light-emitting state of the operation means that is the operation target, whereas in the fifth post-operation performance, it is desirable to turn off the light-emitting state of the operation means that is the operation target. It is desirable that these processing in the first acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state are in a state that can appear when the same result (for example, a jackpot win) is obtained as a result of the jackpot determination.

In addition, if a moving performance is performed by a specific performance movable object in the first post-operation performance, it is desirable to make it possible to emit light in a manner that does not appear when the specific performance movable object is not in operation.

In addition, in the first post-operation performance, the sound effect corresponding to the operation reception is output continuously after it starts, whereas in the fifth post-operation performance, it is desirable that after the sound effect corresponding to the operation reception has been output for a predetermined period of time, a state in which no sound effect is output in a non-suppressed mode (a state in which sound effect is output in a strongly suppressed mode, or a state in which no sound effect is output) appears. With this configuration, in the fifth post-operation performance, the sound effect corresponding to the operation reception is properly executed, but it is possible to make it tend to be more suppressed compared to the first post-operation performance, which is expected to maintain the interest in the game in an appropriate manner.

It is also desirable to make the reception permissible sound output when the first reception permissible state and the fifth reception permissible state occur differently. That is, as described above, in the first reception permissible state, the first permissible sound (sound effect) and the second permissible sound (message sound) are output, whereas in the fifth reception permissible state, the second permissible sound (message sound) is not output, and the first permissible sound (sound effect) is output. However, it is desirable to output the first permissible sound (sound effect) itself as a different sound.

As described above, the same aspect (the aspect shown in FIG. 232 (a) to (c)) of the model image (integrated model image) can be displayed in the first reception allowing state and the fifth reception allowing state (second reception allowing state). However, even if the same aspect is displayed as the model image (integrated model image) in the first reception allowing state and the fifth reception allowing state (second reception allowing state), it is preferable to make the size of the display different (similar shape) and to display it in a smaller aspect in the fifth reception allowing state (second reception allowing state) than in the first reception allowing state. However, the size will be the same in the second reception allowing state and the fifth reception allowing state. Note that, in the first reception allowing state, a special aspect can be displayed as the model image (integrated model image), but in the fifth reception allowing state (second reception allowing state), a special aspect is not displayed as the model image (integrated model image), as described above.

In addition, in the first post-operation performance corresponding to the first reception permission state, it is desirable to start outputting a performance sound not triggered by operation reception (a performance sound output at a predetermined timing in the fluctuation pattern) in a non-suppressed mode while the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation reception is audibly output in a non-suppressed mode (for example, returning the BGM). In contrast, in the fifth post-operation performance corresponding to the fifth reception permission state, it is desirable to prevent outputting a performance sound not triggered by operation reception (a performance sound output at a predetermined timing in the fluctuation pattern) in a non-suppressed mode while the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation reception is audibly output in a non-suppressed mode. In other words, in this case, after the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation reception is put into a non-output state, outputting a performance sound not triggered by operation reception (a performance sound output at a predetermined timing in the fluctuation pattern) in a non-suppressed mode starts, so by adopting such a suppressed mode compared to the first reception permission state, it is possible to preferably maintain interest in the game.

As described above, the second acceptance allowable state may be allowed to occur in both a variation pattern in which the first acceptance allowable state occurs and a variation pattern in which the first acceptance allowable state does not occur, so that when the second acceptance allowable state occurs, there is a possibility that the first acceptance allowable state will occur within the period until the pattern variation in the execution state is stopped. Also, the fifth acceptance allowable state may be allowed to occur in both a variation pattern in which the first acceptance allowable state occurs and a variation pattern in which the first acceptance allowable state does not occur, so that when the fifth acceptance allowable state occurs, there is a possibility that the first acceptance allowable state will occur within the period until the pattern variation in the execution state is stopped. However, in this case, it is desirable to set the rate at which the first acceptance allowable state will occur within the period until the pattern variation is stopped to be higher than when the second acceptance allowable state occurs when the fifth acceptance allowable state occurs. This rate may include 0% or 100%. According to this configuration, even if the player notices in advance that the first acceptance allowable state has not occurred before the operation acceptance is performed, the player can expect the possibility that the fifth acceptance allowable state will occur, so that a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

According to the above-mentioned example of the performance, if an operation is accepted when the model image (integrated model image) is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (mode shown in FIG. 232(d)) and the accepted sound is not terminated midway based on the operation acceptance, not only the accepted sound but also other sounds (such as "BGM playback sound") that were in the output state in the non-suppressed mode will be maintained in the output state in the non-suppressed mode (see FIG. 249). In contrast, if an operation is accepted when the model image (integrated model image) is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (mode shown in FIG. 232(d)) and the accepted sound is terminated midway based on the operation acceptance, not only the accepted sound but also other sounds (such as "BGM playback sound") that were in the output state in the non-suppressed mode can be output or not output in the strong suppressed mode (see FIG. 254).

According to the above-mentioned example of the performance, when a jackpot is obtained by the jackpot judgment and the model image (integrated model image) is displayed, if an operation is accepted and the acceptance permission sound is terminated based on the operation acceptance, there are two cases based on the operation acceptance: "the specific performance movable body is made to emit light in a predetermined manner and a specific performance action is generated (Fig. 250)" and "the light-emitting area of the specific performance movable body that was in a light-emitting state is reduced or turned off, and no performance action is generated (Fig. 254)". Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest in the game in a suitable manner when the acceptance permission sound is terminated in the middle of the game. In addition, in the case of "the specific performance movable body is made to emit light in a predetermined manner and a specific performance action is generated by the process of reducing or turning off the light-emitting area of the specific performance movable body" (Fig. 250), it is desirable to make the non-light-emitting part illuminated by the "process of reducing or turning off the light-emitting area of the specific performance movable body" also illuminate.

In each of the above-mentioned and later-mentioned examples, the integrated model image may be displayed using multiple layers. Also, if the model image and gauge image are displayed separately as separate images rather than as an integrated image, they may be displayed on different layers.

In the examples described above and below, the first and second permissible sounds are output so that there is a period when they are output in overlapping relation to each other, but it is also possible to have the second permissible sound start to be output after the first permissible sound has finished being output.

In addition, in the acceptance acceptance state in each of the examples described above and below, the model image is displayed as an integrated model image IG including the gauge image GG, but it does not necessarily have to be displayed as an image including the gauge image GG.

The acceptable state in each of the examples above and below can occur in both the fluctuation pattern when there is a jackpot and the fluctuation pattern when there is a miss.

In each of the reception permission states described above and each of the reception permission states described below, when the post-operation performance is executed, a disappearance effect is executed as an image separate from the mock image, but it is preferable to execute the disappearance effect by fading out the mock image itself only when the post-operation performance is not executed as a result of execution in a non-automatic reception mode, in order to prevent the degree of expectation from being recognized. In this case, a process is executed in which the mock image itself displayed in a specific layer is changed from the state it was in when the reception permission state was in effect.

In each of the above-mentioned acceptance permission states and each of the acceptance permission states described below, even if the acceptance permission state is the same, the type of extinction effect may be changed depending on whether a jackpot has been won or not, or on the degree of expectation as a mode of post-operation performance.

The wide-area vanishing effect is set to more than half of the display screen, and the narrow-area vanishing effect is set to less than half of the display screen, but it does not necessarily have to meet the condition of more than half or less than half as long as "the display area of the wide-area vanishing effect > the display area of the narrow-area vanishing effect". Similarly, the front performance is set to more than half of the display screen, and the narrow-area front performance is set to less than half of the display screen, but it does not necessarily have to meet the condition of more than half or less than half as long as "the display area of the wide-area front performance > the display area of the narrow-area front performance".

The post-operation performance may be performed only by the LCD display, sound output, or light emitted by a lamp on the game board 5. In short, it is sufficient that some kind of change occurs in the display, sound, light emission, etc. in response to the acceptance of an operation.

In addition, the "specific type of sound effect" may be the sound of background music being played during normal fluctuations, or the sound of background music being played across multiple fluctuations.

In addition, the fourth reception permission state does not necessarily have to be executed in a non-automatic reception mode, but may be executed in an automatic reception mode.

It is also desirable to make the post-operation performance when an operation is accepted in the first acceptance state (first post-operation performance) different from the post-operation performance when an operation is accepted in the fourth acceptance state (fourth post-operation performance).

In each of the examples above and below, when the vanishing effect (specified layer) is displayed, processing may also be performed to reduce the visibility of the integrated model image IG (specific layer) itself (such as increasing the transparency).

In the above and below examples, the image associated with the vanishing effect (wide-area vanishing effect, narrow-area vanishing effect) may be displayed with a specified transparency, and in this case, even if it is displayed so as to overlap the entire mock image (integrated mock image), it is possible to confirm the appearance of the mock image (integrated mock image).

In each of the performance examples described above and below, a "narrow-area pre-performance" may mean a "pre-performance that does not involve a background change (a performance in which the previously displayed background image is made invisible and a performance is performed with a new background image being displayed)." In this case, a "wide-area pre-performance" means a "pre-performance that involves a background change (a performance in which the previously displayed background image is made invisible and a performance is performed with a new background image being displayed)." The background image may be a solid black or white image, for example.

In each of the above-mentioned examples and each of the examples described below, the form of the integrated imitation image shown in FIG. 232(d) may be omitted. In this case, the "special form" is used as a form in which the shape of the operation means (the imitation image that imitates the operation receiving portion itself is the same, and the shape of the peripheral decoration image is different (the form shown in FIG. 232(c)).

In each of the above-mentioned and later-mentioned examples of performance, when a mock image (integrated mock image) is displayed, as described above, the mock image is dynamically displayed in a form that expresses the "movement in the movable area" and "behavior when operated" as an operating means (operation receiving portion). In this regard, it is desirable that such dynamic display continue on a specific layer even after the operation is accepted until it is hidden.

In each of the above-mentioned and later-mentioned performance examples, the display method for the model image may be appropriately changed or added to the contents described in FIG. 232 to FIG. 248, the explanatory text corresponding to these figures, and other examples. In addition, the model image, gauge image, acceptance permission sound, and post-operation performance when the first acceptance permission state occurs may be appropriately changed or added to the contents applied to the explanatory text and other examples described in FIG. 212 to FIG. 248, the explanatory text corresponding to these figures, and other examples related to the "effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is in a strongly suppressed mode." In addition, the model image, gauge image, acceptance permission sound, and post-operation performance when the second acceptance permission state occurs may be appropriately changed or added to the contents applied to the explanatory text and other examples described in FIG. 212 to FIG. 248, the explanatory text corresponding to these figures, and other examples related to the "effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is in a non-suppressed mode."

[More detailed effects such as disappearance of images]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the start winning (reserved consumption). Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is capable of executing a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) as to which of a plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern is to be selectively displayed. Note that, depending on the result of this performance determination, all of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the above-mentioned selected variation pattern may be executed in sequence, or none of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) may be executed.

As described above, when such a performance judgment (variation pattern judgment, advance notice judgment, etc.) is made, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance content according to the result of the performance judgment, and a variable performance using a decorative pattern according to the result of the jackpot judgment is executed together with an expected performance (advance notice performance) related to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movement of the movable body (gimmick performance). As a result, when the variable performance using the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected performance related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., and the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the player can be given a special jackpot game or a transition to a high probability game state.

In this configuration, the variable presentation of the decorative patterns serves as a presentation with the "function of indicating whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination," and the expectation presentation related to the background depiction and the movement of the moving body serves as a presentation with the "function of suggesting the expectation of a jackpot being obtained, that is, the percentage (including 0% and 100%)." In other words, the player enjoys playing the game through these presentations.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if a specific variation pattern is selected from among the high expectation variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into an SP reach (such as a reach performance accompanied by a background change) as a result of the variation pattern determination, regardless of which result is obtained as the performance determination (such as a preview determination), when the pattern performance based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach (when a specified condition is met), an acceptance permission state (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the variation pattern determination, when a special result is obtained in the performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, if the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (if a predetermined condition is met), an acceptance allowance state (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination, the acceptance allowance state (valid period) will not be generated even if the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. Also, the acceptance allowance state (valid period) generated in the predetermined variation pattern is executed as a different performance from the acceptance allowance state (valid period) generated when the pattern performance based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach.

Note that, with regard to the fluctuation patterns that will generate an acceptance-permitted state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during the SP reach no matter which result is obtained as the preview performance judgment, other than the above-mentioned "specific fluctuation patterns" may be provided. However, it is preferable that the fluctuation patterns that will generate an acceptance-permitted state (valid period) at a predetermined timing no matter which result is obtained as the preview performance judgment are not included in the low expectation fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns), or that the selection rate for these patterns is low.

However, the acceptance permission state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions, etc., only executes a post-acceptance performance (post-operation performance) that generates a predetermined change to the performance component that is the target of the performance (at least one of the following: a display change on the performance display device 1600, a performance sound change on the speaker, a light emission change by the lamp, and a performance action by the movable decorative body) as long as an operation by the player is detected within the set time (valid period). Therefore, the acceptance permission state (valid period) itself has little performance value, and there is a concern that the interest in playing the game may decrease due to the acceptance period.

Incidentally, in the above-mentioned and later-mentioned examples, the "operation by the player" to be detected is not limited to operations that are directly performed by the player (pressing or unsheathing the sword), such as the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001", but also includes "contact actions by the player on a specific part" to be detected by a touch sensor, and "actions by the player in a specific space" to be detected by a non-contact sensor. In short, it is sufficient to have one or more acceptance means (operation means) that accept actions by the player (pressing, unsheathing, touching, non-contact, etc.) to be used in the presentation.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is designed to have, for example, the following special presentation characteristics. It is not necessary to have all of the presentation characteristics (configurations) described below; for example, even if the machine has at least one of the presentation characteristics (any configuration), it may be possible to reduce interest in playing, or it may selectively have several configurations that are considered necessary to obtain further effects, or it may adopt a configuration that is described as applicable to another configuration as appropriate. Furthermore, the presentation characteristics (configurations) described below are merely examples, and it is sufficient that the machine has some configuration that can suppress a decrease in interest in playing associated with the acceptance period.

[Configuration 1]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the replica image display, which is displayed using a specified area within the display screen (performance display device 1600), can be displayed even after the performance has progressed based on the acceptance of the player's action (after the performance change based on the acceptance has begun), so that the player can understand in what form (for example, Figures 232 (a) to (d)) the replica image display was displayed during the acceptance period, even after the performance has progressed based on the acceptance.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment provides multiple acceptance periods (valid periods) with different presentation contents (post-acceptance presentations such as conversation preview, cut-in preview, and moving object preview, which are types of preview presentations (expectation level suggestion presentations)) that are carried out when the ball is accepted, and it is possible to generate an acceptance period (valid period) of a different type according to the result of the judgment (presentation judgment).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as will be described later, if an action by a player is accepted within a specific acceptance period, a specific post-acceptance performance image can be displayed on the "performance display device 1600" based on the acceptance, and a specific mode can appear separately from the specific post-acceptance performance image, and when the specific mode appears, the replica image display becomes difficult to see. In other words, in this case, not only is it possible to check which mode appeared as the replica image display even after the acceptance has been made, but by reducing the visibility of the replica image display by the specific mode until it is made invisible, it is expected that the player's focus will naturally be shifted from the "replica image display" to the "specific post-acceptance performance image."

However, since the replica image display is originally displayed during the reception period before the reception has been made, if the replica image display is displayed after the reception has been made, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the specific post-reception performance image corresponding to the reception has already been displayed, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease. In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the replica image display is made invisible (invisible) while the specific mode is displayed, while the specific post-reception performance image is displayed while the specific mode is displayed. In other words, in this case, after the player's action is accepted, while the specific mode is displayed, the transition in the display performance from the pre-reception display (replica image display) to the post-reception display (specific post-reception performance image) is realized, so that it becomes easy to recognize whether or not the transition in the display performance from the pre-reception display (replica image display) to the post-reception display (specific post-reception performance image) has been completed simply by checking whether the state is before the specific mode appears or after the specific mode has finished appearing.

As will be described later, in pachinko machine 1, the specific mode and the specific post-acceptance performance image both appear based on the fact that the reception has been made, but the specific mode appears before the specific post-acceptance performance image is displayed, in a situation where the specific post-acceptance performance image has not yet been displayed. In other words, in this case, the imitation image display is made difficult to see by the specific mode in a situation where the specific post-acceptance performance image has not yet been displayed, so while the imitation image display is visible, the specific post-acceptance performance image may soon appear, and the player can be encouraged in advance to prepare himself or herself to change his or her gaze from the "difficult-to-see imitation image display."

[Configuration 2]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted during a first acceptance period (valid period) among the above-mentioned multiple acceptance periods (valid periods), a first post-acceptance performance image can be displayed based on the acceptance, and a mode (first performance mode) in which the model image display is difficult to see can be displayed separately from the first post-acceptance performance image. Also, when an action by a player is accepted during a second acceptance period among the above-mentioned multiple acceptance periods (valid periods), a second post-acceptance performance image different from the first post-acceptance performance image can be displayed based on the acceptance, and a mode (second performance mode) in which the model image display is difficult to see can be displayed separately from the second post-acceptance performance image. The above-mentioned "specific mode" may correspond to either the first performance mode or the second performance mode, or may not correspond to either one.

With this configuration, it becomes possible to infer the type of post-reception performance image (first post-reception performance image, second post-reception performance image) simply by checking the manner in which the imitation image display is difficult to see, without checking whether the "first post-reception performance image" or the "second post-reception performance image" is displayed as the post-reception performance image. In other words, it goes without saying that the manner in which the imitation image display is difficult to see (first performance manner, second performance manner) is realized as an image displayed in a specific area that at least partially overlaps with a predetermined area in which the imitation image display is displayed in the "display screen of the performance display device 1600" (if it overlaps with the entire area from the start of appearance, a predetermined transparency is set), or as a performance that uses a predetermined performance object (for example, a movable object performance, etc.) that is located in a position that overlaps with the imitation image display when viewed from the front. Therefore, even if a player does not change his/her gaze from the model image display after the reception, it is possible to confirm the type of appearance (first presentation mode, second presentation mode) that appears at the gaze point (so as to overlap with the model image display), and this makes it possible to guess the type of post-reception presentation (first post-reception presentation image, second post-reception presentation image) without changing the gaze point.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if an action (operation) by a player is accepted during the third acceptance period (valid period) among the multiple acceptance periods (valid periods), a third post-acceptance performance image different from both the first post-acceptance performance image and the second post-acceptance performance image can be displayed based on the fact that the action (operation) is accepted. However, in addition to the third post-acceptance performance image, the first performance mode that also corresponds to the first acceptance period can be displayed as a performance mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mock image display.

According to this configuration, when the first performance mode appears as a mode that makes it difficult to view the imitation image display, it is unclear which of the first and third post-reception performance images will appear, but when the second performance mode appears as a mode that makes it difficult to view the imitation image display, it is possible to guess that the second post-reception performance image will appear. That is, in this case, for example, when the first performance mode appears, it is possible to recognize that the possibility of the second post-reception performance image being output has been denied, but it is unclear which of the first and third post-reception performance images will appear, which makes it possible to arouse the player's interest in which one will appear, and therefore it is possible to appropriately encourage the player to shift their gaze to the location where the post-reception performance is being executed while maintaining the performance and tension when a mode that makes it difficult to view the imitation image display appears.

Here, the "post-acceptance performance image" has been described as an example of the post-acceptance performance, but if, for example, "lamp illumination" or "moving body operation" is executed in a different manner between the first and second acceptance periods as the post-acceptance performance (or if it is executed when the reception is made during one acceptance period, but not executed when the reception is made during the other acceptance period), the above-described "post-acceptance performance image" can be replaced with "lamp illumination" or "moving body operation". In any case, in consideration of the above-mentioned effect of "allowing the player to guess the type of post-acceptance performance without changing the gaze", the post-acceptance performance is realized as being executed at a position that is offset from the position where the model image display is displayed in front view and does not overlap (a position that the player cannot confirm unless he changes his gaze from the position where the model image display is displayed). In addition, if multiple post-acceptance performances such as "post-acceptance performance image", "lamp illumination", and "moving body operation" are performed in parallel based on the acceptance, the above-mentioned effect can be achieved as long as at least one of those post-acceptance performances corresponds to the above-mentioned "post-acceptance performance".

When multiple post-reception effects (multiple post-reception modes) such as "post-reception performance image," "lamp illumination," and "moving body operation" are performed in parallel based on the fact that the reception is confirmed, it is possible to make at least one of these post-reception effects (post-reception modes) equivalent to a "post-reception performance." This can be applied to the performance examples described above as well as the performance examples described below.

[Configuration 3]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an action by a player is accepted within a reception period (a specific reception period), a special presentation mode can be executed as a post-acceptance presentation (one aspect) based on that acceptance, and during the execution period of the special presentation mode, there are states in which the imitation image display is relatively easy to see and states in which the imitation image display is relatively difficult to see.

In other words, in this case, even after the execution of the special performance mode (post-reception performance) has begun based on the fact that the reception has been made, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the replica image display. Also, by making the replica image display relatively difficult to see during the execution of the special performance mode (post-reception performance), it is expected that the player will be encouraged to naturally shift their focus of attention from the "replica image display" to the "special performance mode (post-reception performance)."

In the pachinko machine 1, the special performance mode (post-reception performance) is started so as not to affect the visibility of the replica image display that is continuously displayed (displayed in an easily visible state) from before the reception. More specifically, the replica image display is displayed in a specified area within the display screen (performance display device 1600), but the special performance mode (post-reception performance) is not an image display that is displayed using at least a part of the specified area, nor is it a performance that is executed in a position that overlaps with at least a part of the specified area when viewed from the front. As a result, by making the replica image display relatively difficult to see during the execution period of the special performance mode (post-reception performance), it is expected that the player's focus will be naturally shifted from the "replica image display" to the "special performance mode (post-reception performance)".

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when acceptance is made within a specific acceptance period, a state in which at least the special presentation mode and the predetermined presentation mode are performed in parallel appears based on the acceptance. However, the predetermined presentation mode is started to be executed after the special presentation mode has started to be executed (later than the special presentation mode) so as to adversely affect the visibility of the replica image display (making the replica image display difficult to see). This makes it relatively difficult to see the replica image display during the execution period of the special presentation mode (post-acceptance presentation), which is expected to encourage the player to naturally shift his or her focus from the "replica image display" to the "special presentation mode (post-acceptance presentation)".

The process of making the specified performance mode appear also begins to be executed based on the fact that the reception has been made. Therefore, the post-reception performance may be realized as a combination of multiple post-reception performances (multiple post-reception modes) including at least a special performance mode and a specified performance mode, and the specified performance mode may be realized as one mode of the post-reception performance. In any case, the specified performance mode described in this configuration example is realized as an image display that is displayed using at least a portion of the specified area where the mock image display is displayed, or as a performance that is executed using a performance body that is positioned so as to overlap at least a portion of the specified area when viewed from the front.

[Configuration 4]
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when an action by a player is accepted within a reception period (specific reception period), while the replica image display is being displayed, a "specific disappearing effect display" can be displayed as a form of making the replica image display difficult to see, using a specific area including at least a part of the above-mentioned specified area which is the display target area of the replica image display, and the replica image display is made non-displayable while the specific disappearing effect display is being displayed after the specific disappearing effect display has started to be displayed.

In other words, in this case, even after the acceptance, it is possible to confirm which aspect of the model image display was appearing. Also, before the model image display is hidden, the visibility of the model image display is reduced by a specific disappearance effect display, and since the model image display is hidden while the visibility is reduced, it can be suggested that there is little time left until the model image display is hidden, and it can be suppressed that the decrease in interest in the game is suppressed when the model image display is hidden.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, the specific disappearance performance display can be displayed even during the period after the model image display is hidden, and the post-acceptance performance is started to be executed while at least the specific disappearance performance display is displayed. The post-acceptance performance is displayed using at least a part of the specific area that is the display target area of the specific disappearance performance display, or is realized as being executed using a performance body that is located in a position that overlaps with (at least a part of) the specific disappearance performance display when viewed from the front.

With this configuration, among the post-reception performances, the specific post-reception performance that is executed at a position that overlaps with the specific disappearance performance display when viewed from the front can be recognized without shifting the gaze from the position where the specific disappearance performance display is displayed. In other words, in this case, when the specific disappearance performance display is displayed, it becomes possible to recognize that there is no need to change the gaze in order to grasp the aspect of the specific post-reception performance, so that interest in the game can be maintained in an appropriate manner.

[Configuration 5]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, during the period from when the action of the player is accepted during the acceptance period (specific acceptance period) until the model image display is made invisible, a specific mode may appear, and when the specific mode appears, the model image display becomes difficult to see. In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the result of the winning/losing judgment is a special result (for example, a big win or a guaranteed big win), the premonition effect display is executed in a specific premonition mode and the action of the player is accepted during the acceptance period corresponding to the premonition effect display, the specific mode is made to appear during the period from when the action is accepted until the model image display is made invisible.

In other words, in this case, when the premonition effect display is executed in a specific premonition mode, the player will be able to recognize that a specific mode will appear before the model image display is made invisible, making the model image display difficult to see, and it will be possible to encourage the player to pay attention to the mode in which the model image display appears before making an action by the player. Note that the "specific mode" in configuration 5 and the "specific mode" in configuration 1 may be the same mode, or may be different modes, or may occur in response to different acceptance periods.

As will be described later, in pachinko machine 1, when the result of the win/loss judgment is a special result (e.g., a jackpot, a guaranteed jackpot, etc.), the premonition display is executed in a manner different from the specific premonition mode, and an action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period corresponding to the premonition display (an acceptance period different from the specific acceptance period), the specific mode may or may not appear within the period from the acceptance until the model image display is switched off, or may not appear within that period.

With this configuration, if the premonition performance display is executed in a manner different from the specific premonition mode, it becomes unclear whether the specific mode will appear during the period from the time of acceptance until the model image display is hidden. This improves the performance during the period from the time of acceptance until the model image display is hidden, and makes it possible to maintain a sense of tension in an optimal manner.

Note that the above configuration 5 may be replaced with the following configuration, or may be provided as a configuration (acceptance period) different from the above configuration 5. That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, during the period from when the action of the player is accepted during the acceptance period (a specific acceptance period, or an acceptance period different from the specific acceptance period) until the model image display is made invisible, a specific mode may appear, and when the specific mode appears, the model image display becomes difficult to see. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the result of the winning/losing judgment is a special result (for example, a jackpot, a guaranteed jackpot, etc.), the premonition display is executed in a special premonition mode (which may be the same as the specific premonition mode) and the action of the player is accepted during the acceptance period corresponding to the premonition display, the specific mode is not made to appear during the period from when the action is accepted until the model image display is made invisible. In other words, in this case, when the premonition performance display is executed in a special premonition mode, it becomes possible to recognize that a specific mode will not appear before the model image display is hidden, and that the model image display will not be difficult to see in relation to the specific mode.

In this case, in the pachinko machine 1, if the result of the winning/losing judgment is a special result (for example, a jackpot or a guaranteed jackpot), and the premonition display is executed in a manner different from the special premonition mode, and an action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period corresponding to the premonition display (an acceptance period different from the acceptance period), the specific mode may or may not appear during the period from the time of acceptance to the time the model image display is made invisible. Even with this configuration, if the premonition display is executed in a manner different from the special premonition mode, it is unclear whether the specific mode will appear during the period from the time of acceptance to the time the model image display is made invisible, so that the performance from the time of acceptance to the time the model image display is made invisible is improved, and the sense of tension can be maintained in an appropriate manner.

For the configurations of these modified examples (replacement examples), it is possible to appropriately apply the configurations described above or below that are applicable to configuration 5 above.

[Configuration 6]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, multiple types of premonition display effects are provided to indicate that an acceptance period during which the player's actions are accepted will occur soon. A specific premonition display among the multiple types of premonition display effects can be executed across the timing of the corresponding acceptance period, and the player's actions can be accepted while the specific premonition display effect is being displayed.

In other words, in this case, the player's actions can be accepted while still being able to confirm which type (mode) of premonition display is being displayed, which can prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to forgetting to check the type (mode) of the premonition display.

In addition, in pachinko machine 1, when a player's action is accepted while a specific premonition effect display is being displayed, a post-acceptance effect (e.g., a special post-acceptance effect) corresponding to the acceptance is started, but even when the post-acceptance effect starts to be executed, the specific premonition effect display is not hidden but remains displayed.

In other words, in this case, the player's action is accepted while still being able to confirm which type (mode) of premonition display is being displayed, and furthermore, the post-acceptance performance corresponding to that acceptance is started to be executed, so that the decrease in interest in the game caused by forgetting to check the type (mode) of the premonition display can be suppressed.

[Configuration 7]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a reception period (e.g., a specific reception period) occurs, it is possible to execute a process to make an audible reception permission sound, which indicates that the reception means is in a state where reception is permitted, or that the reception means will (soon) be in a state where reception is permitted, thereby preventing the player from forgetting to take action for reception.

Even if the reception-permitted sound is realized as something that is audible before the occurrence of the corresponding reception period (indicating that the reception period will occur soon), it is made audible across the timing of the occurrence of the reception period, and can be made audible at least partway through the reception period. In the case of a pachinko machine 1 in which the tone setting value can be set to "0", when the volume setting value is set to "0", the reception-permitted sound will be output but will not be made audible.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when an action by a player is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is audible (in an output state) during a reception period (such as a specific reception period), processing is started to be executed to make the acceptance permission sound inaudible before the appearance of the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (such as a disappearing effect display)" and before the appearance of the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (such as a disappearing effect display)."

In other words, in this case, even if the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" has not yet appeared after the reception, the fact that the reception period has already ended can be appropriately indicated to the player. As a result, even if the timing at which the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" appears is delayed after the reception, inconvenience is unlikely to occur, and the model image display can be displayed in a mode that is easy to see.

[Configuration 8]
In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period (a plurality of reception periods with different post-reception effects). Then, during the period from when an action by a player is accepted while the model image display is displayed until the model image display is made invisible, a state in which the model image display is difficult to see appears. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in both cases where an action by a player is accepted while the model image display is displayed during the first reception period and where an action by a player is accepted while the model image display is displayed during the second reception period, a "state in which the model image display is difficult to see" appears during the period until the model image display is made invisible.

In other words, in this case, regardless of whether it is the first reception period or the second reception period, it is possible to indicate that the reception period has ended while being able to confirm which state has appeared as the mock image display since reception was made. Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" in configuration 8 may be reception periods of the same type as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" in configuration 2 above, or may be reception periods of different types.

As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 provides multiple modes, including a first mode and a second mode, as the "mode in which the replica image display becomes difficult to see," and the first mode appears during the first reception period, and the second mode appears during the second reception period, so that the "mode in which the replica image display becomes difficult to see" can be given a dramatic effect related to the type of reception period.

As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 also provides a third mode as a "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see," and during the first acceptance period, the first mode can appear regardless of whether or not the request is accepted within that period, but during the second acceptance period, the second mode appears if the request is accepted within that period, and the third mode appears if the request is not accepted within that period.

With this configuration, during the second reception period, it is possible to determine whether or not the player's action has been accepted within the reception period based on the "mode in which the imitation image display is difficult to see" that appears, but during the first reception period, it is not possible to determine whether or not the player's action has been accepted within the reception period based on the "mode in which the imitation image display is difficult to see" that appears, and it is expected that this type of presentation will increase interest in the game.

In each of the above-mentioned examples or each of the examples described below, "a manner in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" may mean a manner in which a disappearance display is displayed in a specific area that includes at least a portion of the specified area in which the imitation image display is displayed, a manner in which a performance is executed that utilizes a performance object that is positioned so as to overlap at least a portion of the specified area in which the imitation image display is displayed when viewed from the front, or a manner in which the imitation image display itself is changed (modified) to a display that is difficult to see (for example, by making the display smaller, blurring it, changing the transparency settings, etc.).

[Configuration 9]
Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when a reception period (e.g., a specific reception period) occurs, it is possible to execute a process to make an audible reception permission sound, which indicates that the reception means is in a state where reception is permitted, or that the reception means will (soon) be in a state where reception is permitted, thereby preventing the player from forgetting to take action for reception.

As also mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 provides multiple types of premonition display effects that indicate that an acceptance period for accepting player actions will occur soon. A specific premonition display among the multiple types of premonition display effects can be executed across the timing of the occurrence of the corresponding acceptance period, and the player's actions can be accepted while the specific premonition display is displayed. In other words, in this case, the player's actions can be accepted while remaining able to confirm which type of premonition display is being displayed, so that a decrease in interest in the game due to forgetting to check the type of premonition display can be suppressed. The "specific premonition display" in configuration 9 may be the same as the "specific premonition display" in configuration 6, or may be a different type (type) of premonition display.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the specific premonition display continues to be displayed even after the performance corresponding to the acceptance of the player's action (post-acceptance performance) has progressed, so that the player can check which type of premonition display has appeared even after the acceptance has been made.

However, because premonition display effects are originally displayed in a state where acceptance is not permitted (before the start of the acceptance period), even if a player performs an action while the premonition display effect is displayed, the player may feel uneasy about whether or not the action has been accepted. Despite this, if the premonition display effect is simply displayed even after acceptance has been made, there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease as it will be difficult to tell whether or not the action has been accepted.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1, as described below, when a player's action is accepted while a specific premonition display is being displayed, the specific premonition display continues to be displayed after the action is accepted, but a mode is created in which the specific premonition display is difficult to see while it is being displayed. Then, after this mode is created, the specific premonition display is made invisible while it is difficult to see.

In other words, in this case, even after acceptance has been made, it is possible to check which aspect of the premonition display has been displayed, and by reducing the visibility of the premonition display until it is hidden, it is possible to appropriately indicate that acceptance has already been made.

[Configuration 10]
In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 can execute both a pattern change (changing pattern) in which a reception period occurs and a pattern change (changing pattern) in which a reception period does not occur. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in both a pattern change (changing pattern) in which a reception period occurs and a pattern change (changing pattern) in which a reception period does not occur, a predetermined image display can be displayed on the display screen (performance display device 1600), and the model image display can be displayed even after the performance has progressed based on the acceptance of the player's action. When the player's action is accepted during the acceptance period, a mode that makes the model image display difficult to see is made to appear while the model image display is being displayed, and the "mode that makes the model image display difficult to see" is executed so as not to affect the visibility of the predetermined image display that can be displayed even in a pattern change in which a reception period does not occur.

In other words, in this case, a specific disappearance effect display is displayed so as not to affect the visibility of a specific image display that is not related to the acceptance period, allowing the game to proceed without adversely affecting the effects that are not directly related to the acceptance period.

However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least the first image display (predetermined image display) and the second image display can be displayed within the reception period as image displays that have no presentation-related relationship to the reception period (current reception period), and the specific disappearance presentation display does not affect the visibility of the first image display (predetermined image display), but is displayed in such a way that it does affect the visibility of the second image display (pending).

With this configuration, even if an image display is not directly related to the acceptance period, depending on the type of image, visibility may be affected or not affected when a "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" occurs. Therefore, when a player performs an action, it is possible to provide a performance that allows the player to decide whether or not to check an image display that is not directly related to the acceptance period.

However, in this case, it is desirable to display the first image display as an image (multiple forms) related to (suggesting) the outcome (expectations) of the pattern change, and the second image display as an image that is not related to (does not suggest) the outcome (expectations) of the pattern change, in order to avoid a decrease in interest in the game when the visibility of the second image display is affected.

When a "specific disappearing performance display" displayed on the display screen (performance display device 1600) is used as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see," if an action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period, the specific disappearing performance display will be displayed using a specific area that includes at least a part of a specified area on the display screen (performance display device 1600), which is the display target area for the model image display, while the model image display is being displayed.

[Configuration 11]
In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 can execute both a pattern change (changing pattern) in which a reception period occurs and a pattern change (changing pattern) in which a reception period does not occur. Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, in both a pattern change (changing pattern) in which a reception period occurs and a pattern change (changing pattern) in which a reception period does not occur, a predetermined image display can be displayed on the display screen (performance display device 1600), and the model image display can be displayed even after the performance has progressed based on the acceptance of the player's action. The "predetermined image display" in the configuration 11 may be the same as the "predetermined image display" in the above configuration 10, or may be a different image display. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the player's action is accepted during the acceptance period, a mode in which the model image display is difficult to see can appear while the model image display is being displayed, and multiple modes including a first mode and a second mode are prepared as modes in which the model image display is difficult to see.

In other words, in this case, one of a number of modes, including the first mode and the second mode, will appear as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see," and it is expected that this will increase interest in the game when the model image display becomes difficult to see.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the "first mode" as the "mode in which the replica image display becomes difficult to view" is executed, the "first mode" makes both the replica image display and the predetermined image display difficult to view, but when the "second mode" as the "mode in which the replica image display becomes difficult to view" is executed, the "second mode" is executed so as to make only the replica image display difficult to view out of the replica image display and the predetermined image display.

This configuration creates a dramatic effect in terms of whether the "first mode" or the "second mode" appears as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see," which is expected to increase interest in the game.

In addition, in order to increase interest in the game, it is desirable that the mock image display and the specified image display can be displayed when either the reception period for the type corresponding to the above-mentioned "first mode" or the reception period for the type corresponding to the above-mentioned "second mode" is occurring.

[Configuration 12]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1,
A first reception performance execution means is provided, which can generate a first reception period during which reception by the reception means (e.g., the operation button 410) is permitted, and when an action by the player is accepted during the first reception period, a first post-reception performance display can be executed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectation levels (the rate at which the jackpot pattern is stopped) based on the fact that the action is accepted; and a second reception performance execution means is provided, which can generate a second reception period during which reception by the reception means (e.g., the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 different from the operation button 410) is permitted, and when an action by the player is accepted during the second reception period, a second post-reception performance display can be executed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectation levels (the rate at which the jackpot pattern is stopped) based on the fact that the action is accepted. The expectation level (the rate at which the jackpot pattern is stopped) may be 0% or 100%. The first post-reception performance display and the second post-reception performance display are executed as displays of different types as advance notice performances. Furthermore, the "first reception period" and "second reception period" in configuration 12 may be reception periods of the same type as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" in configurations 2 and 8 above, or may be reception periods of different types.

Also, as mentioned above, in pachinko machine 1, in both cases where an action by the player is accepted during the first acceptance period and where an action by the player is accepted during the second acceptance period, it is possible for the replica image display to appear in a state in which the replica image display becomes difficult to see after the acceptance is made while the replica image display is still displayed.

In other words, in this case, regardless of the type of reception period, it is possible to check which aspect of the model image display was displayed even after reception was made. Also, since the visibility of the model image display is reduced until the model image display is hidden, it can be suggested that there is little time left until the model image display is hidden, and it can be possible to suppress a decrease in interest in playing the game when the model image display is hidden.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first reception period, whether the first mode is executed as the first reception post-performance display or the second mode with a higher expectation than the first mode is executed as the first reception post-performance display, the same mode appears as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see". In contrast, in the second reception period, if the second mode with a higher expectation than the first mode (or the first mode with a lower expectation than the second mode) is executed as the second reception post-performance display, a specific mode appears as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see", but if the first mode (or the second mode) is executed as the second reception post-performance display, the specific mode does not appear as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" and a mode different from the specific mode appears, or the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" itself does not appear. As described above, the expectation (the rate at which the jackpot pattern stops) may be 0% or 100%.

With this configuration, depending on the type of reception period, there will be cases where the expectation level of the post-reception performance display can be inferred simply by checking the "mode in which the imitation image display is difficult to see," and cases where the expectation level cannot be inferred. This is expected to increase interest in the game through the performance related to the "mode in which the imitation image display is difficult to see."

If the "specific mode" that may occur in response to the second reception period as the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" is set to one that cannot appear as the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" corresponding to the first reception period, it will be possible to infer the type of reception period based on the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see," thereby improving interest in the game. In order to achieve such an effect, it is more desirable to set the "mode" that may occur in response to the first reception period as the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" to one that cannot appear as the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" corresponding to the second reception period.

However, the "mode in which the mock image display becomes difficult to see" may be the same in the "mode" that may occur in response to the first reception period and the "mode" that may occur in response to the second reception period.

[Configuration 13]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a reception-related performance display (such as a model image display or a gauge image) can be displayed at least during the reception period in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, and a reception-related performance sound (such as a reception permission sound) can be output at least during the reception period in relation to the occurrence of the reception period. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when an action by a player is accepted during the reception period, a post-reception output sound (which itself can be seen as one aspect of the post-reception performance) related to the post-reception performance can be output based on the acceptance, and when the reception-related performance display is displayed during the reception period and an action by a player is accepted, the reception-related performance display is made non-displayed based on the acceptance. Similarly, when an action by a player is accepted during the reception period when the reception-related performance sound is in an audible state, the reception-related performance sound is made inaudible based on the acceptance.

In the above configuration, when a player's action is accepted within the acceptance period, a post-acceptance performance sound related to the post-acceptance performance is output, the reception-related performance display is made invisible, and the reception-related performance sound is made inaudible, making it easy for the player to recognize that the action has been accepted.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reception-related performance display is not terminated and is displayed at the time when the specific post-reception performance corresponding to the reception is started, but the reception-related performance sound is terminated and made inaudible at the time when the specific post-reception performance sound corresponding to the reception is started.

With this configuration, the reception-related performance display that is displayed during the reception period will continue to be displayed until after the specific post-reception performance has started, while the reception-related performance sound that is audible (output) during the reception period will no longer be audible at the time the post-reception output sound starts to be executed. This makes it possible to confirm the appearance of the reception-related performance display that was displayed during the reception period even after the specific post-reception performance has started to be executed, while making the reception-related performance sound inaudible, making it possible to appropriately indicate that the reception period has already ended.

In addition, in the above-mentioned and below-mentioned examples, the inaudible state may be a state in which the output process of the reception-related sound production itself has ended, or a state in which the output process of the reception-related sound production itself continues but is not made audible by adjusting the volume to "0." Also, in the above-mentioned and below-mentioned examples, when the post-reception performance in response to reception is executed as a complex performance using multiple performance elements (displays, light-emitting lamps, movable objects, etc.), the specific post-reception performance may correspond to a "performance using a specific performance element" among those performance elements.

[Configuration 14]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, multiple modes are prepared as the premonition effect display, and a specific premonition effect display can be displayed before the reception period occurs, and an audible output of a reception-related effect sound (such as a reception permission sound) can be started. The specific premonition effect display and the reception-related effect sound can be executed across the timing of the reception period, and an action by the player can be accepted while the specific premonition effect display is displayed and the reception-related effect sound is in an audible state (output). In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, when an action by the player is accepted during the reception period while a specific premonition effect display is displayed, the specific premonition effect display is made invisible based on the fact that the action has been accepted. Also, when an action by the player is accepted during the reception period while the reception-related effect sound is in an audible state, the reception-related effect sound is made inaudible based on the fact that the action has been accepted.

In the above configuration, the specific premonition display is hidden based on the acceptance of the player's action during the acceptance period, and the reception-related sound is made inaudible. Therefore, even if the player's action is accepted while the specific premonition display and reception-related sound are being executed before the acceptance period, the player can easily recognize that the action has been accepted. The "specific premonition display" in configuration 14 may be the same as the "specific premonition display" in configurations 6 and 9, or may be a premonition display of a different type (mode). The "reception-related sound" in configuration 14 may be the same as the "reception-related sound" in configuration 13, or may be different.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the above-mentioned specific premonition effect display is not terminated and is displayed at the time when the execution of the specific post-acceptance effect corresponding to the acceptance within the corresponding acceptance period is started. In contrast, the above-mentioned reception-related effect sound is terminated and made inaudible at the time when the execution of the specific post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the acceptance is started.

According to this configuration, the specific premonition display that is displayed before the start of the reception period will continue to be displayed until after the specific post-reception performance has started, while the reception-related performance sound that is audible (output) before the start of the reception period will no longer be audible at the time the post-reception output sound starts to be executed. This makes it possible to confirm the premonition display that is displayed before the start of the reception period even after the specific post-reception performance has started to be executed, while making it possible to appropriately suggest that the reception period has already ended by making the reception-related performance sound that is output before the start of the reception period inaudible. Note that the "specific post-reception performance" and "specific post-reception output sound" of configuration 14 may be the same as or different from the "specific post-reception performance" and "specific post-reception output sound" of configuration 13, respectively.

[Configuration 15]
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 has a plurality of reception periods with different "effect contents (types of post-reception effects) that proceed based on the acceptance of the player's action." The mock image display can be displayed even after the effect has progressed based on the acceptance of the player's action. As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the player's action is accepted during a specific reception period among the plurality of reception periods, one of the plurality of effects is made to appear based on the acceptance, but even if any of the effects appears, a specific mode can be made to appear.

In the above configuration, multiple acceptance periods are prepared with different types of presentation modes that appear based on the acceptance of the player's actions (types of preview presentations, such as a "conversation preview" indicating which conversation will appear and a "moving body action preview" indicating whether a moving body will move or not). In this regard, if the player's action is accepted during a specific acceptance period among the multiple acceptance periods, one of the multiple presentations will appear based on the acceptance, but a specific presentation can appear regardless of which of the presentations appears. In other words, in this case, since a specific presentation will also appear regardless of which of the multiple presentations appears, it can be suggested that they are a common presentation "caused by the acceptance of the player's action during a specific acceptance period."

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an action by a player is accepted during a special acceptance period that is different from the specific acceptance period among the multiple acceptance periods, one of multiple modes can appear, including a special mode whose appearance rate (which may be 0% or 100%) varies depending on whether or not special conditions (such as winning conditions for a jackpot or conditions for entering a special bonus mode) are met, and when the special mode appears, the model image display becomes difficult to see.

With this configuration, a special feature that indicates the degree of expectation appears before the model image display is hidden, and the special feature makes the model image display difficult to see, so the player can enjoy the progression from the model image display to the post-reception performance (special feature) without having to change his or her focus of gaze, without missing it.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the "specific mode" appears based on the acceptance of an action by the player during the specific acceptance period, the "specific mode" makes the replica image display difficult to see. With this configuration, there are cases where the replica image display is made difficult to see by the special mode that suggests the expectation of a bonus being awarded (special acceptance period), and cases where the replica image display is made difficult to see by the specific mode that does not suggest the expectation of a bonus being awarded (specific acceptance period), so that the "mode that makes the replica image display difficult to see (specific mode, special mode)" has a dramatic effect, which can increase interest in the game.

The "specific reception period" in configuration 15 may be the same as the "specific reception period" in configurations 1, 7, and 9, or may correspond to a different reception period.

[Configuration 16]
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 can display a remaining time indication display that reduces the display area of a specific image (such as a gauge image) as time passes during the acceptance period. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the remaining time indication display can be displayed even after the performance has progressed based on the acceptance of the player's action, and since the display area of the specific image can be reduced even while the performance is progressing, it is expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained by making it difficult to recognize whether the "acceptance has been completed" even after the acceptance has been completed.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a specific partitioned area is displayed on the display screen (performance display device 1600) as a remaining time indication display, and a depiction is made in which the display area of a specific image (such as a gauge image) is reduced within the specific partitioned area. Then, after the performance has progressed based on the acceptance of the player's action, not only the specific image (such as a gauge image) but also the specific partitioned area continues to be displayed. With this configuration, the specific partitioned area continues to be displayed even after the performance has progressed based on the acceptance of the player's action, making it easier to determine whether the display area of a specific image (such as a gauge image) has been reduced.

Note that "after the presentation has progressed based on the acceptance of an action by the player, the display area of the specific image (such as a gauge image) is reduced" also means that, for example, a specified display area remains as a gauge image at the time the presentation has progressed based on the acceptance of an action by the player, but at a later point in time, the display area is set to 0 (not displayed). In this case, however, the specific partitioned area is required to still be displayed at the time the display area of the gauge image is set to 0, and the specific partitioned area will be made hidden after the timing when the display area of the gauge image is set to 0.

For example, configuration 16 can be implemented such that, when an action by a player is accepted, the remaining time indication display (such as a specific image or a specific partitioned area) is hidden based on the acceptance, but prior to hiding the remaining time indication display, a specific image with a display area set to a specific value (a predetermined value) within the specific partitioned area is displayed regardless of how much display area of the specific image was remaining at the time of acceptance, or, of the specific partitioned area and the specific image, only the specific partitioned area is displayed (the display area is reduced to 0).

In particular, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the action of the player is accepted (when the progress of the presentation corresponding to the acceptance starts), the "depiction of the reduction in the display area of the specific image" that has been executed before the action was accepted is not terminated but continues. Then, when a specified timing arrives, a specific image with a display area set to a specific value in a specific partitioned area is displayed, or only the specific partitioned area of the specific partitioned area and the specific image is displayed (the display area is reduced to 0).

In other words, in this case, when the performance corresponding to the reception starts, the display area of the specific image (gauge image, etc.) is not significantly reduced and the drawing continues up to that point, which is expected to make it difficult to know whether the reception has been completed or not even after the reception has been completed, and to maintain a good sense of tension. Also, since the display area of the specific image (gauge image, etc.) is significantly reduced at a timing after the performance corresponding to the reception starts, it is possible to make it appear as if the reception has been completed just in time within the valid period (reception period), which is expected to increase interest in the game.

[Configuration 17]
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 provides multiple premonition display displays as premonition display displays that suggest the occurrence of a reception period. As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific premonition display display is performed among the multiple premonition display displays, the model image display related to the reception target is displayed both during the premonition period before the reception period occurs and during the reception period. The model image display displayed during the premonition period is in a different form from the model image display displayed during the reception period, and is hidden before the reception period occurs, so that it is expected that the performance related to the operation will be improved from the period before the reception period occurs.

As described above, when a request is accepted within the acceptance period, the pachinko machine 1 hides the model image display based on that acceptance, but a "specific aspect that makes the model image display difficult to see" can appear before the model image display is hidden. However, as will be described later, the "specific aspect that makes the model image display difficult to see" is configured not to appear when the model image display that is displayed within the premonition period (specific premonition performance display) is hidden until the display is hidden.

With this configuration, during the premonition period (specific premonition effect display), the model image display is hidden without the "specific aspect that makes the model image display difficult to see" that appears in response to the reception period appearing. Therefore, even if the model image display is displayed during the premonition period (specific premonition effect display) but is hidden before the reception period occurs, it is possible to make it less likely for the player to mistakenly believe that the reception period has ended without their knowledge.

When multiple "modes that make the model image display difficult to see" that can appear in response to reception are prepared, including the above-mentioned "specific mode that makes the model image display difficult to see," it is preferable that none of these modes appear when the model image display displayed during the premonition period is hidden. However, if the mode is different from any of the multiple modes prepared as "modes that make the model image display difficult to see" in response to reception, the "mode that makes the model image display difficult to see" may be made to appear during the premonition period until the model image display is hidden. In other words, in this case, since it will be recognized as a "mode that makes the model image display difficult to see" that is exclusive to the premonition period, even if a "mode that makes the model image display difficult to see" appears during the premonition period, it is difficult for the player to misunderstand that the acceptance period has ended without his knowledge.

The "specific premonition display" in configuration 17 may be the same as the "specific premonition display" in configurations 6, 9, and 14, or may correspond to a different premonition display.

[Configuration 18]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when the first performance condition is satisfied, the first reception period can be generated as a reception period during the execution period of the pattern change, and when the second performance condition is satisfied, the second reception period can be generated as a reception period during the execution period of the pattern change. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first reception period can be continued even after the pattern change that caused the first reception period is ended and the next pattern change is started, but the second reception period does not continue until the pattern change that caused the second reception period is ended, but ends before the pattern change is ended. Furthermore, the model image display related to the reception target is displayed in both the first reception period and the second reception period, and in both cases where the action by the player is accepted during the first reception period and where the action by the player is accepted during the second reception period, a disappearance performance mode in which the model image display is difficult to see appears based on the acceptance.

In other words, in this case, the effect of "being able to check which aspect of the mock image display was displayed even after acceptance was made, while being able to indicate that the acceptance period has ended" can be preferably achieved regardless of whether it is the first acceptance period or the second acceptance period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the disappearance performance mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see is executed in a different manner when it is accepted in the first acceptance period and when it is accepted in the second acceptance period. In other words, in this case, based on the type of "disappearance performance mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see," it becomes possible to know whether the acceptance period will end within the ongoing pattern change, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The "first and second reception periods" in configuration 18 may be the same as the "first and second reception periods" in configurations 2, 8, and 12, or may correspond to different reception periods.

[Configuration 19]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of game states (first game state and second game state) with different game conditions (such as the ease of obtaining a prize ball when a game ball is shot into the game area) can be generated, and the above-mentioned acceptance period can be generated in either the first game state or the second game state. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an action by a player is accepted during the acceptance period, a "mode in which the Momo image display becomes difficult to see (disappearing performance mode)" can be made to appear while the Momo image display is being displayed, based on the acceptance, and then the Momo image display is made invisible.

In other words, in this case, the effect of "allowing the user to check which state was displayed as the mock image even after the acceptance was made, while indicating that the acceptance period has ended" can be obtained regardless of whether the acceptance is made during the acceptance period that occurs in the first game state or the second game state.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first reception period of the multiple reception periods can occur only in the first game state of the first and second game states, and the second reception period of the multiple reception periods can occur only in the second game state (jackpot game) of the first and second game states. In this regard, the model image display related to the reception target is displayed in both the first and second reception periods. However, in the first game state (when accepted in the first reception period), a specific "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance performance mode)" that cannot appear in the second game state (when accepted in the second reception period) can appear.

With this configuration, even without checking the post-acceptance performance, it is possible to know whether the game is being controlled to the first game state or the second game state by simply checking which mode appears as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance performance mode)," thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In addition, even in the second game state (when accepted during the second acceptance period), a "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearing performance mode)" different from a specific "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearing performance mode)" may appear.

[Other configurations]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when an acceptance permission state (acceptance period) in which an acceptance opportunity is granted occurs, a model image related to the acceptance target (such as a model image modeled on an operation receiving section) is displayed as an integrated model image display (see FIG. 232) integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the model image, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in playing until the post-acceptance performance (post-operation performance) is executed. It is desirable to display such an integrated model image display in both the operation acceptance performance (acceptance period) that occurs when the pattern performance progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach, and the operation acceptance performance (acceptance period) that occurs as a result of advance judgment in a variation pattern that does not develop into the SP reach, and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression acceptance performance and the high expectation suppression acceptance performance. Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned presentation examples (Figures 144 to 195, 207 to 231), it is desirable to replace the display mode of the exemplified model images with one of the integrated model images described below in order to increase interest in the game.

The "integrated model image display" in this example is as described with reference to Figures 232 to 248, or as another example or modified example thereof, and for example, a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the border decoration image. Also, multiple modes (see Figure 232) with different expectation levels are prepared as the "integrated model image display", and it is similarly arranged to be displayed in one of these modes.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when an acceptance-permitted state (acceptance period) occurs, an acceptance-permitted sound is output to indicate that an operation acceptance has been permitted, or to suggest that an operation acceptance will be permitted, thereby making it less likely that an operation will be forgotten. Here, the "acceptance-permitted sound" refers to a sound that, when the sound starts to be output, will necessarily cause an acceptance-permitted state (acceptance period) to occur while the sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned), or is in a state where an acceptance-permitted state (acceptance period) has already occurred. In other words, the "acceptance-permitted sound" can also be said to be a sound that is not output in a situation where a performance that has no relation to the acceptance-permitted state (acceptance period) is being performed.

In addition, each acceptance permission state (each acceptance period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. That is, an acceptance permission state classified into the first type is a valid period that can occur when a high expectation fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) is selected, but cannot occur in a low expectation fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) (a valid period that occurs based on the establishment of a specific condition (selection of a specific high expectation fluctuation pattern) in a performance judgment based on the result of a jackpot judgment). In addition, an acceptance permission state of the second type is a valid period that can occur in either a high expectation fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) or a low expectation fluctuation pattern (such as a valid period that occurs as a result of a notice judgment).

The "integrated imitation image display" according to this embodiment can be displayed in both the first type and second type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period). Here, it is assumed that the first type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period) and the second type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period) occur as acceptance permission states (acceptance periods) in which an operation opportunity is given for the same operating means (e.g., operation button 410), and therefore the "integrated imitation image display" displayed in those acceptance periods is an image imitation of the same operating means (operation button 410).

However, among the multiple modes prepared as the "integrated Moji image display", the special mode with the highest expectation (for example, the mode shown in Figure 232 (d)) can only be displayed in the first type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period), and in the second type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period), it can only be displayed in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the modes shown in Figures 232 (a) to (c)). In the first type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period), a determination is made based on the result of the jackpot determination as to which of the multiple modes including the special mode (for example, Figures 232 (a) to (d)) the "integrated Moji image display" will be displayed in, and the "integrated Moji image display" is displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination. Even in the second type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period), a determination may be made as to which of multiple modes not including a special mode (e.g., Figures 232(a)-(c)) the "integrated model image" will be displayed in based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the "integrated model image display" may be displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination.

The following describes in detail the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the above components 1 to 19, with reference to the drawings.

As described above, this pachinko machine 1 has multiple reception periods (reception performances) with different performance contents that proceed when a reception is made (conversation notice, cut-in notice, moving object notice, etc. as post-reception performances, and types of notice performances (expectation level indication performances)), and can generate reception periods (reception performances) of different types according to the results of judgments (jackpot judgments, performance judgments, etc.). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least the first reception period (reception performance) to the seventh reception period (reception performance) are prepared as multiple reception periods (reception performances).

Here, the "conversation announcement" as a post-reception effect indicates the degree of expectation (such as the rate at which a jackpot symbol will appear) based on which of multiple conversation contents will appear, the "cut-in announcement" as a post-reception effect indicates the degree of expectation (such as the rate at which a jackpot symbol will appear) based on which of multiple cut-in images will appear, and the "moving object announcement" as a post-reception effect indicates the degree of expectation (such as the rate at which a jackpot symbol will appear) based on whether or not a moving object moves.

The characteristics of each reception period (reception performance) will be explained with reference to Figures 255 to 266. Note that each reception period described above with reference to Figures 254 through 254 may be prepared as a reception period separate from the first reception period to the seventh reception period, or may be realized as one of the first reception period to the seventh reception period.

Figure 255 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the first condition is satisfied as a result of the judgment and the first reception period (first reception presentation) occurs. Figures 262 and 263 are diagrams showing an example of presentation in a variation pattern in which the first reception period (first reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the start condition is established (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is not a sure-win/time-saving state), and the "first variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the first variation pattern. Then, the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ (performance depiction according to the first variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the first variation pattern, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 262(a)"), and during the execution period of the variation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "first variation pattern" itself. In the example of the presentation shown in FIG. 262(a), for ease of explanation, it is assumed that the first presentation display TE (corresponding to the above-mentioned "timer presentation") indicating the expected probability of a jackpot (the rate at which a jackpot pattern will appear when the decorative pattern SZ stops in the presentation) and the second presentation display FE depicted as a frog character are displayed at the start of the pattern change. These displays may be displayed not only at the start of the change, but also during the change, or may be displayed at different times. The second presentation display FE itself may indicate the rate at which a jackpot pattern will appear when the decorative pattern SZ stops in the presentation, or it may not indicate the rate.

In other words, when a special result is obtained in the performance judgment (such as a notice judgment) corresponding to the first variation pattern (when the first condition is met), the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates the first acceptance period (valid period) during which "acceptance regarding the first post-acceptance performance" is permitted when timing tF3 arrives, which is the first predetermined time since the start of the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ, as shown in FIG. 255(a) ("the situation shown in FIG. 262(d)"). As a result, when an action by the player is accepted during the first acceptance period, the first post-acceptance performance is carried out based on that acceptance.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) displays, in relation to the occurrence of such a first acceptance period, a premonition performance display suggesting that the acceptance period (valid period) will occur soon, a Momo image display suggesting the acceptance target (such as an operation receiving part), a gauge image display suggesting the remaining time of the acceptance period, a disappearance-related display (a state in which the Momo image display becomes difficult to see) that makes it difficult to see the Momo image display, and a post-acceptance performance display suggesting the expectation level (the rate at which a jackpot pattern appears) depending on the acceptance. As described above, the Momo image display according to this embodiment is displayed as an "integrated Momo image display" integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display, but is not necessarily limited to this and may be displayed separately. This is also the case for other acceptance periods.

More specifically, first, when the timing tF1 arrives before the first acceptance period occurs, as shown in FIG. 255(b) and FIG. 262(b), the "first premonition effect display ZEH1" is started to be executed as the premonition effect display on the display screen (effect display device 1600) as shown in FIG. 255(b). The "first premonition effect display ZEH1" in the example shown in FIG. 255(b) is made to be hidden in accordance with the timing tF3 when the corresponding acceptance period (first acceptance period) occurs (the timing when acceptance for the first post-acceptance effect is permitted), but it may be made to be hidden before the timing tF3. In any case, as shown in FIG. 262(d), the first acceptance period in this example is such that the "first premonition effect display ZEH1" is not displayed in a state in which acceptance of the player's action is permitted.

However, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, as shown in FIG. 255(b) and FIG. 262(c), when timing tF2 arrives before the occurrence of the first reception period, the "integrated Mo-image display IG (Mo-image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "first premonition performance display ZEH1" is displayed, and at least a part of the area in which the "integrated Mo-image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "first premonition performance display ZEH1" is displayed. In other words, in this case, during the period in which both the "integrated Mo-image display IG" and the "first premonition performance display ZEH1" are displayed in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) (timing tF2 to tF3), at least a part of the "integrated Mo-image display IG" is made difficult to see by the "first premonition performance display ZEH1". This makes it possible to arouse interest in which targets (operation receiving parts) the player's actions will be permitted for during the period before the first acceptance period (timings tF2 to tF3), and is expected to make it less likely that the player will forget to operate or make an operation mistake after the first acceptance period has occurred.

In addition, during the period when both the "integrated Mogu image display IG" and the "first premonition effect display ZEH1" are displayed (timing tF2 to tF3), it is more desirable to display the "first premonition effect display ZEH1" so that the visibility of the "integrated Mogu image display IG" tends to gradually improve toward the start of the acceptance period, in order to increase interest in the game. For example, this can be achieved by gradually decreasing the display range of the "first premonition effect display ZEH1" (the range that overlaps with the integrated Mogu image display IG) or gradually increasing its transparency.

That is, as shown in FIG. 255(b) and FIG. 262(c) and (d), in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) in this example, the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed so as to span the timing tF3 when the first reception period occurs. The "integrated model image display IG" is made invisible when an action is accepted within the first reception period, or when the first reception period ends without the action being accepted. Note that the first reception period in this example ends when timing tF4 arrives if no action by the player is accepted (see FIG. 255(b)).

In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 255 and the example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 262(d) to "A1 (FIG. 263(e1)-(i1))" or "A2 (FIG. 263(e2)-(i2))" assume that the action of the player is accepted at timing tF3a within the first acceptance period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 255(a), the first acceptance period ends based on the acceptance of the action of the player at timing tF3a, and the post-acceptance presentation corresponding to the first acceptance period (first post-acceptance presentation) begins to be executed.

Incidentally, an example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 262(d) to "A1 (FIG. 263(e1)-(i1))" corresponds to a case in which the first mode, which has a relatively low expectation, is executed as the post-reception presentation corresponding to the first reception period, and an example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 262(d) to "A2 (FIG. 263(e2)-(i2))" corresponds to a case in which the second mode, which has a relatively high expectation, is executed as the post-reception presentation corresponding to the first reception period.

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 255(b) and FIG. 263(e1) or (e2), at timing tF3a when the action by the player is accepted (when the first post-acceptance performance is started in response to the acceptance), the integrated model image display IG is not only not hidden, but is also not made difficult to see.

In other words, the first post-acceptance performance in this embodiment is realized as a performance that combines at least the "first post-acceptance performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), the "first post-acceptance specific performance" using the second performance device (e.g., a sub-liquid crystal display, a movable body, a performance lamp, etc.), and the first post-acceptance output sound using the third performance device (speaker). Among these performance devices, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) on which the integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display) is displayed is configured to delay the time at which the first post-acceptance performance display starts to be executed as the first post-acceptance performance compared to the other performance devices, thereby maintaining the visibility of the "integrated model image display IG" even after acceptance has been made.

As shown in FIG. 263(e1) or (e2), this configuration allows the player to easily recognize in which of the multiple forms (FIG. 232(a) to (d)) the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the ended acceptance period even after acceptance has been made, which is expected to effectively prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Here, in order to make it easier to recognize in which of the multiple modes (Fig. 232 (a) to (d)) the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period after the reception period has ended, it is desirable to set the "time during which the integrated model image display IG is displayed in an easily visible mode" after reception to be longer. However, if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed in the same mode as it was during the reception period (the mode shown in Fig. 263 (e1) and (e2)) even though reception has been made and the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has already been executed, it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the reception has been made, and as a result, there is a concern that "the player will be late in noticing the post-reception performance that is being executed."

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 255(b) and FIG. 263(f1) or (f2), when a predetermined time has elapsed from timing tF3a when the first acceptance period ends as a result of the acceptance of an action by the player (when timing tF3b arrives), the display of the first disappearance related display SK1-1 (the first aspect of the first disappearance related display SK1 corresponding to the first acceptance period) is started as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see".

In other words, in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in this example, the "first disappearance related display SK1-1" is displayed while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "first disappearance related display SK1-1" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

According to this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the reception, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, which suggests that the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being performed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the integrated model image display IG to the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) (after timing tF3b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has already been performed, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period. Furthermore, even after the first post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has begun, the appearance of the integrated model image display IG can be confirmed with good visibility until it becomes difficult to see (timing tF3a to tF3b), which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In addition, during the first reception period, regardless of whether the corresponding post-reception performance is executed in a low expectation mode (Fig. 263 (e1) to (i1)) or in a high expectation mode (Fig. 263 (e2) to (i2)), the same mode (first disappearance related display SK1-1) appears as the first disappearance related display SK1. Therefore, even in a situation where the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has started to be executed, the expectation can be kept secret in the first performance device (performance display device 1600).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in Figure 255 (b) and Figure 263 (g1) or (g2), when timing tf3c arrives during the period during which the display related to the first disappearance related display SK1-1 (in a state in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears, the first performance device (performance display device 1600) begins to execute a "first post-acceptance performance display UG1" as a post-acceptance performance in response to the acceptance of an action by the player within the first acceptance period. However, in this example, in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 262(d) to "A1 (FIG. 263(e1)-(i1))" (when the post-reception presentation has a relatively low expectation), as shown in FIG. 263(g1), the first mode (first post-reception presentation display UG1-1) is displayed as the first post-reception presentation display UG1 corresponding to the first reception period, and in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 262(d) to "A2 (FIG. 263(e2)-(i2))" (when the post-reception presentation has a relatively high expectation), as shown in FIG. 263(g2), the second mode (first post-reception presentation display UG1-2) is displayed as the first post-reception presentation display UG1 corresponding to the first reception period.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and the "first disappearance-related display SK1-1" are displayed, the "first post-acceptance performance display UG1 (first post-acceptance performance display UG1-1 or first post-acceptance performance display UG1-2)" begins to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated model image display IG is made to continue to be displayed for a relatively long time after acceptance within the first acceptance period, the post-acceptance performance (first post-acceptance performance display) on the first performance device (performance display device 1600) can be started without a significant delay compared to other performance devices, and a decline in interest in the game can be suppressed. In addition, because the first post-reception performance display begins while the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the "integrated model image display IG" to the "first post-reception performance display UG1 (first post-reception performance display UG1-1 or first post-reception performance display UG1-2)" (from timing tF3c onwards), suggesting that the first reception period has already ended.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the display of the "first post-reception performance display UG1 (first post-reception performance display UG1-1 or first post-reception performance display UG1-2)" is started in this manner, as shown in Figure 255 (b) and Figure 263 (h1) or (h2), while the "first post-reception performance display UG1 (first post-reception performance display UG1-1 or first post-reception performance display UG1-2)" is displayed, first, of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "first disappearance related display SK1-1", the "integrated model image display IG" is made invisible. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this manner, the "first disappearance-related display SK-1" is hidden as shown in FIG. 255(b) and FIG. 263(i1) or (i2), which allows good visibility and causes the display related to the "first post-reception performance display UG1 (first post-reception performance display UG1-1 or first post-reception performance display UG1-2)" to be displayed.

In this regard, the "first post-reception performance display UG1" is displayed in one of a number of modes (here, first post-reception performance display UG1-1 or first post-reception performance display UG1-2) with different degrees of expectation based on the acceptance of the player's action. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 255(b), the "first post-reception performance display UG1" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "first disappearance related display SK-1" are hidden.

In this way, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, various displays are performed within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 255) and on a limited display screen (performance display device 1600) as the first reception period occurs, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game. However, as a result of this, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is forced to delay the start time (timing tF3c) of the first post-reception performance (first post-reception performance display) in response to the reception from the timing tF3a of the reception.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a second performance device is prepared in addition to the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), and when an action by the player is accepted within the first acceptance period, as shown in Figures 255 (b) and (c) together, based on the acceptance, the first post-acceptance performance (first post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is started to be executed prior to the first post-acceptance performance (first post-acceptance performance display) using the first performance device.

With this configuration, the delay in the start of execution from the timing tF3a when the first acceptance period occurs is limited to only a part of the first post-acceptance performance (the display of the first post-acceptance performance), and the first post-acceptance performance itself can be started without delay from the timing tF3a.

Such a second performance device may be provided, for example, as a sub-LCD when the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is used as the main LCD, or may be provided as a performance movable body capable of performing performance actions, or a performance lamp capable of emitting light for performance, etc. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform performances (display performance, movable performance, light-emitting performance, etc.) in multiple ways with different degrees of expectation.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 263, it is assumed that the sub-LCD 1610 is used as the second performance device. In an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 262(d) to "A1 (FIG. 263(e1)-(i1))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively low expectation), as shown in FIG. 263(e1), the mode in which "Sueyoshi" is displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is started to be executed prior to the first post-reception performance (first post-reception performance display UG1-1) using the first performance device as the first post-reception specific performance UGT1 (first post-reception specific performance UGT1-1, which is a low expectation mode of the first post-reception specific performance UGT1) corresponding to the first reception period. In contrast, in an example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 262(d) to "A2 (FIG. 263(e2)-(i2))" (when the post-reception presentation has a relatively high expectation), as shown in FIG. 263(e2), the mode in which "吉" is displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second presentation device) is set to begin execution prior to the first post-reception presentation (first post-reception presentation display UG1-1) using the first presentation device as the first post-reception specific presentation UGT1 (first post-reception specific presentation UGT1-2, which is a high expectation mode of the first post-reception specific presentation UGT1) corresponding to the first reception period.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 262, in addition to the first premonition performance display ZEH1 on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), a premonition performance (first premonition specific performance) corresponding to the first reception period is also executed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) (FIGS. 262(b)-(d)). Unlike the first premonition performance display ZEH1 on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), the first premonition specific performance on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is executed even at the time when timing tF3 when the first reception period occurs arrives, and is executed across timing tF3.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further includes a third effect device (speaker), and when the first acceptance period occurs, the acceptance allowance sound starts to be output at timing tF2 shown in FIG. 255(d) (corresponding to "the situation in which ♪ starts to be output in FIG. 262(c)"). In other words, the acceptance allowance sound corresponding to the first acceptance period is audibly output across timing tF3 when the first acceptance period occurs (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 262(d)"), and the player's actions can be accepted while the acceptance allowance sound is being audibly output.

Here, in the first acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 255(d), FIG. 263(e1)-(g1), or FIG. 263(e2)-(g2), even if an action by the player is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being audibly output, the acceptance permission sound is not terminated midway, but is output for a predetermined time. That is, as will be described later, the above-mentioned multiple acceptance periods include an acceptance period in which, when an action by the player is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being audibly output, the audible output state of the acceptance permission sound is terminated midway based on the acceptance. Therefore, when an action is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being audibly output during the first acceptance period, and a state in which the audible output of the acceptance permission sound continues appears, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the action is accepted, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

However, in the first acceptance period, even if an action by the player is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being audibly output, the acceptance permission sound will not be terminated midway (terminating the audible output state midway), but when the acceptance is made, the audible output of the first post-acceptance output sound (corresponding to the "♪♪" output in FIG. 263 (e1) or (e2)) will be started based on this. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 255 (d), both the "acceptance permission sound" which is the sound audibly output during the first acceptance period and the "first post-acceptance output sound" which is the sound audibly output as a result of an acceptance being made during the first acceptance period can be audibly output, making it even more difficult to recognize whether the acceptance period is in progress or has ended.

As shown in FIG. 255(d), this first post-acceptance output sound, like the "first post-acceptance performance display UG1", will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "first disappearance-related display SK-1" are hidden (corresponding to the "situation where ♪♪ is output in FIG. 263(e1)-(i1) or (e2)-(e1)"). Also, for the first post-acceptance output sound, it is desirable to output different output sounds (modes) in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 262(d) to "A1 (FIG. 263(e1)-(i1))" (when the expectation level is relatively low as a post-acceptance performance) and the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 262(d) to "A2 (FIG. 263(e2)-(i2))" (when the expectation level is relatively high as a post-acceptance performance).

On the other hand, although not shown in Figure 255, the example in which the presentation progresses from Figure 262(d) to "A3 (Figure 263(e3) to (h3))" assumes a case in which no action by the player is accepted within the first acceptance period.

In other words, in this case, after the first acceptance period occurs, the timing tF4 arrives without any action by the player being accepted. In this regard, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at timing tF4 (the point at which the first acceptance period ends and acceptance of actions by the player is no longer permitted) does not hide the integrated model image display IG, as shown in FIG. 263 (e3), just as the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at timing tF3a (the point at which an action by the player is accepted during the first acceptance period), does not make the integrated model image display IG difficult to see.

With this configuration, even if the first acceptance period ends before the player's action is accepted in time, it is possible to recognize how the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the first acceptance period after the period has ended, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if no action by the player is accepted, as shown in FIG. 263 (f3), the display of the first disappearance-related display SK1-2 (the second mode of the first disappearance-related display SK1 corresponding to the first acceptance period) will begin as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see."

In other words, in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in this example, the "first disappearance related display SK1-2" is displayed while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "first disappearance related display SK1-2" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

With this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the first reception period ends without any reception, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, thereby suggesting that the first reception period has ended. Also, even in a situation where the first reception period has already ended, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in playing the game due to not being able to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the above-mentioned "first disappearance-related display SK1-2" that appears when an action by the player is not accepted within the first acceptance period is executed in a manner different from the "first disappearance-related display SK1-1" that appears based on an action by the player being accepted within the first acceptance period. This makes it possible to suggest that an action by the player has not been accepted when the "first disappearance-related display SK1-2" appears, and thus makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

After this, as shown in FIG. 263 (g3), of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "first disappearance related display SK1-2", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden first. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" has been hidden in this way, the "first disappearance related display SK-2" is hidden as shown in FIG. 263 (h3).

Figure 256 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the second condition is satisfied as a result of the judgment and a second reception period (second reception presentation) occurs. Figures 264 and 265 are diagrams showing an example of presentation in a variation pattern in which a second reception period (second reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is satisfied (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is not a sure-win or time-saving state), and the "second variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the second variation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern SZ variation performance (performance depiction according to the second variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the second variation pattern, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 264(a)"), and during the execution period of the variation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "second variation pattern" itself. Note that in the performance examples shown in FIG. 264 and FIG. 265, the first performance display TE is displayed, but the second performance display FE is not displayed.

However, in the presentation related to the "second variation pattern", regardless of which result is obtained as the presentation judgment (preview judgment), as shown in FIG. 256(a), when the timing tG3 (for example, the timing within the SP reach state) arrives when a second predetermined time has elapsed since the presentation of the decorative pattern SZ began to vary, the second acceptance period (valid period) during which "acceptance regarding the second post-operation presentation" is permitted is generated ("the situation shown in FIG. 264(d)"). As a result, when an action by the player is accepted during the second acceptance period, the second post-acceptance presentation is carried out based on that acceptance.

In this regard, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) according to this embodiment, even when such a second reception period occurs, similarly to the case where the above-mentioned first reception period occurs (FIG. 255), in relation to this, a premonition performance display suggesting that the reception period (valid period) will occur soon, a Momo image display suggesting the reception target (such as an operation receiving part), a gauge image display suggesting the remaining time of the reception period, a disappearance related display (a mode in which the Momo image display becomes difficult to see) that makes it difficult to see the Momo image display, and a post-reception performance display suggesting the expectation degree (probability of the appearance of a jackpot pattern) according to the acceptance are each performed. The expectation degree (probability of the appearance of a jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%". As described above, the Momo image display is displayed as an "integrated Momo image display IG" integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display, but is not necessarily limited to this and may be displayed separately. This is also the case for other reception periods.

More specifically, in this example as well, when timing tG1 arrives before the second reception period occurs, the "second premonition effect display ZEH2" is started to be executed as the premonition effect display, as shown in Fig. 256(b) and Fig. 264(b). Also, as in the case of the example shown in Fig. 255, the "integrated Mogu image display IG (Mogu image display, gauge image display)" is displayed within the "second premonition effect display ZEH2" when timing tG2 arrives before the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period) occurs (see Fig. 256(b) and Fig. 264(c)). As shown in FIG. 264(c), at least a portion of the area in which the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "second premonition effect display ZEH2" is displayed, and the "integrated model image display IG" is made difficult to see by the "second premonition effect display ZEH2", which is similar to the example shown in FIG. 262(c) (the premonition effect display corresponding to the first reception period).

The "integrated model image display IG" is also similar to the example shown in FIG. 255 (first acceptance period) in that it is displayed across timing tG3 (the situation shown in FIG. 264(d)) when the corresponding acceptance period (here, the second acceptance period) occurs, and is made invisible when an acceptance is made within the corresponding acceptance period (here, the second acceptance period) or when the second acceptance period ends without said acceptance being made. Note that the second acceptance period in this example ends when timing tG4 arrives if no action by the player is accepted.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 256(b) (second reception period), the "second premonition effect display ZEH2" is not only in a different form (image display) than the "first premonition effect display ZEH1" in the example shown in FIG. 255(b) (first reception period), but is not made invisible when the timing tG3 arrives (the timing at which reception is permitted for the second post-reception effect) when the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period) occurs, but is displayed across said timing tG3.

In other words, in this case, during the second acceptance period, not only the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" but also the "second premonition effect display ZEH2" that makes the "integrated Moji image display IG" difficult to see is displayed, and the player's actions can be accepted while this is being displayed. With this configuration, even after the second acceptance period has occurred, at least a portion of the "integrated Moji image display IG" is made difficult to see by the "second premonition effect display ZEH2", making it possible to appropriately maintain the sense of tension that exists during the acceptance period.

Here, the "second premonition effect display ZEH2" may be displayed until timing tG4 when the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period) ends, or may be made non-displayable at a predetermined timing within the reception period (here, the second reception period). Also, as shown in Figures 264 and 265, it is desirable to display the premonition effect display (second premonition effect display ZEH2) in a manner that gradually reduces its display range so that the area overlapping with the "integrated Mogu image display IG (Mogu image display, gauge image display)" tends to gradually reduce during the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period), in order to gradually improve the visibility of the "integrated Mogu image display IG" during the reception period. Furthermore, the area in which the second premonition effect display is displayed and at least a portion of the area in which the "integrated model image display" is displayed do not necessarily have to overlap with each other during the entire period in which the second premonition effect display is displayed. For example, after a specified timing within the reception period during that entire period has arrived, the second premonition effect display may be displayed in an area that does not overlap with the area in which the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed.

The second premonition effect display ZEH2 in this example is made invisible when it is accepted within the corresponding acceptance period (here, the second acceptance period) or when no action by the player is accepted until a predetermined timing within the acceptance period (here, the second acceptance period).

In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 256 and the example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 264(d) to "B1 (FIG. 265(e1)-(i1))" or "B2 (FIG. 265(e2)-(i2))" assume that the player's action is accepted at timing tG3a within the second acceptance period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 256(a), the second acceptance period ends based on the player's action being accepted at timing tG3a, and the post-acceptance presentation corresponding to the second acceptance period (second post-acceptance presentation) begins to be executed.

The example of the performance progressing from FIG. 264(d) to "B1 (FIG. 265(e1)-(i1))" corresponds to the case where the first mode with a relatively low expectation is executed as the post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period, and the example of the performance progressing from FIG. 264(d) to "B2 (FIG. 265(e2)-(i2))" corresponds to the case where the second mode with a relatively high expectation is executed as the post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period. The expectation (probability of the big win pattern appearing) may include "0%" or "100%".

And also in the example shown in FIG. 256, at timing tG3a when the action by the player is accepted (when the second post-acceptance performance is started in response to the acceptance), not only is the "integrated model image display IG" not hidden, but the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see either. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 256, not only the integrated model image display IG but also the second precursor performance display ZEH2 is not made hidden or difficult to see at timing tG3a when the action by the player is accepted (when the second post-acceptance performance is started).

In other words, the second post-acceptance performance in this embodiment is realized as a performance that combines at least the "second post-acceptance performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), the "second post-acceptance specific performance" using the second performance device (e.g., a sub-liquid crystal display, a movable body, a performance lamp, etc.), and the second post-acceptance output sound using the third performance device (speaker). Among these performance devices, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) on which the integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display) is displayed is configured to delay the time at which the second post-acceptance performance display as the second post-acceptance performance begins to be executed compared to the other performance devices, thereby maintaining the visibility of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "second precursor performance display ZEH2" even after acceptance has been made.

With this configuration, as in the case of the first reception period described above, as shown in FIG. 265 (e1) or (e2), even after reception has been made, the player can easily recognize in which of the multiple modes (FIG. 232 (a) to (d)) the integrated model image display IG was displayed in during the ended reception period, and in which mode the premonition effect display was displayed (first premonition effect display ZEH1, second premonition effect display ZEH2, etc.), which is expected to effectively prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Here, in order to make it easier to recognize how the integrated model image display IG and the premonition effect display ZEH were displayed during the reception period after the reception period has ended, it is desirable to set the "time during which the integrated model image display IG and the premonition effect display ZEH are displayed in an easily visible manner" after reception has been made longer. However, if the integrated model image display IG and the premonition effect display ZEH continue to be displayed in the same manner as they were during the reception period even though reception has been made and the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) has already been executed, it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the reception has been made, and as a result, there is a concern that "the player will be late in noticing the post-reception effect that is being executed."

Therefore, in the examples shown in Figure 256 (b) and Figure 265 (f1) or (f2), when a predetermined time has passed from timing tG3a when the second acceptance period ends due to the acceptance of the player's action (when timing tG3b arrives), a display of a "second disappearance related display SK2" different from the first disappearance related display SK1 is started as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see".

That is, in this example, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) displays the "second disappearance related display SK2" while displaying the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)," and at least a portion of the area in which the "second disappearance related display SK2" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

According to this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the reception, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, which suggests that the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being performed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the integrated model image display IG to the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) (after timing tG3b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has already been performed, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period. In addition, even after the second post-acceptance performance (second performance device, third performance device) has started, the state of the second premonition performance display ZEH2 can be confirmed with good visibility until the second disappearance-related display SK2 is displayed (timing tG3a to tG3b), and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see except by the second premonition performance display ZEH2, so that it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition. It goes without saying that, when the second premonition performance display ZEH2 is hidden during the second acceptance period and then acceptance is performed, the second premonition performance display ZEH2 will not be displayed until the second disappearance-related display SK2 is displayed, and the state of the integrated model image display IG can be confirmed with good visibility.

In addition, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, the "second disappearance-related display SK2" is displayed while the "premonition performance display (here, the second premonition performance display ZEH2)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "second disappearance-related display SK2" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "second premonition performance display ZEH2" is displayed.

With this configuration, by making the second premonition effect display ZEH2 difficult to see, it is possible to suggest that the post-acceptance effect (second performance device, third performance device) is already being executed, and it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the second premonition effect display ZEH2 to the post-acceptance effect (from timing tG3b onwards). This makes it possible to continue displaying the second premonition effect display ZEH2 for a relatively long time in a situation where the post-acceptance effect (second performance device, third performance device) is already being executed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in what form the premonition effect display was displayed during the acceptance period. Furthermore, even after the post-acceptance performance (second performance device, third performance device) has started, the appearance of the premonition performance display (here, the second premonition performance display ZEH2) can be confirmed with good visibility until the premonition performance display becomes difficult to see (timing tG3a to tG3b), which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the second reception period, the second disappearance-related display SK2 appears in different modes (second disappearance-related display SK2-1, SK2-2) depending on whether the corresponding post-reception performance has a low expectation mode (Fig. 265 (e1) to (i1)) or a high expectation mode (Fig. 265 (e2) to (i2)). In other words, in this case, as shown in Fig. 265 (f1) and (f2), even if the "second post-reception performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) has not yet started, by checking whether the second disappearance-related display SK2 that appears on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) appears in the first mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-1) or the second mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-2), it becomes possible to guess whether the "second post-reception performance display" will be executed in a high expectation mode.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in Figure 256 (b) and Figure 265 (g1) or (g2), when timing tG3c arrives during the period during which the display related to the second disappearance related display SK2 (in a form in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears, execution of a "second post-acceptance performance display UG2" is initiated in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) as a post-acceptance performance in response to the acceptance of an action by the player within the second acceptance period. However, in this example, in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 264(d) to "B1 (FIG. 265(e1)-(i1))" (when the post-reception presentation has a relatively low expectation), as shown in FIG. 265(g1), the first mode (second post-reception presentation display UG2-1) is displayed as the second post-reception presentation display UG2 corresponding to the second reception period, and in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 264(d) to "B2 (FIG. 265(e2)-(i2))" (when the post-reception presentation has a relatively high expectation), as shown in FIG. 265(g2), the second mode (second post-reception presentation display UG2-2) is displayed as the second post-reception presentation display UG2 corresponding to the second reception period.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG," "second precursor effect display ZEH2," and "second disappearance-related display SK2 (second disappearance-related display SK2-1 or second disappearance-related display SK2-2)" are displayed, the "second post-acceptance effect display UG2 (second post-acceptance effect display UG2-1 or second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2)" is started to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated model image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 are made to continue to be displayed for a relatively long time after acceptance within the second acceptance period, the post-acceptance effect (second post-acceptance effect display UG2) in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) can be started without a significant delay compared to other effect devices, and a decline in interest in the game can be suppressed. In addition, because the second post-acceptance performance display UG2 begins while the integrated model image display IG and second premonition performance display ZEH2 are difficult to see, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the "integrated model image display IG" and "second premonition performance display ZEH2" to the "second post-acceptance performance display UG2 (second post-acceptance performance display UG2-1 or second post-acceptance performance display UG2-2)" (after timing tG3c), suggesting that the second acceptance period has already ended.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the display of the "second post-reception performance display UG2 (second post-reception performance display UG2-1 or second post-reception performance display UG2-2)" is started in this manner, as shown in Figure 256 (b) and Figure 265 (h1) or (h2), while the "second post-reception performance display UG2 (second post-reception performance display UG2-1 or second post-reception performance display UG2-2)" is displayed, first, of the "integrated model image display IG," "second premonition performance display ZEH2," and "second disappearance related display SK2," the "integrated model image display IG" and "second premonition performance display ZEH2" are each made non-display. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" and "second premonition performance display ZEH2" are hidden in this manner, as shown in FIG. 255(b) and FIG. 265(i1) or (i2), the "second disappearance related display SK2 (second disappearance related display SK2-1 or second disappearance related display SK2-2)" is hidden, and the "second post-reception performance display UG2 (second post-reception performance display UG2-1 or second post-reception performance display UG2-2)" is displayed with good visibility.

In this regard, the "second post-reception performance display UG2" is displayed in one of multiple modes (here, second post-reception performance display UG2-1 or second post-reception performance display UG2-2) with different degrees of expectation based on the acceptance of the player's action. Therefore, the "second post-reception performance display UG2" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG", "second premonition performance display ZEH2", and "second disappearance-related display SK2" are hidden.

Incidentally, in the example presentation (Figs. 262 and 263) corresponding to the first reception period described above, even if reception is made during the first reception period and the "first post-reception performance display UG1" is executed, the background image is not switched before and after the start of the "first post-reception performance display UG1" and is maintained. In contrast, in the example presentation (Figs. 264 and 265) corresponding to the second reception period, if reception is made during the second reception period and the "second post-reception performance display UG2" is executed, the background image is switched before and after the start of the "second post-reception performance display UG2".

With this configuration, in the situation shown in Figures 265(e) and (f) where no change in the background image has occurred (timings tG3a to tG3b shown in Figure 256), even if there has been a change in the performance on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), it is possible to indicate that the "second post-reception performance display UG2" has not yet started.

In the example shown in FIG. 265, the post-reception performance is configured to switch to the same background image when a low expectation mode appears and when a high expectation mode appears, but it may also be configured to switch to different background images when a low expectation mode appears and when a high expectation mode appears. Also, it may be configured to switch the background image when a high expectation mode appears, but not to switch the background image when a low expectation mode appears.

In this way, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, even when a second reception period occurs, it is within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 256) and various displays are performed within a limited display screen (performance display device 1600), thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game. However, as a result of this, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is forced to delay the start time (timing tG3c) of the second post-reception performance (second post-reception performance display) in response to the reception from the timing tG3a of the reception.

Therefore, in this example as well, when an action by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period, as shown in Figures 256 (b) and (c), based on the acceptance, a second post-acceptance performance (second post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is started to be executed prior to the second post-acceptance performance (second post-acceptance performance display) using the first performance device.

With this configuration, the delay in the start of execution from the timing tG3a when the reception is made during the second reception period is limited to only a part of the second post-reception performance (display of the second post-reception performance), and the second post-reception performance itself can be started without delay from the same timing tG3a.

As mentioned above, such a second performance device may be provided as a sub-LCD when the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is used as the main LCD, or may be provided as a performance movable body capable of performing performance operations, or a performance lamp capable of emitting light for performance, etc. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform performances (display performance, movable performance, light-emitting performance, etc.) in multiple ways with different degrees of expectation. The degree of expectation (the rate at which a jackpot pattern will appear) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-LCD 1610 is used as the second performance device. In an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 264(d) to "B1 (FIG. 265(e1)-(i1))" (when the expectation level is relatively low as a post-acceptance performance), as shown in FIG. 265(e1), the mode in which "women's kimono" is displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is started to be executed prior to the second post-acceptance performance (second post-acceptance performance display UG2-1) using the first performance device as the second post-acceptance specific performance UGT2 (second post-acceptance specific performance UGT2-1, which is a low expectation level mode of the second post-acceptance specific performance UGT2) corresponding to the second acceptance period. In contrast, in an example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 264(d) to "B2 (FIG. 265(e2)-(i2))" (when the post-reception presentation has a relatively high expectation), as shown in FIG. 265(e2), the mode in which "men's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 1610 (second presentation device) is set to begin execution prior to the second post-reception presentation (second post-reception presentation display UG2-2) using the first presentation device as the second post-reception specific presentation UGT2 (second post-reception specific presentation UGT2-2, which is a high expectation mode of the second post-reception specific presentation UGT2) corresponding to the second reception period.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 264, in addition to the second premonition performance display ZEH2 in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), a premonition performance (second premonition specific performance) corresponding to the second acceptance period is also executed in the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) (FIG. 264 (b) to (d)). Unlike the second premonition performance display ZEH2 in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), the second premonition specific performance in the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is executed even at the time when the timing tG3 at which the second acceptance period occurs arrives, and is executed across the timing tG3.

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further includes a third performance device (speaker), and when the second acceptance period occurs, the acceptance permission sound (corresponding to the "♪" output in Figs. 264(c) and (d)) starts to be output at timing tG2 shown in Fig. 256(d). In other words, the acceptance permission sound corresponding to the second acceptance period is audibly output across timing tG3 when the second acceptance period occurs (corresponding to the "situation shown in Fig. 264(d)"), and the player's actions can be accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being audibly output.

Here, during the second acceptance period, a long-term acceptable sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively long time and a short-term acceptable sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively short time are output as the acceptance acceptable sound. In the example shown in FIG. 256(d), the long-term acceptable sound and the short-term acceptable sound are each started to be output at the same time, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one of the long-term acceptable sound and the short-term acceptable sound may be started to be output at or after timing tG3 when the second acceptance period occurs.

In the second acceptance period, if an action by the player is accepted while the long-term permissible sound and/or the short-term permissible sound are being audibly output, the long-term permissible sound and/or the short-term permissible sound are terminated (the audible output state is terminated) based on the acceptance.

In addition, during the second acceptance period, if an action by the player is accepted while an acceptance permissible sound (long-term acceptance sound, short-term acceptance sound) is being audibly output, not only is the acceptance permissible sound terminated midway, but when the acceptance is made, a second post-acceptance output sound (corresponding to the "♪♪" output in FIG. 265 (e1) or (e2), etc.) different from the first post-acceptance output sound is started audibly. In other words, during the second acceptance period, unlike the case of the presentation (display presentation) made by the first presentation device, there is no longer any competition (overlapping) between the presentation made during the acceptance period (acceptance permissible sound) and the presentation made in response to the acceptance being made (second post-acceptance output sound).

As shown in FIG. 256(d), this second post-acceptance output sound, like the "second post-acceptance performance display UG2", will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "second disappearance-related display SK2" are hidden (corresponding to the "situation where ♪♪ is output in FIG. 265(e1)-(i1) or (e2)-(e1)"). In addition, for the second post-acceptance output sound, it is desirable to output different output sounds (modes) in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 264(d) to "B1 (FIG. 265(e1)-(i1))" (when the expectation level is relatively low as a post-acceptance performance) and the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 264(d) to "B2 (FIG. 265(e2)-(i2))" (when the expectation level is relatively high as a post-acceptance performance).

Note that during the second reception period, a long-term acceptable sound and a short-term acceptable sound are output as the reception acceptable sound, but it is not necessary to output these two acceptable sounds, and only one reception acceptable sound may be output, as in the first reception period.

On the other hand, although not shown in Figure 256, the example in which the presentation progresses from Figure 264(d) to "B3 (Figure 265(e3) to (h3))" assumes a case in which no action by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period.

That is, in this case, after the second acceptance period occurs, the timing tG4 arrives without the player's action being accepted. In this regard, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at the timing tG4 (the point at which the second acceptance period ends and the acceptance of the player's action is no longer permitted), as in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at the timing tG3a (the point at which the player's action is accepted during the second acceptance period), as shown in FIG. 265 (e3), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see. In this performance example, since the second premonition performance display ZEH2 is hidden at the timing tG4, the second premonition performance display ZEH2 is not displayed after the timing tG4.

With this configuration, even if the second acceptance period ends before the player's action is accepted in time, it is possible to recognize how the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the second acceptance period after the second acceptance period has ended, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if no action by the player is accepted, as shown in FIG. 265 (f3), the display of the second disappearance related display SK2-1 or the second disappearance related display SK2-2 (in the figure, the display of the second disappearance related display SK2-1) will be initiated as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see."

In other words, in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in this example, the "second disappearance related display SK2-1 or second disappearance related display SK2-2" is displayed while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "second disappearance related display SK2" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

With this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the second reception period ends without any reception, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, thereby suggesting that the second reception period has ended. Also, even in a situation where the second reception period has already ended, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the action by the player is not accepted during the second acceptance period, the case where the "second disappearance related display SK2-1" is displayed as the second disappearance related display SK2 corresponds to the case where, if the action by the player had been accepted during the second acceptance period, the presentation would have progressed from FIG. 264(d) to "B1 (FIG. 265(e1) to (i1))" (if a post-acceptance presentation with a relatively low expectation had been executed). On the other hand, when the action by the player is not accepted during the second acceptance period, the case where the "second disappearance related display SK2-2" is displayed as the second disappearance related display SK2 corresponds to the case where, if the action by the player had been accepted during the second acceptance period, the presentation would have progressed from FIG. 264(d) to "B2 (FIG. 265(e2) to (i2))" (if a post-acceptance presentation with a relatively high expectation had been executed).

In this case, even if no action by the player is accepted during the second acceptance period, after the end of the second acceptance period, simply by checking the appearance of the "second disappearance-related display SK2" that appears in association with the integrated model image display IG being hidden (second disappearance-related display SK2-1, second disappearance-related display SK2-2), it becomes possible to recognize whether the second post-acceptance performance was performed in a low-expectation mode or a high-expectation mode, and therefore it is possible to suitably prevent a decline in interest in the game.

After this, as shown in FIG. 265 (g3), of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "second disappearance related display SK2", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden first. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" has been hidden in this way, the "second disappearance related display SK2" is hidden as shown in FIG. 265 (h3).

Figure 257 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when the third condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and a third reception period (third reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with no guaranteed bonus or time reduction), and the "third variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the third variation pattern. After this, the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ (performance depiction according to the third variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the third variation pattern, etc.) is started, and during the execution period of the variation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "third variation pattern" itself.

However, in the performance related to the "third variation pattern", regardless of which result is obtained as the performance judgment (pre-notice judgment), the third acceptance period (valid period) during which "acceptance regarding the third post-operation performance" is permitted is generated when timing tH3 (which may be a timing before the SP reach state occurs or a timing within the SP reach state) arrives when a third predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ. As a result, when an action by the player is accepted during the third acceptance period, the third post-acceptance performance is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the third acceptance period (valid period) may be generated as a result of the pre-notice performance judgment.

In this regard, in the third reception period (third reception performance) according to this embodiment, the content executed as the third post-reception performance based on the acceptance of the player's action (the "third post-reception performance display" in the first performance device, the "third post-reception specific performance" in the second performance device, and the "third post-reception output sound" in the third performance device) is different from the first post-reception performance described above with reference to FIG. 255 (or FIG. 262, FIG. 263) (the "first post-reception performance display" in the first performance device, the "first post-reception specific performance" in the second performance device, and the "first post-reception output sound" in the third performance device), but the other configurations are basically the same.

For example, the timing tH1 shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to the timing tF1 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tH1 arrives, as shown in FIG. 257(b), the "first premonition effect display ZEH1" is started to be executed as the premonition effect display on the display screen (effect display device 1600) as shown in FIG. 257(b). The "first premonition effect display ZEH1" in the example shown in FIG. 257(b) is also hidden when the timing tH3 at which the corresponding reception period (third reception period) occurs (the timing at which acceptance for the third post-reception effect is permitted) arrives. However, as in the case of the first reception period described above, it may be hidden before the timing tH3. In any case, the "first premonition effect display ZEH1" is not displayed during the first reception period in this example when the acceptance of the player's action is permitted.

The timing tH2 shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to the timing tF2 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tH2 arrives, as shown in FIG. 262(c), the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "first premonition effect display ZEH1" is displayed, and at least a part of the area in which the "integrated Moji image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "first premonition effect display ZEH1" is displayed. Note that the configuration of the "integrated Moji image display IG" and "first premonition effect display ZEH1" displayed in relation to the third reception period, and other examples related thereto, have been described above with reference to FIG. 255, FIG. 262, and FIG. 263, and therefore will not be described here.

Furthermore, timing tH3 shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to timing tF3 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when timing tH3 arrives, the above-mentioned third acceptance period occurs while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, as shown in FIG. 262(d). Similarly, the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden when an action is accepted within the third acceptance period, or when the third acceptance period ends without such acceptance. Note that the third acceptance period in this example ends when timing tH4 arrives if no action by the player is accepted.

Also, the timing tH3a shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to the timing tF3a shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tH3a arrives, the third reception period ends based on the acceptance of the player's action, and the post-reception performance (third post-reception performance) corresponding to the third reception period starts to be executed. As for the third post-reception performance, at least the first mode with a relatively low expectation is executed and the second mode with a relatively high expectation is executed, and the performance contents (the contents of the post-reception performance display, the post-reception specific performance, and the post-reception output sound) are different from the first post-reception performance, but the expectation level is suggested depending on which of the multiple modes is executed, which is the same as the first post-reception performance. The expectation level (the rate at which a jackpot pattern appears) may include "0%" or "100%". Also, at timing tH3a, which is the time when the player's action is accepted (the time when the third post-acceptance performance is started in response to the acceptance), the integrated model image display IG is not made invisible, and is not made difficult to see either, which is the same as in the first post-acceptance performance described above.

Furthermore, timing tH3b shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to timing tF3b shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when timing tH3b arrives, display of the first disappearance related display SK1-1 (the first mode of the first disappearance related display SK1 commonly corresponding to the first reception period and the third reception period) will start as the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to view". Note that the configuration of the "first disappearance related display SK1" displayed in relation to the third reception period and other related examples have been described above with reference to FIG. 255 and FIG. 263, and therefore will not be described here.

This configuration of the first performance device (performance display device 1600) for the "period from when the first premonition performance display ZEH1 is displayed to when the first disappearance-related display SK1 is displayed" makes it difficult to recognize whether the first or third reception period is occurring (has occurred), which encourages interest in the second and third performance devices, and increases interest in which form of post-reception performance display (first post-reception performance display, third post-reception performance display) will appear.

In addition, even during the third reception period, regardless of whether a low expectation mode or a high expectation mode is executed as the corresponding post-reception performance, the same mode (first disappearance related display SK1-1) appears as the first disappearance related display SK1, so that even in a situation where the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has started to be executed, the expectation level can be kept secret in the first performance device (performance display device 1600). However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and different disappearance related displays may appear depending on the expectation level. The expectation level (probability of the jackpot pattern appearing) may include "0%" or "100%".

Furthermore, timing tH3c shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to timing tF3c shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when timing tH3c arrives, the "third post-reception performance display (different in type as a preview performance from the first post-reception performance display)" will be executed as a post-reception performance in the third performance device (performance display device 1600) in response to the acceptance of the player's action within the third reception period. As for this "third post-reception performance display", multiple modes with different expectations are prepared, and as described above, different modes of the "third post-reception performance display" will appear depending on whether a mode with low expectations is executed as the third post-reception performance or a mode with high expectations is executed.

In other words, in this case, the "third post-acceptance performance display" begins to be executed while the "integrated model image display IG" and the "first disappearance-related display SK1-1" are both displayed. This creates a tricky situation in which it is unclear whether the first or third acceptance period has occurred, and it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the "integrated model image display IG" to the "post-acceptance performance display" (after timing tH3c).

In this example, when the display related to the "third post-reception performance display" is started in this way, regardless of the mode, while the "third post-reception performance display" is being displayed, first, the "integrated model image display IG" out of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "first disappearance related display SK1-1" is hidden. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "first disappearance related display SK-1" is hidden, and the "third post-reception performance display" is displayed with good visibility.

As mentioned above, the "third post-reception performance display" is also displayed in one of a number of different modes with different degrees of expectation based on the acceptance of the player's action. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 257(b), the "third post-reception performance display" will also be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "first disappearance related display SK-1" are hidden.

In this way, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, even if a third reception period occurs, it is within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 257), and various displays are performed within a limited display screen (performance display device 1600). However, as a result of this, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is forced to delay the start time (timing tH3c) of the third post-reception performance (third post-reception performance display) in response to reception from the timing tH3a of reception.

Therefore, even if an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the third acceptance period, as shown in Figures 257(b) and (c), based on the acceptance, the third post-acceptance performance (third post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is started prior to the third post-acceptance performance (third post-acceptance performance display) using the first performance device. The content of the third post-acceptance specific performance is different from the first post-acceptance specific performance, but it is basically performed in the same way as the first post-acceptance specific performance.

For example, multiple modes with different degrees of expectation are prepared for the third post-reception specific performance, and different modes appear on the sub-liquid crystal display 1610 (second performance device) as the third post-reception specific performance when a mode with low expectation is executed as the third post-reception specific performance and when a mode with high expectation is executed as the third post-reception specific performance. Also, as shown in Figures 257 (b) and (c), the third post-reception specific performance using the second performance device is started to be executed prior to the display of the third post-reception specific performance using the first performance device, which is the same as the first post-reception specific performance described above.

When the third reception period occurs, it is desirable to have the premonition effect (first premonition specific effect that corresponds commonly to the first reception period and the third reception period) executed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) in the same way as in the first reception period. In this case, unlike the first premonition effect display ZEH1 on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), the premonition specific effect (first premonition specific effect) on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is executed even at the time when the timing tH3 at which the third reception period occurs arrives, and it is more desirable to have it executed across the timing tH3.

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further includes a third performance device (speaker), and when the third acceptance period occurs, the acceptance allowance sound starts to be output at timing tH2 shown in FIG. 257(d). In other words, the acceptance allowance sound corresponding to the third acceptance period is audibly output across timing tH3 when the third acceptance period occurs, and actions by the player can be accepted while the acceptance allowance sound is being audibly output. It is desirable that this acceptance allowance sound be the same sound as the acceptance allowance sound output when the first acceptance period occurs.

However, during the third acceptance period, if an action is accepted by the player while the acceptance permission sound is being audibly output, the audible output state of the acceptance permission sound is terminated based on the fact that an action has been accepted.

In addition, during the third acceptance period, if an action by the player is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being audibly output, not only is the acceptance permission sound terminated midway, but when the acceptance is made, based on this, audible output of a third post-acceptance output sound different from the first post-acceptance output sound and the second post-acceptance output sound is started. In other words, in this case, during the third acceptance period, unlike the case of the presentation (display presentation) performed by the first presentation device, there is no competition (overlapping) between the presentation performed during the acceptance period (acceptance permission sound) and the presentation performed in response to the acceptance (third post-acceptance output sound).

Similar to the "third post-reception performance display", this third post-reception output sound will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "first disappearance related display SK1-1" are hidden, as shown in FIG. 257(d). In addition, it is desirable to prepare multiple modes with different expectations for the third post-reception output sound as well, so that different output sounds (modes) are output when a mode with low expectations is executed as the third post-reception performance and when a mode with high expectations is executed.

With this configuration, by just looking at the first performance device (performance display device 1600), it is difficult to tell which type of reception period has occurred until timing tH3c arrives, but by checking the second performance device and the third performance device, it becomes possible to tell which type of reception period has occurred at the earlier timing tH3a. This makes it possible to encourage players who tend to focus only on the first performance device (performance display device 1600) to enjoy performances with more performance devices.

On the other hand, although not shown in Figure 257, if the player's action is not accepted within the third acceptance period, the process is basically the same as if the player's action was not accepted within the first acceptance period.

In other words, in this case, after the third acceptance period occurs, the timing tH4 arrives without any action by the player being accepted. In this regard, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at timing tH4 (the point at which the third acceptance period ends and acceptance of actions by the player is no longer permitted) does not hide the integrated model image display IG, just like the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at timing tH3a (the point at which an action by the player is accepted within the third acceptance period), and does not make the integrated model image display IG difficult to see.

After this, even if no action by the player is accepted, the display of the first disappearance-related display SK1-2 (the second mode of the first disappearance-related display SK1, which corresponds commonly to the first and third acceptance periods) will begin as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see."

In other words, in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in this example, the "first disappearance related display SK1-2" is displayed while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "first disappearance related display SK1-2" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

With this configuration, if an action by the player is not accepted, it becomes impossible to know which type of action occurred during the acceptance period, and the player can be strongly urged to make an operation. Note that in the third acceptance period, as in the first acceptance period, when an action by the player is not accepted, the "first disappearance-related display SK1" does not appear in a different form according to the degree of expectation, and instead appears in a form (first disappearance-related display SK1-2) different from the form that appears when an action is accepted (first disappearance-related display SK1-1).

After this, of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "first disappearance related display SK1-2", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden first. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "first disappearance related display SK-2" is hidden.

Figure 258 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the fourth condition is satisfied as a result of the judgment and a fourth reception period (fourth reception presentation) occurs. Figures 266 and 267 are diagrams showing an example of presentation in a variation pattern in which a fourth reception period (fourth reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the start condition is established (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is not a sure-win/time-saving state), and the "fourth variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern SZ variation performance (performance depiction according to the fourth variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the fourth variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in FIG. 266(a)), and during the execution period of the variation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "fourth variation pattern" itself. In the example of the presentation shown in FIG. 266(a), for ease of explanation, it is assumed that the first presentation display TE (corresponding to the "timer presentation" described above) indicating the expected probability of a jackpot (the rate at which a jackpot pattern will appear when the decorative pattern SZ stops during the presentation) and the second presentation display FE depicted as a frog character are displayed at the start of the pattern change. These displays may be displayed during the change rather than at the start of the change, or may be displayed at different times.

However, in the presentation related to the "fourth variation pattern", as shown in FIG. 258, regardless of which result is obtained as the presentation judgment (pre-notice judgment), when the timing tI3 (which may be a timing before the occurrence of the SP reach state or a timing within the SP reach state) arrives when the fourth predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the presentation of the decorative pattern SZ variation, the fourth acceptance period (valid period) during which "acceptance regarding the fourth post-operation presentation" is permitted is generated (the situation shown in FIG. 266 (d)). As a result, when an action by the player is accepted during the fourth acceptance period, the fourth post-acceptance presentation is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the fourth acceptance period (valid period) may be generated as a result of the pre-notice presentation judgment.

In this respect, in the fourth reception period (fourth reception performance) according to this embodiment, the content executed as the fourth post-reception performance based on the acceptance of the player's action (the "fourth post-reception performance display" in the first performance device, the "fourth post-reception specific performance" in the second performance device, and the "fourth post-reception output sound" in the third performance device) is different from the first post-reception performance described above with reference to FIG. 255 (or FIG. 262, FIG. 263) (the "first post-reception performance display" in the first performance device, the "first post-reception specific performance" in the second performance device, and the "first post-reception output sound" in the third performance device). Also, in the fourth reception period (fourth reception performance) according to this embodiment, the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 different from the first disappearance-related display SK1 appears as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see", which is different from the first reception period, but the other configurations are basically the same.

Below, we will explain the effects that are performed in relation to the occurrence of the fourth reception period (fourth reception effect), but we will not go into details about the same things as in the first reception period (first reception effect). In other words, for matters that are not specifically mentioned, the effects will be performed in the same way as explained in the first reception period (first reception effect), and the same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

For example, timing tI1 shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to timing tF1 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when timing tI1 arrives, as shown in FIG. 258(b) and FIG. 266(b), on the display screen (performance display device 1600), "first premonition performance display ZEH1" begins to be executed as the above premonition performance display.

Furthermore, timing tI2 shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to timing tF2 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when timing tI2 arrives, as shown in FIG. 266(c), the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "first premonition effect display ZEH1" is being displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "integrated Moji image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "first premonition effect display ZEH1" is displayed.

Furthermore, timing tI3 shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to timing tF3 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when timing tI3 arrives, the fourth reception period occurs while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, as shown in FIG. 266(d).

The timing tI3a shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to the timing tF3a shown in FIG. 255. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 258 and the example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 266(d) to "C1 (FIG. 267(e1)-(i1))" or "C2 (FIG. 267(e2)-(i2))", it is assumed that the action of the player is accepted at timing tI3a during the fourth acceptance period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 258(a), the fourth acceptance period ends based on the action of the player being accepted at timing tI3a, and the post-acceptance performance corresponding to the fourth acceptance period (fourth post-acceptance performance) is started to be executed.

The example of the performance progressing from FIG. 266(d) to "C1 (FIG. 267(e1)-(i1))" corresponds to the case where the first mode with a relatively low expectation is executed as the post-reception performance corresponding to the fourth reception period, and the example of the performance progressing from FIG. 266(d) to "C2 (FIG. 267(e2)-(i2))" corresponds to the case where the second mode with a relatively high expectation is executed as the post-reception performance corresponding to the fourth reception period. However, it is not necessary to prepare multiple modes with different expectation levels as the post-reception performance corresponding to the fourth reception period, and a specific mode (for example, C1 (FIG. 267(e1)-(i1))) may always appear when the reception is made. In this case, even if the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see" corresponding to the fourth reception period is a mode in which multiple modes are prepared according to the expectation level, the same mode will always appear when the reception is made.

Similarly, during this fourth reception period, as shown in FIG. 258(b) and FIG. 267(e1) or (e2), at timing tI3a when the player's action is accepted (when the fourth post-reception performance starts in response to the acceptance), the integrated model image display IG is not only not hidden, but is also not made difficult to see.

Furthermore, timing tI3b shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to timing tF3b shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when timing tI3b arrives, "a state in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" will appear. However, as described above, when an acceptance is made during the fourth acceptance period, the display of the fourth disappearance-related display SK4, which is different from the first disappearance-related display SK1, will start (timing tI3b).

In other words, in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in this example, the "fourth disappearance related display SK4" is displayed while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "fourth disappearance related display SK4" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

According to this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the reception, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, which suggests that the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being performed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the integrated model image display IG to the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) (from timing tI3b onwards). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has already been performed, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the player being unable to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

In addition, in the fourth reception period, the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 appears in different modes (fourth disappearance-related display SK4-1, SK4-2) depending on whether the corresponding post-reception performance has a low expectation mode (Fig. 267 (e1) to (i1)) or a high expectation mode (Fig. 267 (e2) to (i2)). In other words, in this case, as shown in Fig. 267 (f1) and (f2), even if the "fourth post-reception performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) has not yet started, by checking whether the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 that appears on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) appears in the first mode (fourth disappearance-related display SK4-1) or the second mode (fourth disappearance-related display SK4-2), it becomes possible to guess whether the "fourth post-reception performance display" will be executed in a high expectation mode.

Furthermore, timing tI3c shown in Fig. 258 corresponds to timing tF3c shown in Fig. 255. Therefore, when timing tI3c arrives, while the display related to the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 (in a state in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see) is appearing, execution of the "fourth post-reception performance display UG4" as a post-reception performance in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in response to the player's action being accepted within the fourth acceptance period will begin. However, in this example, in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 266(d) to "C1 (FIG. 267(e1)-(i1))" (when the post-reception presentation has a relatively low expectation), as shown in FIG. 267(g1), the first mode (fourth post-reception presentation display UG4-1) is displayed as the fourth post-reception presentation display UG4 corresponding to the fourth reception period, and in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 266(d) to "C2 (FIG. 267(e2)-(i2))" (when the post-reception presentation has a relatively high expectation), as shown in FIG. 267(g2), the second mode (fourth post-reception presentation display UG4-2) is displayed as the fourth post-reception presentation display UG4 corresponding to the fourth reception period.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4 (fourth disappearance-related display SK4-1 or fourth disappearance-related display SK4-2)" are displayed, the "fourth post-acceptance performance display UG4 (fourth post-acceptance performance display UG4-1 or fourth post-acceptance performance display UG4-2)" is started to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated model image display IG is made to continue to be displayed for a relatively long time after acceptance within the fourth acceptance period, the post-acceptance performance (fourth post-acceptance performance display UG4) in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) can be started without a significant delay compared to other performance devices, and a decline in interest in the game can be suppressed. In addition, because the fourth post-reception performance display UG4 begins while the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the "integrated model image display IG" to the "fourth post-reception performance display UG4 (fourth post-reception performance display UG4-1 or fourth post-reception performance display UG4-2)" (from timing tI3c onwards), suggesting that the fourth reception period has already ended.

And also in the performance related to the fourth reception period, when the display of the "fourth post-reception performance display UG4 (fourth post-reception performance display UG4-1 or fourth post-reception performance display UG4-2)" is started in this manner, as shown in Figure 258 (b) and Figure 267 (h1) or (h2), while the "fourth post-reception performance display UG4 (fourth post-reception performance display UG4-1 or fourth post-reception performance display UG4-2)" is displayed, first, of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "second disappearance related display SK2", the "integrated model image display IG" is made invisible. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this manner, as shown in FIG. 258(b) and FIG. 267(i1) or (i2), the "fourth disappearance related display SK4 (fourth disappearance related display SK4-1 or fourth disappearance related display SK4-2)" is hidden, and the "fourth post-reception performance display UG4 (fourth post-reception performance display UG4-1 or fourth post-reception performance display UG4-2)" is displayed with good visibility.

With this configuration, by just looking at the first performance device (performance display device 1600), it is difficult to tell which type of reception period has occurred until timing tI3b arrives, but by checking the second and third performance devices, it becomes possible to tell which type of reception period has occurred at the earlier timing tI3a. This makes it possible to encourage players who tend to focus only on the first performance device (performance display device 1600) to enjoy performances with more performance devices.

In addition, even if the player only looks at the first performance device (performance display device 1600), when timing tI3b arrives, a fourth disappearance-related display SK4, which is different from the first disappearance-related display SK1 described above, will appear as "a state in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see." Therefore, by checking this state, it becomes possible to recognize at an earlier stage which type of reception period has occurred, before the "fourth post-reception performance display UG4" is performed.

In this regard, the "fourth post-reception performance display UG4" is displayed in one of a number of ways (here, the fourth post-reception performance display UG4-1 or the fourth post-reception performance display UG4-2) with different degrees of expectation based on the acceptance of the player's action. Therefore, the "fourth post-reception performance display UG4" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4" are hidden.

In this way, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, even when a fourth reception period occurs, it is within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 258) and various displays are performed within a limited display screen (performance display device 1600), thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game. However, as a result of this, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is forced to delay the start time (timing tI3c) of the fourth post-reception performance (fourth post-reception performance display) in response to the reception from the timing tI3a of the reception.

Therefore, even if an action by the player is accepted within the fourth acceptance period, as also shown in Figures 258 (b) and (c), based on the acceptance, the fourth post-acceptance performance (fourth post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is started to be executed prior to the fourth post-acceptance performance (fourth post-acceptance performance display) using the first performance device.

With this configuration, the delay in the start of execution from the timing tI3a when the acceptance is made during the fourth acceptance period is limited to only a part of the fourth post-acceptance performance (display of the fourth post-acceptance performance), and the fourth post-acceptance performance itself can be started without delay from the same timing tI3a.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-LCD 1610 is used as the second performance device. In an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 266(d) to "C1 (FIG. 267(e1)-(i1))" (when the post-acceptance performance has a relatively low expectation), as shown in FIG. 267(e1), the mode in which "one sword" is displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is started to be executed prior to the fourth post-acceptance performance (fourth post-acceptance performance display UG4-1) using the first performance device as the fourth post-acceptance specific performance UGT4 (fourth post-acceptance specific performance UGT4-1, which is a low expectation mode of the fourth post-acceptance specific performance UGT4) corresponding to the fourth acceptance period. In contrast, in an example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 266(d) to "C2 (FIG. 267(e2)-(i2))" (when the post-reception presentation has a relatively high expectation), as shown in FIG. 267(e2), the mode in which "two swords" are displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second presentation device) is started to be executed prior to the fourth post-reception presentation (fourth post-reception presentation display UG4-2) using the first presentation device as the fourth post-reception specific presentation UGT4 (fourth post-reception specific presentation UGT4-2, which is a high expectation mode of the fourth post-reception specific presentation UGT4) corresponding to the fourth reception period.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 266, in addition to the first premonition performance display ZEH1 on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), a premonition performance (fourth premonition specific performance) corresponding to the fourth reception period is also executed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) (FIGS. 266(b)-(d)). Unlike the first premonition performance display ZEH1 on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), the fourth premonition specific performance on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is executed even at the time when the timing tI3 at which the first reception period occurs arrives, and is executed across the timing tI3.

In this embodiment, the premonition effect corresponding to the fourth reception period is executed as an effect (fourth premonition specific effect) different from the first premonition specific effect shown in FIG. 262, but it may be executed as the same effect as the first premonition specific effect shown in FIG. 262. In this case, even when the second effect device is checked, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the first reception period or the fourth reception period is occurring.

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further includes a third performance device (speaker), and when the fourth acceptance period occurs, the acceptance allowance sound (corresponding to the "♪" output in Figs. 266(b)-(d)) starts to be output at timing tI2 shown in Fig. 258(d). In other words, the acceptance allowance sound corresponding to the fourth acceptance period is audibly output across timing tI3 when the fourth acceptance period occurs (corresponding to the "situation shown in Fig. 266(d)"), and the player's actions can be accepted while the acceptance allowance sound is being audibly output.

In this regard, in the fourth acceptance period, if an action is accepted by the player while the acceptance permission sound is being audibly output, the acceptance permission sound is terminated midway (the audible output state is terminated midway) based on the acceptance.

In addition, during the fourth acceptance period, if an action by the player is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being audibly output, not only is the acceptance permission sound terminated midway, but when the acceptance is made, based on this, a fourth post-acceptance output sound (corresponding to the "♪♪" output in Figure 267 (e1) or (e2), etc.) different from the first post-acceptance output sound is started to be audibly output. In other words, in this case, during the fourth acceptance period, unlike the case of the presentation (display presentation) performed by the first presentation device, there is no competition (overlapping) between the presentation performed within the acceptance period (acceptance permission sound) and the presentation performed in response to the acceptance (fourth post-acceptance output sound).

As shown in FIG. 258(d), this fourth post-acceptance output sound, like the "fourth post-acceptance performance display UG4", will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "fourth disappearance-related display SK4" are hidden (corresponding to the "situation where ♪♪ is output in FIG. 267(e1)-(i1) or (e2)-(e1)"). In addition, for the fourth post-acceptance output sound, it is desirable to output different output sounds (modes) in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 266(d) to "C1 (FIG. 267(e1)-(i1))" (when the expectation level is relatively low as a post-acceptance performance) and the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 266(d) to "C2 (FIG. 267(e2)-(i2))" (when the expectation level is relatively high as a post-acceptance performance).

The reception allowance sound output in response to the fourth reception period is preferably the same as the reception allowance sound output in response to the first reception period, in order to make it difficult to recognize whether the first reception period or the fourth reception period is occurring. However, it does not necessarily have to be the same.

On the other hand, although not shown in Figure 258, the example in which the presentation progresses from Figure 266(d) to "C3 (Figure 267(e3) to (h3))" assumes a case in which no action by the player is accepted within the fourth acceptance period.

In other words, in this case, after the fourth acceptance period occurs, the timing tI4 arrives without any action by the player being accepted. In this regard, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at timing tI4 (the point at which the fourth acceptance period ends and acceptance of actions by the player is no longer permitted) does not hide the integrated model image display IG, as shown in FIG. 267 (e3), just as the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at timing tI3a (the point at which an action by the player is accepted within the fourth acceptance period), does not make the integrated model image display IG difficult to see.

With this configuration, even if the fourth acceptance period ends before the player's action is accepted in time, it is possible to recognize how the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the fourth acceptance period after the fourth acceptance period has ended, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if no action by the player is accepted, as shown in FIG. 267 (f3), the display of the fourth disappearance related display SK4-1 or the fourth disappearance related display SK4-2 (in the figure, the display of the fourth disappearance related display SK4-1) will be initiated as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see."

In other words, in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in this example, the "fourth disappearance related display SK4-1 or the second disappearance related display SK4-2" is displayed while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "fourth disappearance related display SK4" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

With this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the fourth reception period ends without any reception, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, thereby suggesting that the fourth reception period has ended. Also, even in a situation where the fourth reception period has already ended, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in playing the game due to not being able to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the action by the player is not accepted during the fourth acceptance period, the case where "fourth disappearance related display SK4-1" is displayed as the fourth disappearance related display SK4 corresponds to the case where, if the action by the player had been accepted during the fourth acceptance period, the performance would have progressed from FIG. 266(d) to "C1 (FIG. 267(e1) to (i1))" (if a post-acceptance performance with a relatively low expectation had been executed). On the other hand, when the action by the player is not accepted during the fourth acceptance period, the case where "fourth disappearance related display SK4-2" is displayed as the fourth disappearance related display SK4 corresponds to the case where, if the action by the player had been accepted during the fourth acceptance period, the performance would have progressed from FIG. 266(d) to "C2 (FIG. 267(e2) to (i2))" (if a post-acceptance performance with a relatively high expectation had been executed).

In this case, even if no action by the player is accepted during the fourth acceptance period, after the end of the fourth acceptance period, simply by checking the appearance of the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4" (fourth disappearance-related display SK4-1, fourth disappearance-related display SK4-2) that appears in conjunction with the integrated model image display IG being hidden, it becomes possible to recognize whether the fourth post-acceptance performance was performed in a low-expectation mode or a high-expectation mode, and therefore it is possible to suitably prevent a decline in interest in the game.

After this, as shown in FIG. 267 (g3), of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "fourth disappearance related display SK4", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden first. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" has been hidden in this way, the "fourth disappearance related display SK4" is hidden as shown in FIG. 267 (h3).

In the fourth reception period, as in the first reception period, the same specific pattern may appear as the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 regardless of whether a low expectation pattern (Fig. 267 (e1)-(i1)) or a high expectation pattern (Fig. 267 (e2)-(i2)) is executed as the corresponding post-reception performance. However, in this case, even if no action by the player is accepted during the fourth reception period, unlike the first reception period described above, the same specific pattern will appear as the fourth disappearance-related display SK4.

As mentioned above, in both the first and fourth reception periods, the first performance display TE (here, this corresponds to the above-mentioned "timer performance") and the second performance display FE (frog character) can be displayed during the period from when the premonition performance is displayed until when the post-reception performance is displayed.

In this regard, when the first reception period occurs, as shown in FIG. 262(b) and (c), in a situation where the "first premonition display ZEH1" is displayed, the first display TE and the second display FE are not made difficult to see by the "first premonition display ZEH1". Also, after the first reception period ends, as shown in FIG. 263(f1) to (f3), (g1), and (g2), the first disappearance related display SK1-1 (when accepted) and the first disappearance related display SK1-2 (when not accepted) appear, but the first display TE and the second display FE are not made difficult to see by the first disappearance related display SK1 (the first disappearance related display SK1-1 or the first disappearance related display SK1-2).

In contrast, even when the fourth reception period occurs, as shown in Fig. 266(b) and (c), in a situation where the "first premonition display ZEH1" is displayed, the first display TE and the second display FE are not made difficult to see by the "first premonition display ZEH1". Also, after the fourth reception period ends, as shown in Fig. 267(f1)-(f3), (g1), and (g2), the fourth disappearance related display SK4 (fourth disappearance related display SK4-1 or fourth disappearance related display SK4-2) appears, but the first display TE is not made difficult to see by the fourth disappearance related display SK4. However, the second display FE is made difficult to see by the fourth disappearance related display SK4.

With this configuration, even if the type of disappearance-related display SK corresponds to which type of reception period, it is possible to guess which type of reception period has occurred simply by checking whether the second performance display FE is made difficult to see when the disappearance-related display SK is displayed. In addition, regardless of whether the disappearance-related display SK makes the second performance display FE difficult to see, the first performance display TE is not made difficult to see by the disappearance-related display SK, which is expected to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

On the other hand, when a second reception period occurs, as shown in Figures 264 and 265, during the period from when the "second premonition display ZEH2" is displayed to when the "second post-reception display UG2" is displayed, of the first performance display TE and the second performance display FE, the first performance display TE can be displayed, but the second performance display FE cannot be displayed.

In other words, in this case, simply by checking whether a "premonition display" or "acceptance period" has occurred while the second performance display FE is being displayed, it becomes possible to guess the type of acceptance period (at least guess that it is neither the first acceptance period nor the fourth acceptance period), and therefore, even if the second performance display FE itself does not indicate the degree of expectation associated with the changing pattern performance, it becomes possible to provide an interesting performance that utilizes the second performance display FE.

Even if the second reception period occurs, the first performance display TE is not made difficult to see by the premonition performance display or disappearance-related display, as in the case of the first reception period and the fourth reception period.

Figure 259 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when the fifth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and a fifth reception period (fifth reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with no guaranteed bonus or time reduction), and the "fifth fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the fifth fluctuation pattern. After this, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the fifth fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the fifth fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started, and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "fifth fluctuation pattern" itself.

However, in the presentation related to the "fifth variation pattern," regardless of which result is obtained as the presentation judgment (preview judgment), the fifth acceptance period (valid period) during which "acceptance regarding the fifth post-operation presentation" is permitted is generated when timing tJ3 (which may be a timing before the SP reach state occurs or a timing within the SP reach state) arrives when a fifth predetermined time has elapsed since the presentation of the decorative pattern SZ variation has begun. As a result, when an action by the player is accepted during the fifth acceptance period, the fifth post-acceptance presentation is carried out based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the fifth acceptance period (valid period) may be generated as a result of the preview presentation judgment.

In this regard, in the fifth reception period (fifth reception performance) according to this embodiment, the content executed as the fifth post-reception performance based on the acceptance of the player's action (the "fifth post-reception performance display" in the first performance device, the "fifth post-reception specific performance" in the second performance device, and the "fifth post-reception output sound" in the third performance device) is different from each post-reception performance corresponding to the other reception periods (the "post-reception performance display" in the first performance device, the "post-reception specific performance" in the second performance device, and the "post-reception output sound" in the third performance device). In addition, the "fifth premonition performance display" corresponding to the fifth reception period (fifth reception performance) is also different from each premonition performance display corresponding to the other reception periods. However, the methods for displaying the "Fifth post-reception performance display" and "Fifth premonition performance display" themselves (such as the start and end times of the display, and how they relate to other image displays before being hidden, etc.) are the same as those explained for the display performance performed in connection with the first reception period and the display performance performed in connection with the second reception period (Figures 255, 256, 262 to 265), and the other configurations are basically the same.

Below, we will explain the effects that are performed in connection with the occurrence of the fifth reception period (fifth reception effect). However, for configurations that are the same as those in the first reception period (first reception effect) or second reception period (second reception effect), we may mention that they are the same, but will not explain them further here. In other words, for matters that are not specifically mentioned, the effects will be performed in the same way as described in the first reception period (first reception effect) or second reception period (second reception effect), and the same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

For example, timing tJ1 shown in FIG. 259 corresponds to timing tF1 shown in FIG. 255 and timing tG1 shown in FIG. 256. Therefore, when timing tJ1 arrives, the "fifth premonition performance display" begins to be executed as the premonition performance display on the display screen (performance display device 1600).

In this regard, the "fifth premonition effect display", as shown in FIG. 259(b), is a type that is displayed across the timing tJ3 when the fifth reception period occurs. In other words, although the "fifth premonition effect display" differs in performance content (display image) from the above-mentioned "second premonition effect display ZEH2" that is displayed in response to the second reception period, the "start and end times of the display, and how it interacts with other image displays until it is hidden" are displayed in the same manner as explained for the "second premonition effect display ZEH2" with reference to FIGS. 256, 264, and 265. The same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

Furthermore, timing tJ2 shown in FIG. 259 corresponds to timing tF2 shown in FIG. 255 and timing tG2 shown in FIG. 256. Therefore, when timing tJ2 arrives, the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "5th premonition effect display" is being displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "integrated Moji image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "5th premonition effect display" is displayed.

In addition, timing tJ3 shown in FIG. 259 corresponds to timing tF3 shown in FIG. 255 and timing tG3 shown in FIG. 256. Therefore, when timing tJ3 arrives, the fifth reception period will occur while the "fifth premonition effect display" and "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" are displayed.

Furthermore, timing tJ3a shown in FIG. 259 corresponds to timing tF3a shown in FIG. 255 and timing tG3a shown in FIG. 256. Therefore, when the player's action is accepted at timing tI3a, the fifth acceptance period ends and the post-acceptance performance corresponding to the fifth acceptance period (fifth post-acceptance performance) begins to be executed. Note that the fifth post-acceptance performance, like the first post-acceptance performance (FIG. 263) and the second post-acceptance performance (FIG. 265), may either execute the first mode, which has a relatively low expectation, or execute the second mode, which has a relatively high expectation.

Furthermore, timing tJ3b shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to timing tF3b shown in FIG. 255 and timing tG3b shown in FIG. 256. Therefore, when timing tJ3b arrives, "a state in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to view" will appear.

In this regard, when an application is received during the fifth reception period, the display of the above-mentioned "first disappearance-related display SK1" that corresponds to the first reception period in common is started as a "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see." Regarding the "first disappearance-related display SK1," "the start and end times of the display, and how it relates to other image displays until it is hidden," etc., are as described with reference to Figures 255 and 263. The same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

However, with regard to the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" corresponding to the fifth reception period, unlike the case of the first reception period, different modes may appear when the "first mode with relatively low expectations" is executed as the performance after the fifth reception and when the "second mode with relatively high expectations" is executed.

For example, when the "second mode with relatively high expectations" is executed as the fifth post-reception performance, the "first disappearance related display SK1 (here, the first mode, the first disappearance related display SK1-1 (FIG. 263))" is displayed as the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see." In contrast, when the "first mode with relatively low expectations" is executed as the fifth post-reception performance, a mode different from the "first disappearance related display SK1-1" is displayed as the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see." This makes it possible to raise awareness of the possibility that the "second mode with relatively high expectations" will be executed as the fifth post-reception performance when the "first disappearance related display SK1-1" is displayed in response to the first reception period, thereby improving interest in the game.

In this case, when the "second mode with relatively high expectation" is executed as the fifth post-reception performance, it is desirable to set the expectation (probability of the appearance of a jackpot pattern) to be higher than when the "second mode with relatively high expectation" is executed as the first post-reception performance. This probability may be 100%.

In addition, when the "first mode with relatively low expectation" is executed as the fifth post-reception performance, if a mode different from the "first disappearance related display SK1-1" is to appear as the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see," the "first disappearance related display SK1-2, which is the second mode of the first disappearance related display SK1" may appear as the different mode. In other words, in this case, when the first disappearance related display SK1-2 appears, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the first disappearance related display SK1-2 has appeared as a result of acceptance during the fifth reception period, or as a result of not being able to make the acceptance within the first reception period, which can increase interest in the game.

In order to more appropriately raise awareness of the possibility that the "second mode with relatively high expectations" will be executed as the fifth post-reception performance when the "first disappearance-related display SK1-1" is displayed in response to the first reception period, and to more appropriately raise awareness of the possibility that the "second mode with relatively low expectations" will be executed as the fifth post-reception performance when the "first disappearance-related display SK1-2" is displayed in response to the first reception period, it is preferable that the "first premonition performance display ZEH1" similar to the first reception period be executed as the premonition performance display corresponding to the fifth reception period, rather than the "fifth premonition performance display."

In addition, in the case where the fifth reception period is accepted, as in the case of the first reception period and the second reception period, as shown in FIG. 259, the fifth reception post-performance (fifth reception post-specific performance) using the second performance device (here, the sub-LCD 1610) is started to be executed prior to the fifth reception post-performance (fifth reception post-performance display) using the first performance device based on the acceptance. The fifth reception post-specific performance is also executed so that different modes appear depending on the degree of expectation. In addition, before the reception period occurs, the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) may also be configured to execute a premonition performance (fifth premonition specific performance) corresponding to the fifth reception period. In addition, the premonition specific performance using the second performance device (here, the sub-LCD 1610) may be executed as the same performance as the first premonition specific performance shown in FIG. 262, instead of the fifth premonition specific performance.

Also, when the fifth reception period occurs, the reception allowable sound starts to be output at timing tJ2. This reception allowable sound is of a type that is terminated midway when reception is made, as shown in FIG. 259(d). In the example shown in FIG. 259(d), like the reception allowable sound that is audibly output when the second reception period occurs, a "long-term allowable sound" and a "short-term allowable sound" are audibly output as reception allowable sounds, and the audible output is performed in the same manner as described for the "reception allowable sound" with reference to FIGS. 256, 264, and 265 with regard to "the start and end times of the audible output, and how it is related to other performances until the audible output is terminated." This can also be applied to other examples and modified examples in the same manner.

However, with regard to the reception permission sound output when the fifth reception period occurs, just like the reception permission sounds output when the third reception period and the fourth reception period occur, only one reception permission sound may be output, and the sound may be output as if it was terminated midway when it was accepted.

In any case, in the fifth acceptance period, if an action by the player is accepted while the acceptance permissible sound is being audibly output, not only is the acceptance permissible sound terminated midway, but when the acceptance is made, the audible output of a fifth post-acceptance output sound, which is different from the post-acceptance output sounds output in response to the other acceptance periods, is started based on this. In other words, in this case, in the fifth acceptance period, as in the second acceptance period, there is no competition (overlapping) between the effect performed within the acceptance period (acceptance permissible sound) and the effect performed in response to the acceptance being made (fifth post-acceptance output sound).

The fifth post-acceptance output sound, like the first post-acceptance output sound and the second post-acceptance output sound, is audibly output as a different output sound when the post-acceptance performance is performed in the first mode, which has a relatively low expectation, and when it is performed in the second mode, which has a relatively high expectation.

On the other hand, although not shown in Figure 259, if no action by the player is accepted within the fifth acceptance period, the above timing tJ4 will arrive after the fifth acceptance period has occurred without any action by the player being accepted.

In this regard, even during the fifth reception period, at timing tJ4 (the point at which the fifth reception period ends and the acceptance of actions by the player is no longer permitted), the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) not only does not hide the integrated model image display IG, but also does not make the integrated model image display IG difficult to see.

After this, even if no action by the player is accepted, the display of the fifth disappearance-related display SK5 will begin as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see."

When the application is not accepted during the fifth acceptance period, the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" is the same as in the second acceptance period, in which the mode that would have appeared if the application had been accepted during the fifth acceptance period (a mode that differs depending on the degree of expectation) is made to appear. However, as in the first acceptance period, it is also possible to make the mode appear in which it would not have appeared if the application was accepted during the fifth acceptance period.

Figure 260 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when the sixth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and a sixth reception period (sixth reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with no guaranteed bonus or time reduction), and the "sixth variable pattern" is selected as a result of the variable pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the sixth variable pattern. After this, the decorative pattern SZ variable performance (performance depiction according to the sixth variable pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the sixth variable pattern, etc.) is started, and during the execution period of the variable performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "sixth variable pattern" itself.

However, in the presentation related to the "sixth variation pattern", regardless of which result is obtained as the presentation judgment (pre-notice judgment), the sixth acceptance period (valid period) during which "acceptance regarding the sixth post-operation presentation" is permitted is generated when timing tK3 (which may be a timing before the SP reach state occurs or a timing within the SP reach state) arrives when a sixth predetermined time has elapsed since the presentation of the decorative pattern SZ variation has begun. As a result, when an action by the player is accepted during the sixth acceptance period, the sixth post-acceptance presentation is carried out based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the sixth acceptance period (valid period) may be generated as a result of the pre-notice presentation judgment.

In this regard, in the sixth reception period (sixth reception performance) according to this embodiment, the content executed as the sixth post-reception performance based on the acceptance of the player's action (the "sixth post-reception performance display" in the first performance device, the "sixth post-reception specific performance" in the second performance device, and the "sixth post-reception output sound" in the third performance device) is different from each post-reception performance corresponding to the other reception periods (the "post-reception performance display" in the first performance device, the "post-reception specific performance" in the second performance device, and the "post-reception output sound" in the third performance device). In addition, when the player's action (operation) is accepted in the sixth reception period (sixth reception performance), the model image display (here, the integrated model image display) is made invisible without causing the appearance of a "mode in which the model image display is difficult to see." However, the methods for displaying the "6th post-reception performance display" and "mock image display" themselves (such as the start and end times of the display, and how they relate to other image displays before being hidden, etc.) are the same as those described in the display performance carried out in connection with the first reception period (Figures 255, 262, and 263), and the other configurations are basically the same as any of the methods described above.

Below, we will explain the effects that are performed in relation to the occurrence of the sixth reception period (sixth reception effect). However, for configurations that are the same as those in the first reception period (first reception effect), we may mention that they are the same, but will not explain them further here. In other words, for matters that are not specifically mentioned, the effects will be performed in the same way as described in the first reception period (first reception effect), and the same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

For example, timing tK1 shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to timing tF1 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when timing tK1 arrives, the display screen (performance display device 1600) starts to execute the "first premonition performance display" as the above premonition performance display.

Furthermore, timing tK2 shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to timing tF2 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when timing tK2 arrives, the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "first premonition effect display" is being displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "integrated Moji image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "first premonition effect display" is displayed.

The timing tK3 shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to the timing tF3 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tK3 arrives, the sixth reception period occurs while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is being displayed.

Furthermore, timing tK3a shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to timing tF3a shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the player's action is accepted at timing tK3a, the sixth acceptance period ends and the post-acceptance performance corresponding to the sixth acceptance period (sixth post-acceptance performance) begins to be executed. Note that, like the first post-acceptance performance (FIG. 263), the sixth post-acceptance performance may either execute a first mode with a relatively low expectation or execute a second mode with a relatively high expectation.

However, as shown in FIG. 260, the processing related to the presentation related to the sixth reception period does not have anything equivalent to timing tF3b shown in FIG. 255, meaning that the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" does not become difficult to see until it is hidden. This is the same whether a "low expectation mode" or a "high expectation mode" appears as the sixth post-reception presentation (timing tF3b does not exist), and it is also the same when the sixth reception period ends without any action by the player being accepted during that period (timing tF3b does not exist).

With this configuration, in other reception periods, when the reception period ends, there is a feature that makes it difficult to see the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" until it is hidden. However, in the sixth reception period, even if the reception period ends, there is no feature (disappearance-related display SK) that makes it difficult to see the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" until it is hidden. This makes it difficult to recognize whether the sixth reception period has ended (whether the player's action has been canceled), and is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an optimal manner.

In addition, in the case where the sixth reception period is accepted, as in the case of the first reception period, as shown in FIG. 260, the sixth reception post-performance (sixth reception post-specific performance) using the second performance device (here, the sub-LCD 1610) is started to be executed prior to the sixth reception post-performance (sixth reception post-performance display) using the first performance device based on the acceptance. The sixth reception post-specific performance is also executed so that different modes appear depending on the degree of expectation. In addition, before the reception period occurs, the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) may also be configured to execute a premonition performance (sixth premonition specific performance) corresponding to the sixth reception period. In addition, the premonition specific performance using the second performance device (here, the sub-LCD 1610) may be executed as the same performance as the first premonition specific performance shown in FIG. 262, instead of the sixth premonition specific performance.

When the sixth acceptance period occurs, an acceptance permissible sound starts to be output at timing tK2. This acceptance permissible sound is of a type that is terminated midway when acceptance is made, as shown in FIG. 260(d). Regarding the "start and end times of the audible output, and how the audible output is related to other effects until it is terminated," etc., for this type of acceptance permissible sound, the audible output is performed in the same manner as described for the "acceptance permissible sound" corresponding to the fourth acceptance period with reference to FIGS. 258, 266, and 267. The same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

However, with regard to the reception permission sound output when the sixth reception period occurs, two reception permission sounds may be output, similar to the reception permission sound output when the second reception period occurs, and the two reception permission sounds may be output and terminated when the call is accepted.

In any case, in the sixth acceptance period, if an action by the player is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being audibly output, not only is the acceptance permission sound terminated, but when the acceptance is made, the audible output of a sixth post-acceptance output sound, which is different from the post-acceptance output sounds output in response to other acceptance periods, is started based on this. In other words, in this case, in the sixth acceptance period, as in the fourth acceptance period, there is no competition (overlapping) between the performance performed within the acceptance period (acceptance permission sound) and the performance performed in response to the acceptance being made (sixth post-acceptance output sound).

The sixth post-acceptance output sound, like the first post-acceptance output sound and the fourth post-acceptance output sound, is audibly output as a different output sound when the post-acceptance performance is performed in the first mode, which has a relatively low expectation, and when it is performed in the second mode, which has a relatively high expectation.

On the other hand, although not shown in Figure 260, if no action by the player is accepted within the sixth acceptance period, the above timing tK4 will arrive after the sixth acceptance period has occurred without any action by the player being accepted.

In this regard, even during the sixth acceptance period, at timing tK4 (the point at which the sixth acceptance period ends and the acceptance of actions by the player is no longer permitted), the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) not only does not hide the integrated model image display IG, but also does not make the integrated model image display IG difficult to see. However, as described above, during the sixth acceptance period, after the timing tK4 arrives without any actions by the player being accepted, the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" does not occur.

Figure 261 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the presentation when the seventh condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and a seventh reception period (seventh reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with no guaranteed bonus or time reduction), and the "seventh variable pattern" is selected as a result of the variable pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the seventh variable pattern. After this, the decorative pattern SZ variable performance (performance depiction according to the seventh variable pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the seventh variable pattern, etc.) is started, and during the execution period of the variable performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "seventh variable pattern" itself.

However, in the performance related to the "seventh variation pattern", regardless of the result of the performance judgment (pre-notice judgment), the seventh acceptance period (valid period) during which "acceptance regarding the seventh post-operation performance" is permitted is generated when timing tL3 (which may be a timing before the SP reach state occurs or a timing within the SP reach state) arrives when the seventh predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ. As a result, when an action by the player is accepted during the seventh acceptance period, the seventh post-acceptance performance is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the seventh acceptance period (valid period) may be generated as a result of the pre-notice performance judgment.

In this regard, in the seventh reception period (seventh reception performance) according to this embodiment, the content executed as the seventh post-reception performance based on the acceptance of the player's action (the "seventh post-reception performance display" in the first performance device, the "seventh post-reception specific performance" in the second performance device, and the "seventh post-reception output sound" in the third performance device) is different from each post-reception performance corresponding to the other reception periods (the "post-reception performance display" in the first performance device, the "post-reception specific performance" in the second performance device, and the "post-reception output sound" in the third performance device). In addition, the "seventh premonition performance display" corresponding to the seventh reception period (seventh reception performance) is also different from each premonition performance display corresponding to the other reception periods. In addition, in the seventh reception period (seventh reception performance) according to this embodiment, even in the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see", a "seventh disappearance-related display" different from each disappearance-related display corresponding to the other reception periods appears. However, the methods for displaying the "7th post-reception performance display", "7th premonition performance display", and "7th disappearance-related display" themselves (such as the start and end times of the display, and how it interacts with other image displays before being hidden, etc.) are the same as those explained for any of the display performances carried out in connection with each of the above-mentioned reception periods, and the other configurations are basically the same.

Below, we will explain the effects that are performed in connection with the occurrence of the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect). However, for configurations that are the same as those in other reception periods (other reception effects), we will mention that they are the same, but will not explain them further here. Furthermore, for matters that are not specifically mentioned, the effects will be performed in the same way as described in the first reception period (first reception effect), and the same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

For example, timing tL1 shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to timing tF1 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when timing tL1 arrives, the premonition display starts on the display screen (performance display device 1600).

However, as described above, in the seventh reception period (seventh reception performance), the corresponding premonition performance display is the "seventh premonition performance display" that does not correspond to other reception periods. As shown in FIG. 261(b), the "seventh premonition performance display" is not displayed at the time the seventh reception period occurs, and is hidden before this. In other words, although the performance content (display image) of the "seventh premonition performance display" is different from the above-mentioned "first premonition performance display ZEH1" that is displayed in response to the first reception period, the "start and end times of the display, and how it is related to other image displays until it is hidden" are displayed in the same manner as described for the "first premonition performance display ZEH1" with reference to FIG. 256 and FIG. 262. The same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

Furthermore, timing tL2 shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to timing tF2 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when timing tL2 arrives, the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "7th premonition effect display" is being displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "integrated Moji image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "7th premonition effect display" is displayed.

In addition, timing tL3 shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to timing tF3 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when timing tL3 arrives, the seventh reception period occurs while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is being displayed.

Furthermore, timing tL3a shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to timing tF3a shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when an action by the player is accepted at timing tL3a, the seventh acceptance period ends and the post-acceptance performance corresponding to the seventh acceptance period (seventh post-acceptance performance) begins to be executed. Note that, like the first post-acceptance performance (FIG. 263), the seventh post-acceptance performance may either execute the first mode, which has a relatively low expectation, or execute the second mode, which has a relatively high expectation.

Furthermore, timing tL3b shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to timing tF3b shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when timing tL3b arrives, a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" will appear. However, as described above, when an acceptance is made during the seventh acceptance period, a display related to the "seventh disappearance-related display" that does not correspond to other acceptance periods will start to appear as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" (timing tL3b).

Here, the "7th disappearance-related display" is different from the above-mentioned "1st disappearance-related display SK1" that is displayed in response to the first reception period in terms of the performance content (display image), but the "start and end times of the display, and how it relates to other image displays until it is hidden" are displayed in the same manner as described for the "1st disappearance-related display SK1" with reference to Figures 255, 256, 263, and 265. The same can be applied to other examples and modified examples. Also, in both cases where the 7th post-reception performance is "executed in a relatively low expectation mode" and "executed in a relatively high expectation mode," the "7th disappearance-related display" is displayed in the same manner, as in the case of the above-mentioned first reception period.

However, with regard to the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see (seventh disappearance-related display)" corresponding to the seventh reception period, unlike the case of the first reception period, different modes may appear when the "first mode with relatively low expectations" is executed as the seventh post-reception performance and when the "second mode with relatively high expectations" is executed.

Furthermore, timing tL3c shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to timing tF3c shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when timing tL3c arrives, while a display related to the "seventh disappearance-related display" (in a state in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see) is displayed, the "seventh post-acceptance performance display" will begin to be executed as a post-acceptance performance in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in response to the player's action being accepted within the seventh acceptance period.

In addition, in the case where the reception is made during the seventh reception period, as in the case of the first reception period, as shown in FIG. 261, the seventh reception-after performance (seventh reception-after specific performance) using the second performance device (here, the sub-liquid crystal display 1610) is started to be executed prior to the seventh reception-after performance (seventh reception-after performance display) using the first performance device based on the reception. The seventh reception-after specific performance is also executed so that different modes appear depending on the degree of expectation. In addition, before the reception period occurs, the sub-liquid crystal display 1610 (second performance device) may also be configured to execute a premonition performance (seventh premonition specific performance) corresponding to the seventh reception period. In addition, the premonition specific performance using the second performance device (here, the sub-liquid crystal display 1610) may be executed as the same performance as the first premonition specific performance shown in FIG. 262, instead of the seventh premonition specific performance.

When the seventh acceptance period occurs, an acceptance allowable sound starts to be output at timing tL2. This acceptance allowable sound is of a type that is terminated midway when acceptance is made, as shown in FIG. 261(d). Regarding the "start and end times of the audible output, and how the audible output is related to other performances until it is terminated," etc., related to this acceptance allowable sound, the audible output is performed in the same manner as described for the "acceptance allowable sound" corresponding to the fourth acceptance period with reference to FIGS. 258, 266, and 267. The same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

However, with regard to the reception permission sound output when the seventh reception period occurs, two reception permission sounds may be output, similar to the reception permission sound output when the second reception period occurs, and the output may be terminated when the call is accepted.

In any case, in the seventh acceptance period, if an action by the player is accepted while the acceptance permissible sound is being audibly output, not only is the acceptance permissible sound terminated midway, but when the acceptance is made, the audible output of a seventh post-acceptance output sound, which is different from the post-acceptance output sounds output in response to the other acceptance periods, is started based on this. In other words, in this case, in the seventh acceptance period, as in the fourth acceptance period, there is no competition (overlapping) between the performance performed within the acceptance period (acceptance permissible sound) and the performance performed in response to the acceptance being made (seventh post-acceptance output sound).

The seventh post-acceptance output sound, like the first post-acceptance output sound and the fourth post-acceptance output sound, is audibly output as a different output sound when the post-acceptance performance is performed in the first mode, which has a relatively low expectation, and when it is performed in the second mode, which has a relatively high expectation.

On the other hand, although this is not shown in Figure 261, if no action by the player is accepted within the seventh acceptance period, the above timing tL4 will arrive after the seventh acceptance period has occurred without any action by the player being accepted.

In this regard, even during the seventh reception period, at timing tL4 (the point at which the seventh reception period ends and the acceptance of actions by the player is no longer permitted), the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) not only does not hide the integrated model image display IG, but also does not make the integrated model image display IG difficult to see.

After this, even if no action by the player is accepted, the seventh disappearance-related display will begin to be displayed as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see."

When the application is not accepted during the seventh acceptance period, the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" is the same as in the first acceptance period, and a mode that would not appear if the application was accepted during the seventh acceptance period is displayed. However, the mode that would have appeared if the application had been accepted during the seventh acceptance period (a mode that differs depending on the degree of expectation) may be displayed, as in the second acceptance period.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present application, which provides the first through seventh reception periods, provides the following excellent effects:

That is, first, regardless of whether the first acceptance period through the seventh acceptance period occurs, the imitation image display displayed using a specified area within the display screen (performance display device 1600) can be displayed even after the performance has progressed based on the acceptance of the player's action (after the performance change based on the acceptance has started). This allows the player to know in what form (e.g., Figures 232 (a) to (d)) the imitation image display was displayed during the acceptance period, even after the performance has progressed based on the acceptance.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment provides multiple acceptance periods (first acceptance period to seventh acceptance period) with different presentation contents (post-acceptance presentations such as conversation preview, cut-in preview, and moving object preview, which are types of preview presentations (expectation indication presentations)) that are carried out when the ball is accepted, and it is possible to generate an acceptance period (valid period) of a different type according to the result of the judgment (presentation judgment).

In this regard, in the first reception period to the seventh reception period, when an action by a player is accepted, the post-acceptance performance display (first post-acceptance performance display to seventh post-acceptance performance display) can be displayed on the "performance display device 1600" based on the fact that the action has been accepted. Among these, in the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, when an action by a player is accepted, not only is the post-acceptance performance display displayed based on the fact that the action has been accepted, but the "mode in which the imitation image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is also made to appear. In other words, in this case, not only is it possible to check which mode has appeared as the imitation image display even after the acceptance has been made, but by reducing the visibility of the imitation image display by the "mode in which the imitation image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" until the imitation image display is made invisible, it is expected that the player's focus will naturally shift from the "imitation image display" to the "post-acceptance performance display".

However, since the replica image display is originally displayed during the acceptance period when the acceptance has not yet been made, if the replica image display is displayed after the acceptance has been made, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the post-acceptance performance display corresponding to the acceptance has already been displayed or not, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may decrease. In this regard, when the acceptance is made during any of the first to fifth acceptance periods, or the seventh acceptance period, the replica image display is made invisible (invisible) while the "mode in which the replica image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is displayed, while the post-acceptance performance display is displayed while the "mode in which the replica image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is displayed. In other words, in this case, after the acceptance of the action by the player, while the "mode in which the replica image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is displayed, the transition in the display performance from the pre-acceptance display (replica image display) to the post-acceptance display (post-acceptance performance display) is realized.

Note that the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to view (disappearance-related display)" and the "post-reception performance display" have in common that they are both displayed based on reception. However, the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to view (disappearance-related display)" is, for example, a display that appears to make the model image display difficult to view when the model image display is displayed, as shown in FIG. 263(f1), FIG. 265(f1), FIG. 267(f1), etc. In contrast, the "post-reception performance display" is, for example, a display that appears to not make the model image display difficult to view even if it is displayed when the model image display is displayed, as shown in FIG. 263(g1), FIG. 265(g1), FIG. 267(g1), etc. Also, in each of the above examples, the "post-reception performance display" is started to be displayed when the model image display is displayed, but the "post-reception performance display" does not necessarily have to be started to be displayed when the model image display is displayed, and may be started to be displayed after the model image display is made non-display.

As for the "manner in which the mock image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)", methods of "appearing so as to make the mock image display difficult to see" can be adopted, such as a method of realizing this by preferentially displaying (displaying in a front layer) an image display other than the mock image display in at least a part of the area in which the mock image display is displayed, or a method of realizing this by displaying an image (video) that is made so that part of the mock image display appears missing (unseen) by using an image display other than the mock image display. Also, instead of displaying an image other than the mock image display, it is also possible to adopt a method of changing the numerical values (transmittance, etc.) related to the display characteristics of the mock image display itself. In response to this, methods for making the "post-reception performance display" appear so as not to make the replica image display difficult to see include a method of displaying the "post-reception performance display" in at least a part of the area in which the replica image display is displayed, but displaying the "post-reception performance display" in a manner that gives the replica image display priority (displaying it in the rear layer), as well as a method of displaying the "post-reception performance display" only in areas excluding the area in which the replica image display is displayed, at least while the replica image display is displayed.

In addition, as a "mode in which the mock image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)," it is possible to adopt both a method of displaying an image display other than the mock image display in at least a part of the area in which the mock image display is displayed, and a method of changing a numerical value (such as transmittance) related to the display characteristics of the mock image display itself.

The "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears before the "post-acceptance performance display" is displayed, in a situation in which the "post-acceptance performance display" has not yet been displayed. In other words, in this case, in a situation in which the "post-acceptance performance display" has not yet been displayed, the imitation image display becomes difficult to see due to the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)". Therefore, while the imitation image display is visible, the "post-acceptance performance display" may soon appear, and the player can be prompted in advance to prepare himself or herself to change his or her gaze from the "difficult-to-see imitation image display".

In addition, if a game is accepted during the first acceptance period through the fifth acceptance period, the seventh acceptance period, etc., the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" can remain displayed even after the "post-acceptance performance display" is displayed, and is hidden while the "post-acceptance performance display" is displayed. This makes it possible to provide a wider range of performance related to the "post-acceptance performance display" during the period in which the "post-acceptance performance display" is displayed, after the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is hidden, and thus makes it possible to increase interest in the game by changing the performance during such a display period.

In addition, in the above-mentioned examples of effects relating to the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, as shown in Fig. 263 (g1), (h1), Fig. 265 (g1), (h1), Fig. 267 (g1), (h1), the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is displayed not only in the area in which the imitation image display is displayed, but also in the area in which the imitation image display is not displayed. And, in this area, the "post-reception performance display" is displayed in at least a part of it, but the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is displayed so that at least a part of the "post-reception performance display" is difficult to see (for example, displayed in the rear layer).

With this configuration, the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears to make it difficult to see not only the imitation image display, but also the "post-reception performance display", which is expected to improve both the presentation until the imitation image display is hidden and the presentation when the "post-reception performance display" begins to be displayed.

As mentioned above, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples relating to the first reception period to the seventh reception period, in a situation where the "post-reception performance display" is not displayed after reception and before the "post-reception performance display" is displayed, a specific post-reception performance (post-reception performance using the second performance device) that does not make the imitation image display difficult to see can be displayed in a manner according to the degree of expectation, separate from the "mode in which the imitation image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display)". This makes it possible to enjoy the post-reception performance prior to the first performance device without interfering with its performance.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples relating to the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, the post-reception specific performance (post-reception performance using the second performance device) is made to appear before the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears, in a situation in which the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" has not yet appeared. Also, the post-reception specific performance (post-reception performance using the second performance device) is made to continue until after the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" has ended.

With this configuration, players who dislike the complex presentation of the first presentation device can enjoy the post-reception presentation with the second presentation device, which has a more simplified presentation, thereby increasing the interest of various types of players.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples relating to the first reception period to the seventh reception period, the premonition performance display is executed across the timing when the imitation image display is displayed. In addition, in some of the above-mentioned performance examples, as shown in Figures 264 and 265, etc., it is possible for acceptance to occur while the premonition performance display is displayed, and when such acceptance occurs, the "mode in which the imitation image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" makes both the imitation image display and the premonition performance display difficult to see (such as the priority display described above).

However, at least at the point when the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears, it does not overlap with either the imitation image display or the premonition effect display in its entirety, and visibility is not hindered at least in part. In other words, the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is executed in a way that gradually worsens the visibility of the imitation image display and the premonition effect display (increasing the overlapping area).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples of performances relating to the first reception period to the seventh reception period, the imitation image display will be displayed by dynamic display, as described above with reference to Figures 233 and 234. In this case, it is desirable that the dynamic display of the imitation image display is not terminated but continues even when a "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears after reception.

In addition, in the above-mentioned examples of the performance for the first through fifth reception periods and the seventh reception period, the "mode in which the imitation image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is not only to make the imitation image display difficult to see, but also to make the gauge image indicating the remaining time until the end of the reception period difficult to see. This prevents the appearance of remaining time being seen even if the gauge image is displayed after reception.

In the above-mentioned example of the performance, if the action (operation) of the player is accepted during the first acceptance period of the multiple acceptance periods, the first post-acceptance performance display UG1 can be displayed based on the acceptance, and a mode in which the model image display is difficult to see (first disappearance-related display SK1) can be displayed separately from the first post-acceptance performance display UG1. In addition, if the action of the player is accepted during the second acceptance period of the multiple acceptance periods, the second post-acceptance performance display UG2 different from the first post-acceptance performance display UG1 can be displayed based on the acceptance, and a mode in which the model image display is difficult to see (second disappearance-related display SK2) different from the first acceptance period can be displayed separately from the second post-acceptance performance display UG2.

With this configuration, it becomes possible to guess the type of post-reception performance display without checking whether the "first post-reception performance display UG1" or the "second post-reception performance display UG2" was displayed as the post-reception performance display, simply by checking in what manner (first disappearance-related display SK1, second disappearance-related display SK2) the mock image display became difficult to see.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if an action (operation) by a player is accepted during a third acceptance period among the multiple acceptance periods, a third post-acceptance performance display different from both the "first post-acceptance performance display UG1" and the "second post-acceptance performance display UG2" can be displayed based on the acceptance. However, in addition to the third post-acceptance performance display, the above-mentioned mode (first disappearance-related display SK1) that also corresponds to the first acceptance period can be made to appear as a performance mode that makes it difficult to see the model image display.

According to this configuration, when the first disappearance-related display SK1 appears as a mode for making the imitation image display difficult to see, it is unclear whether the first or third post-acceptance performance display will appear, but when the second disappearance-related display SK2 appears as a mode for making the imitation image display difficult to see, it becomes possible to guess that the second post-acceptance performance display will appear.

In the above-mentioned example of the effect, the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" is realized as a "disappearance-related display" that is displayed (priority display) in an area that includes at least a part of the area in which the imitation image display is displayed. However, it can also be realized by executing a performance using a performance device (such as a movable body) located in front of the display screen in a position that overlaps with at least a part of the imitation image display when viewed from the front.

Even if the same pattern (first disappearance related display SK1) appears as a "pattern that makes it difficult to see the pattern image display," if the type of acceptance period is different, it is desirable to make the rate (expectation) at which the jackpot pattern stops due to the pattern change different.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the premonition performance display is the same (first premonition performance display), but there are cases where the "first disappearance-related display SK1" appears as a "mode in which the mock image display becomes difficult to see" (first reception period, third reception period), cases where a mode different from the "first disappearance-related display SK1" appears (fourth reception period), or cases where the mode does not appear (sixth reception period).

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance examples, although the premonition performance displays (first premonition performance display, fourth premonition performance display) are different, there are cases (first reception period, fifth reception period) where the same pattern (first disappearance-related display SK1) appears as a "pattern in which the mock image display becomes difficult to see."

This configuration makes it difficult to guess the type of reception period until it is known which type of post-reception performance is being performed, which can increase interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, a post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) can be executed using the second performance device, and during the execution period of the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device, the first performance device is in a state where the mock image display is relatively easy to see and a state where the mock image display is relatively difficult to see.

In other words, in this case, it is possible to check which aspect of the replica image display appeared even after the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device has begun based on the fact that the reception has been made. Also, by making the replica image display relatively difficult to see during the execution of the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device, it is expected that the player will be encouraged to naturally shift his or her focus of attention from the "first performance device" to the "second performance device."

In the above-mentioned performance example, the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is started so as not to affect the visibility of the imitation image display that is continuously displayed (displayed in an easily visible state) from before the reception. More specifically, the imitation image display is displayed in a specified area within the display screen (performance display device 1600), but the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is not an image display that is displayed using at least a portion of the specified area, nor is it a performance that is executed in a position that overlaps with at least a portion of the specified area when viewed from the front.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, the post-reception performance display is started to be displayed after the timing when the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" appears, but it may be started to be displayed at the timing when the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" appears.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples, the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" is realized as an image display that is displayed using at least a part of the "area in which the imitation image display is displayed." However, in this case, it is desirable to display the image display so that the area displayed in the "area in which the imitation image display is displayed" tends to gradually expand over time.

As mentioned above, the model image display can be displayed in one of several different modes with different expectations. According to each of the above-mentioned examples, the display mode is maintained and continued even after acceptance, including the display position, size, dynamic depiction, etc., so it is possible to recognize in what mode the model image display was displayed during the acceptance period, even after acceptance.

However, in this case, if it is during the period immediately after acceptance, the post-acceptance performance must be performed under such conditions (maintaining the display related to the imitation image display). In other words, the range of performance is narrow, and only limited performances (post-acceptance performances using only performance devices different from the first performance device) can be performed. However, as time passes and a "mode that makes the imitation image display difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears, it becomes possible to perform the post-acceptance performance under the condition that "the visibility of the imitation image display may be worsened," and therefore it becomes possible to perform the "post-acceptance performance display in the first performance device" under such conditions. By gradually performing these two post-operation performances of different natures (post-acceptance specific performance in the second performance device, post-acceptance performance display in the first performance device), it becomes possible to easily confirm the mode of the imitation image display even after acceptance, while also favorably fulfilling the role of the post-operation performance.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the second premonition performance display is displayed as the premonition performance display, if the reception is made within the corresponding reception period, the second disappearance-related display SK1 (Fig. 265) appears as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see". In addition, when the seventh premonition performance display is displayed as the premonition performance display, if the reception is made within the corresponding reception period, the seventh disappearance-related display appears as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see". In contrast, when the "first premonition performance display" different from the above "second premonition performance display" or the above "seventh premonition performance display" is displayed as the premonition performance display, if the reception is made within the corresponding reception period, the first disappearance-related display may appear (first reception period, third reception period) or the fourth disappearance-related display may appear (fourth reception period) as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see".

In other words, in this case, when the second or seventh premonition display is displayed as the premonition display, it becomes possible to recognize at that point what type of appearance will appear as the "appearance in which the mock image display becomes difficult to see."

Moreover, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the "first premonition performance display" that is different from a specific mode (here, the above-mentioned "second premonition performance display" or the above-mentioned "seventh premonition performance display") is displayed as the premonition performance display, even if the reception is made within the corresponding reception period, there are cases in which the "mode in which the model image display is difficult to see" itself does not appear (sixth reception period).

According to this configuration, when the premonition effect display is executed in a mode (here, the first premonition effect display) different from a specific mode (here, the above-mentioned "second premonition effect display" or the above-mentioned "seventh premonition effect display"), it becomes unclear whether or not the above-mentioned "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" itself will appear during the period from the time of acceptance until the model image display is made invisible. This improves the performance during the period from the time of acceptance until the model image display is made invisible, and makes it possible to maintain a sense of tension in an optimal manner.

The above-mentioned examples of effects may be modified to the following configurations, or the following configurations (acceptance periods) may be further provided as separate acceptance periods (separate premonition display). That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, during the period from when the player's action is accepted during the acceptance period until the model image display is switched off, a "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" may appear. In this regard, in this modified example, when a specific mode (for example, the second premonition display, the seventh premonition display, or another premonition display not described above) is displayed as the premonition display, the above-mentioned "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" itself is prevented from appearing even if acceptance is performed during the corresponding acceptance period. In other words, in this case, when the premonition effect display is executed in a specific manner, the "manner in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" does not occur until the imitation image display is made invisible, and it becomes possible to recognize that the imitation image display will not be made difficult to see in relation to the "manner in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see."

In this case, even in this modified example, when the premonition display is executed in the "first premonition display" and is accepted within the corresponding acceptance period, there are cases where the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" appears when the acceptance is made within the corresponding acceptance period (first acceptance period, third acceptance period, fourth acceptance period), and cases where the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" does not appear (sixth acceptance period). Even in this configuration, when the premonition display is executed in a mode (here, the first premonition display) different from a specific mode (for example, the second premonition display, the seventh premonition display, or another premonition display not mentioned above), it is unclear whether the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" appears, so that the performance from acceptance to the time when the model image display is made invisible is improved, and the sense of tension can be maintained in an appropriate manner.

For the configurations of these modified examples (replacement examples), it is possible to appropriately apply each configuration that is applicable to the above configuration before modification.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples, when a specific mode (here, the "second premonition display") is displayed as a premonition display, even if no action by the player is accepted within the corresponding acceptance period, the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" is made to appear in the same manner as if the action had been accepted.

In contrast, when a mode (here, the "first premonition display") different from a specific mode (here, the "second premonition display") is displayed as the premonition display, there are cases where the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" appears in a different mode depending on whether or not an action by the player is accepted during the corresponding acceptance period (such as the first acceptance period), and cases where the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" appears in the same mode as when the action was hypothetically accepted, even if no action by the player is accepted during the corresponding acceptance period (such as the fourth acceptance period).

With this configuration, it is possible to use effects (premonition effects) that are executed before the acceptance period begins to improve the presentation after the acceptance period ends, or when a request is not accepted.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples of performance, the audible output state of the reception allowable sound is terminated during the reception period in which a specific mode (here, the second disappearance-related display, the fourth disappearance-related display, the seventh disappearance-related display, etc.) can appear as a "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see", but in the reception period in which a mode different from the specific mode (here, the first disappearance-related display) can appear as a "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see", the audible output state of the reception allowable sound may or may not be terminated. With this configuration, by checking the output state of the reception allowable sound at the time of acceptance, a state in which it is easy to guess what mode will appear as a "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" or a state in which it is difficult to guess will appear, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples of presentation, the reception permissible sound that can be used as a basis for such judgment is audibly output as a sound that ends before the end of the reception period (within the reception period), so that the player can choose whether the reception is to be made while the reception permissible sound is in an audible output state, or whether the reception is to be made after the audible output state of the reception permissible sound has ended.

In each of the above-mentioned performance examples, it is desirable that during the reception period in which the premonition performance display is executed in a specific mode (for example, the second premonition performance display), multiple modes (for example, the four modes shown in Figures 232(a) to (d)) can be displayed as the model image display, and during the reception period in which the premonition performance display is executed in a mode different from the specific mode (for example, the first premonition performance display), there are modes that cannot be displayed as the model image display (for example, the three modes shown in Figures 232(b) to (d) are not displayed, and only Figure 232(a) is displayed).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, multiple types of premonition display effects are prepared during a specific type of acceptance period, which indicate that an acceptance period in which the player's actions are eligible for acceptance will occur soon. Among the multiple types of premonition display effects, specific premonition display effects (second premonition display effect, fifth premonition display effect) can be executed across the timing of the occurrence of the corresponding acceptance period, and actions by the player can be accepted while the specific premonition display effect is displayed.

In other words, in this case, the player's actions can be accepted while still being able to confirm which type (mode) of premonition display is being displayed, which can prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to forgetting to check the type (mode) of the premonition display.

In addition, in pachinko machine 1, when a player's action is accepted while a specific premonition effect display is being displayed, a post-acceptance effect corresponding to the acceptance is started to be executed, but even at the point when the post-acceptance effect starts to be executed, the specific premonition effect display is not hidden but remains displayed.

In other words, in this case, the player's action is accepted while still being able to confirm which type (mode) of premonition display is being displayed, and furthermore, the post-acceptance performance corresponding to that acceptance is started to be executed, so that the decrease in interest in the game caused by forgetting to check the type (mode) of the premonition display can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, among the post-reception performances, the post-reception performances (post-reception specific performances) using the second performance device are executed so as not to adversely affect the visibility of the specific premonition performance displays (second premonition performance display, fifth premonition performance display).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, among the post-reception performances, the post-reception performance (post-reception performance display) using the first performance device is executed so as not to adversely affect the visibility of specific premonition performance displays (second premonition performance display, fifth premonition performance display) (for example, the specific premonition performance display is displayed with priority over the post-reception performance display (displayed in front on the layer)).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, during the acceptance period in which the premonition performance display is executed in a specific manner (for example, the second premonition performance display, the fifth premonition performance display), acceptance can be made while the premonition performance display is displayed, but when the player's action is not accepted, the premonition performance display can be made invisible before the timing at which the corresponding acceptance period ends. In other words, in this case, the player can choose whether to start the post-acceptance performance with the premonition performance display still displayed, or to start the post-acceptance performance with the premonition performance display hidden.

However, the execution state of a specific premonition effect display does not necessarily have to end within the acceptance period, and may continue to be displayed until the acceptance period ends without ending its execution state. In this case, the specific premonition effect display is displayed (priority display) using at least a part of the area in which the mock image display is displayed until the corresponding midway point in the acceptance period, but it is desirable that, in the period after the midway point, the display is not displayed in the area in which the mock image display is displayed, but only in an area different from that area.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples, when the reception period occurs, it is possible to execute a process to make a reception permission sound audible, indicating that reception is permitted or will be permitted (soon). This prevents the player from forgetting to take action to receive.

In addition, among the above-mentioned examples of effects, in the examples shown in Figures 256 to 259 and Figure 261, if an action by the player is accepted during the acceptance period while the acceptance permission sound is audible (output state), processing is started to be executed to make the acceptance permission sound inaudible before the appearance of the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display, etc.)" and before the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" has yet to appear.

In other words, in this case, even if the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" has not yet appeared after the reception, the fact that the reception period has already ended can be appropriately indicated to the player. As a result, even if the timing of the appearance of the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is delayed after the reception, inconvenience is unlikely to occur, and the model image display can be displayed in a highly visible manner.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples of effects, even if an action by the player is accepted while the acceptance permission sound is audible, the acceptance permission sound is not terminated midway, and an acceptance period (such as a first acceptance period) is further provided in which the disappearance effect display is displayed while the acceptance permission sound continues to be audible. This makes it difficult to tell whether the action has been accepted or not, and makes it possible to maintain a sense of tension.

In this regard, the types of "modes in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" that occur corresponding to the reception period (Fig. 256, Fig. 258, Fig. 261) in which the reception allowance sound is made audible and an action by the player is accepted and the reception allowance sound is made inaudible, even if an action by the player is accepted (Fig. 255), are different, so that by checking the output status of the reception allowance sound, it is possible to infer the subsequent progress of the presentation.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, multiple types of reception-permitted sounds are prepared. In this regard, it is desirable to output the same sound as the reception-permitted sound during the first reception period, the third reception period, the fourth reception period, and the sixth reception period. With this configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize which of these reception periods is occurring.

In contrast, the reception allowable sound that is audible in response to the first reception period is audibly output as a sound different from the reception allowable sounds that are audible in response to the second reception period, the fifth reception period, and the seventh reception period. With this configuration, when the reception allowable sound starts to be output, it is possible to narrow down to some extent the candidates for which type of reception period is occurring by checking the sound. Also, when a reception is made while the reception allowable sound is audible, it is possible to further narrow down the candidates by checking whether the reception allowable sound is terminated midway, making it possible to provide an interesting performance using the reception allowable sound.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the premonition performance display is executed in a specific manner (here, the second premonition performance display, the fifth premonition performance display, and the seventh premonition performance display), if an acceptance is made while the corresponding reception permission sound is being output, the reception permission sound is terminated midway. However, when the premonition performance display is executed in a manner different from the specific manner (here, the first premonition performance display), when an acceptance is made while the corresponding reception permission sound is being output, the reception permission sound is terminated midway (third reception period, fourth reception period, sixth reception period) or is not terminated midway (first reception period). With this configuration, it is possible to provide an interesting performance using the reception permission sound.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, there is a reception period in which two sounds (long-term acceptable sound, short-term acceptable sound) are output as the reception acceptable sound, and a reception period in which only one sound is output as the reception acceptable sound. In a reception period in which two sounds (long-term acceptable sound, short-term acceptable sound) are output as the reception acceptable sound, the reception period is terminated midway if the reception is made while the reception acceptable sound is audible, but in a reception period in which only one sound is output as the reception acceptable sound, the reception period may or may not be terminated midway if the reception is made while the reception acceptable sound is audible. This configuration also makes it possible to provide an interesting performance using the reception acceptable sound.

In addition, with regard to the acceptance period during which two sounds with different sound data (long-term acceptance sound, short-term acceptance sound) are output as the acceptance acceptance sound, if an acceptance is made while an acceptance acceptance sound is being output, only one of the two acceptance acceptance sounds (long-term acceptance sound, short-term acceptance sound) may be terminated midway, and the other may be allowed to continue without being terminated midway.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned presentation examples, there are reception periods (such as the second reception period, the fourth reception period, the fifth reception period, the seventh reception period, etc.) in which the same "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears when an acceptance is made and when the acceptance is not made within the reception period, and there are reception periods (such as the first reception period and the third reception period) in which different "modes in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appear when an acceptance is made and when the acceptance is not made within the reception period, thereby improving the presentation when an acceptance is not made.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples of performance, when acceptance is made during a specific acceptance period (such as the first acceptance period or the third acceptance period), the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" is realized as a disappearance-related display different from the imitation image display, but when acceptance is not made, it is desirable to realize the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" by changing the imitation image display itself (changing the numerical value (transmittance) related to the display characteristics). With this configuration, it becomes easy to recognize whether the situation is one in which acceptance has been made or not when the "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" appears.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 is capable of executing both a pattern change (changing pattern) in which a reception period occurs and a pattern change (changing pattern) in which a reception period does not occur. In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of displaying the first performance display TE (corresponding here to the above-mentioned "timer performance"), which has no performance relationship with the reception period, and the above-mentioned second performance display FE, on the display screen (performance display device 1600), in both a pattern change (changing pattern) in which a reception period occurs and a pattern change (changing pattern) in which a reception period does not occur. Then, as shown in FIG. 263, if an action by the player is accepted during the first or third acceptance period, a "mode in which the replica image display is made difficult to see (first disappearance-related display SK1)" is made to appear while the replica image display is being displayed, but this "mode in which the replica image display is made difficult to see (first disappearance-related display SK1)" is executed so as not to affect the visibility of the first performance display TE or the second performance display FE, which may be displayed even during a pattern change in which no acceptance period occurs (the first performance display TE or the second performance display FE is given priority display, or the disappearance-related display is not displayed in the position where the first performance display TE or the second performance display FE is displayed).

In other words, in this case, the disappearing effect display is displayed so as not to affect the visibility of the specified image display (the first effect display TE and the above-mentioned second effect display FE) that is not related to the acceptance period, so that the game can proceed without adversely affecting the effects that are not directly related to the acceptance period.

However, if an action by the player is accepted within the fourth acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 267, a "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (fourth disappearance related display SK4)" is made to appear while the imitation image display is being displayed. This "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (fourth disappearance related display SK4)" is displayed in such a way that it does not affect the visibility of the first performance display TE (does not make it difficult to see), but does affect the visibility of the second performance display FE (makes it difficult to see).

With this configuration, even if an image display is not directly related to the acceptance period, depending on the type of image, visibility may be affected or not affected when a "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see" occurs. Therefore, when a player performs an action, it is possible to provide a performance that allows the player to decide whether or not to check an image display that is not directly related to the acceptance period.

However, in this case, it is desirable to display the first performance display TE as an image (multiple forms) related to (suggesting) the outcome (expectations) of the pattern change, and the second performance display FE as an image that is not related to (does not suggest) the outcome (expectations) of the pattern change, in order to avoid a decrease in interest in the game when the visibility of the second performance display FE is affected.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the second reception period can occur while the first performance display TE is displayed, but cannot occur while the second performance display FE is displayed; it only occurs when the second performance display FE is not displayed. In other words, the second performance display FE can only be displayed at a relatively early stage after the pattern change has begun and is then hidden, and is used to enhance the performance or decorativeness of the early stages of the change. In this regard, by making the second reception period possible only when it is at a relatively late stage after the pattern change has begun, it becomes possible to create such a relationship even though there is no performance-related relationship between the two.

As shown in FIG. 267, even if the second performance display FE is made difficult to see by the fourth disappearance-related display SK4, it is thereafter displayed again in an easily visible state. In other words, in this case, it will be made invisible when a predetermined timing arrives thereafter. When the second performance display FE is made invisible, unlike the case of the mock image display, no aspect that makes it difficult to see will appear.

The first performance display TE displays a predetermined performance result (expectation level) at a predetermined timing within the pattern change, but if a disappearance-related display is displayed during the execution period of the first performance display TE, the disappearance-related display is made invisible before the arrival of the predetermined timing.

As shown in FIG. 267, the area in which the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 is displayed includes at least a portion of the area in which the second performance display FE is displayed, and is displayed in that area in a manner that gives it a higher display priority than the second performance display FE. However, in this case, a predetermined transparency is set for the fourth disappearance-related display SK4, and the second performance display FE may be difficult to see through the fourth disappearance-related display SK4, but may still be visible.

As shown in FIG. 267, the area in which the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 is displayed includes at least a portion of the area in which the first performance display TE is displayed, and in that area, the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 is displayed with a lower display priority than the first performance display TE. In this case, it is desirable to ensure that the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 behind the first performance display TE is not visible through it.

In contrast, as shown in FIG. 263, the first disappearance-related display SK1 is displayed in such a way that it does not affect the visibility of both the first performance display TE and the second performance display FE.

When the first disappearing performance display SK1 is displayed, which does not affect the visibility of the second performance display FE, the reception permission sound continues without being terminated midway, and when the fourth disappearing performance display SK4 is displayed, which affects the visibility of the second performance display FE, the reception permission sound can be terminated midway. This makes it possible to improve the presentation quality using the reception permission sound.

The first effect display TE and the second effect display FE are both dynamically displayed, and it is desirable that these dynamic displays continue even in situations where either disappearing effect display is displayed.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples of effects, it is possible for a "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" to appear while the model image display is being displayed, and multiple modes are provided for this "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)."

In other words, in this case, one of a number of different modes will appear as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)," which is expected to increase interest in the game when the model image display becomes difficult to see.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when a "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (fourth disappearance-related display SK4)" corresponding to the fourth reception period appears (Figure 267), the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 makes both the imitation image display and the second performance display FE difficult to see, but when a "mode in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (first disappearance-related display SK1)" corresponding to the first reception period appears (Figure 263), the first disappearance-related display SK1 is executed to make only the imitation image display difficult to see out of the imitation image display and the second performance display FE.

This configuration creates a dramatic effect in which either the "first disappearance related display SK1" or the "fourth disappearance related display SK4" appears as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see," which is expected to increase interest in the game.

In this case, it is desirable that the "mock image display" and "predetermined image display" displayed during the first reception period and the "mock image display" and "predetermined image display" displayed during the fourth reception period are displayed in the same manner.

The mock image display is hidden while the disappearance-related display is appearing, but it is preferable that the second performance display FE is not hidden while the disappearance-related display is appearing, but is hidden at a predetermined timing after the disappearance-related display has ended (before the pattern change stops).

The fourth disappearance-related display SK4 may not be an image, but may be an effect produced by an effect device that is performed in front of the mock image display and the second effect display FE when viewed from the front. However, it is preferable that the first disappearance-related display SK1 be realized as an image display.

In each of the above-mentioned examples of effects, the second reception period can occur even when the second effect display FE is in a non-display state, and a special mode (second disappearance related display SK2) that appears only during the second reception period is prepared as a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see. In such a second reception period, as shown in FIG. 265, as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (second disappearance related display SK2)," there are a case in which a special mode appears (second disappearance related display SK2-2) and a case in which it does not appear (second disappearance related display SK2-1), and it is desirable that when the special mode appears, the expectation level (the rate at which the jackpot pattern stops) is higher than when the fourth disappearance related display SK4 is displayed in any mode. The rate may be 100%. In this case, it is desirable that during the second reception period, a premonition effect of a special mode (second premonition effect display ZEH2) that cannot be executed when the second effect display FE is in a display state can be executed.

In each of the above-mentioned performance examples, during the first reception period, whether the first mode (first post-reception performance display UG1-1) is executed as the first post-reception performance display UG1 (Fig. 263 (e1) to (i1)), or the second mode (first post-reception performance display UG1-2) which is more promising than the first mode is executed as the first post-reception performance display UG1 (Fig. 263 (e2) to (i2)), the same mode (first disappearance-related display SK1-1) appears as the "mode in which the mock image display becomes difficult to see."

In contrast, during the second reception period, if the second mode (second post-reception performance display UG2-2), which has a higher expectation than the first mode (second post-reception performance display UG2-1), is executed as the second post-reception performance display UG2, a specific mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-2) appears as a "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see", but if the first mode (second post-reception performance display UG2-1) is executed as the second post-reception performance display UG, the specific mode does not appear as a "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see", and a mode different from the specific mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-2) appears.

With this configuration, depending on the type of reception period, there will be cases where the expectation level of the post-reception performance display can be inferred simply by checking the "mode in which the imitation image display is difficult to see," and cases where the expectation level cannot be inferred. This is expected to increase interest in the game through the performance related to the "mode in which the imitation image display is difficult to see."

The "specific mode (second disappearance related display SK2-1 or second disappearance related display SK2-2)" that may occur in response to the second reception period as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" is not capable of appearing as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" corresponding to the first reception period. With this configuration, it becomes possible to infer the type of reception period based on the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see", thereby improving interest in the game.

However, the "manner in which the mock image display becomes difficult to see" may be the same in the first reception period and the second reception period.

As shown in FIG. 263, if no acceptance is made during the first acceptance period, a mode (first disappearance related display SK-2) that would not appear when acceptance is made is displayed as a "mode in which the imitation image display is difficult to see." However, if no acceptance is made during the first acceptance period, the "mode in which the imitation image display is difficult to see" itself may not appear.

During the second acceptance period, it is desirable that one of multiple modes with different expectation levels (probability of the jackpot symbol being stopped) can be selectively audibly output as the acceptance acceptable sound, and during the first acceptance period, only one mode can be audibly output as the acceptance acceptable sound. In this case, it is also desirable that all of the acceptance acceptable sounds (multiple modes) that can be audibly output in response to the second acceptance period be prepared as sounds different from the acceptance acceptable sounds audibly output in response to the first acceptance period.

In each of the above-mentioned examples, the first reception period through the seventh reception period are each generated in a different variation pattern, but the first reception period through the seventh reception period may include reception periods that are related to each other and can occur sequentially within the same variation pattern. In other words, in this case, at least some of the first reception period through the seventh reception period can occur in multiple variation patterns.

For example, for a reception period (such as the second reception period or the fourth reception period) in which the "manner in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" changes according to the degree of expectation, it is desirable to make it possible for this to occur within the same pattern change after the occurrence of a reception period (such as the first reception period or the third reception period) in which the "manner in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" does not change according to the degree of expectation.

In addition, it is desirable to make it possible for a reception period during which reception can be made while the premonition display is being displayed (such as the second reception period or the fifth reception period) to occur within the same pattern change after the occurrence of a reception period during which reception cannot be made while the premonition display is being displayed (such as the first reception period, the third reception period, the fourth reception period, etc.).

During a reception period in which the "manner in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" changes according to the degree of expectation, it is desirable to selectively output a plurality of reception permissible sounds, including a specific reception permissible sound that cannot be audibly output during a reception period in which the "manner in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" does not change according to the degree of expectation, and when a specific reception permissible sound is audibly output, a manner with a high degree of expectation appears as the "manner in which the imitation image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)".

In addition, during reception periods (such as the second reception period and the fifth reception period) in which the "manner in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" changes depending on the degree of expectation, a premonition effect display exclusive to that reception period can be executed, but at a stage even earlier than the execution of the premonition effect display, a special preview effect can be executed, and when that special preview effect is executed, it is desirable that when reception is made during the reception period, the "manner in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is always executed in a manner with high expectation.

During the acceptance period in which the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance related display)" changes according to the degree of expectation, the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance related display)" may be a mode that can only appear when a jackpot has been obtained (for example, the second disappearance related display SK2-2, etc.). Also, a mode that cannot appear when a jackpot has been obtained (for example, the second disappearance related display SK2-1, etc.) may be prepared.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, reception-related performance displays (such as model image displays and gauge images) can be displayed at least during the reception period in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, and reception-related performance sounds (such as reception permission sounds) can be output at least during the reception period in relation to the occurrence of the reception period. Furthermore, when an action by a player is accepted during the reception period, a post-reception output sound related to the post-reception performance can be output based on the fact that the action has been accepted, and when the reception-related performance displays (such as model image displays and gauge images) are displayed during the reception period, the reception-related performance displays (such as model image displays and gauge images) are made invisible based on the fact that the action has been accepted. Similarly, when a reception-related performance sound (such as reception permission sounds) is in an audible state during the reception period, when an action by a player is accepted, the reception-related performance sound (such as reception permission sounds) may be made inaudible based on the fact that the action has been accepted.

In this configuration, based on the fact that an action by the player has been accepted within the acceptance period, a post-acceptance output sound related to the post-acceptance effect is audibly output, the reception-related effect display (such as a model image display or gauge image) is hidden, and the reception-related effect sound is made inaudible (such as an acceptance-permitted sound), making it easy for the player to recognize that the action has been accepted.

In this regard, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the reception-related performance display (such as a model image display or gauge image) is not terminated and is still displayed when the post-reception performance in response to the reception being made starts to be executed, but the reception-related performance sound (such as a reception permissible sound) is terminated and may be made inaudible when the reception output sound in response to the reception starts to be executed.

With this configuration, the reception-related performance display (such as a model image display or gauge image) that is displayed during the reception period will continue to be displayed even after the post-reception performance has started, while the reception-related performance sound (such as the reception allowable sound) that is audible (output) during the reception period will no longer be audible at the time the post-reception output sound starts to be executed. This makes it possible to confirm the appearance of the reception-related performance display (such as a model image display or gauge image) that was displayed during the reception period even after the post-reception performance has started to be executed, while making the reception-related performance sound (such as the reception allowable sound) inaudible, making it possible to appropriately indicate that the reception period has already ended.

As mentioned above, the reception-related performance display (such as the model image display or gauge image) is executed as a performance display that indicates the probability of winning the jackpot (expectation level). In this case, it is also desirable for the reception-related performance sound (reception acceptable sound) to be a different sound that is output according to the expectation level (aspect as a reception-related performance display) indicated by the reception-related performance display (such as the model image display or gauge image).

However, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, during the first reception period, the reception-related performance sound (reception permissible sound) is not terminated but continues even when the post-reception output sound begins to be executed, making it difficult to recognize whether or not a reception has been made, and thus maintaining a sense of tension in an optimal manner.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, during the first reception period, only one type of reception-related performance display (such as a model image display or a gauge image) can be displayed, and no performance display indicating the rate (expectation level) of a jackpot is executed. Also, during the first reception period, only one type of reception-related performance sound (acceptable reception sound) can be displayed, so that it is possible to appropriately increase interest in the game when a different type appears during another reception period.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, multiple modes including a specific mode are prepared as the premonition performance display, and a premonition performance display of a specific mode (e.g., the second premonition performance display: Fig. 256) can be displayed prior to the occurrence of a specific reception period (e.g., the second reception period), and an audible output of a reception-related performance sound (such as a reception permissible sound) can be started. The premonition performance display of a specific mode (e.g., the second premonition performance display: Fig. 256) and the reception-related performance sound (reception permissible sound) can be executed across the timing of the occurrence of the reception period, and an action by the player can be accepted while the premonition performance display of a specific mode (e.g., the second premonition performance display: Fig. 256) is displayed and the reception-related performance sound (reception permissible sound) is in an audible state (output). In this regard, if an action by a player is accepted during a reception period when a specific type of premonition display (e.g., the second premonition display: FIG. 256) is displayed, the specific type of premonition display (e.g., the second premonition display: FIG. 256) is made invisible based on the fact that the action has been accepted. Also, if an action by a player is accepted during a reception period when a reception-related performance sound (reception-permitted sound) is in an audible state, the reception-related performance sound (reception-permitted sound) is made inaudible based on the fact that the action has been accepted.

In the above configuration, a specific type of premonition display (e.g., the second premonition display: FIG. 256) is hidden based on the acceptance of a player's action within the acceptance period, and the acceptance-related performance sound (acceptance sound) is made inaudible. This makes it easy to recognize that an action by a player has been accepted even when a specific type of premonition display (e.g., the second premonition display: FIG. 256) and a reception-related performance sound that have been in an execution state since before the acceptance period occurs are both being executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 256, the premonition effect display of the specific mode (for example, the second premonition effect display: FIG. 256) is not terminated and is displayed at the time when the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the acceptance within the corresponding acceptance period starts to be executed. In contrast, the reception-related effect sound (acceptance sound) is terminated and made inaudible at the time when the post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the acceptance starts to be executed.

According to this configuration, the premonition display of the specific aspect (e.g., the second premonition display: FIG. 256) that is displayed before the start of the reception period will continue to be displayed even after the post-reception performance has started, while the reception-related performance sound (reception-permissible sound) that is audible (output) before the start of the reception period will no longer be audible at the time the post-reception output sound starts to be executed. This makes it possible to confirm the premonition display aspect that is displayed before the start of the reception period even after the start of the specific post-reception performance, while making the reception-related performance sound (reception-permissible sound) that is output before the start of the reception period in an inaudible state, making it possible to appropriately indicate that the reception period has already ended.

It is desirable that the premonition display of the specific mode (second premonition display ZEH2) be displayed as a different display image depending on the degree of expectation, and executed as a display indicating the rate at which a jackpot is obtained (degree of expectation). In this case, it is also desirable that the reception-related sound (acceptance sound) be output as a different sound depending on the degree of expectation indicated by the premonition display of the specific mode (the mode as a premonition display of the specific mode).

However, in each of the above-mentioned examples, during the acceptance period in which the first premonition display is executed, the first premonition display can be executed in only one manner, and is not executed as a display that indicates the probability (expectation) of a jackpot being obtained.

Note that in a reception period (such as the second reception period or the fifth reception period) in which multiple reception permissible sounds (long-term permissible sounds, short-term permissible sounds) are output simultaneously, the output of the reception permissible sound and the post-reception output sound do not overlap; however, in a reception period in which only one reception permissible sound is output, there are cases in which the output of the reception permissible sound and the post-reception performance sound overlap (the first reception period) and cases in which the output of the reception permissible sound and the post-reception output sound do not overlap (the third reception period, the fourth reception period, etc.).

A long-term allowable sound is, for example, a sound that is output as a sound effect (corresponding to the second allowable sound shown in Figure 213, etc.), and a short-term allowable sound is, for example, a sound that is output as a message sound (corresponding to the first allowable sound shown in Figure 213, etc.). A case in which only one reception allowable sound is output is, for example, a case in which no message sound is output and only a sound effect is output (corresponding to the case in Figure 212, etc. where only the first allowable sound is output). Note that a short-term allowable sound may be defined as "sound output as a sound effect" and a long-term allowable sound may be defined as "sound output as a message sound."

When one of the two reception-permitted sounds is output as a "message sound," it is desirable to display a message image (a reception-related performance display such as "press") corresponding to the message sound while the message sound (for example, a "push" sound) is being audibly output. In this case, the output period of the message sound does not overlap with the period during which the post-reception performance (such as the post-reception output sound) is executed, but the period during which the message image (reception-related performance display) corresponding to the message sound is displayed overlaps with the period during which the post-reception performance is executed.

In each of the above-mentioned examples, the Moji image display is displayed as an integrated Moji image display that includes a gauge image within a peripheral decoration image. The integrated Moji image display is as described above with reference to FIG. 232 and other figures, and other configurations can be adopted as appropriate. In other words, in the past, the Moji image display was displayed at a distance from the gauge image, so it was difficult to make both difficult to see by using premonition display or disappearance-related display. The gauge image may change depending on the state of the Moji image display that indicates the degree of expectation, and if it can be seen, there is no point in making the Moji image display difficult to see. In this regard, by displaying it as an integrated Moji image display, it becomes easy to make both the Moji image display and the gauge image difficult to see.

In each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the "manner in which the imitation image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is made to appear so as to make the post-reception performance display difficult to see, but it may also be made to appear so as not to make the post-reception performance display difficult to see (for example, the post-reception performance display is displayed with priority). Also, the above-mentioned multiple reception periods may include reception periods in which the post-reception performance display is difficult to see due to the "manner in which the imitation image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" and reception periods in which the post-reception performance display is not difficult to see due to the "manner in which the imitation image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display)".

Furthermore, it is not necessary to prepare all of the first through seventh reception periods, and it is also possible to prepare only some of these reception periods in an appropriate combination.

The first reception period may also be terminated if a call is accepted while the reception permission sound is being audibly output.

The "first premonition effect display" and the "seventh premonition effect display" do not necessarily have to be "types that are not displayed at the time the reception period occurs and are hidden before this", and may be displayed, for example, as "types that are displayed across the timing of the reception period". In other words, in this case, the "first premonition effect display" and the "seventh premonition effect display" have different performance contents (display images) from the above-mentioned "second premonition effect display ZEH2" that is displayed in response to the second reception period, but the "start and end times of the display, and how it is related to other image displays until it is hidden", etc. are displayed in the same manner as described for the "second premonition effect display ZEH2" with reference to Figures 256, 264, and 265. The same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

Needless to say, when "at least some" is used above and below, it is intended to include "all."

Next, modified examples of each of the above-mentioned performance examples will be explained. That is, FIG. 268 is a modified example of the "performance when a second reception period occurs" shown in FIG. 264, and FIG. 269 is a modified example of the "performance when a second reception period occurs" shown in FIG. 265. Note that configurations that are not specifically mentioned in this modified example are as described above in the "performance examples relating to the second reception period (FIGS. 256, 264, 265)" and can be similarly applied to other examples that can be applied to the "performance examples relating to the second reception period".

As shown in FIG. 268, this pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a specific decorative member SDY (blind device) as a fourth performance device. For ease of explanation, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) has been omitted from the above-mentioned performance examples, but even in the above-mentioned performance examples, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a specific decorative member SDY (blind device). In other words, in the above-mentioned performance examples, the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) does not operate in relation to the occurrence of a reception period.

Now, if the "second variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, even in the modified example for the second acceptance period, a performance determination (such as a preview determination) corresponding to the second variation pattern is first performed. After this, the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ (such as a performance depiction according to the second variation pattern or sound output of BGM playback according to the second variation pattern) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 268(a)").

The process from this point onwards is similar to that of Figures 264(b) to (d) described above. That is, first, as shown in Figure 268(b), the "second premonition effect display ZEH2" is executed (timing tG1). Next, as shown in Figure 268(c), the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed (timing tG2). Then, while the "second premonition effect display ZEH2" and the "integrated model image display IG" are displayed in this manner, a second reception period occurs (timing tG3), as shown in Figure 268(d).

For ease of explanation, the second performance device (sub LCD 1610) is not shown here, but even in this modified example, the "second post-reception specific performance" and "premonition performance" using the second performance device (sub LCD 1610) are executed in the same manner as in the above-mentioned example (Figs. 264 and 265). Also, the performances (acceptable reception sound, second post-reception output sound, etc.) using the third performance device (speaker) are executed in the same manner as in the above-mentioned example (Figs. 264 and 265).

In addition, in this modified example, if an action by the player is accepted at timing tG3a during the second acceptance period, the second acceptance period will end based on the acceptance, and the post-acceptance performance (second post-acceptance performance) corresponding to the second acceptance period will begin to be executed, similar to the above-mentioned example (Figs. 264 and 265).

The example of the performance progressing from FIG. 268(d) to "D1 (FIG. 269(e1)-(i1))" corresponds to a case where the first mode with a relatively low expectation is executed as the post-acceptance performance corresponding to the second acceptance period according to the modified example, and the example of the performance progressing from FIG. 268(d) to "D2 (FIG. 269(e2)-(i2))" corresponds to a case where the second mode with a relatively high expectation is executed as the post-acceptance performance corresponding to the second acceptance period according to the modified example. The expectation (probability of the big win pattern appearing) may include "0%" or "100%".

And in the examples shown in Figs. 268 and 269, as in the examples described above (Figs. 264 and 265), not only is the "integrated model image display IG" not hidden, but the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see at timing tG3a, which is the time when the player's action is accepted (the time when the second post-acceptance performance is started in response to the acceptance), but also the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see. As in the examples described above (Figs. 264 and 265), not only the integrated model image display IG but also the second precursor performance display ZEH2 is not made hidden or difficult to see at timing tG3a, which is the time when the player's action is accepted (the time when the second post-acceptance performance is started).

In addition, when the first mode with a relatively low expectation is executed as the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the second acceptance period in this modified example (Fig. 269 (e1)-(i1)), the same procedure is followed as in the above-mentioned example (Fig. 264, Fig. 265). That is, first, at timing tG3b, the display of the "second disappearance-related display SK2-1" is started as the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see". Next, when timing tG3c arrives, the "second post-acceptance effect display UG2-1" is started to be executed as the post-acceptance effect in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in response to the acceptance of the player's action during the second acceptance period.

After this, as in the case of the above-mentioned example (Fig. 264, Fig. 265), as shown in Fig. 269 (h1), while the "second post-reception performance display UG2-1" is displayed, first, among the "integrated Moji image display IG", "second premonition performance display ZEH2", and "second disappearance-related display SK2-1", the "integrated Moji image display IG" and "second premonition performance display ZEH2" are each hidden. After the "integrated Moji image display IG" and "second premonition performance display ZEH2" are each hidden, the "second disappearance-related display SK2-1" is hidden as shown in Fig. 269 (i1), and thus the "second post-reception performance display UG2-1" is displayed with good visibility.

However, when the second mode, which has a relatively high expectation, is executed as the post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period in this modified example (Fig. 269 (e2) to (i2)), at timing tG3b, as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see", a disappearance-related display is not performed in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) but a specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is started to operate. That is, as shown in Fig. 269 (f2), the specific decorative member SDY (blind device) is positioned (operated) so as to overlap at least a portion of the integrated model image display IG when viewed from the front, thereby making the integrated model image display IG difficult to see, and this functions as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see".

With this configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the expectation level is higher in the case shown in FIG. 269 (f2) than in the case shown in FIG. 269 (f1), which increases the interest in the game. In addition, since the action of the specific decorative member SDY (curtain role) itself indicates the expectation level, it can also serve as a post-reception performance, and this post-reception performance itself can make the integrated model image display IG difficult to see. In this sense, it is desirable for the fourth performance device (specific decorative member SDY) to be used as a performance element that indicates the expectation level even in performances other than the post-reception performance (such as a preview performance that indicates the expectation level).

Next, while the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is being executed in such a way that it overlaps with at least a portion of the integrated model image display IG when viewed from the front as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see," when timing tG3c arrives, the "second post-reception effect display UG2-2" begins to be executed as a post-reception effect on the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the player's action being accepted within the second acceptance period.

In other words, in this case, the "integrated model image display IG" and the "second premonition display ZEH2" are displayed, and the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is being executed at a position where it overlaps at least a part of the "integrated model image display IG" when viewed from the front, while the "second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2" is started. With this configuration, since the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 is started while the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" makes it difficult to see the integrated model image display IG and the second premonition effect display ZEH2, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the "integrated model image display IG" and the "second premonition effect display ZEH2" to the "second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2" while suggesting that the second acceptance period has already ended (after timing tG3c).

Furthermore, when the second mode, which has a relatively high expectation, is executed as the post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period in this modified example (Figures 269 (e2) to (i2)), when the display of the "second post-reception performance display UG2-2" is started in this manner, as shown in Figure 269 (h2), while the "second post-reception performance display UG2-2" is displayed, first, of the "integrated model image display IG," "second premonition performance display ZEH2," and "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see (here, a performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative material SDY))," the "integrated model image display IG" and "second premonition performance display ZEH2" are each made invisible and terminated. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" and "second precursor effect display ZEH2" are both hidden in this way, the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is terminated as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see" as shown in FIG. 269 (i2). In other words, the specific decorative member SDY is moved to its original position so that the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" does not overlap with the integrated model image display IG when viewed from the front. This allows the "second post-reception effect display UG2-2)" to be displayed with good visibility.

In addition, when a "performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative material SDY)" is performed as the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" (a relatively high expectation mode (Fig. 269 (e2) to (i2))), it is desirable to make the time from when the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" appears to when it ends longer than when a "performance using the first performance device (disappearance-related display)" is performed as the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" (a relatively low expectation mode (Fig. 269 (e1) to (i1)). That is, in this case When the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is executed as the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see", the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" itself can increase the interest in the game, and after the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" ends, the "second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2" that was previously difficult to see is revealed, which is expected to further increase the interest in the game. In contrast, in the first and third acceptance periods, when a mode with low expectations is executed as the post-acceptance effect and when a mode with high expectations is executed as the post-acceptance effect, the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see (such as the first disappearance-related display SK-1)" is executed for the same amount of time.

On the other hand, the example in which the presentation progresses from Figure 268 (d) to "D3 (Figure 269 (e3) to (h3))" assumes a case in which no action by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period in the modified example.

As shown in FIG. 269 (e3)-(h3), in this modified example, if no action by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period, the situation is the same as in the example described above (FIG. 265 (e3)-(h3)). For example, if no action by the player is accepted, as shown in FIG. 269 (f3), the "pattern in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see" will be the pattern that would have appeared if the action by the player had been accepted within the second acceptance period.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 269 (e3) to (h3), the case where the "second disappearance related display SK2-1" is displayed when no action by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period corresponds to the case where, if the action by the player had been accepted within the second acceptance period, the presentation would have progressed from Figure 268 (d) to "D1 (Figure 269 (e1) to (i1))" (the case where a post-acceptance presentation with a relatively low expectation would have been executed). On the other hand, although not shown in the figures, when no action by the player is accepted during the second acceptance period, a "performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative member SDY)" is executed as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see." This corresponds to the case where, if the action by the player had been accepted during the second acceptance period, the performance would have progressed from FIG. 268(d) to "D2 (FIG. 269(e2)-(i2))" (a post-acceptance performance with a relatively high expectation would have been executed).

After this, as shown in FIG. 269 (g3), out of the "integrated Momo image display IG" and the "mode in which the integrated Momo image display IG becomes difficult to see (performance using the second disappearance related display SK2-1 or the fourth performance device (specific decorative material SDY))", the "integrated Momo image display IG" is first hidden. Then, after the "integrated Momo image display IG" has been hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 269 (h3), the "mode in which the integrated Momo image display IG becomes difficult to see (performance using the second disappearance related display SK2-1 or the fourth performance device (specific decorative material SDY))" ends.

As mentioned above, in the example of the performance shown in FIG. 268 and FIG. 269, the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" is performed as a "display on the first performance device (performance display device 1600)" (FIG. 269 (e1) to (i1)), and as a "performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative material SDY)" (FIG. 269 (e2) to (i2)). In this regard, in the above example, the timing at which the "display on the first performance device (performance display device 1600)" starts to be executed is the same as the timing at which the "performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative material SDY)" starts to be executed (timing tG3b), but the "performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative material SDY)" may start to be executed at a timing (for example, timing tG3a) before the timing tG3b at which the "display on the first performance device (performance display device 1600)" starts to be executed.

With this configuration, the time from acceptance to the appearance of the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" varies depending on the type of "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" and the expectation level suggested as a post-acceptance effect (the rate at which a winning symbol appears), which adds excitement and increases interest in the game. In particular, the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" also functions as a post-acceptance effect, just like the "post-acceptance specific effect using the second effect device," and so by executing this at an early timing, it is possible to increase interest in the game.

However, even in a situation where the "performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative member SDY)" is being executed in a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see," it is desirable to make at least a portion of the integrated model image display IG (model image display) visible, as shown in FIG. 269 (f2).

In addition, in the example of the performance shown in Figures 268 and 269, when the performance progresses from Figure 268 (d) to "D2 (Figures 269 (e2) to (i2))" (when a post-reception performance with a relatively high expectation has been executed), as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see", "display on the first performance device (performance display device 1600)" is not performed, but a "performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative material SDY)" is performed. However, in this case, as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see", both a "display (display related to disappearance) on the first performance device (performance display device 1600)" and a "performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative material SDY)" may be performed.

With this configuration, after an operation has been accepted, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see by both the "display (disappearance-related display) on the first performance device (performance display device 1600)" and the "performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative member SDY)," making it possible to ideally indicate that the operation has been accepted.

In this way, when both the "display (disappearance-related display) on the first performance device (performance display device 1600)" and the "performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative material SDY)" are executed as "a mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see," the disappearance-related display is displayed (such as a priority display) in a manner that makes at least a portion of the integrated model image display IG difficult to see, and the "performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative material SDY)" is executed in a manner that makes at least a portion of the integrated model image display IG and at least a portion of the disappearance-related display difficult to see, respectively.

In this case, too, the "performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative material SDY)" which functions as the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" may be started at timing tG3a, and the "display (display related to disappearance) in the first performance device (performance display device 1600)" which functions as the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" may be started at timing tG3b.

In addition, when executing both the "display (disappearance-related display) in the first performance device (performance display device 1600)" and the "performance using the fourth performance device (specific decorative material SDY)" as the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see," it is desirable that the disappearance-related display be displayed as an image display different from the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display SK2-1)" that appears when the performance progresses from Figure 268 (d) to "D1 (Figure 269 (e1) to (i1))" (when a post-reception performance with a relatively low expectation is executed).

The fourth performance device does not necessarily have to be provided as a movable object (specific decorative member SDY) that can operate; it simply needs to be something that can perform a specific performance at a position that overlaps with at least a portion of the integrated model image display IG (model image display) when viewed from the front (for example, a flying object that can perform a performance by flying in front of the performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front, or a light guide plate provided in front of the performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front). It is also desirable that the performance using the fourth performance device be performed not only based on acceptance during the acceptance period, but also when different performance conditions are met (such as the arrival of a specific timing in a specific pattern change).

The example of the performance regarding the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" described with reference to Figures 268 and 269 can also be applied to a reception period other than the second reception period. For example, even if it is applied to the fifth reception period, the performance will progress as shown in Figures 268 and 269.

In addition, the example of the effect relating to the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" described with reference to Figures 268 and 269 may not be applied to any of the first through seventh reception periods, but may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth variation pattern, eighth post-reception effect) that is different from any of those reception periods.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the post-reception performance display is started while the integrated Momo image display IG (depending on the type of reception period, both the integrated Momo image display IG and the premonition performance display ZEH) is displayed, but the post-reception performance display is started in a manner that makes it difficult to see due to the integrated Momo image display IG (depending on the type of reception period, both the integrated Momo image display IG and the premonition performance display ZEH) (Figures 263, 265, and 267).

However, instead of this, the post-acceptance performance display may be started while the integrated Momo image display IG (or both the integrated Momo image display IG and the premonition performance display ZEH, depending on the type of acceptance period) is displayed, but the post-acceptance performance display may be started in a manner (such as priority display) that is not made difficult to see by the integrated Momo image display IG (or both the integrated Momo image display IG and the premonition performance display ZEH, depending on the type of acceptance period).

The following describes how this configuration is applied to the example of the second reception period. Configurations that are not specifically mentioned are the same as those in the examples above (Fig. 256, Fig. 264, Fig. 265), and can be applied to other examples as appropriate.

The presentation content until the player's action (operation) is accepted during the second acceptance period in this modified example is the same as the presentation content described above (Figs. 264(a)-(d), 265(e)). For example, in this example as well, as shown in Fig. 270(e2), at timing tG3a when the player's action is accepted, not only are the "integrated model image display IG" and the "second premonition presentation display ZEH2" not hidden, but the integrated model image display IG and the second premonition presentation display ZEH2 are not made difficult to see.

In addition, even in this modified example, there are cases where a post-acceptance performance with a relatively low expectation is executed and cases where a post-acceptance performance with a relatively high expectation is executed. However, when a post-acceptance performance with a relatively low expectation is executed, the performance content is the same as that described above (Figure 265 (e1) to (i1)), so a description thereof will be omitted here.

In contrast, in this modified example, when a "relatively high expectation post-acceptance performance" is executed as the post-acceptance performance corresponding to the second acceptance period, the performance content shown in FIG. 270 (f2) to (i2) appears instead of the performance content described above (FIG. 265 (f2) to (i2)).

First, at timing tG3b, in a situation where the "second post-acceptance performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) has not yet started, as shown in FIG. 270 (f2), the second disappearance-related display SK2 that appears on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is executed in the second mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-2). Next, when timing tG3c arrives during the period in which the display related to the second disappearance-related display SK2 (the mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears, the "second post-acceptance performance display UG2" as the post-acceptance performance on the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in response to the acceptance of the player's action during the second acceptance period is started to be executed in the second mode (second post-acceptance performance display UG2-2). It goes without saying that the post-acceptance performance display indicates the expectation level (the rate at which the player is granted the bonus). The rate may be 100%.

However, as shown in FIG. 270 (g2), the second post-reception performance display UG2-2 in this modified example is not made difficult to view by the integrated model image display IG, the second precursor performance display ZEH2, the second disappearance-related display SK2, or the like. More specifically, the second post-reception performance display UG2-2 in this modified example is displayed in a manner that overlaps with the areas in which the integrated model image display IG, the second precursor performance display ZEH2, and the second disappearance-related display SK2 are displayed, and is displayed (priority displayed) in a manner that makes the integrated model image display IG, the second precursor performance display ZEH2, and the second disappearance-related display SK2 difficult to view.

With this configuration, the second post-reception performance display UG2-2 itself can function as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see," thereby improving interest in the game. Note that even the second post-reception performance display UG2-2 in this example is not displayed with priority over the first performance display TE (here, this corresponds to the above-mentioned "timer performance"), and the portion that overlaps with the first performance display TE is made difficult to see.

After this, as shown in FIG. 270 (h2), first the integrated model image display IG and the second premonition effect display ZEH2 are hidden. Next, as shown in FIG. 270 (i2), the second disappearance-related display SK2 is hidden.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 270, if no action by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period, the situation is the same as in the example described above (FIG. 265 (e3) to (h3)). In other words, if no action by the player is accepted, the situation in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see will be the situation that would have appeared if the action by the player had been accepted within the second acceptance period.

In the example shown in FIG. 270, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2 and the second post-reception performance display UG2-2 are displayed as "a mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see," but it is also possible to display only the second post-reception performance display UG2-2 without displaying the second disappearance-related display SK2-2.

The example of the "post-reception performance display" described with reference to FIG. 270 can also be applied to a reception period other than the second reception period. For example, even if it is applied to the fifth reception period, the performance will progress as shown in FIG. 270.

In addition, the example of the "post-reception performance display" described with reference to FIG. 270 may not be applied to any of the first through seventh reception periods, but may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth variation pattern, eighth post-reception performance) that is different from any of those reception periods.

In the above-mentioned modified examples (Figs. 268 to 270) or other examples thereof, when an action by a player is accepted within a reception period (specific reception period), while the Moji image display (here, integrated Moji image display IG) is being displayed, a specific area including at least a part of the display target area of the Moji image display can be used to display a "specific disappearance effect display (e.g., second disappearance related display SK2-2)" as a mode of making the Moji image display difficult to see, and after the specific disappearance effect display (second disappearance related display SK2-2) starts to be displayed, the Moji image display is made non-displayable while the specific disappearance effect display (e.g., second disappearance related display SK2-2) is being displayed.

In other words, in this case, even after the acceptance, it is possible to confirm which aspect of the model image display was appearing. Also, before the model image display is hidden, the visibility of the model image display is reduced by a specific disappearance effect display, and since the model image display is hidden while the visibility is reduced, it can be suggested that there is little time left until the model image display is hidden, and it can be suppressed that the decrease in interest in the game is suppressed when the model image display is hidden.

In addition, in the above-mentioned modified examples (Figs. 268 to 270) or other examples thereof, the above-mentioned "specific disappearance performance display (e.g., second disappearance-related display SK2-2)" can be displayed even during the period after the model image display (here, integrated model image display IG) is hidden, and the post-reception performance (e.g., a performance using the specific decorative material SDY, the second post-reception performance display UG2-2, etc.) is started to be executed while at least the specific disappearance performance display (e.g., second disappearance-related display SK2-2) is displayed. The post-reception performance is displayed using at least a part of the specific area that is the display target area of the specific disappearance performance display (e.g., second disappearance-related display SK2-2) (example shown in Fig. 270), or is realized as being executed using a performance body (such as the example shown in Fig. 269 or other examples thereof) that is in a position that overlaps with the specific disappearance performance display (at least a part of it) when viewed from the front.

With this configuration, among the post-reception effects, the specific post-reception effect that is executed at a position that overlaps with a specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2) when viewed from the front can be recognized without shifting the gaze from the position where the specific disappearance effect display is displayed. In other words, in this case, when the specific disappearance effect display is displayed, it becomes possible to recognize that there is no need to change the gaze in order to grasp the aspect of the specific post-reception effect, so that interest in the game can be maintained in an appropriate manner.

When a specific post-reception effect according to the above modified example (for example, an effect using a specific decorative member SDY or the second post-reception effect display UG2-2) appears, the percentage of the player who is granted a bonus may be 100%.

The specific post-reception performance in the above modified example (e.g., a performance using the specific decorative material SDY, the second post-reception performance display UG2-2, etc.) begins to be executed before the imitation image display is hidden, making the imitation image display difficult to see, and therefore can appropriately indicate that the reception has been made even while the imitation image display is displayed. However, the specific post-reception performance in the above modified example (e.g., a performance using the specific decorative material SDY, the second post-reception performance display UG2-2, etc.) may begin to be executed after the imitation image display is hidden.

In addition to the reception period during which the specific post-reception performance (e.g., a performance using the specific decorative material SDY or the second post-reception performance display UG2-2) according to the above modified example can be generated, a reception period during which a post-reception performance different from the specific post-reception performance can be generated may be prepared, and the specific disappearance performance display (e.g., the second disappearance-related display SK2-2) may be displayed even when the different post-reception performance is executed. The reception period during which the different post-reception performance can be generated may be any of the first reception period and the third to seventh reception periods. However, in the reception period during which the reception allowance sound is not terminated halfway (the first reception period), it is preferable that the specific disappearance performance display (e.g., the second disappearance-related display SK2-2) is not displayed (another disappearance performance display may be displayed).

In addition, in the above-mentioned modified examples (Figs. 268 to 270) or other examples thereof, when a reception period occurs, a process is executed to make an audible reception permission sound, which indicates that the reception is permitted for the post-reception performance corresponding to that reception period, or that the reception will be permitted (soon), thereby preventing the player from forgetting to perform the reception action.

As described above, this pachinko machine 1 is provided with multiple types of premonition effect displays, but in the above-mentioned modified examples (Figs. 268 to 270) or other examples thereof, if a player's action is accepted while a specific premonition effect display (second premonition effect display ZEH2) is being displayed, the specific premonition effect display (second premonition effect display ZEH2) is displayed even after the acceptance, but a mode is created in which the specific premonition effect display (second premonition effect display ZEH2) is difficult to see while the specific premonition effect display (second premonition effect display ZEH2) is being displayed. Then, after the mode is created, the specific premonition effect display (second premonition effect display ZEH2) is hidden while it is difficult to see.

In other words, in this case, even after acceptance has been made, it is possible to check which aspect of the premonition display has been displayed, and by reducing the visibility of the premonition display until it is hidden, it is possible to appropriately indicate that acceptance has already been made.

In the above-mentioned modified examples (Figures 268 to 270) or other examples thereof, the manner in which the specific premonition performance display (second premonition performance display ZEH2) becomes difficult to see is an image display other than the specific premonition performance display (second premonition performance display ZEH2) (for example, second disappearance-related display SK2-2 or post-reception performance display UG2-2), or a performance in a performance element that is performed in front of the specific premonition performance display (second premonition performance display ZEH2).

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned modified examples (Figures 268 to 270) or other examples thereof, the "mode of making the specific premonition performance display (second premonition performance display ZEH2) difficult to see" is executed so as to straddle not only the specific premonition performance display (second premonition performance display ZEH2) but also both the specific premonition performance display and the imitation image display when viewed from the front, making both of them difficult to see. This mode may be performed in a manner that makes the entire performance display device 1600 difficult to see, but in that case, it is desirable to make the specific premonition performance display and the imitation image display visible through a specified transmittance.

The "mode of making a specific premonition display (second premonition display ZEH2) difficult to see" may be achieved by changing the display characteristics of the specific premonition display itself (such as changing the transmittance).

In the above-mentioned modified examples (Figs. 268 to 270) or other examples thereof, the specific premonition effect display (second premonition effect display ZEH2) is hidden during the acceptance period. Even if the acceptance is made in this hidden state, "a mode in which the specific premonition effect display is difficult to see (second disappearance-related display SK2-2, post-acceptance effect display UG2-2, effect body, etc.)" is executed.

In addition, in the first acceptance period described above, if an action by the player is accepted, one of multiple effects (the effects shown in Fig. 263 (e1)-(i1), the effects shown in Fig. 263 (e2)-(i2)) is made to appear based on the acceptance, but regardless of which of these effects appears, a specific mode (first disappearance-related display SK1-1 (first mode of first disappearance-related display SK1 corresponding to the first acceptance period)) can appear. In other words, in this case, regardless of which of the multiple effects appears, a specific mode will also appear along with it, suggesting that they are a common effect "resulting from the acceptance of an action by the player during the specific acceptance period."

In contrast, in the second reception period described above, the modified examples (Figs. 268 to 270) or the second reception period according to the other examples, when the action of the player is accepted, one of a number of modes including a special mode (for example, a second disappearance-related display SK2-2, a performance using a specific decorative member SDY, a post-acceptance performance display UG2-2, etc.) whose appearance rate (which may be 0% or 100%) varies depending on whether or not a special condition (such as a winning condition for a big win or a condition for entering a certain probability mode) is met can appear, and when the special mode appears, the model image display becomes difficult to see. With this configuration, a special mode that suggests the degree of expectation appears before the model image display is hidden, and the special mode makes the model image display difficult to see, so that the player can enjoy the progression from the model image display to the post-acceptance performance (special mode) without missing it, without changing the focus of attention.

In this regard, even when the above-mentioned specific mode (first disappearance-related display SK1-1 (first mode of first disappearance-related display SK1 corresponding to the first reception period)) appears, the model image display is made difficult to see by the "specific mode." With this configuration, there are cases where the model image display is made difficult to see by the special mode that suggests the degree of expectation for the award (special reception period) and cases where the model image display is made difficult to see by the specific mode that does not suggest the degree of expectation for the award (specific reception period), so that the "mode that makes the model image display difficult to see (specific mode, special mode)" has a dramatic effect, which can increase interest in the game.

In addition, when the reception period illustrated in each of the above-mentioned performance examples and modified examples occurs, a model image display suggesting the objects (such as the type of operating means) that are acceptable for reception during the reception period may be displayed both during the period in which the premonition performance display is executed before the reception period occurs, and during the reception period itself. However, in this case, the model image display displayed during the period in which the premonition performance display is executed should be in a different form from the model image display displayed during the reception period, and it is preferable that it be made non-display before the reception period occurs.

Below, we will explain a modified example of the method of displaying a mock image in this manner when it is applied to the second reception period. That is, Figs. 271(a)-(f) and Figs. 272(g) and (h) are modified examples of the "presentation when a second reception period occurs" shown in Fig. 264, and Figs. 272(i)-(l) are modified examples of the "presentation when a second reception period occurs" shown in Fig. 265. Note that configurations that are not specifically mentioned in this modified example are as described above in "Presentation examples related to the second reception period (Figs. 256, 264, 265)" and can be similarly applied to other examples that can be applied to the "Presentation examples related to the second reception period".

Now, if the "second variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, then in this modified example for the second acceptance period, first, a performance determination (such as a preview determination) corresponding to the second variation pattern is performed. After this, the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ (such as a performance depiction according to the second variation pattern or sound output of BGM playback according to the second variation pattern) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 271(a)").

However, in this modified example, when timing tG0 arrives, which is earlier than timing tG1 described above, a "preceding type premonition display SZE" is executed as shown in FIG. 271(b). In the example shown in FIG. 271(b), an image display that is also used in other performance examples (normal performance examples in which a mock image display is not executed and then temporarily hidden within the period in which the premonition display is executed) is executed as the "preceding type premonition display SZE", but it is preferable that the "preceding type premonition display SZE" be executed as an image display that cannot appear in other performance examples (normal performance examples in which a mock image display is not executed and then temporarily hidden within the period in which the premonition display is executed).

In this modified example, the Moji image display TMH (here, an integrated Moji image display) appears while the "precedent type premonition effect display SZE" is displayed in this way. That is, as shown in FIG. 271(c), the Moji image display TMH (here, an integrated Moji image display) in this example is started to be displayed while at least a part of it is made difficult to see by the "precedent type premonition effect display SZE". Also, although the Moji image display TMH in this example is displayed as an integrated Moji image display, it is displayed as an image in which the gauge image GG and the partition image KG, which is the display target area of the gauge image GG, etc. are not displayed (a Moji image display in a form that cannot be displayed during the reception period).

After a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 271(d), the model image display TMH (here, the integrated model image display) is displayed in a manner that is not made difficult to see by the "preceding type premonition effect display SZE." In this example, the display related to the "preceding type premonition effect display SZE" has ended, and the display is decorated with other effect displays (in the figure, a flame effect).

However, as shown in Fig. 271(c) and (d), the Moji image display TMH (here, the integrated Moji image display) that appears while the "preceding type premonition effect display SZE" is displayed is displayed in a manner different from any of the Moji image displays that may be displayed during the reception period (Fig. 232(a)-(d)). This makes it possible to indicate that the reception period has not yet occurred while displaying the Moji image display TMH for a relatively long period of time,

As will be described later, when the Moji image display TMH (here, an integrated Moji image display) appears, during the corresponding reception period, the Moji image display is displayed in the mode with the highest expectation (e.g., Fig. 232(d)) among the above multiple modes (Fig. 232(a)-(d)). This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game when the "pre-emptive type premonition performance display SZE" is displayed. Note that the modes that can be displayed as the Moji image display do not necessarily have to be the above four modes (Fig. 232(a)-(d)), and there may be only two modes, for example.

In this modified example, when timing tG1 arrives, as shown in FIG. 271(e), the "normal type premonition effect display TZE" begins to be executed, and the "normal type premonition effect display TZE" makes part of the model image display TMH difficult to see (for example, priority display). Next, as shown in FIG. 271(f), the "normal type premonition effect display TZE" is displayed in a manner that makes the entire model image display TMH difficult to see, and thus the model image display TMH is hidden while the "normal type premonition effect display TZE" is displayed.

Then, after this, when timing tG2 arrives, as shown in FIG. 272(g), the Moji image display (here, the integrated Moji image display IG) starts to be displayed in the form with the highest expectation among the multiple forms (FIGS. 232(a)-(d)) mentioned above. At the time when the Moji image display (here, the integrated Moji image display IG) that can be displayed within the acceptance period starts to be displayed in this way, a part of it is made difficult to see by the "normal type premonition performance display TZE".

Then, while the "normal type premonition effect display TZE" and the "moth image display (here, integrated moth image display IG)" are displayed in this manner, the second reception period occurs (timing tG3), as shown in FIG. 272 (h).

For ease of explanation, the second performance device (sub LCD 1610) is not shown here, but even in this modified example, the "second post-reception specific performance" and "premonition performance" using the second performance device (sub LCD 1610) are executed in the same manner as in the above-mentioned example (Figs. 264 and 265). Also, the performances (acceptable reception sound, second post-reception output sound, etc.) using the third performance device (speaker) are executed in the same manner as in the above-mentioned example (Figs. 264 and 265).

In addition, in this modified example, if an action by the player is accepted at timing tG3a during the second acceptance period, the second acceptance period will end based on the acceptance, and the post-acceptance performance (second post-acceptance performance) corresponding to the second acceptance period will begin to be executed, similar to the above-mentioned example (Figs. 264 and 265).

In addition, even in this modified example, there are cases where a post-acceptance performance with a relatively low expectation is executed and cases where a post-acceptance performance with a relatively high expectation is executed. However, when a post-acceptance performance with a relatively low expectation is executed, the performance content is the same as that described above (Figure 265 (e1) to (i1)), so a description thereof will be omitted here.

In contrast, in this modified example, when a "relatively high expectation post-reception performance" is executed as the post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period, the performance content shown in Figures 272 (i) to (l) appears instead of the performance content described above (Figures 265 (f2) to (i2)).

Firstly, in this example too, as shown in FIG. 272(i), at timing tG3a when the player's action is accepted, the "normal type premonition effect display TZE" and the "moth image display (here, integrated moth image display IG)" are not hidden, nor are the "normal type premonition effect display TZE" and the "moth image display (here, integrated moth image display IG)" made difficult to see.

However, in this example, even when this acceptance is made and thereafter, as long as the "model image display (here, integrated model image display IG)" is displayed, the dynamic display as a model image display will continue. Also, the display area of the gauge image GG will decrease over time.

At timing tG3b, in a situation where the "second post-acceptance performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) has not yet started, as shown in FIG. 272(j), the second disappearance-related display SK2 that appears on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is executed in the second mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-2). However, here, no matter how much display area the gauge image GG had at the time of acceptance (FIG. 272(i)), the display area is set to "0" when timing tG3b arrives. With this configuration, the gauge image GG, which has been decreasing its display area according to a certain rule over time (for example, the amount of display area that decreases over time is proportional), suddenly decreases its display area significantly, ignoring the previous rule, which makes it possible to make the player think that "the remaining time was set to "0" by surprise, but luckily I was able to make it in time for the acceptance," and this can increase the interest in the game.

Then, when timing tG3c arrives during the period during which the display related to the second disappearance-related display SK2-2 (the mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears, the "second post-acceptance performance display UG2" begins to be executed in the second mode (second post-acceptance performance display UG2-2) as a post-acceptance performance on the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in response to the player's action being accepted during the second acceptance period. It goes without saying that this post-acceptance performance display indicates the expectation level (the proportion of times that a bonus will be awarded to the player). This proportion may be 100%.

Note that the second post-reception performance display UG2-2 in this modified example is made difficult to see by the integrated model image display IG, the second premonition performance display ZEH2, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2, etc., as shown in FIG. 272(k), but it may also be displayed in the manner described above with reference to FIG. 270.

After this, first, the integrated model image display IG and the second premonition effect display ZEH2 are both hidden (Fig. 272 (l)). Next, although not shown in the figure, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2 is hidden, and as a result, the second post-reception effect display UG2-2 is displayed with good visibility.

As described above, this pachinko machine 1 provides multiple premonition effect displays to indicate that a reception period will occur. In this regard, in the above-mentioned modified example (Figs. 271 and 272), when a specific premonition effect display (Figs. 271(b)-(f) and 272(g)) among the multiple premonition effect displays is performed, a model image display related to the reception target is displayed both during the premonition period before the reception period occurs (model image display TMH) and during the reception period (model image display IG).

In particular, in this modified example, after the imitation image display (imitation image display TMH) is displayed during the premonition period, it is made non-displayable during the premonition period. Furthermore, the imitation image display TMH that is displayed (and made non-displayable) only during the premonition period is in a different form from the imitation image display IG that can be displayed during the reception period, so it is expected that the performance related to the operation will be improved from the period before the reception period occurs.

In this modified example, if the request is received within the reception period, the Moji image display IG is hidden based on the fact that the request is received (Fig. 272 (l)), but a "specific aspect that makes the Moji image display difficult to see (second disappearance related display SK2-2)" can appear before the Moji image display IG is hidden (Fig. 272 (j) and (k)). However, the "specific aspect that makes the Moji image display difficult to see (second disappearance related display SK2-2)" is not allowed to appear when the Moji image display TMH displayed within the premonition period (specific premonition performance display) is hidden until the Moji image display TMH is hidden.

With this configuration, during the premonition period (specific premonition effect display), the "specific aspect that makes the image display difficult to see (second disappearance related display SK2-2)" that appears in response to the reception period does not appear, and the image display TMH is hidden. Therefore, even if the image display TMH is displayed during the premonition period (specific premonition effect display) but is hidden before the reception period occurs, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the reception period has ended without their knowledge.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 1, multiple "modes for making the Momo image display difficult to see" that can appear in response to reception are prepared, including the above-mentioned "specific mode for making the Momo image display difficult to see (second disappearance-related display SK2-2)." In this regard, in the above-mentioned modified example (FIGS. 271 and 272), none of these modes appear in conjunction with the Momo image display TMH displayed during the premonition period being made invisible. In the above-mentioned modified example, a mode (normal premonition performance display TZE) different from any of the multiple modes prepared as "modes for making the Momo image display difficult to see" in response to reception is made to function as a "mode for making the Momo image display difficult to see" during the premonition period until the Momo image display TMH is made invisible. In other words, in this case, since it will be recognized as a "mode that makes it difficult to see the imitation image display" that is exclusive to the premonition period, even if a "mode that makes it difficult to see the imitation image display" appears during the premonition period, it will be difficult for the player to mistakenly believe that the acceptance period has ended without their knowledge.

In addition, in the above modified example, during the premonition period until the Moji image display TMH is hidden, the "normal premonition effect display TZE" is displayed as a "mode for making the Moji image display difficult to see," and when accepted during the acceptance period, during the period until the Moji image display IG is hidden, the "second disappearance-related display SK2-2" is displayed as a "mode for making the Moji image display difficult to see." In this regard, it is desirable to make the period from when the "normal premonition effect display TZE" is displayed until it is hidden longer than the period from when the "second disappearance-related display SK2-2" is displayed until it is hidden, in order to increase interest in the game.

When the Moji image display TMH is displayed during the premonition period, it is desirable that during the reception period that occurs corresponding to the Moji image display TMH being hidden, reception (reception related to the post-reception performance corresponding to the reception period) is permitted for the reception target (operation means) of the type suggested by the Moji image display TMH, and reception (reception related to the post-reception performance corresponding to the reception period) is not permitted for the reception target (operation means) different from the reception target (operation means) of the type suggested by the Moji image display TMH. That is, in the case of the above modified example (Fig. 271, Fig. 272), since the Moji image display TMH displayed during the premonition period suggests the operation button 410 as the reception target, reception (reception related to the post-reception performance corresponding to the reception period) is not permitted for the reception target (sword decoration 5001) different from the operation button 410 during the corresponding reception period.

As described above, this pachinko machine 1 has the "operation button 410" and the "sword decoration 5001" as the reception targets for the post-reception performance. In this regard, when a performance is executed in a manner such as "displaying a model image display and then hiding the model image display within the premonition period," it is desirable to make the "operation button 410" and the "sword decoration 5001" that have a higher probability of appearing a jackpot pattern when they are the reception target the reception target. In other words, in this case, the reception target of the "operation button 410" and the "sword decoration 5001" that has a lower probability of appearing a jackpot pattern when they are the reception target is prevented from being executed in a manner such as "displaying a model image display and then hiding the model image display within the premonition period" before the corresponding reception period occurs.

Of the modified examples described above with reference to Figures 271 and 272, this "presentation mode related to the premonition effect" can also be applied to a reception period other than the second reception period among the above multiple reception periods, or to other examples thereof. Furthermore, this "presentation mode related to the premonition effect" may not be applied to any of the first to seventh reception periods, but may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth variation pattern, eighth post-reception effect) that is different from any of these reception periods.

Furthermore, among the modified examples described above with reference to Figures 271 and 272, this "presentation mode related to the premonition effect" can also be applied to the modified examples exemplified with reference to Figures 268 to 270 and their other examples.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 can display a remaining time indication display (including the section image KG, etc.) that reduces the display area of a specific image (gauge image GG) as time passes during the acceptance period. In this regard, in the above-mentioned modified example (Figs. 271 and 272), the remaining time indication display can be displayed even after the performance has progressed based on the acceptance of the player's action, and since the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) can be reduced even while the performance is progressing, it is expected that the tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner by making it difficult to know whether the acceptance has been made or not even after the acceptance has been made.

In the modified example described above with reference to Figures 271 and 272, a specific partitioned area (partition image KG) is displayed on the display screen (performance display device 1600) as a remaining time indication display, and the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is depicted as being reduced within the specific partitioned area (partition image KG). After the performance has progressed based on the acceptance of the player's action, not only the specific image (gauge image GG) but also the specific partitioned area (partition image KG) continues to be displayed. With this configuration, the specific partitioned area (partition image KG) remains displayed even after the performance has progressed based on the acceptance of the player's action, making it easier to determine whether the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) has been reduced.

Note that "after the presentation has progressed based on the acceptance of an action by the player, the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is reduced" also means that, for example, a specified display area remains as the gauge image GG at the time the presentation has progressed based on the acceptance of an action by the player, but at a later point in time, the display area is set to 0 (not displayed) (Figure 272 (j)). In this case, however, it is required that the specific partitioned area (section image KG) is still displayed at the time the display area of the gauge image GG is set to 0, and the specific partitioned area (section image KG) will be made hidden after the display area of the gauge image GG is set to 0.

In addition, in the modified example described above with reference to Figures 271 and 272, when an action by the player is accepted, the remaining time indication display (gauge image GG, section image KG, etc.) is hidden based on the acceptance, but prior to hiding the remaining time indication display, regardless of how much display area of the gauge image GG was remaining at the time of acceptance, a specific image having a display area of a specific value (a predetermined value) within a specific section area (section image KG) is displayed, or of the specific section area (section image KG) and the gauge image GG, only the specific section area (section image KG) is displayed (the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced to 0). In other words, in this case, the gauge image GG, which has been reducing its display area over time according to a certain rule (for example, the amount of display area that decreases over time is proportional), will suddenly ignore that rule and reduce its display area significantly, which will make the player think, "I was surprised when the remaining time was set to 0, but luckily I was able to make it in time for the reception," which will increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the modified example described above with reference to Figures 271 and 272, when the player's action is accepted (when the performance corresponding to the acceptance starts to progress), the "depiction of the reduction in the display area of the gauge image GG" that has been executed before the action was accepted is not terminated but continues. Then, when a specified timing arrives, a specific image (gauge image GG) with a display area set to a specific value in a specific partitioned area (partition image KG) is displayed, or, of the specific partitioned area (partition image KG) and the specific image (gauge image GG), only the specific partitioned area (partition image KG) is displayed (the display area is reduced to 0).

In other words, in this case, at the timing when the performance corresponding to the reception starts (for example, timing tG3a), the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is not significantly reduced and the drawing continues up to that point, so it is expected that the tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner by making it difficult to recognize whether the reception has been completed or not even after the reception has been completed. Also, at a timing (for example, timing tG3b) after the timing when the performance corresponding to the reception starts (for example, timing tG3a), the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG, etc.) is significantly reduced, so it is possible to make it appear as if the reception has been completed just in time within the valid period (reception period), which is expected to increase the interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 272, the model image display is dynamically displayed within a predetermined dynamic range both before and after the reception. In this regard, when timing tG3b arrives, which is a predetermined time after the reception, no matter what dynamic position the model image display was in at the time of reception, the model image display is displayed in a static state at a specific dynamic position after the reception (in the example shown in FIG. 272(j), when timing tG3b arrives, the button position is depicted as being at the highest position regardless of the button position up to that point). Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 272(j), after timing tG3b, the model image display is not dynamically displayed, but is statically displayed at the displayed position. This makes it possible to more suitably obtain the above-mentioned effects.

Of the modified examples described above with reference to Figures 271 and 272, the "presentation of gauge image GG and section image KG after acceptance (Figures 272(i)-(k))" and the "dynamic and static display related to model image display" can be applied to a reception period other than the second reception period among the above multiple reception periods, or to other examples thereof. In addition, the "presentation of gauge image GG and section image KG after acceptance (Figures 272(i)-(k))" may not be applied to any of the first to seventh reception periods, but may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth variation pattern, eighth post-reception performance) that is different from any of these reception periods.

In addition, when the "depiction of the gauge image GG and section image KG after acceptance (Fig. 272(i)-(k))" and the "dynamic and static display related to the model image display" are applied to one of the first through seventh acceptance periods (any acceptance period will do), it is desirable not to apply them to acceptance periods other than the one to which they were applied. With this configuration, there will be cases where a depiction of a large decrease in the gauge image GG appears after acceptance (Fig. 272(j)) and cases where this depiction does not appear, which will increase interest in the game.

Even during the reception period when "the depiction of the gauge image GG and the section image KG after reception (Fig. 272 (i) to (k))" and "the dynamic and static display related to the model image display" are not applied, it is desirable to depict the gauge image GG display area to be reduced after reception, or to display it dynamically. In other words, in this case, the only difference is that the display area of the gauge image GG is not depicted to be greatly reduced ignoring the previous rules, and a static display is not performed.

In each of the above-mentioned examples of performance and other examples, and their modified examples, a plurality of reception periods (e.g., the first reception period to the seventh reception period, etc.) that may occur under different conditions are prepared. In this regard, a predetermined reception period (e.g., the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.) among the plurality of reception periods may be made to continue after the pattern change in which the predetermined reception period occurred has ended and the next pattern change has started (a period that may occur across multiple changes), and a specific reception period (e.g., the second reception period, the fourth reception period, the seventh reception period, etc.) among the plurality of reception periods may be made to end before the pattern change in which the specific reception period occurred has ended without continuing until the pattern change in which the specific reception period occurred has ended. That is, in this case, the replica image display related to the reception object is displayed in both the predetermined reception period and the specific reception period, and in both cases where an action by the player is received during the predetermined reception period and when an action by the player is received during the specific reception period, the replica image display is not hidden at the time of the reception, and a mode in which the replica image display is difficult to see (such as a disappearance-related display) appears. This makes it possible to preferably obtain the effect of "making it possible to check which mode of the replica image display was displayed even after the reception was made, while indicating that the reception period has ended" regardless of whether it is the predetermined reception period or the specific reception period.

In addition, if the "predetermined reception period" is, for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, and the fifth reception period, and the "specific reception period" is, for example, the second reception period, the fourth reception period, and the seventh reception period, the manner in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display) will be executed in a different manner when the reception is made in a "predetermined reception period" that can be maintained across multiple variations, and when the reception is made in a "specific reception period" that does not span multiple variations. In other words, in this case, based on the type of "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display, etc.)", it will be possible to know whether the reception period will end within the pattern variation currently being performed, thereby improving interest in the game.

In addition, in both the "predetermined reception period" that may occur over multiple variations and the "specific reception period" that does not, a model image display that imitates the reception target is displayed, but the model image display may be displayed in a different manner (such as the size or position of the display) between the "predetermined reception period" and the "specific reception period". For example, when the model image display is displayed in the manner described above (displayed only at a predetermined position) in the "specific reception period" that does not span multiple variations, it is desirable to display the model image display itself so that its display position changes (moving display) in the "predetermined reception period" that may occur over multiple variations. With this configuration, even if the "predetermined reception period" occurs over multiple variations, it is possible to encourage the player to accept the game quickly.

In addition, in a "reception period" that does not span multiple changes, there are cases where the operation button 410 is used as the reception object and cases where the sword decoration 5001 is used as the reception object, whereas in a "reception period" that may occur across multiple changes, it is desirable that the operation button 410 be used as the reception object but that the sword decoration 5001 not be used as the reception object.

Even in the case of an "acceptance period" that may occur across multiple variations, it is desirable to make it possible to execute the premonition display before the occurrence of the "acceptance period." In other words, in this case, the pattern variation may end while the "premonition display" is being executed, and the acceptance period corresponding to the "premonition display" may occur after the pattern variation has ended, so that interest in playing can be maintained in an appropriate manner after the pattern variation has ended.

As described above, even in "acceptance periods (e.g., the first acceptance period, the third acceptance period, the fifth acceptance period, etc.)" that may occur across multiple variations, after acceptance, a "mode that makes it difficult to see the imitation image display (disappearance-related display, etc.)" appears. This "mode that makes it difficult to see the imitation image display (disappearance-related display, etc.)" takes a predetermined time to execute, but even if the pattern variation is stopped while this is being executed, it is desirable that the "mode that makes it difficult to see the imitation image display (disappearance-related display, etc.)" continue without being terminated midway.

Regarding the "premonition effect display" that is executed in response to the "acceptance period (e.g., the first acceptance period, the third acceptance period, the fifth acceptance period, etc.)" that may occur across multiple changes, and the "mode of making the imitation image display difficult to see (disappearance-related display, etc.)," it is desirable to end the execution period (the time from when the premonition effect display is displayed until it is hidden, the time from when the mode of making the imitation image display difficult to see appears until it is ended) in a time shorter than the time from when the pattern change that was in the execution state stops until the next pattern change starts (the time required from when the pattern change that was in the execution state stops until the reserved amount is consumed).

As described above, in the "reception period (e.g., the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.)" that may occur across multiple variations, the corresponding "premonition effect display" and "disappearance-related display" may be displayed. In this regard, if the "disappearance-related display" is displayed before the pattern variation in which the "premonition effect display" is displayed ends, it is desirable to display the "disappearance-related display" by using at least a part of the same area (overlapping area) as the area in which the "premonition effect display" is displayed, and if the "disappearance-related display" is displayed after the pattern variation in which the "premonition effect display" is displayed ends (after the reserved period is consumed and the next pattern variation is started, etc.), it is desirable to display the "disappearance-related display" by using only an area different from the area in which the "premonition effect display" is displayed. With this configuration, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the post-reception performance is being performed across multiple variations while paying close attention to it.

As described above, multiple modes (Fig. 232 (a) to (d)) with different expectations are prepared for the mock image display, and in a "reception period (e.g., the second reception period, the fourth reception period, the seventh reception period)" that does not span multiple variations, the mock image display is displayed in one of these modes. However, in a "reception period (e.g., the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.)" that may occur in a form spanning multiple variations, it is desirable to display only the mock image display of a specific mode (e.g., Fig. 232 (a)) among the multiple modes. However, in both a "reception period (e.g., the second reception period, the fourth reception period, the seventh reception period)" that does not span multiple variations and a "reception period (e.g., the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.)" that may occur in a form spanning multiple variations, it is desirable to continue the dynamic display of the mock image display after acceptance.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 can generate a plurality of game states (first game state and second game state) with different game conditions (such as the likelihood of winning a prize ball when a game ball is shot into the game area). In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "acceptance period" during which a post-acceptance performance can be executed when an action by a player is accepted can occur in either the first game state or the second game state. Furthermore, if an action by a player is accepted during such an "acceptance period", after the acceptance, regardless of whether the "acceptance period" occurs in the first game state or the second game state, a "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display, etc.)" is made to appear while the image display is being displayed, and then the image display is made invisible while the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display, etc.)" is being displayed.

In other words, in this case, the effect of "allowing the user to check which state was displayed as the mock image even after the acceptance was made, while indicating that the acceptance period has ended" can be obtained regardless of whether the acceptance is made during the acceptance period that occurs in the first game state or the second game state.

The "first game state" corresponds to, for example, a normal game state (low probability, no time reduction), and the "second game state" corresponds to a "game state different from the normal game state" that can occur (state transition) based on the result of a jackpot determination. Any game state may be used as long as it is different from the normal game state.

To further explain this point, using the multiple reception periods (such as the first reception period to the seventh reception period) exemplified in the above-mentioned examples and other examples, and their modified examples, for example, a predetermined type of reception period among the multiple reception periods (such as the first reception period, the fourth reception period, the sixth reception period, and the seventh reception period, but it is not necessary to provide all of them) is set to be able to occur only in the first game state among the first game state and the second game state. In contrast, a third reception period among the multiple reception periods is set to be able to occur only in the second game state among the first game state and the second game state. Even with this configuration, the model image display related to the reception target is displayed in both the predetermined type of reception period (first game state) and the third reception period (second game state). However, in the first game state (when accepted during the first acceptance period), a specific mode (such as the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 and the seventh disappearance-related display, but it is not necessary that all of these are included) that cannot appear in the second game state (when accepted during the second acceptance period) can appear as a "mode in which the model image display is difficult to see."

With this configuration, even without checking the type of post-acceptance performance, it is possible to know whether the game is being controlled to the first game state or the second game state by simply checking which state appears as the "state in which the model image display becomes difficult to see," thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

The "mode in which the replica image display is difficult to see" in the modified example shown in FIG. 269 and FIG. 270 may also be set as a "mode in which the replica image display is difficult to see" that can only appear in the first gaming state (when accepted during the first acceptance period). In other words, in this case, it is expected that the player's interest in the game will be favorably maintained when he or she is in the most unfavorable state (normal gaming state).

Furthermore, according to the above configuration, in the second game state (when accepted during the third acceptance period), the first disappearance-related display is executed as a "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see," but the first disappearance-related display can also appear in the first game state (when accepted during the first acceptance period). That is, in this case, the player is only informed of the possibility that the game is in a state controlled to the second game state, so that the sense of tension can be appropriately maintained. Furthermore, even when the game is controlled to the first game state, when the first disappearance-related display appears, the player can be made aware of the possibility that the game is in a state controlled to the second game state, so that interest in the game can be appropriately maintained.

The second acceptance period and the fifth acceptance period may be prepared as acceptance periods that can occur in either the first game state or the second game state, or may be acceptance periods that can occur only in the first game state out of the first game state and the second game state.

As described above, during the reception period that occurs in the first gaming state, the mock image display is displayed in one of multiple modes (Fig. 232(a)-(d)). In this regard, it is desirable that during the reception period that occurs in the second gaming state, only a mock image display of a specific mode out of the multiple modes (for example, Fig. 232(a) which is a mode with low expectation) is displayed. With this configuration, even if a mode with low expectation (Fig. 232(a)) appears as the mock image display, it is possible to make the player aware of the possibility that the game is controlled to the second gaming state, and therefore the interest in the game can be maintained in a good condition.

In the first game state, if a player's action is not accepted during the acceptance period, the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" may appear in the same mode as when the action is accepted (e.g., the second acceptance period, the fourth acceptance period, the fifth acceptance period, the seventh acceptance period, etc.) or in a different mode from when the action is accepted (e.g., the first acceptance period, etc.). However, in the second game state (third acceptance period), it is preferable that the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" always appears in the same mode as when the action is accepted, or always appears in a different mode from when the action is accepted. With this configuration, if a player's action is not accepted in the first game state, the player can be made aware of the possibility that the second game state has occurred depending on whether the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" appears in the same mode as when the action is accepted.

When the acceptance period (third acceptance period) occurring in the second game state is generated as one in which "even if not accepted within that period, the same appearance as if accepted will always be displayed as a 'mode in which the model image display is difficult to see'", it is desirable for the effective time (set time) of the acceptance period (third acceptance period) to be longer than any of the "acceptance periods in which even if not accepted, the same appearance as if accepted will always be displayed as a 'mode in which the model image display is difficult to see'" occurring in the first game state.

In both the first and second game states, the corresponding premonition effect display will be executed before the acceptance period occurs. In this regard, it is desirable to execute a specific premonition effect display (second premonition effect display, fifth premonition effect display, seventh premonition effect display, etc.) in the first game state that cannot occur in the second game state.

[Special application period]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the start winning (reserved consumption). Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is capable of executing a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) as to which of a plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern is to be selectively displayed. Note that, depending on the result of this performance determination, all of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the above-mentioned selected variation pattern may be executed in sequence, or none of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) may be executed.

As described above, when such a performance judgment (variation pattern judgment, advance notice judgment, etc.) is made, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance content according to the result of the performance judgment, and a variable performance using a decorative pattern according to the result of the jackpot judgment is executed together with an expected performance (advance notice performance) related to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movement of the movable body (gimmick performance). As a result, when the variable performance using the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected performance related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., and the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the player can be given a special jackpot game or a transition to a high probability game state.

In this configuration, the variable presentation of the decorative patterns serves as a presentation with the "function of indicating whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination," and the expectation presentation related to the background depiction and the movement of the moving body serves as a presentation with the "function of suggesting the expectation of a jackpot being obtained, that is, the percentage (including 0% and 100%)." In other words, the player enjoys playing the game through these presentations.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if a specific variation pattern is selected from among the high expectation variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into an SP reach (such as a reach performance accompanied by a background change) as a result of the variation pattern determination, regardless of which result is obtained as the performance determination (such as a preview determination), when the pattern performance based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach (when a specified condition is met), an acceptance permission state (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the variation pattern determination, when a special result is obtained in the performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, if the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (if a predetermined condition is met), an acceptance allowance state (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination, the acceptance allowance state (valid period) will not be generated even if the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. Also, the acceptance allowance state (valid period) generated in the predetermined variation pattern is executed as a different performance from the acceptance allowance state (valid period) generated when the pattern performance based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate acceptance periods during which the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is permitted, and when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period, a display change occurs according to the type of acceptance period that has occurred. Also, during the acceptance period, it is possible to display a mock image display in which the object (operation means) that is the target of the player's action is expressed as an image.

Note that, with regard to the fluctuation patterns that will generate an acceptance-permitted state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during the SP reach no matter which result is obtained as the preview performance judgment, other than the above-mentioned "specific fluctuation patterns" may be provided. However, it is preferable that the fluctuation patterns that will generate an acceptance-permitted state (valid period) at a predetermined timing no matter which result is obtained as the preview performance judgment are not included in the low expectation fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns), or that the selection rate for these patterns is low.

However, the acceptance permission state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions, etc., only executes a post-acceptance display (post-operation display) such as a display change on the performance display device 1600, or generates a performance sound change on the speaker, a change in the light emitted by a lamp, or a performance action by a movable decoration, as long as an operation by the player is detected within the set time (valid period). Therefore, the acceptance permission state (valid period) itself has little performance value, and there is a concern that it may reduce interest in the game related to the acceptance period.

Incidentally, in the above-mentioned and later-mentioned examples, the "operation by the player" to be detected is not limited to operations that are directly performed by the player (pressing or unsheathing the sword), such as the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001", but also includes "contact actions by the player on a specific part" to be detected by a touch sensor, and "actions by the player in a specific space" to be detected by a non-contact sensor. In short, it is sufficient to have one or more reception means (operation means) that accepts actions by the player (pressing, unsheathing, touching, non-contact, etc.).

Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is designed to have, for example, the following special presentation features. It is not necessary to have all of the presentation features (configurations) described below; for example, it is possible to reduce interest in playing by only having one of the presentation features (any configuration), or it is possible to selectively have several configurations that are considered necessary to obtain further effects, or it is possible to appropriately adopt a configuration that is described as applicable to another configuration. Furthermore, the presentation features (configurations) described below are merely examples, and it is sufficient that they have any one configuration that can suppress a decrease in interest in playing related to the acceptance period.

[Configuration 1-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. In both cases where the first reception period occurs and where the second reception period occurs, text information is displayed in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, but the text information is displayed as different text information (for example, "Push!", "Please push", etc.) even though the same action by the player is accepted in the first reception period and the second reception period. Note that the "first reception period (display after the first reception)" and the "second reception period (display after the second reception)" in the configuration 1-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 1-A. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" in the other configurations, may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other, or may mean reception periods different from those reception periods.

In other words, the first and second reception periods require the player to perform the same action (operation mode), but the display changes (post-reception display) that occur as a result of the detection of that action are different. In this regard, with this pachinko machine 1, even when the same action (operation mode) is required of the player, the text information displayed in connection with the occurrence of a reception period is made different depending on the type of reception period (type of post-reception display). This allows the player to perform an operation (action by the player) while knowing which type of display change is likely to occur as the post-reception display, which is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

When different actions (operation modes) are requested of the player, even if the reception periods are of the same type (generating the same post-reception display), it is more desirable to make the text information displayed in connection with the occurrence of the reception period different in order to prevent operational errors by the player (see, for example, FIG. 182(c)). In the same sense, when different actions (operation modes) are requested of the player, but the reception periods are of different types (generating different post-reception displays), it is desirable to make the text information displayed in connection with the occurrence of the reception period different.

It is also possible to provide a further reception period in which the same operation (operation mode) as in the first reception period is requested and the same text information and imitation image display as in the first reception period are displayed, but when the reception is made, a post-reception display different from that in the first reception period is generated. In other words, in this case, it is not possible to fully grasp which type of post-reception display will be executed just by looking at the text information and imitation image display, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension when operating.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 1-A" is adopted, the text information is not hidden during the first acceptance period until the state in which acceptance is permitted (valid state) ends, whereas during the second acceptance period, while the state in which acceptance is permitted (valid state) continues, the text information may be hidden during that period. In other words, in this case, unless an operation (predetermined operation) is performed relatively soon after the second acceptance period occurs, it becomes difficult to recognize what operation (operation mode) is being requested of the player, and it becomes difficult to recognize the type of the acceptance period. This is expected to favorably avoid a situation in which different text information is displayed and the tension is completely lost.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 1-A" is adopted, the second reception period may include a period during which text information is displayed and a period during which text information is not displayed, but the display change may be the same regardless of when the reception is made. In other words, in this case, even if the text information is not displayed, it is possible to perform the operation properly as long as the player checks what type of operation is being requested while the text information is displayed, and this is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

[Configuration 2-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, in the first reception period, only one mode can be displayed as the model image display, and in the second reception period, any of the plurality of modes can be displayed as the model image display. Note that the "first reception period (display after first reception)" and the "second reception period (display after second reception)" according to the configuration 2-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 2-A. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" according to other configurations, may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other, or may mean reception periods different from those reception periods.

With this configuration, during the second reception period, a performance effect that would not be possible during the first reception period is provided, which can favorably increase the player's interest in the game until an operation (motion) by the player is detected.

In addition, for the "multiple modes of model image displays" that can be displayed during the second reception period, it is more desirable to vary the expectation of a jackpot pattern appearing depending on which of those model image displays is displayed, in order to increase interest in the game. Also, any one of the "multiple modes of model image displays" may be the same as "one mode" that can be displayed during the first reception period. In this case, it is desirable for the "lowest expectation mode" of the "multiple modes of model image displays" to be the same as "one mode" that can be displayed during the first reception period.

As will be described later, when this "Configuration 2-A" is adopted, a third reception period may be further provided, and only one mode of the model image display may be displayed during the first reception period and the third reception period. Then, during the "second reception period" in which the model image display is displayed in one of a plurality of modes, the model image display is not made invisible until the valid state is terminated. In contrast, of the "first reception period" and "third reception period" in which the model image display is displayed in only one mode, during the "first reception period" the model image display is not made invisible until the valid state (reception period) is terminated, but during the "third reception period", the model image display that had been displayed until that point may be made invisible during the valid state (reception period) until it is terminated (while the valid state is continuing). That is, in this case, even in the "first reception period" and "third reception period" in which only one form of the model image display is displayed, the performance of whether or not the model image display will be hidden during the period is provided, so that it is possible to appropriately increase the interest in the game until the player's operation (action) is detected. Note that the model image display displayed in the first reception period and the model image display displayed in the third reception period may be the same, but they do not necessarily have to be the same, and the possibility of it being hidden may be suggested.

Also, as will be described later, when "Configuration 2-A" is adopted, the same display change (post-acceptance display) may be produced during the third acceptance period whether the acceptance is made during the period in which the model image display is displayed or during the period in which the model image display is not displayed. In other words, in this case, the valid state (acceptance period) itself continues unchanged even after the model image display is not displayed, so that when creating a dramatic effect (non-display of the model image display) using the "third acceptance period", it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

The "third acceptance period (display after the third acceptance)" for the configuration 2-A is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 2-A. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "third acceptance period" for other configurations, or it may mean an acceptance period different from those acceptance periods (for example, the first acceptance period or the second acceptance period for other configurations).

[Configuration 3-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, in the first reception period, after the model image display is displayed when the first reception period occurs, the model image display is not hidden until the end of the first reception period, and the player's actions can be accepted while the model image display is displayed. In the second reception period, the player's actions can be accepted while the model image display is not displayed, and the above-mentioned "acceptance allowance sound" is audibly output when the first reception period occurs, but is not audibly output when the second reception period occurs. Note that the "first reception period (first reception post-display)" and "second reception period (second reception post-display)" according to the configuration 3-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 3-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" in other configurations, it may mean reception periods that are opposite to each other, or it may mean a reception period that is different from those reception periods.

With this configuration, not only is there a "first reception period" in which the reception permission sound is audibly output and the imitation image display is displayed, but there is also a "second reception period" in which the reception permission sound is not audibly output and the imitation image display is not displayed. This makes it possible for the player to be aware of the possibility that a post-reception display may occur at various times that the player does not intend, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 3-A" is adopted, a third acceptance period is further provided, and in the second acceptance period, the model image display is not displayed from the start of the second acceptance period until its end, and actions by the player can be accepted while the model image display is not displayed, but in the third acceptance period, the model image display may be hidden for only a portion of the third acceptance period, and actions by the player can be accepted both during the period when the model image display is displayed and during the period when the model image display is hidden. In other words, in this case, the third acceptance period has both the aspects of the first acceptance period (acceptance while the model image display is displayed) and the second acceptance period (acceptance while the model image display is not displayed), which can increase interest in playing the game. In addition, since there is a possibility that the state in which the player's actions (operations) are accepted may continue even after the model image display is made non-displayed, it is expected that the decrease in interest in the game that occurs when the model image display is made non-displayed without the player's actions (operations) being accepted will be suppressed.

The "third acceptance period (display after the third acceptance)" for the "configuration 3-A" is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 3-A. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "third acceptance period" for other configurations, or it may mean an acceptance period different from those acceptance periods (for example, the first acceptance period or the second acceptance period for other configurations).

The reception allowable sound is audibly output when the first reception period occurs, but may not be audibly output when the second reception period occurs or when the third reception period occurs. That is, during the third reception period, there is a timing when the imitation image display is displayed. In this regard, according to the above configuration for the third reception period, the reception allowable sound is not output in accordance with the timing when the imitation image display is displayed (or before or after that, etc.). As a result, even during the timing when the third reception period occurs, the third reception period has both the aspects of the first reception period (the imitation image display is displayed) and the aspects of the second reception period (the reception allowable sound is not output), which can increase interest in the game.

Also, as will be described later, when this "Configuration 3-A" is adopted, the same display change (post-acceptance display) may be produced during the third acceptance period whether the acceptance is made during the period in which the model image display is displayed or during the period in which the model image display is not displayed. In other words, in this case, the valid state (acceptance period) itself continues unchanged even after the model image display is not displayed, so that when creating a dramatic effect (non-display of the model image display) using the "third acceptance period", it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

[Configuration 4-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. In the first reception period, when a player's action is detected during the period, the first reception display is displayed and the first reception sound is output, but when a player's action is not detected during the period, the first reception display is not displayed and the first reception sound is not output, and in the second reception period, when a player's action is detected during the period, the second reception display is displayed and the second reception sound is output, and even when a player's action is not detected during the period, the same second reception display as when a player's action is detected during the period is displayed, but the second reception sound is not output. Note that the "first reception period (first reception display)" and "second reception period (second reception display)" according to the configuration 4-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 4-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" in other configurations, it may mean reception periods that are opposite to each other, or it may mean a reception period that is different from those reception periods.

With this configuration, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the acceptance period, a disadvantage in terms of presentation can occur, making it possible to optimally maintain the sense of tension when the acceptance period occurs.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 4-A" is adopted, a third reception period is further provided, and during the third reception period, when a movement (operation) by the player is detected during the period, the third post-reception display is displayed and the third reception sound is output, and even if a movement by the player is not detected during the period, the same third post-reception display as when a movement by the player is detected during the period may be displayed and the third reception sound may be output. In other words, in this case, when a movement (operation) by the player is not accepted during the acceptance period, the same display change (post-reception change) as when the movement (operation) is accepted may be generated in a way that causes a disadvantage in terms of presentation (second acceptance period) or in a way that does not cause a disadvantage in terms of presentation (third acceptance period), so that a decrease in interest in the game when the movement (operation) by the player is not accepted in time during the acceptance period can be suppressed.

The "third acceptance period (display after the third acceptance)" for the "configuration 4-A" is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 4-A. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "third acceptance period" for other configurations, or it may mean an acceptance period different from those acceptance periods (for example, the first acceptance period or the second acceptance period for other configurations).

[Configuration 5-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. The first reception period can occur when the first variation pattern starts to be executed at a first timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the first variation pattern starts to be executed, regardless of the number of judgment information stored by the reservation storage means (the number of jackpot judgments in a reserved state (reserved number)) is any numerical value, and the second reception period can occur when the second variation pattern starts to be executed at a second timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the second variation pattern starts to be executed, when the number of judgment information stored by the reservation storage means (the number of jackpot judgments in a reserved state (reserved number)) is less than a predetermined number, but when the second variation pattern starts to be executed at a number equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the second reception period does not occur even if the second timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the second variation pattern starts to be executed arrives. The "first acceptance period (displayed after the first acceptance)" and "second acceptance period (displayed after the second acceptance)" in the configuration 5-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 5-A. Therefore, they may mean the same acceptance period as the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" in other configurations, they may mean acceptance periods on the opposite sides of each other, or they may mean acceptance periods different from those acceptance periods.

With this configuration, when the player is about to stop playing and the number of reserved balls is decreasing, a type of reception period (second reception period) that had not occurred until then will occur, which will hopefully encourage the player not to stop playing, or, even if the game is stopped, will give the player the final impression that the game was fun.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 5-A" is adopted, even if the second variation pattern is started when the "number of judgment information stored by the reservation storage means (reserved number)" is less than a predetermined number, if the "number of judgment information stored by the reservation storage means (reserved number)" increases (becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined number) at a stage before the second timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the second variation pattern was started, the second acceptance period may not occur when the second timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the second variation pattern was started. In other words, even if the pattern variation (second variation pattern) is started when the number of reserved pieces is decreasing, if the number of reserved pieces is increased within the period of the pattern variation, this suggests that the player is not planning to stop playing. In this regard, according to the above configuration, even if the pattern change (second change pattern) is started when the number of reserved balls is decreasing, if the number of reserved balls is increased during the execution period of the pattern change, the second acceptance period will not occur when the second timing arrives when a predetermined time has elapsed since the second change pattern was started to be executed, so that the second acceptance period can function more appropriately as "a type of acceptance period that can only appear when you are about to stop playing."

In order to more effectively obtain such an effect, even if a second reception period occurs, if the "number of determination information stored by the reservation storage means (reservation number)" increases while the second reception period is occurring, it is more desirable to terminate the second reception period at that point.

[Configuration 6-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. The first reception period occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed state regardless of the state of the performance, and the second reception period occurs after the specific BGM is suppressed or inaudible regardless of the state of the performance. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide a performance related to the type of reception period before the reception period occurs by using the specific BGM. Note that the "first reception period (display after first reception)" and the "second reception period (display after second reception)" according to the configuration 6-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 6-A. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" according to other configurations, may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other, or may mean reception periods different from those reception periods.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 6-A" is adopted, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period, a second reception period, and a third reception period are prepared as the reception period, and the third reception period may occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, or may occur after the specific BGM is suppressed or inaudible, depending on the situation of the presentation. With this configuration, whether the reception period occurs while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, or occurs after the specific BGM is suppressed or inaudible, the reception period may be the "third reception period", so that it is expected that the player's interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition until the player's action (operation) is accepted.

The "third acceptance period (display after the third acceptance)" for the "configuration 6-A" is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 6-A. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "third acceptance period" for other configurations, or it may mean an acceptance period different from those acceptance periods (for example, the first acceptance period or the second acceptance period for other configurations).

[Configuration 7-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. In the first reception period, if reception is made within the period, a first post-reception display corresponding to the reception can be executed, and the performance symbols are displayed with priority over the first post-reception display at least while the first post-reception display is displayed. In contrast, in the second reception period, if reception is made within the period, a second post-reception display corresponding to the reception can be executed, and the performance symbols are displayed in a manner that makes them difficult to see by the second post-reception display, or are hidden, at least while the second post-reception display is displayed. In addition, the "mode in which it is difficult to see" in the configuration 7-A means "a mode in which at least a part of the performance pattern can be seen through the second post-reception display set to a predetermined transmittance to an extent corresponding to the transmittance, or a mode in which at least a part of the performance pattern is made invisible by the second post-reception display in which it overlaps, or a mode in which at least a part of the performance pattern is hidden, etc." In addition, the "first reception period (first post-reception display)" and the "second reception period (second post-reception display)" in the configuration 7-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 7-A. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" in other configurations, they may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other, or they may mean reception periods different from those reception periods.

With this configuration, it becomes possible to recognize the type of reception period by checking whether the visibility of the performance symbols has been affected by the post-reception display triggered by the player's operation. Note that "performance symbols" refer to, for example, symbols that form a reach state as a performance on the performance display device 1600, and also to symbols that are used in the performance of whether or not a reach state is formed, pseudo consecutive performances, full rotation performances, etc.

However, it has been confirmed that some players feel aversion to the worsening visibility of the performance symbols as a result of the second post-acceptance display being displayed. Therefore, as will be described later, when "Configuration 7-A" is adopted, when the second post-acceptance display is displayed in response to an acceptance within the second acceptance period, an acceptance period different from the second acceptance period is generated (for example, generated in response to an acceptance within the second acceptance period). Then, when an operation by the player is accepted within the different period, the second post-acceptance display may be made invisible in response to the acceptance, thereby making the performance symbols easier to see.

For example, if the second post-acceptance display in response to an acceptance during the second acceptance period is to be hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of its display, the player can hide the second post-acceptance display at that point by simply performing a predetermined operation before the predetermined time has elapsed. Note that the operation required of the player to display the second post-acceptance display during the second acceptance period and the operation required of the player to hide the second post-acceptance display during an acceptance period other than the second acceptance period (an acceptance period that occurs in response to an acceptance during the second acceptance period) may be the same operation or different operations. For example, during an acceptance period other than the second acceptance period (an acceptance period that occurs in response to an acceptance during the second acceptance period), the player may be required to perform operations on multiple operating means to hide the second post-acceptance display.

In contrast, the first post-reception display is also hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed since it began to be displayed (which may be the same as the predetermined time until the second post-reception display is hidden, or it may be a different time). However, for the first post-reception display that does not deteriorate the visibility of the performance symbols, it is preferable to prevent it from being hidden as a result of any operation performed by the player before the predetermined time has elapsed, in order to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when a player makes an incorrect operation contrary to his or her intention.

[Configuration 8-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. The first reception period can be generated while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, and when reception is made while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, this triggers the specific BGM to be made inaudible, and the second reception period is permitted for reception after the specific BGM that was audibly output in a non-suppressed mode is audibly output in a suppressed mode or is not audibly output, and even if the reception is made, the specific BGM is maintained in a state in which it is audibly output in a suppressed mode or is not audibly output. Note that the "first reception period (display after the first reception)" and "second reception period (display after the second reception)" according to the configuration 8-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 8-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" in other configurations, it may mean reception periods that are opposite to each other, or it may mean a reception period that is different from those reception periods.

This configuration adds interest in the timing at which the specific BGM is "audibly output in a suppressed manner or not audibly output" in relation to the occurrence of the reception period.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 8-A" is adopted, in the first reception period, all sounds that were audibly output at the time of acceptance are made inaudible (when only the specific BGM is audibly output, only the specific BGM is inaudible), and in the second reception period, all sounds that were audibly output at the time of acceptance are made inaudible (when only one sound is audibly output, only that one sound is inaudible). In other words, in this case, it is possible to provide a common presentation between the first reception period and the second reception period, such as making the specific BGM "in a state of being audibly output in a suppressed mode or in a state of not being audibly output" in connection with the occurrence of the reception period, or making all sounds that were audibly output at the time of acceptance inaudible, thereby improving the interest in the game.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 8-A" is adopted, a situation may occur during the first acceptance period in which the specific BGM is made inaudible and no sound is output (partway through the valid period) while the acceptance of operations by the player is permitted, but it is desirable to make the acceptance period continue even in such a situation. In other words, in this case, during the first acceptance period, although the specific BGM is made inaudible when an operation is accepted, if no operation is accepted for a predetermined time after the occurrence of the first acceptance period, the specific BGM is made inaudible while no operation has yet been accepted, which makes the player think that the first acceptance period has ended, strongly catching the player's interest.

When the specific BGM is made inaudible when the reception is made, a "display change in response to reception (display after the first reception)" is generated accordingly. However, when the specific BGM is made inaudible before the reception is made, it is preferable not to generate a "display change in response to reception (display after the first reception)". In other words, in this case, by confirming that the specific BGM has been made inaudible but the "display change in response to reception (display after the first reception)" has not yet occurred, it is possible to make the player aware of the possibility that the first reception period is still continuing. After the specific BGM is made inaudible, if the player's operation is accepted before the first reception period ends, this will trigger the "display change in response to reception (display after the first reception)" to occur, which will eliminate the sense of anxiety when the specific BGM is made inaudible (concern that the valid period may have ended), thereby improving the interest in the game.

[Configuration 9-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of operation means including a first operation means (first operation receiving unit) and a second operation means (second operation receiving unit) are prepared as operation means, and a plurality of types of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared as reception periods. In the specific reception period, both the reception of an operation to the first operation means and the reception of an operation to the second operation means are permitted as receptions for causing a display change corresponding to the specific reception period, and when an operation is received to the first operation means, a specific display change can be caused, and when an operation is received to the second operation means, a display change different from the specific display change can be caused without causing a specific display change, so that it is possible to provide interest in which operation means to operate. Note that the "specific reception period (specific reception post-display (specific display change))", "first operation means", and "second operation means" according to the configuration 9-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 9-A. Therefore, it may mean the same thing as the "acceptance period" or "operation means" of other configurations, or it may mean an acceptance period or operation means different from those acceptance periods.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 9-A" is adopted, when the first operating means is operated during a specific reception period, the specific reception period may be ended, but when the second operating means is operated, the specific reception period may not be ended and the remaining time may be extended. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to provide a reception period using multiple operating means with unprecedented dramatic effect, and it becomes possible to provide a variety of interesting reception periods based on such dramatic effect.

[Configuration 10-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, in the first reception period, a model image display simulating the operation receiving portion is displayed, and in the second reception period, a plurality of model image displays simulating the operation receiving portion are displayed, and the model image displays are made executable as dynamic displays depicting the movement when the operation receiving portion is moved by the operation by the player. Note that the "first reception period (display after first reception)" and the "second reception period (display after second reception)" according to the configuration 10-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 10-A. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" according to other configurations, may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other, or may mean reception periods different from those reception periods.

With this configuration, even if multiple operation receiving parts are provided that require different operations (e.g., pushing, pulling, etc.), the player can easily recognize what operation to perform, making it less likely that an operation will not be completed in time within the valid period.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 10-A" is adopted, the imitation image display may be executed as a "dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving part is moved by the player's operation" or may not be executed as a "dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving part is moved by the player's operation." In other words, in this case, even when the imitation image display is displayed, it is possible that the player can easily recognize what operation to perform, but also that it is difficult to recognize what operation to perform, and therefore it is expected that the tension until the player's operation is accepted will be appropriately maintained.

[Configuration 11-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of operation means (a plurality of operation receiving units) including a specific operation means (a specific operation receiving unit) are prepared as the operation means, and a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as the reception period. Then, in the first reception period, a model image display imitating the specific operation means and a specific image corresponding to the model image display are displayed so that "a remaining time specific display suggesting the remaining time during which the reception of operations to the specific operation means is permitted by reducing the display area of the specific image according to the passage of time" is performed, and in the second reception period, a model image display imitating the specific operation means is performed, but a specific image corresponding to the model image display is displayed so that "a remaining time specific display suggesting the remaining time during which the reception of operations to the specific operation means is permitted by reducing the display area of the specific image according to the passage of time" is not performed. In addition, the "first reception period (displayed after the first reception)" and the "second reception period (displayed after the second reception)" in the configuration 11-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 11-A. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" in other configurations, they may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other, or they may mean reception periods different from those reception periods.

With this configuration, even if an imitation image display that imitates a specific operation means is displayed, the "specific remaining time display that indicates the remaining time during which operations on the specific operation means are permitted to be accepted by reducing the display area of the specific image over time" is not necessarily displayed, so it is possible to maintain a sense of tension when the acceptance period occurs.

As will be described later, when this "Configuration 11-A" is adopted, during the second reception period, a specific image display imitating a specific operation means and a special image display imitating a different special operation means are displayed, but the above-mentioned "remaining time specific display" may not be displayed.

In other words, in this case, even though both the acceptance of operations for the specific operation means and the acceptance of operations for other operation means are permitted during the second acceptance period, the above-mentioned "specific remaining time display" is not performed. This prevents the player from becoming complacent about the fact that both the acceptance of operations for the specific operation means and the acceptance of operations for other operation means are permitted, and makes it possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension when the second acceptance period is occurring.

[Configuration 12-A]
As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment first provides, as operation means, "a first operation means having a first operation receiving part displaced by an operation by a player and a first peripheral decoration part provided on its periphery" and "a second operation means having a second operation receiving part displaced by an operation by a player and a second peripheral decoration part provided on its periphery." When the first model image display imitating the first operation means is displayed, it is possible to display a first receiving part model image imitating the first operation receiving part and a first peripheral decoration image decorating the periphery of the first receiving part model image, and when the second model image display imitating the second operation means is displayed, it is possible to display a second receiving part model image imitating the second operation receiving part and a second peripheral decoration image decorating the periphery of the second receiving part model image, and the first peripheral decoration image and the second peripheral decoration image are displayed as different images. The "first operating means" and "second operating means" in the configuration 12-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 12-A. Therefore, they may mean the same operating means as the "first operating means" and "second operating means" in other configurations, or they may mean operating means on opposite sides to each other, or they may mean operating means different from those operating means.

With this configuration, even if the operating means themselves are similar, the appearance of the first operating means can be made significantly different from that of the second operating means, which is expected to make it easier to distinguish which operating means to operate.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 12-A" is adopted, the first peripheral decorative image may be displayed as an image simulating the first peripheral decorative portion, while the second peripheral decorative image may be displayed as an image including at least a portion simulating a peripheral decorative portion different from the second peripheral decorative portion. In other words, in this case, when the "first imitation image display" having the first peripheral decorative image, which is an image simulating the first peripheral decorative portion, is displayed, it is possible to favorably recognize that a situation has been given in which the first operating means has been given an operation opportunity. In contrast, when the "second imitation image display" having the second peripheral decorative image, which is an image not simulating the second peripheral decorative portion, is displayed, it is possible to provide a situation in which an operation opportunity has been given to the second operating means, with a more dramatic effect. In this case, it is desirable to provide the "second operating means corresponding to the second simulated image display" as a member having a larger operating receiving portion (first operating receiving portion) than the "first operating means corresponding to the first simulated image display", so that even if the second peripheral decoration image, which is an image that does not mimic the second peripheral decoration portion, is displayed, it is not difficult to know which operating means to operate.

In order to provide a situation in which an operation opportunity has been given to the second operating means as a "more dramatic situation," it is desirable that the second peripheral decorative image be displayed as an image that imitates a fictitious decorative part that does not actually exist in the gaming machine. However, in order to make it easier to recognize that an operation opportunity has been given to the second operating means, a part of the second peripheral decorative image may include a part that imitates the second peripheral decorative part.

[Configuration 13-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as the operation means, a plurality of operation receiving sections including a first operation receiving section, a second operation receiving section, and a third operation receiving section are prepared, and as the reception period, a plurality of types of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared. Then, in the specific reception period, the first model image display imitating the first operation receiving section, the second model image display imitating the second operation receiving section, and the third model image display imitating the third operation receiving section are all displayed, and when an operation is received for the first operation receiving section among the plurality of operation receiving sections, at least the second model image display and the third model image display imitating the operation receiving section that has not been received among the first model image display, the second model image display, and the third model image display are made non-displayable. The "first operation receiving unit", "second operation receiving unit", "third operation receiving unit", and "specific reception period" in the configuration 13-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 13-A. Therefore, they may mean the same thing as the "operation receiving unit" and "reception period" in other configurations, or they may mean something different.

According to the above configuration, the imitation image display (second imitation image display, third imitation image display) that imitates an operation receiving part (second operation receiving part, third operation receiving part) different from the operation receiving part (first operation receiving part) that has accepted an operation is hidden, so that it becomes easy to recognize whether or not further operation is required for the operation receiving part (second operation receiving part, third operation receiving part) that has the imitation image display but has not accepted an operation but for which the operation receiving part (second operation receiving part, third operation receiving part) has not accepted an operation.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 13-A" is adopted, during the specific reception period, even though the first, second, and third model image displays are displayed, the third operation receiving section may not be enabled (not permitted) to receive operations among the first, second, and third operation receiving sections. That is, in this case, during the specific reception period, when an operation is received by the first operation receiving section, a first display change occurs, and when an operation is received by the second operation receiving section, a second display change occurs, but no operation is received by the third operation receiving section, and no display change occurs as a result of the operation. This makes it possible to maintain the presentation and tension until the operation by the player is received during the specific reception period.

[Configuration 14-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. In both cases where the first reception period occurs and where the second reception period occurs, text information is displayed in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, but the text information is displayed as different text information (for example, "Push!", "Please push", etc.) even though the same action by the player is accepted in the first reception period and the second reception period. Note that the "first reception period (display after the first reception)" and the "second reception period (display after the second reception)" in the configuration 14-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 14-A. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" in the other configurations, may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other, or may mean reception periods different from those reception periods.

In other words, the first and second reception periods require the player to perform the same action (operation mode), but the display changes (post-reception display) that occur as a result of the detection of that action are different. In this regard, with this pachinko machine 1, even when the same action (operation mode) is required of the player, the text information displayed in connection with the occurrence of a reception period is made different depending on the type of reception period (type of post-reception display). This allows the player to perform an operation (action by the player) while knowing which type of display change is likely to occur as the post-reception display, which is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

When different actions (operation modes) are requested of the player, even if the reception periods are of the same type (generating the same post-reception display), it is more desirable to make the text information displayed in connection with the occurrence of the reception period different in order to prevent operational errors by the player (see, for example, FIG. 182(c)). In the same sense, when different actions (operation modes) are requested of the player, but the reception periods are of different types (generating different post-reception displays), it is desirable to make the text information displayed in connection with the occurrence of the reception period different.

It is also possible to provide a further reception period in which the same operation (operation mode) as in the first reception period is requested and the same text information and imitation image display as in the first reception period are displayed, but when the reception is made, a post-reception display different from that in the first reception period is generated. In other words, in this case, it is not possible to fully grasp which type of post-reception display will be executed just by looking at the text information and imitation image display, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension when operating.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 14-A" is adopted, it is more desirable that, in the first acceptance period, the text information is not hidden until the state in which acceptance is permitted (valid state) ends, whereas, in the second acceptance period, the text information may be hidden while the state in which acceptance is permitted (valid state) continues. In other words, in this case, unless an operation (predetermined operation) is performed relatively soon after the second acceptance period occurs, it becomes difficult to recognize what operation (operation mode) is being requested of the player, and it becomes difficult to recognize the type of the acceptance period. This is expected to favorably avoid a situation in which the player becomes complacent with the situation in which different text information is displayed and loses all sense of tension.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 14-A" is employed, the second reception period includes a period in which text information is displayed and a period in which text information is not displayed, and different display changes may occur depending on during which of these periods the reception was made. In other words, in this case, a display change is provided that cannot be confirmed unless the state in which it is difficult to recognize what type of operation is being requested (a state in which text information is not displayed) is made, and this type of dramatic effect allows the tension to be maintained in an ideal way.

It is desirable to make the time from when the corresponding text information is displayed when the first reception period occurs until when it is hidden when no operation is performed by the player different from the time from when the corresponding text information is displayed when the second reception period occurs until when it is hidden when no operation is performed by the player.

[Configuration 15-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, in the first reception period, only one mode can be displayed as the model image display, and in the second reception period, any of the plurality of modes can be displayed as the model image display. Note that the "first reception period (display after first reception)" and the "second reception period (display after second reception)" according to the configuration 2-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 2-A. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" according to other configurations, may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other, or may mean reception periods different from those reception periods.

With this configuration, during the second reception period, a performance effect that would not be possible during the first reception period is provided, which can favorably increase the player's interest in the game until an operation (motion) by the player is detected.

In addition, for the "multiple modes of model image displays" that can be displayed during the second reception period, it is more desirable to vary the expectation of a jackpot pattern appearing depending on which of those model image displays is displayed, in order to increase interest in the game. Also, any one of the "multiple modes of model image displays" may be the same as the "one mode" that can be displayed during the first reception period. In this case, it is desirable for the "lowest expectation mode" of the "multiple modes of model image displays" to be the same as the "one mode" that can be displayed during the first reception period.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 15-A" is adopted, a third reception period may be further provided, and only one mode of the model image display may be displayed during the first reception period and the third reception period. Then, during the "second reception period" in which the model image display is displayed in one of a plurality of modes, the model image display is not made invisible until the valid state is terminated. In contrast, of the "first reception period" and "third reception period" in which the model image display is displayed in only one mode, during the "first reception period" the model image display is not made invisible until the valid state (reception period) is terminated, but during the "third reception period", the model image display that had been displayed until that point may be made invisible during the valid state (reception period) until it is terminated (while the valid state is continuing). That is, in this case, even in the "first reception period" and "third reception period" in which only one form of the model image display is displayed, the performance of whether or not the model image display will be hidden during the period is provided, so that it is possible to appropriately increase the interest in the game until the player's operation (action) is detected. Note that the model image display displayed in the first reception period and the model image display displayed in the third reception period may be the same, but they do not necessarily have to be the same, and the possibility of it being hidden may be suggested.

Also, as will be described later, when "Configuration 15-A" is employed, the third reception period includes a period during which the model image display is displayed and a period during which the model image display is not displayed, and different display changes may occur depending on during which of these periods the reception is made. In other words, in this case, a display change is provided that cannot be seen unless the user is made aware that the reception period may have ended (a state in which the model image display is not displayed), and this type of dramatic effect effectively maintains a sense of tension.

The "third acceptance period (display after the third acceptance)" for configuration 15-A is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of configuration 15-A. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "third acceptance period" for other configurations, or it may mean an acceptance period different from those acceptance periods (for example, the first acceptance period or the second acceptance period for other configurations).

[Other configurations]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when an acceptance permission state (acceptance period) in which an acceptance opportunity is granted occurs, a model image related to the acceptance target (such as a model image modeled on an operation receiving section) is displayed as an integrated model image display (see FIG. 232) integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the model image, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in playing until the post-acceptance display (display change) is executed. It is desirable to display such an integrated model image display in both the operation acceptance presentation (acceptance period) that occurs when the pattern presentation progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach, and the operation acceptance presentation (acceptance period) that occurs as a result of advance judgment in a variation pattern that does not develop into the SP reach, and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression acceptance presentation and the high expectation suppression acceptance presentation.

The "integrated model image display" in this example is as described with reference to Figures 232 to 248, or as another example or modified example thereof, so details will be omitted, but for example, a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the border decoration image. Also, multiple modes (see Figure 232) with different degrees of expectation are prepared as the "integrated model image display," and it is similarly configured to be displayed in one of these modes.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when an acceptance-permitted state (acceptance period) occurs, an acceptance-permitted sound is output to indicate that an operation acceptance has been permitted, or to suggest that an operation acceptance will be permitted, thereby making it less likely that an operation will be forgotten. Here, the "acceptance-permitted sound" refers to a sound that, when the sound starts to be output, will necessarily cause an acceptance-permitted state (acceptance period) to occur while the sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned), or is in a state where an acceptance-permitted state (acceptance period) has already occurred. In other words, the "acceptance-permitted sound" can also be said to be a sound that is not output in a situation where a performance that has no relation to the acceptance-permitted state (acceptance period) is being performed.

In addition, each acceptance permission state (each acceptance period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. That is, an acceptance permission state classified into the first type is a valid period that can occur when a high expectation fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) is selected, but cannot occur in a low expectation fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) (a valid period that occurs based on the establishment of a specific condition (selection of a specific high expectation fluctuation pattern) in a performance judgment based on the result of a jackpot judgment). In addition, an acceptance permission state of the second type is a valid period that can occur in either a high expectation fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) or a low expectation fluctuation pattern (such as a valid period that occurs as a result of a notice judgment).

The "integrated imitation image display" according to this embodiment can be displayed in both the first type and second type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period). Here, it is assumed that the first type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period) and the second type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period) occur as acceptance permission states (acceptance periods) in which an operation opportunity is given for the same operating means (e.g., operation button 410), and therefore the "integrated imitation image display" displayed in those acceptance periods is an image imitation of the same operating means (operation button 410).

However, among the multiple modes prepared as the "integrated Moji image display", the special mode with the highest expectation (for example, the mode shown in Figure 232 (d)) can only be displayed in the first type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period), and in the second type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period), it can only be displayed in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the modes shown in Figures 232 (a) to (c)). In the first type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period), a determination is made based on the result of the jackpot determination as to which of the multiple modes including the special mode (for example, Figures 232 (a) to (d)) the "integrated Moji image display" will be displayed in, and the "integrated Moji image display" is displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination. Even in the second type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period), a determination may be made as to which of multiple modes not including a special mode (e.g., Figures 232(a)-(c)) the "integrated model image" will be displayed in based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the "integrated model image display" may be displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination.

The details of the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the above configurations 1 to 15 are explained below with reference to the drawings. However, each configuration described below is merely described as the best embodiment, and does not necessarily have to be included. In other words, when it is desired to obtain further effects, it is possible to arbitrarily select and adopt only the configuration corresponding to each configuration described in the specification described below.

First, an example that embodies the above configurations 2, 3, and 5 to 8 will be described. As described above, this pachinko machine 1 provides multiple reception periods (reception performances) with different performance contents that proceed when the player is accepted (for example, conversation notice, cut-in notice, moving object notice, etc. as post-reception performances, and types of notice performances (expectation level indication performances)), and can generate reception periods (reception performances) of different types according to the results of judgments (jackpot judgments, performance judgments, etc.). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least reception period A (reception performance A) to reception period D (reception performance D) are provided as multiple reception periods (reception performances).

The characteristics of each reception period (reception performance) will be explained with reference to Figures 273 to 282. Note that each reception period described above with reference to Figures 272 through 272 may be prepared as a reception period separate from reception period A (reception performance A) through reception period D (reception performance D), or may be realized as one of reception periods A (reception performance A) through D (reception performance D).

Figure 273 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when condition A is satisfied as a result of the judgment and reception period A (reception presentation A) occurs. Figure 279 is a diagram showing an example of presentation in a fluctuation pattern in which reception period A (reception presentation A) occurs.

Now, if the start condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with no probability change or time reduction), and "variation pattern A" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern A. Then, the variation performance of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern) SZ (performance depiction according to variation pattern A, sound output of specific BGM playback, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 279(a)"), and during the execution period of the variation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "variation pattern A" itself. In the performance example shown in FIG. 279(a), a landscape depicting a mountain is displayed as the background image HG1.

In other words, when a special result is obtained in the performance judgment (such as a notice judgment) corresponding to the variation pattern A, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates the above-mentioned acceptance period A (valid period) in which "acceptance regarding post-acceptance display A" is permitted when timing tM2 arrives (when condition A is met) after a predetermined time A has elapsed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ, as shown in FIG. 273(a) ("the situation shown in FIG. 279(b)"). This acceptance period A occurs when a specific BGM is being output without being suppressed. As a result, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the acceptance period A, post-acceptance display A is performed based on the acceptance (the situation shown in FIG. 279(c)).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is configured to perform, in relation to the occurrence of such a reception period A, a Momo image display indicating the reception target (such as an operation receiving portion), a gauge image display indicating the remaining time of the reception period, a disappearance-related display that makes the Momo image display difficult to see (a state in which the Momo image display becomes difficult to see), and a post-reception display indicating the expectation level (the rate at which a jackpot pattern appears) depending on the reception. As described above, the Momo image display according to this embodiment is displayed as an "integrated Momo image display" integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display, but this is not necessarily limited to this and may be displayed separately. Also, when the Momo image display is displayed instead of the "integrated Momo image display", the gauge image display may not necessarily be displayed. The same applies to other reception periods.

More specifically, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, as shown in FIG. 273(b), when timing tM1 arrives before the occurrence of the reception period A, the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. In other words, the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed so as to span timing tM2 when the reception period A occurs. The "integrated model image display IG" is made invisible when an acceptance is made within the reception period A, or when the reception period A ends without the acceptance being made. Note that the reception period A in this example ends when timing tM3 arrives if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (see FIG. 273(h)).

In this regard, the examples shown in Figures 273(a)-(g) and 279(b) and (c) assume that a player's action (operation) is accepted at timing tM2a within acceptance period A. In other words, in this case, as shown in Figures 273(a)-(g) and 279(b) and (c), acceptance period A ends based on the acceptance of a player's action (operation) at timing tM2a, and post-acceptance display A (post-acceptance performance A) corresponding to said acceptance period A begins to be executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 279, only one mode is displayed as the post-acceptance display A corresponding to the acceptance period A. Although not shown in the figure, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the acceptance period A, based on the acceptance, the first mode (e.g., "It's your chance") with a relatively low expectation may be executed as the post-acceptance display A, or the second mode (e.g., "It's super hot") with a relatively high expectation may be executed as the post-acceptance display A.

Although details will be omitted, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reception period A shown in FIG. 273 advances the presentation in the same manner as the "first reception period" shown in FIG. 255, etc. For example, as shown in FIG. 273(b), at timing tM2a when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (when the audible output of the acceptance sound A in response to the acceptance begins), the integrated model image display IG is not only not made invisible, but is also not made difficult to see.

Here, in order to make it easier to recognize in which of the multiple modes (FIG. 232 (a) to (d)) the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period after the reception period has ended, it is desirable to set the "time during which the integrated model image display IG is displayed in an easily visible mode" after reception has been made longer. However, if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed in the same mode as it was during the reception period (in the example shown in FIG. 255, the mode shown in FIG. 263 (e1) and (e2)), even though reception has been made and the audible output of reception sound A has already started, it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the reception has been made, and as a result, there is a concern that "the player will be late in noticing the post-reception performance (here, reception sound A) that is in the execution state."

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 273(b), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when a predetermined time has passed from timing tM2a when the acceptance period A ends due to the acceptance of the player's action (operation) (when timing tM2b arrives), the display of a disappearance-related effect (disappearance-related display A corresponding to the acceptance period A) is started as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see". The "disappearance-related effect" here refers to an image (another image different from the integrated model image display IG) that is displayed for a predetermined time until the integrated model image display IG is hidden. When the display of the "disappearance-related effect" starts, the integrated model image display IG is not hidden but is visible, and the integrated model image display IG is gradually hidden as the "disappearance-related effect" is displayed.

In other words, in the performance display device 1600 in this example, the "disappearance-related display A (disappearance EF in the figure)" is displayed while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "disappearance-related display A" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

According to this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the reception is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, which suggests that the reception sound A has already been executed. As a result, even in a situation where the reception sound A has already been executed, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in playing due to not being able to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period A. In addition, even after the process for audibly outputting the reception sound A has started, the form of the integrated model image display IG can be confirmed with good visibility until it is made difficult to see (timing tM2a to tM2b), so it is expected that interest in playing will be maintained in a good condition.

In addition, during the reception period A, regardless of whether the corresponding post-reception display A is executed in a low expectation mode or a high expectation mode, the disappearance-related display A will appear in the same mode. This makes it possible for the performance display device 1600 to keep the expectation secret even in a situation where the reception sound A has started to be executed.

As shown in Figs. 273(b)-(d), in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when timing tM2c arrives during the period during which the display related to the disappearance-related display A (the mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears, the "post-acceptance display A" begins to be executed in response to the acceptance of the player's action (operation) during the acceptance period A. As described above, the post-acceptance display A may be a first mode with a relatively low expectation (e.g., "It's your chance") or a second mode with a relatively high expectation (e.g., "It's super hot").

In other words, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display A" are both displayed, "post-reception display A" begins to be executed. Also, since "post-reception display A" begins while the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the "integrated model image display IG" to the "post-reception display A" while suggesting that the reception period A has already ended (from timing tM2c onwards).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display of "Post-reception display A" starts in this way, as shown in Fig. 273(b)-(d), while the "Post-reception display A" is being displayed, first, the "integrated model image display IG" of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display A" is hidden. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "disappearance-related display A" is hidden, and the "Post-reception display A" is displayed with good visibility (illustration of the progress of these effects is omitted in Fig. 279).

In this regard, the "Post-Acceptance Display A" is displayed in one of a number of different modes with different degrees of expectation based on the acceptance of the player's action (operation). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 273(d), the "Post-Acceptance Display A" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "Integrated Model Image Display IG" and "Disappearance-Related Display A" have been hidden.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the acceptance period A occurs, the acceptance permission sound starts to be output at the timing tM1 shown in FIG. 273(f). In other words, the acceptance permission sound corresponding to the acceptance period A is audibly output across the timing tM2 at which the acceptance period A occurs, and the player's actions (operations) can be accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being audibly output.

Here, in the acceptance period A, as shown in FIG. 273(f), even if an action (operation) by the player is accepted while the acceptance allowance sound is being audibly output, the acceptance allowance sound is not terminated midway, but is output for a predetermined time. That is, as will be described later, the above-mentioned multiple acceptance periods include an acceptance period in which, if an action (operation) by the player is accepted while the acceptance allowance sound is being audibly output, the audible output state of the acceptance allowance sound is terminated midway based on the acceptance. Therefore, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted while the acceptance allowance sound is being audibly output during the acceptance period A, and a state in which the audible output of the acceptance allowance sound continues appears, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the action has been accepted, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

As shown in Figures 273(d) and 279(c), the post-reception display A in this example is displayed in a position where at least a portion of it overlaps with the decorative pattern SZ. However, in the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, the integrated model image display IG is given priority over the decorative pattern SZ, but the post-reception display A is not given priority over the decorative pattern SZ, and the decorative pattern SZ is given priority over the post-reception display A. And, as shown in Figures 273(d) and 279(d), the post-reception display A in this example is made non-displayable when a predetermined time has elapsed since its display began.

On the other hand, Figures 273(h)-(n) and "an example in which the presentation progresses from Figure 279(b) to Figure 279(d) without passing through Figure 279(c)" are intended to cover the case where no action by the player is accepted within acceptance period A.

In other words, in this case, after the reception period A occurs, the timing tM3 arrives without any action (operation) by the player being accepted (and the automatic button function not being enabled). In this regard, the performance display device 1600 at the timing tM3 (the point at which the reception period A ends and the acceptance of actions by the player is no longer permitted) does not hide the integrated model image display IG, as does the performance display device 1600 at the timing tM2a (the point at which actions by the player are accepted within the reception period A), and does not make the integrated model image display IG difficult to see (in the example of FIG. 255, the aspect shown in FIG. 263 (e3)).

With this configuration, even if the player's action is not received in time and acceptance period A ends, it is possible to recognize how the integrated model image display IG was displayed during acceptance period A after the end of the acceptance period, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Also, in the case where no action by the player is accepted during the acceptance period A, as shown in FIG. 273(j), the display of the disappearance-related effect (disappearance-related display A corresponding to the acceptance period A) will not start as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see". At this time, if the method is to fade out the integrated model image display IG itself, this may be done. However, it is preferable not to display an image different from the integrated model image display IG for a predetermined period of time until the integrated model image display IG is made invisible.

Figure 274 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when condition B is satisfied as a result of the judgment and reception period B (second reception presentation B) occurs. Figure 280 is a diagram showing an example of presentation in a variation pattern in which reception period B (reception presentation B) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with no probability change or time reduction), and "variation pattern B" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern B. Then, the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ (performance depiction according to variation pattern B, sound output of specific BGM playback, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 280(a)"), and during the execution period of the variation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "variation pattern B" itself. In the performance example shown in FIG. 280(a), a landscape depicting a river is displayed as the background image HG2.

However, in the performance related to "variation pattern B", regardless of the result of the performance judgment (preview judgment), when the timing tN2 (for example, the timing in the SP reach state) arrives after a predetermined time B has elapsed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ as shown in FIG. 274(a), the above-mentioned acceptance period B (valid period) in which "acceptance regarding the post-acceptance display B" is permitted is generated (the situation shown in FIG. 280(b)). This acceptance period B occurs after the specific BGM is output in a suppressed mode or is made inaudible. As a result, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the acceptance period B, the post-acceptance display is performed based on the acceptance. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 280(b), the above-mentioned acceptance period B occurs when the decorative pattern SZ forms a reach state.

In this regard, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) according to this embodiment, even when such a reception period B occurs, similarly to the case where the above-mentioned reception period A occurs (FIG. 273), in relation to this, the following are performed: a Momo image display suggesting the reception target (such as an operation receiving part), a gauge image display suggesting the remaining time of the reception period, a disappearance-related display that makes the Momo image display difficult to see (a state in which the Momo image display becomes difficult to see), and a post-reception display suggesting the expectation degree (the rate at which a jackpot pattern appears) in response to acceptance. The expectation degree (the rate at which a jackpot pattern appears) may include "0%" or "100%". As described above, the Momo image display is displayed as an "integrated Momo image display IG" integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display, but this is not necessarily limited to this and may be displayed separately. In addition, when the Momo image display is displayed instead of the "integrated Momo image display", the gauge image display may not necessarily be displayed. The same applies to other application periods.

More specifically, in the performance display device 1600 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 274(b), when the timing tN1 arrives before the occurrence of the reception period B, the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. That is, the "integrated Moji image display IG" is displayed so as to straddle the timing tN2 when the reception period B occurs. The "integrated Moji image display IG" is also hidden when an acceptance is made within the corresponding reception period (here, reception period B) or when the reception period B ends without the acceptance being made, as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 273 (reception period A). Note that the reception period B according to this example ends when the timing tN3 arrives if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (see FIG. 274(h)).

Here, in the above-mentioned "reception period A (see FIG. 279(b))," when the Mo image display (integrated Mo image display IG) is displayed, no corresponding text information is displayed, but in the "reception period B (see FIG. 280(b))," when the Mo image display (integrated Mo image display IG) is displayed, text information (here, "push") related to the fact that the reception is permitted is displayed. That is, in both the "reception period A" and the "reception period B," the same form (the form shown in FIG. 232(a) among the multiple forms shown in FIG. 232(a) to (d)) is used as the Mo image display (integrated Mo image display IG), but when the "reception period B" occurs, text information (here, "push") that does not appear when the "reception period A" occurs is displayed, suggesting that the degree of expectation that may be suggested as the display after reception is different. Note that in this example, the expectation (proportion) of the appearance of the jackpot pattern when the pattern stops is higher when the reception period B occurs than when the reception period A occurs. Alternatively, the post-acceptance display B corresponding to the acceptance period B may be configured to show a pattern suggesting that the probability of the jackpot pattern appearing is 100%, whereas the post-acceptance display A corresponding to the acceptance period A may not show a pattern suggesting that the probability of the jackpot pattern appearing is 100%.

In this regard, the examples shown in Figures 274(a) to (g) assume that a player's action (operation) is accepted at timing tN2a within acceptance period B. In other words, in this case, as shown in Figure 274(a), acceptance period B ends based on the acceptance of a player's action (operation) at timing tN2a, and post-acceptance display B (post-acceptance performance B) corresponding to said acceptance period B begins to be executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 280, only one mode is displayed as post-acceptance display B corresponding to acceptance period B. Although not shown in the figure, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during acceptance period B, based on the acceptance, a first mode with a relatively low expectation (e.g., "Defeat 10 monsters!") may be executed as post-acceptance display B, or a second mode with a relatively high expectation (e.g., "Defeat 100 monsters!") may be executed as post-acceptance display B.

And, although details will be omitted, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reception period B shown in FIG. 274 advances the presentation in the same manner as the "second reception period" shown in FIG. 256 etc., and for example, as shown in FIG. 274(b), at timing tN2a when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (when the audible output of the acceptance sound B in response to the acceptance starts), not only is the integrated model image display IG not made invisible, but the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see either.

Here, in order to make it easier to recognize in which of the multiple modes (FIG. 232 (a) to (d)) the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period after the end of the reception period, it is desirable to set the "time during which the integrated model image display IG is displayed in an easily visible mode" after the reception is made to be long. However, if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed in the same mode as it was during the reception period (in the example shown in FIG. 256, the mode shown in FIG. 265 (e1) and (e2)) even though the reception has been made and the audible output of the reception sound B has already started, it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the reception has been made, and as a result, there is a concern that "the player will be late in noticing the post-reception performance (here, reception sound B) that is in the execution state."

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 274(b), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when a predetermined time has passed from timing tN2a when the acceptance period B has ended due to the acceptance of the player's action (operation) (when timing tN2b arrives), the display of "disappearance-related display B" different from the disappearance-related display A is started as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see". The "disappearance-related display (disappearance-related effect)" here refers to an image (another image different from the integrated model image display IG) that is displayed for a predetermined time until the integrated model image display IG is made invisible. At the time when the display of the "disappearance-related effect" starts, the integrated model image display IG is not made invisible but is visible, and the integrated model image display IG is gradually made invisible as the "disappearance-related effect" is displayed.

In other words, in the performance display device 1600 in this example, the "disappearance-related display B" is displayed while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "disappearance-related display B" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

According to this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the reception is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, which suggests that the reception sound B has already been executed. As a result, even in a situation where the reception sound B has already been executed, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in playing the game due to the inability to recognize in which form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period B. In addition, even after the process for audibly outputting the reception sound B has started, the form of the integrated model image display IG can be confirmed with good visibility until it is made difficult to see (timing tN2a to tN2b), so it is expected that interest in playing the game will be maintained in a good condition.

Although not shown in the figures, during reception period B, different patterns (disappearance-related display B1, B2) are displayed as the disappearance-related display B depending on whether the corresponding post-reception performance B is a low-expectation pattern or a high-expectation pattern. In other words, in this case, even if the "post-reception display B" using the performance display device 1600 has not yet started, by checking whether the disappearance-related display B that appears on the performance display device 1600 is the first pattern or the second pattern, it becomes possible to guess whether the "post-reception display B" will be executed in a high-expectation pattern.

As shown in Figs. 274(b)-(d), in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when timing tN2c arrives during the period during which the display related to the disappearance-related display B (the mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears, the "post-acceptance display B" begins to be executed in response to the acceptance of the player's action (operation) during the acceptance period B. As described above, the post-acceptance display B may be a first mode with a relatively low expectation (e.g., "Knock out 10 monsters!") or a second mode with a relatively high expectation (e.g., "Knock out 100 monsters!").

In other words, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display B (disappearance-related display B1 or disappearance-related display B2)" are displayed, "post-reception display B (first or second mode)" begins to be executed. In addition, since the post-reception display B begins while the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the "integrated model image display IG" to the "post-reception display B" while suggesting that the reception period B has already ended (after timing tN2c).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display of "Post-reception display B" is started in this way, as shown in Fig. 274 (b) to (d), while the "Post-reception display B" is being displayed, first, the "integrated model image display IG" of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display B" is made invisible. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is made invisible in this way, the "disappearance-related display B" is made invisible, and thus the "Post-reception display B" is displayed with good visibility (illustration of the progress of these effects is omitted in Fig. 280).

In this regard, the "Post-Acceptance Display B" is displayed in one of a number of different modes with different degrees of expectation based on the acceptance of the player's action (operation). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 274(d), the "Post-Acceptance Display B" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "Integrated Model Image Display IG" and "Disappearance-Related Display B" have been hidden.

Incidentally, in the example presentation (Fig. 279) corresponding to the reception period A described above, even if reception is made during reception period A and "post-reception display A" is executed, the background image is not switched before and after the start of "post-reception display A" and is maintained this way. In contrast, in the example presentation (Fig. 280) corresponding to reception period B, if reception is made during reception period B and "post-reception display B" is executed, the background image may be switched before and after the start of "post-reception display B".

With this configuration, during the period when no change in the background image occurs (timings tN2a to tN2b shown in FIG. 274), even if there is some kind of display change on the performance display device 1600, it is possible to indicate that "Post-reception display B" has not yet started.

In this case, the post-acceptance display B may be configured to switch to the same background image when a low expectation mode appears and when a high expectation mode appears, or may be configured to switch to different background images when a low expectation mode appears and when a high expectation mode appears. Also, the background image may be switched when a high expectation mode appears, but may not be switched when a low expectation mode appears.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the acceptance period B occurs, the acceptance permission sound starts to be output at the timing tN1 shown in FIG. 274(f). In other words, the acceptance permission sound corresponding to the acceptance period B is audibly output across the timing tN2 at which the acceptance period B occurs, and the player's actions (operations) can be accepted while the acceptance permission sound is being audibly output.

Here, during reception period B, a long-term permissible sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively long time and a short-term permissible sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively short time are output as the reception permissible sound. In the example shown in FIG. 274(f), the long-term permissible sound and the short-term permissible sound are each started to be output at the same time, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one of the long-term permissible sound and the short-term permissible sound may be started to be output at timing tN2 when reception period B occurs or after that.

In addition, during reception period B, if an action by the player is received while the long-term permissible sound and/or the short-term permissible sound are being audibly output, the long-term permissible sound and/or the short-term permissible sound are terminated (the audible output state is terminated) based on the reception.

Also, in acceptance period B, as shown in FIG. 274(f), if an action by the player is accepted while an acceptance permissible sound (long-term permissible sound, short-term permissible sound) is being audibly output, not only is the acceptance permissible sound terminated midway, but the audible output of acceptance sound B is started based on the acceptance. In other words, in this case, unlike the case of a display change, in acceptance period B, there will be no period of conflict (overlap) between the effect performed within the acceptance period (acceptance permissible sound) and the effect performed in response to the acceptance (second acceptance sound).

As shown in FIG. 274(g), this second reception sound, like the "post-reception display B," will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display B" are hidden. Also, for the second reception sound, it is desirable to output different output sounds (modes) when a high expectation mode appears as the post-reception display B and when a low expectation mode appears. In contrast, for the first reception sound, it is desirable to output the same output sound (modes) when a high expectation mode appears as the post-reception display A and when a low expectation mode appears.

Note that during reception period B, a long-term acceptable sound and a short-term acceptable sound are output as the acceptable sound, but it is not necessary to output these two acceptable sounds, and it is also possible to output only one acceptable sound, as in reception period A.

As shown in Figures 274(d) and 280(d), the post-reception display B in this example is displayed in a position where at least a portion of it overlaps with the decorative pattern SZ. In this example, the integrated model image display IG is given priority over the decorative pattern SZ, and the post-reception display B is also given priority over the decorative pattern SZ. As shown in Figures 274(d) and 280(d), the post-reception display B in this example is made non-displayable when a predetermined time has elapsed since its display began, thereby improving the visibility of the decorative pattern SZ.

On the other hand, Figures 274 (h) to (n) assume that no action by the player is accepted within acceptance period B.

In other words, in this case, after the occurrence of acceptance period B, the timing tN3 described above will arrive without any action (operation) by the player being accepted. In this respect, acceptance period B differs from acceptance period A in that it is set as "an acceptance period for which the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled." Therefore, even if the above-mentioned timing tN3 arrives during acceptance period B without any action (operation) by the player being accepted, the same post-acceptance display B will be generated thereafter as when an action (operation) by the player has occurred during acceptance period B.

However, during the reception period B in this embodiment, even though the automatic button function described above is enabled, the performance display device 1600 at timing tN3, like the performance display device 1600 at timing tN2a (the point at which the player's action is accepted during reception period B), not only does it not hide the integrated model image display IG, but it also does not make the integrated model image display IG difficult to see, as shown in FIG. 274(i).

With this configuration, even if the player's action (operation) is not received in time and acceptance period B ends, it is possible to recognize how the integrated model image display IG was displayed during acceptance period B after the end of acceptance period B, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if no action by the player is accepted, as shown in FIG. 274(i), when timing tN3a arrives, which is a predetermined time after timing tN3, when acceptance period B ends, the display of disappearance-related display B will begin as a "mode in which integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see."

In other words, in the performance display device 1600 in this example, the "disappearance-related display B" is displayed within the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)," and at least a portion of the area in which the "disappearance-related display B" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

With this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the reception period B ends without any reception, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, thereby suggesting that the reception period B has ended. Also, even in a situation where the reception period B has already ended, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to not being able to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period B.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the appearance of the disappearance-related display B that appears when the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the acceptance period B is the same as that which would appear if the player's action (operation) had been accepted within the acceptance period B.

In this case, even if no action (operation) by the player is accepted during acceptance period B, after the acceptance period B ends, simply by checking the appearance of the "disappearance-related display B" that appears in conjunction with the integrated model image display IG being hidden, the player will be able to recognize whether post-acceptance display B was executed in a low-expectation mode or a high-expectation mode, and therefore it is possible to effectively prevent a decline in interest in the game.

After this, when timing tN3b arrives, "Post-Acceptance Display B" begins to be executed in the manner that would have appeared if the player's action (operation) had been accepted during acceptance period B (after the situation shown in FIG. 280(b) appears, the situation shown in FIG. 280(c) appears regardless of whether an operation has been performed or not).

After this, as shown in Fig. 274(i)-(k), of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance related display B", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden first. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "disappearance related display B" is hidden.

The timing at which the "disappearance-related display B" appears and the timing at which the "post-acceptance display B" starts to be executed do not have to be later than the timing tN3 at which the acceptance period B ends, but may be the timing tN3 at which the acceptance period B ends, or may be earlier than that.

Figure 275 is a time chart showing an example of the presentation content when condition C is satisfied as a result of the judgment and reception period C (reception presentation C) occurs. Figure 281 is a diagram showing an example of presentation in a variation pattern in which reception period C (reception presentation C) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with no probability change or time reduction), and "variation pattern C" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern C. Then, the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ (performance depiction according to variation pattern C, sound output of specific BGM playback, etc.) is started, and during the execution period of the variation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "third variation pattern" itself. In the performance example shown in FIG. 281(a), a desert landscape is displayed as the background image HG3.

However, in the performance related to "variation pattern C", regardless of the result of the performance judgment (notice judgment), when a timing tO2 (which may be a timing before the occurrence of the SP reach state or a timing within the SP reach state) arrives when a predetermined time C has elapsed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ, the above-mentioned acceptance period C (valid period) during which "acceptance regarding the post-acceptance display C" is permitted is generated. This acceptance period C occurs after the specific BGM is output in a suppressed mode or is made inaudible. As a result, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the acceptance period C, the post-acceptance display C is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the above-mentioned acceptance period C (valid period) may be generated as a result of the notice performance judgment.

In this regard, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) according to this embodiment, when such a reception period C occurs, a post-reception display C is performed indicating the expectation level (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) in response to the reception. However, unlike the cases when the above-mentioned reception periods A and B occur (FIGS. 273 and 274), in relation to this, no model image display indicating the reception target (such as an operation receiving section), no gauge image display indicating the remaining time of the reception period, and no disappearance-related display (a state in which the model image display becomes difficult to see) that makes it difficult to see the model image display are performed. The expectation level (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) may include "0%" or "100%".

More specifically, in the performance display device 1600 in this example, as shown in FIG. 275(b), when the acceptance period C occurs, no model image is displayed, no gauge image is displayed, and no text information encouraging an operation is displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize not only when the acceptance period C begins and when it ends, but also whether the acceptance period C even exists. Note that the acceptance period C in this example ends at timing tO3 if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (see FIG. 275(h)).

In this regard, the examples shown in Figures 275(a) to (g) assume that a movement (operation) by the player is accepted at timing tO2a within acceptance period C. That is, in this case, as shown in Figure 275(a), based on the acceptance of a movement (operation) by the player at timing tO2a, acceptance period C ends and post-acceptance display C (post-acceptance performance C) corresponding to said acceptance period C begins to be executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 281, only one mode is displayed as the post-acceptance display C corresponding to the acceptance period C. Although not shown in the figure, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the acceptance period C, based on the acceptance, a first mode with a relatively low expectation (for example, a mode with a small number of ghosts appearing in the ghost group) may be executed as the post-acceptance display C, or a second mode with a relatively high expectation (for example, a mode with a large number of ghosts appearing in the ghost group) may be executed as the post-acceptance display C.

As described above, in this acceptance period C, as shown in FIG. 275(c), no disappearance-related display is performed when an action (operation) by the player is accepted. Furthermore, when acceptance period C occurs, as shown in FIG. 275(f), no acceptance permission sound is output.

As shown in Figures 275(d) and 281(c), the post-reception display C in this example is displayed in a position where at least a portion of it overlaps with the decorative pattern SZ. However, in the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, the post-reception display C is not given priority over the decorative pattern SZ, and the decorative pattern SZ is given priority over the post-reception display C. Then, as shown in Figures 275(d) and 281(d), the post-reception display C in this example is made non-displayable when a predetermined time has elapsed since its display began.

On the other hand, Figures 275(h)-(n) and "an example in which the presentation progresses from Figure 281(b) to Figure 281(d) without passing through Figure 281(c)" are intended to cover the case where no action by the player is accepted within acceptance period C.

In this case, after the acceptance period C occurs, the timing tO3 arrives without any actions (operations) by the player being accepted (and the automatic button function is not enabled). However, since no display changes occur as the acceptance period C ends, even when the timing tO3 arrives (the point at which the acceptance period C ends and actions by the player are no longer accepted), the background image HG3 is simply flowing on the performance display device 1600, making it difficult for the player to recognize this.

Figures 276 and 277 are time charts showing an example of the presentation content when condition D is satisfied as a result of the judgment and reception period D (reception presentation D) occurs. Figure 282 is a diagram showing an example of presentation in a variation pattern in which reception period D (reception presentation D) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is established (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is not a sure-win state or a time-saving state), and "variation pattern D1 (Fig. 276)" or "variation pattern D2 (Fig. 277)" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation patterns D1 and D2. Then, the variation performance of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern) SZ (performance depiction corresponding to the variation patterns D1 and D2, sound output of specific BGM playback, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in Fig. 282 (a)"), and during the execution period of the variation performance, a performance (preview performance) corresponding to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "variation pattern D1" or "variation pattern D2" itself. In the performance example shown in Fig. 282 (a), a landscape depicting mountains and rivers is displayed as the background image HG4a.

In other words, when a special result is obtained in the performance judgment (such as a notice judgment) corresponding to the variation patterns D1 and D2, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates the above-mentioned acceptance period D (valid period) during which "acceptance of post-acceptance display D" is permitted when timing tP2 arrives (when condition D is met) at which a predetermined time D has elapsed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ, as shown in Figures 276(a) and 277(a) ("the situation shown in Figure 282(b)"). As a result, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the acceptance period D, the post-acceptance display D is performed based on the acceptance (the situation shown in Figure 282(c)).

However, more precisely, when a variation pattern D1 that generates a reach effect is selected, this acceptance period D occurs when the timing tP2-D1 arrives (when condition D1 is met) at which a predetermined time D1 has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ (a timing that arrives after the timing at which the reach state is formed) as shown in FIG. 276(a) arrives (when condition D1 is met), but when a variation pattern D2 that does not generate a reach effect is selected, this acceptance period D occurs when the timing tP2-D2 arrives (when condition D2 is met) at which a predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ arrives (when condition D2 is met) as shown in FIG. 277(a).

Furthermore, when the reception period D is generated at the timing tP2-D1 when a predetermined time D1 has elapsed since the start of the variable performance of the variable pattern D1 that generates the reach performance, as shown in FIG. 276(e), a state is generated in which the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed mode or is made inaudible before the timing tP2-D1 arrives. In other words, in this case, the reception period D occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed mode or is in an inaudible state.

In contrast, if the reception period D is generated when timing tP2-D2 arrives after a predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the variable performance of variable pattern D2 that does not generate a reach performance, the specific BGM is being audibly output in an unsuppressed mode when timing tP2-D2 arrives, as shown in FIG. 277(e). In other words, in this case, the reception period D occurs while the specific BGM is being audibly output in an unsuppressed mode.

In this way, the form of the presentation differs depending on whether the acceptance period D occurs when timing tP2-D1 arrives, which is when a predetermined time D1 has elapsed since the start of the variation presentation of variation pattern D1 that generates a reach presentation, or when timing tP2-D2 arrives, which is when a predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the variation presentation of variation pattern D2 that does not generate a reach presentation.

First, we will provide a detailed description of an example of a performance when the reception period D occurs at timing tP2 (tP2-D1) when a predetermined time D1 has elapsed since the start of the performance of the variation pattern D1 that generates the reach performance, with reference to Figures 276 and 282.

276(a) and (b), in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), in relation to the occurrence of such a reception period D, a Momo image display indicating the reception target (such as an operation receiving portion), a gauge image display indicating the remaining time of the reception period, and a post-reception display indicating the expectation level (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) depending on the reception are each performed. As described above, the Momo image display in this embodiment is displayed as an "integrated Momo image display" integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display, but this is not necessarily limited to this and may be displayed separately. Also, when the Momo image display is displayed instead of the "integrated Momo image display", the gauge image display may not necessarily be displayed. The same applies to other reception periods.

More specifically, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, as shown in FIG. 276(b), when timing tP1 arrives before the occurrence of the reception period D, the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. That is, the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed so as to span timing tP2 (tP2-D1) when the reception period D occurs. The "integrated model image display IG" is made invisible (invisible) when an acceptance is made within the reception period D, or when the reception period D ends without the acceptance being made. Note that the reception period D in this example ends when timing tP3 arrives if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (see FIG. 276(h)).

In this regard, the examples shown in Figs. 276(a)-(g) and examples following the presentation path of Fig. 282(b) → Fig. 282(e) → Fig. 282(f) → Fig. 282(c) assume that a movement (operation) by the player is accepted at timing tPx within the acceptance period D. In other words, in this case, based on the acceptance of a movement (operation) by the player at timing tPx, the acceptance period D ends and the post-acceptance display D (post-acceptance presentation D) corresponding to the acceptance period D is started to be executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 282(c), only one aspect is displayed as the post-reception display D corresponding to the reception period D. However, although not shown, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the reception period D, a first aspect with a relatively low expectation (for example, a cut-in by a princess character) may be executed as the post-reception display D based on the acceptance, or a second aspect with a relatively high expectation (for example, a cut-in by a samurai character) may be executed as the post-reception display D.

However, during acceptance period D, as shown in FIG. 276(b), at the time when the player's action (operation) is accepted (here, timing tPx), the integrated model image display IG is not made invisible, nor is the integrated model image display IG made difficult to see.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 276(c), during reception period D, the disappearance-related effect is not displayed even after a predetermined time has passed since the timing tPx at which reception period D ended due to the acceptance of the player's action (operation). In other words, during reception period D, no corresponding disappearance-related display (an image (a different image from the integrated model image display IG) that is displayed for a predetermined time until the integrated model image display IG is hidden) is prepared, and the integrated model image display IG is suddenly hidden.

In addition, as shown in Figs. 276(b) to (d), during reception period D, when timing tPx1 arrives while the integrated model image display IG is being displayed, the "post-reception display D" begins to be executed in response to the player's action (operation) being accepted during reception period D.

However, during the reception period D, when an action (operation) by the player is received, as shown in FIG. 282(c), the "post-reception display D" begins to be displayed in a manner that overlaps with the entire area in which the integrated model image display IG is displayed, and in a manner that prioritizes display over the integrated model image display IG. The "post-reception display D" may be displayed on the entire screen of the performance display device 1600.

With this configuration, when the "post-acceptance display D" starts to be displayed based on the acceptance of an action (operation) by the player, the integrated model image display IG is suddenly hidden (even if it remains displayed on the layer), providing a different presentation from other acceptance periods that use a vanishing effect, etc. Note that the post-acceptance display D in this example is also hidden when a predetermined time has passed since its display started.

In addition, unlike other reception periods, during reception period D, even if the display of the "Post-reception display D" is started based on the fact that reception has been made, the fact that reception has been made does not cause the processing of the display of the "Integrated model image display IG" to end. In other words, during reception period D, the processing of the display of the "Integrated model image display IG" is continued until a specific predetermined condition is met (here, timing tP3), and is terminated when the specific predetermined condition is met. Note that, if the player's action (operation) has not been accepted and the reception period D is continuing until the specific predetermined condition is met, in addition to terminating the processing of the display of the "Integrated model image display IG", the processing of terminating reception period D is also performed.

In other words, during reception period D, when "post-reception display D" starts to be displayed based on reception, the period D ends based on the reception, but the process for displaying the "integrated model image display IG" does not end, and the display on the layer continues. However, since the "post-reception display D" is displayed with priority over the "integrated model image display IG", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden (made invisible) by the "post-reception display D" as described above (in Figures 276 and 277, the period covered with diagonal lines corresponds to the period during which the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is hidden (made invisible) by the "post-reception display D").

In this case, the "integrated model image display IG" may not be completely hidden, but may be made difficult to see through a specified transparency set in the "post-reception display D."

In addition, during the reception period D, as shown in Fig. 276(b) and Fig. 282(b), (e), and (f), while the state in which the acceptance of the player's actions (operations) is permitted continues, the "integrated model image display IG" may change from a displayed state to a hidden state (timing tP2a shown in Fig. 276 and Fig. 277), or the "integrated model image display IG" may change from a hidden state to a displayed state (timing tP2b shown in Fig. 276 and Fig. 277). Of course, even if the "integrated model image display IG" is in a hidden state, if the player performs an action (operation), the action (operation) will be accepted, and the post-acceptance display D will be performed based on the acceptance (see an example following the presentation path from Fig. 282(e) to Fig. 282(c)).

In this example, if an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period D, the same form (Fig. 282(c)) is made to appear as the "post-acceptance display D" regardless of whether the action was accepted before the "integrated model image display IG" was made non-displayable (Fig. 282(b) → Fig. 282(c)), or whether the action was accepted while the "integrated model image display IG" was in a non-displayable state (Fig. 282(e) → Fig. 282(c)), or whether the action was accepted after the "integrated model image display IG" was returned to a displayable state (Fig. 282(f) → Fig. 282(c)).

With this configuration, in the situation shown in FIG. 282(e), even though reception period D is occurring, it is possible to provide an atmosphere as if it has suddenly switched to reception period C (see FIG. 281(b)) in which the "integrated model image display IG" is not displayed, and this surprising presentation can increase interest in the game. On the other hand, even if a player's action (operation) is accepted in a situation that seems to have suddenly switched to reception period C (when the integrated model image display IG is not displayed), the same form (FIG. 282(c)) is displayed as the "post-reception display D" corresponding to reception period D, so it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Moreover, in this example, during reception period D, when the "integrated model image display IG" changes from a displayed state to a hidden state, the background image is changed. This configuration is expected to more appropriately create an atmosphere that gives the impression of a sudden switch to another reception period when the "integrated model image display IG" changes to a hidden state.

In particular, in this example, the background image changes from "background image HG4a," which depicts mountains and rivers, to "background image HG4b," which depicts a desert different from "background image HG3" (Fig. 282(b) -> Fig. 282(e)). With this configuration, when the "integrated model image display IG" changes to a non-display state, it is expected to more appropriately create an atmosphere of a sudden switch to reception period C, which can occur when the background is a desert.

In this example, when the "integrated model image display IG" is returned from a non-display state to a display state, the background image is also changed from "background image HG4b" back to "background image HG4a" (Fig. 282(e) -> Fig. 282(f)). This is expected to more appropriately create an atmosphere of being returned to the initial reception period D from another reception period (particularly reception period C).

As shown in FIG. 282(c), the post-acceptance display D in this example is displayed at a position where at least a part of it overlaps with the decorative pattern SZ (it may be displayed on the entire screen)). In this example, the integrated model image display IG is given priority over the decorative pattern SZ, and the post-acceptance display D is also given priority over the decorative pattern SZ. As shown in FIG. 276(d) and FIG. 282(d), the post-acceptance display D in this example is made invisible when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of its display, thereby improving the visibility of the decorative pattern SZ. The situation shown in FIG. 282(d) shows a situation in which the presentation due to the reach state progresses and enters the SP reach presentation.

However, if the post-reception display D is displayed with priority over the decorative pattern SZ, there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease because the player will not be able to see the effects of the decorative pattern SZ (such as a winning state) until the display time of the post-reception display D has elapsed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period when the "post-acceptance display D" is displayed, the acceptance of an action (operation) by the player is permitted, and when the action is accepted, the processing related to the display of the "post-acceptance display D" is terminated (see an example of a presentation path such as FIG. 282(c)→FIG. 282(g)). In other words, in this case, depending on the operation of the player, the timing for the end of the display of the "post-acceptance display D" can be made to arrive early (before the display time as the post-acceptance display D has elapsed) (FIG. 282(g)), and this prevents a decrease in interest in the game caused by the inability to see the presentation of the decorative pattern SZ (such as a reach state) due to the "post-acceptance display D".

In this example, the operation required to start displaying the "Post-Acceptance Display D" during the acceptance period D (pressing the operation button 410) and the operation required to end the "Post-Acceptance Display D" early during the period in which the "Post-Acceptance Display D" is displayed (pressing the operation button 410) are set to be the same operation, but these operation contents may be different from each other. For example, the operation required to start displaying the "Post-Acceptance Display D" may be "pressing the operation button 410", while the operation required to end the "Post-Acceptance Display D" may be "unsheathing the sword decoration 5001", or may be a combination of "pressing the operation button 410" and "unsheathing the sword decoration 5001".

In any case, during the period when the "post-reception display D" is displayed, it is desirable to clearly indicate what operation is required to end the "post-reception display D" by displaying "text information (cancelable in the figure)" or "replica image display", as shown in FIG. 282(c). In this case, it is desirable to display the "replica image display" in a position where it overlaps with the "post-reception display D" as a priority over the "post-reception display D" (in the figure, the replica image display is displayed in a position where it does not overlap with the "post-reception display D"). Also, the "text information" may not be prepared as a separate image from the "post-reception display D", but may be displayed as part of the display of the "post-reception display D" itself (an image on the same layer).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when acceptance period D occurs, as shown in FIG. 276(f), the acceptance permission sound is not audibly output, and in this respect, too, a performance that is common to "acceptance period C" is provided, which also makes the player aware of "acceptance period C". Even when the "integrated model image display IG" is made invisible or returned to a displayed state, the acceptance permission sound is not audibly output.

On the other hand, the examples shown in Figures 276 (h) to (n) and examples following presentation paths such as Figures 282 (b), (e), (f), (g), and (d) are intended to cover the case where the player's action (operation) is not accepted within acceptance period D.

In other words, in this case, after the acceptance period D occurs, the player's action (operation) is not accepted (and the automatic button function is not enabled), and the above-mentioned "predetermined specific condition (here, the arrival of timing tP3)" is met. In this regard, the performance display device 1600 at timing tP3 (the point at which the acceptance period D ends and acceptance of actions by the player is no longer permitted) does not hide the integrated model image display IG, just like the performance display device 1600 at timing tPx (the point at which an action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period D), and does not make the integrated model image display IG difficult to see.

With this configuration, even if the player's action (operation) is not received in time and the acceptance period D ends, it is possible to recognize how the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period D after the period has ended, which makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, during acceptance period D, if no action (operation) by the player is accepted, as shown in FIG. 276(j), the display of the disappearance-related effects will not start, as it will be "a mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see." At this time, if the method is to fade out the integrated model image display IG itself, this may be done. However, it is preferable not to display an image different from the integrated model image display IG for a specified period of time until the integrated model image display IG is made invisible.

Next, a detailed description will be given with reference to Fig. 277 and Fig. 282 of an example of a performance in which the reception period D occurs when the timing tP2 (tP2-D2) arrives after a predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the performance of the variation pattern D2 that does not generate a reach performance. Note that Fig. 282 assumes a case in which the reception period D occurs after the formation of a reach state, and does not correspond to the occurrence of the reception period D shown in Fig. 277. However, even in the reception period D shown in Fig. 277, the only difference between the performance contents shown in Fig. 282 is that the reception period D occurs without the formation of a reach state, and that the SP reach performance does not start after the end of the reception period D. Since the rest of the differences are basically the same, the explanation will be given with reference to Fig. 282 for the sake of convenience.

When the timing tP2 (tP2-D2) arrives after a predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the variable performance of the variable pattern D2 that does not generate a reach performance, the reception period D is the same reception period as the reception period D described above, so the processing content performed when the reception is made and the processing content performed when the reception is not made are the same as the processing content described above unless otherwise stated.

However, as described above, when the reception period D is generated at the timing tP2-D1 when a predetermined time D1 has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation performance of the fluctuation pattern D1 that generates a reach performance, a state is generated in which the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed mode or made inaudible before the arrival of the timing tP2-D1, as shown in FIG. 276(e). In contrast, when the reception period D is generated at the timing tP2-D2 when a predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation performance of the fluctuation pattern D2 that does not generate a reach performance, a state in which the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed mode or made inaudible is not generated before the arrival of the timing tP2-D2, as shown in FIG. 277(e).

Therefore, if the reception period D is to be generated at the timing tP2-D2 when a predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the variable performance of the variable pattern D2 that does not generate a reach performance, the reception period D will be generated while the specific BGM is being audibly output in an unsuppressed manner, as shown in FIG. 277(e).

However, if the reception period D is generated at the timing tP2 (tP2-D2) when a predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the variable performance of the variable pattern D2 that does not generate a reach performance, while the reception period D is generated, the specific BGM that was audibly output in a non-suppressed mode until then is made audibly output in a suppressed mode or made inaudible.

With this configuration, it appears as if the above-mentioned reception period A (see FIG. 273) has occurred while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, but then the atmosphere changes to one as if the above-mentioned reception period B (see FIG. 274) has occurred, during which the player's actions (operations) can be accepted while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a suppressed mode or in an inaudible state, thereby improving interest in the game.

In order to more effectively obtain such an effect, it is desirable to make it possible for a post-acceptance display to be displayed when acceptance is made during acceptance period B in a manner that suggests a high degree of expectation (e.g., a 100% probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) that would not appear when acceptance is made during acceptance period A.

As described above, in the reception period D according to this embodiment, when the timing tP2a arrives after a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the reception period D, the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is hidden. However, the timing tPy at which the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed manner or made inaudible is set to arrive before the timing tP2a at which the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is hidden.

If such a configuration is further provided, the specific BGM will be audibly output in a suppressed manner or made inaudible while the mock image display (integrated mock image display IG) is displayed, which is expected to more suitably change the atmosphere to one as if the above-mentioned reception period B (see FIG. 274) is occurring.

On the other hand, while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a suppressed manner or is inaudible, a time tP2a arrives at which the mock image display (integrated mock image display IG) is made invisible, and at this time tP2a, it becomes possible to more appropriately provide an atmosphere as if the above-mentioned reception period C (see FIG. 275) had occurred.

As described above, in the reception period D in this example, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the model image display (integrated model image display IG) was hidden and timing tP2b arrives, the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is displayed again (see FIG. 282(f)). However, even after the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is displayed again in this way, the specific BGM continues to be "in an audible state in a suppressed manner or in an inaudible state."

Figures 277 (a) to (g) assume that during the reception period D described above, an action (operation) by the player is received when the specific BGM is in a state where it is "audibly output in a suppressed mode or is in an inaudible state."

As shown in Fig. 277(a)-(g), in reception period D, as in reception period B, as shown in Fig. 277(a), (b), and (e), even if an action (operation) by the player is accepted when specific BGM is in "a state in which it is audibly output in a suppressed mode or in an inaudible state", this will not trigger the specific BGM to start being audibly output in an unsuppressed mode, but will maintain the "state in which it is audibly output in a suppressed mode or in an inaudible state". This also makes it possible to more appropriately provide an atmosphere as if reception period B (see Fig. 274) were occurring.

Figures 277 (a') to (g') assume that during the reception period D described above, before the timing tPy arrives at which the specific BGM is "audibly output in a suppressed mode or is inaudible", that is, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode.

As shown in FIG. 277(a')-(g'), during the reception period D, when the player's action (operation) is accepted while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, the acceptance is used as a trigger to make the specific BGM "in a state where it is audibly output in a suppressed mode or in a non-audible state". In other words, in this case, when the acceptance is made while the specific BGM is "in a state where it is audibly output in a suppressed mode or in a non-audible state", the acceptance is not used as a trigger to make the specific BGM "in a state where it is audibly output in a suppressed mode or in a non-audible state", but when the acceptance is made while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, the acceptance is used as a trigger to make the specific BGM "in a state where it is audibly output in a suppressed mode or in a non-audible state". This makes it possible to encourage the player to perform an operation at an early stage after the reception period D occurs when the specific BGM can be affected by the player's action (operation), and it is possible to appropriately maintain the sense of tension when the reception period D occurs.

As mentioned above, in the reception period D in this example, the process of displaying the "model image display corresponding to reception period D (integrated model image display IG shown in FIG. 282(b))" is not terminated when reception is made. In other words, the "post-reception display D" is given priority over the model image display (integrated model image display IG) that is maintained in a displayed state on the layer, thereby making the "model image display corresponding to reception period D (integrated model image display IG)" invisible (invisible).

As mentioned above, the "post-acceptance display D" in this example allows the player to make actions (operations) during its display period, and when such an action is accepted, this is used as a trigger to terminate processing related to the display of the "post-acceptance display D" early (see an example that follows the presentation path of FIG. 282(c) → FIG. 282(g)). In addition, when the "model image display (integrated model image display IG shown in FIG. 282(c))" and text information (which can be cancelled) corresponding to the post-acceptance display D are accepted, this is used as a trigger to terminate processing related to their display (see FIG. 282(g)).

In this configuration, depending on the timing of the acceptance of the player's action (operation) during the period in which the "post-acceptance display D" is displayed, a situation may occur in which the processing related to the display of the "model image display corresponding to the acceptance period D (integrated model image display IG)" is continuing, and the processing related to the display of the "post-acceptance display D" is terminated early. In other words, in this case, as a result of the display of the "post-acceptance display D" that was displayed with priority over the "model image display corresponding to the acceptance period D (integrated model image display IG shown in FIG. 282(b))", the "model image display corresponding to the acceptance period D" is displayed again, but at this time, the "acceptance period D" itself may also be generated again.

In this way, if the "acceptance period D" is generated again after the processing related to the display of the "post-acceptance display D" is ended early, it is possible to display the "post-acceptance display D" again by making it possible to accept actions (operations) by the player again within the "acceptance period D" that is thus generated again, even after the processing related to the display of the "post-acceptance display D" has been ended early. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when the "post-acceptance display D" is ended early by mistake.

As described above, the reception periods A to D shown in Figures 273 to 282 occur when the variation patterns A to C, D1, and D2 are selected as the variation pattern and a predetermined time A to D has elapsed since the pattern variation started. However, the reception periods A to D do not have to occur only when different variation patterns are selected. For example, as described below, it is also possible to set the reception periods A to D to occur when one variation pattern is selected.

As mentioned above, reception period D occurs as a reception period with special characteristics compared to the other reception periods A to C. Therefore, such reception period D may be set as a reception period that can only occur when the number of reserved balls is less than a predetermined number. In other words, in this case, reception period D occurs when the number of reserved balls falls below a predetermined number as a result of the player attempting to suspend play, and a special performance is provided as if the reception period is changing to one of A to C each time, which can be expected to encourage the player not to stop playing, or to leave the player with the final impression that the game was interesting even if the game is suspended.

Figures 278(a) and (b) are tables showing example settings for the conditions under which the above-mentioned reception periods A to D occur when these effects are realized.

First, FIG. 278(a) is a table that is referenced when the reserved number is any of "2" to "4" when the reserved number is consumed. In other words, in this case, even if the pattern change starts according to the reserved number being consumed, the reserved number will not become "0", but will be any of "1" to "3", and since the risk of the game being stopped is low, the above-mentioned acceptance period D will not occur regardless of whether the "first variation pattern", "second variation pattern", or "third variation pattern" is executed as the variation pattern.

More specifically, when the number of reserved items is between "2" and "4" and the reserved items are consumed and the first variation pattern is executed, there is a 70% chance that none of the reception periods A to D will occur as a result of the performance judgment (preview judgment), and there is a 30% chance that only reception period A will occur out of reception periods A to D as a result of the performance judgment (preview judgment).

In addition, when the number of reserved items is between "2" and "4" and the reserved items are consumed and the second variation pattern is executed, as a result of the performance judgment (advance notice judgment), there is a 50% chance that only reception period C out of reception periods A to D will occur, and as a result of the performance judgment (advance notice judgment), there is a 50% chance that both reception periods A and C will occur.

In addition, when the number of reserved items is between "2" and "4" and the reserved items are consumed and the third variation pattern is executed, reception periods B and C will occur 10% of the time as a result of the performance judgment (advance notice judgment), and reception periods A, B and C will occur 90% of the time as a result of the performance judgment (advance notice judgment).

Note that acceptance period A can occur when 5 seconds have passed since the start of fluctuation, regardless of whether "first fluctuation pattern," "second fluctuation pattern," or "third fluctuation pattern," which have different fluctuation times, are selected; acceptance period C can occur when 15 seconds have passed since the start of fluctuation, regardless of whether "second fluctuation pattern" or "third fluctuation pattern" is selected; and acceptance period B can occur when 35 seconds have passed since the start of fluctuation when "third fluctuation pattern" is selected.

Furthermore, acceptance periods B and C are not subject to performance judgment (advance notice judgment) and always occur when the corresponding variation pattern is selected, but acceptance period A is subject to performance judgment (advance notice judgment) and can only occur when a special result is obtained in the performance judgment. However, acceptance periods B and C may be subject to performance judgment (advance notice judgment), and acceptance period A may not be subject to performance judgment (advance notice judgment).

Next, FIG. 278(b) is a table that is referenced when the reserved number is "1" when the reserved number is consumed. In other words, in this case, when the pattern change corresponding to the reserved number consumption starts, the reserved number becomes "0", and there is a risk that the game will be stopped if no new reserved number is added within the execution period of the pattern change, so the above-mentioned acceptance period D is generated regardless of the execution of all the variation patterns including the "first variation pattern", "second variation pattern", and "third variation pattern" that are selectable as the variation pattern.

More specifically, when the number of reserved items is "1" and the reserved items are consumed and the first variation pattern is executed, as a result of the performance judgment (advance notice judgment), out of reception periods A to D, only reception period D will occur 70% of the time, and as a result of the performance judgment (advance notice judgment), both reception periods A and D will occur 30% of the time.

In addition, when the number of reserved items is "1" and the reserved items are consumed and the second variation pattern is executed, reception periods C and D will occur with a 50% probability as a result of the performance judgment (advance notice judgment), and reception periods A, C, and D will occur with a 50% probability as a result of the performance judgment (advance notice judgment).

In addition, when the number of reserved items is "1" and the reserved items are consumed and the third variation pattern is executed, reception period B, reception period C, and reception period D will occur with a probability of 10% as a result of the performance judgment (preview judgment), and reception period A, reception period B, reception period C, and reception period D will occur with a probability of 90% as a result of the performance judgment (preview judgment).

In this embodiment, the "first fluctuation pattern" is a fluctuation pattern that does not create a reach state, and the "second fluctuation pattern" and "third fluctuation pattern" are set as fluctuation patterns that create a reach state. Therefore, when the "first fluctuation pattern" is selected, the reception period D occurs in the manner described with reference to FIG. 277. In contrast, when the "second fluctuation pattern" or the "third fluctuation pattern" is selected, the reception period D occurs in the manner described with reference to FIG. 276.

In addition, acceptance period A, acceptance period B, and acceptance period C can occur when a predetermined time (5 seconds, 35 seconds, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the pattern change started, regardless of the type of change pattern or the number of reserved times, whereas acceptance period D has a different time (10 seconds, 30 seconds, 50 seconds) from the start of the pattern change until it occurs, depending on whether the first change pattern, the second change pattern, or the third change pattern is selected.

In other words, in this case, it is possible to generate the reception period D for each type of fluctuation pattern at a timing that does not interfere with the performance content, so that the reception period D can be generated appropriately for all fluctuation patterns.

In the above-mentioned performance example, a plurality of reception periods including reception period A (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 2-A") and reception period B (corresponding to the second reception period of "Configuration 2-A") are prepared as reception periods. In this regard, in reception period A, only one mode (integrated model image display IGa shown in FIG. 232(a)) can be displayed as the model image display (here, integrated model image display IG), and in reception period B, a plurality of modes (integrated model image displays IGa to IGd shown in FIG. 232(a) to (d)) are prepared as the model image display, and among those modes, "modes according to the results of performance judgment (preview judgment)" are selectively displayed. According to such a configuration, in reception period B, a performance that cannot appear when reception period A occurs is provided, so that it is possible to appropriately increase the interest in the game until the operation (motion) by the player is detected.

In addition, for the "multiple modes of model image displays" that can be displayed during reception period B, it is more desirable to vary the expectation of a jackpot pattern appearing depending on which of those model image displays is displayed, in order to increase interest in the game. Also, any one of the "multiple modes of model image displays" may be the same as the "one mode" that can be displayed during reception period A. In this case, it is desirable for the "lowest expectation mode" of the "multiple modes of model image displays" to be the same as the "one mode" that can be displayed during reception period A.

In the above-mentioned performance example, further, reception period D (corresponding to the third reception period of "Configuration 2-A") is provided, and in reception period A and reception period D, only one mode of the model image display can be displayed. Then, in "reception period B" where the model image display is displayed in one of multiple modes, the model image display is not made invisible until the valid state is terminated. In contrast, of "reception period A" and "reception period B" where the model image display is displayed in only one mode, in "reception period A", the model image display is not made invisible until the valid state (reception period) is terminated, but in "reception period B", the model image display that had been displayed until that point is made invisible during the valid state (reception period) until it is terminated (while the valid state is continuing) (see FIG. 282 (e)). In other words, in this case, even during "reception period A" and "reception period D" in which only one form of the replica image display is displayed, the presentation of whether or not the replica image display is hidden during the period is provided, so that the player's interest in the game can be appropriately increased until an operation (motion) by the player is detected.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, during reception period D, the same display change (post-reception display) occurs whether the reception is made during the period when the model image display is displayed or during the period when the model image display is not displayed (presentation progress shown in Fig. 282(b)→(c), Fig. 282(e)→(c)). In other words, in this case, even after the model image display is hidden, the valid state (reception period) itself continues unchanged, so when creating presentation features (hiding the model image display) using the "reception period D", it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the presentation, the model image display is made to disappear during reception period D, and then displayed again. In other words, in this case, even if the player mistakenly believes that reception period D has ended when it has not, the model image display will be displayed again afterwards, thereby clearing up the misunderstanding.

In the above-mentioned production example, "reception period A" and "reception period D" are common in that only one form of mock image display can be displayed, but the content of the display change that appears when the entry is accepted is different for each period. This adds to the excitement of wondering what kind of display change will occur when the entry is accepted.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, during "reception period D", the operation means (here, operation button 410) that is the subject of the reception may be illuminated while the model image display is displayed, thereby encouraging the player to take action (operate). In this case, during the period during "reception period D" when the model image display is not displayed, the operation means (here, operation button 410) that is the subject of the reception may be illuminated in the same manner as during the period when the model image display is displayed. In this regard, by not illuminating the operation means (here, operation button 410) that is the subject of the reception during "reception period C", it becomes possible to suggest which type of reception period is occurring.

In the above-mentioned example of the performance, first, a plurality of reception periods including reception period A or reception period B (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 3-A") and reception period C (corresponding to the second reception period of "Configuration 3-A") are prepared as reception periods. Then, in reception period A or reception period B, after the model image display (here, integrated model image display IG) is displayed when the reception period A or reception period B occurs, the model image display is not hidden until the reception period A or reception period B ends, and the player's actions can be accepted while the model image display is displayed (see Figures 273, 274, 279, 280, etc.), and in reception period C, the player's actions (operations) can be accepted while the model image display is not displayed (see Figures 275, 281, etc.), and the above-mentioned "reception allowable sound" is audibly output when reception period A or reception period B occurs, but is not audibly output when reception period C occurs.

With this configuration, not only is there an "acceptance period A or B" in which the acceptance is made while the acceptance permission sound is audibly output and the imitation image display is displayed, but there is also an "acceptance period C" in which the acceptance is made without the acceptance permission sound being audibly output and the imitation image display being displayed. This makes it possible for the player to be aware of the possibility that a post-acceptance display may occur at various times that the player does not intend, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned presentation example, a reception period D (corresponding to the third reception period of "Configuration 3-A") is further provided, and in reception period C (Figs. 275, 281), the model image display is not displayed from the time the reception period C begins until it ends, and the player's actions (operations) can be accepted while the model image display is not displayed. However, in reception period D (Figs. 276, 277, 282), the model image display is hidden for only a part of the reception period D, and the player's actions (operations) can be accepted both during the period when the model image display is displayed and during the period when the model image display is hidden. In other words, in this case, reception period D has both the aspects of reception periods A and B (acceptance while the model image display is displayed) and the aspect of reception period C (acceptance while the model image display is not displayed), which can increase the interest in playing the game. In addition, since there is a possibility that the state in which the player's actions (operations) are accepted may continue even after the model image display is made non-displayed, it is expected that the decrease in interest in the game that occurs when the model image display is made non-displayed without the player's actions (operations) being accepted will be suppressed.

The acceptable reception sound is audibly output when acceptance periods A and B occur, but is not audibly output when acceptance periods C and D occur. In other words, in this case, at the timing when acceptance period D occurs, acceptance period D has both the aspects of acceptance periods A and B (the model image display is displayed) and the aspect of acceptance period C (the acceptable reception sound is not output), which can increase interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, during reception period D, the same display change (post-reception display) occurs whether the reception is made during the period when the model image display is displayed or during the period when the model image display is not displayed. In other words, in this case, even after the model image display is hidden, the valid state (reception period) itself continues unchanged, so when creating presentation features (hiding the model image display) using the "reception period D," it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Also, in the above-mentioned example presentation, the background image that appears when reception period A or reception period B occurs (Fig. 279, Fig. 280) is different from the background image that appears when reception period C occurs (Fig. 281). This makes it possible to give the impression that "the background image differs depending on the type of reception period."

In this regard, in the above-mentioned presentation example, a change occurs in the background image during reception period D, and a transition occurs from a period in which the model image display is displayed to a period in which the model image display is not displayed at the same time as the change occurs, making it possible to provide a presentation that gives the impression of a transition to a different reception period within reception period D.

Furthermore, during reception period D, the background image that has changed is returned to its original state, and at the same time as the image is returned to its original state, the period in which the mock image display is not displayed is transitioned to the period in which the mock image display is displayed, making it possible to provide a performance that gives the impression that the reception period before the transition has been resumed during reception period D.

The background image changes within the reception period D when a predetermined time has passed since the occurrence of the period D without the player's action (operation) being accepted. If the player's action (operation) is accepted before the predetermined time has passed, the background image will not change even if the predetermined time has passed since the occurrence of the period D. This makes it possible to avoid the background image changing to a different image while the post-acceptance display corresponding to the reception period D is being executed, and makes it possible to maintain interest in the game in an optimal manner.

In the above-mentioned example of the presentation, in reception periods A, B and D, if a reception is made while the model image display is displayed, the model image display is hidden. In this case, in reception periods A and B, the "disappearing EF" is displayed as an image different from the model image display in accordance with the non-display of the model image display, but in reception period D, the "disappearing EF" is not displayed as an image different from the model image display in accordance with the non-display of the model image display. In other words, in this case, if the "disappearing EF" does not appear when a reception is made, it becomes possible to recognize the possibility that the "reception period D" has occurred, so while allowing reception period D to have the aspects of reception periods A and B, it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a complete inability to understand which reception period is occurring.

In the above-mentioned performance example, first, a plurality of reception periods are prepared, including reception period A or reception period B (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 5-A") and reception period D (corresponding to the second reception period of "Configuration 5-A"). Then, reception period A or reception period B can occur when the third fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 278 (corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern of "Configuration 5-A") starts to be executed, regardless of the number of judgment information stored by the pending storage means (the number of jackpot judgments in a pending state (the number of pendings)), and a predetermined time has elapsed since the third fluctuation pattern started to be executed (in FIG. 278, in the case of reception period A, this is the time when 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, and in the case of reception period B, this is the time when 35 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fluctuation). And reception period D can occur when the number of judgment information stored by the pending storage means (the number of jackpot judgments in a pending state (the number of pendings)) starts to be executed, and ) is less than "2" (i.e. "1"), and when this is consumed and the number of reserved items is "0", and the second fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 278 (corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern of "Configuration 5-A") is started, this can occur when a predetermined time has elapsed since the second fluctuation pattern started to be executed (in FIG. 278(b), this is the timing when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fluctuation). However, when the number of judgment information stored by the reserved storage means is "2" or more, and the second fluctuation pattern is started to be executed, this will not occur even if the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the second fluctuation pattern started to be executed arrives (see FIG. 278(a)).

With this configuration, when a player tries to stop playing and the reserved number is exhausted as a result, a type of acceptance period (acceptance period D) that had not occurred until then will occur, which can be expected to encourage the player not to stop playing, or to give the player the final impression that the game was interesting, even if the game is stopped.

In the above-mentioned example of the performance, even if the "number of judgment information stored by the hold storage means (hold number)" is less than "2" (i.e. "1") and this is consumed and the hold number is set to "0" when the second fluctuation pattern is started to be executed, if the "number of judgment information stored by the hold storage means (hold number)" increases (when the hold number goes from "0" to "1" or more) before the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the second fluctuation pattern was started to be executed (in FIG. 278(b) the timing when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fluctuation) has arrived, the acceptance period D may not be generated when the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the second fluctuation pattern was started to be executed arrives.

In other words, even if the reserved number is "1" and is consumed to "0" when the pattern change (second change pattern) is started, if the reserved number is increased during the execution period of the pattern change, this suggests that the game is not being stopped. In this regard, according to the above configuration, even if the reserved number is "0" when the pattern change (second change pattern) is started, if the reserved number is increased during the execution period of the pattern change, the acceptance period D is not generated even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the second change pattern was started (in FIG. 278(b), 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the change), so that the acceptance period D can function more appropriately as a "type of acceptance period that can only appear when the game is being stopped".

To more effectively obtain such an effect, even if an acceptance period D occurs, if the "number of determination information stored by the reservation storage means (reservation number)" increases while the acceptance period D is occurring, it is more desirable to end the acceptance period D (end the state in which acceptance is permitted) at that point in time.

Furthermore, even if an acceptance is made within the acceptance period D and a post-acceptance display is being executed in response to the acceptance, if the "number of judgment information stored by the pending storage means (pending number)" increases before the display time has elapsed, the post-acceptance display may be terminated (not displayed) at that point.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the acceptance period D also occurs when the first fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 278 starts to be executed, and a predetermined time has elapsed since the first fluctuation pattern started to be executed (in FIG. 278(b), this is the time when 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fluctuation) (provided that the number of reserved tickets is 0).
In the case where the reception period D occurs when a predetermined time has elapsed since the second fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern forming a reach state) shown in FIG. 278 started to be executed (in FIG. 278(b), the timing is 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation), the specific BGM is made inaudible before the reception period D occurs, and the reception period D occurs while the inaudible state is maintained (see FIG. 276).
When the reception period D occurs when a predetermined time has elapsed since the first fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern that does not form a reach state) shown in FIG. 278 started to be executed (in FIG. 278(b), the timing is 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation), the specific BGM is not made inaudible, but the reception period D is generated while the specific BGM is being audibly output, and the specific BGM is made inaudible during the generated reception period D (see FIG. 277).
The system is to have the following configuration.

According to this configuration, when a reception period D occurs, it appears as if the reception period A (see FIG. 273) has occurred while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, or as if the reception period B (see FIG. 274) has occurred while the specific BGM is in a suppressed mode or in an inaudible state, which can increase interest in playing the game. Also, the reception period D, which appears as if the reception period A (see FIG. 273) has occurred, appears to have changed to reception period B within the reception period D, which can increase interest in playing the game.

In the above-mentioned performance example, after the first variation pattern shown in FIG. 278 is started, the reception period D occurs while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, and if a reception is made while the specific BGM is being audibly output, the reception is used as a trigger to end the audible output of the specific BGM (see FIG. 277). However, the reception may not be used as a trigger to end the audible output of the specific BGM, and the specific BGM may continue to be audibly output thereafter. For example, even in the example of FIG. 277(e'), the specific BGM may not be put into a suppressed or inaudible state at the reception timing tPx, but may be put into a suppressed or inaudible state based on the arrival of timing tPy (predetermined timing) shown in FIG. 277(e). In other words, in this case, there is a possibility that the specific BGM may be put into a suppressed or inaudible state in the middle of the display period of the post-reception display D, which makes it possible to provide an interesting performance.

In the above-mentioned performance example, first, a plurality of reception periods are prepared, including reception period A (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 6-A") and reception period B (corresponding to the second reception period of "Configuration 6-A"). The reception period A can be generated while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed state, regardless of the performance situation (the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the performance determination, etc.), and the reception period B can be generated after the specific BGM is in a suppressed state or in an inaudible state, regardless of the performance situation (the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the performance determination, etc.). Therefore, by using the specific BGM, it becomes possible to provide a performance related to the type of reception period before the reception period occurs.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the presentation, the reception period further includes reception period D (corresponding to the third reception period of "Configuration 6-A"), and reception period D may occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, or may occur after the specific BGM has been suppressed or made inaudible, depending on the situation of the presentation (the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the presentation determination, etc.).

More specifically, when the reception period D occurs when a predetermined time (10 seconds in FIG. 278(b)) has elapsed since the start of the pattern change of the first change pattern (see FIG. 278(b) etc.) that does not form a reach state, the reception period D is generated while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed state (see FIG. 277). On the other hand, when the reception period D occurs when a predetermined time (30 seconds in the case of the second change pattern and 50 seconds in the case of the third change pattern in FIG. 278(b)) has elapsed since the start of the pattern change of the second or third change pattern (see FIG. 278(b) etc.) that forms a reach state, the reception period D is generated after the specific BGM is suppressed or inaudible (see FIG. 276).

With this configuration, whether the reception period occurs while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, or occurs after the specific BGM is suppressed or made inaudible, there is a possibility that the reception period is "reception period D," which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game until the player's action (operation) is accepted.

Note that even during acceptance period A, if an abnormal condition occurs and a warning sound is being output, the specific BGM may be suppressed or made inaudible before the acceptance period begins. However, the above-mentioned meaning of "acceptance period A can occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output in an unsuppressed mode, regardless of the presentation status (the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the presentation determination, etc.)" means that "if acceptance period A occurs when no abnormality has been notified and the presentation is proceeding properly, acceptance period A will always occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output in an unsuppressed mode."

In the above-mentioned performance example, first, a plurality of reception periods are prepared, including reception period A (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 7-A") and reception period D (corresponding to the second reception period of "Configuration 7-A"). In reception period A, if reception is made within the period, post-reception display A corresponding to the reception can be executed, and the performance pattern (decorative pattern SZ) is displayed in priority over the post-reception display A at least while the post-reception display A is displayed (see FIG. 279(c)). In contrast, in reception period D, if reception is made within the period, post-reception display D corresponding to the reception can be executed, and the performance pattern (decorative pattern SZ) is displayed in a manner that makes it difficult to see by the post-reception display D, or is hidden, at least while the post-reception display D is displayed (see FIG. 282(c)).

Note that "an aspect in which it is difficult to see" here means "an aspect in which at least a part of the performance pattern (decorative pattern SZ) can be seen through the post-reception display D that is set to a predetermined transmittance, to an extent corresponding to that transmittance, or an aspect in which at least a part of the performance pattern (decorative pattern SZ) is made invisible by the post-reception display D that overlaps it, or an aspect in which at least a part of the performance pattern (decorative pattern SZ) is not displayed."

With this configuration, it becomes possible to recognize the type of reception period by checking whether the visibility of the performance pattern (decorative pattern SZ) has been affected by the post-reception display triggered by the player's action (operation). Note that "performance pattern (decorative pattern SZ)" refers to, for example, a pattern that forms a reach state as a performance on the performance display device 1600, and also refers to a pattern that is used for the performance of whether or not a reach state is formed, pseudo consecutive performance, full rotation performance, etc.

However, it has been confirmed that some players feel aversion to the worsening visibility of the effect patterns (decorative patterns SZ) that accompany the display of the post-acceptance display D. In this regard, in the above-mentioned performance example, when the post-acceptance display D is displayed in response to an acceptance within the acceptance period D, a different acceptance period from the acceptance period D is generated (for example, generated in response to an acceptance within the acceptance period D), and when an operation by the player is accepted within the different acceptance period, the acceptance is used as a trigger to hide the post-acceptance display D (terminating the process related to the display of the post-acceptance display D), thereby making the effect patterns (decorative patterns SZ) easier to see (see the performance progress shown in Figure 282 (c) → Figure 282 (g)).

According to this configuration, if the post-acceptance display D in response to an acceptance within the acceptance period D is "displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since its display began," the player can hide the post-acceptance display D at that point by simply performing a predetermined operation before the predetermined time has elapsed. Note that the operation (operation) required of the player to display the post-acceptance display D within the acceptance period D and the operation (operation) required of the player to hide the post-acceptance display D in an acceptance period other than the acceptance period D (an acceptance period that occurs in response to an acceptance within the acceptance period D) may be the same operation (operation) or different operations (operations). Note that the above-mentioned "acceptance period other than the acceptance period D" ends when the post-acceptance display D is hidden.

In contrast, the post-acceptance display A is also hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed since it began to be displayed (this may be the same as the predetermined time until the post-acceptance display D is hidden, or it may be a different time). However, for the post-acceptance display A, which does not deteriorate the visibility of the performance pattern (decorative pattern SZ), it is preferable that it is not hidden as a result of any operation performed by the player before the predetermined time has elapsed, in order to prevent a decrease in the player's interest in the game when a player makes an incorrect operation contrary to his or her intention.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the reception period further includes a reception period B, during which, if reception is made within the period, a post-reception display B corresponding to the reception can be executed, and the performance pattern (decorative pattern SZ) is displayed in a manner that makes it difficult to see due to the post-reception display B, or is hidden, at least while the post-reception display B is displayed (see FIG. 280(c)).

However, in the above-mentioned presentation example, although "post-reception display B" and "post-reception display D" have in common the fact that they affect the visibility of the presentation pattern (decorative pattern SZ), if post-reception display B is "displayed when a predetermined time (which may be different from the time until post-reception display D is hidden) has elapsed since it began to be displayed," then post-reception display B will not be hidden as a result of any operation performed by the player before the predetermined time has elapsed. This makes it possible to provide a presentation that can improve the visibility of the presentation pattern (decorative pattern SZ) when it is affected by the post-reception display.

It is preferable that reception period B is set as a reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled, and reception period D is set as a reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic button function is not enabled.

In the above-mentioned example of the performance, first, a plurality of reception periods are prepared, including reception period D (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 8-A") and reception period B (corresponding to the second reception period of "Configuration 8-A"). The reception period D can occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, and when an acceptance is made while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, this triggers the specific BGM to be made inaudible (see FIG. 277). The reception period B is permitted after the specific BGM that was audibly output in a non-suppressed mode becomes audible or not audible, and even if the acceptance is made, the specific BGM is maintained in a state of being audibly output in a suppressed mode or not audible (see FIG. 274).

This configuration adds interest in the timing at which the specific BGM is "audibly output in a suppressed manner or not audibly output" in relation to the occurrence of the reception period.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, in reception period D, when acceptance is made, all sounds that have been audibly output up until that point, including presentation sounds different from the specific BGM, are made inaudible, and in reception period B, when acceptance is made, all sounds that have been audibly output at that point (such as reception-permitted sounds) are made inaudible. In other words, in this case, in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, the specific BGM is made "in a state where it is audibly output in a suppressed mode or in a state where it is not audibly output," and when acceptance is made, all sounds that have been audibly output at that point are made inaudible, making it possible to provide a common presentation between reception period D and reception period B, thereby improving interest in the game.

As described above, during the acceptance period D, while the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is permitted, a situation may occur in which the specific BGM is made inaudible (partway through the valid period) and no sound is output (see FIG. 276(e)), but even in such a situation, the acceptance period is made to continue (see FIG. 282(e)). That is, in this case, during the acceptance period D, the specific BGM is made inaudible when an action is accepted, but if no action is accepted for a predetermined time after the occurrence of the acceptance period D, the specific BGM is made inaudible while no action has yet been accepted, which makes the player think that the acceptance period D has ended, strongly catching the player's interest.

In particular, in the example presentation described above, the background image is changed in accordance with the timing at which the specific BGM is made inaudible while the reception has not yet been made, providing a performance that gives the impression that a reception period different from reception period D is occurring.

In relation to the occurrence of the reception period D, when the specific BGM is made inaudible as a result of reception (see FIG. 277), a "display change in response to reception (post-reception display D)" is generated accordingly. However, when the specific BGM is made inaudible before reception has been made (see FIG. 277), a "display change in response to reception (post-reception display D)" is not generated accordingly. In other words, in this case, by confirming that the "display change in response to reception (post-reception display D)" has not yet occurred when the specific BGM is made inaudible, it is possible to make the player aware of the possibility that the reception period D has not yet ended. Then, after the specific BGM is made inaudible, if an action (operation) by the player is accepted before the end of the reception period D, a "display change in response to reception (post-reception display D)" will occur as a result of this, which will increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, during acceptance period B, a predetermined presentation sound (e.g., acceptance permission sound) is audibly output until the arrival of timing tM3 at which the period ends, and when the predetermined presentation sound is made inaudible, the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is not permitted, making it easy to recognize whether or not acceptance period B is continuing. Note that, in the above-mentioned presentation example, acceptance period B is set as the acceptance period during which the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled, and the automatic button function is enabled based on the arrival of timing tM3.

In the above-mentioned example of the presentation, the reception period B occurs when a predetermined time (35 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the third variation pattern shown in FIG. 278, for example, and the specific BGM is made inaudible before the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the third variation pattern, but it is desirable that the reception period D does not occur between the start of the third variation pattern and the time when the specific BGM is made inaudible. With this configuration, in the third variation pattern, the reception period B occurs first after the specific BGM is made inaudible, and it can be expected that the reception period D will occur further thereafter with the specific BGM in an inaudible state, which can increase the interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned example of the performance, the acceptance period D can occur only when the number of reserved balls is less than a predetermined number, and can occur when a set time has elapsed since the start of the pattern change in any of the first, second, and third change patterns shown in FIG. 278. However, in any change pattern, it is desirable to set it so that it occurs after other acceptance periods (acceptance periods A to C, etc.). In other words, in this case, the acceptance period D, which has a special performance effect, can be made to function as the last acceptance period to occur for a player who is about to stop playing, so that it can be expected that the player will be encouraged not to stop playing, or, even if the game is stopped, the player can be left with the impression that the game was fun.

During reception period D, when a reception is made, post-reception display D appears for a specific time, but when the specific time has elapsed and post-reception display D is no longer displayed, it is desirable that the specific BGM not be restarted. In this case, it is more desirable that the specific BGM not be restarted unless the next pattern change is started.

Next, we will explain in order the examples of modifications to the above-mentioned performance examples that embody the above configurations 1, 14, and 15.

In other words, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, the same post-acceptance display D is generated when the acceptance is made during the period during which the model image display is displayed and when the acceptance is made during the period during which the model image display is hidden. However, instead of this, different post-acceptance displays may be generated when the acceptance is made during the period during which the model image display is displayed and when the acceptance is made during the period during which the model image display is hidden.

In other words, in this case, more strictly speaking, the reception period D is composed of two types of reception periods: a "reception period D1", which is the period during which the model image display is displayed, and a "reception period D2", which is the period during which the model image display is not displayed; if reception is made during reception period D1, the corresponding post-reception display D1 is displayed, and if reception is made during reception period D2, the corresponding post-reception display D2 is displayed.

Figure 283 shows an example in which the above-mentioned modification has been applied to the reception period D shown in Figure 282 etc.

The following describes the example of the performance shown in FIG. 283, but does not refer to the same configuration as the examples of the performance shown in FIG. 276 to FIG. 278 and FIG. 282. In other words, the reception period D (reception periods D1, D2) shown in FIG. 283 is basically the same as the reception period D shown in FIG. 276 to FIG. 278 and FIG. 282, and can be similarly applied to other examples.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 283, a reception period D1 occurs first (see FIG. 283(b)), and when reception is made during the reception period D1, a post-reception display D1 corresponding to the reception period D1 is displayed (see FIG. 283(c)).

In contrast, after the reception period D1 has occurred (see FIG. 283(b)), if a predetermined time has passed without any reception (when timing tP2a shown in FIG. 276 and FIG. 277 arrives), the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is hidden (see FIG. 283(e)). Even under such circumstances (when the model image display is hidden), the player's actions (operations) are permitted to be accepted, just like in the presentation examples shown in FIG. 282 and elsewhere. However, in this modified example, when the model image display is hidden (see FIG. 283(e)), the "reception period D1" ends and a different "reception period D2" is initiated.

In other words, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during "acceptance period D2" in which the model image display is hidden, a post-acceptance display D2 corresponding to that "acceptance period D2" is displayed (see FIG. 283 (h)). With this configuration, it is possible to actually provide a performance in which the "acceptance period D1" is suddenly replaced by a "acceptance period D2" different from that acceptance period D1, and this surprising performance can increase interest in the game.

Moreover, in this example, in the reception periods D1 and D2, when the model image display (integrated model image display IG) changes from a displayed state to a hidden state, the background image is changed. With this configuration, it is expected that when the model image display (integrated model image display IG) changes to a hidden state, it will be possible to more appropriately create an atmosphere that gives the impression of a sudden switch to another reception period.

In particular, in this example, as in the example shown in Fig. 282, the "background image HG4a" depicting mountains and rivers is changed to "background image HG4b" depicting a desert different from "background image HG3" (Fig. 283(b) -> Fig. 283(e)). With this configuration, when the mock-up image display (integrated mock-up image display IG) changes to a non-display state, it is expected to more suitably create an atmosphere of a sudden switch to reception period C, which can occur when the background is a desert.

In addition, the "post-reception display D2" in this example has different content from the "swarm announcement" of the "post-reception display C" shown in Figure 281 (c), but it has in common the use of ghost characters, making it somewhat reminiscent of "post-reception display C", and this is expected to more suitably create an atmosphere of a sudden switch to reception period C, which may occur against the background of the desert.

In this example, when an acceptance is made within acceptance period D2, the "background image HG4b" is returned (changed) to the "background image HG4a" that was displayed during acceptance period D1, and then a post-acceptance display D2 corresponding to the acceptance is displayed. This makes it possible to indicate that the post-acceptance display is related to acceptance period D1 (more precisely, a post-acceptance display corresponding to acceptance period D2 that occurs when a predetermined time has elapsed since acceptance period D1 occurred (when timing tP2a shown in Figures 276 and 277 arrives)), rather than a post-acceptance display that has no relation to acceptance period D1 (for example, a post-acceptance display corresponding to acceptance period C).

When a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of acceptance period D2 without any action (operation) by the player being accepted (when timing tP2b shown in Figures 276 and 277 arrives), as shown in Figure 283(f), acceptance period D1 occurs again and the state is returned to where the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is displayed. At this time, the background image is also changed from "background image HG4b" back to "background image HG4a" (Figure 283(e) → Figure 283(f)). This is expected to more appropriately create an atmosphere that is reverted from another acceptance period to the initial acceptance period D1.

When acceptance is made within the acceptance period D1 that has occurred again in this way (Figure 283 (f)), the post-acceptance display D1 corresponding to that acceptance period D1 will be displayed (see Figure 283 (c)), just as in the case where acceptance was made within the first acceptance period D1 (Figure 283 (b)).

It goes without saying that such reception period D (reception periods D1 and D2) also applies to the configuration described with reference to FIG. 278.

According to the modified example shown in FIG. 283, during reception period D (corresponding to the third reception period of "Configuration 15-A"), there is a period during which the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is displayed and a period during which the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is not displayed. These periods are made to function as "reception period D1" and "reception period D2", and different display changes are made depending on whether the reception was made during "reception period D1" or "reception period D2". In other words, in this case, a display change (display change when reception is made within reception period D2) that cannot be confirmed unless the state is such that the reception period D may have ended (a state in which the model image display is not displayed) is prepared, and the sense of tension is appropriately maintained through such dramatic effects.

In the above-mentioned example of the performance, reception period D includes a "period in which the model image display is displayed" and a "period in which the model image display is not displayed." However, instead of this, reception period D may include a "period in which text information related to the fact that reception is permitted is displayed" and a "period in which text information related to the fact that reception is permitted is not displayed."

Figure 284 shows an example in which the above-mentioned modifications have been made to reception period D shown in Figure 282 etc.

The following describes the example of the performance shown in FIG. 284, but does not refer to the same configuration as the examples of the performance shown in FIG. 276 to FIG. 278 and FIG. 282. In other words, the reception period D shown in FIG. 284 is basically the same as the reception period D shown in FIG. 276 to FIG. 278 and FIG. 282, and can be similarly applied to other examples.

However, in reception period D shown in Figure 284 (see Figure 284 (b)), first, as in reception period B (see Figure 280 (b)), text information related to the fact that reception is permitted (here, "Please press") is displayed, although the content is different.

That is, as mentioned above, text information related to acceptance of a request cannot be displayed during acceptance period A (see FIG. 279(b)), when expectations are relatively low, but is displayed during acceptance period B (see FIG. 280(b)), when expectations are relatively high. Therefore, by displaying such text information (here, "Please press") during acceptance period D, it is expected that interest in the game will be increased.

However, in the acceptance period D according to this modified example, as shown in Figs. 284(b), (e) and (f), while the state in which acceptance of the player's action (operation) is permitted continues, the text information (here, "Please press") related to the acceptance may change from a displayed state to a hidden state (timing tP2a shown in Figs. 276 and 277), or the text information may change from a hidden state to a displayed state (timing tP2b shown in Figs. 276 and 277). Of course, even if the text information (here, "Please press") is in a hidden state, if the player performs an action (operation), the action (operation) is accepted, and the post-acceptance display D is performed based on the acceptance (see an example that follows a presentation path such as Fig. 284(e) → Fig. 284(c)).

In this example, if an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period D, the same display (Fig. 284(c)) is displayed as "post-acceptance display D" regardless of whether the acceptance is made before the text information (here, "Please press") related to the acceptance of the action (here, "Please press") becomes invisible (Fig. 284(b) → Fig. 284(c)), or whether the acceptance is made while the text information (here, "Please press") is in an invisible state (Fig. 284(e) → Fig. 284(c)), or whether the acceptance is made after the text information (here, "Please press") is returned to a visible state (Fig. 284(f) → Fig. 284(c)).

With this configuration, in the situation shown in FIG. 284(e), even though acceptance period D is occurring, it is possible to provide an atmosphere as if it has suddenly switched to acceptance period A (see FIG. 279(b)) in which no text information related to the acceptance being permitted is displayed, and this surprising presentation can increase interest in the game. On the other hand, even if a player's action (operation) is accepted in a situation that seems to have suddenly switched to acceptance period A (when no text information is displayed), the same form (FIG. 284(c)) is displayed as the "post-acceptance display D" corresponding to acceptance period D, so it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Moreover, in this example, during reception period D, when the text information related to the fact that reception is permitted changes from a displayed state to a hidden state, the background image is changed. With this configuration, it is expected that when the text information related to the fact that reception is permitted changes to a hidden state, it will be possible to more appropriately create an atmosphere that gives the impression that the reception period has suddenly switched to another period.

In particular, in this example, the background image changes from "background image HG4a," which depicts mountains and a river, to "background image HG4c," which depicts a mountain different from "background image HG1" (Fig. 284(b) -> Fig. 284(e)). With this configuration, when the text information related to the acceptance of the acceptance is changed to a non-display state, it is expected that an atmosphere of a sudden switch to acceptance period A, which may occur when the background shows mountains, will be more appropriately created.

In this example, when the text information related to the acceptance of the acceptance is returned from a non-display state to a display state, the background image is also changed from "background image HG4c" back to "background image HG4a" (Fig. 284(e) -> Fig. 284(f)). This is expected to more appropriately create an atmosphere of being returned to the initial acceptance period D from another acceptance period (particularly acceptance period A).

It goes without saying that this reception period D also applies to the configuration described with reference to FIG. 278.

According to the modified example shown in FIG. 284, first, a plurality of reception periods are prepared, including reception period B (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 1-A") and reception period D (corresponding to the second reception period of "Configuration 1-A"). Then, in both cases where reception period B occurs and reception period D occurs, text information is displayed in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, but the text information is displayed as different text information ("Press" in reception period B, and "Please press" in reception period D) even though the same action by the player (pressing the operation button 410) is accepted in reception period B and reception period D.

In other words, in reception period B and reception period D, the player is required to perform the same action (operation mode), but the display changes (post-reception displays B and D) that occur as a result of the detection of the action are different. In this regard, in this pachinko machine 1, even when the same action (operation mode) is required of the player, the text information displayed in connection with the occurrence of a reception period is made different depending on the type of reception period (type of post-reception display). This allows the player to perform an operation (action by the player) while recognizing which type of display change (post-reception displays B and D) is likely to occur as the post-reception display, which is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

It is also possible to provide an additional reception period in which the same operation (operation mode) as in reception period B is requested and the same text information and imitation image display as in reception period B are displayed, but when the reception is made, a post-reception display different from that in reception period B is generated. In other words, in this case, it is not possible to fully understand which type of post-reception display will be executed just by looking at the text information and imitation image display, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension when operating.

In addition, according to the above-mentioned modified example, in reception period B, the text information is not hidden until the state in which reception is permitted (valid state) ends, whereas in reception period D, the text information can be hidden during the period while the state in which reception is permitted (valid state) continues. In other words, in this case, unless an operation (predetermined operation) is performed relatively soon after the start of reception period D, it becomes difficult to recognize what operation (operation mode) is being requested of the player, and it becomes difficult to recognize the type of reception period. This is expected to favorably avoid a situation in which the player becomes complacent with the text information being displayed and loses all sense of tension.

In addition, in the above-mentioned modified example, during acceptance period D, there is a period during which text information is displayed (see FIG. 284(b)) and a period during which text information is not displayed (see FIG. 284(e)), but regardless of when the acceptance is made within these periods, the same display change (see FIG. 284(c)) occurs. In other words, in this case, even if the text information is not displayed, as long as the player checks what type of operation is being requested while the text information is displayed, it is possible to perform the operation appropriately, which is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned modified example, during acceptance period D, the text information is made invisible and then displayed again. In other words, in this case, even if the player mistakenly believes that "acceptance period D" has suddenly changed to "acceptance period A" in which no text information is displayed, the player will be able to clear up the misunderstanding by having the text information displayed again later.

In addition, in the above-mentioned modified example, a change occurs in the background image during reception period D, and the period in which text information is displayed is transitioned to a period in which text information is not displayed in accordance with the timing of the change. This makes it possible to ideally give the impression that reception period D has transitioned to a different reception period.

In the example of presentation described with reference to FIG. 284, the same post-acceptance display D is generated when an acceptance occurs during the period of the acceptance period D during which text information related to the fact that acceptance is permitted is displayed, and when an acceptance occurs during the period during which text information related to the fact that acceptance is permitted is not displayed. However, instead of this, different post-acceptance displays may be generated when an acceptance occurs during the period of the acceptance period D during which text information related to the fact that acceptance is permitted is displayed, and when an acceptance occurs during the period during which text information related to the fact that acceptance is permitted is not displayed.

In other words, in this case, more strictly speaking, the reception period D is composed of two types of reception periods: "reception period D1", which is a period during which text information related to the fact that reception is permitted is displayed, and "reception period D2", which is a period during which text information related to the fact that reception is permitted is not displayed; when reception is made during reception period D1, the corresponding post-reception display D1 is displayed, and when reception is made during reception period D2, the corresponding post-reception display D2 is displayed.

Figure 285 shows an example in which the above-mentioned modification has been applied to reception period D shown in Figure 284 etc.

The following describes the example of the performance shown in FIG. 285, but does not refer to the same configuration as the examples of the performance shown in FIG. 276 to FIG. 278, FIG. 282, and its modified example, FIG. 284. In other words, the reception period D (reception periods D1, D2) shown in FIG. 285 is basically the same as the reception period D shown in FIG. 284, and can be similarly applied to other examples.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 285, a reception period D1 occurs first (see FIG. 285(b)), and when reception is made during the reception period D1, a post-reception display D1 corresponding to the reception period D1 is displayed (see FIG. 285(c)).

In contrast, after the occurrence of the acceptance period D1 (see FIG. 285(b)), if a predetermined time has passed without acceptance (when timing tP2a shown in FIG. 276 and FIG. 277 arrives), the text information related to the fact that acceptance is permitted (here, "Please press") is hidden (see FIG. 285(e)). Even under such circumstances (when the text information related to the fact that acceptance is permitted is hidden), the fact that acceptance of the player's action (operation) is permitted is the same as in the example of the presentation shown in FIG. 284 etc. However, in this modified example, when the text information related to the fact that acceptance is permitted is hidden (see FIG. 285(e)), the "acceptance period D1" ends and a different "acceptance period D2" occurs.

In other words, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during "acceptance period D2" during which text information related to the acceptance of the action is hidden, a post-acceptance display D2 corresponding to the "acceptance period D2" is displayed (see FIG. 285 (h)). With this configuration, it is possible to actually provide a performance in which the "acceptance period D1" is suddenly replaced by a "acceptance period D2" different from the acceptance period D1, and this surprising performance can increase interest in the game.

Moreover, in this example, in reception periods D1 and D2, if the text information related to the fact that reception is permitted changes from a displayed state to a hidden state, the background image is changed. With this configuration, when the text information related to the fact that reception is permitted changes to a hidden state, it is expected that an atmosphere will be more suitably created that suddenly switches to reception period A, in which the text information is hidden.

In particular, in this example, as in the example shown in Fig. 284, the background image changes from "background image HG4a" depicting mountains and rivers to "background image HG4c" depicting a mountain different from "background image HG1" (Fig. 285(b) -> Fig. 285(e)). With this configuration, when the text information (here, "Please press") changes to a non-display state, it is expected to more suitably create an atmosphere of a sudden switch to reception period A, which can occur when the background shows mountains.

In addition, although the "Post-reception display D2" in this example has different content from the "conversation preview" of the "Post-reception display A" shown in FIG. 279(c), it has in common that it uses a princess character, and so is somewhat reminiscent of "Post-reception display A", which is expected to more suitably create an atmosphere of a sudden switch to reception period A, in which text information is not displayed.

In this example, when an acceptance is made within acceptance period D2, the "background image HG4b" is returned (changed) to the "background image HG4a" that was displayed during acceptance period D1, and then a post-acceptance display D2 corresponding to the acceptance is displayed. This makes it possible to indicate that the post-acceptance display is related to acceptance period D1 (more precisely, a post-acceptance display corresponding to acceptance period D2 that occurs when a predetermined time has elapsed since acceptance period D1 occurred (when timing tP2a shown in Figures 276 and 277 arrives)), rather than a post-acceptance display that has no relation to acceptance period D1 (for example, a post-acceptance display corresponding to acceptance period C).

When a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of acceptance period D2 without any action (operation) by the player being accepted (when timing tP2b shown in Figures 276 and 277 arrives), acceptance period D1 occurs again as shown in Figure 285(f), and the state is returned to one in which "text information related to the fact that acceptance is permitted" is displayed. At this time, the background image is also changed from "background image HG4c" back to "background image HG4a" (Figure 285(e) -> Figure 285(f)). This is expected to more appropriately create an atmosphere that is reverted from another acceptance period to the initial acceptance period D1.

When acceptance is made within the acceptance period D1 that has occurred again in this way (Figure 285 (f)), the post-acceptance display D1 corresponding to that acceptance period D1 will be displayed (see Figure 285 (c)), just as in the case where acceptance was made within the first acceptance period D1 (Figure 285 (b)).

It goes without saying that such reception period D (reception periods D1 and D2) also applies to the configuration described with reference to FIG. 278.

According to the modified example shown in FIG. 285, during acceptance period D (corresponding to the second acceptance period of "Configuration 14-A"), there is a period during which "text information related to acceptance being permitted" is displayed and a period during which "text information related to acceptance being permitted" is not displayed, and these periods are made to function as "acceptance period D1" and "acceptance period D2", and different display changes are made depending on whether the acceptance was made during "acceptance period D1" or "acceptance period D2". In other words, in this case, when the "text information related to acceptance being permitted" is hidden, the acceptance period does not end, but a different acceptance period from the acceptance period that had occurred up until then occurs, so that the presentation can be maintained in an optimal manner even when the player's actions (operations) are not being accepted easily.

In the examples of effects shown in Figures 273 to 285, the "Post-reception display" is started to be displayed when the model image display is being displayed, but the "Post-reception display" does not necessarily have to be started to be displayed when the model image display is being displayed, and may be started to be displayed after the model image display is made invisible.

In addition, in the examples shown in Figures 273 to 285, the mock image display is displayed so as to span the timing before and after the reception period, but it may also be displayed when the reception period occurs or after that.

Also, in the examples of effects shown in Figures 273 to 285, the model image display will be displayed dynamically as described above with reference to Figures 233 and 234. In this case, it is desirable that the dynamic display of the model image display is not terminated but continues even while the "disappearance effect (disappearance-related display)" is appearing after it has been accepted.

In addition, in the examples shown in Figures 273 to 285, the "disappearance effect (disappearance-related display)" is designed to make it difficult to see not only the mock image display, but also the gauge image indicating the remaining time until the end of the acceptance period. This prevents the impression that there is still time remaining, even if the gauge image is displayed after acceptance.

In addition, in the presentation examples shown in Figures 273 to 285, even if an acceptance is made during reception period D, the display process for the imitation image display (in the modified example, text information) is not terminated. In other words, the post-reception display D is given priority over the imitation image display (in the modified example, text information) that remains displayed on the layer, so that the imitation image display (in the modified example, text information) is made invisible (invisible). However, even if an acceptance is made during reception period D, the display process for the imitation image display (in the modified example, text information) may be terminated.

In addition, in the examples of effects shown in Figures 273 to 285, a model image display (integrated model image display IG) that mimics the operation receiving part to be operated is displayed during the reception period, but the model image display does not necessarily have to be displayed, and can be realized, for example, by replacing it with an arrow notation that encourages operation.

In the example shown in FIG. 277, if a request is accepted during acceptance period D while specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, the acceptance triggers the specific BGM to be audibly output in a suppressed mode or made inaudible; however, the specific BGM may be made inaudible when a predetermined timing arrives, regardless of whether or not the request is accepted. In other words, in this case, there is a possibility that the specific BGM may be made inaudible during the execution period of the post-acceptance display, which is expected to improve the presentation.

In the examples of effects shown in Figures 273 to 285, the background images HG1 to HG4a (HG4b, HG4c) are displayed before each reception period begins, but they may be displayed in accordance with the timing of the reception period. Depending on the type of reception period, they may be displayed in advance of the reception period beginning or in accordance with the timing of the reception period beginning. In short, as long as reception can be performed while each of the above background images is displayed, the above-mentioned effects related to the background images will be achieved.

In addition, in the examples of effects shown in Figures 273 to 285, the reception period C occurs when the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed mode or is in an inaudible state, but it may also occur when the specific BGM is output in a non-suppressed mode.

In addition, in the presentation examples shown in Figures 273 to 285, the reception period D includes a period during which the model image display (in a modified example, text information related to the fact that reception is permitted) is displayed and a period during which it is not displayed. These periods are set as a sufficient amount of time for reception to be made in a non-displayed state even if the player begins an action (operation) after confirming that the model image display (or text information) has become non-displayed, and are set as a sufficient amount of time for reception to be made in a displayed state even if the player begins an action (operation) after confirming that the model image display (or text information) has been returned to a displayed state, and it is clear that these have technical significance other than display methods such as so-called "blinking display".

For example, during reception period D, the time during which the imitation image display (or text information) is maintained in a "hidden state" after being put into a "hidden state" is preferably set to a time value that is at least half (1.5 seconds or more) of the time (e.g., 3 seconds) set for reception period A or B. Also, the time during which the imitation image display (or text information) is maintained in a "hidden state" after being put back into a displayed state is preferably set to a time value that is at least half (1.5 seconds or more) of the time (e.g., 3 seconds) set for reception period A or B, and the time during which the imitation image display (or text information) is displayed until it is put into a hidden state is preferably set to a time value that is at least half (1.5 seconds or more) of the time (e.g., 3 seconds) set for reception period A or B.

Alternatively, the time from when the Moji image display (or text information) is displayed until it is made invisible, the time for which the Moji image display (or text information) is made invisible and maintained in the invisible state, and the time for which the Moji image display (or text information) is made visible and maintained in the visible state may be set to a time value that is equal to or greater than the shortest time for pattern change (the time required for shortened change). This is because such a time value is set as a time value that is sufficient for the player to confirm the pattern change, while also allowing the pattern change to end early.

Next, an example of implementing the above configurations 4 and 9 to 13 will be described. As described above, this pachinko machine 1 has multiple reception periods (reception performances) with different performance contents that proceed when the player is accepted (for example, conversation notice, cut-in notice, moving object notice, etc. as post-reception performances, and types of notice performances (expectation level indication performances)), and can generate reception periods (reception performances) of different types according to the results of judgments (jackpot judgments, performance judgments, etc.). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned reception period A (reception performance A) to reception period D (reception performance D), reception period E is further prepared as multiple reception periods (reception performances).

The characteristics of reception period E will be described with reference to Figures 286 and 287. Note that each reception period described above with reference to Figures 1 to 272 may be prepared as a reception period separate from reception period E (reception performance E), or may be realized as reception period E (reception performance E).

Figure 286 shows an example of a presentation in a variation pattern in which reception period E (reception presentation E) occurs.

Now, if the start condition is established (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is not a sure-win state or a time-saving state), and "variation pattern E" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern E. Then, the decorative pattern (decorative pattern) SZ variation performance (performance depiction according to the variation pattern E, sound output of specific BGM playback, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 286(a)"), and during the execution period of the variation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "variation pattern E" itself. In the performance example shown in FIG. 286(a), the same background image (background image HG4a) as the background image shown in FIG. 282(a) is displayed.

Here, when a special result is obtained in the performance judgment (such as a preview judgment) corresponding to the variation pattern E, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates the above-mentioned acceptance period E (valid period) during which "acceptance regarding the post-acceptance display E" is permitted when a predetermined time E has elapsed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ (when condition E is met) ("the situation shown in Figure 286 (e)").

In this regard, when the reception period E occurs, a premonition display corresponding to the reception period E is performed. More specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 286(b), the "kunoichi" character KI appears. Next, as shown in FIG. 286(c), the character KI throws a smoke bomb to create smoke. Next, as shown in FIG. 286(d), the character KI is displayed saying, "Press the button to call that person." At this time, the "smoke" is depicted expanding and a "mock image display" is displayed, but the "smoke" and "mock image display" are made difficult to see by displaying the character KI and the lines first. Then, after such premonition displays (FIGS. 286(b)-(d)), when the reception period E occurs, the character KI and the lines are hidden, and the "mock image display" is clearly displayed.

In this example, the "character KI" and "smoke" are given priority over the background image HG4a and the decorative image SZ. The "smoke" may be displayed so as to cover the entire background image HG4a (display screen), thereby changing the background image from "background image HG4a" to "smoke." In other words, in this case, the "smoke" functions as the new "background image." The "smoke" does not necessarily have to be displayed prior to the occurrence of the acceptance period E (it does not have to be displayed as a precursor display).

Here, as shown in FIG. 286(e), during reception period E in this example, the model image displays displayed are an "integrated model image display IG" modeled after the operation button 410, a "sword decoration image SYG" modeled after the sword decoration 5001, and a "special model image TM" modeled after the special operation means (the button labeled "PUSH" in the figure). Note that in this example, multiple copies of each of the "integrated model image display IG", "sword decoration image SYG", and "special model image TM" are displayed, but they may be displayed one at a time.

In other words, in this case, during reception period E, the player is prompted to operate the "operation button 410," the "sword decoration 5001," and the "special operation means 1410." This allows the player to determine whether to operate the "operation button 410," the "sword decoration 5001," or the "special operation means 1410."

In this regard, if an operation is accepted using the "operation button 410" during the acceptance period E, as shown in FIG. 286(f), an acceptance sound E1 such as a "ping pong" is audibly output in response to the acceptance, and a display change (post-acceptance display E1) occurs in which an "image suggesting that the integrated model image display IG is correct" and a "samurai character" are displayed, and the background changes to a "background image HG5" depicting a streetscape. After the "post-acceptance display E1" is displayed in this way, the performance progresses with the "background image HG5" displayed.

On the other hand, if an operation is performed on the "special operation means 1410" during the reception period E, as shown in FIG. 286(g), no reception sound is generated, no display change occurs, and the reception period E does not end (no reaction occurs, and the reception period E does not end). In other words, even though the "special operation means 1410" is not set as an object of reception during the reception period E, a "special model image TM" that imitates the "special operation means 1410" is displayed. With this configuration, during the reception period E, model image displays (integrated model image display IG, sword decoration image SYG) that imitate the operation means that are set as objects of reception during the reception period E and model image displays (special model image TM) that imitate the operation means that are not set as objects of reception during the reception period E are mixed, so that an operation opportunity can be given in a tense atmosphere where it is difficult to recognize which operation means to operate. In addition, when the "special operation means 1410" is within the reception period E, operations on the "special operation means 1410" are accepted, but this may be triggered by no reception sound, no display change, and no end of the reception period E (the same as a state in which no reaction occurs and no operation is performed).

On the other hand, if an operation on the "sword ornament 5001" is accepted within the acceptance period E, as shown in FIG. 286(i), an acceptance sound E2 such as "boosh" is audibly output in response to the acceptance, and a display change (post-acceptance display E2) occurs in which the character KI is depicted saying something like "I'll start over!" At this time, no change occurs to the background image.

In other words, after "post-acceptance display E2" is displayed, the presentation does not progress, but the set time (remaining time) for the acceptance period E is reset, and the remaining time for the acceptance period E is returned to the state it was in immediately after the occurrence of the acceptance period E (it can also be said that "acceptance period E occurs again"). With this configuration, even if no operation is performed to cause the post-acceptance display E1 (Samurai character) to appear, and as a result the post-acceptance display E1 (Samurai character) cannot be displayed, it is possible to restart the "acceptance period E" from the initial state where the remaining time has not been used up, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

The condition for returning to the state immediately after the occurrence of the reception period E may be not "a single operation on the sword ornament 5001 being received" but "a predetermined number of operations on the sword ornament 5001 being received."

By the way, it goes without saying that if an operation is performed on the "special operation means 1410" during reception period E, the remaining time for that reception period E will not be reset.

If an operation is performed on the "sword decoration 5001" during reception period E, causing the remaining time of reception period E to be returned to the state it was in immediately after reception period E occurred (re-occurrence of reception period E), the same phenomenon as described above will occur depending on whether an operation on the "operation button 410", an operation on the "sword decoration 5001", or an operation on the "special operation means 1410" is accepted during reception period E (Fig. 286 (f), (g), (i)).

However, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted during a reception period E in which the set time (remaining time) has not been reset, the manner in which the post-reception display D is displayed in response to that acceptance may be different from the manner in which the post-reception display D is displayed in response to that acceptance when an action (operation) by a player is accepted during a reception period E in which the set time (remaining time) has been reset (post-reception display D1, D2, etc.). With this configuration, there is a dramatic value in making the post-reception display D appear without resetting, making it possible to appropriately maintain the sense of tension when the reception period E is occurring.

On the other hand, the "example of progression from FIG. 286(e) or FIG. 286(g) to FIG. 286(h)" assumes a case where neither "operation of the operation button 410" nor "operation of the sword decoration 5001" is accepted within the acceptance period E.

In other words, in this case, after the reception period E occurs, the remaining time is consumed without any action (operation) by the player being accepted, and the reception period E ends. In this regard, the reception period E is set as the "reception period for which the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled." Therefore, even if the remaining time is consumed during the reception period E without either the "operation of the operation button 410" or the "operation of the sword decoration 5001" being accepted, as shown in FIG. 286 (h), the same post-reception display E will be generated as when a movement (operation) by the player occurs during the reception period E.

However, if neither the "operation of the operation button 410" nor the "operation of the sword ornament 5001" is accepted within the acceptance period E, the same post-acceptance display E as when the "operation of the operation button 410" is accepted within the acceptance period E is generated, but the same acceptance sound E (ping-pong) as when the "operation of the operation button 410" is accepted within the acceptance period E is not audibly output.

This configuration allows the same post-acceptance display E to be displayed as when an "operation on the operation button 410" is accepted within the acceptance period E, but also makes it possible to suggest that the "post-acceptance display E" is not displayed as a result of the player's successful selective operation, which is expected to encourage more proactive operation when the acceptance period E occurs again.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the reception period E, processing is performed to make it difficult to recognize how much time is left in the reception period E, and to give a hint as to what operation mode (operation type) is required to display the post-reception display E1.

Figures 287 (a) to (d) are enlarged views of a portion of the display screen shown in Figure 286 (e), showing the changes in the display content over time as reception period E continues.

As described above, during reception period E, an "integrated model image display IG" modeled after the operation button 410, a "sword decoration image SYG" modeled after the sword decoration 5001, and a "special model image TM" modeled after the special operation means (the button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 are displayed.

In other words, during reception period E, even though multiple types of model image displays are displayed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG used to indicate the remaining time is associated with only one of the multiple types of model image displays (integrated model image display IG). This makes it possible to suggest that the user is in a state where they should operate the operating means (operation button 410) that corresponds to the "integrated model image display IG" among the multiple types of model image displays.

Also, as time passes during reception period E, the "integrated model image display IG" dynamically displays the portion of the operation button 410 that mimics the "operation receiving portion" (button model image BMG) as if it were performing a "movement when operated by the player," as shown in Figs. 287(a)-(d). This dynamic display is the same as that described above in Figs. 233 and 234, and is also the same when the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed in the presentation examples shown in Figs. 279-285.

However, in this example, among the multiple types of model image displays, the "sword decoration image SYG" and "special model image TM" are displayed statically, and the part of the sword decoration 5001 that mimics the "operation receiving part" and the part of the special operation means 1410 that mimics the "operation receiving part" are not dynamically displayed. Note that the "sword decoration image SYG" and "special model image TM" may change the lighting mode, such as flashing.

With this configuration, only the "integrated model image display IG" among the multiple types of model image displays expresses "movement when operated by the player," which makes it possible to imply that the operating means (operation button 410) corresponding to the "integrated model image display IG" among the multiple types of model image displays should be operated.

As mentioned above, during reception period E, a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed to indicate the remaining time. Such gauge images GG are usually depicted as gradually decreasing in size as time passes after the reception period has begun, as shown in Figures 233 and 234, and are used to indicate how much time is left for that reception period. The use of such gauge images GG is also the same when a "gauge image GG (here, integrated model image display IG)" is displayed in the performance examples shown in Figures 279 to 285.

However, during reception period E, as shown in Figures 287(a)-(d), although the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is displayed, there is no "depiction of the gradual decrease in its display area as time passes since the reception period has begun." In other words, during reception period E in this example, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in a manner that maintains it at its maximum value from the time the period begins until it ends. With this configuration, during reception period E, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize how much time is left in reception period E, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In particular, in the reception period E in this example, it is possible to reset the remaining time for the reception period E by operating the special operation means 1410, but even if such processing is performed, no depiction is performed that increases the display area of the gauge image GG, so it is expected that it will be difficult to recognize that the remaining time for the reception period E has been reset, thereby maintaining a good sense of tension.

The "dynamic display of the integrated model image display IG" shown in Fig. 287 (a) to (d) is repeated until the reception period E ends. Therefore, if an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted during the reception period E, the "dynamic display of the integrated model image display IG" is terminated upon acceptance. However, if an operation on the special operation means 1410 is performed during the reception period E, this does not serve as a trigger for the "dynamic display of the integrated model image display IG" to be terminated. Also, even if an operation on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted during the reception period E, the process of generating the post-reception display D2 is performed, but the "dynamic display of the integrated model image display IG" is not terminated or restarted from the beginning, and the "dynamic display of the integrated model image display IG" that has been performed up until that point is simply continued.

According to the above-mentioned example of presentation, first, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including reception period A (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 4-A") and reception period E (second reception period of "Configuration 4-A") are prepared. Then, in reception period A (Fig. 273, Fig. 279), when a movement (operation) by the player is detected during the period, post-reception display A is displayed and reception sound A is output, but when a movement (operation) by the player is not detected during the period, post-reception display A is not displayed and reception sound A is not output. In reception period E (Fig. 286), when a movement (operation) by the player is detected during the period, post-reception display E1 is displayed and reception sound E1 is output, and even if a movement (operation) by the player is not detected during the period, the same post-reception display E1 as when a movement (operation) by the player is detected during the period is displayed, but reception sound E1 is not output.

With this configuration, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the acceptance period E, a disadvantage in terms of presentation can occur, making it possible to optimally maintain the sense of tension when the acceptance period E occurs.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, a reception period B (corresponding to the third reception period of "Configuration 4-A") is further provided, and in this reception period B (Fig. 274, Fig. 280), when a movement (operation) by the player is detected during the period, the post-reception display B is displayed and the reception sound B is output, and even if a movement (operation) by the player is not detected during the period, the same post-reception display B as when a movement (operation) by the player is detected during the period is displayed and the reception sound B is output. In other words, in this case, when a movement (operation) by the player is not accepted during the reception period, the same display change (post-reception change) as when the movement (operation) by the player is accepted may be generated in a way that causes a disadvantage in terms of presentation (reception period E) or in a way that does not cause a disadvantage in terms of presentation (reception period B). This makes it possible to appropriately maintain the sense of tension when a reception period occurs, while suppressing a decrease in interest in the game when the movement (operation) by the player is not accepted in time during the period.

In the above-mentioned example of the performance, during reception period A (Fig. 279), no text information related to the fact that reception is permitted is displayed, whereas during reception period B (Fig. 280) and reception period E (Fig. 286), text information related to the fact that reception is permitted is displayed. In this respect, the text information displayed during reception period B and the text information displayed during reception period E are different from each other. With this configuration, first, by checking the presence or absence of "text information related to the fact that reception is permitted" when a reception period occurs, it becomes possible to recognize whether or not it is a reception period for which the automatic button function is enabled. Also, if "text information related to the fact that reception is permitted" is displayed when a reception period occurs, it becomes possible to recognize the type of reception period that is occurring by checking the type of that text information.

As described above, in reception period B, when the automatic button function is enabled, a "disappearance effect (disappearance-related display)" appears (see FIG. 274 (j)). In this regard, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, in reception period E (FIG. 286), it is desirable to prevent the "disappearance effect (disappearance-related display)" from appearing when the automatic button function is enabled (such as when progressing from FIG. 286 (e) to (h)). With this configuration, it becomes possible to recognize the type of reception period based on whether or not a "disappearance effect (disappearance-related display)" appears when the automatic button function is enabled.

In addition, during reception period E (Fig. 286), when an action (operation) by the player is received and this triggers the model image display (integrated model image display IG) to be hidden, the "disappearance effect (disappearance-related display)" may not be displayed.

As described above, during reception period B, the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is displayed in one of a number of forms (see FIG. 232). In contrast, during reception period A and reception period E, it is desirable to display the model image display in only one form.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, during reception period A, the background image is not changed based on the acceptance of the player's operation (see FIG. 279), but during reception periods B and E, the background image is changed based on the acceptance of the player's operation. With this configuration, the automatic button function is enabled, making it easier to recognize that the post-reception display has been displayed, thereby improving interest in the game.

However, during reception period E, even if an action (operation) by the player is accepted, if this is due to an operation on the "sword decoration 5001", the post-reception display E2 is displayed but the background image is not changed to a different background image. With this configuration, while the post-reception display E2 is displayed in response to the acceptance, the player can recognize that the reception period E has not yet ended by checking that the background image that should have been changed has not yet been changed.

In reception period E, multiple objects (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001, but may also include the special operation means 1410) are set as objects (operation means) that are the targets of the player's actions (operations), and different reception sounds are output when the player's action (operation) on the operation button 410 out of the multiple objects is accepted and when the player's action (operation) on the sword decoration 5001 is accepted. This makes it possible to ideally suggest that different performance effects will be produced depending on which of the multiple objects is operated.

In addition, during reception period B, based on the result of the performance judgment (jackpot judgment), there may be cases where a "reception sound A" corresponding to reception period A is audibly output, and cases where a "reception sound B" different from the "reception sound A" corresponding to reception period A is audibly output.

Also, in the above-mentioned example presentation, during reception period E, the player is presented with multiple options (here, operating the operation button 410, operating the sword decoration 5001, or operating the special operation means 1410), and different displays (post-reception displays E1, E2) appear as post-reception displays depending on which of these options is selected by the player's action (operation). If none of the multiple options are selected within that period (here, none of the player's actions (operations) are detected), then the post-reception display appears as a display (post-reception display E1) that appears when a specific option from the multiple options is selected (here, when the operation button 410 is operated).

With this configuration, if no operation is performed within the reception period E, only the same post-reception display will always be displayed, which encourages the player to perform selective operations within the reception period E.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, multiple operation means are provided as operation means, including operation button 410 (corresponding to the first operation means (first operation receiving section) of "Configuration 9-A") and sword ornament 5001 (corresponding to the second operation means (second operation receiving section) of "Configuration 9-A"), and multiple types of reception periods are provided as reception periods, including reception period E (corresponding to the specific reception period of "Configuration 9-A"). During reception period E, both the acceptance of operations on the operation button 410 and the acceptance of operations on the sword ornamentation 5001 are permitted as acceptances for causing a display change corresponding to that reception period E, and when an operation is accepted on the operation button 410, a post-reception display E1 (a specific display change) can be generated, and when an operation is accepted on the sword ornamentation 5001, the post-reception display E1 (a specific display change) is not generated, but a display change (post-reception display E2) different from the post-reception display E1 (specific display change) can be generated, which adds to the fun of deciding which operating means to operate.

In addition, when the operation button 410 is operated during the reception period E, this triggers the end of the reception period E, but when the sword ornament 5001 is operated, this triggers the end of the reception period E, and instead extends the remaining time. More specifically, when the operation button 410 is operated during the reception period E, this triggers a state in which the remaining time of the reception period E1 is not used up. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to provide a new level of presentation for the reception period E using multiple operation means, and it becomes possible to provide a variety of interesting presentations based on this level of presentation.

However, in the reception period E in the above-mentioned performance example, the remaining time of the reception period E can be extended simply by performing an operation on the sword decoration 5001, so there is a concern that the sense of tension may not be maintained appropriately. Therefore, a reception period F different from the reception period E is further provided, and in the reception period F, as in the reception period E, an "integrated model image display IG" modeled after the operation button 410, a "sword decoration image SYG" modeled after the sword decoration 5001, and a "special model image TM" modeled after the special operation means (the button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 are displayed. And, even if a reception is made within the reception period F, as in the case of the reception period E described above (see FIG. 286),
When an operation on the "operation button 410" is accepted, a reception sound F1 is audibly output and a post-acceptance display F1 is displayed based on the acceptance.
When an operation is performed on the "special operation means 1410", no reception sound is generated, no display change is caused, and the reception period E is not terminated (no reaction occurs, and it is the same as a state where no operation is performed),
When an operation on the "sword decoration 5001" is accepted, a reception sound F2 is audibly output based on the acceptance, and a display change (post-acceptance display F2) different from the post-acceptance display F1 is displayed. Furthermore, even if an operation on the "sword decoration 5001" is accepted during the acceptance period F, the remaining time of the acceptance period F may not be reset (extended), and the remaining time of the acceptance period F may continue to be consumed as is. In other words, in this case, when an operation on the "sword decoration 5001" is accepted during the acceptance period F, the post-acceptance display F2 is displayed as a trigger, but the acceptance period F is not terminated or the remaining time of the acceptance period F is not reset, and the acceptance period F will continue from this point onwards (obviously, acceptance of operations on the operation button 410 is also permitted).

With this configuration, even if a reception period occurs during which the player is presented with the options of "operating the operation button 410," "operating the sword decoration 5001," or "operating the special operation means 1410," the remaining time in the reception period is not necessarily reset (extended) when an operation on the "sword decoration 5001" is accepted, so it is expected that the sense of tension will be maintained in an optimal manner.

Furthermore, it is desirable that reception period F is set as a target for which the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled, just as in reception period E. And when the automatic button function is enabled for reception period F, it is also desirable to display the "post-reception display F1" that appears when the operation button 410 is accepted within reception period F, just as in the case where the automatic button function is enabled for reception period E. However, in this case, when the automatic button function is enabled for reception period F, unlike the case of reception period E (where reception sound E1 is not audibly output), it is more desirable to audibly output the reception sound F1.

With this configuration, when a reception period ends without any reception, it becomes possible to indicate whether the reception period was reception period E or reception period F, thereby preventing a decline in interest in playing the game.

In this case, even during reception period F, it is desirable to display the "integrated model image display IG" as a model image display that mimics the operation button 410, and to prevent the display area of the gauge image GG included in the integrated model image display IG from decreasing over time.

In addition, in reception period F, as in reception period E, although multiple types of model image displays are displayed, it is desirable that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG used to indicate the remaining time is associated with only one of the multiple types of model image displays (integrated model image display IG).

Also, in reception period F, as in reception period E, as time passes in reception period F, the "integrated imitation image display IG" dynamically displays the portion of the operation button 410 that mimics the "operation receiving portion" (button imitation image BMG) as if it were performing a "movement when operated by the player," as shown in Figures 287 (a) to (d), and it is desirable that the "sword decoration image SYG" and "special imitation image TM" statically display the portion of the sword decoration 5001 that mimics the "operation receiving portion" and the portion of the special operation means 1410 that mimics the "operation receiving portion," without dynamically displaying them.

In addition, during reception period E and reception period F, the imitation image display (special imitation image TM) that imitates the special operation means 1410 does not necessarily have to be displayed, and the pachinko machine 1 may not be equipped with the special operation means 1410 itself.

In the above-mentioned example of the performance, multiple reception periods are prepared, including "reception period A or reception period B or reception period D (corresponding to the first reception period of "configuration 10-A")" and "reception period E (corresponding to the second reception period of "configuration 10-A"). In reception period A (or reception periods B, D), a specific Moji image display (here, an integrated Moji image display IG) is displayed as a Moji image display that imitates the operation receiving portion, and in reception period E, multiple Moji image displays (here, an integrated Moji image display IG, a sword decoration image SYG, and a special Moji image TM) are displayed as a Moji image display that imitates the operation receiving portion, and the Moji image display can be executed as a dynamic display that depicts the movement when the operation receiving portion is moved by the operation by the player.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned presentation example, the replica image display is executed as a "dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving part is moved by the player's operation" (e.g., reception periods A, B, E) in some cases, and not as a "dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving part is moved by the player's operation" (e.g., reception period E in other words). In this case, even in a situation where the replica image display is displayed, it is possible that the player can easily recognize what operation to perform, but also that it is difficult to recognize what operation to perform, and therefore it is expected that the tension until the player's operation is accepted will be appropriately maintained.

In particular, in the above-mentioned example presentation, multiple operation receiving parts are prepared, including the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001, and during reception period A (or reception periods B and D), an imitation image display (sword decoration image SYG) modeled after the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed, but an imitation image display (integrated imitation image display IG) modeled after the operation button 410 is displayed, and at this time, the imitation image display modeled after the operation button 410 is executed as a dynamic display depicting the movement of the operation button 410 when it is moved by the player's operation.

In contrast, during reception period E, at least both a model image display (integrated model image display IG) modeled after the operation button 410 and a model image display (sword decoration image SYG) modeled after the sword decoration 5001 are displayed, and one of the integrated model image display IG and the sword decoration image SYG (here, the integrated model image display IG) is executed as a dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving part of the one is moved by the operation of the player, but the other of the integrated model image display IG and the sword decoration image SYG (here, the sword decoration image SYG) is not executed as a dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving part of the other is moved by the operation of the player.

With this configuration, when a mock image is displayed, it may be executed as a dynamic display or it may not be executed as a dynamic display, which allows for a variety of presentation possibilities and is expected to increase interest in the game.

In addition, during the reception period E, when an operation is performed on the operation receiving section (here, the operation button 410) corresponding to the model image display (here, the integrated model image display IG) on the side where the dynamic display is performed and this is accepted, a first display change (post-reception display E1) can be generated as a trigger, and when an operation is performed on the operation receiving section (here, the sword decoration body 5001) corresponding to the model image display (here, the sword decoration image SYG) on the side where the dynamic display is not performed and this is accepted, a second display change (post-reception display E2) can be generated as a trigger. In other words, in this case, regardless of whether the dynamic display is performed or not, the post-reception display according to the type of the side where the acceptance is made appears, so that the model image display on the side where the dynamic display is not performed can be given a "theatrical meaning". For example, even if an operation is performed on the operation receiving section (here, the sword decoration body 5001) corresponding to the model image display (here, the sword decoration image SYG) on the side where the dynamic display is not performed, it becomes possible to give a surprise by the display change that occurs as a result of this.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, multiple operation receiving sections including the operation button 410 and the special operation means 1410 are prepared, and during reception period A (or reception periods B and D), a model image display simulating the special operation means 1410 (special model image TM) is not performed, but a model image display simulating the operation button 410 (integrated model image display IG) is performed, and at this time, the model image display simulating the operation button 410 is executed as a dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation button 410 is moved by the player's operation.

In contrast, during reception period E, at least both a mosaic image display (integrated mosaic image display IG) modeled after the operation button 410 and a mosaic image display (special mosaic image TM) modeled after the special operation means 1410 are displayed, and one of the integrated mosaic image display IG and the special mosaic image TM (here, the integrated mosaic image display IG) is executed as a dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving portion of one of them is made movable by the operation by the player, but the other of the integrated mosaic image display IG and the special mosaic image TM (here, the special mosaic image TM) is not executed as a dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving portion of the other of them is made movable by the operation by the player.

With this configuration, when a mock image is displayed, it may be executed as a dynamic display or it may not be executed as a dynamic display, which allows for a variety of presentation possibilities and is expected to increase interest in the game.

Moreover, during the reception period E, when an operation is performed on the operation receiving section (here, operation button 410) corresponding to the mosaic image display on the side where dynamic display is performed (here, integrated mosaic image display IG), this can trigger a first display change (post-reception display E1), but when an operation is performed on the operation receiving section (here, special operation means 1410) corresponding to the mosaic image display on the side where dynamic display is not performed (here, special mosaic image TM), no display change (post-reception display) is triggered by this. In other words, in this case, even if a mosaic image display (here, special mosaic image TM) is displayed during the reception period, this will not necessarily be accepted when the corresponding operation receiving section (special operation means 1410) is operated, so it is expected that the sense of tension during the reception period will be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In this case, when an operation is performed on the special operation means 1410 during reception period A (or reception periods B, D) when the special model image TM is not displayed, no display change (post-reception display) will occur as a result. However, when an operation is performed on the special operation means 1410 during reception period A (or reception periods B, D) when the special model image TM is not displayed, a display change (post-reception display) may also be generated as a result. With this configuration, the validity of the operation cannot be determined solely based on the presence or absence of the model image display, making it possible to maintain a sense of tension in an optimal manner.

In the above-mentioned example of the performance, during reception period E, the sword decoration image SYG and the special imitation image TM are displayed as still images. However, the sword decoration image SYG and the special imitation image TM need not be executed as dynamic displays depicting the movement when the operation receiving part (the sword decoration body 5001 in the case of the sword decoration image SYG, and the special operation means 1410 in the case of the special imitation image TM) is moved by the operation by the player, and may be executed as dynamic displays if they are, for example, movements (such as rotation) different from the movements when the operation receiving part is moved by the operation by the player.

In the above-mentioned example of the performance, first, multiple operation means (multiple operation receiving units) including the operation button 410 (corresponding to the specific operation means (specific operation receiving unit) of "Configuration 11-A") are prepared, and multiple reception periods are prepared, including reception period A or reception period B (corresponding to the first reception period of "Configuration 11-A"), and reception period E (corresponding to the second reception period of "Configuration 11-A"). Then, during reception period A (or reception period B), a model image display (button model image BMG) modeled after the operation button 410 and a specific image (gauge image GG) corresponding to the button model image BMG are displayed, and "a specific remaining time display that suggests the remaining time during which operations on the operation button 41 are permitted to be accepted by reducing the display area of the gauge image GG according to the passage of time" is performed.

In contrast, during reception period E, a button imitation image BMG (integrated imitation image display IG) that imitates the operation button 410 is displayed, but the "remaining time specific display that indicates the remaining time during which operations on the operation button 41 are permitted to be accepted by reducing the display area of the gauge image GG over time" is not displayed.

With this configuration, even if a button imitation image BMG (integrated imitation image display IG) that imitates the operation button 410 is displayed, the "remaining time specific display that indicates the remaining time during which operations on the operation button 41 are permitted to be accepted by reducing the display area of the gauge image GG over time" is not necessarily performed, so it is possible to appropriately maintain the sense of tension when the acceptance period occurs.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, during the reception period E, although the button-like image BMG (integrated image display IG) that imitates the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG that imitates a different operation means (sword decoration 5001) are displayed, the remaining time display (the above-mentioned remaining time specific display) that suggests (depicts) how much time is left in the reception period E is not performed. In other words, in this case, during the reception period E, although both the reception of operations to the operation button 410 and the reception of operations to a different operation means (sword decoration 5001) are permitted, the above-mentioned "remaining time specific display" is not performed. This prevents the player from getting carried away by the fact that both the reception of operations to the operation button 410 and the reception of operations to the sword decoration 5001 are permitted, and makes it possible to appropriately maintain the sense of tension when the reception period E is occurring.

It goes without saying that even in a situation where there is no remaining time display (the remaining time specific display described above) that suggests (depicts) how much time is left in the reception period E, the remaining time in the reception period E is decreasing.

Also, in the above-mentioned example presentation, during reception period E, a button-like image BMG modeled after the operating button 410 is displayed as an image integrated with a border decoration image SSG that defines the display area of the gauge image GG. However, the gauge image GG is displayed in such a way that its display area is maintained without decreasing over time. That is, in this case, since the remaining time of the reception period E is decreasing even though the display area of the gauge image GG is not decreased at all, it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained when there is a large display area of the gauge image GG remaining. The display area of the gauge image GG is not decreased until the remaining time of the reception period E becomes "0" and it is no longer displayed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, during reception period E, of the button-like image BMG that resembles the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG that resembles the sword decoration 5001, only the button-like image BMG is displayed as an image integrated with the specific image (gauge image GG) used to display the remaining time. In other words, in this case, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the gauge image GG corresponds to the sword decoration image SYG (and thus whether or not operation reception for the sword decoration 5001 is enabled), so the sense of tension can be maintained in an optimal manner.

In this case, even during the reception period F described above, it is desirable to display only the button-modeled image BMG, which is modeled after the operation button 410, and the sword decoration image SYG, which is modeled after the sword decoration 5001, as an image integrated with the specific image (gauge image GG) used to display the remaining time.

In addition, a reception period G for the post-reception display G can be generated, during which the sword decoration image SYG modeled after the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed, and the button model image BMG modeled after the operation button 410 is displayed as the integrated model image display IG. However, unlike reception periods A and B, during reception period G, the gauge image GG in the integrated model image display IG is displayed in such a way that its display area is not reduced over time, but is maintained. With this configuration, even if a reception period occurs during which only the button model image BMG (integrated model image display IG) is displayed as the model image display, the gauge image GG does not necessarily reduce its display area, so that the sense of tension during the reception period can be appropriately maintained.

In the above-mentioned performance example, during reception periods E, F, and G, the integrated model image display IG including the gauge image GG is displayed as a model image display simulating the operation button 410, and the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, making it difficult to recognize the remaining time during reception periods E, F, and G. However, instead of this, during reception periods E, F, and G, unlike reception periods A and B (integrated model image display IG), the model image display simulating the operation button 410 may be displayed as an "image not including the gauge image GG", so that the remaining time is not displayed. In other words, in this case, during reception periods E, F, and G, the gauge image GG will not be displayed anywhere in the display area.

When the mock-up image display of the operation button 410 is displayed as an "image not including the gauge image GG", it is desirable that the "image not including the gauge image GG" is displayed as an image that includes at least the "button mock-up image BMG included in the integrated mock-up image display IG". In other words, in this case, when the button mock-up image BMG is displayed, it will either be displayed as an image integrated with the gauge image GG or as an image not integrated with the gauge image GG, which makes it possible to appropriately maintain the sense of tension when the reception period occurs.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, first, at least the following operation means are prepared as operation means.
- A sword ornament 5001 (corresponding to the first operation means of "Configuration 12-A") having a handle portion 5012 (corresponding to the first operation receiving portion of "Configuration 12-A") that is displaced when operated by a player, and a sheath portion 5020 (corresponding to the first peripheral decorative portion of "Configuration 12-A") that is provided on the periphery of the handle portion 5012 and does not displace even when operated by the handle portion 5012 (corresponding to the first operation means of "Configuration 12-A") (see Figure 146, etc.), and - a performance operation unit 400 (corresponding to the second operation means of "Configuration 12-A") having an operation button 410 (corresponding to the second operation receiving portion of "Configuration 12-A") that is displaced when operated by a player, and a frame unit 415 (corresponding to the second peripheral decorative portion of "Configuration 12-A") that is provided on the periphery of the operation button 410 and does not displace even when operated by the operation button 410 (corresponding to the second operation means of "Configuration 12-A") (see Figure 44, etc.).

When the sword decoration image SYG modeled after the sword decoration 5001 is displayed, it is possible to display a handle image modeled after the handle 5012 (corresponding to the first receiving part image in "Configuration 12-A") and a handle peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the handle image (corresponding to the first peripheral decoration image in "Configuration 12-A") (see FIG. 287, etc.), and when the model image display modeled after the performance operation unit 400 (here, the integrated model image display IG) is displayed, it is possible to display a button model image BMG modeled after the operation button 410 (corresponding to the second receiving part image in "Configuration 12-A") and a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery of the button model image BMG (see FIG. 287, etc.), and the handle peripheral decoration image and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed as different images.

With this configuration, because the border decoration images are different, even if the appearance of the operating means themselves is similar, the appearance can be made significantly different when displaying the sword decoration image SYG and when displaying the integrated model image display IG, which is expected to make it easier to distinguish which operating means to operate.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, the handle peripheral decoration image in the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as an image display that does not include any parts that imitate decorative parts that do not actually exist in the pachinko machine 1 and imitates the sheath 5020, while the peripheral decoration image SSG in the integrated imitated image display IG is displayed as an image that includes at least a part that imitates a decorative part that does not actually exist in the pachinko machine 1. In other words, in this case, when the "sword decoration image SYG" is displayed, it is possible to favorably recognize that a situation has been given in which an operation opportunity has been given to the sword decoration 5001. In contrast, when the "integrated imitated image display IG" is displayed, it is possible to provide a situation in which an operation opportunity has been given to the presentation operation unit 400 (operation button 410) as a situation with a higher level of presentation. In this case, it is desirable to provide the "performance operation unit 400" as a component having an operation receiving portion (operation button 410) larger than the "sword decoration 5001", so that even if a peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed that includes at least a portion that imitates a decoration that does not actually exist within the pachinko machine 1, it is not difficult to know which operation means to operate.

In this way, in order to present the situation in which an operation opportunity has been given to the performance operation unit 400 (operation button 410) as a "situation with higher performance," it is desirable for the peripheral decoration image SSG to be displayed as an image that imitates a fictitious decorative part that does not actually exist in the pachinko machine 1. However, in order to make it easier to recognize that a situation in which an operation opportunity has been given to the performance operation unit 400 (operation button 410) is being given, a part of the peripheral decoration image SSG may include a part that imitates the frame unit 415.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, of the handle peripheral decoration image in the sword decoration image SYG and the peripheral decoration image SSG in the integrated model image display IG, only the peripheral decoration image SSG has a display area defined therein for displaying the remaining time, and as mentioned above, the remaining time can be displayed using this display area.

The "sword decoration image SYG" is displayed as an integrated image display of a handle image modeled after the handle 5012 and a handle border decoration image that decorates the border of the handle image, and the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed as an integrated image display of a button image BMG modeled after the operation button 410 and a border decoration image SSG that decorates the border of the button image BMG. In this regard, the "sword decoration image SYG" does not have separate "handle image" and "handle border decoration image" as image data, but is prepared as a single integrated image data. Similarly, the image data of the "integrated model image display IG" does not have separate "button image BMG" and "border decoration image SSG" but is prepared as a single integrated image data.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, first, multiple operation receiving parts are prepared as operation receiving parts, including the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 (corresponding to the first operation receiving part in "configuration 13-A"), the handle portion 5012 of the sword ornament 5001 (corresponding to the second operation receiving part in "configuration 13-A"), and the operation receiving part of the special operation means 1410 (corresponding to the third operation receiving part in "configuration 13-A").As reception periods, multiple types of reception periods are prepared, including reception period E (corresponding to the specific reception period in "configuration 13-A"). During reception period E (Fig. 286), the "integrated model image display IG (within button model image BMG)" modeled after the operation button 410, the "sword decoration image SYG (within handle peripheral decoration image)" modeled after the handle 5012, and the "special model image TM" modeled after the operation receiving portion of the special operation means 1410 are all displayed, and when an operation is received for the operation button 410 among the multiple operation receiving portions, at least the "sword decoration image SYG" and "special model image TM" modeled after the operation receiving portion that has not been received among the "integrated model image display IG", "sword decoration image SYG", and "special model image TM" are made invisible (see Fig. 286).

With the above configuration, the model image display (sword decoration image SYG, special model image TM) that models an operation receiving part (the handle part 5012 of the sword decoration 5001, the operation receiving part of the special operation means 1410) other than the operation button 410 for which an operation has been received is hidden, making it easy to recognize whether further operation is required for an operation receiving part (the handle part 5012 of the sword decoration 5001, the operation receiving part of the special operation means 1410) for which an operation has not been received even though a model image display was displayed.

In addition, during the reception period E, although the "integrated model image display IG", "sword decoration image SYG", and "special model image TM" are displayed, among the operation button 410, sword decoration 5001, and special operation means 1410, the special operation means 1410 is set so that the acceptance of operations (acceptance of post-acceptance display) is not enabled (not permitted). That is, as described above, during the reception period E, when an operation is accepted for the operation button 410, a first display change (post-acceptance display E1) occurs, and when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001, a second display change (post-acceptance display E2) occurs, but no operation is accepted for the special operation means 1410, and no display change is triggered by this operation. This makes it possible to maintain the presentation and tension in an optimal manner until the operation by the player is accepted during the reception period E.

In addition, during reception period E, when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001, a second display change (post-acceptance display E2) occurs, but this acceptance does not cause the "integrated model image display IG," "sword decoration image SYG," and "special model image TM" to be hidden, and their display states continue (Figure 286 (i)). With this configuration, it is possible to cause a display change that is significantly different from when an operation is accepted for the operation button 410, which is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In particular, during reception period E, when an operation is received for the sword decoration 5001, this is used as a trigger to increase the remaining time for said reception period E (progression from (i) to (e) in Fig. 286), so that in order to realize a performance that calls for further operations, it is expected that a decrease in interest in the game due to a lack of remaining time will be suppressed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, during reception period E, when an operation is accepted on operation button 410, a first display change (post-reception display E1) occurs, but while the first display change (post-reception display E1) is occurring, the "integrated imitation image display IG" is displayed, and the "sword decoration image SYG" and "special imitation image TM" are both hidden (Fig. 286 (f)). This makes it possible to recognize that the post-reception display E1 occurred due to the acceptance of an operation on operation button 410, even after an operation is accepted while multiple imitation images are being displayed.

At this time, the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed in a position different from the position in which it was displayed during reception period E (Figure 286 (f)), which makes it possible to indicate that reception period E has ended.

Also, in the above-mentioned example presentation, when the remaining time in reception period E runs out, the above-mentioned automatic button function is enabled, and the same display screen appears as when an operation is accepted on operation button 410 during reception period E (see FIG. 286 (h)). In this case as well, when the first display change (post-reception display E1) occurs, the "integrated imitation image display IG" is displayed, and both the "sword decoration image SYG" and the "special imitation image TM" are hidden, making it possible to recognize that this is the post-reception display E1 that corresponds to operation button 410.

In the reception period D shown in FIG. 284, when the text information (Please press) is made invisible, the imitation image display is maintained in a displayed state (FIG. 284(e)), but the imitation image display may also be made invisible at the same time that the text information is made invisible. In this case, when the text information (Please press) is returned to a displayed state again, the imitation image display will also be returned to a displayed state again (FIG. 284(f)).

[Operation reception presentation with distinctive image display state]
As illustrated in FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the start winning (reserved consumption). Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is capable of executing a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) as to which of a plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern is to be selectively displayed. Note that, depending on the result of this performance determination, all of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the above-mentioned selected variation pattern may be executed in sequence, or none of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) may be executed.

As described above, when such a performance judgment (variation pattern judgment, advance notice judgment, etc.) is made, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance content according to the result of the performance judgment, and a variable performance using a decorative pattern according to the result of the jackpot judgment is executed together with an expected performance (advance notice performance) related to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movement of the moving body (gimmick performance). As a result, when the variable performance using the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected performance related to the background depiction and the movement of the moving body, etc., and the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the player can be given a special jackpot game or a transition to a high probability game state.

In this configuration, the variable presentation of the decorative patterns serves as a presentation with the "function of indicating whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination," and the expectation presentation related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body serves as a presentation with the "function of suggesting the expectation of a jackpot being obtained, that is, the percentage (including 0% and 100%)." In other words, the player enjoys playing the game through these presentations.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if a specific variation pattern is selected from among the high expectation variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into an SP reach (such as a reach performance accompanied by a background change) as a result of the variation pattern determination, no matter which result is obtained as the performance determination (such as a preview determination), when the pattern performance based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach (when a specified condition is met), an acceptance permission state (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the variation pattern determination, when a special result is obtained in the performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (when a predetermined condition is met), an acceptance allowance state (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination, the acceptance allowance state (valid period) does not occur even if the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. In addition, the acceptance allowance state (valid period) generated in the predetermined variation pattern is executed as a different performance (post-reception performance) from the acceptance allowance state (valid period) generated when the pattern performance based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a reception period can be generated during which the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is permitted, and when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the reception period, a display change (post-acceptance performance) occurs according to the type of reception period that has occurred.

During the reception period, an action target display can be displayed that indicates which is the "target of the player's action." Such an action target display can be displayed, for example, as an imitation image display in which the object (operation means) that is the target of the player's action is expressed as an image. In particular, the "action target display" in this presentation example is displayed as an imitation image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple forms with different degrees of expectation.

During the acceptance period, a remaining time display can be displayed to indicate the time remaining during which the acceptance of the player's action (operation) is permitted. Such a remaining time display can be implemented, for example, as a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time. In particular, in this example presentation, multiple modes are prepared for at least one of the modes of the frame image and the gauge image (for example, the rate at which the display area of the gauge image is reduced, an indication of the degree of expectation, an indication of the type of operation means, etc.), and the display is implemented in any one of these modes.

Note that, with regard to the fluctuation patterns that will generate an acceptance-permitted state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during the SP reach no matter which result is obtained as the preview performance judgment, other than the above-mentioned "specific fluctuation patterns" may be provided. With regard to the fluctuation patterns that will generate an acceptance-permitted state (valid period) at a predetermined timing no matter which result is obtained as the preview performance judgment, it is preferable that they are not included in the low-expectation fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns), or that they may be included but that their selection rate (occurrence rate) is made low (although this is not necessarily required).

However, the acceptance permission state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions, etc., only executes a post-acceptance display (post-operation display) such as a display change on the performance display device 1600, or generates a performance sound change on the speaker, a change in the light emitted by a lamp, or a performance action by a movable decoration, as long as an operation by the player is detected within the set time (valid period). Therefore, the acceptance permission state (valid period) itself has little performance value, and there is a concern that it may reduce interest in the game related to the acceptance period.

Incidentally, in the above-mentioned and later-mentioned examples, the "operation (action) by the player" to be detected is not limited to operations that are directly operated by the player (pressing or unsheathing the sword), such as the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001", but also includes "contact actions by the player on a specific part" to be detected by a touch sensor, and "actions by the player in a specific space" to be detected by a non-contact sensor. In short, it is sufficient to have one or more reception means (operation means) that accepts actions by the player (pressing, unsheathing the sword, touching, non-contact, etc.).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, the state of the model image display when the player is given an operation opportunity (opportunity to act) is given the following special presentation. Note that it is not necessary to have all of the presentations (configurations) described below; for example, it is possible to reduce interest in playing by only having one of the presentations (any configuration), or it is possible to selectively have some configurations that are considered necessary to obtain further effects, or it is possible to appropriately adopt a configuration that is described as applicable (desirable) to another configuration. Furthermore, the presentations (configurations) described below are merely examples, and it is sufficient that they have any one configuration that can suppress a decrease in interest in playing related to the acceptance period.

[Configuration 1-B]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods are prepared, including a specific reception period in which the action target display (for example, a mock image display having a plurality of modes imitating the target of the action of the player and having different expectation levels) is not displayed and "a valid reception judgment that the action of the player is a valid action" is permitted. Note that the "specific reception period" according to the configuration 1-B is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 1-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" according to another configuration, or it may mean a different reception period from the "specific reception period" according to another configuration. However, in such a specific reception period, it is difficult to recognize from what timing the valid reception judgment is permitted, and further, whether the valid reception judgment is already permitted, so there is a concern that "only players who are sensitive to such productions can enjoy it."

In this regard, in pachinko machine 1, when such a specific acceptance period occurs, a state in which a valid acceptance judgment is permitted has been entered, or an acceptance permission sound can be output to indicate that a valid acceptance judgment will be permitted. Therefore, although there is still a situation in which the action target display (for example, an imitation image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple forms with different degrees of expectation) is not displayed and therefore the player is unable to fully recognize which is the target of the action to be taken, the player can recognize that he or she is in a situation in which some action is required (a situation in which an opportunity to operate has been given), and it is expected that many players will enjoy the presentation.

The reception-permitted sound is not limited to the configuration 1-B, and may be generated before the specific reception period and end before the specific reception period, may be output to span the timing of the specific reception period, or may be generated after the timing of the specific reception period and end within the specific reception period. The reception-permitted sound may be realized as a sound that, when output, always gives (or has been given) some kind of action opportunity (opportunity to operate) to the player. Furthermore, the "state in which the action target display (model image display) is not displayed" is not limited to the configuration 1-B, and may also be used in other configurations as long as the "action target display (model image display)" is not visible on the display screen. For example, it also includes a state in which an image is displayed on a layer but cannot be seen because an image on another layer is displayed preferentially.

It is also desirable that the reception permission sound output when a specific reception period occurs is also output (as a reception permission sound) when other reception periods occur. For example, if the reception permission sound is also output when a reception period occurs in which the same action opportunity (operation opportunity) as the specific reception period is granted, it will be possible to suitably suggest to the player which action opportunity (operation opportunity) will be granted (has been granted) even when the action target display (e.g., model image display) is not displayed. Also, for example, if the reception permission sound is also output when a reception period occurs in which an action opportunity (operation opportunity) different from the specific reception period is granted, it will be difficult for the player to predict which action opportunity (operation opportunity) will be granted when the action target display (e.g., model image display) is not displayed, but it will be possible to suggest that some action opportunity (operation opportunity) is granted (has been granted).

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 1-B" is adopted, when the specific reception period occurs, first, a first display state in which the action target display (e.g., a model image display) is hidden (not displayed) is displayed. Then, while the specific reception period continues, a second display state in which the action target display (e.g., a model image display) is displayed may be displayed. That is, in this case, during the specific reception period, the action target display (e.g., a model image display) is initially displayed, and only players who are sensitive to such effects can enjoy it. However, by displaying the action target display (e.g., a model image display) while the specific reception period continues (before the set time (valid time) has ended), many players who are not sensitive to effects can notice this (the specific reception period) and enjoy the effects. It is also expected that such effects will help develop the ability to discern that a so-called "hidden button" has occurred.

In addition, in this case, it is desirable that the action target display can be displayed with one of a plurality of different expectation levels in the second display state. In other words, from the player's perspective, if an action is not accepted in the first display state but is accepted in the second display state, it will be revealed to those around that the player did not realize that the specific acceptance period occurred until the action target display (e.g., the model image display) was displayed, and there is a concern that the player's interest in the game will decrease due to the player's insensitivity to such effects being revealed. In this regard, if the action target display is displayed with one of a plurality of different expectation levels in the second display state, even if the player accepts an action in the second display state, it will be possible to make the player appear as if "the player realized that the state was one in which action acceptance was permitted from the first display state, but chose not to accept the action in the first display state because he wanted to see the expectation level suggested by the action target display (e.g., the model image display)," which is expected to suitably suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, due to the nature of the button as a so-called "hidden button," it is difficult for the player to accurately recognize when the specific acceptance period, which allows the "valid acceptance judgment that the player's action is a valid action," has occurred. In this case, if the button is operated a little before the specific acceptance period occurs, the player may mistakenly think that the "valid acceptance judgment" is not made, and the specific acceptance period may end without the player's action (operation). Therefore, when the "configuration 1-B" is adopted, even if the player performs an action (operation) before the specific acceptance period, the action (operation) is not considered to be a "valid acceptance judgment" at that time, but it is desirable to make it possible to make a "valid acceptance judgment" (based on) the action (operation) performed by the player before the specific acceptance period after the specific acceptance period has started. With this configuration, even if the action (operation) is performed a little before the specific acceptance period occurs, it is possible to accept it after the specific acceptance period occurs, and it is possible to execute a post-acceptance performance triggered by this. However, in this case, the detection of whether or not a player has performed an action (operation) will be required to be performed regardless of whether or not an acceptance period has occurred during which "a valid acceptance determination that a player's action is a valid action" is permitted.

In addition, at this time, it is desirable that the action (operation) performed before the occurrence of the specific acceptance period can be accepted (valid acceptance judgment) as a valid judgment in the first display state, not in the second display state after the occurrence of the specific acceptance period. With this configuration, the action (operation) is judged as valid when a short time has passed since the player performed the action (operation) (for example, the time when the first display state (specific acceptance period) occurs) and the action target display (for example, a model image display) is not displayed, and thus the post-acceptance performance begins to be executed. This makes it possible to suggest that the action by the player has been properly accepted, rather than the so-called "automatic acceptance function" when the action target display (for example, a model image display) is displayed but no action (operation) is performed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Configuration 2-B]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. In the first reception period, regardless of the timing of the "reception validity judgment that the action by the player is a valid action," the action target display (here, a model image display that imitates the target of the action by the player and has a plurality of modes with different expectation degrees) is always displayed, and in the second reception period, regardless of the timing of the above-mentioned reception validity judgment, the action target display (here, a model image display that imitates the target of the action by the player and has a plurality of modes with different expectation degrees) is always not displayed. Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to the configuration 2-B are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 2-B. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to other configurations, may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other, or may mean reception periods different from those reception periods.

With this configuration, by providing two types of acceptance periods with completely different presentation characteristics, it is possible to provide a more distinct response when requesting actions from the player (providing an opportunity to perform an action), which is expected to increase interest in the game.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 2-B" is adopted, a third acceptance period is further provided, and during the third acceptance period, depending on the timing of the acceptance validity determination that the player's action (operation) is a valid action (valid operation), the action target display (model image display) may or may not be displayed. Note that the "third acceptance period" in the configuration 2-B is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 2-B. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "third acceptance period" in the other configurations, may mean a different acceptance period, or may mean a different acceptance period from those acceptance periods.

This configuration makes it possible to make it appear as if a "first reception period" is occurring in which the action target display (imitation image display) is always displayed regardless of when the reception validity determination is made, or as if a "second reception period" is occurring in which the action target display (imitation image display) is always not displayed regardless of when the reception validity determination is made. Through this production feature that creates uncertainty, it is possible to optimally maintain the sense of tension when a reception period occurs.

[Configuration 3-B]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, when a "valid reception judgment that an action by a player is a valid action" is made during the first reception period, a first post-reception performance can be executed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectation levels based on the fact that the reception valid judgment has been made, and when a "valid reception judgment that an action by a player is a valid action" is made during the second reception period, a second post-reception performance can be executed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectation levels based on the fact that the reception valid judgment has been made. Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to the configuration 3-B are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 3-B. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to other configurations, may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other, or may mean reception periods different from those reception periods.

In this regard, in pachinko machine 1, whether a "valid reception judgment" is made during the first reception period or during the second reception period, the disappearance EF performance can be executed using at least a part of the display target area (specific area) of the action target display (here, a mock image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple forms with different degrees of expectation) based on the valid reception judgment being made, so that it becomes easy to recognize that a state has been reached in which a valid reception judgment has been made properly (a state in which the reception period has ended due to the player's operation being accepted).

The disappearance EF performance is displayed using at least a part of the display target area (specific area) of the action target display (mock image display), but in this case, the action target display (mock image display) does not necessarily have to be displayed. Also, the disappearance EF performance includes, for example, the above-mentioned "aspect in which the mock image display becomes difficult to see." In this case, it may be a mode in which the disappearance performance display is displayed in a predetermined area including at least a part of the specific area in which the action target display (mock image display) is displayed, a mode in which a performance is executed using a performance body that is located in a position that overlaps at least a part of the specific area in which the action target display (mock image display) is displayed when viewed from the front, or a mode in which the action target display (mock image display) itself is changed (modified) to a display that is difficult to see (for example, by making the display smaller, blurring it, changing the transparency setting, etc.).

As will be described later, when this "Configuration 3-B" is adopted, during the first acceptance period, depending on when a valid acceptance determination is made that determines that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action (valid operation), the action target display (model image display) may or may not be displayed.

In this case, first, when a valid reception determination is made in a situation where the action target display (model image display) is displayed, this is used as a trigger to execute the disappearance EF performance in a predetermined area including at least a part of the specific area where the action target display (model image display) is displayed. On the other hand, even if a valid reception determination is made in a situation where the action target display (model image display) is not displayed, it is desirable to use this as a trigger to execute the disappearance EF performance in the same manner as when a valid reception determination is made in the above-mentioned situation (a situation where the action target display is displayed). With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately suggest that a valid reception determination has been made secretly even in a situation where the action target display (model image display) is not displayed. Note that if a valid reception determination is made in a situation where the action target display (model image display) is not displayed, the first reception period will end without the action target display being displayed, and the disappearance EF performance will be executed using at least a part of the area where the action target display was scheduled to be displayed.

In addition, in this case, it is desirable that during the second acceptance period, the action target display (imitation image display) is always displayed regardless of when the acceptance validity determination is made that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action (valid operation). By providing such a "second acceptance period in which the action target display (imitation image display) is always displayed" separately from the above-mentioned first acceptance period, combined with the configuration in which the disappearance EF presentation is executed, it is possible to provide a presentation that gives a sense of security and to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

[Configuration 4-B]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the acceptance period in which the player is given an opportunity to act (opportunity to operate), the action target display (here, a replica image display imitating the target of the action by the player and having a plurality of modes with different expectation levels) can usually be displayed using at least a specific area, and when a "valid acceptance determination" is made that the action by the player is a valid action while the replica image display is displayed, the action target display (replica image display) can be made invisible based on the fact that the valid acceptance determination has been made. Also, when a "valid acceptance determination" is made while the action target display (replica image display) is displayed during the acceptance period, a disappearance EF performance can be executed using at least a part of the specific area until the action target display (replica image display) is made invisible.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 first provides a number of reception periods, including a specific reception period. During the specific reception period, a "valid reception determination" is possible that determines a player's action as a valid action when the action target display (here, a mock image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple modes with different degrees of expectation) is not displayed, and when the valid reception determination is made, the disappearance EF performance is not executed. Note that the "specific reception period" in configuration 4-B is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of configuration 4-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" in other configurations, or it may mean a different reception period.

This configuration makes it difficult to recognize whether the "valid reception determination" has been properly made (the reception period has ended due to the acceptance of the player's operation), and it is expected that the tension of the specific reception period in which the player is secretly asked to act (the opportunity to act is secretly given) will be maintained even after the valid reception determination has been made.

Note that even when a disappearance EF effect is displayed, the action target display (mock image display) does not necessarily have to be displayed at that time. Furthermore, the disappearance EF effect includes, for example, the above-mentioned "aspect in which the mock image display becomes difficult to see." In this case, it may be a mode in which a disappearance effect display is displayed in a predetermined area that includes at least a part of the specific area in which the action target display (mock image display) is displayed, a mode in which a performance is executed using a performance body that is located in a position that overlaps at least a part of the specific area in which the action target display (mock image display) is displayed when viewed from the front, or a mode in which the action target display (mock image display) itself is changed (modified) to a display that is difficult to see (for example, by making the display smaller, blurring it, changing the transparency setting, etc.).

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 4-B" is adopted, the "specific reception period" may be the first reception period. A plurality of reception periods including the first reception period (specific reception period) and the second reception period may be prepared as reception periods, and in both the first reception period and the second reception period, a valid reception determination may be made for an action performed by a player in a state in which the action target display (model image display) is not displayed as a valid action. In the first reception period, if a valid reception determination is made for an action performed by a player in a state in which the action target display (model image display) is not displayed as a valid action, the disappearance EF performance may not be executed, and in the second reception period, if a valid reception determination is made for an action performed by a player in a state in which the action target display is not displayed as a valid action, the disappearance EF performance may be executed. In this case, the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 4-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" in other configurations, it may mean reception periods on opposite sides of each other, or it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

With this configuration, while the action target display (model image display) is not displayed, it is difficult to know whether the first reception period (specific reception period) or the second reception period is occurring until the player performs an action. However, after a valid reception determination is made that determines this to be a valid action, it becomes possible to know whether the first reception period (specific reception period) or the second reception period is occurring, and it becomes possible to prompt the player to perform an action.

[Configuration 5-B]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to the configuration 5-B are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 5-B. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to other configurations, may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other, or may mean reception periods different from those reception periods.

If a "valid acceptance judgment that an action by the player is a valid action" is made during the first acceptance period, the action target display (here, a model image display that imitates the target of the action by the player and has multiple forms with different degrees of expectation) may not be hidden but may be in a displayed state at the time when the post-acceptance performance based on the valid acceptance judgment (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) starts to be executed, and if a "valid acceptance judgment that an action by the player is a valid action" is made during the second acceptance period, the action target display (here, a model image display that imitates the target of the action by the player and has multiple forms with different degrees of expectation) may not be hidden but may be in a displayed state at the time when the post-acceptance performance based on the valid acceptance judgment (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the second acceptance period) starts to be executed.

With this configuration, once the post-acceptance performance based on the "valid acceptance determination" has begun, there will be cases where the action target display (here, an imitation image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple forms with different degrees of expectation) is visible, and cases where the action target display (here, an imitation image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple forms with different degrees of expectation) is not visible, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension after the post-acceptance performance has begun.

As will be described later, when this "Configuration 5-B" is adopted, it is desirable that during the first acceptance period, depending on when the "valid acceptance judgment that the action by the player is a valid action" is made, at the time when the post-acceptance performance based on the valid acceptance judgment (the post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) begins to be executed, the action target display (model image display) will be in a displayed state rather than hidden, and the action target display (model image display) will be in a hidden state.

In other words, from the player's perspective, when the model image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations" among the multiple modes, it is certainly preferable in terms of increasing interest in the game to have it continue to be displayed even after the post-acceptance performance based on the "valid acceptance determination" (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) has begun to be executed. However, when the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations" among the multiple modes, if it continues to be displayed even after the post-acceptance performance based on the "valid acceptance determination" (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) has begun to be executed, a decrease in interest in the game is unavoidable.

For example, the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) is designed to have the possibility of being executed in a high-expectation mode (and even a low-expectation mode) regardless of whether the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation" or the "second mode with low expectation" during its valid period (first acceptance period). When the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) is executed in a high-expectation mode, this alone is sufficient to increase interest in the game. However, if the model image display continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectation," this will clearly decrease interest in the game, and therefore it is desirable to hide the model image display. On the other hand, even if the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) is executed in a mode with low expectation, if the model image display continues to be displayed in the "second mode with high expectation," it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the post-acceptance performance being executed in a mode with low expectation, so it is desirable to continue the model image display rather than hiding it.

Or, even if the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations," some players may want to have the model image display not hidden but continue to be displayed at the time when the post-reception performance begins, as an "excuse" in case the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations." And even if the model image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations," some players may want to have the model image display hidden and not visible at the time when the post-reception performance begins, in order to reduce "irritation" if the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations."

In this regard, with the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player can essentially choose whether to start the post-reception performance with the replica image display displayed, or to start the post-reception performance with the replica image display hidden and not visible, depending on the timing at which a "valid reception determination" is made within the first reception period, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

[Configuration 6-B]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to the configuration 6-B are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 6-B. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to other configurations, may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other, or may mean reception periods different from those reception periods.

When "valid acceptance determination that the action by the player is a valid action" is made during the first acceptance period, the remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time, and multiple modes with different degrees of expectation are provided as the modes of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image) may be in a displayed state rather than hidden at the time when the post-acceptance performance based on the valid acceptance determination (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) starts to be executed, and when "valid acceptance determination that the action by the player is a valid action" is made during the second acceptance period, the remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time, and multiple modes with different degrees of expectation are provided as the modes of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image) may be in a displayed state rather than hidden at the time when the post-acceptance performance based on the valid acceptance determination (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the second acceptance period) starts to be executed.

With this configuration, once the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception determination" has begun, there will be cases where the remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time, and multiple aspects with different degrees of expectation are provided for at least one of the aspects of the frame image and the gauge image) is visible, and cases where the remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time, and multiple aspects with different degrees of expectation are provided for at least one of the aspects of the frame image and the gauge image) is not visible, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension after the post-reception performance has begun.

As will be described later, when this "Configuration 6-B" is adopted, it is desirable that during the first acceptance period, depending on when the "valid acceptance determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made, at the time when the post-acceptance performance based on the valid acceptance determination (the post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) begins to be executed, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) will be in a displayed state rather than hidden, and the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) will be in a hidden state.

In other words, from the player's perspective, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "second state with high expectations" among the multiple states, it is certainly preferable in terms of increasing interest in the game to have this image continue to be displayed even after the post-acceptance performance based on the "valid acceptance judgment" (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) has started to be executed. However, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "first state with low expectations" among the multiple states, if this image continues to be displayed even after the post-acceptance performance based on the "valid acceptance judgment" (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) has started to be executed, a decrease in interest in the game is unavoidable.

For example, the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) is designed to have the possibility of being executed in a high expectation mode (and even a low expectation mode) even if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in either the "first mode with low expectation" or the "second mode with low expectation" during its valid period (first acceptance period). When the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) is executed in a high expectation mode, this alone is sufficient to increase interest in the game. However, if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectation," this will clearly decrease interest in the game, and therefore it is desirable to hide the frame image and the gauge image. On the other hand, even if a post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) is executed in a mode with low expectations, if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image continues to be displayed in the "second mode with high expectations," it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the post-acceptance performance being executed in a mode with low expectations, so it is desirable to continue the frame image and the gauge image rather than hiding them.

Or, even if at least one of a frame image and a gauge image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations," some players may want to have the frame image and gauge image not hidden but continue to be displayed when the post-reception performance begins, as an "excuse" in case the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations." And even if at least one of a frame image and a gauge image is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations," some players may want to have the frame image and gauge image hidden and not visible when the post-reception performance begins, in order to reduce frustration when the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations."

In this regard, with the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player can essentially choose whether to start the post-reception performance with the frame image and gauge image displayed, or to start the post-reception performance with the frame image and gauge image hidden and not visible, depending on the timing at which a "valid reception determination" is made within the first reception period, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

[Configuration 7-B]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, when a "valid reception judgment that an action by a player is a valid action" is made during the first reception period, a first post-reception performance can be executed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectation levels based on the fact that the reception valid judgment has been made, and when a "valid reception judgment that an action by a player is a valid action" is made during the second reception period, a second post-reception performance can be executed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectation levels based on the fact that the reception valid judgment has been made. Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to the configuration 7-B are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 7-B. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to other configurations, may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other, or may mean reception periods different from those reception periods.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when a "valid reception judgment" is made during the first reception period, the action target display (here, a model image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple forms with different degrees of expectation) may not be displayed and may be in a hidden state at the time when the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception judgment" (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) starts to be executed. In contrast, when a "valid reception judgment" is made during the second reception period, the action target display (here, a model image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple forms with different degrees of expectation) is not displayed and may not be in a hidden state at the time when the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception judgment" (post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period) starts to be executed.

With this configuration, once the post-acceptance performance based on the "valid acceptance determination" begins, there will be cases where the action target display (imitation image display) is visible and cases where the action target display (imitation image display) is not visible, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension after the post-acceptance performance begins.

As will be described later, when this "Configuration 7-B" is adopted, if "a valid acceptance determination is made that the action by the player is a valid action" before the arrival of a specified timing within the first acceptance period, the action target display (imitation image display) is in a hidden state and is not displayed at the time when the post-acceptance performance based on the valid acceptance determination (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) begins to be executed, but if "a valid acceptance determination is made that the action by the player is a valid action" after the arrival of a specified timing within the first acceptance period, it is desirable to start the post-acceptance performance with the action target display (imitation image display) displayed.

In other words, from the player's perspective, when the model image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations" among the multiple modes, it is certainly preferable in terms of increasing interest in the game to have it continue to be displayed even after the post-acceptance performance based on the "valid acceptance determination" (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) has begun to be executed. However, when the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations" among the multiple modes, if it continues to be displayed even after the post-acceptance performance based on the "valid acceptance determination" (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) has begun to be executed, a decrease in interest in the game is unavoidable.

For example, the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) is designed to have the possibility of being executed in a high-expectation mode (and even a low-expectation mode) regardless of whether the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation" or the "second mode with low expectation" during its valid period (first acceptance period). When the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) is executed in a high-expectation mode, this alone is sufficient to increase interest in the game. However, if the model image display continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectation," this will clearly decrease interest in the game, and therefore it is desirable to hide the model image display. On the other hand, even if the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) is executed in a mode with low expectation, if the model image display continues to be displayed in the "second mode with high expectation," it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the post-acceptance performance being executed in a mode with low expectation, so it is desirable to continue the model image display rather than hiding it.

Or, even if the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations," some players may want to have the model image display not hidden but continue to be displayed at the time when the post-reception performance begins, as an "excuse" in case the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations." And even if the model image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations," some players may want to have the model image display hidden and not visible at the time when the post-reception performance begins, in order to reduce "irritation" if the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations."

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one acceptance period (first acceptance period) occurs, the player can start the post-acceptance performance in a state where the imitation image display is hidden and cannot be seen, as long as a "valid acceptance determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made before a specified timing within the first acceptance period arrives. Also, if a "valid acceptance determination that the player's action is a valid action" is not made before a specified timing within the first acceptance period arrives, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the post-acceptance performance will start when the imitation image display is not displayed at that point in time, so that players who seek this kind of performance can enjoy the operation performance with peace of mind from then on.

[Configuration 8-B]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, when a "valid reception judgment that an action by a player is a valid action" is made during the first reception period, a first post-reception performance can be executed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectation levels based on the fact that the reception valid judgment has been made, and when a "valid reception judgment that an action by a player is a valid action" is made during the second reception period, a second post-reception performance can be executed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectation levels based on the fact that the reception valid judgment has been made. Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to the configuration 7-B are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 7-B. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to other configurations, may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other, or may mean reception periods different from those reception periods.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when a "valid reception determination" is made during the first reception period, at the time when the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception determination" (post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period) starts to be executed, the remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time, and multiple modes with different degrees of expectation are prepared as the modes of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image) may not be displayed and may be in a hidden state. In contrast, when a "valid reception determination" is made during the second reception period, at the time when the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception determination" (post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period) starts to be executed, the remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time, and multiple modes with different degrees of expectation are prepared as the modes of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image) is not displayed and may not be in a hidden state.

With this configuration, once the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception determination" begins, there will be cases where the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is visible and cases where the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is not visible, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension after the post-reception performance begins.

As will be described later, when this "Configuration 8-B" is adopted, if "a valid acceptance determination is made that the action by the player is a valid action" before the specified timing within the first acceptance period arrives, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is hidden and not displayed at the time when the post-acceptance performance based on the valid acceptance determination (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) begins to be executed, but if "a valid acceptance determination is made that the action by the player is a valid action" after the specified timing within the first acceptance period arrives, it is desirable to start the post-acceptance performance with the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) displayed.

In other words, from the player's perspective, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "second state with high expectations" among the multiple states, it is certainly preferable in terms of increasing interest in the game to continue to display this even after the post-acceptance performance based on the "valid acceptance judgment" (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) has started to be executed. However, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "first state with low expectations" among the multiple states, if this continues to be displayed even after the post-acceptance performance based on the "valid acceptance judgment" (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) has started to be executed, a decrease in interest in the game is unavoidable.

For example, the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) is designed to have the possibility of being executed in a high expectation mode (and even a low expectation mode) even if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in either the "first mode with low expectation" or the "second mode with low expectation" during its valid period (first acceptance period). When the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) is executed in a high expectation mode, this alone is sufficient to increase interest in the game. However, if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectation," this will clearly decrease interest in the game, and therefore it is desirable to hide the frame image and the gauge image. On the other hand, even if a post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) is executed in a mode with low expectations, if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image continues to be displayed in the "second mode with high expectations," it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the post-acceptance performance being executed in a mode with low expectations, so it is desirable to continue the frame image and the gauge image rather than hiding them.

Or, even if at least one of a frame image and a gauge image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations," some players may want to keep the frame image and gauge image displayed, rather than hidden, at the time when the post-reception performance begins, as an "excuse" in case the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations." Or, even if at least one of a frame image and a gauge image is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations," some players may want to keep the frame image and gauge image hidden and not visible at the time when the post-reception performance begins, in order to reduce "irritation" when the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations."

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one acceptance period (first acceptance period) occurs, the player can start the post-acceptance performance in a state where the frame image and gauge image are hidden and cannot be seen, as long as a "valid acceptance determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made before a specified timing within the first acceptance period arrives. Also, if a "valid acceptance determination that the player's action is a valid action" is not made before a specified timing within the first acceptance period arrives, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the post-acceptance performance will start when the frame image and gauge image are not displayed at that time, so those who seek this kind of performance can enjoy the operation performance with peace of mind from then on.

[Configuration 9-B]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the acceptance period when the player is given an opportunity to act (opportunity to operate), it is usually possible to display an action target display (here, a replica image display that imitates the target of the action by the player and has multiple forms with different degrees of expectation) using at least a specific area. During the acceptance period, when a "valid acceptance determination" is made that determines the action by the player to be a valid action, a post-acceptance performance according to the type of the acceptance period can be executed based on the valid acceptance determination. Also, even at the time when the post-acceptance performance starts to be executed, the action target display (replica image display) may be in a displayed state rather than hidden.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 first provides a plurality of reception periods, including a first reception period and a second reception period. In either case, when a "valid reception determination" is made during the first reception period, or when a "valid reception determination" is made during the second reception period, the disappearance EF performance can be executed using at least a part of the specific area based on the "valid reception determination". Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" in the configuration 9-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 9-B. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" and "second reception period" in other configurations, may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other, or may mean reception periods different from those reception periods.

This configuration makes it easy to recognize when a valid acceptance determination has been made properly under the action acceptance conditions suggested by the mock image display (when the acceptance period has ended due to the player's action being accepted).

The disappearance EF performance includes, for example, the above-mentioned "mode in which the action target display (mock image display) becomes difficult to see." In this case, it may be a mode in which a disappearance performance display is displayed in a predetermined area that includes at least a part of the specific area in which the action target display (mock image display) is displayed, a mode in which a performance is executed using a performance object that is located in a position that overlaps at least a part of the specific area in which the action target display (mock image display) is displayed when viewed from the front, or a mode in which the action target display (mock image display) itself is changed (modified) to a display that is difficult to see (for example, by making the display smaller, blurring it, changing the transparency setting, etc.).

As will be described later, when this "Configuration 9-B" is adopted, during the first acceptance period, depending on when the "valid acceptance determination" that determines that the action by the player is a valid action is made, the action target display (model image display) may be in a displayed state rather than hidden at the time when the post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period begins to be executed, or the action target display (model image display) may be in an undisplayed state (unvisible state).

In other words, from the player's perspective, when the model image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations" among the multiple modes, it is certainly preferable in terms of increasing interest in the game to have it continue to be displayed even after the post-acceptance performance based on the "valid acceptance determination" (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) has begun to be executed. However, when the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations" among the multiple modes, if it continues to be displayed even after the post-acceptance performance based on the "valid acceptance determination" (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) has begun to be executed, a decrease in interest in the game is unavoidable.

For example, the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) is designed to have the possibility of being executed in a high-expectation mode (and even a low-expectation mode) regardless of whether the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation" or the "second mode with low expectation" during its valid period (first acceptance period). When the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) is executed in a high-expectation mode, this alone is sufficient to increase interest in the game. However, if the model image display continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectation," this will clearly decrease interest in the game, and therefore it is desirable to hide the model image display. On the other hand, even if the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first acceptance period) is executed in a mode with low expectation, if the model image display continues to be displayed in the "second mode with high expectation," it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the post-acceptance performance being executed in a mode with low expectation, so it is desirable to continue the model image display rather than hiding it.

Or, even if the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations," some players may want to have the model image display not hidden but continue to be displayed at the time when the post-reception performance begins, as an "excuse" in case the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations." And even if the model image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations," some players may want to have the model image display hidden and not visible at the time when the post-reception performance begins, in order to reduce "irritation" if the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations."

In this regard, with the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player can essentially choose whether to start the post-reception performance with the replica image display displayed, or to start the post-reception performance with the replica image display hidden and not visible, depending on the timing at which a "valid reception determination" is made within the first reception period, which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

As will be described later, when this "Configuration 9-B" is adopted, during the second acceptance period, regardless of when the "valid acceptance determination" that determines that the action by the player is a valid action is made, the action target display (model image display) may be always in a displayed state at the time when the post-acceptance performance corresponding to the second acceptance period begins to be executed.

With this configuration, it is not always possible to choose whether or not to have the action target display (mock image display) displayed at the time the post-reception performance begins, making it possible to maintain a sense of tension during the reception period.

[Other configurations]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when an acceptance permission state (acceptance period) in which an acceptance opportunity is granted occurs, a model image display related to the acceptance target (such as a model image modeled on an operation receiving section) is displayed as an integrated model image display (see FIG. 232) integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the model image display, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in playing until the post-acceptance display (display change) is executed. It is desirable to display such an integrated model image display in both the operation acceptance presentation (acceptance period) that occurs when the pattern presentation progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach, and the operation acceptance presentation (acceptance period) that occurs as a result of advance judgment in a variation pattern that does not develop into the SP reach, and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression acceptance presentation and the high expectation suppression acceptance presentation.

The "integrated model image display" in this example is as described with reference to Figures 232 to 248, or as another example or modified example thereof, so details will be omitted, but for example, a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the border decoration image. Also, multiple modes (see Figure 232) with different degrees of expectation are prepared for the "integrated model image display," and it is similarly configured to be displayed in one of these modes.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when an acceptance-permitted state (acceptance period) occurs, an acceptance-permitted sound is output to indicate that an operation acceptance has been permitted, or to suggest that an operation acceptance will be permitted, thereby making it less likely that an operation will be forgotten. Here, the "acceptance-permitted sound" refers to a sound that, when the sound starts to be output, will necessarily cause an acceptance-permitted state (acceptance period) to occur while the sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned), or is in a state where an acceptance-permitted state (acceptance period) has already occurred. In other words, the "acceptance-permitted sound" can also be said to be a sound that is not output in a situation where a performance that has no relation to the acceptance-permitted state (acceptance period) is being performed.

In addition, each acceptance allowance state (each acceptance period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. That is, an acceptance allowance state classified into the first type is a valid period that can occur when a high expectation fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) is selected, but cannot occur in a low expectation fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) (a valid period that occurs based on the establishment of a specific condition (selection of a specific high expectation fluctuation pattern) in a performance judgment based on the result of a jackpot judgment). In addition, an acceptance allowance state of the second type is a valid period that can occur in either a high expectation fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) or a low expectation fluctuation pattern (such as a valid period that occurs as a result of a notice judgment).

The "integrated imitation image display" according to this embodiment can be displayed in both the first type and second type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period). Here, it is assumed that the first type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period) and the second type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period) occur as acceptance permission states (acceptance periods) in which an operation opportunity is given for the same operating means (e.g., operation button 410), and therefore the "integrated imitation image display" displayed in those acceptance periods is an image simulating the same operating means (operation button 410).

In addition, among the multiple modes prepared as the "integrated Moji image display", a special mode with a high expectation (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 232(d)) may be displayed only in the first type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period), and in the second type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period), only a mode different from the special mode (for example, the modes shown in FIG. 232(a)-(c)) may be displayed (this configuration is not essential). In this case, in the first type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period), a judgment is made based on the result of the jackpot judgment as to which of the multiple modes including the special mode (for example, FIG. 232(a)-(d)) the "integrated Moji image display" will be displayed in, and the "integrated Moji image display" will be displayed in a mode according to the result of this judgment. Even in the second type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period), a determination may be made as to which of multiple modes not including a special mode (e.g., Figures 232(a)-(c)) the "integrated model image" will be displayed in based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the "integrated model image display" may be displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination.

The details of the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-B" to "Configuration 9-B" are explained below with reference to the drawings. However, each configuration described below is merely described as the best embodiment, and does not necessarily have to be equipped. In other words, when it is desired to obtain an additional effect in addition to any one of the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-B" to "Configuration 9-B", it is possible to arbitrarily select and adopt only the corresponding configuration for each configuration described in the specification below.

First, an example that embodies the above "Configuration 1-B" to "Configuration 4-B" will be described. As described above, this pachinko machine 1 has multiple reception periods (reception performances) with different performance contents that proceed when the ball is accepted (for example, conversation notice, cut-in notice, moving object notice, etc. as post-reception performances, and types of notice performances (expectation level suggestion performances)), and can generate reception periods (reception performances) of different types according to the results of judgments (jackpot judgments, performance judgments, etc.). Here, at least a 1B reception period (1B post-reception performance), a 2B reception period (2B post-reception performance), and a 3B reception period (3B post-reception performance) are prepared as the multiple reception periods (reception performances).

With reference to Figs. 288 to 303, the characteristics of each reception period (reception performance) will be described separately. Note that, with reference to Figs. 287 and up, each reception period described above may be prepared as a reception period separate from the 1B reception period (1B post-reception performance), the 2B reception period (2B post-reception performance), and the 3B reception period (3B post-reception performance), or may be realized as any of the 1B reception period (1B post-reception performance), the 2B reception period (2B post-reception performance), and the 3B reception period (3B post-reception performance). In addition, in order to realize each invention described below, it is only necessary to have only the necessary configurations among the configurations described below, and it is not necessary to have these for each reception period described above with reference to Figs. 287 and up.

Figures 288 to 290 are time charts showing an example of the presentation content when condition 1B is satisfied as a result of a judgment (jackpot judgment or presentation judgment) and a 1B reception period (1B reception presentation) occurs. Figures 297 and 298 are diagrams showing an example of presentation in a variation pattern in which a 1B reception period (1B reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with no chance of winning or time reduction), and the "1B fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 1B fluctuation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 1B fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 1B fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 297(a)"), and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "1B fluctuation pattern" itself.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 288(a), in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the timing tQ2 arrives at which the 1B predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable presentation of the decorative pattern SZ (when condition 1B is satisfied), the 1B acceptance period (valid period) is generated in which "acceptance regarding the 1B post-reception presentation" is permitted ("the situation shown in FIGS. 297(b) and (c)"). As a result, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the 1B acceptance period (when the acceptance is judged to be valid), the 1B post-reception presentation is carried out based on the acceptance (valid acceptance judgment).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) performs, in relation to the occurrence of such a 1B reception period, an action target display (mochi image display) suggesting the reception target (such as an operation receiving part), a remaining time display (a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced over time) suggesting the remaining time of the reception period (valid period), a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) that makes the mochi image display difficult to see, and a 1B post-reception performance display suggesting the expectation level (the rate at which a jackpot pattern appears) in response to the reception (valid reception determination). As described above, the mochi image display according to this embodiment is displayed as an "integrated mochi image display" integrated with a peripheral decoration image including a remaining time display (a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced over time), but this is not necessarily limited to this and may be displayed separately. This is also true for other reception periods.

More specifically, first, when the 1B reception period occurs at timing tQ2, as shown in FIG. 288(b) and FIG. 297(b) and (c), in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, a "mochi image display" or a "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)" is displayed as an integrated mochi image display IG. The integrated mochi image display IG (mochi image display, frame image, gauge image) may appear at timing tQ2, or may appear before timing tQ2 and be displayed to span timing tQ2. The integrated mochi image display IG (mochi image display, frame image, gauge image) is hidden when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made within the 1B reception period, or when the 1B reception period ends without acceptance (valid acceptance determination). In this example, the 1B acceptance period ends at timing tQ3 if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (valid acceptance determination) (see FIG. 288(a)).

In addition, in the 1B reception period in this example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in one of a number of modes (for example, Fig. 232 (a) and (d)), and Fig. 297 (b) corresponds to the case where the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in Fig. 232 (a), and Fig. 297 (c) corresponds to the case where the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in Fig. 232 (d). Note that, even in the 1B reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) may be displayed in one of a number of modes including the modes shown in Figs. 232 (b) and (c).

Figure 288 assumes that a "valid acceptance determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" when a relatively early timing tQ2a occurs within this 1B acceptance period. In other words, in this case, as shown in Figure 288(a), the 1B acceptance period ends and the post-acceptance performance (1B post-acceptance performance) corresponding to the 1B acceptance period starts to be executed based on the player's action being accepted (valid acceptance determination is made) at timing tQ2a.

The example of the performance progressing from FIG. 297(b) to "E1 (FIG. 298(d1) to FIG. 298(h1))" corresponds to the case where the first mode with relatively low expectation is executed as the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance) corresponding to the 1B acceptance period, and the example of the performance progressing from FIG. 297(b) to "E2 (FIG. 298(d2) to FIG. 298(h2))" corresponds to the case where the second mode with relatively high expectation is executed as the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance) corresponding to the 1B acceptance period. The expectation (probability of the appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

Here, in this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 288, at timing tQ2a, which is the time when the player's action is accepted (the time when the 1B post-acceptance presentation starts in response to the acceptance), not only is the "integrated model image display IG" not hidden, but the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see either.

In other words, the 1B post-reception performance according to this embodiment is realized as a performance that is at least a combination of the "1B post-reception performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), the "1B post-reception specific performance" using the second performance device (e.g., a sub-liquid crystal display, a movable body, a performance lamp, etc.), and the 1B post-reception performance sound using the third performance device (speaker) (it does not necessarily have to be realized as a combination performance using three performance devices). However, among these performance devices, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) on which the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed is delayed in the time at which the "1st post-reception performance display" as the 1B post-reception performance begins to be executed compared to the other performance devices, and this is intended to intentionally maintain the visibility of the "integrated model image display IG" even after the reception is made.

As shown in FIG. 298 (d1) or (d2), this configuration allows the player to easily recognize in which of the multiple forms (FIG. 232 (a) to (d)) the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the ended acceptance period, even after acceptance has been made, which is expected to effectively prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Here, in order to make it easier to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period after the reception period has ended, it is desirable to set the "time during which the integrated model image display IG is displayed in an easily visible form" after reception has been made to be longer. However, if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed in the same form as it was during the reception period even though reception has been made and the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has already been executed, it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the reception has been made, and as a result, there is a concern that "the player will be late in noticing the post-reception performance that is being executed."

Therefore, in the examples shown in Figure 288 (b) and Figure 298 (e1) or (e2), when a predetermined time has passed from timing tQ2a when the 1B acceptance period ends due to the acceptance of the player's action (when timing tQ2b arrives), a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes the mock image display difficult to see is started to be displayed.

In other words, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

According to this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the reception, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, which suggests that the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being performed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the integrated model image display IG to the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) (from timing tQ2b onwards). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has already been performed, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

In addition, during the 1B reception period, different modes (first disappearance-related display SKB1, second disappearance-related display SKB2) are displayed as the disappearance-related display depending on whether the corresponding post-reception performance (1B post-reception performance) is a low-expectation mode (Fig. 298 (d1) to (h1)) or a high-expectation mode (Fig. 298 (d2) to (h2)). In other words, in this case, as shown in Fig. 298 (e1) and (e2), even if the "1B post-reception performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) has not yet started, by checking whether the disappearance-related display that appears on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is the "first disappearance-related display SKB1" or the "second disappearance-related display SKB2", it becomes possible to guess whether the "1B post-reception performance display" will be executed in a high-expectation mode.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in Figure 288 (b) and Figure 298 (f1) or (f2), when timing tQ2c arrives during the period during which the display related to the disappearance-related display (in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears, a "1st B post-reception performance display UGB1 (cut-in performance)" is executed as a post-reception performance in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in response to the acceptance of an action by the player within the 1B reception period. However, in this example where the performance progresses from FIG. 297(b) to "E1 (FIG. 298(d1) to (h1))" (when the expectation level is relatively low as a post-reception performance), as shown in FIG. 298(f1), the first mode (here, the first-B post-reception performance display UGB1-1 as a cut-in performance by the princess character)) is displayed as the first-B post-reception performance display UGB1 corresponding to the first-B reception period, and in this example where the performance progresses from FIG. 297(b) to "E2 (FIG. 298(d2) to (h2))" (when the expectation level is relatively high as a post-reception performance), as shown in FIG. 298(f2), the second mode (here, the first-B post-reception performance display UGB1-2 as a cut-in performance by the samurai character) is displayed as the first-B post-reception performance display UGB1 corresponding to the first-B reception period.

In other words, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKB1, second disappearance-related display SKB2)" are displayed, the "1st B post-reception performance display UGB1 ("1st B post-reception performance display UGB1-1" or "1st B post-reception performance display UGB1-2") will begin to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated model image display IG is displayed for a relatively long time after acceptance within the 1B acceptance period, the post-acceptance performance (1B post-acceptance performance display UGB1) on the first performance device (performance display device 1600) can be started without a significant delay compared to other performance devices, and a decline in interest in the game can be prevented. Also, since the 1B post-acceptance performance display UGB1 starts while the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the "integrated model image display IG" to the "1B post-acceptance performance display UGB1 (1B post-acceptance performance display UGB1-1 or 1B post-acceptance performance display UGB1-2)" while suggesting that the 1B acceptance period has already ended (after timing tQ2c).

On the other hand, when the "1B post-reception performance display UGB1 (1B post-reception performance display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception performance display UGB1-2)" is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the area in which the "integrated Moji image display IG" is displayed (it does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "integrated Moji image display IG", and the "integrated Moji image display IG" is displayed with priority over the "1B post-reception performance display UGB1 (1B post-reception performance display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception performance display UGB1-2)". This makes it easier to recognize in which form the integrated Moji image display IG was displayed during the reception period, even when the "1B post-reception performance display UGB1 (1B post-reception performance display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception performance display UGB1-2)" starts to be executed.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the display of the "1st B post-reception performance display UGB1 (1st B post-reception performance display UGB1-1 or 1st B post-reception performance display UGB1-2)" is started in this manner, as shown in Figure 288 (b), 298 (g1) or (g2), while the "1st B post-reception performance display UGB1 (1st B post-reception performance display UGB1-1 or 1st B post-reception performance display UGB1-2)" is displayed, first, of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related displays", the "integrated model image display IG" is made invisible. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this manner, the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKB1 or second disappearance-related display SKB2)" is hidden as shown in FIG. 288(b) or FIG. 298(h1) or (h2), and this allows for good visibility and causes the display related to the "1st B post-reception performance display UGB1 (1st B post-reception performance display UGB1-1 or 1st B post-reception performance display UGB1-2)" to be displayed.

In this regard, the "1B post-reception performance display UGB1" is displayed in one of multiple modes (here, 1B post-reception performance display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception performance display UGB1-2) with different degrees of expectation based on the acceptance of the player's action. Therefore, the "1B post-reception performance display UGB1" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display" are hidden.

In addition, in the example presentation (Figures 297 and 298) corresponding to the 1B reception period, when reception is made during the 1B reception period and the "1B post-reception performance display UGB1" is executed, the background image is switched before and after the "1B post-reception performance display UGB1" begins.

With this configuration, in the situation shown in Figures 298(d) and (e) where no change in the background image has occurred (timings tQ2a to tQ2b shown in Figure 288), even if there has been a change in the performance on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), it is possible to indicate that the "first B post-reception performance display UGB1" has not yet started.

In this example, the "First B post-reception performance display UGB1" and "Background change" are displayed later (timing tQ2c) than the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKB1, second disappearance-related display SKB2)" is displayed (timing tQ2b), but they may be displayed at the same time (timing tQ2b) as the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKB1, second disappearance-related display SKB2)" is displayed (timing tQ2b).

In the example shown in FIG. 298, the post-reception performance is configured so that the same background image is switched when a low expectation mode appears and when a high expectation mode appears, but it may also be configured so that different background images are switched when a low expectation mode appears and when a high expectation mode appears. Also, it may be configured so that the background image is switched when a high expectation mode appears, but the background image is not switched when a low expectation mode appears.

In this way, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, when a 1B reception period occurs, various displays are performed within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 288) and on a limited display screen (performance display device 1600), thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game. However, as a result of this, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is forced to delay the start time (timing tQ2c) of the 1B post-reception performance (1B post-reception performance display) in response to the reception from the timing tQ2a of the reception.

In this example, when an action by the player is accepted within the 1B acceptance period, as shown in Figures 288(b) and (c), based on the acceptance, a 1B post-acceptance performance (1B post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is started prior to the 1B post-acceptance performance (1B post-acceptance performance display) using the first performance device.

With this configuration, the delay in the start of execution from the timing tQ2a when the reception is made during the 1B reception period is limited to only a part of the 1B post-reception performance (display of the 1B post-reception performance), and the 1B post-reception performance itself can be started without delay from the same timing tQ2a.

Such a second presentation device may be provided as a sub-LCD when the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) is used as the main LCD, or may be provided as a presentation movable body capable of presentation operation, or a presentation lamp capable of presentation light emission, etc. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform presentations (display presentation, movable presentation, light emission presentation, etc.) in multiple ways with different degrees of expectation. The degree of expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-LCD 1610 is used as the second performance device. In an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 297(b) to "E1 (FIG. 298(d1) to (h1))" (when the post-acceptance performance has a relatively low expectation), as shown in FIG. 298(d1), the mode in which "women's kimono" is displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is started to be executed prior to the 1B post-acceptance performance (1B post-acceptance performance display UGB1-1) using the first performance device as the 1B post-acceptance specific performance UTB1 (the 1B post-acceptance specific performance UTB1-1, which is a low expectation mode of the 1B post-acceptance specific performance UTB1) corresponding to the 1B acceptance period. In contrast, in an example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 297(b) to "E2 (FIG. 298(d2) to (h2))" (when the post-reception presentation has a relatively high expectation), as shown in FIG. 298(d2), the mode in which "men's kimono" is displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second presentation device) is started to be executed prior to the 1B post-reception presentation (1B post-reception presentation display UGB1-2) using the first presentation device as the 1B post-reception specific presentation UTB1 (the 1B post-reception specific presentation UTB1-2, which is a high expectation mode of the 1B post-reception specific presentation UTB1) corresponding to the 1B reception period.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 297, in addition to the "integrated model image display IG" on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), a performance within the reception period is executed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) to indicate that the 1B reception period has occurred (FIGS. 297(b) and (c)). The performance within the reception period on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is displayed in the same manner when the "integrated model image display IG" on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is displayed in a manner with low expectation (see FIG. 297(b)) and when it is displayed in a manner with high expectation (see FIG. 297(c)).

In other words, in this case, during the 1B reception period in which the player is given an opportunity to act (opportunity to operate), the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) will show different behaviors depending on the degree of expectation, and the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) will show the same behavior regardless of the degree of expectation. However, after this, when a "valid reception determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid operation" is made during the 1B reception period, while the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) continues to display the "integrated model image display IG" (while the expectation of the performance after reception has not yet been indicated), the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) will show different behaviors depending on the degree of expectation. With this configuration, it is possible to obtain performance information more quickly by focusing on the appropriate performance device depending on the time than by focusing on the performance of only one performance device, which can increase the interest in the game.

In this example, the degree of expectation is suggested depending on whether the "1B reception specific performance UTB1-1" or the "1B reception specific performance UTB1-2" appears as the 1B reception specific performance UTB1, but it is not necessary to prepare multiple forms for the 1B reception specific performance UTB1. For example, it is possible to provide only the "1B reception specific performance UTB1-2" as the 1B reception specific performance UTB1, and suggest the degree of expectation (the rate at which a jackpot is obtained) depending on whether the "1B reception specific performance UTB1-2" appears. In other words, in this case, when the "1B reception specific performance UTB1-2" appears, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is higher than when the "1B reception specific performance UTB1-2" does not appear.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further includes a third performance device (speaker), and when the 1B reception period occurs, the reception permissible sound starts to be output at timing tQ1 shown in FIG. 288(d). In other words, the reception permissible sound corresponding to the 1B reception period is audibly output across timing tQ2 when the 1B reception period occurs (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 297(b) and (c)"), and the player's actions (operations) can be accepted while the reception permissible sound is being audibly output.

Here, during the 1B reception period, the reception permissible sounds are a first long permissible sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively long time, and a first short permissible sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively short time. In the example shown in FIG. 288(d), the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound are each started to be output at the same time, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one of the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound may be started to be output at timing tQ2 when the 1B reception period occurs or thereafter.

In the first B reception period, if an action by the player is accepted while the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are being audibly output, the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are terminated midway (terminating the audible output state midway) based on the acceptance.

In this regard, it is desirable that the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound be executed (audibly output) in a manner with low expectation (as shown in FIG. 297(b)) and in a manner with high expectation (as shown in FIG. 297(c)), as shown in FIG. 288(d). In other words, in this case, the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound indicate the expectation during the reception period, but unlike the "integrated mock image display IG", they are executed in such a way that once acceptance (valid reception determination) is made, it becomes impossible to confirm it, and therefore it is expected that the tension as to when during the reception period acceptance (valid reception determination) will be made will be appropriately maintained.

In addition, during the 1B reception period, if an action by the player is accepted while the reception allowable sound (first long allowable sound, first short allowable sound) is being audibly output, not only is the reception allowable sound terminated midway, but the audible output of the 1B post-reception performance sound is started based on the acceptance. The 1B post-reception performance sound is executed so as to suggest the degree of expectation, and for example, it may be executed (audibly output) in a manner with low expectation, or in a manner with high expectation. In other words, in this case, unlike the case of the performance (display performance) performed by the first performance device, during the 1B reception period, there is no competition (overlapping) between the performance performed during the reception period (reception allowable sound) and the performance performed in response to the acceptance (1B post-reception performance sound).

Similar to the "1B post-reception performance display UGB1", as shown in FIG. 288(d), this type of 1B post-reception performance sound will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" are hidden. Also, for the 1B post-reception performance sound, it is desirable to output different output sounds (modes) in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 297(b) to "E1 (FIG. 298(d1)-(h1))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively low expectation) and the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 297(b) to "E2 (FIG. 298(d2)-(h2))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively high expectation).

Note that during the 1B reception period, the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound are output as the reception permissible sound, but it is not necessary to output these two permissible sounds, and only one reception permissible sound may be output.

In addition, when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made in the 1B acceptance period, the third performance device audibly outputs not only the 1B post-acceptance performance sound that indicates the degree of expectation, but also a "acceptance sound" that does not indicate the degree of expectation. That is, the "acceptance sound" is audibly output in the same manner in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 297(b) to "E1 (FIG. 298(d1)-(h1))" (when the degree of expectation is relatively low as a post-acceptance performance) and the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 297(b) to "E2 (FIG. 298(d2)-(h2))" (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as a post-acceptance performance). And, such a "acceptance sound" is audibly output (regardless of the degree of expectation) even when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made in an acceptance period other than the 1B acceptance period. With this configuration, no matter how innovative the post-reception performance, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, the user can easily recognize that the reception (valid reception determination) has been properly made, which encourages the user to concentrate on the content of the post-reception performance.

In contrast, FIG. 289 assumes the case where a "valid acceptance determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made when a relatively late timing tQ2A occurs within such a 1B acceptance period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 289(a), the 1B acceptance period ends and the post-acceptance performance (1B post-acceptance performance) corresponding to the 1B acceptance period starts to be executed based on the player's action being accepted (valid acceptance determination is made) at timing tQ2A.

In this regard, in the first B reception period, even if the reception (valid reception determination) is made at a relatively late timing tQ2A in the first B reception period (no matter what timing the reception (valid reception determination) is made), the performance will basically proceed in the same manner as if the reception (valid reception determination) was made at a relatively early timing tQ2a in the first B reception period. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 289(a), there are cases where the performance progresses from FIG. 297(b) to "E1 (FIG. 298(d1) to (h1))" (when the expectation level is relatively low as a performance after reception) and cases where the performance progresses from FIG. 297(b) to "E2 (FIG. 298(d2) to (h2))" (when the expectation level is relatively high as a performance after reception), and in the first, second, and third performance devices, the performance will basically be executed as described with reference to FIG. 288, etc.

However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 289, because acceptance (valid acceptance determination) was made at a relatively late timing tQ2A within the 1B acceptance period, the display area of the gauge image is further reduced in the situation shown in FIG. 298(d) etc. Also, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 289, as shown in FIG. 289(d), acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made while the first short permissible sound has already ended its audible output, so that acceptance (valid acceptance determination) does not cause the first short permissible sound to end midway (terminate the audible output state midway).

In the example shown in FIG. 289, the time for which the "1B post-reception performance display" based on the fact that the reception (valid reception judgment) has been made is displayed is shorter than in the example shown in FIG. 288. In other words, the "1B post-reception specific performance" and the "1B post-reception performance sound" are executed for a predetermined time (fixed time) from the time that the reception (valid reception judgment) has been made, whereas the "1B post-reception performance display" is terminated (not displayed) when the predetermined timing tQ4 in the variation pattern arrives, regardless of when the reception (valid reception judgment) was made. With this configuration, it is expected that the tension regarding when the reception (valid reception judgment) will be made during the reception period will be appropriately maintained.

On the other hand, the example shown in Figure 290 and the example in which the presentation progresses from Figure 297(b) to "E3 (Figure 298(d3) to (g3))" are examples that assume a case in which no action (operation) is performed by the player within the 1B reception period and no reception (valid reception determination) is made.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 290, after the 1B reception period occurs, the timing tQ3 arrives without the player's action (operation) being accepted. In this regard, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at timing tQ3 (the point at which the 1B reception period ends and the acceptance of the player's action (operation) is no longer permitted) does not hide the integrated model image display IG, nor does it make the integrated model image display IG difficult to see, as shown in FIG. 298 (d3), in the same way as the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at timing tQ2a or tQ2A (the point at which the player's action (operation) is accepted during the 1B reception period (or the point at which the performance after acceptance begins)).

With this configuration, even if the first B reception period ends before the player's action (operation) is received in time, it is possible to recognize how the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the first B reception period after the period has ended, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if no action (operation) by the player is accepted, as shown in FIG. 298 (e3), the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF presentation) will be initiated as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see."

In other words, in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in this example, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed while the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

With this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the 1B reception period ends without any reception, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, thereby making it possible to indicate that the 1B reception period has ended. Also, even in a situation where the 1B reception period has already ended, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in playing the game due to not being able to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1B acceptance period, the "first extinction-related display SKB1" is displayed as the extinction-related display (extinction EF presentation). That is, in this case, it is expected that the player will sense the possibility that the post-1B acceptance presentation would have suggested that the expectation level was low if the action (operation) by the player had been accepted within the 1B acceptance period. This makes it possible to encourage the player to be glad that he or she did not make the action (operation) within the 1B acceptance period, and is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when the action (operation) is not accepted within the 1B acceptance period.

However, if no action (operation) by the player is accepted within the first B acceptance period, the "second disappearance related display SKB2" may be displayed as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF presentation), or a display different from either the "first disappearance related display SKB1" or the "second disappearance related display SKB2" may be displayed.

Also, even if a player's action (operation) is not accepted during the 1B acceptance period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF presentation) may be executed in a manner that would have appeared if the action (operation) had been accepted. That is, in this case, the appearance of the "first disappearance-related display SKB1" in the situation shown in Fig. 298 (e3) means that if the player's action (operation) had been accepted during the 1B acceptance period, the presentation would have progressed from Fig. 297 (b) to "E1 (Fig. 298 (d1) to (h1))" (a post-acceptance presentation with a relatively low expectation would have been executed). On the other hand, in the situation shown in FIG. 298(e3), the "second disappearance-related display SKB2" appears when the player's action (operation) was accepted during the 1B acceptance period, and the presentation would have progressed from FIG. 297(b) to "E2 (FIG. 298(d2)-(h2))" (when a post-acceptance presentation with a relatively high expectation was executed). In other words, in this case, even if the player's action (operation) was not accepted during the 1B acceptance period, after the 1B acceptance period ends, the player can recognize whether the 1B post-acceptance presentation was executed in a low-expectation mode or a high-expectation mode simply by checking the appearance of the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF presentation)" that appears in association with the integrated model image display IG being hidden, and therefore it is possible to suitably prevent a decline in interest in the game.

After this, as shown in FIG. 298(f3), of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKB1 in the figure)", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden first. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" has been hidden in this way, the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKB1 in the figure)" is hidden as shown in FIG. 298(g3).

As mentioned above, in the 1B reception period in this example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 232(d) (see FIG. 297(c)) rather than in the manner shown in FIG. 232(a) (see FIG. 297(b)). When the situation shown in FIG. 297(c) occurs, the only difference from the situation shown in FIG. 297(b) above is the appearance of the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image)," and otherwise the performance will proceed in the same manner.

For example, when the presentation progresses from FIG. 297(c) to "E1'", the content is basically the same as when the presentation progresses from FIG. 297(b) to "E1 (FIG. 298(d1)-(h1))", and only the aspect of the "integrated model image display IG" in the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) has been changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGd". Also, when the presentation progresses from FIG. 297(c) to "E2'", the content is basically the same as when the presentation progresses from FIG. 297(b) to "E2 (FIG. 298(d2)-(h2))", and only the aspect of the "integrated model image display IG" in the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) has been changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGd". Furthermore, when the presentation progresses from FIG. 297(c) to "E3'", the content is basically the same as when the presentation progresses from FIG. 297(b) to "E3 (FIG. 298(d3)-(g3))", with only the aspect of the "integrated model image display IG" in the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) being changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGd".

Figures 291 to 293 are time charts showing an example of the presentation content when condition 2B is satisfied as a result of a judgment (jackpot judgment or presentation judgment) and a second B reception period (second B reception presentation) occurs. Figure 299 is a diagram showing an example of presentation in a variation pattern in which a second B reception period (second B reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with no chance of winning or time reduction), and the "second B fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the second B fluctuation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the second B fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the second B fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 299(a)"), and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "second B fluctuation pattern" itself.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 291(a), the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates the 2B acceptance period (valid period) during which "acceptance of the 2B post-acceptance performance" is permitted when the timing tR2 arrives (condition 2B is satisfied) after the start of the variable performance of the decorative pattern SZ, and thus when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the 2B acceptance period (valid acceptance is determined), the 2B post-acceptance performance is performed based on the acceptance (valid acceptance determination).

However, during the second B reception period in this embodiment, unlike when the first B reception period occurs, in relation to the occurrence of the second B reception period, there is no display of an action target display (a model image display) suggesting the reception target (such as an operation receiving part), a remaining time display suggesting the remaining time of the reception period (valid period) (a depiction in which the display area of a gauge image displayed within a frame image decreases over time), or a disappearance-related display (a disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to see the model image display.

More specifically, in the second B variation pattern, as shown in Fig. 291 (b) and Fig. 299 (a), while the presentation state in which the integrated model image display IG ("model image display" or "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)") is not displayed is maintained, timing tR2 arrives and the second B reception period occurs. Then, the second B reception period ends when timing tR3 arrives if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (valid acceptance determination) (see Fig. 291 (a)).

This type of second B acceptance period is what is known as a "hidden button," and does not provide any operation-related information, such as the point in time when "a valid acceptance judgment that an action by the player is a valid action" is permitted (when the second B acceptance period has occurred), whether the state is such that a "valid acceptance judgment" is permitted (when the second B acceptance period is occurring), or when the state becomes such that a "valid acceptance judgment that an action by the player is a valid action" is no longer permitted (when the second B acceptance period ends). Therefore, it can be said that the second B acceptance period can only be enjoyed by players who are sensitive to such dramatic aspects.

Figure 291 assumes a case where, during such a second B reception period, a "valid reception determination that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made when a relatively early timing tR2a arrives. In other words, in this case, as shown in Figure 291(a), the second B reception period ends and the post-reception performance (second B post-reception performance) corresponding to the second B reception period starts to be executed based on the player's action (operation) being accepted (valid reception determination being made) at timing tR2a.

The example of the progression of the presentation from FIG. 299(a) to FIG. 299(b) and (c) corresponds to the case where the second mode with relatively high expectations is executed as the second-B post-reception presentation corresponding to the second-B reception period (such as "second-B post-reception presentation display", "second-B post-reception specific presentation", "second-B post-reception presentation sound", etc.). The illustration of the case where the first mode with relatively low expectations is executed as the second-B post-reception presentation (such as "second-B post-reception presentation display", "second-B post-reception specific presentation", "second-B post-reception presentation sound", etc.) is omitted, and in fact, the presentation may progress from FIG. 299(a) to a situation where the second-B post-reception presentation is executed in the omitted mode (first mode with low expectations). However, for such a 2B reception period, when a "valid reception determination that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made, the 2B post-reception performance (such as a "2B post-reception performance display", a "2B post-reception specific performance", or a "2B post-reception performance sound") may be executed in the manner shown in Figs. 299(b) and (c) (a type in which a low expectation mode is not provided as a post-reception performance (1B post-reception performance display, 1B post-reception specific performance, 1B post-reception performance sound)). The expectation level (the rate at which a jackpot pattern appears) may include "0%" or "100%".

Here, even in this example of the presentation (second B reception period), as shown in FIG. 291 and FIG. 299(b), at timing tR2a when the player's action (operation) is accepted (when the second B post-reception presentation starts in response to the acceptance), the "second B post-reception presentation display UGB2 (group preview presentation)" of the second B post-reception presentation is not executed, and instead the "second B post-reception specific presentation UTB2-2" and the "second B post-reception presentation sound (high expectation mode)" are executed. With this configuration, the presentation progresses in the same manner as the first B post-reception presentation, so that the above-mentioned action and effect can be obtained in the same way.

However, in this example of effect (second B reception period), as shown in FIG. 291 and FIG. 299(b), no matter when the reception (valid reception determination) is made during the second B reception period, the above-mentioned disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) will not be executed. In other words, in this case, even if the player's action (operation) is accepted during the second B reception period, it will take a long time to notice this just by looking at the performance display device 1600 (first performance device). In this case, combined with the fact that the integrated model image display IG ("model image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)") is not displayed, it will appear as if the action (operation) was made under circumstances in which the second B reception period has not occurred, and in this respect, it can be said that this is an effect that is highly difficult to play.

As shown in Fig. 291(b) and Fig. 299(c), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when timing tR2c, which is later than timing tR2a, arrives, the first performance device (performance display device 1600) starts to execute the "2nd B post-reception performance display UGB2 (in the figure, the 2nd B post-reception performance display UGB2-2 as a group preview performance by ghost characters, which is a highly anticipated aspect)" as a post-reception performance in response to the acceptance of the player's action within the 2nd B reception period. Then, as shown in Fig. 291(b) and Fig. 299(d), the "2nd B post-reception performance display UGB2" thus started ends (is hidden) when a predetermined time (a certain time) has passed since the acceptance (valid acceptance determination).

Note that in the example presentation (Figure 299) corresponding to the 2nd B reception period, unlike the 1st B reception period, there is no change in the background image when the "2nd B post-reception performance display UGB2" is executed, which also makes it difficult to recognize that a reception has been made.

In addition, when an action by the player is accepted within the 2B acceptance period, as shown in Figures 291(b) and (c) and Figures 299(b) and (c), based on the acceptance, the 2B post-acceptance performance (2B post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is started prior to the 2B post-acceptance performance (2B post-acceptance performance display) using the first performance device.

Such a second presentation device may be provided as a sub-LCD when the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) is used as the main LCD, or may be provided as a presentation movable body capable of presentation operation, or a presentation lamp capable of presentation light emission, etc. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform presentations (display presentation, movable presentation, light emission presentation, etc.) in multiple ways with different degrees of expectation. The degree of expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-LCD 1610 is used as the second performance device. In an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 299(a) to FIG. 299(b) (when the post-acceptance performance has a relatively high expectation), as shown in FIG. 299(b), the mode in which a "ghost" is displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is started to be executed prior to the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance performance display UGB2-2) using the first performance device as the post-acceptance specific performance UTB2 (post-acceptance specific performance UTB2-2, which is a high expectation mode of the post-acceptance specific performance UTB2) corresponding to the second-B acceptance period. As mentioned above, we will not go into the details of the case where a low expectation mode is executed as the second B reception post-performance, but the "second B reception post-performance display" and "second B reception post-specific performance UTB2" are executed in a low expectation mode, and are basically the same as when they are executed in a high expectation mode.

Also, as shown in FIG. 299(a), the sub LCD 1610 (second performance device) will not execute a performance within the reception period that would suggest that the second B reception period has occurred.

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is further provided with a third performance device (speaker). However, when the second B reception period occurs, as shown in FIG. 299(d), the reception permission sound is not output, making it difficult to recognize when the second B reception period occurs.

In addition, during the 1B reception period, when reception is made, the audible output of the 2B post-reception sound is started based on this. The 2B post-reception sound is executed so as to suggest the degree of expectation, and for example, it may be executed (audible output) in a manner with low expectation, or in a manner with high expectation.

In addition, when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made during the 2B acceptance period, the third performance device audibly outputs not only the 2B post-acceptance performance sound that indicates the degree of expectation, but also a "acceptance sound" that does not indicate the degree of expectation. In other words, the "acceptance sound" is audibly output in the same manner regardless of whether the 2B post-acceptance performance is executed in a manner with high or low expectations.

In contrast, FIG. 292 assumes a case where a "valid acceptance determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made when a relatively late timing tR2A occurs within such a second B acceptance period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 292(a), the second B acceptance period ends and the post-acceptance performance (second B post-acceptance performance) corresponding to the second B acceptance period is started based on the fact that the player's action is accepted (valid acceptance determination is made) at timing tR2A.

In this regard, in the second B reception period, even if the reception (valid reception judgment) is made at a relatively late timing tR2A in the second B reception period (no matter what timing the reception (valid reception judgment) is made), the performance will basically proceed in the same manner as if the reception (valid reception judgment) was made at a relatively early timing tR2a in the second B reception period. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 292 (a), there are cases where the performance progresses from FIG. 299 (a) to FIG. 299 (b) and (c) (when the expectation level is relatively high as a performance after reception) and cases where the illustration is omitted (when the expectation level is relatively low as a performance after reception), and in the first performance device, the second performance device, and the third performance device, the performance will basically be executed as described with reference to FIG. 291, etc.

In particular, during the 2B reception period, unlike the 1B reception period, the "2B post-reception performance display", like the "2B post-reception specific performance" and "2B post-reception performance sound", is executed for a predetermined time (fixed time) from the time of reception (valid reception determination), so the appearance of the post-reception performance is the same regardless of the timing of reception (valid reception determination).

Note that the "2nd B post-reception performance display", "2nd B post-reception specific performance", and "2nd B post-reception performance sound" only need to be executed for a set period of time, and do not have to end at the same time as each other.

On the other hand, the example shown in Figure 293 and the example in which the presentation progresses from Figure 299(a) to Figure 299(d) are examples that assume a case in which no action (operation) is performed by the player within the second B reception period and no reception (valid reception determination) is made.

In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 293, after the second B acceptance period occurs, the timing tR3 arrives without any action (operation) by the player being accepted. In this regard, when no action (operation) by the player is accepted during the second B acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 293, no effects related to its occurrence or end will be executed.

With this configuration, the player does not know that the second B reception period has occurred or that he or she was unable to perform an action (operation), which prevents a decline in interest in the game due to the second B reception period.

Figures 294 to 296 are time charts showing examples of the presentation content when condition 3B is satisfied as a result of a judgment (jackpot judgment or presentation judgment) and a 3B reception period (3B reception presentation) occurs. Figures 300 and 301 are diagrams showing presentation examples in a variation pattern in which a 3B reception period (3B reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with no probability change or time reduction), and the "3B fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 3B fluctuation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 3B fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 3B fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in Figure 300 (a)"), and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "3B fluctuation pattern" itself.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 294(a), the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates the 3B acceptance period (valid period) during which "acceptance of the 3B post-acceptance performance" is permitted at timing tS2 when the 3B predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance of the decorative pattern SZ (when condition 3B is satisfied), during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates the 3B acceptance period (valid period) during which "acceptance of the 3B post-acceptance performance" is permitted. As a result, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the 3B acceptance period (when the acceptance is judged to be valid), the 3B post-acceptance performance is performed based on the acceptance (valid acceptance judgment).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) performs, in relation to the occurrence of such a 3B reception period, an action target display (mochi image display) suggesting the reception target (such as an operation receiving part), a remaining time display (a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced over time) suggesting the remaining time of the reception period (valid period), a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) that makes the mochi image display difficult to see, and a 1B post-reception performance display suggesting the expectation level (the rate at which a jackpot pattern appears) in response to the reception (valid reception determination). As described above, the mochi image display according to this embodiment is displayed as an "integrated mochi image display" integrated with a peripheral decoration image including a remaining time display (a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced over time), but this is not necessarily limited to this and may be displayed separately. This is also true for other reception periods.

However, the 3B reception period in this embodiment is realized as a special effect that combines the effects of both the above-mentioned "1B reception period (the so-called normal button effect)" and the above-mentioned "2B reception period (the so-called hidden button effect)."

More specifically, the 3B reception period occurs when the integrated model image display IG (the "model image display" and the "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)") is not yet displayed (timing tS2), as shown in Figures 296(b) and 300(a). In other words, in this case, the player is secretly given an opportunity to act (opportunity to operate), providing a so-called "hidden button effect" presentation.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 296(b), the presentation of this "hidden button presentation" continues only until timing X, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the 3B reception period. In other words, when timing X arrives within the 3B reception period, the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) according to this example displays the "Momo image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)" as the integrated Momo image display IG, and thus the state transitions to one in which the player is given an opportunity to act (opportunity to operate) while the integrated Momo image display IG is displayed. The integrated Momo image display IG (Momo image display, frame image, gauge image) thus displayed is hidden when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made within the 3B reception period, or when the 3B reception period ends without acceptance (valid acceptance determination). In this example, the third B reception period ends at timing tS3 if no action (operation) by the player is received (valid reception determination is made) (see FIG. 296(a) etc.).

According to such a 3B reception period, from the occurrence of the 3B reception period until the arrival of timing X, a "performance as a so-called hidden button" is provided in which the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player is permitted in the "first display state" in which the integrated model image display IG is not displayed, and from the above timing X until the end of the 3B reception period, a "performance as a so-called normal button" is provided in which the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player is permitted in the "second display state" in which the integrated model image display IG is displayed. As a result, the 3B reception period according to this embodiment is realized as a special performance that combines the performance of the above-mentioned "1B reception period (so-called normal button performance)" and the performance of the above-mentioned "2B reception period (so-called hidden button performance)," which is expected to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the "second display state" during the 3B reception period in this example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in one of a number of modes (for example, Fig. 232(a) and (c)), and Fig. 300(b) corresponds to the case where the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in Fig. 232(a), and Fig. 300(c) corresponds to the case where the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in Fig. 232(c). Note that, even during the 3B reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) may be displayed in one of a number of modes including the modes shown in Fig. 232(b) and (d).

Figure 294 assumes that a "valid acceptance determination that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made while the above-mentioned "first display state (see, for example, Figure 300(a))" is appearing during this 3B acceptance period (timing tS2a in the figure). In other words, in this case, as shown in Figure 294(a), the 3B acceptance period ends and the post-acceptance performance (3B post-acceptance performance) corresponding to the 3B acceptance period starts to be executed based on the acceptance of the player's action (operation) at timing tS2a (valid acceptance determination is made).

The example of the performance progressing from FIG. 300(a) to "F1 (FIG. 301(d1) to FIG. 301(h1))" corresponds to a case where a "valid reception determination" is made while the above-mentioned "first display state" is appearing during the 3B reception period, and as a result, a first mode with a relatively low expectation is executed as the "3B post-reception performance", and the example of the performance progressing from FIG. 300(a) to "F2 (FIG. 301(d2) to FIG. 301(h2))" corresponds to a case where a "valid reception determination" is made while the above-mentioned "first display state" is appearing during the 3B reception period, and as a result, a second mode with a relatively high expectation is executed as the "3B post-reception performance". The expectation (probability of the appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

Here, in this example of the presentation, as shown in FIG. 294, at timing tS2a when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (when the 3B post-acceptance presentation starts in response to the acceptance), the "integrated model image display IG", which had been hidden up until that point, can be made to appear.

In other words, if a player performs an action (operation) while the above-mentioned "first display state" is appearing during the 3B reception period (if a "valid reception determination" is made), the player will perform the action (operation) without knowing which aspect will appear as the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, frame image, gauge image). In this regard, by making it possible for the "integrated Moji image display IG", which had been hidden until then, to be displayed when the player's action (operation) is accepted, the player will be able to know which aspect will have appeared as the "integrated Moji image display IG" when the above-mentioned "second display state" is provisionally entered during the 3B reception period.

In other words, the 3B post-reception performance in this embodiment is realized as a performance that is at least a combination of the "3B post-reception performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), the "3B post-reception specific performance" using the second performance device (e.g., a sub-liquid crystal display, a movable body, a performance lamp, etc.), and the 3B post-reception performance sound using the third performance device (speaker) (it does not necessarily have to be realized as a combination performance using three performance devices). However, among these performance devices, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) on which the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed is delayed in the time when the "3rd post-reception performance display" as the 3B post-reception performance is started compared to the other performance devices, and this is intended to intentionally maintain the visibility of the "integrated model image display IG" even after the reception is made.

As shown in FIG. 301 (d1) or (d2), this configuration allows the player to easily recognize in which of the multiple modes (FIG. 232 (a) to (d)) the integrated model image display IG was scheduled to be displayed during the ended reception period even after reception has been made in the above-mentioned "first display state" during the 3B reception period, which is expected to effectively prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Here, in order to make it easier to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period after the reception period has ended, it is desirable to set the "time during which the integrated model image display IG is displayed in an easily visible form" after reception has been made to be longer. However, if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed in the same form as when it was in the "second display state" even though reception has been made and the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has already been executed, it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the reception has been made, and as a result, there is a concern that "the player will be late in noticing the post-reception performance that is being executed."

Therefore, in the examples shown in Figure 294 (b) and Figure 301 (e1) or (e2), when a predetermined time has passed from timing tS2a when the 3B acceptance period ends due to the acceptance of an action (operation) by the player (when timing tS2b arrives), a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes the mock image display difficult to see is started to be displayed.

In other words, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed while the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

With this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG is displayed after the reception is made in the "first display state" during the 3B reception period, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, thereby suggesting that the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being executed.

In addition, if the reception is made during the 3B reception period in the above-mentioned "first display state" which provides the effect of a "so-called hidden button," it is difficult to know whether the reception was made during the 2B reception period or the 3B reception period, but the appearance of a "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" which cannot appear during the 2B reception period makes it possible to know that the reception was made during the 3B reception period.

In addition, during the 3B reception period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) is executed in the same manner when a low expectation mode (Fig. 301 (d1) to (h1)) appears as the post-3B reception performance and when a high expectation mode (Fig. 301 (d2) to (h2)) appears. With this configuration, compared to the 1B reception period (when the appearance of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) differs depending on the expectation), the importance of gazing at the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" after reception during the 3B reception period is lower, so even if reception is made during the 3B reception period during the "first display state" that provides the performance of a "so-called hidden button," it becomes possible to preferably gaze at the integrated model image display IG after the reception.

In addition, in the 3B reception period according to this performance example, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) that appears when reception is made uses the "second disappearance-related display SKB2" that is displayed when the post-reception performance (1B post-reception performance) corresponding to the above-mentioned 1B reception period is executed in a highly anticipated manner. In other words, in this case, in the 3B reception period, as long as reception is made, it is possible to give the impression that the post-reception performance will be executed in a highly anticipated manner, which can increase interest in the game.

The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) corresponding to the 3B reception period does not necessarily have to be the "2nd disappearance-related display SKB2". For example, even if the "1st disappearance-related display SKB1" that is displayed when the post-reception performance (1st B post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1B reception period is executed in a low expectation mode is used as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) corresponding to the 3B reception period, it will be difficult to recognize whether the reception has been made in the 1B reception period or the 3B reception period.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in Figure 294 (b) and Figure 301 (f1) or (f2), when timing tS2c arrives during the period during which a display related to the disappearance-related display (in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears, the first performance device (performance display device 1600) begins to execute a "3rd B post-reception performance display UGB3 (conversation announcement)" as a post-reception performance in response to the acceptance of an action (operation) by the player within the 3rd B reception period. However, in this example where the performance progresses from FIG. 300(a) to "F1 (FIG. 301(d1) to (h1))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively low expectation), as shown in FIG. 301(f1), the first mode (here, the post-reception performance display UGB3-1, which is a "silent" conversation announcement) is displayed as the post-reception performance display UGB3 corresponding to the 3B reception period, and in this example where the performance progresses from FIG. 300(a) to "F2 (FIG. 301(d2) to (h2))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively high expectation), as shown in FIG. 301(f2), the second mode (here, the post-reception performance display UGB3-2, which is a conversation announcement that mentions "chance") is displayed as the post-reception performance display UGB3 corresponding to the 3B reception period.

In other words, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKB2)" are displayed, the "3rd B post-reception performance display UGB3 ("3rd B post-reception performance display UGB3-1" or "3rd B post-reception performance display UGB3-2") will begin to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated model image display IG is displayed for a relatively long time after acceptance within the 3B acceptance period, the post-acceptance performance (3B post-acceptance performance display UGB3) on the first performance device (performance display device 1600) can be started without a significant delay compared to other performance devices, and a decline in interest in the game can be suppressed. Also, since the 3B post-acceptance performance display UGB3 starts while the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the "integrated model image display IG" to the "3B post-acceptance performance display UGB3 (3B post-acceptance performance display UGB3-1 or 3B post-acceptance performance display UGB3-2)" while suggesting that the 3B acceptance period has already ended (after timing tS2c).

On the other hand, when the "3B post-reception performance display UGB3 (3B post-reception performance display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception performance display UGB3-2)" is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the area in which the "integrated Moji image display IG" is displayed (it does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "integrated Moji image display IG", and the "integrated Moji image display IG" is displayed preferentially over the "3B post-reception performance display UGB3 (3B post-reception performance display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception performance display UGB3-2)". This makes it easier to recognize in which form the integrated Moji image display IG was displayed during the reception period, even when the "3B post-reception performance display UGB3 (3B post-reception performance display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception performance display UGB3-2)" starts to be executed.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the display of the "3rd B post-reception performance display UGB3 (3rd B post-reception performance display UGB3-1 or 3rd B post-reception performance display UGB3-2)" is started in this manner, as shown in Figure 294 (b) and Figure 301 (g1) or (g2), while the "3rd B post-reception performance display UGB3 (3rd B post-reception performance display UGB3-1 or 3rd B post-reception performance display UGB3-2)" is displayed, first, of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related displays", the "integrated model image display IG" is made invisible. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKB2)" is hidden as shown in FIG. 294(b) or FIG. 301(h1) or (h2), and this allows for good visibility and causes the display related to the "3rd B post-reception performance display UGB3 (3rd B post-reception performance display UGB3-1 or 3rd B post-reception performance display UGB3-2)" to be displayed.

In this regard, the "third-B post-reception performance display UGB3" is displayed in one of a number of modes (here, third-B post-reception performance display UGB3-1 or third-B post-reception performance display UGB3-2) with different degrees of expectation based on the acceptance of the player's action (operation). Therefore, the "third-B post-reception performance display UGB3" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display" are hidden.

In the example of the performance corresponding to the 3B reception period (Fig. 300 and Fig. 301), even if the reception is made during the 3B reception period and the "3B reception post performance display UGB3" is executed, the background image is not switched before and after the start of the "3B reception post performance display UGB3". With this configuration, when compared with the 1B reception period, even if the reception is made in the "second display state", it is possible to suggest that the reception is made in the 3B reception period, which also has the performance properties of a "so-called hidden button". Also, when compared with the 2B reception period, it is possible to make it appear as if the performance is progressing as a result of the reception being made with the "so-called hidden button" even while the "3B reception post performance display UGB3" is being executed.

In this performance example, the "3rd B post-reception performance display UGB3" is started to be displayed at a later time (timing tS2c) than the time (timing tS2b) when the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKB2)" is started to be displayed, but it may be started to be displayed at the same time (timing tS2b) as the time (timing tS2b) when the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKB2)" is started to be displayed.

In this way, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, when a 3B reception period occurs, various displays are performed within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 294) and on a limited display screen (performance display device 1600), thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game. However, as a result of this, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is forced to delay the start time (timing tS2c) of the 3B post-reception performance (3B post-reception performance display) in response to the reception from the timing tS2a of the reception.

In this example, when an action by the player is accepted within the 3B acceptance period, as shown in Figures 294(b) and (c), based on the acceptance, the 3B post-acceptance performance (3B post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is started prior to the 3B post-acceptance performance (3B post-acceptance performance display) using the first performance device.

With this configuration, the delay in the start of execution from the timing tS2a when the 3B reception period is made is limited to only a part of the 3B post-reception performance (display of the 3B post-reception performance), and the 3B post-reception performance itself can be started without delay from the same timing tS2a.

Such a second presentation device may be provided as a sub-LCD when the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) is used as the main LCD, or may be provided as a presentation movable body capable of presentation operation, or a presentation lamp capable of presentation light emission, etc. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform presentations (display presentation, movable presentation, light emission presentation, etc.) in multiple ways with different degrees of expectation. The degree of expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-LCD 1610 is used as the second performance device. In an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 300(a) to "F1 (FIG. 301(d1) to (h1))" (when the expectation level is relatively low as a post-acceptance performance), as shown in FIG. 301(d1), the mode in which "Suekichi" is displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is started to be executed prior to the 3B post-acceptance performance (3B post-acceptance performance display UGB3-1) using the first performance device as the 3B post-acceptance specific performance UTB3 (the 3B post-acceptance specific performance UTB3-1, which is a low expectation level mode of the 3B post-acceptance specific performance UTB3) corresponding to the 3B acceptance period. In contrast, in an example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 300(a) to "F2 (FIG. 301(d2) to (h2))" (when the post-reception presentation has a relatively high expectation), as shown in FIG. 301(d2), the mode in which "吉" is displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second presentation device) is set to begin execution prior to the 3B post-reception presentation (3B post-reception presentation display UGB3-2) using the first presentation device as the 3B post-reception specific presentation UTB3 (the 3B post-reception specific presentation UTB3-2, which is a high expectation mode of the 3B post-reception specific presentation UTB3) corresponding to the 3B reception period.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 301, in the above-mentioned "first display state" during the 3B reception period, the performance during the reception period that suggests that the 3B reception period has also occurred on the sub-liquid crystal display 1610 (second performance device) is not executed, and in the above-mentioned "second display state" during the 3B reception period, the performance during the reception period that suggests that the 3B reception period has also occurred on the sub-liquid crystal display 1610 (second performance device) is executed (FIG. 300(b) and (c)). The performance during the reception period on the sub-liquid crystal display 1610 (second performance device) is displayed in the same manner when the "integrated model image display IG" on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is displayed in a manner with low expectation (see FIG. 300(b)) and when it is displayed in a manner with high expectation (see FIG. 300(c)).

In other words, in this case, during the 3B reception period in which the player is given an opportunity to act (opportunity to operate), in the above-mentioned "second display state", different modes will appear on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) depending on the degree of expectation, and the same mode will appear on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) regardless of the degree of expectation. However, after this, when the "valid reception determination is made that the action (operation) by the player is a valid operation" during the above-mentioned "second display state" during the 3B reception period, while the display related to the "integrated model image display IG" continues on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) (while the expectation of the performance after reception has not yet been indicated), different modes will appear on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) depending on the degree of expectation. With this configuration, it is possible to obtain performance information more quickly by focusing on the appropriate performance device depending on the time than by focusing on the performance by only one performance device, and this can improve the interest in the game.

In this example, the degree of expectation is suggested depending on whether the "special effect UTB3-1 after 3B reception" or the "special effect UTB3-2 after 3B reception" appears as the specific effect UTB3 after 3B reception. However, it is not necessary to prepare multiple forms for the specific effect UTB3 after 3B reception. For example, it is possible to provide only the "special effect UTB3-2 after 3B reception" as the specific effect UTB3 after 3B reception, and suggest the degree of expectation (the rate at which a jackpot is obtained) depending on whether the "special effect UTB3-2 after 3B reception" appears. In other words, in this case, when the "special effect UTB3-2 after 3B reception" appears, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is higher than when the "special effect UTB3-2 after 3B reception" does not appear.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further includes a third performance device (speaker), and when the third B reception period occurs, the reception allowable sound starts to be output at timing tS1 shown in FIG. 294(d). The reception allowable sound corresponding to the third B reception period is audibly output across both timing tS2 when the third B reception period occurs and timing X when the "first display state" transitions to the "second display state", and while the reception allowable sound is being audibly output, the player's actions (operations) can be accepted. However, the reception allowable sound only needs to be audibly output across timing X, and it does not necessarily have to be audibly output across timing tS2.

In this case, during the 3B reception period, a third acceptable sound different from either the first long acceptable sound or the first short acceptable sound is audibly output as the acceptable sound, thereby making it possible to indicate that a 3B reception period, which also has the dramatic quality of a "so-called hidden button," will occur (or has occurred), rather than the 1B reception period. However, the acceptable sound corresponding to the 3B reception period may be executed as either the first long acceptable sound or the first short acceptable sound.

In the third B acceptance period, if an action by the player is accepted while the corresponding acceptance permissible sound (here, the third permissible sound) is being audibly output, the acceptance permissible sound is not terminated midway (the audible output state is not terminated midway) based on the fact that an action has been accepted. This also makes it possible to suggest that a third B acceptance period, which also has the dramatic quality of a "so-called hidden button," will occur (or is occurring), rather than the first B acceptance period. However, the acceptance permissible sound corresponding to the third B acceptance period may also be terminated midway based on the fact that an action has been accepted.

In this regard, it is desirable that the reception allowable sound (here, the third reception allowable sound) corresponding to the 3B reception period be executed (audibly output) in a manner with low expectation (as shown in FIG. 300(b)) and executed (audibly output) in a manner with high expectation (as shown in FIG. 300(c)), as shown in FIG. 294(d). In other words, in this case, while the reception allowable sound suggests the expectation level during the reception period, unlike the "integrated model image display IG," it is executed in such a way that it becomes impossible to confirm once reception (valid reception determination) has been made, and therefore it is expected to favorably maintain a sense of tension as to when during the reception period the reception (valid reception determination) will be made.

Also, during the 3B reception period, if the player's action is accepted while the reception permission sound is being audibly output, not only is the reception permission sound terminated, but the audible output of the 3B post-reception performance sound is started based on the acceptance. The 3B post-reception performance sound is executed to indicate the degree of expectation, and may be executed (audibly output) in a manner with low expectation, or in a manner with high expectation. In other words, in this case, unlike the performance (display performance) performed by the first performance device, during the 3B reception period, there is no competition (overlapping) between the performance performed during the reception period (reception permission sound) and the performance performed in response to the acceptance (3B post-reception performance sound).

Similar to the "3B post-reception performance display UGB3", as shown in FIG. 294(d), this type of 3B post-reception performance sound will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" are hidden. Also, for the 3B post-reception performance sound, it is desirable to output different output sounds (modes) in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 300(a) to "F1 (FIG. 301(d1)-(h1))" (when the expectation level is relatively low as a post-reception performance) and the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 300(a) to "F2 (FIG. 301(d2)-(h2))" (when the expectation level is relatively high as a post-reception performance).

In addition, when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made during the 3B acceptance period, the third performance device audibly outputs not only the 3B post-acceptance performance sound that indicates the degree of expectation, but also a "acceptance sound" that does not indicate the degree of expectation. That is, the "acceptance sound" is audibly output in the same manner in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 300(a) to "F1 (FIG. 301(d1) to (h1))" (when the degree of expectation is relatively low as a post-acceptance performance) and the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 300(a) to "F2 (FIG. 301(d2) to (h2))" (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as a post-acceptance performance). And, such a "acceptance sound" is audibly output (regardless of the degree of expectation) even when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made during an acceptance period other than the 3B acceptance period (for example, the 1B acceptance period, or a predetermined acceptance period other than each of the above-mentioned acceptance periods). With this configuration, no matter how innovative the post-reception performance, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, the user can easily recognize that the reception (valid reception determination) has been properly made, which encourages the user to concentrate on the content of the post-reception performance.

In contrast, FIG. 295 assumes a case where, during this 3B reception period, while the above-mentioned "second display state (see, for example, FIG. 300(b) and (c))" appears (timing tS2A in the figure), "a valid reception determination is made that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action." In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 295(a), the 3B reception period ends and the post-reception performance (3B post-reception performance) corresponding to the 3B reception period starts to be executed based on the fact that the action (operation) by the player is accepted (valid reception determination is made) at timing tS2A.

In this regard, during the 3B reception period, even if reception (valid reception determination) is made while the above-mentioned "second display state (see, for example, Figures 300(b) and (c))" is present during the 3B reception period, after the reception is made, the presentation will progress in the same manner as if reception (valid reception determination) was made while the above-mentioned "first display state (see, for example, Figure 300(a))" was present during the 3B reception period. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 295(a), there are cases where the presentation progresses from FIG. 300(b) to "F1 (FIG. 301(d1)-(h1))" (a case where the expectation level is relatively low as a post-reception presentation), and cases where the presentation progresses from FIG. 300(b) to "F2 (FIG. 301(d2)-(h2))" (a case where the expectation level is relatively high as a post-reception presentation), and in the first, second, and third presentation devices, the presentation is basically executed as described with reference to FIG. 294 etc.

However, in the example shown in Figure 295, the display area of the gauge image is reduced in the situation shown in Figure 301 (d) etc. by the amount of reception (valid reception determination) that occurs at a relatively late timing tS2A within the 3B reception period.

In addition, during the 3B reception period, the "3B post-reception performance display", like the "3B post-reception specific performance" and "3B post-reception performance sound", is executed for a predetermined time (a fixed time) from the time of reception (valid reception determination), so the appearance of the post-reception performance is the same regardless of the timing of reception (valid reception determination).

Note that the "3B post-reception performance display", "3B post-reception specific performance", and "3B post-reception performance sound" only need to be executed for a set period of time, and do not have to end at the same time as each other.

On the other hand, the example shown in Figure 296 and the example in which the presentation progresses from Figure 301(b) to "F3 (Figure 301(d3) to (g3))" are examples that assume a case in which no action (operation) is performed by the player within the 3B reception period and no reception (valid reception determination) is made.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 296, after the 3B reception period occurs, the timing tS3 arrives without the player's action (operation) being accepted. In this regard, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at the timing tS3 (the point at which the 3B reception period ends and the acceptance of the player's action (operation) is no longer permitted) does not hide the integrated model image display IG, nor does it make the integrated model image display IG difficult to see, as shown in FIG. 301 (d3), in the same way as the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at timing tS2a or tS2A (the point at which the player's action (operation) is accepted during the 3B reception period (or the point at which the performance after acceptance begins)).

With this configuration, even if the 3B acceptance period ends before the player's action (operation) is accepted in time, it is possible to recognize how the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the 3B acceptance period after the end of the period, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if no action (operation) by the player is accepted, as shown in FIG. 301 (e3), the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF presentation) will be initiated as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see."

In other words, in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in this example, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed while the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

With this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the 3B reception period ends without any reception, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, thereby making it possible to indicate that the 3B reception period has ended. Also, even in a situation where the 3B reception period has already ended, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in playing the game due to not being able to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 in this example, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the third B acceptance period, the "third disappearance related display SKB3" is displayed as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF presentation).

It is desirable that the "third disappearance-related display SKB3" is not displayed in relation to the first B acceptance period. In other words, in this case, even if the player's action (operation) is not accepted during the third B acceptance period, it will be possible to suggest that the acceptance period combined the presentation characteristics of the above-mentioned "first B acceptance period (so-called normal button presentation)" and the above-mentioned "second B acceptance period (so-called hidden button presentation)."

It is also desirable that the "third disappearance-related display SKB3" not be displayed when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the third B acceptance period. In other words, in this case, it is possible to more appropriately indicate that the third B acceptance period has ended without any acceptance.

After this, as shown in FIG. 301 (f3), of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (the third disappearance-related display SKB3 in the figure)," the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden first. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" has been hidden in this way, the "disappearance-related display (the third disappearance-related display SKB3 in the figure))" is hidden as shown in FIG. 301 (g3).

As mentioned above, in the third B reception period in this example, when the "second display state" is reached, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 232(c) (see FIG. 300(c)) rather than in the manner shown in FIG. 232(a) (see FIG. 300(b)). When the situation shown in FIG. 300(c) occurs, the only difference from the situation shown in FIG. 300(b) above is the appearance of the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image)," and otherwise the performance will proceed in the same manner.

For example, when the presentation progresses from FIG. 300(c) to "F1'", the content is basically the same as when the presentation progresses from FIG. 300(b) to "F1 (FIG. 301(d1)-(h1))", and only the aspect of the "integrated model image display IG" in the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) has been changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGc". Also, when the presentation progresses from FIG. 300(c) to "F2'", the content is basically the same as when the presentation progresses from FIG. 300(b) to "F2 (FIG. 301(d2)-(h2))", and only the aspect of the "integrated model image display IG" in the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) has been changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGc". Furthermore, when the presentation progresses from Figure 301 (c) to "F3'", the content is basically the same as when the presentation progresses from Figure 300 (b) to "F3 (Figure 298 (d3) to (g3))", and only the form of the "integrated model image display IG" in the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) has been changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGc".

The pachinko machine 1 of the present application, which provides the 1B reception period through the 3B reception period, provides the following excellent effects.

First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, multiple reception periods (1B reception period to 3B reception period) are prepared with different presentation contents (post-reception presentations such as cut-in notice, group notice, conversation notice, etc., which are types of pre-notification presentations (expectation indication presentations)) that are carried out when reception is made, and it is possible to generate reception periods (valid periods) of different types according to the results of the judgment (presentation judgment).

In this regard, in the 1B reception period to the 3B reception period, when an action by the player is accepted, the post-acceptance performance display (1B post-acceptance performance display to the 3B post-acceptance performance display) can be displayed on the "performance display device 1600" based on the fact that the action has been accepted. Among these, in the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, when an action by the player is accepted, not only is the post-acceptance performance display displayed based on the fact that the action has been accepted, but the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is also made to appear. In other words, in this case, not only is it possible to check which form of the model image display has appeared even after the acceptance has been made, but by reducing the visibility of the model image display by the "form in which the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" until the model image display is made invisible, it is expected that the player's focus will naturally shift from the "model image display" to the "post-acceptance performance display". In addition, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is a display in which the same format can be used for multiple reception periods in which the performance content that progresses when the application is accepted is different (see Figure 298 (e2) and Figure 301 (e2), etc.).

However, because the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are originally displayed during the reception period when reception has not yet been made, if the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) were to be displayed after reception has been made, it would be difficult to tell whether the post-reception performance display corresponding to the reception has already been displayed, and there is a concern that interest in the game would decrease. In this regard, when reception is made during either the 1B reception period or the 3B reception period, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are made invisible (invisible) while a "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is displayed, whereas the post-reception performance display is displayed while a "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is displayed. In other words, in this case, after the player's action is accepted, a transition in display presentation from the pre-acceptance display (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) to the post-acceptance display (post-acceptance presentation display) is realized while "a display in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears.

Note that the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" and the "post-acceptance performance display" are common in that they are both displayed based on acceptance. However, the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" refers to, for example, as shown in FIG. 298(e1) or FIG. 298(e2), etc., which appears to make the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) difficult to see when the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. In contrast, the "post-acceptance performance display" refers to, for example, as shown in FIG. 298(f1) or FIG. 298(f2), etc., which appears to make the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) difficult to see even if it is displayed when the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. Also, in each of the above examples, the "post-reception performance display" is started to be displayed when the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, but the "post-reception performance display" does not necessarily have to be started to be displayed when the model image display is displayed, and may be started to be displayed after the model image display is made non-display.

As for the "mode in which the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)", methods of "appearing so as to make the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) difficult to see" include a method of realizing this by displaying an image display other than the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) as a priority display (displaying in a front layer) in at least a part of the area in which the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, as well as a method of displaying an image (video) that is made so that a part of the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) appears missing (unrecognizable) by displaying an image display other than the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). Also, instead of displaying an image other than the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), it is also possible to adopt a method of changing the numerical values (transparency, etc.) related to the display characteristics of the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself. In response to this, a method for making the "post-reception performance display" "appear so as not to make the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) difficult to see" can be adopted, such as a method of displaying the "post-reception performance display" in at least a part of the area in which the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, but displaying the "post-reception performance display" (displaying in a rear layer) in such a way that the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is given priority display, or a method of displaying the "post-reception performance display" only in an area excluding the area in which the Moji image display is displayed, at least while the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed.

In addition, as a "disappearance-related display that makes the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) difficult to see," it is possible to adopt both a method of displaying an image display other than the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in at least a part of the area in which the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, and a method of changing a numerical value (transparency, etc.) related to the display characteristics of the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself.

The "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears before the "post-acceptance performance display" is displayed, in a situation in which the "post-acceptance performance display" has not yet been displayed. In other words, in this case, in a situation in which the "post-acceptance performance display" has not yet been displayed, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are made difficult to see by the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)." This means that while the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are visible, the "post-acceptance performance display" may soon appear, and it is possible to encourage the player to prepare in advance by changing his or her gaze from the "difficult-to-see model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)."

In addition, if a win is accepted during the 1B acceptance period or the 3B acceptance period, the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" can remain displayed even after the "post-acceptance performance display" is displayed, and is hidden while the "post-acceptance performance display" is displayed. This makes it possible to provide a wider range of performance related to the "post-acceptance performance display" during the period in which the "post-acceptance performance display" is displayed, after the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is hidden, and thus makes it possible to increase interest in the game by changing the performance during such a display period.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples for the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, as shown in Figures 298 and 301, the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is displayed not only in the area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, but also in the area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are not displayed. And, in this area, the "post-reception performance display" is displayed in at least a part of it, but it is displayed (for example, displayed in the rear layer) so that at least a part of the "post-reception performance display" is difficult to see due to the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)".

With this configuration, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) appears to make it difficult to see not only the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), but also the "post-reception performance display", which is expected to improve both the performance until the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are hidden, and the performance when the "post-reception performance display" begins to be displayed.

As mentioned above, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples relating to the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, in a situation where the "post-reception performance display" is not displayed after reception and before the "post-reception performance display" is displayed, a post-reception specific performance (post-reception performance using the second performance device) that does not make it difficult to see the mock-up image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) can be made to appear in addition to the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance). This makes it possible to enjoy the post-reception performance prior to the first performance device without interfering with the performance of the first performance device.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples relating to the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, the post-reception specific performance (post-reception performance using the second performance device) is made to appear before the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) appears, in a situation where the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) has not yet appeared. Also, the post-reception specific performance (post-reception performance using the second performance device) is made to continue until after the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) has ended.

With this configuration, players who dislike the complex presentation of the first presentation device can enjoy the post-reception presentation with the second presentation device, which has a more simplified presentation, thereby increasing the interest of various types of players.

In addition, in the above-mentioned examples of effects relating to the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, the model image display will be displayed by dynamic display, as described above with reference to Figures 233 and 234. In this case, it is desirable that the dynamic display of the model image display is not terminated and continues even when the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) appears after acceptance.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples of effects related to the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is designed to make it difficult to see not only the mock image display, but also the gauge image indicating the remaining time until the end of the reception period. This prevents the appearance of remaining time being seen even if the gauge image is displayed after reception.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if an action (operation) by a player is accepted during the 3B acceptance period among the multiple acceptance periods, the "3B post-acceptance performance display UGB3" can be displayed based on the fact that the action (operation) has been accepted. However, in addition to the 3B post-acceptance performance display UGB3, the above-mentioned mode (second disappearance-related display SKB2) that also corresponds to the above-mentioned 1B acceptance period can be made to appear as a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) in addition to the 3B post-acceptance performance display UGB3.

With this configuration, when the second disappearance-related display SKB2 appears, it is unclear whether the first or third B post-reception performance display will appear, but when the first disappearance-related display SKB1 appears, it becomes possible to guess that the first B post-reception performance display UGB1 will appear.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) is displayed (priority display) in an area that includes at least a part of the area in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. However, it is also possible to realize a performance that uses a performance device (such as a movable body) located in front of the display screen, in a position that overlaps with at least a part of the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) when viewed from the front.

In addition, even if the same pattern (second disappearance related display SKB2) appears as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF performance), if the type of acceptance period is different, it is desirable to make the probability (expectation level) that the jackpot pattern will stop due to the pattern change different.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, a post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) can be executed using the second performance device, and during the execution period of the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device, the first performance device is configured to be in a state where the mock image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively easy to see, and in another state where the mock image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively difficult to see.

In other words, in this case, even after the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device has started based on the fact that the reception has been made, it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). Also, by making the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) relatively difficult to see during the execution period of the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device, it is expected that the player will be encouraged to naturally shift his or her focus of attention from the "first performance device" to the "second performance device."

In the above-mentioned performance example, the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is started so as not to affect the visibility of the mock image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) that are continuously displayed (displayed in an easily visible state) from before the reception. More specifically, the mock image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed in a specified area within the display screen (performance display device 1600), but the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is not an image display that is displayed using at least a portion of the specified area, nor is it a performance that is executed in a position that overlaps with at least a portion of the specified area when viewed from the front.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the post-reception performance display is started to be displayed after the timing of the appearance of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance), but it may be made to start to be displayed at the timing of the appearance of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) is realized as an image display that is displayed using at least a part of the "area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed." However, in this case, it is desirable to display the image display so that the area displayed in the "area where the model image display is displayed" tends to gradually expand as time passes.

As mentioned above, the "moon image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" in this embodiment can be displayed as an integrated moon image display IG in one of multiple modes (integrated moon image displays IGa-IGd) with different degrees of expectation. According to each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the display mode is maintained and continued even after acceptance, including the display position, size, dynamic depiction, etc., so it is possible to recognize in what mode the moon image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) were displayed during the acceptance period, even after acceptance.

However, in this case, if it is during the period immediately after acceptance, the post-acceptance performance must be performed under such conditions (maintaining the display related to the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)). In other words, the range of performance is narrow, and only limited performances (post-acceptance performances using only performance devices different from the first performance device) can be performed. However, when the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) appears after time has passed, it becomes possible to perform the post-acceptance performance under the condition that "the visibility of the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) may be deteriorated", and therefore it becomes possible to perform the "post-acceptance performance display in the first performance device" under such conditions. By gradually performing these two post-operation performances of different natures (post-acceptance specific performance in the second performance device, post-acceptance performance display in the first performance device), it becomes possible to easily confirm the state of the model image display even after acceptance, while also favorably fulfilling its role as a post-operation performance.

As mentioned above, the "mock image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be displayed separately, or only one of the "mock image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be displayed.

In addition, the target of the player's action (operation) during the first B reception period, second B reception period, and third B reception period does not necessarily have to be the same, and may be different actions. However, if different actions are requested, the action target display (model image display) will also be displayed differently.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, multiple reception periods are prepared, including the 3B reception period (Figs. 294 to 296) having the above-mentioned "first display state" in which the model image display (or remaining time display) is not displayed and "a reception validity judgment that the player's action is a valid action" is permitted. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when such a 3B reception period (first display state) occurs, a reception permission sound can be output indicating that a state in which a reception validity judgment is permitted or that a reception validity judgment is about to be permitted. Therefore, although there is still a situation in which it is not possible to fully recognize which is the target of the player's action because the model image display is not displayed, it becomes possible to recognize that the player is in a situation in which some action is required (a situation in which an operation opportunity is given), and it is expected that many players will enjoy the presentation. As a result, even in the reception period in which the model image display is not displayed and "a reception validity judgment that the action by the player is a valid action" is permitted, even a player who is insensitive to the dramatic effect of so-called hidden buttons can enjoy it, unlike the case of the second B reception period. However, the reception permission sound may not be output when the third B reception period occurs. In addition, the "state in which the model image display (or the remaining time display) is not displayed" may mean a state in which the model image display (or the remaining time display) cannot be visually recognized on the display screen. For example, it includes a state in which the model image display (or the remaining time display) is displayed on a layer but cannot be visually recognized because an image on another layer is displayed preferentially. In addition, the "model image display (or the remaining time display)" here means an image displayed in any of a plurality of modes with different expectancies shown in Figs. 232(a) to (d). Therefore, as long as it is not possible to determine which of these display modes it is in, it can be said to be in a state where the mock image display (or remaining time display) is not being displayed (conversely, if it is possible to determine which of these display modes it is in, it can be said to be in a state where the mock image display (or remaining time display) is being displayed, even if it is not displayed in a highly visible manner).

The reception permission sound output when the 3B reception period occurs is realized as the "third reception permission sound", but it is preferable that the sound be output (as the reception permission sound) when other reception periods occur. For example, if the reception permission sound is output when a reception period occurs in which the same action opportunity as the 3B reception period (for example, pressing the operation button 410) is given, it will be possible to suitably suggest to the player which action opportunity (operation opportunity) will be given (has been given) even when the model image display is not displayed. Also, for example, if the reception permission sound is output when a reception period occurs in which an action opportunity different from the 3B reception period (for example, sheathing the sword decoration 5001) is given, it will be difficult for the player to predict which action opportunity (operation opportunity) will be given when the model image display is not displayed, but it will be possible to suggest that some action opportunity (operation opportunity) is given (has been given).

In addition, in the 3B reception period according to the above-mentioned performance example, as shown in FIG. 296, first, a "first display state" appears in which the model image display is not displayed. Then, while the 3B reception period continues, a "second display state" appears in which the model image display is displayed. That is, in this case, in the 3B reception period, the model image display is initially generated as a so-called "hidden button", and only players who are sensitive to such performance can enjoy it. However, since the model image display is displayed while the 3B reception period continues (before the set time (valid time) has ended), many players who are not sensitive to performance can notice this (the 3B reception period) and enjoy the performance. In addition, it is expected that such performance will develop the ability to discern that a so-called "hidden button" has occurred.

In addition, in this case, it is desirable that the model image display can be displayed with one of a number of different expectation levels (modes) in the "second display state", as shown in Fig. 300(b) and (c). In other words, from the player's perspective, if a player does not accept an action in the "first display state" but accepts an action in the "second display state", it will be revealed to those around that the player did not recognize that the 3B acceptance period occurred until the model image display was displayed, and there is a concern that the player's interest in the game will decrease due to the player's insensitivity to such effects being revealed. In this regard, if the model image display is displayed with one of a number of different expectation levels (modes) in the "second display state", even if the player accepts an action in the "second display state", it will be possible to make the player appear as if "the player realized that the game was in a state in which acceptance of an action was permitted from the first display state, but deliberately did not accept an action in the first display state because he wanted to see the expectation level suggested by the model image display", which is expected to suitably suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, during the 3B reception period (first display state), due to its nature as a so-called "hidden button," it is difficult for the player to accurately recognize at what point in time the 3B reception period, during which "valid reception determination that an action by the player is a valid action" is permitted, has occurred. In this case, if an action (operation) is performed shortly before the occurrence of the 3B reception period, the player may mistakenly believe that "the 3B reception period has occurred, but was mistaken," due to the lack of a "valid reception determination," and there is a concern that the 3B reception period may end without the player performing an action (operation).

Therefore, in the 3B acceptance period, even if a player makes an action (operation) before timing tS2 when a state (3B acceptance period) occurs in which a "valid acceptance judgment that treats a player's action as a valid action" is permitted, the action (operation) will not be "validly accepted" at that time, but it is desirable to make it possible to make a "valid acceptance judgment" targeting (based on) the player's action (operation) made before the 3B acceptance period at the start of the 3B acceptance period (or thereafter).

In this case, however, the detection of whether or not a player has performed an action (operation) will be required to be performed regardless of whether or not the relevant third B acceptance period, in which "a valid acceptance determination that a player's action is a valid action" is permitted, has occurred.

For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 294, even if the player's action (operation) is performed slightly before timing tS2, this will be detected. However, at the time when the player's action (operation) is detected in this way, the 3B reception period has not yet occurred, so a "valid reception determination that the player's action is a valid action" is not made based on this detection. However, the existence of this detection information is kept as a memory (history), and after the 3B reception period occurs, a "valid reception determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made during the 3B reception period based on the detection information kept as the memory (history). Then, the 3B post-reception performance is executed based on the "valid reception determination" obtained in this way.

With this configuration, even if an operation (manipulation) occurs shortly before the occurrence of the 3B reception period, it can be accepted within the 3B reception period, and it becomes possible to execute a post-reception performance (3B post-reception performance) triggered by this. This makes it possible to lower the difficulty of accepting the operation, even while realizing the performance of a so-called "hidden button" (first display state).

However, if an operation (operation) is performed significantly (more than a specified time) before the occurrence of the 3B reception period, it is desirable to prevent this from triggering the execution of the 3B post-reception performance. This type of configuration can be realized, for example, by setting a time value that is stored as detection information.

Note that this configuration when operated (operated) slightly before the occurrence of the 3B reception period may be applied to the 1B reception period and the 2B reception period in the same manner, or may not be applied.

In addition, at this time, it is desirable to make it possible to accept (validly accept) any action (operation) performed before the occurrence of the 3B acceptance period as a valid judgment in the "first display state" rather than in the "second display state" after the occurrence of the 3B acceptance period. With this configuration, the action (operation) is judged as valid when a short time has passed since the player performed the action (operation) (for example, when the first display state (3B acceptance period) occurs) and the imitation image display is not displayed, and thus the post-acceptance performance begins to be executed. This makes it possible to suggest that the action by the player has been properly accepted, rather than the so-called "automatic acceptance function" that occurs when the imitation image display is displayed but no action (operation) is performed, and it is possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance examples (e.g., Fig. 294, Fig. 300, Fig. 301), the same appearance is made as the 3B post-reception performance according to the reception when the reception (valid reception judgment) is made in the "first display state" during the 3B reception period and when the reception (valid reception judgment) is made in the "second display state" during the 3B reception period (see Fig. 300 and Fig. 301, etc.). However, it is more desirable to make the performance content different between the case where the reception (valid reception judgment) is made in the "first display state" during the 3B reception period and the case where the reception (valid reception judgment) is made in the "second display state" during the 3B reception period in order to improve the performance of the reception period having the "first display state" and the "second display state".

For example, in the above-mentioned presentation examples (e.g., Figures 294, 300, 301), even if acceptance (valid reception judgment) is made when in the "first display state" within the 3B reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) (which had not been displayed until then) is displayed after the acceptance (valid reception judgment) is made, just as in the case where acceptance (valid reception judgment) is made when in the "second display state" within the 3B reception period (when the presentation progresses from Figure 300(a) to "F1 (Figure 301(d1) to Figure 301(h1))" or when the presentation progresses from Figure 300(a) to "F2 (Figure 301(d2) to Figure 301(h2))"). However, instead of this, if acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made during the "first display state" within the 3B acceptance period, it is desirable to prevent the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) from being displayed as a trigger after the acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made.

From the player's perspective, this configuration allows the player to show those around him (by the performance progressing without the mock image display) that he has been successfully accepted in the "first display state," which is considered relatively difficult to accept due to the presentation of the "so-called hidden button," after the acceptance (valid acceptance determination) has been made, thereby increasing his interest in the game.

However, in this case, with regard to the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance), even if acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made when in the "first display state" within the 3B acceptance period, it is desirable to make it visible when the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed (cannot be seen). In other words, if the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed (cannot be seen) when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made when the integrated Moji image display IG is not displayed even after the acceptance, it becomes difficult to distinguish whether the acceptance period has occurred as the above-mentioned 2B acceptance period or as the above-mentioned 3B acceptance period (first display state). In this regard, even if the integrated Mogu image display IG (Mogu image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) will be displayed in the same way as when it was accepted in the "second display state", suggesting that the acceptance period has occurred as the third B acceptance period (first display state) and not as the second B acceptance period.

In examples where these configurations are adopted, if acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made during the "first display state (see FIG. 300(a))" during the 3B acceptance period, the performance progress shown in FIG. 301(d1)-(h1) or FIG. 301(d2)-(h2) will be performed in a state where the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed. In other words, if acceptance is determined to be valid in the first display state, the post-acceptance performance will be started without the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) being displayed in any of the multiple modes, and if acceptance is determined to be valid in the second display state, the post-acceptance performance will be started with the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) being displayed in any of the multiple modes.

Or, during the 3B reception period, in the "first display state",
A first period (first state, first timing) in which, even if the reception (valid reception determination) is made, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed after the reception, and the third B post-reception performance is executed;
When acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made, an integrated model image display IG (model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed after the acceptance (after the timing of the acceptance), and a second period (second state, second timing) in which the display of the integrated model image display IG and the execution of the 3B post-acceptance performance are performed in parallel may be further included. For example, in the first display state, it is desirable that the first period (first state, first timing) occurs first, and then the second period (second state, second timing) occurs. With such a configuration, the content of the performance differs depending on the timing at which the acceptance is made in the first display state, so that it is expected to improve the performance as a reception period having a "first display state".

Note that the "first display state" during the 3B reception period may include at least one of the first period (first state, first timing) and the second period (second state, second timing).

In the third B reception period in the above-mentioned performance example, if the set time elapses without the player's action being accepted (Fig. 296 (f)), the same post-reception performance as when an action is accepted within the third B reception period is not executed (the automatic reception performance is not activated). However, the third B reception period may be generated as a target for which the automatic reception performance is activated. In this case, the automatic reception is not performed in the first display state, but in the second display state. Also, the first reception period may be generated as a target for which the automatic reception performance is activated.

In addition, during the 3B reception period, the timing at which automatic reception is performed may differ depending on the state of the presentation (a state that can be set by the player). However, regardless of the timing at which automatic reception is performed, it is desirable that automatic reception is performed in the above-mentioned "second display state" and the same post-reception presentation is started as when reception is performed during the 3B reception period.

Furthermore, when the above-mentioned "second display state" occurs during the 3B reception period, the 3B reception period itself has already occurred before this, but the gauge image may be displayed (the depiction of the above-mentioned area decreasing) from a state in which its display area is at its maximum value within its frame (it may start from a state in which the area has already decreased). With this configuration, even if the remaining time of the reception period is actually already decreasing, by starting to display the area of the gauge image from its maximum value, a decrease in interest in playing the game is suppressed. It is also possible to make the reception period appear as if it were the above-mentioned 1B reception period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first B reception period and a second B reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, in the first B reception period, the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is always displayed regardless of when the "valid reception determination that the action by the player is a valid action" is made (see Figures 288, 289, etc.), and in the second B reception period, the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is always not displayed regardless of when the above-mentioned valid reception determination is made (see Figures 291, 292, etc.).

With this configuration, by providing two types of acceptance periods with completely different presentation characteristics, it is possible to provide a more distinct response when requesting actions from the player (providing an opportunity to perform an action), which is expected to increase interest in the game.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further includes a third B acceptance period, during which, depending on the timing of the acceptance validity determination that the player's action (operation) is a valid action (valid operation), the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) may be displayed or the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) may not be displayed.

This configuration makes it possible to make it appear as if a "first B reception period" is occurring in which the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is always displayed regardless of when the "reception validity determination" is made, or as if a "second B reception period" is occurring in which the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is always not displayed regardless of when the "reception validity determination" is made. This production element that creates uncertainty makes it possible to optimally maintain the sense of tension when the reception period occurs.

In addition, during the 1B reception period, as shown in Figures 297 and 300, it is desirable to be able to display an integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) in a manner that cannot appear during the 3B reception period. In other words, during the 1B reception period in the above-mentioned performance example, the special manner (integrated model image display IGd) shown in Figure 232 (d) can be displayed, but this special manner cannot appear during the 3B reception period. With this configuration, when the integrated Mogu image display IG (Mogu image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 232(a) (integrated Mogu image display IGa), it becomes difficult to recognize whether the 1B reception period or the 3B reception period is occurring, and when the integrated Mogu image display IG (Mogu image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed in the special manner shown in FIG. 232(d) (integrated Mogu image display IGd), it becomes possible to suggest that the 1B reception period is occurring.

In addition, during the second B reception period, the reception permission sound is not output, and during the third B reception period, reception is performed without displaying the integrated model image display IG (model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)), so that even if a post-reception performance is executed, it is desirable to output the reception permission sound. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest that the reception period has occurred as the third B reception period (first display state) and not as the second B reception period.

In addition, the "reception sound" that is output in the same manner regardless of the manner (expectation level) of the post-reception performance may be output in the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, but not output in the 2B reception period. It is desirable to output the "reception sound" in the same manner in the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period. However, such a "reception sound" does not necessarily have to be output in the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period.

It is also desirable to display a disappearance EF effect (for example, the first disappearance-related display SKB1) that cannot appear during the 3B reception period during the 1B reception period. With this configuration, it becomes possible to indicate that the 1B reception period, rather than the 3B reception period, is occurring through the type of disappearance EF effect.

It is also desirable to display the disappearance EF effect (e.g., second disappearance-related display SKB2) that may appear in the 3B reception period during the 1B reception period. This configuration makes it difficult to recognize whether the 1B reception period or the 3B reception period has occurred.

Note that in the first B reception period, the second B reception period, and the third B reception period, the target to which the action opportunity is given (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) may be the same or different. However, if the target to which the action opportunity is given is different, the action target display (model image display) will be displayed as different.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of reception periods including a 1B reception period and a 3B reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, when a "valid reception determination that an action by the player is a valid action" is made during the 1B reception period, a 1B post-reception performance can be executed in one of a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation based on the fact that the reception valid determination has been made, and when a "valid reception determination that an action by the player is a valid action" is made during the 3B reception period, a 3B post-reception performance can be executed in one of a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation based on the fact that the reception valid determination has been made.

In this regard, in pachinko machine 1, whether a "valid reception judgment" is made during the 1B reception period or during the 3B reception period, the disappearance EF performance can be executed using at least a part of the display target area (specific area) of the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) based on the valid reception judgment being made, so that it becomes easy to recognize that a proper valid reception judgment has been made (a state in which the reception period has ended due to the player's operation being accepted).

As mentioned above, during the 3B acceptance period, depending on the timing (first display state, second display state, etc.) at which a valid acceptance determination is made that determines that the player's action (operation) is a valid action (valid operation), the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) may be displayed or the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) may not be displayed. In this case, first, when a valid acceptance determination is made under a situation in which the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed, this is used as a trigger to execute a disappearance EF performance in a predetermined area including at least a part of the specific area in which the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed. In contrast, even if a valid reception determination is made when the integrated Momo image display IG (Momo image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed, it is desirable to use this as an opportunity to execute the disappearance EF performance in the same manner as when a valid reception determination is made when the integrated Momo image display IG is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately indicate that a valid reception determination has been made secretly even when the integrated Momo image display IG is not displayed. Note that if a valid reception determination is made when the integrated Momo image display IG is not displayed, the first reception period will end without the integrated Momo image display IG being displayed, and the disappearance EF performance will be executed using at least a portion of the area where the integrated Momo image display IG was scheduled to be displayed.

In addition, in this case, it is desirable that the integrated model image display IG is always displayed during the 1B reception period, regardless of when the reception validity determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid action (valid operation). By providing a "1B reception period" in which such an integrated model image display IG is always displayed, separate from the above-mentioned 3B reception period, it is possible to provide a reassuring presentation, combined with the configuration in which the disappearance EF presentation is executed, and to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In the 1B reception period, if the corresponding post-reception performance is executed in a high expectation mode (Fig. 298 (f2) to (h2)), a specific mode (Fig. 298 (e2) to (g2)) that is also used in the 3B reception period appears as the extinction EF performance, but if it is different from the high expectation mode, it is desirable that the specific mode (Fig. 298 (e2) to (g2)) does not appear as the extinction EF performance, but a different mode (Fig. 298 (e1) to (g1)) appears instead, or the extinction EF performance itself does not appear. With this configuration, when the extinction EF performance is executed in response to the 3B reception period, it is possible to give the impression that a high expectation performance is being executed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In the 1B reception period, the reception permission sound is output in multiple modes with different expectations, but in the 3B reception period, the reception permission sound may be output only in "one mode". With this configuration, when the reception permission sound having the "one mode" is output, it is possible to make the player aware of the possibility that the 3B reception period, which has the dramatic effect of a "so-called hidden button", is occurring, and therefore it is possible to preferably maintain a sense of tension. The "one mode" may be selectively output (by judgment) even when the 1B reception period occurs. In this case, it is desirable that the "one mode" is output as the mode with the lowest expectation. In this case, it is expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained even in a situation where the reception permission sound is output in the mode with the lowest expectation.

When a specific fluctuation pattern is selected, both the first B reception period and the third B reception period may occur sequentially within the specific fluctuation pattern. In this case, it is desirable that the first B reception period occurs after the third B reception period occurs. Also in this case, the first B reception period may occur. In this case, it is desirable that the second B reception period may occur between the occurrence of the third B reception period and the occurrence of the first B reception period.

It is also desirable that the premonition effect output when the 1st B reception period occurs and the premonition effect output when the 3rd B reception period occurs be different from each other. In other words, in this case, the premonition effect can indicate whether the 1st B reception period or the 3rd B reception period will occur.

In addition, in the 3B reception period, it is desirable that a specific mode (e.g., the second disappearance-related display SKB2) appears as the disappearance EF performance when there is an acceptance, and that a mode different from the specific mode (e.g., the third disappearance-related display SKB3) appears when there is no acceptance, or that no mode appears at all. In contrast, in the 1B reception period, it is desirable that even if there is no acceptance, the same mode as when there is an acceptance appears as the disappearance EF performance. In other words, in the 3B reception period, which combines the performance of the above-mentioned "1B reception period (so-called normal button performance)" and the performance of the above-mentioned "2B reception period (so-called hidden button performance)," it can be said that forgetting to operate (the reception period ending without acceptance) is more likely to occur than in the above-mentioned "1B reception period (so-called normal button performance)." In this regard, according to the above configuration, if an action is forgotten during the 3B reception period, the disappearance EF effect (for example, the second disappearance related display SKB2) that occurs when an action is accepted will not appear, so it is possible to appeal to the player that an action has been forgotten, and it is possible to maintain a good sense of tension when the reception period occurs thereafter. In contrast, there are no elements that are likely to cause an action to be forgotten during the 1B reception period. Nevertheless, when an action is not accepted, it is possible that the player has deliberately made a gaming choice to "not make an action," so if a player who has made such a choice is "appealed to the player that an action has been forgotten," it may actually decrease the player's interest in the game. Therefore, even if an action is not accepted during the 1B reception period, it is desirable to make the disappearance EF effect appear in the same manner as when an action is accepted.

In particular, during the 1B reception period in the above-mentioned performance example, the appearance of the extinction EF performance differs depending on the appearance (expectation) of the performance after 1B reception (see FIG. 298). Therefore, even if there is no reception during the 1B reception period, by making the same appearance as when there is reception appear as the extinction EF performance, it becomes possible to recognize the appearance (expectation) of the performance after 1B reception that appeared when there was reception, and it becomes possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, during the second B reception period in this embodiment, a "valid reception determination" is possible that determines as valid a player's action performed when the integrated model image display IG (model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed, and when the valid reception determination is made, the disappearance EF performance is not executed.

This configuration makes it difficult to recognize whether the "valid reception determination" has been properly made (a state in which the reception period has ended due to the acceptance of the player's operation), and it is expected that the tension of the second B reception period, in which the player is secretly asked to act (the opportunity to act is secretly given), will be maintained even after the valid reception determination has been made.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, in both the second B reception period and the third B reception period, it is possible to make a valid reception judgment that a player's action performed in a state where the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed is a valid action. In the second B reception period, if a valid reception judgment is made that a player's action performed in a state where the integrated Moji image display IG) is not displayed is a valid action, the above-mentioned disappearance EF presentation is not executed, and in the third B reception period, if a valid reception judgment is made that a player's action performed in a state where the integrated Moji image display IG is not displayed is a valid action, the above-mentioned disappearance EF presentation is executed.

With this configuration, it is difficult to know whether the 2nd B reception period or the 3rd B reception period is occurring until the player performs an action when the integrated model image display IG (model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed. However, after a valid reception determination is made that determines this to be a valid action, it becomes possible to know whether the 2nd B reception period or the 3rd B reception period is occurring, and it becomes possible to prompt the player to perform an action.

In addition, if the 4B condition is satisfied, the 4B reception period may be allowed to occur. Even in this 4B reception period, it is possible to make a valid reception judgment that a player's action performed in a state where the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed is a valid action. In the 4B reception period, if a valid reception judgment is made that a player's action performed in a state where the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed is a valid action, the disappearance EF performance is executed as in the case of the 3B reception period. However, in the 4B reception period, the disappearance EF performance is executed in a different manner depending on the manner (expectation level) of the corresponding 4B post-reception performance. With this configuration, while the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed, it is difficult to know whether the second B reception period, third B reception period, or fourth B reception period is occurring until the player performs an action. However, after a valid reception determination is made that determines this to be a valid action, it becomes possible to know whether the second B reception period, third B reception period, or fourth reception period has occurred, and in the case of the fourth reception period, it becomes possible to suggest the degree of expectation.

During the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, it is desirable that the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is configured so that when an action by the player is accepted, a disappearance EF display is executed while the depiction of the movement appearing in the operation receiving section and the reduction in the area of the gauge image continue.

The above-mentioned examples and other examples may be modified to the following configurations, or the following configurations (acceptance periods) may be provided as other acceptance periods (other premonition display) with different types of post-acceptance effects. That is, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has at least the 1B acceptance period, the 2B acceptance period, and the 3B acceptance period as acceptance periods during which the acceptance of the player's actions (operations) is permitted. Of these, during the 1B acceptance period and the 3B acceptance period, the disappearance EF performance can be executed based on the acceptance (valid acceptance determination) of the player's actions (operations), and during the 2B acceptance period, the disappearance EF performance is not executed even if the player's actions (operations) are accepted (valid acceptance determination).

In this regard, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted (valid acceptance judgment) during the 1B acceptance period, the extinction EF performance may be executed in the same manner when the 1B post-acceptance performance is executed in a manner with a low expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) based on the acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) and when the 1B post-acceptance performance is executed in a manner with a high expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing). When such a configuration is applied to the example shown in FIG. 298, regardless of which mode (modes shown in FIG. 298 (d1) to (h1), modes shown in FIG. 298 (d2) to (h2)) appears as the 1B post-acceptance performance, and further regardless of whether the acceptance was made during the 1B acceptance period (modes shown in FIG. 298 (d3) to (g3)), a predetermined mode will always appear as the extinction EF performance. In other words, the 1B reception period refers to a period in which the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) continues to be displayed regardless of when reception (valid reception determination) is made during the period (and even if reception is not made). In this case, since information such as "in what form the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) was displayed" is provided, there is a concern that if further different information is provided by the disappearance EF performance, the performance will become too complicated. In this regard, during such a 1B reception period, regardless of which mode (modes shown in FIG. 298 (d1)-(h1), or modes shown in FIG. 298 (d2)-(h2)) appears as the post-1B reception performance, and further regardless of whether or not the reception is made within the 1B reception period (modes shown in FIG. 298 (d3)-(g3)), the above-mentioned concerns can be eliminated by making it so that a predetermined mode always appears as the disappearance EF performance.

In addition, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted (valid acceptance judgment) during the 3B acceptance period, the disappearance EF effect may be executed in different modes depending on whether the post-3B acceptance performance is executed in a mode with low expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) based on the acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) or in a mode with high expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing). The 3B acceptance period has a performance feature using a "so-called hidden button," and can be considered to be positioned as a "highly difficult acceptance period." Therefore, even after acceptance, it is desirable to provide different performance information from both the mode as the integrated model image display IG (model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) and the mode as the disappearance EF performance, in order to stimulate the player in terms of performance.

When this configuration is applied to the example shown in FIG. 301, it is desirable that the form of the disappearance EF effect that appears when no acceptance has been made is different from any of the multiple forms of the disappearance EF effect that can appear when acceptance has been made. This makes it possible to recognize that no acceptance has been made, and also makes it possible to suggest that the acceptance period in question was a combination of the effects of the above-mentioned "first B acceptance period (the so-called normal button effect)" and the above-mentioned "second B acceptance period (the so-called hidden button effect)."

As described above, in another example of the 3B reception period, when reception is made during the "first display state" within the 3B reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) will not be displayed after reception. In other words, in this case, since no information is provided regarding "in what form the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) was displayed" after reception, in this situation it is desirable to provide information through the disappearance EF performance (expectation information regarding the performance after reception) in order to increase interest in the game.

In addition, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted (valid acceptance judgement) during the 1B acceptance period, the disappearance EF effect may be executed in a manner different from the manner that appears when acceptance is made. This makes it possible to recognize that no acceptance has been made, and if that manner cannot appear during the 3B acceptance period, it can suggest that the acceptance period did not combine both the performance characteristics of the above-mentioned "1B acceptance period (so-called normal button performance)" and the above-mentioned "2B acceptance period (so-called hidden button performance)."

In addition, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted (valid acceptance judged) during the 3B acceptance period, the disappearance EF presentation may be executed in the same manner as the presentation that appears when the action (operation) is accepted. With this configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not an action has been accepted, which enhances the presentation as a "so-called hidden button."

It is not necessary to apply all of these configurations to the above-mentioned production examples or other examples. For example, an appropriate combination or only one of the configurations (variations) may be applied to the above-mentioned production examples or other examples.

Next, we will explain the case where some of the above-mentioned modified examples are applied to the above-mentioned performance examples. That is, Fig. 302 is a modified example of the "performance that appears when an acceptance is made or not made during the 1B reception period" shown in Fig. 298, and Fig. 303 is a modified example of the "performance that appears when an acceptance is made or not made during the 3B reception period" shown in Fig. 301. Note that in this modified example, configurations that are not specifically mentioned are as described above with reference to "performance examples related to the 1B reception period (Figs. 288 to 290, 297, 298)" and "performance examples related to the 3B reception period (Figs. 294 to 296, 300, 301)," and can be similarly applied to each of the above-mentioned other examples that can be applied to "performance examples related to the 1B reception period" and "performance examples related to the 3B reception period."

In the modified example shown in FIG. 302, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted (valid acceptance judgement) during the 1B acceptance period, the extinction EF effect is executed in the same manner in both cases where the 1B post-acceptance performance is executed in a manner with low expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) based on the acceptance (valid acceptance judgement) (see FIG. 302 (d1) to (h1)) and where the 1B post-acceptance performance is executed in a manner with high expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) (see FIG. 302 (d2) to (h2)). Here, the second extinction-related display SKB2 is executed as the extinction EF effect.

However, in the modified example shown in FIG. 302, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted (valid acceptance judgement) during the 1B acceptance period (see FIG. 302 (d3)-(g3)), the extinction EF presentation is a display that does not appear when the player's action (operation) is accepted (valid acceptance judgement) during the 1B acceptance period. Here, the third extinction-related display SKB3 is executed as the extinction EF presentation.

In contrast, in the modified example shown in FIG. 303, when a player's action (operation) is accepted (valid acceptance judgment) during the 3B acceptance period, the extinction EF performance is executed in different manners depending on whether the 3B post-acceptance performance is executed in a manner with low expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) based on the acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) (see FIG. 303 (d1) to (h1)) or in a manner with high expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) (see FIG. 303 (d2 to (h2)). Here, when the performance is executed in a manner with low expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) (see FIG. 303 (d1) to (h1)), the first extinction-related display SKB1 is executed as the extinction EF performance, and when the performance is executed in a manner with high expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) (see FIG. 303 (d2 to (h2)), the second extinction-related display SKB2 is executed as the extinction EF performance.

In addition, in the modified example shown in Fig. 303, if a movement (operation) by the player is not accepted (valid acceptance judgment) during the 3B acceptance period (see Fig. 303 (d3) to (g3)), the extinction EF presentation is configured to show the appearance that would have appeared if a movement (operation) by the player had been accepted (valid acceptance judgment) during the 3B acceptance period. That is, in the example shown in Fig. 303 (d3) to (g3), because the first extinction-related display SKB1 is displayed as the extinction EF presentation, it becomes possible to recognize that if a movement (operation) by the player had been accepted (valid acceptance judgment) during the 3B acceptance period, the presentation progression shown in Fig. 303 (d1) to (h1) would have occurred. In contrast, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted (valid acceptance determination) during the 3B reception period, when the second disappearance related display SKB2 is displayed as the disappearance EF presentation, it becomes possible to recognize that the presentation progression shown in FIG. 303 (d2) to (h2) would have occurred if the player's action (operation) had been accepted (valid acceptance determination) during the 3B reception period.

In the 1B reception period of this modified example, the "second disappearance related display SKB2" that is displayed when the post-reception performance (3B post-reception performance) corresponding to the above-mentioned 3B reception period of the modified example is executed in a highly anticipated manner is used as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF performance) that appears when reception is made. In other words, in this case, in the 1B reception period of the modified example, as long as reception is made, it is possible to give the impression that the post-reception performance will be executed in a highly anticipated manner, which can increase interest in the game.

The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) corresponding to the 3B reception period in the modified example does not necessarily have to be the "2nd disappearance-related display SKB2". For example, even if the "1st disappearance-related display SKB1" that is displayed when the post-reception performance (1st B post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1B reception period is executed in a low expectation mode is used as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) corresponding to the 1B reception period in the modified example, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the reception is in the 1B reception period in the modified example or in the 3B reception period in the modified example.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this modified example, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the first B acceptance period, the "third disappearance-related display SKB3" is displayed as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF presentation).

It is preferable that the "third disappearance-related display SKB3" is not displayed in relation to the third B reception period according to the modified example. In other words, in this case, even if the player's action (operation) is not accepted during the first B reception period, it is possible to suggest that the reception period did not combine both the presentation characteristics of the above-mentioned "first B reception period (so-called normal button presentation)" and the above-mentioned "second B reception period (so-called hidden button presentation)."

It is also desirable that the "third disappearance-related display SKB3" not be displayed when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the first B acceptance period according to the modified example. In other words, in this case, it is possible to more appropriately indicate that the first B acceptance period has ended without any acceptance.

Incidentally, if the configuration according to the above-mentioned other example is applied to the 3B reception period of this modified example, in which when reception is made in the "first display state", "the post-reception performance is executed without displaying the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image))", the performance progress shown in Figures 303 (d1) to (h1) or Figures 303 (d2) to (h2), etc., will be carried out in a state where the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed. In other words, if a valid reception determination is made in the first display state, the post-reception performance will begin without the integrated model image display IG (model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) being displayed in any of the multiple modes, and if a valid reception determination is made in the second display state, the post-reception performance will begin with the integrated model image display IG (model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) being displayed in any of the multiple modes.

Even in the third B acceptance period according to this modified example, if a player makes an action (operation) before timing tS2 when a state (third B acceptance period) occurs in which a "valid acceptance judgment that treats a player's action as a valid action" is permitted, the action (operation) will not be judged as a "valid acceptance judgment" at that time. However, it is possible to apply the configuration according to the above-mentioned other example, which makes it possible to make a "valid acceptance judgment" targeting (based on) an action (operation) made by the player before the third B acceptance period at the start of the third B acceptance period (or thereafter), as well as the configuration according to the first period (first state, first timing) and the second period (second state, second timing).

In the 3B reception period according to the above modified example, if a low expectancy pattern appears as a post-3B reception effect (Fig. 303 (d1) to (h1)), the first disappearance-related display SKB1 is executed as a disappearance EF effect, but the disappearance EF effect itself may not appear.

In addition, in the 1B reception period according to the above modified example, a specific pattern appears as the disappearance EF performance when reception is made (Fig. 302 (d1)-(h1) or Fig. 302 (d2)-(h2)), and a pattern different from the specific pattern appears when no reception is made (Fig. 302 (d3)-(g3)). However, the disappearance EF performance itself may not appear when no reception is made.

In addition, in the 1B reception period according to the above modified example, the second disappearance-related display SKB2 is executed as a specific mode (disappearance EF performance) when reception is made, but it may be executed in a mode different from the second disappearance-related display SKB2. For example, even if it is executed as the first disappearance-related display SKB1, it can be difficult to recognize whether the reception is made in the 1B reception period or the 3B reception period.

Next, an example that embodies the above "Configuration 5-B" to "Configuration 9-B" will be described. As described above, this pachinko machine 1 has multiple reception periods (reception performances) with different performance contents that proceed when the ball is accepted (for example, conversation notice, cut-in notice, moving object notice, etc. as post-reception performances, and types of notice performances (expectation level suggestion performances)), and can generate reception periods (reception performances) of different types according to the results of judgments (jackpot judgments, performance judgments, etc.). Here, at least a 1C reception period (1C post-reception performance), a 2C reception period (2C post-reception performance), and a 3C reception period (3C post-reception performance) are prepared as the multiple reception periods (reception performances).

With reference to Figures 304 to 318, the characteristics of each reception period (reception performance) will be described separately. Note that, with reference to Figures 303 and up, each reception period described above may be prepared as a reception period separate from the 1C reception period (1C post-reception performance), the 2C reception period (2C post-reception performance), and the 3C reception period (3C post-reception performance), or may be realized as any of the 1C reception period (1C post-reception performance), the 2C reception period (2C post-reception performance), and the 3C reception period (3C post-reception performance). In addition, in order to realize each invention described below, it is sufficient to have only the necessary configurations among the configurations described below, and it is not necessary to have these for each reception period described above with reference to Figures 303 and up.

Figures 304 to 306 are time charts showing an example of the presentation content when condition 1C is satisfied as a result of a judgment (jackpot judgment or presentation judgment) and a 1C reception period (1C reception presentation) occurs. Figures 313 and 314 are diagrams showing an example of presentation in a variation pattern in which a 1B reception period (1B reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with no chance of winning or time reduction), and the "1st C fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 1st C fluctuation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 1st C fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 1st C fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 313(a)"), and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "1st C fluctuation pattern" itself.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 304(a), in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the timing tT2 arrives at which the 1C predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable presentation of the decorative pattern SZ (when condition 1C is satisfied), the 1C acceptance period (valid period) is generated in which "acceptance regarding the 1C post-acceptance presentation" is permitted ("the situation shown in FIG. 297(b) and (c)"). As a result, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the 1C acceptance period (when the acceptance is judged to be valid), the 1C post-acceptance presentation is carried out based on the acceptance (valid acceptance judgment).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) performs, in relation to the occurrence of such a 1C reception period, an action target display (mochi image display) suggesting the reception target (such as an operation receiving part), a remaining time display (a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced over time) suggesting the remaining time of the reception period (valid period), a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) that makes the mochi image display difficult to see, and a 1C post-reception performance display suggesting the expectation level (the rate at which a jackpot pattern appears) in response to the reception (valid reception determination). As described above, the mochi image display according to this embodiment is displayed as an "integrated mochi image display" integrated with a peripheral decoration image including a remaining time display (a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced over time), but this is not necessarily limited to this and may be displayed separately. This is also true for other reception periods.

More specifically, first, when the 1C reception period occurs at timing tT2, as shown in FIG. 304(b) and FIG. 313(b) and (c), in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, a "mochi image display" or a "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)" is displayed as an integrated mochi image display IG. The integrated mochi image display IG (mochi image display, frame image, gauge image) may appear at timing tT2, or may appear before timing tT2 and be displayed to span timing tT2. The integrated mochi image display IG (mochi image display, frame image, gauge image) is hidden when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made within the 1C reception period, or when the 1C reception period ends without acceptance (valid acceptance determination). In this example, the 1C acceptance period ends at timing tT3 if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (valid acceptance determination) (see FIG. 304(a)).

In addition, during the 1C reception period in this example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in one of a number of modes (for example, Fig. 232(a) and (d)), and Fig. 313(b) corresponds to the case where the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in Fig. 232(a), and Fig. 313(c) corresponds to the case where the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in Fig. 232(d). Note that, during the 1C reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) may be displayed in one of a number of modes including the modes shown in Figs. 232(b) and (c).

Figure 304 assumes that a "valid acceptance determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" when a relatively early timing tT2a occurs during this first C acceptance period. In other words, in this case, as shown in Figure 304(a), the first C acceptance period ends and the post-acceptance performance (first C post-acceptance performance) corresponding to the first C acceptance period starts to be executed based on the player's action being accepted (valid acceptance determination is made) at timing tT2a.

Incidentally, an example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 313(b) to "G1 (FIG. 314(d1) to FIG. 314(h1))" corresponds to a case in which a first mode with a relatively low expectation is executed as the post-reception presentation (post-reception presentation) corresponding to the 1C reception period, and an example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 313(b) to "G2 (FIG. 314(d2) to FIG. 314(h2))" corresponds to a case in which a second mode with a relatively high expectation is executed as the post-reception presentation (post-reception presentation) corresponding to the 1C reception period. The expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) may include "0%" or "100%".

In this regard, during the 1C reception period, as shown in FIG. 304, at timing tT2a when the player's action is accepted (when the 1C post-reception performance starts in response to the acceptance), the "integrated model image display IG" is not made invisible, nor is the integrated model image display IG made difficult to see.

In other words, the 1C post-reception performance in this embodiment is realized as a performance that is at least a combination of the "1C post-reception performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), the "1C post-reception specific performance" using the second performance device (e.g., a sub-liquid crystal display, a movable body, a performance lamp, etc.), and the 1C post-reception performance sound using the third performance device (speaker) (it does not necessarily have to be realized as a combination performance using three performance devices). However, among these performance devices, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) on which the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed is delayed in the time at which the "1C post-reception performance display" as the 1C post-reception performance begins to be executed compared to the other performance devices, and this is intended to intentionally maintain the visibility of the "integrated model image display IG" even after the reception is made.

As shown in FIG. 314 (d1) or (d2), this configuration allows the player to easily recognize in which of the multiple forms (FIG. 232 (a) to (d)) the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the ended acceptance period, even after acceptance has been made, which is expected to effectively prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Here, in order to make it easier to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period after the reception period has ended, it is desirable to set the "time during which the integrated model image display IG is displayed in an easily visible form" after reception has been made to be longer. However, if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed in the same form as it was during the reception period even though reception has been made and the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has already been executed, it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the reception has been made, and as a result, there is a concern that "the player will be late in noticing the post-reception performance that is being executed."

Therefore, in the examples shown in Figure 304 (b) and Figure 314 (e1) or (e2), when a predetermined time has passed from timing tT2a when the first C acceptance period ends due to the acceptance of the player's action (when timing tT2b arrives), a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes the mock image display difficult to see is started to be displayed.

In other words, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed while the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

According to this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the reception, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, which suggests that the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being performed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the integrated model image display IG to the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) (after timing tT2b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has already been performed, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the player being unable to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

In addition, during the 1C reception period, different modes (first disappearance-related display SKC1, second disappearance-related display SKC2) are displayed as the disappearance-related display depending on whether the corresponding post-reception performance (1C post-reception performance) is a low-expectation mode (Fig. 314 (d1) to (h1)) or a high-expectation mode (Fig. 314 (d2) to (h2)). In other words, in this case, as shown in Fig. 314 (e1) and (e2), even if the "1C post-reception performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) has not yet started, by checking whether the disappearance-related display that appears on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is the "first disappearance-related display SKC1" or the "second disappearance-related display SKC2", it becomes possible to guess whether the "1C post-reception performance display" will be executed in a high-expectation mode.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in Figure 304 (b) and Figure 314 (f1) or (f2), when timing tT2c arrives during the period during which the display related to the disappearance-related display (in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears, a "1st C post-reception performance display UGC1 (cut-in performance)" is executed as a post-reception performance in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in response to the acceptance of an action by the player within the 1st C reception period. However, in this example where the performance progresses from FIG. 313(b) to "G1 (FIG. 314(d1) to (h1))" (when the expectation level is relatively low as a post-reception performance), as shown in FIG. 314(f1), the first mode (here, the first C post-reception performance display UGC1-1 as a cut-in performance by the princess character)) is displayed as the first C post-reception performance display UGC1 corresponding to the first C reception period, and in this example where the performance progresses from FIG. 313(b) to "G2 (FIG. 314(d2) to (h2))" (when the expectation level is relatively high as a post-reception performance), as shown in FIG. 314(f2), the second mode (here, the first C post-reception performance display UGC1-2 as a cut-in performance by the samurai character) is displayed as the first C post-reception performance display UGC1 corresponding to the first C reception period.

In other words, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKC1, second disappearance-related display SKC2)" are displayed, the "1st C post-reception performance display UGC1 ("1st C post-reception performance display UGC1-1" or "1st C post-reception performance display UGC1-2") will begin to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated model image display IG is displayed for a relatively long time after acceptance within the 1C acceptance period, the post-acceptance performance (first C post-acceptance performance display UGC1) on the first performance device (performance display device 1600) can be started without a significant delay compared to other performance devices, and a decline in interest in the game can be prevented. In addition, since the first C post-acceptance performance display UGC1 starts while the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the "integrated model image display IG" to the "first C post-acceptance performance display UGC1 (first C post-acceptance performance display UGC1-1 or first C post-acceptance performance display UGC1-2)" while suggesting that the first C acceptance period has already ended (after timing tT2c).

On the other hand, when the "1st C post-reception performance display UGC1 (1st C post-reception performance display UGC1-1 or 1st C post-reception performance display UGC1-2)" is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the area in which the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed (it does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "integrated model image display IG", and the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed with priority over the "1st C post-reception performance display UGC1 (1st C post-reception performance display UGC1-1 or 1st C post-reception performance display UGC1-2)". This makes it easy to recognize in which form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period, even when the "1st C post-reception performance display UGC1 (1st C post-reception performance display UGC1-1 or 1st C post-reception performance display UGC1-2)" starts to be executed.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the display of the "1st C post-reception performance display UGC1 (1st C post-reception performance display UGC1-1 or 1st C post-reception performance display UGC1-2)" is started in this manner, as shown in Figure 304 (b) and Figure 314 (g1) or (g2), while the "1st C post-reception performance display UGC1 (1st C post-reception performance display UGC1-1 or 1st C post-reception performance display UGC1-2)" is displayed, first, of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display", the "integrated model image display IG" is made invisible. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this manner, as shown in FIG. 304(b) and FIG. 314(h1) or (h2), the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKC1 or second disappearance-related display SKC2)" is hidden, and the "first C post-reception performance display UGC1 (first C post-reception performance display UGC1-1 or first C post-reception performance display UGC1-2)" is displayed with good visibility.

In this regard, the "first C post-reception performance display UGC1" is displayed in one of a number of modes (here, first C post-reception performance display UGC1-1 or first C post-reception performance display UGC1-2) with different degrees of expectation based on the acceptance of the player's action. Therefore, the "first C post-reception performance display UGC1" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display" are hidden.

In addition, in the example of the performance corresponding to the 1C reception period (Figures 313 and 314), when a reception is made during the 1C reception period and "1C post-reception performance display UGC1" is executed, the background image is switched before and after the start of the "1C post-reception performance display UGC1".

With this configuration, in the situation shown in Figures 314(d) and (e) where no change in the background image has occurred (timings tT2a to tT2b shown in Figure 304), even if there has been a change in the performance on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), it is possible to indicate that the "first C post-reception performance display UGC1" has not yet started.

In this example, the "first C reception post-performance display UGC1" and "background change" are displayed later (timing tT2c) than the time (timing tT2b) when the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKC1, second disappearance-related display SKC2)" starts to be displayed, but they may be displayed at the same time (timing tT2b) as the time (timing tT2b) when the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKC1, second disappearance-related display SKC2)" starts to be displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 314, the post-reception performance is configured to switch to the same background image when a low expectation mode appears and when a high expectation mode appears, but it may also be configured to switch to different background images when a low expectation mode appears and when a high expectation mode appears. Also, it may be configured to switch the background image when a high expectation mode appears, but not to switch the background image when a low expectation mode appears.

In this way, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, when a 1C reception period occurs, various displays are performed within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 304) and on a limited display screen (performance display device 1600), thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game. However, as a result of this, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is forced to delay the start time (timing tT2c) of the 1C post-reception performance (1C post-reception performance display) in response to the reception from the timing tT2a at which it was received.

In this example, when an action by a player is accepted within the 1C acceptance period, as shown in Figures 304(b) and (c), based on the acceptance, a 1C post-acceptance performance (1C post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is started prior to the 1C post-acceptance performance (1C post-acceptance performance display) using the first performance device.

With this configuration, the delay in the start of execution from the timing tT2a when the 1C reception period is reached is limited to only a part of the 1C post-reception performance (display of the 1C post-reception performance), and the 1C post-reception performance itself can be started without delay from the same timing tT2a.

Such a second presentation device may be provided as a sub-LCD when the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) is used as the main LCD, or may be provided as a presentation movable body capable of presentation operation, or a presentation lamp capable of emitting light for presentation. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform presentations (display presentation, movable presentation, light-emitting presentation, etc.) in multiple ways with different degrees of expectation. The degree of expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-LCD 1610 is used as the second performance device. In an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 313(b) to "G1 (FIG. 314(d1) to (h1))" (when the expectation level is relatively low as a post-acceptance performance), as shown in FIG. 314(d1), the mode in which "women's kimono" is displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is started to be executed prior to the 1C post-acceptance performance (1C post-acceptance performance display UGC1-1) using the first performance device as the 1C post-acceptance specific performance UTC1 (the 1C post-acceptance specific performance UTB1-1, which is a low expectation level mode of the 1C post-acceptance specific performance UTC1) corresponding to the 1C acceptance period. In contrast, in an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 313(b) to "G2 (FIG. 314(d2)-(h2))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively high expectation), as shown in FIG. 314(d2), the mode in which "men's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 1610 (second performance device) is started to be executed prior to the 1C post-reception performance (1C post-reception performance display UGC1-2) using the first performance device as the 1C post-reception specific performance UTC1 (1C post-reception specific performance UTC1-2, which is a high expectation mode of the 1C post-reception specific performance UTC1) corresponding to the 1C reception period.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 313, in addition to the "integrated model image display IG" on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), a performance within the reception period is executed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) to indicate that the 1C reception period has occurred (FIGS. 313(b) and (c)). The performance within the reception period on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is displayed in the same manner when the "integrated model image display IG" on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is displayed in a manner with low expectation (see FIG. 313(b)) and when it is displayed in a manner with high expectation (see FIG. 313(c)).

In other words, in this case, during the 1C reception period in which the player is given an opportunity to act (opportunity to operate), the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) will show different behaviors depending on the degree of expectation, and the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) will show the same behavior regardless of the degree of expectation. However, after this, when a "valid reception determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid operation" is made during the 1C reception period, while the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) continues to display the "integrated model image display IG" (while the expectation of the performance after reception has not yet been indicated), the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) will show different behaviors depending on the degree of expectation. With this configuration, it is possible to obtain performance information more quickly by focusing on the appropriate performance device depending on the time than by focusing on the performance of only one performance device, which can increase the interest in the game.

In this example, the degree of expectation is suggested depending on whether the "special effect UTC1-1 after 1C reception" or the "special effect UTC1-2 after 1C reception" appears as the specific effect UTC1 after 1C reception. However, it is not necessary to provide multiple forms for the specific effect UTC1 after 1C reception. For example, the specific effect UTC1 after 1C reception may be provided with only the "special effect UTC1-2 after 1C reception", and the degree of expectation (the rate at which a jackpot is obtained) may be suggested depending on whether the specific effect UTC1 after 1C reception appears. In other words, in this case, when the "special effect UTC1-2 after 1C reception" appears, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is higher than when the "special effect UTC1-2 after 1C reception" does not appear.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further includes a third performance device (speaker), and when the 1C acceptance period occurs, the acceptance allowance sound starts to be output at timing tT1 shown in FIG. 304(d). In other words, the acceptance allowance sound corresponding to the 1C acceptance period is audibly output across timing tT2 when the 1C acceptance period occurs (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 313(b) and (c)"), and the player's actions (operations) can be accepted while the acceptance allowance sound is being audibly output.

Here, during the first C reception period, the first long allowable sound, which is in an audible output state for a relatively long time, and the first short allowable sound, which is in an audible output state for a relatively short time, are output as the reception allowable sound. In the example shown in FIG. 304(d), the first long allowable sound and the first short allowable sound are each started to be output at the same time, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one of the first long allowable sound and the first short allowable sound may be started to be output at timing tT2 when the first C reception period occurs or thereafter.

In the first C reception period, if an action by the player is accepted while the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are being audibly output, the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are terminated midway (terminating the audible output state midway) based on the acceptance.

In this regard, it is desirable that the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound be executed (audibly output) in a manner with low expectation (as shown in FIG. 313(b)) and in a manner with high expectation (as shown in FIG. 313(c)), as shown in FIG. 304(d). That is, in this case, the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound indicate the expectation during the reception period, but unlike the "integrated mock image display IG", they are executed in such a way that once acceptance (valid reception determination) is made, it becomes impossible to confirm it, and therefore it is expected that the tension as to when during the reception period acceptance (valid reception determination) will be made will be appropriately maintained.

In addition, during the 1C reception period, if an action by the player is accepted while the reception allowable sound (first long allowable sound, first short allowable sound) is being audibly output, not only is the reception allowable sound terminated midway, but the audible output of the 1C post-reception performance sound is started based on the acceptance. The 1C post-reception performance sound is executed so as to suggest the degree of expectation, and for example, it may be executed (audibly output) in a manner with low expectation, or in a manner with high expectation. In other words, in this case, unlike the case of the performance (display performance) performed by the first performance device, during the 1C reception period, there is no competition (overlapping) between the performance performed during the reception period (reception allowable sound) and the performance performed in response to the acceptance (1C post-reception performance sound).

Similar to the "1C post-reception performance display UGC1", as shown in FIG. 304(d), this type of 1C post-reception performance sound will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" are hidden. Also, for the 1C post-reception performance sound, it is desirable to output different output sounds (modes) in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 313(b) to "G1 (FIG. 314(d1)-(h1))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively low expectation) and the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 313(b) to "G2 (FIG. 314(d2)-(h2))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively high expectation).

Note that during the first C reception period, the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound are output as the reception permissible sound, but it is not necessary to output these two permissible sounds, and only one reception permissible sound may be output.

In addition, when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made during the 1C acceptance period, the third performance device audibly outputs not only the 1C post-acceptance performance sound that indicates the degree of expectation, but also a "acceptance sound" that does not indicate the degree of expectation. That is, the "acceptance sound" is audibly output in the same manner in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 313(b) to "G1 (FIG. 314(d1)-(h1))" (when the degree of expectation is relatively low as a post-acceptance performance) and the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 313(b) to "G2 (FIG. 314(d2)-(h2))" (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as a post-acceptance performance). And, such a "acceptance sound" is audibly output (regardless of the degree of expectation) even when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made during a reception period other than the 1C acceptance period. With this configuration, no matter how innovative the post-reception performance, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, the user can easily recognize that the reception (valid reception determination) has been properly made, which encourages the user to concentrate on the content of the post-reception performance.

In contrast, FIG. 305 assumes a case where a "valid acceptance determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made when a relatively late timing tT2A occurs within such a 1C acceptance period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 305(a), the 1C acceptance period ends and the post-acceptance performance (1C post-acceptance performance) corresponding to the 1C acceptance period starts to be executed based on the player's action being accepted (valid acceptance determination is made) at timing tT2A.

In this regard, in the 1C reception period, even if the reception (valid reception judgment) is made at a relatively late timing tT2A in the 1C reception period (no matter what timing the reception (valid reception judgment) is made), the performance will basically proceed in the same manner as if the reception (valid reception judgment) was made at a relatively early timing tT2a in the 1C reception period. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 305(a), there are cases where the performance progresses from FIG. 313(b) to "G1 (FIG. 314(d1) to (h1))" (when the expectation level is relatively low as a performance after reception) and cases where the performance progresses from FIG. 313(b) to "G2 (FIG. 314(d2) to (h2))" (when the expectation level is relatively high as a performance after reception), and in the first performance device, the second performance device, and the third performance device, the performance will basically be executed as described with reference to FIG. 304, etc.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 305, because acceptance (valid acceptance determination) was made at a relatively late timing tT2A within the 1C acceptance period, the display area of the gauge image is further reduced in the situation shown in FIG. 314(d) and the like. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 314, as shown in FIG. 314(d), acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made while the first short permissible sound has already ended its audible output, so that acceptance (valid acceptance determination) does not cause the first short permissible sound to end midway (terminate the audible output state midway).

In the example shown in FIG. 305, the time for which the "1C post-reception performance display" based on the fact that the reception (valid reception judgment) has been made is displayed is shorter than in the example shown in FIG. 304. In other words, the "1C post-reception specific performance" and the "1C post-reception performance sound" are executed for a predetermined time (fixed time) from the time that the reception (valid reception judgment) has been made, whereas the "1C post-reception performance display" is terminated (not displayed) when the predetermined timing tT4 in the variation pattern arrives, regardless of when the reception (valid reception judgment) was made. With this configuration, it is expected that the tension regarding when the reception (valid reception judgment) will be made during the reception period will be appropriately maintained.

On the other hand, the example shown in Figure 306 and the example in which the presentation progresses from Figure 313(b) to "G3 (Figure 314(d3) to (g3))" are examples that assume a case in which no action (operation) is performed by the player within the 1C reception period and no reception (valid reception determination) is made.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 306, after the 1C reception period occurs, the timing tT3 arrives without any action (operation) by the player being accepted. In this regard, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at timing tT3 (the point at which the 1C reception period ends and acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is no longer permitted) does not hide the integrated model image display IG, nor does it make it difficult to see, as shown in FIG. 314 (d3), in the same way as the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at timing tT2a or tT2A (the point at which the action (operation) by the player is accepted during the 1C reception period (or the point at which the performance after acceptance begins)).

With this configuration, even if the first C reception period ends before the player's action (operation) is received in time, it is possible to recognize how the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the first C reception period after the period has ended, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if no action (operation) by the player is accepted, as shown in FIG. 314 (e3), the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF presentation) will be initiated as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see."

In other words, in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in this example, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed while the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

With this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the 1C reception period ends without any reception, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, thereby making it possible to indicate that the 1C reception period has ended. Also, even in a situation where the 1C reception period has already ended, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in playing the game due to not being able to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1C acceptance period, the "first extinction-related display SKC1" is displayed as the extinction-related display (extinction EF performance). That is, in this case, it is expected that the player will sense the possibility that the post-1C acceptance performance would have suggested low expectations if the action (operation) by the player had been accepted within the 1C acceptance period. This makes it possible to encourage the player to be glad that he or she did not make the action (operation) within the 1C acceptance period, and is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when the action (operation) is not accepted within the 1C acceptance period.

However, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the first C acceptance period, the "second disappearance related display SKC2" may be displayed as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF presentation), or a display different from either the "first disappearance related display SKC1" or the "second disappearance related display SKC2" may be displayed.

Also, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1C acceptance period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF presentation) may be executed in a manner that would have appeared if the action (operation) had been accepted. That is, in this case, the appearance of the "first disappearance-related display SKC1" in the situation shown in Fig. 314(e3) means that if the action (operation) by the player had been accepted within the 1C acceptance period, the presentation would have progressed from Fig. 313(b) to "G1 (Fig. 314(d1)-(h1))" (the presentation after acceptance with a relatively low expectation would have been executed). On the other hand, in the situation shown in FIG. 314(e3), the "second disappearance-related display SKC2" appears when the player's action (operation) was accepted during the 1C acceptance period, and the performance would have progressed from FIG. 313(b) to "G2 (FIG. 314(d2)-(h2))" (when a relatively highly anticipated post-acceptance performance was executed). In other words, in this case, even if the player's action (operation) was not accepted during the 1C acceptance period, after the 1C acceptance period ends, the player can recognize whether the 1C post-acceptance performance was executed in a low-expectation mode or a high-expectation mode simply by checking the mode as the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" that appears in association with the integrated model image display IG being hidden, and therefore it is possible to suitably prevent a decline in interest in the game.

After this, as shown in FIG. 314(f3), of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (in the figure, the first disappearance-related display SKC1)", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden first. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" has been hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 314(g3), the "disappearance-related display (in the figure, the first disappearance-related display SKC1))" is hidden.

As mentioned above, during the 1C reception period in this example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 232(d) (see FIG. 297(c)) rather than in the manner shown in FIG. 232(a) (see FIG. 313(b)). When the situation shown in FIG. 313(c) occurs, the only difference from the situation shown in FIG. 313(b) above is the appearance of the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image)," and otherwise the performance will proceed in the same manner.

For example, when the presentation progresses from FIG. 313(c) to "G1'", the content is basically the same as when the presentation progresses from FIG. 313(b) to "G1 (FIG. 314(d1)-(h1))", and only the aspect of the "integrated model image display IG" in the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) has been changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGd". Also, when the presentation progresses from FIG. 313(c) to "G2'", the content is basically the same as when the presentation progresses from FIG. 313(b) to "G2 (FIG. 314(d2)-(h2))", and only the aspect of the "integrated model image display IG" in the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) has been changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGd". Furthermore, when the presentation progresses from FIG. 313(c) to "G3'", the content is basically the same as when the presentation progresses from FIG. 313(b) to "G3 (FIG. 314(d3)-(g3))", with only the aspect of the "integrated model image display IG" in the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) being changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGd".

For ease of explanation, during the 1C reception period in this performance example, the 1C post-reception performance (1C post-reception performance display UGC, 1C post-reception specific performance UTC, 1C post-reception performance sound) is executed with the same performance content (type) as the 1B post-reception performance corresponding to the above-mentioned 1B reception period. However, it is desirable to use different performance content (type) for the post-reception performance (post-reception performance display, post-reception specific performance, post-reception performance sound) between the 1B reception period and the 1C reception period.

In addition, for the sake of convenience, in the 1C reception period of this performance example, the disappearance-related display SKC is executed as the same (type) as the disappearance-related display SKB corresponding to the above-mentioned 1B reception period. However, the disappearance-related display does not necessarily have to be the same in the 1B reception period and the 1C reception period.

Figures 307 to 309 are time charts showing an example of the presentation content when condition 2C is satisfied as a result of a judgment (jackpot judgment or presentation judgment) and a second C reception period (second C reception presentation) occurs. Figure 315 is a diagram showing an example of presentation in a variation pattern in which a second C reception period (second C reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with no chance of winning or time reduction), and the "second C variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the second C variation pattern. After this, the variation performance of the decorative pattern SZ (performance depiction according to the second C variation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the second C variation pattern, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 315(a)"), and during the execution period of the variation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "second C variation pattern" itself.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 307(a), the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates the above-mentioned 2C acceptance period (valid period) during which "acceptance of the 2C post-acceptance performance" is permitted when timing tU2 arrives (condition 2C is satisfied) after the start of the variable performance of the decorative pattern SZ, and thus when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the 2C acceptance period (valid acceptance is determined), the 2C post-acceptance performance is carried out based on the acceptance (valid acceptance determination).

However, during the second C acceptance period in this embodiment, unlike when the first C acceptance period occurs, the integrated model image display IG (the "model image display" or "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)") is not displayed at the time when the player's operation is accepted (valid acceptance determination) (or when the post-acceptance performance begins to be executed).

More specifically, in the second C variation pattern, as shown in Fig. 307(b) and Fig. 315(b), when timing tU2 arrives, the second C acceptance period occurs and the integrated model image display IG ("model image display" or "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)") is displayed. The second C acceptance period ends when timing tU3 arrives if the player's action (operation) is not accepted (valid acceptance determination) (see Fig. 307(a)).

Figure 307 assumes a case where, during such a second C acceptance period, a "valid acceptance determination that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made when a relatively early timing tU2a arrives. In other words, in this case, as shown in Figure 307(a), the second C acceptance period ends and the post-acceptance performance (second C post-acceptance performance) corresponding to the second C acceptance period starts to be executed based on the fact that the player's action (operation) is accepted (valid acceptance determination is made) at timing tU2a.

The example of the progression of the presentation from FIG. 315(b) to FIG. 315(c) corresponds to the case where the second mode with relatively high expectations is executed as the second C post-reception presentation corresponding to the second C reception period (such as "second C post-reception presentation display", "second C post-reception specific presentation", "second B post-reception presentation sound", etc.). The illustration of the case where the first mode with relatively low expectations is executed as the second C post-reception presentation (such as "second C post-reception presentation display", "second C post-reception specific presentation", "second C post-reception presentation sound", etc.) is omitted, and in fact, the presentation may progress from FIG. 315(b) to a situation where the second C post-reception presentation is executed in the omitted mode (first mode with low expectations). However, for such a 2C reception period, when a "valid reception determination that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made, the 2C post-reception performance (such as a "2C post-reception performance display", a "2C post-reception specific performance", or a "2C post-reception performance sound") may be executed in the manner shown in FIG. 315(c) (a type in which a low expectation mode is not provided as a post-reception performance (1C post-reception performance display, 1C post-reception specific performance, 1C post-reception performance sound)). The expectation level (the rate at which a jackpot pattern appears) may include "0%" or "100%".

In this regard, in this example of the performance (second C reception period), as described above, as shown in FIG. 307(b) and FIG. 315(c), at timing tU2a, which is the time when the player's action (operation) is accepted (the time when the second C post-reception performance is started in response to the acceptance), the integrated model image display IG (the "model image display" or the "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)") is not displayed. Note that, more strictly speaking, FIG. 315(c) shows the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at timing tU2c shown in FIG. 307(c). In other words, at timing tU2a, the "second C post-reception performance display UGC2 (group preview performance)" of the second C post-reception performance is not executed, and the "second C post-reception specific performance UTC2-2" and the "second C post-reception performance sound (high expectation mode)" are executed. With this configuration, the performance will progress in the same manner as in the performance after 1C reception, so the same effects as described above can be obtained.

Therefore, in this presentation example (2nd C reception period), as shown in Figures 307 and 315 (b), no matter when acceptance (valid reception determination) is made during the 2nd C reception period, the above-mentioned disappearance-related display (disappearance EF presentation) will not be executed. This is because, at the time when the player's action (operation) is accepted (the time when the 2nd C post-reception presentation starts in response to acceptance), the integrated model image display IG ("model image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)") is not displayed, and there is no need to make it difficult to see.

As shown in FIG. 307(b) and FIG. 315(c), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when timing tU2c, which is later than timing tU2a, arrives, the first performance device (performance display device 1600) starts to execute "2nd C post-reception performance display UGC2 (in the figure, 2nd C post-reception performance display UGC2-2 as a group preview performance by ghost characters, which is a highly anticipated aspect)" as a post-reception performance in response to the acceptance of the player's action within the 2nd C reception period. Then, as shown in FIG. 307(b) and FIG. 315(d), the "2nd C post-reception performance display UGC2" thus started ends (is hidden) when a predetermined time (a certain time) has passed since the acceptance (valid acceptance determination).

Note that in the example of the performance corresponding to the second C reception period (Figure 315), unlike the first C reception period, there is no switching of the background image when the "post-second C reception performance display UGC2" is executed.

In addition, when an action by the player is accepted within the second C acceptance period, as shown in Figures 307 (b) and (c), based on the acceptance, the second C post-acceptance performance (second C post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is started to be executed prior to the second C post-acceptance performance (second C post-acceptance performance display) using the first performance device.

Such a second presentation device may be provided as a sub-LCD when the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) is used as the main LCD, or may be provided as a presentation movable body capable of presentation operation, or a presentation lamp capable of emitting light for presentation. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform presentations (display presentation, movable presentation, light-emitting presentation, etc.) in multiple ways with different degrees of expectation. The degree of expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-LCD 1610 is used as the second performance device. In an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 315(b) to FIG. 315(c) (when the expectation level is relatively high as the post-reception performance), the mode in which a "ghost" is displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is started to be executed prior to the second C post-reception performance (second C post-reception performance display UGC2-2) using the first performance device as the second C post-reception specific performance UTC2 (second C post-reception specific performance UTC2-2, which is a high expectation level mode of the second C post-reception specific performance UTC2) corresponding to the second C reception period. As described above, the explanation of the case in which a low expectation level mode is executed as the second C post-reception performance is omitted, but the "second C post-reception performance display" and the "second C post-reception specific performance UTC2" are executed in a low expectation mode, and are basically the same as when they are executed in a high expectation mode.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is further provided with a third performance device (speaker). However, when the second C reception period occurs, as shown in FIG. 307(d), the reception permission sound is not output.

In addition, during the first C reception period, when reception is made, the audible output of the second C post-reception sound is initiated based on this. The second C post-reception sound is executed to indicate the degree of expectation, and may be executed (audible output) in a manner that indicates low expectation, or in a manner that indicates high expectation, for example.

In addition, when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made during the 2C acceptance period, the third performance device audibly outputs not only the 2C post-acceptance performance sound that indicates the degree of expectation, but also a "acceptance sound" that does not indicate the degree of expectation. In other words, the "acceptance sound" is audibly output in the same manner regardless of whether the 2C post-acceptance performance is executed in a manner with high or low expectations.

In contrast, the example of progression from Fig. 308 and Fig. 315(b) and (e) to Fig. 315(c) assumes a case where a "valid acceptance determination that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made when a relatively late timing tU2A arrives within such a second C acceptance period. That is, in this case, as shown in Fig. 308(a), the second C acceptance period ends and the post-acceptance performance (second C post-acceptance performance) corresponding to the second C acceptance period is started based on the fact that the player's action is accepted (valid acceptance determination is made) at timing tU2A.

In this regard, during the second C acceptance period, even if acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) is made at a relatively late timing tU2A within the second C acceptance period (no matter what timing acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) is made), the presentation will basically proceed in the same manner as if acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) was made at a relatively early timing tU2a within the second C acceptance period. Therefore, at the time when the player's operation is accepted (valid acceptance judgment) (or at the time when the post-acceptance presentation begins to be executed), the integrated model image display IG ("model image display" or "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)") is not displayed. Also, in the example where the performance progresses from Figure 308 (a) or Figures 315 (b) and (e) to Figure 315 (c), there are cases where the performance after reception has a relatively high expectation and cases where the illustration is omitted (cases where the performance after reception has a relatively low expectation), and in the first performance device, the second performance device, and the third performance device will basically execute the performance as described with reference to Figure 307 etc.

In particular, during the 2nd C reception period, unlike the 1st C reception period, the "2nd C post-reception performance display", like the "2nd C post-reception specific performance" and "2nd C post-reception performance sound", is executed for a predetermined time (fixed time) from the time of reception (valid reception determination), so the appearance of the post-reception performance is the same regardless of the timing of reception (valid reception determination).

Note that the "2nd C post-reception performance display", "2nd C post-reception specific performance", and "2nd C post-reception performance sound" only need to be executed for a set period of time, and do not have to end at the same time as each other.

On the other hand, the example shown in Figure 309 and the example in which the presentation progresses from Figure 315(b) and (e) to Figure 315(d) are examples that assume a case in which no action (operation) is performed by the player within the second C reception period and no reception (valid reception determination) is made.

In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 309, after the second C acceptance period occurs, the timing tU3 arrives without any action (operation) by the player being accepted. In this regard, when no action (operation) by the player is accepted during the second C acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 309, no performance related to its end will be executed.

In addition, in the second C reception period, only one mode (integrated Momo image display IGb (see FIG. 232 (b))) is displayed as the Momo image display. The integrated Momo image display IGb is a mode that is not displayed in the first C reception period or the third C reception period. However, the second C reception period is characterized in that, regardless of the timing at which the reception (valid reception determination) is made, the Momo image display (gauge image) is not displayed at the time when the reception (valid reception determination) is made (or at the time when the post-reception performance starts to be executed). Therefore, in the second C reception period, any mode may appear as the Momo image display, or it may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. In addition, in the second C reception period, the Momo image display may not be displayed, and a gauge image may be displayed. In addition, in the second C reception period, the gauge image may not be displayed, and the Momo image display may be displayed. Additionally, during the second C reception period, neither the mock image display nor the gauge image may be displayed.

Furthermore, according to the above-mentioned characteristics of the second C reception period, after reception has been made, it becomes possible to concentrate only on the aspect of the post-reception performance without worrying about the aspect of the model image display (gauge image). In this case, even if the first C reception period and the third C reception period are subject to the above-mentioned automatic reception function, it is desirable to make the second C reception period not subject to the above-mentioned automatic reception function. As a result, the occurrence of a post-reception performance is limited to the case where the player himself operates the device after confirming the performance aspect during the second C reception period, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the model image display or gauge image not being displayed at the end of the second C reception period or thereafter.

Figures 310 to 312 are time charts showing examples of the presentation content when condition 3C is satisfied as a result of a judgment (jackpot judgment or presentation judgment) and a 3C reception period (3C reception presentation) occurs. Figures 316 to 318 are diagrams showing presentation examples in a variation pattern in which a 3C reception period (3C reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with no chance of winning or time reduction), and the "3C fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 3C fluctuation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 3C fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 3C fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 316(a)"), and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "3C fluctuation pattern" itself.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 310(a), the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates the 3C acceptance period (valid period) during which "acceptance of the 3C post-acceptance performance" is permitted when timing tV2 arrives (condition 3C is satisfied) after the start of the variable performance of the decorative pattern SZ, and the 3C post-acceptance performance is performed based on the acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the 3C acceptance period.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) displays, in relation to the occurrence of such a 3C reception period, an action target display (mochi image display) suggesting the reception target (such as an operation receiving part), a remaining time display (a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced over time) suggesting the remaining time of the reception period (valid period), a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) making the mochi image display difficult to see, and a 1C post-reception performance display suggesting the expectation level (the rate at which a jackpot pattern appears) in response to the reception (valid reception determination). As described above, the mochi image display according to this embodiment is displayed as an "integrated mochi image display" integrated with a peripheral decoration image including a remaining time display (a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced over time), but this is not necessarily limited to this and may be displayed separately. This is also true for other reception periods.

In this regard, the 3C reception period in this embodiment is realized as a special presentation that combines the above-mentioned "presentation due to the 1C reception period (presentation in which a model image display or gauge image is displayed at the time of reception (or at the time when the post-reception performance starts))" and the above-mentioned "2C reception period" presentation (presentation in which a model image display or gauge image is not displayed at the time of reception (or at the time when the post-reception performance starts)).

More specifically, when a 3C reception period occurs during which acceptance of operations by the player is permitted, first, as shown in FIG. 310(b) and FIG. 316(b), an integrated Moji image display IG ("Moji image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)") is displayed (timing tV2). However, depending on the timing of the 3C reception period during which the operation by the player is accepted (valid acceptance determination), the Moji image display and gauge image may or may not be displayed at the time when the acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made (or when the post-acceptance performance begins to be executed).

As will be described later, in this presentation example, as shown in Figure 310 (a) and the like, if an operation by a player is accepted (valid acceptance judgment) within the period (first period) from the occurrence of the 3C acceptance period to timing Y at which a predetermined time has elapsed, then a model image display or gauge image will not be displayed at the time when the acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) is made (or the time when the post-acceptance presentation starts to be executed), and if an operation by a player is accepted (valid acceptance judgment) within the period (second period) from timing Y to the end of the 3C acceptance period, then a model image display or gauge image will be displayed at the time when the acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) is made (or the time when the post-acceptance presentation starts to be executed). However, this is merely one example, and what is essential is that when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made at a first timing within the 3C acceptance period, the model image display and gauge image are in a hidden state (not displayed) at the time when the acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made (or the time when the post-acceptance performance starts to be executed), and when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made at a second timing different from the first timing within the 3C acceptance period, the model image display and gauge image are displayed at the time when the acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made (or the time when the post-acceptance performance starts to be executed).

According to this type of third C reception period, from the time the third C reception period occurs until timing Y arrives, even if an acceptance is made, the corresponding third C post-reception performance will be initiated with the integrated model image display IG not displayed (not visible), and from timing Y until timing tV3, when the third C reception period ends, the corresponding third C post-reception performance will be initiated with the integrated model image display IG displayed (it is sufficient that at least a part of the integrated model image display IG is visible). As a result, the 3C acceptance period in this embodiment is realized as a special presentation that combines the above-mentioned "presentation due to the 1C acceptance period (presentation in which a model image display or gauge image is displayed at the time of acceptance (or when the post-acceptance performance starts))" and the above-mentioned "2C acceptance period" presentation (presentation in which a model image display or gauge image is not displayed at the time of acceptance (or when the post-acceptance performance starts))," which is expected to increase interest in the game.

In other words, in this case, by adjusting the operation timing for the 3C reception period, the player can essentially select whether to start the 3C post-reception performance with the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and gauge image) displayed so that the appearance of the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and gauge image) that was displayed during the 3C reception period is visible, or to start the 3C post-reception performance with the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and gauge image) hidden in order to concentrate on the 3C post-reception performance, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In order to more effectively realize such a performance, during the 3C reception period, the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in one of a number of modes with different expectation levels (for example, one of Figs. 232(a) and (c)), and Fig. 316(b) corresponds to the case where the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in Fig. 232(a), and Fig. 316(d) corresponds to the case where the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in Fig. 232(c), etc. It is preferable that the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in one of a number of modes including the modes shown in Figs. 232(b) and (d) during the 3C reception period as well.

Figure 310 assumes a case where a "valid acceptance determination that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made during the above-mentioned "first period (first state) (see, for example, Figure 316(b)) of such a 3C acceptance period (timing tV2a in the figure). That is, in this case, as shown in Figure 310(a), the 3C acceptance period ends and the post-acceptance performance (3C post-acceptance performance) corresponding to the 3C acceptance period is started based on the acceptance of the player's action (operation) at timing tV2a (valid acceptance determination is made).

The example of the performance progressing from FIG. 316(b) to "H1 (FIG. 317(d1) to FIG. 317(h1))" corresponds to a case where a "valid reception determination" is made during the above-mentioned "first period (first state)" of the 3C reception period, and as a result, a first mode with a relatively low expectation is executed as the "3C post-reception performance", and the example of the performance progressing from FIG. 316(b) to "H2 (FIG. 317(d2) to FIG. 317(h2))" corresponds to a case where a "valid reception determination" is made during the above-mentioned "first period (first state)" of the 3C reception period, and as a result, a second mode with a relatively high expectation is executed as the "3C post-reception performance". The expectation (probability of the appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

As mentioned above, if a "valid acceptance determination" is made during the above-mentioned "first period (first state)" of the 3C acceptance period, then as shown in Figure 310 (b) and Figure 317 (d1) or (d2), at timing tV2a when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (when the 3C post-acceptance performance is started in response to the acceptance), the "integrated model image display IG" is made non-displayed and is not displayed (made invisible).

According to this configuration, if the player performs an action (operation) during the above-mentioned "first period (first state)" of the 3C reception period (if a "valid reception determination" is made), the player will be able to enjoy the post-reception performance (here, the 3C post-reception specific performance UTC3) in a state in which the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is not displayed (is not visible).

In this regard, during the 3C reception period in this presentation example, even if the player performs an action (operation) during the above-mentioned "first period (first state)", when a predetermined time has passed since timing tV2a when the action (operation) was performed (when timing tV2b arrives), the display related to the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF presentation) will start as shown in FIG. 317 (e1) or (e2).

In other words, in the 3C reception period in this example, when an action (operation) by the player is received during the above-mentioned "first period (first state)", even though the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is no longer displayed (is not visible) at the time when timing tV2b arrives, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" begins to be displayed, and at least a part of the area in which the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" was displayed.

This configuration makes it possible to ideally indicate that a post-acceptance performance is being executed in response to a player's action being properly accepted.

In addition, if the reception is made during the above-mentioned "first period (first state)" that provides the presentation of the above-mentioned "second C reception period" during the third C reception period (presentation in which no mock image or gauge image is displayed at the time the reception is made (or at the time the post-reception presentation begins)), it is difficult to know whether the reception was made during the second C reception period or the third C reception period, but the appearance of the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF presentation)" that cannot appear during the second C reception period makes it possible to know that the reception was made during the third C reception period.

In addition, during the 3C reception period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) is executed in the same manner when a low expectation mode (Fig. 317 (d1)-(h1)) appears as the 3C post-reception performance and when a high expectation mode (Fig. 317 (d2)-(h2)) appears. With this configuration, compared to the 1C reception period (when the appearance of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) differs depending on the expectation level), the importance of paying attention to the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display)" after reception during the 3C reception period is lower, and coupled with the fact that the model image display (gauge image) is not displayed, it becomes possible to concentrate on what appearance will appear as the 3C post-reception performance display UGC.

In addition, in the 3C reception period according to this performance example, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) that appears when reception is made uses the "second disappearance-related display SKC2" that is displayed when the post-reception performance (1C post-reception performance) corresponding to the above-mentioned 1C reception period is executed in a highly anticipated manner. In other words, in this case, in the 3C reception period, as long as reception is made, it is possible to give the impression that the post-reception performance will be executed in a highly anticipated manner, which can increase interest in the game.

The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) corresponding to the 3C reception period does not necessarily have to be the "2nd disappearance-related display SKC2". For example, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) corresponding to the 3C reception period may be the "1st disappearance-related display SKC1" that is displayed when the post-reception performance (1st C post-reception performance) corresponding to the above 1C reception period is executed in a low expectation mode, or a disappearance-related display that does not correspond to the 1C reception period may be used.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in Figure 310 (b) and Figure 317 (f1) or (f2), when timing tV2c arrives during the period during which a display related to the disappearance-related display (in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears, the first performance device (performance display device 1600) begins to execute a "3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3 (conversation announcement)" as a post-reception performance in response to the acceptance of an action (operation) by the player within the 3rd C reception period. However, in this example where the performance progresses from FIG. 316(b) to "H1 (FIG. 317(d1) to (h1))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively low expectation), as shown in FIG. 317(f1), the first mode (here, the third C post-reception performance display UGC3-1, which is a "silent" conversation announcement) is displayed as the third C post-reception performance display UGC3 corresponding to the third C reception period, and in this example where the performance progresses from FIG. 316(a) to "H2 (FIG. 317(d2) to (h2))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively high expectation), as shown in FIG. 317(f2), the second mode (here, the third C post-reception performance display UGC3-2, which is a conversation announcement that mentions "chance") is displayed as the third C post-reception performance display UGC3 corresponding to the third C reception period.

In other words, in this case, the "integrated model image display IG" is not displayed, and the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2)" is displayed, and the "third C post-reception performance display UGC3 ("third C post-reception performance display UGC3-1" or "third C post-reception performance display UGC3-2") begins to be executed.

In this regard, when the "3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3 ("3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3-1" or "3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3-2") is displayed so as to overlap at least a portion of the area in which the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2)" is displayed (it does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2)," and the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2)" is displayed with priority. In this way, by making it difficult for the player to see the object of his or her gaze (3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3), it is possible to encourage even greater concentration.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display of the "3C post-reception performance display UGC3 (3C post-reception performance display UGC3-1 or 3C post-reception performance display UGC3-2)" is started in this way, as shown in FIG. 310(b) and FIG. 317(g1), (h1) or (g2), (h2), while the "3C post-reception performance display UGC3 (3C post-reception performance display UGC3-1 or 3C post-reception performance display UGC3-2)" is displayed, the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2)" is hidden, and thus the display of the "3C post-reception performance display UGC3 (3C post-reception performance display UGC3-1 or 3C post-reception performance display UGC3-2)" is performed with good visibility.

In this regard, the "third C post-reception performance display UGC3" is displayed in one of a number of modes (here, third C post-reception performance display UGC3-1 or third C post-reception performance display UGC3-2) with different degrees of expectation based on the acceptance of the player's action (operation). Therefore, the "third C post-reception performance display UGC3" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display" are hidden.

In this performance example, the "Third C post-reception performance display UGC3" is started to be displayed at a later time (timing tV2c) than the time (timing tV2b) when the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2)" is started to be displayed, but it may be started to be displayed at the same time (timing tV2b) as the time (timing tV2b) when the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2)" is started to be displayed.

In this example, when an action by the player is accepted within the 3C acceptance period, as shown in Figures 310(b) and (c), based on the acceptance, the 3C post-acceptance performance (3C post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is started prior to the 3B post-acceptance performance (3B post-acceptance performance display) using the first performance device.

With this configuration, even if the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is configured to display the 3C post-reception performance after displaying the disappearance-related display, the 3C post-reception performance itself can be started without delay from the same timing tV2a.

Such a second presentation device may be provided as a sub-LCD when the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) is used as the main LCD, or may be provided as a presentation movable body capable of presentation operation, or a presentation lamp capable of presentation light emission, etc. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform presentations (display presentation, movable presentation, light emission presentation, etc.) in multiple ways with different degrees of expectation. The degree of expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-LCD 1610 is used as the second performance device. In an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 316(b) to "H1 (FIG. 317(d1) to (h1))" (when the post-acceptance performance has a relatively low expectation), as shown in FIG. 317(d1), the mode in which "Sueyoshi" is displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is started to be executed prior to the 3C post-acceptance performance (3C post-acceptance performance display UGC3-1) using the first performance device as the 3C post-acceptance specific performance UTC3 (3C post-acceptance specific performance UTC3-1, which is a low expectation mode of the 3C post-acceptance specific performance UTC3) corresponding to the 3C acceptance period. In contrast, in an example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 316(a) to "H2 (FIG. 317(d2) to (h2))" (when the post-reception presentation has a relatively high expectation), as shown in FIG. 317(d2), the mode in which "吉" is displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second presentation device) is set to begin execution prior to the 3C post-reception presentation (3C post-reception presentation display UGC3-2) using the first presentation device as the 3C post-reception specific presentation UTC3 (3C post-reception specific presentation UTC3-2, which is a high expectation mode of the 3C post-reception specific presentation UTC3) corresponding to the 3C reception period.

In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 317, when the 3C reception period is in the above-mentioned "first period (first state)" (FIG. 317(b)) and when the 3C reception period is in the above-mentioned "second period (second state)" (FIG. 317(c)), the reception period effect is executed on the sub-liquid crystal display 1610 (second performance device) to indicate that the 3C reception period has occurred. The reception period effect on the sub-liquid crystal display 1610 (second performance device) is displayed in the same manner when the "integrated model image display IG" on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is displayed in a low expectation mode (see FIG. 316(b)) and a high expectation mode (see FIG. 316(d)).

In other words, in this case, during the 3C reception period when the player is given an opportunity to act (opportunity to operate), the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) will show different behaviors depending on the degree of expectation, and the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) will show the same behavior regardless of the degree of expectation. However, after this, when a "valid reception determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid operation" during the 3C reception period, the "integrated model image display IG" will be hidden on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) (while the expectation of the performance after reception has not yet been indicated), and the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) will show different behaviors depending on the degree of expectation. With this configuration, it is possible to obtain performance information more quickly by focusing on the appropriate performance device depending on the time than by focusing on the performance of only one performance device, which can improve the interest in the game.

In this example, the degree of expectation is suggested depending on whether the "special effect UTC3-1 after 3C reception" or the "special effect UTC3-2 after 3C reception" appears as the specific effect UTC3 after 3C reception. However, it is not necessary to provide multiple forms for the specific effect UTC3 after 3C reception. For example, the specific effect UTC3 after 3C reception may be provided with only the "special effect UTC-2 after 3C reception", and the degree of expectation (the proportion of jackpots that are obtained) may be suggested depending on whether the "special effect UTC3-2 after 3C reception" appears. In other words, in this case, when the "special effect UTC-2 after 3C reception" appears, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is higher than when the "special effect UTC-2 after 3C reception" does not appear.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further includes a third performance device (speaker), and when the third C reception period occurs, the reception allowable sound starts to be output at timing tV1 shown in FIG. 310(d). The reception allowable sound corresponding to the third C reception period is audibly output across both timing tV2 when the third C reception period occurs and timing Y when the "first period" transitions to the "second period", and while the reception allowable sound is being audibly output, the player's actions (operations) can be accepted. However, the reception allowable sound only needs to be audibly output across timing Y, and it does not necessarily have to be audibly output across timing tV2.

In this case, during the third C reception period, a third permissible sound different from either the first long permissible sound or the first short permissible sound is audibly output as the reception permissible sound, thereby making it possible to suggest that a third C reception period combining multiple performance features will occur (or is occurring) rather than the first C reception period. However, the reception permissible sound corresponding to the third C reception period may be executed as either the first long permissible sound or the first short permissible sound.

In the third C acceptance period, if an action by the player is accepted while the corresponding acceptance permissible sound (here, the third permissible sound) is being audibly output, the acceptance permissible sound is not terminated midway (the audible output state is not terminated midway) based on the acceptance, which also makes it possible to suggest that a third C acceptance period combining multiple presentation aspects will occur (or is occurring) rather than the first C acceptance period. However, the acceptance permissible sound corresponding to the third C acceptance period may also be terminated midway based on the acceptance.

In this regard, it is desirable that the reception permissible sound (here, the third permissible sound) corresponding to the third C reception period be executed (audibly output) in a manner with low expectations (as shown in FIG. 316(b)) and executed (audibly output) in a manner with high expectations (as shown in FIG. 316(d)), as shown in FIG. 310(d).

As shown in FIG. 310(d), the 3C post-reception sound effect will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" are hidden, just like the "3C post-reception sound effect UGC3". In addition, it is desirable to output different output sounds (modes) for the 3C post-reception sound effect in an example where the effect progresses from FIG. 316(a) to "H1 (FIG. 317(d1)-(h1))" (when the expectation level is relatively low for the post-reception effect) and an example where the effect progresses from FIG. 316(a) to "H2 (FIG. 317(d2)-(h2))" (when the expectation level is relatively high for the post-reception effect).

In addition, when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made during the 3C acceptance period, the third performance device audibly outputs not only the 3C post-acceptance performance sound that indicates the degree of expectation, but also a "acceptance sound" that does not indicate the degree of expectation. That is, the "acceptance sound" is audibly output in the same manner in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 316(b) to "H1 (FIG. 317(d1) to (h1))" (when the degree of expectation is relatively low as a post-acceptance performance) and the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 316(b) to "H2 (FIG. 317(d2) to (h2))" (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as a post-acceptance performance). And, such a "acceptance sound" is audibly output (regardless of the degree of expectation) even when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made during an acceptance period other than the 3C acceptance period (for example, the 1C acceptance period, or a predetermined acceptance period other than each of the above-mentioned acceptance periods). With this configuration, no matter how innovative the post-reception performance, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, the user can easily recognize that the reception (valid reception determination) has been properly made, which encourages the user to concentrate on the content of the post-reception performance.

In contrast, examples in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 311, FIG. 316(b), (c) to "H3 (FIG. 318(d3)-(h3))" or "H4 (FIG. 318(d4)-(h4))" are based on the assumption that a "valid acceptance determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made during the above-mentioned "second period (second state)" of the 3C reception period (timing tV2A in the figures). In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 311(a), FIG. 318(d3)-(h3), or FIG. 318(d4)-(h4), the 3C reception period ends and the post-reception presentation (3C post-reception presentation) corresponding to the 3C reception period is started based on the fact that the player's action (operation) is accepted (valid acceptance determination is made) at timing tV2A.

In this regard, during the 3C reception period, even if acceptance (valid reception determination) is made during the above-mentioned "second period (second state)" within the 3C reception period (when acceptance is made in the state shown in Figure 316 (c)), after the acceptance is made, the presentation will basically proceed in the same manner as if acceptance (valid reception determination) was made during the above-mentioned "first period (first state)" within the 3B reception period (when acceptance is made in the state shown in Figure 316 (b)). Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 311(a), there are cases where the presentation progresses from FIG. 316(c) in a relatively low-expectation mode as a post-reception presentation (the presentation progresses to "H3 (FIG. 318(d3)-(h3))"), and cases where the presentation progresses from FIG. 316(c) in a relatively high-expectation mode as a post-reception presentation (the presentation progresses to "H4 (FIG. 318(d4)-(h4))"), and in the first, second, and third presentation devices, the presentation is basically executed as described with reference to FIG. 310, etc.

However, as described above, the 3C reception period in this embodiment is realized as a special presentation that combines the above-mentioned "presentation due to the 1C reception period (presentation in which a model image display or gauge image is displayed at the time when the post-reception performance starts to be executed)" and the above-mentioned "2C reception period" presentation (presentation in which a model image display or gauge image is not displayed at the time when the post-reception performance starts to be executed), and when acceptance (valid reception determination) is made during the above-mentioned "second period (second state)" within the 3C reception period (when acceptance is made in the state shown in FIG. 316 (c)), the above-mentioned "1C reception period" presentation (presentation in which a model image display or gauge image is displayed at the time when the post-reception performance starts to be executed) appears.

As is clear when comparing "Fig. 318 (d3)-(h3) or (d4)-(h4)" with "Fig. 317 (d1)-(h1) or (d2)-(h2)," if acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made during the above-mentioned "second period (second state)" within the 3C acceptance period (if acceptance is made in the state shown in Fig. 316 (c)), the integrated model image display IG will not be hidden but will continue to be displayed when the 3C post-acceptance performance begins to be executed.

In addition, such an integrated model image display IG will not be hidden and will continue to be displayed even when the "3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3 (conversation announcement)" begins to be executed (see Figure 311 and Figure 318 (f3) or (f4)). The integrated model image display IG is not displayed with priority over the "2nd disappearance related display SKC2" and is displayed behind it, but is displayed with priority over the "3rd C post-reception performance display UGC3 (conversation announcement)", making it easier to recognize in which form it was displayed during the reception period.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, after acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made during the above-mentioned "second period (second state)" within the 3C acceptance period, when the display related to the "3C post-acceptance performance display UGC3 (3C post-acceptance performance display UGC3-1 or 3C post-acceptance performance display UGC3-2)" begins, as shown in Figure 311 (b) and Figure 318 (g3) or (g4), while the "3C post-acceptance performance display UGC3 (3C post-acceptance performance display UGC3-1 or 3C post-acceptance performance display UGC3-2)" is displayed, first, of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this manner, the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2)" is hidden as shown in FIG. 311(b) and FIG. 318(h3) or (h4), and this allows for good visibility and causes the display related to the "third C post-reception performance display UGC3 (third C post-reception performance display UGC3-1 or third C post-reception performance display UGC3-2)" to be displayed.

Other presentation aspects (e.g., specific post-acceptance presentation, disappearance-related display, post-acceptance display presentation, permissible sound, post-acceptance presentation, reception sound, etc.) when acceptance is made during the second period (second state) within the 3C acceptance period are as explained with reference to FIG. 317 (or the same as the presentation example shown in FIG. 301), so explanations will be omitted here.

In the example of the performance corresponding to the 3C reception period (Figs. 316 to 318), even if the reception is made during the 3C reception period and the "3C reception post-performance display UGC3" is executed, the background image is not switched before and after the start of the "3C reception post-performance display UGC3". With this configuration, the case where the reception is made during the 1C reception period and the case where the reception is made during the second period within the 3C reception period are the same in that the post-reception performance starts while the integrated model image display IG is displayed, but by checking whether the background image changes in response to the reception, it becomes possible to recognize whether the 1C reception period or the 3C reception period has occurred. In contrast, when acceptance is made during the second C acceptance period and when acceptance is made during the first period within the third C acceptance period, the post-acceptance performance begins without the integrated model image display IG being displayed, but by checking whether or not a "disappearance-related display" is executed in response to acceptance, it becomes possible to recognize whether the second C acceptance period or the third C acceptance period has occurred.

In addition, during the 3C reception period, the "3C post-reception performance display", like the "3C post-reception specific performance" and "3C post-reception performance sound", is executed for a predetermined time (a fixed period of time) from the time of reception (valid reception determination), so the appearance of the post-reception performance is the same regardless of the timing of reception (valid reception determination).

Note that the "3C post-reception performance display", "3C post-reception specific performance", and "3C post-reception performance sound" only need to be executed for a set period of time, and do not have to end at the same time as each other.

On the other hand, the example shown in Figure 312 and the example in which the presentation progresses from Figure 316(c) to "H4 (Figure 318(d5) to (g5))" are examples that assume a case in which no action (operation) is performed by the player within the 3C reception period and no reception (valid reception determination) is made.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 312, after the 3C reception period occurs, the timing tV3 arrives without any action (operation) by the player being accepted. In this regard, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at timing tV3 (the point at which the 3C reception period ends and acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is no longer permitted) does not hide the integrated model image display IG, as shown in FIG. 318 (d5), in the same way as the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at timing tV2A (the point at which actions (operations) by the player are accepted during the second period within the 3C reception period), does not make the integrated model image display IG difficult to see.

With this configuration, even if the 3C reception period ends before the player's action (operation) is received in time, it is possible to recognize how the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the 3C reception period after the end of the period, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if no action (operation) by the player is accepted, as shown in FIG. 318 (e5), the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF presentation) will be initiated as a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see."

In other words, in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in this example, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed while the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

With this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the 3C reception period ends without any reception, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, thereby making it possible to indicate that the 3C reception period has ended. Also, even in a situation where the 3C reception period has already ended, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in playing the game due to not being able to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 in this example, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the third C acceptance period, the "third disappearance related display SKC3" is displayed as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF performance).

It is preferable that the "third disappearance-related display SKC3" is not displayed in relation to the first C acceptance period. In other words, in this case, even if the player's action (operation) is not accepted during the third C acceptance period, it will be possible to suggest that the acceptance period had both the above-mentioned "first C acceptance period performance (performance in which a model image display or gauge image is displayed at the time of acceptance (or when the post-acceptance performance starts))" and the above-mentioned "second C acceptance period" performance (performance in which a model image display or gauge image is not displayed at the time of acceptance (or when the post-acceptance performance starts)).

It is also desirable that the "third disappearance-related display SKC3" not be displayed when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the third C acceptance period. In other words, in this case, it is possible to more appropriately indicate that the third C acceptance period has ended without any acceptance.

After this, as shown in FIG. 318 (f5), of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (in the figure, the third disappearance-related display SKB3)," the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden first. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" has been hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 318 (g5), the "disappearance-related display (in the figure, the third disappearance-related display SKB3))" is hidden.

As mentioned above, during the 3C reception period in this example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 232(c) (see FIG. 316(d) and (e)) rather than in the manner shown in FIG. 232(a) (see FIG. 316(b) and (c)). When the situation shown in FIG. 316(d) and (e) occurs, the only difference from the situation shown in FIG. 316(b) and (c) above is the appearance of the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image)", and otherwise the performance will proceed in the same manner.

For example, when the presentation progresses from FIG. 316(d) to "H1'", the content is basically the same as when the presentation progresses from FIG. 316(b) to "H1 (FIG. 317(d1) to (h1))", and only the aspect of the "integrated model image display IG" in the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) has been changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGc". Also, when the presentation progresses from FIG. 316(d) to "H2'", the content is basically the same as when the presentation progresses from FIG. 316(b) to "H2 (FIG. 317(d2) to (h2))", and only the aspect of the "integrated model image display IG" in the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) has been changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGc". Also, when the performance progresses from FIG. 316(e) to "H3'", the content is basically the same as the content of the performance progresses from FIG. 316(c) to "H3 (FIG. 318(d3) to (h3))", and only the aspect of the "integrated model image display IG" in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) has been changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGc". Also, when the performance progresses from FIG. 316(e) to "H4'", the content is basically the same as the content of the performance progresses from FIG. 316(c) to "H4 (FIG. 317(d4) to (h4))", and only the aspect of the "integrated model image display IG" in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) has been changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGc". Furthermore, when the presentation progresses from FIG. 316(e) to "H5'", the content is basically the same as when the presentation progresses from FIG. 316(c) to "H5 (FIG. 318(d5)-(g5))", with only the aspect of the "integrated model image display IG" in the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) being changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGc".

For ease of explanation, during the 3C reception period in this performance example, the 3C post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance display UGC, 3C post-reception specific performance UTC, 3C post-reception performance sound) is executed with the same performance content (type) as the 3B post-reception performance corresponding to the above-mentioned 3B reception period. However, it is desirable to use different performance content (type) for the post-reception performance (post-reception performance display, post-reception specific performance, post-reception performance sound) between the 3B reception period and the 3C reception period.

In addition, for the sake of convenience, during the 3C reception period in this performance example, the disappearance-related display SKC is executed as the same (type) as the disappearance-related display SKB corresponding to the above-mentioned 3B reception period. However, the disappearance-related display does not necessarily have to be the same during the 3B reception period and the 3C reception period.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present application, which provides the 1B reception period through the 3B reception period, provides the following excellent effects.

First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, multiple reception periods (1C reception period to 3C reception period) are prepared with different presentation contents (post-reception presentations such as cut-in notice, group notice, conversation notice, etc., which are types of pre-notification presentations (expectation indication presentations)) that are carried out when a ball is accepted, and it is possible to generate a reception period (valid period) of a different type according to the result of the judgment (presentation judgment).

In this regard, in the 1C reception period to the 3C reception period, when the action of the player is accepted, the post-acceptance performance display (1C post-acceptance performance display to the 3C post-acceptance performance display) can be displayed on the "performance display device 1600" based on the fact that the action has been accepted. Among these, in the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, when the action of the player is accepted, not only is the post-acceptance performance display displayed based on the fact that the action has been accepted, but the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is also made to appear. That is, in this case, not only is it possible to check which aspect of the model image display (or gauge image) has appeared even after the action has been accepted, but by reducing the visibility of the model image display (or gauge image) by the "aspect in which the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" until the model image display (or gauge image) is hidden, it is expected that the player's focus will naturally shift from the model image display (or gauge image) to the "post-acceptance performance display". In addition, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is a display in which the same format can be used in common for multiple reception periods in which different performance content is carried out when the application is accepted (see, for example, Figure 314 (e2) and Figure 317 (e2)).

However, because the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are originally displayed during the reception period when reception has not yet been made, if the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) were to be displayed after reception has been made, it would be difficult to tell whether the post-reception performance display corresponding to the reception has already been displayed, and there is a concern that interest in the game would decrease. In this regard, when reception is made during either the 1C reception period or the 3C reception period (second period), the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are made invisible (invisible) while a "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is displayed, whereas the post-reception performance display is displayed while a "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is displayed. In other words, in this case, after the player's action is accepted, a transition in display presentation from the pre-acceptance display (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) to the post-acceptance display (post-acceptance presentation display) is realized while "a display in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears.

The "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" and the "post-acceptance performance display" are common in that they are both displayed based on acceptance. However, the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" refers to, for example, as shown in FIG. 314(e1) and FIG. 318(e3), etc., which appears to make the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) difficult to see when the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. In contrast, the "post-acceptance performance display" refers to, for example, as shown in FIG. 314(f1) and FIG. 318(f3), etc., which appears to make the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) difficult to see even if it is displayed when the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed.

In this regard, in the above example, if the operation is accepted during the first period of the 3C acceptance period, the disappearance-related display and the post-acceptance performance display are started to be displayed while the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are already in a non-display state, as shown in FIG. 317 (e1), etc., so that the player can concentrate on "what form will appear as the post-acceptance performance display." In addition, by adjusting whether the operation is accepted during the first or second period of the 3C acceptance period, it becomes possible to select whether the post-acceptance performance display is started to be executed while the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) continue to be displayed, or whether the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are made non-display before the post-acceptance performance display is started, which can increase the interest in the game.

As for the "mode in which the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)", methods of "appearing so as to make the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) difficult to see" include a method of realizing this by displaying an image display other than the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) as a priority display (displaying in a front layer) in at least a part of the area in which the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, as well as a method of displaying an image (video) that is made so that a part of the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) appears missing (unrecognizable) by displaying an image display other than the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). Also, instead of displaying an image other than the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), it is also possible to adopt a method of changing the numerical values (transparency, etc.) related to the display characteristics of the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself. In response to this, a method for making the "post-reception performance display" "appear so as not to make the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) difficult to see" can be adopted, such as a method of displaying the "post-reception performance display" in at least a part of the area in which the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, but displaying the "post-reception performance display" (displaying in a rear layer) in such a way that the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is given priority display, or a method of displaying the "post-reception performance display" only in an area excluding the area in which the Moji image display is displayed, at least while the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed.

In addition, as a "disappearance-related display that makes the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) difficult to see," it is possible to adopt both a method of displaying an image display other than the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in at least a part of the area in which the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, and a method of changing a numerical value (transparency, etc.) related to the display characteristics of the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself.

The "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears before the "post-acceptance performance display" is displayed, in a situation in which the "post-acceptance performance display" has not yet been displayed. In other words, in this case, in a situation in which the "post-acceptance performance display" has not yet been displayed, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are made difficult to see by the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)." This means that while the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are visible, the "post-acceptance performance display" may soon appear, and it is possible to encourage the player to prepare in advance by changing his or her gaze from the "difficult-to-see model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)."

In addition, if a win is accepted during the 1C acceptance period and the 3C acceptance period (second period), the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" can remain displayed even after the "post-acceptance performance display" is displayed, and is hidden while the "post-acceptance performance display" is displayed. This makes it possible to provide a wider range of performance related to the "post-acceptance performance display" during the period in which the "post-acceptance performance display" is displayed, after the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is hidden, and thus makes it possible to increase interest in the game by changing the performance during such a display period.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples relating to the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, as shown in Figures 314 and 318, the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is displayed not only in the area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, but also in the area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are not displayed. And, in this area, the "post-reception performance display" is displayed in at least a part of it, but it is displayed (for example, displayed in the rear layer) so that at least a part of the "post-reception performance display" is difficult to see due to the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)".

With this configuration, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) appears to make it difficult to see not only the replica image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), but also the "post-reception performance display", which is expected to improve both the performance until the replica image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are hidden, and the performance when the "post-reception performance display" begins to be displayed.

As mentioned above, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples relating to the 1st C reception period and the 3rd C reception period, in a situation where the "post-reception performance display" is not displayed after reception has been made and before the "post-reception performance display" is displayed, a post-reception specific performance (post-reception performance using the second performance device) that does not make it difficult to see the mock-up image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) can be made to appear in addition to the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance). This makes it possible to enjoy the post-reception performance prior to this without interfering with the performance in the first performance device.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples relating to the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the post-reception specific performance (post-reception performance using the second performance device) is made to appear before the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) appears, in a situation where the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) has not yet appeared. Also, the post-reception specific performance (post-reception performance using the second performance device) is made to continue until after the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) has ended.

With this configuration, players who dislike the complex presentation of the first presentation device can enjoy the post-reception presentation with the second presentation device, which has a more simplified presentation, thereby increasing the interest of various types of players.

In addition, in the above-mentioned examples of performances related to the 1st C reception period and the 3rd C reception period, the model image display will be displayed by dynamic display, as described above with reference to Figures 233 and 234. In this case, it is desirable that the dynamic display of the model image display is not terminated after acceptance and continues (until it is made invisible) even while the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) is appearing.

In addition, in the above-mentioned examples of effects related to the 1st C reception period and the 3rd C reception period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is designed to make it difficult to see not only the mock image display, but also the gauge image indicating the remaining time until the end of the reception period. This prevents the appearance of remaining time being seen even if the gauge image is displayed after reception.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if an action (operation) by a player is accepted during the 3C acceptance period among the multiple acceptance periods, the "3C post-acceptance performance display UGC3" can be displayed based on the acceptance, but in addition to the 3C post-acceptance performance display UGC3, the above-mentioned mode (second disappearance-related display SKC2) that also corresponds to the 1C acceptance period can be made to appear as a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance).

With this configuration, when the second disappearance-related display SKC2 appears, it is unclear whether the first C or third C post-reception performance display will appear, but when the first disappearance-related display SKC1 appears, it becomes possible to guess that the first C post-reception performance display UGC1 will appear.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) is displayed (priority display) in an area that includes at least a part of the area in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. However, it is also possible to realize a performance that uses a performance device (such as a movable body) located in front of the display screen, in a position that overlaps with at least a part of the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) when viewed from the front.

In addition, even if the same pattern (second disappearance related display SKC2) appears as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF performance), if the type of acceptance period is different, it is desirable to make the probability (expectation level) that the jackpot pattern will stop due to the pattern change different.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, a post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) can be executed using the second performance device, and during the execution period of the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device, the first performance device is configured to be in a state where the mock image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively easy to see, and in another state where the mock image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively difficult to see.

In other words, in this case, even after the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device has started based on the fact that the reception has been made, it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). Also, by making the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) relatively difficult to see during the execution period of the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device, it is expected that the player will be encouraged to naturally shift his or her focus of attention from the "first performance device" to the "second performance device."

In the above-mentioned performance example, the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is started so as not to affect the visibility of the mock image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) that are continuously displayed (displayed in an easily visible state) from before the reception. More specifically, the mock image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed in a specified area within the display screen (performance display device 1600), but the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is not an image display that is displayed using at least a portion of the specified area, nor is it a performance that is executed in a position that overlaps with at least a portion of the specified area when viewed from the front.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the post-reception performance display is started to be displayed after the timing of the appearance of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance), but it may be made to start to be displayed at the timing of the appearance of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) is realized as an image display that is displayed using at least a part of the "area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed." However, in this case, it is desirable to display the image display so that the area displayed in the "area where the model image display is displayed" tends to gradually expand over time.

As mentioned above, the "moon image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" in this embodiment can be displayed as an integrated moon image display IG in one of multiple modes (integrated moon image displays IGa-IGd) with different degrees of expectation. According to each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the display mode, including the display position, size, dynamic depiction, etc., may be maintained and continued even after acceptance, so it is possible to recognize in what mode the moon image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) were displayed during the acceptance period, even after acceptance.

As mentioned above, the "mock image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be displayed separately, or only one of the "mock image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be displayed.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples of effects, when the "mochi image display" or "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" is in a hidden state, it is sufficient that it is in a state where it is not visible to the player, and this includes, for example, a state where it is displayed on a layer, but the "mochi image display" or "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" is not visible because another image display is given priority. However, if at least a part of the "mochi image display" or "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" is visible to the player, this means that the aspect of the "mochi image display" or "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" is visible, so it can be said that the "mochi image display" or "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" is not in a hidden state, but is in a state where it continues to be displayed.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the specific performance after reception may be realized as being performed on the first performance device (within the display screen of the performance display device 1600) rather than the second performance device.

In addition, the target of the player's action (operation) during the first C reception period, second C reception period, and third C reception period does not necessarily have to be the same, and they may each call for a different action. However, if different actions are called for, the action target display (model image display) and remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) will also be displayed differently.

Now, if it is desired that acceptance (valid acceptance determination) be made during the first period (first state) of the 3C acceptance period, the player is required to make the valid acceptance determination before timing Y arrives. However, if the 3C acceptance period is set as a "valid period lasting for 3 seconds", then only about 1 second will be allowed for the first period (first state). In other words, in this case, it is expected that the player will act (operate) a little before the occurrence of the 3C acceptance period due to the impatience of having to act (operate) within such a short time. In this case, if the player tries to redo the action but timing Y has already arrived by that time, there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease because the player will not be able to play the way he or she wants to.

Therefore, during the 3C acceptance period, even if a player makes an action (operation) before timing tV2 when a state (3C acceptance period) occurs in which a "valid acceptance judgment that treats a player's action as a valid action" is permitted, the action (operation) will not be "valid acceptance judgment" at that time, but it is desirable to make it possible to make a "valid acceptance judgment" targeting (based on) the player's action (operation) made before the 3C acceptance period at the start of the 3C acceptance period (or thereafter).

In this case, however, the detection of whether or not an action (operation) has been performed by the player will be required to be performed regardless of whether or not the relevant 3C acceptance period, in which "a valid acceptance determination that an action by the player is a valid action" is permitted, has occurred.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 304, even if the player performs an action (operation) slightly before timing tV2, this will be detected. However, at the point when the player's action (operation) is detected in this way, the 3C reception period has not yet occurred, so no "valid reception determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made based on this detection. However, the existence of this detection information is kept as a memory (history), and after the 3C reception period occurs, during the 3C reception period, a "valid reception determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made based on the detection information kept as the memory (history). Then, the 3C post-reception performance is executed based on the "valid reception determination" obtained in this way.

With this configuration, even if an action (operation) occurs shortly before the occurrence of the 3C reception period, it can be accepted within the 3C reception period, and it becomes possible to execute a post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance) triggered by this. This makes it possible to lower the difficulty of accepting the action, even while the above-mentioned performance (first period) is realized.

However, if an operation (operation) is performed significantly (more than a specified time) before the start of the 3C reception period, it is desirable to prevent this from triggering the execution of the 3C post-reception performance. This type of configuration can be realized, for example, by setting a time value that is stored as detection information.

Note that this configuration when operated (operated) shortly before the occurrence of the third C reception period may be applied in the same manner to the first C reception period and the second C reception period, or may not be applied.

In addition, at this time, it is desirable to make it possible to accept (validly accepted) any action (operation) performed before the occurrence of the 3C acceptance period as a valid judgment in the above-mentioned "first period (first state)" rather than in the above-mentioned "second period (second state)" after the occurrence of the 3C acceptance period. With this configuration, the action (operation) is judged as validly accepted a short time after the action (operation) is performed by the player, and thus the post-acceptance performance begins to be executed. This makes it possible to suggest that the action by the player has been properly accepted, rather than the so-called "automatic acceptance function" that occurs when no action (operation) is made despite the occurrence of a acceptance period, and thus makes it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a second C reception period and a third C reception period are prepared as reception periods during which the acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) of a player's action (operation) is permitted. Then, when a "valid acceptance judgment that the player's action is a valid action" is made during the third C reception period, at the time when the above-mentioned post-acceptance performance based on the valid acceptance judgment (the first C post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first C reception period) starts to be executed, the action target display (here, a mock image display that imitates the target of the player's action (operation) and has multiple forms with different degrees of expectation (see Figures 232 (a) to (d))) may be in a displayed state rather than hidden (see Figure 318), and during the second C reception period, a "valid acceptance judgment that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made. When a "valid reception determination" is made, at the time when the above-mentioned post-reception performance based on the valid reception determination (the 2nd C post-reception performance corresponding to the 2nd C reception period) starts to be executed, the action target display (here, a replica image display that imitates the target of the player's action (operation) and has multiple forms with different degrees of expectation (see Figures 232 (a) to (d))) is not hidden and is not in a displayed state (no matter when the reception is made, the replica image display is in a hidden state at the time when the post-reception performance starts to be executed) (see Figure 315).

With this configuration, once the post-acceptance performance based on the "valid acceptance determination" has begun, there will be cases where the action target display (here, a model image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple forms with different degrees of expectation (see Figures 232(a)-(d))) is visible, and cases where the action target display (here, a model image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple forms with different degrees of expectation (see Figures 232(a)-(d)))) is not visible, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension after the post-acceptance performance has begun.

Furthermore, during the 3C acceptance period in this embodiment, depending on the timing (see Figs. 310 and 311) of the "valid acceptance judgment that determines that the action by the player is a valid action," at the time when the post-acceptance performance based on the valid acceptance judgment (the 3C post-acceptance performance corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) begins to be executed, the action target display (see Figs. 232(a)-(d)) may be in a displayed state rather than hidden (see Fig. 318), or the action target display (see Figs. 232(a)-(d)) may be in a hidden state (see Fig. 317).

In other words, from the player's perspective, when the model image display is displayed in the "high expectation second mode (see FIG. 316(d))" among the multiple modes (see FIG. 232(a)-(d)), it is certainly preferable to keep it displayed even after the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception judgment" (the 1st C post-reception performance corresponding to the 1st C reception period) has started to be executed, in order to increase the player's interest in the game. However, when the model image display is displayed in the "low expectation first mode (see FIG. 316(b))" among the multiple modes, if it continues to be displayed even after the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception judgment" (the 3rd C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3rd C reception period) has started to be executed, a decrease in the player's interest in the game is unavoidable.

For example, the post-acceptance performance (the 3C post-acceptance performance corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) is designed to have the possibility of being executed in a high-expectation mode (and even in a low-expectation mode) regardless of whether the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 316(b))" or the "second mode with low expectation (see FIG. 316(d))" during its valid period (the 3C acceptance period). When the post-acceptance performance (the 3C post-acceptance performance corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) is executed in a high-expectation mode, this alone is sufficient to increase interest in the game. However, if the model image display continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 316(b))," this will clearly result in a decrease in interest in the game, and therefore it is desirable to hide the model image display. On the other hand, even if the post-reception performance (the 3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectation, if the model image display continues to be displayed in the "second mode with high expectation (see FIG. 316(d))," it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the post-reception performance being executed in a mode with low expectation, so it is desirable to continue the model image display rather than hiding it.

Or, even if the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316(b))," some players may want to have the model image display not hidden but continue to be displayed at the time when the post-reception performance begins, as an "excuse" in case the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations." And even if the model image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations (see FIG. 316(d))," some players may want to have the model image display hidden and not visible at the time when the post-reception performance begins, in order to reduce "irritation" when the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations."

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when a 3C reception period occurs, the player can essentially choose between starting the post-reception performance with the model image display displayed (see FIG. 318) or starting the post-reception performance with the model image display hidden and not visible (see FIG. 317) depending on the timing at which a "valid reception determination" is made during the 3C reception period (see FIG. 310, FIG. 311), which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the second C reception period according to this embodiment, the action target display is not displayed in any of the modes that can be displayed in the third C reception period (the integrated model image display IGa shown in FIG. 316(b) and the integrated model image display IGc shown in FIG. 316(d) (in the example shown in FIG. 315, the integrated model image display IGb), and no matter when the "valid reception determination" is made, the action target display is not displayed and is always in a hidden state at the time when the post-reception performance based on the valid reception determination (second C post-reception performance) starts to be executed. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest whether the second C reception period or the third C reception period is occurring from the time the reception period in which the player is given an opportunity to operate occurs, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

During the 3C reception period, even if the player does not perform an action (operation), the same post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance) as when the action (operation) is performed may be executed (the automatic reception function described above may be enabled). In this case, however, when the 3C post-reception performance is executed based on the automatic reception function being enabled during the 3C reception period, it is desirable to ensure that the action target display (model image display) is always in a displayed state at the time the 3C post-reception performance is executed. In other words, in this case, even if the automatic reception function starts executing the 3C post-reception performance without the player realizing it, the player will be able to easily recognize in what form the action target display (model image display) was displayed during the 3C reception period.

In addition, when the "3C reception period" is the target of the automatic reception function described above, multiple different timings may be prepared for the timing at which the automatic reception function is enabled depending on the performance mode, etc. However, regardless of the timing at which the automatic reception function is enabled, when the 3C post-reception performance is executed based on the automatic reception function being enabled during the 3C reception period, it is desirable to ensure that the operation target display (model image display) is always in a displayed state at the time when the 3C post-reception performance is executed.

However, during the 2nd C reception period, it is desirable to ensure that if no action (operation) is performed by the player, the same post-reception performance (2nd C post-reception performance) as when the action (operation) is performed is not executed (this is not subject to the activation of the automatic reception function described above).

In addition, during the 3C reception period in this embodiment, whether the 3C post-reception performance is started while the action target display (model image display) continues to be displayed (see FIG. 318) or the 3C post-reception performance is started while the action target display (model image display) is not displayed (see FIG. 317), the form of the 3C post-reception performance (3C post-reception specific performance UTC3, 3C post-reception performance display UGC3, 3C post-reception performance sound, etc.) itself is the same. Therefore, it becomes possible to play the 3C post-reception performance by selecting the performance form from the perspective of how the player wants to enjoy it.

In addition, during the 3C reception period in this embodiment, the same disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2) is displayed regardless of whether the 3C post-reception performance is started while the action target display (model image display) continues to be displayed (see FIG. 318) or the 3C post-reception performance is started while the action target display (model image display) is not displayed (see FIG. 317). This makes it possible to appropriately indicate that the reception has been properly performed during the 3C reception period regardless of the manner in which the performance progresses.

In the above presentation example, a 1C reception period is also provided in addition to the 2C reception period and the 3C reception period, and in the 1C reception period, no matter when a valid reception judgment is made that determines that the action by the player is a valid action, the action target display is not hidden but always continues to be displayed when the post-reception presentation based on the valid reception judgment begins to be executed. In other words, in this case, the 3C reception period combines the presentation characteristics of both the 1C reception period and the 2C reception period, which can increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the 1C reception period according to this embodiment, the action target display can be displayed in a form (integrated model image display IGd in the example shown in FIG. 313(c)) different from either of the forms that can be displayed in the 3C reception period (integrated model image display IGa shown in FIG. 316(b) and integrated model image display IGc shown in FIG. 316(d)). In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to indicate whether the 1C reception period or the 3C reception period is occurring from the time the reception period in which the player is given an opportunity to operate occurs, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, during the 1C reception period in this embodiment, the action target display can also be displayed in the manner that can be displayed during the 3C reception period (the integrated model image display IGa shown in FIG. 316(b)). In other words, in this case, when the integrated model image display IGa is displayed, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the 1C reception period or the 3C reception period is occurring, so that the sense of tension during the reception period is appropriately maintained.

In addition, during the third C reception period, the integrated model image display IGc shown in FIG. 316(d) may not be displayed as the operation target display, and the integrated model image display IGa (one aspect) shown in FIG. 316(b) may always be displayed.

In addition, a specific premonition display may be displayed prior to the occurrence of the 3C reception period, suggesting that the player will be given an opportunity to operate. In this case, however, if the action target display (model image display) is not hidden but remains displayed at the time when the 3C post-reception performance begins, it is desirable that the specific premonition display be displayed at the time when the 3C post-reception performance begins, and that the specific premonition display be not displayed. In contrast, if the action target display (model image display) is not displayed at the time when the 3C post-reception performance begins, it is desirable that the specific premonition display be displayed without fail at the time when the 3C post-reception performance begins.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a second C reception period and a third C reception period are prepared as reception periods during which the acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) of an action (operation) by a player is permitted. Then, when a "valid acceptance judgment that an action by a player is a valid action" is made during the third C reception period, at the time when the above-mentioned post-acceptance performance based on the valid acceptance judgment (the first C post-acceptance performance corresponding to the first C reception period) starts to be executed, the remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of a gauge image displayed within a frame image is reduced over time, and multiple modes with different degrees of expectation are prepared as the modes of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image) may be in a displayed state rather than hidden (see FIG. 318), and during the second C reception period, a "valid acceptance judgment that an action (operation) by a player is a valid action" is made during the third C reception period. When a "validity judgment" is made, at the time when the post-acceptance performance based on the validity of acceptance judgment (the second C post-acceptance performance corresponding to the second C acceptance period) starts to be executed, the remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced over time, and multiple modes with different expectation levels are prepared as the modes of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image) is not hidden or displayed (no matter when the acceptance is made, the frame image and the gauge image are hidden at the time when the post-acceptance performance starts to be executed) (see FIG. 315). Note that the remaining time display in the above embodiment is displayed as an integrated model image display IG, and multiple modes shown in FIG. 232(a) to (d) (multiple modes as the frame image that forms the area in which the gauge image is displayed) are prepared as the modes.

With this configuration, once the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception determination" has begun, there will be cases where the remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of a gauge image displayed within a frame image is reduced over time, and multiple modes with different degrees of expectation are provided for at least one of the modes of the frame image and the gauge image (see Figures 232(a)-(d))) is visible and cases where the remaining time display is not visible, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension after the post-reception performance has begun.

Furthermore, during the 3C acceptance period in this embodiment, depending on the timing (see Figs. 310 and 311) of the "valid acceptance judgment that determines that the action by the player is a valid action," at the time the post-acceptance performance based on the valid acceptance judgment (the 3C post-acceptance performance corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) begins to be executed, the remaining time display (see Figs. 232(a)-(d)) may be in a displayed state (see Fig. 318) rather than hidden, or the remaining time display (see Figs. 232(a)-(d)) may be in a hidden state (see Fig. 317).

In other words, from the player's perspective, when the remaining time display is displayed in the "high expectation second mode (see FIG. 316(d))" of the multiple modes (see FIG. 232(a)-(d)), it is certainly preferable in terms of increasing interest in the game to continue displaying this even after the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception judgment" (the 3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) has started to be executed. However, when the remaining time display is displayed in the "low expectation first mode (see FIG. 316(b))" of the multiple modes, if this continues to be displayed even after the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception judgment" (the 3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) has started to be executed, a decrease in interest in the game is inevitable.

For example, the post-acceptance performance (the 3C post-acceptance performance corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) is likely to be executed in a high-expectation mode (and even in a low-expectation mode) regardless of whether the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 316(b))" or the "second mode with low expectation (see FIG. 316(d))" during its valid period (the 3C acceptance period). When the post-acceptance performance (the 3C post-acceptance performance corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) is executed in a high-expectation mode, this alone is sufficient to increase interest in the game. However, if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 316(b))," this will clearly decrease interest in the game, and therefore it is desirable to hide the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image). On the other hand, even if the post-acceptance performance (the 3C post-acceptance performance corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) is executed in a low expectation mode, if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) continues to be displayed in the "high expectation second mode (see FIG. 316 (d))," it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the post-acceptance performance being executed in a low expectation mode, so it is desirable to continue the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) without hiding it.

Or, even if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316(b))", some players may want to have the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) not hidden but remain displayed at the time when the post-reception performance begins, as an "excuse" in case the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations". And even if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations (see FIG. 316(d))", some players may want to have the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) hidden and not visible at the time when the post-reception performance begins, in order to reduce "irritation" when the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations".

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when a 3C reception period occurs, the player can essentially choose between starting the post-reception performance with the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) displayed (see FIG. 318) or starting the post-reception performance with the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) hidden and therefore not visible (see FIG. 317) based on the timing at which a "valid reception determination" is made during the 3C reception period (see FIG. 310, FIG. 311), which is expected to maintain the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the second C reception period according to this embodiment, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not displayed in any of the modes that can be displayed in the third C reception period (integrated model image display IGa shown in FIG. 316(b) and integrated model image display IGc shown in FIG. 316(d) (integrated model image display IGb in the example shown in FIG. 315), and no matter when the "valid reception determination" is made, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not displayed and is always in a hidden state at the time when the post-reception performance based on the valid reception determination (second C post-reception performance) starts to be executed. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest whether the second C reception period or the third C reception period is occurring from the time the reception period in which the player is given an opportunity to operate occurs, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

During the 3C reception period, even if the player does not perform an action (operation), the same post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance) as when the action (operation) is performed may be executed (the automatic reception function described above may be enabled). In this case, however, when the 3C post-reception performance is executed based on the automatic reception function being enabled during the 3C reception period, it is desirable to ensure that the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is always displayed at the time the 3C post-reception performance is executed. In other words, in this case, even if the automatic reception function starts executing the 3C post-reception performance without the player realizing it, the player will be able to easily recognize in what form the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) was displayed during the 3C reception period.

In addition, when the "3C reception period" is the target of the automatic reception function described above, multiple different timings may be prepared for the timing at which the automatic reception function is enabled depending on the performance mode, etc. However, regardless of the timing at which the automatic reception function is enabled, when the 3C post-reception performance is executed based on the automatic reception function being enabled during the 3C reception period, it is desirable to ensure that the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is always displayed at the time the 3C post-reception performance is executed.

However, during the 2nd C reception period, it is desirable to ensure that if no action (operation) is performed by the player, the same post-reception performance (2nd C post-reception performance) as when the action (operation) is performed is not executed (this is not subject to the activation of the automatic reception function described above).

In addition, during the 3C reception period in this embodiment, whether the 3C post-reception performance starts while the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) continues to be displayed (see FIG. 318) or the 3C post-reception performance starts while the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not displayed (see FIG. 317), the form of the 3C post-reception performance (3C post-reception specific performance UTC3, 3C post-reception performance display UGC3, 3C post-reception performance sound, etc.) itself is the same. Therefore, it becomes possible to play by selecting the performance mode from the perspective of how the player wants to enjoy the 3C post-reception performance.

In addition, during the 3C reception period in this embodiment, the same disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2) is displayed regardless of whether the 3C post-reception performance starts while the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) continues to be displayed (see FIG. 318) or the 3C post-reception performance starts while the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not displayed (see FIG. 317). This makes it possible to appropriately indicate that the reception has been properly performed during the 3C reception period regardless of the manner in which the performance progresses.

In the above presentation example, a 1C reception period is also provided in addition to the 2C reception period and the 3C reception period, and in the 1C reception period, no matter when a valid reception judgment is made that determines that the player's action is a valid action, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not hidden but is always continuously displayed at the time when the post-reception presentation based on the valid reception judgment begins to be executed. In other words, in this case, the 3C reception period combines the presentation characteristics of both the 1C reception period and the 2C reception period, which can increase interest in the game.

In addition, during the 1C reception period in this embodiment, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) can be displayed in a manner (integrated model image display IGd in the example shown in FIG. 313(c)) different from either of the manners that can be displayed during the 3C reception period (integrated model image display IGa shown in FIG. 316(b) and integrated model image display IGc shown in FIG. 316(d)). In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to indicate whether the 1C reception period or the 3C reception period is occurring from the time the reception period in which the player is given an opportunity to operate occurs, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, during the 1C reception period in this embodiment, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) can also be displayed in the manner that can be displayed during the 3C reception period (integrated model image display IGa shown in FIG. 316(b)). In other words, in this case, when the integrated model image display IGa is displayed, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the 1C reception period or the 3C reception period is occurring, so that the sense of tension during the reception period is appropriately maintained.

In addition, during the 3C reception period, the integrated model image display IGc shown in FIG. 316(d) may not be displayed as the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image), and the integrated model image display IGa (one aspect) shown in FIG. 316(b) may always be displayed.

In addition, a specific premonition display may be displayed prior to the occurrence of the 3C reception period, suggesting that the player will be given an opportunity to operate. In this case, however, if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not hidden but continues to be displayed at the time when the 3C post-reception performance starts, it is desirable that the specific premonition display be displayed at the time when the 3C post-reception performance starts, and that the specific premonition display be not displayed. In contrast, if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not displayed at the time when the 3C post-reception performance starts, it is desirable that the specific premonition display be displayed without fail at the time when the 3C post-reception performance starts.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a 1C reception period and a 3C reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, when a "valid reception determination is made that the action (operation) by the player is a valid operation" is made during the 3C reception period, the 3C post-reception performance can be executed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectation levels (low expectation modes shown in FIG. 317(d1)-(h1), high expectation modes shown in FIG. 317(d2)-(h2)) based on the fact that the reception is valid, and when a "valid reception determination is made that the action (operation) by the player is a valid operation" is made during the 1C reception period, the 1C post-reception performance can be executed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectation levels (low expectation modes shown in FIG. 314(d1)-(h1), high expectation modes shown in FIG. 314(d2)-(h2)) based on the fact that the reception is valid.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when a "valid reception determination" is made during the 3C reception period, the action target display (here, a model image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple modes with different expectations) may not be displayed and may be in a hidden state at the time when the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception determination" (the post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) starts to be executed. In contrast, when a "valid reception determination" is made during the 1C reception period, the action target display (here, a model image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple modes with different expectations) is not displayed and may not be in a hidden state at the time when the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception determination" (the post-reception performance corresponding to the 1C reception period) starts to be executed. Note that the model image display in the above embodiment is displayed as an integrated model image display IG, and multiple modes shown in Figs. 232(a) to (d) are prepared as its modes.

With this configuration, once the post-acceptance performance based on the "valid acceptance determination" begins, there will be cases where the action target display (imitation image display) is visible and cases where the action target display (imitation image display) is not visible, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension after the post-acceptance performance begins.

Moreover, in the third C reception period according to this embodiment, if "a valid reception determination is made that the action by the player is a valid action" before the timing Y in the third C reception period arrives (see FIG. 310), the action target display (model image display) is in a hidden state and is not displayed at the time when the post-reception performance based on the valid reception determination (the third C post-reception performance corresponding to the third C reception period) starts to be executed, but if "a valid reception determination is made that the action by the player is a valid action" after the timing Y in the third C reception period arrives (see FIG. 311), the third C post-reception performance starts to be executed with the action target display (model image display) displayed.

In other words, from the player's perspective, when the model image display is displayed in the "high expectation second mode (see FIG. 316(d))" of the multiple modes, it is certainly preferable in terms of increasing interest in the game to have it continue to be displayed even after the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception judgment" (the 3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) has started to be executed. However, when the model image display is displayed in the "low expectation first mode (see FIG. 316(b))" of the multiple modes, if it continues to be displayed even after the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception judgment" (the 3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) has started to be executed, a decrease in interest in the game is unavoidable.

For example, the post-acceptance performance (the 3C post-acceptance performance corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) is designed to have the possibility of being executed in a high-expectation mode (and even in a low-expectation mode) regardless of whether the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 316(b))" or the "second mode with low expectation (see FIG. 316(d))" during its valid period (the 3C acceptance period). When the post-acceptance performance (the 3C post-acceptance performance corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) is executed in a high-expectation mode, this alone is sufficient to increase interest in the game. However, if the model image display continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 316(b))," this will clearly result in a decrease in interest in the game, and therefore it is desirable to hide the model image display. On the other hand, even if the post-reception performance (the 3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectation, if the model image display continues to be displayed in the "second mode with high expectation (see FIG. 316(d))," it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the post-reception performance being executed in a mode with low expectation, so it is desirable to continue the model image display rather than hiding it.

Or, even if the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316(b))," some players may want to have the model image display not hidden but continue to be displayed at the time when the post-reception performance begins, as an "excuse" in case the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations." And even if the model image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations (see FIG. 316(d))," some players may want to have the model image display hidden and not visible at the time when the post-reception performance begins, in order to reduce "irritation" when the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations."

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one acceptance period (third C acceptance period) occurs, the player can start the post-acceptance performance in a state where the replica image display is hidden and cannot be seen, by making sure that a "valid acceptance determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made before timing Y arrives within the third C acceptance period. Also, if a "valid acceptance determination that the player's action is a valid action" is not made before timing Y arrives within the third C acceptance period, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the post-acceptance performance will start when the replica image display is not displayed, so that players who seek this kind of performance can enjoy the operation performance with peace of mind from then on.

According to this configuration, the 3C reception period gives the player the "choice of whether or not to start the post-reception performance while the replica image display is still displayed," while the 1C reception period does not give the player the "choice of whether or not to start the post-reception performance while the replica image display is still displayed," and functions as a period in which the post-reception performance always starts while the replica image display is still displayed.

In this regard, in the third C acceptance period in which such a choice is granted, if the action (operation) of the player is not accepted during the third C acceptance period (if there is no valid acceptance judgment), the same post-acceptance performance as when there is a valid acceptance judgment is not executed (the automatic performance function is not activated), and in the first C acceptance period in which such a choice is not granted, if the action (operation) of the player is not accepted during the first C acceptance period (if there is no valid acceptance judgment), the same post-acceptance performance as when there is a valid acceptance judgment is executed (the automatic performance function is activated). According to such a configuration, when the third C acceptance period occurs, in exchange for granting the above-mentioned choice, relief is not performed when an operation is forgotten. As a result, when the third C acceptance period occurs, if the player does not make a decision such as "which one to select" within a limited time, the post-acceptance performance itself will not be executed, and a sense of tension can be appropriately given. In contrast, when the first C reception period occurs, the above-mentioned right of choice is not granted, but even if the reception is not completed within the first C reception period, the post-reception performance is executed properly, so that it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition. In this case, if the post-reception performance when an operation is forgotten during the first C reception period is started while the model image display is still displayed, it is possible not to grant the above-mentioned right of choice, even when an operation is forgotten.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a 1C reception period and a 3C reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, when a "valid reception determination is made that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made during the 3C reception period, the 3C post-reception performance can be executed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectation levels (low expectation modes shown in FIG. 317(d1)-(h1), high expectation modes shown in FIG. 317(d2)-(h2)) based on the fact that the reception is valid, and when a "valid reception determination is made that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made during the 1C reception period, the 1C post-reception performance can be executed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectation levels (low expectation modes shown in FIG. 314(d1)-(h1), high expectation modes shown in FIG. 314(d2)-(h2)) based on the fact that the reception is valid.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when a "valid reception determination" is made during the 3C reception period, at the time when the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception determination" (the 3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) starts to be executed, the remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time, and multiple modes with different degrees of expectation are prepared as the modes of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image) may not be displayed and may be in a hidden state. In contrast, when a "valid reception determination" is made during the 1C reception period, at the time when the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception determination" (the post-reception performance corresponding to the 1C reception period) starts to be executed, the remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time, and multiple modes with different degrees of expectation are prepared as the modes of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image) is not displayed and may not be in a hidden state. The remaining time display in the above embodiment is displayed as an integrated image display IG, and multiple forms are available, as shown in Figures 232 (a) to (d).

With this configuration, once the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception determination" begins, there will be cases where the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is visible and cases where the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is not visible, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension after the post-reception performance begins.

Moreover, in the 3C acceptance period according to this embodiment, if "a valid acceptance determination is made that the action by the player is a valid action" before the timing Y in the 3C acceptance period arrives (see FIG. 310), the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is hidden and not displayed at the time when the post-acceptance performance based on the valid acceptance determination (the 3C post-acceptance performance corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) starts to be executed, but if "a valid acceptance determination is made that the action by the player is a valid action" after the timing Y in the 3C acceptance period arrives (see FIG. 311), the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image are displayed when the 3C post-acceptance performance starts to be executed.

In other words, from the player's perspective, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "high expectation second mode (see FIG. 316(d))" of the multiple modes, it is certainly preferable in terms of increasing interest in the game to continue to display this even after the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception judgment" (the 3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) has started to be executed. However, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "low expectation first mode (see FIG. 316(b))" of the multiple modes, if this continues to be displayed even after the post-reception performance based on the "valid reception judgment" (the 3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) has started to be executed, a decrease in interest in the game is unavoidable.

For example, the post-acceptance performance (the 3C post-acceptance performance corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) is designed to have the possibility of being executed in a high-expectation mode (and even in a low-expectation mode) regardless of whether the remaining time display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 316(b))" or the "second mode with low expectation (see FIG. 316(d))" during its valid period (the 3C acceptance period). When the post-acceptance performance (the 3C post-acceptance performance corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) is executed in a high-expectation mode, this alone is sufficient to increase interest in the game. However, if the remaining time display continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 316(b))," this will clearly decrease interest in the game, and therefore it is desirable to hide the remaining time display. On the other hand, even if the post-acceptance performance (the 3C post-acceptance performance corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) is executed in a mode with low expectation, if the remaining time display continues to be displayed in the "second mode with high expectation (see FIG. 316 (d))," it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the post-acceptance performance being executed in a mode with low expectation, so it is desirable to continue the remaining time display rather than hiding it.

Or, even if the remaining time display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316(b))," some players may want to have the remaining time display not hidden, but continue to be displayed, at the time when the post-reception performance begins, as an "excuse" in case the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations." And even if the remaining time display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations (see FIG. 316(d))," some players may want to have the remaining time display hidden, so that it cannot be seen, at the time when the post-reception performance begins, in order to reduce "irritation" if the post-reception performance is executed in the "mode with low expectations."

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one acceptance period (third C acceptance period) occurs, the player can start the post-acceptance performance in a state where the remaining time display is hidden and cannot be seen, by making sure that a "valid acceptance determination that the player's action is a valid action" is made before timing Y arrives within the third C acceptance period. If a "valid acceptance determination that the player's action is a valid action" is not made before timing Y arrives within the third C acceptance period, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the post-acceptance performance will start when the remaining time display is not displayed at that point, and therefore players who seek this kind of performance can enjoy the operation performance with peace of mind from then on.

According to this configuration, the 3C reception period gives the player "the right to choose whether or not to start the post-reception performance while the remaining time display is still displayed," while the 1C reception period does not give the player "the right to choose whether or not to start the post-reception performance while the remaining time display is still displayed," and functions as a period in which the post-reception performance always starts while the remaining time display is still displayed.

In this regard, in the third C acceptance period in which such a choice is granted, if the action (operation) of the player is not accepted during the third C acceptance period (if there is no valid acceptance judgment), the same post-acceptance performance as when there is a valid acceptance judgment is not executed (the automatic performance function is not activated), and in the first C acceptance period in which such a choice is not granted, if the action (operation) of the player is not accepted during the first C acceptance period (if there is no valid acceptance judgment), the same post-acceptance performance as when there is a valid acceptance judgment is executed (the automatic performance function is activated). According to such a configuration, when the third C acceptance period occurs, in exchange for granting the above-mentioned choice, relief is not performed when an operation is forgotten. As a result, when the third C acceptance period occurs, if the player does not make a decision such as "which one to select" within a limited time, the post-acceptance performance itself will not be executed, and a sense of tension can be appropriately given. In contrast, when the first C reception period occurs, the above-mentioned right of choice is not granted, but even if the reception is not completed within the first C reception period, the post-reception performance is executed properly, so that it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in a good condition. In this case, if the post-reception performance when an operation is forgotten during the first C reception period is started while the remaining time display is still displayed, it is possible not to grant the above-mentioned right of choice, even when an operation is forgotten.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of reception periods including a 1C reception period and a 3C reception period are prepared as reception periods. In the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) can be displayed using at least a specific area. Then, when a "valid reception determination that an action by the player is a valid action" is made during the 1C reception period, a 1C post-reception performance can be executed in one of a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation based on the fact that the valid reception determination has been made, and when a "valid reception determination that an action by the player is a valid action" is made during the 3C reception period, a 3C post-reception performance can be executed in one of a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation based on the fact that the valid reception determination has been made. Also, even when the first C post-reception performance starts to be executed, or when the third C post-reception performance starts to be executed, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) may remain displayed and not hidden.

In this regard, in pachinko machine 1, whether a "valid reception judgment" is made during the 1C reception period or during the 3C reception period, the disappearance EF performance can be executed using at least a part of the display target area (specific area) of the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) based on the valid reception judgment being made, so that it becomes easy to recognize that a proper valid reception judgment has been made (a state in which the reception period has ended due to the player's operation being accepted).

As described above, in the 3C reception period, depending on the timing (first period, second period, etc.) of the "valid reception determination" that determines that the player's action is a valid action, the integrated model image display IG may be in a displayed state rather than hidden at the time when the 3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period begins to be executed, or the integrated model image display IG may be in a not-displayed state (not visible state). In contrast, in the 1C reception period, the integrated model image display IG is always displayed regardless of the timing of the valid reception determination that determines that the player's action (operation) is a valid action (valid operation). By providing a 1C reception period in which such an integrated model image display IG is always displayed, in addition to the above-mentioned 3C reception period, it is possible to provide a reassuring performance, combined with the configuration in which the disappearance EF performance is executed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

During the 1C reception period, if the corresponding post-reception performance (1C post-reception performance) is executed in a high expectation mode (Fig. 314 (d2) to (h2)), a specific mode (Fig. 314 (e2) to (g2)) that is also used in the 3C reception period appears as the extinction EF performance (disappearance-related display); however, if it differs from the high expectation mode, the specific mode (Fig. 314 (e2) to (g2)) does not appear as the extinction EF performance (disappearance-related display), and a different mode (Fig. 314 (e1) to (g1)) appears, or it is desirable that the extinction EF performance (disappearance-related display) itself does not appear. With this configuration, when the extinction EF performance (disappearance-related display) is executed in response to the 3C reception period, it is possible to give the impression that a high expectation performance is being executed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In the first C reception period, the reception allowance sound is output in multiple modes with different expectation levels, but in the third C reception period, the reception allowance sound may be output only in "one mode". With this configuration, when the reception allowance sound having the "one mode" is output, it is possible to make the user aware of the possibility that the third C reception period having the above-mentioned two performance features is occurring, so that the sense of tension can be maintained in an appropriate manner. The "one mode" may be selectively output (by judgment) even when the first C reception period occurs. In this case, it is desirable that the "one mode" is output as the mode with the lowest expectation level. In this case, it is expected that the sense of tension can be maintained in an appropriate manner even in a situation where the reception allowance sound is output in the mode with the lowest expectation level.

When a specific variation pattern is selected, both the first C reception period and the third C reception period may occur sequentially within the specific variation pattern. In this case, it is preferable that the first C reception period occurs after the third C reception period occurs. Also in this case, the first C reception period may occur. In this case, it is preferable that the second C reception period may occur between the occurrence of the third C reception period and the occurrence of the first C reception period.

It is also desirable that the premonition effect output when the first C reception period occurs and the premonition effect output when the third C reception period occurs are different from each other. In other words, in this case, the premonition effect can suggest whether the first C reception period or the third C reception period will occur.

In addition, in the third C reception period, it is desirable that a specific mode (e.g., the second disappearance-related display SKC2) appears as the disappearance EF performance (disappearance-related display) when there is an acceptance, and that a mode different from the specific mode (e.g., the third disappearance-related display SKC3) appears when there is no acceptance, or that no mode appears at all. In contrast, in the first C reception period, it is desirable that even if there is no acceptance, the disappearance EF performance (disappearance-related display) appears in the same mode as when there is an acceptance. In other words, in the third C reception period, which has both the performance due to the above-mentioned "first C reception period" (performance in which a model image display or a gauge image is displayed at the time when the performance after acceptance starts to be executed) and the performance due to the above-mentioned "second C reception period" (performance in which a model image display or a gauge image is not displayed at the time when the performance after acceptance starts to be executed), it can be difficult to select the performance, so it can be said that it is more likely to cause forgetting to operate (the reception period ends without acceptance) than in the above-mentioned "first C reception period". In this regard, according to the above configuration, if an action is forgotten during the 3C reception period, the disappearance EF effect (for example, the second disappearance-related display SKC2) that occurs when an action is accepted will not appear, so it is possible to appeal to the player that an action has been forgotten, and it is possible to maintain a good sense of tension when the reception period occurs thereafter. In contrast, there are no elements that are likely to cause an action to be forgotten during the 1C reception period. Nevertheless, when an action is not accepted, it is possible that the player has deliberately made a gaming choice to "not make an action," so if a player who has made such a choice is "appealed to the player that an action has been forgotten," it may actually reduce the player's interest in the game. Therefore, even if an action is not accepted during the 1C reception period, it is desirable to make the disappearance EF effect (disappearance-related display) appear in the same manner as when an action is accepted.

In particular, during the 1C reception period in the above-mentioned performance example, the appearance of the extinction EF performance (disappearance-related display) differs depending on the appearance (expectation) of the performance after the 1C reception (see FIG. 314). Therefore, even if there is no reception during the 1C reception period, by making the same appearance as when there is reception appear as the extinction EF performance (disappearance-related display), it becomes possible to recognize the appearance (expectation) of the performance after the 1C reception that appeared when there was reception, and it is possible to increase interest in the game.

During the 1st C reception period and the 3rd C reception period, it is desirable that the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) be configured so that when an action by the player is accepted, a disappearance EF display is executed while the depiction of the movement appearing in the operation receiving section and the reduction in the area of the gauge image continue.

The above-mentioned examples of effects and other examples may be modified to the following configurations, or the following configurations (acceptance periods) may be further provided as other acceptance periods with different types of post-acceptance effects. That is, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has at least the first C acceptance period, the second C acceptance period, and the third C acceptance period as acceptance periods during which the acceptance of the player's actions (operations) is permitted. Of these, during the first C acceptance period and the third C acceptance period, the disappearance EF performance (disappearance-related display) can be executed based on the acceptance (valid acceptance determination) of the player's actions (operations), and during the second C acceptance period, the disappearance EF performance (disappearance-related display) is not executed even if the player's actions (operations) are accepted (valid acceptance determination).

In this regard, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted (valid acceptance judgment) during the 1C acceptance period, the extinction EF performance (disappearance related display) may be executed in the same manner when the 1C post-acceptance performance is executed in a manner with a low expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) based on the acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) and when the 1C post-acceptance performance is executed in a manner with a high expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing). In addition, when such a configuration is applied to the example shown in FIG. 314, it is desirable that a predetermined one of the extinction EF performances always appears, regardless of which of the modes (modes shown in FIG. 314 (d1) to (h1) and modes shown in FIG. 314 (d2) to (h2)) appears as the 1C post-acceptance performance, and regardless of whether the acceptance was made during the 1C acceptance period (modes shown in FIG. 314 (d3) to (g3)). In other words, the 1C reception period refers to a period in which, regardless of when reception (valid reception determination) is made during the period (or even if reception is not made at all), the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) continues to be displayed after the period ends. In this case, since information such as "in what form the integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) was displayed" is provided, there is a concern that if further different information is provided by the disappearance EF performance, the performance will become too complicated. In this regard, with such a 1C reception period, regardless of which mode (modes shown in FIG. 314 (d1)-(h1), or modes shown in FIG. 314 (d2)-(h2)) appears as the post-1C reception performance, and further regardless of whether or not the reception is made within the 1C reception period (modes shown in FIG. 314 (d3)-(g3)), a predetermined mode will always appear as the disappearance EF performance, thereby eliminating the above-mentioned concerns.

In addition, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted (valid acceptance judgment) during the 3C acceptance period, the disappearance EF effect may be executed in different modes depending on whether the 3C post-acceptance performance is executed in a mode with low expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) based on the acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) or in a mode with high expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing). The 3C acceptance period has the above-mentioned two types of performance, and can be said to be positioned as a "highly difficult acceptance period". Therefore, even after acceptance, it is desirable to provide different performance information from both the mode as the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) and the mode as the disappearance EF performance in order to stimulate the player in terms of performance.

When this configuration is applied to the examples shown in Figures 317 and 318, it is desirable that the form of the disappearance EF performance that appears when no acceptance has been made is different from any of the multiple forms of the disappearance EF performance that can appear when acceptance has been made. This makes it possible to recognize that no acceptance has been made, and also makes it possible to suggest that the acceptance period in question was a combination of both the performance characteristics of the "first C acceptance period" described above and the performance characteristics of the "second C acceptance period" described above.

As described above, in another example of the 3C reception period, when reception is made during the "first period (first state)" of the 3C reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) will not be displayed after reception. In other words, in this case, since no information is provided on "in what form the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) was displayed" after reception, in this situation it is desirable to provide information through the disappearance EF performance (expectation information regarding the performance after reception) in order to increase interest in the game.

In addition, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted (valid acceptance judged) during the 1C acceptance period, the disappearance EF presentation may be executed in a manner different from the manner that appears when acceptance is made. This makes it possible to recognize that no acceptance has been made, and if this manner cannot appear during the 3C acceptance period, it can suggest that the acceptance period did not combine both the presentation characteristics of the above-mentioned "1C acceptance period" and the above-mentioned "2C acceptance period".

In addition, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted (valid acceptance determination) during the 3C acceptance period, the disappearance EF performance may be executed in the same manner as it appears when the action (operation) is accepted.

It is not necessary to apply all of these configurations to the above-mentioned production examples or other examples. For example, an appropriate combination or only one of the configurations (variations) may be applied to the above-mentioned production examples or other examples.

Next, we will explain the case where some of the above-mentioned modified examples are applied to the above-mentioned performance examples. That is, FIG. 319 is a modified example of the "performance that appears when acceptance is made or not made during the 1C reception period" shown in FIG. 314, and FIG. 320 and FIG. 321 are modified examples of the "performance that appears when acceptance is made or not made during the 3C reception period" shown in FIG. 317 (acceptance during the 1st period) and FIG. 318 (acceptance during the 2nd period). Note that in this modified example, the configurations that are not specifically mentioned are as described above with reference to the "performance examples related to the 1C reception period (FIG. 304 to FIG. 306, FIG. 313, FIG. 314)" and the "performance examples related to the 3C reception period (FIG. 310 to FIG. 312, FIG. 316 to FIG. 318)," and can be similarly applied to each of the above-mentioned other examples that can be applied to the "performance examples related to the 1C reception period" and the "performance examples related to the 3C reception period."

In the modified example shown in FIG. 319, when an action (operation) by a player is accepted (valid acceptance judgment) during the 1C acceptance period, the extinction EF effect (disappearance-related display) is executed in the same manner when the 1C post-acceptance performance is executed in a manner with low expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) based on the acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) (see FIG. 319 (d1)-(h1)) and when the 1C post-acceptance performance is executed in a manner with high expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) (see FIG. 319 (d2)-(h2)). Here, the second extinction-related display SKC2 is executed as the extinction EF performance.

However, in the modified example shown in FIG. 319, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted (valid acceptance judgement) during the 1C acceptance period (see FIG. 319 (d3)-(g3)), the extinction EF presentation is a display that does not appear when the player's action (operation) is accepted (valid acceptance judgement) during the 1C acceptance period. Here, the third extinction-related display SKC3 is executed as the extinction EF presentation.

In contrast to this, in the modified example shown in Figures 320 and 321, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted (valid acceptance judgment) during the 3C acceptance period, the disappearance EF performance is executed in different manners depending on whether the post-3C acceptance performance is executed in a manner with a low expectation level (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) based on the acceptance (valid acceptance judgment) (see Figures 320 (d1) to (h1) and Figures 321 (d3) to (h3)) or whether the post-3C acceptance performance is executed in a manner with a high expectation level (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) (see Figures 320 (d2) to (h2) and Figures 321 (d4) to (h4)). Here, when the expectation level (the rate at which a winning symbol appears) is low (see FIG. 320(d1)-(h1) and FIG. 321(d3)-(h3)), the first disappearance-related display SKC1 is executed as the disappearance EF effect, and when the expectation level (the rate at which a winning symbol appears) is high (see FIG. 320(d2)-(h2) and FIG. 321(d4)-(h4)), the second disappearance-related display SKC2 is executed as the disappearance EF effect. As described above, FIG. 320(d1)-(h1) and FIG. 320(d2)-(h2) show the progress of the effect that appears when the acceptance is made during the first period of the third C acceptance period according to the modified example, and FIG. 321(d3)-(h3) and FIG. 321(d4)-(h4) show the progress of the effect that appears when the acceptance is made during the second period of the third C acceptance period according to the modified example.

In addition, in the modified example shown in Figures 320 and 321, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted (valid acceptance judgment) during the 3C acceptance period (see Figures 321 (d5) to (g5)), the extinction EF performance is configured to appear in the manner that would have appeared if the player's action (operation) had been accepted (valid acceptance judgment) during the 3C acceptance period. That is, in the example shown in Figures 321 (d5) to (g5), since the first extinction-related display SKC1 is displayed as the extinction EF performance, it becomes possible to recognize that if the player's action (operation) had been accepted (valid acceptance judgment) during the 3C acceptance period, the performance progression shown in Figures 321 (d3) to (h3) would have occurred (if it had been accepted during the first period, the performance progression shown in Figures 320 (d1) to (h1) would have occurred). In contrast, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted (valid acceptance determination) during the 3C acceptance period, when the second extinction-related display SKC2 is displayed as the extinction EF presentation, if the player's action (operation) was accepted (valid acceptance determination) during the 3C acceptance period, it will be possible to recognize that the presentation progression shown in FIG. 321 (d4)-(h4) has occurred (if the action (operation) was accepted during the first period, the presentation progression shown in FIG. 320 (d2)-(h2) has occurred).

In the 1C reception period of this modified example, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that appears when reception is made uses the "second disappearance-related display SKC2" that is displayed when the post-reception effect (3C post-reception effect) corresponding to the above-mentioned 3C reception period of the modified example is executed in a highly anticipated manner. In other words, in this case, in the 1C reception period of the modified example, as long as reception is made, it is possible to give the impression that the post-reception effect will be executed in a highly anticipated manner, which can increase interest in the game.

The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) corresponding to the 3C reception period in the modified example does not necessarily have to be the "2nd disappearance-related display SKC2". For example, even if the "1st disappearance-related display SKC1" that is displayed when the post-reception performance (1st C post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1C reception period is executed in a low expectation mode is used as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) corresponding to the 1C reception period in the modified example, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the reception is in the 1C reception period in the modified example or in the 3C reception period in the modified example.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this modified example, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the first C acceptance period, the "third disappearance-related display SKC3" is displayed as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF presentation).

It is preferable that the "third disappearance-related display SKC3" is not displayed in relation to the third C acceptance period according to the modified example. In other words, in this case, even if the player's action (operation) is not accepted during the first C acceptance period, it is possible to suggest that the acceptance period did not combine both the presentation characteristics of the above-mentioned "first C acceptance period" and the above-mentioned "second C acceptance period".

Furthermore, it is desirable that the "third disappearance-related display SKC3" is not displayed when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the first C acceptance period according to the modified example. In other words, in this case, it is possible to more appropriately indicate that the first C acceptance period has ended without any acceptance.

Even in the third C acceptance period according to this modified example, if a player makes an action (operation) before timing tV2 when a state (third C acceptance period) occurs in which a "valid acceptance judgment that treats a player's action as a valid action" is permitted, the action (operation) will not be judged as a "valid acceptance judgment" at that time. However, it is possible to apply the configuration according to the above-mentioned modified example, which makes it possible to make a "valid acceptance judgment" targeting (based on) an action (operation) made by the player before the third C acceptance period at the start of the third C acceptance period (or after that).

In the 3C reception period according to the above modified example, if a low expectancy pattern appears as a post-3C reception performance (see FIG. 320 (d1)-(h1), or FIG. 321 (d3)-(h3)), the first disappearance-related display SKC1 is executed as a disappearance EF performance, but the disappearance EF performance itself may not appear.

In addition, during the 1C reception period in the above modified example, a specific pattern appears as the disappearance EF performance when reception is made (Fig. 319 (d1)-(h1) or Fig. 319 (d2)-(h2)), and a pattern different from the specific pattern appears when no reception is made (Fig. 319 (d3)-(g3)). However, the disappearance EF performance itself may not appear when no reception is made.

In addition, in the first C reception period according to the above modified example, the second disappearance-related display SKC2 is executed as a specific mode (disappearance EF performance) when reception is made, but it may be executed in a mode different from the second disappearance-related display SKC2. For example, even if it is executed as the first disappearance-related display SKC1, it can be difficult to recognize whether the reception is made in the first C reception period or the third C reception period.

[Premonition Stock Effects]
As illustrated in FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the start winning (reserved consumption). Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is capable of executing a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) as to which of a plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern is to be selectively displayed. Note that, depending on the result of this performance determination, all of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared corresponding to the above-mentioned selected variation pattern may be executed in sequence, or none of the plurality of expected performances (preview performances, etc.) may be executed.

As described above, when such a performance judgment (variation pattern judgment, advance notice judgment, etc.) is made, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance content according to the result of the performance judgment, and a variable performance using a decorative pattern according to the result of the jackpot judgment is executed together with an expected performance (advance notice performance) related to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movement of the movable body (gimmick performance). As a result, when the variable performance using the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected performance related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., and the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the player can be given a special jackpot game or a transition to a high probability game state.

In this configuration, the variable presentation of the decorative patterns serves as a presentation with the "function of indicating whether or not a jackpot has been obtained as a result of the jackpot determination," and the expectation presentation related to the background depiction and the movement of the moving body serves as a presentation with the "function of suggesting the expectation of a jackpot being obtained, that is, the percentage (including 0% and 100%)." In other words, the player enjoys playing the game through these presentations.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if a specific variation pattern is selected from among the high expectation variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into an SP reach (such as a reach performance accompanied by a background change) as a result of the variation pattern determination, no matter which result is obtained as the performance determination (such as a preview determination), when the pattern performance based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach (when a specified condition is met), an acceptance permission state (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even a reach state is not formed as a result of the variation pattern determination, when a special result is obtained in the performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (when a predetermined condition is met), an acceptance allowance state (valid period) in which performance acceptance is permitted can be generated. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination, the acceptance allowance state (valid period) does not occur even if the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. In addition, the acceptance allowance state (valid period) generated in the predetermined variation pattern is executed as a different performance (post-reception performance) from the acceptance allowance state (valid period) generated when the pattern performance based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a reception period can be generated in which the acceptance of a player's action (operation) is permitted, and when a player's action (operation) is accepted during the reception period, a display change (post-acceptance effect) occurs according to the type of the acceptance period that has occurred. More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 includes "motion detection means (sensor, etc.) for detecting a player's action (operation)", "detection information storage means (peripheral control RAM 1511c, a corresponding processing step in a program, etc.) for storing information detected by the motion detection means", and "acceptance-related effect execution means (peripheral control MPU 1511a, a corresponding processing step in a program, etc.) that can generate an acceptance period, and when an acceptance validity determination is made during the acceptance period that the player's action is a valid action based on the detection information stored in the detection information storage means, the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the acceptance period can be executed."

During the reception period, an action target display can be displayed that indicates which is the "target of the player's action." Such an action target display can be displayed, for example, as a replica image display in which the object (operation means) that is the target of the player's action is expressed as an image. In particular, the "action target display" in this presentation example is displayed as a "replica image display" that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple forms with different degrees of expectation.

During the acceptance period, a remaining time display can be displayed to indicate the time remaining during which the acceptance of the player's action (operation) is permitted. Such a remaining time display can be implemented, for example, as a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time. In particular, in this example of the presentation, multiple modes are prepared for at least one of the modes of the frame image and the gauge image (for example, the speed at which the display area of the gauge image is reduced, an indication of the degree of expectation, an indication of the type of operation means, etc.), and the game is executed in one of these modes. Depending on which mode is executed, a different degree of expectation (the rate at which a jackpot pattern will appear) may be suggested.

In addition, when a reception period occurs, a premonition effect can be executed before this, suggesting that the player will be given an opportunity to act (suggesting that a reception period will occur). Premonition effects are executed, for example, by displaying a performance on the performance display device 1600 and outputting a corresponding performance sound.

Note that, as for the fluctuation patterns that will generate an acceptance-permitted state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during the SP reach no matter which result is obtained as the preview performance judgment, other than the above-mentioned "specific fluctuation patterns" may be provided. As for the fluctuation patterns that will generate an acceptance-permitted state (valid period) at a predetermined timing no matter which result is obtained as the preview performance judgment, it is preferable that they are not included in the low-expectation fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns), or that they may be included but that their selection rate (occurrence rate) is made low (although this is not necessarily required).

However, the acceptance permission state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions, etc., only executes a post-acceptance display (post-operation display) such as a display change on the performance display device 1600, or generates a performance sound change on the speaker, a change in the light emitted by the lamp, or a performance action by the movable decoration, as long as an operation by the player is detected within the set time (valid period). Therefore, the acceptance permission state (valid period) itself has little performance value, and there is a concern that it may reduce interest in the game related to the acceptance period.

Incidentally, in the above-mentioned and later-mentioned examples, the "operation (action) by the player" to be detected is not limited to operations that are directly operated by the player (pressing or unsheathing the sword), such as the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001", but also includes "contact actions by the player on a specific part" to be detected by a touch sensor, and "actions by the player in a specific space" to be detected by a non-contact sensor. In short, it is sufficient to have one or more reception means (operation means) that accepts actions by the player (pressing, unsheathing the sword, touching, non-contact, etc.).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, the following special presentation is provided with respect to the acceptance of "operations (actions) by the player". Note that it is not necessary to provide all of the presentations (configurations) described below; for example, it is possible to reduce interest in playing by providing only one of the presentations (any configuration), or it is possible to selectively provide several configurations that are considered necessary to obtain further effects, or it is possible to appropriately adopt a configuration that is described as applicable (desirable) to another configuration. Furthermore, the presentations (configurations) described below are merely examples, and it is sufficient that any one configuration capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in playing associated with the acceptance period is provided.

[Configuration 1-C]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared as the reception period, and a specific performance display can be displayed in the premonition performance. The "specific reception period" according to the configuration 1-C is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 1-C. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" according to another configuration, or it may mean a different reception period from the "specific reception period" according to another configuration. Furthermore, the "specific performance display" according to the configuration 1-C is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 1-C. Therefore, it may mean the same performance display as the "specific performance display" according to another configuration, or it may mean a different performance display from the "specific performance display" according to another configuration.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, even if the player performs an action while a specific performance display is being displayed, the action is detected by the action detection means (such as a sensor), the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means (such as the peripheral control RAM 1511c or a corresponding processing step in the program), and a valid acceptance determination may be made within the specific acceptance period based on the stored detection information, determining that the player's action is a valid action. With this configuration, even if the player performs an action (operation) while a premonition performance (specific performance display) is being executed, it is possible to use this as an opportunity to start a post-acceptance performance, and it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in an appropriate manner through such flexible performance.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 1-C" is adopted, even if a player performs an action before the specific acceptance period occurs and while a specific performance display is being displayed, the action is detected by the action detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. During the specific acceptance period, a valid acceptance determination may be made based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the specific acceptance period occurs and while a specific performance display is being displayed, to determine that the action performed by the player is a valid action (stock acceptance performance), and when the valid acceptance determination is made, the specific performance display may be displayed at the time when the post-acceptance performance based on the valid acceptance determination is started. With this configuration, even if a player performs an action during the "execution period of the premonition performance" before the specific acceptance period occurs, the action is properly detected, and the detection information may be stored and held until the specific acceptance period occurs. That is, in this case, "valid acceptance determination that the action by the player is a valid action" may be made within the specific acceptance period based on detection information obtained before the specific acceptance period occurs, so even if the player makes an action (operation) in a rush before the specific acceptance period occurs, the player can enjoy the post-acceptance effect without having to redo the action after the specific acceptance period occurs. Also, at this time, when the post-acceptance effect is started due to an action (operation) in a rush before the specific acceptance period has occurred (when the specific performance display is displayed), the specific performance display is not hidden but is displayed, so that the player can easily recognize that the post-acceptance effect has been started based on the action (detection information) made by the player when the specific performance display is displayed.

[Configuration 2-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods, and a first performance display is displayed in a first premonition performance corresponding to the first reception period, and a second performance display is displayed in a second premonition performance corresponding to the second reception period. Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to the configuration 2-C are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 2-C. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period (or the reversed second reception period)" and "second reception period (or the reversed first reception period)" according to another configuration, or may mean a reception period (e.g., a specific reception period) different from the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to another configuration. Also, the "first performance display" and "second performance display" according to the configuration 2-C are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 2-C. Therefore, it may mean the same performance display as the ``first performance display (or the inverse second performance display)'' and ``second performance display (or the inverse first performance display)'' associated with another configuration, or it may mean a performance display different from the ``first performance display'' and ``second performance display'' associated with another configuration (for example, a specific performance display, etc.).

In this regard, in pachinko machine 1, even if the player performs an action (operation) while either the first or second performance display is being displayed, the action is detected by the action detection means, the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means, and a valid acceptance determination that the player's action is a valid action may be made within the first acceptance period or the second acceptance period based on the stored detection information. Therefore, even if the player performs an action while a premonition effect (first or second performance display) is being executed, it is possible to use this as an opportunity to start a post-acceptance effect, and it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in an appropriate manner through such flexible performance.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 2-C" is adopted, the following configurations may be adopted. That is, in both the first and second acceptance periods, if a player performs an action before the acceptance period occurs and while a premonition effect is being executed, the action is detected by the action detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. Then, in both the first and second acceptance periods, a valid acceptance determination may be made that the action by the player is a valid action based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means when the acceptance period occurs before the premonition effect is being executed (stock acceptance effect). Then, if a valid acceptance determination is made that the action by the player is a valid action based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means during the first acceptance period before the first acceptance period occurs and while a premonition effect is being executed, at least a part of the mock image display is always displayed at the time when the post-acceptance effect based on the valid acceptance determination is started to be executed. In contrast, if during the second acceptance period, before the occurrence of the second acceptance period and while the premonition effect is being executed, a valid acceptance determination is made based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means to determine that the action by the player is a valid action, at the time when the post-acceptance effect based on the valid acceptance determination is started to be executed, even a part of the mock image display is not displayed. When these configurations are adopted, whether it is the first acceptance period or the second acceptance period, a "valid acceptance determination to determine that the action by the player is a valid action" may be made during the acceptance period based on detection information obtained before the occurrence of the acceptance period, so that even if the player makes an action (operation) out of momentum before the occurrence of the first acceptance period or the second acceptance period, he or she can enjoy the post-acceptance effect after the occurrence of the acceptance period without having to redo the action. Furthermore, if an action (operation) is made too enthusiastically before the first reception period occurs, at least a portion of the imitation image display will always be displayed when the post-reception performance based on this starts to be executed, whereas if an action (operation) is made too enthusiastically before the second reception period occurs, not even a portion of the imitation image display will be displayed when the post-reception performance based on this starts to be executed, making it possible to appropriately indicate whether the post-reception performance is based on the first reception period or the second reception period (before which reception period the player made the action).

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 2-C" is adopted, the following configurations may be adopted. That is, in both the first and second acceptance periods, if a player performs an action before the occurrence of the acceptance period and while a premonition effect is being executed, the action is detected by the action detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. Then, in both the first and second acceptance periods, a valid acceptance determination may be made that the action performed by the player is a valid action based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means when the action performed before the occurrence of the acceptance period and while a premonition effect is being executed. Then, if a valid acceptance determination is made that the action performed by the player is a valid action based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means during the first acceptance period before the occurrence of the first acceptance period and while a premonition effect is being executed, at least a part of the remaining time display is always displayed at the time when the post-acceptance effect based on the valid acceptance determination is started to be executed. In contrast, if during the second acceptance period, before the occurrence of the second acceptance period and while the premonition effect is being executed, a valid acceptance determination is made based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means to determine that the action by the player is a valid action, the remaining time display is made so that not even a part of it is displayed at the time when the post-acceptance effect based on the valid acceptance determination is started to be executed. When these configurations are adopted, whether it is the first acceptance period or the second acceptance period, a "valid acceptance determination that the action by the player is a valid action" may be made during the acceptance period based on the detection information obtained before the occurrence of the acceptance period, so that even if the player makes an action (operation) out of momentum before the occurrence of the first acceptance period or the second acceptance period, he or she can enjoy the post-acceptance effect after the occurrence of the acceptance period without having to redo the action. Furthermore, if an action (operation) is made with too much momentum before the first reception period occurs, at least a portion of the remaining time display will always be displayed when the post-reception performance based on this starts to be executed, whereas if an action (operation) is made with too much momentum before the second reception period occurs, not even a portion of the remaining time display will be displayed when the post-reception performance based on this starts to be executed, making it possible to appropriately indicate whether the post-reception performance is based on the first reception period or the second reception period (before which reception period the player made the action)

Note that "replica image display and remaining time display are not displayed" is not limited to the case of configuration 2-C, but may also be displayed in other configurations as long as the replica image display and remaining time display are not visible on the display screen. For example, this also includes a state in which the replica image display and remaining time display are displayed on a layer but are not visible because an image on another layer is displayed with priority.

[Configuration 3-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared as the reception period. Note that the "specific reception period" according to the configuration 3-C is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 3-C. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" according to another configuration, or it may mean a reception period different from the "specific reception period" according to another configuration.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, even if no action by the player is detected during a specific reception period, the reception may be determined to be valid and a post-reception performance corresponding to the specific reception period may be executed, and this type of flexible performance is expected to maintain interest in the game.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 3-C" is adopted, the following configurations may be adopted. That is, a specific display is displayed in the premonition effect corresponding to the specific reception period, and even if the player performs an action before the specific reception period occurs and when the specific display is displayed, the action is detected by the action detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. Then, during the specific reception period, a valid reception determination may be made based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the specific reception period occurs and when the specific display is displayed" (stock reception determination), and when the valid reception determination is made, the model image display is not displayed at the time when the post-reception performance based on the valid reception determination starts. On the other hand, when the valid reception determination is made based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means during the specific reception period", the model image display may be displayed at the time when the post-reception performance based on the valid reception determination starts. When these configurations are adopted, "valid acceptance determination that the player's action is a valid action" may be made within the specific acceptance period based on detection information obtained before the specific acceptance period occurs, so even if the player makes an action (operation) in a rush before the specific acceptance period occurs, the player can enjoy the post-acceptance performance without having to redo the action after the specific acceptance period occurs. Furthermore, depending on whether or not a mock image display is displayed at the time when the post-acceptance performance begins to be executed, it becomes possible to suggest whether or not a valid acceptance determination has been made based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means when the specific performance display was displayed before the specific acceptance period occurred."

The "specific performance display" in configuration 3-C is merely a term used to explain the technical concept of configuration 3-C. Therefore, it may mean the same performance display as the "specific performance display" in another configuration, or it may mean a different performance display from the "specific performance display" in another configuration.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 3-C" is adopted, the following configurations may be adopted. That is, a specific display is displayed in the premonition effect corresponding to the specific reception period, and even if the player performs an action before the specific reception period occurs and when the specific display is displayed, the action is detected by the action detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. Then, during the specific reception period, a valid reception determination may be made based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the specific reception period occurs and when the specific display is displayed" (stock reception determination), and when the valid reception determination is made, the remaining time display is not displayed at the time when the post-reception performance based on the valid reception determination is started. On the other hand, when the valid reception determination is made based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means during the specific reception period", the remaining time display may be displayed at the time when the post-reception performance based on the valid reception determination is started. When these configurations are adopted, "valid acceptance determination that the action by the player is a valid action" may be made within the specific acceptance period based on detection information obtained before the specific acceptance period occurs, so even if the player makes an action (operation) in a rush before the specific acceptance period occurs, the player can enjoy the post-acceptance performance without having to redo the action after the specific acceptance period occurs. Furthermore, depending on whether or not the remaining time display is displayed at the time when the post-acceptance performance begins to be executed, it becomes possible to suggest whether or not a valid acceptance determination has been made based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means when the specific performance display is displayed before the specific acceptance period occurs."

Note that "replica image display and remaining time display are not displayed" is not limited to the case of configuration 3-C, but may also be displayed in other configurations as long as the replica image display and remaining time display are not visible on the display screen. For example, this also includes a state in which the replica image display and remaining time display are displayed on a layer but are not visible because an image on another layer is displayed with priority.

[Configuration 4-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods, and when a first reception period occurs, even if the action of the player is not detected by the action detection means during the first reception period, a first post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period can be executed, and when a second reception period occurs, even if the action of the player is not detected by the action detection means during the second reception period, a second post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period can be executed. Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to the configuration 4-C are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 4-C. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period (or the reversed second reception period)" and "second reception period (or the reversed first reception period)" according to other configurations, or they may mean a reception period (for example, a specific reception period) different from the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to other configurations.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, there are at least two timings during the first reception period when the performance after the first reception is started without the player's action being detected by the above-mentioned action detection means, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

As will be described later, when this "Configuration 4-C" is adopted, at least a first timing and a second timing are prepared as timings at which the first post-reception performance is started without the player's action being detected by the action detection means during the first acceptance period, and at the first timing, "the first post-reception performance is started by making the above-mentioned acceptance validity determination within the first acceptance period based on the player's action (detection information) detected before the first acceptance period occurs (stock acceptance performance)," and at the second timing, "the first post-reception performance is started based on the arrival of a specified timing (second timing) without detecting any action by the player, including before the first acceptance period occurs."

As will be described later, when "Configuration 4-C" is adopted, it is possible that during the second acceptance period, "the second post-acceptance performance is started by making the above-mentioned acceptance validity determination within the second acceptance period based on an action (detection information) by the player detected before the second acceptance period occurs" (stock acceptance performance), but it is not necessary to "start the second post-acceptance performance based on the arrival of a specified timing without detecting any action by the player, including before the second acceptance period occurs."

When both of these configurations are provided, in both the first and second reception periods, "the valid reception determination can be made within the reception period based on the player's actions (detection information) detected before the reception period occurs," making it possible to start the post-reception performance. Furthermore, even if such a "stock reception performance" fails in the first reception period, the post-reception performance is executed as a rescue based on the arrival of a specified timing, so the player can safely challenge the "stock reception performance." On the other hand, in the second reception period, if such a "stock reception performance" fails, the post-reception performance is not executed as a rescue, which creates an ideal sense of tension.

[Configuration 5-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared as reception periods, and when a specific reception period occurs, even if the action of the player is not detected by the action detection means during the specific reception period, a specific post-reception performance corresponding to the specific reception period can be executed as the post-reception performance. Note that the "specific reception period" according to the configuration 5-C is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 5-C. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" according to another configuration, or it may mean a reception period different from the "specific reception period" according to another configuration.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, there are at least a first timing and a second timing at which the performance after specific reception is started without the player's action being detected by the action detection means during the specific reception period, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 5-C" is adopted, when the specific post-reception performance starts at the first timing, the imitation image display is not displayed at the time when the specific post-reception performance starts, but when the specific post-reception performance starts at the second timing, the imitation image display may be displayed at the time when the specific post-reception performance starts. In other words, in this case, after the specific post-reception performance starts, it becomes possible to indicate whether the specific post-reception performance starts at the first timing or the second timing.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 5-C" is adopted, when the specific post-reception performance starts at the first timing, the remaining time display is not displayed at the time the specific post-reception performance starts, but when the specific post-reception performance starts at the second timing, the remaining time display may be displayed at the time the specific post-reception performance starts. In other words, in this case, after the specific post-reception performance starts, it becomes possible to indicate whether the specific post-reception performance starts at the first timing or the second timing.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 5-C" is adopted, a specific performance display is displayed as a precursor performance corresponding to the specific reception period, and when the specific post-reception performance starts to be executed at the first timing, the specific performance display is displayed at the time when the specific post-reception performance starts to be executed, but when the specific post-reception performance starts to be executed at the second timing, the specific performance display is not displayed at the time when the specific post-reception performance starts to be executed. In other words, in this case, after the specific post-reception performance starts to be executed, it becomes possible to suggest whether the specific post-reception performance starts to be executed at the first timing or the second timing.

Note that "replica image display, remaining time display, and specific effect display are not displayed" is not limited to the configuration 5-C, but may also be used in other configurations as long as the replica image display, remaining time display, and specific effect display are not visible on the display screen. For example, this also includes a state in which an image is displayed on a layer but cannot be seen because an image on another layer is displayed preferentially.

Furthermore, the "specific performance display" in configuration 5-C is merely a term used to explain the technical concept of configuration 5-C. Therefore, it may mean the same performance display as the "specific performance display" in another configuration, or it may mean a different performance display from the "specific performance display" in another configuration.

[Configuration 6-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared as reception periods, and when a specific reception period occurs, even if the action of the player is not detected by the action detection means during the specific reception period, a specific post-reception performance corresponding to the specific reception period can be executed as the post-reception performance. Note that the "specific reception period" according to the configuration 6-C is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 6-C. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" according to another configuration, or it may mean a reception period different from the "specific reception period" according to another configuration.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, there are at least a first timing and a second timing as timings at which the specific post-reception performance is started without the action of the player being detected by the action detection means during the specific reception period. Also, if the specific post-reception performance is started at the second timing without the action of the player being detected by the action detection means during the specific reception period, a disappearing EF display can be displayed, and when the disappearing EF display is displayed, the action prompting display is made difficult to see, thereby enabling the player to easily recognize that the specific reception period has ended.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 6-C" is adopted, it is possible to display the disappearing EF display when the specific post-reception performance starts at the first timing without the action of the player being detected by the action detection means during the specific reception period, but when the disappearing EF display is displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to see displays other than the action prompting display. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest whether the specific post-reception performance starts at the first timing or the second timing after the specific post-reception performance starts to be executed.

In this case, the disappearing EF display may be displayed as the same image display when it appears when the specific post-reception performance starts to be executed at the first timing, and when it appears when the specific post-reception performance starts to be executed at the second timing. In other words, in this case, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the performance is being executed at the first timing or the second timing just by looking at the disappearing EF display, and it is expected that the disappearing EF display will encourage the player to focus on the "object that is made difficult to see."

[Configuration 7-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared as the reception period. Note that the "specific reception period" according to the configuration 7-C is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 7-C. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" according to another configuration, or it may mean a reception period different from the "specific reception period" according to another configuration.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when a specific reception period occurs, there are cases where the specific post-reception performance corresponding to the specific reception period is executed without the player's action being detected by the action detection means during the specific reception period, and cases where the specific reception period ends without the player's action being detected by the action detection means during the specific reception period, and the specific post-reception performance is not executed. This makes it possible to appropriately maintain the sense of tension when a specific reception period occurs.

As will be described later, when adopting this "Configuration 7-C", it is desirable to make it possible to generate a predetermined acceptance period different from the specific acceptance period, and when this predetermined acceptance period occurs, even if the action by the player is not detected by the action detection means during the predetermined acceptance period, the corresponding predetermined post-acceptance performance is always executed. Note that the "predetermined acceptance period" in this configuration 7-C is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 7-C. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "acceptance period" in other configurations.

In other words, in this case, when a specific acceptance period occurs, a sense of tension is suitably created, such as "if the player's action is not detected by the action detection means during the acceptance period, the post-acceptance performance may not occur," and when a prescribed acceptance period occurs, the corresponding post-acceptance performance is guaranteed to occur, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

[Configuration 8-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods, and when the first reception period occurs, the first premonition effect can be executed before the first reception period occurs, and when the second reception period occurs, the second premonition effect can be executed before the second reception period occurs. Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to the configuration 8-C are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 8-C. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period (or the reversed second reception period)" and "second reception period (or the reversed first reception period)" according to other configurations, or may mean a reception period (e.g., a specific reception period) different from the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to other configurations. Also, the "first premonition effect" and "second premonition effect" according to the configuration 8-C are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 8-C. Therefore, it may mean the same premonition effect as the ``first premonition effect (or the opposite, the second premonition effect)'' and ``second premonition effect (or the opposite, the first premonition effect)'' in other configurations, or it may mean a premonition effect different from the ``first premonition effect'' and ``second premonition effect'' in other configurations (for example, a specific premonition effect, etc.).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the period during which the first effect display (first premonition effect) is displayed includes a first period during which, when a motion is performed by the player, the motion is detected by the motion detection means and the detection information by the motion detection means is used to determine whether the acceptance is valid within the first acceptance period, and a second period during which, even if a motion is performed by the player and detected by the motion detection means, the detection information by the motion detection means is not used to determine whether the acceptance is valid within the first acceptance period. This makes it possible to provide a tense presentation.

As will be described later, even if the first reception period ends without any new detection by the motion detection means after the motion detection means detects a motion during the second period during which the first performance display is displayed, the first post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period can be executed as the post-reception performance. In other words, in this case, even if a motion by the player is detected during the second period, not during the first period, during the period during which the first precursor performance (first performance display) is being performed, it is possible to generate the post-reception performance without detecting any new motion by the player, which is expected to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 8-C" is adopted, the first period and the second period during which the first effect display is displayed may both be periods before the first acceptance period occurs. In other words, in this case, "valid acceptance determination that the action by the player is a valid action" may be performed within the first acceptance period based on detection information obtained before the first acceptance period occurs, so even if the player makes an action (operation) before the first acceptance period occurs, the player can enjoy the post-acceptance effect without redoing the action after the first acceptance period occurs. Moreover, even if the player makes an action (operation) before the first acceptance period occurs and the player's action is detected in the second period instead of the first period as a result of making an action (operation) before the first acceptance period occurs, the post-acceptance effect can be generated without newly detecting the player's action, so that it is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[Configuration 9-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared as reception periods, and a specific performance display can be displayed in the premonition performance corresponding to the specific reception period. The "specific reception period" according to the configuration 9-C is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 9-C. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" according to another configuration, or it may mean a reception period different from the "specific reception period" according to another configuration. Furthermore, the "specific performance display" according to the configuration 9-C is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 9-C. Therefore, it may mean the same performance display as the "specific performance display" according to another configuration, or it may mean a performance display different from the "specific performance display" according to another configuration.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the period during which a specific presentation display is displayed includes a first period during which, if a motion is performed by the player, the motion is detected by the motion detection means and the detection information by the motion detection means is used to determine whether the acceptance is valid within the specific acceptance period, and a second period during which, even if a motion is performed by the player and detected by the motion detection means, the detection information by the motion detection means is not used to determine whether the acceptance is valid within the specific acceptance period, thereby making it possible to maintain a sense of tension.

As will be described later, when "Configuration 9-C" is adopted, the first period and the second period may be periods before the occurrence of the specific reception period and may both be included in the period during which the specific performance display is displayed. In other words, in this case, even if the player makes an action (operation) out of urgency before the occurrence of the specific reception period, the player will be able to enjoy the post-reception performance after the occurrence of the specific reception period without having to redo the action. However, if the player makes an action (operation) out of urgency before the occurrence of the specific reception period, the post-reception performance is not necessarily executed (second period), so that the sense of tension can be maintained in an optimal manner.

[Configuration 10-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods, and a first performance display is displayed in a first premonition performance corresponding to the first reception period, and a second performance display is displayed in a second premonition performance corresponding to the second reception period. Note that the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" according to the configuration 10-C are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 10-C. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period (or the reversed second reception period)" and the "second reception period (or the reversed first reception period)" according to another configuration, or may mean a reception period (e.g., a specific reception period) different from the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" according to another configuration. Also, the "first performance display" and the "second performance display" according to the configuration 10-C are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 10-C. Therefore, it may mean the same performance display as the ``first performance display (or the inverse second performance display)'' and ``second performance display (or the inverse first performance display)'' associated with another configuration, or it may mean a performance display different from the ``first performance display'' and ``second performance display'' associated with another configuration (for example, a specific performance display, etc.).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, both the period in which the first effect display (first premonition effect) is executed and the period in which the second effect display (second premonition effect) is executed include a "pre-motion permitted period during which, if a motion is performed by the player, the motion is detected by the motion detection means and the information detected by the motion detection means is used to determine whether the acceptance is valid within the acceptance period" and a "pre-motion unpermitted period during which, even if a motion is performed by the player and detected by the motion detection means, the information detected by the motion detection means is not used to determine whether the acceptance is valid within the acceptance period", thereby making it possible to maintain a sense of tension.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 10-C" is adopted, the "pre-motion permitted period" and the "pre-motion non-permitted period" may both be periods before the timing when the acceptance period (first acceptance period or second acceptance period) occurs. In other words, in this case, "valid acceptance determination that the action by the player is a valid action" may be made within the acceptance period based on detection information obtained before the acceptance period (first acceptance period or second acceptance period) occurs, so even if the player makes an action (operation) before the acceptance period occurs, the player can enjoy the post-acceptance effect without having to redo the action after the acceptance period occurs. However, if the player makes an action (operation) before the acceptance period (first acceptance period or second acceptance period) occurs, the post-acceptance effect is not necessarily executed (pre-action non-permitted period), so the sense of tension can be maintained in an appropriate manner.

[Configuration 11-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared as reception periods, and when a specific reception period occurs, even if the action of the player is not detected by the action detection means during the specific reception period, a specific post-reception performance corresponding to the specific reception period can be executed as the post-reception performance. Note that the "specific reception period" according to the configuration 11-C is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 11-C. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" according to another configuration, or it may mean a reception period different from the "specific reception period" according to another configuration.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, there are at least two timings at which the specific post-reception performance can begin without the player's action being detected by the action detection means during the specific reception period, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 11-C" is adopted, at least a first timing and a second timing are prepared as timings at which the specific post-reception performance is started without the action of the player being detected by the action detection means during the specific reception period, and at the first timing, "the specific post-reception performance is started by making the above-mentioned reception validity determination within the specific reception period based on the action (detection information) of the player detected before the specific reception period occurs (stock reception performance)," and at the second timing, "the specific post-reception performance is started based on the arrival of a predetermined timing (second timing) without detecting any action by the player, including before the specific reception period occurs." In other words, in this case, "the above-mentioned reception validity determination can be made within the reception period based on the action (detection information) of the player detected before the reception period occurs (stock reception performance)," which makes it possible to start the specific post-reception performance. Furthermore, even if you fail this "stock reception performance" during the specific reception period, the specific post-reception performance will be executed as a rescue based on the arrival of a specified timing (second timing), so you can safely try the "stock reception performance."

[Configuration 12-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods, and when a first reception period occurs, even if the action of the player is not detected by the above-mentioned motion detection means during the first reception period, a corresponding first post-reception performance can be executed, and when a second reception period occurs, even if the action of the player is not detected by the above-mentioned motion detection means during the second reception period, a corresponding second post-reception performance can be executed. Note that the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to the configuration 12-C are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 12-C. Therefore, they may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period (or the reversed second reception period)" and "second reception period (or the reversed first reception period)" according to other configurations, or they may mean a reception period (for example, a specific reception period) different from the "first reception period" and "second reception period" according to other configurations.

In this regard, in pachinko machine 1, the first post-reception performance is performed for the same duration when the performance is performed without the player's action being detected by the action detection means during the first reception period, as it is performed based on the player's action being detected by the action detection means during the first reception period. This makes it possible to maintain interest in the game in an optimal manner.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 12-C" is adopted, the detection information (detection information of the player's action) acquired before the first acceptance period occurs may be used for the acceptance validity determination within the first acceptance period, so that the first post-acceptance performance can be executed without the player's action being detected by the action detection means during the first acceptance period, and the detection information (detection information of the player's action) acquired before the second acceptance period occurs may be used for the acceptance validity determination within the second acceptance period, so that the second post-acceptance performance can be executed without the player's action being detected by the action detection means during the second acceptance period. With this configuration, even if the player makes an action (operation) out of momentum before the first acceptance period or the second acceptance period occurs, the player can enjoy the post-acceptance performance after the first acceptance period or the second acceptance period occurs without having to redo the action.

[Configuration 13-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the premonition performance that suggests that the player will be given an opportunity to act, there are cases where the premonition performance sound corresponding to the premonition performance is output and cases where the premonition performance sound corresponding to the premonition performance is not output. This is expected to maintain a suitable sense of tension when giving the player an opportunity to act.

As will be described later, when the "Configuration 13-C" is adopted, when a specific premonition effect sound is output before the occurrence of a reception period during which the player is given an opportunity to act, there are at least a first timing and a second timing at which the action by the player is not detected by the action detection means during the reception period and the corresponding post-acceptance effect is started, whereas when no premonition effect sound is output before the occurrence of a reception period during which the player is given an opportunity to act, there may be at least a first timing and a second timing at which the action by the player is not detected by the action detection means during the reception period and the corresponding post-acceptance effect is started, or there may be at least a first timing without a second timing. In other words, in this case, it is expected that the sense of tension will be more appropriately increased when a premonition effect sound corresponding to the premonition effect is not output.

[Other configurations]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when an acceptance allowable state (acceptance period) occurs in which it is permitted to perform an acceptance validity judgment that the player's action is a valid action based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means, a model image display related to the acceptance target (such as a model image modeled on an operation receiving section) is displayed as an integrated model image display (see FIG. 232) integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the model image display, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game until the post-acceptance display (display change) is executed. It is desirable to display such an integrated model image display in both the operation acceptance performance (acceptance period) that occurs when the pattern performance progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach, and the operation acceptance performance (acceptance period) that occurs as a result of a notice judgment in a variation pattern that does not develop into an SP reach, and it is desirable to display it in both the low expectation non-suppression acceptance performance and the high expectation suppression acceptance performance.

The "integrated model image display" in this example is as described with reference to Figures 232 to 248, or as another example or modified example thereof, so details will be omitted, but for example, a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the border decoration image. Also, multiple modes (see Figure 232) with different degrees of expectation are prepared for the "integrated model image display," and it is similarly configured to be displayed in one of these modes.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when an acceptance-permitted state (acceptance period) occurs, an acceptance-permitted sound is output to indicate that an operation acceptance has been permitted, or to suggest that an operation acceptance will be permitted, thereby making it less likely that an operation will be forgotten. Here, the "acceptance-permitted sound" refers to a sound that, when the sound starts to be output, will necessarily cause an acceptance-permitted state (acceptance period) to occur while the sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned), or is in a state where an acceptance-permitted state (acceptance period) has already occurred. In other words, the "acceptance-permitted sound" can also be said to be a sound that is not output in a situation where a performance that has no relation to the acceptance-permitted state (acceptance period) is being performed.

In addition, each acceptance permission state (each acceptance period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. That is, an acceptance permission state classified into the first type is a valid period that can occur when a high expectation fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) is selected, but cannot occur in a low expectation fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) (a valid period that occurs based on the establishment of a specific condition (selection of a specific high expectation fluctuation pattern) in a performance judgment based on the result of a jackpot judgment). In addition, an acceptance permission state of the second type is a valid period that can occur in either a high expectation fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) or a low expectation fluctuation pattern (such as a valid period that occurs as a result of a notice judgment).

The "integrated imitation image display" according to this embodiment can be displayed in both the first type and second type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period). Here, it is assumed that the first type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period) and the second type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period) occur as acceptance permission states (acceptance periods) in which an operation opportunity is given for the same operating means (e.g., operation button 410), and therefore the "integrated imitation image display" displayed in those acceptance periods is an image simulating the same operating means (operation button 410).

In addition, among the multiple modes prepared as the "integrated Moji image display", a special mode with a high expectation (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 232(d)) may be displayed only in the first type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period), and in the second type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period), only a mode different from the special mode (for example, the modes shown in FIG. 232(a)-(c)) may be displayed. In this case, in the first type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period), a judgment is made based on the result of the jackpot judgment as to which of the multiple modes including the special mode (for example, FIG. 232(a)-(d)) the "integrated Moji image display" will be displayed in, and the "integrated Moji image display" will be displayed in a mode according to the result of this judgment. Even in the second type of acceptance permission state (acceptance period), a determination may be made as to which of multiple modes not including a special mode (e.g., Figures 232(a)-(c)) the "integrated model image" will be displayed in based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the "integrated model image display" may be displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination.

The pachinko machine 1 including the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-C" to "Configuration 13-C" will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. However, each configuration described below is merely described as a best embodiment and does not necessarily have to be included. In other words, for each configuration described in the specification described below, when it is desired to obtain further effects for any one of the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-C" to "Configuration 13-C", only the corresponding configuration can be selected and adopted at will. As described above, this pachinko machine 1 provides multiple reception periods (reception performances) with different performance contents (for example, conversation notice, cut-in notice, movable object notice, etc. as post-reception performances, and types of notice performances (expectation indication performances)) that proceed when the reception is made, and can generate reception periods (reception performances) of different types according to the results of judgments (jackpot judgments, performance judgments, etc.). Here, at least the first D reception period (first D post-reception performance) and the second D reception period (second D post-reception performance) are provided as multiple reception periods (reception performances).

With reference to Figures 322 to 334, the characteristics of each reception period (reception performance) will be described separately. Note that the reception periods described above with reference to Figures 321 through 321 may be prepared as reception periods separate from the 1D reception period (1D post-reception performance) and the 2D reception period (2D post-reception performance), or may be realized as either the 1D reception period (1D post-reception performance) or the 2D reception period (2D post-reception performance). Furthermore, in order to realize each invention described below, it is sufficient to have only the necessary configurations among the configurations described below, and it is not necessary to have these for each reception period described above with reference to Figures 321 through 321.

Figures 322 to 324 are time charts showing examples of the presentation content when condition 1D is satisfied as a result of a judgment (jackpot judgment or presentation judgment) and a 1D reception period (1D reception presentation) occurs. Figures 328 to 331 are diagrams showing presentation examples in a variation pattern in which a 1D reception period (1D reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with no guaranteed bonus or time reduction), and the "1st D fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 1st D fluctuation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the 1st D fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 1st D fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 328(a)"), and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is executed in addition to the performance of the selected "1st D fluctuation pattern" itself.

However, in the presentation related to the "1st D variation pattern", regardless of which result is obtained as the presentation judgment (preview judgment), as shown in FIG. 322(a), when timing tW2 (for example, timing within the SP reach state) arrives when the 1st D time has elapsed since the decorative pattern SZ variation presentation started, the above-mentioned 1st D acceptance period (valid period) during which "acceptance regarding the 1st D post-acceptance presentation" is permitted is generated ("the situation shown in FIG. 329(d)"). As a result, when an action by the player is accepted during the 1st D acceptance period, the 1st D post-acceptance presentation will be carried out based on that acceptance.

In this regard, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) according to this embodiment, when such a 1D reception period occurs, in relation to this, a premonition performance display suggesting that the reception period (valid period) will occur soon, an action target display (mochi image display) suggesting the reception target (operation receiving part, etc.), a remaining time display suggesting the remaining time of the reception period, a disappearance related display (disappearance EF display) making it difficult to see the action target display (mochi image display) and the remaining time display, etc., and a post-reception performance display suggesting the expectation degree (probability of the appearance of a jackpot pattern) according to the acceptance are each performed. The expectation degree (probability of the appearance of a jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%". As described above, the action target display (mochi image display) according to this example is displayed as an "integrated mochi image display IG" integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display, but is not necessarily limited to this and may be displayed separately. This is also the case for other reception periods.

More specifically, when the timing tW1 arrives before the occurrence of the 1D reception period, as shown in FIG. 322(b) and FIG. 328(b) and (c), the "1D premonition effect display ZEC" is started to be executed as the premonition effect display. As will be described later, the "1D premonition effect display ZEC" in this example is executed by sequentially displaying the "1D premonition effect display ZEC-1 (see FIG. 328(b))" and the "1D premonition effect display ZEC-2 (see FIG. 328(c))" which makes the "1D premonition effect display ZEC-1" difficult to see. However, this configuration does not necessarily have to be provided. In this example, as shown in FIG. 322(d), when the "1D premonition effect display ZEC" is executed, a sound effect (premonition effect sound) corresponding to the "1D premonition effect display ZEC" is output.

In addition, the "1D premonition effect display ZEC" in this example is hidden at timing tW2 when the 1D reception period occurs, but it may be displayed across timing tW2.

As will be described later, during the 1D acceptance period in this embodiment, even if the player performs an action (e.g., a pressing operation) on the operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) before the 1D acceptance period occurs, the action (operation) is detected by the action detection means (such as a sensor), and the detection information is stored and held in the detection information storage means (such as the peripheral control RAM 1511c or a corresponding processing step in the program) even at the time the 1D acceptance period occurs, and may be used for the above-mentioned acceptance validity determination during the 1D acceptance period (when the stock acceptance performance is executed).

In this regard, in the examples shown in Figures 322 and 323, and in the example in which the presentation progresses from Figure 328(c) to "I (Figure 329(d)", it is assumed that the 1st D reception period occurs without such a stock reception presentation being performed, that is, that is, that the detection information obtained before the 1st D reception period is not used for the above-mentioned reception validity determination within the 1st D reception period.

More specifically, in the case where the 1D reception period occurs at timing tW2 without a stock reception performance, as shown in FIG. 322(b) and FIG. 329(d), in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) according to this example, a "mochi image display" or a "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)" is displayed as an integrated mochi image display IG. The integrated mochi image display IG (mochi image display, frame image, gauge image) may appear at timing tW2 when the corresponding reception period (here, the 1D reception period) occurs, or may appear before timing tW2 and be displayed to span the timing tW2. The integrated mochi image display IG (mochi image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is hidden when reception (valid reception determination) is made within the 1D reception period, or when the 1D reception period ends without the reception (valid reception determination). In this example, the 1D acceptance period ends at timing tW3 if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (valid acceptance determination) (see FIG. 322(a)).

Furthermore, in the 1D reception period in this example, the integrated Mosaic image display IG (Mosaic image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed in one of a number of modes (for example, Fig. 232 (a) and (d)). Figs. 329 to 331 correspond to the case where the integrated Mosaic image display IG (Mosaic image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed in the "mode shown in Fig. 232 (d)". When the integrated Mosaic image display IG (Mosaic image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the "mode shown in Fig. 232 (a)", the integrated Mosaic image display IG (Mosaic image display, frame image, gauge image) shown in Figs. 329 to 331 is simply changed from the "mode shown in Fig. 232 (d)" to the "mode shown in Fig. 232 (a)", and therefore illustration will be omitted. In addition, even during the 1D reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) may be displayed in any of a number of forms, including those shown in Figures 232 (b) and (c).

Figure 322 assumes that a player's action is detected during this 1D reception period, and a "valid reception determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made at timing tW2a based on the detection information. In other words, in this case, as shown in Figure 322(a), the 1D reception period ends based on the player's action being accepted (valid reception determination is made) at timing tW2a, and the post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1D reception period begins to be executed.

Incidentally, an example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 329(d) to "I1 (FIG. 330(e1) to FIG. 330(i1)) corresponds to a case in which a first mode with a relatively low expectation is executed as the post-reception presentation (post-reception presentation) corresponding to the 1D reception period, and an example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 329(d) to "I2 (FIG. 330(e2) to FIG. 330(i2))" corresponds to a case in which a second mode with a relatively high expectation is executed as the post-reception presentation (post-reception presentation) corresponding to the 1D reception period. The expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) may include "0%" or "100%".

In this regard, during the 1D reception period, as shown in FIG. 322, at timing tW2a when the player's action is accepted (when the 1D post-reception performance begins in response to the acceptance), the "integrated model image display IG" is not made invisible, nor is the integrated model image display IG made difficult to see.

In other words, the 1D post-reception performance in this embodiment is realized as a performance that is at least a combination of the "1D post-reception performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), the "1D post-reception specific performance" using the second performance device (e.g., a sub-liquid crystal display, a movable body, a performance lamp, etc.), and the 1D post-reception performance sound using the third performance device (speaker) (it does not necessarily have to be realized as a combination performance using three performance devices). However, among these performance devices, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) on which the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed is delayed in the time at which the "1D post-reception performance display" as the 1D post-reception performance is started compared to the other performance devices, and this is intended to intentionally maintain the visibility of the "integrated model image display IG" even after the reception is made.

As shown in FIG. 330(e1) or (e2), this configuration allows the player to easily recognize in which of the multiple forms (FIG. 232(a) to (d)) the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the ended acceptance period, even after acceptance has been made, which is expected to effectively prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Here, in order to make it easier to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period after the reception period has ended, it is desirable to set the "time during which the integrated model image display IG is displayed in an easily visible form" after reception has been made to be longer. However, if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed in the same form as it was during the reception period even though reception has been made and the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has already been executed, it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the reception has been made, and as a result, there is a concern that "the player will be late in noticing the post-reception performance that is being executed."

Therefore, in the examples shown in Figure 322 (b) and Figure 330 (f1) or (f2), when a predetermined time has passed from timing tW2a when the 1st D acceptance period ends due to the acceptance of the player's action (when timing tW2b arrives), a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes the model image display difficult to see is started to be displayed.

In other words, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display)" is displayed.

According to this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the reception, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, which suggests that the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being performed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the integrated model image display IG to the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) (after timing tW2b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has already been performed, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the player being unable to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

In addition, during the 1D reception period, different modes (first disappearance-related display SKD1, second disappearance-related display SKD2) are displayed as the disappearance-related display depending on whether the corresponding post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance) is a low-expectation mode (Fig. 330 (e1) to (i1)) or a high-expectation mode (Fig. 330 (e2) to (i2)). In other words, in this case, as shown in Fig. 330 (f1) and (f2), even if the "1D post-reception performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) has not yet started, by checking whether the disappearance-related display that appears on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is the "first disappearance-related display SKD1" or the "second disappearance-related display SKD2", it becomes possible to guess whether the "1D post-reception performance display" will be executed in a high-expectation mode.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in Figure 322 (b) and Figure 330 (g1) or (g2), when timing tW2c arrives during the period during which the display related to the disappearance-related display (in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears, the first performance device (performance display device 1600) begins to execute a "1st D post-reception performance display UGD1 (cut-in performance)" as a post-reception performance in response to the acceptance of an action by the player within the 1D reception period. However, in this example where the performance progresses from FIG. 329(d) to "I1 (FIG. 330(e1)-(i1))" (when the expectation level is relatively low as a post-reception performance), as shown in FIG. 330(g1), the first mode (here, the first-D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 as a cut-in performance by the princess character)) is displayed as the first-D post-reception performance display UGD1 corresponding to the first-D reception period, and in this example where the performance progresses from FIG. 329(d) to "I2 (FIG. 330(e2)-(i2))" (when the expectation level is relatively high as a post-reception performance), as shown in FIG. 330(f2), the second mode (here, the first-D post-reception performance display UGD1-2 as a cut-in performance by the samurai character) is displayed as the first-D post-reception performance display UGD1 corresponding to the first-D reception period.

In other words, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKD1, second disappearance-related display SKD2)" are displayed, the "1st D post-reception performance display UGD1 ("1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-1" or "1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-2") will begin to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated model image display IG is displayed for a relatively long time after acceptance within the 1D acceptance period, the post-acceptance performance (1D post-acceptance performance display UGD1) on the first performance device (performance display device 1600) can be started without a significant delay compared to other performance devices, and a decline in interest in the game can be suppressed. Also, since the 1D post-acceptance performance display UGD1 starts while the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the "integrated model image display IG" to the "1D post-acceptance performance display UGD1 (1D post-acceptance performance display UGD1-1 or 1D post-acceptance performance display UGD1-2)" while suggesting that the 1D acceptance period has already ended (after timing tW2c).

On the other hand, when the "1st D post-reception performance display UGD1 (1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-2)" is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the area in which the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed (it does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "integrated model image display IG", and the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed with priority over the "1st D post-reception performance display UGD1 (1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-2)". This makes it easier to recognize in which form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period, even when the "1st D post-reception performance display UGD1 (1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-2)" starts to be executed.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the display of the "1st D post-reception performance display UGD1 (1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-2)" is started in this manner, as shown in Figure 322 (b) and Figure 330 (h1) or (h2), while the "1st D post-reception performance display UGD1 (1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-2)" is displayed, first, of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related displays", the "integrated model image display IG" is made invisible. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this manner, the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKD1 or second disappearance-related display SKD2)" is hidden as shown in Figure 322 (b) and Figure 330 (i1) or (i2), and this allows the "1st D post-reception performance display UGD1 (1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-2)" to be displayed with good visibility.

In this regard, the "1st D post-reception performance display UGD1" is displayed in one of multiple modes (here, 1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-2) with different degrees of expectation based on the acceptance of the player's action. Therefore, the "1st D post-reception performance display UGD1" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display" are hidden.

In addition, in the example of the performance corresponding to the 1D reception period (Figure 330), when reception is made during the 1D reception period and the "1D post-reception performance display UGD1" is executed, the background image is switched before and after the "1D post-reception performance display UGD1" starts.

With this configuration, in the situation shown in Figures 330(e) and (f) where no change in the background image has occurred (timings tW2a to tW2b shown in Figure 322), even if there has been a change in the performance on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), it is possible to indicate that the "first D post-reception performance display UGC1" has not yet started.

In this example, the "first D post-reception performance display UGD1" and "background change" are displayed later (timing tW2c) than the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKD1, second disappearance-related display SKD2)" is displayed (timing tW2b), but they may be displayed at the same time (timing tW2b) as the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKD1, second disappearance-related display SKD2)" is displayed (timing tW2b).

In the example shown in FIG. 330, the post-reception performance is configured to switch to the same background image when a low expectation mode appears and when a high expectation mode appears, but it may also be configured to switch to different background images when a low expectation mode appears and when a high expectation mode appears. Also, it may be configured to switch the background image when a high expectation mode appears, but not to switch the background image when a low expectation mode appears.

In this way, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, when a 1D reception period occurs, various displays are performed within a limited time and on a limited display screen (performance display device 1600) in response to the 1D reception period, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game. However, as a result of this, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is forced to delay the start time (timing tW2c) of the 1D post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance display) in response to the reception from the timing tW2a of the reception.

In this example, when an action by the player is accepted within the 1D acceptance period, as shown in Figures 322(b) and (c), based on the acceptance, the 1D post-acceptance performance (1D post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is started prior to the 1D post-acceptance performance (1D post-acceptance performance display) using the first performance device.

With this configuration, the delay in the start of execution from the timing tW2a when the 1D reception period is reached is limited to only a portion of the 1D post-reception performance (the 1D post-reception performance display), and the 1D post-reception performance itself can be started without delay from the same timing tW2a.

Such a second presentation device may be provided as a sub-LCD when the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) is used as the main LCD, or may be provided as a presentation movable body capable of presentation operation, or a presentation lamp capable of presentation light emission, etc. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform presentations (display presentation, movable presentation, light emission presentation, etc.) in multiple ways with different degrees of expectation. The degree of expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-LCD 1610 is used as the second performance device. In an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 329(d) to "I1 (FIG. 330(e1) to (i1))" (when the expectation level is relatively low as a post-reception performance), as shown in FIG. 330(e1), the mode in which "women's kimono" is displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is started to be executed prior to the 1D post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1) using the first performance device as the 1D post-reception specific performance UTD1 (1D post-reception specific performance UTD1-1, which is a low expectation level mode of the 1D post-reception specific performance UTD1) corresponding to the 1D reception period. In contrast, in an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 329(d) to "I2 (FIG. 330(e2)-(i2))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively high expectation), as shown in FIG. 330(e2), the mode in which "men's kimono" is displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is started to be executed prior to the 1D post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2) using the first performance device as the 1D post-reception specific performance UTD1 (1D post-reception specific performance UTD1-2, which is a high expectation mode of the 1D post-reception specific performance UTD1) corresponding to the 1D reception period.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 329(d), in addition to the "integrated model image display IG" on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), a performance during the reception period (display of the samurai character and the princess character) is executed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) to indicate that the 1D reception period has occurred. The performance during the reception period on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is displayed in the same manner when the "integrated model image display IG" on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is displayed in a manner with low expectation (not shown) and when it is displayed in a manner with high expectation (see FIG. 329(d)).

In other words, in this case, during the 1D reception period in which the player is given an opportunity to act (opportunity to operate), the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) will show different behaviors depending on the degree of expectation, and the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) will show the same behavior regardless of the degree of expectation. However, after this, when a "valid reception determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid operation" is made during the 1D reception period, while the "integrated model image display IG" continues to be displayed on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) (while the expectation of the performance after reception has not yet been indicated), the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) will show different behaviors depending on the degree of expectation. With this configuration, it is possible to obtain performance information more quickly by focusing on the appropriate performance device depending on the time than by focusing on the performance of only one performance device, which can increase the interest in the game.

In this example, the reception period performance (display of the samurai character and princess character) on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is executed continuously before the 1D reception period occurs, and also functions as a precursor performance that indicates the occurrence of the 1D reception period. However, the reception period performance on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) and the precursor performance on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) may each be executed as different performances.

In addition, in this example, the degree of expectation is suggested depending on whether "1D reception specific performance UTD1-1" or "1D reception specific performance UTD1-2" appears as the 1D reception specific performance UTD1, but it is not necessary to prepare multiple forms for the 1D reception specific performance UTD1. For example, it is possible to provide only "1D reception specific performance UTD1-2" as the 1D reception specific performance UTD1, and suggest the degree of expectation (the rate at which a jackpot is obtained) depending on whether the 1D reception specific performance UTD1 appears. In other words, in this case, when "1D reception specific performance UTD1-2" appears, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is higher than when "1D reception specific performance UTD1-2" does not appear.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further includes a third performance device (speaker), and when the 1D reception period occurs, the reception permissible sound starts to be output at a timing slightly before the timing tW2 shown in FIG. 322(d). In other words, the reception permissible sound corresponding to the 1D reception period is audibly output across the timing tW2 at which the 1D reception period occurs, and the player's actions (operations) can be accepted while the reception permissible sound is being audibly output.

Here, during the first D reception period, the first long allowable sound, which is in an audible output state for a relatively long time, and the first short allowable sound, which is in an audible output state for a relatively short time, are output as the reception allowable sound. In the example shown in FIG. 304(d), the first long allowable sound and the first short allowable sound are each started to be output at the same time, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one (or both) of the first long allowable sound and the first short allowable sound may be started to be output at or after timing tW2 when the first D reception period occurs.

In the first D reception period, if an action by the player is received (valid reception determination) while the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are being audibly output, the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are terminated (termination of the audible output state) based on the reception.

In this regard, it is desirable that the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound be executed (audibly output) in a manner with low expectation (not shown) as shown in FIG. 322(d) and executed (audibly output) in a manner with high expectation (as shown in FIG. 329(d)). In other words, in this case, the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound indicate the expectation during the reception period, but unlike the "integrated mock image display IG", they are executed in such a way that once acceptance (valid reception determination) is made, it becomes impossible to confirm it, and therefore it is expected that the tension as to when during the reception period acceptance (valid reception determination) will be made will be appropriately maintained.

In addition, during the 1D reception period, if an action by the player is accepted while the reception allowable sound (first long allowable sound, first short allowable sound) is being audibly output, not only is the reception allowable sound terminated midway, but the audible output of the 1D post-reception performance sound is started based on the acceptance. The 1D post-reception performance sound is executed so as to suggest the degree of expectation, and for example, it may be executed (audibly output) in a manner with low expectation, or in a manner with high expectation. In other words, in this case, unlike the case of the performance (display performance) performed by the first performance device, during the 1D reception period, there is no competition (overlapping) between the performance performed during the reception period (reception allowable sound) and the performance performed in response to the acceptance (1D post-reception performance sound).

Similar to the "1D post-reception performance display UGD1", as shown in FIG. 322(d), this type of 1D post-reception performance sound will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" are hidden. Also, for the 1D post-reception performance sound, it is desirable to output different output sounds (modes) in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 329(d) to "I1 (FIG. 330(e1)-(i1))" (when the expectation level is relatively low as a post-reception performance) and the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 329(d) to "I2 (FIG. 330(e2)-(i2))" (when the expectation level is relatively high as a post-reception performance).

Note that during the first D reception period, the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound are output as the reception permissible sound, but it is not necessary to output these two permissible sounds, and only one reception permissible sound may be output.

In addition, when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made in the 1D acceptance period, the third performance device audibly outputs not only the 1D post-acceptance performance sound that indicates the degree of expectation, but also a "acceptance sound" that does not indicate the degree of expectation. That is, the "acceptance sound" is audibly output in the same manner in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 329(d) to "I1 (FIG. 330(e1) to (i1))" (when the degree of expectation is relatively low as a post-acceptance performance) and the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 329(d) to "I2 (FIG. 330(e2) to (i2))" (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as a post-acceptance performance). And, such a "acceptance sound" is audibly output (regardless of the degree of expectation) even when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made in a reception period other than the 1D acceptance period. With this configuration, no matter how innovative the post-reception performance, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, the user can easily recognize that the reception (valid reception determination) has been properly made, which encourages the user to concentrate on the content of the post-reception performance.

In contrast to this, the example shown in Figure 323, and examples in which the presentation progresses from Figure 329(d) to "i1 (Figure 330(e3)-(i3))" and from Figure 329(d) to "i2 (Figure 330(e4)-(i4))" are examples that assume a case in which no action (operation) is performed by the player within the 1D reception period and no reception (valid reception determination) is made.

In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 323, after the first D reception period occurs, the timing tW3 arrives without the player's action (operation) being accepted (valid reception judgement). However, in this example, even if the player does not make an action (operation) and is not accepted (valid reception judgement) during the first D reception period, the same post-reception performance (here, the first D post-reception performance) as when a valid reception judgement is made during the first D reception period is generated based on the arrival of the timing tW3.

For example, if the reception validity determination had been made within the 1D reception period, the performance (low expectation) would have progressed from FIG. 329(d) to "I1 (FIG. 330(e1)-(i1))". However, in reality, the reception validity determination is not made within the 1D reception period, and the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the arrival of the timing tW3. In other words, in this case, the display area of the gauge image as the "remaining time display" in the integrated model image display IG is "0", which is different from the case of "I1 (FIG. 330(e1)-(i1))". However, other than that, as shown in FIG. 330(e3)-(i3), the performance will progress in basically the same manner as the case of "I1 (FIG. 330(e1)-(i1))".

In addition, the case where the performance progresses from FIG. 329(d) to "i2 (FIG. 330(e4)-(i4))" corresponds to a case where if a valid reception determination had been made within the 1D reception period, the performance (high expectations) would have progressed from FIG. 329(d) to "I2 (FIG. 330(e2)-(i2))". However, in reality, a valid reception determination is not made within the 1D reception period, and the performance after the 1D reception is executed based on the arrival of the timing tW3. That is, in this case, the display area of the gauge image as the "remaining time display" in the integrated model image display IG is "0", which is different from the case of "I2 (FIG. 330(e2)-(i2))". However, other than that, as shown in FIG. 330(e4)-(i4), the performance progresses in basically the same manner as the case of "I2 (FIG. 330(e2)-(i2))".

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the execution time of the 1D post-reception performance (post-reception performance display, post-reception specific performance display, post-reception performance sound, etc.) is set to be different between the case where the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the reception validity judgment being made within the 1D reception period and the case where the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the reception validity judgment not being made within the 1D reception period and the arrival of timing tW3. In this example, when the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the reception validity judgment not being made within the 1D reception period and the arrival of timing tW3, the execution time of the 1D post-reception performance is set to be shorter than the case where the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the reception validity judgment being made within the 1D reception period, thereby encouraging the player to play so that the reception validity judgment is made within the 1D reception period. However, if the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the arrival of timing tW3 without a valid reception determination being made within the 1D reception period, the execution time of the 1D post-reception performance may be made longer than if the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on a valid reception determination being made within the 1D reception period.

On the other hand, Figure 324 assumes that an action (e.g., a pressing operation) is performed by the player on the operating means (e.g., the operating button 410) before the 1st D acceptance period occurs, and the action (operation) is detected by an action detection means (such as a sensor), and the detection information is stored and held in a detection information storage means (such as the peripheral control RAM 1511c or a corresponding processing step in a program) until the 1st D acceptance period occurs, and is used for the above-mentioned acceptance validity determination during the 1st D acceptance period (when a stock acceptance presentation is executed during the 1st D acceptance period).

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 324(a), when the timing tW1 arrives before the occurrence of the 1D reception period, a premonition effect display (here, the 1D premonition effect display ZEC) that suggests to the player that an action opportunity will be given can be executed. In this regard, during the period in which the 1D premonition effect display ZEC is executed,
a first period (stock period) during which, when a player performs an action, the action is detected by the action detection means and detection information by the action detection means is used for “validity of acceptance determination” within the first D acceptance period;
- A second period (non-stock period) is included in which, even if an action is performed by a player and the action is detected by the action detection means, the detection information by the action detection means is not used for ``valid acceptance determination'' within the first D acceptance period.

In addition, as shown in Fig. 324 and Fig. 328(b) and (c), the "1D premonition effect display ZEC" in this example is executed by sequentially displaying the "1D premonition effect display ZEC-1 (see Fig. 328(b))" corresponding to the above-mentioned "first period (stock period)" and the "1D premonition effect display ZEC-2 (see Fig. 328(c))" corresponding to the above-mentioned "second period (non-stock period)". That is, in this case, when a player's action is detected during the period during which the "1D premonition effect display ZEC" is executed, this will be used for the above-mentioned validity of acceptance judgment during the 1D acceptance period, but when a player's action is detected during the period during which the "1D premonition effect display ZEC" is executed, this will not be used for the above-mentioned validity of acceptance judgment during the 1D acceptance period.

In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 324 assumes a case in which an action is performed by the player during the "first period (stock period)" of the period during which the "1st D premonition effect display ZEC" is executed, and this is detected by the action detection means.

However, the "valid acceptance judgment that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is permitted only during the first D acceptance period. Therefore, even if the action by the player is performed during the "first period (stock period)" and detected by the action detection means, the "valid acceptance judgment" is not made at that time (the time when the first D acceptance period has not yet occurred). In other words, the detection information (detection information of the action by the player) obtained during the "first period (stock period)" is also stored and held at the timing tW2 when the first D acceptance period occurs. Then, at the timing tW2 (more precisely, the judgment timing tW2A that arrives immediately (several ms after) the occurrence of the timing tW2), it is judged based on the stored detection information whether or not the situation is such that a "valid acceptance judgment" should be made, and as a result of this judgment, a "valid acceptance judgment" is made (based on the stored detection information (detection information obtained during the "first period (stock period)") (stock acceptance performance). Furthermore, based on the fact that the reception is valid, the 1D reception period that has just occurred is terminated, and the post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance) corresponding to the 1D reception period is started to be executed.

Therefore, even if the player performs an action during the "first period (stock period)" and the action is detected by the action detection means, the 1D premonition effect display ZEC is not terminated or the corresponding premonition effect sound is not interrupted at the time of the detection. Furthermore, even if the player performs an action during the "first period (stock period)" and the action is detected by the action detection means, the detection does not cause any reaction in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), and the reception permission sound is not stopped from being output after the detection. In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, until the timing tW2 at which the 1D reception period occurs arrives, the performance progresses in the same manner whether the player performs an action during the "first period (stock period)" and the action is detected by the action detection means or the action is not detected by the action detection means.

In addition, even if a "valid reception determination" is made (a stock reception presentation is executed) during the 1D reception period based on detection information obtained before the 1D reception period occurs, as shown in Figures 324 and 331, the presentation will basically proceed in the same manner as if a valid reception determination was made based on detection information obtained during the 1D reception period.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 324 (when the stock reception performance is executed during the 1D reception period), there are cases where the performance progresses from FIG. 328(c) to "J1 (FIG. 331(e5)-(i5))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively low expectation), and cases where the performance progresses from FIG. 328(c) to "J2 (FIG. 331(e6)-(i6)" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively high expectation), and in the first performance device, the second performance device, and the third performance device will basically execute the performance as described with reference to FIG. 322, FIG. 330(e1)-(i1), or FIG. 330(e2)-(i2), etc.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 324 (when the stock reception presentation is executed during the 1D reception period), similar to the example shown in FIG. 322, at timing tW2 (more precisely, timing tW2A), which is the time when the player's action is accepted (the time when the 1D post-reception presentation is started in response to the acceptance), the "integrated model image display IG" is in a displayed state, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 324 (when the stock reception effect is executed during the 1D reception period), as also shown in FIG. 331 (e5) and (e6), the "1D premonition effect display ZEC" is not hidden but is in a displayed state at timing tW2 (more precisely, timing tW2A), which is the time when the player's action is accepted (the time when the 1D post-reception effect is started in response to the acceptance). In other words, in this case, it is possible to suggest that the player's action has been accepted (a valid acceptance determination has been made) based on the detection information obtained during the period when the "1D premonition effect display ZEC" is being executed, prior to the occurrence of the 1D reception period.

Also, in the examples shown in FIG. 324(b) and FIG. 331(f5) or (f6), when a predetermined time has passed from timing tW2 (more precisely, timing tW2A) when the first D acceptance period ends by accepting the player's action (when timing tW2B arrives), a display related to the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to see the integrated model image display IG (model image display) begins. As in the cases shown in FIG. 322 and FIG. 330, different disappearance-related display modes (first disappearance-related display SKD1, second disappearance-related display SKD2) appear depending on whether a low expectation mode (FIG. 331(e5)-(i5)) appears as the first D acceptance post-effect or a high expectation mode (FIG. 331(e6)-(i6)) appears.

However, in the example shown in Figure 324 (when the stock reception effect is executed during the 1st D reception period), as shown in Figures 331 (f5) and (f6), the disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKD1 or second disappearance-related display SKD2) will be displayed in a manner that makes it difficult to see not only the integrated model image display IG (model image display), but also the "1st D premonition effect display ZEC."

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 324 (an example in which a stock reception effect is executed), the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed while the "1st D premonition effect display ZEC" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "1st D premonition effect display ZEC" is displayed. With this configuration, even if the "1st D premonition effect display ZEC" continues to be displayed after reception has been made, the "1st D premonition effect display ZEC" is made difficult to see, thereby suggesting that the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) has already been executed.

Also, in the example shown in Figure 324 (an example in which a stock reception effect is executed), when timing tW2C arrives during the period in which the disappearance-related display appears, as shown in Figure 331 (g5) or (g6), a "1st D post-reception performance display UGD1 (cut-in performance)" is executed as a post-reception performance in the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in response to the player's action being accepted within the 1st D reception period. The "1st D post-reception performance display UGD1 (cut-in performance)" is executed in different ways (1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-1, 1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-2) in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 328(c) to "J1 (FIG. 331(e5)-(i5))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively low expectation) and in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 328(c) to "J2 (FIG. 331(e6)-(i6))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively high expectation), just like in the cases shown in FIG. 322 and FIG. 330.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 324 (where the stock reception effect is executed during the 1D reception period), when timing tW2C arrives, the "1D premonition effect display ZEC" is hidden.

Also, in the example shown in Figure 324 (an example in which a stock reception performance was executed during the 1D reception period), after the display of the "1D post-reception performance display UGD1 (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2)" has begun in this manner, while the "1D post-reception performance display UGD1 (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2)" is displayed, as shown in Figure 324 (b) and Figure 331 (h5) or (h6), first, of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related displays", the "integrated model image display IG" is made non-displayable. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this manner, the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKD1 or second disappearance-related display SKD2)" is hidden as shown in Figure 324 (b) and Figure 331 (i5) or (i6), and this allows the "1st D post-reception performance display UGD1 (1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1st D post-reception performance display UGD1-2)" to be displayed with good visibility.

In the examples shown in Figures 324 and 331 (examples in which a stock reception effect is executed), the 1D post-reception effect (1D post-reception specific effect) using the second effect device and the 1D post-reception effect (1D post-reception sound) using the third effect device are started prior to the 1D post-reception effect (1D post-reception display) using the first effect device based on the player's action being accepted (valid reception determination being made), and the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are terminated midway (midway through the audible output state) based on the player's action being accepted (valid reception determination being made) while the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are being audibly output.

However, as mentioned above, it is also possible to start outputting one (or both) of the first long allowable sound and/or the first short allowable sound at timing tW2 when the first D reception period occurs or thereafter. When such a configuration is adopted, in the examples shown in Figures 324 and 331 (examples in which a stock reception performance is executed), unlike the examples shown in Figures 322 and 330 (examples in which the sound is received within the reception period), it is also possible to prevent the first long allowable sound and/or the first short allowable sound from starting to be output.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the execution time of the 1D post-reception performance (post-reception performance display, post-reception specific performance display, post-reception performance sound, etc.) executed based on the reception validity determination being made during the 1D reception period is different between the example shown in FIG. 324 or FIG. 331 (example where the stock reception performance is executed during the 1D reception period) and the example shown in FIG. 322 or FIG. 330 (example where the reception is based on the detection information obtained during the 1D reception period). In this example, when the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the detection information obtained before the 1D reception period occurs (see FIG. 324 or FIG. 331), the execution time of the 1D post-reception performance is shorter than when the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the detection information obtained during the 1D reception period (see FIG. 322 or FIG. 330), and this encourages the player to play so that the player's operation is detected during the 1D reception period. However, when the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on detection information obtained before the 1D reception period occurs (see FIG. 324 or FIG. 331), the execution time of the 1D post-reception performance may be longer than when the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on detection information obtained within the 1D reception period (see FIG. 322 or FIG. 330).

In addition, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 324 or FIG. 331 (the case where the stock reception performance was executed during the 1D reception period), the execution time of the 1D post-reception performance (post-reception performance display, post-reception specific performance display, post-reception performance sound, etc.) is set to be different from the example shown in FIG. 323 (the case where the stock reception performance was not executed during the reception period)

In the examples shown in Figures 324 and 331 (examples in which the stock reception effect was executed during the 1D reception period), the timing at which the "1D premonition effect display ZEC" is hidden is the same as the timing tW2C at which the 1D post-reception effect display UGD1 begins to be executed, but it does not necessarily have to be the same timing. For example, the "1D premonition effect display ZEC" may be hidden at the same timing (later than timing tW2C) as the "integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image and gauge image))."

In addition, in the examples shown in Figures 324 and 331 (examples in which a stock reception effect was executed during the 1D reception period), if a "valid reception determination" is made based on detection information obtained before the occurrence of the 1D reception period, the 1D premonition effect display SKC-2 (second period) is displayed as the "1D premonition effect display ZEC" at timing tW2 (more precisely, timing tW2A) when the "valid reception determination" is made, but instead, the 1D premonition effect display SKC-1 that was present when the detection information was obtained may be displayed. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest at what timing the "valid reception determination" was made based on the detection information obtained.

In the above example, the period during which the first D premonition effect display ZEC is executed is as follows:
a first period (stock period) during which, when a player performs an action, the action is detected by the action detection means and detection information by the action detection means is used for “validity of acceptance determination” within the first D acceptance period;
When a player performs an action, even if the action is detected by the action detection means, a second period (non-stock period) is generated in which the detection information by the action detection means is not used for ``valid acceptance determination'' within the first D acceptance period.However, instead of this, the second period (non-stock period) may be generated first and then the first period (stock period).

In the above example, the content of the 1D premonition effect display ZEC is different between the first period (stock period) and the second period (non-stock period), but the content of the effect may be the same (continued over the two periods). Also, the second period (non-stock period) does not necessarily have to be included in the period during which the 1D premonition effect display ZEC is executed.

As mentioned above, in the first D reception period in this example, the integrated Mo-image display IG (Mo-image display, frame image, gauge image) may be displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 232(a) instead of the manner shown in Fig. 232(d). Even if it has been pre-determined (pre-determined based on the result of the jackpot determination) that the integrated Mo-image display IG (Mo-image display, frame image, gauge image) will be displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 232(a), if a "valid reception determination" is made within the first D reception period based on detection information obtained before the first D reception period occurs, the only difference from the situation shown in Fig. 331 above is the appearance of the "integrated Mo-image display IG (Mo-image display, frame image, gauge image)," and otherwise the presentation will proceed in the same manner. In other words, the situation shown in FIG. 331 above corresponds to a case where it has been pre-determined (pre-determined based on the result of the jackpot determination) that the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) will be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 232(d).

With this configuration, even if the above-mentioned stock reception performance is executed based on detection information obtained before the occurrence of the 1D reception period, it is possible to preferably indicate which aspect was intended to appear as the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image).

Figures 325 to 327 are time charts showing examples of the presentation content when condition 2D is satisfied as a result of a judgment (jackpot judgment or presentation judgment) and a second D reception period (second D reception presentation) occurs. Figures 332 to 335 are diagrams showing presentation examples in a variation pattern in which a second D reception period (second D reception presentation) occurs.

Now, if the starting condition is met (reserved consumption) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state with no chance of winning or time reduction), and the "second D fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (preview performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the second D fluctuation pattern. Then, the decorative pattern SZ fluctuation performance (performance depiction according to the second D fluctuation pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the second D fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started ("the situation shown in FIG. 332(a)"), and during the execution period of the fluctuation performance, a performance (preview performance) according to the result of the preview performance determination is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "second D fluctuation pattern" itself.

In addition, in the performance related to the "second D variation pattern", regardless of which result is obtained as the performance judgment (pre-notice judgment), as shown in FIG. 325(a), when the timing tX2 (for example, timing in a non-reach state) when the second D time has elapsed since the start of the decorative pattern SZ variation performance arrives (when condition 2D is satisfied), the above-mentioned second D acceptance period (valid period) in which "acceptance regarding the second D reception post-performance" is permitted may be generated ("the situation shown in FIG. 333(d)"); or, only when a predetermined result is obtained as the performance judgment (pre-notice judgment), when the timing tX2 (for example, timing in a non-reach state) arrives (when condition 2D is satisfied), the above-mentioned second D acceptance period (valid period) in which "acceptance regarding the second D reception post-performance" is permitted may be generated. In any case, when the action by the player is accepted during the second D acceptance period (when the acceptance is judged to be valid), the second D reception post-performance will be performed based on the acceptance.

In this regard, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) according to this embodiment, when such a second D reception period occurs, in relation to this, a premonition performance display suggesting that the reception period (valid period) will occur soon, an action target display (mochi image display) suggesting the reception target (operation receiving part, etc.), a remaining time display suggesting the remaining time of the reception period, a disappearance related display (disappearance EF display) making it difficult to see the action target display (mochi image display) and the remaining time display, and a post-reception performance display suggesting the expectation degree (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) according to the acceptance are each performed. The expectation degree (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) may include "0%" or "100%". As described above, the action target display (mochi image display) according to this example is displayed as an "integrated mochi image display IG" integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display, but is not necessarily limited to this and may be displayed separately. This is also the case for other reception periods.

More specifically, when the timing tX1 arrives before the occurrence of the second D reception period, as shown in FIG. 325(b) and FIG. 332(b) and (c), the "second D premonition effect display ZED" is started to be executed as the premonition effect display. In this example, the "second D premonition effect display ZED" is made non-displayable at the timing tX2 when the second D reception period occurs, but may be displayed across the timing tX2. Note that in this example, as shown in FIG. 325(d), when the "second D premonition effect display ZED" is executed, unlike when the above-mentioned "first D premonition effect display ZED" is executed, the effect sound (premonition effect sound) corresponding to the "second D premonition effect display ZED" is not output.

As will be described later, in the second D acceptance period of this embodiment, like the first D acceptance period described above, even if the player performs an action (e.g., a pressing operation) on the operation means (e.g., the operation button 410) before the second D acceptance period occurs, the action (operation) is detected by the action detection means (such as a sensor), and the detection information is stored and retained in the detection information storage means (such as the peripheral control RAM 1511c or a corresponding processing step in the program) even at the time the second D acceptance period occurs, and may be used for the above-mentioned acceptance validity determination during the second D acceptance period (when the stock acceptance performance is executed). However, if a "valid reception determination" is made within the second D reception period based on detection information obtained before the second D reception period occurs, unlike the above-mentioned "if a "valid reception determination" is made within the first D reception period based on detection information obtained before the first D reception period occurs," the post-reception performance (here, the second D post-reception performance) is started without the integrated model image display IG (model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) being displayed (made visible) even once. Note that the target (type of operation means) to which an action opportunity is given during the first D reception period and the target (type of operation means) to which an action opportunity is given during the second D reception period may be the same or different.

In this regard, in the examples shown in Figures 325 and 326, and in the example in which the presentation progresses from Figure 332(c) to "K (Figure 333(d)", it is assumed that the second D reception period occurs without such a stock reception presentation being performed, that is, that is, that the detection information obtained before the second D reception period is not used for the above-mentioned reception validity determination within the second D reception period.

More specifically, in the case where the second D reception period occurs at timing tX2 without a stock reception performance, as shown in FIG. 325(b) and FIG. 333(d), in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, a "mochi image display" or a "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)" is displayed as an integrated mochi image display IG. The integrated mochi image display IG (mochi image display, frame image, gauge image) may appear at timing tX2 when the corresponding reception period (here, the second D reception period) occurs, or may appear before timing tX2 and be displayed to span the timing tX2. The integrated mochi image display IG (mochi image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is hidden when reception (valid reception determination) is made within the second D reception period, or when the second D reception period ends without the reception (valid reception determination). In this example, the second D acceptance period ends at timing tX3 if no action (operation) by the player is accepted (valid acceptance determination) (see FIG. 325(a)).

Furthermore, in the second D reception period in this example, the integrated Mosaic image display IG (Mosaic image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed in one of a number of modes (e.g., Fig. 232(a) and (c)). Figs. 333 and 334 correspond to the case where the integrated Mosaic image display IG (Mosaic image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed in the "mode shown in Fig. 232(c)". When the integrated Mosaic image display IG (Mosaic image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the "mode shown in Fig. 232(a)", the integrated Mosaic image display IG (Mosaic image display, frame image, gauge image) shown in Figs. 333 and 334 is simply changed from the "mode shown in Fig. 232(c)" to the "mode shown in Fig. 232(a)", and therefore will not be illustrated. In addition, even during the second D reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) may be displayed in any of a number of forms, including those shown in Figures 232 (b) and (d).

Figure 325 assumes that a player's action is detected during this second D acceptance period, and a "valid acceptance determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made at timing tX2a based on the detection information. In other words, in this case, as shown in Figure 325(a), the second D acceptance period ends based on the player's action being accepted (valid acceptance determination is made) at timing tX2a, and the post-acceptance performance (second D post-acceptance performance) corresponding to the second D acceptance period begins to be executed.

Here, an example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 333(d) to "K1 (FIG. 334(e1) to FIG. 334(i1))" corresponds to a case in which a first mode with a relatively low expectation is executed as the post-reception presentation (post-reception presentation) corresponding to the second D reception period, and an example in which the presentation progresses from FIG. 333(d) to "K2 (FIG. 334(e2) to FIG. 334(i2))" corresponds to a case in which a second mode with a relatively high expectation is executed as the post-reception presentation (post-reception presentation) corresponding to the second D reception period. The expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) may include "0%" or "100%".

In this regard, even during the 2nd D reception period, as shown in FIG. 325, at timing tX2a when the player's action is accepted (when the 2nd D post-reception performance starts in response to the acceptance), the "integrated model image display IG" is not made invisible, nor is it made difficult to see.

In other words, the 2D post-reception performance according to this embodiment is realized as a performance that combines at least the "2D post-reception performance display" using the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), the "2D post-reception specific performance" using the second performance device (e.g., sub-liquid crystal display, movable body, performance lamp, etc.), and the 2D post-reception performance sound using the third performance device (speaker) (it does not necessarily have to be realized as a composite performance using three performance devices). However, among these performance devices, the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) on which the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed is delayed in the time at which the "2nd post-reception performance display" as the 2D post-reception performance starts compared to the other performance devices, and this purposely maintains the visibility of the "integrated model image display IG" even after the reception is made.

As shown in FIG. 334 (e1) or (e2), this configuration allows the player to easily recognize in which of the multiple forms (FIG. 232 (a) to (d)) the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the ended acceptance period, even after acceptance has been made, which is expected to effectively prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Here, in order to make it easier to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period after the reception period has ended, it is desirable to set the "time during which the integrated model image display IG is displayed in an easily visible form" after reception has been made to be longer. However, if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed in the same form as it was during the reception period even though reception has been made and the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has already been executed, it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the reception has been made, and as a result, there is a concern that "the player will be late in noticing the post-reception performance that is being executed."

Therefore, in the examples shown in Figure 325 (b) and Figure 334 (f1) or (f2), when a predetermined time has passed from timing tX2a when the second D acceptance period ends due to the acceptance of the player's action (when timing tX2b arrives), a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes the model image display difficult to see is started to be displayed.

In other words, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) in this example, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display)" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display)" is displayed.

According to this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the reception, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, which suggests that the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) is already being performed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the integrated model image display IG to the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) (after timing tX2b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception performance (second performance device, third performance device) has already been performed, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

However, unlike the first D reception period described above, in the second D reception period, the same disappearance-related display (here, the second disappearance-related display SKD2) appears when the corresponding post-reception performance (second D post-reception performance) is a low expectation mode (Fig. 334 (e1)-(i1)) and when a high expectation mode (Fig. 334 (e2)-(i2)) appears. In other words, in this case, while the disappearance-related display appears on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), it becomes difficult to recognize in what manner the "second D post-reception performance display" will be executed.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in Figure 325 (b) and Figure 334 (g1) or (g2), when timing tX2c arrives during the period during which a display related to the disappearance-related display (in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears, the first performance device (performance display device 1600) begins to execute a "2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2 (conversation preview performance)" as a post-reception performance in response to the player's action being accepted within the 2nd D acceptance period. However, in this example where the performance progresses from FIG. 333(d) to "K1 (FIG. 334(e1)-(i1))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively low expectation), as shown in FIG. 334(g1), the first mode (here, the second-D post-reception performance display UGD2-1, which is a "silent" conversation announcement) is displayed as the second-D post-reception performance display UGD2 corresponding to the second-D reception period, and in this example where the performance progresses from FIG. 333(d) to "K2 (FIG. 334(e2)-(i2))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively high expectation), as shown in FIG. 334(f2), the second mode (here, the second-D post-reception performance display UGD2-2, which is a conversation announcement that mentions "chance") is displayed as the second-D post-reception performance display UGD2 corresponding to the second-D reception period.

In other words, in this case, the second D post-reception performance display UGD2 will start to be executed in one of multiple modes (second D post-reception performance display UGD2-1, second D post-reception performance display UGD2-2) with different degrees of expectation, but no matter which of these modes starts to be executed, one mode (second disappearance-related display SKD2) is displayed (priority display) as a disappearance-related display so as to overlap with the second D post-reception performance display UGD2, making it difficult to see, so that it becomes difficult to recognize in what mode the "second D post-reception performance display" is being executed.

In this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKD2)" are displayed, the "second D post-reception performance display UGD2 ("second D post-reception performance display UGD2-1" or "second D post-reception performance display UGD2-2") will begin to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated model image display IG is displayed for a relatively long time after acceptance within the second D acceptance period, the post-acceptance performance (second D post-acceptance performance display UGD2) on the first performance device (performance display device 1600) can be started without a significant delay compared to other performance devices, and a decline in interest in the game can be suppressed. Also, since the second D post-acceptance performance display UGD1 starts while the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the "integrated model image display IG" to the "second D post-acceptance performance display UGD2 (second D post-acceptance performance display UGD2-1 or second D post-acceptance performance display UGD2-2)" while suggesting that the second D acceptance period has already ended (after timing tX2c).

On the other hand, when the "2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2 (2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-2)" is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the area in which the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed (it does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "integrated model image display IG", and the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed with priority over the "2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2 (2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-2)". This makes it easier to recognize in which form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period, even when the "2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2 (2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-2)" starts to be executed.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the display of the "2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2 (2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-2)" is started in this manner, as shown in Figure 325 (b) and Figure 334 (h1) or (h2), while the "2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2 (2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-2)" is displayed, first, of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related displays", the "integrated model image display IG" is made invisible. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this manner, the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKD2)" is hidden as shown in Figure 325 (b) and Figure 334 (i1) or (i2), and this allows for good visibility and causes the display related to the "second D post-reception performance display UGD2 (second D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or second D post-reception performance display UGD2-2)" to be displayed.

In this regard, the "2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2" is displayed in one of multiple modes (here, 2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-2) with different degrees of expectation based on the acceptance of the player's action. Therefore, the "2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance related display" are hidden.

In this performance example, the "2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2" is started to be displayed at a later time (timing tX2c) than the time (timing tX2b) when the "disappearance-related display (2nd disappearance-related display SKD2)" is started to be displayed, but it may be started to be displayed at the same time (timing tX2b) as the time (timing tX2b) when the "disappearance-related display (2nd disappearance-related display SKD2)" is started to be displayed.

In this example, when an action by the player is accepted within the second D acceptance period, as shown in Figures 315(b) and (c), based on the acceptance, the second D post-acceptance performance (second D post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is started prior to the second D post-acceptance performance (second D post-acceptance performance display) using the first performance device.

With this configuration, even if the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) displays a disappearance-related display and then displays a second D post-reception performance, the second D post-reception performance itself can be started without delay from the same timing tX2a.

Such a second presentation device may be provided as a sub-LCD when the presentation display device 1600 (first presentation device) is used as the main LCD, or may be provided as a presentation movable body capable of presentation operation, or a presentation lamp capable of emitting light for presentation. In any case, it will be provided as something that can perform presentations (display presentation, movable presentation, light-emitting presentation, etc.) in multiple ways with different degrees of expectation. The degree of expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub-LCD 1610 is used as the second performance device. In an example in which the performance progresses from FIG. 333(d) to "K1 (FIG. 334(e1)-(i1))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively low expectation), as shown in FIG. 334(d1), the mode in which "Sueyoshi" is displayed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is started to be executed prior to the second-D post-reception performance (second-D post-reception performance display UGD2-1) using the first performance device as the second-D post-reception specific performance UTD2 (second-D post-reception specific performance UTD2-1, which is a low expectation mode of the second-D post-reception specific performance UTD2) corresponding to the second-D reception period. In contrast, in an example in which the performance progresses from Figure 333 (d) to "K2 (Figure 334 (e2) to (i2))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively high expectation), as shown in Figure 334 (e2), the mode in which "吉" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display 1610 (second performance device) is started to be executed prior to the second-D post-reception performance (second-D post-reception performance display UGD2-2) using the first performance device as the second-D post-reception specific performance UTD2 (second-D post-reception specific performance UTD2-2, which is a high expectation mode of the second-D post-reception specific performance UTD2) corresponding to the second-D reception period.

In the example of the performance shown in FIG. 333(d), in addition to the "integrated model image display IG" on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device), a performance within the reception period (display of a fortune) is executed on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) to indicate that the 2D reception period has occurred. The performance within the reception period on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is displayed in the same manner when the "integrated model image display IG" on the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) is displayed in a manner with low expectations (not shown) and when it is displayed in a manner with high expectations (see FIG. 333(d)).

In other words, in this case, during the second D reception period in which the player is given an opportunity to act (opportunity to operate), the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) will show different behaviors depending on the degree of expectation, and the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) will show the same behavior regardless of the degree of expectation. However, after this, when a "valid reception determination is made that the player's action (operation) is a valid operation" is made during the second D reception period, while the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) continues to display the "integrated model image display IG" (while the expectation of the performance after reception has not yet been indicated), the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) will show different behaviors depending on the degree of expectation. With this configuration, it is possible to obtain performance information more quickly by focusing on the appropriate performance device depending on the time than by focusing on the performance of only one performance device, which can increase the interest in the game.

In this example, the reception period performance (display of the fortune slip) on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) is executed continuously from before the second D reception period occurs, and also functions as a precursor performance that indicates the occurrence of the second D reception period. However, the reception period performance on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) and the precursor performance on the sub-LCD 1610 (second performance device) may each be executed as different performances.

In addition, in this example, the degree of expectation is suggested depending on whether the "2nd D reception specific performance UTD2-1" or the "2nd D reception specific performance UTD2-2" appears as the 2nd D reception specific performance UTD2, but it is not necessary to prepare multiple forms for the 2nd D reception specific performance UTD2. For example, it is possible to provide only the "2nd D reception specific performance UTD2-2" as the 2nd D reception specific performance UTD2, and suggest the degree of expectation (the proportion of jackpots that are obtained) depending on whether the 2nd D reception specific performance UTD2 appears. In other words, in this case, when the "2nd D reception specific performance UTD2-2" appears, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is higher than when the "2nd D reception specific performance UTD2-2" does not appear.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further includes a third performance device (speaker), and when the second D reception period occurs, the reception permissible sound starts to be output at a timing slightly before the timing tX2 shown in FIG. 325(d). In other words, the reception permissible sound corresponding to the second D reception period is audibly output across the timing tX2 at which the second D reception period occurs, and the player's actions (operations) can be accepted while the reception permissible sound is being audibly output.

Here, during the second D reception period, the first long permissible sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively long time is not output as the reception permissible sound, and the first short permissible sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively short time is output. However, the reception permissible sound corresponding to the second D reception period may be output as a sound different from either the first long permissible sound or the first short permissible sound.

In the second D acceptance period, if an action by the player is accepted while the corresponding acceptance permissible sound (here, the first short acceptance sound) is being audibly output, the acceptance permissible sound is not terminated midway (the audible output state is not terminated midway) based on the acceptance, thereby indicating that the second D acceptance period will occur (or is occurring) rather than the first D acceptance period. However, the acceptance permissible sound corresponding to the second D acceptance period may also be terminated midway based on the acceptance.

In this regard, it is desirable that the reception permissible sound (here, the first short permissible sound) corresponding to the second D reception period be executed (audibly output) in a manner with low expectations (not shown) as shown in FIG. 325(d) and executed (audibly output) in a manner with high expectations (as shown in FIG. 333(d)).

When an acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made during the 2D acceptance period, the audible output of the 2D post-acceptance performance sound is started based on this. The 2D post-acceptance performance sound, like the "2D post-acceptance performance display UGD2", will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" are hidden, as shown in FIG. 325(d). In addition, it is desirable that the 2D post-acceptance performance sound be output in a different output sound (mode) in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 333(d) to "K1 (FIG. 334(e1) to (i1))" (when the expectation level is relatively low as a post-acceptance performance) and the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 333(d) to "K2 (FIG. 334(e2) to (i2))" (when the expectation level is relatively high as a post-acceptance performance).

In addition, when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made during the 2D acceptance period, the third performance device audibly outputs not only the 2D post-acceptance performance sound that indicates the degree of expectation, but also a "acceptance sound" that does not indicate the degree of expectation. That is, the "acceptance sound" is audibly output in the same manner in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 333(d) to "K1 (FIG. 334(e1) to (i1))" (when the degree of expectation is relatively low as a post-acceptance performance) and the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 333(d) to "K2 (FIG. 334(e2) to (i2))" (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as a post-acceptance performance). And, such a "acceptance sound" is audibly output (regardless of the degree of expectation) even when acceptance (valid acceptance determination) is made during an acceptance period other than the 2D acceptance period. With this configuration, no matter how innovative the post-reception performance, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, the user can easily recognize that the reception (valid reception determination) has been properly made, which encourages the user to concentrate on the content of the post-reception performance.

In contrast to this, the example shown in Figure 326 and the example in which the presentation progresses from Figure 333(d) to "k (Figure 334(e3) to (h3))" are examples that assume a case in which no action (operation) is performed by the player within the 2D reception period and no reception (valid reception determination) is made.

In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 326, after the second D reception period occurs, the timing tX3 arrives without the player's action (operation) being accepted (valid reception judgement). In the second D reception period in this example, unlike the first D reception period described above, if the player does not make an action (operation) and is not accepted (valid reception judgement) during the second D reception period, the same post-reception performance (here, the second D post-reception performance) as when a valid reception judgement is made during the second D reception period will not occur.

However, in the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at the timing tX3 (the point at which the second D reception period ends and the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is no longer permitted), just like the performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at the timing tX2a (the point at which the player's actions (operations) are accepted within the second D reception period (or the point at which the performance begins to be executed after acceptance)), as shown in FIG. 334 (e3), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, nor is the integrated model image display IG made difficult to see.

With this configuration, even if the second D reception period ends before the player's action (operation) is received in time, it is possible to recognize how the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the second D reception period after the second D reception period ends, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

After this, even if no action (operation) by the player is accepted, as shown in FIG. 334 (f3), the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) will be initiated as a "mode in which the integrated Moji image display IG becomes difficult to see." In other words, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" will be displayed while the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is being displayed, so that at least a portion of the area in which the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed will overlap with the area in which the "integrated Moji image display IG (Moji image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

With this configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the second D reception period ends without any reception, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, thereby making it possible to indicate that the second D reception period has ended. Also, even in a situation where the second D reception period has already ended, it is possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in playing the game due to not being able to recognize in what form the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 in this example, if the player's action (operation) is not accepted within the second D acceptance period, the "third disappearance related display SKD3" is displayed as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF presentation).

It is preferable that the "third disappearance-related display SKD3" is not displayed in relation to the first D reception period. In other words, in this case, it is possible to suggest that the first D reception period has not occurred. It is also preferable that the "third disappearance-related display SKD3" is not displayed when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the second D reception period. In other words, in this case, it is possible to more appropriately suggest that the second D reception period has ended without any acceptance.

It is desirable that the "third disappearance related display SKD3" is always displayed in one manner, regardless of whether or not a highly anticipated manner would have appeared as the "post-second D reception performance" if a valid reception determination had been made within the second D reception period.

After this, as shown in FIG. 334 (g3), of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (in the figure, the third disappearance-related display SKD3)," the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden first. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" has been hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 334 (h5), the "disappearance-related display (in the figure, the third disappearance-related display SKD3))" is hidden.

As mentioned above, during the second D reception period in this example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 232(a) rather than in the manner shown in FIG. 232(c). However, when such a situation arises, the only difference is the appearance of the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image)" and otherwise the performance will proceed in the same manner, so we will not explain this further.

On the other hand, Figure 327 assumes that an action (e.g., a pressing operation) is performed by the player on the operating means (e.g., the operating button 410) before the second D acceptance period occurs, and the action (operation) is detected by the action detection means (such as a sensor), and the detection information is stored and held in the detection information storage means (such as the peripheral control RAM 1511c or a corresponding processing step in the program) until the second D acceptance period occurs and is used for the above-mentioned acceptance validity determination during the second D acceptance period (when a stock acceptance presentation is executed during the second D acceptance period).

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 327(a), when the timing tX1 arrives before the occurrence of the second D reception period, a premonition effect display (here, the second D premonition effect display ZED) that suggests to the player that an action opportunity will be given can be executed. In this regard, during the period in which the second D premonition effect display ZED is executed,
a first period (stock period) during which, when a player performs an action, the action is detected by the action detection means and detection information by the action detection means is used for “validity of acceptance determination” within the second D acceptance period;
- The second period (non-stock period) is included during which, even if an action is performed by a player and the action is detected by the action detection means, the detection information by the action detection means is not used for ``valid acceptance determination'' within the second D acceptance period.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 327 and FIG. 332(b) and (c), the "2nd D premonition effect display ZED" in this example is displayed in the same manner in both the "first period (stock period)" and the "second period (non-stock period)". Therefore, even if the manner of the "2nd D premonition effect display ZED" is confirmed, it is not possible to recognize whether the "first period (stock period)" or the "second period (non-stock period)" is occurring. However, the "2nd D premonition effect display ZED" may also be configured to appear in different manners depending on whether it is in the "first period (stock period)" or the "second period (non-stock period)".

In addition, in the "second D premonition effect display ZED (see FIG. 327)" according to this example, the proportion of the "first period (stock period)" to the period from when the premonition effect display is executed to when the reception period occurs is larger than in the case of the above-mentioned "first D premonition effect display ZEC (see FIG. 324)". For example, in the example shown in FIG. 324, the proportion of the "first period (stock period)" to the "period of timing tW1 to tW2" is only about 40%, but in the example shown in FIG. 327, the proportion of the "first period (stock period)" to the "period of timing tX1 to tX2" is about 70%. In other words, in this case, in the "second D premonition effect display ZED (see FIG. 327)", when a player's action is detected during the period from when the premonition effect display is started to when the reception period occurs, the expected value of this occurring during the "first period (stock period)" can be made higher than in the case of the "first D premonition effect display ZED (see FIG. 324)".

In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 327 assumes a case in which an action is performed by the player during the "first period (stock period)" of the period during which the "2D premonition effect display ZED" is executed, and this is detected by the action detection means.

However, the "valid acceptance judgment that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is permitted only during the second D acceptance period. Therefore, even if the action by the player is performed during the "first period (stock period)" and detected by the action detection means, the "valid acceptance judgment" is not made at that time (the time when the second D acceptance period has not yet occurred). In other words, the detection information (detection information of the action by the player) obtained during the "first period (stock period)" is also stored and held at the timing tX2 when the second D acceptance period occurs. Then, at the timing tX2 (more precisely, the judgment timing tX2A that arrives immediately (several ms after) the occurrence of the timing tX2), it is judged based on the stored detection information whether or not the situation is such that a "valid acceptance judgment" should be made, and as a result of this judgment, a "valid acceptance judgment" is made (based on the stored detection information (detection information obtained during the "first period (stock period)") (stock acceptance performance). Furthermore, based on the fact that the reception is valid, the second D reception period that has just occurred is terminated, and the post-reception performance (second D post-reception performance) corresponding to the second D reception period is started to be executed.

Therefore, even if the player performs an action during the "first period (stock period)" and this is detected by the action detection means, the second D premonition effect display ZED will not be terminated at the time of the detection. Furthermore, even if the player performs an action during the "first period (stock period)" and this is detected by the action detection means, no reaction will be generated in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) based on the detection, and the acceptance permission sound will not be stopped from being output after the detection. In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, until the timing tX2 at which the second D acceptance period occurs arrives, the performance will progress in the same manner whether the player performs an action during the "first period (stock period)" and this is detected by the action detection means or not detected by the action detection means.

In addition, even if a "valid reception determination" is made (a stock reception presentation is executed) during the second D reception period based on detection information obtained before the second D reception period occurs, as shown in Figures 327 and 335, the presentation will basically proceed in the same manner as if a valid reception determination was made based on detection information obtained during the second D reception period.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 327 (when the stock reception performance is executed during the second D reception period), there are cases where the performance progresses from FIG. 332(c) to "L1 (FIG. 335(e4)-(i4))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively low expectation), and cases where the performance progresses from FIG. 332(c) to "L2 (FIG. 335(e5)-(i5)" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively high expectation), and in the first performance device, the second performance device, and the third performance device, the performance is basically executed as described with reference to FIG. 325, FIG. 334(e1)-(i1), or FIG. 334(e2)-(i2), etc.

However, as mentioned above, if during the 2D reception period a "valid reception determination" is made based on detection information obtained before the 2D reception period occurs (if the stock reception performance is executed), the post-reception performance (here, the 2D post-reception performance) will begin to be executed without the integrated model image display IG (model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) being displayed (made visible) even once.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 327 (when the stock reception presentation is executed during the 2D reception period), unlike the example shown in FIG. 325, the "integrated model image display IG" is not displayed (visible) at timing tX2 (or more precisely, timing tX2A), which is the time when the player's action is accepted (the time when the 2D post-reception presentation is started in response to the acceptance).

Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 327 (when the stock reception effect is executed during the 2D reception period), as also shown in FIG. 335(e4) and (e5), the "2D premonition effect display ZED" is not hidden but is in a displayed state at timing tX2 (more precisely, timing tX2A), which is the time when the player's action is accepted (the time when the 2D post-reception effect is started in response to the acceptance). In other words, in this case, it is possible to suggest that the player's action has been accepted (a valid acceptance determination has been made) based on the detection information obtained during the period when the "2D premonition effect display ZED" is being executed, prior to the occurrence of the 2D reception period.

In this regard, even in the examples shown in FIG. 327(b) and FIG. 335(f4) or (f5), when a predetermined time has passed (when timing tX2B arrives) from timing tX2 (more precisely, timing tX2A) when the second D acceptance period ends by the acceptance of the player's action, the display related to the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF presentation) begins. As in the cases shown in FIG. 325 and FIG. 334, the same disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKD2) appears when a low expectation mode (FIG. 335(e4)-(i4)) appears as the second D post-acceptance presentation and when a high expectation mode (FIG. 335(e5)-(i5)) appears.

However, in the example shown in Figure 327 (when the stock reception effect is executed during the 2nd D reception period), as shown in Figures 335 (f4) and (f5), the disappearance-related display (2nd disappearance-related display SKD2) will be displayed in a way that makes it difficult to see the "2nd D premonition effect display ZED" rather than as an integrated model image display IG (model image display).

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 327 (an example in which a stock reception effect is executed during the 2D reception period), the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed while the "2D premonition effect display ZED" is displayed, and at least a portion of the area in which the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "2D premonition effect display ZED" is displayed. With this configuration, even if the "2D premonition effect display ZED" continues to be displayed after reception has been made, the "2D premonition effect display ZED" is made difficult to see, suggesting that the post-reception effect (second performance device, third performance device) has already been executed.

Also, in the example shown in Figure 327 (an example in which a stock reception effect is executed during the 2nd D reception period), when timing tX2C arrives during the period in which the disappearance-related display appears, as shown in Figure 335 (g4) or (g5), a "2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2 (conversation preview performance)" is executed as a post-reception performance on the first performance device (performance display device 1600) in response to the player's action being accepted during the 2nd D reception period. The "2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2 (conversation preview performance)" is executed in different ways (2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-1, 2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-2) in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 332(c) to "L1 (FIG. 335(e4)-(i4))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively low expectation) and in the example where the performance progresses from FIG. 332(c) to "L2 (FIG. 335(e5)-(i5))" (when the post-reception performance has a relatively high expectation), just like in the cases shown in FIG. 325 and FIG. 334.

Then, in the example shown in Figure 327 (an example in which a stock reception effect is executed during the 2nd D reception period), after the display of the "2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2 (2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-2)" has begun in this manner, as shown in Figure 327 (b) and Figure 335 (h4) or (h5), while the "2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2 (2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-2)" is displayed, first, of the "2nd D premonition performance display ZED" and the "disappearance-related display (2nd disappearance-related display SKD2)," the "2nd D premonition performance display ZED" is made invisible. Then, after the "2nd D premonition performance display ZED" is hidden in this manner, the "disappearance-related display (2nd disappearance-related display SKD2)" is hidden as shown in Figure 327 (b) or Figure 335 (i4) or (i5), and this allows for good visibility and causes the "2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2 (2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or 2nd D post-reception performance display UGD2-2)" to be displayed.

Incidentally, even in the examples shown in Figures 327 and 335 (examples in which a stock reception effect is executed during the 2D reception period), based on the player's action being accepted (a valid reception determination being made), the 2D post-reception effect (2D post-reception specific effect) using the 2nd performance device and the 2D post-reception effect (2D post-reception sound effect) using the 3rd performance device are started to be executed prior to the 2D post-reception effect (2D post-reception effect display) using the 1st performance device.

However, in the examples shown in Figures 327 and 335 (examples in which the stock reception effect is executed during the second D reception period), unlike the examples shown in Figures 324 and 331 described above (examples in which the stock reception effect is executed during the first D reception period), the first short permissible sound is not terminated midway (the audible output state is terminated midway) based on the acceptance of a player's action (valid reception determination) while the first short permissible sound is being audibly output.

As mentioned above, the first short allowable sound may be output at or after timing tX2 when the second D reception period occurs. Even when such a configuration is adopted, in the examples shown in Figures 327 and 335 (examples in which the stock reception performance is executed in the second D reception period), unlike the examples shown in Figures 324 and 331 (examples in which reception is performed within the reception period), it is desirable to ensure that the first short allowable sound is always output.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 327 or FIG. 335 (where the stock reception effect is executed during the second D reception period) and the case of the example shown in FIG. 325 or FIG. 334 (where the reception is based on the detection information obtained during the second D reception period), the execution time of the second D post-reception effect (post-reception effect display, post-reception specific effect display, post-reception effect sound, etc.) that is executed based on the reception validity determination being made during the second D reception period is set to be the same.

In the examples shown in Figures 327 and 335 (examples in which the stock reception effect was executed during the 2D reception period), the timing at which the "2D premonition effect display ZED" was hidden was later than the timing tX2C at which the 2D post-reception effect display UGD2 begins to be executed, but it may also be hidden at the same timing tX2C.

In the above example, the period during which the second D premonition effect display ZED is executed is as follows:
a first period (stock period) during which, when a player performs an action, the action is detected by the action detection means and detection information by the action detection means is used for “validity of acceptance determination” within the second D acceptance period;
When a player performs an action, even if the action is detected by the action detection means, a second period (non-stock period) is generated in which the detection information by the action detection means is not used for ``valid acceptance determination'' within the second D acceptance period.However, instead of this, the second period (non-stock period) may be generated first and then the first period (stock period) may be generated.

In addition, the second period (non-stock period) does not necessarily have to be included within the period during which the second D premonition effect display ZED is executed.

In addition, in the second D reception period in this performance example, the disappearance-related display SKD is the "second D premonition display ZED," which can also appear when reception is made in the first D reception period. However, the disappearance-related display may be executed in a manner that does not allow it to appear in relation to the first D reception period.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present application, which provides such a first D reception period and a second D reception period, achieves the excellent effects listed below.

First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, multiple reception periods (first D reception period and second D reception period) are prepared that have different presentation contents (post-reception presentations such as cut-in notice, group notice, conversation notice, etc., which are types of pre-notification presentations (expectation indication presentations)) that are carried out when reception is made, and it is possible to generate a reception period (valid period) of a different type according to the result of the judgment (presentation judgment).

In this regard, in the first D reception period and the second D reception period, when an action by a player is accepted, a post-acceptance performance display (first D post-acceptance performance display, second D post-acceptance performance display) can be displayed on the "performance display device 1600" based on the fact that the action has been accepted. Among these, in the first D reception period and the second D reception period, when an action by a player is accepted, not only is a post-acceptance performance display displayed based on the fact that the action has been accepted, but a "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is also made to appear. That is, in this case, not only is it possible to check which aspect of the model image display (or gauge image) has appeared even after the action has been accepted, but by reducing the visibility of the model image display (or gauge image) by the "aspect in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" until the model image display (or gauge image) is made invisible, it is expected that the player's focus will naturally shift from the model image display (or gauge image) to the "post-acceptance performance display". In addition, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is a display in which the same format can be used in common for multiple reception periods in which the performance content that progresses when the reception is made is different (which may be a reception period different from the 1st D reception period and the 2nd D reception period (such as the reception periods described above with reference to the drawings up to Figure 321)).

However, because the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are originally displayed during the reception period when reception has not yet been made, if the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) were to be displayed after reception has been made, it would be difficult to tell whether the post-reception performance display corresponding to the reception has already been displayed, and there is a concern that interest in the game would decrease. In this regard, when reception is made during either the first D reception period or the second D reception period, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are made invisible (invisible) while a "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is displayed, whereas the post-reception performance display is displayed while a "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is displayed. In other words, in this case, after the player's action is accepted, a transition in display presentation from the pre-acceptance display (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) to the post-acceptance display (post-acceptance presentation display) is realized while "a display in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears.

The "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" and the "post-acceptance performance display" are common in that they are both displayed based on acceptance. However, the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is basically a display that appears to make the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) difficult to see when the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, as shown in FIG. 330(f) and FIG. 334(f), etc. In contrast, the "post-acceptance performance display" is a display that appears to make the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) difficult to see even if it is displayed when the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, as shown in FIG. 330(g) and FIG. 334(g), etc.

As for the "mode in which the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)", methods of "appearing so as to make the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) difficult to see" include a method of realizing this by displaying an image display other than the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) as a priority display (displaying in a front layer) in at least a part of the area in which the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, as well as a method of displaying an image (video) that is made so that a part of the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) appears missing (unrecognizable) by displaying an image display other than the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). Also, instead of displaying an image other than the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), it is also possible to adopt a method of changing the numerical values (transparency, etc.) related to the display characteristics of the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself. In response to this, a method for making the "post-reception performance display" "appear so as not to make the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) difficult to see" can be adopted, such as a method of displaying the "post-reception performance display" in at least a part of the area in which the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, but displaying the "post-reception performance display" (displaying in a rear layer) in such a way that the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is given priority display, or a method of displaying the "post-reception performance display" only in an area excluding the area in which the Moji image display is displayed, at least while the Moji image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed.

In addition, as a "disappearance-related display that makes the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) difficult to see," it is possible to adopt both a method of displaying an image display other than the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in at least a part of the area in which the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, and a method of changing a numerical value (transparency, etc.) related to the display characteristics of the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself.

The "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears before the "post-acceptance performance display" is displayed, in a situation in which the "post-acceptance performance display" has not yet been displayed. In other words, in this case, in a situation in which the "post-acceptance performance display" has not yet been displayed, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are made difficult to see by the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)." This means that while the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are visible, the "post-acceptance performance display" may soon appear, and it is possible to encourage the player to prepare in advance by changing his or her gaze from the "difficult-to-see model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)."

In addition, if a win is accepted during the 1st D acceptance period or the 2nd D acceptance period, the "mode in which the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" can remain displayed even after the "post-acceptance performance display" is displayed, and is hidden while the "post-acceptance performance display" is displayed. This makes it possible to provide a wider range of performance related to the "post-acceptance performance display" during the period in which the "post-acceptance performance display" is displayed, after the "mode in which the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is hidden, and thus makes it possible to increase interest in the game by changing the performance during such a display period.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples relating to the 1st D reception period and the 2nd D reception period, as shown in Figures 330 and 334, the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is displayed not only in the area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, but also in the area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are not displayed. And, in this area, the "post-reception performance display" is displayed in at least a part of it, but it is displayed (for example, displayed in the rear layer) so that at least a part of the "post-reception performance display" is difficult to see due to the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)".

With this configuration, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) appears to make it difficult to see not only the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), but also the "post-reception performance display", which is expected to improve both the performance until the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are hidden, and the performance when the "post-reception performance display" begins to be displayed.

In addition, the "disappearance-related display" in the example shown in FIG. 335 is displayed not only in the area where the second D premonition effect display ZED is displayed, but also in the area where the second D premonition effect display ZED is not displayed, when the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is not displayed. In addition, the "post-acceptance effect display" is displayed in at least a part of the area, but is displayed (for example, displayed in the rear layer) so that at least a part of the "post-acceptance effect display" is difficult to see by the "disappearance-related display". In other words, in this case, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) appears not as a model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), but as something that makes the "second D premonition effect display ZED" and the "post-acceptance effect display" difficult to see, so that it is possible to provide a different effect from the above-mentioned effect.

As mentioned above, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples relating to the 1st D reception period and the 2nd D reception period, in a situation where the "post-reception performance display" is not displayed after reception and before the "post-reception performance display" is displayed, a post-reception specific performance (post-reception performance using the second performance device) that does not make it difficult to see the mock-up image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) can be made to appear in addition to the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance). This makes it possible to enjoy the post-reception performance prior to the first performance device without interfering with the performance of the first performance device.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples relating to the first D reception period and the second D reception period, the post-reception specific performance (post-reception performance using the second performance device) is made to appear before the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) appears, in a situation where the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) has not yet appeared. Also, the post-reception specific performance (post-reception performance using the second performance device) is made to continue until after the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) has ended.

With this configuration, players who dislike the complex presentation of the first presentation device can enjoy the post-reception presentation with the second presentation device, which has a more simplified presentation, thereby increasing the interest of various types of players.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples of performances related to the 1st D reception period and the 2nd D reception period, the mock image display will be displayed by dynamic display, as described above with reference to Figures 233 and 234. In this case, it is desirable that the dynamic display of the mock image display is not terminated after it is accepted and continues (until it is made invisible) even while the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) is appearing.

In addition, in the above-mentioned examples of effects related to the 1st D reception period and the 2nd D reception period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is designed to make it difficult to see not only the mock image display, but also the gauge image indicating the remaining time until the end of the reception period. This prevents the appearance of remaining time being seen even if the gauge image is displayed after reception.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if an action (operation) by a player is accepted during the second D acceptance period among the multiple acceptance periods, a "second D post-acceptance performance display UGD2" can be displayed based on the acceptance, but in addition to the second D post-acceptance performance display UGD2, the above-mentioned mode (second extinction-related display SKD2) that also corresponds to the first D acceptance period can be made to appear as a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) in addition to the second D post-acceptance performance display UGD2.

With this configuration, when the second disappearance-related display SKD2 appears, it is unclear whether the first D or second D post-reception performance display will appear, but when the first disappearance-related display SKD1 appears, it becomes possible to guess that the first D post-reception performance display UGD1 will appear.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) is displayed (priority display) in an area that includes at least a part of the area in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. However, it is also possible to realize a performance that uses a performance device (such as a movable body) located in front of the display screen, in a position that overlaps with at least a part of the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) when viewed from the front.

In addition, even if the same pattern (second disappearance related display SKD2) appears as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF performance), if the type of acceptance period is different, it is desirable to make the probability (expectation level) that the jackpot pattern will stop due to the pattern change different.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, a post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) can be executed using the second performance device, and during the execution period of the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device, the first performance device is configured to be in a state where the mock image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively easy to see, and in another state where the mock image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively difficult to see.

In other words, in this case, even after the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device has started based on the fact that the reception has been made, it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as the model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). Also, by making the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) relatively difficult to see during the execution period of the post-reception performance (post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device, it is expected that the player will be encouraged to naturally shift his or her focus of attention from the "first performance device" to the "second performance device."

In the above-mentioned performance example, the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is started so as not to affect the visibility of the mock image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) that are continuously displayed (displayed in an easily visible state) from before the reception. More specifically, the mock image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed in a specified area within the display screen (performance display device 1600), but the post-acceptance performance (post-acceptance specific performance) using the second performance device is not an image display that is displayed using at least a portion of the specified area, nor is it a performance that is executed in a position that overlaps with at least a portion of the specified area when viewed from the front.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the post-reception performance display is started to be displayed after the timing of the appearance of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance), but it may be made to start to be displayed at the timing of the appearance of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) is realized as an image display that is displayed using at least a part of the "area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed." However, in this case, it is desirable to display the image display so that the area displayed in the "area where the model image display is displayed" tends to gradually expand as time passes.

As mentioned above, the "moon image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" in this embodiment can be displayed as an integrated moon image display IG in one of multiple modes (integrated moon image displays IGa-IGd) with different degrees of expectation. According to each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the display mode, including the display position, size, dynamic depiction, etc., may be maintained and continued even after acceptance, so it is possible to recognize in what mode the moon image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) were displayed during the acceptance period, even after acceptance.

As mentioned above, the "mock image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be displayed separately, or only one of the "mock image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be displayed.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples of effects, when a "predetermined image display" such as a "mochi image display" or a "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" is in a hidden state (not displayed), it means that it is in a state where it cannot be seen by the player, and includes, for example, a state where a "predetermined image display" such as a "mochi image display" or a "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" is not visible because it is displayed on a layer but other image displays are given priority. However, if at least a part of a "predetermined image display" such as a "mochi image display" or a "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" is visible from the player's side, this means that the form of the "predetermined image display" is visible, so it can be said that the "predetermined image display" is not in a hidden state and is in a state where it continues to be displayed. The "predetermined image display" may be an image (for example, a premonition effect display) different from the "mochi image display" or the "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)".

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the specific performance after reception may be realized as being performed on the first performance device (within the display screen of the performance display device 1600) rather than the second performance device.

In addition, the target of the player's action (operation) during the first D reception period and the second D reception period does not necessarily have to be the same, and they may each call for different actions. However, if different actions are called for, the action target display (model image display) and remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) will also be displayed differently.

In the above-mentioned performance example, when the stock reception performance is executed in the 1D reception period (see FIG. 331), the 1D premonition performance display ZEC and the integrated Momo image display IG are displayed at the time when the reception validity determination is made within the 1D reception period (the time when the performance after the 1D reception starts to be executed). In this regard, in the above-mentioned performance example, the 1D premonition performance display ZEC is displayed behind the integrated Momo image display IG, but instead, the integrated Momo image display IG may be displayed behind the 1D premonition performance display ZEC. In this case, however, the 1D premonition performance display ZEC is displayed in a form that overlaps only a part of the integrated Momo image display IG, and it is required that the integrated Momo image display IG (at least a part of it) is displayed (visibly recognized).

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the "2D premonition performance display ZED" that can appear when a valid reception judgment is made within the 1D reception period is used as the disappearance-related display SKD that can appear when a valid reception judgment is made within the 2D reception period, but instead of this, a mode that cannot appear when a valid reception judgment is made within the 1D reception period may be used.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, first, a number of reception periods including the second D reception period are prepared as reception periods, and in the premonition performance, the "second D premonition performance display ZED (specific performance display)" shown in Figures 332 (b) and (c) can be displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as shown in Fig. 327, Fig. 332 and Fig. 335, even if the player performs an action while the "2D premonition effect display ZED" is displayed, the action is detected by the action detection means (such as a sensor), the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means (such as the peripheral control RAM 1511c or a corresponding processing step in the program), and a valid acceptance determination that the player's action is a valid action based on the stored detection information is made within the 2D acceptance period (when the detection information is obtained during the first period (stock period) during which the 2D premonition effect display ZED is executed) (stock acceptance effect). With this configuration, even if the player performs an action (operation) while the premonition effect (2D premonition effect display ZED) is being executed, it is possible to start the 2D post-reception effect using this as a trigger, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained in a good manner through such flexible performance. This configuration and effect can be said not only when the stock reception performance is performed during the second D reception period, but also when the stock reception performance is performed during the first D reception period.

In the above-mentioned performance example, even if the player performs an action before the second D reception period occurs and while the "second D premonition performance display ZED" is displayed, the action is detected by the action detection means and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. During the second D reception period, a valid reception determination may be made to determine that the action performed by the player is a valid action based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the second D reception period occurs and while the "second D premonition performance display ZED" is displayed (when detection information is obtained during the first period (stock period) of the period during which the second D premonition performance display ZED is executed), and when the valid reception determination is made, the second D premonition performance display ZED is displayed at the time when the second D post-reception performance based on the valid reception determination is started, as shown in FIG. 335. According to such a configuration, even if an action is performed by the player "within the execution period of the second-D premonition effect display ZED" before the occurrence of the second-D acceptance period, the action is properly detected, and the detection information may be stored and held until the timing tX2 at which the second-D acceptance period occurs. In other words, in this case, "valid acceptance determination that the action performed by the player is a valid action" may be performed within the second-D acceptance period based on the detection information obtained before the occurrence of the second-D acceptance period, so that even if the player makes an action (operation) out of momentum before the occurrence of the second-D acceptance period, the player can enjoy the post-acceptance effect after the occurrence of the second-D acceptance period without having to redo the action. In addition, at this time, when the second D post-reception performance is started based on detection information obtained by an action (operation) made with too much momentum when the second D reception period has not yet occurred (when the second D premonition performance display ZED is displayed), the second D premonition performance display ZED is not hidden but is displayed, so that the player can easily recognize that the second D post-reception performance has been started based on an action (detection information) made by the player when the second D premonition performance display ZED is displayed. The same can be said about this configuration and effect not only when the stock reception performance is executed during the second D reception period, but also when the stock reception performance is executed during the first D reception period.

In the above-mentioned performance example, if a valid acceptance determination is made based on the detection information (detection information of the player's action) obtained during the second D reception period at a specific timing (timing tX2a in FIG. 327) that determines that the player's action is a valid action, the second D premonition performance display ZED (specific performance display) is not displayed at the time when the second D post-reception performance based on the valid acceptance determination starts to be executed. With this configuration, the performance state in the performance display device 1600 at the time when the second D post-reception performance starts to be executed is different between a case where a valid acceptance determination is made during the second D reception period based on detection information obtained before the second D reception period occurs and a case where a valid acceptance determination is made during the second D reception period based on detection information obtained during the second D reception period, and this makes it possible to suggest whether or not the situation is one in which a valid acceptance determination is made based on detection information obtained before the second D reception period occurs. The same can be said about this configuration and effect not only for the second D reception period but also for the first D reception period.

In addition, if a valid reception determination is made during the second D reception period based on detection information obtained during that period, the premonition effect display (here, the second D premonition effect display ZED) may or may not be displayed at the time when the corresponding second D post-reception effect begins to be executed. In other words, in this case, while suggesting whether or not a situation is occurring in which a valid reception determination was made based on detection information obtained before the second D reception period occurs, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not such a situation is occurring, thereby making it possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension. This alternative example can also be applied to the first D reception period in the same way.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, if a valid reception determination is made during the second D reception period based on the detection information obtained during the second D reception period, and if the premonition display (here, the second D premonition display ZED) is not displayed at the time when the second D post-reception performance starts based on the valid reception determination, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display) is displayed at the time when the second D post-reception performance starts. With this configuration, as shown in Figures 334 (e1) and (e2), the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display) maintains its display state without being difficult to see due to other image displays even after the second D post-reception performance starts, so it is possible to suitably suggest in which form it was displayed during the second D reception period. The same can be said about this configuration and effect not only for the second D reception period, but also for the first D reception period.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, if the "premonition performance display (here, the second D premonition performance display ZED)" is displayed at the time when the second D post-reception performance starts to be executed, as shown in FIG. 335(f), the "premonition performance display (here, the second D premonition performance display ZED)" is made difficult to see by the disappearance-related display (here, the second disappearance-related display SKD2). With this configuration, while suggesting that the stock reception performance has been executed, it is possible to suppress the suspicion that "the reception validity determination has not yet been made" due to the display of the "premonition performance display (here, the second D premonition performance display ZED)" is displayed. The same can be said about this configuration and effect not only in the second D reception period but also in the first D reception period.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the disappearance-related display (see FIG. 335) for making it difficult to see the "premonition performance display (here, the second D premonition performance display ZED)" when the stock reception performance is executed during the second D reception period, and the disappearance-related display (see FIG. 334) for making it difficult to see the "integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display)" when a reception validity determination is made based on the detection information obtained during the second D reception period, are displayed in the same manner (second disappearance-related display SKD2). This makes it possible to more appropriately indicate that the second D reception period has ended.

In the above-mentioned example, when the stock reception effect is executed in the second D reception period (see FIG. 335), the integrated model image display (model image display and remaining time display) is not displayed (visible) at the time when the corresponding second D post-reception effect starts, but the "premonition effect display (here, the second D premonition effect display ZED)" is displayed, and when the stock reception effect is executed in the first D reception period (see FIG. 331), the integrated model image display (model image display and remaining time display) is displayed (visible) at the time when the corresponding first D post-reception effect starts. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest whether the stock reception effect was executed in the first D reception period or the second D reception period, and it is expected to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the reception period ending soon after it begins.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, first, multiple reception periods including a first D reception period and a second D reception period are prepared as reception periods, and the first D premonition performance display ZEC (first performance display) is displayed in the premonition performance corresponding to the first D reception period (see FIG. 328), and the second D premonition performance display ZED (second performance display) is displayed in the premonition performance corresponding to the second D reception period (see FIG. 332).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, even if the player performs an action (operation) while either the first D premonition performance display ZEC or the second D premonition performance display ZED is displayed, the action is detected by the action detection means, the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means, and a valid acceptance determination that the action performed by the player is a valid action based on the stored detection information may be made within the first D acceptance period or the second D acceptance period. Therefore, even if the player performs an action while the premonition performance (the first D premonition performance display ZEC or the second D premonition performance display ZED) is being executed, it is possible to use this as an opportunity to start a post-acceptance performance, and it is expected that interest in the game will be maintained in an appropriate manner through such flexible performance.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the following configurations are adopted. That is, in both the first D reception period and the second D reception period, if a player performs an action before the reception period occurs and when the premonition performance is being executed, the action is detected by the action detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. Then, in both the first D reception period and the second D reception period, when the reception period occurs before the premonition performance is being executed, a valid reception determination may be made for the player's action as a valid action based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means (stock reception performance). Then, in the first D reception period, when the first D reception period occurs before the premonition performance (first D premonition performance display ZEC) is executed, if a valid reception determination is made for the player's action as a valid action based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means, at least a part of the model image display is always displayed at the time when the post-reception performance based on the valid reception determination is started. In contrast, in the second D reception period, if a valid reception determination is made based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the second D reception period occurs and while the premonition effect (second D premonition effect display ZED) is being executed, the mock image display is not even partially displayed at the time when the post-reception effect based on the valid reception determination is started to be executed. When these configurations are adopted, whether it is the first D reception period or the second D reception period, a "valid reception determination that a player's action is a valid action" may be made within the reception period based on the detection information obtained before the reception period occurs, so that even if the player performs an action (operation) out of momentum before the first D reception period or the second D reception period occurs, the player can enjoy the post-reception effect after the reception period occurs without having to redo the action. Furthermore, if a player makes an action (operation) out of vigor before the first D reception period occurs, at least a portion of the model image display will always be displayed when the post-reception performance based on this starts to be executed, whereas if a player makes an action (operation) out of vigor before the second D reception period occurs, not even a portion of the model image display will be displayed when the post-reception performance based on this starts to be executed, making it possible to appropriately indicate whether the post-reception performance is based on the first D reception period or the second D reception period (before which reception period the player made the action occurred).

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the following configurations are adopted. That is, in both the first D reception period and the second D reception period, if a player performs an action before the reception period occurs and while the premonition performance is being executed, the action is detected by the action detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. Then, in both the first D reception period and the second D reception period, a valid reception determination may be made to determine that the player's action is a valid action based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means when the reception period occurs before the premonition performance is being executed (stock reception performance). Then, in the first D reception period, if a valid reception determination is made to determine that the player's action is a valid action based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means when the first D reception period occurs before the premonition performance (first D premonition performance display ZEC) is being executed, at least a part of the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is always displayed at the time when the post-reception performance based on the valid reception determination is started. In contrast, during the second D reception period, if a valid reception determination is made based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the second D reception period occurs and while the premonition effect (second D premonition effect display ZED) is being executed, even a part of the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is not displayed at the time when the post-reception effect based on the valid reception determination starts to be executed. When these configurations are adopted, whether it is the first D reception period or the second D reception period, a "valid reception determination that a player's action is a valid action" may be made during the reception period based on the detection information obtained before the reception period occurs, so that even if the player performs an action (operation) out of momentum before the first D reception period or the second D reception period occurs, the player can enjoy the post-reception effect after the reception period occurs without having to redo the action. Furthermore, if an action (operation) is made with too much momentum before the first D reception period occurs, at least a portion of the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) will always be displayed when the post-reception performance based on this starts to be executed, whereas if an action (operation) is made with too much momentum before the second D reception period occurs, not even a portion of the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) will be displayed when the post-reception performance based on this starts to be executed, making it possible to appropriately indicate whether the post-reception performance is based on the first D reception period or the second D reception period (before which reception period the player made the action occurred).

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the presentation, the opportunity to operate the same operating means is provided during the first D reception period and the second D reception period. In this regard, during the first reception period, it is possible to display a model image display or remaining time display in a form that does not appear during the second reception period (integrated model image display IGd shown in FIG. 232(d)). With this configuration, even if the stock reception presentation is not performed, it is possible to indicate whether the first D reception period or the second D reception period is occurring.

As described above, in the second D reception period according to this embodiment, if a "valid reception determination that the action by the player is a valid action" is made during the second D reception period based on detection information obtained before the second D reception period occurs (if a stock reception effect is performed), not even a part of the model image display or remaining time display is displayed at the time when the post-reception effect starts to be executed. However, even in this case, as shown in FIG. 327 and FIG. 335, a disappearance-related display (here, the second disappearance-related display SKD2) is displayed based on the fact that a valid reception determination was made during the second D reception period (a stock reception effect was performed). With this configuration, even if no model image display or remaining time display that prompts the player to perform an action appears, it is possible to suggest that the "post-reception effect" is being executed in response to the acceptance of the action by the player during the reception period.

In addition, during the first D reception period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) is executed in different modes (first disappearance-related display SKD1, second disappearance-related display SKD2) when a low expectation mode (Fig. 331 (e5) to (i5)) appears as the performance after the first D reception and when a high expectation mode (Fig. 331 (e6) to (i6)) appears as the performance after the second D reception. In contrast, during the second D reception period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) is executed in the same mode when a low expectation mode (Fig. 335 (e4) to (i4)) appears as the performance after the second D reception and when a high expectation mode (Fig. 335 (e5) to (i5)) appears as the performance after the second D reception. With this configuration, compared to the first D reception period (when the appearance of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) differs depending on the degree of expectation), the importance of paying attention to the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance)" is lower after reception within the second D reception period, and this, combined with the fact that the mock image display or remaining time display is not displayed, allows you to concentrate on what appearance will appear as the second D post-reception performance display UGD2C.

In addition, in the second D reception period in this performance example, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) that appears when reception is made uses the "second disappearance-related display SKD2" that is displayed when the post-reception performance (first D post-reception performance) corresponding to the first D reception period is executed in a highly anticipated manner. In other words, in this case, in the second D reception period, as long as reception is made, it is possible to give the impression that the post-reception performance will be executed in a highly anticipated manner, which can increase interest in the game.

The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) corresponding to the second D reception period does not necessarily have to be the "second disappearance-related display SKD2." For example, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF performance) corresponding to the second D reception period may be the "first disappearance-related display SKD1" that is displayed when the post-reception performance (first D post-reception performance) corresponding to the above-mentioned first D reception period is executed in a low expectation mode, or a disappearance-related display that does not correspond to the first D reception period may be used.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, it is desirable that during the second D reception period, as the disappearance EF performance (disappearance-related display), if there is a reception, a specific mode (e.g., the second disappearance-related display SKD2) appears as the disappearance EF performance (disappearance-related display), and if there is no reception, a mode different from the specific mode (e.g., the third disappearance-related display SKD3) appears, or no mode appears at all. With this configuration, if an action is forgotten during the second D reception period, the disappearance EF performance (e.g., the second disappearance-related display SKD2) that appears when the action is received will not appear, making it possible to appeal to the player that he or she is in a situation where an action has been forgotten, and from then on, it becomes possible to appropriately maintain the sense of tension when the reception period occurs.

In addition, in the first D reception period according to the above-mentioned performance example, the model image display or remaining time display (at least a part of it) is displayed at the time when the first D post-reception performance starts based on the stock reception performance, and the first D post-reception performance is executed for a different time when the reception validity judgment (stock reception performance) is made based on the detection information obtained before the first D reception period and when the reception validity judgment is made based on the detection information obtained during the first D reception period (see Figs. 322 and 324). In contrast, in the second D reception period according to the above-mentioned performance example, the model image display or remaining time display is not displayed at the time when the second D post-reception performance starts based on the stock reception performance, and the second D post-reception performance is executed for the same time when the reception validity judgment (stock reception performance) is made based on the detection information obtained before the second D reception period and when the reception validity judgment is made based on the detection information obtained during the second D reception period (see Figs. 325 and 327). This configuration makes it possible to provide completely different presentations during the first D reception period and the second D reception period, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The detection by the action detection means when the player performs an action and the storage of the detection information by the detection information storage means may be performed at any time, not just during the acceptance period or during the execution period of the premonition effect. In this case, however, the detection information stored by the detection information storage means will not be stored and held until the acceptance period occurs, or even if it is stored and held, it will not be used to determine whether acceptance is valid during the acceptance period.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, first, a number of reception periods including the second D reception period are prepared as reception periods. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, even if no action by the player is detected during the second D reception period, the reception may be determined to be valid and a post-reception presentation (second D post-reception presentation) corresponding to the second D reception period may be executed. This type of flexible presentation is expected to maintain interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned performance example, the second D premonition performance display ZED (specific performance display) is displayed as a premonition performance corresponding to the second D reception period, and even if the player performs an action before the second D reception period occurs and while the second D premonition performance display ZED is displayed, the action is detected by the action detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. Then, during the second D reception period, a valid reception determination may be made based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the second D reception period occurs and while the second D premonition performance display ZED is displayed" (stock reception performance), and when the valid reception determination is made, the model image display is not displayed at the time when the post-reception performance based on the valid reception determination is started. In contrast, when a valid acceptance determination is made based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means during the second D acceptance period," a model image display may be displayed at the time when the post-acceptance performance based on the valid acceptance determination (second D post-acceptance performance) starts to be executed. When these configurations are adopted, a "valid acceptance determination that the player's action is a valid action" may be made during the second D acceptance period based on detection information obtained before the second D acceptance period occurs, so that even if the player makes an action (operation) out of momentum before the second D acceptance period occurs, the player can enjoy the post-acceptance performance (second D post-acceptance performance) without having to redo the action after the second D acceptance period occurs. Moreover, depending on whether or not a model image display is displayed at the time when the post-acceptance performance (second D post-acceptance performance) starts to be executed, it is possible to suggest whether or not the state is one in which a valid acceptance determination has been made (a state in which a stock acceptance performance has been performed) based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means when the second D acceptance period occurs before the second D acceptance period occurs and the second D premonition performance display ZED is displayed."

In the above-mentioned performance example, the second D premonition performance display ZED (specific performance display) is displayed as a premonition performance corresponding to the second D reception period, and even if the player performs an action before the second D reception period occurs and when the second D premonition performance display ZED is displayed, the action is detected by the action detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. During the second D reception period, a valid reception determination may be made based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the second D reception period occurs and when the second D premonition performance display ZED is displayed" (stock reception performance), and when the valid reception determination is made, the remaining time display is not displayed at the time when the post-reception performance based on the valid reception determination is started. On the other hand, when the valid reception determination is made based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means during the second D reception period", the remaining time display may be displayed at the time when the post-reception performance based on the valid reception determination (second D post-reception performance) is started. When these configurations are adopted, "valid acceptance determination that the action by the player is a valid action" may be made during the second D acceptance period based on the detection information obtained before the second D acceptance period occurs, so even if the player makes an action (operation) in a rush before the second D acceptance period occurs, the player can enjoy the post-acceptance performance (second D post-acceptance performance) without having to redo the action after the second D acceptance period occurs. Moreover, depending on whether or not the remaining time display is displayed at the time when the post-acceptance performance (second D post-acceptance performance) starts to be executed, it is possible to suggest whether or not the state is one in which a valid acceptance determination has been made (a state in which a stock acceptance performance has been performed) based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means when the second D premonition performance display ZED is displayed before the second D acceptance period occurs."

When a valid reception determination is made based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means during the second D reception period," the second D premonition display ZED may be displayed or may not be displayed at the time when the post-reception performance (second D post-reception performance) based on the valid reception determination is started. In other words, in this case, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the post-reception performance (second D post-reception performance) is started based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the second D reception period occurs" or whether the post-reception performance (second D post-reception performance) is started based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means during the second D reception period," and it becomes possible to preferably maintain a sense of tension.

In addition, during at least one of the first D reception period and the second D reception period, a special performance mode that cannot appear if the post-reception performance is started based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the reception period occurs" may be prepared. In other words, the special performance mode can appear if the post-reception performance is not started based on "detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the reception period occurs." It is desirable to indicate the likelihood that a highly anticipated performance will appear as a post-reception performance depending on whether or not the special performance mode appears.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first D reception period and a second D reception period are prepared as reception periods, and when a first D reception period occurs, even if the player's action is not detected by the above-mentioned action detection means during the first D reception period, a first D post-reception performance corresponding to the first D reception period can be executed, and when a second D reception period occurs, even if the player's action is not detected by the above-mentioned action detection means during the second D reception period, a second D post-reception performance corresponding to the second D reception period can be executed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, there are at least two timings during the 1D reception period when the performance after the 1D reception is started without the player's action being detected by the action detection means, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

However, if a player intends to perform an action (operation) within the "period of timing tW1 to W" before the occurrence of the first D acceptance period, but actually performs the action (operation) within the "period of timing W to tW2", it will be difficult for the player to recognize that he or she is in a situation where he or she should redo the action once the first D acceptance period has occurred, and as a result, there is a high possibility that the player will forget to perform an operation.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-mentioned presentation example, at least timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in Figure 324 and timing tW3 shown in Figure 323 are provided as timings at which the 1D post-reception presentation is started without any action by the player being detected by the above-mentioned action detection means during the 1D reception period, and at timing tW2 (tW2A), "the above-mentioned reception validity determination is made within the 1D reception period based on an action (detection information) by the player detected before the 1D reception period occurs (within the period of timings tW1 to W), thereby starting the execution of the 1D post-reception presentation (stock reception presentation)," and at timing tW3, "the 1D post-reception presentation is started based on the arrival of a specified timing (timing tW3) without detecting any action by the player, including before the occurrence of the 1D reception period." With this configuration, even if the player mistakenly believes that he or she performed an action (operation) during the "period from timing tW1 to W" before the occurrence of the 1D reception period and as a result forgets to perform the operation, the 1D post-reception performance will begin to be executed based on the arrival of timing tW3, which is expected to effectively prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned performance example, in the second D reception period, it is possible to make it so that "the reception validity determination is made within the second D reception period based on the action (detection information) by the player detected before the second D reception period occurs, so that the second D post-reception performance is started" (stock reception performance), but it is not possible to make it so that "the second D post-reception performance is started based on the arrival of a predetermined timing without detecting any action by the player, including before the second D reception period occurs". That is, in this case, in both the first D reception period and the second D reception period, "the reception validity determination can be made within the reception period based on the action (detection information) by the player detected before the reception period occurs (stock reception performance)", and this makes it possible to start the post-reception performance. Moreover, in the first D reception period, even if such a "stock reception performance" fails, the post-reception performance (first D post-reception performance) is executed as a rescue based on the arrival of the predetermined timing (timing tW3), so that the "stock reception performance" can be challenged with confidence. On the other hand, during the 2D reception period, if such a "stock reception effect" fails, the post-reception effect (1D post-reception effect) is not executed as a rescue, which creates an ideal sense of tension.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the premonition performance corresponding to the 1D reception period (such as the 1D premonition performance display ZEC) and the premonition performance corresponding to the 2D reception period (such as the 2D premonition performance display ZED) are executed in different performance modes, but these premonition performances may be executed in the same performance mode (for example, the 2D premonition performance display ZED in both cases). With this configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not a reception period with a rescue (timing tW3) (the 1D reception period) will occur when the stock reception performance based on the actions while the premonition performance is being performed fails, which is expected to maintain a sense of tension in an optimal manner.

In the first D reception period according to the above-mentioned performance example, when the first D post-reception performance is generated based on the detection information obtained before the first D reception period (by the stock reception performance), the first D post-reception performance is generated by performing the same process (detection by the same action detection means → storage by the same detection information storage means → same reception validity judgment during the first D reception period) as when the first D post-reception performance is generated based on the detection information obtained during the first D reception period. In contrast, when the first D post-reception performance is generated based on the arrival of timing tW3 after the first D reception period has occurred, the first D post-reception performance is generated by performing a process different from the case of generating the first D post-reception performance based on the detection information obtained during the first D reception period (no detection by the same action detection means, no storage by the same detection information storage means, and judgment that timing tW3 has arrived). With this configuration, when the post-reception performance is automatically generated without the need for a player's action during the reception period, it is possible to provide the player with various performances, which is expected to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the execution time of the 1D post-reception performance is different between the case where the 1D post-reception performance is generated (by the stock reception performance) based on detection information obtained before the 1D reception period and the case where the 1D post-reception performance is generated based on the arrival of timing tW3, which makes it possible to improve the interest in the game. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned performance example, the execution time of the 1D post-reception performance when the reception validity determination is made at a specific timing (timing tW2a) within the 1D reception period is different from both the case where the 1D post-reception performance is generated (by the stock reception performance) based on detection information obtained before the 1D reception period and the case where the 1D post-reception performance is generated based on the arrival of timing tW3, which makes it possible to further improve the interest in the game.

In contrast, in the second D reception period where there is no rescue (automatic reception) in the event of a failed stock reception performance, the execution time of the second D post-reception performance is set to be the same in both cases: when the second D post-reception performance is generated (by the stock reception performance) based on detection information obtained before the second D reception period, and when the second D post-reception performance is generated based on a valid reception determination being made at a specific timing (timing tX2a) within the second D reception period. This means that even if the stock reception performance fails, the same performance can be enjoyed by redoing the operation within the second D reception period, and it is expected that a decrease in interest in the game due to the lack of rescue will be suppressed.

In addition, during the execution period of the premonition effect (1D premonition effect display ZEC) prior to the 1D reception period, even if an action is performed by the player, no notification is given to indicate whether or not the detection information obtained regarding the action is used for the valid reception determination within the 1D reception period. Furthermore, at least the effect display device 1600 may not give any indication that an action by the player has been detected. With this configuration, it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained even during the 1D reception period in which a rescue (timing tW3) is set in case the stock reception effect fails.

In addition, even during the execution period of the premonition effect (second-D premonition effect display ZED) prior to the second-D reception period, if a player makes an action, no notification may be given to indicate whether or not the detection information obtained regarding the action is used for the validity of reception determination within the second-D reception period. Furthermore, at least the effect display device 1600 may not give any indication that a player's action has been detected.

In addition, in the premonition effect corresponding to the 1D reception period, the 1D premonition effect display ZEC and the premonition effect sound associated therewith are each executed. In contrast, in the premonition effect corresponding to the 2D reception period, the 2D premonition effect display ZED is executed, but the premonition effect sound associated with the 2D premonition effect display ZED is not executed. In other words, in this case, whether or not there is a rescue when the stock reception effect fails can be indicated by the presence or absence of the premonition effect sound being output.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, first, a number of reception periods including the 1D reception period are prepared as reception periods, and when the 1D reception period occurs, even if the above-mentioned motion detection means does not detect a motion by the player during the 1D reception period, the 1D post-reception presentation corresponding to the 1D reception period can be executed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the timings at which the performance after 1D reception is started without the player's action being detected by the action detection means during the 1D reception period are at least timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 324 and timing tW3 shown in FIG. 323, which is expected to increase interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned example, the 1D premonition display ZEC is displayed as a premonition display corresponding to the 1D reception period, and when the 1D post-reception performance starts at the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 324, the 1D premonition display ZEC is displayed at the time when the 1D post-reception performance starts, but when the 1D post-reception performance starts at the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 323, the 1D premonition display ZEC is not displayed at the time when the 1D post-reception performance starts. In other words, in this case, when the 1D post-reception performance starts without obtaining detection information during the 1D reception period, it becomes possible to suggest whether the performance starts at the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 324 or the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 323.

In the above-mentioned performance example, even if the 1D post-reception performance starts to be executed at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 324 and the 1D premonition performance display ZEC is displayed, the "1st disappearance related display SKD1" or the "2nd disappearance related display SKD2" is made to appear as the disappearance-related display (see FIG. 331). In this case, whether the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) is displayed as the "1st disappearance related display SKD1" or the "2nd disappearance related display SKD2", it is desirable to make it so that it overlaps with the 1D premonition performance display ZEC so as to make it difficult to see.

In the above-mentioned performance example, the above-mentioned model image display is displayed at the time when the first D post-reception performance starts, whether the first D post-reception performance starts at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in Fig. 324 or the first D post-reception performance starts at timing tW3 shown in Fig. 323. However, instead of this, as shown in Fig. 336, when the first D post-reception performance starts at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in Fig. 324, the above-mentioned model image display may not be displayed at the time when the first D post-reception performance starts, as in the case when the second D post-reception performance starts at timing tX2 (tX2A) shown in Fig. 327. In other words, in this case, even when the stock reception performance is executed in the 1D reception period, just as when the stock reception performance is executed in the 2D reception period, the mock image display (here, the integrated mock image display IG) is never displayed (made visible) and the post-reception performance (here, the 1D post-reception performance) begins to be executed.

In the above-mentioned performance example, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is displayed at the time when the first D post-reception performance starts, whether the first D post-reception performance starts at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in Fig. 324 or the first post-reception performance starts at timing tW3 shown in Fig. 323. However, instead of this, as shown in Fig. 336, when the first D post-reception performance starts at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in Fig. 324, the remaining time display may not be displayed at the time when the first D post-reception performance starts, as in the case when the second D post-reception performance starts at timing tX2 (tX2A) shown in Fig. 327. In other words, in this case, even if the stock reception performance is executed in the 1D reception period, just as if the stock reception performance was executed in the 2D reception period, the remaining time display (here, the integrated mock-up image display IG) is never displayed (made visible) and the post-reception performance (here, the 1D post-reception performance) begins to be executed.

According to the configuration of these other examples, when the 1D post-reception performance is started at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 324 based on detection information obtained before the 1D reception period (see FIG. 336), the model image display and the remaining time display are not displayed at the time when the 1D post-reception performance is started, whereas when the 1D post-reception performance is started at timing tW3 shown in FIG. 323, the model image display and the remaining time display are displayed at the time when the 1D post-reception performance is started (see "i1" and "i2" in FIG. 330). In other words, in this case, when the 1D post-reception performance is started without detecting the action of the player during the 1D reception period, it becomes possible to suggest whether this is the first timing (timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 324) or the second timing (timing tW3 shown in FIG. 323).

Even if these alternative examples are adopted, when the 1st D post-reception performance starts at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 324, it is desirable to have the "1st extinction-related display SKD1" or the "2nd extinction-related display SKD2" appear as the extinction-related display, as shown in FIG. 336 (f5) and (f6). In other words, in this case, the "extinction-related display" appears while the mock image display or remaining time display is not being displayed, and the "extinction-related display" is displayed in such a way that it is difficult to see the "1st D premonition performance display ZEC" or the "1st D post-reception performance display UGD1", etc.

The reception periods in these other examples (see FIG. 336) are provided as modified versions of the 1D reception period shown in FIGS. 322 to 324 and 328 to 331. However, instead of this, they may be provided as a 3D reception period (occurring under condition 3D) that is different from both the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period. In this case, when the post-reception performance corresponding to the 3D reception period (3D post-reception performance) is executed, one mode (for example, the second disappearance-related display SKD2) may appear as the "disappearance-related display" regardless of which of multiple modes with different expectation levels the post-reception performance is executed in.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, the timings at which the 1D post-reception presentation starts without the player's action being detected by the action detection means during the 1D reception period include at least the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 324 and the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 323. If the 1D post-reception presentation starts at the timing tW3 shown in FIG. 323 without the player's action being detected by the action detection means during the 1D reception period, a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) can be displayed, and when the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) is displayed, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) is made difficult to see, which allows the player to easily recognize that the 1D reception period has ended.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, it is possible to display a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) when the above-mentioned 1D post-reception performance starts at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 324 without the action of the player being detected by the action detection means during the 1D reception period, but when the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) is displayed, it is also possible to make it difficult to see displays other than the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display). In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest whether the 1D post-reception performance starts at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 324 or at timing tW3 shown in FIG. 323 after the 1D post-reception performance starts to be executed.

For example, when the configuration according to the alternative example for the 1D reception period is adopted, if the 1D post-reception performance is started at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in Fig. 324 based on detection information obtained before the 1D reception period, the model image display and remaining time display will not be displayed at the time the 1D post-reception performance is started. In other words, in this case, when the 1D post-reception performance is started at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in Fig. 324 without the action of the player being detected by the action detection means during the 1D reception period, if a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) is displayed, a display (such as the 1D premonition performance display ZEC) different from the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) will be difficult to see. Alternatively, if the 1D post-reception performance starts at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 324, an image display that would not appear if the 1D post-reception performance starts at timing tW3 shown in FIG. 323 may be displayed, and the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) may make the image display difficult to see.

The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) is arranged to be displayed as the same image display when it appears when the 1D post-reception performance starts at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 324 and when it appears when the 1D post-reception performance starts at timing tW3 shown in FIG. 323. In other words, in this case, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the situation is being executed at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 324 or timing tW3 shown in FIG. 323 just by looking at the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display), and it is expected that the disappearance EF display will encourage the player to focus on the "object that is made difficult to see."

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, when a second D reception period occurs, there are two cases: a movement by the player is not detected by the above-mentioned movement detection means during the second D reception period and a second D post-reception presentation corresponding to the second D reception period is executed (see FIG. 327); and a movement by the player is not detected by the above-mentioned movement detection means during the second D reception period and the second D reception period ends, resulting in a second D post-reception presentation not being executed (see FIG. 326). This makes it possible to appropriately maintain the sense of tension when the second D reception period occurs.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned performance example, a first D reception period different from the second D reception period can be generated, and when the first D reception period occurs, the corresponding first D post-reception performance is always executed even if the player's action is not detected by the action detection means during the first D reception period. In other words, in this case, when the second D reception period occurs, a sense of tension is preferably provided by "the post-reception performance may or may not occur when the player's action is not detected by the action detection means during the reception period," while when the first D reception period occurs, "the post-reception performance always occurs even if the player's action is not detected by the action detection means during the reception period," which is expected to increase interest in the game.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is provided with a means for executing a performance setting (at least one of volume, brightness, performance mode, etc.) that changes the performance mode based on the operation by the player. In this regard, a case where the second D post-reception performance is executed without the action of the player being detected by the action detection means during the second D reception period, and a case where the second reception period ends without the action of the player being detected by the action detection means during the second D reception period and the second D post-reception performance is not executed can occur under the same performance setting. In other words, a case where the second D post-reception performance is executed without the action of the player being detected by the action detection means during the second D reception period does not mean a case where the second D reception period occurs in a state where the automatic button performance state is set. For example, even when the automatic button presentation state is not set (under the same presentation settings), during the second D reception period, there may be cases where the second D post-reception presentation is executed without the action of the player being detected by the action detection means during the second D reception period, and cases where the second reception period ends without the action of the player being detected by the action detection means during the second D reception period, and the second D post-reception presentation is not executed.

In the above-mentioned performance example, first, a plurality of reception periods including the second D reception period are prepared as the reception period, and the second D premonition performance display ZED can be displayed in the premonition performance corresponding to the second D reception period. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 327, the period in which the second D premonition performance display ZED is displayed includes a stock period (first period) in which, when a motion is performed by the player, the motion is detected by the motion detection means and the detection information by the motion detection means is used for the reception validity judgment in the second D reception period, and a non-stock period (second period) in which, even if a motion is performed by the player and detected by the motion detection means, the detection information by the motion detection means is not used for the reception validity judgment in the second D reception period, so that the sense of tension can be maintained in a suitable manner. The same can be said about this configuration and effect not only in the 2D reception period (2D premonition effect display ZED) but also in the 1D reception period (1D premonition effect display ZEC) (see FIG. 324).

In the above-mentioned performance example, the stock period (first period) and the non-stock period (second period) are both included in the period before the second D reception period occurs and in the period in which the second D premonition performance display ZED is displayed, as shown in FIG. 327. That is, in this case, even if the player makes an action (operation) before the second D reception period occurs, the player can enjoy the second D post-reception performance without having to redo the action after the second D reception period occurs. In addition, if the player makes an action (operation) before the second D reception period occurs, the second D post-reception performance is not necessarily executed (non-stock period), so that the sense of tension can be appropriately maintained. The same can be said about the configuration and the action and effect not only in the second D reception period (second D premonition performance display ZED) but also in the first D reception period (first D premonition performance display ZEC) (see FIG. 324).

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the proportion of the stock period (first period) in the period during which the premonition performance is displayed differs between when the first D reception period occurs and when the second D reception period occurs. In the first D reception period and the second D reception period, at least one of the stock period (first period) and the non-stock period (second period) is set to a different time.

More specifically, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, in the example shown in FIG. 324 (when the first D reception period occurs), the ratio of the above-mentioned "first period (stock period)" to the execution period of the first D premonition performance display ZEC (period from timing tW1 to tW2) is only about 40%, but in the example shown in FIG. 327 (when the second D reception period occurs), the ratio of the above-mentioned "first period (stock period)" to the execution period of the second D premonition performance display ZED (period from timing tX1 to tX2) is about 70%. In other words, in this case, in the "second D premonition performance display ZED (see FIG. 327)", when a player's action is detected during the period from the start of the premonition performance display to the occurrence of the reception period, the expected value of this occurring during the "first period (stock period)" can be made higher than in the case of the "first D premonition performance display ZED (see FIG. 324)".

In this example, in the "2nd D premonition effect display ZED (see FIG. 327)," the proportion of the above-mentioned "first period (stock period)" in the period from when the premonition effect display is executed to when the acceptance period occurs is made larger than in the case of the above-mentioned "1st D premonition effect display ZEC (see FIG. 324)," but instead, this proportion may be made smaller.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, at least in the performance display device 1600, when a player's action is detected during the stock period, and when a player's action is detected during the non-stock period, no reaction is shown in response to the detection. In other words, in this case, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not a situation exists in which a stock reception performance can be executed, which is expected to maintain a good sense of tension.

In the above-mentioned performance example, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first D reception period and a second D reception period are prepared as reception periods, and the first D premonition performance display ZEC is displayed in the premonition performance corresponding to the first D reception period, and the second D premonition performance display ZED is displayed in the second premonition performance corresponding to the second D reception period. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 324 and FIG. 327, in both the period in which the first D premonition performance display ZEC is executed and the period in which the second D premonition performance display ZED is executed, a "stock period (pre-action permitted period) in which, when a motion is performed by the player, the motion is detected by the motion detection means and the information detected by the motion detection means is used for the above-mentioned reception validity judgment during the reception period" is included, and a "non-stock period (pre-action non-permitted period) in which, even if the motion is detected by the motion detection means when a motion is performed by the player, the information detected by the motion detection means is not used for the above-mentioned reception validity judgment during the reception period" is included, so that a sense of tension can be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the stock period (pre-action permitted period) and the non-stock period (pre-action non-permitted period) are both set to be periods before the timing when the acceptance period (first D acceptance period or second D acceptance period) occurs. In other words, in this case, "a valid acceptance determination that the action by the player is a valid action" may be made within the acceptance period based on detection information obtained before the acceptance period (first D acceptance period or second D acceptance period) occurs, so even if the player makes an action (operation) before the acceptance period occurs, the player can enjoy the post-acceptance performance without having to redo the action after the acceptance period occurs. Moreover, if the player makes an action (operation) before the acceptance period (first D acceptance period or second D acceptance period) occurs, the post-acceptance performance is not necessarily executed (non-stock period (pre-action non-permitted period)), so the sense of tension can be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In the above-mentioned example, no message is displayed encouraging the player to take action during either the stock period (pre-action permitted period) within the period in which the 1st D premonition display ZEC is executed, or the stock period (pre-action permitted period) within the period in which the 2nd D premonition display ZED is executed.

However, instead of this, a message display urging the player to take action may be displayed at least during the stock period (pre-action permitted period) during the period during which the first D premonition effect display ZEC is executed, and a message display urging the player to take action may not be displayed during the stock period (pre-action permitted period) during the period during which the second D premonition effect display ZED is executed. With this configuration, when the first D reception period occurs, it is possible to urge the player to obtain detection information for an action by the player before the first D reception period occurs, and it is possible to more actively provide a performance (stock reception performance) in which a reception validity determination is made within the first D reception period based on the detection information thus obtained. On the other hand, when the second D reception period occurs, the fact that such a stock reception performance is permitted is kept secret, so that it is possible to add interest to the performance and improve the interest in the game.

In this case, the message display that is in a displayed state during the stock period (pre-action permitted period) during which the first D premonition effect display ZEC is executed may also be in a displayed state during at least part of the non-stock period (pre-action non-permitted period). With this configuration, even if the player performs an action while the message display is in a displayed state, this action will not necessarily be used for a valid acceptance judgment within the first D acceptance period, so that the tension can be maintained in an optimal manner. During the period during which the second D premonition effect display ZED is executed, the message display is not displayed during either the stock period (pre-action permitted period) or the non-stock period (pre-action non-permitted period).

In the above-mentioned performance example, as shown in FIG. 332 and FIG. 335, when the stock reception performance is performed in the second D reception period, the second D premonition performance display ZED starts to be displayed, and then the second D post-reception performance starts to be executed without any message display. In contrast, in the above-mentioned modified example regarding the message display, when the stock reception performance is performed in the first D reception period, even if detection information is obtained in the stock period (pre-operation allowable period), it is desirable to not hide the message display in the period before the first D reception period occurs, and to maintain the display state as when no detection information is obtained. In addition, when the stock reception performance is performed in the first D reception period, it is desirable to keep the message display in the display state even at the time when the first D post-reception performance starts to be executed accordingly. With this configuration, in both the case where the first D reception period occurs and the case where the second D reception period occurs, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the stock reception performance is performed (the stock reception performance is successful), and the sense of tension can be appropriately maintained.

In the above-mentioned performance example, first, a plurality of reception periods including the 1D reception period are prepared as reception periods, and when the 1D reception period occurs, even if the motion of the player is not detected by the motion detection means during the 1D reception period, the 1D post-reception performance corresponding to the 1D reception period can be executed as the post-reception performance. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, there are at least two timings (timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 324 and timing tW3 shown in FIG. 323) at which the 1D post-reception performance starts to be executed without the motion of the player being detected by the motion detection means during the 1D reception period, which is expected to increase the interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned presentation example, at least timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 324 and timing tW3 shown in FIG. 323 are prepared as timings at which the 1D post-reception presentation starts to be executed without the player's action being detected by the action detection means during the 1D reception period. At timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 324, "the reception validity determination is made within the 1D reception period based on the player's action (detection information) detected before the 1D reception period occurs, thereby starting the 1D post-reception presentation (stock reception presentation)," and at timing tW3 shown in FIG. 323, "the 1D post-reception presentation starts to be executed based on the arrival of a predetermined timing (timing tW3) without detecting any action by the player, including before the 1D reception period occurs."

In other words, in this case, "the validity of the reception can be determined within the 1D reception period based on the player's actions (detection information) detected before the 1D reception period occurs," which makes it possible to start the execution of the 1D post-reception performance. Furthermore, even if such a "stock reception performance" fails during the 1D reception period, the 1D post-reception performance is executed as a rescue based on the arrival of a specified timing (timing tW3), so the player can safely challenge the "stock reception performance."

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example, the execution times for the 1D post-reception performance are different between when the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the stock reception performance being performed within the 1D reception period (see FIG. 324) and when the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the timing tW3 arriving without any action by the player being detected within the 1D reception period (see FIG. 323). In other words, in this case, when the 1D post-reception performance is executed without any action by the player being detected within the 1D reception period, it becomes possible to suggest which timing the 1D post-reception performance was executed based on. At this time, it is also possible to set either execution time to be longer.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, when a valid reception determination is made based on the detection information at timing tW2a within the 1D reception period (see FIG. 322), the 1D post-reception performance is executed for a time period different from either the case where the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on a stock reception performance being performed within the 1D reception period (see FIG. 324), or the case where the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on timing tW3 arriving without detection of a player's action within the 1D reception period (see FIG. 323), making it possible to suggest that the player's action within the 1D reception period has been properly accepted.

In the above-mentioned performance example, a specific reception period different from either the first D reception period or the second D reception period can be generated, and even in the specific reception period, there may be a case where a post-reception performance (for example, a specific post-reception performance different from either the first D reception period or the second D reception period) is executed based on detection information obtained before the specific reception period (within the execution period of the premonition performance) (stock reception performance), and a case where a post-reception performance (specific post-reception performance) is executed based on the arrival of a predetermined timing without detection of a player's action during the specific reception period. The execution time required for the post-reception performance (specific post-reception performance) may be the same in the case where a post-reception performance (specific post-reception performance) is executed based on the stock reception performance being performed during the specific reception period and the case where a post-reception performance (specific post-reception performance) is executed based on the arrival of a predetermined timing without detection of a player's action during the specific reception period. With this configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize at which timing the post-reception performance was executed just by looking at the execution time of the post-reception performance, and the sense of tension can be maintained in an appropriate manner.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the performance, the second D post-reception performance is performed for the same duration when the player's action is not detected by the action detection means during the second D reception period (stock reception performance) and when the player's action is detected by the action detection means during the second D reception period, thereby making it possible to maintain interest in the game.

In contrast, the 1D post-reception performance has a different execution time when it is executed without the player's action being detected by the action detection means during the 1D reception period (stock reception performance) and when it is executed based on the player's action being detected by the action detection means during the 1D reception period, making it possible to provide different performance characteristics depending on the type of reception period.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the presentation, in the premonition presentation that suggests that the player will be given an opportunity to act, there are cases where a premonition presentation sound corresponding to that premonition presentation is output (see FIG. 322) and cases where a premonition presentation sound corresponding to that premonition presentation is not output (see FIG. 325). This is expected to maintain an appropriate sense of tension when giving the player an opportunity to act.

When a specific premonition effect sound (effect sound corresponding to the 1D premonition effect display ZEC) is output before the acceptance period during which the player is given an opportunity to act occurs, as shown in Figs. 322 to 324, there are at least timings tW2 (tW2A) shown in Fig. 324 and tW3 shown in Fig. 323 as timings at which the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the action of the player is started without the action of the player being detected by the action detection means during the acceptance period. In contrast, when no premonition effect sound is output before the acceptance period during which the player is given an opportunity to act occurs, there is no timing corresponding to timing tW3 shown in Fig. 323, and there is at least timing tX2 (tX2A) corresponding to timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in Fig. 324 as timings at which the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the action of the player is started without the action of the player being detected by the action detection means during the acceptance period, as shown in Figs. 325 to 327. According to this configuration, when the premonition sound is being output, even if the stock reception effect fails as a result of the player's action (the action is detected within the non-stock period), the post-acceptance effect is always executed, so the player can challenge the stock reception effect with a sense of security. Also, when the premonition sound is not being output, if the stock reception effect fails, the player must perform another action within the acceptance period to trigger the post-acceptance effect, so the player can challenge the stock reception effect in a tense atmosphere.

In addition, when no premonition sound is output before the acceptance period in which the player is given an opportunity to act occurs, as shown in Figs. 325 to 327, there may be a case where there is no timing corresponding to the timing tW3 shown in Fig. 323 and at least a timing tX2 (tX2A) corresponding to the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in Fig. 324 as a timing at which the action of the player is not detected by the action detection means during the acceptance period and the corresponding post-acceptance performance is started (second acceptance period), and there may be a case where there is at least a timing (not shown) corresponding to the timing tW3 shown in Fig. 323 and a timing (not shown) corresponding to the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in Fig. 324 as a timing at which the action of the player is not detected by the action detection means during the acceptance period and the corresponding post-acceptance performance is started (another acceptance period). With this configuration, when the premonition sound is not output, the player can be challenged to the stock acceptance performance while maintaining a sense of tension and providing a sense of security.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation example, even if a premonition presentation sound corresponding to the 1D premonition presentation display ZEC is being output and an action by the player is performed and detected within the stock period (first period), this is not used as a trigger to interrupt the 1D premonition presentation display ZEC or the corresponding premonition presentation sound before the 1D reception period occurs. This makes it difficult to recognize whether the detection of the player's action was performed during the stock period (first period) or the non-stock period (second period).

As mentioned above, the 1D premonition effect display ZEC may be performed across the timing when the 1D reception period occurs. In this case, the premonition effect sound corresponding to the 1D premonition effect display ZEC is also output across the timing when the 1D reception period occurs. In this case, when the 1D reception period occurs and the premonition effect sound corresponding to the 1D premonition effect display ZEC is output, if an action by the player is performed and detected, the 1D premonition effect display ZEC and the premonition effect sound corresponding thereto may be interrupted during the 1D reception period using this as a trigger. In other words, in this case, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the stock reception effect is being performed or the reception is being performed during the 1D reception period. In contrast, when the stock reception effect is performed, the premonition effect sound is interrupted at timing tX2 (tX2A) using this as a trigger.

Incidentally, the "stock reception effect" in the performance examples described above with reference to Figures 322 to 335 and in other examples (variations) thereof means, as described above, that when an action is performed by the player within the "premonition effect execution period" before the reception period occurs and this is obtained as detection information, the detection information is stored and the stored detection information is used to provide for "valid reception determination" during the reception period that occurs thereafter. Therefore, "the player's action being performed within the premonition effect execution period and this being obtained as detection information" is technically completely different from "the operation to set the automatic button performance state described above being performed."

For example, in the "stock reception performance", the detection information obtained during the "premonition performance execution period" is checked during the reception period as is, so that the reception is judged to be valid even if no action by the player is detected during the reception period. In contrast, when an operation is performed to set the above-mentioned automatic button performance state, detection information corresponding to the operation is obtained, but the detection information is not retained until the reception period occurs. In other words, when the detection information corresponding to the operation to set the above-mentioned automatic button performance state is obtained, the state of the performance state flag is set to a specific state corresponding to the "automatic button performance state" based on the detection information. Then, each time a reception period occurs, the state of the performance state flag is checked at a predetermined timing within the reception period, making it possible to execute the post-reception performance without the player's action (operation) during the reception period.

Therefore, in order to realize the "stock reception performance" in the performance example described above with reference to Figs. 322 to 335 and other examples (variations), the gaming machine may not have a setting function for the automatic button performance state, or may be a gaming machine that is always controlled to the automatic button performance state. Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the performance example described above with reference to Figs. 322 to 335 and other examples (variations), if the 1D reception period occurs when the automatic button performance state is set by the player's operation, during the 1D reception period, the 1D post-reception performance will be started based on the arrival of a predetermined timing between the timings tW2 (tW2A) shown in Fig. 324 and the timing tW3 shown in Fig. 323. That is, in this case, the 1D post-reception performance will be started based on the arrival of a predetermined timing without the player's action being detected (without the reception validity determination being made). In contrast, when the automatic button presentation state is not set, the predetermined timing does not function, so the first D post-reception presentation starts to be executed based on the arrival of timing tW3 without the player's action being detected (valid reception determination is not made). If the second D reception period occurs when the automatic button presentation state is set by the player's operation, the second D post-reception presentation starts to be executed during the second D reception period based on the arrival of a specific timing later than timing tX2 (tX2A) shown in FIG. 327.

Furthermore, in the examples of effects described above with reference to Figures 322 to 335 and other examples (variations) thereof, it goes without saying that the actions (operations) required of the player to successfully execute the above-mentioned "stock reception effect" are the same as the actions (operations) required of the player during the corresponding reception period.

Also, in the presentation examples and other examples (variations) thereof described above with reference to Figures 322 to 335, even if the player performs an action more than a predetermined time before the timing when the acceptance period occurs, the above-mentioned "stock acceptance effect" is not executed based on the detection information (in the embodiment, only detection information within the execution period of the corresponding premonition effect is used for the "valid acceptance determination"). In other words, making it possible to realize such a "stock acceptance effect" only when the player is in a situation where he or she can be aware of the acceptance period that is the subject of the action (operation) is important in making the player perform the action (operation) with the awareness of generating a specific post-acceptance effect.

As mentioned above, in the performance examples described above with reference to Figures 322 to 335 and other examples (variations) thereof, even if detection information is obtained within the storage period, no notification that the detection information has been obtained is given within the performance display device 1600. In contrast, when a setting to an automatic button performance state is made, it is self-evident that a notification must be given to the person who set it as to whether or not the setting has been completed.

Also, as mentioned above, in the performance examples described above with reference to Figures 322 to 335 and other examples (variations) thereof, if detection information is obtained within the stock period, the detection information will always be used for "valid reception determination" within the reception period, and a post-reception performance will always occur based on this. In contrast, if the automatic button performance state is set, it is self-evident that this can be canceled before the specified timing arrives.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance examples (such as the first D reception period and the second D reception period), the stock period (first period) occurs first during the period in which the premonition performance is performed, and the non-stock period (second period) occurs later, so that the reception period occurs in a manner connected to this. However, instead of this, the non-stock period (second period) may occur first during the period in which the premonition performance is performed, and the stock period (first period) may occur later, so that the reception period occurs in a manner connected to this. In this case, it is assumed that the player's action is detected across the stock period (first period) and the reception period, but even in such a case, it is desirable to make the reception validity judgment within the reception period based on the detection information obtained in the stock period (first period) (without using the detection information obtained in the reception period). Alternatively, if the player's action is detected across the stock period (first period) and the reception period, the reception validity judgment may be made within the reception period based on both the detection information obtained in the stock period (first period) and the detection information obtained within the reception period. Even in such a case, the performance may progress in the manner shown in Figures 331 and 335.

In the above-mentioned examples and other examples (variations), unless there is a specific description that the automatic button presentation state has been set, the pachinko machine 1 is described as being in a state that is not set to the automatic button presentation state or does not have a function related to the automatic button presentation state.

In the above-mentioned performance example and other examples (variations), the period during which the 2D premonition performance display ZED is displayed includes, as shown in Figs. 325 to 327, a stock period (first period) during which, when a player performs a motion, the motion is detected by the motion detection means and the detection information by the motion detection means is used for the reception validity judgment during the 2D reception period, and a non-stock period (second period) during which, even if the player performs a motion and the motion is detected by the motion detection means, the detection information by the motion detection means is not used for the reception validity judgment during the 2D reception period. Then, if the 2D reception period ends without any new detection by the motion detection means after the motion detection means detects the motion during the non-stock period (second period) during which the 2D premonition performance display ZED is displayed, the 2D post-reception performance is not executed (see Fig. 326).

In contrast to this, in the above-mentioned performance example and its other examples (variations), the period during which the 1D premonition performance display ZEC is displayed also includes, as shown in Figs. 322 to 324, a stock period (first period) during which, when a player performs an action, the action is detected by the action detection means and the detection information by the action detection means is used for the reception validity judgment during the 1D reception period, and a non-stock period (second period) during which, even if the player performs an action and the action is detected by the action detection means, the detection information by the action detection means is not used for the reception validity judgment during the 1D reception period. Nevertheless, even if the 1D reception period ends without any new detection by the action detection means after the action detection means has been detected during the non-stock period (second period) during which the 1D premonition performance display ZEC is displayed, the 1D post-reception performance is executed (timing tW3 shown in Fig. 323). In other words, in this case, even if an action by the player is detected during the period in which the 1D premonition effect display ZEC is being performed, not during the stock period (first period), but during the non-stock period (second period), the 1D post-reception effect can be generated without detecting any new action by the player, which is expected to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Also, as shown in Figures 330 and 331, regardless of whether detection information is obtained during the stock period (first period) or the non-stock period (second period), in the performance progression on the side where the 1D post-reception performance can be executed without obtaining new detection information within the 1D reception period, a different appearance (first disappearance-related display SKD1 or second disappearance-related display SKD2) is made to appear as the disappearance-related display depending on the appearance of the 1D post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1 or 1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2). In contrast, as shown in Figures 334 and 335, in the performance progression on the side where the second D post-reception performance can be executed without obtaining new detection information within the second D reception period only if detection information is obtained during the stock period (first period) out of the stock period (first period) and non-stock period (second period), the same form (second disappearance-related display SKD2) is made to appear as the disappearance-related display regardless of the form related to the second D post-reception performance (second D post-reception performance display UGD2-1 or second D post-reception performance display UGD2-2).

That is, the 1D post-reception performance can be executed without obtaining new detection information during the 1D reception period, regardless of whether the detection information is obtained during the stock period (first period) or the non-stock period (second period), so there is a concern that the player's sense of tension will not be maintained. In this regard, according to the above configuration, when the 1D post-reception performance is executed, the disappearance-related display itself is given a performance characteristic for suggesting the degree of expectation, so that it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained. In contrast, the 2D post-reception performance can be executed without obtaining new detection information during the 2D reception period only when the detection information is obtained during the stock period (first period) out of the stock period (first period) and the non-stock period (second period), so it can be said that the player's sense of tension is maintained by the performance characteristic itself. In this regard, according to the above configuration, when the second D post-reception performance is executed, the disappearance-related display itself is not given the performance characteristics to suggest the degree of expectation, so after the reception validity determination by the stock reception performance is successful, it is expected to encourage concentration on the first D post-reception performance. Also, when the second D post-reception performance is executed, the disappearance-related display "second disappearance-related display SKD2" corresponding to the high expectation aspect of the first D post-reception performance always appears, so it is expected to maintain the interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 331, in the performance progression on the side where the 1D post-reception performance can be executed without newly obtaining detection information during the 1D reception period, whether the detection information is obtained during the stock period (first period) or the non-stock period (second period), if a reception validity determination is made by the stock reception performance, the model image display and the remaining time display are displayed at the time when the 1D post-reception performance starts to be executed. In contrast, as shown in FIG. 335, in the performance progression on the side where the 2D post-reception performance can be executed without newly obtaining detection information during the 2D reception period, only if the detection information is obtained during the stock period (first period) of the stock period (first period) or the non-stock period (second period), if a reception validity determination is made by the stock reception performance, the model image display and the remaining time display are not displayed (cannot be seen) at the time when the 2D post-reception performance starts to be executed.

That is, the 1D post-reception performance can be executed without obtaining new detection information during the 1D reception period, regardless of whether the detection information is obtained during the stock period (first period) or the non-stock period (second period), so there is a concern that the player's sense of tension will not be maintained. In this regard, according to the above configuration, even at the time when the 1D post-reception performance starts to be executed, the mock image display and the remaining time display are in a state where they are displayed, so that it is expected that the player will be aware of the possibility that the "valid reception judgment" has not yet been made, and the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained. In contrast, the 2D post-reception performance can be executed without obtaining new detection information during the 2D reception period only if the detection information is obtained during the stock period (first period) out of the stock period (first period) and the non-stock period (second period), so it can be said that the player's sense of tension is maintained by the performance itself. In this regard, with the above configuration, when the second D post-reception performance begins, the mock image display and remaining time display are not displayed (are not visible), making it easier to recognize that the "valid reception determination" has been made properly, which is expected to encourage concentration on the first D post-reception performance.

The first D reception period and second D reception period in each of the above-mentioned performance examples and modified examples (alternative examples) may be realized by modifying them to the configurations below, or the configurations in the modified examples below (first D reception period, second D reception period) may be further provided as reception periods separate from the above-mentioned first D reception period and second D reception period.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has at least a first D reception period and a second D reception period as reception periods during which the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is permitted.

In this regard, when the 1D post-reception performance corresponding to the 1D reception period is executed, as shown in FIG. 330 and FIG. 331, the disappearance EF performance (disappearance related display) is executed in a different manner depending on whether the 1D post-reception performance is executed in a manner with low expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1) or in a manner with high expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2). However, instead of this, the disappearance EF performance (disappearance related display) may be executed in a predetermined manner (the same manner) regardless of whether the 1D post-reception performance is executed in a manner with low expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-1) or in a manner with high expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) (1D post-reception performance display UGD1-2).

In addition, when the second D reception post-performance corresponding to the second D reception period is executed, as shown in FIG. 334 and FIG. 335, the disappearance EF performance (disappearance related display) is executed in a predetermined manner (the same manner) regardless of whether the second D reception post-performance is executed in a manner with low expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) (second D reception post-performance display UGD2-1) or in a manner with high expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) (second D reception post-performance display UGD2-2). However, instead of this, the disappearance EF performance (disappearance related display) may be executed in a different manner depending on whether the second D reception post-performance is executed in a manner with low expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) (second D reception post-performance display UGD2-1) or in a manner with high expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) (second D reception post-performance display UGD2-2).

Next, a case where the above-mentioned modified example is applied to the above-mentioned performance example will be described. That is, FIG. 337 is a modified example of "the performance that appears when the first D reception post-performance is executed based on the detection information being obtained within the first D reception period, or the first D reception post-performance is executed based on the arrival of timing tW3 without the reception validity judgment being made within the first D reception period" shown in FIG. 330, and FIG. 338 is a modified example of "the performance that appears when the first D reception post-performance is executed based on the detection information obtained before the first D reception period" shown in FIG. 331. Also, FIG. 339 is a modified example of "the performance that appears when the second D reception post-performance is executed based on the detection information being obtained within the second D reception period, or the performance that appears when the timing tX3 arrives without the reception validity judgment being made within the second D reception period" shown in FIG. 334, and FIG. 340 is a modified example of "the performance that appears when the second D reception post-performance is executed based on the detection information obtained before the second D reception period" shown in FIG. 335. In addition, in this modified example, configurations that are not specifically mentioned are as described above with reference to "Performance examples relating to the 1st D reception period (Figures 322 to 324, Figures 328 to 331)" and "Performance examples relating to the 2nd D reception period (Figures 325 to 327, Figures 332 to 335)," and can be similarly applied to each of the above-mentioned other examples that are applicable to "Performance examples relating to the 1st D reception period" and "Performance examples relating to the 2nd D reception period."

In the modified example shown in FIG. 337 and FIG. 338, first, the disappearance EF effect (disappearance related display) is executed in the same manner when the 1D post-reception performance is executed in a mode with low expectation (probability of the jackpot pattern appearing) based on the detection information obtained during the 1D reception period (see FIG. 337 (e1) to (i1)) and when the 1D post-reception performance is executed in a mode with high expectation (probability of the jackpot pattern appearing) (see FIG. 337 (e2) to (i2)). Also, the disappearance EF effect (disappearance related display) is executed in the same manner when the 1D post-reception performance is executed in a mode with low expectation (probability of the jackpot pattern appearing) based on the arrival of timing tW3 (see FIG. 337 (e3) to (i3)) and when the 1D post-reception performance is executed in a mode with high expectation (probability of the jackpot pattern appearing) (see FIG. 337 (e4) to (i4)). In addition, the extinction EF effect (disappearance-related display) is executed in the same manner whether the 1st D post-reception performance is executed in a manner with low expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) based on detection information obtained before the 1st D reception period (see FIG. 338 (e5)-(i5)) or in a manner with high expectation (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) (see FIG. 338 (e6)-(i6)). Here, the second extinction-related display SKD2 is executed as the extinction EF effect.

In contrast, in the modified example shown in FIG. 339 and FIG. 340, the disappearance EF effect is executed in a different manner when the second D reception post-performance is executed in a manner with low expectation (probability of the appearance of a jackpot pattern) based on the detection information obtained during the second D reception period (see FIG. 339 (e1) to (i1)) and when the second D reception post-performance is executed in a manner with high expectation (probability of the appearance of a jackpot pattern) (see FIG. 339 (e2) to (i2)). Also, the disappearance EF effect is executed in a different manner when the second D reception post-performance is executed in a manner with low expectation (probability of the appearance of a jackpot pattern) based on the detection information obtained before the second D reception period (see FIG. 340 (e4) to (i4)) and when the second D reception post-performance is executed in a manner with high expectation (probability of the appearance of a jackpot pattern) (see FIG. 340 (e5) to (i5)). Here, when the expectation level (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) is low (see Figures 339 (e1)-(i1) and 340 (e4)-(i4)), the first disappearance related display SKD1 is executed as the disappearance EF performance, and when the expectation level (probability of a jackpot pattern appearing) is high (see Figures 339 (e2)-(i2) and 340 (e5)-(i5)), the second disappearance related display SKD2 is executed as the disappearance EF performance.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 339, if the reception validity determination is not made within the second D reception period and timing tX3 arrives, the third disappearance-related display SKD3 is displayed as the disappearance EF performance. However, instead of this, the disappearance EF performance may be displayed in the form that would have appeared if the reception validity determination had been made within the second D reception period (the first disappearance-related display SKD1 or the second disappearance-related display SKD2). With this configuration, even if the reception validity determination is not made within the second D reception period, by checking the form of the disappearance EF performance that is displayed based on the arrival of timing tX3, it becomes possible to recognize in which form (low expectation form or high expectation form) the second D post-reception performance would have been executed if the reception validity determination had been made within the second D reception period.

In addition, in the performance examples shown in Fig. 326 and Fig. 334 and the modified example shown in Fig. 339, if the reception validity determination is not made within the 2D reception period and timing tX3 arrives, the 2D post-reception performance is not executed. However, instead of this, even in the performance examples shown in Fig. 326 and Fig. 334 and the modified example shown in Fig. 339, the 2D post-reception performance may be executed based on the fact that the reception validity determination is not made within the 2D reception period and timing tX3 arrives, as in the performance examples shown in Fig. 323 and Fig. 330 and the modified example shown in Fig. 337. That is, in this case, only the remaining time shown by the remaining time display (the display area of the gauge image is "0") is different, and otherwise the performance will progress in the manner shown in Fig. 334 (e1) to (i1) or Fig. 334 (e2) to (i2), or in the manner shown in Fig. 339 (e1) to (i1) or Fig. 339 (e2) to (i2).

Although the present invention has been described above using several embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention, as described below.

For example, in each of the above-mentioned examples of effects related to the automatic effect function, a display such as "Auto button setting in progress" may be displayed, but this display is not necessarily required. In particular, when a pachinko machine 1 is realized as one that is not set to the automatic effect mode, but is always in a state where the automatic effect function can be enabled and does not have a process such as "setting to effect state" installed, it is desirable not to display a display such as "Auto button setting in progress." In a pachinko machine 1 that does not have a process such as "setting to effect state" installed, an effective period during which the automatic effect function is performed and an effective period during which the automatic effect function is not performed may be generated according to the type of operation acceptance effect that is permitted to be operated by the player.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples, the "imitation image" may be any image that prompts the player to perform an operation, and does not necessarily have to be an image that imitates the operating means that is the target of operation, such as an arrow image that points downward and moves up and down.

In addition, when the automatic performance function is adopted in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the timing for automatically generating (automatically accepting) the operation reception within the operation valid period may be set to any timing within the operation valid period. In order to provide the player with an operation opportunity in a favorable manner, it is desirable that the operation reception is automatically generated (automatically accepted) when no operation is detected until a predetermined timing that arrives after more than half of the operation valid period has elapsed, and that the post-operation performance is started based on the automatically generated operation acceptance. In this sense, it is most desirable that the operation reception is automatically generated (automatically accepted) when no operation is detected until the remaining time within the operation valid period becomes one frame, and that the post-operation performance is started based on the automatically generated operation acceptance. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples regarding the automatic performance function, if the bar display is not hidden but is maintained even after the valid period has ended, it is desirable to execute a performance that changes the state of the operating means to be operated in accordance with the timing at which the valid period ends (for example, vibration or turning off the LED). This is expected to prevent players from misunderstanding that the validity period is still in effect, even if the bar display is not hidden but is instead kept on display.

In the example of the presentation described above and below, such as the example of the presentation described with reference to FIG. 209, when the post-operation presentation is started without hiding the model image (or bar display), the "time from the time when the operation is detected to the time when the model image (or bar display) is hidden (such as the period from timing tf2 to tf4, the period from timing tg3 to tg5, or the period from timing th3 to th4)" may be at least a few frames (e.g., two frames). Or it may be just one frame. Even if there is only such a period, the period when the model image (or bar display) is displayed and the period after the post-operation presentation has started will overlap, and some players may be aware of this.

In each of the above examples of effects, when "period" or "time" is mentioned, this may be the smallest unit of control, such as the period or time of one frame.

In the explanatory example of the "help image to encourage understanding of the effects," a ruler is used as an example of a "guideline image showing horizontal units of length," but other images may be used. In short, any image that, when operated by a player, causes a display image to appear that is not affected by special effects may be used. For example, a display image that is not intended to encourage understanding of the effects but is intended to perform another function (such as an image suggesting the degree of expectation, an image suggesting the current state of the effects, or an image suggesting the state of the effects settings) may be displayed as an image that is depicted to extend horizontally. Note that such an image does not necessarily have to be depicted as a single unit, and may be depicted as multiple images lined up side by side to extend horizontally as a whole.

In addition, in the example explaining "preventing tampering with multiple operating means," tampering is very different from fraudulent acts such as magnet cheating, and taking too strict measures could lead to disadvantages for the hall. Therefore, images that appear based on the detection of a player's operation (including images that appear in the process of making a specific video appear) may be realized as having nothing to do with preventing tampering. In short, when the player operates the multiple operating means in a predetermined pattern (predetermined procedure), in a state in which "the performance display device 1600 displays (plays) a specific video (which may be a video with content that has nothing to do with preventing pranks (for example, a transition to a state in which a predetermined movie is played) that cannot appear when a game performance corresponding to a jackpot determination is being executed)," "even if the volume adjustment button is operated, the volume setting value for the output volume of the performance sound is not accepted, and the current volume setting value is not displayed," and "even if the brightness adjustment button is operated, the brightness setting value for the brightness of the performance lamp is not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed," control is performed to generate a function restriction period for a predetermined time. In this case, the player can also operate the multiple operating means in a predetermined pattern (procedure) to generate a function restriction period in which the above-mentioned specific video is played at his own will.

In addition, in the example of "preventing tampering with multiple operating means," when the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner, the partial restriction period may be always controlled as described above.

As for the example of "preventing noise with adjustment confirmation sounds at opening time", essentially, it is a gaming machine that is not controlled to the normal state in which volume adjustment confirmation sounds and brightness adjustment confirmation sounds can be output immediately after the power is turned on, but is controlled to the normal state after passing through a restricted state in which volume adjustment confirmation sounds and brightness adjustment confirmation sounds can not be output, and is designed to end the restricted state early and control to the normal state when play is started in the restricted state, and the length of time that the restricted state is maintained may be set appropriately (anywhere from a few seconds to a few hours). If the length of time that the restricted state is maintained is set too short, the above-mentioned effect will not be achieved during the playing period immediately after opening, but it is possible to suppress noise when the hall sets the volume immediately after turning on the power.

In addition, in the explanatory example of "control of the volume adjustment confirmation sound according to the importance of the presentation," a case is illustrated in which, when the first special symbol is changing and when the second special symbol is changing, the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output during the change of the second special symbol on the side that can be played under favorable conditions, but the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output during the change of the first special symbol on the side that can be played under unfavorable conditions. However, it is also possible to adopt this technology for gaming machines that do not have a second special symbol. For example, a specific symbol that is drawn under less favorable conditions than the first special symbol may be prepared, and a configuration may be made in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output during the change of the first special symbol (special symbol) on the side that can be played under favorable conditions, but the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output during the change of the specific symbol on the side that can be played under unfavorable conditions.

In addition, in the example explaining "the performance characteristics of the period (valid period) during which operation acceptance is permitted itself," the acceptance acceptance sound accompanying the occurrence of a special operation acceptance performance may be a different performance sound from the acceptance acceptance sound accompanying the occurrence of the first and second operation acceptance performances. Also, in FIG. 210, the acceptance acceptance sound is output from timing tr1 (tr11), but it may be assigned to a channel and output, for example, from timing trA as "one sound data" spanning timing tr1 (tr11).

The model image representing the operation receiving portion that receives the operation and the border decoration image that decorates the border of the image may be prepared separately as image data, and the image data may be combined to display as an integrated model image.

In the example shown in FIG. 232, when an operation opportunity is given to one operation means, there are two cases: a "normal button imitation image BMGa" is displayed (FIG. 232(a) and (c)), and a "special button imitation image BMGb" having a different shape is displayed (FIG. 232(b) and (d)). However, when the "normal button imitation image BMGa" is displayed (FIG. 232(a) and (c)), an operation opportunity may be given to the first operation means (first operation receiving section), and when the "special button imitation image BMGb" is displayed (FIG. 232(b) and (d)), an operation opportunity may be given to a second operation means (second operation receiving section) different from the first operation means (first operation receiving section).

In each of the above-mentioned examples, the components (operation means) prepared as the object of operation may be realized as those requiring a pressing operation (pressing action) (such as a button), those requiring an insertion/removal operation (such as a sword decoration), or those requiring a player action such as non-contact or touching (such as a proximity sensor).

The peripheral decoration image SSG does not imitate the peripheral decoration that is actually provided on the periphery of the "operation receiving portion to which the operation opportunity is given," but it is sufficient if at least a part of it does not imitate the peripheral decoration, and there may be a part that imitates the peripheral decoration.

The second effective period during which the operation-related image (such as the integrated model image IG) is displayed in a "display mode that features the movement of the gauge image GG" and the effective period during which the gauge image itself is not displayed are not limited to a specific set time, but may continue indefinitely unless a specific condition unrelated to the passage of time is met.

If the specific image TG is displayed within the validity period, the gauge image GG does not necessarily have to be displayed.

The "automatic reception performance" described in FIG. 232 and subsequent figures may employ any of the implementation methods for the "automatic reception performance" exemplified earlier. When the automatic reception performance is performed, any of the implementation methods described above may be employed for how the model image and gauge image are displayed. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a reception performance occurs, depending on the type of performance state when the performance occurs, or the type of the reception performance (post-operation performance) itself, or the conditions under which the reception performance occurs, there are cases where the same post-operation performance as when the operation is performed is executed even if there is no operation by the player during the valid period (the "automatic performance function" is enabled), and cases where the post-operation performance is not executed if there is no operation by the player during the valid period (the "automatic performance function" is not enabled). The timing at which the automatic performance function is enabled may be a predetermined timing during the valid period, may be the timing at which the valid period ends, or may be the timing a little while after the valid period ends.

The reception period illustrated in each of the above-mentioned performance examples (for example, reception periods D, E and reception periods F, G shown in Fig. 282 to Fig. 287) does not necessarily have to occur within the performance pattern according to the result of the jackpot judgment (performance judgment). For example, it may occur (based on the establishment of a predetermined condition) during a period when the pattern change is not being performed (for example, a period when a jackpot game is being performed or various interval periods) rather than during a period when the pattern change is being performed. In this case, "x seconds after the start of the change" shown in Fig. 278 may be applied to a pattern change of y seconds that is shorter than x seconds, and the timing of "x seconds after the start of the change" may arrive after the pattern change of y seconds has ended, and the reception period D may be generated at that timing. According to this configuration, the reception period D occurs after the pattern change is stopped with the reserve at "0", so that a player who is about to stop playing can be held back. In this sense, it may be set as "x seconds after the change stops" rather than "x seconds after the change starts".

In addition, the acceptance periods exemplified in the above-mentioned examples (e.g., acceptance periods D and E and acceptance periods F and G shown in Figures 282 to 287) do not necessarily have to have the end condition of the acceptance period set to "the passage of a predetermined time value", and the acceptance period may end when a predetermined end condition is met (e.g., when 10 game balls are received in the large prize opening).

At the timing shown in FIG. 316(b), the action target display (mock image display) and remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) may be in a hidden state and cannot be seen, as shown in FIG. 300(a).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the disappearance EF performance (disappearance effect image, etc.) can be used in common (can be executed in the same performance mode) for multiple reception periods with different types of post-reception performance (conversation announcement in which the expectation level is suggested depending on which conversation appears, movement performance in which the expectation level is suggested depending on whether the movable body moves or not, cut-in announcement in which the expectation level is suggested depending on which mode the cut-in display appears, etc.), thereby making it possible to recognize that the operation reception (operation reception) is in a proper state (a state in which the reception period has ended). In other words, since the post-reception performance differs depending on the type of reception period, it is difficult to recognize when looking at the performance content whether it is being performed within the reception period or is being performed as a result of the reception period having ended. In this regard, by preparing a disappearance EF performance that can appear in a common (same) performance mode when the reception period ends, regardless of the type of reception period, it becomes possible to appropriately indicate that the operation reception (operation reception) has been properly performed and the post-reception performance is being executed. However, as a gaming machine (pachinko machine 1), there may be cases where a disappearance EF performance (such as a disappearance effect image) that is common to multiple types of post-acceptance performance is executed, and for example, a dedicated disappearance EF performance that can be executed only when a specific type of post-acceptance performance occurs may be prepared.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned examples of performance, variations, notes, etc., the items described as "desirable" are merely descriptions of the additional effects that may be obtained when the same configuration is provided, and it goes without saying that the same configuration does not necessarily have to be provided.

In other words, in the embodiment, the invention is applied to a pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine, but this is not limited to this, and the invention may also be applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, and in this case too, the same effects can be achieved.

Claims (1)

A determination means for making a determination;
A bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus based on a result of the determination by the determining means;
an operation receiving section for receiving an operation by a player;
an operation acceptance means capable of generating an acceptance permission state in which an operation opportunity is given, and causing a display change when an operation is accepted in the acceptance permission state;
a model image display means capable of displaying a model image display of an operation receiving portion to which an operation opportunity is to be given in the reception permission state;
Equipped with
A plurality of modes including a special mode are prepared as the mock-image display,
In the reception permitted state, a remaining time indication image may be displayed, the display area of which decreases as time passes,
The reception permission state includes:
a first acceptance state which occurs while the specific BGM is being output in a non-suppressed manner and in which the audible output of the specific BGM continues even after an operation is accepted and a first display change corresponding to the acceptance acceptance state occurs;
a second acceptance state which occurs while the specific BGM is being output in a suppressed manner or is in a non-output state, and which causes a second display change corresponding to the acceptance acceptance state when the operation is accepted; and
a third acceptance state which occurs while the specific BGM is being output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state, and which causes a third display change corresponding to the acceptance acceptance state when the operation is accepted;
Contains
The special mode as the mock-up image display can appear only when the second acceptance allowance state occurs among the first acceptance allowance state, the second acceptance allowance state, and the third acceptance allowance state. However, when the second acceptance allowance state occurs, a mode different from the special mode may appear as the mock-up image display.
the remaining time indication depiction appears when the first acceptance allowance state occurs and when the second acceptance allowance state occurs among the first acceptance allowance state, the second acceptance allowance state, and the third acceptance allowance state, but does not appear when the third acceptance allowance state occurs;
moreover,
A reserve storage means capable of storing judgment information used in the judgment by the judgment means;
A pattern change execution means for selecting one of a plurality of change patterns based on the judgment information stored in the reserved storage means and executing a pattern change in the selected change pattern;
Equipped with
The third acceptance allowance state can occur when the pattern change is started in a specific change pattern when the number of judgment information stored in the reserved memory means is less than a predetermined number, but even if the pattern change is started in the specific change pattern when the number of judgment information stored in the reserved memory means is less than the predetermined number, if the number of judgment information stored in the reserved memory means increases before the specific time has elapsed since the pattern change was started, the third acceptance allowance state does not occur even if the specific time has elapsed since the pattern change was started.

Images